Chicago Hittite Dictionary

Volume P 

P

pa- see pai-A. 

pahhaš-see pahš-.
pahhaššanu-, pahhašnu-see pahšanu-.
pāhī Hurr. n.; head; NH.† 

1 NINDA.SIG … gamerši šarrašši mali nanki e[…] pa-a-hi-i pantani hirā
hi dU-ubbi TUŠ-aš [KI. MIN (= paršiya)] “(The exorcist), sitting, [breaks] one thin bread … for gamerši, šarrašši, mali, nanki, […], for the head (and) right hirā
hi of Teššub” KUB 
27.1 ii 2-4 (fest. of IŠTAR of Šamuha, NH), ed. Lebrun, Samuha, 78, 100. Both the pāhi and the hirahīare parts of the human (and divine) body. 
Laroche, RA 67 (1973) 121-122; Kammenhuber, THeth 7 (1976) 155; Laroche, GLH (1979) 192f. 
pahhi-n. com.; (mng. unkn.; something harmful?); MS.† 
nu anduhši pa-ah-hi-in ša-an-≠ah-hi-iš!±-k[i-zi …] KBo 16.31:3 (treaty, MH/MS), the traces have not been collated; the frag. is probably a treaty (not instr., as classified in StBoT 22:93), since the lines 6-10 contain the regulation on refugees from a third country (cf. Dupp. §§15-17, KBo 13.55 obv.! 5f., etc.). 
Lines 3-4 may contain actions which the treaty partner must not do: “[If he …s] …, and seek[s] p. against(?) a man, [or, if he …]s, (let these oath-deities destroy him [together with] his […]),” hence 
p. may denote a harmful action. This action noun may be related to the Luw. verb pahhittaru KUB 
35.49 rev.? 3 (cf. DLL 77), followed in the next line by […] adduwališ iššariš x[…] “evil hand,” and is probably related to pahheški-(q.v.). 

GIŠpahhiša, GIŠpāhiša (Luw.) n. neut.; (a noisemaker); from MH/NS.† sg. nom.-acc. GIŠpa-ah-hi-ša KBo 5.1 iv 32 (MH/NS), KBo 
22.135 i 3, Bo 4951 rev. 4, 5 (StBoT 29:124), [GIŠp]a-a-hi-ša Bo 4951 rev. 3 (StBoT 29:124). Obj. of walh- “to beat”: (In the morning, the sac
rificers purify the child) GIŠpa-ah-hi-šaÚyaÚšši šarā walhanzi “and beat a p. over him” KBo 5.1 iv 32-33 

(birth rit., MH/NS), ed. Pap. 12*f. w. n. 4, StBoT 29:120; Sommer/Ehelolf read GIŠPA-ah-hi-ša in KBo 5.1 iv 32 (Pap. 76); (earlier apparently they beat a stick; then) [… GIŠp]a-a-hi-ša UL walh[zi …] nuÚššan 1 GIŠpa-ahhi-ša x [… (x x-anzi)] / [mahhanÚmaÚaš] (var. GIM-[an …]) parkuišzi GIŠpa-ah-hi-ša dān wal~ [(han)zi] “[…] he does not beat the p.; […] … thereupon they … one p.; [but] when [he(?)] is pure, they beat the p. a second time” Bo 4951 rev. 3-5 (birth rit.), w. dupl. KBo 17.68:2, ed. StBoT 29:124f. On the basis of Bo 4951, Ehelolf in OLZ 32:322f. corrected his earlier reading of the word as GIŠ“PA”-ah-hi-ša to GIŠpa-ah-hi-ša. 
GIŠp. in KBo 22.135 i 3 occurs in a rit. performed by a LÚAZU “exorcist”; the other refs. occur in birth rituals. In view of the use of walh-elsewhere for playing percussion instruments, one should consider the possibility that p. was a noisemaker of some kind, made (partly?) of wood. Starke (StBoT 31:208) posits a Luwian stem pahhit-and translates “Trommel” or “Gong.” 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 76; Ehelolf, OLZ 32 (1929) 322f.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 153 (“Stock(?), Gerte(?)”); Beck-man, StBoT 29 (1983) 122, 288 (tr. “stick(?)” employed only provisionally). 
pahheški-iter. v.; (a hostile action).† 
Sum. [ÓAR] = Akk. [a-r]a-rum “to mill, grind” = Hitt. hūwarzakiuwar “repeated cursing” (tr. of Akk. arā
ru “to curse”) / Sum. [ÓAR] = (Akk.) ≠za±a-u “resin(??)” = (Hitt.) pa-ah-he-eš-ki-u-wa-ar “repeated …-ing” (a hostile action) / (Sum.) [ÓAR] = (Akk.) ZA-a-rum = (Hitt.) kurur appatar “initiating hostilities” KBo 1.45 obv.! 2-4 (Sa vocab., NH), ed. MSL 3:53; a new witness to the Sa text has come from Emar, which preserves a long ÓAR section (Emar VI/4 pp. 1213), but no Akkadian entry there clarifies this za-a-u; the CAD (Z 74) interpreted it as “resin,” but of course that does not reflect the Hittite scribe’s (mis)understanding. 
Given the context of entries on either side which denote hostile actions and the existence of the expression -ši pahhin šanh-which denotes a hostile action (see pahhi- n.), Oettinger (Stammbildung 212 n. 68) is probably right to disassociate this word from 
1

pahš-(attested alternative stem pahhaš-, not pah~ heš-!). It is likely that this v. is based upon the same root as the noun pahhi-. We prefer this interpretation to Eichner’s intriguing suggestion (apud Oettinger, Stammbildung 212 n. 68) that it is an associative writing *PAP-ahheškiuwar = KÚR-ahheškiuwar. 
Eichner apud Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 212 n. 68. Cf. pahhi-. 
*pahhit-(Luw., cf. Starke, StBoT 31:208) see GIŠpah~ hiša. 
pahš-, pahhaš-v.; 1. to protect, keep (people) safe, 2. to protect, guard, defend, keep (valuable things) safe, 3. to guard, keep, restrain, hold in (harmful or dangerous things), 4. to observe (agreements, laws, customs), keep (oaths), obey (commands), heed (advice), 5. to keep something to oneself, keep (a secret), 6. (mid. w. dat.) to seek protection with, 7. (w. -za or reflexively used enclitic pers. pron.) (mng. uncertain, perhaps) to guard oneself(?), watch out(?); written syll. and PAP; from OH. 
act. pres. sg. 1 pa-ah-ha-aš-mi KUB 29.1 i 19 (OH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-hi KUB 13.4 iii 26 (MH/NS), KBo 5.9 i 24, 27, ii 13, KBo 5.3 i 38, iv 27, 28 (Šupp. I), KUB 23.1 ii 29, Bronze Tablet ii 40, 42, 72, 74 (Tudh. IV), PAP-aš-hi KUB 40.38:7 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), KBo 14.112:4, KUB 23.44 iii! 7, 11 (both Šupp. II), PAP-ah-hi KUB 26.33 iii (22), 23 (Šupp. II); sg. 2 pa-ahha-aš-ti KBo 5.3 ii 10, KUB 26.37 obv. 13 (both Šupp. I), KBo 
5.13 ii 14, iii 20, KBo 5.4 obv. 44 (both Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iv 38 (Muw. II), KBo 4.10 rev. 6, 8 (Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), PAPaš-ti KUB 19.55 rev. 40 (NH), KUB 48.123 i 24. 
pl. 1 pa-ah-šu-e-ni KUB 31.44 ii 28 (MH/NS), pa-ah-šu-ue-ni KUB 26.1 i 4 (Tudh. IV), KUB 23.112 i 5 (Tudh. IV); pl. 2 pa-ah-ha-aš-te-ni KBo 5.3 iv 26, 30, 36, KBo 5.12 iv (10), 11 (both Šupp. I), KUB 43.38 rev. 4, 6, 29 (NH); pl. 3 pa-ah-šaan-zi KUB 21.1 i 69 (Muw. II). 
pret. sg. 1 pa-ah-ha-[aš-hu-u]n KBo 21.12:8 (pre-NH/NS); sg. 3 pa-ah-ha-aš-ta KUB 21.1 i 45 (Muw. II), KUB 23.1 i 23, 25, 46, ii (27) (Tudh. IV), KUB 31.59 iii 9 (NS), PAP-aš-ta KUB 23.1 i 22, 25, 45 (Tudh. IV); pl. 3 pa-ah-šir KUB 21.49 obv. 12 (NH). 
imp. sg. 2 pa-ah-ši KUB 1.16 iii 28 (OH/NS), KUB 23.72 rev. 70 (MH/MS), KUB 34.40:20 (MH/MS), KBo 15.10 ii 44 (MH/MS), KUB 24.9 ii 30 (MH/NS), KBo 5.3 i 16, 31, ii 22, KBo 10.12 i (9), iii (9), 11 (both Šupp. I), KBo 4.3 i 21, 28, KUB 26.59 rev. 6 (both Murš. II), KUB 21.1 i 69, 70, iii 39, KUB 21.5 ii 11 (both Muw. II), KUB 23.1 ii 9, 10, 39, 40, KUB 
23.92 obv. 9 (both Tudh. IV), KBo 12.30 ii 4 (Šupp. II), KBo 
18.28 iv 10 (NH), KUB 29.4 iii 26 (NH), PAP-ši KBo 8.37 rev. 

pahš

9 (MH/NS), KUB 23.1 ii 4, 5 (Tudh. IV); sg. 3 pa-ah-ha-aš-du Bronze Tablet ii 73 (Tudh. IV), KBo 19.71:(3), PAP-du KBo 
18.28 i 8 (NH). pl. 2 pa-ah-ha-aš-te-en KUB 23.68 rev. 8 (MH/NS), KUB 
14.14 obv. 23 (coll. W) (Murš. II), pa-ah-ha-aš-ti-en KUB 24.9 ii 39 (MH/NS), KUB 24.11 ii 18 (MH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-tén KUB 23.82 rev. 5, 12 (MH/MS), KUB 31.115:19 (OH/NS), KBo 8.22 obv. (7) (MS?), KUB 13.4 iii 17, 45 (MH/NS), KUB 
13.5 iii 16 (MH/NS), KUB 26.1 i 8 (Tudh. IV), KUB 23.103 rev. 7 (Tudh. IV), KUB 31.37 obv. 10, KUB 21.42 i 29, 30 (NH), KUB 22.61 iv 7, pa-ah-aš-té[n] KUB 26.1 i 16 (Tudh. IV), PAP-aš-tén KUB 26.18 obv. 12, KUB 21.42 i 11, iv 19, 22, KBo 7.20 ii 5 (all NH), PAP-ah-ha-aš-tén KBo 12.39 rev. 13 (NH); pl. 3 ≠pa±-ah-ša-an-du KBo 4.12 rev. 4 (Óatt. III), [p]aah-ha-aš-ša-[an-du] KUB 40.58:5 (MH/NS), PAP-an-d[u] KUB 
40.1 rev.! 29 (NH). 
mid. pres. sg. 1 pa-ah-ha-aš-ha KBo 3.23 rev. 11 (OH/NS), KUB 31.115:18 (OH/NS), KUB 36.127 obv. 5 (MH/MS or NS); sg. 2 pa-ah-ha-≠aš-ta± KUB 1.16 iii 28 (OH/NS); sg. 3 pa-ahša KUB 36.127 obv. 8 (MH/MS or NS), pa-ah-ša-ri KBo 16.25 i 49 (MH/MS), KBo 16.27 ii 16 (MH/MS), KBo 5.3 i 34, 37 (Šupp. I), Bronze Tablet ii 69 (Tudh. IV), KUB 21.15 + 715/v iv 6 (ZA 63:85) (Óatt. III), KBo 19.60:12, PAP-ri KUB 23.103 obv. 5 (Tudh. IV). 
pl. 1 pa-ah-šu-wa-aš-ta KBo 16.27 iii 16 (MH/MS), KUB 
19.25 i (13) (Šupp. I); pl. 2 pa-ah-ha-aš-du-ma KUB 1.16 iii 47, 49 (OH/NS), KBo 8.35 ii 14 (MH/MS), KUB 23.78b ii 10 (MH/MS); pl. 3 pa-a-ah-ša-an-ta KBo 21.22 rev. 38 (OH/MS), PAP-an-d[a] KUB 40.1 rev.! 33 (NH), [pa-ah]-≠ha-aš±-ša-anta-ri KUB 21.1 i 75 (coll. W) (Muw. II), PAP-ah-ša-an-ta-ri KUB 23.94:10 (NH?). 
pret. sg. 1 pa-ah-ha-aš-ha-at KUB 6.41 i 31 (Murš. II), PAP-ah-ha-aš-ha-at KUB 26.33 ii 6 (Šupp. II), PAP-aš-ha-at KUB 26.32 i 10 (Šupp. II), [PA]P-ah-ha-at ibid. i 17 (Šupp. II), pa-ah-ha-aš-ha-ha-at KUB 21.44 obv. (4) (NH), KUB 21.1 i 72 (Muw. II), PAP-ha-ha-at KUB 26.32 i 12 (Šupp. II), Götze’s [pa-h]a-aš-ha-ha-at Óatt. iii 6 is to be read [‰R-a]hha-ha-at (StBoT 24:16); sg. 3 pa-ah-ha-aš-ta-at KBo 5.8 ii 26, (42), KUB 21.49 obv. 6 (both Murš. II), KUB 8.82 obv. 1 + 1198/u obv. 7 (Tudh. IV, StBoT 16:80). 
imp. sg. 3 pa-ah-ša-ru KUB 2.2 iii 39 (OH/NS), KUB 13.4 iii 14 (MH/NS), KUB 21.1 iii (40), 44 (Muw. II), Bronze Tablet ii 34, 47, 70 (Tudh. IV), KUB 30.40 iii 6; pl. 2 pa-ah-ha-ašdu-ma-at KUB 1.16 iii (34) (OH/NS), KBo 16.25 i 69 (MH/ MS), KUB 36.114 ii? 13 (MH/MS), KBo 4.12 rev. 3 (Óatt. III). 
pl. 3 pa-ah-ša-an-ta-ru VBoT 2:18, KUB 40.36 + KUB 
23.78 ii 11, HKM 3:20, HKM 36:41, HKM 52:24, HKM 56:6, 25 (all MH/MS), KUB 26.37:(14) (Šupp. I), KBo 4.10 + 1548/u (ZA 63:86) rev. 10 (Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), KBo 7.56:4, KUB 45.20 ii 11, pa-ah-ša-an-da-ru KBo 8.35 ii 15 (MH/MS), ABoT 65 obv. 5, HKM 31:24, HKM 58:4, 28, HKM 60:33 (all MH/MS), KBo 5.3 ii 12 (Šupp. I), KUB 21.5 ii 12 (Muw. II), KBo 18.97 1.e. 5, KBo 18.50 obv. 4, [pa-ah-š]a-an-da-a-r[u] KUB 40.23 i 5, [PAP-]an-ta-ru KBo 19.73 + KUB 21.1 ii 12 (Muw. II), PAP-ru AT 125:3 (coll. p. 62). 

2

part. pahšant- is quoted in HW 153b. We have no unambiguous ex. in our files. pa-ah-ša-[…] KBo 4.4 iii 71 (AM 132) is probably a participle, either of pahš-or pahšanu-. 

iter. imp. sg. 3 pa-ah-ha-aš-ki-id-du KUB 39.101 ii 12. 

Unlike takš-, which has two alternative stem forms taggašand takke/iš-, pahš-has only pahhaš-, no *pahheš-. See pah~ heški-. 
(Akk.) ina irtiki ina er≈etim u≈rinni KUB 1.16 iv 71-72 = (Hitt.) nuÚmu tagga[niyaÚti] taknaz pa-ah-[š]i “[On your] breast protect me from the earth” ibid. iii 72-73 (edict, Óatt. I / NS), ed. HAB 16f., cf. Götze, ZA 34:183 and Melchert, Diss. 182f.; (Akk.) u abuya µAz[ir]a qadu KUR-šu itta≈aršu KUB 
3.14 obv. 7-8 = (Hitt.) [ABUÚYA µAzir]an QADU KURÚŠU pa-ah-ha-aš-ta-at “My father protected Aziru together with his land” KUB 21.49 obv. 6 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:6f. 
1. to protect, keep (people) safe — a. subj. gods (most exx. mid.) — 1' in treaties: nu mān kūš lin~ gāuš(!) pa-ah-ha-aš-du-ma šumāšÚa DINGIR. MEŠ-eš pa-ah-ša-an-da-ru (var. pa-ah-ša-an-ta-ru) “If you keep these oaths, may the gods protect you too” KBo 8.35 ii 14-15 (treaty, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 40.36 
+ KUB 23.78 ii 10-11 + KUB 26.6:11-12, tr. Kaškäer 111, cf. also 4 c, below; nuÚtta kūš NÂŠ DINGIR.MEŠ … SILIM!-li pa-ah-ša-an-[t]a-ru KBo 4.10 + 1548/u (ZA 63:86) rev. 9-10 (treaty, Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 36f., see CHD lingai- 1 e (now w. join 1548/u this passage belongs s.v. lingai- 2 b 1'); cf. KBo 5.3 ii 11-12 (Óuqq. treaty, Šupp. I), etc. (see index of forms in SV 2:202). 
2' in letters: “Let all be well with you” nuÚtta DINGIR.MEŠ TI-an harkandu nu SAG.DUÚKA pa-ah-ša-an-da-ru “May the gods keep you alive (and) protect your person (lit. head)” ABoT 65 obv. 4-5 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:345f., cf. Hoffner, JNES 
31:33 (dating); cf. HKM 27 rev. 21-22 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten XLIV/173:48f., HBM 168f.; nu dUTU-ŠI BE_LÂYA DINGIR.MEŠ TI-an harkandu nu ANA dUTU-ŠI BE_LÂYA ŠU.ÓI.A-uš arahzanda aššuli harkandu nu dUTU-ŠI BE_LÂYA pa-ah-ša-an-ta-ru “May the gods grant Your Majesty, my lord, (long) life, may they benevolently hold their hands around Your Majesty, my lord, and protect Your Majesty, my lord” Güterbock, FsLaroche 142f.:6-12 (letter), from a photograph and a hand copy by Otten; cf. HKM 81 (Mˆt 75/ 64) obv. 5-8 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten XLIV/173:51f., HBM 272f.; VBoT 2:15-18 (letter from Arzawa to Egypt, MH/ MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:329f.; “May everything be well with you” nuÚtta DINGIR.MEŠ aššuli pa-ah-ša-anda-ru “May the gods benevolently protect you” 

pahš- 1 b 1' a' 
HKM 31 rev. 23-24 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten XLIV/ 173:50f., HBM 176f.; cf. HKM 81:5-8, 27-28, AT 125:3 (coll. Wiseman, AT p. 62), KBo 18.3:4-5, KBo 18.50 obv. 3-4, and passim in letters. 
3' in rituals: nu ammeyantan šallin DUMU.NITA attaš DINGIR.MEŠ-iš pa-ah-ša-an-ta-ru “May the gods of the father(s) protect the small (and) the big boy” KUB 45.20 ii 10-11 (rit., NS); nu LUGAL MU~ NUS.LUGAL DUMU.MEŠ LUGALÚya aššuli pa-ah-ha-aš-tén “Benevolently protect the king, the queen and the princes” KUB 43.55 ii 4-5 (rit., NS). 
4' in festivals: (The priest speaks:) dIM-aš-wa! LUGAL-un MUNUS.LUGAL-annÚa QADU DU~ MU.MEŠÚŠUNU DUMU.DUMU.MEŠÚŠUNU aš~ šuli pa-ah-ša-ru “May the Stormgod benevolently protect the king and the queen together with their children and grandchildren” KUB 30.40 iii 4-6 (hišuwaš fest.). 
b. subj. humans (usually kings) who are partners to a treaty or an oath — 1' general — a' act.: “You, people of Išmeriga, are sworn to the king” nu LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL DUMU.MEŠ [LU~ GAL] U KUR URUÓatti EGIR.UD.KAM pa-ah-haaš-te-en “so in the future protect the king, the queen, the princes, and the land of Óatti” KUB 23.68 
+ ABoT 58 rev. 7-8 (treaty, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:196f.; dUTU-ŠI-i[nÚpat] ≠šāk± pa-ah-ši-ia-an dUTU-ŠI “Recognize [only] His Majesty (and) protect him, His Majesty” KBo 5.3 i 15-16 (Óuqq. treaty, Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:108f.; nu NÂŠI DINGIR-LIM ŠA LU~ GAL U ŠU LUGAL pa-ah-ši dUTU-ŠIÚma tuk µDuppi-dU-upan pa-ah-ha-aš-hi … nu tuk mahhan dUTU-ŠI pa-ah-ha-aš-hi DUMUÚKAÚya QA_TAM~ MA pa-ah-ha-aš-hi zikÚma µDuppi-dU-upaš! (text: -an) LUGAL KUR URUÓatti KUR URUÓatti DU~ MU.MEŠÚYA DUMU.DUMU.MEŠÚYA ziladuwa pa-ah-ši “Now keep the oath of the king and protect the power (lit. hand) of the king. And I, My Majesty, will protect you, Duppi-Teššub. … And just as I, My Majesty, shall protect you, even so I shall protect your son also. But you, Duppi-Teššub, in the future protect the king of Óatti, the land of Óatti, my sons (and) my grandsons” KBo 5.9 i 23-24, 26-28 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:12f., tr. ANET 204 (“be/remain loyal”); kattaÚma DUMU.NITA.MEŠ [dU]TU-ŠI pa-ah-ha-aš-tén “But later (i.e., after my death) 
3

protect the sons of My Majesty” KUB 21.37 obv. 10 (hist., Óatt. III), ed. THeth 4:116f.; dUTU-ŠI PAP-aš-tén [katt]aÚma NUM[UN] dUTU-ŠI pa-ah-≠ha±-aš-tén “Protect My Majesty, and [afte]r (me) protect the sons of My Majesty” KUB 21.42 i 11-12 (instr., NH), ed. Dienstanw. 23; cf. KUB 26.1 i 8 (instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 9, cf. Goetze, JCS 13:66, and passim in instr.; nu ABI dUTU-ŠI PAP-aš-ta KUR URUKÙ.BABBAR-tiÚya pa-ah-ha-aš-ta KUB 23.1 i 45-46 (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16:8f.; (Mašturi committed treason) nÚan datta kuiš µNIR.GÁL-iš LÚÓATANUÚ y[aÚa]n(!) kuiš DÙ-at nu namma apel DUMUÚŠU µUrhi-dU-upan UL pa-ah-ha-aš-ta … LÚpahhur~ šinÚpat pa-ah-ha-aš-hi “he no longer protected Urhiteššup, the son of Muwatalli (II), who (i.e., Muw. II) had taken him and made him a son-inlaw; (he committed treason and supported my father [Óatt. III], saying:) ‘Should I protect a bastard?’” KUB 23.1 ii 25-29 + KUB 31.43 obv. 7-9, ed. StBoT 16:10f.; µ.dLAMMA-ašÚmaÚmu apēdani mēhuni pahhaššanut nu ANA ZIÚYA šer kiššan lenkatta ABUÚKAÚwaÚtta mān LUGAL-eznani ULÚya tit~ tanuzi kuedaniÚmaÚwaÚtta pedi ABUÚKA tittanuzi ūkÚmaÚwa tukÚpat pa-ah-ha-aš-hi nuÚwaÚza tuel ‰R-iš ammukÚma ANA µ.dLAMMA šer kiššan len~ kun ūkÚmaÚwa tuk pa-ah-ha-aš-hi “But at that time Kurunta protected me, and he swore allegiance to me as follows: ‘Even if your father does not install you in kingship, in whatever place your father installs you I will protect only you. I am your servant.’ And I swore allegiance to Kurunta as follows: ‘I too will protect you’” Bronze Tablet ii 37-42 (Kurunta treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f.; cf. also Bronze Tablet ii 49, 55 (act.). 
b' mid.: nu dUTU-ŠI GIM-an tuk µAlakša[n]dun SIGﬁ-anti memini IŠTU AWAT ABUÚKA pa-ah-haaš-ha-ha-[a]t … zilatiyaÚta katta [(hašš)]a han~ zašša tuēl DUMU-an ammel DUMU.MEŠÚYA DU~ MU.DUMU.MEŠÚYA [pa-ah-h]a-[a]š-ša-an-ta-riÚ pat “And just as I, My Majesty, protected you, Alakšandu, in good will [memiya(n)- 2 b 2'], for the sake of the agreement with (lit. word of) your father … so in the future my sons and my grandsons will also (-pat) protect you and your son (and) down to the third and fourth generations” KUB 21.1 i 71-72, 73-75 (coll. W)(Alakš. treaty, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 

pahš- 1 b 2' b' 

21.3:2, 4-5, ed. SV 2:56f. “But I, Tudhaliya, the Great King — before I became king, already previously the god brought Kurunta and me together in friendship, already previously we were dear and beloved to each other” nuÚnnaš lenkiyaš ešwen 1-ašÚwa 1an pa-ah-ša-ru “and we were parties to an oath: ‘Let one protect the other’” Bronze Tablet ii 34 (Kurunta treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f.; cf. Bronze Tablet ii 47; “While the brother [Arn. III, son of Tudh. IV] of His Majesty [Šupp. II] was king, I was a lord” nÚan PAP-aš-ha-at IGI-andaÚšši UL kuitki waš~ dahun dUTU-ŠIÚma ENÚYA :kuwayataza šallanu~ marraza šakuwa≠šar±it ZI-it PAP-ha-ha-at “I protected him and in no respect sinned against him but because of kuwayata-(and) upbringing I protected His Majesty, my lord, with a loyal spirit” KUB 26.32 i 10-12 (Šupp. II), ed. Laroche, RA 47:74f., tr. Otten, MDOG 

94:3. 

c' act. and mid. forms in successive clauses: “If anyone plots evil against Kupanta-LAMMA, be helpful …”) nÚan pa-ah-ši apāšÚma tuk pa-ah-šaru … nu 1-aš 1-an pa-ah-ša-ru “You protect him and let him protect you … let each of you protect the other” KUB 21.5 iii 55-56, 59-60 (Alakš. treaty, Muw. II), ed. SV 2:72f. 
2' aššuli pahš- “to protect someone benevolently” (for more exx. of the same phrase in the salutatory formula, see 1 a, above) — a' act.: ziga mān µÓuqnaš¢ dUTU-ŠI zilatiya [INA EG]IR.UD-MI aššuli UL pa-ah-haaš-ti “If you, Óuqqana, do not henceforth [in the fu]ture benevolently protect My Majesty” (you break the oath) KBo 5.3 i 17-18 (Óuqq. treaty, Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:108f.; cf. ibid. iv 25-28, ed. SV 2:134f., and KUB 21.1 i 69 (treaty w. Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:56f. 
b' mid.: (the following ex. from Óuqq. obviously has a mixture of act. and mid. forms) nu zik µÓuqqanāš dUTU-ŠIÚpat aššuli pa-ah-ši EGIRpannÚa ANA dUTU-ŠIÚpat arhut nammaÚmaÚza damā
in lekuinki šakti nuÚtta dUTU-ŠIÚya aššuli pa-ah-ha-aš-hi kattaÚmaÚtta DUMU.MEŠÚKA pa-ahha-aš-hi kattaÚma tuel DUMU.MEŠÚKA ammel DUMUÚYA pa-ah-ša-ri § ≠nu± m[ā]n ≠SIGﬁ-in ku±~ wapi iššatti nu d[UTU]-ŠI aššuli pa-ah-ha-aš-ti nuÚ tta ≠dUTU-ŠI± kattaÚya A[N]A [DU]MU.MEŠÚKA [SI]LIM.BI iyami nu ammel DUMUÚYA DUMU. MEŠÚKAÚya katta aššuli pa-ah-ša-ri dUTU-ŠIÚma 

4

tuk pa-ah-ha-aš-hi nuÚtta kā uddār ŠAPAL NÂŠ
ša keDINGIR-LIM tehhun “Now you, Óuqqana, benevolently protect only My Majesty and support My Majesty only. You must not recognize any other (overlord) in addition. And I, My Majesty, will also benevolently protect you, and after you, will protect your sons, as after (us) my son will benevolently protect your sons. § If you treat (me) well and benevolently protect My Majesty, I, My Majesty, will treat you and afterward your [so]ns well too. And my son after (me) will benevolently protect your sons, and I, My Majesty, will protect you. I have placed these terms under oath for you” KBo 

5.3 i 31-39 (Huqq. treaty, Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:108-111. 

3' EN-anni pahš-, AŠŠUM BE_LU_TTI (or ENUTTI) pahš- (literally) “to protect someone with respect to his overlordship,” (freely) “to be loyal to someone as overlord” or “maintain someone’s overlordship”: nu ≠zik± µKupanta-dLAMMA-aš zi~ latiya dUTU-ŠI AŠŠUM BE_LUTTIM [pa-a]h-≠ši± kattaÚma DUMU.MEŠ dUTU-ŠI hašša hanzašša zi~ latiya [AŠŠU]M BE_LUTTIM pa-ah-ši … tama®nÚ maÚza ŠU-an lē kuinki ilaliyaši [zilat]iya dUTU-ŠI AŠŠUM BE_LUTTIM pa-ah-ši “You, Kupanta-LAMMA, maintain in the future My Majesty’s overlordship. (Likewise), maintain the overlordship of My Majesty’s children down to the third and fourth generations. … Do not desire any other ‘hand’ (i.e., overlord), (but) maintain the overlordship of My Majesty [forev]er” KBo 4.3 i 42-44, 46-47 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:118-121; cf. KUB 21.5 ii 11-12 (Kup. treaty, Muw. II), ed. SV 2:58f., KBo 4.10 + 1548/u rev. 6, 8 (treaty w. Ulmi-Teššub, Óatt. III, or Tudh. IV), KUB 23.1 i 21-25, passim (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16:6f.; nuÚšmaš AŠŠUM E[N-U]TTI tamai[(n)] UN-an lē kuinki šekteni AŠŠUM EN-UTTI katta hašša h[(a)]nz[(a)]šš[(a)] NUMUN µTudhaliyaÚpat pa-ah-aš[-(tén)] “Do not recognize the overlordship of any other man. Maintain (lit. protect) only the overlordship of the descendants of Tudhaliya down to the third and fourth generations” KUB 26.1 i 13-16 (instr., Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 26.8 i 3-6, ed. Dienstanw. 9, cf. Melchert, RHA XXXI:63; cf. KUB 26.1 i 3-5, KUB 21.42 i 29-30, iv 22 (instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 24, 28; [dUTU-Š]I µŠuppiluliuman šakuwaššarit ZI-it [pa-ah-]ši kattaÚma NUMUNÚYA pediÚza kuit tittanumi [nÚ 

pahš- 2 b 
a]t EN-anni šakuwaššarit ZI-it pa-ah-ši “[Prot]ect [My Majes]ty, Šuppiluliuma, in loyalty. Also, maintain loyally the overlordship of my descendant whom I will put in my place” KBo 12.30 ii 2-4 (hist., Šupp. II), ed. Otten, BoHa 6:52 □ restoring [na-a]t (contra Otten’s [na-a]n) because NUMUN is neuter, as shown by kuit, cf. KUB 26.33 iii 21-23 (oath, Šupp. II). 
2. to protect, guard, defend, keep (valuable things) safe, usually w. -za — a. obj. utne (KUR) “land”: KUR URUPalāÚma UL kuitki pah≠ha±š~ šanuwan KUR-TUM ēšta … µÓutupiyanzašÚma KUR URUPalā pa-ah-ha-aš-ta-at “The land of Palā was not at all a protected land” (and lacked suitable fortifications), “(yet) Óutupiyanza defended the land of Palā” KBo 5.8 ii 22-23, 26 (ann. Murš. II), ed. AM 152-55; “[If the king of Mit]anni begins hostilities against the king of Óatti, (and) Šunaššura does not give him […] (and) does not let him (the king of Mitanni) through his land” nuÚza KURÚSU pa-ah-ša “and defends his (own) territory, (so that troops and chariots will not [co]me [to help the Hittite king])” KUB 36.127 obv.? 8 (treaty, MH/MS or NS), ed. del Monte, OA 20:218f.; “The gods … entrusted the land and my household to me (as) the king” nuÚza LUGAL-uššÚa utneÚmet É-irÚmittÚa pa-ah-ha-ašmi “so I, also as king, will guard my land and my household” KUB 29.1 i 18-19 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 25, Marazzi, VO 5:148f., Starke, ZA 69:75, tr. ANET 357f. (“rule over”); cf. KUB 31.59 iii 9; “I, My Majesty the king, gave the Šeha River Land and Appawiya to you, Manapa-dU: Let that land be yours” nÚat pa-ah-ši “and guard it” KUB 26.59 rev. 6 + KUB 19.50 iii 16 + KUB 14.26 obv. 2 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. del Monte, Or NS 49:60, 63; nuÚtta apāt KUR-TAM ēšdu nÚatÚza pa-ah-ši KBo 5.13 i 32-33 (Kup. treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:116f.; cf. further exx. above, 1 b 1'. 
b. obj. irha- (ZAG) “border(s)”: nu ŠA ABIÚKA ZAG.ÓI.A pa-ah-ši “Safeguard the boundaries of your father” KUB 23.92 obv. 9 (letter, NH), ed. Otten, AfO 19:40; tukÚma ANA µUlmi-dU-up KUR-TUM kuit ADDIN ZAG.MEŠÚta kuiēš tehhun nÚašÚza pa-ahši lēÚašÚkan šarratti “The land which I gave to you, Ulmi-Teššub, and the boundaries which I set for you, you must safeguard. Do not transgress them” KBo 4.10 obv. 15 (treaty, Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 12f. 
5

	c. obj. per- (É) “house(hold)”: cf. KBo 17.65 rev. 58 below, 4 b; cf. KUB 29.1 i 18-19 above, 2 a. 
	d. obj. É DINGIR “temple(s)”: nu É.MEŠ DIN~ GIR.MEŠ mekki marri pa-ah-ha-aš-tén “Guard the temples very carefully. (Do not fall asleep)” KUB 

13.4 iii 17 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 156-159, Süel, Direktif Metni 56f.; cf. ibid. iii 14 and iii 25-26 (both w. -za). 
	e. objs. šarhuli- “pillar” and kutt- “wall”: 4-aš [š]arhuliuš (coll.) … kuttan pa-ah-≠ša±-ru “May he (sc. the god) guard the four pillars(?), the … (and) the wall. (Let the evil not enter)” KUB 2.2 iii 38-39 (Óattic-Hitt. bil., OH/NS), ed. Schuster, HHB 73, 135 n. 284. 
	f. obj. wattaru “spring, fountain”: ≠dUTU±-waš wattaru uit nÚat māhh[an iyan] … nÚat paršaneš pa-a-ah-ša-an-ta “The Sungoddess’ spring/fountain came. And how is it [made?] (It is built with stones from base to the top, it is cove[red with …]), and leopards are guarding it; (its water flows out of a basin [of …])” KBo 21.22:36-37 (blessings for the Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi 246f., Starke, ZA 69:93 n. 100, Collins, Diss. 78, for the immediately following context cf. pahšanu- 1a. 
	g. obj. UNU_TU “utensil(s)”: “Armaziti returned the utensils to Wattanta (saying)” [k]ēÚwaÚmu UNU_TEMEŠ PAP-ah-š[i] “Keep these utensils for me” KUB 23.91:11 (depos., NH). 

h. obj. tuppi (T˘˘
UPPU) “tablet”: k® TUPPU PAP-an-d[u] “Let them keep this tablet safe” (and let them question me in this matter from this tablet) KUB 40.1 rev.! 29 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:69, 72, cf. Kühne, ZA 62:238. 
i. obj. tuegga- (N´.TE) “body, embodiment”: nakkišÚza DINGIR-LUM N´.TEÚKA pa-ah-ši DIN~ GIR-LIM-niyatarÚmaÚzaÚkan šarri “You, honored goddess, take care of your embodiment (or: protect your person), divide your divinity (by creating an additional cult statue), (come to these new temples, take an honored place)” KUB 29.4 iii 26-27 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 24f. (differently), cf. Goetze, Tunn. 45 (differently), Oettinger, Stammbildung 290 n. 65 
3. to guard, keep, restrain, hold in (harmful or dangerous things) — a. obj. pahhur (IZI) “fire”: “Furthermore, be very careful in the matter of fire” nÚašta mān [ŠÀ] É DINGIR-LIM EZEN nu IZI 

pahš- 4 a 

mekki pa-ah-ha-aš-tén “When there is a festival in the temple, guard the fire particularly carefully” KUB 13.4 iii 45 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 62f. 
b. obj. idalu “evil”: “(The Old Woman) breaks a thin bread at a fork in the road and lays it to the left of the roadway. She libates beer and says: ‘O gods of the road’” idalu šumeš [ē
pten?] nÚat pa-ahha-aš-ti-en “‘[seize?] the evil and guard it. (Do not let it reappear)’” KUB 24.9 ii 38-39 + KBo 12.127 ii 5-6 (rit., MH/NS), cf. ibid. 36 + 3, ed. THeth 2:36f. 
c. obj. alwanzata(r) “sorcery”: (After taking the sorcery directed against her client, burying it in the ground and nailing it down, the Old Woman breaks thin breads for several deities. When she breaks one for the Sungoddess (of the Earth), she says:) k® zik pa-ah-ši “You guard this (sorcery)” KUB 24.9 ii 30 (rit., MH/NS), cf. ibid. ii 32-33, ed. THeth 2:34f.; cf. KUB 
24.10 iii 27-28. 
4. to observe (agreements, laws, customs), keep (oaths), obey (commands), heed (advice) — a. obj. uttar, AWATU (opp. of -ašta/-kan šarra-“to transgress” and peššiya- “to reject”): (If you transgress the words of this tablet, may the gods destroy you) mānÚma kē AWATEMEŠ (var. INIM.MEŠ) pa-ahha-aš-ti … nuÚttaÚkan … aššu[(li pa-ah)]-ša-an-taru “but if you observe these words, … may (the oath-gods) benevolently protect you …” KUB 21.1 iv 37-38, 42-44 (Alakš. treaty, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.4 iv 7, 11-15, ed. SV 2:82f.; cf. KBo 5.13 iii 20-21 (Kup. treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:126-129; KBo 19.43 ii 58 (Óuqq. treaty, Šupp. I); KUB 19.49 iv 30-34 (opp. of wahnu-), 40-41 (Man. treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 2:18f.; kuišÚma kē AWATEMEŠ pa-ah-ša-ri KUB 21.15 iv 6 + 715/v (hist., Óatt. III), ed. NBr 52f., translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:85 [nu attaš udd]ā
r pa-ah-ši mān attaš uttar pa-ah-ha-≠aš-ta± “Observe (your) [father’s wo]rds. As long as you observe (your) father’s word (you will eat bread and drink water)” KUB 1.16 iii 28 (edict of Óatt. I, NS), ed. HAB 12f., contrast [attašš]Úa uttar peššiya “reject [the father’s] word” KUB 1.16 iii 32; “You are now my [fore]most servants” nu LUGAL-aš udd[ā]rÚmit [pa-ah-ha-ašd]u-ma-at nu NINDA-an azzašteni wātarrÚa ekut~ teni … mā
n AWAT LUGALÚma UL pahhašnutteni “[Obs]erve my, the king’s, words. Then you will eat 

6

bread and drink water … But if you do not observe the king’s word (you will not stay alive)” ibid. iii 3334, 36, ed. HAB 12f.; cf. ibid. iii 46-49, ed. HAB 14f.; [(≠ūk± µPimpiraš LUGA)]L-un pa-ah-ha-aš-ha … [… L]UGAL-waš uttar pa-ah-ha-aš-tén “I, Pimpira, will protect the king … Observe the king’s word” KUB 31.115:18-19 (hist., OH/NS), w. par. KBo 3.23 rev. 11 and KBo 14.41 obv. 8, ed. Archi, FsLaroche 41-43. 
b. objs. išhiul “obligation,” šaklai- “custom/rite”: “You have become the maidservant of Óebat …” [n]uÚwa É išhiūl šaklainnÚa pa-ah-ši “so keep the temple, the obligation, and the custom/rite” KBo 
17.65 rev. 58 (birth rit.), ed. Beckman, StBoT 29:144f.; (At the end of the instructions for the ÓAZANNU:) nu zik LÚÓAZ[A]NNU ŠA URUÓatti išhiū
l kišan [p]a-ahši nuÚttaÚkkan uddanaz lē kuiški ka[rpzi] “You ÓA~ ZANNU, keep thus (as elaborated in the preceding lines) the behavior required in Óatti, and let no one ‘lift’ you from the word(s)” Bo 69/1256 (Or NS 52:134) 
	+ KUB 26.9 iv 9-11 (instr. for ÓAZANNU, MH/MS), ed. Otten, Or NS 52:136f. 
	c. obj. lingai- “oath” (opp. of -ašta/-kan šarra“to transgress”): nu mā¢uš(!) pa-ah-ha

n kuš lingaaš-du-ma “If you keep these oaths (may the gods protect you)” KBo 8.35 ii 14 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 111, cf. 1 a 1', above. 
1	to keep something to oneself, keep (a secret) (obj. harwaši memiyan): našmaÚtta LUGAL-uš kuin harwaši memiyan [me]mai zigÚan UL pa-ahha-aš-ti “or (if) you do not keep to yourself the secret word which the king [te]lls you, (you will transgress the oath)” KBo 5.9 iii 9-11 (Dupp. treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:20f., tr. ANET 204. 
2	(mid. w. dat.) to seek protection with (StBoT 16:29): “Wh[en Aziru came] to the land of Óatti to My Majesty’s ancestor, Šuppiluliuma, the Amurru lands were still [host]ile; [just as] they were subjects (lit. slaves) of the Hurrian king” […] nuÚšši µ[A]ziraš QA_TAMMA [(pa-ah-ha-aš-t)]a-at “so Azira sought protection with him (Šupp. I) in the same way” KUB 23.1 i 19-20 (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), w. dupl. 1436/u + 1198/u + KUB 8.82 obv. 7, ed. StBoT 16:6f., see ibid. 18, 80; nuÚšši DUMUÚŠU PAP-ri kuit KUB 23.103 obv. 5 (letter, Tudh. IV), ed. Otten, AfO 19:40f., is too fragmentary for translation. 

pahšanu
7. (w. -za or reflexively used enclitic pers. pron.) (meaning uncertain, perhaps:) to guard oneself(?), watch out(?): “He kept saying from [the si]de ([tap]ušza)” pa-ah-ha-[aš-hu-u]nÚwaÚz “I was on gu[ard](?)” KBo 21.12 8 (rit., pre-NH/NS); [AN]A ZI LUGALÚmaÚ<šm>aš IGI-anda x[…] / [pa-a]hha-aš-tén “Protect yourselves from the king’s wrath; (do not [give allegiance] anywhere else)” KUB 26.1a:8-9 (instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 10, tr. differently sub menahhanda 3 g. 
Götze, ZA 34 (1922) 185; Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 26f.; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 130-132; Kestemont, Diplomatique et droit international en Asie occidentale (1974) 614-616. 
Cf. pahšanu-. 
pahšanu-, pahhaššanu-, pahhašnu-v.; 1. to protect, defend, take care of, 2. to obey, heed, keep (words, commands), 3. (trans.) to be watchful, keep watch, be cautious, be alert, beware of, (part.) cautious, alert, watchful, wary, on one’s guard, 4. (part.) durable, enduring, stable, 5. (verbal subst.) “protection” (as a designation in KIN oracles); written syll. and PAP; from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pa-ah-ša-nu-mi KUB 19.23 l.e. 2 (Tudh. IV); pl. 2 pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ut-te-ni KUB 1.16 iii 36 (OH/NS), [p]aah-ša-nu-ut-te-ni KUB 23.68 obv. 19 (MH/NS), KBo 3.27 obv. 
(22) (OH/NS), pa-ah-ša-nu-te-n[i] KUB 26.10 iv 4; pl. 3 pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-zi KUB 9.15 iii 8, 14, (25) (NH), pa-ah-ha[aš-]ša-nu-an-zi KBo 16.50:18 (MH/MS). 
pret. sg. 1 pa-≠ah-ša-nu±-[n]u-[un] KBo 3.20 i 8 (OH); sg. 2 pa-ah-ša-nu-uš KUB 36.100 rev. 11 (OS); sg. 3 pa-ah-ha-ašša-nu-ut Bronze Tablet ii 37 (Tudh. IV); pl. 3 pa-ah-ša-nu-[ir] KBo 3.53 obv. 3 (OH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-[nu-ir] KUB 19.49 i 18 (Murš. II), PAP-ah-ša-nu-≠ir± KBo 3.46 rev.!? 32 (OH/NS), PAP-nu-[ir] KUB 19.49 i 13 (Murš. II). 
imp. sg. 2 pa-ah-ša-nu-ut KBo 16.20 left col. 5, pa-ah-haaš-ša-nu-ut KUB 29.1 i 16 (OH/NS), PAP-nu-[ut] KBo 13.6:1, PAP-nu-d(a)? KUB 48.124 obv.? 5; sg. 3 pa-ah-ša-nu-ud-du KUB 24.9 iii 17 (MH/NS), 987/v:5 (Otten/Rüster ZA 63:89) (+ KUB 24.11 iii 8) (MH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ud-du KBo 
11.11 ii 2 (NH/early NS), KUB 13.2 i (27) (MH/NS); pl. 2 pa-ah-ša-nu-ut-te-en KBo 7.14 obv. 13 (OS), KBo 22.1 obv. 5 (OS), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ut-te-en KUB 1.16 iii 46 (OH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-[ut-te-en] KBo 12.18 iv 10; pl. 3 pa-ah-ha-ašnu-an-du KBo 21.22:39 (OH/MS), pa-ah-ha-<aš>-nu-an-du KUB 13.2 i 8 (MH/NS), PAP-nu-an-du KBo 4.14 i 18, 20 (NH). 
part. sg. nom. com. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-za KBo 3.57 rev. 9 (OH), KBo 13.58 ii 4 (MH/NS), KBo 10.12 ii 38 (NH), KUB 
2.2 i 6 (NH), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-wa-an-za HKM 17:(29), HKM 89:(23), KUB 13.1 i (35) (all MH/MS), KBo 4.1 obv. 8 (NH), 
7

KBo 10.5 ii 2, pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an-za HKM 1:12, HKM 6:16, left edge 1, HKM 8:19, HKM 22:6, HKM 30 obv. 6 (all MH/MS); nom.-acc. neut. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an KBo 3.7 i 6 (OH/NS), KBo 
13.58 iii 18 (MH/NS), KBo 5.11 i rt. col. 24 (MH?/NS), KBo 
16.17 iii 33 (Murš. II), pa-ah-ša-nu-an KBo 34.34:10, pa-ahha-aš-nu-wa-an KBo 5.11 i left col. 24 (MH?/NS), KUB 14.16 i 24 (Murš. II), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an KUB 33.68 iii 6 (OH/MS), KBo 17.63 rev. 6 (MH?/early NS), KUB 13.20 i 21 (MH/NS), KBo 18.59 obv. 3, KBo 19.42 rev.? 8, pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-waan KUB 13.20 i 9 (MH/NS), KUB 5.8 ii 23 (Murš. II), pa-ahha-aš-ša-nu-a[n] 655/u ii 19 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:104). 
pl. nom. com. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-te-eš KUB 13.5 iii 25 (NS), [pa-ah-š]a-nu-wa-an-te-eš⁄‡ KBo 5.9 ii 11 (Murš. II), pa≠ah-ha±-aš-nu-wa-an-te-≠eš± KBo 12.4 iii 10 (OH), HKM 7:(26) (MH/MS), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an-te-eš KBo 17.88 iii 23 (OH?/ NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-wa-an-te-eš KUB 13.4 ii 74 (MH/NS), KUB 23.68 obv. 19 (MH/NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-an-≠te±-[eš] KUB 13.4 iii 54 (MH/NS); nom.-acc. neut. pa-ah-ša-nu-waan-da KUB 2.2 i 8 (NH), pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-wa-an-da KBo 4.1 obv. 9 (NH). 
verbal subst. nom.-acc. pa-ah-ša-nu-mar KUB 16.77 ii 69, KUB 52.37 ii 3, PAP-ah-<ša->nu-mar KBo 22.264 iii 5, PAP-nu-mar KBo 1.44 i 21, KBo 13.69:2, KBo 14.21 i 65!, 77, KUB 
5.1 i 4, 31, 98, ii 71, iii 7, iv 54, 91, KUB 5.3 iv 14, KUB 5.5 ii 33, KUB 6.30:5, KUB 16.14 rev. 3, KUB 16.66 obv. 13, KUB 
16.81 rev. 11, KUB 22.25 rev. 28, KUB 22.37 obv. 4, 8, KUB 
49.79 i 18, 20, PAP-mar KBo 13.76 obv. 17, KUB 6.7 iii 3, 7, 25, iv 22, KUB 16.36:6, KUB 18.58 ii 3, iii 30, KUB 50.108:4; gen. pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ma-aš HKM 44:9 (MH/MS). 
inf. pa-ah-ša-nu-um-[m]a-an-zi KUB 23.68 obv. 20 (MH/ NS), pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-ma-an-zi KUB 25.37 i 23, 29 (NS), PAP-nu-ma-an-zi KUB 26.32 i 3 (Šupp. II). 
iter. pres. sg. 2 PAP-nu-uš-ki-ši 720/v (StBoT 16:79) 1.e. 1; imp. sg. 2 PAP-nu-uš-ki KUB 23.1 l.e. 1 (both Tudh. IV). 
(Sum.) ŠU!.BAR.Z´ = (Akk.) az-za-ru “to help, forgive” = (Hitt.) PAP-nu-ma[r] KBo 1.44 obv. 21 (Erimhuš Bogh.), cf. StBoT 7:10; (Akk.) ≠u?-≈ú±-ur = (Hitt.) PAP-nu-[ut] “protect!” KBo 13.6:1 (vocab.). 
1. to protect, defend, take care of — a. obj. people: nuÚtta LÚ.ME[Š URUKarkiša] anzid[a]z memi~ yanaz PAP-nu-[ir] “The people [of Karkiša] protect[ed] you according to our agreement” KUB 19.49 i 12-13 (Man.), ed. SV 2:4f.; (In a description of a fountain:) nÚat paršaneš pāhšanta wātarÚšedÚaÚkan x[…] lū
liaz aršzi nÚan pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an-du l[a]~ b[arn]an [LUG]AL-un paššileš “and leopards are guarding it (the fountain); its water flows out of a basin of […], and may the pebbles protect him, the Labarna, the king” KBo 21.22:38-40 (blessings for the Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Kellerman, Tel Aviv 5:200, 202, Archi, FsMeriggi2:46f.; [ANA µŠup]piluliyama …[? o o]-LU~ GAL-ma GAL DUB.SAR GIŠ ANA SAG.DUÚŠU t®yaššatti [o-a]z? PAP-nu-ma-an-zi a≠u±wan UGU tiuwanzi ziladuwa kišan ≠šer± likta “In the following manner […]-šarruma, the chief wood-tablet scribe, swore to Šuppiluliuma to protect his person from tiyaššatti, [and death?], (and) to exalt(?) him forever” KUB 26.32 i 1-4 (oath, Šupp. II), ed. Laroche, RA 47:74, cf. Ose, Sup. 42f.; nÚ[a]t QA_TAMMA pa-ah-haaš-nu-an ē[štu] “And [let i]t (the newborn) likewise b[e] protected” KBo 17.63 rev. 6 + KBo 17.62 iv 11 (birth rit., MH?/ENS), ed. StBoT 29:34f. (differently); nÚuš pa-ahša-nu-an hark “Keep them (sc. the king and queen) safe” KBo 34.34:10 (frag. of mugawar for the Stormgod). 
b. obj. cities or lands — 1' finite forms: DINGIR. MEŠ URUÓurman pa-ah-ša-nu-[ir] (var. PAP-ah-šanu-ir) “The gods protected Óurma” KBo 3.53 obv. 3 (ann. of Óatt. I, NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.46 obv. 32, ed. Kempinski/Košak, Tel Aviv 9:89, 92; nu damai pē
dan pa-ah-ha[aš-]ša-nu-an-zi “(so that) they defend (that) other place” KBo 16.50:18 (oath of Ašhapala, MH/MS), ed. Otten, RHA XVIII/67:122 and CHD lamniya- 2 a; “As soon as a governor of a border province […-]s into those watchtowers and towns, into which the enemy keeps arriving in surprise raids” nÚaš kuitman [hud(āk weteddu) nÚaš pa-a]h-ha-aš-nu-ud-du “meanwhile(?) let him [imme]diately(?) build them, [and] defend [them]” KUB 13.2 i 26-27 (instr. for BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.55 + 1236/u i 5-6, ed. without dupl. Dienstanw. 42, translit. Kühne, ZA 62:255; also w. -za: (To Mašhuiluwa I gave the lands of Mira and Kuwaliya, to Targašnalli I gave the land of Óapalla) [(nuÚš)maš] apāt KUR-TUM e![(¢šd)]u nÚatÚza pa-ah-ha-aš-n[u-an-d(u)] “Let these be th[eir] lands, and let them defend them” KBo 22.41:5 
+ KBo 19.71:3 (Man.), w. dupl. KUB 19.50 iii 19 + KUB 14.26:5, ed. del Monte, Or NS 49:60, 63. 
2' non-finite forms: (Muršili sent forth Tarhini with the order:) ®tÚwaÚšši KURÚK[A p]eran pa-ahša-nu-wa-an har(a)k “Go, keep your land safe/defended against him (sc. Aparru of Kalašma)” KBo 
16.17 iii 33 (ann. of Murš. II), ed. Otten, MIO 3:173f.; (My father sent prince Óutupianza to Palā) KUR 
URUPalāÚma UL kuitki pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-wa-an KUR-TUM ēšta “now Palā was in no way a safe/ defended land; (but Óutupianza defended [pah~ haštat] Palā
)” KBo 5.8 ii 22-23 (ann. of Murš. II), ed. AM 152f.; (Part of Šarri-Kušuh’s army was stationed in the Lower Land, facing the Arzawan enemy) nu KUR-e pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-wa-an harkir “and they kept the land safe/defended” KUB 14.16 i 24 (ann. of Murš. II), ed. AM 28f.; “May the land thrive and prosper” 

8

nuÚwa utnē ¢

pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an ešdu “and may the land be protected/cared for (by the gods)” KBo 3.7 i 5-6 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:12, 18, tr. NERT 157, Hittite Myths 11, LMI 49f.; “Since I have sent out Marakui, the chariot-driver, let him remain there. Give him good instructions” pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ma-ašši-k[án] kišr® anda [ÉRIN.MEŠ? S]IGﬁ-in dai[š~ ten(?)] “Pla[ce sec]urely in his hand [troops(?)] of protection” HKM 44:9-11 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 196f.; cf. Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:65 w. n. 62. 
	c. obj. roofs: “They will sweep the temple, wipe the floors, sprinkle the temple inside (and) outside” šuhhuš zappiyaz pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-zi “(and) keep the roofs from leaking” KUB 9.15 iii 8 (instr., NH), cf. ibid. iii 13-14, 25. 
	d. other objects: “Let the man be dressed, let him put his shoes on” nÚat pa-ah-ša-nu-ud-du “Let him take care of them” (KUB 24.11) + 987/v iii 8 (rit. of Alli, MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:44f., translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:89; “Come, let us go to the mountain” … zik ÓUR.SAG-anÚdan pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-ut “Take care of your mountain” KUB 29.1 i 15-16 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 25, Marazzi, VO 5:148f., tr. ANET 357 (differently). 
	e. obj. broken: nu mahhan LÚ.MEŠ URUAzzi eniššan pa-ah-ša-[nu-an-du-uš?? …] awer “When the men of Azzi saw the [troops(?)] so prot[ected]” KBo 4.4 iii 71-72 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 132f. □ one could restore an accusative form of the participle of either pahš-or pahšanu-; since the former is not otherwise attested, Götze’s choice of the latter is more plausible. 

1	to obey, heed, keep (words, commands): “You oppress the TUKUL-men, and they in turn began to oppress (you)” kiššan AWAT ABIYA pa-ah-ša-nu-ut-te-en “Is this the way you have kept my father’s command?” KBo 22.1 obv. 4-5 (instr., OS), ed. differently Archi, FsLaroche 45f., tr. Beal, AoF 15:280; mān AWAT LUGALÚma UL pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-ut-te-ni “If you do not obey the word of the king, (you will not stay alive in the future)” KUB 1.16 iii 36 (OH/NS), ed. HAB 12f.; cf. ibid. iii 46 and KBo 3.27 obv. 22. 
2	to be watchful, keep watch, be cautious, be alert, beware of — a. (trans.) “to watch, beware of”: “He who is a herald in Óattuša — when he calls the guards to the watchtower, he calls during the first watch: ‘Put out the fire.’ He calls during the middle watch:” pa<h>hurÚwa«-wa» pa-ah-ša-nuwa-an ē

šdu “Let the fire be watched/attended to” 

KBo 13.58 iii 17-18 (instr. for HAZANNU, Arn. I/NS), ed. Daddi Pecchioli, OA 14:104f. 
	b. without object: (Let them [sc. the scouts] lock everyone inside the towns … and let them not allow them to come out) nu pa-ah-ha-<aš>-nu-an-du (var. pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-[…]) “Let them keep watch” KUB 13.2 i 8 (instr. for BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), 
	w. dupl. KUB 31.85:14, ed. Dienstanw. 41; “He drinks it up from there, and it does not spill (lahu[wa]ri) on the floor” nÚat apadda handa pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-maan-zi iyan “and therefore it is made/done for being cautious” KUB 25.37 obv. 28-29 (tablet of Lallupiya, NS); cf. ibid. obv. 23. 
	c. (participle) “cautious, alert, watchful, wary, on one’s guard”: “Now you who are temple officials” nuÚza haliy[aš] uddan® mekki pa-ah-ha-aš-šanu-wa-an-te-eš (var. pa-ah-ša-nu-[wa-an-te-eš]) ēšten “Be very alert about the matter of the wat[ch]” KUB 13.4 ii 73-74 (instr., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.94:4, ed. Chrest. 156f., Süel, Direktif Metni 50f.; nuÚza pahhū

enaš uddan® mekkiÚpat marri pa-ah-ha-aš-šanu-an-≠te±-[eš] (var. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-te-eš) ē
šten “Be very watchful in the matter of fire” KUB 13.4 iii 54 (instr., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.5 iii 25, ed. Chrest. 160f., Süel, Direktif Metni 66f.; (The gateman addresses the “people of the fire” in “Luwian”) uwat pahhunit pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-wa-an uwat IZI-it mar-[ri-it] ≠x±-it pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an ēš[tu] KBo 5.11 i 23-24 (instr. for gate-men, MH?/NS), translit. LTU 12; (If you warn the enemy: “The Hittite troops and chariotry are coming to attack you”) nuÚwaÚšma[š pa-ah-š]a-nu-wa-ante-eš⁄‡ ēšt[en] “Beware (pl.), (you will break the oath)” KBo 5.9 ii 11 (Dupp.), ed. SV 1:14f.; “If you write to the enemy: ‘[The Hittite troops and chari]ots are [com]ing [to attack you]’” nuÚwaÚza pa-ah-ša-nuw[a]-an-za ēš “Beware (sg.), (you will thereby break your oath)” KBo 10.12 ii 38 (treaty w. Aziru, Šupp. I), ed. Freydank, MIO 7:362, 369f. □ Goetze, JCS 16:29 and JCS 22:20, compares pahšanuwant-w. Akk. lu-ú du-un-nu-nata?-a-ma (against copy) in the treaty w. Tette, KBo 1.4 ii 32; since the last sign is -me not -ma, the phrase is lu-ú du-un-nuna il-me (see PD 62f., Freydank, MIO 7:375) which is too remote to allow a comparison w. Hitt.; nuÚza PA_NI LÚ. KÚR pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an-za ēš “Be on your guard toward (lit. before) the enemy (until reinforcements arrive)” HKM 22:6-7 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten XLIV/173:44f., HBM 154f., cf. HKM 1:11-13; there is insufficient space in the copy for Alp’s restoration: n[u? U]RUKa~ papahšuwaš mekki kuit / [pa-ah-ha-aš-n]u-wa-an-za “Because 
9

the city Kapapahšuwa is very [ale]rt” HKM 17:28-29 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 144f.; this verb is always written pa-ahha-aš-… in the Maˆat letters, including in HKM 45:18 (correct the glossary of HBM 391). 
1	(part.) durable, enduring, stable: kāšÚwa mahhan URUDU pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-wa-an-za (var. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-za) nammaÚwarÚaš ukturi[(š)] kēÚyaÚwa É DINGIR-LIM QA_TAMMA pa-ah-haaš-nu-wa-an-da (var. pa-ah-ša-nu-wa-an-da) ēšdu “Just as this copper is durable and hence everlasting, so let this temple be durable (and may it be everlasting on the dark earth)” KBo 4.1 i 8-9 (foundation rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 2.2 i 6-8 (NH), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 126f., 134; (If there is any construction work or other service to be done, perform it loyally) nÚat ŠA EGIR! U›-MI pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-wa-an (var. pa-ah-ha-aš-ša-nu-a[n]) KIN ēš[du] “and let it b[e] a durable work for the future” KUB 13.20 i 9 (instr., Tudh. II), w. dupl. 655/u (+ KUB 13.21) ii 19-20, ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:390f., 406, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:104; cf. ibid. i 21; “Run/report to the rejuvenated ‘Our Sungod’ and Tawananna” paidduÚwa innarauwanteš inna~ [r]auwanteš pa-ah-ha-aš-nu-an-te-eš ašandu “Let it happen that the vigorous ones be vigorous (and) enduring” KBo 17.88 + KBo 24.116 iii 22-23 (fest. of the month, OH?/NS) □ it is unusual for phraseological uwa- or painot to agree in number w. the main verb; one expects here pānduÚwa … ašandu. 
2	(verbal subst.) “protection” (as a designation in KIN oracles): 3-ŠU LÚ.KÚRÚza ZAG-tar DU° KASKAL MU PAP-nu-mar-ra ME-aš nÚat! DIN~ GIR.MAÓ-ni SUM-an S[IGﬁ] “Third. ‘The enemy’ took ‘rightness,’ ‘relief,’ ‘way,’ ‘year,’ and ‘protection.’ They were (lit. it was) given to ‘Óannahanna’: Favorable” KUB 5.1 i 4 (oracle on the king’s campaigns, NH), ed. THeth 4:32f. Since the resumptive encl. pron. agrees in gender w. the last word in a list of nouns (cf. Drohla, Kongruenz, 72f.), the gender of p. can be determined when it occurs last in a list. Hence 

n. com.: KUB 5.1 i 98, ii 71, iv 54, and KUB 16.81 rev. 11 + KUB 16.29 rev. 4; n. neut.: KUB 5.1 i 4, iii 7, KUB 16.66 obv. 13, and KBo 14.21 i 65. In KIN oracles p. always occurs in association w. other designations of transferred objects. For this procedure, see Archi, OA 13:115, cf. CHD minumar mng. 2 e. For a use of the verbal subst. outside KIN oracles see lex. sec. and 1 b 2'. 

pahšuil- b 

Friedrich, ZA 35 (1924) 16; idem, SV 2 (1930) 24f.; Sommer, AU (1932) 229; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 303, 377, 440f., 448, 460, 519. 
Cf. pahš-. 
pa-ah-ši[-…] (mng. unclear).† 
3 NINDA.GUR›.RA tar-na[-aš] / BA.BA.ZA pa-ah-ši[-…] / 1 NINDA.KU‡ UP-NI […] KUB 20.27:68; the lines are short, and there is probably nothing missing. In line 6, there is a space after tar-na, so that [-aš] very likely concludes the line. Since lines 6 and 8 give measurements for the foodstuffs, the same ought to be true of the line 7. Therefore, an emendation to na!-ah-ši[-iš] is suggested. BA.BA. ZA is usually measured in units of dry measurements, BÁN, PARISU, UPNU; but cf. […]BA.BA. ZA tarnaš KUB 42.104 iv? 7 (tarna- = 1/2 nahši, see s.v. nah(h)aši-). Of course, some variety of bread made of BA.BA.ZA could be restored in the break. Still, pahši from pahš- “to protect” makes no sense here. 
pahšuil-, paššuil-, paršuil n.; (a substance); from OH/NS and MH/MS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pa-≠ah±-šu-il KUB 29.40 ii 8 (MH/MS), paaš-šu-il KBo 14.63a i 8 (MH/MS), [pa-ah?/aš?-šu-i]l KUB 
29.45 i 3 (MH/MS), pa-aš-šu-i-il KBo 13.101 i 15 (NS), páršu-il KUB 9.28 iii 23 (MH/NS); gen. pa-aš-šu-ú-i-la-aš KUB 
4.47 rev. 30 (OH/NS); abl. pa-aš-šu-i-la-za KUB 55.57 i 8. 
	a. in the horse-training texts: nuÚšmaš 2 UPNU pa-aš-šu-il ANA 2 UPNI I[N.NU anda] ≠i±mmiyanzi nÚat adanzi “They mix for them (sc. the horses) two handfuls of p. with two handfuls of straw, and they eat it” KBo 14.63a i 8-9 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 220f. (= i *47-*48); 4 UPNU pa-≠ah±-šu-il ANA 4 UPNI IN.NU KUB 29.40 ii 8 (hipp., MH/MS), cf. KUB 29.45 i 3. 
	b. in rituals, an ingredient of a beverage libated to the gods and drunk through tubes: 1 NINDA.SIG paršiyammi KAŠ x-[…] walhi šipandahhi 1 DUG KA.GAG.A TUR ŠA GÚ.ŠEŠ x-[…] šipandahhi nuÚkan IŠTU 9 UZUÚR arha ku[ermi] nÚat išgaran~ ta iyami 1 NINDA.SIGÚya paršiy[ammi] dammilÚ ma pa-aš-šu-i-il anda imiyami “I break one thin bread, I libate beer […] (and) walhi-drink. I libate one small vessel of KA.GAG.A beer [with an infusion(?)] of bitter vetch. I cleave off (a piece) from the nine body parts and make it into išgaranta. I 

10

also break one thin bread. I mix together fresh p. (and I libate it to certain deities together with a clay cup of beer)” KBo 13.101 i 11-15 (rit., NS), cf. dupl. KUB 57.61:4-5 □ for dammil(i)- “fresh, unused” see Güterbock, RHA XXII/74:104 (said of beer); 1 DUG KA.GAG TUR ŠA 1 UPNI iyanza nÚaš IŠTU GÚ[.ŠEŠ …] taršandaza kantit dammelaza pa-aš-šu-i-la-za […] anda immiyantet šuwanza “One small vessel of KA. GAG beer of 1 UPNU capacity is prepared (lit. made), and it is filled with [bitter] vetch, dried/ roasted kant-grain, fresh paššuil, [and …], (and three drinking tubes are inserted into it)” KUB 55.57 i 7-9 (rit. frag.); 2 KUKUB ŠÀ.BA INA 1 DUGÓAB. ÓAB KAŠ akuwannaš pár-šu-il šūš 1 GI [(š)]uh~ miliš tarnanza “Two pitchers: one pitcher is full of beer (and) paršuil for drinking, one firm reed (i.e., a drinking tube) is inserted” KUB 9.28 iii 22-24 (rit. for the Heptad, MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.132 rev.? 10-11, ed. Kammenhuber, Materialien 4 (eku-/aku-) 78 (w. different interpretation) □ the syntax is strange: one would expect either 1 DUGÓAB.ÓAB IŠTU KAŠ akuwannaššÚa paršuilit šūš or INA 
1 DUGÓAB.ÓAB KAŠ akuwannaššÚa paršuil (without šūš); nu GEŠTIN pa-aš-šu-ú-i-la-aš-ša wā
tar šippanti “he/ she libates wine and p.-water” KUB 4.47 rev. 30 (rit., OH/NS). For NA›pa-aš-šu-e-la-aš HKM 116 ii? 24 (rit. in myth), ed. Güterbock, JKF 10:205-214, esp. 207, 210, see its own entry. 
If these spellings all represent one word (perhaps a foreign word whose Hittite spelling was not yet standardized), the alternation of hš, rš, and šš is unparalleled in Hittite. 

pahhuwar see pahhur. 
LÚ/DAMpahhuwarši-see LÚpahhurši-. 

DUG/NA›pahhunal(l)i-, DUGpahhuinali-,DUGpahhunala-n. neut.; (a container for fire, embers, and other things); from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li KBo 17.54 iv (16), 19 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 20.73 iv 16, (20) (OH or MH/MS), KUB 
28.82 ii 7 (OH?/NS), NA›pa-ah-hu-na-al-li KUB 7.18:3, (7) (NS); loc. [DUGpa-ah-hu-n]a-al-li-ia KBo 20.73 iv 17 (OH or MH/MS), DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li KUB 28.82 ii 9 (OH?/NS); abl. DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li-ia-za KUB 7.60 ii 11 (NS), DUGpa-ah-huna-li-az KBo 21.57 ii 6 (OH?/MS), KUB 7.53 ii 23, 26 (NH), DUGpa-ah-hu-≠i±-na-li-az VBoT 58 iv 36 (OH/NS), [… p]a-ahhu-na-la-az-zi(-ia-) KBo 21.7 i 5. 

DUG/NA›pahhunal(l)i
pl. nom.-acc. DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li KBo 13.146 i 12 (OH/ NS), DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li KUB 7.53 i 20 (NH). 
unclear: DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li KUB 34.88:10 (MS), KUB 

51.59 obv. 6, ≠pa-ah-hu-na±-al-li KBo 20.51 i 3, KBo 21.57 ii 
(2) (OH?/MS), DUGpa-ah-hu-na[-…] KUB 33.34 rev. 2 (OH/NS), KUB 51.22 rev. 6, DUGpa-ah-hu-u-n[a-…] KBo 8.94 rev.? 6. 
nekuz mehurÚma DUGpa-ah-hu-≠i±-na-li-az (var. [DUGpa-ah-hu-i-n]a-al-li-ia-az) pahhur PA_NI DIN~ GIR-LIM dā
[(i)] “In the evening, she (sc. the Old Woman) takes fire from the p.-container before the deity” VBoT 58 iv 36 (disappearance of the Sungod, OH/NS), 
w. dupl. KUB 53.20 rev.? (10-)11; the hand copy permits the reading i in DUGpahhuinaliaz. Laroche’s emendation to DUGpaah-hu-un!-na-li-az in RHA XXV/77:87 is unnecessary; (The Old Woman prepares the paths for attracting the gods of the enemy) nu DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li-ia-za pahhuwar dāi “She takes fire (i.e., embers?) from a p.-container, (tosses assorted sweet things on the hearth and burns incense)” KUB 7.60 ii 11 (curse of enemy cities, NS); kattanÚmaÚšši NA›paššiluš ānduš DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li-az harkanzi … kattanÚmaÚšši huwalliš DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li-az harkanzi “They hold heated pebbles by means of a p.-container next to her (sc. the Old Woman) … they hold pine cones by means of (another) p.-container next to her” KUB 7.53 ii 22-26 + KUB 12.58 ii 1 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 12f. (“brazier”); (The Man of the Stormgod then takes a measuring vessel with water in it) ANA GAL DUMU.MEŠ É.[GAL] DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li pāi nuÚššan ANA LUGAL ŠU.MEŠ-aš wātar parala~ huwai LUGAL-ušÚzaÚkan DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li ŠU.MEŠ-uš katta ārri “and gives a p.-container to the chief of the pal[ace] officials, he pours water over the king’s hands and the king washes his hands in the p.-container” KUB 28.82 ii 6-10 (rit., OH?/ NS); [nu MUNUS ŠU.G]I DUGpa-ah-hu-na-al-li dāi nuÚššan [DUGpa-ah-hu-n]a-al-li-ia GIŠeyan kittari “[The Old Wo]man takes a p.-container, and in the p.-container there lies eyan-wood. (She places heated pebbles on the eyan-wood)” KBo 20.73 iv 1617 + KBo 17.54 iv 2-3 (conjuration, OH or MH/MS); cf. KBo 
20.73 iv 20-21 + KBo 17.54 iv 16-17, w. par. KUB 7.18:3-4; […] EN-aš hašši DUGpa-ah-hu-na-li-az / […] ≠har±~ kan KBo 21.57 ii 6-7 (OH?/MS). 
p. is a container, sometimes made of stone (NA›p.), whose name is derived from pahhur r/n 
11

“fire,” showing both of the latter’s oblique stems: pahhun-and pahhuin-. The traditional tr. “brazier” (compare hašša-) may be overly precise. p. can contain fire, but also wood and pebbles which may be heated elsewhere. It may also contain liquids and serve as a wash basin. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 153f. (“‘Feuerbecken’ oder ‘Wärmstein’”); Van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 110 (“brasero”). 
Cf. pahhur. 
pahhur n. neut. and com.; 1. fire (in general), 2. torch(es), 3. campfire, watchfire, 4. fire signal(s) (?), 5. embers, burning coals, 6. fever, inflammation, burning pain, 7. (metaphorical use), 8. (designation in a KIN oracle); written syll., Sum. IZI, Akk. IŠA_TI, and possibly PINDU “live coal” (see mng. 5); from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pa-ah-hur KBo 23.49 iii 3 (OS or MS), KUB 
33.59 iii 9 (OH/MS), KBo 13.58 iii 16, KBo 21.33 iv 18, KBo 
21.47 ii 5, KUB 34.85:9, KUB 43.58 iii 12 (all MH/MS), KBo 
2.5 ii 22, KBo 11.11 ii 5, 6, KUB 9.1 iii 31, KUB 9.4 iii 43, KUB 14.20 i 13, KUB 17.1 ii 8, KUB 24.14 i 20, KUB 44.4 rev. 4, KUB 51.22 ii? 6 (all NH), pa-ah-hu-ur KBo 3.27 obv. 24, (25), KBo 3.34 i 2 (both OH/NS), pa-a-ah-hur KUB 17.10 iii 22 (2Z) (OH/MS), pa-ah-hu-u-ur KBo 9.127 left col. 6, KUB 
36.41 i (20) (MS?), pa-ah-hu-wa-ar KUB 7.60 ii 11 (NS), pa<ah>-hur KBo 13.58 iii 17 (MH/MS), IZI-hur KUB 17.8 iv 3 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 43.49 rev.? 21, KUB 46.27 obv. 20, IZI KBo 11.14 i 18 (MH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 12, KUB 13.4 iii 45 (MH/ NS), KUB 5.1 i 82, 100, ii 32, etc., KUB 22.70 rev. 52 (both NH). 
erg. pa-ah-hu-e-na-za KBo 12.128 rt. col. 5, pa-ah-hu-ena-an-za KBo 32.14 ii 7, 8 (MH/MS). gen. pa-ah-hu-e-na-aš KBo 5.11 obv. 21 (MH?/NS), KUB 
10.72 ii 10 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 19.144 i 13, KBo 22.107 i 3, KUB 8.36 iii 2 (all NH), pa-ah-hu-u-e-na-aš KUB 12.12 vi 44 (MH/NS), KUB 13.4 iii 44, 54 (MH/NS), KUB 24.12 iii 3 (NH?/NS), KBo 33.194 vi 24, pa-ah-hu-na-aš KUB 2.1 ii (35) (NH), KUB 44.16 iii 14, IZI-na-aš KUB 17.8 iv 10 (pre-NH/ NS), ŠA IZI KBo 20.2:9 (OS), KUB 34.88:8, IZI KBo 16.52 obv.? 7 (NH), [Š]A I-ŠA-TI KUB 42.107 iv? 2. 
loc. pa-ah-hu-e-ni KBo 6.3 ii 54 (OH/NS), KBo 7.36 i 7 (OH), KBo 6.34 iv 4, KUB 9.28 ii 3 (both MH/NS), KUB 17.27 ii 36 (MH?/NS), KBo 9.126:11, KBo 23.23 obv. (31), KUB 7.18:9, KUB 45.49 iv 4, 6, pa-ah-hu-u-e-ni KUB 39.48:10, VBoT 16 obv.? 6, pa-ah-hu-u-≠e±[-ni] or pa-ah-hu-u-ni? KUB 60.136:2, pa-ah-hu-ni KBo 2.9 iv 20 (MH/NS), KUB 7.46 rev. 1, IZI-ni KBo 6.5 iv 16, IZI-i KBo 11.32 obv. 9, 13, rev. 49 (OH/ NS), KBo 13.126 rev. 11, KUB 39.70 i 14, INA IZI VBoT 16 rev.? 3, ANA IZI KBo 21.42 i 6, KBo 13.208:7, IZI KBo 5.1 iii 15, 20, 29 etc. (MH/NS), KBo 23.41 rev.? 14. 

pahhur 1 a 1' c' 

all. [pa-a]h-hu-e-na KBo 11.11 ii 11 (NH/early NS). inst. pa-ah-hu-e-ni-it KUB 15.34 iv 49 (MH/MS), KUB 
32.65 i 4, KBo 11.18 v (6), KBo 13.206:5, pa-ah-hu-u-e-ni-it KBo 15.48 iv! 25 (MH/NS), KUB 32.128 ii 25 (NH), pa-ah-hu-ni-it KBo 17.105 iii 2 (MH/MS), KBo 5.11 i 23 (MH/NS), KBo 13.155:(2), IZI-ni-it KBo 13.167 ii (6), 7, IZI-it KBo 
19.128 ii 15 (OH?/NS), KBo 10.45 iii 48 (MH/NS), KBo 13.114 i 13, VBoT 24 ii 37, 40 (both MH/NS), KBo 15.49 i 11 (MH/ NS), KBo 4.2 iii 50 (NH), KBo 13.101 i 10 (NS), KUB 7.60 ii 37 (NS), IŠTU IZI KBo 24.19 ii 17 (MS), HT 1 i 47 (NS), KUB 40.79:5, IZI KBo 20.72 iii 20. 
abl. pa-ah-hu-e-na-az KUB 15.34 i 2, iii 56 (MH/MS), KBo 
21.41 rev. 6, pa-ah-hu-u-e-na-az KBo 13.126 rev. 9, pa-ah-hu-na-az KBo 2.9 iv 21, KUB 5.13 i 5, pa-ah-hu-na-za KBo 2.9 iv 19, pa-ah-hu-u-na-za KBo 11.8:24, IZI-na-az KBo 13.126 rev. 13, IZI-az VBoT 24 iv 25 (MH/NS), IZI-za KUB 8.35 obv. 5 (OH?/NS), KUB 5.4 ii 11 (NH), KUB 18.12 i 47, KBo 20.47:8. 
In oracles, IZI is occasionally com. (KUB 16.29 rev. 11, KUB 16.39:9, KUB 50.15:3, KUB 52.68 i 17).— Note that pahhuwar is not the older form of pahhur, as thought by Friedrich, HW 154. 
1. fire (in general) — a. starting, dying down, going out and extinguishing — 1' starting — a' obj. of parai-A: m[ān]Úšan hašš® p[a-ah-]hu-ur [n]atta paraiš≠te±ni “If you do not kindle/fan a fire in the brazier” KBo 3.27 obv. 25-26 (edict of Óatt. I, NS), cf. ibid. obv. 23-24; INA UD.3.KAMÚma kēz 7-an pa-ah-hur kē
zziya 7-an pa-ah-hur parihhi “On the third day, I blow/fan seven fires on this side and seven fires on the other side” KBo 11.11 ii 5-6 (rit., NH); cf. KBo 3.34 i 2-3 (OH/NS), KBo 21.57 ii 2-4, KUB 10.88 i 8-11, IBoT 3.67 rt. col. 4-5 (see 1 a 3', below); cf. parai-A 2 a. 
b' obj. of lapnu-: n[u] µKiššiyaš attaš DINGIR. ME[Š] pa-ah-hur lapnuškiuwan dāir “The father/ ancestral gods of Kešši began to heat up a fire” KUB 17.1 ii 7-8 (Kešši myth, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:66f. 
c' obj. of warnu-: LÚMUÓALDIMÚkan hašši pa-ah-hur warnuzzi “The cook lights the fire on the hearth” KUB 11.35 v 16 (winter fest.); namma KÁ.GAL peran kezza pa-ah-hur warnuwanzi kezziya pa-ahhur warnuwanzi “Then in front of the gate, they light a fire on this side and they light a fire on the other side (and the troops march through between them)” KUB 17.28 iv 51-52 (rit. for a defeated army, MH/ NS), ed. O. Masson, RHR 137:6, StBoT 3:151; cf. 2Mašt. iii 54-iv 6 (MH/MS); namma IZI 2 AŠRA [(warn)]uwanzi “Then they light fires in two places” HT 1 iv 10-11 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 9.31 iv 4, ed. Dinçol, Bel

12

pahhur 1 a 1' c' 

leten XLIX/193:18f.; nuÚkan EGIR-anda GIŠpahhurulaz pa-ah-hur warpanzi nu pa-ah-hur warnuanzi “Afterwards they ‘enclose’ (i.e., bank?) the fire with a pahhurula-implement, and they make the fire hot (lit. make the fire burn)” KUB 15.31 i 18-20 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 i 19-21, ed. Ehelolf, KlF 1:159, Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:150f. □ this warp-is not the verb meaning “to wash,” but the one meaning “to enclose, surround.” 

2' dying down: m[ā

hhan pa-ah]-hur katta išari “W[hen the fi]re dies down” KBo 15.25 obv. 30 (conjuration, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:4f.; cf. ibid. rev. 20; cf. also KUB 

58.83 iii 11-12 below, mng. 5. 

3' going out (kišt-): [… pahhur?] / pariyanzi […] / pa-ah-hur kišta[ri] “They fan [a fire?…], the fire goes out […]” (and they sing) IBoT 3.67 rt. col. 3-5. 
4' extinguishing (kištanu-): For KUB 13.4 iii 44-48, see 1 b, below; cf. KBo 4.2 i 12, KBo 6.34 iv 6, KBo 16.52 rev.? 5-7, KBo 21.6 rev. 7-8, KBo 26.131 rev. 2-3, KUB 15.35:44(-45), KUB 17.10 iii 22, KUB 17.27 iii 7, KUB 24.13 i 22, KUB 30.15 obv. 12-13; in KUB 24.14 i 20-21 the “fire” which is extinguished is either metaphorical or a term for “fever, inflammation,” cf. mng. 6, below. 
b. something to be watched as a source of potential bodily harm: andaÚmaÚza pahhuenašÚa ud~ dan® mekki nahhanteš ēšten nÚašta mān [ŠÀ] É DINGIR-LIM EZEN nu IZI mekki pahhašten mah~ hanÚma GEﬂ-anza k®ša nÚašta pa-ah-hur kuit ANA GUNNI ā
šzi nÚatÚkan wedanda SIGﬁ-in keštanut~ ten mān INIM IZIÚma šannapi šannapi kuitki ha~ danÚma GIŠ-ru “Be (pl.) very careful in the matter of fire: If there is a festival [in] a temple, watch the fire carefully. And when night comes, extinguish thoroughly with water whatever fire (embers) remains in the brazier (or fireplace). But if here and there (in various separated places) there is some trace of fire (and) dry wood” KUB 13.4 iii 44-48 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 62-65; nuÚza pa-ah-hu-e-na-aš uddani mekkiÚpat marri pahšanu~ wanteš ēšten KUB 13.4 iii 54; takku LÚ-an pa-ah-hue-ni (dupl. IZI-ni) kuiški peššizzi nÚaš aki “If someone pushes a person into the fire, so that he dies” KBo 6.3 ii 54 (Laws §44a, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 16, ed. HG 30f.; w. pahš- “guard, watch”: KUB 13.4 iii 45, 

pahhur 1 c 3' 
see pahš- 3 a; w. pahšanu- “take care of”: KUB 13.4 iii 54, KBo 5.11 i 23-24, KBo 13.58 iii 13-18, see pahšanu-3 c. 
c. as something that consumes or destroys — 1' in general: IGI-zin pa-ah-hu-e-na-za karapi KBo 
12.128 rt. col. 5 (proverb), cf. (Sum.) [lú].dub.sag.gá [i]zi an.kú.e = (Akk.) mahrâ išātum ik[kal] “(When) fire consumes the first (in rank)” K 8315:34, ed. Lambert, BWL 254:3, cf. CAD mahrû and bil. sec.; (Then the patili-priest guts the birds) nÚatÚšan IZI peššiyazi “and throws them (i.e., the innards) into the fire” KBo 5.1 iii 15 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Pap. 10*f.; cf. ibid. iii 28-29, iii 35-37, and KUB 34.69 obv. 6; […] / anda hapuš ≠nÚanÚkan pa-ah-hu-u-ni?± […] / peššiya “Catch up with […], and push him/it into the fire […]” KUB 60.136:1-3; cf. also ukturi-“incineration dump”; takku pa-ahhur ANA A.ŠÀÚŠU kuišk[(i pedai)] “If someone carries fire into his field (and burns up his neighbor’s field …)” KBo 6.11 i 4 (Laws §106, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.12 i 22, KUB 29.21:17, KUB 29.23:1 and par. takku pa-ah-hur kuišk[i …] KBo 6.17 i 1, ed. HG 62f. 
2' as a conflagration capable of causing massive destruction: logical subj. of warnu-: (When in the sixth month a star falls from heaven) KUR-yaš A.ŠÀ kuraš IZI-it warnutari “the land’s field will be burned by fire” KUB 8.25 i 8-9 (omen, OH?/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 147f.; wešiyahhari kuedani ÓUR.SAG-i mānÚan pa-ah-hu-e-na-an-za arha warnuzi dIM-ašÚmanÚan walhzi pa-ah-hu-e-na-anzaÚmanÚan arha warnuzi “I wish fire would burn up the mountain that I am grazing upon, I wish Teššup would strike it (with lightning?), and fire would burn it up” KBo 32.14 ii 6-8 (Hurr.-Hitt. bilingual wisdom text, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32 (forthcoming); in mythological context: dIŠTARÚkan kuwapi KUR-eaš IZI wēraza anda išhuwāi “When IŠTAR pours fire on the lands from a wera-vessel” KBo 4.14 ii 5-6 (treaty, LNS), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:39. 
3' passing something between fires or near a fire in order to remove evils: “Then he (i.e., the priest) lifts the (image of the) goddess up, he sets fire on either side” nuÚkan Z´D.DA ANA IZI kēz kēzziya išhuwai “he sprinkles flour on the fire on either side (and carries the goddess through)” FsLaroche 138 + KBo 29.213 i 3-4 (cult of Išhara), w. dupl. KBo 21.42 obv. 6-7, ed. Güterbock, FsLaroche 138, 140; cf. 
13

KUB 17.28 iv 51-52 (rit. for a defeated army, MH/NS) and HT 1 iv 10-11 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 9.31 iv 4 (both above, 1 a 1' c'). 
	d. attracting gods from the fire: EGIR-ŠUÚma pa-ah-hu-e-na-az QA_TAMMA huittiyaz[i nu tezzi] mānÚza DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ GIŠERIN-aš wa~ ranti pa-ah-hu-[e-ni] “Likewise, he (sc. the diviner) draws the gods from the fire [saying]: ‘If you male cedar gods are in the blazing fi[re] (… I will draw you out)’” KUB 15.34 iii 56-57 (evocation, MH/MS), 
	w. par. KBo 13.126:9-13, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:200f.; cf. ibid. i 2, KBo 2.9 iv 19-21, KBo 11.8:24, KBo 21.41 rev. 6, KUB 7.46 iv 1, KUB 43.36:15. 
	e. cooking with fire — 1' šanhuwa-: (The Old Woman takes a little grain) nÚatÚkan pa-ah-hu-niit šanhuzzi “and roasts it with fire” KBo 17.105 iii 2-3 (incant., MH/MS). 

2' zanu- “to cook with fire, i.e., to grill, broil” (contrasted w. IŠTU DUGÚTUL zanu- “to stew,” KBo 14.27:9-10, KUB 2.13 iii 6-8, KUB 27.16 iii 21-25): “Next the augurs sacrifice a goat to the patron deity of the hunting-bag” nu hantezzi palši ZAG-an UZUGEŠTU-an UZUN´G.GIG UZUŠÀ ZAG-an UZUZAG.LU-an IZI-az zanuanzi “The first time they broil the right ear, the liver, the heart, (and) the right shoulder” VBoT 24 iv 23-25 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 116f.; namma UZUŠÀ IZI-it (dupl. pa-ah-hu-u-e-ni-it) zanu[(wanzi)] KBo 15.49 i 11 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 32.128 ii 24-25; cf. KBo 3.14:8, KBo 10.37 iv 7, KBo 
11.17 ii 19-20, KBo 13.114 iii 6, KBo 13.167 ii 6-7, KUB 2.13 iii 6-7, KUB 7.60 ii 37-38, KUB 27.16 iii 22, HT 1 obv. 47, IBoT 2.55:8; nÚašta ZAG-an UZUGEŠTU-an kuranzi nÚat IZI-it zanuwanzi “They cut off the right ear (com. gen.) and cook/broil it (neut.!) with fire” VBoT 24 ii 36-37 (rit., MH/NS); nÚašta UZUN´G.GIG danzi nÚat IZI-it zanuwanzi “They take liver and cook it with fire” KUB 56.45 ii 10-11. 
f. variously used in magic rituals: (Óannahanna made three wells/springs: over one an ippiya-tree stands; next to another a wooden hupparaš is placed) kēni “by another
daniÚma pa-ah-hur ura(i.e., the third) a fire burns” KUB 33.59 iii 9 (myth of Inara, OH/MS), ed. Collins, Diss., 240f., translit. Myth. 89, tr. Hittite Myths 30; cf. KUB 46.19 rev.? 11, KUB 17.27 ii 26, IBoT 2.125 ii 3, KBo 23.49 iii 3, KUB 33.28 iii 11, KBo 9.127 i 

pahhur 1 g 

6, KBo 21.47 ii? 5; ‰Úkan GIŠtepaza IZI-i lahu<i> “he pours oil on the fire from a GIŠtepa-” KBo 11.32 obv. 9 (rit., OH/NS); kinunaÚatÚkan MÁŠ.GAL IZIÚya iš~ tarna arha pēdanzi “Now they carry them (i.e., the paraphernalia) through the goat and the fire” KUB 
22.70 rev. 52 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:94f.; cf. KUB 
5.6 iii 30-31; [n]uÚkan LÚ.MEŠzupriyalliuš LÚapiriuš GIŠkalmišnit apenzan pa-ah-hu-e-ni anda š®yaiškanzi apēÚma GIŠkalmišniuš apenzan pa-ah-hu-e-ni anda š®yaiškanzi “The torch-bearers and the apiri-men push with logs into their fire, the others push logs into their fire” KUB 45.49 iv 3-6 (rit., NS), translit. StBoT 15:29; “He takes cheese …” nÚanÚšan pa-a[h-h]ue-ni dāi “and places it on the fire” KUB 9.28 ii 3-4 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 86:28; cf. KBo 21.33 iv 18-19, KBo 21.42 i 5, KBo 24.27:6, KUB 7.60 ii 11, KUB 39.22 ii? 56, KUB 43.57 iv 2, VBoT 16 obv.? 6, rev.? 3; ‰Úkan memal IZI šuhhai “He pours oil (and) groats into the fire” KBo 11.32 obv. 13 (rit., OH/NS); cf. ibid. obv. 41; “Then the patili-priest brings the lamb inside” nÚanÚkan ANA 7 IZI 7-ŠU šer arha wahnuzi “and waves it seven times over seven fires” KBo 5.1 iv 10 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Pap. 12*f.; URUNinuwa huppannin huštannÚa ≠pa±-ahhu-≠e±[-ni] / [o o o o a]ndan wahnuzi “In? Nineveh she waves a hupanni-and a hušta-stone […] ov[er] the fire” KBo 23.23 obv. 31-32 (incant., MH/MS), ed. Haas/ Thiel, AOAT 31:206 (where ≠pa±-ah-hu-≠e±-[ni] is misread as da-ah-hu-u[n]); [o-o (gimri)] šuppi pa-ah-hur tepu p[a?-…] “in the steppe/field the sacred fire a little […]” KBo 34.38 i 3 (rit. to purify troops), w. dupl. KUB 57.20:4, cf. Košak, ZA 78:310f. 
g. pahhuenit wahnu-“to surround (something) with fire,” i.e., “to immolate” (cf. MSpr 28-32): [nu (gangatiSAR parā appanzi pa-ah-hu-e-ni-it-t)]a wahnuanzi (var. warnuanzi) “They hold out a gan~ gati-herb and surround (dupl. burn) (it) with fire” KUB 15.33b iv 9 (evocation), w. dupl. KUB 15.34 iv 49 (MH/ MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:206f.; nuÚšši GUD pū
hugariš p®yawanzi IZI-it wahnumanzi [(MUŠEN. ÓI.)]A wahnummanzi SIZSÁ-at “It was determined (by oracle) to send to him (i.e., the god) the substitute ox, to surround (the ox) with fire, (and) to surround the birds” (followed many lines later by a statement that warnut “he burned” various birds) KBo 4.2 iii 50-51 (Murš. II speech loss), w. dupl. KUB 43.50 obv. 11-12 + KUB 15.36 obv. 3-4, ed. MSpr. 4f., Lebrun, Heth

14

itica 6:104, 110 (“de le brûler”); cf. pa-ah-hu-u-e-na-aš wah~ numaš (dupl. warnu[maš]) tuhhušta “(The ritual) of the surrounding with (dupl. burning with) fire is finished” KBo 33.194 vi 24 (EZEN hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KUB 12.12 vi 44-45, ed. ChS 1/4:179,155, w. no mention of burning or torches in what considerable amount of the preceding context is preserved; for pahhuenit wahnu-in another usage see mng. 2, below. 
h. in description of the Moongod: [nuÚza Š]Uza wariwaran pa-ah-hur harta “He (sc. the Moon-god) held a blazing fire in his hand” KUB 44.4 rev. 4 (birth rit., NH), ed. Beckman, StBoT 29:176f. 
1	torch(es) in pahhuenit wahnu-“to circle (someone/-thing) with fire (i.e., carrying torches): lukkattaÚmaÚka[n (INA É)] huhhaš andan adda[š DINGIR.MEŠ-u]š(?) pa-ah-hu-e-ni-i[t] (var. pa-ah-hu-u-e-ni-it) wahnuanzi “The next day in the house of the grandfather they surround the gods of the fathers with fire” KBo 23.28 i 25-27 + KUB 32.65 i 35 (hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 15.48 i 24-26, translit. ChS 1/ 4:60, 27; § mahhanÚma DINGIR.M[EŠ …] / nu DIN~ GIR.MEŠ IZI-it w[ahnu-…] / IZI-it wahnua[nzi …] / nu GIŠzuppari x[…] § “But when […] the god[s …] s[urround] the gods with fire […] they surround […] with fire. And torches […]” KUB 7.35:8-11 (Kizzuwatnean rit.) □ since the gods are the object of the verb, one can exclude the usage of pahhuenit wahnu-cited above 1g “to immolate”; cf. […GI]Šzuppari lukkanzi [… I]ZI-it wah~ nuanzi “They light torches. They surround […] with fire” KBo 8.72 obv.? 10-11 (Kizzuwatnean rit.). 
2	campfire, watchfire (in military camp): “It rained throughout the night, and there was fog” nuÚkan namma LÚ.KÚR ŠA KARAŠ pa-ah-hur UL aušta “(with the result that) the enemy could no longer see the campfires” KBo 19.76 i 25-26 + KUB 

14.20 i 12-13 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 194f. (without KBo 19.76), tr. Otten, AfO 22:113, cf. Ünal, Belleten XLI/163:452 

w. n. 30. 
4. fire signal(s)(?) (cf. CAD išā

tu 3 and Dossin, RA 35:174-186): nuÚza KUR URUŠallahšuwaš IZI-it apa~ šila kattan tarnaš apušÚmaÚmu ‰R.MEŠ-ni wahnuir “The land, i.e., Šallahšuwa handed itself over (to me, indicating this) by fire (signals)” KBo 10.2 i 4244 (ann., Óatt. I/NS), cf. Melchert, JNES 37:11f. 
5. embers; burning coals: [GIM-a]n? pa-ah-hur GAM-ta ešari nu GUNNI.MEŠ / [… kar](a)ppanzi 

pahhur 5 
nu pa-ah-hur anda “When the fire dies down, they [l]ift(?) the braziers, and fire (i.e., embers) is therein” KUB 58.83 iii 11-12, ed. Götze, KlF 1:408f. as unpublished passage supplied by Ehelolf; cf. also KBo 15.25 obv. 30 above, 1 a 2'; “When the night falls” nÚašta pa-ahhur kuit ANA GUNNI ā
šzi “what(ever) fire/embers remain(s) in the fireplace (extinguish it well with water)” KUB 13.4 iii 46-47 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 158161; (They set up a table of ivory) ANA 1 DUGBUR. ZIÚkan IZI išhuwanzi “they pour embers into a bowl” KUB 44.1 obv. 8 (fest.), cf. KBo 10.37 iii 52, KUB 7.4:6-7, KUB 27.22 i 11, KUB 39.68 rt. col. 1-2, KUB 39.70 i 14, KUB 39.71 iii 34-35, KUB 41.4 ii 10, KUB 43.49 rev.? 21, KUB 45.39 ii? 21; for KBo 4.14 ii 5-6, see 1 c 2', above; [L]ÚMUÓALDIMÚkan ANA UGULA LÚ.MEŠALAN. ZU· [pa-a]h-hur SAG.DU-i šer išhū¢
wa[i] “The cook pours embers on the head of the chief of the performers” KUB 60.21:6-7 (fest.) □ this is another example of slapstick humor involving the LÚALAN.ZU·; cf. CHD luliya3 a; cf. KUB 20.11 ii 11-13, where food is served and an altercation occurs between the same two functionaries (the cook and the chief of the performers): (The table-men set out fruit and breads. They serve ARZANA stew to the performers. The chief of the performers sits down and is given a cup of wine by the cook, who then squats in front of him) LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· TU‡ ZIQU_QI azzikanzi UGULA LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·Úma LÚMU~ ÓALDIM SAG.DUÚS[U] GIŠUD.MUNUS.ÓÚB-it 3-ŠU walhzi “The performers eat stew made of flour, but the chief of the performers strikes the cook three times on his head with a large container for wine” GIŠUD.MUNUS.ÓÚB = Akkad. kūtu; pa~ r(a)štuhha<n?>Úma pa-ah-hur-ra har[(iē
zzi)] “He buries the earthenware crock(s?) and the embers (i.e., filled with embers)” KBo 21.13 iv 4 (rit.), w. dupls. IBoT 2.125 ii 7 and KUB 39.101 ii 17; GIŠBANŠUR-i per~ an GAM takn® GAL.GIR› kitta nuÚššan IZI šuhhan “On the ground, down in front of the table, there stands an earthenware crock; into it fire/hot embers is/are poured” KBo 11.14 i 17-18 (rit., MH/NS) □ for GAL.GIR›, see parštuhha-; cf. KUB 44.15 i 7, w. dupl. Bo 3727 (Otten, ZA 64:68), KUB 7.18:5. The Akkadogram P´-INDU (= pēmtu “(Holz-)Kohle” AHw 854a) may have been read w. Hitt. pahhur in the sense of “embers, live coals”: andaÚmaÚkan P´-IN-DU peššiya[…] / eganÚwaÚkan anda peššie[-…] “[…] throw(s) in a live coal […]; […] throw(s) in ice […]” KUB 44.4 obv. 10-11 (fest.). 
15

6. fever, inflammation, burning pain — a. referring to specific body parts: UZUmeliyaš pa-ah-hur šā
tar piddaizzi “she will carry away the inflammation of the UZUmeliyaš and the wrath” KUB 9.4 iii 4344 (Old Woman rit., MH/NS), cf. KUB 9.34 i 26f., iv 3, KBo 
17.54 i 15 (restored); [mān] antuhš[an] huwahh[urtin] ≠pa-ah±-[h]u-e-na-aš ē
pzi “[If] an inflammation (lit. ‘that of the fire’) seizes a ma[n’s] thr[oat] (… and he loses his voice)” KUB 8.36 iii 1-2 (shelf list), ed. StBoT 19.38f. and Laroche, CTH pp. 188, 190; mānÚwa ANA dUTU-ŠI eni IZI ŠA G‰R.MEŠÚŠU nuntaraš SIGﬁ-ri “If this inflammation of His Majesty’s feet subsides soon” KUB 15.3 i 18-19 (vow, NH), tr. Güterbock apud Oppenheim, Dreams 255; ANA SAG.DUÚKAÚ maÚduÚšan pahhur kištanunun nÚatÚšan alwazeni UN-ši SAG.DU-i warnunun “I have extinguished the fire on your head and made it burn on the head of the sorcerer” KUB 24.14 i 20-22 (Óebattarakki’s rit.), ed. Collins, JCS 42:216 w. n. 26. 
b. in general: pa-ah-hur huekmi “I conjure the fever/inflammation” KBo 22.107 i 11. 
1	(metaphorical use): “A tongue (that is) unknown … [a tongue that is u]nmentioned” EME pa-ah-hur “a tongue (that is) fire, (a tongue that is water …)” KUB 34.85:9 (rit., NS), ed. Kühne, FsOtten 162f., cf. Meriggi, RHA XVIII/66-67:92; cf. also lalašÚwa armizzi “the tongue is a bridge” KBo 11.72 iii 5, w. dupl. KBo 11.10 iii 17, cf. CHD lala-b (end); dTelipinuš kardimiyawanza ZIÚŠU k[arazÚšiš] uriwaran pāhhur “Telipinu is angry; his soul (and) his karaz are a blazing fire” KUB 17.10 iii 21-22 (Tel.myth, OH/MS); cf. also KUB 33.28 iii 11; [ŠA DINGIR]-LUM TUKU.TUKU-wanza ZIÚ ŠU [ka]razÚšeš waran pahhur lapta HKM 116:1-4 (incant.), ed. Güterbock, JKF 10:206, 208. 
2	(in a KIN oracle) — a. inflammation or burning pain(?): … ŠÀ-aš IZI ta-paš-ša-a[n …] “… burning of the heart/innards/inside (and) fever” VBoT 136 obv. 12; in other exx. w. abl. “burning from the inside”: menahhandaÚmaÚkan kuiš UN-aš GA[R-r]i nuÚzaÚkan [Š]À-az IZI nÚat pangaui paiš “The ‘person’ that is situated opposite <took> ‘fire’ from the ‘heart’ and gave it to the ‘pankuš’” KUB 

5.24 i 59-60; cf. ibid. i 27; KUB 49.28 rt. col. 24; ŠÀ-za IZI KBo 14.21 ii 62, KBo 24.132 obv. 15, KUB 5.11 i 9, KUB 6.8:4, 5, KUB 16.30 iii 1, KUB 49.79 i 9; ŠÀ IZI KUB 16.80 obv. 2. Archi, OA 13:117 w. n. 14, interprets ŠÀ-za as subject (i.e., 

pahhur 

nom., not abl.) and IZI as object. This analysis is contradicted by the parallel construction w. the gen. ŠÀ-aš IZI; cf. also nu ta≠p±aššanÚpat IZIÚya ME-aš “and took the ‘fever’ itself and ‘burning pain(?)’” KUB 6.14 rev. 16. 
	b. fire as a weapon: GIŠTUKUL URUKÙ.BAB~ BAR IZI URUKÙ.BABBAR “Hittite weapon (and) Hittite fire” KUB 5.1 ii 58; GIG.TUR GIŠTUKUL LÚ. KÚR IZI LÚ.KÚR “small sickness, enemy’s weapon (and) enemy’s fire” ibid. ii 32; in the first example GIŠTUKUL and IZI refer to Hittite weapons and fire directed against their enemies, while in the second example they indicate enemy weapons and fire directed against the Hittites; cf. Engl. “fire and sword.” 
	c. unclear: [S]Aﬁ IZKIM IZIÚya ME-aš nÚaš pa.-i SUM-za “(The token) takes the ‘red omen’ and ‘fire’ and gives them to ‘the pankuš’” KUB 52.68 i 17; for other exx. in KIN oracles where IZI is resumed by -aš see KUB 16.36:9-10, KUB 50.15:3; pa.Úza GÙB-tar IZI PAP-numarrÚa ME-aš nÚaš d[M]AÓni SUM-za “the ‘pankuš’ took ‘left-ness,’ ‘fire,’ and ‘protection’ and gave them to ‘Óannahanna’” KUB 

16.81 rev. 11 + KUB 16.29 rev. 4. 
Containers used for fire or embers — a. hašša-/ GUNNI: KUB 11.35 v 16, KUB 13.4 iii 46. 
b. pahhunalli-: q.v. 
	c. DUGhuprušhi-: KUB 7.4:6-7, KUB 39.71 iii 34-35, KUB 51.85 rev.? 5. 
	d. DUGBUR.ZI: KUB 44.1 obv. 8. 
	e. SIG›: KUB 41.4 ii 10, KUB 44.15 i 7 w. dupl. Bo 3727 (Otten, ZA 64:68). 

f. GAL: KBo 13.260 iii 21-22; GAL.GIR›: KBo 11.14 i 

18. 

g. DUGD´LIM.GAL: [DUGD´L]IM.GAL ŠA IZI KBo 20.2:9 (MELQE_TU list, OS), translit. StBoT 25:47; 300 DUGD´LIM.GAL ŠA IZI KUB 34.88:8 (ration list [tar~ natt-], MS?); 200+[… DUGD´LIM.GAL Š]A I-ŠA-TI KUB 42.107 iv? 2 (ration list); 1 DUGD´LIM.GAL IZI KBo 
24.41 i 4 (rit.); 10 DUGD´LIM.GAL IZI KUB 51.12 obv. 8 (fest.). 
Ehelolf, KlF 1 (1930) 159f. (mng. 3 “Feuerstelle”); Haas, Or NS 40 (1971) 412 (mng. 6-7 “Brennen”). 
Cf. DUGpahhunalli-, GIŠpahhurula-. 

16

pahhura-(mng. unkn.).† 

[…] MUNUS.MEŠ pa-ah-hu-re-eš x[…] Bo 6873:8 (StBoT 16:37). According to StBoT 16:37, this is a scribal error for pahhuwarši-, pahhurši-. Since no context is given, we list this ex. as a separate lemma. 

Kühne/Otten, StBoT 16 (1971) 37. 
pahhurriya-x[…] (mng. unkn.).† 

nÚatÚši pa-ah-hur-ri-ia-a[š/n(-)…] KUB 8.38 ii 5 (medical text, NH), ed. StBoT 19:30f. (= col. iii). Burde, StBoT 19:31, reading pa-ah-hur-ri-ia-z[i], translates “und es brennt(?) ihm wie(?) Feu[er]” and cites in the index, p. 69, pahhurriya- “wie Feuer brennen”(?) (followed by Starke, StBoT 31:571, n. 2131). It is uncertain whether this word is a verb at all. Also, a denominative from an r/n stem would probably be derived from the stem of the oblique cases, cf. šaheššar: šahešnai-, šuppiwašhar, :šuppiwašhanai-. 

Burde, StBoT 19 (1974) 30, 69. 
Cf. pahhur. 

LÚpahhurši-, LÚpahhurzi-, LÚ/DAMpahhu~ warši-n.com.; (member of the royal family who is not in direct line of succession); from OH/NS. 
sg. acc. LÚpa-ah-hur-ši-in KUB 23.1 ii 29 (NH); gen. LÚpaah-hur-ši-ia-aš KBo 14.109:3, LÚpa-hur-ši-ia-aš KUB 23.1 ii 29 (NH). 
pl. nom. DAM.MEŠpa-ah-hu-wa-ar-še-eš KUB 29.1 iii 42 (OH/NS), LÚ.MEŠpa-ah-hu-wa-a[r-…] KUB 18.61:3, LÚ.MEŠpaah-hur-ši-iš KUB 23.1 ii 13 (NH), LÚ.MEŠpa-ah-hur-zi-e-eš KBo 3.27 obv. 17 (OH/NS), LÚ.MEŠpa!-ah-hur-zi-eš KBo 3.28 ii 27 (OH/NS). 
nuÚzan É-aš BE_LU_ MEŠ-TIM LUGAL-uš MU~ NUS.LUGAL-šÚa DAM.MEŠpa-ah-hu-wa-ar-še-eš ešantari “The ‘lords’ of the house — the king and the queen (and) the p.-wives — sit down” KUB 29.1 iii 41-43 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 17f., 30, Güterbock apud Kellerman, p. 66, proposes the meaning “épouses non régnantes,” cf. also Marazzi, VO 5:117-169, esp. 158f.; “Maintain the authority of My Majesty and later maintain the authority of the sons, grandsons (and) of the descendants of My Majesty” ŠEŠ.ÓI. A dUTU-ŠIÚma kuiēš [š]akuwašarru≠š± DUMU. MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠIŠARTIÚya kuiē[š] ŠA ABI dUTU-ŠI nammaÚya kuit tamai NUMUN LUGAL-UT[TI] LÚ.MEŠpa-ah-hur-ši-iš-ta kuiēš “But those who are 

GIŠ¿pahhurul(a)
legitimate brothers of My Majesty, the sons of the secondary wives of My Majesty’s father, and further, whichever other royal descendants (who are) 
p. to you — (do not desire the authority of any of those)” KUB 23.1 ii 10-13 (treaty w. Šaušgamuwa, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16:8-11, LÚ.MEŠpahhuršišÚta was interpreted as pahhuršišÚ(a)šta by Kammenhuber, KZ 83:289; an emendation of the final -ta into -ša! would result in pahhuršiššÚa “and the p.”; (Do not act like Mašturi who allied himself with Óattušili III against Urhi-Teššub, saying) LÚpa-ah-hur-ši-inÚpat pahhašhi LÚpa-hur-ši-ia-ašma-wa DUMU.[NI]TA kuit DÙ-mi “Am I to be loyal even to a p.? Why (kuit) should I act (on behalf) of a son of a p.?” KUB 23.1 ii 29 (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16.10f.; for the various interpretations of this line see StBoT 16:37f. w. lit.; AWAT LUGAL ≠LÚ.MEŠ±MEŠEDI-eš LÚ.MEŠpa-ah-hur-zi-e-eš / ≠U!± (text: ≠MA±) LÚ.MEŠMUŠA_ hurtalianzi “The guards, the p.s, and the LÚ.MEŠMUŠA_ nullify the king’s word” KBo 3.27 obv. 17-18. (edict of Óatt. I, NS). 
Friedrich, HW 154 (“nicht regierungsfähiger Königssohn(?)”); Kühne/Otten, StBoT 16 (1971) 37, 61 (“Bastard”); Bin-Nun, JCS 26 (1974) 115, 119f.; Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 65 (“homme d’origine royale n’ayant pas droit au trone”); Marazzi, VO 5 (1982) 159 (“figli naturali”). 
GIŠpahhurul(a)-n.; (an implement for tending or banking a fire); from MH/NS.† 
sg. nom. [GIŠpa-a]h-hu-ru-la-aš KUB 2.1 ii 35 (NH); abl. GIŠpa-ah-hu-ru-la-az KUB 15.3 i 19, KUB 15.32 i 20 (both MH/ NS), KBo 16.52 rev.? 11 (NH). 
nuÚkan EGIR-anda GIŠpa-ah-hu-ru-la-az pahhur warpanzi nu pa-ah-hur warnuanzi “Afterwards they enclose (i.e., bank?) the fire with a p.-implement, and they make the fire hot (lit. make the fire burn)” KUB 15.31 i 18-20 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 i 19-21, ed. Ehelolf, K1F 1:159, Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:150f. □ this warp-is not the verb meaning “to wash” but the one meaning “to enclose, surround”; uncertain restoration: [GIŠpa?-ah?-h]u?-ru-la-az KBo 16.52 rev.? 11 (letter, NH) in association w. ukturi- “pyre” and a “fire in the hešta-house” ibid. rev.? 5-7, see Haas/Wäfler, UF 9:98f. w. n. 65, cf. Ünal, Belleten XLI/163:467. 
Ehelolf, KlF 1:159 (“ein Feuergerät”). 
Cf. pahhur, pahhunalli-. 
17

LÚpahhurula-n.; (fire-)tender; NH.† 
[(pa)]hhunaš hašša[š (LÚp)a(-a)]h-hu-ru-la-aš [L]abarnaš dLAMMA-i “To the tutelary deity of the Labarna, (who is) the tender of the fire (and) hearth” KUB 2.1 ii 35-36 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, Tudh. IV), 
w. dupl. KUB 44.16 iii 14, par. KBo 2.38 rt. col. 1, ed. McMahon, AS 25:102f., translit. Archi, SMEA 16:109, cf. ibid. 97. The gender concord between Labarnaš and the preceding genitives indicates that it is he, not the tutelary deity, who is the “tender of the fire.” 
LÚpahhurzi-see LÚpahhurši-. 
pai-A, pa-v.; 1. to go, 2. to pass/go past (something), 3. to go by, pass (of time), 4. to flow, 5. (idiomatic uses); from OS. 
1.	“to go” 
	a.	an overview of subjects
1' gods and humans
2' animals
3' vehicles
4' concepts (abstracts)
5' other

	b.	methods/means of locomotion
1' on foot
2' by vehicle
3' by water
4' by air
5' by ladder

	c.	absolute use (without goal expressed) 1' in general 2' in the sense of “to leave” 3' w. another verb in the same sentence “to go (do 

something), to proceed to (do something)” (phraseological pai-and uwa-) 

	d.	w. dative or allative 1' “to go to” or “against” 2' “to go for” (i.e., to go to get something or someone) 
	e.	w. accusative of the way 1' w. road as obj. “to travel a road, take a journey” 

(without local particle) 2' katta pai-w. -kan “to descend (something)” 3' pariyan pai- “to go across/traverse (something)” 4' šarā pai- w. -kan “to go/climb up (something)” 5' āppan šarā pai- “to go up (something) from behind” 
	f.	w. inf. 
	g.	w. nouns denoting action 
	h.	w. local adverbs 
	i.	without preverb, but w. local sentence particles
1' w. -ašta “to leave, go out”
2' w. -apa
3' w. -šan

pai- A 

4' w. -kan
a' “to leave”
b' “to move away”
c' other

j.	pai- w. preverbs 1' anda pai
a'	“to go in(to)”
1'' without local particle
2'' w. -kan
3'' w. -ašta
4'' w. -šan
5'' w. -an

b'	“to go into (an unnamed location) to (a person or object inside), go inside to, go in to” 1'' a clear ex. w. -apa 2'' uncertain exx. 

a'' without local particle b'' w. -šan 

c' “to move closer together, to close ranks” 2' āppan(-)anda pai- “to go after, pursue” 3' peran anda pai- “to go in before, to go into the pres
ence of” 
4'	andan pai- “to go in(to)”
a' without local particle
b' w. -kan

5' āppa pai
a'	“to go back” 1'' active forms without local particle 2'' active forms w. -šan 3'' part. w. -kan 
b' (mng. unclear) 6' kattan āppa pai- “to go back into the presence of” 7' āppan pai- “to go behind, to follow, to support (polit
ically)
a' “to go behind, to follow”
b' “to support politically”

8' āppanda pai- “to go after (i.e., to pursue/to follow)” 
9'	arha pai- “to go out, go away, go off; to go back home” a' without sentence particle b' w. -kan c' w. -za and without local particle 
10' āppa arha pai-“to go back home”
11' awan arha pai-“to walk away from, leave” (w. -kan)
12' ištarna pai-“to go among”
13' katta pai- “to go down”

a' without sentence particle b' w. abl. and -ašta or -kan 14' appan katta paī- (w. -kan) “follow below(?), go down the back(?)” 15' kattan pai
a'	“to go down”
1'' w. -ašta
2'' w. -kan

18

b'	“to go into the presence of (a person), go to (a location)” (without local particle) 
c' “to go with (someone)” (without local particle) 16' āppa kattan pai- “to go back into the presence of” 17' kattanda pai- “to go down (into)” 

a' without local particle
b' w. -ašta
c' w. -kan
d' in other or broken context

18'	menahhanda pai- “to go against/toward, to go to meet” a' without local particle b' w. -ašta or -kan 

19'	parā pai
a'	“to go out” 1'' without local particle 2'' w. -ašta or -kan (opp. of anda pai-/uwa-) 3'' w. -šan 
b' “to go forward” (without locative particle) 20' peran parā pai- “to go in advance/ahead” 21' parranda pai- (always w. -kan) 

a' “to go across to or over to” (d.-l. indicating what is crossed over to) b' “to go across (something)” (d.-l. indicating what is crossed) 

22'	pariyan pai- “to go across to” (w. d.-l. and -kan) a' w. d.-l. expressed b' w. d.-l. unexpressed 
23'	āppa parza pai- “to go backwards” 
24'	peran pai- (without local particle)
a' “to go in front”
b' “to go ahead”

25'	šarā pai- “to go up to” (w. d.-l.)
a' without local particle
b' w. -ašta
c' w. -kan
d' w. -šan
e' other

26'	āppan šarā pai- “to go up from behind” 

27'	tapuša pai- “to go to the side” a' (in literal sense), w. loc. or all. noun b' “to cease to function” (without loc. or all. noun) 
k.	w. preverb/adverb in bird oracles (pai- “to fly away from the viewer” contrasts w. uwa- “to fly toward the viewer”) 1' arha pai-“to fly away” (without local particle) 2' peran arha pai-“to fly away from in front” (w. -kan) 3' tarwiyalli peran arha pai4' takšan arha pai-“to fly off down the middle” (with
out local particle) 5' GUN-li takšan arha pai6' zilawan aššuwaz pai-“to fly off zilawan on the good 
side (= oraculum?)” 7' zilawan kuštayaz/kuštayati pai-“to fly away zilawan on the kuštai-side” 

19 

pai- A 
8' pariyan pai-“to fly off across (something)” 9' tarwiyalla/i- pariyan pai-or pariyan tarwiyalla/i pai“to fly off across tarwiyalli-” 10' GUN-li pariyan pai-or pariyan GUN-li pai-“to fly 
off across GUN-li” 11' pariyawan pai-“to fly across” 12' pariyan tarwiyalli- pai13' pariyawan tarwiyallian pai-“to fly off across tarwi~ 
yallian” 14' zilawan tarwiyalli pai-“to fly off zilawan tarwiyalli” 15' zilawan pai-“to fly off zilawan” 16' GUN-li zilawan pai-“to fly off zilawan GUN-li” 
l.	in snake oracles
1' without preverb/adverb, but w. -kan
2' anda pai

a' without local particle 
b' w. -kan
3' andan pai
4' kattan pai

2.	“to pass/go past (something)” 
	a.	without preverb/adverb (w. acc. and -kan) 
	b.	āppan pai-“to pass behind” (w. acc. and without local particle) 
	c.	āppan arha pai-“to pass behind” (w. acc. and -kan) 
	d.	ištarna arha pai- “to go/pass through” (w. acc. and -kan) 1' subj.: people 2' subj.: roads 
	e.	kattan arha pai- “to pass under, below”
1' w. acc.
2' w. d.-l. and -kan

	f.	peran arha pai- “to pass in front of ”
1' w. acc. and -kan (opp. of āppan arha)
2' w. d.-l. and -kan
3' without acc. or d.-l.

	g.	šer arha pai- “to pass over” (w. acc. and -kan) 
	h.	ištarna pai- “to pass through” (w. acc., and -kan) 

3.	“to go by, pass” (time) 
	a.	without prev. 
	b.	āppanda pai
	c.	ištarna pai

1	to flow 
2	(idiomatic uses) 

a.	“(for a male) to go to (a female)” (= “to have sexual intercourse”) 1' female in d.-l. w. -šan 2' female Akkadographically construed w. ITTI, with
out -šan 
	b.	andan pai- “to transfer one’s allegiance to, resort to, join with, recognize the lordship of” 
	c.	peran āppa pai- “to have free access to(?)” 
	d.	šer arha pai- “to ignore/neglect something”
1' w. acc. and -ašta
2' w. acc. and -kan
3' w. acc. and without local particle

	e.	katta pai- “to be lost/destroyed” (cf. German: zugrundegehen) 
	f.	:allal(l)a pai- “to go to the pit(?)/inferno(?)” > “to commit treason” 
	g.	arruša pai- “to go astray(?)” 
	h.	uttar pai
	i.	ANA DUGÚTUL pai-“to go into the pot (i.e., be executed)” 

pres. sg. 1 pa-i-mi KBo 7.14 obv. 4 (OS), KBo 17.1 ii 40, iii 18, iv 11, 12 (OS), KBo 17.3 ii 11, iv 7, 8 (OS), KBo 21.90 rev. 53 (OH/MS), KUB 23.72 rev. 30, 31 (MH/MS), IBoT 1.36 i 36 (MH/MS), KBo 16.97 obv. 28, rev. 8 (MH?/MS?), KBo 
14.8 iii 18 (Murš. II), KUB 14.4 iii 26 (Murš. II), pa-a-i-mi KBo 
21.90 rev. 52 (OH/MS), KBo 3.55 obv. 5 (OH/NS), KUB 13.20 i 16 (MH/NS), KBo 5.3 ii 15 (Šupp. I), KBo 14.3 iii 10 (Murš. II), KUB 19.55 rev. 11 (Óatt. III), KUB 21.23:11 (NH), KUB 
5.24 ii 52 (NH), pa-a-mi KBo 19.120 ii 2, KBo 9.150:12, 13, KBo 23.116 iii? 4 (both NH). 
sg. 2 pa-i-ši KBo 22.1 obv. 28 (OS), KBo 17.22 ii (6) (OS), KUB 30.35 i 7 (MH/NS), KBo 5.3 iii 59 (Šupp. I), KUB 19.29 iv 21 (Murš. II), pa-a-i-ši KUB 31.64 iv 4 (OH/NS), FHG 1 ii 13 (OH/NS), KBo 5.3 iii 47 (Šupp. I), KBo 19.44 rev. 2, 33 (Šupp. I), KBo 14.15 rev. 5 (Murš. II), KBo 4.4 iii 25 (Murš. II), pa-a-i-<ši> KUB 33.121 ii 10 (NH), pa-a-ši HT 1 i 42 (MH/ NS), KUB 12.62 obv. 10, rev. 3 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 4.14 ii 39, 43 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), pa-it-ti KBo 5.3 iii 23 and dupl. KBo 
19.44 rev. 12 (both Šupp. I) (so Friedrich, SV 2:124f.), [(pa)]≠a±-i-e-ši KUB 43.25:3 (OS) rest. from dupl. pa-i-ši KUB 33.61 iv 3 (OH/NS). 
sg. 3 pa-iz-zi KBo 3.22 rev. 78 (OS), KBo 20.10 ii 2 (OS), KBo 17.74 iv 18, 19 (OH/MS), KBo 3.34 i 14 (OH/NS), KUB 
8.81 + KBo 19.39 ii 3, 12, iii 11 (MH/MS), HKM 46:9 (MH/ MS), KUB 19.30 i 17 (Murš. II), KUB 23.1 iv 15, 17 (Tudh. IV), KBo 4.14 ii 58, iii 4, 45 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), passim, pa-i-iz-zi KBo 25.127 ii 7 (OS), KBo 25.147 rev.? 7 (OS), KBo 
17.51 obv.? 10 (MS), pa-a-iz-zi KBo 21.41 rev. 3 (MH/MS), KBo 11.32:68 (OH/NS), KUB 33.79 iv (4) (OH/NS), KUB 9.32 rev. 22 (NH), KUB 27.56 iii 5 (NH), KBo 10.27 v 8 (NS), KUB 
25.1 i 23, KBo 15.9 i 32, KBo 27.155:10. 
pl. 1 pa-i-wa-ni KBo 22.2 obv. 15 (OS), KBo 17.1 i 39, iv 24 (OS), KUB 31.143 ii 31, 36 (OS), KUB 43.33 obv. 4 (OS), VBoT 24 i 33 (MH/NS), KUB 34.75:6, KBo 34.244 iii 2, pa-ai-wa-a-ni KUB 29.1 i 14 (OH/NS), KBo 5.3 iv (13?) (Šupp. I), pa-a-i-wa-ni KUB 29.1 i 10 (OH/NS), KBo 3.7 iv 6 (OH/NS), KUB 7.5 ii 4 (MH/NS), KUB 31.42 iii 19 (MH/NS), pa-i-uwa-ni KUB 12.66 iv 9 (OH/NS), pa-i-ú-wa-ni KUB 60.157 iii 16, pa-a-i-u-e-ni KUB 60.20 rev.? 10 (OH/NS), KUB 33.115 iii 10 (MH/NS), KUB 33.106 ii 19 (NH), KBo 6.29 ii 25 (Óatt. III), KBo 2.2 ii 46 (NH), KUB 36.15:7 (NH), pa-i-u-e-ni KUB 36.18a:4 (MH/NS?), KUB 5.6 iii 29 (NH), KUB 17.1 ii 18 (NH), pa-a-u-e-ni KUB 23.23 iii 5 (OH/NS), KUB 33.112 iii 8, KUB 36.56 ii (2). 
pl. 2 pa-it-te-ni KBo 22.1 obv. 24 (OS), KUB 23.77a rev. 11 (MH/MS), KUB 31.105:5 (MH/MS), KUB 26.19 ii 38 (MH/ 

pai- A 

NS), KUB 13.4 i 12, iv 32 (MH/NS), KUB 26.1 i (20), (26), 
(29) (Tudh. IV), pa-it-te-e-n[i] KUB 23.7 rev. 1 (MH/NS), pa-it-ta-ni KBo 3.23 rev. 16 (OH/NS), pa-it-ta-a-ni KBo 8.37 rev. 6 (MH/NS), [pa-it-ta-ni KUB 31.101:25 Ünal, RHA XXXI 50; read ku-it-ta-ni w. Archi, SMEA 16:137 and Hart, Kadmos 20:129-131]. 
pl. 3 pa-a-an-zi KBo 6.2 iv 12 (OS), KBo 20.8 obv.? 20 (OS), KBo 6.3 iv 6 (OH/NS), IBoT 1.36 i 4, 67, passim (MH/ MS), KUB 22.70 obv. 57, 58 (NH), KBo 24.57 i 16, KBo 4.14 ii 74, 80 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), passim, pa-an-zi KBo 5.6 i 24 (Murš. II), KUB 22.70 obv. 56 (NH), KBo 24.57 i 4, KUB 46.21 rev. 2. 
pret. sg. 1 pa-a-un KBo 17.3 iv 9 (OS), KUB 26.71 i 11 (OH/NS), KBo 10.2 i 30, 42, 46 (OH/NS), ABoT 65 rev. 18 (MH/MS), KUB 23.11 ii 27 (MH/NS), KUB 19.20 obv. 8 (Šupp. I), KUB 19.37 iii 35, 41, 49, etc. (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 iv 31 (Óatt. III), passim, pa-a-u-un KUB 23.11 iii 15 (MH/NS), KUB 19.37 iii 31 (Murš. II), KBo 4.7 i 13 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 ii 23 (Óatt. III), KBo 6.29 ii 21, 29 (Óatt. III), KUB 14.3 i 58 (2Z), ii 20 (Óatt. III), KUB 36.87 iii 5, 10, 15, 19 (NH), KUB 
36.74 iii 9 (NH), pa-a-ú-un KBo 16.42 obv. 24, KBo 16.59 rev. 5, KUB 34.45 + KBo 16.63 obv. 13 (NH), pa-a-nu-un Oettinger, Stammbildung 388. 
sg. 2 pa-it-ta KUB 58.30 ii 12 (OH/NS), KBo 23.1 i 21 (2Z) (NH), KUB 33.70 iii 13 (OH/NS). 
sg. 3 ba-i-it KBo 18.151 rev. 19 (atypical OS), pa-i-it ibid. rev. 12 (OS), SBo 1.6 obv. 18 (OS), KBo 3.60 i 13 (OH/NS), pa-it KBo 8.42 obv.? 11, rev.? 9 (OS), KBo 7.14 rev. 6 (OS), KBo 3.56 obv. 6 (OH/NS), KBo 10.2 i 4 (OH/NS), KUB 23.72 rev. 17 (MH/MS), KUB 14.1 obv. 63, 69, 70, rev. 59, 62 (MH/ MS), KUB 19.37 ii 10 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 ii 49, 54 (Óatt. III), ABoT 15 rev. 8, 9, passim, pa-a-it KUB 14.1 rev. 73 (MH/MS), KUB 41.8 ii 9 (MH/NS), KUB 26.85 ii 12, ABoT 15 rev. 1, KUB 36.89 obv. 12 (NH), pa-i-t(a-aš) KUB 28.4 obv. 11b, 22b (NS), pa-a-i-t(a-aš) KUB 24.8 i 29 (pre-NH/NS), pa-it-t[(aaš)] KUB 28.5 obv. 15b, pa-a-i-ta KBo 3.7 iii 13 (OH/NS). 
pl. 1 pa-i-ú-u-en KBo 3.60 iii 11 (OH/NS), pa-a-i-ú-en Oettinger, Stammbildung 389 (OH/NS), pa-a-u-en KUB 23.21 obv. 27, rev. 4 (MH/NS), KUB 8.80:7, 12 (Šupp. I), KUB 5.25 iv 16, KUB 18.29 iv 21, AT 454 ii 11 (all NH), pa-i-u-en KBo 
14.12 iv 24 (Murš. II), pa-a-u-e-en KUB 31.68:15 (NH). 
pl. 3 pa-a-ir KBo 22.2 obv. 15 (OS), KBo 3.34 i 2 (OH/ NS), KBo 3.46 rev. 12 (OH/NS), KUB 23.72 obv. 31 (MH/MS), KUB 14.1 rev. 54 (MH/MS), KBo 14.7 i 10 (Murš. II), KUB 
21.38 rev. 8 (Óatt. III), KUB 19.23 rev. 11, 13, 16 (NH), KUB 
18.57 iii 18 (NH), pa-i-ir? Bab. 4:225 No. 3 obv. 2, pa-i-i[r] KBo 3.60 ii 9 (OH/NS), pa-ir KUB 18.65:2, 11 (NH), pa-a-eer KUB 36.37 iii? 15 (NH), KBo 18.9:6, pa-a-e-er!(text ni) HKM 113:13 (MH/MS), pa-e-er KUB 18.5 i 8 (NH), KUB 
49.11 ii (13)?. 
imp. sg. 3 pa-it-tu KBo 25.123:7 (OS), KBo 3.28 (= BoTU 10γ) ii 11 (OH/NS), pa-id-du KBo 3.46 obv. 2 (OH/NS), KBo 
12.3 iii 9 (OH/NS), KBo 8.35 i 14 (MH/MS), IBoT 1.36 i 42, 45 (MH/MS), KUB 41.8 ii 12, 20 (MH/NS), KBo 14.1 ii (2) (Murš. II), KUB 9.4 iii 20 (NH), passim. 

20

pl. 2 pa-it-tén KBo 10.45 ii 4 (MH/NS), KUB 13.4 ii 75 (MH/NS), KUB 24.5 obv. 24 (NH), KBo 13.203:8. 
pl. 3 pa-a-an-tu KUB 26.77 i 13 (OH/NS), KUB 60.88:6 (NS), pa-a-an-du KBo 20.73 iv 9 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 3.1 ii 13 (OH/NS), KUB 13.1 i 24 (MH/MS), KBo 11.14 iii 29 (MH/ NS), KUB 9.4 iii 13 (NH), ≠pa-an±-du KUB 33.120 ii 61 (NS), pa-a<-an>-du KUB 33.34 obv. 2 (OH/NS). 
iter. act. pres. sg. 3 [pa-i]š-ki-iz-zi KBo 4.8 iii 2 (Murš. II); pl. 3 pa-iš-kán-zi VBoT 74:5. 

pret. pl. 1 pa-iš-ki-u-en KUB 18.24:4 (NH). 
imp. pl. 2 pa-iš-ki-it-tén KUB 33.60 rev. 13 (OH/NS). 

iter. mid. pres. sg. 3 pa-iš-ki-it-ta IBoT 1.36 i 63 (MH/MS), KUB 24.13 ii 11 (MH/NS), KBo 13.52 obv. left col. 4, pa-iškat-ta KUB 30.39 rev. 9, pa-iš-ki-it-ta-ri KUB 34.13 obv.? 5, [pa-iš]-ga-at-ta-ri KUB 24.5 obv. 24 (NH) (rest. by StBoT 3:10); pl. 2 pa-iš-kat-tu-≠ma± KBo 8.42 obv.? 9, (10) (OS); pl. 3 pa-iš-kán-ta KUB 23.77:72 (MH/MS), IBoT 1.36 i 63 (MH/ MS), pa-iš-kán-da ibid. i 60, pa-iš-kán-ta-r[i] 531/s:4 (StBoT 5:132), here? pa-a-iš-ká[n-…] KUB 57.69 ii 6. 
pret. sg. 1 pa-iš-ga-ha-at KBo 17.1 iv 13 (OS); sg. 3 pa-iški-it-ta KUB 24.7 iii 25 (NH). 
imp. sg. 1 pa-iš-ka-ah-hu-[ut] KUB 33.60 rev. 10 (OH/NS), [pa]-iš-≠ga-ah-hu-ut± KUB 33.61 iv 10 (OH/NS) (uncertain traces, cf. Myth. 94); sg. 3 pa-iš-ga-ta-ru VBoT 58 i 11 (OH/ NS), pa-iš-kat-ta-ru KUB 4.1 i 40 (MH/NS), 1190/u rev. 5 (StBoT 5:132), [pa-iš-k]at-ta-ru KBo 25.107:3 (OS) (rest. from par. VBoT 58 i 11); pl. 3 pa-iš-kán-ta-ru KBo 20.31 obv. 9. 
inf. pa-ú-wa-a-an-zi KBo 20.8 obv.? 9 (OS), pa-ú-wa-an-zi ibid. obv.? 10, pa-a-u-wa-an-zi KBo 6.6 i 30 (OH/NS), KBo 
16.8 ii 24 (Murš. II), KUB 23.92 rev. 3 (NH), KUB 6.40 rev. 6 (NH), KBo 4.14 ii 46 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), pa-a-u-an-zi KUB 
23.1 iv 23 (Tudh. IV), KBo 24.45 obv. 20, KBo 24.128 rev. 4. 
verbal subst. nom. pa-a-u-ar KUB 49.29 left col. 4 (NH), KBo 1.35 iv 4, KBo 4.14 ii 70 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), pa-a-u-wa-ar KUB 22.59 obv. 4 (NH), KBo 13.1 rev. left col. 16, KBo 
4.14 ii 60, 63 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), pa-a-wa-ar KBo 26.26 ii 2; gen. pa-a-u-wa-aš KUB 27.1 i 32 (NH), KUB 13.5 ii 12 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 29.9 iv 5, 10 (NH), KUB 48.21:6, pa-a-≠u-a±[š?] ibid. 48.21:2. 

iter. supine pa-iš-ga-u-wa-an KBo 5.8 ii 5 (Murš. II). 

part. sg. nom. com. pa-a-an-za KUB 23.72 rev. 12, 14 (MH/MS), KBo 5.3 iii 67 (Šupp. I), KUB 13.20 i 1 (MH/NS), KBo 5.8 i 38 (Murš. II), KBo 18.24 iv 17 (NH), KUB 38.35 i 2 (Tudh. IV), pa-an-za KBo 13.231 obv.? 3, 11; nom.-acc. neut. pa-a-an KUB 31.115:5 (OH/NS), KBo 4.4 iv (7) (Murš. II), KBo 18.57 rev. 39 (MH/MS), KBo 14.21 ii 65 (NH); d.-l. pa-a-an-ti KBo 12.58 obv. 11; pl. nom. com. pa-a-an-te-eš KUB 
17.28 iii 27, 29 (MH/NS), IBoT 2.131 obv. 15, pa-an-te-eš KBo 
5.6 i 17 (Murš. II), KUB 27.1 i 1, 9 (NH), IBoT 2.131 obv. 33; acc. com. pa-a-an-du-uš KBo 10.16 i 7; nom.-acc. neut. pa-aan-ta KBo 11.1 rev. 5 (Muw. II). 
(Sum.)[(BAR)] = (Sum. pron.) pa-ar = (Akk.) Ù´-TÙ = (Hitt.) pa-ra-a-kán pa-a-u-ar (dupl. pa-a-wa-ar) “departure” KBo 1.35 iv 4, w. dupl. KBo 26.26 ii 2; (Sum.) PÀ.È.A = (Sum. 

pai- A 1 a 2' 
pronunciation) pa-e = (Akk.) UÙ-ÙÚ-TÙ = (Hitt.) pa-ra-a-kán pa-a-u-wa-ar “departure” KBo 13.1 rev. left col. 16 (both erim.huš). 
(Akk.) ana URUZalbar allikma KBo 10.1 obv. 4 = (Hitt.) nu URUZalpa pa-a-u[n] “I went to Zalpa” KBo 10.3 i 7, cf. [EGIRand]aÚma INA URUZalpa pa-a-un KBo 10.2 i 9; and passim in this bilingual (OH/NS). 
1. “to go” — a. an overview of subjects — 1' gods and humans: pa-i-ta-aš dÓapantaliyaš “(the god) Óapantaliya went” KUB 28.4:22b (the moon that fell myth, NS); dUTU-uš aruni antagaÚšša pa-it “The Sungod went to the Sea(god) to his chamber” KUB 36.44 i! 12 (missing Sungod myth, OH/MS?), translit. Myth 22; nu URUÓattuša iyannahh[e] LUGAL-šÚa URUArinna paiz-zi “I set out for Óattuša, but the king goes to Arinna” KBo 17.4 ii 8-9 (rit., OS); nÚaš kuedani KUR-ya pa-iz-zi “To whatever land he (i.e., the one who escapes) goes” KBo 16.47:11 (treaty, MH/MS); nu dUTU-ŠI ukila pa-i-mi “I, My Majesty, will go myself” KBo 16.97 rev. 7-8 (oracle question, MH?/MS?); KÙ. BABBAR-anza anda parnaÚšša pa-it “Silver went into his house” KUB 17.4 obv. 8 (myth of silver, NS); (When my grandfather heard about the disaster) “since my grandfather was still [si]ck, my grandfather (spoke) thus” [kuišÚwa p]a-iz-zi UMMA ABUÚYAÚMA ammukÚwa pa-a-i-mi “‘Who will go?’ My father replied: ‘I will go’” KBo 14.3 iii 10 (DŠ Frag. 14), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:67; (If someone whom I or my father carried off flees to you, and you say to him) [eh]uÚwa i-it kuwapiÚwa pa-i-ši “‘Come! Go wherever you go!’” KBo 5.9 ii 43-44 (Dupp.), ed. SV 1:18f. 
2' animals: takku GUD.ÓI.A A.ŠÀ-ni pa-a-anzi “If cattle go onto a field (and the owner of the field finds them)” KBo 6.2 iv 12 (Laws §79, OS), ed. HG 42f.; cf. takku ŠAÓ šēliya našma A.ŠÀ-ni GIŠKIRIﬂni pa-i[z-zi] “If a pig goes into a grain pile, field, or garden” KBo 6.3 iv 19 (Laws §86, OH/NS), ed. HG 44f.; ŠA dMezzulla UDU.ÓI.A pa-iz-zi “The sheep of Mezzulla go” KUB 10.28 ii 1-2 (winter fest., OH/NS), cf. ibid. ii 4, and KUB 9.38:4; nÚaš 1 DANNA 20 IKU.ÓI.A parhanduš pa-a-an-zi “They (the horses) go at a gallop for 1 DANNA and 20 IKU” KUB 1.11 iv 21-22 (MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 120f.; for birds and bees see 1 b 4', below; for snakes see 1 l, below. 
21

3' vehicles: māhhan GIŠhuluganniš parnaÚšša pa-iz-zi “When the cart goes to its/his house” IBoT 
1.36 iii 61 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:30f. 
4' concepts (abstracts) — a' evils: nuÚwa kē kal~ lar uttar apiya pa-id-du “Let this evil matter go there” KBo 4.2 ii 22-23 (rit., pre-NH/NS); nu k® <i>nan ēšhar NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM kuwapi pa-iz-zi zik šūra~ šūwašMUŠEN apadda i-it-te-en “Wherever this disease, blood, (or) oath goes, let you (sg.) šū¢wa
rašubird go (pl.) there” KUB 30.34 iv 5-6 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 112f.; cf. personified evil KUB 15.39 + KUB 12.59 ii 19-20 (MH/NS), cited below, 5'. 
b' news (personified): dUTU-i halugaš pa-it “News went to the Sungod” KUB 33.67 iv 15 (OH/NS), translit. Myth. 78; nu ANA dNIN.TU halugaš pa-it “News went to NIN.TU” KUB 7.1 iii 9 (NH), translit. Myth. 111 iii 43; apāšÚwa paizzi dU-ni halugaš “‘That news goes to the Stormgod’” KUB 7.57 i 2 (rit.), cf. iyannišÚaš dU-ni halugaš ibid. i 3. 
5' (other): kāšÚwa IM-aš mahhan wappui EGIR-pa UL pa-iz-zi … § iššanašÚmaÚwaÚkan kāš DIN~ GIR.MEŠ-aš NINDA harši UL pa-iz-zi kēdašÚaÚ waÚkan (2Mašt. Úšan) ANA 2 EN.S´SKUR idā
luš EME-aš N´.TE-ši QA_TAMMA lē pa-iz-zi “As this clay does not go back to the claypit … §And this dough does not go into the thick-bread of the gods, in the same way let evil tongues (slander) not go to the body of these two patients” KUB 15.39 + KUB 
12.59 ii 15-20 (1Mašt., MH/NS), cf. 2Mašt. iii 2-7, ed. Rost, MIO 1:356-359; mān ≠ŠE⁄¤±-anti INA ITU.12.KAM d.KUŠkurš[aš] ŠA dU URUZipalanda ANA KASKAL IM.U⁄·.LU pa-iz-zi “When in the winter, in the 12th month, the divine-hunting-bag of the Stormgod of Zipalanda goes on a journey south” KUB 10.78 vi 810 + KUB 20.25 vi 2-5 (colophon to fest., OH?/NS); ta NINDAharšiš pa-iz-zi “The thick-bread goes” KBo 
23.99 i 25 (fest.); nu GIŠkalmišanaš pa-it “A lightning bolt went (and struck the land of Arzawa)” KBo 3.4 ii 18 (Murš. II), and cf. KUB 14.15 ii 4, both ed. AM 46f. 
b. methods/means of locomotion — 1' on foot: LUGAL-ušÚkan INA É dUTU andan pa-iz-zi § LU~ GAL-uš šuppayaš GIŠN[Á-a]š pa-iz-zi § … § LU~ GAL-ušÚkan IŠTU É dUTU uiz≠zi± “The king goes into the temple of the Sungoddess. § The king goes to the consecrated bed. § … § The king comes from 

pai- A 1 c 1' 

the temple of the Sungoddess” KUB 11.17 v 4-9, 15-17 (fest., OH/NS); “When it is morning they open the palace and draw back the curtain. §” LUGAL-uš tunnakišna pa-iz-zi “The king goes into the inner room” KBo 10.23 i 6-7 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:9, cf. StBoT 27:58; māhhanÚma LUGAL-uš arahza pa-iz-zi … nu LÚMEŠEDI LÚ GIŠŠUKUR. KÙ.GI LÚ‰.DU°Úya Ékāškāštipa pa-a-an-zi “When the king goes outside … The guard, the gold-spearman, and the gatekeeper go to the gatehouse(?)” IBoT 1.36 i 64, 66-67 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:12f. 
2' by vehicle: “When they open the palace” LUGAL-uš uizzi naššu GIŠGIGIR-it našma GIŠhulu~ gannit INA É-TIM GAL pa-iz-zi “the king goes to the ‘great house’ either by chariot or by cart” KBo 
19.128 i 2-5 (fest., OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 13:2f.; cf. KBo 11.43 i 26-27 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH?/NS); KBo 10.20 i 22-23 (OH/ NS) and dupl. KBo 24.112 + KUB 30.39 obv. 16 (OH/NS). 
3' by water: passim in snake oracles (1 l, below); cf. crossing the sea 1 j 21', below (parranda pai-). For “water” itself “going” i.e., “flowing” see mng. 4, below. 
4' by air: ≠h±ā
rašMUŠEN pa-it “The eagle went” (and did not find him) KUB 17.10 i 27 (Tel.myth, OH/ MS), translit. Myth. 31, tr. Hittite Myths 15; pa-it NIM. LÀL-aš “The bee went” KUB 33.59 iii 5 (myth of Inara, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 89, tr. Hittite Myths 30; cf. KUB 41.8 ii 8-9 below, 1 j 18' b'; passim in bird oracles (1 k, below); for a lightning bolt going see 1 a 5', above. 
5' by ladder: nÚašÚkan ≠šašti± šer IŠTU GIŠKUNﬁ pa-i[t] “He climbed (lit. went) onto the bed by a ladder” KUB 36.67 ii 28 (Gurparanzah story), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:86f. 
c. absolute use (without goal expressed) — 1' in general: mān ‰R.MEŠÚma pa-a-ir “But when (the enemy’s) servants went (he stuck/pierced? one servant with a spit(?))” KBo 3.16 obv. 11 (Naram-Sin legend, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:52f.:12; nu pa-a-un (var. pa-a-u-un) nuÚkan LÚ.KÚR INA URUÓahha damaššun “I went and I harassed/pressed the enemy in Óahha” KBo 3.6 ii 8 (hist., Óatt. III), w. dupl. KUB 
1.1 ii 23, ed. Óatt. 16f., StBoT 24:10f. ii 23; cf. KBo 2.5 iv 6-7 (AM); nÚat ēšta SIGﬁ-in pa-id-du-wa-at SIGﬁ-in “(As) it was good (i.e., effective), (so) let it go on well (now)” KUB 44.4 “rev.” 17 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:176f.; cf. KBo 14.3 iii 10 (DŠ), 1 a 1', above; and other exx. 

22

in 1 b 4', above; pa-iz-ziÚmaÚaš nāui … pa-i-mi nāwi ū¢
hhi nawi UMMA LUGALÚMA i-it “But he had not yet gone … (he said) … “‘I have not yet gone, I have not yet seen.’ The king said: ‘Go!’” KBo 3.34 i 14-15, 23 (anecdotes, OH/NS). 
2' in the sense of “to leave”: nÚaš mā
n k[a]rupa-≠a±-an-za … § mānÚaš nāwiÚma pa-iz-zi “If he has already left, … but if he has not yet left” HKM 66:23-24, 26 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 246f.; kāšaÚwa LÚ.MEŠšapašallēš […] p®yenun nuÚwa pa-a-ir “I have just sent off scouts […], and they have left” HKM 7:4-5 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 128f.; cf. exx. in 1 i 1' and 1 i 4' a', below. 
3' w. another verb in the same sentence “to go (do something), to proceed to (do something)” (phraseological pai-and uwa-): (The greater and lesser gods looked and did not find him) [nuÚ w]arÚan pa-iz-zi kāš NIM.LÀL-aš wemiy[azzi] “will this bee go find him?” KUB 33.5 ii 12 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 40, tr. Hittite Myths 18; nuÚza pa-a-an-zi AŠARŠUNU appanzi “They go and take their places” KBo 4.9 v 45 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., OH/NS); “The cupbearer gives a cup of beer to the huwaššannalliwoman” nÚan pa-iz-zi ANA DINGIR-LIM parā
epzi “She goes and holds it out to the deity” KUB 32.126 iii 7 (witaššiyaš fest.); (A famine has come to the land; so lead that troop of Marešta) nuÚza pa-id-du Š[A] É.GAL-LIM hal≠ki±n tukanzi daddu nÚanÚzaÚkan URU-ri šarā pehuteddu “let it go and take the tu~ kanzi barley/grain of the palace, and conduct it up to the city” HKM 24:49-50 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 162f.; pa-i-miÚkan dUTU-ŠI antuhšan INA URUŠamūha parā nehhi “I, My Majesty, will go and send a man to Šamuha” KUB 32.130:4-5 (prayer, Murš. II); pa-a-i-ue-niÚwarÚanÚkan kuennummē
ni “Let us proceed to kill him” KBo 6.29 ii 25 (hist., Óatt. III), ed. Óatt. 50f.; nuÚ za pa-a-i-mi dUTU-un ≠šip±antahhi “I will go and sacrifice to the Sungoddess” KBo 12.96 iv 24-25 (rit., MH/NS); nuÚdduÚza pa-iz-zi DINGIR-LAM DÙ-zi “He will go and make you a goddess (and assign a place to you and give you a temple)” KUB 7.5 i 19 (rit. of Paškuwatti, MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:273, 277 (line 46); cf. KBo 11.72 iii 12 (rit., MH?/NS); KUB 9.34 iii 33 (rit., NH); KBo 5.6 i 9 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10.90; nu LÚ GIŠGIDRU pa-iz-zi NINDApurpuruš LUGAL-i kattan šuhhāi “The staff-bearer goes and pours purpura

pai- A 1 d 1' a' 2'' 
breads at the king(’s feet)” KBo 10.24 iv 26-28 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:20. Note that the enclitic pronouns and particles preceding or attached to pai- go w. the second verb of the sentence; see HE §312. 
d. w. dat. or all. — 1' “to go to” or “against” — a' localities — 1'' in OS: “I led away the ruler (lit. man) of Purušhanda with me” [(m)]ān tun~ nakišnaÚma pa-iz-zi “But when he goes into the inner room (he sits on the right before me)” KBo 3.22 rev. 78 (Anitta, OS), w. dupl. KUB 26.71 i 18 (OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:14f.; nÚaš arzanaš parna pa-iz-z[i] “He goes to the inn” KUB 60.41 obv. 12 (fest., OS), translit. StBoT 25:109; see similarly IBoT 1.29 obv. 50 (MH?/MS?); [m]ān LUGAL-uš MUNUS.LUGAL-aššÚa taranzi ta DUMU.MEŠ-an parna pa-i-mi [takk]u nattaÚ ma taranzi nu natta pa-i-mi karūÚma [ŠÀ(?)] É DUMU.MEŠ-an pa-iš-ga-ha-at kinunÚa natta ku~ wāpikki pa-a-un “When the king and queen say (so), I will go to the children’s quarters. But if they do not say (so), I will not go. Formerly I used to go to the children’s quarters, now I have not gone anywhere” KBo 17.1 iv 11-13 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:36f.; uwatten URUNēn¢URUNeša pa-a-ir …
ša pa-i-wa-ni mā“‘Come, we will go to Neša!’ When they went to Neša, …” KBo 22.2 obv. 15 (Zalpa story, OS), ed. StBoT 17:6f.; [ta]kku ‰R-aš huwā
i nÚaš ANA KUR Luwiya pa-iz-zi … nÚaš ANA KUR kūruri a[nda] (var. ku~ ruri KUR-e) pa-iz-zi “If a slave flees and he goes to Luwiya … and he goes into (var. to) an enemy land” KBo 6.2 i 51-53 (Laws §23, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 5961 (OH/NS); takku GUD.ÓI.A A.ŠÀ-ni pā
nzi “If cattle go into a field” KBo 6.2 iv 12 (Law §79, OS); kā~ šattaÚwa utniya pa-it-te-ni “You are about to go to (your assigned) land” KBo 22.1:24 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f. 
2'' in MS: nu INA TÙR pa-a-un “I went to the pen” KBo 17.61 rev. 8 (birth rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:44f.; ta tazelliš INA Éheštā pa-iz-zi “The tazelli-priest goes to the heštā
-house” IBoT 1.29 rev. 35 (MH?/MS?); [t(?)]aÚššan hilamna pa-iz-zi GIŠhuluganniÚma EGIR-pa wahnuz[i] “He goes to the portico, but he turns back to the cart” § MUNUS.LUGAL-aš Éha~ lentūi pa-iz-zi “The queen goes to the palace. (When she comes away from the palace, the palace servant runs in front)” § [MUNUS.L]UGALaš dInaraš parna pa-iz-zi “[The qu]een goes to the 
23

Temple of Inara” KBo 20.88 iv 2-7 (fest.); mānÚaš tam[ed]az KUR-az INA KUR URUKizzuwatni apaši~ la pa-iz-z[i] “If he himself goes from another land to Kizzuwatna (Šunaššura will seize him and send him back to His Majesty)” KUB 8.81 + KBo 19.39 ii 2-3 (treaty w. Šunaššura, MH/MS), ed. del Monte OA 20:216f.; nÚaš ≠É.±DU⁄‚.≠ÚS.SA± pa-iz-zi “He goes to the bath-house” KBo 23.23:56 (rit., MH/MS). 
3'' in OH/NS or MH/NS: mā
wa gim[(ra)] pa-imi (var. pa-a-≠i±-[mi]) “When I go to the countryside” KUB 17.6 i 18-19 (Illuy., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 17.5 i 23 (OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:14, 18; µZuliyašÚwa hapā pa-id-du “Let Zuliya go the river(-ordeal)” KUB 13.3 iii 29 (instr. for kitchen personnel, MH?/NS), tr. TUAT 1/1:125; nÚaš wetena pa-iz-zi nu TÚL-i kišan t[ezzi] “He goes to the water and says to the well as follows” KUB 30.34 iii 10 (purification rit., MH/NS); nÚ aš witeni pa-iz-zi nu kiššan memai KBo 10.45 ii 22 (rit. to underworld, MH/NS); nÚaš É-ri pa-iz-zi “He goes to the house” ibid. iii 59; tÚat INA É LÚ.MEŠMUÓALDIM pa-a-an-zi “They go to the house of the cooks” KUB 
11.35 i 17-18 (winter fest., OH/NS); mānÚwa ANA É DAMÚKA pa-a-i-ši “When you go to the house of your wife” KBo 3.7 iii 10 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:15, 19; ehu ÓUR.SAG-ri pa-a-i-wa-a-ni “Come, we will go to the mountain” KUB 29.1 i 14 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 25, Marazzi, VO 5:148f., tr. ANET 357; namma LUGAL-uš Éhalen~ tūaz dAnzili[yaš] NA›hūwašiya pa-iz-zi “Then the king goes from the palace to the stela of Anzili” KUB 7.25 i 12-13 (fest., OH/NS); ≠ūkÚwa±Úššan nepiši pa-i-mi […] “I will go to heaven” VBoT 58 i 43 (disappearance of Sungod, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 24, tr. Hittite Myths 27; [Ó]UR.SAG-ašÚkan pa-it wē
lluašÚkan pa-it “He went to the mountains. He went to the meadows” KUB 36.83 i 10 (rit.). 
4'' in NH: [… IGI-zi] pal-ši kuedani L´L-ri paiz-zi “To whatever battlefield he goes for the [first] time” KUB 23.92 rev. 16 (letter to Assyria, Tudh. IV), ed. Otten, AfO 19:42f.; nu INA GIŠKIRIﬂ pa-a-i-mi “I will go to the garden” KUB 12.26 ii 19 (rit., NH); MU-anniÚ ma INA KUR Azzi pa-a-un “In the next year I went to Azzi” KBo 3.4 iv 35 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 130f. 
b' gods and persons — 1'' in general: [(mānÚwa A)]NA dIM (dupl. omits) URUNerik pa-a-i-wa-ni 

pai- A 1 e 1' 

(var. pa-i-u-wa-ni) “When we go to the Stormgod of Nerik” KBo 3.7 iv 5-6 (Illuy., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
12.66 iv 9 (OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:16, 20; dTe~ lipinuš aruna pa-it “Telipinu went to the Seagod” KUB 12.60 i 11 (Telipinu and the daughter of the sea, OH/NS); nu DINGIR-LIM-ni pa-it-te-ni “You shall go to the god (for an ordeal)” KUB 13.4 iv 32 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS); […P]A_NI DINGIR-LIM pa-iz-zi “[He] goes before the deity” KBo 27.165 obv. 8. 
2'' (militarily/in battle), “to go (against)”: “If blood spurts from them, they are human” taÚšmaš pa-a-i-mi “I will go against them. (If blood does not spurt from them, they are gods)” taÚšmaš UL pa-ai-mi “I will not go against them” KUB 31.1 ii 10-11 (Naram-Sin, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:52f.; nu INA URUKalā
šma ANA µAparrupa-a-un “I went to Ka~ lašma against Aparru” KBo 2.5 iii 25-26 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 190f. iii 50-51; nu ANA µPitaggatalli ≠pa-a-un± “I went against P.” KBo 5.8 iii 20, ed. AM 156f.; [m]anÚ ši pa-a-un-pát “I would have gone against him” KUB 14.15 iv 27, ed. AM 70f.; ŠEŠÚYA kuwapi INA KUR URUMi≈ri pa-it “When my brother went against (lit. to) Egypt” KBo 3.6 ii 49, ed. Óatt. 20f., StBoT 24:16f ii 69. 
c' other: µImpā
kruš šašti pa-it “Impakru went to bed” KUB 36.67 ii 24 (Gurparanzah story); cf. KUB 11.17 v 7-9 above, 1 b 1'; LÚNAR-šiyaš UDUN-niya pa-iz-zi “The singer goes to the oven” KBo 17.43 i 17 (fest., OS), translit. StBoT 25:105. 
2' “to go for” (i.e., to go to get something or someone): nu kuitman ANA LÚSANGA pa-a-an-zi kuitman LÚSANGA URUAštataza uwadanzi kuitman uwanzi “While they are going for the priest, while they are bringing the priest from Aštata, while they are coming” KUB 5.6 i 39-40 (oracle question, NH); 
MUNUS.MEŠhazgarai GURUN-i pa-an!-zi (text: pa-iz
zi) “The hazgara-women go for the fruit (and bring it)” KBo 26.182 i 11 (NH); cf. LÚ.MEŠ UR.MAÓ MUNUS.MEŠhazqa[r]a ANA GURUN pa-a-an-zi KBo 2.8 iii 23 (NH); cf. [… ašš]anumaš DUMU.MUNUS. MEŠ GURUN pa-an-z[i] KUB 51.47 i 13 (cult inv.). 
e. w. accusative of the way — 1' w. road as obj. “to travel a road, take a journey” (without local particle): (Let the anger of Telipinu go. Let the house and its parts release it. Let it not go into cropland, gardens (and) forest) taknašÚat dUTU-aš 

24

KASKAL-an pa-id-du “Let it travel the road of the Sungoddess of the Earth” KUB 17.10 iv 13 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 37, tr. Hittite Myths 17; and similarly dankuwayašÚat taknaš KASKAL-an pa-idd[u] “Let it travel the road of the dark earth” KUB 
33.8 iii 6 (Tel.myth, OH/NS); EGIR-paÚyaÚaš ZAG-az apūnÚpat KASKAL-an pa-iz-zi “And also on his return he follows the same route on the right” IBoT 
1.36 iii 28 (instr. for MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:26f.; (PN the auspex saw these birds) nÚuš uni KASKALanÚma kuin pa-iz-zi nu DINGIR-LUM apiya [KAS~ KAL-ši(?)] idā
lu uškiši “Do you, O god, see them as an evil on the aforementioned road which he will travel?” KUB 50.1 ii 15-16 (oracle question, MH?/ MS?); NIM.LÀL teriyaš UD-aš m®uwa<š> UD-aš KASKAL-an pa-a-an-du “Let the bee(s) take a journey of three or four days” KUB 43.60 i 10-11 (myth, OH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths 33; note that KASKAL when it means “campaign” takes d.-l. w. pai-. 
2' katta pai-w. -kan “to descend (something)”: “He passes behind the Temple of Mizzulla (ā
ppan arha pai-)” nÚašÚkan ŠA É dMizzulla Éluštanin kat~ ta pa-iz-zi “He descends the postern of the Temple of Mizzulla (and goes into the palace)” KBo 30.164 iii 12-13, ed. Alp, Tempel, 16, CHD (É)luštani-. 
3' pariyan pai- “to go across/traverse (something)”: kuit dGIŠ.GIM.MAŠ nuÚwaÚkan arunan p[ariyan] pa-a-i-ši “Why Gilgameš, will you go a[cross] the sea” KUB 8.50 iii 8-9 (Gilg., NH), ed. Fried-rich, ZA 39:24f.; cf. exx. w. d.-l. in 1 j 22', below. 
4' šarā pai- w. -kan “to go/climb up (something)”: nu INA URUZippašna pā
un nuÚkan URUZip~ pašnan GEﬂ-azÚpat šarā pa-a-un … § LUGAL GAL tabarnaš INA URUZippašna [p]āun “I went to Z. I went up Z. at night” (I fought and won a victory.) “I the Great King, the Tabarna, went in(to) Z.” KBo 
10.2 ii 48-50 (ann., OH/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:50f., cf. Melchert, JNES 37:18-20; manÚkan ÓUR.SAGTehšinan š[arā] pa-a-un “I would have gone up Mt. Tehšina” KUB 19.37 iii 49, ed. AM 176f. 

5' ā

ppan šarapai- “to go up (something) from behind”: nuÚkan ÓUR.SAGÓaharwa EGIR UGU paiz-zi “He will go up Mt. Óaharwa from behind” KUB 
5.1 ii 55 (oracle question, NH), ed. Ünal, THeth 4:60f. (“geht wieder … hinauf”). 

pai- A 1 g 
f. w. inf.: takku āppatriwanzi kuišk[i p]a-iz-zi “If someone goes to commandeer (something)” KBo 
6.26 i 28 (Laws §164, OH/NS); nu kuiš LÚNAGAR IÙÙI ÓUR.SAG GIŠinnaššaš karšūwanzi pa-iz-zi “The carpenter who goes to cut mountain timber for beams” KUB 29.1 iii 14-15 (new palace rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 16, 29, tr. ANET 358; cf. ibid. iii 18-19; nu EN.S´SKUR warpuanzi pa-iz-zi “The patient goes to wash” KUB 29.8 ii 12-13 (rit., MH/MS); nu INA KUR URUGašg[a la]hhiyauwanzi pa-a-u-un “I went to campaign in Kaška-land” KUB 23.11 iii 14-15 (ann. Tudh. II, MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:160f.; cf. KUB 
34.33:6 + KBo 14.44:1 + KBo 14.20 i 20 (annals, Murš. II), ed. THeth 20:380f. n. 1439, Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:169, 178; note also lahha/lahhi pai- in CHD lahha- 1 a; nu ABI ABIYA apē
daš [ANA UR]U.DIDLI.ÓI.A walhuwanzi pa-it “My grandfather went to attack those cities” (lit. “my grandfather went to those cities for attacking/ to attack”) KUB 19.11 iv 33-34 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:66; man INA KUR URUAzzi taninumanzi pa-a-un “I would have gone to reorganize Azzi” (lit. “I would have gone to Azzi to reorganize”) KBo 4.4 iv 42-43, ed. AM 138f.; cf. KUB 21.1 iii 46-47 (Alakš.), ed. SV 2:72-75; KUB 20.88 vi? 22-23 (fest.); and cf. KUB 12.62 obv. 10-rev. 6 (pre-NH/NS), ed. CHD mimma-; nu LUGAL-uš ANA ANŠE.[KUR.RA? … ?] uwanna pa-i[z-zi] “The king goes to inspect(?) the ho[rses …]” 531/s rt. col. 10-11 (fest.), ed. Alp, Tempel 318f.; for the logical object of the infinitive being expressed by the dative see HE §272 and Melchert, JCS 31:58. 
g. w. nouns denoting action, similar in mng. to 1 f: nÚaš namma aruni zahhiya pa-it “He went once again to the sea for battle” KBo 3.7 iii 22 (Illuy., OH/ NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:15, 19; nu INA URUNinašša MÈ-ya pa-a-un KBo 10.2 i 30 (ann. Óatt. I, OH/NS); cf. KUB 14.1 obv. 69, 70 (Madd., MH/MS); KBo 3.4 ii 57, ed. AM 62f.; “‘I am not dear to my father’” šuÚwa URUÓat~ tuša (var. URUÓattuši) hengani pa-a-un “‘I went to Óattuša for death’” KBo 22.2 rev. 5 (Zalpa text, OS), w. dupl. KBo 3.38 rev. 21 (OH/NS), ed. StBoT 17:10f.; for šehuna/šehuni pai- “to go to urinate” cf. šehur; kē
daniÚpat KASKAL-ši pa-i-mi “I will go only on (lit. for) this journey (or this very journey?)” KBo 
16.97 obv. 28 (oracle question, MH?/MS?); for KASKAL-an pai-see 1 e 1', above; for lahha/lahhi pai- “to go on (lit. for) a campaign/journey” see lahha- 1 a. 
25

h. w. local adverbs: “Furthermore, the campaign which is ascertained/determined by oracle for him” nÚaš apiya pa-iz-zi “There he will go” KUB 5.1 i 81 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:46f.; cf. KUB 13.4 iii 26 (instr., MH/NS); mā
hhanÚma LUGAL-uš arahza paiz-zi “But when the king goes outside” IBoT 1.36 i 64 (MH/MS), ed. AS 24:12f.; kaÚ¢warÚaš pa-it KUB 30.28 rev. 8 (rit.), ed. HTR 96f. 
i. without preverb, but w. local sentence particles: These sentences are not very common. Many that do have a “local” particle are demonstrably sentences in which pai-introduces another verb in the same clause and in which the “local” particle and the other enclitics go w. the second verb of the “go and …” construction. Many other examples of this are probably compound sentences, but due to the fragmentary nature of the text, it is impossible to tell. Considering the large number of examples of the verb pai-, it seems significant that very few examples of pai- w. “local” particles occur in sentences where the following sentence begins w. nu and/or has its own enclitics, or even in sentences where the verb of the next sentence is rarely or never attested w. that particle. Sentences where the “local” particle must go w. pai- are cited in this section — 1' w. -ašta “to leave, go out”: tÚašta pa-aan-zi § “they leave” KBo 17.28:5 (fest., OS); “The chief of the palace servants bows” tÚašta pa-iz-zi ta hat~ kanzi “He goes out. They close up” IBoT 2.1 vi 6-7 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., OH); “The waiter crumbles zippu~ lašni-bread. They bring (in) the banquet” tÚašta pa-iz-zi GAL MEŠEDI ANA LÚALAN.ZU· DUGhūp~ par GEŠTIN-aš tarkumiyaizzi “He leaves. The chief of the bodyguards announces a huppar of wine to the performer” KUB 25.17 vi 4-6 (fest., OH?/NS) 
□ tarkummiya- never takes a “local” particle; [nÚa]šta É Óannu pa-iz-zi nÚašt[a …] Bo 69/1260:10, ed. Alp, Tem-pel 366f.; [m]ānÚašta URUÓattušaz ≠URU±A_nkuwai ŠA É LÚ.MEŠŠÀ.TAM KIN-az pa-iz-zi “When the equipment of the house of the ŠATAMMU goes out from Óattuša to Ankuwa” KUB 25.28 i 1-3 (OH/NS); -ašta tends to be replaced by -kan in this usage of pai- in later texts. 
2' w. -apa: only in the hapax idiom w. uttar (5 h, below). 

pai- A 1 j 1' a' 1'' 

3' w. -šan: kēdašÚaÚwaÚššan (par. Úkan) idaluš lā]kki lē
la[š tuepa-iz-zi § 2Mašt. iii 6-7 (MH/MS), par. KUB 15.39 + KUB 12.59 ii 19-20 (cf. 1 a 5', above), ed. Rost, MIO 1:358f.; aru<na>Ú[š]an pa-i-mi [d?]āšanaÚ šan!(text -ta-an) pa-i-mi ´D-p[a m]ūhhi luli[ya] muhhi tenawaÚšan pa-i-m[i …] “I will go to the sea. I will go to the dāšana. I will fall into the river. I will fall into the pond. I will go to the tenawa-” KUB 
43.60 i 32-34 (myth in rit.?, OH/NS); nuÚwaÚššan mā
n pa-a-i-mi “When I go (there), (for my sake be fearful with respect to the leopard and wolf)” KBo 21.90 rev. 51-52 (Tetešhapi fest., OH/MS); other examples are not totally clear: nuÚššan pa-a-un KUR URUPiggain~ arešša šašti walhhun KBo 4.4 iii 36-37, ed. AM 128f., this appears to be a good candidate for a sentence w. two verbs except that walh- is otherwise attested only w. -kan and Ø. 
4' w. -kan — a' “to leave” (cf. w. -ašta, 1 i 1', above): “They wash their hands” nÚatÚkan (var. adds parā) pa-a-an-zi GAL MEŠEDIÚyaÚkan (var. adds parā) pa-iz-zi “They leave and the commander of the MEŠEDI-guards leaves” KUB 41.52 rev.! 7-8 + KUB 
11.29 iv 6-7 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., NS), w. par. KBo 4.9 iv 5 (OH/ NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:59f., 62; taÚkkan LÚ.MEŠDUGUD (dupl. LÚ.MEŠDUGUDÚkan) pa-a-[a]n-zi § HT 19 + FHL 177:8 (fest.), w. dupl. IBoT 3.23 iii? 13; tÚašÚkan paiz-zi §§ VAT 7458 vi 12 (fest., OH), ed. Alp, Tempel 128f. 
b' “to move away”: mahhanÚmaÚššiÚkan alpaš tepu paizzi “When the cloud moves a bit away from him” KUB 43.62 ii? 3 (myth?). 
c' other: nuÚttaÚkkan ariyašešnaza 2-an nāwi pa-a-i-u-e-ni “We have not yet gone to you a second time with an oracle question” KBo 2.2 ii 45-46 (oracle question, NH); išnašÚmaÚwaÚkan kāš DINGIR. MEŠ-aš NIND[Aharši U]L [p]a-iz-zi 2Mašt. iii 5-6 (MH/ MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:358f.; cf. KUB 15.39 + KUB 12.59 ii 1920 (1Mašt., MH/NS), w. par. 2Mašt. iii 6-7 having -šan (cited in 1 a 5', 1 i 3', above); cf. exx. in snake oracles 1 l 1', below; KUB 41.8 ii 21 with the copy and against Otten, ZA 54: 126f.:58, is not -kan … pai- but -kan and[a]… pai- (coll.). 
j. pai- “to go” w. preverbs; the translational distinctions originally posited by Götze, ArOr 5:16-22, 29f., and summarized in HE §295 are not universally valid — 1' anda pai
— a' to go in(to) — 1'' without local particle: “But when it is morning” nu LÚÚ.HÚB-za ūgga anda pa-i-wa-ni “the deaf man and I go in” KBo 17.3 iv 21-22 

26

pai- A 1 j 1' a' 1'' 

(rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:38f.; “If a slave flees” nÚaš ANA KUR kūruri a[nda] (dupl. kururi KUR-e omits anda) pa-iz-zi “(And) he goes into an enemy land” (The one who brings him back, shall take him) KBo 
6.2 i 52-53 (Laws §23, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 61 (OH/NS); LUGAL-uš INA É-TIM GAL anda pa-iz-zi “The king goes into the Great House” KBo 19.128 i 12-13 (fest., OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 13:2f.; “But the exorcist comes back to the city” parni anda pa-iz-zi “(and) he goes into the house” KUB 41.8 iv 17 (rit., MH/NS), ed. ZA 54:136f., cf. 2'', below; NINDAharšiš anda pa-iz-zi “The thick-bread goes in” (the cook holds it up) KBo 9.136 i 8 (fest., OH/NS); for snake oracles see 1 l 2' a', below. 
2'' w. -kan: “In the dark earth are iron storage vessels. Their lids are lead” kuitÚkan anda pa-iz-zi “What goes in (does not come up again)” KUB 33.8 iii 7-9 (Tel.myth 2nd vers., OH/NS), translit. Myth. 43f., tr. Hittite Myths 19, cf. par. 1st vers. KUB 17.10 iv 16 using andan pai-; “The fisherman arrived at the city of Urma” nÚašÚkan INA ÉÚŠU an≠da± pa-it nÚašÚzaÚkan GIŠŠÚ.A-ki ešat “He went into his house and sat down on a chair” KUB 24.7 iv 42-43 (tale of the fisherman, NH), ed. Kum. 120f., Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. LMI 176, Hittite Myths 66; nÚašÚkan GIŠAB-za anda pa-iz-zi KUB 
27.68 i 8 (fest.), ed. Haas, KN 300; “The client walks to before the entrance of the tent. … He washes his hands” nÚašÚkan AN[A P]A_NI DINGIR-LIM anda pa-iz-zi “He goes in before the deity. (He bows before the deities, comes out, then washes his hands)” nÚa[š]Úkan anda pa-iz-zi “He goes in” KBo 20.129 i 18, 20 (mouth-washing rit.), ed. Haas, ChS 1/1:55; É-riÚkan anda ā
ššu pa-id-du “Let good go into the house” KUB 41.8 ii 12 (incant., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f. ii 49; [n]ÚašÚkan parni anda pa-iz-zi KBo 10.45 iv 19 (MH/ NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:136f. w. n. 207; cf. 1 l 2' b', below. 
3'' w. -ašta: “I destroyed the Kaškaean army” § nammaÚšta KUR-eaššÚa anda pa-a-u-un “Then I went also into the lands” KUB 23.11 iii 22 (ann. Tudh., MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:160f.; mānÚašta GIŠGI~ GIR-zaÚma kuwapi anda pa-iz-zi “But if the king ever goes in by chariot” IBoT 1.36 iv 23 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:34f.; LU[GAL MUNUS.LUGAL] É dŠarrumma a[nda] pānzi … § nÚašta LUGAL-uš INA É dU anda pa-iz-zi “The ki[ng and queen] go into the temple of Šarruma. ([He] sacrifices two 

pai- A 1 j 1' b' 2'' a'' 
[…-s] to Šarruma and they burn them.) § The king goes into the temple of the Stormgod. (The king sacrifices … to the [Storm]god)” KUB 41.48 iv 4-6, 910 (fest.); § nÚ[a]šta GAL MEŠEDI anda pa-iz-zi “The chief of the guards goes in” KBo 4.9 v 28 (fest., OH/NS); cf. ibid. ii 37-38; KBo 20.62 i 10-11 (rit., MH); KUB 
10.11 ii 15-16 (offerings, NH); nÚašta (so B and C, A: ≠n±ašma) EN.S´SKUR DUGpalhi ā
rr[(a)]z and[(a)] pa-iz-zi “The sacrificer goes into the pithos vessel (which is open like a culvert at both ends) through its rear end” KUB 45.26 ii 6-7(B) (rit., OH/NS), w. dupl. IBoT 2.46 ii 6-7 (C) and KBo 24.63 ii 11-12 + KBo 23.43 ii 3-4 (A, MS), translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:277, cf. CHD puri-; differently Puhvel, JAOS 102:178, who fails to consider the context. 
4'' w. -šan: (If they catch a free man breaking into a house) [(anda)Úš(š)]an parna nā
wi ≠pa-iz±zi “(and) he has not yet gone into the house, (he shall pay twelve shekels.” If they seize a slave) [and]aÚššan parna nā
wi pa-iz-zi “and he has not yet gone into the house, (he shall pay six shekels)” KBo 
6.3 iv 35-37 (Laws §93, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 37-39 (OS); nÚašÚšan (dupl. nÚatÚkan) [(and)]a ÓUR. SAG-aš šuppayaš (var. šuppay[aš ÓUR.SAG]. MEŠ-aš) pa-id-du nÚašÚkan (dupl. nÚatÚkan) and[(a hallūwaš a)]ldannaš paiddu “Let it go into the holy mountains. Let it go into the deep well” KUB 41.8 ii 20-21 (incant., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 5556 (MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:126f. ii 57-58; cf. nÚašÚšan É dIM anda pa-iz-zi KBo 19.138 obv. 12 (fest.). 
5'' w. -an: dAndaliyašÚan anda iyanniš … dUTUÚan DUMU-aš anda pa-it “Andaliya went in … The son of the Sungod(dess) went in” KUB 12.63 rev. 19, 22 (Zuwi rit., OH/MS); perhaps nÚašÚan anda pa-iz-zi KBo 19.150 + IBoT 2.35 obv. 3 (OH). 
b' “to go into (an unnamed location) to (a person or object inside), go inside to” — 1'' a clear ex. 
w. -apa: “I will call to the soul of the person” nÚ atÚšeÚ(a)pa anda pa-≠a±-ir nÚan ep[pir] “‘They went in to him, and sei[zed] him’” KUB 12.63 obv. 18 
+ KUB 36.70:7 (Zuwi rit., OH/MS), cf. Carruba, Or NS 33:420. 
2'' uncertain exx. — a'' without local particle: [k]uitma≠n±Úma LUGAL-uš dU NA›hūwašiya anda nāwi pa-iz-zi “While the king has not yet gone in (i.e., into the sanctuary) to the stela of the Storm
27

god.” KUB 10.1 i 22-24 (KI.LAM fest.), translit. StBoT 28:23, cf. StBoT 27:63; similarly, but w. local particle, LUGAL-ušÚ kan NA›huwašiya peran anda pa-iz-zi “the king goes in (to the sanctuary) before the stela” KUB 20.99 ii 4, ed. Popko, Kultobjekte 125, cf. 1 j 3', below; so Gurney, Schweich 40f. “go in to”; others assume that the huwaši in this case was not simply a stela, but either a rock sanctuary such as Yazılıkaya (so Güterbock, MDOG 86:76 n. 2, Carter, Diss. 26-50) or a huwašistela surrounded by an enclosure, the whole of which could, by extension, also be referred to as a huwaši. 
b'' w. -šan: LUGAL-ušÚš[a]n dU-aš NA›hū
wašiya anda pa-iz-zi “The king goes in(to the sanctuary) to the huwaši-stone of the Stormgod” KUB 2.3 ii 3233 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. StBoT 28:64, cf. StBoT 27:79, possibly belongs s.v. 1 j 1' a' 4'', q.v.; cf. KUB 10.1 i 22-24 above, 1 j 1' b' 2'' a'', and discussion there. This comes close to the usage in which anda is a postpos.: cf. HW2 andan IV 2, especially -kan PA_NI DINGIR-LIM É.ŠÀ-ni anda pa-iz-zi KBo 
21.57 ii 7 (mugawar for dU URUKuliwišna, OH?/MS) (HW2 1:104a). 
c' “to move closer together, to close ranks”: “They (the troops (collective sg.)) shall march 3 IKU apart” ≠mān±Úši peranÚma kuwapi KASKALiš hatkuš nÚaš anda pa-iz-[z]i “However, if anywhere the road ahead of him/it is narrow, they shall close ranks” IBoT 1.36 ii 63 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:22f., Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:188f. (differently). 
2' ā
ppan(-)anda pai- “to go after, pursue”: (If a couple elopes) n[uÚšmaš šard]®eš ā
ppan(-)anda pa-a-an-zi “(and) helpers go after them” KBo 6.2 ii 10 (Hrozny™, CH, pl. V) (Laws §37, OS), ed. HG 26 n. 15, 27 n. 10; cf. KBo 6.3 ii 29 (OH/NS) w. āppanda pai- q.v. (j 8', below). 
3' peran anda pai- “to go in before, to go into the presence of”: na-it-x (var. nÚatÚkan) / [(DIN~ GIR-LIM-n)]i peran anda pa-an-zi “They go into the presence of the deity” KBo 24.57 i 3-4 (rit.), w. dupl. KBo 23.42 i 4; cf. KUB 20.99 ii 4 above, 1 j 1' b' 2'' a''. 
4' andan pai- “to go in(to)” — a' without local particle: nu INA URUApā
ša ANA URU-LIM ŠA µU_h~ ha-LÚ andan pa-a-un “I went into Apaša, the city of Uhhaziti” KBo 3.4 ii 29-30 (ann. Murš. II), ed. AM 50f. 
□ note how INA and ANA are completely interchangeable here; cf. KBo 10.2 ii 2 (ann. Óatt. I, OH/NS); ta LUGAL-uš URUTahurpaza URUArinna andan GIŠGIGIR-it pa-iz

pai- A 1 j 5' a' 2'' 

zi “The king goes from Tahurpa into Arinna by chariot” KBo 11.43 i 26-27 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH?/NS); GIŠhu≠lu±ganniššÚa KÙ.GI GAR.RA andan URUÓat~ tuši pa-iz-zi (var. pa-a-i[z-zi]) “And a cart, inlaid with gold, goes into Óattuša” ibid. i 21-22, w. dupl. KUB 
25.19 i 13-14; cf. in snake oracles (1 l 3', below); cf. KUB 17.10 iv 16 (Tel.myth 1st vers., OH/MS) using andan pai- w. par. KUB 33.8 iii 8-9 (Tel.myth 2nd vers., OH/NS) using -kan anda pai-; and cf. KBo 10.20 i 15-16 (ANDAÓŠUM outline, OH/NS) using andan pai- w. dupl. KUB 30.39 obv. 3-4 using anda pai-. 
b' w. -kan: lukkattiÚmaÚkan LUGAL-uš URUTa~ hurpi andan pa-iz-zi “But in the morning the king goes into Tahurpa” KUB 10.48 ii 15-16 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH/NS), but cf. ibid. ii 17-18 without -kan; cf. KUB 46.14 rev. 4 (fest.); [tak]kuÚkan antuwahhaš INA ÉÚŠU an~ dan pa-iz-zi “[I]f a man goes into his house” KUB 
29.9 i 4-5 (omen), ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79; NIN.DIN~ GIRÚkan andan pa-iz-zi “The NIN.DINGIR-priestess enters” KBo 10.27 iii 20 (fest., NS). 
5' āa' “to go back” (for further exx. of
ppa pai-— āppa w. pai-cf. 1 a 5', 1 e 1' and 4) — 1'' active forms, without local particle: nammaÚaš mah≠h±an EGIR-pa pa-iz-zi nÚanÚmuÚkan duwā
n paranai “When he again goes back, send him to me …” HKM 66:3132 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 246f.; kāšÚwa IM-aš mah~ han wappui EGIR-pa UL pa-iz-zi “As this clay does not go back to the riverbank” KUB 15.39 + KUB 12.59 ii 15-16 (1Mašt., MH/NS), cf. par. 2Mašt. iii 2-3 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:356f.; (He addresses the gods of Óatti. He addresses the gods of Kaška) mān zinna[i] nÚaš EGIR-pa MAÓAR DINGIR.MEŠ URUÓatt[i] pa-izzi “When he finishes, he goes back before the gods of Óatti” KUB 4.1 iii 5-6 (rit. before a campaign, MH/NS), ed. Kaškäer 172f., tr. ANET 355; (Kaškaeans who had emigrated to Óatti decided to rebel, saying) “Let’s make a [rebellion]” n[uÚw]a INA URUGašga EGIR-pa pa-a-i-u-e-ni “Let’s go back to Kaška” KUB 
34.33:4 + KBo 14.20 i 18 (annals, Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:169, 178; nu LUGAL-uš EGIR-pa IŠTU É dIM pa-iz-zi “The king goes back from the Storm-god’s temple” KUB 12.12 v 22 (hišuwaš fest.); cf. KBo 
17.25 obv. 6 (rit., OS); KBo 17.74 ii 3, 9 (rit., OH/MS); HT 25 
+ KUB 33.111:7 (kingship of dLAMMA myth); KUB 21.29 ii 12 (decree, Óatt. III); KUB 25.3 ii 6-7 (fest.). 
2'' act. form w. -šan: EGIR-paÚmaÚššan URU≠ya±(!) šannapiliš nūman pa-iz-zi kāšti kaninti “He 

28

pai- A 1 j 5' a' 2'' 

does not want to return to (his) city empty handed, in hunger and thirst” KUB 33.121 ii 15-16 (Kešši tale, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:234f., Hoffner, GsKronasser 41. 
3'' part. w. -kan: “Because all the Kaška-Land was at peace, some of the Hittite population had hostels behind Kaškaean towns” kuiēšÚmaÚkan hāppiri EGIR-pa pa-an-te-eš “while some had gone back into town” KBo 5.6 i 16-17 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:90; cf. ibid. i 19-20. 
b' (mng. unclear): “[Kaššu, the … ,] came and brought the troops of Óatti” [… GI]M-an EGIR-pa KUR Wiluša GUL-uwanzi pa-a-ir [ammukÚm]a ištarkzi KUB 19.5 obv. 3-5, ed. Houwink ten Cate, JEOL 28:38f., for discussion of possible meanings see pp. 42f., 50f. 

6' kattan ā

ppa pai- “to go back into the presence of” (the kattan here is a postpos. w. ANA PN): “IŠTAR shut him (Urhi-Teššub) up in Šamuha like a pig in a pen. … Out of respect for my brother I did nothing (hostile)” nu INA URUŠamuha ANA µUrhi-dU-up GAM-an EGIR-pa pa-a-un “I went back to Šamuha into the presence of Urhi-Teššub. (I led him down like a hostage/prisoner)” KBo 3.6 iii 61 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. Óatt. 34f., StBoT 24:24f. iv 3031 (“marschierte zurück hinab gegen Urhi-Tesup”). 

7' ā

ppan pai- “to go behind, to follow, to support (politically)” — a' “to go behind, to follow”: “In the morning he goes to the temple of [DN]” nuÚšši DUMU.LUGAL EGIR-an pa-iz-z[i] “The prince follows him” KUB 9.16 i 5 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH/NS); ITU.10.KAMÚya EGIR-an pa-iz-zi “And the 10th month follows” KBo 27.67 rev. 9 (birth rit.), ed. StBoT 29:218f. (“passes”); (Behold, you evils, mark this [substitute]) nuÚwa kēdani :tarpalli EGIR-an [p]ait-tén “Follow this substitute” KUB 24.5 obv. 23-24 + KUB 9.13 obv. 11-12 (substitute king rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:10f. 
b' “to support (politically)”: (My father did not stand behind (ā
ppan tiya-) Mašhuiluwa …) nuÚšši EGIR-an tiyanun [(nuÚš)]ši EGIR-an pa-a-u-un (vars. pa-a-un) “I stood (lit. stepped) behind him. I supported (lit. went behind) him” KBo 4.7 i 12-13 (Kup., Murš. II), w. dupls. KUB 6.44 i 12-13 and KUB 6.41 obv. 14, ed. SV 1:108f., 153 (“sorgen für, sich kümmern um”). 

8' ā

ppanda pai- “to go after (i.e., to pursue/to follow)”: (If a couple elopes) EGIR-andaÚm[a]Ú 

pai- A 1 j 9' a' 
≠šmašÚkan(?)± [ša]rdiyaš pa-iz-zi “But a helper (or: a group of helpers) goes after them” KBo 6.3 ii 29 (Laws §37, OH/NS), cf. KBo 6.2 ii 10 (Hrozny™, CH, pl. V) (OS) w. āppan(-)anda pai- (see 1 j 2', above); (The enemy [went onto(?)] Mt. Hullušiwanda. …) [nuÚšmaš] attašÚmiš µTudhaliyaš LUGAL.GAL [U ū]qqa µAr~ nuwandaš LUGAL.GAL EGIR-anda pa-a-uen “My father, Tudhaliya, the Great King, [and] I, Arnuwanda, the Great King, pursued [them]” KUB 
23.21 obv. 26-27 (joint annals of Tudh.-Arn., MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:168f.; (All the land of Arzawa fled. Some persons to be resettled fled to Mt. Arinnanda) nu dUTU-ŠI INA ÓUR.SAGArinnanda ANA NAM. RA EGIR-anda pa-a-un “I, My Majesty, went to Mt. Arinnanda after the persons to be resettled” KBo 3.4 ii 37, ed. AM 54f.; cf. KBo 5.8 i 24-25, ed. AM 148f.; iii 40-41, ed. AM 158f.; “Urhi-Teššub fled from Maraššantiya and went into Šamuha” ammukÚmaÚšši EGIR-anda pa-a-u-un “So I went after him” KBo 
6.29 ii 21 (edict, Óatt. III), ed. Óatt 48f.; […] GIŠŠUKUR. ÓI.A EGIR-anda pa-i[t] KUB 36.63 rt. col. 7 (Kešši story, NH); DINGIR.MEŠ-šÚa EGIR-anda ®t[ten] KUB 
9.1 ii 31 (rit., pre-NH/NS); for āppanda pai-w. time see 3 b, below. 
9' arha pai- “to go out, go away, go off; to go back home” (on a possible distinction based upon presence of local particles cf. Götze, AM 280 sub arha)— a' without sentence particle: “When on the 6th day they open up and pull back the curtain” LUGAL-uš arha paiz-zi “The king leaves (the palace)” KBo 20.10 i 2 (fest., OS); LÚ ≠d±U arha INA ÉÚŠU pa-iz-zi “The man of the Stormgod’ goes home to his house” IBoT 
1.29 rev. 26 (haššumaš fest., MH?/MS?); (The Ahhiyawan king wrote to Piyamaradu:) nuÚwa šarā t®ya nuÚ wa INA KUR Óatti arha i-it ENÚKAÚwaÚtta EGIR-an kappuw[ai]t mānÚmaÚwa UL nuÚwa INA KUR Ahhiyawā [a]rha ehu “Arise and go home to Óatti; your lord (the Hittite king) has forgiven you; or if not, then come home to Ahhiyawa” KUB 14.3 iii 6468 (Taw., Óatt. III), ed. AU 14f.; “The king comes from the Temple of Ziparwa” tÚaš Éhalentuwaš arha pa-a-iz-zi “He goes off to the palace” KUB 41.26 iv 23 (fest. of Ziparwa, OH/NS); (My brother came and fortified Anziliya and Tapiqqa) nÚaš arhaÚpat pa-it “He went away (and did not come near me)” KUB 
1.1 ii 49 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. Óatt. 18f., StBoT 24:14f.; cf. KUB 16.66 obv. 9 (oracle question, NH); cf. also 1 i 1'. 
29

b' w. -kan: (He sleeps in the city. At dawn,) nÚašÚkan URU-riaz arha hū¢k pa-id-du “let him
dago out from the city immediately” KUB 9.15 ii 18-19 (instr., NH); cf. KUB 19.11 i 11-12 (DŠ); “As they dye this red-brown (SAﬁ) skin (so that it is) blood-red” nuÚššiÚkan i[šhar]wā
tar arha UL pa-iz-zi “And the b[lood]-redness never leaves it, (let the oath-gods seize you in the same way)” nuÚšmašÚatÚkan arha lē pa-iz-zi “Let it not go away from you” KBo 6.34 + KUB 48.76 iii 48-iv 3 (soldiers oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:14f. (“weichen”); (I would have traveled to Kalašma, but because I had far too much booty) nuÚkan namma ammuk IŠTU KARAŠ arha UL pa-a-un “I did not then set out with (my) army.” (I sent Nuwanza … I left for Óattuša) KBo 5.8 iv 14-15, ed. AM 160-163; našmaÚkan LUGAL-uš tūwali KASKAL-ši arha pa-iz-zi “Or if the king goes off on a distant campaign” KBo 4.14 ii 57-58 (edict, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II); IŠTU KUR-TIÚkan ar[h]a kašza pa-iz-zi “Hunger/ Famine will leave the land” KUB 8.35 obv. 15 (omen apodosis); cf. KUB 33.54:14-15 + KUB 33.47:2 (OH/NS), translit. Myth. 79, tr. Hittite Myths 28; (Wašulana revolted against Óudupianza; so I sent Nuwanza with troops) [nÚatÚ(kan ANA) µÓ(ūd)]upianza šer arha pa-a-ir (A: ≠pa-i±t) “they (A: he) went off for the sake of Óudupianza” KBo 16.6 iii 6 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. A: KUB 14.29 i 16 (coll. W), C: KBo 10.17 i 8. 
c' w. -za and without local particle: “The enemy arrived below Maraša and killed Zuwa, the staff-bearer … […]” nÚatÚza arha pa-a-ir “They went back out (and burned the city of Maraša)” KUB 14.1 rev. 54 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 32f. (“zogen sie fort”); nÚašÚza arha ≠I±NA KURÚŠU pa-it “He went back home to his land” KUB 14.1 obv. 65 (MH/ MS), ed. Madd. 16f. (“er zog weg”); nÚašÚza arha INA ÉÚŠU pa-iz-zi “He goes back home to his house” KUB 29.4 ii 39 (rit., NH); nÚašÚza arha pa-iz-zi “He goes back home” ibid. iii 11. On this mng. w. arha, verbs of going/coming, and without local particle, cf. Götze, ArOr 
5:21. 
10' āppa arha pai-“to go back home”: nÚaš EGIR-pa arha pa-it “and he/she went back home” KBo 34.268:4. 
11' awan arha pai- “to walk away from, leave” 
(w. -kan): nÚašÚkan LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDU_TIM DUMU. MEŠ É.GALÚya awan arha pa-iz-zi “He walks 

pai- A 1 j 13' b' 

away from the guards and palace servants” IBoT 1.36 ii 41-42 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:18f. (“walks apart from”), Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:186f. (“geht weg”); [mā]n? LUGAL-uš NIN.DINGIR awan arha pa-izzi “[Whe]n the king walks apart from the NIN. DINGIR-priestess, (and goes into the temple of the Sun deity)” KBo 10.27 v 18 (fest., NS) □ the function of awan is not clear, see HW2 1:635f. and Puhvel, HED 1-2:245; 
w. d.-l.: nÚašÚkan AN≠A± [DUMU.ME]Š É.[G]ALTIM [GÙ]B-laz awan arha pa-iz-zi “He leaves the palace servants on the left (or: walks apart from the palace servants …)” IBoT 1.36 iv 10-11 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:32f., Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:198f. 
(“geht weg”). 
12' ištarna pai-“to go among”: namma ANA UDU.ÓI.A ištarna pa-i-mi “Then I go among the sheep (and pull out a tuft of wool from the sheep whose eyes are turned toward the sun)” VBoT 24 iii 11 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS); ištarna could be a postpos. instead of a preverb here; [ o o ]-ili 6 S´G.SAﬁ haminkan hanza [iš?]tarna pa-iz-zi KUB 9.28 iv 3-4 (rit. for the Heptad, MH/NS); cf. in broken context KUB 50.31 i 8 (oracle question); for other exx. of ištarna w. pai-see 2 d (w. acc.), and 3 c (of time), below. 
13' katta pai- “to go down” — a' without sentence particle: nu nekuz mēhūni hūdak¢GAM (var. katta) pa-it-tén “At night-time go down immediately” (from the temple to the city) KUB 13.4 ii 75 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.94:5; GIManÚma ŠEŠÚYA µNIR.GÁL-iš IŠTU AMAT DIN~ GIR-LIMÚŠU INA KUR ŠAPLITI katta (B: GAM) pa-it “When at the word of his deity, my brother Muwatalli went down to the Lower Land” KUB 1.1 i 75-76 (Apology of Óatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 i 64-65, ed. Óatt. 14f., StBoT 24:10f.; cf. KUB 49.100 rev.? 6 (oracle question, NH); for other exx. of katta pai- cf. 1 e 2' (-kan + acc.), 5 e (“to get lost, ruined, destroyed”). 
b' w. abl. and -ašta or -kan “go down from, down through”: mānÚašta GUD.MAÓ-aš KÁ.GAL-az katta pa-iz-zi “When the bull goes down through (-ašta) the gate, (they shut the gate)” KUB 20.87 i 16-17 (fest.); nÚatÚkan katta [I]ŠTU KÁ.GAL 

URUDā

uniya pa-a-an-zi “They go down through the Dauniya Gate” KUB 15.34 i 18 (evocation rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:184f.; cf. KBo 7.42 iii? 6 (fest.); nuÚkan LÚ dU URUÓakmiššaz katta pa-iz-zi “The 

30

pai- A 1 j 13' b' 

man of the Stormgod goes down from Óakmiš” KUB 
25.23 l.e. a 2 (cult inv., Tudh. IV); cf. VBoT 30 rev.? 7 (NS); cf. also in broken context KUB 20.2 iv 18, 20-21, 24 (fest., NH); in KUB 20.87 i 16-17 and KUB 25.23 l.e. a 2 katta could also be postpos. following the abl. 

14' ā

ppan katta pai- (w. -kan) “follow below(?), go down the back(?)”: (First they were accusing Ukkura of misappropriation/stealing; then while he was on a trip to Babylonia, the hurling of walwa~ yalli [charges?] at him stopped for a while.) “When I returned from Babylonia …” INIM :walwa~ yallašÚmaÚwaÚkan namma EGIR-an katta pa-it “The matter of the charges (walwayalli) nipped at (my) heels (?, lit. went down behind or went back down) again” KUB 13.35 i 24 + KUB 23.80 obv.! 10 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:4f., 16, Güterbock, Cor.Ling. 67; (The king travels. When he comes away from the city Óišarluwa) tÚašta LÚÓAZANNU ZAG-az / [(paššu)]i šer artari GIM-anÚmaÚššiÚkan [LUGAL-u(š? han)]~ daittari (par. hāndaizzi) tÚaš (par. nÚaš) U[(Š~ KÊ)]N (dupl. UŠKÊNNU) [tÚa(šÚka)]n paššun E[(GIR-a)]n ≠kat±ta pa-iz-zi (par. píd-da-a-i) “the ÓAZANNU stands on the right, on top of the paššu. But when [the kin]g(?) is lined up with him, he bows (dupl. they bow) and goes (par. runs) down the back of the paššu” KUB 58.22 i 15-18 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KUB 2.7 i 16-20 and parallel KBo 34.160:2-6, ed. Popko, AoF 13:220, cf. paššu-a. 
15' kattan pai-— a' “to go down” — 1'' w. -ašta: “They burn a goat and bury a šū¢ra-bird and
rašusay”: kiyÚašta mahhan [MÁŠ.G]AL šū¢raššÚa
rašukattan taknaza pa-a-ir k®Úkan ŠA URUÓatti inan ēšhar NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM pangauwaš EME-aš QA_~ TAMMA GAM-anda taknaza pa-id-d[u] “As these, [the go]at and the šū¢ra-bird, have gone down
rašuto the earth (abl. of direction?), so may these — the sickness, blood, oath, and slander (lit. tongue of the multitude) of Óatti — likewise go down to the earth” KUB 30.34 iv 26-29 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Melchert, Diss. 311; note that -ašta … kattan in the mahhan clause is considered equivalent to -kan … GAM-anda in the QA_TAMMA one. 
2'' w. -kan: kuitma<n>ÚatÚkan katt[a]n pa-a-anzi “While they are going down” 738/z obv. 9, translit. StBoT 15:48. 

pai- A 1 j 17' a' 
b' “to go into the presence of (a person), go to (a location)” (without local particle): nÚašÚkan auriyaza katta iyanneš nÚaš dU-ni kattan pa-it “He descended from the tower and went into the presence of the Stormgod” KUB 33.106 ii 11-12 (Ullik. IIIA, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6.20f.; nuÚšši INA URUŠamuha ukila kattan pa-a-u-un “I myself went to Šamuha into his presence” KBo 6.29 ii 28-29, ed. Óatt. 50f.; (If I do not go before the king, Óešni will make trouble and the king will have my head. We went before the king) nuÚwa ANA µÓešni kattan pa-a-u-un “I (also) went into the presence of Óešni” KUB 31.68 obv. 16 (inquest?, NH), cf. Stefanini, Athenaeum 40:23f.; cf. KUB 36.89 rev. 4-5 (prayer), ed. Haas, KN 150f.; kattiÚšši pa-iz-zi nÚašÚši kattiÚšši šešzi “(to see if) she (the goddess) will go to him and sleep with him” KUB 
7.5 iv 3-4 (rit. of Paškuwatti, MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:276, 279 (§15); “Whether that god is in heaven or in the earth” ziga (par. ziggaÚšši) dUTU-uš kattiÚšši [(pa-i-ši)] (par. pa-a-i-ši) “You, O Sungod, go to him (and say to him …)” KUB 36.75 ii 11, (prayer, OH/ MS), w. dupl. (KBo 22.75) + 1698/u + 221/w ii 11, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 64:241, w. par. FHG 1 ii 13 (OH/NS); for kat~ tan pai- in snake oracles see 1 l 4'; (If someone needs to relieve himself, and says) DUGkaltiyaÚwa kattan pa-i-mi “I need to go to the latrine (lit. kalti-pot)” IBoT 1.36 i 36 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:178f., AS 24:8f. cf. ibid. i 41; although in this context kattan can mean “down,” the word itself does not require that translation, and kattan does not recur when later the permission is given (ibid. i 42, 45). 
c' “to go with (someone)”: “When the equipment of the ŠATAMMU goes from Óattuša to Ankuwa” LÚhupralaššÚa kattiÚšmi pa-iz-zi “The hupra~ la-person goes with them” KUB 25.28 i 3-4 (OH/NS). 

16' ā
ppa kattan pai- “to go back into the presence of”: nÚaš EGIR-pa EN-aÚšši kattan pa-it “He went back into the presence of his lord” KUB 36.74 iii 6 (Atrahas®s myth, NH), ed. Siegelová, ArOr 38.136. 
17' kattanda pai- “to go down (into)” — a' without local particle: [n]Úe namma hattešnaš kattant[a] nūmān pa-a-an-zi “They (the drunken serpents) do not want to go back down into (their) holes again” KUB 17.5 i 13-14 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:13, 18, tr. Hittite Myths 12, cf. Hoffner, GsKronasser 41. 
31

b' w. -ašta: nÚašta dIM-naš tān anna[šÚš]iš [katt]anta pa-it “For the second time the mother of the Stormgod went down” KBo 21.22:43-44 (blessings for the Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi2 47. 
c' w. -kan: nÚašÚkan hāri kattanda pa-it “He went down into the valley” KBo 12.75:7 (myth, NS); nuÚwaÚššiÚkan andakittiÚšši kattanta pa-it “He went down to her to her bedroom” KUB 7.5 i 7-8 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277 (§5 i 34-35); cf. KUB 30.34 iv 29 (MH/NS), cited above s.v. kat~ tan pai- (j 15' a' 1''). 
d' in other or broken context: [… h]attešni GAM-anda pa-a-it “He went down into the hole” KUB 36.89 obv. 12; [… (a)]runi GAM-anda (var. kattanda) pa-it “He went down to the sea” KUB 
33.122 ii 9 (Óedammu myth), w. dupl. KUB 12.65 iii? 4 (NS), ed. StBoT 14:50f.; [LUG]AL-i kattanta pa-iz-zi “He goes down to the king” IBoT 4.343:5; takku INA ITU. 4.KAM dEN.ZU-aš kattanda pa-a-u-wa-aš mē
huni aki “If there is a lunar eclipse (lit. the Moongod dies) in the fourth month at the time of (the moon’s) going down” KUB 29.9 iv 9-10 (lunar omens, NH), cf. ibid. iv 4-5, ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:80. 
18' menahhanda pai- “to go against/toward, to go to meet (for further exx. see menahhanda 1 a 2', 5 d) — a' without local particle: [INA ÓU]R.SAGKulithaÚwaÚ ≠šši(?)± menahhanda pa-a-i-u-≠e±-[ni] “We will go against him(?) at Mt. Kulitha” KBo 16.14:20 + KBo 
16.8 ii 35 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Kammenhuber, Or NS 39:548f.; cf. KBo 3.60 ii 7-9 (cannibals text, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:106f.; KBo 22.86 rt. col. 6 + KUB 36.2C iii 4 (myth). 
b' w. -ašta or -kan: “Ištar is winged” nÚašta URUNinuaz SÚR.DÙ.AMUŠEN IGI-anda pa-a-it (dupl. pa-it) “She went (i.e., flew) from Nineveh to meet the falcon” KUB 41.8 ii 8-9 (rit. for infernal deities, MH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 44-45 (MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f. ii 45-46; nÚašÚkan UDU.ÓI.A-waš menah~ handa pa-iz-zi “She goes toward the sheep” KBo 
17.92:7 (Hurr. rit.); also w. -kan KBo 26.79:10-11 (Óedammu myth), ed. StBoT 14:68f. 
19' parā pai-— a' “to go out” — 1'' without local particle: nÚaš ā
šga parapa-iz-zi “He goes on to the gate” KUB 17.12 ii 24 (healing rit.); DINGIR.MEŠ-a[š par]ā pa-i-it “He/it went out to the ‘gods’” KBo 
18.151 rev.? 12 (KIN oracle, atypical OS), ed. Ünal/Kammen

pai- A 1 j 19' a' 2'' 

huber, KZ 88:164f. (“zu den Göttern ging er w[eite]r”); (I burned and plundered GN) § namma parā INA URUTahappišū
na pa-a-un … § nam-ma pa-ra-a pa-a-un … § parāÚma INA KUR URUÓurna pa-a-un … § [nu] parā pa-a-un “Then I went out to T.” (I burned and plundered it.) § “Then I went out (and camped in Kapperi.)” … § “I went out to the land of Óurna” (and made it tributary). § “I went out (and would have gone up Mt. Tehšina)” KUB 19.37 iii 31, 34, 41, 49, ed. AM 176f., and passim in AM; Götze tr. all these sentences without -kan as “weiter ziehen” (index AM 305), but see the following exx.; nu EGIR-pa URUŠa[-… AN]A KARAŠ uwanun § namma parā I[NA URU]At~ [huli]ša pa-a-un “I came back from Š. to the main army. § Then I went out to Athulišša” KBo 14.19 ii 14-15 (AM), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:174, 182; [(LÚ. KÚRÚwa k)]uiš INA URUAniša parā ≠pa-a±-an-za [(ē)]šta “The enemy who had gone out (or ‘gone on’) to Aniša” KUB 19.18 i 2 (DŠ), w. dupl. KBo 14.3 iv 56, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:75. 
2'' w. -ašta or -kan (opp. of anda pai-/uwa-): nÚ ašta LÚ GIŠGIDRU parā pa-iz-zi … § nÚašta LÚ GIŠGIDRU namma (dupl. + -pat) parā pa-iz-zi (var. pa-a-iz-zi) … § nÚašta GAL MEŠEDI anda paizzi … § nÚa[š]ta GAL MEŠEDI Éh®li parā pa-iz-zi nu ANA LÚ GIŠGIDRU tezzi zinir zinir § LÚ GIŠGID~ RUÚmaÚkan parā
aški pa-iz-zi “The scepter-bearer goes out (and leads <in?> the cooks) § The staff-bearer goes out again (namma) (He leads <in?> the consecrated priests, the lord of Óatti and the ši~ wanzanni-priestess of the temple of Óalki, and seats them.) § The chief of the guards goes in” … § “The chief of the guards goes out to the courtyard. He says (in Óattic) to the scepter-bearer ‘lyre, lyre’ (zinir zinir). § The scepter-bearer then goes out to the gate. (He says to the musicians ‘lyre, lyre.’ The scepter-bearer leads the musicians who carry the lyres [INANNA-instruments] in)” KBo 4.9 v 21, 24, 28, 32-34 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 25.1 i 18, 22-23, (27), 32-35; cf. KBo 17.3 i 15 (OS), KBo 17.18 ii 5, and exx. in StBoT 26:131f. (all rit., OS); [n]ÚatÚkan KÁ-az parā pa-a-an-zi “They go out through the gate” KUB 32.123 i 9 (NH); LUGAL-ušÚ kan IŠTU É dLAMMA parā pa-iz-zi KUB 11.17 iv 6-8 (fest., OH/NS); nÚašÚkan parā Éh®li pa-iz-zi … § nÚ ašÚkan parā pa-iz-zi “He goes out to the courtyard. 

32

pai- A 1 j 19' a' 2'' 

(He takes mud in the courtyard. … He takes mud in the gate building …) He goes out (and before the gate …)” KUB 7.41 obv. 22-24 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f.; nÚatÚkan parā paid-d[u a]ndaÚmaÚkan … ui[ddu] “Let them (i.e., words which are evil and frightening) go out, and let (good, mild, and wise ones) come in” KBo 17.105 iii 7-8 (incant., MH/MS); “If a man is sleeping in a bed, and spittle flows out from his mouth on the right of his face” nuÚššiÚkan parā kuitki pa-iz-zi “Something will go out to him” KUB 29.9 i 12 (omen, NH), cf. ibid. i 16-17, ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79 (“will happen”); (The horses are worked out, unharnessed, and put into the stable) mahhanÚmaÚašÚkan waršulaš parā paiz-zi “When they begin to smell (lit. When smell goes forth from(!) (-aš for -šmaš) them), (they wash them five times)” KBo 3.5 iv 32-33, ed. Hipp.heth. 100f. (“Sobald für sie? die (Zeit) der Ruhe vergeht”) □ for the tr. of waršula-see Güterbock, JKF 10:212; cf. lex. sec. above where parāÚkan pawar translates (Akk.) ÙÂTU and UÙÙUTU both meaning “departure, going out.” 
3'' w. -šan: nÚatÚšan ´D-i parā pa-a-an-zi “They go out to the river” KUB 29.4 iii 42 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 24f. 
b' to go forward (without locative particle): nÚ aš EGIR-pa tepu u[izzi] … § nÚaš parā tepu pa-izzi “He comes back a bit … § He goes forward a bit” KUB 24.9 ii 34, 40 (rit., MH/NS); LUGAL-i pa-ra-a 1ÚŠU pa-iz-zi ā
ppaÚmaÚašta nea “He goes forward toward the king one time; but he turns back” KBo 
17.43 i 11-12 (fest., OS), ed. Starke, StBoT 23:140, 180 §308, cf. also Neu, StBoT 25:105, for more context cf. LÚmeneya-a and nai-2 b 1' c'; “Then I killed him (i.e., the enemy)” namma parā pa-a-un “After that I went on further (and burned down the city of Tapapanuwa)” KUB 
19.39 ii 6 (annals, Murš. II), ed. AM162f.; see further Zuntz, Ortsadv. 63f.; cf. also “All the land of Arzawa fled. Some (potential) persons to be resettled went to Mt. Arinnanda (and) held Mt. Arinnanda” kuiēšÚ ma NAM.RA.ÓI.A parā INA URUPūranda pa-a-ir “Other (potential) persons to be resettled persons went on to Puranda (and held Puranda. Still others went across the sea)” KBo 3.4 ii 34-35, ed. AM 52f. 
20' peran parā pai- “to go in advance/ahead”: “When the prince comes” nÚaš hūdak INA É halki 

pai- A 1 j 23' 
peran parā pa-iz-zi “He immediately goes in advance/ahead to the temple of Óalki” KUB 42.100 iv 36-37 (cult inv., Tudh. IV). 
21' parranda pai- (always w. -kan) — a' “to go across to or over to” (d.-l. indicating what is crossed over to) [see parranda 2 b]: “Then I pursued him” nuÚ kan INA KUR URUArzauwa ≠pa±rranda pa-a-un “I crossed over to Arzawa, (and went into Apaša, city of Uhhaziti)” KBo 3.4 ii 28-29, ed. AM 50f.; cf. Friedrich, SV 1:157 (“zog ins Land … hinüber”), and Starke KZ 95:143, 147f.; nuÚkan apū¢
š INA LÚ.MEŠ URUAraunna pa~ ra≠n±da pa-a-ir apušÚmaÚkan INA LÚ.MEŠEN.NU. UN ÓUR.SAG-i parranda pa-a-ir “Some went across to the men of Araunna, and some went across the mountain to the watchmen (or: to the mountain-watchmen)” KUB 16.16 rev. 6-7 (oracle question, NH), ed THeth 20:259 w. n. 973. 
b' “to go across (something)” (d.-l. indicating what is crossed) (see CHD parranda 1 b): kuiēšÚmaÚ kan NAM.RA.MEŠ aruni parranda ITTI µUhha-LÚ pa-a-ir “Some (potential) persons to be resettled went across the sea with Uhhaziti” KBo 3.4 ii 36, ed. AM 52f.; cf. ibid. ii 31-32 ed. AM 50f.; see also KUB 19.37 ii 10, ed. AM 168f. 
22' pariyan pai- “to go across to” (w. d.-l. and -kan) — ¢
a' w. d.-l. expressed: nÚašÚkan man INA KUR ÓUR.SAGŠakaddunuwa parēan pa-iz-zi “If he goes across to Mt. Šakaddunuwa-Land” HKM 46 obv. 8-9 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsLaroche 30, and HBM 200f.; nuÚkan INA URUMārišta pāriyan pa-a-un “I went across to Marišta” KBo 16.17 iii 21-22 (AM), ed. Otten, MIO 3:172-174; cf. KUB 14.16 ii 20, ed. AM 44f. 
b' w. d.-l. unexpressed: ammukÚmaÚzaÚkan pariyan pa-a-u-wa-[an-zi] UL tarnaš “You did not let me go across” KUB 23.87:10-11 (letter); cf. in broken context nÚat x[…] pariyan pa-a-e-er KBo 18.9:56 (letter), ed. THeth 16:141f.; for pariyan pai-w. acc. (“to go across/traverse [something])” see 1 e 3', above. 
23' āppa parza pai- “to go backwards”: [… ap]ēÚma āppa parza pa-a-an-zi [A]ŠARÚŠUNU appānzi “Those, however, go backwards and take up their positions (again)” IBoT 2.28 ii? 7-8 (OH or MH/ NS?). 
33

24' peran pai- (without local particle) — a' “to go in front”: “[Or if] you go to attack [the …]” peranÚma pa-iz-zi “but he goes in front” (… do not harm him) KUB 23.77a rev. 11 (treaty w. Kaška, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 124. 
b' “to go ahead”: GAL LÚ.MEŠDUB.SAR GIŠ GA[L DUMU].≠MEŠ É.±GAL LÚDUB.SAR LÚ dU LÚGUDU⁄¤Úya peran GIŠdaha[nqa] pa-a-an-zi “The chief of the wood-tablet-scribes, the chief of the palace servants, the scribe, the ‘man-of-the-Stormgod,’ and the GUDU⁄¤-priest go ahead to the da~ hanga-grove” KUB 58.11 obv. 3-4 (fest.), ed. Haas, KN 214f. 
25' šarā pai- “to go up to” (w. d.-l.) — a' without local particles: šÚaš šarā URU-≠ya± pa-it “He went up to the city” KBo 22.2 rev. 14 (Zalpa text, OS), ed. StBoT 17:12f.; “The king steps into the chariot” § ta šarā šarazzi NA›ZI.KIN pa-iz-zi “He goes up to the upper huwaši-stela” KUB 10.18 i 13-14 (spring fest. at Tippuwa, OH/NS); “On the first day the priest, ‘mother-of-god,’ (and) the female crier bathe” nÚ at INA É DINGIR-LIM UGU pa-a-an-zi “They go up to the temple” KBo 2.8 i 21 (cult inv., NH); cf. KUB 
7.25 i 7 (OH/NS); KBo 10.27 iii 10-11 (NS); KBo 23.92 ii 1617 (all fest.). 
b' w. -ašta: nÚašta URUÓattuši šarā GIŠhulugannit¢pa-iz-zi “He goes up to Óattuša by cart” KBo 10.20 i 22-23 (ANDAÓŠUM outline, OH/NS); cf. ibid. i 13-14; IBoT 3.40:9-10 (ANDAÓŠUM fest.); “The king sits down in the cart” tÚašta šarā URUÓatt[uši] pa-iz-zi “By that means (-ašta) goes up to Óattuša” IBoT 1.27:2-3 + KUB 20.47 i 11-12 (spring fest in Tippuwa, OH). 
c' w. -kan: lukkattiÚmaÚkan mahhan dUTU-ŠI INA ÓUR.SAGPiškurunuwa šarā pa-iz-zi “In the morning when the king goes up to Mt. Piškurunuwa” KBo 
24.118 vi 20-21 (NH); cf. KUB 49.74:15; KUB 5.1 i 34, passim (all oracle questions, NH); nuÚwarÚašÚkan nepiši [LU~ GAL-ezn]anni UGU pa-id-du “Let him go up to heaven for [king]ship” KUB 33.93 iii left side 19 + right side 30 (Ullik. IA iii 19, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:152f.; cf. similar KBo 26.65 iv 26-27 (Ullik. IIIA); nuÚkan LUGALuš šuhhi šarā pa-iz-zi (dupl. pa-a-iz-zi) “The king goes up to the roof” KUB 6.45 i 9 (introduction to prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 i 9; cf. KUB 24.5 obv. 12 (rit., NH); ≠šu±mašÚwaÚkan GIŠNÁ-aš UGU pa-it “He 

pai- A 1 j 27' b' 

went up to your (pl., the gods’) bed” KUB 16.16 rev. 18 (oracle question, NH); nÚašÚkan pargauwaš auriyaš šarā pa-i[t] “He went up to the high towers” KUB 
33.106 ii 4 (Ullik. IIIA, NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f.; cf. KUB 20.76 iv 6-7 (OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.52 ii 23-24 (fest., OH/NS), cf. GIŠparanalla-; nuÚkan G‰R-it šarā pa-a-uu[n] “I went up on foot” KUB 14.3 i 24 (Taw., NH); nÚatÚkan gurda UGU pa-a-an-zi “They go up to the citadel” KUB 56.51 i 18 (fest.). 
d' w. -šan: “When Anu finished speaking” nÚ ašÚšan šarā AN-ši p[a-it] “He went up to the sky” KUB 33.120 i 37 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), translit. Myth. 155, tr. MAW 157, Hittite Myths 41; [nuÚ]ššan LÚtapr[iyaš AN]A ≠É± dIM tapriti šarā pa-iz-zi “The man of the tapri goes up to the temple of the Stormgod to the tapri” KBo 17.103 rev. 27 + KUB 46.48 rev. 12 (rit., NH). 
e' other: [(nÚaš mān) INA] É.DINGIR-LIM šarā pa-a-u-wa-aš “If he is (a man of, sc. w. permission for) going up to the temple” KUB 13.5 ii 12 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.63 i 17, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 34f.; for šarā pai-+ acc. see 1 e 4', above. 
26' āppan šarā pai- “to go up from behind”: URUTani<zila> andan URUZiqapallaza EGIR UGU! ≠pa-iz±-zi “Shall he go up into T. from the rear (starting) from Z.?” KUB 5.1 l.e. left col. 1-2 (oracle question, NH), ed. Ünal, THeth 4:92f.; cf. nÚanÚkan URUŠarkatta~ šenazaÚma EGIR UGU RA-zi ibid. l.e. rt. 1. 
27' tapuša pai- “to go to the side” — a' (in literal sense), w. loc. or all. noun: nÚašta LUGAL-uš INA É dL[UGAL?] tapuša pa-iz-zi “The king goes to the side of the Temple of Š[arruma(?)]” KUB 
41.48 iii 16-17 (fest.); cf. [n]Úaš[t]a LÚSANGA tapūš[a] INA É dÓebat pa-iz-zi KUB 43.54 v 1-2 (fest.); LÚSAN~ GAÚmaÚkan INA É dU tapuša pa-iz-zi “But the priest goes to the side of the temple of Teššub” ibid. v 8-9; cf. KUB 46.47 rev. 4 and KUB 55.58 obv. 15; note however nu kuitman UZUN´G.GIG INA É dÓebat tapuša zēri KUB 
43.54 v 7-8 without -kan, similarly ABoT 29 ii 14-15 w. -kan where tapuša can hardly be construed w. the verb; cf. also KBo 24.62:5-6. 
b' “to cease to function” (without loc. or all. noun): “In my sleep, the hand of a god came upon me” KAZU-iššÚaÚmuÚkan tapūša pa-it “And my mouth went to the side” KBo 4.2 iii 47 (Murš. II speech loss), ed. MSpr. 4f., Lebrun, Hethitica 6:104, 110; nuÚššiÚ 

34

pai- A 1 j 27' b' 

kan KAZU-iš tapuša pa-≠it± IGI.ÓI.A-wa KI.MIN 9 UZUÚR.ÓI.A KI.MIN “His mouth ceased to function, (his) eyes ceased to function, (his) nine body parts ceased to function” KUB 44.4 rev. 7-8 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:176f.; cf. discussions in MSpr. 23-27 and StBoT 29:185 w. n. 493. 
k. w. preverb/adverb in bird oracles (pai- “to go,” i.e., to fly away from the viewer contrasts w. uwa- “to come,” i.e., to fly toward the viewer) (cf. Archi, SMEA 16:151-153), NH — 1' arha pai- “to fly away” (without local particle): “(The eagle) flew in on the kuštai-side […]” nÚaš [a]rha pa-it “then it flew away” KUB 22.30 obv.? 9; cf. 1 j 9' a', above. 
2' peran arha pai- “to fly away from in front,” always w. -kan: nÚašÚkan pe.-an arha pa-it “(The bird) flew away from in front” KUB 5.17 ii 16; cf. nÚatÚkan pe.-an arha pa-a-ir ibid. ii 19, both passim; nÚašÚkan pe. arha pa-it KUB 5.22:37, 41, KUB 22.7 obv. 8, cf. Ünal, RHA XXXI:37 (“‘nach vorne wegfliegen,’ d.h. zuerst nach vorne, vor den Beschauer und dann abfliegen”), Archi, SMEA 16:153 (“andare via in avanti”). This term always occurs as the final action performed by an observed bird (or birds). 
3' tarwiyalli peran arha pai-: TI°MUŠENÚkan tar.li pi. arha pa-it KUB 5.22:24. 
4' takšan (2-an) arha pai- “to fly off down the middle” (without local particle): “The harrani-bird flew in on the good-side in front” nÚaš 2-an arha pa-it “It flew off down the middle. (The haštapibird, however, …)” KBo 2.6 iv 19, passim; Archi, SMEA 16:153, tr. “andare via a mezz’aria.” Ünal, RHA XXXI:37, tr. “halbwegs wegfliegen, d.h. sich nicht ganz entfernen, oder den Fluš bzw. eine Markierung(?) nicht erreichen.” 
5' GUN-li takšan arha pai- “to fly off down the middle GUN-li”: [aršint]athiš GUN-li 2-an arha pa-it KUB 16.55 i 7; TI°MUŠENÚma GUN-li 2-an arha [pait] KUB 49.41 iv 4. 
6' zilawan aššuwaz pai- “to fly off zilawan on the good side (= oraculum??)”: “The eagle flew in up from the river in front on the good-side. Behind the river it flew in” nÚaš zilawan aššuwaz pa-it “It flew (away) zilawan from the good side” KUB 18.5 ii 14; and passim in this text only; all exx. end the description of a bird’s behavior except: “The maršanašši

pai- A 1 k 10' 
bird which we saw” nÚaš zilawan aššuwaz pa-it nÚ aš munaittat “It went zilawan on the good side. It hid itself” ibid. + KUB 49.13 i 26-27; cf. Archi, SMEA 16:161 (“andare da questa parte (con volo) bello”), Ünal, RHA XXXI 
31:37 (“diesseitig(?) vom Günstigen (weg)fliegen”); opposite of zilawan kuštayaz pai- q.v. 
7' zilawan kuštayaz/kuštayati pai- “to fly off zil~ awan on the kuštai-side”: “We saw two maršanaššibirds tarwiyalan” 1-aš zi.-an kuš. pa-it KUB 49.18 i 7 and passim; it usually ends the recorded actions of a particular bird except for KUB 18.5 i 37-38, where the birds subsequently conceal themselves; cf. Archi, SMEA 16:177 (“andare da questa parte (con volo) basso”), ibid. 151; kuš(tayaz)/kuš(ta~ yati) is the opposite of aššuwaz. 
8' pariyan pai-(w. acc.), “to fly off across (something)”: “We saw the pattarpalhi-bird behind the river tarwiyallan” nÚašÚkan ´D-an pariyan pa-it “It flew off across the river” KUB 18.5 i 33-34; cf. 1 e 3', above. 
9' tarwiyalli(a)- pariyan pai- or pariyan tar~ wiyalli(a)-pai- “to fly off across tarwiyalli-”: 2 TI°MUŠEN tar.-liuš pa.-an pa-a-ir KUB 22.45 obv. 17; 2 kantaršiuš tar.-li.ÓI.A-uš pa.-an pa-≠e±-[er] KUB 49.11 ii 13; […] ≠TI°±MUŠENÚya tar.-lian NIMUR nÚat pa.an tar.-liuš pa-a-ir “[An x-bird] and an eagle we saw tarwiyalli-. They went across tarwiyalli-” KUB 
16.69 obv. 12; “We saw a halwašši-bird GUN-li-an. It flew in up from behind on the good-side by a good flight” nÚaš tar.-li (eras.) pa.-an pa-it “It flew off across tarwiyalli-” KUB 16.46 ii 13, passim; 1 TI°MUŠENÚma pariyawan taru.-an uit nÚašÚkan ´Dan pariyan taru.-an pa-it “One eagle came across(?) tarwiyallian. It flew off across the river tar~ wiyallian” KUB 18.5 i 39-40; cf. ibid. ii 39; “We saw a šalwini-bird GUN-lian. It flew in on the kuštai-side in front” nÚaš pa.-an tar.-li pa-it “It flew off across tarwiyalli” KUB 49.19 iii 33, passim; [uria]nnešMUŠEN taru. pari. pa-it KBo 15.28 obv. 9 (letter concerning bird oracles). The phrase occurs either as t. p. or p. t.; the order seems irrelevant. -kan occurs only in the sentence where pariyan takes an accusative object, and never in the numerous exx. where the object is unexpressed. 
10' GUN-li pariyan pai-or pariyan GUN-li pai“to fly off across GUN-li”: TI°MUŠEN GUN-li pa.-an 
35

pa-it KUB 5.24 ii 48-49, passim; šalwayašÚma GUN pa~ rian pa-[it] KUB 5.22:24; “Two eagles […]” [n]Úat pa.-an GUN-lian pa-a-ir KUB 22.30 obv.? 5; ipar~ waššišÚma aramnaza dUTU-un GUN-li pa.-an pa-it “An iparwašši-bird (or?) an aramnaza-bird …” KUB 18.9 ii 9-10 (all bird oracles, NH). 
11' pariyawan pai- “to fly across(?)”: […] ≠n±Ú aš pariyawan pa-it KBo 24.130 i 15 (NH). For discussion of pariyan vs pariyawan see pariyawan. 
12' pariyan tarwiyalli-pai-: see tarwiyalli pari~ yan pai-(k 9', above). 
13' pariyawan tarwiyallian pai- “to fly off across (?) t.”: “We saw another maršanašši-bird behind the river tarwiyallian. It flew in across (pariyan) the river tarwiyallian” nammaÚaš pariyawan taru.an pa-i[t] “Then it flew off across(?) tarwiyallian” KUB 18.5 + KUB 49.13 i 24-25, cf. ibid. ii 11, 16, 23, 27-28, 35, iii 9, 15. For a discussion of pariyan vs pariyawan see pari~ yawan. 
14' zilawan tarwiyalli(an) pai- “to fly off zila~ wan tarwiyallian”: [… z]i.-an tar.-li pa-it KBo 24.131 rev. 19; ≠pattarpalhiš± [o o o o o o o] ≠zila±wan taru.an pa-it KUB 18.5 iii 2-3. 
15' zilawan pai- “to fly off zilawan”: nÚaš zi.-an pa-it KUB 52.21 i 3. 
16' GUN-li zilawan pai- “to fly off GUN-li zila~ wan”: “We saw GUN-lian two haštapi-birds. [One] …” 1-ašÚma GUN-li zi.-an pa-it “The other, however, went GUN-li zilawan” KUB 22.30 rev. 10; cf. KUB 
49.19 ii 5 and perhaps also KUB 49.9 ii 25 and KUB 49.60 i 8. 
l. in snake oracles — 1' without preverb/adverb, but w. -kan (cf. 1 i 4', above): nÚašÚkan TI-anni pa-it nÚašÚkan ANA MU.KAM.ÓI.A G´D.DA pa-it “It (the snake) went to ‘life.’ It went to ‘long years.’ (Another snake seized a fish at ‘the brazier’)” KUB 
18.6 iv 3-4. 
2' anda pai-— a' without local particle: “The snake” … DINGIR.MEŠ-aš išgaratar anda pa-it IBoT 1.33:41, also ibid. 81, but cf. ibid. 56, 74 w. -kan; cf. 1 j 1' a' 1'', above. 
b' w. -kan: MUŠ ŠUM LUGALÚmaÚkan ŠÀ É. LUGAL pa-it “The snake ‘of the name of the king’ went into the ‘king’s house’” KUB 18.6 iv 9-10; cf. IBoT 

pai- A 2 d 1' 

1.33:55-56, 74 (w. -kan) and 41, 81 without -kan, cited in a', above; cf. 1 j 1' a' 2'', above. 
3' andan pai-(without local particle): parāÚ maÚaš išhanaš lenkiyaš ANA NA›ZI.KIN andan pa-it “Furthermore it (the snake) went into ‘the hu~ waši-stela of the oath of/and the blood’” KUB 22.38 i 6-7, ed. Laroche, RA 52:150f.; cf. 1 j 4' a', above. 
4' kattan pai-(w. d.-l., without local particle): parāÚmaÚaš ANA GIDIM.ÓI.A GAM-an pa-it “Next it (the snake) went into the presence of ‘the Dead Ones’” KUB 22.38 i 9-10, ed. Laroche, RA 52:151; cf. 1 j 15' b', above. 
2. “to pass/go past (something)” — a. without preverb/adverb, w. acc. and -kan: nuÚkan kuit AŠRU pa-iz-zi-ya kuitÚmaÚkan AŠRU nūwa šer ar[ha] iyaddari “Because he even passes (the) place yet still walks all over the place, (for that reason I do not believe that matter)” KUB 19.23 rev. 8-9 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:27-29. 

b. ā

ppan pai-“to pass behind” (w. acc., without local particle): “The king will come back down from Mt. Óaharwa and go into Aštigurqa” nu tak~ šatar EGIR-an pa-iz-zi “He will pass behind the plain” KUB 5.1 iv 65-66 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:88f. (“Hinterher geht sie (die Majestät) auf die Ebene”). 

c. ā

ppan arha pai- “to pass behind” (w. acc., all preserved exx. w. -kan): in broken context KUB 26.71 i 13 (Anitta text, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:14f. (“umging”); “When they bring the defendant in line with the guards, the guard who is on the outside” apāšÚaÚ kan šarkantin EGIR-an(-)arha pa-iz-zi nÚaš šar~ kant® arahza ZAG-az iyannai “passes behind the defendant and walks on the outside right of the defendant” IBoT 1.36 iii 21-22 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f.; nÚašÚkan šarkantin peran arha UL pa-izzi EGIR-an arhaÚašÚkan pa-iz-zi “He does not pass in front of the defendant; he passes behind” ibid. iii 32-33, ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:194f., AS 24:26f.; nÚašÚkan É dMizzulla EGIR-an arha pa-iz-zi “He (i.e., the king) passes behind the temple of Mizzulla” KBo 
30.164 iii 10-11 (NH), ed. as 174/t in Alp, Tempel 16 (differently); cf. KBo 18.146 obv. 6; KBo 26.117:4. 
d. ištarna arha pai- “to go/pass through” (w. acc. and -kan) — 1' subject: people: “Across the riv

36

er they cut in half a man, a billy-goat, a puppy, and a piglet. They place half on this side and half on that side. Then they make a gate of hawthorn … They light a fire on either side of the gate” nuÚkan ÉRIN.MEŠ ištarna arha pa-≠an±-zi “And the troops go/pass through” KUB 17.28 iv 53 (rit. for a defeated army, MH/NS); cf. KBo 2.3 iii 24-25 + IBoT 4.13 rev. 7-8 (1Mašt., MH/NS); “Do not let an Assyrian merchant into your land” KURÚKAÚašÚkan ištarna arha lē pa-iz-zi “Let him not pass through your land” KUB 23.1 iv 17 (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16:16f.; “The city of Kattimuwa was at peace with me” nÚanÚkan ištarna arha pa-a-un “I went through it (and struck Taggašta)” KBo 5.8 i 27, ed. AM 148f.; cf. ibid. i 30; nuÚ ≠kan± URUx[… t]akšulanni išt[arna a]rha pa-iz-z[i] “He will go through GN in peace” KUB 22.25 obv. 1314 (oracle question, NH); nuÚkan ÓUR.SAGMazzawantan išta[rna ar]ha pa-iz-zi “He will go through (i.e., via) Mt. Mazzawantan” KBo 16.53 obv. 9 (itinerary); cf. KUB 34.43 obv.? 4; cf. KUB 34.16 ii 8 (lunar omen protasis, OH/NS); LUGAL-ušÚkan ŠA LÚ dIM GIŠharpuš iš~ tarna arha pa-iz-zi “The king passes through the middle of the piles of the Man-of-the-Stormgod” KUB 58.22 i 11-12 (nuntarriyašhaš fest.), ed. Popko, AoF 13: 220:25f. 
2' subject roads: 1 A.ŠÀ luliyašhaš 2 KASKAL. ÓI.AÚkan ištarna arha pa-an-zi “1 field of marshland, two roads go through it” KUB 8.75 ii 13 (field list, NH), ed. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:12f. 
e. kattan arha pai- “to pass under, below” — 1' 
w. acc. — a' w. -ašta: nÚašta EN.S´SKUR apēa KÁ.GAL.ÓI.A kattan arha [p]a-iz-zi “The patient passes under those gates” KBo 23.43 iii 11-12 + KBo 

24.63 iii 4-5 (rit.); cf. KUB 45.26 ii 3 (rit.). 

b' w. -kan: nuÚ≠kan± URUŠuppiluliyan GAM-an arha pa-iz-zi “He passes below Šuppiluli” KUB 22.51 obv. 11 (oracle question, NH), w. dupl. KUB 50.108:8; pa~ rāÚmaÚašÚkan GIŠalanzaš KÁ.GAL kattan arha paiz-zi “Furthermore he passes under the gate of alanza-wood” KUB 7.53 iii 12-13 (Tunn., NH), ed. Tunn. 20f. iii 46-47. 
2' w. d.-l. and -kan: “O hawthorn, in the spring you clothe yourself in white, but in autumn you clothe yourself in blood-red” GUD-ušÚtaÚkkan katti[ti] arha pa-iz-zi … UDU-u[(š)Úm]aÚtaÚkkan 

pai- A 2 h 
kattiti [(arha) pa-iz-z(i)] “The ox passes under you (and you pull out its hair). The sheep passes under you and you pull out its fleece” KUB 33.54:14-16 + KUB 33.47:2 (missing deities, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 33.48:12 and par. KUB 17.10 iv 1-2 (OH/MS), translit. Myth. 79 and 36 respectively; cf. par. [UD]U?-ušÚtaÚkkan kattan arha pa-iz-zi KUB 7.53 iii 1 (Tunn., NH); UDUÚšiÚkan kattan a[rha pa-iz-zi] “The [she]ep passes under it (the hawthorn), (and it pulls out its wool)” GUDÚšiÚkan kattan ar[ha pa-iz-zi] “the ox passes under it (and it pulls out its hair)” KUB 34.76 i 4-6 (missing goddess, NS), and cf. in broken context KBo 8.35 iii 18 (Kaška treaty, MH/MS). 
f. peran arha pai- “to pass in front of” — 1' w. acc. and -kan (opp. of ā
ppan arha): nÚašÚkan šar~ kantin peran arha UL pa-iz-zi EGIR-an arhaÚašÚ kan pa-iz-zi “He does not pass in front of the defendant; he passes behind” IBoT 1.36 iii 32-33 (instr. for MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:26f.; LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDU_TIÚ maÚašÚkan peran arha UL pa-iz-zi “But he does not pass in front of the guards” ibid. iii 29. 
2' w. d.-l. and -kan: “The GUDU⁄¤-priests of Arinna and the chamberlain come” [nÚa]tÚkan LUGAL-i peran arha pa-a-an-zi “They pass in front of the king” KBo 25.176 rev. 19 (KI.LAM outline, OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:94. 
3' (without acc. or d.-l.): LU[GAL]-ušÚkan per~ an arha pa-iz-z[i] “The king passes in front” KBo 
10.27 iii 8 (fest., NS); cf. KUB 25.18 ii 9-10 (ANDAÓŠUM fest.); KUB 44.39 ii? 7 (ANDAÓŠUM fest. outline); peran arha i-it DUMU-mit lēÚmu ≠per±an šarā arta≠ti± “Pass in front, my son. Do not stand up in front of me” KBo 26.65 iv 9-10 (Ullik. III A), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:28f., CHD -mi- e 2' b' (“go ahead”). 
	g. šer arha pai- “to pass over” (w. acc. and -kan): some exx. cited below in 5 d may have this meaning and belong here. 
	h. ištarna pai- “to pass through” (w. acc. and -kan): [(nÚašÚkan)] ≠pahhu±r ištarna (dupl. adds arha) pa-iz-[(zi)] “He passes through the fire” KBo 

9.106 iii 20, w. dupl. 2Mašt. iv 6 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:364f. This is probably a contraction or mistake for ištarna arha pai-. 
37

3. “to go by, pass” (of time) — a. without prev.: mān 1 ME.KAM MU.KAM pa-it “When the one-hundredth year passed” KBo 3.20 i 3 (Naram-Sin legend, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:50f.; mašiēš MU.ÓI.A pa-a-ir “How many years have passed” KUB 1.16 iii 44 (edict, Óatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14f.; ITU.1.KAM ITU.[2. KAM ITU.3.KAM pa-it] [IT]U.4.KAM ITU.5. KAM ITU.6.KAM pa-it [ITU.7.KAM] ITU.8.KAM ITU.9.KAM pa-it nu ITU.10.KA[M tiyat] “The first, [second, and third] months [passed]. The fourth, fifth, and sixth months passed. The [seventh,] eighth, and ninth months passed. The tenth month [arrived] (and in the tenth month the earth began to cry out in labor … She bore children)” KUB 33.120 iv 4-6 + KUB 33.119:13-15 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), translit. Myth. 160, tr. Hittite Myths 43; cf. KUB 36.60 iii 2-4 + KUB 24.8 iii 1-3 (Appu story, pre-NH/NS), ed. StBoT 14:10f.; INA ITU.4.KAM UD.4.KAM pa-iz-zi ša[ka~ eššÚa kiša] “In the fourth month the fourth day passes and an o[men occurs]” KUB 8.2 obv. 7, passim (lunar signs, OH/NS); (When Inara went out, she instructed Óupašiya not to look out of the window) mān UD.20.KAM pa-it “When the twentieth day passed (he looked out from the window)” KUB 17.6 i 23 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:14, 19; cf. KUB 
29.4 i 54 (rit., NH); mahhanÚmaÚkan ANA UD-MI 2 1/2 kipeššar 5 wakšur pa-iz-zi “When for the day two and one-half gipeššar and five wakšur (of time) pass” KUB 30.31 i 6-7 (rit., NH) □ on the units of time see van den Hout, RLA 7:517-522; cf. wizzapant- “year-passed” > “old.” 
b. ā
ppanda pai-: “I completely forgot about that matter” mahhanÚma uēr MU.ÓI.A-uš EGIR-anda pa-a-ir “But as the years proceeded to pass” KBo 
4.2 iii 45 (Murš. II speech loss) □ uer is “phraseological” here, contra StBoT 17:23; cf. 1 j 8', above. 
c. ištarna pai-: “The queen of Kaniš bore thirty sons in one year …” § mān MU.ÓI.A ištarna pa-air “When the years passed, (the queen bore thirty daughters)” KBo 22.2 obv. 6 (Zalpa story, OS), ed. StBoT 17:6f. □ ištarna means that years “intervened”; “On the second day, however, they offer 2 tuhalzi” nÚašta apāš UD-az ištarna pa-iz-zi “That day goes by. (On the third day however …)” KBo 5.1 i 57 (MH/NS), ed. Pap. 4*-5* (“geht zwischendrein dahin”); cf. UD-azÚmaÚkan ištarna pa-iz-zi ibid. iv 34, tr. Götze, ArOr 5:18 (“der Tag 

pai- A 5 b 

aber geht inmitten hin”); INA UD.2.KAMÚma … išpa[(ntiÚma)] … § lukkattaÚmaÚkan UD-az iš~ t[(arna)] pa-iz-zi … § INA UD.3.KAMÚma … “On the second day … At night, however, … § The next morning the day passes … § On the third day, however, …” KBo 23.2 ii 5-11 (Ammihatna’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 23.1 i 56-ii 1; cf. KUB 17.12 ii 18-19 (rit.); KUB 27.1 i 1, 8-9, 20 (rit., NH); [nuÚka]n mēhur ištarna pa-iz-zi “Time passes” KBo 4.14 iii 4 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II); cf. UD.KAMÚmaÚkan ištarna iyattari “but a day passes” KUB 
44.61 obv. 6 (StBoT 17:23 n. 35 as Bo 291). 
4. to flow: [šuhhaz]aÚkan mahhan wātar katt[(a ā
ršzi) nÚat namma EGIR-pa GIŠŠ]EN-li UL pa-iz-zi “As water flows down from [the roof] (and) it does not flow (lit. ‘go’) [back up] the pipe [again,]” (let these evils pour out and may they not come back again) KUB 7.41 obv. 29-30 (underworld deities rit., MH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 i 8-9 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f.; nu apāt ēšhar kuwapi pa-iz-z[i] “When/where that blood flows” KUB 14.3 iv 52 (Taw., NH), ed. AU 18f. 
5. (idiomatic uses) — a. “(for a male) to go to (a female)” (= “have sexual intercourse with”) — 1' female in d.-l. w. -šan: nu 8? TUR.MEŠ.NITA uwadanzi MUNUS-niÚššan kuiēš nāui pa-a-an-zi “They bring eight boys who have not yet had sexual intercourse with (lit. gone to) a woman” KUB 9.31 ii 9-10 (Zarpiya’s rit. MH/NS); ANA UDU.U⁄‚ÚmaÚššan UDU.ŠIR-aš kuedani nā
wi pa!-a-iz-zi (var. pa-iz-zi) KUB 9.32 ii 21-22 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 41.17 iv 17-18, ed. Dinçol, Belleten XLIX/193:21, 26; 3 GUD.MAÓ kuēšÚšan ANA G[UDÁ]B iškiša nawi pa-a-an-te-eš 18 U[DU].ŠIR kuišÚšan ANA UDU.U⁄‚ iškiša nā
wi pa-a-an-te-eš “Three bulls which have not yet had sexual intercourse with (lit. gone to the back of) a cow and eighteen rams which have not yet had sexual intercourse with (lit. gone to the back of) a ewe” KUB 17.28 iii 26-29 (rit., MH/NS); for maninkuwan pai- w. a sexual connotation cf. maninkuwan 1 b 4' b'. 
2' female Akkadographically construed w. ITTI, without -šan: nÚaš ITTI MUNUS-TI QA_TAMMA pa-id-du “Let him have sexual intercourse with (lit. go to) a woman” KUB 13.4 iii 70 (instr. for priests, MH/ NS), ed. Chrest. 160f., Süel, Direktif Metni 70f. 
b. andan pai- “to transfer one’s allegiance to, resort to, join with, recognize the lordship of”: (If 

38

sometime evil happens to His Majesty, for His Majesty has many brothers. If you somehow do this:) [nuÚk(an ≠tamē±dani) k]uedanikki andan pa-it-t[(eni)] “You transfer your allegiance(?) to someone else (You say: ‘the one whom we are taking up is not a son of our lord.’ Do not do this thing. Protect only the seed of His Majesty for lordship)” andaÚ kan tamēda[(ni l≠e± kuedanikki) pa-(i)]t-te-ni “Do not transfer your allegiance to anyone else” KUB 
26.1 i 19-20, 25-26 (SAG 1 instr., NH), w. dupl. KUB 26.8 i 10-11, 16-17, cf. ibid. i 28f., ed. Dienstanw. 9 w. n. on p. 18 (“zu irgendeinem anderen Menschen hineingehen” = “dessen Herrschaftsansprüche anerkennen und sich ihm unterstellen”). 
c. peran āppa pai- “to have free access to(?)”: EN[.SISKUR(?) …] UL peran EGIR-pa pa-iz-zi “The wor[shiper(?) …] does not have free access(?)” KUB 46.39 iii 17-18 (rit., NH); kuitÚat imma kuit šahhan luzzi nuÚšmaš peran EGIR-pa lē kuiški pa-iz-zi ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URU.dU-taššaÚašÚkan EGIR-an arawahhun “Whatever šahhan and luzzi there are, let no one have free access to them; I have exempted them for the gods of Tarhuntašša” Bronze Tablet iii 54-56 (treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:22f.; […] EN MAD[GA]LTI ELKI MAŠKIM URUKI ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ wehannaš lē kuiški peran EGIR-p[a paizzi] KBo 6.28 rev. 24-25 (edict, Óatt. III); cf. also w. uwa-: […-]pi peran EGIR-pa uizz[i …] / […]-za DINGIR-LUM :malhašša x[…] / […] karpzi KUB 56.20:14-16. 
d. šer arha pai- “to ignore/neglect something” 
(w. -kan) (for an ex. of arha pai-w. šer see 1 j 9' b', above) 
— 1' w. acc. and -ašta: “I returned to Nerik to sacrifice to the gods. When some weapon was given to me by the god and someone revolted against me” nÚašta apādan šer arha pa-a-u-un “I ig
t penored/neglected that place” KUB 36.87 iii 9-10 (prayer, NH), ed. Haas, KN 190f. 
2' w. acc. and -kan: “We asked the oracle concerning the Urhi-Teššub who was ascertained and [the children of] (said) Urhi-Teššub were ascertained. Because it was ascertained (to be) on account of the … concerning his children” nuÚkan ABI dUTU-ŠI [nam]ma kuitki šer arha pa-it nÚatÚ kan zāiš “And the father of His Majesty further(?) ignored(?) something and passed over it. (These were ascertained)” KUB 50.6 iii 35-36 (oracle question, NH); cf. further 2 g, above; “When later some year ar

pai- A 5 f 
rived and struck me (between) the eyes in (lit. by means of) an oracle” ammukÚmaÚkan apaddÚaya šer arha pa-a-u-un “I, however, ignored/neglected that too” KUB 36.87 iii 14-15 (prayer, NH), ed. Haas, KN 190f. (“ging ich … weg”), Werner, BiOr 14:233; for KBo 16.6 iii 6 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. A: KUB 14.29 i 16, C: KBo 10.17 i 8, where šer is a postpositional, and the resulting meaning is different from these exx., see 1 j 9' b', above. 
3' w. acc. without local particle; uncertain: “The Stormgod of Nerik, [my lord] has spoken … words” nÚat e[…] / [Z]I-nit šer arha pa-a-u-[un] “and I deliberately ignored/neglected it (-at) […]” KUB 36.87 iv 4-5 (prayer, NH), ed. Haas, KN 192f. (who restores this as two sentences). 
e. katta pai- “to be lost/destroyed” (cf. German: zugrundegehen): UR[UÓ]al[i]nzuwaš URU-aš karū
i~ liyaš ANA LUGAL.MEŠ […] katta pa-≠a±-an-za ēšta DINGIR.MEŠ-tarrÚa katta pa-a-an ēš≠ta± dUTU-ŠI [µ]Tudhaliyaš URU-LUM EGIR-pa wedaš DINGIR.ME[Š-tarrÚa] EGIR-pa kišan iēr “The city of Óalinzuwa was ruined for the ancient kings. The images of the deities were lost. His Majesty Tudhaliya rebuilt the city and remade the images of the deities as follows” KUB 38.35 i 1-4 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:19f.; katta pa-a-u-aš uttar šāg~ ≠ga±hhi “I know about a case of loss. (Šaušgatti took […])” KUB 34.45 + KBo 16.63 i 7 (court record, early NS), ed. StBoT 4:50f. (“einen Fall von Mitlaufen-Lassen”); “They will set it right again” katta pa-a-an-taÚma kue […] “That which is lost […] (There also they shall set it right)” KBo 11.1 rev. 5 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:109, 118 (“those [belongings(?)] that went with [him/them]”); DINGIR.MEŠ-niÚ ma kuitki GAM pa-a-an-ti šer TUKU[.TUKU-]x nu DINGIR.MEŠ-tar kuit GAM pa-it [… ŠA?] dUTU-ŠI GAM pa-it “[…] angry somehow on account of the lost divine image. Because the divine image got lost (or: the divine image which got lost) [… of] His Majesty got lost” KBo 12.58 + KBo 13.162 obv. 1112 (prayer); DINGIR-LUM GAM pa-a-an-za AT 454 
	l.e. vi 3 (oracle question concerning cult inv.); cf. KBo 13.231 rev. 3, 8 and KUB 38.29 obv. 10 (both cult inv.); for katta pai“to go down” see 1 j 13', above. 
	f. :allal(l)a pai- “to go to the pit(?)/inferno(?)” > “to commit treason”: “If some lands defect (kat~ tan nai-) from me” zikÚma :allallā pa-a-u-wa-ar 1

39

eda tiyauwar pediÚkan wašdumar lē šanhti “Do not you, however, seek to go to commit treason, to stand alone, or to ‘sin in place’” KBo 4.14 ii 63-65, cf. ii 56-61, 69-71 (edict, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:42f.; “If some land defects (kattan nai-) from me” našmaÚmuÚkan EN.MEŠ kuiēšqa :allal~ lā pa-a-an-zi “Or some lords become traitors(?) (and you join them saying ‘they forced me’)” ibid. 74; (If the situation ever becomes difficult, do not step out of the road and say:) :allallā pa-a-u-waan-ziÚwaÚza UGU linqanuwanza “‘I am sworn concerning commiting treason(?) (but not concerning this)’” ibid. ii 46-47; cf. ibid. ii 39, 43, 59-60, 70, 79-80; cf. AU 348 w. n. 2, ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:60f., HW2 1:54f., Puhvel, BiOr 36.58 and HED 1-2:27 (“resort to defection”); while both lands and people nai- “defect” (nai- 3 b), only people :allal(l)a pai-; for the meaning of allal(l)a- as a pit or the like cf. ≠n±ÚašÚkan alallā [m]aušdu “May he (the evil one) fall (in)to the pit” KBo 13.260 iii 37-38 (incant., NS), differently maušš-b 1' (treachery). 
g. arruša pai- “to go astray(?)”: “You lords who command the front line towers … Let no one knowingly infringe the border” ar≠ruša± pa-a-u-wa-ar šanhzi lē kuiški “Let no one seek to go astray(?), (either a criminal comes back in, and you let him in or you let him escape and go to another enemy land)” KUB 26.12 ii 16-17 (SAG 2 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 24f. (“abseits(?) gehen”); manÚmaÚkan LÚ. MEŠ URULalandaÚma kuiēš URU.DIDLI.ÓI.A ar~ rū[ša] pa-a-ir “But some towns (of) the people of Lalanda wanted to go astray” (people are treacherous … When my lord got sick in Ankuwa) apūšÚmaÚkan apiya karū ā
rruša pa-a-ir “They had already at that time gone astray” (… When they heard that my lord was still living) nÚatÚkan nam~ ma arruša UL [pāir] “they no longer went astray;” (now when they heard about the death of my lord) [nÚa]tÚkan (coll.) namma arrū[š]a pa-a-ir “they went astray again” KUB 19.23 rev. 10-11, 14, 16 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:28f., cf. Otten, ZA 71:219; cf. KUB 8.79 obv. 18-19 (letter, NH); cf. HW2 1:355a (“zum Verrat gehen”), Eichner, Die Sprache 24:69 (“ärschlings”), Puhvel, BiOr 36:58 and HED 1-2:182f. (“resort to secession,” lit. “to head for a split”); for *arušan paimi KUB 43.60 i 32 (HW2 1:355a) see 1 i 3', above. 

pai- B 

h. uttar pai-: “He who does harm among his (royal) brothers and sisters, let him look to the head of the king. Call an assembly” mānÚapa uttarÚ≠šet± pa-iz-zi “If he is found guilty, (lit. “if his matter (i.e., case)/its word (i.e., verdict) goes”) (let him pay with his head)” KBo 3.1 ii 51 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. Götze, AO 27/2:20 (“und wenn dann seine Sache zur Entscheidung kommt”), AU 189 (“Wenn seine Sache dahingeht” 
d.i. “vergeht, dahinschwindet” = “verloren gehen”), Chrest. 190f. (“If at that time he carries out his plan”), Carruba, Or NS 
	33:421 (“wenn seine Sache zutrifft (d.h. er für schuldig befunden wird)”), Eisele, Diss. 37f. (“Sobald dann i[h]r Wort (er)geht”), Beckman, JAOS 102:439f. (“If his deed comes to pass(?)”), Hoffner, JAOS 102:507f. (“If/when his case goes against him”), THeth 11:34f. (“Sobald i[h]r Wort (er)geht”); see also KUB 13.35 i 24, ed. StBoT 4:4f. 
	i. ANA DUGÚTUL pai-“to go into the pot (i.e., be executed)”: “If a slave rises up against his master” ANA DUGÚTUL pa-iz-zi “He shall go into the pot (i.e., he shall be executed)” KBo 6.26 ii 15 (Laws §173, OH/NS). 

Sommer, Heth. 1 (1920) 1f.; Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 42; Friedrich, HW (1952) 154f.; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 313, 380f., 460f., 464f., 558; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 132-134; Josephson, Part. (1972) 216-221, 325; Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 3234, 53-56, 74f., 114, 139f.; Disterheft, KZ 97 (1984) 221-227 (phraseological uwa-and pai-); Puhvel, HED 2 (1984) 325f. (for suppletive root i-in imp. forms). 
pai-B, pe-, piya-v.; to give, pay, grant, hand over; wr. syll., SUM and NADA_NU; from OS. 
a.	“to give something owed, required, or agreed upon” 
1'	purchase price, wages, hire, fee, tribute, bride price, dowry a' purchase price b' hire, wages (kuššan) c' tribute d' bride price e' dowry 
2' daughters, sisters, sons given in marriage
3' compensation, damages, or fine
4' substitutes
5' bribes, propitiatory gifts (maškan)
6' fulfillments of vows or agreements w. a deity
7' offerings to the gods
8' prizes or awards

	b.	“to give without being required to, to donate” 
	c.	“to physically hand over or pass (something to another)” 
	d.	“to temporarily give into someone’s care or custody, entrust” 

40

	e.	“to surrender, give up, yield up (someone/-thing demanded)” 
	
f.	“to supply, furnish” 
g.	“to put (an enemy) in someone’s power” 
h.	“to grant or bestow (intangibles)” 
i.	in the technical language of the KIN oracles 

j.	in idiomatic expressions 1' kunanna pai-“to give over for execution, condemn to 

death” 2' idalu hengan pai-“to give an evil death” 3' kurur pai-“to act in a hostile manner toward, lit.: to give 

enmity” 
4'	zahhain pai-“to give battle”
a' in general
b' w. menahhanda

5' kiššeran pai-“to give the hand” (a gesture of friendship) 6' SISKUR(.SISKUR).(ÓI.A)/mukeššar pai-“to perform 

(lit. give) an invocation ritual”
7' EZEN pai-“to provide (for) a festival”
8' NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM pai-“to administer an oath”
9' uttār pai-“to give words/instructions”

10' “to impart (ability)”
11' KASKAL-an pai-“to show the way(?)”
12' SIGﬁ pai-“to give a greeting”

k.	w. adv., prev., postpos. 
1'	anda pai
a' “to give in addition to (dat.)”
b' in broken context

2'	išši anda pai-“to incriminate someone (acc.) by means 

of false testimony(?)”
3' andan pai-“to give inward”
4' āppa pai

a'	“to give back”
1'' in general
2'' in treaties and diplomatic context

a'' by the Hittite king to tributaries b'' from tributary to tributary c'' from tributary to independent power d'' from independent king to independent king e'' from tributaries to the Hittite king f'' from one provincial official to another(?) 

b' “to entrust(?)”
5' āppan pai-“to remit”
6' āppanda pai-“to give afterwards”
7' [arha pai-]
8' kattan pai

a' w. dir. obj. “to betray someone to someone (dat.), abandon someone” b' other 9' parā paia' “to hand over, allow to be defeated or captured” (obj. enemies or opponents; subj. gods) 

b'	“to return, extradite (fugitives and criminals)” 1'' by subjects and tributaries to the Hittite king 2'' by Hittites to a tributary 
c' “to return (territory)” 

pai- B 
d'	“to hand on (booty)” 
e' “to hand on, hand over (objects in festivals and 
rituals)” 
f'	“to hand out” 
g' “to hand over (a newborn child to a midwife)” 
h'	“to give (a person for marriage) out (of the commu
nity)” 
i' “to dedicate (to a deity)” 
j'	“to give up (kingship), abdicate” 
10' āppa parā pai-“to hand back” 
11' šarā pai-“to hand upwards” 
act. pres. sg. 1 pé-e-eh-hé KUB 43.32 iii 7, iii 8 + KBo 17.4 iii 1, KBo 17.1 iii 31, (33) (all OS), KBo 17.56 rev. 3 (OH?/ MS), pé-e-eh-hi KBo 17.6 ii 7 (2Z), (8), iii (23), 24 (OS), Oettinger, Stammbildung 69, also claims a MH/MS ex., pé-eh-hi KUB 12.63 obv. 23, rev. 12 (OH/MS), KUB 14.1 obv. 77, rev. (89), KUB 23.72 obv. 40 (MH/MS), VBoT 2 (= EA 32) 9, KBo 
17.61 obv. 23, 24 (both MH/MS), KUB 19.31 ii 14 (Murš. II), KUB 21.38 i 13, 63 (Óatt. III), KBo 4.14 iv 57 (LNS) and passim in MS and NS, SUM-hi KUB 6.22 iii 11, KUB 31.71 ii 4, KUB 15.11 iii 12, KUB 60.118 obv. 8 (all NH), SUM-eh-hi KUB 22.30 obv.? 11 (NH). 
sg. 2 pa-it-ti KUB 23.77:(64) (MH/MS), KUB 12.60 i 19 (OH/NS), KBo 6.34 iii 46 (MH/NS), pa-iš-ti KBo 5.6 iii 13 (Murš. II), pé-eš-ti HT 1 iv 3 (MH/NS), KBo 5.4 rev. 23 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 59 (Muw. II), KUB 21.29 iii 5 (Óatt. III), KUB 

5.1 i 65, 68, ii 24, iii 10, 38, 62 (NH), KUB 33.117 i 5 (NH). 
sg. 3 pa-a-i KUB 36.106 obv. 4, KBo 17.4 ii 12, KBo 6.2 i 2, 10, passim (all OS), KUB 33.68 ii 20 (OH/MS), KUB 8.81 iii 1, 5, IBoT 1.36 ii 22, 41 (both MH/MS), KBo 22.56 rev. (17) (Tudh. IV), and passim in all periods, pa-i KUB 33.68 ii 21 (OH/MS), KBo 3.5 i 15 (MH/MS), KBo 29.149:18. 
pl. 1 pí-i-ú-e-ni KBo 16.27 i (9), 14, 15, KUB 23.77:56 (both MH/MS), KUB 40.76:(7) (OH or MH/MS), KBo 21.21 rev. 15, pí-ú-e-ni KUB 2.2 ii 50 (OH?/NS), KUB 17.21 iv 12, KBo 16.50 obv. 6 (both MH/MS), KBo 18.86 obv. 2, pí ?-u-e-ni KBo 7.33:3 (OH?), pí-ia-u-e-ni KUB 48.99:8 (OH/NS), KUB 
30.33 i 19 (MH/NS), KBo 5.8 iii 10, KUB 12.32 rt. col. 6 (both Murš. II), KUB 23.83 obv. 3, KUB 18.14 iii 20 (NH), pí-i-ia-u-e-ni KBo 4.4 iv (36), 48, KUB 19.30 iv 6, 10, KUB 19.3 i 12 (all Murš. II), KBo 14.86 iv 12 (OH/NS), SUM-u-e-ni KUB 
22.57 obv. 7, IBoT 2.129 obv. 32 (both NH), KBo 22.139:5, SUM-ni KUB 6.1 obv. 6, 8, 10 (NH). 
pl. 2 pí-iš-te-ni KUB 12.63 rev. 33 (OH/MS), KUB 23.77:6, 20, 51, 61, KUB 13.27 rev.! 28, KUB 31.105:(12), KUB 15.34 iii 38 (2Z) (all MH/MS), KUB 26.19 ii 28 (MH/NS), pé-eš-teni KUB 13.4 i 55, 57 (MH/NS), KUB 15.33b iii 3 (MH/NS), KBo 19.44 rev. 55 (Šupp. I), KUB 22.70 obv. 43, KUB 5.17 ii 9 (both NH). 
pl. 3 pí-an-zi KBo 22.2 rev. 12, KBo 20.16 “rev.?” (obv. i!) 9, 11, 15, 16, (17) (both OS), KBo 16.27 iii 10 (MH/MS), KUB 
25.36 ii 11, 12, 15 (OH/MS), KUB 22.70 obv. 35, 45, 50, 81, rev. 45, 53, 57 (NH), KUB 26.58 obv. 20, 26 (Óatt. III), KBo 
2.4 iii 11 (NH), KUB 15.5 i 21, iii 14, and passim in all periods, pí-ia-an-zi KBo 20.5 iii! 7 (OS), KUB 25.36 v 37 (OH/ 
41

MS), KUB 25.6 v 13 (OH/NS), KBo 4.10 obv. 11 (NH), KUB 
22.70 obv. 24, rev. 17 (NH), KBo 2.4 i 19, ii 14 (NH), KUB 
15.5 i 6, 17 (NH), KUB 25.23 l.e. 3 (Tudh. IV), SUM-an-zi KUB 26.43 obv. 67 (Tudh. IV), KUB 15.5 ii 51, iii 3, passim (NH), KBo 2.4 l.e. 2 (NH), KBo 2.6 i 36, iii 46, 62 (NH), KUB 
25.23 l.e. b2 (Tudh. IV), SUM-zi KUB 6.2 obv. 14, 16, 18, KUB 
5.1 ii (47), KUB 25.24 ii 16, 17, 18, 19, IBoT 2.103 iv 4, KUB 
27.2 iii 5 (all NH), pí-en-zi KUB 27.12:8, KUB 45.44 ii 9, pí-iia-an-zi KUB 2.8 v 35 (NH), KUB 5.6 i 33 (NH), KUB 42.98 i 13, 14 (NH), pé-e-an-zi KBo 22.235 obv. 4. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-eh-hu-un KBo 10.2 i 8, 11, 12, 14 (OH/NS), KUB 14.1 obv. 15, 84, KBo 16.47 obv. 27 (both MH/MS), KUB 
1.1 iv 67, 68, 69, 76, 77 (Óatt. III), KUB 23.1 ii 3 (Tudh., IV), passim, pé-e-eh-hu-un KBo 5.13 iv 23 (Murš. II), SUM-eh-huun KUB 24.5 obv. 10, SUM-un KUB 40.91 iii? 7, KUB 26.69 vii 5, 13, KUB 40.88 iv 18, 2270/c:4 (StBoT 4:73), AAA 3 pl. 27 no. 4:1 (all NH), KBo 12.38 iv 7 (Šupp. II), AD-DIN KUB 
14.1 obv. 43 (MH/MS), KBo 4.3 i 15 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 iv 39, 66, 70, 71, 79 (Óatt. III), KBo 4.10 obv. 15 (NH), KUB 
24.5 obv. 34. 
sg. 2 pa-it-ta KBo 26.136 obv. (18), (19) (OH/MS, cf. StBoT 34:23), KUB 1.16 iii 10 (OH/NS), KUB 14.1 obv. 22, 
(76) (MH/MS), KUB 33.70 iii 13 (OH/NS), pé-eš-ta KBo 11.1 rev. 12 (Muw. II). 
sg. 3 pa-iš KBo 3.22:47, KBo 22.2 obv. 17, KUB 43.23 obv. 12 (all OS), KUB 30.10 rev. 3, KUB 30.11 rev. 3, KUB 36.75 ii 9 (all OH/MS), KBo 3.34 ii 31, 32, KUB 12.60 i 13, 25, KUB 
29.1 ii 37 (all OH/NS), KBo 16.47 obv. 5, 28 (MH/MS), KUB 
13.7 i 20 (MH/NS), KBo 5.6 iii 29, KBo 4.7 i 7 (both Murš. II), KBo 3.6 ii 6 (Óatt. III), KUB 5.17 ii 31, 34 (NH), and passim in all periods, ba-i-iš KBo 18.151 obv.? 7, (13) (atypical OS), pa-i-iš KBo 22.72:5 (OH/NS?), pa-a-iš KBo 3.7 iii 23, KUB 
29.1 ii 38, KUB 12.60 i (24) (all OH/NS), KUB 10.72 ii 10 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 36.53:8, KUB 33.96 iv 21, KBo 14.21 i 46, passim (NH), pa-a-i-iš KBo 19.66 i 7 (Murš. II), [p]a-eš KUB 
16.37 i 3 (NH), SUM-iš KUB 16.10:10, 11, KUB 50.124:6 (both NH), pa-iš-ta KBo 3.38 i (27) (OH/NS), KBo 14.7 i 3, KBo 
14.12 iii 11, KBo 3.4 ii 12 (all Murš. II), pé-eš-ta KBo 16.1 iii 10 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 i 18, passim (Óatt. III), KBo 4.14 ii 1, KUB 23.1 ii 18 (Tudh. IV), KBo 16.35:9 (Šupp. II), KBo 14.21 ii 38, (39), 47 (NH), KUB 7.60 iii 15, and passim in NH, pé-eeš-ta KUB 14.8 obv. 22 (Murš. II), pé-eš-≠da± KUB 57.1:30, píiš-ta KBo 18.28 obv. 11 (NH), SUM-eš-ta KUB 5.6 ii 34 (NH), SUM-ta KBo 18.25 rev. 6 (NH), KUB 48.85:5, SUM KUB 5.1 iv 90, KUB 6.7 iii 17, KUB 22.51 obv. 17 (all NH), pa-it-ta HKM 111 l.e. 3, HKM 102:12, 16, 19 (both MH/MS), ID-DIN KUB 40.91 ii 2 (NH), KUB 40.93:4, 5. 
pl. 1 pí-ú-en KBo 17.105 iii 30 (MH/MS), FHL 3 obv. (3) (Arn. I), pí-i-ú-en KUB 34.50:5 (NH?), pí-ia-u-e-en KBo 10.37 iv 15, (35) (OH/NS), KUB 13.4 iv 50, 51, 73 (MH/NS), HT 1 iv 2 (NS), SUM-u-en KUB 16.16 rev. 20 (NH), NI-ID-DI-IN SBo 1.4 obv. (16), (20) (OS), (pí-i-e-u-en KBo 20.107 ii 23 < piya-“to send”?). 
pl. 3 pí-i-er KBo 8.42 rev. 10 (OS), KBo 3.55 obv. 10 (OH/ NS), KBo 3.33 ii 8 (OH/NS), KUB 22.70 obv. 47(?) (NH), pí

pai- B 

i-e-er KBo 25.68 i 12 (OS), KUB 33.66 ii 6 (OH/MS?), KBo 20.59:(5) (OH?/MS), KBo 3.34 ii 4, 5, KBo 3.7 iii 14, 16 (both OH/NS), KUB 14.1 rev. 53 (MH/MS), KUB 23.11 ii 24, 30, iii 7 (MH/NS), KBo 4.4 iv 49, 51 (Murš. II), KUB 31.53 i 7 (Óatt. III), KBo 14.21 i 39 (NH), KUB 22.70 obv. 69 (NH), pí-e-er HKM 113:16 (MH/MS), KBo 16.6 ii 8 (Murš. II), KUB 21.38 i 45 (Óatt. III), KUB 12.26 ii 24 (NH), KUB 33.96 iv 17 (NH), pí-ia-er KUB 31.68:43 (NH), SUM-e-er KUB 16.77 ii 70 (NH), SUM-er KUB 33.115 i 7 (MH/NS), KUB 17.8 iv 12 (pre-NH/ NS), ABoT 57 obv. 21 (Óatt. III), KUB 5.1 i 91 (NH), KUB 
15.5 iii 1 (NH), KUB 33.93 iii 17, KUB 13.4 ii 36, 37, SUM KUB 5.1 i 103 (NH), pí-er IBoT 2.131 obv. 27. 
imp. sg. 2 pa-i KBo 17.4 ii 11 (OS), KBo 3.23 obv. 5, rev. 7, 8 (OH/NS), KUB 12.60 i 22 (OH/NS), KUB 14.1 rev. 60, KBo 16.47 obv. 20 (both MH/MS), KUB 31.84 iii 62, KBo 
12.112 rev. 6 (both MH/NS), KUB 34.45 obv. 9 (early NS), pa-a-i ABoT 44a ii (3) (OH/NS), KBo 10.41:10 (MH/NS), KBo 
11.72 ii 34 (2Z) (MH?/NS), KBo 5.3 iii 66 (Šupp. I), KBo 5.6 iv 11 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 i 16 (NH), KUB 21.27 ii 20, 21, iii 35 (Óatt. III). 
sg. 3 pa-a-ú KBo 3.38 i 33, VBoT 58 iv 12 (2Z) (both OH/ NS), KUB 8.81 ii 13 (MH/MS), KUB 24.9 ii 14 (MH/NS), KBo 
12.94:4 (NS), pé-eš-du KBo 18.19 rev. 34, ABoT 56 iii 17 (Šupp. II). 
pl. 2 [p]í-i-iš-te-en IBoT 3.135 rev. 10 (OS), pí-iš-te-en KUB 23.77:58, KUB 31.105:17 (both MH/MS), pí-iš-tén KUB 23.77:14, KBo 17.105 iii (33), KUB 15.34 ii 49 (all MH/MS), KUB 31.119 rt. col. 4 (MS?), KUB 15.32 i 55 (MH/early NS), KBo 15.34 ii 6, KUB 26.19 i 17 (both MH/NS), [p]í-iš-<te>-en KUB 30.12 rev. 15 (Murš. II), pa-iš-te-en KUB 23.77:31, 40, KUB 31.105:10 (both MH/MS), [p]a-iš-tén KUB 12.56 iv 7 (MH), pé-eš-tén KBo 10.37 ii 33 (OH/NS), KUB 41.8 iii 10 (MH/NS), KBo 10.45 ii 32 (MH/NS), KUB 26.29 obv. 15 (MH/ NS), KUB 36.89 rev. 40 (NH), KUB 24.12 iii 7 (NH?/NS), péeš-te-[en] KBo 11.14 iii 17 (MH/NS). 
pl. 3 pí-an-du KUB 2.2 iii 33 (OH?/NS), KBo 20.42 i 36 (MH/MS), KBo 6.34 i 23 (MH/NS), KUB 30.34 iv 33 (MH/ NS), KUB 15.5 i 8, 9, KUB 26.43 obv. 67 (Tudh. IV), pí-ia-andu KUB 48.1 iii (9) (OH?/NS), KUB 13.2 iii 3 (MH/NS), KUB 
7.54 ii 17 (NH). mid. pres. pl. 3 pí-an-da-ri 46/h obv. 7 (StBoT 5:141) (here or to piya- “send”; Neu points out that other middle forms do not exist for either verb). inf. pí-ia-an-na KBo 15.34 ii 13 (MH/NS), KUB 2.5 ii 23, KUB 52.90 iv 3, KBo 4.10 rev. 18 (NH), pí-an-na KBo 24.45 
obv. 27, pí-ia-ni KBo 3.1 ii 60 (OH/NS) (thus Chrest. 190 and HW2 1:219b), SUM-an-na KUB 16.66 obv. 8 (NH), KUB 
60.100 obv. 4. [If, as seems very likely, all the piyauwanzi forms from Muršili II’s Speech Loss — pí-i-ia-u-wa-an-zi KUB 
15.36 obv. 6, ibid. obv. 3 + KUB 43.50 obv. 11, pí-ia-u-wa-anzi KBo 4.2 iii 53, pí-ia-u-an-zi KBo 4.2 iii 50 — belong s.v. piya “to send,” the only other -wanzi form left is SUM-u-an-zi KUB 
19.55 rev. 4 (NH) which could be a rebus writing for the inf. of piyai-.] 

42

supine pí-i-ia-u-w[a-an] KUB 19.3 i 7 (Murš. II), SUM-u-wa-an KUB 38.35 rev. 12 (Tudh. IV) (here?). 
verbal subst. pí-ia-u-wa-ar KUB 22.70 rev. 66 (NH), pí-ia-u-wa-aš KUB 51.27 obv. 10 (so Neu, GsKronasser 132), SUM-aš KUB 16.19 obv. 4, KUB 50.116:(7) (both NH). 
part. sg. com. nom. pí-ia-an-za KBo 6.2 ii 39 (OS), KBo 
3.7 iv 23 (OH/NS), KUB 21.38 rev. 8 (Óatt. III), KUB 49.6:11 (NH), pí-an-za KBo 6.4 iv 22, 23 (NS), KUB 31.53 obv. 15 (Óatt. III), KBo 26.215:1 (NH), SUM-an-za KUB 36.87 iii 7, KUB 6.20 rev. 4, KUB 22.57 rev. 7, KUB 50.44 i 5, 11 (all NH), SUM-za KUB 5.1 i 9, and passim in KIN oracles (NH). 
com. acc. SUM-an-tanx(tén) KUB 26.12 iv 39, KUB 21.43:(7) (both NH). 
neut. nom.-acc. pí-ia-a-an KBo 6.2 ii 28 (OS), KBo 6.3 ii 50 (OH/NS), KUB 36.118:4 (MH/MS), pí-i-ia-an KBo 6.5 iv 8, (9) (OH/NS), KBo 12.8 i 5 (OH/NS), pí-ia-an KUB 31.130 obv. 4 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 ii 49 (OH/NS), KUB 31.127 i 19 (OH/NS), KUB 13.9 ii 4, 9 (MH/NS), KUB 21.15 i 17 (Óatt. III), KBo 4.10 obv. 34, 36 (NH), KUB 15.5 i 3 (NH), KUB 5.7 obv. 32 (NH), SUM-an KUB 13.33 ii 6, KUB 26.12 iv 38, KUB 
15.5 i 21, KUB 5.1 i 26, and passim in KIN oracles (all NH). nom. com.?/neut.? SUM KUB 6.7 iii 11 (NH). d.-l. pí-an-ti KBo 32.15 ii 24 (MH/MS), SUM-an-ti KUB 
22.19:12 (NH), SUM-ti KUB 22.42 obv. 2, KUB 22.43 obv. 9, IBoT 1.33:65 (all NH). 
pl. com. nom. pí-ia-an-te-eš KUB 15.34 iii (14), 35 (MH/ MS), KUB 13.8:3, 5, 6 (MH/NS), KUB 21.15 i 16 (Óatt. III), KUB 30.31 iv 34 (NH), KBo 22.6 i 25 (OH?/NS), Bronze Tablet i 77 (Tudh. IV), pí-an-te-eš 1897/u:13 (Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:198f.), KUB 13.8:2 (MH/NS), SUM-an-te-eš⁄‡ KUB 
50.115:11 (NH), SUM-an-te-eš KUB 21.43:6 (NH), KBo 14.21 i 59, and passim in KIN oracles (NH), SUM KUB 6.7 + KUB 
18.58 iii (8), 13, 35 (NH). pl. acc. com. pí-an-du-uš KBo 13.54:11. pl. d.-l. or gen. or sg. gen. SUM-an-ta-aš KUB 50.6 iii 23 

(NH). 
broken pí-i-an-x[…] KBo 25.56 i 19 (OS)(here?). 

iter. pres. sg. 1 pé-≠e-±[eš-k]i-mi KBo 32.15 iii 15, pí-iš-kimi KUB 24.9 i 46, 51 (MH/NS), KUB 43.53 i 17, (18)? (OH/ NS), 1032/u:5 (Otten, ZA 63:78), pé-eš-ki-mi KUB 24.9 i 42 (MH/NS), KUB 43.53 i 16 (OH/NS), KBo 5.4 rev. 33 (Murš. II), KUB 21.38 i 17 (Óatt. III), SUM-eš-ki-mi KUB 41.1 i 10 (MH/NS). 
sg. 2 pé-eš-ki-ši KUB 31.127 i 4 (OH/NS), KUB 22.70 rev. 35, KUB 16.17 iii 8 (both NH), pí-iš-ki-ši KUB 31.112:16, 27 (MH/NS). 
sg. 3 pí-iš-ki-z[i?] KUB 43.30 iii 20 (OS), pí-iš-ki-iz-zi KBo 
17.16:4 (OS), KBo 32.15 ii 27 (MH/MS), KUB 10.21 v 24 (OH/ NS), IBoT 2.94 vi? 8 (OH?/NS), KBo 5.9 ii 33 (Murš. II), KBo 
15.69 i 21 (MH/NS), pé-eš-ki-iz-zi KUB 41.7 v (7) (OH/NS), KUB 13.9 iv 8 (MH/NS), KBo 3.4 iv 48 (Murš. II), KUB 17.35 i 15, ii (34), iii 22, iv 2 (Tudh. IV), pé-<eš->ki-iz-zi AT 454 i 15 (NH), pé-eš-ki-zi KUB 51.23 rev.? 4 (Tudh. IV), KUB 51.33 i 8, SUM-iz-zi KBo 2.1 ii 29, 38, iii (32)? (NH), KUB 38.32 rev. 31, IBoT 1.9:6, SUM-zi KUB 42.100 iii 21 (Tudh. IV), KBo 

pai- B 
2.1 iv 14 (NH), KUB 36.88 rev. 9, KUB 51.7 obv. 11. pl. 1 pí-iš-ga-u-e-ni KUB 40.36 i 9, KBo 16.27 iii 3, KUB 
17.21 i 3 + 545/u obv. 7 (Kaškäer 152, 164) (all MH/MS), KUB 
12.50:8 (pre-NH/NS), pé-eš-ga-u-e-ni KUB 31.117 ii 9 (Arn. I), KUB 15.32 i 52 (MH/early NS), KUB 16.16 rev. 13, 15 (NH), SUM-qa-u-e-ni KUB 22.57 obv. 5 (NH), pí-iš-ki-u-wa-ni KBo 32.15 ii 28 (MH/MS), pé-eš-ki-u-e-ni AT 454 iv 7 (NH). 
pl. 2 pí-iš-kat-te-ni KBo 22.1 obv. 20 (OS), KUB 26.19 ii 27 (MH/NS), KUB 52.72 obv. 4, pé-eš-kat-te-ni KUB 31.99 obv. 8. 
pl. 3 pí-iš-kán-zi KUB 18.14 iii? (5) (NH), KBo 20.33 obv. 8 (OS), KBo 11.72 ii 28 (MH/NS), KUB 32.130:14, 22 (MH/ MS), KBo 22.246 ii 15, iii (8), 11, KUB 12.4 i 3 (NH), pé-eškán-zi KUB 7.8 ii 13 (MH/NS), KUB 13.4 i 8 (MH/NS), KUB 
24.3 i 10, 11, 26 (Murš. II), KUB 7.24 rev. 7 (Tudh. IV), KBo 
22.246 iii 6, (18), KUB 12.4 i 9, 10 (NH), piš-qa-an-zi KUB 

17.35 iii (33), iv 33 (Tudh. IV), SUM-kán-zi KUB 42.105 iii 4, 
9, iv 14 (Tudh. IV), KBo 13.231 obv.? (3), 9, KUB 17.37 i 15. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-eš-ki-nu-un KUB 22.70 obv. 36 (NH). 
sg. 3 pé-e-eš-ki-it ABoT 65 obv. 14 (MH/MS), pí-iš-ki-it 
KUB 14.1 obv. (7), (8) (MH/MS), KUB 14.7 i 14 (Óatt. III), KUB 22.70 rev. 36 (NH), KUB 43.76 rev. 9, pé-eš-ki-it KBo 
3.4 i 44 (Murš. II), KUB 13.35 i 3, 4 (NH), KUB 16.16 rev. 8 (NH), IBoT 2.131 obv. 35 (NH). 
pl. 3 pí-iš-kir KBo 6.2 i 10, 13, 40, 57, ii 55, iii 25, 31, 51, iv 41 (OS), KUB 29.16 iii 5, (14) (OS), KUB 13.12 ii 2 (OH/ NS), pí-iš-ki-ir KBo 6.2 iv 16 (OS), KUB 29.13 rev. (9) (OS), KUB 16.16 obv. 19 (NH), pí-iš-kikir KUB 29.25:4 (OS), pé-eški-ir KUB 29.14 iv 3 (OH/NS), KUB 16.16 rev. 25 (NH), KUB 
5.10 i 6 (NH), KBo 14.21 i 62 (NH), KBo 13.252 ii 13 (NH), pé-eš-kir KBo 6.3 i 17, passim (OH/NS), KBo 6.14 i 8, 16 (OH), KBo 19.3 iv 8 (OH/ENS), IBoT 2.131 rev. 19 (NH), KUB 5.10 i 9 (NH), SUM-kir KUB 50.42 left col. 19 (NH), pí-iš-kir°(= kar) KUB 38.3 i 17 (NH). 
imp. sg. 1 pí-iš-ke-el-lu KUB 6.45 iii 66 (Muw. II). 
sg. 2 pí-iš-ki KBo 17.60 rev. 11 (MH/MS), KUB 57.39 rev.? 8 (MH), KBo 15.25 obv. 11 (MH/NS), KUB 27.67 ii (23) (MH/ NS), KUB 24.2 rev. 16 (Murš. II), pé-eš-ki KUB 46.25 i 19, KUB 10.72 v 16 (both pre-NH/NS), KUB 24.1 iii 6, 9, 10, 12, 14 (Murš. II), KUB 21.29 iii 4 (Óatt. III). 
sg. 3 pí-iš-ki-id-du KUB 43.23 rev. (16), 19 (OS), pé-eš-kiid-du KUB 27.29 iii 3 (MH/NS), KBo 19.64a iv (30) (Murš. II). 
pl. 2 pí-iš-kat-te-en KBo 15.10 ii 35 (MH/MS), pí-iš-kattén KBo 17.105 ii 25 (MH/MS), KUB 15.34 ii 24, iii (18) (MH/ MS), KUB 15.32 i 58 (MH/ENS), KUB 12.28:10, [pí-i]š-ki-ittén KUB 15.34 ii 40 (MH/MS), pí-iš-ki-tén KBo 17.105 ii 22, 25 (MH/MS), KUB 24.8 ii (20)(?) (pre-NH/NS), pé-eš-kat-tén KBo 10.37 ii 28, (29), 31 (OH/NS), KUB 24.9 iv 17 (MH/NS), KUB 43.55 ii 6 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 6.37 obv. 3 (NH). 
pl. 3 pí-iš-kán-du KBo 15.10 iii 36 (MH/MS), pé-eš-kán-du HKM 81:(13), 15 (HBM 274-275) (MH/MS), KUB 13.8:13 (MH/NS), IBoT 2.131 obv. 19. 
supine pé-eš-ki-u-wa-an KBo 4.4 iv 35, 47 (Murš. II), KUB 

21.17 i 8 (Óatt. III), KUB 33.93 iii 14, KUB 15.11 ii 14 (NH), 
43

KUB 49.93 ii 10 (NH), pé-eš-ki-u-an KBo 3.4 iii 26 (Murš. II), pa-iš-ga-u-wa-an KBo 5.8 ii 5 (Murš. II), pí-iš-ki-u-wa-an KUB 
18.51 ii 19 (NH), pí-iš-ki-u-an KBo 5.8 ii 4 (Murš. II). part. neut. nom.-acc. pé-eš-kán KUB 50.122 obv. 9. dur. supine pí-ia-an-ni-wa-an KBo 8.42 rev. 3 (OS). unclear SUM KUB 48.90 lower edge 4, IBoT 1.31 obv. 9 
(NH). 
For morphological discussion cf. Oettinger, Stammbildung 69f., 469f. 
(Akk. nadā
nu:) (Akk.) m®nam dumqam addinšunuti “I gave them whatever was good” KBo 10.1 obv. 3 = (Hitt.) [(nu) kue ku]e ašauwar ēš[t]a [nÚ(at) A]NA ÉRIN.MEŠ ašanduli pé-ehhu-un “I gave to my troops in garrison whatever sheepfolds there were” KBo 10.2 i 7-8 (ann., Óatt. I/NS), w. dupl. KBo 
10.3 i 5-6, cf. Marazzi, AkkBoaZ 46 w. anterior lit.; (Akk.) [ana DUMU-ya Labarna É-tam addin A.ŠÀ-am] mādam addinšu [GUD.ÓI.A māti addinšu] = (Hitt.) DUMUÚmi Labarni ≠É±
du[i]r? pé-eh-h[u-un A.ŠÀ.ÓI.AÚše mekk]i pé-eh-hu-un GUD. ÓI.AÚše me[kk]i pé-eh-hu[-un] “I gave my son, Labarna, a house. I gave him many fields. I gave him many cattle” KUB 
1.16 i/ii 31-32 (OH/NS), translit. BoTU 8, rest. from HAB 6f., cf. Marazzi, AkkBoaZ 16; (Akk.) AD-DIN KBo 4.3 i 15 (A) (NH) KBo 4.7 ii 5 (B) (NH) and KUB 19.53 ii 4 (E) (NH) = (Hitt.) pé-eh-hu-un KBo 5.13 i 27 (C) (NH) and KUB 6.41 ii 3 
(D) (NH) (Kup. § 8, Akkadograms in Hittite context). 
(Akk. šūlû:) (Akk.) 3 GIŠmaya[ltam] ana dUTU URUTÚLna ušēli 1 GUD KÙ.BABBAR ana É dMezzulla ušēli KBo 10.1 obv. 4-5 = (Hitt.) U 3 GIŠGIGIR.MEŠ MADNANU ANA dUTU URUTÚL-na pé-eh-hu-un § 1 GUD KÙ.BABBAR 1 GEŠPÚ KÙ.BABBAR INA É dIM pé-eh-hu-un “Three MADNANU-chariots I gave (Akk.: I dedicated, lit.: made go up) to the Sun-goddess of Arinna. One silver ox, one silver fist I gave to the temple of the Stormgod. (That which remained I gave (Akk. dedicated) to the temple of Mezzulla)” KBo 10.2 i 11-12 (ann., Óatt. I/NS); (Akk.) u 7 DINGIR.MEŠ ana dUTU URUTÚL-na ušēli … / … u kidat DINGIR.MEŠ-šu / ana É dMizzulla ušēli KBo 10.1 obv. 18-20 = (Hitt.) nu 7 DINGIR.MEŠ INA É dUTU URUTÚL-na / [p]edahhun … / … āššerÚmaÚkan kuiēš DIN~ GIR.MEŠ / nÚaš INA É dMezzulla pé-eh-hu-un (var. pēdahhun) “Seven deities I carried off (Akk. dedicated) to the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna … Those deities which remained I gave (var. carried off) (Akk. dedicated) to the temple of Mezzulla” KBo 10.2 i 37-40 (ann., Óatt. I/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
23.31 rev. 5, cf. Marazzi, AkkBoaZ 49f. 
(Akk. našû:) (Akk.) ina MU.KAM-ti MU.KAM-tima it~ tataššaššu “Year in and year out he kept giving it to him” KUB 
3.14 obv. 10 = (Hitt.) nÚanÚši pé-eš-ki-it “He continually gave it to him” KUB 21.49:8 (Dupp., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:6f., on the Akk. verb, a Gtn of našû w. dat. pron. suffix -šu, cf. CAD N/ 2:80b, 92b. 
a. “to give (something) owed, required, or agreed upon” — 1' purchase price, wages, hire, fee, tribute, bride price, dowry — a' purchase price: 2 

pai- B a 1' c' 

GUD GAL UZUÚŠUNU kuiš wāši 1 UDU pa-a-i “He who buys the meat (of) two adult oxen, pays one sheep” KBo 6.26 iii 15 (Law § 185, OH/NS), cf. ibid. iii 16-19 (Law §186); (cf. Klengel, AoF 15:76-81, and RLA 5:503, 530b §4). 
b' hire, wages (kuššan): “If someone hires a person, and he (the hireling) goes on a campaign and dies” takku kuššan pí-ia-an (A: pí-ia-a-an, C: pí-i-[i]a-an) nu UL šarnikzi takku kuššanÚšet UL píia-a-an (C: pí-i-ia-[an]) 1 SAG.DU pa-a-i kuš~ šannÚa 12 G´N KÙ.BABBAR pa-a-i U ŠA MUNUS kuššan 6 G´N K[(Ù.BAB)]BAR pa-a-i “If the wages are paid, there is no compensation. If the wages are not paid, he shall give (a 3') one person, and he shall pay wages of twelve shekels of silver. For a woman he shall pay (a 1' b') wages of six shekels of silver” KBo 6.3 ii 49-51 (Law §42, ON/NS), w. dupl. A = KBo 
6.2 ii 28-29 (OS), C = KBo 6.5 iv 8-11 (OH/NS), cf. natta b 2'; “If someone gives (pai- d) a child for apprenticeship …” n[(u annanu)mm]aš 6 G´N KÙ.BABBAR pa-a-i “he pays six shekels of silver for the apprenticing. (If he makes him a master(?))” nuÚšši 1 SAG. DU pa-a-i “he (the father) gives him (the teacher) one person” KBo 6.26 iv 31 (Law § 200B, OH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 13.14 rev. 8 + KUB 13.16:5, KUB 13.14 + KUB 13.16:5; “If someone commandeers a horse, a mule, or a donkey and it dies on his place, he shall transport it (the carcass) (back)” kušša(n)ÚššettÚa pa-a-i “And he shall pay its hire” KBo 6.2 iv 5 (Law § 76, OS); “They carry in two black bulls. Ten bronze-spear men carry one (other) bull …” [(LUGAL-uš AN)]A 20 LÚ.MEŠ ŠUKUR 5 MA.NA KÙ.BAB~ BAR pa-a-i “The king pays five MA.NA of silver to the twenty bronze-spear men” KBo 21.25 i 49 + KUB 
34.123 i 18-19 (fest., OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 43.26 i 6-7 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:66 i 48-49. 
c' tribute: nu arkamma[n …] / ≠10 G´N± KÙ. BABBAR 10 G´N KÙ.GI 2 GUN URUDU 1 G[UN …] / MU.KAM-li SUM-anna SIZSÁ-at § arkam~ mani GAM-an 1 GUD 8 UDU MU.KAM-li pi[anna SIZSÁ-at] “It was ascertained to give tribute annually: ten shekels of silver, ten shekels of gold, two talents of copper, one talent [of …]. It [was ascertained] to give annually with the tribute one ox (and) eight sheep” KUB 56.24 obv. 8-11, cf. 13-15; normally the verb used w. argamman is either piddai-or uda-. 

44

d' bride price: “He asked them for the heart” nÚašÚši pí-i-e-er “They gave it to him. (Afterwards, he asked them for the eyes)” nuÚšši apēÚya pí-i-eer “They gave these also to him. (He brought them to his father)” KBo 3.7 iii 13-16 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:15, 19 (§24'), tr. Hittite Myths 13 □ this is an antiyanza marriage, where the groom received a “brideprice” from the bride’s father, and became a member of her family; “The Sea sent to the Stormgod. ‘Telipinu, your son, took my daughter as his wife. He led her away’” ammuqqaÚwa [kuit] pa-it-ti … pé-eh-hiwa<-ra>-at-ši mānÚwaÚšši UL pé[-eh-hi] … [1 L]IM GUD.ÓI.A 1 LIM UDU.ÓI.A pa-iš “‘[What] will you give me (as a brideprice)?’ … ‘Shall I give it to him? (What) if [I do] not giv[e] (it)?’ … One thousand oxen and one thousand sheep he gave” KUB 12.60 i 18-19, 21, 25 (OH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths 26, translit. Myth. 20. The official term used in the laws for paying a brideprice, (kušata) piddai-“to pay, render” (Laws §§ 29-30, 34-36), is not used here. 
e' dowry: nuÚwaÚmu iwaru kuit pa-a-i “What dowry will he give me?” KUB 17.9 i 30 (Gurparanzah story); “If in a town, someone holds šahhan owing fields (as) dowry (iwaru)” takkuÚšše A.ŠÀ [dapi~ anza] pí-ia-an-za (var. dapian pí-i-ia-an) “if the entire field was given to him” KBo 6.2 ii 38-39 (Law §46, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 25 (OH/NS), ed. HG 30f. 
2' daughters, sisters, sons given in marriage: nuÚzza DUMU.MUNUS.MEŠÚŠA ANA DUMU. NITA.MEŠÚŠA pa-iš “She gave her daughters to her sons” KBo 22.2 obv. 17 (Zalpa story, OS), ed. StBoT 17.6f.; “If a girl is promised to a man, …” takkuÚ (w)an attaš annaššÚa tamē
dani LÚ-ni pí-an-zi “if her father and mother give her to another man” KBo 
6.3 ii 8 (Law §28b, OH/NS), ed. HG 24f.; [n]uÚšši DU~ MU.MUNUSÚKA ANA DAMÚŠU [pa]-it-ta “You gave your daughter to him as his wife” KUB 14.1 obv. 76 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f.; cf. nuÚwaÚtta DU~ MU.MUNUSÚYA ANA DAMÚKA pé-eh-hi “I will give you my daughter as your wife” KUB 14.1 obv. 77 (MH/MS); “If you are truly seeking my daughter” nuÚtta UL imma pé-eh-hi pé-eh-hi-it-ta “will I really not give (her) to you? I shall give (her) to you” VBoT 2 (= EA 32):8-9 (Tarhuntaradu to Amenhotep III, MH/ MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:329; nuÚwaÚtta ƒMuwattin apel DUMU.MUNUSÚSU NINÚYA ANA DAM-UTTIÚ 

pai- B a 5' 
ŠU pé-eš-ta KUB 14.15 iv 40-41, ed. AM 72f.; mānÚwaÚ mu 1-an DUMUÚKA pa-iš-ti “If you give me a son of yours (lit. your one son), (he will become my husband)” KBo 5.6 iii 12-13 (DŠ frag. 28), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:94; (The Egyptians sought a son from my father for kingship) nuÚšmaš mahhan ABUÚYA apēl DUMUÚŠU pé-eš-ta (var. pé-e-eš-ta) “When my father gave them his son, (… they killed him)” KUB 
14.11 ii 13-14 (PP 2), w. dupl. KUB 14.8 obv. 21-23, ed. Götze, KlF 1:210f.; “I made you a brother-in-law” nuÚtta NINÚYA DAM-an[ni] pé-eh-hu-un “I gave you my sister for wifeship” KUB 23.1 ii 2-3 (Šaušgamuwa-Tudh. IV treaty), ed. StBoT 16:8f.; cf. KBo 18.19 obv. 11; see also k 3' (andan pai-B) and k 9' h' (parā pai-B), below. 
3' compensation, damages, or fine: 4 SAG.DU pa-a-i “He must give four persons” KBo 6.3 i 2 (Law §1, OH/NS), ed. HG 16f.; karū 1 MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR peškir kinuna 20 G´N KÙ.BABBAR pa-a-i “They used to give one mina of silver, but now he shall give twenty shekels of silver” KBo 6.3 i 17 (Law §7, OH/NS), and passim in the laws; “If someone breaks the horn or foot of an ox, he takes the ox” U GUD SIGﬁ <ANA> BE_L GUD pa-[(a-i )] “And he gives a good ox to the owner of the (injured) ox” KBo 6.3 iii 71 (Law §74, OH/NS), ed. HG 40f.; for KBo 6.10 ii 20-21 (Law §128, OH/NS) see k 1' a' (anda pai-), below; for law §42 see a 1' b', above; “If a Hittite abducted a Luwian in Óatti and carried him off to Luwiya” karū 12 SAG.DU pí-iš-kir (var. pé-eš-kir) kinuna 6 SAG.DU pa-a-i “they used to give twelve persons (lit. heads), now he shall give six persons” KBo 6.2 i 40-41 (Law §19B, OS), ed. HG 20f., w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 49 (OH/NS); māš~
n ehanaššÚa kuiški šarnikzil pí-ia-an harzi “and if someone has paid the compensation for homicide (lit. blood)” KUB 13.9 ii 3-4 (instr., MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 446, 449, Westbrook/Woodard, JAOS 110:643; mān tayizzilaššÚa kuiški šarnikzel pí-ia-an harzi KUB 13.9 ii 8-9 (MH/NS); for KUB 26.19 ii 27 (treaty, MH/ NS) see k 5', below; the forms of piyauwanzi in the various copies of MSpr. belong to piyai-, q.v. 
4' substitutes: [… ANA dERE]Š.KI.GAL :tarpal~ lin pé-eh-hu-u[n] “I gave a substitute to the Queen of the Netherworld” KUB 36.94 rev. 12 (royal subst. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:12f., w. n. 44; cf. KUB 13.9 ii 2-3 (MH/NS). 
5' bribes, propitiatory gifts (maškan): (If either you, as his colleague, conceal them) nuÚšši maš~ 
45

kan pa-a-i “and he gives a bribe to him (or: for it [your silence?])” KUB 13.9 iii 14 (instr., MH/NS); ≠ANA!± dU[TU] URUTÚL-na dUTU-ŠI maškan pa-a-i “His Majesty will give a propitiatory gift to the Sungoddess of Arinna” KBo 2.2 ii 39 (oracle question, NH); because of the explicit mention of a maškan in this line, we can assume that is what is meant in the following passage from just a few lines previous in the text: “Because the Sungoddess of Arinna was determined (to be responsible) for His Majesty’s illness … whatever is determined by oracle” nu ANA dUTU URUTÚL-na apā[t] SUM-an-zi “they will give that to the Sungoddess of Arinna” ibid. ii 34. 
6' fulfillments of vows or agreements w. a deity: “His Majesty vowed as follows to Katahha: ‘If the city of Ankuwa survives, and does not in its entirety burn down’” nu ANA dKatahha 1 URU-LUM KÙ.BABBAR DÙ-mi KI.LÁ.BI NU.GÁL 1 GUD 8 UDUÚya pé-eh-hi “‘I will make for Katahha one silver city(-model) of unspecified weight (and) one ox and eight sheep I will give’” KUB 15.1 iii 20-21 (vow, NH), ed. Hoffner, IEJ 19:178f.; cf. ibid. iii 25-26; and passim in vows; nuÚmu ANA DINGIR-LIM ‰R-anni péeš-ta “So he gave me to serve the goddess” KUB 1.1 i 18 (Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:4f. 
7' offerings to the gods: nu namma DINGIR. MEŠ-aš NINDA.GUR›.RA išpanduzzi [U]L kuiški pa-a-i “Now no one gives thick bread and libations to the gods any longer” KUB 36.2d iii 41-42 (kingship of dLAMMA, NS), ed. Meriggi, Athenaeum NS 31:142f., tr. Hittite Myths 44 (§6), translit. Myth. 149, cf. ibid. iii 17-18 + KUB 
33.112 iii 10-11; ANA DINGIR-LIM SILA› ambašši pían-zi “They dedicate (lit. give) one lamb to the deity for ambašši” KUB 29.4 iv 3-4 (NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 28f. (“bestimmen”(?)), 55 (“bestimmen, aussuchen, vorbereiten”). 
8' prizes or awards: [LÚKA]Š›.E tarhzi kuiš 1 MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR U 2 NINDAwagadaš pí-an-zi “They give 1 MA.NA of silver and two wagadabreads (to) the runner who wins” KBo 20.33 obv. 12 (OS), translit. StBoT 25 no. 19; kuiš hazzizzi nuÚšše GEŠ~ TIN-an akuwanna pí-an-zi … kuiš nattaÚma haz~ zizzi nuÚšše iyara GAL-ri pí-an-zi “They will give wine to drink to him who hits (the target) … but they will give iyara in a cup to him who does not 

pai- B c 

hit (the target)” KBo 3.34 ii 33-34 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. THeth 20:536. 
	b. “to give without being required to, to donate”: (If you make a chariot out of hides that are not ritually fit for the king, do not worry, tell the king about it.) “I, the king, will send it to a foreigner” našmaÚat ANA ‰R pé-eh-hi “Or I will give it to a subject” KUB 13.3 iii 17 (MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:47, 49, tr. ANET 207; mānÚmaÚšši IŠTU É.GAL-LIMÚma AŠŠUM N´G.BAÚŠU KÙ.BABBAR KÙ. GI UNU_T ZABAR pí-an-zi nÚat lamniyan ēšdu kāšÚwarÚatÚši LUGAL-uš pa-iš … kēdaniÚwarÚ atÚši ANA EZEN SUM-ir “If they give him silver, gold, or a bronze implement from the palace as a gift, let it be enumerated: ‘King So-and-so gave (this) to him … They gave it to him at such-andsuch festival’ (and let the witnesses be put down at the end)” KUB 13.4 ii 32-34, 36 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS); mānnÚaÚšši E[GIR-anda dUTU-ŠI] IŠTU NAM.R[A.MEŠ pé-eh-hi našmaÚšši] IŠTU LÚ ELLI pé-eh-hi naš[ma UNU_TUM našma] TÚG-UŠTUM pé-eh-hi “If later I, My Majesty give her (Šauska) some resettled persons or some freemen, or an implement, or I give a garment” KBo 6.29 iii 34-37 (Óatt. III), ed. NBr 50f. iii 35-38; “Thus speaks Ašmunikal, the Great Queen, concerning the Stone House which we created” nu ANA É NA›-NI kuiēš URU.ÓI.A pí-ia-an-te-eš LÚ.MEŠBE_L QA_TI kuiēš pían-te-eš (etc.) “The towns which were donated to the Stone House, the craftsmen who were donated,” (etc., let them be exempt from taxes and corvée) KUB 13.8:2 (MH/NS), ed. Otten, HTR 106f. 
	c. “to physically hand over or pass (something to another)”: “The spears which the guards hold” nÚat ANA LÚšalašha GIŠGU.ZA pí-an-zi “they give to the coachman (who had brought) the seat; (when the carriage goes home)” LÚšalašhašÚma GIŠŠU~ KUR.ÓI.A ANA LÚ‰.DU° pa-a-i “the coachman gives the spears to the gatekeeper” IBoT 1.36 iii 6062 (MEŠEDI instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:30f., Jakob-Rost, MIO 11.196f.; GAL DUMU.MEŠ.É.GAL LUGAL-i GALri pa-a-[i] “The chief of the palace servants gives a cup to the king, (and the king libates at the hearth. The chief of the palace servants takes the cup from the king)” KBo 25.52 ii 10-12 (fest., OS), trans-lit. StBoT 25:117; LÚ.SAGI-aš 1 NINDA.GUR›.RA 

46

GAL LUGAL-i pa-a-i “The cupbearer gives one large flat-bread to the king. (The king crumbles (it) and places it on the altar)” LUGAL-uš GUB-aš ANA LÚ.MEŠBE_LU_TIM akuwanna kiššar® pa-a-i “The king, standing, gives something to drink into the hand of the lords” KBo 19.128 vi 12-13, 14-16 (fest., OH?/ NS), ed. StBoT 13:16f.; [n]Úaš ANA DUMU.É.GAL GÙB-lit ŠU-it pa-a-i § DUMU.É.GALÚmaÚaš GÙB-laz kiššaraz LUGAL-i pa-a-i “He gives them to the palace servant with his left hand. The palace servant gives them to the king with his left hand. (The king swings them around with his left hand, pours them into the river and leaves)” KUB 
2.7 i 5-8 (fest. of haste, OH/NS), ed. Košak, Linguistica 16:62, 57, Popko, AoF 13:220; [n]uÚšši naššu adanna pé-eš-kiiz-zi našmaÚšši akuwanna pé-eš-ki-iz-zi “Either (the slave) gives him (i.e., the master) something to eat or he gives him something to drink” KUB 13.4 i 24 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 24f.; cf. ibid. iii 66-70; (I take a bit of crumbled bread) nu LÚ-i BE_L S´SKUR pé-eh-hi “I give (it) to the male patient. (He places it in his mouth and drinks three times to Uliliyašši)” KUB 7.5 ii 11 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:274, 278 (§10); nuÚšmaš 1 UPNA uzuhrin ÓÁD.DU.A pa-a-i INA 3! KASKALÚya n[amma] UL kuitki pa-a-i “He gives them (the horses) 1 handful of hay. Then on the third(!) time, he gives (them) nothing” KUB 1.13 l.e. 2 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 74f.; (If your wife’s sister, sister’s children, or cousin comes to you) nuÚ šši [a]danna akuwanna pa-a-i “give her (something) to eat or drink” KBo 5.3 iii 36-37 (Óuqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:126f.; DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL LUGAL-i ŠU. MEŠ-aš wātar pí-ia-an-zi ŠU.MEŠÚŠU arrīGAL DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL GAD-an pa-a-i ŠU.MEŠÚŠU ā
nši “The palace servants give the king water for (his) hands. He washes his hands. The chief of the palace servants gives (him) a cloth. He wipes his hands” KUB 20.85 i 7-10 (fest.); GAL DUMU.MEŠ É. GAL LUGAL-i GIŠkalmuš pa-a-i “The chief of the palace servants gives a crook to the king” KUB 11.35 i 19 (winter fest., OH/NS), cf. KUB 10.21 i 2-3, 11-12 (OH/ NS); (The table attendant takes a thick bread off of the zippulašša-bread) nÚan ANA LÚSAGI pa-a-i LÚSAGIÚmaÚan LUGAL<-i> pa-a-i LUGAL-uš paršiya tÚan ANA LÚSAGI EGIR-pa pa-a-i LÚSA~ GIÚmaÚan ANA LÚ GIŠBANŠUR pa-a-i “He gives 

pai- B d 
it to the cupbearer. The cupbearer gives it to the king. The king crumbles it. He gives it back to the cupbearer. The cupbearer gives it to the waiter” KUB 20.78 iv 10-15 (fest. of the month, OH/NS); several of the examples used under usage c could belong under usage e, and vice versa; the boundaries are often unclear. 
	d. “to temporarily give into someone’s care or custody, entrust”: “If someone batters a man and makes him ill, he shall nurse him” pediÚššiÚma LÚ.U⁄·.LU-an (var. antuhšan) pa-a-i “and he shall give a person in his place, (and he shall work his estate until he recovers)” KBo 6.2 i 17 (Law §10, OS), 
	w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 26 (OH/NS), ed. HG 18f., Watkins, Ériu 27:21, Beckman, RLA 7:631; [DUMU.MEŠ] šulluš pí-iú-e-ni “We will give hostages” KBo 16.27 i 14 (MH/ MS), translit. Kaškäer 135; nuÚšši URUKÙ.BABBAR-aš KUR-e hūman pa-iš “He (the Stormgod) gave to him (the Labarna) the whole land of Óattuša” IBoT 1.30:4-5 (OH?/NS), ed. Goetze, JCS 1:90f., Güterbock, JAOS Suppl. 15:16; “I say as follows to the king:” pa-i-mu DUMU.É.GAL-in “‘Give me a palace servant (and I will go to the room of the children)’” LUGALušÚmu DUMU.É.GAL pa-a-i “The king will give me a palace servant. (Whatever the king says, that I will do)” KBo 17.4 ii 11 (fest., OS), ed. StBoT 8:24f.; nu ANA µTemeti ÉRIN.MEŠ ŠUTI [SU]M-zi “They will give the ŠUTI-troops to Temeti. (They will carry off Ununiya and meet back up with His Majesty)” KUB 5.1 ii 47 (oracle questions on prospective campaigns, NH), ed. THeth 4:58f.; (If you request some troops from His Majesty to attack some enemy) nuÚtta dUTU-ŠI ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.R[(A. ME)]Š pa-a-i “His Majesty will give you troops, infantry, and chariotry” KUB 21.1 iii 57-58 (Alakš. §17, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iv 3(-4), ed. SV 2:74f.; namma ÉRIN.MEŠ-an MU-ti M[U-ti] pí-iš-kán-zi KUB 23.72 rev. 18 (Mita text, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:36; nuÚmu ÉRIN.MEŠ pé-eš-ki-u-wa-an dāir KUB 14.16 ii 22, ed. AM 44f., cf. KBo 4.4 iv 34-35, 47, ed. AM 138-141; cf. Law §200B in a 1' b', above; cf. kūššÚa ABI LUGAL ANA <µ>Nakkilit GAL LÚ.MEŠSAGI pa-iš kūš µÓuzz® GAL LÚ.MEŠNIMGIR kūš µKizzui GAL LÚ.MEŠ MEŠE~ DI pa-iš “The father of the king gave these (men) to Nakkilit, the chief of the cupbearers, these (men) to Óuzzi, the chief of the heralds, (and) these (men) to Kizzu, chief of the guards” KBo 3.34 

47

ii 30-32 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. THeth 20:535f.; 1 DUMU. MUNUS ƒKummiya ŠUMÚŠU ANA µMulla šal~ lanu[(m)]anzi AD-D[(IN)] “One girl, Kummiya by name, I gave to Mulla to raise” KUB 31.61 ii 5 (vow of Pud.), w. dupl. KUB 31.58 obv. 10, ed. StBoT 1:22f.; cf. KUB 
31.53 + 1320/u obv. 12-16 (vow of Pud., NH), ed. StBoT 1:20f.; [kueda]niÚwarÚan pé-eh-hi aši DUMU-an “To whom will I give this child?” KUB 33.93 rt. iii 38(-39) + left iii (27-)28 (Ullik. I A), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:152 iii 27-28; 30 ANŠE.ÓI.AÚwaÚmu annaz pí-i-e-er kinunÚmaÚ wa 13 ANŠE.ÓI.A ē
šzi “They formerly gave me thirty donkeys. Now thirteen remain” KUB 13.35 iii 1-2 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:8f.; kāšattaÚšmaš µMuršilin pé-eh-hu-un “I have given Muršili into your care (i.e., entrusted him to you)” KBo 3.27 obv. 13-14 (edict, 

šaÚwaÚtta KUR [HUR.SAG]Z[ipp]ašla

OH/NS); [k]āADDIN “I have given to you the land of Zippašla” KUB 14.1 obv. 43 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 10f.; (The hand of the king of Óurri took away the city of Iyaruwanta from Abiratta’s grandfather by force) nÚan ANA ABI ABIŠU ŠA µTette LÚSA.GAZ pa-iš “and he gave it to the grandfather of Tette, the ÓA~ PIRU-man” KBo 3.3 i 6-7 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:33, 39; (I took Iyaruwanta with my army and plundered it) URUIyaruwaddanÚma URU-an tanna~ tan purut DINGIR.MEŠ akkanduššÚa tuk ANA µAbiratta pé-eh-hi “I am giving to you, Abiratta, the empty city of Iyaruwadda, (its) clay, its gods, and its dead” ibid. i 23-25; (I, My Majesty, destroyed ENurta with his house and his land. What of his kingship, throne, house, and land that I left) nÚat ANA µAbiradda pé-eh-hu-un “I gave it to Abiratta (and I made him king in Barga)” ibid. ii 4 (treaty, Murš. II); “He left me in these lands” nuÚmu kē KUR.KUR. MEŠ dannatta AŠŠUM MUIRDUTTIM pé-eš-ta “He gave me these empty lands to govern” KUB 1.1 ii 56 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:14f.; cf. ibid. ii 61-64; cf. tukÚma ANA µUlmi-Tešub KUR-TUM kuit AD-DIN “The land which I gave to you Ulmi-Teššub” KBo 4.10 obv. 15 (treaty, Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. van den Hout, Diss.12f.; cf. KBo 4.10 obv. 33-35, ed. CHD :lapana-; “If the king gives a person to be resettled” nuÚšši A. ŠÀ.ÓI.A-an pí-an-zi “they shall give to him fields, (and he becomes a GIŠTUKUL-man)” KBo 6.2 + KBo 
19.1 ii 22 (Law §40, OS), ed. Otten/Sou√ek, AfO 21:2, tr. Beal, 
AoF 15:276f. □ the giving of the field is not the conferring of 
title or the right to resell, but the granting of tenancy. 

pai- B h 

	e. “to surrender, give up, yield up (someone/ -thing demanded)”: “He demanded Tabarna and Óappi” U LÚ.MEŠ URU-LIM natta pí-an-zi “But the men of the city would not surrender (them)” KBo 22.2 rev. 11-12 (Zalpa story, OS), ed. StBoT 17:12f.; nuÚwaÚmuÚkan kuit LÚ.MEŠ [anda uer] nuÚwarÚ at ANA BE_LIÚYA pé-eš-ki-mi “I will hand over to my lord whatever men [sought refuge] with me” KUB 14.15 iv 21-22 (NH), ed. AM 68f.; more commonly w. āppa pai-or parā pai-, see k 4' and 9', below. 
	f. “to supply, furnish”: LUGAL-i SIGﬁ-antan GEŠTIN-an hinkatta apedaššÚa tamain GEŠTIN-an pí-i-e-er “he allots a good wine to the king, but to them they supplied a different wine” KBo 3.34 ii 3-4 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Beal, JCS 35:123f.; [(ME)]LQE_T LÚ.MEŠ URUAngulla … IN[A EZEN] Éhištā [(LÚAG~ RI)]G URUZinirnuwa ≠pa±-[(a)]-i “The administrator of Zinirnuwa supplies (lit. gives) the halkueššar/ MELQE_TU of the men of Angulla … for the festival of the hišta-building” KBo 16.69 + KBo 20.54 i 6-8 (ration list, OH/MS??), w. dupl. KUB 43.24:1-3 (OS). 
	g. “to put (an enemy) in someone’s power”: (the king writes to his general Nuwanza:) “I have consulted bird and liver oracles on your behalf, and it has been determined:” nuÚwa ®t namma apūnÚ maÚtta LÚ.KÚR URUÓayašan dU BE_LIYA karū paiš nuÚwarÚanÚkan kueši “Go, at last! The Storm-god, my lord, has already given you that Óayašan enemy, and you will kill him” KBo 4.4 ii 56-57 (NH), ed. AM 118f.; cf. similar expressions w. parā pai-(k 9' a', below) in KBo 3.22:46-48 and KUB 23.11 ii 24, 30, iii 7. 
	h. “to grant or bestow (intangibles)”: nu ANA LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL DUMU.MEŠ DUMU. MUNUS.MEŠ DUMU.DUMU.MEŠÚŠUNU pa-a-i nuÚšmaš LÚŠU.<(GI)>-tar MUNUSŠU.GI<(-tar)> pa-a-i “Give sons, daughters, and their grandchildren to the king and queen, give them longevity (lit. old-man-hood and old-woman-hood)” KBo 11.10 ii 27-28 (rit., MH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.72 ii 31-32 (NS); “If, Leliwani, my lady, … you make Óattušili, your servant, live” MU.ÓI.AÚši ITU.KAM.ÓI.A UD.ÓI.A dalu~ gaēš pé-eš-ti “(and) you give him long years, months, and days …” KUB 21.27 iii 38 (Óatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8.116f., Lebrun, Hymnes 334, 340, tr. ANET 394; [nuÚnn]aš DINGIR-LUM ŠA LÚMUTI D[A]M 

48

aššiyatar pé-eš-ta “The goddess gave us the love of husband and wife (and we had sons and daughters)” KUB 1.1 + 1304/u iii 3 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24.16f.; kuišÚmu DINGIR-LUM k® inannÚa paiš “Whatever deity gave me this disease too” KUB 
36.75 ii 9 (prayer, OH/MS); cf. KUB 30.10 rev. 3 (Kantuzzili prayer, OH/MS), KUB 30.11 rev. 3 (OH/MS); nuÚmu dIŠ~ TAR URUŠamuha GAŠANÚYA GIŠTUKUL pé-eš-ta ŠA ABEÚYAÚyaÚmu U ŠA ŠEŠÚYA kaneššuwar péeš-ta “IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady, gave me a weapon and granted me recognition by my father and my brother” KBo 6.29 i 11-13 (edict, Óatt. III); cf. nu EN.L´L-tarÚšet tuk pa-iš “He gave to you his Enlilship” KBo 3.21 ii 1 (hymn to IŠKUR-Adad, MH/NS), ed. Güterbock, Oriens 10:359, Archi, Or NS 52:22, 25. 
	i. in the technical language of the KIN oracles (cf. Archi, OA 13:113-144): “The ‘Stormgod of Heaven’ arose. He took ‘sickness’ (and) he took the ‘difficulty of the king’” µZikiltu ba-i-iš “(and) he gave (them to) ‘Zikiltu’” KBo 18.151 obv. 7 (atypical OS), ed. Ünal/Kammenhuber, KZ 88:164f.; “On the second day ‘the Mothergoddess’ arose. She took ‘good’ and the ‘god ZA.BA›.BA›’” nÚat ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUÓatti SUM-an “and they are given to the ‘Men of Óatti’” KUB 22.25 obv. 23 (NH); “The ‘gods’ arose” SILIM-ul ME-ir nÚaš KARAŠ SUM-za “they took ‘favor,’ and it is given to ‘the army’” KUB 5.1 i 51 (NH), ed. THeth 4:40f. 
	j. in idiomatic expressions — 1' kunanna pai- “to give over for execution, condemn to death”: nu apūn UN-an ANA LUGAL innarā kunanna pa-a-i … nu niwallan antuhšan kunanna pa-iš “On his own authority he gives that man over to the king for execution … He gave over an innocent man for execution” KUB 13.7 i 18-20 (MH/NS), ed. Friedrich, SV 1:176. Aside from the routine adanna/akuanna pai-see exx. in a 8' and c, above, this is the only inf. construed w. pai-B. 

2' idalu hengan pai-“to give an evil death”: (Whoever does not use ritually pure skins from the royal kitchen to make the king’s chariot, and later it comes to light) nuÚšši QADUM NUMUNÚŠU ÓUL-lu ÚŠ-an pí-ia-an-zi “to him and his seed they will give an evil death” KUB 13.3 iii 8 (instr., MH?/NS), cf. ibid. iii 20, ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:47, 49, tr. ANET 207. 

pai- B j 6' 
3' kurur pai-“to act in a hostile manner toward, lit. to give enmity”: “Whoever does this thing” nuÚ šši dUTU-ŠI kū
rur pé-eh-hi “I, My Majesty, will act in a hostile manner toward him. (Let him be my enemy. I, My Majesty, will fight [him] like an enemy)” KBo 5.4 rev. 14 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:62f. (“sage ich Feindschaft an”), p. 88 (“ich entbiete ihm Feindschaft”). 
4' zahhain pai-“to give battle” — a' in general: “He then went to the sea for battle” mānÚši zahhain pa-a-iš “When he gave battle (against) him, (he began finally to vanquish the serpent)” KBo 3.7 iii 23 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:15, 19, tr. ANET 126 (“engaged him in battle”), Hittite Myths 13; nuÚšši INA UD.8.KAM INA UD.1.KAM zahhin pa-iš “On the 8th day he gave battle against it (i.e., Kargamiš) for one (entire) day” KBo 5.6 iii 29 (DŠ Frag. 28), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:95; (They perform a ritual) nu zah~ hin QA_TAMMA pí-an-zi “In the same way they give battle” KUB 4.1 iii 14 (military rit., pre-NH/NS). 
b' w. menahhanda: 9-tiÚma MU-ti dAlalūi dAnuš menahhanda zahhain [pa]-iš “In the 9th year Anu gave battle against Alalu, (and defeated Alalu)” KUB 33.120 i 12-13 (Song of Kumarbi, NH), translit. Myth. 154, tr. Hittite Myths 40. 
5' kiššeran pai-“to give the hand” (a gesture of friendship): “He still [keeps] saying ‘I am afraid.’ Atpā s[aid(?):]” dUTU-ŠIÚwa ŠU-an ANA DUMU. NITA pa-a-i … nuÚšši ŠU-an AD-DIN “‘Will His Majesty give to the young man (his) hand?’ … I gave him (my) hand” KUB 14.3 ii 29-30, 34 (Taw., NH), ed. AU 8f.; ([Two] male chief priests kiss each other’s right hands and mouths) LÚSANGA dIM ANA LÚSANGA dTelipinu Š[U-an 3-ŠU] pa-a-i nammaÚ aš UŠKÊN nu ANA LÚSANGA d[x] kišširan 3-ŠU pa-a-i “The priest of the Stormgod gives (his) hand [three times] to the priest of Telipinu. Then he bows. He gives (his) hand three times to the priest of […]. (Then he bows)” KUB 20.88 i 5-7 (fest.), ed. Jasink Ticchioni, SCO 27:156f.; cf. ibid. i 8-13; cf. KUB 41.46 iii 9 (fest.). 
6' SISKUR(.ÓI.A)/SŠSKUR.(ÓI.A)/mukeššar pai-“to perform (lit. give) an invocation ritual” (cf. mukeššar b 1'): nuÚšmaš ŠA U[D-M]I ŠA ITU.KAM MU-ti mēyaniyaš S´SKUR.ÓI.A UL kuiški pa-a-i “No one performs for you (lit. gives you) the invo
49

cation ritual of the day, of the month, of the course/ extent/length of the year” KUB 17.21 iii 14-15 (prayer of Arn. and Ašm., MH/MS), ed. Kaškäer 158f.; S´SKUR. ÓI.AÚaÚšmaš parkui šalli šanezzi URUÓattušašÚpat KUR-ya pí-iš-ga-u-e-ni “And in the land of Óattuša only do we perform pure, great, and fine rituals for you” ibid. i 2-3 + 545/u i 6-7, ed. Kaškäer 152f.; kāšaÚwa ANA dWišuriyanti huwappi MUNUS-ni S´SKUR péeš-ki-mi “Now, I will keep performing rituals for Wišuriyanza, the evil woman” KBo 15.25 obv. 34-35 (Wišuriyanza rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:4f.; SISKURÚši péeh-hi “I will perform a ritual for her (the zawalli of Šaušgatti) (and then send her away on the road)” KUB 16.46 iv 14 (oracle question, NH); nu GIM-an SIS~ KUR pí-ya-an-zi “When they perform a ritual” KBo 
2.4 i 19 (monthly fest., NH), ed. KN 278f. (“darbringen”). 
7' EZEN pai-“to provide (for) a festival”: ŠU. NIGIN 4 UDU 2 PA. 4 BÁN Z´D.DA 10 DUG KAŠ 1 DUGhuppar 2 EZEN 1 EZEN zeni 1 EZEN DÂŠI URU-aš pé-eš-ki-iz-zi “Total: The town provides four sheep, two PARISUs, and four SU_TUs of flour, ten pitchers of beer, one huppar-vessel (and) two festivals, (i.e.,) one autumn festival and one spring festival” KUB 17.35 iii 21-22 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 130, 144. 
8' NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM pai-“to administer an oath”: [nuÚšmaš] NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM kuit 1-an ADDIN “Since I have given [you] (Targašnalli, Mašhuiluwa, and Manapa-Tarhunta) the same (lit. ‘one’) oath” KBo 5.4 rev. 9 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:60f. 
w. n. 6 (“einen Eid (d.h. einen Vertrag des gleichen Inhalts) gab”). 
9' uddār pai-“to give words/instructions”: ud~ dārÚmetÚta pé-eh-hu-un “I have given you my words. (Let them read this [table]t before you monthly)” KUB 1.16 iii 56-57 (edict, Óatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14f.; mān ŠA KUR URUKummanni āššauwa AWA~ TEMEŠ k® pé-eš-ta “If you gave these good instructions concerning (lit. of) the land of Kummanni” KBo 11.1 rev. 12 (prayer to Teššub, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:109, 118. 
10' “to impart (ability)”: nu ANA µKan.-li iyau~ wa UL pa-a-i “He does not impart (lit. give) to Kantuzzili ability to act” KUB 30.10 obv. 3 (prayer of 

pai- B k 2' 

Kantuzzili, OH/MS); cf. FHG 1:10-11 (iyauwar) (prayer to the Sungod, OH/NS). 
11' KASKAL-an pai-“to show the way(?)”: KASKAL-annÚaÚwaÚšmaš pí-iš-ki-tén ANA LÚ.MEŠMUŠEN.DÙÚwa KASKAL-an pí-iš-kat-tén “And (O gods) always show them the way(?); always show the way(?) to the augurs” KBo 17.105 ii 24-25 (rit. and prayer for dLAMMA and dIMIN.IMIN.BI, MH/ MS). 
12' SIGﬁ pai-“to give a greeting”: ANA LÚ T˘E_MI SIGﬁ pa-i nÚatÚmu kattimi uda≠u± “Give (your) greetings to the messenger, and let him convey them to me” HKM 30:21-22 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 174f. 
	k. w. adv., prev., postpos. — 1' anda pai-— a' “to give in addition to (dat.)” (cf. Hoffner, AfO Beih. 19:131f.): “If someone steals bricks, however much he steals” andaÚšše«ašše» apēnišūwan ≠pa-a-i± “that much (i.e., an equal amount) he shall pay in addition to it” KBo 6.10 ii 21 (Law §128, OH/NS); “If someone steals an ox, horse, mule, or donkey, and its owner recognizes it, he shall take what is truly his” [a]ndaÚšše (var. andaÚyaÚššiÚkan) 2-TAM (var. 2-ki) pa-a-i “He (the thief) shall give twice again in addition to it” KBo 6.2 iii 56-57 (Law §70, OS), 
	w. dupl. KBo 6.3 iii 61 (OH/NS), ed. HG 40f. □ for 2-TAM see StBoT 20:30 n. 2; for other ref. to anda pai- in Laws see HW2 1:100; (Urhi-Teššub denies trying to curtail Óattušili’s power and offers him additional (ā

ppanda pehhi) things) É-erÚmaÚwaÚtaÚkkan ANA É-TI anda pé-eh-hi “I will give you house/estate in addition to house/estate” KUB 21.37 obv. 24 (Óatt. III), ed. THeth 4:120f. (incorrectly “Ich werde dir ein Haus im Hause geben”); [n]uÚttaÚkk[an …] ANA ZAG KUR Mila~ wata anda kuit UL pé-eh[-hu-un …] “[The …] which I did not give to you in addition to the border of the land of Milawata, […]” KUB 19.55 rev. 4647 + KUB 48.90 rev. 13-14 (Milawata letter, NH), ed. Hoffner, AfO Beih. 19:131-133; the forms w. -kan are post-OH. 
b' in broken context: KUB 21.16 i 3 (hist., Óatt. III); KBo 12.124 iii 21 (med. rit.); KUB 44.61 i 21 (med.). 
2' išši anda pai-“to incriminate someone (acc.) by means of false testimony(?),” lit. “to give (someone) into (someone’s mouth)”: “If it is a case of homicide, and a man, whether legal opponent or 

50

avenger, appeals to(?) (lit. lifts) the king” nÚanÚ kan ANA LUGAL iššiÚšši anda pa-a-i “and he gives him to the king in his mouth, (and they execute that man)” KUB 13.7 i 16 (MH/NS), ed. Beal, AnSt 43:32 (“gets the king to order the accused’s execution”). 
3' andan pai-“to give inward”: ANA LÚ.MEŠ É.NA›ÚyaÚkan AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM andan pé-eškán-du “Let people give (women) into (the Stone House) to the men of the Stone House as brides. (Let no one give son or daughter out (parā pai-, see k 9' h', below))” KUB 13.8:13 (edict of Ašm. for the Stone House, MH/NS), ed. HTR 106f. 

4' āa' “to give back” —

ppa pai-— 1'' in general: (If someone hits a pig, and it dies) nÚan išhiÚ šši EGIR-pa pa-a-i “he shall give it back to its owner” KBo 6.3 iv 20-21 (Laws §86, OH/NS); (If a slave is convicted of theft from a house, they mutilate him) nÚan āppa išhiÚšši pí-an-zi “and give him back to his owner” KBo 6.2 iv 45-46 (Law §95, OS); cf. KUB 13.35 ii 7, iii 12 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:6-11 (“übergeben”); “My father took away what the Kaškaeans held” [nÚ]at EGIR-pa LÚ.MEŠ URUÓatti pé-eš-ki-it “and gave it back to the Hittites” KBo 14.3 iii 21 (DŠ Frag. 14), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:67; “(S)he took old age from him” mayatatarÚmaÚšši EGIR-pa pa-iš “and gave back to him (his) youth” KUB 29.1 ii 37 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 14, 28, tr. ANET 358; cf. KUB 9.27 i 27 (Paškuwatti rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277 (§4); “Now, I am taking (the magic spell) from each body part of the patient” nÚat EGIR-pa išheÚšši SUM-eš-ki-mi (var. išhaÚšši pí-iš-≠ki±-mi) “I am giving it back to its originator (lit. owner)” KUB 41.1 i 10 (rit. of Alli, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 24.9 i 51, ed. THeth 2:28f. i 57, and passim in this text; LÚSAGI NINDAtakarmun [LU]GAL-i pa-a-i LUGAL-uš paršiya nÚan EGIR-pa [LÚ]SAGI pa-a-i “The cupbearer gives takarmubread to the king. The king breaks it. He gives it back to the cupbearer. (He carries it out)” KBo 23.64 iii 9-11, also 6-7 (fest.); see also KBo 4.9 v 11-17 (ANDAÓ~ ŠUM fest., OH/NS), KBo 11.14 ii 7-14 (Óantitaššu rit., MH/ NS), etc.; 9 LÚ.MEŠ URUQašqa EGIR-an pa-it-ta ŠÁMÚŠUNUÚma 20 GUD.ÓI.A … “He gave nine Kaškaean men back; their price was twenty cattle, (and) …” HKM 102:19-20 (list of prisoners of war for exchange-repatriation, MH/MS), cf. ibid. 15-17. 

pai- B k 4' a' 2'' d'' 
2'' in treaties and diplomatic context — a'' by the Hittite king to tributaries: “I did not take away from you the house of your father nor your land” nu É ABIÚKA KURÚKAÚya tukÚpat EGIR-pa AD-DIN “I gave you back your father’s house and your land” KBo 5.13 i 25 (C) (Kup., Murš. II), w. dupl. A = KBo 4.3 i 13, B = KBo 4.7 ii 4, D = KUB 6.41 ii 1, E = KUB 19.53 ii 1-2, ed. SV 1:114f.; (If a fugitive comes to you with his master’s/colleague’s possessions) [nu]≠U±NU_TEMEŠ EGIR-pa pí-≠i±-[ú-e-ni] pitteandannÚaÚšmaš EGIR-pa UL pí-i-ú-e-ni “We will give back the implements, but we will not give back the fugitive to you” KUB 23.77:56 (treaty w. Kaškaeans, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 120; cf. KBo 8.35 ii 6-7 (treaty w. Kaškaeans, MH/ MS), tr. Kaškäer 110, ed. HW2 1:185a; “If … some freeman comes as a fugitive to Óatti” [nÚanÚt]a EGIR-pa UL pé-eh-hi IŠT[U KUR] URUKÙ.BABBAR-ti LÚMUNNABTUM EGIR-pa pí-ia-an-na UL āra “I will not give him back to you. Giving back fugitives from Óatti is not done.” (If a farmer or craftsman flees to Óatti, however) nÚanÚta EGIR-pa pé-eh[hi] “I will give him back to you” KBo 5.4 obv. 38-40 (Targ.), ed. SV 1:58f.; (Abiratta, petty king of Barga says to Muršili II:) “Since in the old days the city Iyaruwada belonged to my grandfather” nuÚwaÚ mu URUIyaruwattan URU-an dannattan purut DIN~ GIR.MEŠ akkanduššÚa EGIR-pa pa-a-i “give back to me the empty city of Iyaruwatta, the dirt, the gods, and the deceased” KBo 3.3 i 15-17 (hist., Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:33f., 39f. 
b'' from tributary to tributary: (If some subject of Kupanta-dLAMMA revolts and comes to you (Alakšandu), arrest him) nÚan ANA µKupantadLAMMA-ya EGIR-pa pa-a-i “Return him to Kupanta-dLAMMA” KUB 21.5 iii 58 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:72f.:42; cf. KBo 4.3 + KBo 19.64a iv 30 (Kup.), ed. del Monte, FsPintore 32f. 
c'' from tributary to independent power: (If a Hittite fugitive comes from the land of the Kaška and comes to a city with a treaty (with us), put him on the road to Óattuša. Do not seize him) [nÚa]n EGIR-pa INA KUR URUQašqa [pa-]≠it-ti± “and give him back to the land of Kaška” KUB 23.77:63-64 (treaty 
w. the Kaškaeans, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 121. 
d'' from independent king to independent king: “If a fugitive goes from Óattuša (to Kizzuwatna), 
51

let Šunaššura seize him” nÚan ANA dUTU-ŠI āppa pa-a-ú “Let him give him back to His Majesty” KUB 
8.81 ii 12-13 (Tudh.-Šunaššura treaty, MH/MS), ed. del Monte, OA 20:216f.; (The enemy kings belittled me) [nuÚ m]u ‰R.MEŠ EGIR-pa UL pí-i-e-er “They did not give back my subjects” KUB 19.29 iv 22, ed. AM 20f.; “Pihhuniya (king of the Kaškaeans) wrote back as follows”: ULÚwaÚtta kuitki EGIR-pa pé-eh-hi … nuÚmu ‰R.MEŠÚYA EGIR-pa UL pí-iš-ta “‘I will give you nothing back’ … He did not give my subjects back” KBo 3.4 iii 80, 84-85, ed. AM 90f.; (Muršili II declares war on Uhhaziti of Arzawa, writing:) “‘After I demanded the return of my subjects who came to you’” nuÚwarÚašÚmu EGIR-pa «EGIRpa» UL pa-iš-ta (var. pé-eš-ta) “‘you did not give them back to me’” KBo 3.4 ii 11-12, w. dupl. KBo 16.1 iii 10, ed. AM 46f. (without dupl.). 
e'' from tributaries to the Hittite king: “If a fugitive comes from Óatti …” ULÚmanÚan EGIR-pa URUÓattuši pí-iš-te-ni “Should you not give him back to Óatti, …” KUB 23.77:60-61 (treaty w. the Kaškaeans, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 121; “Now, if His Majesty is requesting the resettled persons of Alašiya back” nuÚwarÚanÚši āppa pé-[eh-h]i “I will give them back to him” KUB 14.1 rev. 89 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 38f.; (The Azzians say:) “‘The Hittite resettled persons who are here’” nuÚwarÚan parā pí-i-ia-u-e-ni [nuÚmu NA]M.RA URUÓatti 1 LI[M] NAM.RA EGIR-pa pí-i-e-er “‘we will give them over.’ They gave back [to me] the Hittite resettled persons, i.e., 1,000 resettled persons” KBo 4.4 iv 48-49, ed. AM 140f.; cf. iv 51; cf. KUB 19.3 i (6)-7, ed. AM 104f.; (If a resettled person flees to you, Duppi-Teššub) “and you do not seize him” nÚan ANA LUGAL KUR URUÓatti EGIR-pa U[L] pé-eš-ti “and do not give him back to the king of Óatti” KBo 5.9 ii 41-42 (Dupp.), ed. SV 1:18f.; cf. (Seize the fugitive resettled persons) nuÚwarÚaš parā pa-a-i kinuna mān apūš NAM. RA.MEŠ µAziraš ANA dUTU-ŠI EGIR-pa UL pa-iš “and hand them over. If Aziru has not now given back those resettled persons to My Majesty” KBo 
3.3 iii 19-22 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:38, 43f. 
f'' from one provincial official to another(?): (“The priest” writes to Kaššu:) nÚašta mān tuel ‰R.MEŠÚKA kattanda uwanzi nÚašta ammuqqa EGIR-pa UL pé-eh-hi “If your subjects come down, 

pai- B k 6' 

I will not give them back” HKM 74:14-19 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. HBM 262f. 
3'' KIN oracles: “Two: ‘the deities’ arose and took ‘vigor,’ ‘release,’ and ‘the enemy’” nÚat EGIR-pa LÚ.KÚR SUM-an “They are given back to ‘the enemy’” KUB 5.1 iv 63 (NH), ed. THeth 4:86f.; cf. nÚaš EGIR ANA LÚ.KÚR SUM-za IBoT 1.32 obv. 22 (NH); nÚat EGIR-pa pa-iš KUB 5.1 ii 59a (NH). 
b' “to entrust(?)”: [MUNUS.LUGAL k]uit UNU_~ TUM ANA µGAL-dU DUMU µU[kkur]a LÚUGULA 10 … EGIR-pa pé-eš-ki-it “Concerning the implements which the queen entrusted to GAL-dU, son of Ukkura, the Overseer of Ten” KUB 13.35 i 1, 3 (dep., NH), ed. Güterbock, Symb.Koschaker 30f., StBoT 4:4f.; cf. d, above. 

5' ā

ppan pai-“to remit”: “If they kill somebody/ something …” ANA 1 LÚ EGIR-an 3 LÚ.MEŠ píiš-kat-te-ni “For one man you will remit three men” KUB 26.19 ii 27 (treaty, MH/NS); (The Hittite king and queen have eliminated the necessity that infantry and horse-troops of the Óulaya River Land be stationed in Óatti) apātÚmaÚšši KARAŠ ŠA DINGIRLIM šahhan luzzi EGIR-an SUM-er kuinÚši AŠŠUM LÚ.MEŠKISAL.LUÓ-UTTI EGIR-an SUM-er kuinÚ maÚšši AŠŠUM LÚ.MEŠAPIN.LAL-UTTI EGIR-an SUM-er “They have remitted to him (the king of Óulaya River Land) those troops for paying/doing the god’s taxes and work. Some they remitted to him for custodianship; and some they remitted to him for farming” KBo 4.10 obv. 44-45 (Ulmi-Teššub treaty, Óatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 32f. (“züruckgeben”), Hoffner, FsÖzgüc 201, Götze, NBr 55f. (“stellen zur Verfügung”), CHD luzzi e (“gave over”), tr. Geogr. 68 (“remit”); (Because supplies for the ceremonies and rites of the gods are too heavy for him) nÚatÚši … ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URU.dU-tašša hū
mandaš EGIR-an pé-eh-hu-un nÚanÚkan arawahhun “I remitted it to him with respect to … all the gods of Tarhuntašša and exempted him” Bronze Tablet iii 67-69, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:24f. (Tudh. IV). 

6' ā

ppanda pai-“to give afterwards”: “One talent of copper, three bull-shaped vessels of beads (containing) one-half BÁN of beads the parwalamen gave (to) the king” 3 GUN URUDU [x] GUN AN.NA 2 U[RUDUŠ]EN 6 URUDUKIN 5 URUDUwak~ 

52

šur 2 BIBRU GUD NA›NUNUZ 1/2 BÁN NA›NU~ [NUZ LÚ.MEŠparw]alaš LUGAL EGIR-anda SUMir “Three talents of copper, x talents of tin, two copper pipes, six copper sickles, five copper wakšurvessels, two bull-shaped vessels of beads (containing) one-half BÁN of beads the parwala-men later gave (to) the king” KUB 40.95 ii 6-8 (inv.), ed. Kempinski/Košak, Tel Aviv 4:88f. (“gave in addition”), Siegelová, Verw. 268f. (“lieferten … aus” without attempting to render the EGIR-anda); “The house of Šunaili: four men, one woman; total five people” 1 MUNUS-TUMÚmaÚ šši E_DE_NU EGIR-anda pí-ia-an-[(za)] “One single woman is to be given to him afterwards” Bo 2628 i 12-13 (vow of Pud., copy S), w. dupl. 1340/u:6 (EE), ed. StBoT 1:30f.; cf. KUB 38.12 iv 12 (cult inv., NH); KBo 
21.18:17 (frag. of rit. w. Hurrian); KBo 6.29 iii 34-37 + Bo 2026b (KUB 1 pl. 8):4-7 (Óatt. III), ed. NBr. 50f. w. n. 10; KUB 26.66 iii 12-13 (list of metals, NH). 
7' [arha pai-]: arha pé-eh-hi KUB 9.27 i 24 read arha da(coll.)-ah-hi; see already Friedrich, ZA 37:192 and StBoT 

22:64 w. n. 5. 

8' kattan pai-— a' w. direct obj. “to betray (or hand over) someone to someone (dat.); abandon someone”: “Kalašma transgressed the oath … (and) the oath deities seized them” nuÚza ŠEŠ-aš ŠEŠ-an kattan pé-eš-ki-it [LÚa]rašÚmaÚza LÚaran kattan pé-eš-ki-it “Brother betrayed brother, and friend betrayed friend. (One killed the other)” KBo 
2.5 iv 16-17 (NH), ed. AM 192f.; “Or if you seek infantry and mounted troops from His Majesty (so that) you may attack some enemy and His Majesty gives you infantry and mounted troops” zi[kÚmanÚm]aÚ an (Friedrich: zi[ggaÚm]aÚan) hantezzi ANA LÚ. KÚR GAM-an pé-eš-t[i] “but you hand them over to the first enemy (let that matter be placed under the oath and let the oath-deities continually chase you, Alakšandu)” KUB 21.1 iii 58-59 (Alakš., Muw. II), 
w. dupl. KBo 19.74 + KUB 21.5 iv 5-6, ed. SV 2:74f.; and similarly KBo 5.4 rev. 22-24 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:64f.; nuÚ šmaš kā
ša LÚ.MEŠ.x-x-randa 6 URU.DIDLI.ÓI.A kattan pé-eš-kan-zi “Now, the …-men are betraying six cities to them” KBo 18.29 obv. 9-12 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:54f.; “Or if a Kaškaean marries a woman (from the city), [if] he comes [into the city]” nuÚza URU-an GAM-an pa-a-[i] “he will betray the city” KUB 21.29 iii 28-31 (Tiliura edict, Óatt. III), cf. 

pai- B k 9' b' 1'' 
AM 265 and tr. Kaškäer 147 (both “verlassen”); cf. KUB 21.29 iv 4. 
b' other, perhaps faulty occurrences: (We have given some cooked food, flesh, bread, and beer [to the god], so eat and drink in the manner of a god) ≠antuhši±ÚmaÚwaÚza kattan lē pé-eš-ti “but do not give(?) yourself under a human being” HT 1 iv 3 (Ašhella’s rit., NS), ed. AM 265 (“vergiš den Menschen nicht”), incorrectly Dinçol, Belleten XLIX/193:17, 24; the word pé-eš-ti is confirmed by the dupl. KUB 9.32 obv. 44; but while the sporadic use of -za in the examples cited in k 8' a' is always required by a possessive idea (“one’s own”) relating to the accusative object, in this passage no such factor is present; kat-ta-an [p]a-a-i in KBo 30.69 iii 7-8 is presumably a hearing error for the expected GAD-an pāi. 
9' parā pai-— a' “to hand over, allow to be defeated or captured” (obj. enemies or opponents; subj. gods): šÚan dÓalmaš[uiz] dš®ušÚmiš parā paiš “My goddess Ó. handed it (Óattuša) over (to me) (and I took it by storm at night)” KBo 3.22 rev. 46-48 (Anitta, OS), ed. StBoT 18:12f.; cf. KBo 3.55 obv. 10 (OH/NS); (The gods ran before me. These lands which I have named, those (people) who began hostilities) nÚ atÚmu DINGIR.MEŠ parā pí-i-e-er “the gods handed them over to me (and I carried off all these lands)” KUB 23.11 ii 30 (ann. Tudh., MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:158f.; “I, Tudhaliya, the Great King, fought him” nÚanÚmu DINGIR.MEŠ parā pí-i-e-er “The gods handed him over to me (… and I destroyed the Kaškaean army)” ibid. iii 19; cf. ibid. ii 24; “The Aššuwan prisoners of war started a revolt” nuÚ waÚmu DINGIR.MEŠ parā pí-i-e-er “The gods handed (them) over to me” ibid. iii 7; LÚ.KÚR. MEŠÚYAÚmu parā pí-iš-ki-ši “You keep handing my enemies over to me, (and I keep destroying them)” KUB 32.130:33 (hymn to Šaušga, Murš. II), ed. Danmanville, RHA XIV/59:42f., Wegner, AOAT 36:18 w. n. 68; cf. KUB 58.73 iii 8-9 (prayer in rit.), ed. Otten, ZA 65:300f.; cf. g, above, and cf. LÚ.MEŠLÚ.KÚR … ŠAPAL G‰R.MEŠ zikkein KBo 15.52 + KUB 34.116 v 14-16. 
b' “to return, extradite (fugitives and criminals)” 
— 1'' by subjects and tributaries to the Hittite king: “If a fugitive comes from Óatti like a fugitive(!)” nÚan šarā dā nÚanÚmu parā pa-a-i “seize him and extradite him to me. (If … a well-born man comes from Óapalla to Óatti as a fugitive, I will not give 
53

him back (ā
ppa pai-) to you)” KBo 5.4 obv. 36 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:58f., del Monte, FsPintore 31; (The people of Mira became afraid and seized their rebellious king) nÚanÚmu parā pí-e-er (var. pí-i-e-er) “They extradited him to me” KBo 5.13 i 10 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:112f.; The Azzians fall at Muršili’s feet saying: “Our lord, do not destroy us in any way …” [NAM.R]A URUÓattiÚyaÚwaÚnnašÚkan kuiš anda nuÚwarÚan parā pí-i-i[a-u]-e-ni “The (fugitive) Hittite resettled persons, who are here with us, we will extradite” KBo 4.4 iv 35-36 (NH), ed. AM 138f.; cf. āppa pai-(k 4', above) and see del Monte, FsPintore 29-47. 
2'' by Hittites to a tributary: (In a section which may deal with a craftsman fleeing Wiluša for Óatti) [nÚanÚt]a parā pí-ia-a≠n-zi± “They will give him back (i.e., extradite him) to you” KUB 21.1 iii 67 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:76f., del Monte, FsPintore 32. 
c' “to return (territory)”: ŠA KUR URUÓattiÚyaÚ kan kuiš NAM.RA.[ÓI.A] ANA KUR URUÓayaša parranda pānza nu NAM.RA.ÓI.A parā [p(é-eštén)] ŠA KUR URUKÙ.BABBARÚya ZAG.MEŠ parā pé-eš-tén “Extradite the Hittite resettled persons who have gone across to Óayaša and return the border(-territories) of Óatti” KBo 5.3 iii 66-68 (Óuqq., Šupp. I), w. dupl. KBo 19.44 rev. 51-52, ed. SV 2:128
131. 
d' “to hand on (booty)”: (Madduwatta promised the Hittite king) “‘I will either destroy or carry off the land of Óapalla with its resettled persons, cattle and sheep’” [nÚat ANA] dUTU-ŠI parā pé-eh-hi “‘I will hand them on to His Majesty.’ (Then, however, you did not destroy Óapalla nor did you seize it)” nÚat ANA dUTU-ŠI parā U[L paitta] “and [you did] not [hand] it on to My Majesty. (You Madduwatta took it for yourself)” KUB 14.1 rev. 22-23 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 24-27. 
e' “to hand on, hand over (objects in festivals and rituals)”: “The exorcist (AZU) takes a cup of wine and libates before the deity” namma ANA EN. S´SKUR parā pa-a-i “Then he hands it over to the patient” KUB 12.11 iii 24 (MH/NS); DUGKUKUB KAŠ LÚSAGI parā pa-a-i “(The prince) hands the pitcher of beer over to the cupbearer” KUB 20.88 vi? 17-18; nu GAL MEŠEDI GIŠŠUKUR ANA LÚMEŠEDI parā pa-a-i “The chief of the guards hands the spear 

pai- B k 9' i' 

over to a guard” KBo 21.85 i 7 + KBo 8.109 left col. 2 (fest., OH/MS); perhaps also KBo 27.40 obv.? 6-7 (fest.). 
f' “to hand out”: (Muršili II complains about his Babylonian stepmother) “She brought this from Babylonia” apātÚma URUÓattuši hūmanti antuh~ šanni parā pé-eš-ta “While that she handed out to all Óattuša, to the people” KUB 14.4 ii 6-7 (prayer of Murš. II), ed. Güterbock, apud Laroche, Ugar. 3:102f. 
g' “to hand over (a newborn child to a midwife)”: nuÚmu mān DUMU-an parā pí-an-zi “When they hand over the child to me” KBo 17.61 obv. 12 (birth rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:42f. 
h' “to give (a person for marriage) out (of the community)”: “Let people give (daughters) in (an~ dan pai-) for daughter-in-law-ship to the men of the Stone House” parāÚmaÚkan DUMU.NITA DU~ MU.MUNUS AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM LÚandaiyan~ danniÚya lē kuiški pa-a-i “but let no one give out (of the community) a son for son-in-law-ship or a daughter for daughter-in-law-ship” KUB 13.8:14-15 (instr. of Ašm. for the Stone House, MH/NS), ed. HTR 106f.; (Puduhepa quotes Ramses II’s letter) GIM-anÚ waÚmu DUMU.MUNUS parā [p]é-eš-ti “‘When you give a daughter out (of your country) to me’” KUB 21.38 rev. 1 (letter, NH), ed. Helck, JCS 17:92f. 
i' “to dedicate (to a deity)”: (IŠTAR tells Muršili II in a dream the following about his son, Óattušili: “He will not live”) nuÚwarÚan ammuk parā pa-a-i “But dedicate him to me (and let him be my priest, and he will live)” KUB 1.1 i 15-16 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:4f.; ammukÚma ANA dIŠTAR GAŠANÚ YA É µ.dSIN-dU AD-DIN [nÚa]tÚkan EGIR-an tar~ nahhun nÚat parā
pé-eh-hu-un [an]nallan kuit ešta apātÚši parā pé-eh-hu-un ammuqqa kuit harkun apaddaÚya parā pé-eh-hu-un nÚatÚkan EGIR-an tarnahhun nÚat ANA DINGIR-LIM parā AD-DIN … ammuqqaÚza kuit haštiyaš É-ir DÙ-nun nÚat ANA DINGIR-LIM parā pé-eh-hu-un DUMUÚyaÚtta [µD]udhaliyan ‰R-anni parā pé-eh-hu-un “I gave the estate of Armatarhunta to Šaušga, my lady. I withdrew it (from the realm of private property(?)) and dedicated it. What was previously (available), that I dedicated to her. What I held, that too I dedicated to her. I withdrew it from the realm of private property(?) and dedicated it to the deity. … 

54

The bone-house that I built I dedicated to the deity. I also dedicated my son Tudhaliya to the deity as a servant” KUB 1.1 iv 66-70, 75-76 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:28f.; perhaps here KUB 14.4 ii 11 (Murš. II prayer about the Tawananna). 
j' “to give up (kingship), abdicate”: “If it becomes unpropitious to someone [i.e., a king] because of a word from a deity” nu LUGAL-UTTA ŠA KUR URU.dU-tašša parā pa-a-i “and he gives up the kingship of the land of Tarhuntašša” Bronze Tablet iii 14, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:20f. 
10' āppa parā pai-“to hand back”: (Óattušili exiled his enemy Armatarhunta) “But I took half of [his estate]” [nÚan] ANA µA[rm]a-dU EGIR-pa parā pé-eh-hu-un “and handed it back to Armatar~ hunta” KUB 19.67 + 1513/u i 27 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:18f. iii 30; “They settled these men in Tanipiya” nu ā¢
ppa (var. appan) paraÚpat INA URUTani~ piya A.ŠÀ kueraš LUGAL-waz pí-ia-an-za “And a field in Tanipiya was handed back (or: rededicated?) by the king” KBo 3.7 iv 22-23 (dedication ending the Illuyanka myth, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 17.6 iv 18, ed. Beck-man, JANES 14:17, 20 (§34''), tr. Hittite Myths 14 (both differently), translit. Myth. 12. 
11' šarā pai-“to hand upwards”: “They pick up (the statue of) Pirwa, carry him forward” nÚanÚ kan :harpi ŠA MUN šarā pí-ia-an-zi “and hand him up (on) to a pile of salt” IBoT 2.131 rev. 15-16 (cult of Pirwa). 
Hrozny™, MDOG 56 (1915) 38; Sommer, Heth. 1 (1920) 1f.; Hrozny™, JSOR 6 (1922) 69 n. 1; Götze/Pedersen, MSpr (1934) 63; Friedrich, HW (1952) 155; Kronasser, Schw.Gotth. (1963) 28f., 55 (“bestimmen(?), aussuchen, vorbereiten” said of a sacrificial animal). 

Cf. piyanai-, piyani, NINDApiyantalli-, *piyatar, peškatalla-. 

GIŠpain(n)i-, GIŠpaeni-n. neut.; tamarisk; written syll. and GIŠŠINIG; from OH. 
nom.-acc. GIŠpa-a-i-ni KBo 22.6 iv 14 (OH?/NS), KBo 
17.103 i 15!, (25) (NH), KUB 7.39:11, 16, KUB 42.98 i (18) (NH), KUB 45.28 obv. 4, KBo 34.195 i 4, GIŠpa-a-e-ni KUB 
17.20 i 6 (LNS), KBo 17.93 obv. 8, GIŠpa-i-ni KUB 9.22 ii 22, 29, iii 12 (NH), FHG 23:6, GIŠpa-e-ni KUB 36.8 i 21 (NS), GIŠpa-a-in-ni KBo 23.13 rt. col. (12), KUB 46.47 rev. (22) (MH/NS), GIŠpa-a-i-in-ni ibid. rev. 11; gen. GIŠpa-a-i-in-na-aš KBo 21.44 rev. (6), 10; abl. GIŠpa-a-i-ni-ta-az KBo 17.103 rev. 

GIŠpain(n)i
10 (NH), KBo 27.68:(4), GIŠpa-a-i[n-ni-ta-az] KBo 23.13 rt. col. 13, GIŠba-a-i-ni-ya-az(-za) KUB 42.98 i 23 (NH); inst. GIŠpa-i-ni-it KBo 11.5 vi 7. 
GIŠŠINIG KBo 5.2 i 39, 60, iii 43, iv 21 (MH/NS), KBo 

22.136 i (5), KBo 27.80:6. 
GIŠpa-a-i-ni-w[a-t]a kuit ÉhilamniÚšit arta nuÚ warÚa(t)Úšt[a] karša(n)du “Let them cut down the tamarisk which stands at your(!, lit. its) gate building (and let them make it into weapons ([GIŠTU~ KUL].≠ÓI.A±, cf. line 27) for Ištar of Akkad)” KBo 
22.6 iv 14-15 (šar tamhari, OH?/NS), ed. Güterbock, MDOG 101:21, 23; [nu GIŠ]ERIN GIŠpa-i-ni GIŠSERDUM IŠTU S´G SAﬁ anda išhiyan “And cedar, tamarisk (and) olive(-woods) are tied together with red wool” KUB 
9.22 ii 22-23 (birth rit., NH), ed. Beckman, StBoT 29:90f.; nammaÚkan LÚpatiliš harnā®n IŠT[U DUGD´]LIM. GAL IŠTU GIŠ GIŠERIN GIŠpa-i-ni GIŠSERDUM ≠dāi± nu MUNUS KAZUÚŠU šuppiyahhi “Then the patili-priest takes harnai-, some cedar, tamarisk, and olive wood out of a bowl, and he consecrates the woman’s mouth” ibid. ii 28-30; [n]Úašta LÚpat[i]liš kuit GIŠERIN ≠GIŠ±pa-i-ni GIŠSE[RD]UM IŠTU S´G SAﬁ [a]nda išhiyan ANA MUNUS ipulliyaš [a]nda daiš “What cedar, tamarisk, and olive(-woods) bound together with red wool the patili-priest placed on the woman, on the ipulli (he takes these from her and puts them with the nahiti-loaf)” ibid. iii 11-13; GIM-anÚma āppazzi(sic) hāli t®yazi […] / GIŠuraddazza GIŠba-a-i-ni-ia-az-za harnā
innÚa da[…] “but when the last watch arrives, […] take(s?) […] with ura(t)-wood and tamarisk-wood and har~ nai” KUB 42.98 i 22-23 (rit. frag.), cf. ibid. i 18; […] GIŠpaa-e-ni witeni anda peššiyazi “(s)he throws the […] tamarisk (wood) into the water” KBo 17.93:8 (rit. frag.); “But if the patient is a woman, <they take> for her a stool and fine clothes of a woman, and they lay them out for Óebat: a little lapis lazuli, a little carnelian, a little alabaster, a little hūšti-”14 kap-pí-iš ŠE parā šiyannaš GIŠŠINIG tepu GIŠERIN tepu “fourteen kappiš of germinated(?) barley, a little tamarisk, a little cedar” KBo 5.2 i 38-39 (Ammihatna’s rit.); “Before the gate on the right stands purification water in a cup” nuÚkan GIŠŠINIG anda kittari “and tamarisk is placed in (it); (on the left one cup of sweet milk is standing, and olive (-wood?) is placed in it)” ibid. iii 43; “He takes one kappiš of barley, he takes a little lapis lazuli, car
55

nelian, and alabaster” hūštin GIŠERIN GIŠŠINIG tepu dāi “he takes a little hušti-, cedar, and tamarisk, (and grinds them up in a mortar; he ‘lets them out’ with water of purification, and the patient stands facing the sun and drinks this preparation on an empty stomach)” ibid. iv 21-22; […]x anda GIŠpaa-i-ni GIŠ≠ERIN-annÚa± [išhiyan] KUB 45.28 obv. 4 (rit. for ancient gods); nuÚššan [kedani] / [tu]p!-pí-ya GIŠERIN GIŠpa-a-i-in-na-aš-ša x[…] / [me]miyanuš zin<n>anteš “on [this] [t]ablet the words of cedar and tamarisk are finished” KBo 21.44 rev. 9-11 (colophon of tablet of itkalzi rit.); […] ≠A±NA GIŠ.ÓI.A šer GIŠuran GIŠpa-a-i[-ni …] KUB 42.98 i 18 (rit. frag.); […] / ≠GIŠ±pa-i-ni-it GIŠura[ttit …] / U IŠTU GI.DÙG.GA wahnuzi KBo 11.5 vi 6-8; “He takes a silver pitcher and fills it with water. He throws into it seven pebbles of the sea, and then drips a bit of fine oil in” šerrÚaÚššan GIŠpa-a-i-n[i!] šā
hi “On top he stuffs tamarisk (leaves/branches?)” KBo 17.103 obv. 15 ( + KUB 46.48 obv. 19) (rit. for Teššub); cf. also ibid. obv. 25; ([Purification] water is placed […]) andaÚmaÚkan GIŠ≠pa-a±-[ni …] (par. GIŠpa-a-i[n-ni …]) [(dāi)] nu DINGIR.MEŠ GIŠpa-a-i-ni-ta-az (par. GIŠpa-a-i[nni-ta-az]) wetenit x[… (arha šup)piy(a)hhanzi] “and he places tamarisk in it […] and [they] con[secrate] the gods with tamarisk (and) water […]” KBo 
17.103 rev. 10 (rit. for Teššub), rest. from par. KBo 23.13 rt. col. 12-14; […] wetenaz GIŠpa-a-i[n-ni … p]apparšzi “he sprinkles the tamarisk with […] water” KUB 
46.48 rev. 22 (rit. for Teššub); (The exorcist gathers a great number of diverse materials: silver, gold, stones, woods, grain, reeds, etc., they are ground up and put into fourteen cups) GIŠERI[N] 1? GIŠpai-ni-ia apeniššan anda tianzi UL [k]uškuššanzi “they put (in) cedar and tamarisk wood as is (i.e., unground), they do not grind them” KBo 20.129 i 38-39 + FHG 23:6-7 (mouth-washing rit.); nuÚšši LÚAZU kiš~ šara[…] / GIŠpa-i-ni-iš-ša-an ku-x[…] / peran paš~ kan KBo 34.195 i 3-5 (rit. frag.). 
GIŠpaini appears to be a loanword from Hurrian GIŠpaini which is in turn connected w. Akk. b®nu “tamarisk.” (Cf. also ba-ne, ba-ne-um, ba-nu in Ebla vocab. 395, ed. MEE V, forthcoming). Güterbock, MDOG 101:23, translated GIŠpaini as “tamarisk” but was uncertain (ibid. p. 24) whether in Hittite Anatolia the word always denoted “tamarisk.” He accordingly suggest

pairra

ed that it might also denote “juniper.” This idea was developed by Hoffner, AlHeth. 119. It is now claimed that several subspecies of the tamarisk have been common in Asia Minor at least since the third millennium B.C. until the present (see Encyclopaedia Britannica Micropaedia 15 s.v. tamarisk; P. H. Davis, ed. Flora of Turkey, Edinburgh Univ. 1967, vol. 2:349-351; G. 
H. Willcox, AnSt 24 (1974) 126-129; W. van Zeist et al., Paleohistoria 14 (1970) 24; idem, Paleohistoria 17 (1975) 101, 132). If tamarisks grew as far north as Purušhanda (Acemhüyük) in the third millennium, this could have been the paini of the Sargon story. In Mesopotamia wood of the b®nu was used to make small objects (CAD B 242). In the Hittite tr. of the Sargon story GIŠTUKUL.ÓI.A “weapons” were fashioned from it. But in native Hittite compositions paini was only used in purification rituals, not as a material for carpenters. 
Güterbock, MDOG 101 (1969) 24; Ertem, Flora (1974) 99-101 (“ılgın a©acı” = “tamarisk”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 119; Wegner/Salvini, ChS I/4 (1991) 243 (indices). 
pairra-(Hurr.) n.; (images of) the dPairra (= Sum. DINGIR.IMIN.IMIN.BI “the Seven Gods”); NS.† 
acc. or gen. pl. pa-ir-ra-ša KBo 11.5 vi 2, (4) (NS); pl. d.-l. dPa-ir-ra-aš KBo 14.142 i 17 (NH); Luw. pl. dat. dPa-irra-an-za KBo 14.143 i 13. 
[GIM-a]nÚma GEﬂ-anza ≠kiša±ri nu [2 MÁŠ. GAL?] / [2 T]APAL pa-ir-ra-ša LUGAL-i pa[rā ēpzi] / [LUGAL-u]šÚkan QA_TAM daī2 MÁ[Š.GAL …] / ≠d±UTU-za 2 MÁŠ.GAL 2 TAPAL pa-i[r-ra-ša] / [AN]A DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ pāi “But [whe]n it becomes night, he [holds] o[ut two billy goats and two] sets of dPairra (images) to the king. The [king] ‘places the hand.’ [He …s] two billy goats (and?) in the morning sun(?) he gives two billy goats and two sets of dPairra (images) to the male deities” KBo 11.5 vi 1-5 (Hurr. cult rit. of Muwalanni, NS); cf. [… (a number)] TAPAL dIMIN.IMIN.BI hū
wap~ paēš KÚ-kanzi “[So-many]
š / [… šuppa h]uišu kuiesets of P.-deities, evil beings who eat raw [meat]” KUB 46.54 obv. 11-12 (incantation); w. the divine determinative and written syllabically: 12 NINDA.SIG. MEŠ dPa-ir-ra-aš ZAG-aš GÙB-laš KBo 14.142 i 17 (cult of Teššub of Aleppo, NH); cf. KUB 27.13 i 10; ANA 

56

dPa-ir-ra-an-za amba[šši …] / ≠huw±alziya [šipan~ ti(?)] KBo 14.143 i 13-14 (Luw. dat. pl. in an offering list w. Hurr. terms, NH). 
The absence of the determinative for god on the two occurrences of pairraša in KBo 11.5 suggests that the word could be used as a noun designating some concrete representation of the deities. The Hittitized form pairraša in KBo 11.5 vi 2 (acc. or gen. pl.) is built upon the Hurrian determined plural *pair(i)Úna > pairra “those who built” (for pairi see Neu in bibl.). Laroche (GLH 193f.) has noted the equation of dPairra = DINGIR.IMIN.BI in Meskene. The occurrence of TAPAL “pair, set” w. the dPair~ ra and dIMIN.IMIN.BI groups would also fit an equation dPairra = dIMIN.IMIN.BI for Hittite texts. The deities referred to in Hittite texts under the writing dIMIN.IMIN.BI (and probably also dPair~ raš) are bloodthirsty and fearful companions of the pestilence god Yarri (see KUB 54.65 iii 7-13 (+) KUB 
56.69 and discussion s.v. CHD marwai-). The dIMIN. IMIN.BI are to be found beyond a road fork (KAS~ KAL-aš hattareš parian) in an uninhabited region (dammeli pedi) KUB 54.65 (+) KUB 56.69 ii 17-19, trans-lit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:140f. In these respects they resemble the heptad of Mesopotamian deities, offspring of Anu and the Earth, death-dealing, “filled with the power to frighten,” who play an important role in the Erra Epic (L. Cagni, The Poem of Erra, SANE 1/3, pp. 18f., 26-30). The Hurrian epithet “they who built” seems to have no meaningful reference to this group. For other references in Akk. texts to groups of seven gods see CAD S 230f. s.v. sibittu. 
Goetze, JCS 18 (1964) 94 (“something like ‘attendants’”); Laroche, GLH (1977/79) 193f. s.v. *pairi (Hurr. pairra translates dVII.BI [“the Seven Gods,” “Divine Heptad”] in Meskene series An no. 191); Neu, Hurritische (1988) 7 w. n. 15, p. 44, on the undetermined singular form paÚiÚri “(einer) der gebaut hat.” 
paizzinna-n. com.; (a kind of produce); MH/ NS.† 
(Among the materials for the king’s SISKUR šarraššiyaš to Teššub they take) GIŠINBU hūman RAT≥BU ŠA_BULU kuittÚa parā tepu GIŠPÈŠ GIŠGEŠ~ TIN.ÓÁD.DU.A GIŠSERDUM pa-iz-zi-in-na-aš wa~ rawaraš GIŠÓAŠÓUR GIŠÓAŠÓUR.KUR.RA GIŠzū~ 

pakmariti 
pa GIŠdammašhuel GIŠNURMA GIŠGEŠTIN GIŠšama~ ma “all fresh (and) dried fruit, of each a little: figs, raisins, olives, paizzinnaš, warawaraš, apples, ‘foreign apples’(?), zū
pa, dammašhuel, pomegranates, grapes, šamama” KBo 10.34 i 15-18 (enthronement rit. in the cult of Teššub and Óebat, MH/NS), tr. Güterbock, JAOS 88:69, translit. Ertem, Flora 2, cf. Hoffner, AlHeth 115. Perhaps, since the ending -aš could be genitive, “‘foreign apple(s)’ of paizzinna and warawara.” 
Note that p. and warawara- are the only produce in the list without the det. GIŠ. Therefore they were probably not grown on woody plants (i.e., trees or bushes). 
Ertem, Flora (1974) 2, 72; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 115. 
[Úpak(k)išitti] n. KUB 37.1 obv. 26, (31?), cited as Hittite by Tischler, HDW 58. The text is Akk., w. Hitt. and Luw. words marked w. a glossenkeil. Úp. is unmarked and therefore probably thought to be Akk., although it may have been a loanword. 
Cf. Köcher, AfO 16:54; Ertem, Flora 137. 
pakmariti Hurr. n.; (denoting an activity associated w. sacrifice); NS.† 
loc.? pa-ak-ma-ri-ti KUB 6.14 rev. 20, (24), KUB 16.40 rev.! 6, 10, KUB 18.11 rev. 5, 10, 14, 16, KUB 50.90 obv. 5, 8, 13, 16, rev. 22, 28, KUB 50.121 iii 5 (all NS), pa-ak-ma-ri-t[i!] KUB 6.27:10. 
p. appears in šašta-oracles and is always paired w. kam~ zuriti. In the exx. KUB 6.27:10 and KUB 50.121 iii 5, kamzuriti is probably to be restored. 
“Let the first sheep be favorable and let the second one be unfavorable. The first sheep, the first hāli, the first bedding (= šaštaš) (was) on the left; the second (one) it drew (them) over to the right (ZAG-≠an hu-i±-nu-ut)” kamzuriti pa-ak-ma-ri-ti UL kuitki iyat “At the kamzuriti (and) p. (the sheep) did nothing” KUB 18.11 rev. 5 (šašta-oracle, NH); “The second sheep, the first hāli, the first bedding (was) on the left; afterwards it brought (them) over to the right. At (the time of) the kamzuriti (the sheep) brought out (its) tongue and bit it, and it did not take it back again” pa-ak-ma-ri-tiÚma UL kuit~ ki DÙ-at “at (the time of) the p. (the sheep) did not do anything” ibid. rev. 10; cf. also KUB 16.40 rev.! 6, 10, KUB 6.14 rev. 24, KUB 50.90 obv. 13, rev. 22, 28; cf. the 
57

Akk. šumma immeru passage: lišānšu šumēla unaššak “(the sheep) bites its tongue (on the) left” (Ebeling, Tod und Leben 42, obv. 9); “The first sheep, the first hali, the first bedding (was on) the right” EGIR-p[a …] kamzu~ riti pa-ak-ma-ri-tiÚmaÚza arha pippaš “The second (one) […]. But at (the time of) the kamzuriti (and) 
p. (the sheep) turned itself over” KUB 50.90 obv. 4-5 (oracle, NS); cf. the use of Akk. ištu imni ana šumēli ittaba~ lakkat “(the sheep) turns itself (over?) from the right to the left” in the šumma immeru text edited in Ebeling, Tod und Leben 42, rev. 3; cf. [kamzu]ri pa-ak-ma-ri[(-)?] KUB 
60.19:9 (šašta-oracle frag.). 
While not all the actions mentioned in the Hittite examples can be paralleled in the Ebeling Akkadian text, enough can be paralleled to assure the identity of this practice. More important for the meaning of pakmariti is the correspondence between kamzuriti and pakmariti in the Hittite text w. the various phrases beginning w. ina and ana in the Akkadian text: ina t≥
ehîÚka “when you approach,” ina karā
biÚka “when you utter the prayer,” ina/ana niqê “at the moment of sacrifice.” Since these expressions, which would correspond in Hittite to “locatives,” express points of time, it is clear that we must seek the precise meanings of kamzuriti and pakmariti in this area. 
Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 194 s.v. pakmari; Hoffner, FsHallo (1993) 116-119. 
Cf. kamzuriti. 
paknu-v.; to defame, slander, denounce; OH/ NS.† 
pret. pl. 3 pa-ak-nu-er KBo 3.34 ii 10, pa-ak-nu-e-er KBo 
3.36 obv. (17), VBoT 33:9 (all OH/NS). uncertain: pa-a[k-nu-an-zi?] KUB 26.87:3 (OH?/NS). 
“Aškaliya was the lord in Óurma and was a man in every respect” šÚanÚašta attiÚmi pa-ak-nu-er (var. pa-ak-nu[-e-]er) šÚan arnut šÚan URUAnkui IRDI šÚan URUAnkuiÚpat LÚAGRIG-an iēt šarkuš LÚ-eš! (text: MEŠ) ēšta akišÚmaÚaš tepšauwanni “They defamed him to my father; so he transferred him, brought him to Ankuwa, and made him an LÚAGRIG in Ankuwa; he was a prominent man, but he died in disgrace/obscurity” KBo 3.34 ii 9-12 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.36 obv. 17-19, ed. de Martino, OA 28:9-11, Singer, AnSt 34:102, Sturtevant, AJPh 50:364, cf. 

pakkušš-

Carruba, Or NS 33:415, tr. Tischler/del Monte, RGTC 6:23 (“verleumdete”), Pecchioli Daddi, Stato Economia 242 (“calumniarono”); […]x-an apē pa-ak-nu-e-er “They defamed […]” VBoT 33:9 (anecdotes, OH/NS); [… µKar]~ ruwan LUGAL-i pa-a[k-nu-an-zi? … µK]arruwan idalu iya[nzi(?)] “[They] def[ame Kar]ruwa before the king … they treat Karruwa badly” KUB 26.87:3-4 (anecdotes?, OH?/NS). 
Since a LÚAGRIG (Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri 438-442; Singer, AnSt 34:97-127, esp. 105f., StBoT 27:171 “administrator”) is a postion inferior to that of the lord of a city, it is clear that Aškaliya was demoted because someone paknu-ed him. This assumption also seems to be strengthened by the sequence paknu> idalu iya- “to do evil to” in KUB 26.87:3-4. 
paknu- is a near synonym of hanti tiya- and kušduwai-. 
Sturtevant, AJPh 50 (1929) 364 (“to praise(?)”); Güterbock apud Friedrich, HW (1952) 155 and HW 1. Erg. (1957) 15 (“verleumden(??)”); Carruba, Or NS 33 (1964) 415 (“man stellte ihn … heraus”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 12 (“anzeigen(?)” > *pank-nu-> panku- (?)); Singer, AnSt 34 (1984) 102 (“denounced(?)”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 128 §285 (on the stem); de Martino, OA 28 (1989) 10 n. 37. 
pakšuwant-see pakkuššuwant-. 
paku-see pa(n)ku-. 
pakkušš-v.; to pound, crack, crush, grind (grain); OH/NS.† 
iter. pres. pl. 3 pa-ak-ku-uš-kán-zi KUB 29.1 iii 9 (OH/NS). 
imp. pl. 3 pa-ak-ku-uš-kán-du KUB 29.1 iii 12 (OH/NS) and dupl. KUB 55.50:(3). 
nu šeppit euwannÚa šuhhair nu pa-ak-ku-uš-kánzi kuiš LUGAL-i idālu šanhazzi apunn¢Úa DINGIR. MEŠ idalawe peššeyandu nu apunnÚa pa-ak-ku-uškán-du “They have strewn šeppit and ewan (types of grain) and are crushing (it). He who plots evil against the king, let the gods abandon him to an evil (fate), let them crush him too (like šeppit and ewan)” KUB 29.1 iii 9-12 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Schwartz, Or NS 16:32f., 43f., AlHeth 78, Kellerman, Diss. 16, 29, Marazzi, VO 5:156f. (“pestino”), tr. ANET 358. 
pakkušš- is similar in meaning to harra-, kuš~ kušš-, pašihai-, puwai-, and zahhurai-. 

58

Laroche, RHA XI/53 (1951) 68 w. n. 23 (“concasser”); Fried-rich, HW (1952) 155 (stem: pakku-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 405 (stem: pakkuš-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 212 (stem: pakkušš- “zerstampfen”). 

Cf. pakkuššuwant-, (GIŠ)pakkuššuwar. 
pakkuššawant-see pakkuššuwant-. 

pakkuššuwant-, pakkuššawant-, pakšu~ want-1. (adj. modifying šeppit grain) cracked(?), 
2. (substantivized adj.) cracked(?) grain, grits(?); from MH/MS. 
sg. neut. nom.-acc. pa-ak-ku-uš-≠ša?±-wa-an KBo 21.1 i 15 (NS), pa-ak-šu-wa-an KUB 30.38a:5. 
pl. com. nom. pa-ak-ku-uš-šu-an-te-eš KBo 16.78 i 6 (MH?/ MS?); neut. nom.-acc. pa-ak-ku-uš-šu-wa-an-da KUB 9.6 i 1, 11, (14) (MH/NS), pa-ak-šu-wa-da KUB 41.22 iv 14 (NH); loc. ≠pa±-ak-ku-uš-[š]u-wa-an-da-aš KUB 9.6 i 19 (MH/NS); abl. pa-ak-ku-uš-≠šu-wa-an±-da-az ibid. i 20. 
1	(adj. modifying šeppit-grain) “cracked(?)”: (In a list of ingredients) 1 UPNU pa-ak-ku-uš-≠ša?±wa-an šeppit “one handful (of) cracked šeppitgrain” KBo 21.1 i 15 (rit., NS). 
2	(substantivized adj.) “cracked(?) grain, grits (?)”: mahhanÚma MUNUS ŠU.GI pa-ak-ku-uš-šuwa-an-da [pa]rkuwayaz wetenaz arha ārri “But when the Old Woman rinses the grits(?) with [cl]ean water” KUB 9.6 i 1-2 (Dupaduparša rit., MH/NS), translit. LTU 37 and StBoT 30:111; “With her right hand, she pours wine, oil, and honey from a clay cup through two wooden tubes” nuÚššan IŠTU GIŠŠEN. ÓI.A katta šer ≠pa±-ak-ku-uš[-š]u-wa-an-≠da±-aš aršzi pa-ak-ku-uš-≠šu±-wa-an-da-a[z-m]a-≠aš±-ša-an katta GIpaddani aršzi “and through the wooden tubes it flows down onto the grits(?) and from the grits it flows down into the sieve” ibid. + KUB 35.39 i 18-21, translit. LTU 38 and StBoT 30:112; BA.BA.ZA GIM-an karšanza nuÚššiÚkan pa-ak-šu-wa-an (dupl. pa-ak-≠šu±-wa-da, par. pí-id-du-un-za) anda NU.GÁL “Just as the porridge is ‘cut’ (i.e., strained?), so that there are no grits(?) (var. pid~ dunza lump?) in it” (so let evil and impurity be eliminated) KUB 30.38a:4-5, w. dupl. KUB 41.22 iv 14 (NH) and par. KBo 23.1 i 35-36 (NH). 

Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 212 w. n. 70 (anaptyxis of u). 

Cf. pakkušš- v. 

palla 
(GIŠ)pakkuššuwar n.; (a wooden implement used to crack or crush cereals); from MH/NS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. GIŠpa-ak-k[u?-u]š?-šu-ar KUB 41.8 iii 28, paak-ku-uš-šu-wa-ar KBo 10.45 iii 37 (both MH/NS). 
“If you do not decide the just case of this household” nuÚšmaš GAM-an daganzipaš GUL-wannaš kiš[aru UG]UÚma AN-iš pa-ak-ku-uš-šu-wa-ar (var. GIŠpa-ak-k[u?-u]š?-šu-ar) kišaru nu AN[-za(?) …]x anda zahhuraiddu “may the earth below you become the GUL-wannaš and may the sky above become the pakkuššuwar, and may the sky(?) crush […] therein” KBo 10.45 iii 36-38 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 iii 27-29, ed. Otten, ZA 54:130f. □ our restoration AN[-za(?)] represents the ergative nepišanza required by the transitive construction. 
From the word’s formation it is implied that its action is pakkušš-. From KUB 41.8 iii 29 it is implied that its action could also be described by the verb zahhurai-“to break up, crush.” 
Otten, ZA 54 (1961) 131 (“Stöšel”). 
Cf. pakkušš-. 
palla (abbreviated writing); (the name of a location mentioned in snake oracle texts); NH.† 
pal-la IBoT 1.33:14, 26, 76, 113 (NH), KUB 49.1 obv.? i 4, rev.? iv 2 (NH). 
“We named/assigned ‘the snake of the head’ to (the place called) the ‘brazier.’ At ‘the Stormgod’ it caught a fish” pal-la! T[I-ni] [e]zzaš “(and) ate (it) at ‘palla TI-ni’” IBoT 1.33:13-14 (snake oracle, NH), ed. Laroche, RA 52:152, 156; “We assigned the ‘snake of the head’ to the ‘brazier’ …” 2 pal-la TI-ni hadandaza GAM-anda u[it] “Secondly: it emer[ged] from below the ‘dry place’ at/to ‘palla TI-ni’” ibid. 112-113, ed. RA 52:155, 159. 
This word appears in snake oracles, always in a phrase pal-la TI-ni (or pal.-la ti.-ni). The language and meaning are unclear; the phrase as a whole is in the loc. The two words together describe a location in the area in which the snake oracles were carried out. 
Laroche, RA 52 (1958) 162 (pal-la TI-ni (ou BAL-la TI-ni??) inconnue ailleurs, semble contenir le datif TI-ni ‘à la vie’”). 
59

palahh-v.; to call(?), summon(?); from OH/NS.† 
pret. sg. 3? pa-la-a-ah-t[a(-)…] KUB 31.110:9 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pa-la?-ah-hi-ir KUB 33.56 obv. 6 (OH/NS). 
SI UZﬂ dā nuÚwa h[(alugan iya dLAMMA)] halugan iē
t utn[eyaz … uer?] (var. KI.NE[…]) nu warri pa-la?-ah-hi-ir(-)x[… (nu kuišša)] kuwatta [(pait)] “‘[…] take the horn of a nanny goat, and make a sound.’ Inara made a sound, [and from] the l[ands …-s came.] They called(?) (for) aid and everyone went somewhere” KUB 33.56 obv. 5-6 (myth of Inara, NS), w. dupl. KUB 33.52 ii 4-6 (OH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths 29 (§3), 37 n. 6; Laroche, Myth. 88 n. 6 transliterates: pa-la-ah-hi-ir x[…]. The trace of a vertical wedge following -ir is relatively close so that the word may have been continued. Although one might be tempted to read -ká[n] instead of -ir x[…], the -kán sign in KUB 33.56 obv. 5 and the BA› signs in rev. 1 are quite different; […] / QA_TAMMA ÌR LU~ GAL šume[š …] / ūkkÚaÚwa ara[wanniš(?) …] / šÚuš pararaht[ani? …] / auriÚšmit x[…] / [U]RUriaššÚa pa-la-a-ah-t[a …] / ziga ÉRIN.MEŠ-zaÚ m[iš …] / šÚan URUÚ-x[…] “[…] in the same way. You (are?) servant(s) of the king […], but I am a f[ree man … You (pl.)] pararah-them […]; […] their/your(pl.) district(s); he called(?) [to …] and to cities […] You (sg.), my army, [will …] and him [in] the city U[-…]” KUB 31.110:5-11 (OH/NS). The incomplete final sign of the key word can be read -g[a] or -t[a]. Alternatively, since this is OH/NS, one might read: URUriaššÚapa la-a-ah-t[a(-)…]. If the above interpretation of lines 5-6 is correct, note the typically OH absence of -za in the nominal sentences w. 1st and 2nd person subjects. 
The provisional translation is based on the construction w. d.-l. warri “aid, help.” For the similar uwarra/warri halzai-see most recently HED 3:58 w. lit. The d.-l. warri also occurs w. the verbs pai-, uwa-, and ar-, and w. ÉRIN.MEŠ uppa-/parā nai-/arnu-/ uwate-. But p. is unlikely to be a verb of perambulation. If our guess is correct, p. shares part of the semantic range of halzai-, kallešš-, punušš-, wek-, and weriya-. 
(:)(TÚG)palahša-n.com.; (a garment characteristic of dIŠTAR/dŠaušga and her two maidservants Ninatta and Kulitta); NH.† 
sg. nom. TÚGpa-la-ah-ša-aš KUB 42.61 obv. 5; acc. :pa-laah-ša-an KUB 1.1 i 57 (Óatt. III), pa-la-ah-ša-an KBo 3.6 i 

(:)(TÚG)palahša

(48) (Óatt. III), KUB 31.20 iii 7 + KBo 16.36 iii 10 (Óatt. III), KBo 24.134 obv. 2; loc. pa-la-ah-ši KBo 16.100:14; pl. nom.(?) pa-la-ah-ši-iš KBo 20.29 obv.? 6. 
uncertain pa-la-ah-ša-aš KUB 39.66 l.e. 1; frag. pa-l[aa]h-ša[-…] KBo 18.161 obv. 15, pa-la-ah-ša-x[…] KBo 

	12.74:12. 

	a. held over someone (šer har-/ēp-) in a gesture of protection: “Whether there was a(n adverse) word from an enemy, or from an opponent in court, or from the palace” nuÚmu dIŠTARÚpat GAŠANÚ YA hū

mandaza :pa-la-ah-ša-an (var. [pa-]la-ah-šaan) UGU harta “IŠTAR, my lady, held (her) p. over me (to protect me) in everything” KUB 1.1 i 57 (Apology of Óatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 i 48, ed. StBoT 24:8f.; “They attacked him (while he was) in the river with bows and arrows and with stones” nuÚšši dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠANÚYA pa-la-ah-ša-an šer ēpta “and IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady, held (her) 
	p. over him. (When he reached the other side of the river …)” KUB 31.20 iii 6-7 + KBo 16.36 iii 9-10 (hist., Óatt. III), ed. Riemschneider, JCS 16:112. 
	b. made of cloth or a type of cloth: […] / ≠5± ŠA TÚGpa-la-ah-ša-aš […] “[(so-many) …s,] five having (lit. of) p.-s” or: “five of p.-cloth(?)” KUB 42.61 obv. 5 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 526f. (“3 rote, alte Leinen […] 4 des Schirmüberzuges(?)”). 
	c. represented in silver as part of a statuette: pa-la-ah-ši-iš KÙ.BABBAR x[…] “silver p.-s” KBo 

20.29 obv.? 6 (lists of offerings, NH), in a description of the statuettes of IŠTAR, Ninatta, and Kulitta. 
	d. associated w. the kureššar, a headwear characteristic of females: […]x+1 pa-la-ah-ša-aš 4 kureššar GAD […] KUB 39.66 lower edge 1 (rit., NS). 
	e. in broken contexts: nuÚzaÚ[k]an pa-la-ah-ši GAD-an (or: kat-<ta->an)[…] KBo 16.100:14 (cult of Óuwaššanna); 3 pa-l[a-a]h-ša[(-)…] KBo 18.161 obv. 15 (inv. of metal objects, NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 182f.; […y]a pa-la-ah-ša-x KBo 12.74:12 (myth frag.) could also be palahšai-/palahšiya-v. 

The p. was a part of female attire. It is associated w. the characteristically female headwear, kureššar (usage d, cf. Hoffner, JBL 85:331 w. n. 33). As such it forms a part of the attire of certain goddesses both in statuettes (usage c) and in narrations of their activities (usage a, and perhaps KBo 12.74:12, under 

60

(:)(TÚG)palahša

usage e). While it is not yet possible to determine what kind of garment it was, the fact that a denominative verb palahšai-describes covering recently exercised horses suggests a large cloth covering. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 155 (“Schirm?”); Kammenhuber, OLZ 49 (1954) 231f. (“Ruhe”); Riemschneider, JCS 16 (1962) 112 (“Schild”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 167 (related to palhi-?); Otten, StBoT 24 (1981) 8f. (“Gewand(?)”); Beal, Diss. (1986) 625f. (a garment, not a shield); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 610 (“Schirm”). 

Cf. palahšiya- v. 
palahšai-see palahšiya-. 

palahšiya-, palahšai-v.; to cover(?); from MH.† 
pres. pl. 3 pa-la-ah-ši-ia-an-zi KUB 29.40 iii 33, KUB 
29.50 i 11, 23, 25, iv 12, 15 (both MH/MS), KBo 14.63a i 3, (4), pa-la-ah-ša-an-zi KBo 8.50 ii 35 + KUB 29.48 obv. 17, KUB 29.48 rev. 9, (21), KUB 29.44 ii (12) (all MH/MS), KUB 29.41:(6)(?); pret. sg. 3 pa-la-ah-še-et KBo 26.105 iv? 6 (NS); pl. 3 pa-a-≠la±-ah-ša-a-er KUB 58.85 iii 10. 
a. an action performed on horses, when they are wet or sweating: (They pour water over the horse until it trembles and they lead it away from the water) nÚ[a]n katta kušalanzi pa-la-a[h-ša-an-zi-iaan] “They scrape it down/thoroughly [and] cov[er(?) it?]. (Then they take it back to the stable)” KUB 29.50 iii 1 + KUB 29.48 iii 21 (Hitt. horse training manual, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 164f. (iii 42) □ for katta kušalasee Güterbock, JAOS 84:273; cf. ibid. ii 35-36; (After one set of exercises they stop the horses and wipe their faces) [namm]aÚaš katta pa-[l]a-ah-ši-ia-an-zi nÚ at 1/ 2 DA[NNA zallaz] uwanzi par[h]anziÚyaÚaš 4 ME gipeššar [nÚuš namma] arā
nzi nÚuš katta pa-la-ah-ši-ia-an-zi “Then they cover(?) them. (Afterwards) they [tr]ot half a mi[le] and gallop 400 ells. [Then] they stop [them] and cover(?) them” (Followed by another exercise at varied pace and distance) KUB 29.50 i 23-25 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 210f., cf. Melchert, JCS 32:53-56; on zallaz cf. also Starke, KZ 
95:155 n. 58, StBoT 31:337-340, 544-547, and Neu apud Alp, HBM 310-312; cf. also ibid. i 11, iv 12-15, KUB 29.40 iii 33; (They wash a horse until it shivers/trembles and lead it away from the water) nÚa[n] katta kuša~ [lanzi nÚan] pa-la-ah-ša-an-zi “They scr[ape] it down [and] cover(?) [it]” (Then they feed and wa

:palayanalliya
ter it and cover/wrap it well (= anda waššanzi)) KUB 29.48 rev. 8-9 + KUB 29.44 iii 18-19 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 162f. (iii 29-30). 
b. in broken context: […]x-iš hatugaš pa-la-ahše-et KBo 26.105 iv? 6 (myth, NS); šarkuš ÉRIN.MEŠaz […] / DINGIR.MEŠ-aš ā
ppa aušt[a(?)] / pa-a≠la±-ah-ša-a-er […] § “a heroic army […] looked back at the gods […] they covered(?) [them(?)]” KUB 58.85 iii 8-10 (rit.); possibly also KBo 12.74:12 (myth frag.) also cited in morphological section of palahša-. 
The exx. from the Hittite horse manual show that the p.-action was performed when they were either wet or sweating. In this state, horses are wiped, rubbed down, scraped (w. a strigil), or at least covered. Since for the first three activities, the manual employs the verbs anš-, ašnu-, and kuša~ lai-, one might choose for p. the tr. “to cover(?),” perhaps loosely or temporarily, before the horses were properly wrapped (anda wašš-). This tr. also brings the verb semantically close to the noun (:)palahša- (a garment). p. occurs sometimes w. the adv. katta which makes no apparent difference to the meaning. 
Sommer, OLZ 42 (1939) 162; Friedrich, HW (1952) (“beruhigen(?)”); Kammenhuber, OLZ 49 (1954) 231f.; Friedrich, HW 
1. Erg. (1957) 15 (“beruhigen(?)”); Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. (1961) 341 (“‘beruhigen’ im Sinne von: den Pferden eine Ruhepause gönnen”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 470, 503 (“ruhen lassen, Ruhe gönnen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 29 (“beruhigen”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 327f. w. n. 1156 (denominative of TÚGpalahša- “Decke, Mantel”). 
Cf. (:)palahša- n. 
:palayanalliya-n.; (an object); NH.† 
Luw. (pl. acc. or neut. sg. in -ša) :pa-la-ia-na-al-li-ia-anza KUB 48.126 i 11 (NH). 
“Dream of the queen”: Ù-itÚwaÚmu MUNUSaz~ zinn[aš(?) …] / :pa-la-ia-na-al-li-ia-an-za GAL KÙ.BABBARÚy[a IR-ta] / ariyawen nu dIŠTAR URUŠamuha SIZSÁ[-at] “In my dream, Azzinn[a] (or: an a. woman) [asked] me for :p. and a silver cup. We inquired, and IŠTAR of Šamuha was determin[ed]” KUB 48.126 i 10-12 (dream of the queen and vow to IŠTAR of Šamuha), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 215-217 (as Bo 2828), translit. de Roos, Diss. 315, 454; restorations are from KUB 15.1 i 12-14. 
61

p. may perhaps be another vessel or an adjective modifying a noun in the broken away end of the preceding line. 
Lebrun, Samuha (1976) 217 (“il s’agirait d’une offrande”), 231 (“peut désigner un ornement”). 
[NINDA≠pal?±-la-in] in KBo 23.27 ii 38 should be read NINDAmu!-la<-ti>-in, q.v. 
pallanti(ya)-n.; depravation(?), dire need(?); MH/MS.† 
sg. d.-l. pal-la-an-ti-ia HKM 113:12; abl. pal-la-an-ti-yaaz KBo 32.15 ii 16. 
(Hurr.) tap-ša-ap ši-pa-a dTe-eš-šu-up x[…] / ha-a-ša-ri aar-ri-waa-aš e[-…] / pí-in-ti-li-waa-aš wa-al-li-x[…] KBo 32.15 i 14-16 = (Hitt.) [m]ānÚaš harga!nza(text: har-ta-an-za)Úma dIM-aš nuÚšši kuišša ‰.DÙG.GA 1 kūpin p®weni nuÚšši išhueššar parā šunnumeni nÚanÚkan pal-la-an-ti-ya-az āppa tarnumeni dÚS-un “But if Teššup is ruined(?), we will each give him fine oil, one kupi-, and we will pour a grain heap for him, and we will release him, the dÚS, from depravation(?)” KBo 32.15 ii 14-17 (Hurr.-Hitt. wisdom text, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32 (forthcoming) □ DINGIR.ÚS-UN also occurs in ii 13, where again it probably stands in apposition to nÚan and thus describes Teššup; Neu, in OBO 129:348f., reads the signs as a new sentence DINGIR-uš UN “(Der) Gott (ist) Mensch” and restores the Hurr. version at KBo 32.15 i 12 as e-ne (uninscribed space) [ma-a-an-ni tar-šu-wa-a-ni]; in neither line 13 or 17 or in the dupl. KBo 32.15:1 is there any word space between DINGIR. UŠ and UN; the Hurr. version in ibid. 16 contains no trace at all of this sentence; it seems strange, however, that the scribe left such a long uninscribed space in line 12 before the last two words of this alleged clause which would have to fit very tightly into the space of the lacuna; perhaps Neu (OBO 129:349) shows his awareness of this problem by writing that after Hurr. e-ne “der Rest der Zeile ist unbeschrieben bzw. weggebrochen” (italics ours). 
[…]x peran gašza kišat / ≠x-x-x±-attaš ƒAliwan~ attiš / URU[…]x-rayaza pal-la-an-ti-ia / INA URUŠugaziya pāēr “Because of […] a famine broke out. […-]atta (and) Aliwanatti in dire need(?) went from the city … to the city Šugaziya” HKM 113:10-13 (MH/MS). 

palaššurimi

:pallaššarinuwa-Luw. v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 :pal-la-aš-ša-ri-nu-wa-ad-da KUB 6.12 iv? 20 (NH) 
[…-n]aš(?) :pal-la-aš-ša-ri-nu-wa-ad-da nuÚ nnaš x[… ša]kuwašarit ZI-it DU⁄⁄-ta “(s)he …-ed to us […] and spoke […] to us in a true spirit” KUB 
6.12 iv? 20-21 (oracle question, NH). The form could be also 
Hitt. pres. mid. sg. 3. 
Perhaps a -nuwa-causative of the same verb from which Kronasser believed the Luwian passive participle palaššurimi-is derived: *pallašša/uri-. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 77; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 442, 458, 498, 527, 555, 590; Melchert, CLL (1993) 164 (no tr.). 
Cf. palaššurimi-. 
LÚpalašši-n.; (a functionary in a festival); from MH?/MS?.† 
sg. nom. LÚpa-la-aš-ši-iš KBo 20.68 i 8, KBo 20.112 obv. 4 (both MH?/MS?). 
[3? (LÚ.ME)]Š É dI[(M 2 L)]Ú.MEŠ É dLAM~ MA ≠šarl±[(aimiaš 4 MU)]NUS.MEŠhahhala[(lleš)] ≠1± 
LÚmaššanami[(š)] 1 LÚpa-la-aš-ši-iš 1 [(LÚwāw)]®š nÚat 12 LÚ.MEŠBE_[(L DINGIR.MEŠ)] “[three?] men of the temple of the Stormgod, two men of the temple of the Exalted Patron Deity, four hahhallawomen, one maššanami-man, one p.-man, (and) one wā
wi-man(?): they are the twelve ‘lords’ of the gods. (They call them all into the house)” KBo 14.89 
+ KBo 20.112 i 2-4 (šahhan fest., MH?/MS?), w. par. KBo 
20.68 i 6-9, translit. Otten, IM 19/20:86f. 
The šahhan fest. is part of the Luw. fest. for the goddess Óuwaššana of Óupišna. Since several terms in this passage have a Luw. formation (šar~ laimi-, maššanami-, perhaps also hahhalalli-), p. too may be of Luw. origin. 
palaššurimi- n.; (a kind of person); NH.† 
(Sum.) gú-zal = (Akk.) ku-uz-za-al-lu = (Hitt.) pa-la-aš-šuri-mi-iš KBo 1.42 ii 23 (vocab. Izi Bogh. A, NH), ed. Güterbock, MSL 13:135. 
The Sumerian indicates that the Akkadian entry should have been interpreted as guzallu “scoundrel, rascal, criminal” (see CAD G s.v.) by the Hittite translator. Alternatively, the Hittite translator may 

62

have based his tr. on the mistaken assumption that the Akk. word was guzalû “chair-bearer” (CAD G s.v.) or kuzallu “shepherd” or “the third month of the Assyrian calendar” (CAD, AHw s.v.). p. may be a Luw. (passive) participle in -mi-. Its connection w. the verb palaššarinuwa-is unclear. 
Sturtevant, Gl.2 (1936) s.v.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 155f. (“gemeiner, gewöhnlicher Mensch,” based upon the supposed meaning of guzallu); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 219 (reads the word erroneously as pallaššurimi-w. doubled l, understands it as Luwian, and accepts Friedrich’s tr. “gewöhnlicher Mensch.” He also connects the word, despite the difference in one vowel, to the verb pallaššarinuwa-). 
URUpalaumnili adv.; in Palaic (the language of the people of Pala); from OH/NS.† 
URUpa-la-um-ni-li KUB 2.4 iv 11, v (17) (OH/NS), KUB 
41.26 i (11) (OH/NS), IBoT 2.37 iv 5, IBoT 2.38 iii 5, 598/d ii 11 (Otten, ZA 48:121 n. 7), KBo 13.266 obv. (6). 
MUNUS.ŠU.GI dZiparwā memalaš uddar¢URUpala-um-ni-li memiškizzi “The Old Woman recites in Palaic the incantation of groats for Ziparwa” KUB 
2.4 iv 9-12 (fest. of Ziparwa, OH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 48:119; MUNUS.ŠU.GIÚma ŠA dZiparw[a] ŠA NINDA. GUR›.RA.MEŠ uddār [U]RUpa-la-um-ni-li memiš~ ki[zzi] “The Old Woman recites in Palaic the incantation of thick loaves for Ziparwa” IBoT 2.38 iii 3-5 (fest. of Ziparwa, OH/NS); cf. also KBo 13.266 obv. 4-7. None of these rituals actually includes the Palaic incantation. 
Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 190; Götze, Madd. (1928) 53; Otten, ZA 48 (1944) 119f.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 156; Friedrich, HE (1960) §§ 50b, 227b (on -umna- and -ili); Kronasser EHS 1 (1966) 44, 45, 113, 236, 359. 

palh-(?) v.; (mng. unkn.); OH/NS.† 
pa-a[l?-]hi-ir? KBo 3.1 i 34 = BoTU 23A i 35. 

“And Óantili was afraid” [EGI(R?Úkan pa-ah-) o o ÉR]IN.MEŠ-an pa-a[l?-]hi-ir “[Afterwar]ds(?) … they …-ed the troops” BoTU 23A i 35 (= KBo 3.1 i 34) (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. BoTU 23B (= KUB 11.1) i 35, ed. THeth 11:20f. (differently); the copy in KBo 3.1 i 34 shows no traces following pa-, and has a possible […-h]i-ir at the end; Hoffmann (THeth 11:20f.) read the copy as: [DIN]GIR.MEŠan pa[-ah-š]e-er “the gods protected him,” noting her restoration was uncertain (21 n. 1). But Forrer (BoTU 23A i 35) saw 

(:)palha- c 
traces which are compatible w. pa-a[l-]hi-ir or pa-a[l-o-]hi-ir, and a recent collation (courtesy Klengel) confirmed Forrer. The traces read -a[l-could be another sign w. a similar beginning. 
(DUG)palha-see (DUG)palhi-. 
(:)palha-Luw. v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
inf. :pal-hu-na KBo 13.241 rev. 10 (NH); part. sg. nom.acc. neut. pal-ha-am-ma<-an> KBo 13.241 rev. 18 (NH). 
In unilingual Luw. text: pal-ha-a-ma-an-za (case in -ša) KUB 35.145 rev. 7 (NH), pal-ha-a[m-ma-an-za] KBo 29.25 ii? 9 (ENS). 
a. done to or at a rock (peruna-): “O tongues, tongues! Where are you going?” NA›peruni :pal-huna pā
iweni “We are going to the rock to palha-” (or: “we are going to palha-the rock” w. the d.-l. of peruni as the logical obj. of the inf.) KUB 44.4 rev. 22 + KBo 13.241 rev. 10 (incant. in birth rit., NH), ed. Beck-man, StBoT 29:178f. (“we are going to the rock for stretching out?”). 
b. done to/by(?) the sky: “Whoever should prepare evil for this child” AN-iš pal-ha-am-ma<-an> aušdu “let him see the sky p.-ed” KUB 44.4 rev. 30 + KBo 13.241 rev. 18 (birth rit., NH), ed. Beckman, StBoT 29:178f., Starke, StBoT 31:256 (“Er soll die Breite des Himmels (partitivische Apposition) sehen”). Although Starke (StBoT 31:257), following Laroche (DLL 77) and Beckman (StBoT 29:198), argues for pal-ha-am-ma as a pl., it is difficult to see why a pl. is required here in apposition to the sg. noun nepiš. An alternative would be to read pal-ha-am-ma<-an> (van den Hout, KZ 97:69). The scribe has also clearly omitted a final -an in KI-an gi-nu-wa-an-da<-an> in the next line, as Beckman StBoT 29:178 indicated; note the neut. sg. in -ša in the par. text: [n]epiš pal-ha-a-ma-an-za KUB 
35.145 rev. 7 (birth rit., NH), translit. Beckman, StBoT 29:194, cf. Laroche, OLZ 66:148f., Carruba, FsKronasser 5, and (for an explanation as sg. nom.-acc. neut. in -ša) van den Hout, KZ 97 (1984):69. For arguments that the -ša case should be understood as pl. see lit. cited by van den Hout KZ 97:61 n. 7. Starke argues that this form is not a participle, but a noun (“Breite”) derived from the adj. w. a derivational suffix -amman. But the Nesite participles in the other parallel clauses (e.g., KI-an ginuwanda<n>, UR.MAÓ-an GIŠ-ruandan, UR.BAR.RA pa~ talhandan) militate against this interpretation. 
c. unclear: cf. :palhaya/i-. 
63

A connection of this verb w. the root of palhi“wide” suggests itself, and Beckman so took it. Starke argued that a Luw. inf. palhuna could not be derived from a verbal stem palha-, and that the stem must be palh¥i-. This would exclude a Luw. passive participle palhammi-, which seems to be present in KUB 44.4 rev. 30 + KBo 13.241 rev. 18. For the stem *palh¥i-, Starke compares la∑arr¥i(his stem notation) w. inf. la∑arruna. 
From the context, that the evildoer will “see the …-ed sky” one expects here something truly frightening. In the contexts of usages a and b, a meaning like “split open (the sky)” or “split off (fragments from the rock)” would fit. 
Laroche, DLL 77 (“étale?”); Laroche, OLZ 66 (1971) 148; Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 198; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 256f., 259, 532; Melchert, CLL (1993) 164 (“make flat, spread out”). 
Cf. palhanu-. 
:palhaya/i-Luw. adj.; wide, broad.† 
[mekki(?) išhašš]arwahhanza (or: [… lil]iwah~ hanza) n[ammaÚwaÚ …] / [… m]ekki SIGﬁ-eššan nam[maÚwaÚ…] / [… m]ekki šallaya :pal-ha-an[za (or:-ta)] “[Very l]ordly (or: swift?), f[urther … v]ery good, fur[ther … v]ery high(ly?) palha-ed […]” KUB 60.81:2-4 (NH); Starke, StBoT 31:257, knowing the passage only as Bo 1574:4, read ]x-ik-ki šal-la-ia :pal-haan[-za, and tr. “die grošen (und) breiten (Pl. N.A. n. mit Sekundärendung) […]” In each of the three parallel phrases there is a preceding adv. mekki and no following noun. p. is undoubtedly a neut. pl. nom.-acc., but whether a Luw. adj. in -nza or a Hittite part. in -anta is unclear. 
In our lemma we have arbitrarily followed Starke’s interpretation of palhan[za] as Luw. neut. pl. adj. from palha¥a/i-. But the word could be palhan[ta], a neut. pl. participle from the verb palha-(cf. palha-c). 
Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 256f. 
[ p[a]l-ha-ma-aš] KUB 31.84 ii 1 (MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 42 (tr. “Breite”) is probably to be emended to ar!(tablet: pal)-ha-ma-aš according to the dupl. arha-ia-aš KUB 31.86 ii 1 + KUB 48.104:10 (MH/NS); cf. discussion s.v. GIŠmariyawanna-. Starke, StBoT 31:257, having 

palhašti- a 

apparently overlooked the reconstruction of the passage in CHD s.v. mariyawanna-which utilizes the joined dupl., has retained the reading ≠pal±-ha-ma-aš and related the word to Luw. palhamman-. 
palham(m)i-see palha-b. 
palhanu-v.; (mng. unclear); NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 pal-ha-nu-ut KUB 23.92 obv. 6 (Tudh IV). 
“He became great king …” […-n]ut pal-ha-nuut “he …-ed (and) palhanu-d [(?) …] (and he defeated great kings with weapons)” KUB 23.92 obv. 6 (letter to Assyria, Tudh. IV), ed. Otten, AfO 19:40. 
Since a nu-causative verb should be transitive, there may have been a direct object to the broken verb and p. in the break. 
Cf. palha-, palhi-. 
palhašti-n. com.; width; wr. syll. and DAGAL; from OH. 
sg. nom. pal-ha-aš-ti-iš KUB 33.106 (= KBo 26.65) i 21 (NH), DAGAL-iš KUB 8.75 i 7 (NH), DAGAL-eš KBo 19.15:7, KBo 19.18 l.e. (2), KUB 8.75 i 14 (NH), KUB 8.77 i 3, 5, 7, KUB 42.2:5, 7, 9, 11; sg. loc. pal-ha-a-aš-ti KUB 8.57 obv. 8 (NH), pal-ha-aš-ti KUB 36.8 i 15, KUB 33.109 i (8), pal!-haaš-ti KBo 12.70 rev.! rt. col. 11 (NH). 
uncomplemented Sumerogram: DAGAL SBo 1.6:16 (OS), KBo 5.7 rev. 11 (MH/MS), and passim in lists of fields, covering Hitt. sg. nom. and loc.; IŠTU DAGAL KUB 8.75 i 55, 58, etc., and passim in field texts. 
For Akk. INA RA-AP-ŠI see :padumazziya. 
a. in nom.: (Ullikummi’s height was nine thousand miles) pal-ha-aš-ti-iš-ma-aš-ši 9 LIM DAN~ NA “and his width was nine thousand miles” KUB 
33.106 + KBo 26.65 i 21 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:18f. (without KBo 26.65) □ for DANNA = ca. 1500 m, see Melchert, JCS 32:56; “[One field]: ditto. Its seed (is) ten PARISU. It is (i.e., measures) [… cub]its in length, its other length (is) eighty-nine cubits” [DAGA]LÚmaÚšši 1 M[E] gipešar 2-NU DAGALišÚmaÚaš ≠24?± gipešar “Its [wid]th (is) one-hundred cubits, and its second width (is) twenty-four(?) cubits” KUB 8.75 i 7-8 (list of fields, NH), ed. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:6f.; for other nom. forms cf. ibid. obv. 14-15, passim, KUB 8.77 i 3, 5, 7, KUB 42.2:5-11, KBo 19.15:7, KBo 
19.18 l.e. 2. 

64

	b. in loc.: “The great gods created Gilgamesh” ALAMÚši pa[rgašti] 11 AMMATUM GABÚmaÚšši pal-ha-a-aš-ti 9 š[ekan …] “His frame (lit. the frame to him) was eleven cubits in he[ight], his chest nine s[pans] in width” KUB 8.57 obv. 7-8 (Gilg., NH), ed. Otten, IM 8:98f. (reading w[a-ak-šur] instead of š[ekan]. Both readings are problematic according to the photograph, but the latter is easier); (The dimensions of the great rock with whom Kumarbi has sex and begets Ullikummi:) nÚaš dalugašti 3 DANNA pal-ha-ašti[ÚmaÚaš … DANNA] 1/ 2 DANNAÚya “In length she was three miles; in width [she was …] and a half miles” KUB 33.98 + KUB 36.8 i 15-16 (Ullik.), ed. JCS 5:146f.; (The dimensions of Šertapšuruhi, the daughter of the Sea:) dalugaštiya [… pal-h]a-aš-ti-ma-aš 1 DANNA “she (measures) […] in length and she (has) a mile in [w]idth” KUB 33.109 i 7-8 (Óedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:38f.; “You built yourself a house and made it (as) high (as) a marnan” pal!-ha-aš-ti-maat 9-an haštai DÙ-≠at!± “in width you made it nine ‘bones’” KBo 12.70 rev.! rt. 11 (bil. wisdom, NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:782 □ haštai (= Akk. e≈emtu) is a subdivision of the cubit; for discussion see CHD marnan A. 
	c. wr. IŠTU DAGAL or simply DAGAL: “One field … :” IŠTU G´D.DA 1 ME 42 KI.MIN IŠTU DAGALÚmaÚaš 80 KI.MIN “142 ditto (i.e., cubits) in length, 80 cubits in width” KBo 19.10 + KUB 8.75 i 24-25 (list of fields, NH), ed. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:8f. (without join); IŠTU DAGALÚmaÚšši ŠUŠI 7 KI.MI[N] 2-NU DAGAL 47 KI.MI[N] ibid. ii 2-3; IŠTU G´D.DA 90 DAGALÚmaÚšši 37 ≠KI.MIN± ibid. iii 53, and passim in lists of fields; (One field:) 80 gi. G´D.DA 80 gi. DA~ GAL KUB 8.78 vi 17. 

Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 262; Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 35, 77; Sou√ek, ArOr 27 (1959) 379f.; Neu, Lok. (1980) 49 n. 113 (on the loc. forms and the gender); Joseph, Die Sprache 30 (1984) 3f. 

Cf. palhi- A. 

palhatar n. neut.; width; wr. syll. and DAGAL; MH/NS.† 
sg. nom. pal-ha-tar KBo 3.2 rev.! 26, DAGAL KUB 1.11 iv 23, KUB 29.47 iii 4; loc. ≠pal-ha-an-ni± KUB 31.84 iii 75 (tablet surface badly damaged, but reading is possible). 
“He makes them (sc. the horses) gallop nine laps of the track for one mile (and) eighty IKU” 

palhi- A d 
ANA wašanniÚma pargatarÚšet 6 IKU pal-ha-tarše-et-ma 4 IKU.ÓI.A “The length (lit. height) of the track is six IKU, its width is four IKU” KBo 3.2 rev.! 25-26 (Kikk., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 138f.; “They (sc. the horses) go for one mile twenty IKU in gallop to the track” nÚaš parkuwatarÚšet 5 IKU DAGAL-SUÚ ma 3 IKU 1/ 2 IKUÚya “It (i.e., the race course) has a length (lit. height) of five IKU and a width of three and one-half IKU” KUB 1.11 iv 23 (Kikk., NH), ed. Hipp.heth. 120f. w. n. 77 □ for a suggested value of the Hittite IKU, see Melchert, JCS 32:50-56. 
Cf. palhi-A. 
palhi-A adj.; wide, broad; from OS.† 
sg. nom. com. pal-hi-iš KUB 4.4 rev. 13 (NH); pl. nom. com. pal-ha-a-e-eš KBo 17.22 iii 7 (OS), KBo 15.10 i 16 (MH/ MS), pal-ha-a-eš KUB 57.39 obv.? 7 (MH), pal-ha-e-eš KUB 
28.8 rev. rt. col. 4b (OH?/NS), pal-he-e-eš ibid. rev. rt. col. 6b; pl. nom.-acc. neut. pal-hi KUB 42.78 ii 22 (NH); uncertain pal-hi-iš KUB 28.8 rev. rt. col. 5 (OH/NS); frag. pal-ha[-…] KBo 22.133:6 (pl. acc. com.?). 
	a. of the earth: išdammaštaÚa[nÚma] pal-hi-iš GEﬂ-iš daganzipaš “The wide, dark earth heard him (sc. dIM), (and she adorned herself)” KUB 4.4 rev. rt. col. 12-15 (trilingual hymn to dIM, NH), ed. Laroche, RA 58:74f. 
	b. of a woman’s add(i)eš (hips?): kinunaÚwa ANA ƒZi. addiešÚšeš pal-ha-a-e-eš [tu]ēkkēšÚšeš SIGﬁ-anteš mišriwanteš “Now Ziplantawiya’s a.-s (are) wide, her [l]imbs (are) well (and) perfect, (her mouth is well, her tongue is well)” KBo 15.10 i 16-17 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth 1:14f., HW2 1:510 (differently); cf. the parallel [… add]iešÚšeš pal-ha-a-eš KUB 

57.39 obv.? 7 (MS) □ for add(i)ēš denoting some body parts, see Neumann, KZ 86:322, Poetto, Paideia 32:320, Hoffner, JAOS 109:88, contra HW2 1:510 (“Väter”), 559 (“Vorfahren”). 
	c. of two gold šakantaddar-s: 2 šakantaddara pal-hi KÙ.GI ŠÀ.BA 1-E[N …] “Two wide š.-s of gold, among them on[e … (and) one …] KUB 42.78 ii 22 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:113, Siegelová, Verw. 464f. 
	d. of something which belongs to the Labarna: nu laba[rnaš …] talugaēš pal-ha-a-e-eš aš[antu] “May the Lab[arna’s …] be long (and) wide” KBo 

17.22 iii 6-7 (Óattic-Hitt. prayer for the Labarna, OS), translit. StBoT 25:208. 
65

Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 35f.; idem, HW (1952) 156. 
Cf. palhaya-, palhanu-, palhašti-, palhatar, DUGpalhi- B, pal~ hešš-, palheššar, pattarpalhi-. 
(DUG)palhi-B, (DUG)palha-n. com. w. neut. forms apparently restricted to the pl.; (a kind of vessel primarily used to hold beverages); from OS. 
sg. nom. com. DUGpal-hi-i[š] KUB 44.56 iii 8 (OH?-MH?/ NS); sg. acc. com. DUGpal-ha-an KBo 23.43 ii? 5 (MS), KUB 
17.5 i 11 (OH/NS), DUGpal-hi-in KUB 44.56 iii 11 (OH?-MH?/ NS), KBo 22.116 obv. 13 (NS); sg. gen. [DUG]pal-ha-aš KBo 
20.3 rev. 4 (OS); sg. loc. DUGpal-≠hi± KBo 24.63 ii 4, ibid. ii 11 
+ KBo 23.43 ii? 3 (MS?). 
pl. nom. com. DUGpal-hi-iš KUB 33.8 iii 7 (OH/NS), Bo 7615:3 (Otten, JCS 4:131), [DUGpal-h]i-e-eš KUB 33.54 ii 5 (OH/NS), pal-ha-eš KUB 33.66 ii 9 (OH/MS?); pl. acc. com. DUGpal-hi-uš KBo 26.83:12; pl. nom.-acc. neut. ≠pal±-ha-eaÓI.A KUB 31.143 ii 22 (OS), DUGpal-hi IBoT 3.141 iv 11 (OH/ MS?), KUB 25.31:14, pal-hi KUB 17.10 iv 15, KUB 33.3:6 (both OH/MS), DUGpal-ha KUB 17.6 i 6 (OH/NS), pal-hiÓI.A KBo 30.21:2, [DU]Gpal-hi-aš KBo 24.63 iii? 1 + KBo 24.43 iii? 8 (MS?); pl. loc. [DU]G≠pal-ha±-aš KBo 3.7 i 17 (OH/NS). 
ambiguous, sg. or pl. DUGpal-hi KUB 42.107 iv? 5 (NH), KUB 25.31 + 1142/z obv. 14 (2Z), KBo 3.7 i 16, 17 (OH/NS); uncertain: DUGpal-hi KUB 39.99 obv. 8 (MH/MS?), pal-hi-iš KBo 24.59 i? 7, pa-al-ha-aš KBo 17.51 obv.? 4, 6 (MS). 
	a. sizes: (in a list of vessels:) 5 DUGpal-hi GAL 5 DUGpal-hi TUR “five large p.-vessels, five small p.-vessels” KUB 42.107 iv? 5 (ration list, NH). 
	b. (fairly large) storage vessels holding beverages — 1' for guests at a party: “(The goddess Inara) prepared everything on a grand scale (for the feast)”: GEŠTIN-aš DUGpal-hi marnuwandaš DUGpal-hi [wa]lhiyaš DUGpal-hi [nu DU]Gpa[l-h]a-aš a[nd]an iyāda! i[ēt] “storage vessels of wine, storage vessels of marnuant-beverage, (and) vessels of walhi-beverage. She made an abundance in the storage vessels” KBo 3.7 i 16-18 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:13, 18 (§5), translit. Myth. 6, tr. ANET 125 (“amphorae”), Hittite Myths 11; (Illuyanka and his sons ate and drank) [(n)]Úašta ≠DUG±pal-ha-an hū~ mandan (var. DUGpal-ha hūma«ma»n[da]) ek[uer] “They dr[ank] up every storage vessel (var. all the storage vessels) (and became drunk)” KUB 17.5 i 11 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 17.6 i 6, ed. Beckman, JANES 14:13, 18 (§10); (He invited guests to eat and drink in his house) DUGpal-hi-uš-ma IŠTU KAŠ GEŠTIN šunn[aš?] “he fill[ed] the storage vessels 

(DUG)palhi- B c 1' 

with beer (and) wine” KBo 26.83:12 (Óedammu myth, NS). 
2' used in the cult: [8? DU]Gpal-hi išpanduzi karūili LÚGUDU⁄¤ dāi EGIR-paÚma 8 DUGpal-hi [išp]anduzi nemuš LÚZABAR.DAB pāi “The GU~ DU⁄¤-priest takes the [eight?] previous p.-vessels of wine rations, but the wine steward issues again eight new p.-vessels (of) [wi]ne rations” KUB 25.31 
+ 1142/z obv. 14-15 (village offerings, NS), ed. Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:234 □ note the inexplicable gender incongruence between the neuters palhi and išpanduzi and the common pl. ne~ muš; kā
ša GEŠTIN-aš DUGpal-hi-in dammilen [da~ w]en “We have just [ta]ken an unused (i.e., untapped) palhi-vessel of wine” KBo 22.116 obv. 13-14 (rit., NS); […] NA›-aš pal-hi-iš “palhi-vessel(s) (made) of stone” KBo 24.59 i? 7 (fest.); [o o o o GA]L šuškiši ≠pal±-ha-e-aÓI.A GAL šu≠škiši± “You fill [lar]ge […], you fill large p.-vessels” KUB 31.143 ii 22 (invoc., OS), translit. StBoT 25:186, similarly Gertz, Diss. 17-19, cf. StBoT 26:134 w. n. 420a, Watkins, GsKronasser 259; however Laroche, JCS 1:202, reads pal-ha-e A.ÓI.A.GAL; but the resulting tr. “you fill the p.-vessels with large water” does not make sense, for “large p.-vessels” palhae and GAL would not be separated. 
3' in other contexts: nÚašta DUGpal-hi-in kinut “Then he opened the storage vessel” KUB 44.56 iii 11 (myth); [(≠ 1/ 2 ?± NINDAwageššar 10-li ≠9± NINDA. ÉRIN.MEŠ 20-iš DUG)]pal-ha-aš katta ti[(anzi)] “They place [half? a] ten-weight wageššar-bread (and) six twenty-weight ‘soldier breads’ next to a palhi-vessel” KBo 20.3 rev. 4 (MELQETU-list, OS), w. dupl. KUB 58.27 i 7-9 (OH/NS), ed. StBoT 23:184f., StBoT 25:45, cf. StBoT 27:23-25; [DU]Gpal-hi-aš pūriyaš peran kue [GI]Šhata[(lk)]išnaš KÁ.GAL artari MUŠEN.ÓI. AÚyaÚššan anda hamankanteš “The birds (are) tied to (or: tied inside) the gates (made) of hawthorn which stand in front of the rims of the palhi-vessel(s)” KBo 23.43 iii 8-10 + KBo 24.63:1-3 (Hurr. rit., MS), 
	w. dupl. KUB 48.70 rev. 8-9. 
	c. in the netherworld or the sea, holding evils — 1' subj. of ar- (v. mid.) “to stand”: “The gatekeeper opened the seven doors, he drew back the seven bolts” kattan dankui takn® ZABAR pal-hi (dupl. palhi ZABAR) arta ištappulliÚšmet A.GARﬁ-aš zak~ kišÚšmiš AN.BAR-aš “Down in the netherworld (lit. dark earth) stand palhi-vessels (made) of 

66

(DUG)palhi- B c 1' 

bronze. Their lids are of lead, their latches(?) are of iron. (That which goes into them does not come up again, it perishes therein)” KUB 17.10 iv 15-16 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.3:6-7 (OH/MS), translit. Myth. 97, tr. Hittite Myths 17, ANET 128, cf. par. w. ki-c 2', below. 
2' subj. of ki- (v. mid.) “to be situated”: (The evils are passed from the body parts to the netherworld, then to the Sungoddess (of the Netherworld), who carries them to the sea) aruniÚma ≠URUDU±-aš pal-ha-eš kianda[ri] ištappulliÚšmit A.GARﬁ-aš “In the sea are situated palhi-vessels (made) of copper; their lids are of lead” KUB 33.66 ii 9-10 (incant., OH/MS?), ed. Hoffner, JNES 27:65 (cf. p. 66 noting a parallel passage in the Hebrew Bible, Zechariah 5:511, where a basket is described large enough for a woman to sit in and having a lid made of lead which keeps evils inside), translit. Myth. 70, cf. Wegner, MDOG 113:114; and Gurney, Schweich 53 n. 4; dankuwā
i takn® AN.BAR-aš DUGpalhi-iš (var. DUGpal-hi) kianta “In the dark earth are situated palhi-vessels made of iron” KUB 33.8 iii 7 (OH/NS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.141 iv 11 (OH); cf. [DUGpal-h]ee-eš kiantari KUB 33.54 rt. col. 5 (OH/NS); cf. par. c 1', above. 
d. a vessel open on both sides like a culvert, large enough for a man to crawl through: [(n)]ašma (var. našta) EN S´SKUR DUGpa[(l-h)]i arraz anda [(pai)]zzi paraÚmaÚašÚkan [(p)]ū
riyaz uizzi [(ku~ i)]tmannÚaÚkan EN S´SKUR DUGpal-ha-an [i(štar~ n)]a arha iyattari “Or the patient goes into the (large) palhi-vessel on the arra-side, but he comes out on the ‘lip’ side. While the patient is passing through the palhi-vessel (the Old Woman speaks in Hurrian)” KBo 24.63 ii 11-14 + KBo 23.43 ii 3-6 (Hurr.-Hitt. rit., MS?), w. dupls. IBoT 2.46 ii? 6-10 and KUB 45.26 ii 6-10, cf. Melchert, Diss. 388f., differently HW2 1:258b s.v. arraz 2 and HED 1-2:122. 
p. is a vessel apparently named after its characteristic width (cf. adj. palhi-). It existed in various sizes, small and large, occasionally so large that a man could crawl inside. Bronze, copper, iron, or stone p.-vessels are attested. The p.-vessel served as a container for beverages. Although the serpents in the Illuyanka myth “drank up every p.-vessel,” it does not seem that these vessels were directly 

palheššar 
drunk from, but rather that they were large vessels in which the beverage was kept and from which it was drawn off into individual cups or bowls. The use of the verb kinu-(q.v.) for opening these containers, as well as the fact that they could be equipped w. lids (ištappulli) and latches (zakkiš), suggests that they may have been used to store beverages or other valuable things. Archaeologically, wide-bodied vessels w. lids that approximate these requirements are known; see BoHa 4:58-63 and tables 68-76 (“Vasen mit Deckel”); but note that none of these is more than ten inches across the mouth. In the lowest register of the Old Hittite ∫nandık vase (cf. T. Özgüç, ∫nandıktepe [TTKYayın 5/43], foldout drawing following page 174, and pl. 44.2) a man is shown preparing food and drink for the wedding or festival depicted in the upper registers. Several vessels stand in front of him which could be palhi-vessels as they are described in the Illuyanka myth. 
Laroche, JCS 1 (1947) 206 (“kettle”); Goetze, ANET (1969) 125f. (“amphora”), 128 (“cauldron”); Gurney, Schweich (1976) 53 w. n. 4 (“bronze urns or bins,” “vats”); Coˆkun, ∫simleri (1979) 44-48; Gertz, Diss. (1982) 17-19. 
Cf. palhi- A. 
palhešš-v.; to become wide or broad, to expand; from OH?/NS.† 
iter. imp. sg. 3 pal-hi-iš-ki-it-ta-ru KUB 57.60 ii? 10, KUB 

57.63 ii (15). 
“He gave them a battle-ready, valiant spear (saying): ‘May the hostile foreign lands perish by the hand of the Labarna and may they send their goods in gold and silver to Óattuša (and) Arinna, the cities of the gods” KUR URUÓattiÚ≠ma±Úkan la~ barnaš MUNUStawannannaš kiššar® ≠tarrū± wešittaru nÚat pal-hi-iš-[k]i-it-ta-ru “May the land of Óatti graze tarrū (quietly?/undisturbed?) in the hand of the Labarna (and) the Tawannanna, and may it expand” KUB 57.60 ii? 7-10 (OH or MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
57.63 ii 12-15, ed. StBoT 5:134 (“breit werden”), StBoT 23:102, Archi, FsMeriggi2 49 (“diventi (più) ampio”), idem, FsOtten2 18f. (“sich verbreitern”). 
Cf. palhi- A. 
palheššar n.; width; NH.† inst. pal-he-eš-ni-t(ák-kán) KUB 24.13 ii 8. 
67

“I took the ‘binding’ of the mouth away from you. Let them take the dimness of the eyes away from you” ēššaritÚatÚkan dandu parkešnitÚatÚkan andan ē
šdu pal-he-eš-ni-ták-kán (palhešnitÚaÚkkan perhaps for palhešnitÚatÚkan) anda ē
šdu alwanzi~ naš kuit ÓUL-lu uttar ēššešta “Whatever evil spell the sorceress has cast, let them take it away by means of an image. Let it (i.e., the evil spell) remain therein (i.e., in the image) with (its) height; let it remain therein with (its) width” KUB 24.13 ii 79 (Allaiturahhi’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:104f., Haas/Wegner, ChS I/5:109 w. index p. 152 (dat.-loc.). Haas and Thiel, following HW 156, analyze differently: eššariÚtaÚ atÚkan … parkešniÚtaÚatÚkan … palhešniÚtaÚkkan “… let them take it (i.e., the spell) from you for the image; let it (sc. the substitute image) be (equal) to you in height, let it be (equal) to you in width.” This interpretation requires that eš“to be” have the force of takk- “be equal to,” and an unusual word order of encl. pronouns (normally ÚatÚta, see Friedrich, HE I § 288.5.a) as analyzed by Kammenhuber, ZA 57:221 w. 
n. 147 (dat.-loc. + ta + at + kan). Haas and Thiel obviously felt the problem: tr. on p. 105 and index p. 340 lists ēš(ša)re- as dat.-loc., while on p. 54 this is quoted as inst. Since the text has a few lines further: išhaššarwannitÚatÚkan aššiyauwannit, where i. is a clear inst. followed by ÚatÚkan, we prefer to see pal-he-eš-ni-ták-kán as inst. as well. 
Cf. palhi-A. 
[palhuišša-] […]x pal-hu-iš-ša[-an] KUB 48.80 (Bo 6447) iv 2, so transliterated by Güterbock, ZA 43:326 
(w. copy on p. 322) and Lebrun, Samuha 210, is to be read [UR]UPal-hu-iš-ša[-…] (RGTC 6/2:119, and cf. RGTC 6:298f.). The end of the URU is seen as a single vertical wedge in the copy. 
paliri-see parili-. 
palku(wai)-see palkušta. 
palkwiya-v. mid.; (w. -zaÚkan) to acclaim(?); OH/NS.† 
mid. pres. pl. 3 pal-ku-i-ia-an-ta KUB 29.1 iii 5. 
(Let Telipinu take the wine to the mountain) “All the gods are gathered on the mountain” nuÚ zaÚkan LUGAL-un duškeškanzi nÚanÚz(a)ÚanÚkan pal-ku-i-ia-an-ta “They will make the king glad and 

(:)palpadami

acclaim(?) him. (The Sungod and the Stormgod have taken care of the king. They have renewed his strength and set no limits to his years)” KUB 29.1 iii 4-5 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Schwartz, Or NS 16:32f., Kellerman, Diss. 15f., 29 (no tr.), cf. ibid. p. 54, Marazzi, VO 5:156f. (“accogliendolo con onore”), tr. ANET 358 (“will make the king welcome and give him their approval”). 
Our tentative tr. is derived solely from the supposition that the verb is connected w. palwai- “to cry out.” Note the somewhat comparable pairing of intransitive -za duškeške- and palwai- in dTašmišuš [išt]amašta nÚašÚza duškiškiwan dā
iš nu 3-ŠU pal~ wait “Tašmišu heard (the good news that Ullikummi would be defeated), and rejoiced and cheered three times. (Up in heaven the gods heard)” KBo 
26.65 iv 15-16 (Ullik. IIIA). For other exx. of kw/w, see Neu, StBoT 5:135, Puhvel, JAOS 94:294 w. n. 32. Note, however, that while active palwai- is intransitive, middle palkuya- is transitive. Neither Badalì (Or NS 59:130-142) nor Nowicki (Or NS 59:239-242) mention palkwiya-in their discussions of palwai-. 
Schwartz, Or NS 16 (1947) 33 (“to chant the palkwiš”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 134f. (stem palkwiya-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 333f. (stem palkue- “besingen, beklatschen(?)”); Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 54 (stem palkuya-). 
Cf. palwai-. 
palkušta v.; (mng. unkn.); OS.† 
pret. sg. 3 pa-al-ku-uš-ta KBo 25.123:6 (OS). 
®tÚwaÚššan tanku≠waš±(-)ta-x[…] / […]x pa-alku-uš-ta GUD.ÓI.A-šÚaÚt[a] / […-]hhi paittuÚwa d≠UTU±-waš pēran / […] KBo 25.123:5-8 (Óattic-Hitt. bil., OS), translit. StBoT 25:206. 
The stem could be palku-, palkuwai-, palkueššor palkuš-. The choice of palku(wai)-would indicate an etymological connection w. palkuya-/palk~ wiya-. The frag. context does nothing to clarify the problem. 
Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 135 n. 7 (stem palkuwai-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 333 (stem *palkuešš-); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 134 (stem palku(wai)-; “verbum dicendi?”). 
Cf. palwai-. 
(:)palpadami-Luw. (passive) participle; (describing the god Nergal); NH.† 

68

sg. acc. com. :≠pal±-pa-da-mi-in KBo 13.241 rev. 19, palp[a-…] KUB 35.145 rev. 11. 
“Whoever should prepare evil for this child, let him see the sky palha-ed. Let him see the earth opened up” DINGIR GAL dU.G[(UR)] :pal-pa-dami-in (par. pal-p[a-…]) KI.MIN (i.e., aušdu) “‘Ditto’ (i.e., Let him see) the great god, Ne[rgal], …-ed. (Let him see IŠTAR …-ed)” KUB 44.4 rev. 31 
+ KBo 13.241 rev. 19 (birth rit., NH), w. par. KUB 35.145 rev. 11-12, ed. Beckman, StBoT 29:178f., 194f., translit. StBoT 

30:236. 

“palha-ed,” “opened up,” (:)palpadami- and “…-ed” are all passive participles modifying the immediately preceding name or noun. Since the person who must see these things is being thus punished for evil acts, we should expect that the aspect of Nergal which he will see would be terrifying. A middle form palpatittari occurs in broken Luwian context KUB 35.107 iii 4-5, translit. StBoT 30:237. Its subject may be “fire” (cf. StBoT 31:158). If so, then perhaps we should translate the birth rit., “Let him see the great god Nergal set on fire.” 
Laroche, OLZ 66 (1971)149; Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 199, 289 (stem :palpada-); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 158 w. n. 510; Melchert, CLL (1993)165 (:palpata-/palpati(ya)- “blaze?”). 
palša-, palši-n. com.; 1. road, path, trail, route, (figuratively) way, behavior, 2. campaign, military expedition, 3. journey, trip, mission, 4. (object in a KIN oracle), 5. caravan, transport, 6. (a feature of the exta), 7. time (i.e., occasion, occurrence), 8. (a scribal technical term); wr. syll. and KASKAL; from OH. 

1.	road, path, trail, route, (figuratively) way, behavior 

	a.	in general
1' MH
2' NH

	
	b.	as objects of verbs 1' KASKAL-an epp- “to take the road” 2' KASKAL-an har(k)- “to hold (i.e., travel on) the 

road” 
c.	accusatives of the way 
1'	w. verbs of going a' KASKAL-an iya-“to travel/go a on road” b' KASKAL-an pai-“to travel a road” 
2' other 
	d.	acc. + KASKAL-ši … dai
	e. special designations 

palša
1' KASKAL G´D.DA “long road” or “long journey/dis
tance” 2' KASKAL LUGAL “king’s road/campaign” 3' KASKAL GAL/KASKAL RABU^ 
a' “main road” b' (in mythological context) “the Great Road” which the soul travels to the netherworld 4' taknaš dUTU-aš KASKAL “the route/road of the Sun-
goddess of the Netherworld” 5' KASKAL IM.U⁄·.LU “South Road” 6' KASKAL-aš hattareššar/hatarniyašhaš “road fork, 
intersection” 
	f.	in bird oracles 
	g.	in rituals of ‘marking trails’ and allusions to such rituals in other texts 
	h.	in a metaphorical sense 

1	campaign, military expedition 
2	journey, trip, mission 

a.	in general
1' w. d.-l.
2' w. acc.

a' KASKAL-an pai-“to go on a journey” b' KASKAL-an piya- “to send on a journey” 
	b.	EGIR KASKAL “after the trip” 
	c.	NINDA KASKAL “food provisions for a journey” 
	d.	KASKAL + GN “journey to GN” 

4.	(object in a KIN oracle) “campaign” or “journey(?)” 
	a.	KASKAL “campaign” 
	b.	KASKAL LUGAL “king’s campaign” 
	c.	KASKAL KARAŠ “campaign of the army” 
	d.	KASKAL LÚ.KÚR “campaign of the enemy” 
	e.	LÚaraš KASKAL“campaign of the ally” 
	f.	KASKAL + GN “campaign/journey to GN” 

1	caravan, transport 
	6.	(a feature of the exta) 
	a.	(listed w. other features of the exta) 
	b.	w. anš
	c.	w. nai
	d.	w. andan da
	e.	w. walh
	f.	other 
	7.	time (i.e., occasion, occurrence; German “Mal”) 
	a.	in consecutive numbering 
	b.	hantezzi palši (adv.) “the first time, at first” 1' followed by EGIR-ŠUÚma/EGIR-andaÚma “but after 

it (= afterwards)”
2' followed by EGIR-paÚma
3' followed by apiyaÚma “then”
4' followed by kinuna “now”
5' followed by namma “again”
6' wr. hantezzi KASKAL(?)-NI
7' other

	c.	(from “two” upwards, always wr. KASKAL) 
	d.	KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši “each time” 

8.	(a scribal technical term) 
69

sg. nom. KASKAL-ša-aš KUB 12.62 rev. 5 (pre-NH/NS), KASKAL-aš KUB 33.8 iii 16 (OH/NS), KUB 13.4 ii 59 (MH/ NS), KUB 5.1 i 80 (NH), KUB 43.77 obv. 10, 12 (NH), KBo 
13.101 rev. 15 (NS), KUB 8.68 i 3, KASKAL-iš KBo 16.97 obv. 37, rev. 25, l.e. 5b (MH/ENS), IBoT 1.36 ii 63 (MH/MS), KUB 
29.55 i 17, KBo 16.42 obv. 30, KASKAL-NU KBo 2.2 iii 17 (NH). 
acc. KASKAL-ša-an KUB 33.3:4 (OH/MS), KUB 48.106:4, KASKAL-an KBo 17.1 i 40, KUB 43.33 obv. 3 (both OS), KUB 
33.8 iii 6, KUB 43.60 i 11, 28, 29 (both OH/NS), KUB 14.1 obv. (70), 71, KUB 15.34 i 24, 25, iii 29, 31, IBoT 1.36 i 12, iii 25, 28 (all MH/MS), KBo 4.2 iii 38, KUB 24.8 iii 15 (both pre-NH/NS), KBo 4.14 iv 50, KBo 12.25:7, KUB 9.34 ii 13 (all NH), KASKAL-NU KUB 5.1 i 106, ii 51 (NH). 
gen. KASKAL-ša-aš KUB 9.22 iii 20 (NH), KASKAL-aš KUB 10.72 ii 8 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 7.54 ii 13 (NH), ŠA KAS~ KAL-NI KBo 13.146 i 12 (OH/NS), ŠA KASKAL-NIM HT 1 ii 47 (NS). 
d.-l. pal-še KBo 13.250 obv. left col. 10, pal-ši KBo 21.8 iii 11, KUB 14.1 rev. 48, 61 (both MH/MS), KBo 16.97 obv. 26 (ENS), KBo 11.14 i 23, KBo 15.69 i 8 (both MH/NS), KBo 2.4 iv 16, KUB 27.1 iv 19 (both NH), KASKAL-ši KBo 25.17 i 5, Bo 6594 i? 13 (StBoT 25:98f.) (both OS), KUB 12.63 obv. 9, 11 (OH/MS), KUB 33.66 iii 7 (OH/MS?), KUB 25.28 i 5, KUB 
43.60 i 30 (both OH/NS), KUB 15.34 i 19, 23, 27, iii 29, KUB 
23.77:63 (both MH/MS), KBo 16.97 obv. 28 (ENS), KBo 10.45 ii 37, KUB 15.31 i 15 (both MH/NS), KBo 4.4 ii 69, iii 58 (Murš. II), KUB 16.55 iii 4, 6, KUB 22.70 rev. 64 (both NH), KASKAL-i(š-) KUB 51.44 obv. 13, INA KASKAL-NIM KBo 19.141:3, KUB 12.47 i 1, INA KASKAL-NI KUB 17.35 i 26 (NH), ANA KASKAL-NI KUB 15.31 ii 1 (MH/NS). 
all. KASKAL-ša KBo 6.2 iii 21 (OS), KUB 17.10 ii 30 (OH/MS). 
abl. KASKAL-ša-az KBo 17.105 i 2, iii 24 (MH/MS), 617/p ii 8 (AOATS 3:180f. n. 4), cf. KASKAL-iš(for ša!)-az KUB 9.28 iii 14 (MH/NS) (or perhaps KASKAL.SAÓAR-az “from the dirt road”), KASKAL-az KUB 26.71 i 6 (OH/NS), KBo 17.105 iii 31 (MH/MS), KUB 13.21 ii 9, KUB 15.31 i 2 (both MH/NS), KUB 20.1 iii 13, 19, KBo 19.145 iii 11 (both NH), KASKAL-za KBo 3.22:58 (OS), KUB 46.38 i 9 (NH). 
pl. nom. KASKAL-ši-iš KUB 36.27:2 (OH?/NS). 
acc. KASKAL.ÓI.A-uš KUB 43.33 obv. 2 (OS), KUB 12.63 i 30 (OH/MS), KUB 35.84 ii? 4, 5, 6, KBo 22.97:6, KASKAL. MEŠ-uš KBo 3.9 obv. 11, KASKAL.MEŠ-TIM KUB 14.1 rev. 27 (MH/MS), KBo 20.62 i 6, IBoT 3.133 obv. 7, KBo 20.62 i 7, KASKAL.ÓI.A-TIM KUB 13.2 i 17 (MH/NS), KUB 45.48 ii 3. 
gen. KASKAL.MEŠ-aš KUB 26.87:6 (OH/NS). d.-l. KASKAL-ša-aš KBo 22.111 iii 12, KASKAL.ÓI.A-aš KBo 24.9 i? 3, KUB 22.56 obv. 21 (NH), KASKAL-aš KUB 
16.55 i 10, KUB 26.69 v 1, ANA KASKAL.ÓI.A-TIM KBo 
14.86 i 1. abl. KASKAL.MEŠ-az KUB 15.31 iv 37, KUB 26.11 iv 11 (both MH/NS), KBo 20.107 iv 23. 
uncomplemented Sumerogram KASKAL KUB 17.10 iv 12 (OH/MS), KBo 6.3 iii 24 (OH/NS), KUB 5.1 iii 79 (NH), 

palša- 1 a 2' 

KASKAL.ÓI.A KBo 25.13 ii (13) (OS), KUB 23.72 rev. 53 (MH/MS), KUB 30.33 i 11 (MH/NS), KUB 29.4 i 65 (NH). 
(Sum.) [(EN.TI)] = (syll. Sum.) [en-d]i = (Akk.) a-la-aktù = (Hitt.) KASKAL-aš “road” / (Sum.) [(EN.TI.TI)] = (syll.) [en-di-d]i! = (Akk.) al-ka-ka-tù (dupl. al-ka›-a[k-tù]) = (Hitt.) pankuš KASKAL-aš “every road, the whole road” KBo 1.35:11-12 (Erimhuš Bogh.), w. dupl. KBo 1.37:7-8, ed. MSL 
17:118 lines 13'-14'. 
1. road, path, trail, route, (figuratively) way, behavior — a. in general — 1' MH: mānÚši peranÚma kuwapi KASKAL-iš hatkuš “But if the road before him is narrow somewhere” IBoT 1.36 ii 63 (MEŠEDI instr., MS), ed. AS 24:22f.; (Madduwatta suggested to the people of Dalawa:) ≠nuÚwa±Úšmaš KAS[KAL-a]n peran ēpten nuÚwarÚaš walhten nuÚššan ÉR[IN. MEŠ UR]UDalauw[a KAS]KAL-ši! parā uwat[er(?)] nu uēr anz[el] ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti KASKAL-an eppir nÚ uš nininkir “‘Seize the road before them (sc. the advancing Hittite army) and attack them.’ They brought the troops of Dalawa forward on the road. They came and seized the road (before) our troops, and they upset/routed them” KUB 14.1 obv. 70-71 (Madd., MS), ed. Madd. 18f., tr. CHD ninink- 3 a 1'; cf. also nammaÚmanÚši EGIR-an KASKAL.MEŠ-TIM I[Ù~ BAT] ibid. rev. 27; [(nammaÚka)]n KASKAL.ÓI.AÚ ya LÚ.MEŠN´.ZU war[šk]and[u] “then let the scouts also scour the roads (and watch for the enemy’s tracks)” KUB 13.2 i 2 (BE_L MADGALTI, NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.85:7, ed. Dienstanw. 41, cf. also KUB 13.2 i 5; nu ŠA LÚ.KÚR kuiēš KASKAL.ÓI.A nÚašÚza BE_L MADGALTI kappū
wan hardu nÚašÚza gul(a)ššan hardu “Let the District Governor keep account of the (invasion) routes of the enemy and keep them written down” KUB 13.2 i 9-10 (BE_L MADGALTI, NS), ed. Dienstanw. 41. 
2' NH: nÚanÚkan KASKAL-ši tam[aššanz]i “And they trap (lit. press) him on the road” KBo 14.4 i 27 (DŠ frag. 18), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:80; nuÚza ÓUR.SAGAšharpayan kuiš URUGašgaš ešan harta nu ŠA KUR URUPalā KASKAL.MEŠ kar(a)ššan harta nu … zahhiyanun “I fought … against the Kaškaean who had occupied the mountain land of Ašharpaya and had cut off the roads to Palā” KBo 3.4 iii 39-41 (annals, Murš. II), ed. AM 76f.; “Timmuhala is situated u[p in the mountains]” nuÚššan KASKAL. MEŠ šarā […-a]nteš “and the roads up (to it) are [ardu]ous(?)” KUB 19.37 ii 4-6, ed. AM 166f.; nu ≠KAS~ 

70

KAL±.MEŠ anda warhuē[š ešer] “The roads were rough/overgrown” KUB 21.19 + 1303/u iii 13 (prayer), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:94f. w. comment on p. 106 proposing restoration warhuē[ššar ešta]; [nuÚkan ÉRIN.MEŠÚYA kui]t KASKAL-ši artat “because [my troops] were standing on the road” KUB 14.17 ii 7, ed. AM 84f.; restoration of ÉRIN.MEŠ instead of Götze’s EN.MEŠ allows for correct agreement w. the singular verb. 
b. as object of verbs — 1' KASKAL-an epp- “to take the road”: [… UR]UÓuršama KASKAL.ÓI.A appanzi “They take the roads to Óuršama” Bo 6002 rev. 5 (StBoT 25:41 n. 131); […]≠-ri-in KASKAL.ÓI.A± appand[a] KBo 25.13 ii 13 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:41; [ŠA] ≠d÷±U GIŠTIRÚwa kuwapi KASKAL-an appiškir “At the time when they used to take (or: seize) the road of the Stormgod of the Forest” KBo 20.57 rev. 12, cf. ABoT 56 i 15 (Šupp. II), KUB 8.53 ii 11 (Gilg.), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:12f. (“den Weg einschlagen”); note the lit. meaning “to seize the road (before an enemy)” in KUB 14.1 obv. 70 (w. peran), 71 (MH/MS) 1 a, above. 
2' KASKAL-an har(k)- “to hold (i.e., travel on) the road”: nuÚza KASKAL-an peran apāš harzi “That one will travel the road in front” KBo 25.184 iii 72 (funerary rit.); for another ex. w. -za see KUB 24.8 iii 9 in 1 h “metaphorical sense”; for an ex. without -za see KUB 43.60 i 28-29 1 e 3' b', below. 
c. accusatives of the way — 1' w. verbs of going 
— a' KASKAL-an iya- (mid.) “to travel/go on a road”: KASKAL-anÚma I[M.ÓI.A (dupl. Ø) (ku~ in)] iyantari (dupl. iyandari) nu KASKAL[-an kuin] uwanzi n[u (ammu)]k dLAMMA-aš nepiš[(aš LU~ GAL-uš)] DINGIR.MEŠ-aš hinkm[(i)] “Do I, LAMMA, king of heaven, not allot to the gods the road on which the winds go and come?” KUB 33.112 iii 3-5 + KUB 36.2c iii 10-12 (kingship of dLAMMA), w. dupls. KUB 36.5 i 5-6, HT 25 + KUB 33.111:1-2, tr. Hittite Myths 44, translit. Myth. 34; mān LUGAL-uš KASKAL-an iyatt[ari] “When the king travels the road” KUB 

40.40 ii 10 (instr.); for a different usage see 1 h, below. 

b' KASKAL-an pai-“to travel a road”: for exx. see 1 e 4', below, and CHD pai-A 1 e 1'; for a different usage see 3 a 2' a', below. 
2' other: “The priest makes a libation for the bull, hits it with an iron rod, and it starts to walk. They start walking behind it” nu KASKAL-an parā 

palša- 1 e 2' 
S‰R-RU “and along the road they sing further” KUB 

20.87 i 14-15 (fest.). 
d. acc. + KASKAL-ši … dai-: “Come, make an appeal to me” nuÚwaÚtaÚkkan KASKAL-ši tehhi KASKAL-šiÚmaÚwaÚtaÚkkan GIM-an teh[hi] nuÚwarÚat ANA ŠEŠÚYA hatrāmi “I will put you on the road. And how I will put you on your road that I will write to my brother” KUB 14.3 ii 65-66 (Taw., NH), ed. AU 10f., tr. Geogr. 113 (“settled his account with you”), cf. ibid. iii 6; “If someone comes through your country” ≠nÚaš±Úkan KASKAL-ši SIGﬁ-in dāi “put them safely on the road (and direct them on the road to Óatti)” KBo 5.9 iii 15 (Dupp., Murš. II), ed. SV 1.20f.; cf. ibid. iii 18 (without SIGﬁ-in); nÚašÚšan ANA KUR URUÓatti KASKAL-ši SIGﬁ[-in] tittanuški KBo 
13.55 rev. 5-6 (treaty, NH); cf. also KBo 2.6 iii 17-22 (oracle question, NH). 
e. special designations — 1' KASKAL G´D.DA “long road” or “long journey/distance”: ammugaÚ kan ŠA KASKAL G´D.DA LÚ.MEŠN´.ZU-TIM ÓUR.SAGÓapidduini anda šašanna pē®škimi “I will send the scouts of the long road/journey to Mt. Óapidduini to spend the night” HKM 46:18-21 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsLaroche 30, HBM 202f.; [LÚ.MEŠN]´. ZUÚkan ŠA KASKAL G´D.DA auwariē
ša[(ppan~ du)] (var. [LÚ.MEŠN´.ZUÚka]n KASKAL.G´D.DAuš auriu[ššÚa appandu]) “Let the scouts occupy look-outs on the long road (var. Let the scouts occupy the long roads [and] look-out points)” KUB 13.1 i 33 (instr., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 22.44:8, ed. Goetze, JCS 14:70; cf. ibid. i 12, 15. 
2' KASKAL LUGAL “king’s road/campaign”: eki BÀD-ni LUGAL-aš KASKAL-ša takšuanzi (var. pāuwanzi) … natta kuiški arauaš “No (copper worker) shall be exempted from being assigned to (var. going on) a royal expedition for ice(-cutting) or fortification (work)” KBo 22.62 iii 24-25 + KBo 
6.2 iii 21-22 (Law § 56, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.6 i 30-31 (NS), for more complete context and discussion cf. CHD luzzi- a; ≠KASKAL± LUGALÚat tarnau “Let the king’s road release it (sc. the anger of the deity)” KUB 17.10 iv 12 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.3:2 (MS), translit. Myth 37, tr. Hittite Myths 17; cf. par. KBo 26.133:3 (missing Stormgod, OH?/MS?); EZEN GAL ŠA KASKAL LU~ GAL KUB 58.7 ii 21, cf. KUB 46.17 iii 6, frag. KUB 46.71 rev. 10, KUB 30.51 rev. 5 (NH); cf. EZEN KASKAL 
71

LUGALÚyaÚšši … KBo 21.81 obv. 5; for KASKAL LU~ GAL as an object in KIN oracles see 4 b, below. 
3' KASKAL GAL/KASKAL RABÛ — a' “main road”: “Then the king mounts the chariot and comes away from the stela” mahhanÚmaÚššan LU~ GAL-uš ANA KASKAL GAL parā ari “When the king arrives at the main road” KUB 10.18 i 24-25 (fest., OH/NS), ed. Haas/Wäfler, IM 23/24:19; (On the way from the halentu- to the hešti-house) ANA KASKAL RABÊÚkan LÚUMMIAN LÚ ŠU.GI aranta “a craftsman and an elder stand on the main road (and bow to the king)” IBoT 3.1:19-20 (fest., OH/NS), tr. Haas/Wäfler, UF 9:106, cf. Güterbock, MDOG 86:75f. w. n. 2; cf. KASKAL GAL KUB 20.2 iv 22 (NH). 
b' (in mythological context) “the Great Road” which the soul travels to the netherworld: “The soul is great. The soul is great. Whose soul is great? The mortal soul is great” nu kuin KASKAL-an harzi uran KASKAL-an harzi marnuwalan KASKAL-an harzi “And what road does it travel? It travels the Great Road. It travels the Invisible(?) Road” KUB 
43.60 i 28-29 (myth, OH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths 33 (accidentally omitting the phrase “It travels the Great Road”); see marnu~ wala-. 
4' taknaš dUTU-aš KASKAL “the route/road of the Sungoddess of the Netherworld”: “Let (the anger of the deity) not go to the field, to the garden or to the orchard” taknašÚat dUTU-aš KASKAL-an (var. KASKAL-ša-an) paiddu “Let it travel the road of the Sungoddess of the Netherworld” KUB 
17.10 iv 13 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.3:4 (MS), translit. Myth. 37, tr. Hittite Myths 17. 
5' KASKAL IM.U⁄·.LU “South Road”: mān ≠ŠE⁄¤±-anti INA ITU.12.KAM d.KUŠkurša[š] ŠA dU URUZipalanda ANA KASKAL IM.U⁄·.LU paizzi “If in the winter in the twelfth month the hunting-bag of the Stormgod of Zipalanta goes on the south road (or: the hunting-bag goes on the south road of the Stormgod of Zipalanta)” KUB 20.25 vi 5 + KUB 10.78 vi 10 (fest., OH?/NS), ed. Güterbock, JNES 20:92. 
6' KASKAL-aš hattarešar/hatarniyašhaš “road fork, intersection”: “She (i.e., the Old Woman) breaks one unleavened bread and places it on the right branch of the fork …” 1 NINDA SIG KAS~ KAL-aš hattare[(šn)]aš paršiya KASKAL-ši GÙB

palša- 1 f 

za [(dāi)] “she breaks (another) unleavened bread at the fork in the road and places it on the left branch” KUB 24.9 ii 37 + KBo 12.127 ii 4 (rit. of Alli, MH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 24.11 ii 16-17, ed. THeth 2:36f.; nuÚt[ta mān] naššu takn® našma ÓUR.[SAG]-i ´D-i naššu KASKAL-aš hattarešnaš hā
riyaš Ú.SAL-aš TÚLaš wappuwaš IM-aš pahhuenaš pāiš “[If] you have gone either to the netherworld, or to the mountain or the river, or to the fork in the road, valleys, meadows, springs, to the clay(s) of the bank, to the fires” KUB 10.72 ii 7-10 (fest. frag., pre-NH/NS), ed. Tunn. 54; cf. KBo 11.17 i 1, 12 (NH), IBoT 3.91 iv? 5, KUB 39.61 i (14); KASKAL.MEŠ-aš hattereš[naš] KUB 26.87:6; (Bread offerings are first given to the right) “Then (there are) three warmannizi-breads and two small fresh thick loaves” nÚaš KASKAL-aš hatarni~ yašhaš pēi “and he carries them to the fork in the
daroad (and breaks them to the left)” KUB 17.12 ii 9-10 (rit., NS), cf. Güterbock, Oriens 15:349 w. n. 4 (“Weggabelung(?)”). Neu, StBoT 5:53, doubts the tr. “crossroads” and prefers “Wegführung, -strecke” but such a designation could apply to any road; see also Neu, Lok. 45. 
f. in bird oracles (NH): (The haštapi-bird … went across tarwiyallian) EGIR KASKAL-NI TI°MUŠEN GUN-lian NIMUR “Behind the road we observed an eagle GUN-lian” KUB 16.46 iv 4; (The haštapi-bird … went away in front) EGIR KAS~ KAL-NI halwašišÚkan EGIR UGU SIGﬁ-za uit “Behind the road — the halwaši-bird came up from behind on the good-side (and went away in front)” KBo 2.6 iv 20-21, and passim in bird oracles; (The marša~ naši-bird … went away in front) nu EGIR KAS~ KAL-NI 2 hašdapiušÚkan EGIR UGU SIGﬁ-za uēr “Behind the road — 2 hašdapi-birds came up from behind on the good-side” IBoT 1.32 obv. 27; (The hašdapi-bird … went away in front) EGIR KAS~ KAL-NIÚmaÚkan 3 TI°MUSEN EGIR UGU SIGﬁ-za uēr “Behind the road, three eagles came up from behind on the good side” ibid. obv. 7. The road here refers to a fixed point of reference in the area in which the bird flights were observed, dividing it into two fields, see Archi, SMEA 16:151; EGIR KAS~ KAL occurs after one bird has flown away and before the discussion of the next bird begins. The common positioning of the -kan on the word after EGIR KASKAL would seem to indicate that EGIR 

72

KASKAL is an independent sentence. EGIR KAS~ KAL never occurs last in an oracle paragraph, i.e., just before “UMMA PN.” For this reason and because it is sometimes included within the following sentence, it seems to go w. what follows it. As it usually occurs but once in a paragraph and never at the beginning, it may mark a change in the part of the area being viewed, i.e., (unmarked = in front of the road — EGIR KASKAL = behind the road). Still it does occur twice in one paragraph in KUB 
18.12 i 10, 14. Note also “We saw a harrani-bird tar(wiya)lian” nÚaš INA KASKAL-NI tarnanza nu U[L …]x nÚašÚza TUŠ-at KAZUÚmaÚzaÚkan INA KASKAL-N[I neanza(?)] “It was released(?) in the road. It did not […]. It sat down. Its beak was [turned(?)] towards the road” KUB 18.12 i 18. 
g. in rituals of ‘marking trails’ and allusions to such rituals in other texts: kā
ša IŠTU ‰.DÙG.GA ŠA dTelipinu KASKAL.ÓI.AÚKA paparšhun nuÚššan dTelipinuš ‰.DÙG.GA-it papparšanta KASKAL-ša iyanni “I have just sprinkled your paths, Telipinu, with sweet oil. Set out, Telipinu, on paths sprinkled with sweet oil” KUB 17.10 ii 28-30 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), tr. Hittite Myths 16; DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ GIŠERIN-aš kāšaÚšmaš KASKAL.MEŠ TÚGkušiši≠yaš± TÚGku~ rešnit išparhun nuÚšmaš BA.BA.ZA ‰.DÙG.≠GA± išparhun nuÚššan apiya iy≠ad±dumat “O male cedar gods, I have spread the trails for you with a kerchief (that goes) with the kušiši-gown, I have spread for you BA.BA.ZA cereal (and) fine oil. So walk over there” KUB 15.34 i 40-42 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:186f., tr. ANET 352 (“ways”), cf. KUB 7.60 ii 26-28; EGIR-ŠUÚma DINGIR-LAM IŠTU 7 KASKAL.MEŠ huittianzi “Afterwards they evoke (lit. draw) the deity from the seven trails” KBo 
24.45 rev. 19 (rit.); EGIR-ŠUÚma dÓepat KAS~ KAL-az SUD-anzi “Afterwards they draw/attract Óepat from (i.e., along) the road” IBoT 3.148 i 40; cf. KUB 20.1 iii 13, KUB 44.1 rev. 13; IŠT[(U)] ≠7± KAS~ KAL.ÓI.A (dupl. KASKAL.MEŠ) IŠTU 7 PADANI ehu “Come from the seven trails, from the seven paths” KBo 23.1 obv. 24-25 (Ammihatna’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 23.2 iii 6-7, cf. KUB 29.4 iii 45-48 (NH); KASKAL-aš hū
ittiyauwar KUB 10.92 i 18; KASKAL-aš SUD-uwar KUB 15.37 ii 9; NA›akuwanduš KASKAL.ÓI.A-uš KUB 
35.84 ii 4 (rit.), translit. LTU 84, cf. HW2 1:54, Sürenhagen, 

palša- 2 
AoF 8:106f., HED 1:24 (all using tr. “stony”) vs Hoffner, BiOr 
	35:245 (aku “seashell”); contra HW2 1:54, since aku + -want> *akumant- in Hittite phonology (HE §§49d, 29a), akuwantmust be from aku + -ant-; since the immediately following context mentions “roads” (i.e., trails) made of honey along which the gods were lured/drawn, it is probable that the akuwanduš roads too were trails of valuable aku-shells to lure the deity. 
	h. in a metaphorical sense: kūwapiÚ[(ši)] ≠at!ta±[-aš]-≠mi-iš?±(sic) DINGIR.MEŠ-aš N´G.SI.SÁan KASKAL-an U[L ēpper (nuÚza)] LÚ.ÓUL-lu (var. ÓUL-pan) KASKAL-an harker “Inasmuch as my paternal gods did not [take] the proper course for him, but held themselves to an evil course, (let the child have the name Evil)” KUB 36.60 iii 9 + KUB 

24.8 iii 8-9 (Appu tale, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.59 ii 67, ed. StBoT 14:10f.; “You, O Sungod, stand over the one who did evil” ūgÚza ammel SIGﬁ-andan KAS~ KAL-an iyahhat “I traveled my good way. (You, O Sungod know who did evil to me)” KUB 17.28 ii 5960 (rit., MH/NS); (The patient says to the garden of IŠTAR:) “‘I am the patient. What are you taking?’” … tarhūilātar [ o - o ] MU.KAM.ÓI.A G´D.DA UD.KAM.ÓI.A G´D.DA ŠA dU KASKAL-an [ŠA dZA.B]A›.BA› KASKAL-an daškimi “I am taking … valor, [ x ], a long life, long days, the way of the Stormgod (and) the way of ZA.BA›.BA›” KUB 
32.121 iii 12-14 (followed by the ways of the Moongod, LAM~ MA and IŠTAR, among others) (rit.); (Concerning the fact that IŠTAR of Šamuha has manifested her anger …) “They will do the following”: mukiššar x[…] [K]ASKAL DINGIR-LIM ambaššin wa[r-…] “An evocation ritual, […], the way of the deity, ambašši […] KUB 49.80:3-4 (oracle question, NH). 
2. campaign, military expedition: KASKAL-za (dupl. KASKAL-az) kuit āššu utahh[un …] “The goods which I brou[ght] from the campaign …” KBo 
3.22:58 (Anitta, OS), w. dupl. KUB 26.71 i 6 (OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:14f.; mānÚkan LÚ.SIGﬁ [(našma appezziš)] antuhšaš (var. antuwahhaš) lahhaz KASKAL-az [EGI(R-pa hū¢
wai)] “If a subaltern officer or a common soldier (lit. a lowly person) runs back from (i.e., deserts) a campaign (or) a journey” KUB 13.21 ii 8-10 (instr., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.20 i 3-4, ed. Alp, Belleten 11/43:388f., 405; although KASKAL seems to be distinguished here from a lahha-, which like KASKAL can be military or non-military, the presence of the LÚ.SIGﬁ points to both 
73

being military; ammukÚma kē
dani KASKAL-ši GIM-an GIM-an nakkēškit “But whenever it became difficult for me on that campaign” KUB 40.1 rev.! 18 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:69, 71 (“weg”), tr. CHD nakkešš-3 a (“occasion”); “When the spring came” nu INA KUR URUAzzi dān KASKAL-ši namma pāun “I went again, for a second time, on a campaign against Azzi” KBo 4.4 iii 57-58 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 130f.; nuÚ kan mahhan ANA KASKAL URUTaggašta tiyanun “When I went on a campaign (against) Taggašta …” KBo 5.8 i 14-15, ed. AM 148f.; kuitman ANA LU~ [GAL KUR URUMizri mena]hhanda KASKAL-an iyat KUB 21.27 i 35-36 (Pud. prayer), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:110f.; cf. KASKAL URUGašga KUB 15.5 ii 35 (vow); KASKAL KURAššur KUB 22.29 i? 1 (oracle question); and cf. 4 f and 3 d, below; dIŠTARÚmuÚkan GAŠANÚYA IGI-zi palši ŠUMUM kēdani KASKAL-ši halzāiš “IŠTAR, my lady, proclaimed my name for the first time on this campaign” KBo 3.6 ii 14 (Apology of Óatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:12f.; našmaÚkan LUGAL-uš tūwali KASKAL-ši arha paizzi “or (if) the king goes off on a distant campaign …” KBo 4.14 ii 57-58 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:42-43. 
3. journey, trip, mission — a. in general — 1' w. d.-l.: “When the aniyat-paraphernalia of the house of the ŠATAMMUs travels from Óattuša to Ankuwa, the huprala-man goes along with them” § ta aniya≠tti± KASKAL-ši 2-ŠU šešzi “and he sleeps twice on (his) journey with the aniyaz-paraphernalia” KUB 25.28 i 5 (cult trip, OH/NS); ANA KASKAL DUMU.LUGALÚyaÚašÚkan annalli anda É-ri iyanza “And it is performed in the old building during the (cultic) journey of the prince” KUB 42.100 iv 35-36 (rit., Tudh. IV), ed. del Monte OA 17:185, 187f. 
2' w. acc. — a' KASKAL-an pai-“to go on a journey”: NIM.LÀL teriyaš UD-aš m®uwa<š> UDaš KASKAL-an pāndu “Let the bee go on a journey of three days (or) four days” KUB 43.60 i 10-11 (myth, OH/NS), tr. Hittite Myths 33; for a different usage see 1 c 1' b', above. 
b' KASKAL-an piya- “to send on a journey”: “If there are not twelve bodyguards (at your present disposal)” naššu KASKAL-an kuiški pēyanza “because someone was either sent on a journey, (or …)” IBoT 1.36 i 12 (instr. for the bodyguards, MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:174f., AS 24:6f. 

palša- 3 c 

b. EGIR.KASKAL “after the trip”: mān GUD pūhugarišÚma EGIR KASKAL(dupl. + NI) a[(ki KASKAL-aš kuit t)]ūwa “If a substitute ox dies after the trip, because the journey is long/far (they provide another ox)” KBo 4.2 iv 46-47 (aphasia of Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 43.50 rev. 14-15, ed. MSpr. 12f. (“unterwegs”!), Lebrun, Hethitica 6:108, 112 (“en route”); nu dUTU-ŠI p®yemi nuÚmu dIŠTAR ÙE_RI kattiÚmi udanzi EGIR.KASKALÚmaÚšši UD-at UD-at S´SKUR piškanzi § … § nuÚšši apiyaÚya EGIR KASKAL UD-at UD-at S´SKUR QA_TAMMA piš~ kanzi “I, My Majesty, will send, and they will bring me IŠTAR of the Field. But after the trip, they will give her daily sacrifices. (§ … § Then they will bring it (sc. the statue of IŠTAR) back to Šamuha) and there too, after the trip, they will give her daily sacrifices” KUB 32.130:12-14, 21-22 (cult of IŠTAR, MH/ MS?), ed. Wegner, AOAT 36:136f. w. n. 426 (“auf der Rückreise”); cf. KUB 30.56 iii 21-22 (cat.), ed. CTH pp. 181f. (“au retour”); “Whenever you are cutting out groups of animals from the herd, and they drive them to the gods, your lords, let cowherds and shepherds accompany the cut out herds …” EGIR KASKAL-NIÚmaÚatÚkan lē wahnuškanzi mānÚmaÚkan ŠÀ KASKAL-NI … “Let them not switch them after the trip. But if during (lit. in/on) the trip …” KUB 
13.4 iv 61 (instr. for priests and temple officials, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 86f. (“yolun [on the trip]” w. n. “Metin: yolda arkasında [Text: ‘after the trip’]”) □ HW2 1:159b correctly denies a tr. “return, return journey,” although in some passages it has been so translated by others, cf. KUB 13.3 ii 4 (Werner, StBoT 4:35 “Rückwege”), KUB 39.21 i? 14 (Otten, HTR 88f. “Rückwege”), KBo 17.65 obv. 48 (Beckman, StBoT 29:138f., 166 “en route,” rejecting “return trip”). For the phonetic reading, cf. EGIR KASKAL-NI KBo 23.16 rt. col. 8, w. dupls. [K]ASKAL-ši EGIR[-an] 129/g:10, [KASKAL-ši EGIR]-an KBo 24.42 iii 16. 
c. NINDA KASKAL “food provisions for a journey”: µTāš LÚKUŠ‡ URUKūluppa ŠU_T (PNs) 5 LÚ.MEŠNA_ŠI ÙIDÂTIŠU 1 UDU … 1 zipattanni ‰.ŠAÓ DÙG.GA 5 GA.KIN.AG 5 EMÙU 6 PA. Z´D.DA Z´Z ANA NINDA KASKAL daškizzi “Mr. Tā, the chariot warrior from Kuluppa, customarily takes these (named individuals), his five provision carriers (and) one sheep … , one zipattanni- of good lard, five cheeses, five rennets, six PARISU-mea

74

sures of wheat flour as food provisions for a journey” KBo 22.1:7-12 (OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 45f., tr. THeth 
20:130 n. 479; NINDA KASKAL seems here to be roughly synonymous w. Akk. ÙIDÂT(T)U “provisions”; EGIR-ŠUÚma ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URU-LIM NINDA KASKALNI […] / kiššan pianzi “Afterwards they give to the deities of the city food provisions for a journey, as follows” (followed by a list in which one sheep is allotted to each of at least nine named deities) KBo 
2.17 obv. 2-3 (fest., NS); ŠA NINDA KASKAL-NIÚya / […-m]u(?)-wa peškir kinunÚmaÚwa UL SUM(over erasure)-er “[…] used to give […] of provisions for a journey, but now they did not give (them)” KUB 
5.6 iv 24-25 (oracle question, NH). Although in the Sumero-Akkadian lexical series Proto-Diri Akk. ≈id®tu(m) is one reading of NINDA.KASKAL.LA (the other is akal harrānim), and the Akkadogram ÙIDÂTIŠU occurs in KBo 22.1 in the lines immediately preceding NINDA.KASKAL, we cannot exclude the possibility that Hittite scribes read NINDA KASKAL analytically as palšaš zuwaš “bread/food of the road.” For that reason we include it here. 
d. KASKAL + GN “journey to GN”: KASKAL URUŠamuha KUB 22.63:17 (oracle question); cf. 4 f, below; for references to KASKAL GN requiring a translation of “campaign to/against GN” when GN is hostile territory see mng. 2, above. 
4. (object in a KIN oracle) “campaign” or “journey(?)” (NH) — a. KASKAL “campaign”: dU GUB-iš ŠA LUGAL A.A-an KASKALÚya ME-aš “The ‘Stormgod’ stood up, took the ‘king’s muwa-’ and ‘campaign’ (and it was given to the ‘army’)” KUB 16.29 obv. 23; LÚ.KÚRÚza ZAG-tar DU° KASKAL MU PAP-numarrÚa ME-aš “The ‘enemy’ took for himself the ‘rightness,’ ‘relief,’ ‘campaign,’ ‘name,’ and ‘protection.’ (They were given to the ‘mother goddess’: favorable)” KUB 5.1 i 4, ed. THeth 4:32f.; cf. passim in this text; cf. KBo 22.264 i 3, KUB 16.61:5, KUB 49:28 rt. col. 14, KUB 22.46:8, KUB 50.25:5, KUB 50.52:6, KBo 13.76 obv. 7, KUB 22.25 obv. 24, rev. 18, KUB 49.76:3, etc. 
b. KASKAL LUGAL “king’s campaign”: KA~ RAŠ.ÓI.AÚšamaš ZAG-tar KASKAL LUGAL MÈÚya ME-ir “The ‘troops’ took for themselves ‘rightness,’ the “king’s campaign,’ and ‘battle’” KUB 5.1 i 21, passim; cf. KUB 6.33:6, KUB 49.79 i 15, KUB 

palša- 6 a 
16.81 obv. 33, KUB 6.26 rev. 8, KUB 6.14 obv. 20, KUB 50.59b:4, KUB 18.58 ii 7, KUB 22.28 rev. 12; for KASKAL LUGAL outside KIN oracles see 1 e 2', above. 
	c. KASKAL KARAŠ “campaign of the army”: LÚ.KÚRÚza ZAG-tar HUL-lu KASKAL KA~ RAŠÚya ME-aš nÚaš KARAŠ.HI.A GUB-za GARri KUB 5.1 i 93-94; cf. ibid. ii 77; KASKAL ÉRIN.MEŠ KUB 49.61:9. 
	d. KASKAL LÚ.KÚR “campaign of the enemy”: SUD-lianza tarnumar KASKAL LÚ.KÚRÚya ME-aš nÚašÚkan ŠÀ KUR-TI GAR-ri KUB 5.1 iii 69. 
	e. LÚaraš KASKAL “campaign of the ally”: LÚ.KÚRÚza MÈ dapian ZI-an LÚaraššÚa KASKAL ME-aš nuÚkan ŠÀ SUD-li SIGﬁ KUB 5.1 ii 59-59b. 
	f. KASKAL + GN “campaign/journey to GN”: KASKAL URUÓat[ti] (or: URUPa[-la-a] or: URUPa[p~ panhi]) “journey to Óatti” (or: “journey/campaign to Pala,”¢ or: “campaign to Pappanhi”) KUB 49.79 obv. 18, 20. The translation depends on whether GN is hostile or friendly territory. See 2 and 3 d, above. 

1	caravan, transport: [IŠTU(?) É.GAL] karu~ pahi ≠INA± KASKAL NAŠU^ “brought [from the great] karupahi [depot] for transport” KUB 42.16 ii 15 (inv., NH), cf. ibid. ii 8, v 5, 12; ŠA KASKAL INA É. GAL-LIM [karupahi(-)] “of (i.e., from) the transport/caravan to the great [karupahi] depot” ibid. iii 4; the inventories seem to list goods obtained by trade or tribute; there is no evidence for spoils of war; É.GAL karupahi is unusual and is not complete in either of the lines quoted; (in inventories at the end of an enumeration of valuables:) ŠA KASKAL “of the road” (i.e., “arrived by caravan(?)”) KUB 42.11 v 9 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:33, 36, Siegelová, Verw. 404f.; restored accordingly in 4 MA.NA 7 G´N KÙ.GI KURKar[(anduni)aš] 2 MA.NA 2 G´N KÙ.GI KURLuq[(qā)] ŠA [KASKAL] “Four minas seven shekels of gold from Babylon, two minas two shekels of gold from Luqqa: (arrived) by [caravan]” ibid. ii 25-27, w. dupl. KBo 18.173:9-11, ed. THeth 10:33, 35, Siegelová, Verw. 402f. 
2	(a feature of the exta), (NH); although KAS~ KAL is not listed as its Sumerogram, one thinks of Akk. padānu “road, way” as a feature of the exta, cf. AHw 808a — a. (listed w. other features of the exta): ni. ši. [t]a. KASKAL 10 ŠÀDIR. SIGﬁ KUB 

22.40 iii 26; cf. KUB 49.71:6, KUB 22.70 rev. 37, 47. 
75

b. w. anš-: […]ni. ši. ta. GIŠTUKUL ZAG-aš KASKAL GÙB-za anšan KUB 16.31 iv 9, KUB 22.36:6. 
c. w. nai-: nipašū¢¢
riš šintahiš KASKAL-iš neanza KBo 16.97 l.e. 4b-5b; KASKAL-NU GÙB-aš neyattat KBo 23.116 iii? 6; KASKAL.ÓI.AÚkan neyantat KUB 
5.20 ii 12; KASKAL ZAG-aš neya KUB 46.37 obv. 40; KASKAL-ašÚkan neyatta KUB 49.95 i 8. 
d. w. andan da-: KUŠ.MEŠ ni. ši. ke. KASKAL GAR-ašÚza andan ME-aš KUB 16.29 obv. 15; cf. KUB 
5.3 i 51-52, KUB 49.17 iii 9. 
	e. w. walh-: šintahiš tananiš ŠA dU GIŠTUKUL KASKAL urni[rni]š GÙB-laz walhanza KBo 16.97 rev. 34; ni. ši. ki. KASKAL GÙB-za RA-IÙ KUB 5.11 i 12; GIŠTUKUL KASKAL GÙB-laza MAÓIÙ KBo 8.55:22; cf. KBo 24.126 rev. 19, KUB 18.2 ii? 7, iii? 19; apparently always GÙB-za; Laroche, RHA XII/54:28 says GÙB-za/ ZAG-za, but we can find no ref. for KASKAL ZAG-za wal~ hanza. 
	f. other: ≠KASKAL±-NUÚkan ZAG-naš KAZU-i KBo 2.2 iii 17; KASKAL-NU iškiša GAM IGI-zi KUB 

18.11 rev. 6; cf. KUB 6.14 rev. 25; KASKAL-NU entiš GÙB-aš maze ZAG-aš KUB 22.31 obv. 9, cf. KUB 46.37 obv. 25, rev. 1-2; KASKAL ZAG-za ašaltimiš KUB 
50.90 obv. 6; KASKAL.MEŠ hirindugarri KUB 22.70 i 66, cf. KUB 22.56 obv. 21, 27. 
7. time (i.e., occasion, occurrence; German “Mal”) — a. in consecutive numbering: [ha]ntezziya (var. [hantez]zi) pal-ši 18 (var. 19) SIG‡ ÉRIN. MEŠ [(pē)]hutenun šÚan hullēr [(tān 12 SIG‡ ÉRIN.MEŠ p)]ēhutenun šÚan namma hul[(ler) teri~ y]anna (var. 3-na) 6 SIG‡ ÉRIN.MEŠ pēhutenun [(šÚa)]n namma huller “The [fir]st time I brought 180,000 troops and they defeated them. The second time (tān) I brought 120,000 troops and they defeated them again. The [thi]rd time ([teriy]anna) I brought 60,000 troops and they defeated them yet again” KBo 3.18 rev. 4-8 (Naram-Sin legend, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.16 rev. 1-4, ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:54f.; (They make the horses shiver four(?) times (“4(?)-[ŠU]”) nuÚšmaš hantezzi pal-ši INA 2 KASKAL-NIÚya UL kuitki pianzi mahhanÚmaÚaš INA 3 KASKAL we~ tenaz šarā
uwadanzi 1 UPNA uzuhrinnÚa pai INA 4 KASKALÚya namma UL kuitki pianzi “The first and the second time they do not give them any

palša- 7 b 5' 

thing. When they are brought up from the water the third time, he gives them one handful of hay and the fourth time again they do not give them anything (to eat)” KBo 3.2 rev.! 3-6 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 136f.; cf. KBo 3.2 rev.! 40-43, KBo 3.5 i 24-28, 5054, iii 20-24, and passim in the horse training texts; ANA dU URUNerik kuwapi IGI-zi pal-ši EZEN ITU.KAM iyanzi … dānÚma kuwapi ANA dU URUNerik EZEN ITU.KAM tiyanzi “When they perform the monthly festival for the Stormgod of Nerik the first time … and when they perform the monthly festival for the Stormgod of Nerik the second time” KBo 2.4 iv 16-18 (monthly fest., NH), ed. KN 288f. 
b. hantezzi palši (adv.) “the first time, at first” 
— 1' followed by EGIR-ŠUÚma/EGIR-andaÚma “but after it (= afterwards)”: IGI-zi pal-ši dUTU URUTÚL-na dMizzulan 3-ŠU ekuzi … § EGIR-ŠUÚ ma dU URUNerik d[Z]ahapunān GUB-aš 3-ŠU ekuzi “First he drinks the Sungoddess of Arinna (and) Mizzulla three times … § afterwards, standing, he drinks the Stormgod of Nerik (and) Zahapuna three times” KUB 25.22 iii 13-14 (fest.), ed. Haas, KN 240f.; cf. also VBoT 24 i 11-16 (MH/NS), KBo 15.25 rev. 15-17 (rit. of Wišuriyanza, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:4-7, KBo 15.37 i 63-ii 12 (MH/NS), KBo 25.184 ii 16-18. 
2' followed by EGIR-paÚma: KUB 27.12:4-7 (fest.), KUB 45.47 iv 10-13 (fest., MH/MS?). 
3' followed by apiyaÚma “then”: “When I arrived at Timmuhala” nuÚmuÚkan hantezzi pal-ši kuit URUTimmuhalaš IŠTU NAM.RA.ÓI.A GUD UDU išparzašta “since Timmuhala escaped from me the first time together with the population, cattle, and sheep (I seized it then [apiyaÚma] together with population, cattle, and sheep)” KUB 19.37 iii 22-23 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 174f. 
4' followed by kinuna “now”: hantezzi pal-ši mah≠ha±[n šipandahhun(?)] / kinuna QA_TAMMA šipandahhi “Just as [I offered?] the first time, I offer in the same way now” KBo 16.97 obv. 26-27 (oracle question, ENS); cf. also KUB 9.32 i 41-42 (rit. of Ašhella, NH). 
5' followed by namma “again”: [iērÚma(?)] / hantezzi pal-ši mah[han] / nÚat namma QA_TAMMA iya[nzi] KUB 12.12 i 26-27 (hišuwaš fest.); cf. KBo 21.34 i 38-41 (MH/NS). 

76

6' wr. hantezzi ≠KASKAL(?)±-NI (= Akk. ÓAR~ RA_NI): KBo 22.189 ii 9 (following photograph rather than KBo copy, NS). 
7' other: For KBo 3.6 ii 14 see mng. 2, above; cf. KUB 

	31.68:47 (NH). 

	c. (from “two” upwards, always wr. KASKAL): [nu INA 7] KASKAL-NI ma[hhan] ienzi INA 8 KASKAL[-NIÚya 9 KASKAL-NI QA_TAMMAÚpat] ienzi “Ju[st as they do it the seventh] time, [so] they do it the eighth [and the ninth times]” KBo 14.63 iv 910 (3rd horse manual, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 222f.; (They drive the sheep three times to the old priest) INA 3 KASKAL-NIÚmaÚza LÚSANGA GIBIL [PA_NI] LÚSANGA LIBIR-RU šarā ešari “on the third time, the new priest takes his seat up [before] the old priest” KUB 17.35 i 26-27 (cult inv., NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 124f., 138. 
	d. KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši “each time”: “However many times (mašiyanki) they hitch them (i.e., the horses) up” nu KASKAL-ši KASKAL-šiÚpat INA 7 IKU.ÓI.A anda penneškizzi “he drives them seven IKUs on each of those (-pat) occasions” KBo 

3.5 ii 14-15 (Kikk., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 88f., cf. Güterbock, RHA XV/60:4; ŠEŠÚYAÚmaÚmu KASKAL-ši KAS~ KAL-ši tamai a-x[…] KUB 23.88 obv. 4 (letter, NH), ed. Otten, AfO Beiheft 12:66f.; KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši TUKU.TUKU-uanta pē harkanzi KUB 49.90:14 (oracle question, NH). 
8. (a scribal technical term); cf. Mascheroni, Hethitica 5:95-109: ANA GIŠ.ÓURÚka[n …] / KASKAL µPiha-U[R.MAÓ …] / µPalluwa[r]a-LÚ […] / µÓulla-LÚ[…] KUB 44.24 vi 8-11 (colophon, fest., NS); KASKAL µPalluwara-≠ZA± […] / LÚDUB.SAR […] KUB 51.77 rev. 6-7 (colophon, NH); cf. [A]NA [GIŠ.ÓUR]Úkan hāntān / [KASKAL µ]Piha-UR.MAÓ DUB.SAR.GIŠ / [… µP]alluwara-LÚ DUB.SAR KUB 20.29 vi 4-6 (colophon, NH). KASKAL here might mean something like “tracing” of the original tablet or following the master scribe’s track. 
That “BAL”-š(a/i)-is to be interpreted syllabically as Hittite pal-š(a/i)- was first argued by Güterbock (RHA XV/60 (1957) 3-4), who based his argument on the alternations between (number) “BAL”-ši and INA (number) KASKAL. This proposal was opposed by Goetze (JCS 16 (1962) 33), who 

*palšiya
cited Hatt. ii 29-30 (= KBo 3.6 ii 13-14) as an objection: nuÚmu k® IGI-zi LÚ-tarÚmit dIŠTARÚmuÚ kan GAŠANÚYA IGI-zi “BAL”-ši ŠUMUM kēdani KASKAL-ši halzāiš “This (was) my first manly deed. On this occasion for the first time IŠTAR my lady called me by name.” Goetze’s point was that *palši (if that were the correct reading of both KASKAL-ši and “BAL”-ši) would not likely be used twice in the same clause w. different meanings. Of course, the cogency of this counter argument depends heavily upon one’s assessment of the rules of Hittite “style.” The collocation hantezzi ≠KASKAL(?)±-NI (cf. c 7', above) seems to support Güterbock’s case. His proposal has now found general acceptance. 
(Items prior to 1957 read BAL-.) Hrozny™
, SH (1917) 94f. (mng. 7 b “hantezzi(-) palli (geschr. bal-lim) zuerst”); Sommer, AU (1932) 118-120 (mng. 1 d); Laroche, RHA XII/54 (1952) 27f. (mng. 6); Güterbock, RHA XV/60 (1957) 3-4 (“BAL”-ša- = palša- = KASKAL); Otten, HTR (1958) 88 (mng. 3 b “Rückwege”); Goetze, JCS 14 (1960) 70 (on KASKAL G´D.DA); idem, JCS 16 (1962) 33 (opposing reading pal-ši); Güterbock, Oriens 15 (1962) 349 w. n. 4 (mng. 1 e 6' “entweder die beiden Strassenränder oder die beiden Zweige einer Weggabelung”); Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 35 (mng. 3 b “Rückweg”); Laroche, RA 64 (1970) 132f. (mng. 6, corresponds to Akk. padānu); Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 39f. (mng. 1 f); Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 145f. (mng. 1 g); Archi, OA 13 (1974) 139 (mng. 4 “spedizione, campagna militare”); Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 176f. (mng. 1 f); Laroche, Revue archéologique 1976:16 n. 3 (mng. 5 “(venus) par caravane”); Mascheroni, Hethitica 5 (1983) 95-109 (on mng. 8); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1984) 166 (mng. 3 b “en route”), 310 (“return trip”); Beal, THeth 20 (1992) 269 (on KASKAL G´D.DA). 
Cf. *palšiyahh-, *palšiyala-; hari-/KASKAL (Hurr.). 
[pal?-ša-nu-ma-aš] KBo 13.258:8 read aš(over erasure)-ša-nu-ma-aš, cf. ibid. 10. 
palši-see palša-. 
[*palšiya-, KASKAL-šiya- v.] KASKAL-ši-iia-an!-zi KBo 23.27 ii 25 (MS) should be read ma-an[a-at tu-u-wa-]li-ma KASKAL-ši i-ia-an-zi. Since the word occurs at the end of the line and is written over on the edge, the scribe did not have enough space for a word divider, and KASKAL-ši iyanzi was intended. For acc. + KASKAL-ši iyasee IBoT 2.134 iii 16, KUB 10.27 vi 3. For tuwali KAS~ KAL-ši see KBo 4.14 ii 57. 
77

*palšiahh-v.; to dispatch, set on the road, satisfy; wr. KASKAL-šiahh-; NH.† 
pres. sg. 1 KASKAL-ši-ah-mi KBo 24.126 obv. 30, KUB 
16.46 iv 14, KUB 22.67:10, KASKAL-ah-mi KUB 5.1 i 92, KUB 22.39 iii 13, Bo 2906:16 (ZA 78:310); sg. 3 KASKAL-šiah-zi KUB 22.57 obv. 16, KUB 31.80 obv. 7, KASKAL-ah-zi KBo 13.68 obv. 7, KUB 5.1 iv 83, 84, KUB 26.69 vi 5, KUB 
50.26 ii (8), KASKAL-zi KBo 23.107 obv.? 5, KUB 18.10 iv 33, KASKAL-ah-hi Bo 2906:15 (ZA 78:310), KBo 13.154:(3), 316/u:(8) (Lebrun, Samuha 205), KASKAL-hi KBo 22.155 obv. 7. 
pl. 3 KASKAL-ši-ah-ha-an-zi KUB 16.77 iii 23, 39, KAS~ KAL-ah-ha-an-zi KBo 9.91 rev. 8, KUB 16.37 iv 1, KUB 22.40 iii 27, 34, KASKAL-an-zi KBo 23.107 obv.? 8, 9, 12, KBo 
23.117 rev. 13, KUB 5.1 iii 19, KUB 52.7 iv 3. pret. sg. 1 KASKAL-ši-ah-h[u-un] KUB 31.66 iv 19; sg. 2 
or 3 KASKAL-ah-ta KBo 9.82 obv. 8, KUB 14.2 iv 6. part. sg. nom. com. KASKAL-ah-ha-an-za KUB 5.3 ii 46, 
50. verbal subst. KASKAL-ši-ah-hu-u-wa-ar Bo 2906:7 (ZA 
78:310). 
inf. KASKAL-hu-an-zi KBo 22.155 obv. 4. 
iter. pres. pl. 3 ≠KASKAL±-ah-hi-iš-kán-zi KUB 49.37:7; pret. sg. 3 KASKAL-ši-ah-hi-iš-ki-i[t] KUB 31.80 obv. 10. 
frag. KASKAL-ah[-…] KBo 18.26:1. 
Although this word seems never to have been written w. 
the glide (*KASKAL-ši-ia-ah-…), it is obviously not to be read as KASKAL-ši-ih-. 
DINGIR-LIM-tar KASKAL-an-zi DINGIR. MEŠ URUŠapinuwaiya udanzi “They will dispatch the divine statues and bring the gods to Šapinuwa” KUB 5.1 iii 19 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:68f.; cf. ibid. i 92, iv 83-84; [DINGIR-L]UM GIBIL LUGAL-UTTI kuit ÚŠ-ni šer [TUKU.T]UKU-atti SIZSÁ-at KASKAL-ah-ha-an-za-za [k]uit nawi nu KIN NU.SIGﬁ-du “Since concerning the plague you, O new [go]d of kingship, have been determined to be in anger, (if it is) because you have not yet been satisfied (lit. dispatched): let the KIN be unfavorable” KUB 5.3 ii 45-47 (oracular inquiry, NH); GIM-an LUGAL KUR URUAmurri KASKAL-ši-ah-zi x[…] / INA É.GAL-LIM EGIR-pa memianz[i] “When the king of Amurru puts (him?) on the road […] (or: When he puts the king of Amurru on the road), afterwards they will report in the palace” KUB 31.80 obv. 7-8 (hist. frag., NH), ed. Forrer, Klio 30:165f., tr. Geogr. 99; ÓAR.ŠU KÙ.BABBAR ANA dU URUTÚL-na dUTU«-ŠI» URUTÚL-na LÚ.MEŠKÙ.D´M KASKAL-ah-ha-an-zi “The smiths will dispatch silver bracelets for the Stormgod of Arinna (and) for the Sun-

GIŠpalšūwanza 

goddess(!) of Arinna” KBo 9.91 rev. 6-8 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:25f., Siegelová, Verw. 334f. 
Adverbs: arha KBo 24.126 obv. 30, KUB 16.46 iv 14, KUB 22.67:10, KUB 50.26 ii (8); GAM-an KUB 26.69 vi 5; UGU KUB 22.39 iii 13 (oracle question). 
Güterbock, RHA XV/60 (1957) 3f. (KASKAL-šiyahh-= *pal~ šiyahh-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 426, 428f. 
Cf. palša-. 
*palšiyala-n.; guide(?); wr. LÚKASKAL-la-, OH/NS.† 
sg. nom. LÚKASKAL-la-aš KUB 43.60 i 30. 
≠š±ÚanÚzaÚapa KASKAL-ši LÚKASKAL-la-aš handāit “The guide(?) has prepared it (sc. the human soul) for the journey” KUB 43.60 i 30 (myth, OH/ NS), tr. Hoffner, Hittite Myths 33 (“traveler”). 
Cf. palša-. 
[*palšiešš-, KASKAL-šiešš- v.] KASKAL-šie-eš-zi KUB 28.82 i 25 (OH?/NS) is to be read KAS~ KAL-ši e-eš-zi; the lack of word space is due to the crowding at the end of the line; dupl. reads: [… KASKAL-ši] / [e-e]š-zi KBo 12.87 rev. 5-6. 
GIŠpalšū
wanza n.; (a valuable wooden object); NH.† 
≠6± GIŠpal-šu-u-wa-an-za ŠÀ 1 GIŠDUB.ŠE[N …] / wallayaš kittari “Six p.-s are lying on smooth(?)/ shorn(?) […-s] in a treasure-box” KUB 42.75 rev. 4-5 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:189f., Siegelová, Verw. 66f. □ GIŠDUB.ŠEN (Akk. tupšinnu) is the proper reading (courtesy 
M. Civil) of GIŠ“UM.MIŠ” (cf. Güterbock, Anadolu 15:6f. and Siegelová, Verw. 82 n. 9) found six times in the inventory texts. For the Sumerian word and the loanword in Akk. see P. Steinkeller, OA 20:243-249, 23:39-41 and Civil, AuOr 5:20f. 
w. anterior literature. Steinkeller showed that it was a treasure box, not just a tablet box (so initially Wiseman, Iraq 37:158, 163; cf. Krecher and von Soden in AHw 1371 s.v. tupšinnu “ein Tafelbehälter”). In Mesopotamia the DUB.ŠEN was often made of copper. Cf. also HZL numbers 99 and 230. 
Siegelová p. 610 lists the Hittite word stem as palšuwant- and takes it as a nom. sg. com. The nom. sg. in -anza could be either a com. gender noun in -ant- or a Luw. neut. sg. -z/ša form, on which see van den Hout, KZ 97:60-80. 

78

paldahi(-); (mng. and language unkn.); NH.† 

NU.ŠE-du / INIM pal-da-hi(-)x(-)x ni. ši. UL KAR-at “Let it be unfavorable. (In?) the ‘word’ (of?) p. (the diviner) did not find the nipašuriš and šintahiš (parts of the sheep liver)” KUB 22.56 rev. 910 (extispicy, NH). 
It is barely possible that PAL-DA-ÓI is the genitive of an Akk. word (cf. CAD baldahû, possibly a gentilic), although its meaning is presently unknown. Nowhere else does one find the matter of inquiry coming between NU.ŠE-du and the ni. ši. UL KAR-at. For this reason one could suppose that INIM paldahi indicates the location in the sheep’s innards where the diviner did not find the nipašuri and šintahi. The entire passage is unclear. 
(UZU)paltana-n. com.; shoulder, shoulder blade; wr. syll. and (UZU)ZAG.LU, UZUZAG; from OS. 
sg. nom. pal-ta-na-aš KUB 43.53 i (7), (24) (OH/NS), KBo 
1.42 ii 13, iv (14) (NH); acc. UZUpal-ta-na-a[n] Bo 3640 iii? 9 (Ertem, Flora 157), UZUZAG.LU-an VBoT 24 iv 25 (MH/NS), KUB 33.106 iii 44, 46 (NH), HHT 79:5, ZAG.LU-an KUB 
50.90 obv. 5 (NH), UZUZAG-an VBoT 24 ii 39 (MH/NS); gen. pal-ta-na-aš KBo 11.40 ii 9, UZUZAG.LU-aš KUB 35.148 iii 18, 23 (OH/NS), KUB 2.1 ii 18 (NH), ŠA UZUZAG.L[U] KUB 35.72:11; loc. UZUpal-ta-ni KUB 39.71 iii 26, KUB 45.32 iii 6, pal-ta-ni KBo 25.109 iii 7 (OS? or MS?), KBo 17.92 obv. 14, KBo 3.13 rev. 15, KBo 20.121:5, pal-da-ni KBo 25.109 ii 3 (OS? or MS?), pal-ta-ni-i KUB 43.53 i 7, 24 (OH/NS), UZUZAG.LU-ni KUB 9.34 ii 39 (NH), KBo 26.61 iii (24), KUB 
33.106 iii 47(NH), KUB 32.2:8; abl. ZAG.LU-za KBo 3.1 ii 30 (OH/NS), KUB 38.2 i 22 (NH), UZUZAG.LU-az KUB 24.14 i 12 (NH), KBo 26.228 i 4. 
pl. nom. pal-ta-nu-uš KBo 1.42 ii 32 (NH); acc. pal-ta-na[aš] KBo 8.91 obv. 15, UZUZAG.LU.ÓI.A KBo 15.10 iii 69 (MH/ MS), KUB 27.59 iv 17; loc. pal-ta-a-na-aš KBo 11.11 ii 2 (NH), UZUZAG.LU-aš KUB 32.95 rev. 8 (MH?/MS). 
(Sum.) GÚ = (Akk.) a-hu “arm” = (Hitt.) pal-ta-na-aš “shoulder” KBo 1.42 ii 13 (Izi Bogh., NH), ed. MSL 13:135; (Sum.) GÚ.ŠUB.BA = (Akk.) a-hu na-dú-ú “whose arms hang down (i.e., is idle or negligent)” = (Hitt.) pal-ta-nu-uš kuedani awan katta kiyantari “whose shoulders are laid down” ibid. ii 32-33, ed. Madd. 135 n. 14 and MSL 13:136; (Sum.) ZAG = (Akk.) [i-mi-i]t-t[ù] = (Hitt.) pal-ta-n[a-aš] “shoulder” ibid. iv 14, ed. MSL 13:140. Although the scribe translates Akk. a-hu “arm” w. paltana-, the inner-Hitt. exx. support only the mng. “shoulder (blade).” 
Akk. būdu, which designates the human (as opposed to animal) shoulder appears in Hitt. texts only in vocabularies GÚ = BU-DU = SAG.KI-anza KBo 1.42 ii 12, [BAL] = [BU]-Ú-DUM 

(UZU)paltana- a 
= hanza KUB 3.95:13 (MSL 3:79) translated in Hittite as “forehead” (i.e., Akk. pūtu). On “UZU”BU-DU in Ullik. to be emended to GIŠ!BU!-BU-DU see Güterbock, JCS 6:40. 
a. of human beings and (anthropomorphic) deities: “I made them farmers” GIŠTUKUL.ÓI.A-ušÚ šušÚšta ZAG.LU-za dahhun “I took their weapons from their shoulder (and I gave them yokes)” KBo 
3.1 ii 30 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. Chrest., 188f. (“right side”) and THeth 11:30f.; (I make the ingredients into the two figurines) nu anniškimi kuin UN-an nuÚššiÚššan ZAG-za UZUZAG.LU-az 1 šē
nan tehhi GÙB-anziÚ yaÚššiÚššan 1 šēnan tehhi “The man whom I am treating, I put one figure on his right shoulder and I put the other figure on his left (shoulder)” KUB 24.14 i 11-14 (Óebattarakki rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 74 (“thigh”) □ GÙBanzi is a nasalized ablative (*-ati > *-anti > *-anzi) in parallelism w. ZAG-za; ŠA Labarna ZAG-na![-aš] UZUZAG.LU[-aš dLAMMA-i] / ŠA Labarna GÙB[la]š UZUZAG.LU[-aš dLAMMA-i] “[To the patron deity of] the Labarna’s right shoulder, to [the patron deity] of the Labarna’s left shoulder” KUB 2.1 iii 7-8 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, NH), ed. McMahon, AS 25:106f., translit. Archi, SMEA 16:110, and cf. p. 99 sub pal~ tanaš; cf. ibid. ii 18 and KBo 11.40 ii 9; (The priest gives the TÚGŠÀ.GA.DÙ-garment to the queen, the queen bows) ≠n±Úan TÚGŠÀ.GA.DÙ! UZUpal-ta-ni-iš[-ši …] “and (s)he [puts(?)] it, (namely) the ŠÀ.GA.DÙgarment, over her shoulder” KUB 45.32 iii 6 (rit. of IŠTAR of Tamininga); [… ÓAÙ]ÙINNA pal-ta-ni-iš-ši dāi KBo 25.109 iii 7 (rit., OS or MS); UZUZAG.LU-aš inan lipdu “Let it (sc. the puppy) lick up the illness of his shoulder” KUB 35.148 iii 18 (Zuwi rit., OH/NS); unclear: (preceding context in missing last lines of column ii) al~ wanzenaš idaluš idāluš EGIR-pa pal-ta-a-na-aš pahhašnuddu KBo 11.11 ii 1-2 (rit., NH); (Upelluri says to Ea:) [k]inunaÚmu ZAG-an kuitki UZUZAG.LU-an GIG-zi … nuÚkan ŠA d≠U±peluri [ZAG-a]n UZUZAG.LU-an wehta nuÚkan NA›ŠU.U-iš dUpe~ luriy[aš ZAG-n]i UZUZAG.LU-ni GIŠšiyattal mahhan art[a]t “‘Now something is making (my) right shoulder hurt … (When Ea heard the words,) he went around Upeluri’s [righ]t shoulder, and (there) stood the Basalt on Upeluri’s right shoulder like a blade(?)” KUB 33.106 iii 43-47 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:28f., tr. Hittite Myths 59 □ the tr. “he turned Upelluri’s right shoulder” (transitive) is impossible for weh-/wah-, which elsewhere takes in the acc. things walked around or roamed 
79

through: É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ hūmanda wehzi KUB 25.12 vi 16-17, KUR-e wehzi KBo 30.164 iii 9, ed. Alp, Tempel 16, KASKAL.MEŠ wehanzi KBo 24.99 iv 21, ārtahiuš wehandaru KUB 13.2 ii 22, GUNNI wehantari IBoT 1.29 rev. 21; (in sequence of body parts: kapru, mieli, paltana-, GAB) pa[l]-t[a-n]a-aš-ša-pa pal-ta-ni-i dākki “The shoulder corresponds to the shoulder” KUB 43.53 i 7 (Zuwi rit., OH/NS), ed. Haas, Or NS 40:415-417, cf. also HAB 219f.; [pal-ta-n]a-aš-ši-ša!(text -ta)-aš-ta pal-ta-[n]i-i šalliš “his [sho]ulder is bigger than the shoulder” ibid. i 24; in a sequence of body parts of dU: UZUZAG.LU … UZUGAB … UBUR.ÓI.A … 2 išhū~ nau-, … 2 GÉŠPU.ÓI.A … 2 ŠU.MEŠ … ŠU.SI “shoulder, … chest, … nipples, … two išhunau-, … two fists, … hands, … fingers” 125/r ii 4-10, ed. Güterbock, FsAlp 238, cf. Otten, MDOG 93:76. 
b. of anthropomorphic statues: dLIŠ halziyauwaš ALAM KÙ.GI LÚ GUB-anza ZAG.LU-za pát!-tar! (text: tar-pát) uwan “(the bisexual deity) Šaušgato-be-Invoked: a golden statue (represented as) a man standing, wings coming from (his) shoulders” KUB 38.2 i 21-22 (description of statue, NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 4-7, tr. Rost, MIO 8:175; cf. ibid. i 8; “Nine statues of clay, stand[ing]: in their hands two bas[kets]” [ANA UZ]UZAG.LU.ÓI.AÚŠU kēz 1 GIŠMA.S[Á.AB … kez]ziya 1 GIŠzupparu “On their shoulders a basket […] on one side and a torch on the [ot]her” KUB 
58.74 rev. 15-16, translit. StBoT 15:22 (as Bo 2910 ). 
c. of animals — 1' slaughtered animals whose shoulders were used as offerings — a' UDU “sheep”: KBo 10.31 iii 30-32 (OH/NS), KBo 13.114 iii 2-4, KUB 7.5 iii 4-7 (both MH/NS), KBo 2.4 rev. iii 12-13 (NH). 
b' UDU.NITA “wether”: KBo 8.127:3-4. 
c' UDU.ŠIR “ram”: KUB 9.34 ii 36-39 (NH). 
d' UDU.U⁄‚ “ewe”: HT 1 iv 36-39 (NS). 
e' MÁŠ.GAL “male goat”: KBo 20.72 iii! 16-18 (MS?), VBoT 58 iv 45-46 (OH/NS), VBoT 24 iv 22-25 (MH/ NS), KBo 13.101 i 8-9 (NS), HT 1 iv 12-14 (NS). 
f' GUD “ox”: KBo 10.31 iii 30-32 (OH/NS), KUB 27.59 iv 16-17. 
g' [GUD.?]MAÓ “bull”: HT 89:7-8. 
h' PÉŠgaparta-(a rodent): KBo 15.10 iii 58-59, iii 6870 (MH/MS). 

palwai

i' PÉŠ.TUR “mouse”: KUB 27.67 iii 52-56 (MH/NS). 
2' method of preparation — a' zanu-“to cook”: KUB 27.67 ii 51. 
b' happinit zanu-“to cook with/over a flame”: KBo 15.10 iii 59, 69-70 (MH/MS). 
c' IZI-it/IZI-az zanu- “to cook with fire”: KUB 
27.67 iii 55-56 (MH/NS), VBoT 24 ii 39-40, iv 25 (MH/NS), KBo 13.101 i 9-10 (NS). 
d' offered to a deity raw: KUB 56.49 i 16-17. 
Von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1943) 25f., 84f. (“Schulterstück, Schulterblatt, Schulter”); Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 65-67; idem, JCS 6 (1952) 40; Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 134f. n. 422. 
palwa-n. com.; blister(?), boil(?); NH.† 
(Akk.) bu-bu-uº-tù (“pustule, blister, boil”) = (Hitt.) pal-wa-aš KBo 1.51 rev. 16 (vocab.); the pal sign was read mu!? by Friedrich, KlF 1:376 w. n. 4; collation in Istanbul showed a clear pal; cf. also our objections in CHD muwa- (discussion at the end). 
palwai-v.; to cry out, shout for joy, cheer; to make a long, sustained utterance (probably in a loud voice), declaim(?); from OS. 
pres. sg. 3 pal-wa-a-iz-zi KBo 25.82 rev.? 12 (OS), KBo 
10.26 i 16, KBo 10.28 ii 9, KBo 17.75 iv (44), KBo 19.128 v 42, KUB 1.17 iv (21), vi (1), 19, KUB 2.13 vi 6, KUB 20.28 iii 7, KUB 25.6 iii 17, iv 10, v 7 (all OH/NS), KUB 11.34 ii 4, iii 16, iv 23, v 55, KBo 20.72 iv! 2 (both pre-NH/MS?), KBo 12.96 i 11, KBo 15.48 v! 29 (both MH/NS), KUB 27.55 ii 18 (NH), pal-wa-iz-zi KUB 25.36 vi 35 (OH?/NS), KBo 4.9 iii 21, KBo 
17.75 iv 7, KUB 2.3 i 6, 18, iii 17, KUB 20.28 iv 13, IBoT 1.15:5 (all OH/NS), KBo 20.72 iii! 18 (MS?), KBo 15.48 v! 7 (MH/ NS), KBo 2.8 ii 1, KBo 8.72 obv.? 12, KUB 32.55:12 (all NH), pal-u-wa-a-iz-zi KUB 2.6 ii 33, iv (24), pal-u-wa-iz-zi KBo 13.194:4, KBo 21.94 iv 10, KUB 41.44 v 5, IBoT 2.96 v 15, 20. 
pl. 3 pal-wa-an-zi KBo 25.63 left col. 3, (4), (5) (OS), IBoT 3.9:7, pal-wa-a-an-zi VBoT 128 v 10 (NH), KBo 23.55 i 22, pal-u-wa-an-zi KUB 44.21 iii 5. 
pret. sg. 3 pal-wa-it KBo 26.65 (= KUB 33.106) iv 16. part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pal-wa-an KBo 15.33 iii 25 (MH/ MS). iter. pres. sg. 3 pal-ú-i-iš-ki-zi KBo 25.109 iii 7 (OS? or MS?), pal-ú-iš-ki-iz-zi KBo 15.33 iii (37) (MH/MS), KUB 
27.65 i 14 (NH), pal-ú-i-iš-ki-iz-zi KUB 11.21a i 5, IBoT 2.21 i! 4, KUB 27.65 i 29 (NH), pal-wiﬁ-eš-ki[-iz-zi] KUB 2.8 iii 12 (NH), ≠pal-wiﬁ-iš-ki±-iz-zi KBo 11.49 vi 5 (“pal-wi-iš-ki-iz-zi” in Mestieri 248). 

80

pl. 3 pal-ú-eš[-kán-zi] KBo 20.13 rev. 17 (OS), pal-ú-i-iš-kán-zi KBo 10.23 iii y+ 6, 14, KUB 11.17 iii 4 (all OH/NS), KBo 2.14 iii 7, 12, 17, 22, iv 19, 24 (NH), KBo 13.181:5, KBo 22.244:7, pal-ú-iš-kán-zi KBo 4.9 i 50 (OH?/NS), KBo 17.83 i 8, KBo 22.186 ii 7, pal-ú-e-eš-kán-zi KUB 25.1 v 16, vi 30, KBo 
34.188 rt. col. 13, pal-ú-i-eš-kán-zi KUB 54.64 obv. 20 (NS), pal-lu-eš-kán[-zi] KBo 20.81 v? 19, pal-lu-i[š-kán-zi] KBo 17.55 i 8, pal-wiﬁ-iš-kán-zi KUB 11.25 iii 22 (OH/NS), pal-≠wiﬁ-eškán±-zi KUB 11.29 ii 7. 
a. to cry out, shout for joy, cheer — 1' audible at a great distance: dTašmišuš [išt]amašta nÚašÚza duškiškiwan dāiš nu 3-ŠU pal-wa-it nuÚššan šarā [AN-]ši DINGIR.MEŠ-muš ištama[š]šer 2-anki palwa-it “Tašmišu [he]ard (sc. Ea’s message) and began to rejoice. He shouted three times, and the gods in [hea]ven heard (him); he shouted twice, (and the Stormgod, the valiant king of Kummiya, heard him; and they came to the assembly)” KBo 26.65 (= KUB 33.106) iv 15-17 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:30f. (“shouted”) and idem, Kum. *28, 28 (“er klatschte?”), Oettinger, Stammbildung 370 (“er klatschte”), Badalì, Or NS 59:132 (“gridò”), tr. Hoffner, Hittite Myths 60 (“clapped”) □ for the combination duškeške- w. the v. palkwiya- see palkwiya-. 
2' expressing joy, celebration and approval: (Describing a wrestling match:) “And when he attacks and [takes] down [the wrestler] of the enemy” nu anzel ÉRIN.MEŠ hūmanzaššÚa pal-wa-aiz-z[i] “our army and everyone cheers. (He who won bows again to the king)” KBo 23.55 i 6 (fest.); “Again they begin to wrestle. When our (man) takes him down (laknuzi)” [nÚat pa]l-wa-a-an-zi “they cheer. (The loser bows to the deity, our man crouches)” ibid. i 22, cf. Hoffner, BiOr 35:247 (“must denote the victory shout”). 
3' while dancing: “Other performers (LÚ.MEŠA~ LAN.ZU·) have put on multicolored garments” nÚ at LUGAL-i tapušza aranta nu ŠU.MEŠ-uš šarā harkanzi nÚatÚšan pēteÚši wehantari pal-ú-iš-kánziÚya “They stand at the side of the king, hold their hands up, turn around in place, and keep shouting” KBo 4.9 i 47-50 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. de Martino, SMEA 24:137, Alp, Tempel 156f., Oettinger, Stammbildung 371, Badalì, Or NS 59:134f., tr. ANET 358f.; cf. KBo 10.23 iii 1-6 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. Singer, StBoT 28:12, Badalì, Or NS 59:135f. 
4' while both of the person’s hands are fully occupied w. another activity: nu LÚpalwattallaš 

palwai- b 2' 
TI°MUŠEN-aš partaunit LUGAL-i menahhanda wā
tar 3-ŠU papparšzi pal-wa-iz-zi-ma 1-ŠU LÚpalwattal~ laš GAL A TI°MUŠEN-aššÚa partauwar harziÚpat “The crier sprinkles water with an eagle’s wing three times toward the king. He shouts once, and the crier continues (-pat) to hold the cup of water (in one hand) and the eagle’s wing (in the other)” KBo 15.48 v! 5-9 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:136f., translit. Mestieri 248 □ the -pat on harzi seems to show that the action continues without interruption; if the meaning were “again holds,” one would expect namma harzi; LÚ.MEŠGALA S‰R-RU GIŠargami galgalturi GIŠhuhu~ pallittÚa hazzikanzi pal-u-e-eš-kán-zi-ia “The lamentation-priests sing, strike the argami, the galgal~ turi and huhupal-instruments, and keep shouting” KUB 25.1 vi 26-30 (ANDAÓŠUM fest.). 
5' while someone lowers a bridle from a roof during a ceremony: [n]Úašta šuhhi šer dPirinkir [(šippanti)] / nÚašta KUŠKIR›.TAB.ANŠE šuhhaz [(katta) udanzi] / nÚatÚkan ANA PA_NI DINGIRLIM <(an)da (pedanzi nÚa)tÚkan> menahhan[(da) …] / nu pal-wa-iz-zi (par. pal-wa-a-an-zi) nÚat kat~ ta ti[anzi] “he/she offers to Pirinkir upon the roof. [They bring] a bridle down from the roof, and [place] it opposite the deity (par. carry it in opposite the deity and [place] it before [the deity]). (He/ she) cheers (par. they cheer), and [they] set it down” KBo 34.172:7-10 (fest. frag.) restored from par. VBoT 128 v 4-11 and KBo 8.54:6-8. 
b. to make a sustained utterance (probably in a loud voice), declaim(?), recite(?) — 1' followed immediately by quoted discourse: (Someone fills two BIBRUs: one for the Stormgod of Manuzziya, and one for Lilluri. And they place one BIBRU for ZA.BA›.BA›) nu pal-wa-a-iz-zi dLellurišÚwaÚkan ŠÀ-ašÚšaš ār(a)š dIM ManuziyaÚmaÚwaÚkan dLel~ luriš LUGAL-un MUNUS.LUGAL-an ZI-aš arnu~ wandu nuÚwaÚšši LÚ.MEŠ KÚR G‰R-aš kattan tiandu “and (s)he cries out/declaims: ‘Lelluri has achieved her heart’s desire. May the Stormgod of Manuzziya and Lelluri bring the king and queen to the fulfillment of their wish. Let them put his enemies under his feet’” KBo 24.76:5-11 (hišuwaš fest.), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:139, cf. Güterbock, JCS 6:42 (as 274/c). 
2' stereotypically associated w. two other acts of liturgical utterance: “The singer sings in Hurri
81

an” LÚALAN.ZU· memai LÚpalwata[llaš] pal-wa-aiz-zi LÚkidaš h[alzai] “the performer speaks, the declaime[r]/shoute[r] declaims(?)/shouts(?), the kita-man c[alls]” KUB 20.26 i 6-7 (autumn fest.); cf. pal~ watalla-a 2', b 2'. Sometimes the LÚALAN.ZU· and the LÚkita-are paired without the LÚpalwatalla-(cf. CHD LÚkita-). 
c. w. indication of the number of times repeat
ed in succession — 1' once: MUNUSpalwat[al]laš 1ŠU pal-wa-[i]z-zi [MUNUS.MEŠ]haz<qa>raÚma išha~ 
miškanzi “The female-shouters/declaimers shout/ declaim once. The haz<qa>ra-women sing” KBo 2.8 ii 1-2 (cult. of night deity of Parnašša, NH), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:133f., KBo 15.48 ii 5-7 (cf. palwatalla-1 d), KBo 24.30:5, 
KUB 32.125:6-7; see also KBo 15.48 v! 5-9 above, a 4'. 
2' twice: namma LÚpalwatallaš TI°MUŠEN-aš par~ taunit wātar LUGAL-i menahhanda 3-ŠU pap~ par(a)šzi pal-wa-a-iz-ziÚya 2-ŠU “The shouter/declaimer sprinkles water on the king with an eagle’s wing and he shouts/declaims two times” KBo 15.48 v! 26-29 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:136f.; see also a 1', above. 
3' three times: KBo 2.8 iii 16, ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:134, ibid. iii 25 (NH), KUB 2.13 vi 12 (fest. of the month, OH/NS), KBo 4.13 vi 3 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., NH), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:135; see also a 1', above. 
d. w. various subjects — 1' LÚ/MUNUSpalwat~ talla-, DUMU.NITA (LÚ)palwatallaš: q.v. 
2' MUNUShuwaššanalla/i-: KBo 14.97:2, KBo 24.22:7, 13, KBo 24.18 rev. 8, KUB 27.49 ii (40), iii 6, KUB 27.54 ii (11), KUB 32.125:6, KUB 32.126 ii 3, iii 2, KBo 20.72 iii! 18. 
4' LÚALAN.ZU·: KBo 4.9 i 45, KBo 10.23 iii y+12, 
KUB 11.17 iii 3-4. 
5' LÚNAR: KBo 29.115 obv. 5 (witaššiyaš fest.); KBo 
29.69:16, w. dupl. KUB 27.66 ii 17. 
6' others: LÚMUÓALDIM: HT 23 obv. 1; LÚaššuš~ šalla-: KBo 25.54 i 11; MUNUS(-TUM): KBo 25.43 rev. 6, KUB 41.17 i 29 (Badalì, Or NS 59:132f.); ÉRIN.MEŠ: KBo 23.55 i 6, 22 (see a 2', above); dTašmišu: KBo 26.65 (= KUB 33.106) iv 15 (see a 1', above). 
e. prohibited under certain circumstances: nu aliyani EGIR-anda lē kuiški pal-wa-a-iz-zi “Behind the deer(?) let no one speak in a loud voice” KBo 

palwai

12.96 i 11 (rit. for dLAMMA of the hunting-bag, MH/NS), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:133, Rosenkranz, Or NS 33:239, 241 (no tr.); KBo 29.115 obv. 7 ([U]L pal-wa-a-iz-zi). 
f. w. adverbs — 1' arha: hazgaraiÚyaÚz arha palwa-iz-zi “The hazgarai-women shout out” Bo 2670 left col. 16, ed. differently Oettinger, Stammbildung 371 (“Er klatscht von dem Mädchen weg”). 
2' peran: [… ÓAÙ]ÙINNA paltaniÚšši dāi pe~ rannÚa pal-ú-i-iš-ki-zi […] U DUGQULLU^ INA ÉÚ ŠU pippai “He places an ax on his shoulder and in front he shouts/declaims. In his house he overturns a […] and a QULLU^-vessel” KBo 25.109 iii 7-8 (rit., OS or MS) □ for Akk. qullû see CAD and AHw s.v. qulliu. 
Summary of semantics: p. is an audible manifestation of joy and acclaim, also performed in rituals, often accompanied by music and dancing. The options that have been entertained previously (see bibliographical sec.) are “to clap,” “to recite,” or “to shout.” 
With regard to the proposed translations: 
1) The use of numbers (e.g., 3-ŠU “three times” c, above) permits either “to clap” or a verb of speech since such numbers occur inter alia w. mema-. 
2) The description in KBo 4.9 i 47-50 (a 3', above) of a dancer doing this w. raised hands matches the relief Carchemish B 17b (Woolley, Carchemish 2), portraying a dancer w. hands lifted, accompanied by a lute and a flute player (cf. Güterbock, Kum. 80). In this pose the dancer might have been clapping his hands over his head. But the pictorial representation is not conclusive. There is no caption proving that he is indeed palwai-ing. Furthermore the dancer might be simply holding his hands together over his head, as dancers often do. 
3) In one text (KBo 24.76:5-11, b 1', above) palwaizzi is immediately followed by direct discourse. This suggests that the action denoted by palwaizzi produces the quoted matter. On the other hand, it is incontestable that one finds examples of verbs that do not denote speech acts followed by direct discourse: after arnu-KUB 36.90 obv. 7, auš-KBo 24.124 rev. 1, KBo 24.128 rev. 2, KUB 5.24 ii 12, KUB 44.4 rev. 9, iya-KBo 11.10 iii 17, ep-KUB 33.106 ii 5, IBoT 1.36 i 56, 

82

ešša-KBo 14.21 ii 58, kappuwai-KUB 36.51 rev. 3, KUB 
17.10 i 21, pai-KUB 16.16 rev. 8, piya-KUB 12.60 i 16, KBo 13.228 i 5-6, VBoT 58 i 21, peda-KUB 13.4 iv 70, šuhhai-KUB 12.26 ii 22, tarna-KUB 22.70 rev. 44, dai-KBo 3.60 ii 13-14, KUB 13.4 iv 27, tešhaniya-KUB 1.1 iii 4-5, iv 9, uiya-KBo 3.40:10, KBo 4.14 iii 73, KUB 1.1 14-15, KUB 17.10 i 24, KUB 24.2 i 5, KUB 26.89:5, wahnu-KBo 
9.106 ii 1, KUB 44.4 rev. 25, :zuwai-KUB 44.4 rev. 10-11. In such cases one needs to supply in translation “(saying).” 
4) The stereotyped description found in the festivals: LÚALAN.ZU· memai LÚpalwatallaš palwaizzi LÚkitaš halzai shows p. flanked by two obvious verbs of vocal action (memai and halzai). This suggests that to palwai-is to produce a sound by the human voice. 
5) The action of palwai-is audible at a great distance and can be used to summon people to an assembly (a 1', above). “Clap” hardly fits this context, whereas “shout” fits quite well. 
6) A text describes someone doing the action palwai-while holding an eagle’s wing in one hand and a cup of water in the other (KBo 15.48 v! 5-9, a 4', above). This posture that would not permit “clapping,” but would permit a vocal act. 
7) If palwai-is a vocal act, the direct speech found following it in KBo 24.76:5-11 necessitates a translation “recite, declaim (a long liturgical utterance).” 
8) Although “recite, declaim” is preferable for some uses of palwai-, it is inappropriate for others, listed under usage a. Tašmišu’s palwai-ing three times (a 1', above) heard in heaven is likely to have been three short shouts, not three long recitations, and the troops who palwai-the victorious wrestler (a 2', above) hardly “recite,” but rather “cheer” and the dancers surely “shout” or “cheer.” 
Neu (StBoT 5:135) is probably right that palwaiand palkuwai-form a pair of phonological variants (-kw-/-w-) on analogy w. lalakueša-/lalaweša-and tarkuwai-/tarwai-. 
Alp, Beamt. (1940) 77-83 (“rezitieren”); Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 79-80 (“‘einen Schrei ausstossen, jauchzen’ oder … besser … ‘(in die Hände) klatschen’”); idem, JCS 6 (1952) 42 

LÚ/MUNUSpalwat(t)alla- a 1' 
(“a verbum dicendi”); Hoffner, BiOr 35 (1978) 247 (“must denote the victory shout”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 369372 (“klatschen” w. suggested etymology); Laroche, apud Gonnet, Mém.Atatürk (1982) 67 (“acclamer, souhaiter”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 248f. (references), Badalì, BeO 28 (1986) 55-64 (“recitare”); Badalì, SEL 3 (1986) 45 (“recitare”); Badalì/Zinko, Scientia 20 (1989) 63f. (“rezitieren”); Badalì, Or NS 59 (1990) 130-142 (verbum dicendi); Nowicki, Or NS 59 (1990) 239-242 (etymology). 
Cf. palkwiya-, palkušta-, (LÚ/MUNUS)palwatalla-. 
[pal-u-wa-aš] KBo 18.170 rev. 4, KUB 38.1 i 31, read BAL-u-wa-aš, and see išpanduwa-, šipanduwa-. 

(LÚ/MUNUS)palwat(t)alla-, LÚpal(l)uwatalla
n. com.; crier, a participant in festivals who cries out; from OS. 
sg. nom. LÚpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš KBo 20.1 obv.? (9) (OS), KBo 19.128 v 37 (OH?/NS), KUB 11.34 i (37) (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 15.48 v! 5, 8, 26 (MH/NS), MUNUSpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš KBo 
20.4 obv. (9) (OS), KBo 16.78 iv 7 (MH?/MS?), MUNUSpal-wa-at-t[a-al-la-aš] KBo 25.59 iv 8 (OS), LÚpal-wa-tal-la-aš KBo 

11.52 v 22 (NS), KUB 11.34 v 41, 55 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 
10.26 i 15, KBo 11.50 v 20, KBo 17.75 iii 10, iv 44, KUB 1.17 v 62, KUB 2.3 i 6, 17, KUB 20.28 ii (26), KUB 25.6 iii 17, (24), IBoT 1.15:5 (all OH/NS), MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš KUB 41.29 iii 11 (OH/NS), KBo 2.8 i 11, KUB 27.61 ii? 6 (both NH), pal-wa-tal-la-aš KUB 10.9:7, LÚpal-wa-at-tal-aš KBo 19.128 iv 37 (OH?/NS), KUB 60.155 rev. 8, L[Ú]pal-wa-tal-aš KUB 1.15 rev. iv 15, KUB 20.23 iv 17, LÚpal-wa-tal-la«-tal-la»-aš KUB 10.14 i 3, LÚpal-wa-a-at-tal-l[(a-aš)] KUB 41.40 iv 22, 31 (OH/NS), [L]Úpal-wa-a-t[al-la-aš] KUB 51.29 rev. 1, MUNUSpal-wa-a-tal-la[-aš] KUB 27.65 i 15 (NH), LÚpal-u-wa-tal-la-aš KUB 28.91 iv (12), KBo 10.18 rt. col. 16 (OH/NS), IBoT 2.96 v 15, KBo 
13.194 rev.? 3, LÚpal-lu-wa-tal-la-aš KBo 23.59 iv 13. stem form (or sg. nom. -<aš>?) ≠LÚ±pal-wa-a-tal-la KUB 
53.23 obv. 4, [LÚpal-wa-t]al-la KUB 10.2:3, MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la KBo 2.8 i 41, ii 29 (NH). 
sg. dat. MUNUSpal-wa-a[t-ta-al-l]i KBo 16.71 iv 1 (OS), LÚpal-wa-tal-li KUB 9.17 obv. 10 (MS or early NS), LÚpal-wa-a[t-tal-li] KBo 23.28 i (51), LÚpal-wa-at-ta-li KBo 15.48 v! 32, MUNUSpal-wa-tal-li KBo 27.163:9. 
pl. nom. pal-wa-at-ta-al-le-eš KBo 25.31 ii 5 (OS), [p]al-wa-tal-le-eš KBo 17.75 i 20 (OH/NS), pal-wa-at-tal-le-e-eš KBo 

25.42 left col. 13, (17), LÚ.MEŠpal-wa-tal-le-e-eš KUB 11.25 iii 
22, 27 (OH/NS), [… pa]l-wa-tal-la-aš KBo 22.244:7. 
sg. or pl. nom.? LÚpal-wa-ta[l-l]a-aš KBo 27.42 ii 62. 
pl. acc. LÚ.MEŠpal-wa-tal-la-aš KBo 4.9 iii 24 (OH?/NS), 
LÚ.MEŠpal-wa-tal-lu-uš KUB 56.34 iv? 27. 
a. LÚp. — 1' in lists of personnel: LÚ GIŠŠUKUR LÚ‰!(text: DÙ).DU° LÚ GIŠBANSUR LÚGALA LÚpal-wa-tal-la-aš LÚarkammiyalaš LÚMUŠEN.DÙ 
83

LÚBAÓARﬁ “The man of the spear, the gatekeeper, the waiter, the lamentation priest (Akk. kalû), the crier, the arkami-player, the augur, the potter” KUB 38.12 i 9-10 (cult inv., NH); (twelve priests are mentioned,) 1 LÚ GIŠGIDRU 1 LÚ ŠUKUR 1 L[Ú … (LÚ.MEŠKISA)]L.LUÓ 2 LÚ.MEŠšarmiēš 1 LÚSA~ GI.A 1 LÚ GIŠBANŠUR 1 L[(Ú NINDA.DÙ.DÙ 1 LÚpal-w)]a-tal-la-aš 1 LÚE.DÉ.A DINGIR-LIM 3 LÚ.MEŠ É DINGIR-LIM 3 LÚ.MEŠAPIN.LÁ “one staff-man, one spear-man, one …, forecourtsweepers, two šarmie-men, one cupbearer, one table-man, one baker, one palwatalla-man, one smith of the deity, three temple servants, three farmers” (these sit down to eat) IBoT 1.29 obv. 22-24 (haššumaš fest., MH?/MS?), w. dupls. KUB 51.57 obv. 26-29, Bo 3228:1113; cf. also KUB 54.39 i 1-3 (fest. frag.). 
2' doing the action palwai-: “The Óurrian singers sing” [LÚ]ALAN.ZU· memai ≠LÚ±pal-wa-tal-la-aš palwaizzi [LÚ]ki[t]aš halzai “The performer speaks, the crier cries, the kita-calls out” KBo 11.28 ii 22-24 (fest. for IŠTAR of Šamuha), ed. Lebrun, Samuha, 152, 159; cf. ibid. iii 16-20; GIŠ.dINANNA.GAL LÚ.MEŠhalliyareš S‰R-RU (§) LÚALAN.ZU· memai LÚpal-wa-tal-la-aš palwaizzi “The large lyre (is struck), the halliyarasingers sing. The performer recites, the crier cries” KUB 10.69 iii 4-8 (fest.); cf. KUB 2.3 i 15-18, KBo 19.128 v 41-42, etc.; sometimes abbreviated: LÚALAN.ZU· memai L[Úpal-wa]-tal-la-aš <palwaizzi> / LÚk®taš halzā[i] 543/t i 9-10; sometimes without others doing mema-and halzai-: (the GUDU⁄¤-priest libates three times before the altar) LÚpal-wa-a-tal-la<aš> palwā
izzi KUB 53.23 obv. 4 (fest. frag.); after the LÚALAN.ZU· calls out “ahā” KBo 30.74 rev. 16; cf. also palwai-b 2'; for an exhaustive list of references cf. Mestieri 248f. 
3' other activities: nu LÚpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš TI°MUŠEN-aš partaunit LUGAL-i menahhanda wā
tar 3-ŠU papparšzi palwaizziÚma 1-ŠU § LÚpal-wa-attal-la-aš GAL A TI°MUŠEN-aššÚa partauwar harziÚ pat … namma LÚpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš TI°MUŠEN-aš partaunit wā
tar LUGAL-i menahhanda 3-ŠU pap~ paršzi palwā
izziÚya 2-ŠU “The crier sprinkles water with an eagle’s wing/feather three times toward the king. He shouts once, and the crier continues (-pat) to hold the cup of water (in one hand) and the eagle’s wing (in the other) … again the crier 

LÚ/MUNUSpalwat(t)alla- b 1' 

sprinkles water towards the king with the eagle’s wing three times and cries twice” KBo 15.48 v! 5-9, 26-29 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), ed. Badalì, Or NS 59:136f., translit. Mestieri 248; nÚašta LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· LÚ.MEŠhalliyarēš LÚ.MEŠpal-wa-tal-la-aš LÚk®tannÚa parā parhanzi “They chase away the performers, the halliyara-singers, the criers, and the kita-” KBo 
4.9 iii 23-25 (ANDAÓŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:58f. (incorrectly translating parā parhanzi as “corrono fuori”); “Before the king and the queen have gone into the temple of ZA.BA›.BA›” nuÚkan peran parā LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· LÚpal-wa-tal-la-aš LÚk®taššÚa an~ da pā
nzi nuÚza AŠARÚŠUNU appanzi “the performers, the crier, and the kita-enter ahead of time and take their places” ibid. ii 2-6, cf. also KBo 30.56 iv 26-30 (fest. frag.); LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· DUMU.É.GAL LÚpalwa-at-tal-la-aš ITTI GIŠ.dINANNA.ÓI.A iyantari § ta LÚ.MEŠhalliyarē
š PA_NI GIŠ.dINANNA.ÓI.A parš~ nanzi DUMU.É.GALÚma LÚpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš ITTI LÚ.MEŠNAR tianzi “The performers, the palace servant, (and) the crier walk together with the lyres. The halliyari-singers squat in front of the lyres, but the palace servant (and) the crier position themselves with the singers” KUB 11.13 ii 10-16 (ANDAÓ~ ŠUM fest.); (after the NIN.DINGIR priestess takes up her position in front of the pillar, a priest libates several times in different locations of the cult room) NIN.DINGIRÚšan QA_TAM zikk[izzi] / LÚpalwa-tal-la-aš ≠pal-ú-e±[-eš-ki-iz-zi] “the NIN.DIN~ GIR priestess keeps placing her hand, and the crier keeps declaiming(?)” KBo 30.153 ii 10-11 (fest. frag.); [LÚ.MEŠALAN.Z]U· [L]ÚkitašÚa [LUGAL?-i? IGI-a]n[d]a tiyanzi [LÚ.ME]ŠhaliyarišÚma [I]TTI GIŠ. <d>INANNA.ÓI.A paršnā
izzi LÚpal-wa-tal-la-aš pe~ ran tiyazi “The performers and the kita-man stand opposite [the king(?)]; the halliyari-singer (pl. det., but sg. verb!) squats with the lutes; the crier steps in front” 418/s ii 1-6 (fest. frag.), ed. Alp, Tempel 81f. 
b. MUNUSp. — 1' in lists of personnel: LÚ dU MUNUS dU MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš LÚ.MEŠZITTI LÚ.MEŠhazziwiaš hū
manza pean huwa<i> “The man of the Stormgod, the woman of the Stormgod, the female crier, the participants, the masters of the ceremony(?) — everyone (of them) goes in front (of the king)” KUB 20.19 iii 1-3 (fest.), cf. ibid. iii 912; [LÚ] dIM GIŠGIDRU-an harzi MUNUS dIM 

84

LÚ/MUNUSpalwat(t)alla- b 1' 

MUNUSpal-wa-at-tal-la-a[š] / [… LÚ.]MEŠALAN.ZU· UGULA LÚ.MEŠMUÓALDIM 15 LÚ.MEŠhā
pieš / […]x LÚ.MEŠ UR.BAR.RA 1 MUNUS GIŠBAN 3 MUNUS.MEŠiwanteš KBo 16.78 iv 7-9 (village offerings, MH?/ MS?); […] LÚSANGA MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš-ša KBo 
9.129 obv.? 2 (rit. frag.); MUNUS.MEŠzi[ntuheš(?) …] / LÚpa[lwatallaš …] / MUNUSpa[l-wa-tal-la-aš …] / LÚN[AR (?) …] KUB 9.23:5-8 (fest. frag.); (after the king and the two GUDU⁄¤-priests bow) LÚk®taš halzaīMUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš palwa[¢izzi] KBo 30.58 iii 17-18, cf. ibid 21-22 (great fest. of Arinna). 
2' stereotyped activity: “The small lyre (is struck), the halliyari-singers sing” LÚALAN.ZU· memai MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš palwaizz[i] “the performer speaks, the female crier cries” KUB 10.99 i 19-20 (fest.); cf. KBo 9.132 iii 15-18; MUNUSpal-wa-tal-laaš palwaizzi LÚkitaš halzai KUB 41.51 iv 1-2 (fest. frag.); MUNUSzintuhiaš halz[(āi)] MUNUSpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš palwai[(zzi)] KBo 20.81 ii? 7-8 (fest. frag.), w. dupl. KBo 20.80:13-14. 
3' other activities: DINGIR-LUM MUNUSpal-watal-la (or, -<aš>?) šarā dāi “The female crier lifts up the deity” KBo 2.8 iii 29 (cult inv., NH); LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· MUNUSpal-wa-tal-la-aš LÚkitaššÚa NINDAharšaš EGIR-an iyanta “The performers, the female crier, and the kita-man walk behind the thick loaves” KBo 11.39 i 7-9 (spring fest.); [(EGIR)]-ŠUÚma MUNUSpal-wa-at-tal-la-aš LUGA[L-i wā
tar (TI°MUŠE)]N-aš pardaunaza 3-ŠU pap[paršzi] KBo 
33.188 ii! 13-14 (hišuwaš fest.), ed. ChS 1/4:135; EGIR-ŠUma MUNUSpal-wa[-…] / TI°MUŠEN-aš partau[-…] KBo 

33.192 iii 7-8, cf. KBo 15.48 ii 5-9 (above, a 3'). 

c. DUMU.NITA (LÚ)p., DUMU.MUNUS p.: DUMU.NITA pal-wa-tal-la-a[š] [p]alwāizzi KUB 10.9:7-8 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS); DUMU.NITA LÚpal~ watalla[š] KBo 30.7 v 8 (KI.LAM fest.), translit. StBoT 28:25, w. var. DUMU.NITA pa[l-…] KUB 10.1 v 4 (in Badalì, Or NS 59:135, KBo 30.7 v 8 is erroneously cited as “KUB X 11 v 8'-9'”). In KBo 10.23 (KI.LAM) the DU~ MU.NITA p. does the following things: stands w. (kattiÚšmi arta KBo 11.67 + KBo 10.23 iv 19) the priest of the tutelary deity and the holy priest, then about ten lines later he walks on the left of the holy priest on whose right the priest of the tutelary deity walks (iv 9''), then after a further gap of twenty-five lines: 

pālza 
[LÚ.MEŠALAN.Z]U· ahā [halziy]anzi [DUMU.NITA] pal-wa-tal-la-aš palw[aiz]zi [nÚa]šta šuppin LÚSANGA[…] LÚSANGA dLAMMA KÁ.GAL-az katta arnuzi “The performers call out ahā, the [boy] palwatallaš cries out and ushers the holy priest and the priest of the tutelary deity through the gate” KBo 
10.23 v 5-10 (KI.LAM), translit. StBoT 28:14; what the boy calls out could be something like “Make way before the priests!” or a continuous declamation, as in palwai-2 a; [(1 DUMU.NITA)] 1 DUMU.MUNUS pal-wa-at-ta-alle-eš u[(enzi)] KBo 25.31 ii 4-5 (OS), w. par. KUB 43.48:34 (fest.), translit. StBoT 25:79; and later in the same text, while the hapieš-men whirl about, DUMU.NITA U DUMU.MUNUS dInaraš halugan tar[nanzi] “The boy and girl deliver the message of Inara” ii 13 repeated ii 14-15, and repeated twice again iii 4-5, 6 □ Pecchioli Daddi (OA 26:45-46, and FsCarratelli 194-197) understands “the message of Inara” to be a reciting of the Illuyanka story, however this might be an allusion to the Inara myth (KUB 33.55 and dupls.; translit. Myth. 87f., tr. Hittite Myths 29), where the Mother-goddess commands Inara (wr. dLAMMA) to take a goat’s horn and halugan iya “make a message (i.e., sound the horn),” which she does (KUB 33.52 ii 45), and “everyone went somewhere.” It is thus conceivable that the boy and girl palwatalleš here are blowing horns. 
Alp, Beamt. (1940) 77-83 (“nomen agentis auf -(a)talla- von palwā(i)-, … sehr wahrscheinlich ein Verbum des Sagens”); Van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 81 (“psalmodiste(?), récitant(?)”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 246-252 (LÚp.), 394-396 (MUNUSp.); Singer, StBoT 27 (1983) 60 n. 27 (“psalmodist boy” for DUMU.NITA p.). For further bibliography see 
s.v. palwāi-. 
Cf. palwai-. 
pālza n.; (an object or a PN); NH.† 
nu LUGAL-uš / [kišš]an memai § [o o o]x LUGAL-un U LÚ.MEŠBE_LU_TIM / [o o o o] 1 pa-aal-za (or: µPāppir 2 DINGIR.MEŠ dPapa~
lza?) eyan / [dIšd]ušduwan LUGAL-uš wemiyanun / [nuÚ za t]uzziyanun KUB 9.1 ii 1-5 (rit., NH). We cannot be certain that 1 pa-a-al-za here is not a PN µPālza. 
p. can be analyzed as sg. nom. or stem form, neut. or com., or an abl. Kronasser, EHS 58, explained it as the basic noun from which (GIŠ)pal~ zah(h)a- was derived, but the fragmentary context here does not allow for a mng. “pedestal.” Note 
85

also that (GIŠ)palzah(h)a- is always spelled w. pal-from OS onwards. 
O. Haas, JKF 3 (1955) 132-133; idem, LingBalk 2 (1960) 30f.; Laroche apud O. Haas, LingBalk 2 (1960) 31 n. 1 (“palza existe mais c’est un hapax, dans un contexte fragmentaire et inutilisable”); Kronasser, EHS (1966) 58. 
(GIŠ)palzah(h)a-, (GIŠ)palzašha-n. com.; a flat base for statues, a pedestal; from OS. 
sg. nom. GIŠpal-za-ha-aš KBo 2.1 iv 5 (NH), KBo 26.147:10, KUB 44.1 obv. 3, 4, pal-za-ha-aš KUB 12.63 obv. 6 (OH/MS), KBo 18.172 obv. 11 (NH), KBo 26.176:3, KUB 38.2 i 11, 16, ii 5, 20, KUB 38.21 obv. 6, pal-za-ah-ha-aš KUB 2.2 ii 9 (OH?/ NS), KBo 4.1 rev. 8 (NH), pal-za-ha-a-aš KUB 38.38 obv. 14, GIŠpal-za-aš-ha-aš KUB 38.3 i 4 (NH), KUB 38.1 i 31. 
sg. acc. GIŠpal-za-ha-an KUB 51.64:5, pal-za-ha-an KBo 
12.129:4. sg. gen. pal-za-ah-ha-aš KBo 4.1 rev. 11 (NH), KUB 2.2 ii 11 (OH?/NS). 
sg. loc. pal-za-hi KBo 13.165 ii 9 (OH/MS), [G]IŠpal-za-hi KBo 21.11 rev.? 6, pal-za-ah-hi KBo 4.1 rev. 9, 10 (NH), GIŠpal-za-aš-hi KUB 51.50 iv? 4, pal-za-aš-hi RS 25.421 obv. 27 (NH), KBo 11.15:3, KUB 51.50 iv? 20. 
pl. acc. GIŠpal-za-hu-uš KBo 17.36 ii 5 (OS). 
stem form GIŠpal-za-ha KBo 2.16 obv. 9 (OH?/NS), palza-ha KUB 38.2 iii 6, GIŠpal-za-aš-ha KUB 38.1 iv 11. 
uncertain (sg. or pl. nom.?) pal-za-ha-aš KUB 42.11 v 7, 9, KUB 42.14 i (1), (3), KUB 42.21 obv. 7 (all NH), pal-≠zaha-x± KBo 18.175a:2. 
frag. pal-za-aš-h[a-…] KUB 42.35:6 (NH). 
(Sum.) [dlamma NA›giš-nu⁄⁄-gal ki-gal NA›za-gìn-na gubba-àm] = (Akk.) dlamassu NA›gišnugallu [š]a ina <KI.GAL> uqn® izzaz “She is a statue of alabaster (representing a) protective spirit, who stands on a base of lapis lazuli” = (Hitt.) nÚ ašÚkan NA›ZA.G‰N-aš pal-za-aš-hi GUB-ri “and she stands on a base of lapis lazuli” RS 25.421 obv. 26-27 (signalement lyrique, NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:773, 775 (“qui se dresse sur une plaque de lapis-lazuli”); Hitt. palzašhi translates ki-gal “base of a statue” in the Sum. version, which, although broken away in RS 25.421, is restored from other unilingual copies, cf. Civil, JNES 23:2 line 30. The Akk. version of RS 25.421 is preserved, but its equivalent of Sum. KI.GAL was accidentally omitted by the scribe. 
a. in general: “One gold lion of one shekel (and) two pairs of iron oxen hitched together by one silver yoke. Each ox weighs one shekel” palza-ah-ha-ašÚmaÚšmaš kattan 1-aš nÚatÚšan 2 GUD pal-za-ah-hi arandari nammaÚyaÚššan 2 GUD palza-ah-hi arandari (§) pal-za-ah-ha-ašÚma gan~ kūwar UL duqqari “Beneath them there is a single base: two oxen are standing on a base, and two 

(GIŠ)palzah(h)a

further oxen are standing on a base. The weight of the base is of no importance” KBo 4.1 rev. 8-11 (foundation rit., NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 30, Kellerman, Diss. 130, 136 (“socle”), Siegelová, Eisen 115 (“Basis”); nammaÚššan ALAM.ÓI.A kue ŠA GAL DUB.SAR.GIŠ x[ o o] pal-za-hi PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ artari “Further, the statues of the chief of the scribes of the wooden tablets […] which are standing on the pedestal in front of the deities …” KBo 13.165 ii 8-9 (fest. frag., OH/ MS); “The Stormgod of Lihzina in Tiliura: the deity is an animal figure (lit. ‘rhyton’), (in the shape of a) wooden bull, standing on all fours, plated with gold, his head (and) breast plated with silver, one-half cubit in height” GAMÚŠU GIŠpal-za-aš-ha-aš “beneath it there is a (wooden) base” KUB 38.3 i 1-4 (inv., NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 16f. (Text 3), tr. Rost, MIO 8:182 
	that this BIBRU was not a rhyton was noted by Otten apud Tuchelt, IstF 22:50 n. 32 and Güterbock, FsBittel 213; 7 palza-ha-aš AN.BAR ŠÀ 1 gul. “Seven bases of iron, among them one inscribed(?)” KUB 42.11 v 7 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Eisen 117 (“eingeritzt” as tr. of gul~ <šanza>?). 
	materials used — 1' wood: KBo 17.36 ii 5 (OS), KUB 38.2 i 16, iii 6, KUB 51.64:5. 

2' wood plated w. silver: KBo 18.172 obv. 11, KBo 26.147:7, KUB 38.1 i 31, KUB 38.2 i 11, ii 20, KUB 38.21 obv. 6, KUB 44.1 obv. 3, 4. 
3' silver: KUB 38.2 ii 5, 12, iii 1. 
4' iron: KBo 2.1 iv 5, KUB 42.11 v 7, 9, KUB 42.14 i 3, KUB 42.21:7. 
5' lapis lazuli: RS 25.421 obv. 27 (see above in bil. sec.). 
6' copper plated w. gold: KUB 38.38 obv. 14. 
For two statues of deities w. dowels beneath their feet indicating that they originally stood on a pedestal, see Bittel, Die Hethiter 227 figs. 262 (from Bo©azköy), 263 (from Lattaqiya). Note also the relief of a bull standing on a pedestal at Alaca Höyük, ibid. 
p. 186 fig. 209, p. 191 fig. 214. For a representation of a bull originally on a wooden base (though the base is not preserved) and a similar image on a relief, see Yadin, Hazor 84f. The evidence only tells us that the statue stands on the p. Nothing tells us if the Hittite pedestals were made up of several super

86

(GIŠ)palzah(h)a

imposed parts, or if p. was the general and comprehensive term, or which of the specific parts it might be (surbase, dado, base, etc.). If the verb palzahhai- is a denominative verb based on p., the 

p. is flat rather than tall. 

von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1942) 30-32 (“Sockel, Standfläche, Basis”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 166f. (from palza, 
w. suff. -hha- and -šha-); ◊op, Indogermanica minora (1971) 63f. (palt- + -šha-); Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 171f. (Hurr. origin); Starke, KZ 93 (1979) 249 (palt- + -šha-); Siegelová, Eisen (1984) 117. 

Cf. palzahhai- v. 

palzahai-v.; to stretch (a sheep, lamb, kid) out (on a flat surface); NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 [pal]-za-ha-a-iz-z[i] KUB 28.78 iv 1, pal-za-ha[iz]-zi KUB 24.14 iv 9, (12b); pl. 3 pal-za-ha-an-zi KBo 22.222 iii 4. 
[(ta! (text: ša) n)]amma UDU-un arha (dupl. omits arha) ≠pal±-za-ha-a-iz-[zi] (dupl. pal-za-ha≠iz±-zi) [(half-line = seven or eight signs in lacuna of KUB 24.14; length of break in KUB 28.78 indeterminable)] tar~ maizzi “He then (or: again) stretches the sheep out (on the ground?), […] fastens […] (and speaks as follows in Óattic)” KUB 28.78 iv 1 (bil. conj., NH), w. dupl. KUB 24.14 iv 9-10, ed. Laroche, JKF 1 (1951) 175, trans-lit. Friedrich, Kleinasiatische Sprachdenkmäler, 6; a later passage in KUB 24.14 iv 19-21 invokes birds and foxes to devour the exposed sheep; SILA› MÁŠ.TURÚkan ANA dU URUArihhaz[iya …] / nÚaš pal-za-ha-an-zi nÚaš PA_NI DINGIR-LIM ŠALM[U …] / tianzi “[They bring] a lamb and a kid for the Stormgod of Arihhaziya. They stretch them out (on a flat surface) and place them in front of the deity whole (ŠAL~ MU)” KBo 22.222 iii 2-5 (rit. frag., NS). 
Assuming the (GIŠ)palzah(h)a-was the flat top of either a pedestal or altar, perhaps the sacrificial victim was stretched out on the palzaha- (denominative verb palzahai-) before killing. Hence the meaning of palzahai-was “to stretch out flat.” 
Friedrich apud von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1942) 31 n. 4 (“wohl ‘niederstrecken,’’’ and compares Lat. sternere : stratum); Laroche, JKF 1 (1951) 175f. (“aplatir”). 

Cf. GIŠpalzah(h)a-. 
(GIŠ)palzašha-see (GIŠ)palzah(h)a-. 

pangarit 
banapa-adj.; (mng. unkn.; perhaps proper name, for <URU>Banapi URU-ri); NS.† 
(The Stormgod speaks to the bull Šeri:) “I have cursed the god […], I have cursed the god ZA.BA›. BA›” nÚan ba(coll.)-na-pí URU-≠ri± a[(rnunun)] “I have brought him to the b. city. (Who now can do battle any more against me?)” KUB 36.1 rt. col. 4 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), w. dupl. KUB 33.120 iii 28, ed. Meriggi, Athenaeum NS 31:124f., Otten, MGK 5, translit. Myth. 159, tr. Hittite Myths 42 (§19). 

pa-a-ni-y[a?] (mng. unkn.).† 
EGIRÚma NU.SIGﬁ-du […] / ši(-)ha-a-ri pa-ani-y[a? …] / KASKAL GÙB-za RA-IS≥ 12 Š[ÀDIR. …] KBo 22.264 ii 9-11. 
Technical term in an extispicy, probably of Hurrian origin. 
pangariya-v. mid.; to become widespread, common, general; OH/NS.† 
pret. sg. 3 pa-an-ga-ri-ia-at-ta-ti KBo 3.1 ii 31, 33 (OH/ NS), pa-an-ga-ri-ia-ta-ti HFAC 40 obv.? 9 (OH/NS). 
nu šallašÚpat haššannaš ešhar pa-an-ga-ri-ia-atta-ti “And bloodshed became widespread even (-pat) within (lit. ‘of’) the royal family” KBo 3.1 ii 31 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. Chrest. 188f., THeth 11:30f. (“nahm überhand”), cf. Otten, Königshaus 22f.; (The “men of the gods” were saying:) kāšaÚwa URUÓattuši ēšhar pa-an-ga-ri-ia-at-ta-ti “Bloodshed has now become widespread in Óattuša” ibid. ii 33, ed. THeth 11:30f. (“ist zahlreich geworden”); (Someone asks the Sungoddess of the Earth in her temple:) išharÚwa kuit makkišta išhahruÚmaÚwa [kuit(?)] / ≠pa-an-ga±-ri-ia-ta-ti “Why have (cases of) bloodshed become numerous? [Why(?)] has weeping become widespread?” HFAC 40 obv.? 8-9 (rit, OH/NS), cf. makkešš-. 
Laroche, BSL 58 (1963) 63 (“augmenter”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 135; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 351f.; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 348. 
Cf. panku-A, B, pangarit. 
pangarit adv.; in large numbers, in force, en masse; from OH. 
pa-an-ga-ri-it KBo 3.22 obv. (5) (OS), ABoT 60 obv. 23, KUB 14.1 obv. (45) (both MH/MS), KBo 14.6:7 (Murš. II), KUB 19.9 iv (14) (Óatt. III), KUB 23.59 ii? 13 (NS), pa-an
87

qa-ri-it KUB 21.10:12, (28) (Murš. II), KBo 12.38 iii (13) (Šupp. II), KUB 16.59 obv.? 8 (NH). 
a. w. ninink-(cf. ninink-1 a 1' a' and 1 b 1'): [µMad~ du]wattašÚa [KUR-e] hūman [IÙ]BAT namm[aÚa]t IŠTU ÉRIN.MEŠ pa-[an-ga-]ri-it ninik[ta] “[Maddu]watta [se]ized all of [the land,] and then he mobiliz[ed] it en m[as]se (together) with troops” KUB 14.1 obv. 44-45 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 10-13, 114f. (discussion); ÉRIN.MEŠ-itÚma pa-an-ga-ri-it niniktum~ mat “Mobilize yourselves en masse (together with) troops” KUB 26.29 + KUB 31.55 obv. 15 (protocol, MH/NS), cf. StBoT 5:128 (“mit Truppen aber in Menge mobilisiert!”); [m]ān LÚ.KÚR pa-an-ga-ri-it ni-n[i?-…] KUB 
	31.105:18 (treaty, MH/MS). 
	b. w. verbs of motion — 1' w. uwa-: nuÚmu LÚ.KÚR.ÓI.A ŠA KUR Alašiya pa-an-ga-r[i-it z]a[hh]iya uit “The Alašiyan enemy came against me in large numbers for battle” KBo 12.38 iii 12-13 (hist., Šupp. II); LÚ.KÚRÚma pa-an-ga-ri-it uit “The enemy came in force” KUB 21.10:12 (DŠ). 

2' w. iya- “to march”: LÚ.KÚRÚwa pa-an-gari-it išpandaz kuwapi 6 M[E LÚ.KÚR] kuwapiÚma 4 ME LÚ.KÚR ia[ttari] nuÚwaÚkan halkiuš arha warškizzi “The enemy mar[ches] in force by night 
— 60[0] in one place, 400 in another — and cuts down the grain (harvest)” HKM 25:6-10 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. Alp, HBM 164f.; […] pa-an-ga-ri-it iyauwašt[a …] KBo 22.129 obv. 8 (rit.). 
3' w. anda ar- “to enter”: ÉRIN.MEŠ SUTEÚma pa-an-ga-ri-it anda ar[i] “The tribal troops ente[r] in force” KBo 5.6 ii 1 (DŠ frag. 28), ed. Güterbock, JCS 
10:92. 
4' w. zai- “to cross”: kāšaÚkan LÚ.KÚR pa-anga-ri-it 2 AŠRA_ zāi[š] “The enemy has just cross[ed] (our border) in force in two places” HKM 46:3-4 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, HBM 200f. 
c. w. verbs of possessing or seizing — 1' w. har“to hold”: [ÓUR.SAGTiwatašanÚma LÚ.KÚ]R pa-anga-ri-it harta “The [en]emy held [the mountain T.] in force” KBo 14.6 i 6-7 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:80. 
2' w. da- “to take”: [… pa-a]n-ga-ri-it dāš KBo 
	14.18:19 (hist.), ed. JCS 10:119 (“with full force”). 
	d. w. verbs of dying or being defeated — 1' w. BA.ÚŠ (= ak(k)-) “to die”: nu LÚ.KÚR pa-an-ga

panku- A 

ri-it BA.ÚŠ “And the enemy died in great numbers” KBo 5.6 i 27-28 (DŠ frag. 28), ed. JCS 10:91, cf. KUB 
19.11 i 8-9; nu ÉRIN.MEŠ URUGašgaš [… p]a-an-gari-it BA.ÚŠ “And the troops of the Kaškaeans died […] in great numbers” KUB 19.11 iv 39 (DŠ frag. 13), ed. JCS 10:66. 
2' w. maušš-“to fall, be defeated” (cf. maušš-a 2' b'): našmaÚkan ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti pa-an-ga-ri-it mau[š~ zi] “Or there will be a defeat for the army involving great numbers” KBo 8.47 obv. 11 (lunar omen); […] pa-an-ga-ri-it maušzi KUB 34.17 rev. 7 (lunar omen, NS), cf. also KBo 34.111 obv. 6 (lunar omen) and VBoT 70:2 (star omen). Compare zahhiyaÚkan pangawi ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti maušzi “There will be a fall (i.e., defeat) in battle for the entire army” KUB 8.1 iii 6 (OH/NS). 
The Bo©azköy Akkadian calque on pangarit is ina nakbatiÚšu in KBo 5.1 ii 64, iii 3; cf. CAD N/1:181, and Marazzi, WO 15:96-102, who does not mention that the passage reflects Hittite pangarit. 
This word, which is employed exclusively in military contexts, is the instrumental of an otherwise unattested noun *pangar(a/i?)-. 
Götze, Madd. (1928) 114f.; Neu, StBoT 18 (1974) 64; Melchert, Diss. (1977) 164f. (as a “distributive instrumental”); Eichner, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 53 n. 30; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 123f., 128; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 348, 353. 
Cf. pangariya-. 
panku-A adj.; 1. all (of), entire, complete (w. collective or pl.), 2. every (w. sg.), 3. general (w. sg.); from OH. 
sg. com. nom. pa-an-ku-uš KBo 16.25 i 52, KUB 36.109:7, KUB 36.114 ii (or iv) 18 (all MH/MS), KBo 4.4 iv 8 (Murš. II), KUB 5.3 i 47 (NH), KUB 23.55 iv 12. 
acc. pa-a-an-ku-un KUB 19.11 i 6 (Murš. II), pa-an-ku-un KBo 19.142 iii 5 (NH), KUB 45.2 ii 17, 18. 
neut. nom.-acc. pa-an-ku KUB 43.70b:2, KUB 24.8 i 14 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 5.1 i 47, KUB 5.3 i 44, 46 (both NH), KUB 
45.79 obv. 15. gen. pa-an-ga-u-wa-aš KBo 23.108 i 11, KUB 9.34 iv 13, 
KUB 12.58 ii 14 (all NH). dat. pa-an-ga-u-i KBo 19.163 iii 12, 25, 40 (OH/NS), KUB 
30.24 ii 17, KUB 8.1 iii 6 (OH/NS), KBo 14.3 iv 29 (Murš. II). inst. pa-an-ku-it KBo 21.85 iv 33 (OH/MS), KBo 30.119 rev.? 19 (MS), KBo 25.191 rev.? 6. 
abl. [(pa-a)n-ga-u-wa-a]z KBo 25.193 obv.? 10 rest. from KBo 21.6 obv. 7 (NS), pa-an-qa-u-wa-az KBo 12.139:6, pa-an

88

ga-u-wa-za KUB 35.80:10 (MH/MS?), KBo 13.131 iii 9 (MH/ 

NS). 

pl. com. nom. pa-an-ga-u-e-eš KUB 30.36 ii 3 (MH/NS). 

acc. pa-an-qa-u-e-eš KBo 12.38 i 5 (Šupp. II). 

(Sum.) [(en-ti)] = (pronunciation of Sum.) [en-d]i = (Akk.) a-la-ak-tù = KASKAL-aš “road, route”; [(en-ti-ti)] = [en-di-d]i? = al-ka-ka-tù (dupl. al-ka›-a[k-tù]) = pa-an-ku-uš KASKAL-aš “complete/entire(?) route” KBo 1.35 left col. 11-12, w. restorations from KBo 1.37 rt. col. 7-8. 
1. all (of), entire, complete (w. collective or pl.) 
— a. w. collective: nu LÚ.KÚR URUGašga pa-a-anku-un ÉRIN.MEŠ ŠUTI INA [ŠÀ KUR-TI] IKŠUD “He encountered the Kaškaean enemy, all of the tribal troops, in [the midst of the land]” KUB 19.11 i 6-7 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:63; nuÚkan edani pa-anga-u-i L[(Ú.KÚR 1-ankiÚpat anda h)]andaizzi “He joined with that entire enemy (force) at once” KBo 
14.3 iv 29-30 (DŠ), w. dupl. KUB 19.18 i 25, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:76; nuÚkan KUR-e kuit hūman(col.) šarā pā
[n] ešta nÚan ÉRIN.MEŠ pa-an-ku-uš harta “And although the whole land (i.e., the civilian population) had gone up (into the city on the mountain), the entire (enemy) troop held it (i.e., the city of Aripša)” KBo 4.4 iv 7-8 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 134f.; zahhiyaÚkan pa-an-ga-u-i ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti maušzi “There shall be defeat in battle for all the troops” KUB 8.1 iii 6 (lunar omen, OH/NS); cf. Akk. omens w. imaqqut “will fall” cited in CAD sub nakbatu); ÉRIN.MEŠ-az pa-an-ku-u[š …] / handi šarrattari “The entire army […] will be divided in two” KBo 34.122 + KUB 34.14 iii 10-11 (solar omen); nÚašta ŠA LÚ.KÚR ÉRIN.MEŠ. ÓI.A pa-an-ku-uš šipanti “And the entire enemy army makes an offering” KUB 9.1 iii 24-25 (rit., NH); ŠA KARAŠ pa-an-ga-u-wa-aš “Of the entire army (camp)” KBo 23.108 i 11 (oracle question, NH); [p]a-angu-uš-!ša ÉRIN.MEŠ tarnattallaš “And all of the ration-receiving groups (lit. troops)” KBo 25.13 ii 9 (fest., OS), translit. Neu, StBoT 25:40, n. 127 stresses word space before ŠA, therefore not pa-an-gu-uš-ša; but in StBoT 
26:136 (pangušš-a?) he opens the possibility again; [kinu]na kāša ANA DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL ištarna [… LU~ GA]L-uizni lamnir nuÚza ŠEŠ.MEŠÚŠU NIN.ÓI. AÚŠ[U pa-]an-ku-uš-ša LÚ.MEŠ URUÓatti šekkandu “Just [no]w they named […] for [kin]gship (from) among the princes. Let his brothers, his sisters, and all the men of Óattuša, recognize him” KUB 36.109:57 (protocol, MH/MS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:190f., cf. Küm

panku- A 3 
mel, StBoT 3:28; pa-an-ku-uš-ša LÚ.KÚR “And all of the enemy” KUB 23.55 iv 12 (hist.); pa-an-ku-uš URUÓattušaš “all Óattuša” KBo 16.25 i 52 (protocol, MH/ MS); pa-an-ku-uš URUÓa-a[t-tu-ša-aš] KUB 36.114 ii 18 (protocol, MH/MS); URU-rian pa-an-ku-un “The entire city” KBo 34.110 obv. 7 (lunar omen), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 271f.; pa-an-ku-un GEŠTIN-an šipand[an~ zi] “They lib[ate] all of the wine” KUB 45.2 ii 17 (rit.); KÙ.BABBARÚmaÚšši KÙ.GI-aš N[A›ZA.G]‰N-aš K[ISL]AÓ-aš pa-an-ku hū¢
igatar ma[n] hahhariyan “His […] of silver, gold, and lapis was raked up like the entire chaff of a th[reshing flo]or” KUB 24.8 i 1314 (Appu, pre-NH/NS), ed. StBoT 14:4f. (differently). 
b. w. pl.: SIGﬁ-uwa dapida [TA KÙ.BABBAR] KÙ.GI URUDU pa-an-qa-u-e-eš-ša NAM.RA.MEŠ [udahh]un “All of the goods [together with silver,] gold, copper, and all of the civilian captives I [brou]ght home” KBo 12.38 i 4-6 (hist., Šupp. II), ed. Güterbock, JNES 26:75, 77 □ NAM.RA.MEŠ usually = collective sg. arnuwala-and takes sg. agreement; ÓUR.SAG. MEŠ GAL-TIM pa-an-ga-u-e-eš TUR.MEŠ-TIM hāriyaš nakk®yaš kuit uwanun “All you mountains, high and low, why have I come to the rugged valleys?” KUB 30.36 ii 3-4 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Laroche, RHA XI/ 53:63; [pa-an-g]a-u-wa-aš MÁŠ.ÓI.A-aš KURyaššÚa LÚ.[ME(Šlulahiyaš LÚ.MEŠh)]apiriyaš EME-an KI.MIN “Ditto(= ‘may he/it remove’) the tongue of [a]ll of the families, and of the land, of the mountain-dwellers (and) of the hapirū” Bo 3436 (ZA 68:157) + IBoT 3.102 i 14-15 (rit., NS), translit. Hutter, Behexung 50, w. dupl. KUB 9.34 i 34 (NS), ed. Hutter, Behexung 28f., translit. Kammenhuber, Or NS 54:92. 
2. every (w. sg.): DINGIR.MEŠ[(-aš karpiš pa-a)n-ga-u-wa-a]z KASKAL-az EGIR-pa neya “The anger of the gods will turn back from e[ver]y path!” KBo 25.193 obv. 9-10 (rit., OH/NS), w. restorations from KBo 
21.6 obv. 7; ÓUL-uaz pa-an-qa-u-wa-az EME-azza “from every evil tongue” KBo 12.139:6 (rit.), cf. KUB 
35.80:10 (MH?/MS?), KBo 13.131 iii 9 (MH/NS); nu 5 NINDA.SIG 7 NINDA.GUR›.RA.ÓI.A pa-an-ku-un NINDA-[an paršiya] “[And he breaks] every loa[f] 
— five thin loaves (and) seven thick loaves” KBo 

19.142 iii 5 (fest.). 
3. general (w. sg.): URUKÙ.BABBAR-zaÚnašÚ kan GAM pa-an-ku-uš markišdauwaš ÚŠ-aš UL watkunuzzi “And a general sudden death will not 
89

make us flee down out of Óattuša” KUB 5.3 i 47-48 (oracle question, NH), cf. ibid. i 44, KUB 5.1 i 47, ed. THeth 4:40f., and KUB 45.79 obv. 15. 
Götze, AM (1933) 239f.; Sommer, HAB (1938) 29f., 183-186, 209-211; Götze Kl. (1957) 87f.; Hahn, JAOS 85 (1965) 300; Beckman, JAOS 102 (1982) 435-442; Mora, StMed 4 (1983) 159-184; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 124-126. 
Cf. panku-B n., NINDApanku-C, pangariya-, pangarit, pankuešš-; humant-, dapiya-. 
pa(n)ku-B n. com.; 1. multitude, the people, the masses, 2. (worshipping) assembly, congregation, 
3. the totality of the king’s retinue as an advisory and admonitory body, 4. (name of a symbol in KIN oracles), 5. (d.-l. used adverbially) “in totality(?)”; from OH. 
sg. nom. pa-an-ku-uš KBo 3.1 ii 28, 47, 72 (OH/NS), KUB 
23.76 iv 8, KUB 24.3 + 544/u iii 43, KUB 22.25 obv. 22 (NH), KUB 42.100 iii 37 (NS), KUB 22.43 obv. 4, KUB 7.58 i 16, KUB 39.40 ii 14, pa-an-ku-ú-š(a) KUB 35.136 iv 9, pa-an-ku-š(a) KBo 13.119 iv (9), 10, (12) (MS?), KUB 35.139 i 11, iv 4, KUB 35.136 iv 5, KUB 25.38 obv.? (2), 5, pa-an-ku<-uš> ibid. obv.? 8, [p]a-an-gu-uš KBo 25.13 ii 9 (OS), pa. KUB 5.1 i 10, 36, 42, 100 (NH). 
acc. pa-an-ku-un KUB 1.16 iii 61 (OH/NS), KBo 15.37 v 46 (MH/NS), HT 39 rev. left col. 4, pa-an. KUB 5.1 ii 69 (?). 
gen. pa-an-ga-u-wa-aš KBo 20.73 iv 15 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 12.91 iv 7, KUB 30.35 i 2, KUB 30.34 iv 17 (all MH/NS), KUB 9.34 i 30, iv 8, 13 (NS), KUB 18.29 i 7, 11 (NH), KUB 
7.53 iii 7 (NH), pa-an-ga-wa-aš KBo 10.45 iv 3, KUB 7.41 iv 3 (both MH/NS), pa-an-qa-wa-aš KUB 30.33 i 11 (MH/NS), pa-an-qa-u-wa-aš ibid. i 18, pa-an-ga-u-aš KBo 9.125 iv 7, pa-ga-u-wa-aš KUB 24.13 iii 23, KUB 30.33 iv 9, ≠pa±-ga-wa-aš KUB 
52.60 iii 13 (NH), pa-an-ga-u-wa<-aš> KBo 13.131 iii 3, KBo 
10.45 ii 51 (both MH/NS), pa-an-«ku-»ga-u-wa-aš KUB 41.8 iv 3 (MH/NS). 
dat. pa-an-ga-u-i KBo 21.93 i 2 (OH/MS), KUB 1.16 iii 62 (OH/NS), KBo 19.161 i 8, 13, 19, etc., KUB 31.42 ii 22 (MH/ NS), KUB 5.3 i 33, 49 (NH), pa-an-ga-u-e KUB 25.36 ii 10, 14, pa-an-ga-u-wiﬁ KBo 2.2 i 11 (NH), pa-an-qa-u-i KBo 24.134 rev. 21, KUB 5.4 i 9, 21, 25 (NH), KUB 6.3:11 (NH), pa-ga-u-i KUB 52.66:14 (NH), KUB 50.42 rt. col. (8), pa.-u-i KUB 50.79 obv.? 5, pa.-i KUB 5.1 i 33, 103, pa. KUB 5.1 iv 27 (all NH). 
abl. [abbr. pa.-za KUB 5.1 i 10, etc., is nom. pa. + particle -za]. 
(Akk.) [u? na-]ak-bá-tam lu t[aštanal u lišā
nu ina kut]alli ana na-ak-bá-a-ti [lu turrat] = (Hitt.) nuÚza pa-an-ku-un EGIR-pa punuški nu EME-[aššÚa] EGIR-pa pa-an-ga-u-i-pát wahanza ēšdu “Always consult the advisory body, and let [even] the ‘tongue’ (evil speech as opposed to overt action [HAB 186]) be turned back to that same advisory body. (But you should do 

panku- B 2 

what you have decided in your own mind)” KUB 1.16 iii/iv 6162 (edict, OH/NS), ed. HAB 16f. (“Adelsgemeinschaft”), 184; cf. Marazzi, WO 15:96-102, Mora, StMed 4:159-184; Sommer restored the word also in KUB 1.16 ii 1 (HAB 29f.) on the basis of the Akk. a-na ÉRIN.MEŠ na-ak-bá-ti KUB 1.16 i 1. 
1. multitude, the people, the masses — a. general: anzidaza t®er DINGIR.MEŠ anzidazza memir LUGAL.MEŠ anzitaz nuntarnut pa-an-ku-uš DUMU.NITA.MEŠ-uš anzel ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti p®er DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ-natar walkiyauwar “The gods have sided with us; kings have spoken on our behalf; the multitude has hastened to our side; the gods have given young men for our troops, (as well as) manhood (and) walkiyawar” KUB 7.58 i 13-17 (rit.), ed. Friedrich, ArOr 6:370, Melchert, Diss. 312f.; cf. Kammenhuber, MIO 2:55. 
b. in the phrase pangawaš lala-: kē
daniÚyaÚkan ANA EN.SISKUR idalu papratar alwazatar(sic) ā
štayaratar DINGIR.MEŠ-aš karpin NÂŠ DINGIRLIM pa-an-ga-u-wa-aš EME-an maninkūwandan MU-an arha QA_TAMMA huittiya “(The Old Woman says:) ‘Draw away likewise from this sacrificer evil, uncleanness, sorcery, sin, the anger of the gods, the oath of the gods, the slander of the multitude, (and) the short year(s of life)’” KUB 7.53 iii 58 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 18f. iii 39-42; cf. also Kammenhuber, Or NS 54:85-87; for further exx. see lala-4 b 2'-3'. The Luwian equivalent seems to be mayaššiš EME (Laroche, DLL 65 s.v., Kammenhuber, Or NS 54:86). Cf. also the similar IBoT 
3.102 + Bo 3436 cited in panku- A 1 b, above, where pankuserves as an attributive adj., modifying MÁŠ.ÓI.A “families.” 
2. (worshipping) assembly, congregation: nuÚ kan LÚ.MEŠ URUTuhumiyara anda uwanzi nu 3 LÚ.MEŠ daškupānzi pa-an-ku-uš-ša kiššan S‰R-RU “Then the men of T. enter: Three men wail, and the congregation sings thus” KUB 12.8 iii 1-4 (fest., OH/ NS); pa-an-ku-ša-aš-ma-[aš katt]an kiššan S‰R-RU “The congregation sings with them thus” KUB 25.38:5-6 (fest.), cf. also KUB 55.38 iii 16; [U]MMA LÚ. MEŠ É DINGIR-LIM annalazaÚwaÚkan DINGIRLUM É.ŠÀ-ni [EG]IR-an ē
šta nuÚwarÚan pa-an-kuuš UL ušgit [k]inunÚmaÚašÚkan GIŠištana[ni] GUBri “Thus spoke the temple personnel: ‘Formerly the (image of) the deity was back in the inner chamber, so that the congregation could not see it, but now it stands on the alt[ar] (where it can be seen 

90

by the congregation)’” KUB 42.100 iii 36-38 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. del Monte, OA 17:184, 187; nu pa-an-ku-uš kuiūš memiyanuš [memišta(?)] DINGIR.MEŠ apušÚpat memianuš išta[mašandu?] “And the words that the congregation [has spoken,] let the gods he[ar] just those words” KUB 23.76 iv 8-9 (instr.); [paa]n-ku-ša halzā
i miyauwa miyauwa “And the [con]gregation cries ‘miyauwa miyauwa!’” KBo 13.119 iv 12 (rit., MS?), cf. ibid. iv 10; pa-an-ku-uš-ša wiškiuw[an dā(i)] “The congregation begins to wail” KUB 39.40 ii 14 (funerary rit.), w. dupl. KUB 30.24 ii 34; [pa-an-g]au-i! akuwanna pianzi “[The con]gregation is given something to eat” VBoT 32 i 11 (fest.); EGIR-ŠU-ma LUGAL-un pa-an-ku-un-na ≠iš±kanzi “But thereafter they anoint the king and the congregation” KBo 
15.37 v 46-47 (fest., MH/NS); LÚ GIŠBANŠUR NINDA. GUR›.RA šer ē
pzi [nÚa](n)Úššan EGIR-pa GIŠBAN~ ŠUR dā
i pa-an-ga-u-i kišr® pianzi “The waiter holds up the thick bread and places it (on) the table. They give (a piece) to (each member of) the congregation in his hand” KBo 19.161 i 21-22 (fest., OH/NS). 
	3. the totality of the king’s retinue as an advisory and admonitory body: see ex. in bil. sec.; nu µTanu~ wan µTahurwailin µTaruh[šunnÚa] uwater nÚuš pa-an-ku-uš parā hingani harta “Then they brought Tanuwa, Tahurwaili, [and] Taruhšu (up on charges), and the advisory body held them for death” KBo 3.1 ii 27-28 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:30f.; nam~ ma kuišÚa LUGAL-uš kišari nu ŠEŠ-aš NIN-aš idalu šanhzi šumeššÚa pa-an-ku-uš-ši-<iš> nuÚšši karši tetten k®Úwa ēšnaš uttar tuppiaz au “And furthermore, whoever should become king and seek evil against (his) brother (or) sister — you are his advisory body! Say to him frankly/truthfully: ‘See from the tablet this record of bloodshed’” ibid. ii 4648; [(mā
	n namma idalu ku)]iški iyazi … [(manÚaš EGIR-iz)zi(š) man¢Úaš (hante)]zzi<š> šumaššÚa<n> pa-an-ku-uš anda [(ē)p(ten nuÚšmašÚan UZUZU·it)] karipten “Further, if someone (of the court bureaucracy) does evil, … If he is of low status, (or) [if he is] of high status, you, as an advisory body must sei[ze] (him) and devour him with your teeth” ibid. ii 70-73, w. dupls. KUB 11.2 + IBoT 3.84:8-11, KBo 12.4 iii 2-6. 
2	(a symbol in KIN oracles, NH) — a. as agent symbol: pa-an-ku-uš-za ZAG-tar innarawatarrÚa 

panku- B 5 
dāš nÚat LUGAL-i SUM-an “The ‘p.’ took ‘right’ and ’strength,’ and they were given to the ‘king’” KUB 22.25 obv. 22-23; pa-an-ku-uš-za GÙB-tar GIG. GALÚya ME-aš nuÚkan DINGIR-LIM-ni dapī ZIni “The ‘p.’ took ‘left’ and the ‘great sickness’ and (gave them to) the ‘god’ (and) ‘the entire soul’” KUB 5.3 ii 43-44; 2 pa-za GÙB-tar GIŠTUKULÚya ME-aš nÚaš ANA LUGAL GÙB-za GAR-ri “Secondly: the ‘p.’ took ‘left’ and ‘the weapon,’ and it is placed to the left of the ‘king’” KUB 5.1 i 10. 
	b. as receiving symbol: DINGIR.MAÓ GUB-iš IZI šalliÚya waštul ME-aš nÚat pa-an-qa-u-i paiš “The ‘Mother-goddess’ arose, took ‘fire’ and ‘the great sin,’ and gave them to the ‘p.’” KBo 24.134 rev. 21; DINGIR-LUMÚza dapian ZI-an parnašša SIGﬁ ME-aš nÚat pa-an-ga-u-i paiš “The ‘god’ took ‘the entire soul’ and ‘the well-being of the house’ and gave them to the ‘p.’” KBo 24.126 rev. 15-16; DINGIR.MEŠ GUB-ir ADAMMA ME-aš pa-i SUM “The ‘gods’ arose, took! the ‘blood,’ and gave it to the ‘p.’” KUB 6.7 iii 17. 
	c. as symbol acted upon: pa-an in LUGA[Lu]šÚzaÚkan pa-an parhuwar KASKAL IZI URUKÙ. BABBAR GIŠTUKUL URUKÙ.≠BABBAR±Ú[y]a MEaš KUB 5.1 ii 69 is probably not an abbreviation for a noun pankun, i.e., a token acted upon, nor for an adj. panku modifying the following neuter noun, nor for a genitive pangauwaš modifying the following noun. Rather it is probably an abbreviation for pariyan since pa-an waštul, later in the same text (iii 34-35), is certainly an abbreviation for pariyan waštul. See pariyan 6 a-b. 
	d. in the genitive: GIG.GALÚza pa-an-ga-u-waaš GÙB-tar x[… ME-aš] “‘The great sickness’ [took] the ‘leftness of the p.’” […] KUB 18.26 ii 6; cf. dDAG GUB-iš ≠pa±-ga-wa-aš GÙB-ta[r …] KUB 

52.60 ii 13. 
5. (d.-l. used adverbially) “in totality(?)”: [(nammaÚkan BE_L)]U_ 
MEŠÚNI pa-an-ga-u-e (dupl. pa-an-qa-[…]) QADU DAM.MEŠÚŠU[NU (DU~ MU.MEŠÚŠUNU DUMU.DUMU.MEŠÚ)]ŠUNU <(UL)> ā
ššiyanušgaweni “(If) then we, in totality(?), with our wives, children, and grandchildren do not always make our lords beloved, …” KUB 
31.42 ii 22-23 (protocol for LÚ.MEŠDUGUD, MH/NS), w. dupl. 
91

KUB 31.44 ii 20-21 (NS), ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:227, 230 (“insgesamt”), HW2 1:404 (“insgesamt”), Puhvel, HED 1
2:196 (“collectively”). 
The inflection displayed by panku- even in its nominal use — e.g., pa-an-ga-u-wa-aš in KUB 9.34 i 30 — suggests that the noun arose through the ellipsis of an adjectival phrase such as pankuš tuzziš or pankuš URUÓattušaš. In practice it is often difficult to determine whether a given form is an adjective or a noun. The basic sense of the noun is “all those present (on a given occasion) or involved (in a given situation).” 
KUB 14.13 + KUB 23.124 i 49 (Murš. II) must be read pa-a[nd]a-la-az. 
Götze, AM (1933) 239f.; idem, Kl. (1957) 87f.; Sommer, HAB (1938) 29f., 183-186, 209, 211; Hahn, JAOS 85 (1965) 300; Beckman, JAOS 102 (1982) 435-442; Mora, StMed 4 (1983) 159-184; Marazzi, WO 15 (1984) 96-102; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 126-130; Bryce, BiOr 43 (1986) 749. 
Cf. panku A adj.; tuliya-, PUÓRU. 
NINDApanku-C n. neut.; (a type of baked good); NS.† 
1 NINDApa-an-ku KUB 42.85:10 (cult inv., NH), KUB 
47.71 i 7 (fest., NS). 
From the adjective panku-, q.v. 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 175. 
Cf. panku-A adj. 
pankuešš-v.; to become plentiful(?).† 
nuÚkan ŠÀ KUR-TI ANA dU NINDA.GUR›.RA pa-an-ku-e-eš-zi “And the (sacrificial) bread will become plentiful(?) for the Stormgod in the land” KBo 11.1 rev. 22 (prayer, Muw.), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:110, 119; the alternative interpretation — ¢
panku ešzi encounters difficulty w. the lack of word division in the copy and the known gender of NINDA.GUR›.RA (common, not neuter; cf. nÚan KUB 30.19 iv 25 [HTR 46f.], KUB 6.45 + KUB 
30.14 iii 64-66; pl. resumed by nÚaš KUB 6.45 iv 23-24, 28-29; modified in acc. sg. by anda daminkantān KBo 15.34 ii 30 [cf. AlHeth 201]). 
Cf. panku- A. 

pankur 1 c 

pankur n. neut.; 1. animal body part, 2. group of related animals or persons, 3. (a designation in KIN oracles); from OH/MS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pa-an-kur KUB 36.107:5 (OS, StBoT 34), KUB 31.103 l.e. 6 (MH/MS), KBo 6.34 iii 10 (MH/NS), KUB 
24.14 i 5 (NH), pa-an-gur KBo 3.27 obv. (15) (OH/NS), KBo 
21.10 i 5 (MH/NS), KUB 6.3:13, 17 (NS), pa-an-ku-ur KUB 
1.16 ii 46 (OH/NS), pa-a-an-gur! HT 55 + 910/v (ZA 72:148) rt. col. 4 (read pa-a-an-kán? by Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:148; our reading -gur! suggested by Eichner, Die Sprache 29:199 # 93, who compares KUB 7.55 obv. 6). 
gen. pa-an-ku-na-aš KUB 13.20 i 33 (MH/NS), KUB 16.77 iii 18 (NH), pa-an-ku(-)na-aš KUB 60.146 obv. 7. inst. pa-an-ku-ni-it KUB 40.13 obv.! 9 (MH), KUB 7.55 obv. 6. 
1. animal body part — a. as a body part: GUDušÚmaÚwaÚššiÚkan aw[an arha paizzi nuÚwaÚššiÚ šta(?) …] pa-an-kur huittiyazi “An ox [passes] t[hrough it (i.e., a thorny bush/tree) and …] it tugs at [its (i.e., the ox’s)] p.” KBo 21.10 i 4-5 (rit.), ed. StBoT 22:14f. (“Euter(?)”); the restorations are based upon similar passages about the hawthorn (GIŠhatalkišna-) in the incantations for Telipinu and DINGIR.MAÓ: KUB 17.10 iv 1-2, translit. Myth. 36, and KUB 33.54 + KUB 33.47 ii 14-17, trans-lit. Myth. 79. 
b. as a material in rit.: nu tuhhuē
ššar ŠA UZﬂ pa-an-kur NA›IM.BABBAR … § nu k® hūman ANA Z´D.DA ŠE išni menahhanda immiyami “(And I take) incense, the p. of a nanny goat, gypsum (and other materials), and all this I mix together with the barley meal dough” KUB 24.14 i 5, 9-10 (NH), cf. Güterbock, RHA XXII/74:102; ŠA MÁŠ.GAL MÁŠ(?) ‰.UDU pa-an-kur zamankur UN-aš šehu[r …] / [G]A. KIN.AGÚpat NA›ZÚ nu k® dapian šaminuzi “The MÁŠ(?) of a male goat, sheep fat, p., beard(-hair), human urine, […], [c]heese, flint(?)/obsidian(?) — all this he removes” KBo 21.20 i 25-26 (NH), ed. Burde, StBoT 19:44f. (“Milch?”), Polvani, Minerali 142 (“di una pecora il latte”). 
c. uncertain: (The sacrificer says: “I will sprinkle the hide of a lion; I will sprinkle the hide of a … and …” He gave the hide to me, a mortal, for sprinkling) UZﬂ-šÚaÚmu pa-an-kur pezzauwanzi paiš kinuna EN.SISKU[R KUŠ] papparšūwanzi pa-an-kurÚma (written over an erasure) pē
zzauwanzi da-x[…] … UZﬂ-aššan pa-an-k[u?-…] “he gave me the p. of a nanny goat for pezza-ing. Now the client 

92

to[ok(?) the hide(?)] for sprinkling, and the p. for pezza-ing. […] the p. of a nanny goat […]” KBo 21.12:21-24 (rit., NS), translit. StBoT 30:375, cf. StBoT 31:606, see also CHD pezza-; ŠA ŠAÓ pa-an-ku-ni-it “with the 
p. of a pig” KUB 7.55 obv. 6 (rit.); ANA GU›.MAH pa-an-kur “a p. to/for the bull” KBo 12.121:7 (rit.); UDU. ÓI.A-aš pa-an-kur “p. of sheep” KBo 20.92 iv! 15 (rit., MH/NS). 
The once attractive interpretation of pankur as “milk” (Güterbock, RHA XXII/74:102f.) is now rendered uncertain by the passage quoted under a, above, where pankur apparently denotes an external body part which may be snagged by a thorn. Note also that pankur appears in entirely different contexts than the Sumerogram GA, “milk,” and is never said to be “sweet” (cf. GA.KU‡) or “thickened” (cf. GA.KALAG.GA), or of any particular volume measure (cf. Hoffner, RLA s.v. “Milch”). There are no passages unambiguously mentioning male animals possessing a pankur, but it is not clear whether the possession of this body part is restricted to females. Since, however, all animals known to have had a pankur are mammals — oxen, goats, and pigs — pankur may be the word for the udder (so Oettinger, StBoT 22:14f., 51), the teats, or some other external portion of the mammaries which might be removed and employed in magico-medical concoctions. 
2. a group of related animals or persons (perhaps “clan”) — a. in metaphor: [šu]minzanÚa ‰R. MEŠ-a(n)Úmman UR.BAR.RA-aš mā
n pa-an-g[urša-me-et] 1-EN ēštu “May the p. of [y]ou, my servants, be unified like (the pankur = pack?) of a wolf” KBo 3.27 obv. 15-16 (edict, OH/NS), cf. Collins, Diss. 87; also [šumenzana] wētnaš mān pa-an-ku-ur-šeme-[et 1-EN] ē
šdu “May [your(?)] p. be [united] like that of the wetna-animal” KUB 1.16 ii 46 (edict, OH/NS); cf. Collins, Diss. 280 (“clan”; wetna-= “hyena??”) □ the restoration [… hu]-ú-e-et-na-aš ma-a-an proposed by Laroche (RA 62:88) and advocated by Archi (FsCarratelli 27 
n. 17) is improbable. In the lacuna there would be no room for Sommer’s šu-me-en-za-na. If one were to restore [o-o hu-]ú-eet-na-aš, what would the first two signs be? Secondly, the regular spelling of huitar is hu-u-i/e-not *hu-ú-i/e-. And thirdly, not all animal types which are included in huitar form groups; some are more or less solitary, making “like (that of) the (wild) animals” an unsuitable comparison. The parallel UR.BAR.RA

pankur 
aš in KBo 3.27 obv. 15-16 shows the kind of animal specificity and appropriateness which is required. 
b. kinship term: (Officials shall judge legal cases fairly) nÚatÚzaÚkan apē
l ŠA ÉÚŠU ŠA ŠEŠÚŠU NINÚŠU haššannaÚšši pa-an-ku-na-aš-ši LÚkaenti LÚareÚšši ŠA NINDA KAŠ mā
niyahhiyatti le kuiški iyazi “And no one shall act upon them (sc. the legal cases) out of consideration for his own household, for that of his brother (or) his sister, for his relatives by birth, his p., (his) relative, his friend, (or) an allotment of bread and beer” KUB 13.20 i 3234 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:392-395; (Whoever among the military leaders should commit evil against the king or queen, may the oath gods seize him) nÚanÚkan DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU QADU DA[MÚ ŠU DUMU.NI]TAÚ[ŠU] pa-an-ku-na-aš uwadanzi [nÚat(?)] ešhanaz šarnikzel “They will bring him, (namely a member of) his p., a mortal together with [his] wife and [his] son, [and there] (will be) compensation with respect to (lit. from) the bloodshed” KUB 16.77 iii 18-19 (oracle question, NH); [DUM]U?.MEŠÚŠU pa-an-kur hašš[atar?] KBo 19.42 rev.? 16 (treaty); pa-an-kur Labar[naš?] KBo 13.49 rt. col. 9 (incant.). Although the metaphor adduced under a shows that pankur indicates a relation of kinship, the variable position taken by the word among the terms of relationship quoted under b allows no conclusion as to the degree of closeness of this relationship. 
c. uncertain: pa-an-gur-za! parianda šianna GIM-an taparti “As you command the pressing(?) beyond of the p.” KUB 6.3:13-14 (oracle question, NH), cf. Güterbock, RHA XXII/74:102; mahhanÚmaÚšmašÚkan pa-an-kur [… nÚušÚk]an ašnuwanzi KUB 29.40 iv 10 (hipp., MH), ed. Hipp.heth. 186f., cf. mahhanÚmaÚatÚkan pa-an-[…] KUB 29.50 iv 19 (hipp.), ed. Hipp.heth. 212f. 
3. (a designation in KIN oracles): INA UD.2. KAM LUGAL-ušÚza ZAG-tar TI-tar pa-an-gur-ra ME-aš “On the second day: the ‘king’ took for himself ‘right,’ ‘life,’ and ‘p.’” KUB 6.3:16-17 (NH). 
Despite uncertainty as to the meaning of pankur 1, Güterbock’s suggestion is still viable that the mng. “clan, (wolf) pack” (here mng. 2) derives from the fact of those sharing a common pankur. 
93

Therefore, homophony w. panku-, q.v., is probably accidental. 
Götze, ArOr 2 (1930) 161 w. n. 1; Sommer, HAB (1938) 76 w. 
n. 3; Güterbock, RHA XXII/74 (1964) 102f.; Burde, StBoT 19 (1974) 44f.; Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 39, 51; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 606. 
GIŠpandahittit n.; (mng. unkn.).† 
sg. inst. GIŠpa-an-da-hi-it-ti-it 1328/z:9 (Ertem, Flora 137). 
INBIÓI.A huelpi GIŠÓAŠÓUR […] / GIŠŠENNUR GIŠU›.ÓI.IN GIŠGEŠTIN […] / GIŠpa-an-da-hi-it-ti-it hu[mantit(?) …] / šuwanteš GIŠDŠLIM.GAL AD. K[ID TUR/GAL?] “Fresh fruit: apples, […], medlars, unripe dates (Akk. uhinnu), grapes, [small/ large(?)] wicker bowls filled with a[ll kings of] p.” 1328/z:7-10 (rit. frag.), translit. Ertem, Flora 137; GIŠp. can be sg. nom. of a stem pandahittit (rather unlikely), inst. of a stem pandahit-, pandahita-, pandahiti-, or inst. of a stem pandah(a/i)- w. the pronominal suffix -tit “your.” In the former case, GIŠp. would belong to the list of fresh fruits all in the nom. or acc. In the latter it could be understood as a kind of fruit 
w. which the wicker bowls were filled. Our tr. reflects the second option. The broader context seems to distinguish sections for dried(?) fruit (lines 1-6), fresh fruit (lines 7-10), and roasted [seeds(?)] (line 11). Our word occurs in the section of “fresh” (huelpi) fruit. See also the discussion of GIŠmut~ haya-in Otten, ZA 81:118. 
Ertem, Flora (1974) 137; Tischler, HDW (1982) 59 (GIŠpan~ dahiti- “(eine Pflanze)”). 
pantala-n.; moment, point in time; NH. 
abl. pa-an-ta-la-az KUB 33.118 i?/iv? 24, pa-a[n-d]a-[laaz] KUB 14.13 i 49 (Murš. II). 
(From the days my father went on a campaign against Egypt, a plague established itself in the Hittite lands) nu apit pa-a[n-d]a-[la-az] KUR URUÓat~ ti akkiškittāri “and from that time the land of Óatti was (lit. is) dying” KUB 14.13 i 49-50 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Götze, KlF 1:246, Neu, StBoT 5:2, and Lebrun, Hymnes 221, 225; for a reading pa-a[n-d]a-[la-az] instead of pa-a[nku]-uš, see HW2 1:133 and Lebrun, Hymnes 221; “He made me sleep with him” nu apit pa-an-ta-la-az-pát / […] tuhheškiuwan tehhun “and from that very time [I …-ed(?). And after ten months(?)] I began to 

pandani 

gasp(?) (in labor)” KUB 33.118 i/iv? 24-25 (myth, NH), ed. Friedrich, JKF 2 (1952/53) 151f., translit. Myth. 189. Since the lacuna is fairly long, another verb may have intervened. 
Collation of nuÚnnaš a-pí-it-≠za(?)(-)pa-an±-tala-az UL pi[an]zi KUB 40.110 obv. 6-7 (cf. Otten, IM 17:58 and for dating ZA 68:278f.) by Güterbock in 1983 (and subsequent re-collation by H. Klengel in 1993) showed rather a-pí-it-≠ha-at±-ta-la-az. 
p. occurs always in the phrase apit pantalaz “from that time/moment on, from then on,” cf. adv. kitpandalaz “from this time/moment on, from now on.” Unlike kit, which occurs in kitkarza as well, apit is until now attested only preceding pandalaz. Kitpandalaz (OH/NS, MS), always “univerbiert,” is a frozen form of a noun phrase used as an adv. From the exx. to date it would appear that apit pan~ dalaz is some kind of re-analysis in NH, fashioned after kitpandalaz. For grammatical discussions of the demonstratives in -et see Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXIV/79:125126; Jasanoff, MSS 31:126; Melchert, Diss. 259-271, cf. also 289 and 297. 
Friedrich, JCS 1 (1947) 285 (“Zeitpunkt”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 92 (“instant”); Neu, Lok. (1980) 22f. 
Cf. kitpandalaz. 
pandani Hurr. adj.; right; NH.† 
pa-an-ta-ni KUB 27.1 iv 1, KBo 35.168 i 24, pa-an-da-ni KUB 27.6 iv (7), pa-an-ta-an-ni KBo 35.168 i 2, pa-a-ta-ni KUB 
27.1 iv 4, cf. Hurr. spelling waa -an-da-an-ni KUB 27.1 i 45. 
EGIR-ŠU-ma LUGAL-uš GUB-aš dIŠTAR LŠL dNinatta dKulita pa-an-ta-ni ša-ú-ri dIŠTAR-bi 3-ŠU ekuzi “Afterward the king, standing, drinks three times to Šaušga of the Field, Ninatta, Kulita, and the right(-hand) weapon of Šaušga” KUB 27.1 iv 1-2 (fest.), cf. KUB 27.1 iv 3-4; 1 NINDA.SIG waa-an-daan-ni šaurri (dupl. pa-an-ta-ni šaur[i]) dGAŠANwii paršiya “He breaks one thin bread to the right(hand) weapon(?) of the Goddess” KUB 27.1 i 45 (fest.), w. dupl. KBo 35.168 i 24, cf. GLH 219 (“arme de droite de Šauška”). 
Cf. in strictly Hurrian context pa-an-ta-ni KUB 27.6 i 10, pa-an-da-ni KUB 27.1 ii 13, pa-ta-ni KUB 27.1 iii 41. 
Laroche, GLH (1977-79) 293f. s.v. wandi “droit”; Neu, Hurritische (1988) 15 (waa-an-ti-in = ZAG-az). 

94

UZUpanduha-n. com.; bladder(?); from NH/NS.† 
sg. acc. UZUpa-an-tu-ha-an KBo 22.128:3 (NS), 350/z:10 (ZA 67:59), UZUpa-an-du-ha-an KUB 7.1 iii 18 (NH), UZUpa-an-tu-u-ha-aš-ša-an (UZUpantūhan + -šan) KUB 7.1 iii 6 (NH). 
pl. acc. UZUpa-an-du-hu-uš KUB 9.1 iii 20 (pre-NH/NS); loc. UZUpa-an-du-ha-aš KUB 9.1 iii 22. 
(In an incantation listing body parts, roughly from top to bottom) (Below, he was bound with respect to his chest, his lungs) nÚaš UZUN´G.GIG hamikta<t> nÚaš genzu hamikta<t> nÚaš UZUpaan-tu-u-ha-aš-ša-an hamiktat “he was bound with respect to his liver, his genzu (scrotum?), his bladder(?), (his arse, his knee)” KUB 7.1 iii 5-6 (rit., NH), ed. Alp, Anatolia 2:42f. and Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:158f., cf. Sommer, HAB 81; cf. ibid. iii 18; in ibid. iii 25, UZUp. is replaced by UZUú-la-an between UZUgenzu- and UZUarra-; [nu GU]D?.ÓI.A-aš UZUpa-an-du-hu-uš udanzi [n]Úašta kueluwanaš wātar [U]ZUpa-an-du-ha-aš anda lāhu~ anz[i] “They bring [co]ws’ bladders(?) and they pour into the bladders(?) water of kueluwana-containers (with which they have washed out the braziers)” KUB 9.1 iii 20-22 (rit. sim. to soldiers’ oath, pre-NH/ NS), ed. Alp, Anatolia 2:24. 
According to the exx., UZUp. is an internal organ in the lower body cavity, in the region between the genzu and the arse, and it is hollow so that it can be filled w. water. The genzu itself is inflatable, and therefore could be the scrotum: (They kill a pig, hold thin breads under the blood, and place it back before the deity;) ŠAÓÚma ē
ššanzi [n]ÚanÚ kan pittalwan markanzi nÚašta UZUgenzu parianzi “But the pig (i.e., its carcass) they ‘work’ and butcher it ‘plain,’ and inflate(?) its genzu” KUB 43.56 iii 14-15 (rit., MH/NS); cf. parai-A 3. The pantuha-might be a/the “bladder(?).” “Stomach(?)” is also possible, but this is also expressed by šarhuwant- (esp. in Laws § 90). Alp, Anatolia 2:25, opted for “Magen(?)” since he believed gamaršuwant- “faeces(?), bowel movement(?)” meant “bladder” (Harnblase). 
Sayce, RA 24 (1927) 125 (“paunch”); Güterbock apud Friedrich, HW (1952) 157 (“‘Magen(?)’ oder ‘Blase(?)’”); Alp, Anatolia 2 (1957) 24f. (“Magen(?)”); Poetto, KZ 95 (1981) 274 n. 3 (“stomaco,” cf. comment s.v. pantuga). 

panzakitti
pantuga adv.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
UMMA ƒŠehuzzi mān UH‡-ahhandan SIGﬁ-ahmi nÚan pa-an-tu-ga aniyami “Thus says Šehuzzi: When I cure a bewitched (person), I treat him p.” KUB 43.59 + KUB 9.39 i 1-2 (rit., NS); in the following context Šehuzzi takes various kinds of mud and seeds, mixes them together, makes models of mouth and tongues, stuffs them w. soil and clay, waves a basket back and forth over the patient, and pronounces a spell to divert evil eyes. Poetto, KZ 
	95:274 n. 3, treated KUB 43.59 without knowledge of the join to KUB 9.39. His restoration is incorrect, and his suggestion that 
	p. is related to UZUpantuha-unlikely. 

In other rit. introductions of this type the final clause is nÚan kiššan aniyami “I treat him as follows.” p. must therefore, like kiššan, be an adverb. Cf. hatuga “frightfully.” 
(arha) panzahh-v.; to skin(?), flay(?); NH.† 
(They slaughter a lamb and a kid for the Storm-god of Nerik) ŠALMU_TEÚyaÚaš arha pa-an-za-ahha-an-z[i n]Úaš zenuwanzi(sic, for zanuwanzi) “they skin(?)/flay(?) them whole, cook them (and place them before the god)” KUB 38.25 i 14 (rit.), ed. KN 276f. 
panzakitti-n.; spindle whorl; NH.† 
sg. nom. pa-an-za-ki-it-ti-iš KUB 7.1 ii 32 (NH); acc. pa-an-za-ki-it-ti-in KUB 7.1 ii (16). 
≠nÚašta anda± ŠA GI hapušeššar U [(ŠA GIŠTÚG pa-an-za-ki-i)]t-ti-in warpzi “She encloses(?)/ wraps(?) the stem of a reed and a spindle whorl (made) of boxwood” KUB 7.1 ii 15-17 (Wattiti’s rit., NH), 
w. dupl. KBo 22.145 ii 8, ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:149151, Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. 108, StBoT 22:65; cf. also Kellerman, Diss. 48; CHD nata-2; for wooden spindle whorls in Mesopotamia, cf. CAD Q 108 s.v. qaqqadu 4 b 2'; huišašÚ wa pa-an-za-ki-it-ti-iš GIM-an wehatta “Just as the whorl of the spindle turns” KUB 7.1 ii 32-33. 
pa-an-za-ki-id-d[u(-) 259/i:3 (StBoT 5:199 n.15), now KBo 
23.71:3 is to be restored [ši-i]p-pa-an-za-ki-id-d[u]. 
Since Kronasser (EHS 1:238) has referred to the similarity of this word to PNs from Alalakh, it must be stressed that both of the male PNs cited by Kronasser from the index to Wiseman, AT, are misread
95

ings by Wiseman, as the copies in JCS 8:19, 21, 23 show. 
Kronasser, Die Sprache 8 (1962) 111; idem, WZKM 58 (1962) 221; idem, EHS 1 (1966) 238f. (“Teil des Spinnwirtels? oder ‘Spinnwirtel’?”); Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1975) 65 (“Wirtel”); Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. (1977) 108f. (“skein(?),” “roping(?)”); Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 49 (“galet” = “spindlewhorl”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 59 (“Spinnwirtel, Schwungscheibe”). 
panzawartanna adv. (derived from Indic); for five laps; MH.† 
“He drives them (sc. the horses) for half a DANNA and twenty IKU” nÚaš pa-an-za-wa-arta!-an-na : parhanzi < 1/ 2 DANNA> 27 IKU.ÓI.A uwahnuwar(!)Úma (reading -wa«-u»-ar) 5 hal~ ziššanzi “They let them gallop for five laps, (i.e.) half a DANNA and twenty-seven IKUs — they call it ‘five turns’” KBo 3.2 obv.! 58-59 (Kikk. tablet IV, MH/ MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 134f. □ the glossenkeil following p. is a punctuation marker, see Güterbock, Or NS 25:119. On the dating of the Kikkuli text cf. Neu in FsGüterbock2. 
Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. (1961) 294, 297; Imparati, I Hurriti (1966) 50; Mayrhofer, Die Indo-Arier im alten Vorderasien (1966) p. 136 s.v.; Kammenhuber, Die Arier im Vorderen Orient (1968) 204 (from Indic panca-); Gusmani, FsPagliaro 2 (1969) 329 n. 3. 
Cf. aikawartanna, nawartanna, šattawartanna, terawartanna. 
panzikipwa (Hurr.); (mng. unkn.).† 
In a sequence of paragraphs describing the drinking of various aspects of the god Teššub: [EGIR-a]ndaÚma nušū
ni nirni pa-an-zi-k[(i-ip-waa) …] / [o o]x-apa weri dTeššuppin[a GUB-aš ekuzi] / [1 NINDA.SIG] paršiya KI.MIN “Afterwards [he drinks] … [standing]; he breaks [one thin bread]; ditto” KUB 32.84 iv? 20-22 (offerings to Hurr. gods, NH), w. dupl. KUB 34.102 iv 15-17. 
pap(a?)-v. (an action performed on fermented dough and resulting in loaves ready for baking; perhaps “to subdivide or shape”); from OS.† 
pres. pl. 3 pa-a-pa?-an-zi KUB 60.41 obv. 13 (OS). 
inf. pa-a-pu-u-wa-an-zi KUB 17.24 ii 5 (NH?), pa-a-pu-wa-an-z[i] KUB 51.60 obv. 4, KBo 24.28 + KBo 29.70 i (25). 

pap(a?)

“The second day, when it dawns, they take up the dough from the kneading trough(s)” nuÚza pa-a-pu-wa-an-z[(i appanzi)] / [(nu 1 PA.NI)]NDA[(ši)]~ wantannin tarna[(š iya)nzi 1 P(A.Úma)] / [(NINDAar~ m)]a[(t)]allannin IŠTU U[(PNI iy)anzi 1? P(A.Ú ma)] / [(NINDAuwalpa)]imannin … GIŠp(a-a-p)u(-uun-na x) …] “and they begin to shape(?) (the dough). They make one PARISU-measure into ši~ wantanni-loaves of a tarnaš-measure (each), they make another PARISU-measure into armatallanniloaves of an UPNI-measure (each), and they make another PARISU-measure into walpaimanni-loaves [of a … (each)]” KUB 51.60 obv. 4-7 (fest., NH?), w. dupl. KBo 24.28 + KBo 29.70 i 25-28; (On top of [the roof(?)] a song is sung in Luwian) LÚKISAL.LUÓÚmaÚkan É-TIM harnuwizzi mahha[nÚma išnan(?)] / pa-apu-u-wa-an-zi zinnanzi nuÚza ŠA DUGišnu[ri iš~ nan(?)] / GA.KIN.AG LÚ.MEŠNAR LÚ.MEŠ É. DINGIR-LIMÚya danzi “The courtyard sweeper sprinkles the house. [But] when [the …-s] finish shaping(?) [the dough(?)], the singers and the temple personnel take for themselves [the dough(?)] of the kneading trough (and) the cheese (and divide up the uncooked meat)” KUB 17.24 ii 4-6 (fest., NH?), cf. AlHeth. 137; (Someone goes into the arzanahouse) […-]ešta/uhha parā pa-a-pa?-an-zi / […]x. ÓI.A LÚMURIDI / […]x daškir “they shape(?) out [the …], and the food server(s) used to take [the …-]s” KUB 60.41 obv. 13-15 (fest., OS), translit. StBoT 
25:109. Coll. confirms copy; still in view of the failure of pap(a)- elsewhere to take a preverb, one might suggest an emendation kar!-pa-an-zi, a verb attested w. parā. 
In two examples p. is an action performed probably on dough to prepare several distinct loaves of unbaked bread; in the third example it involves the LÚMURÂDI “food server” (Kümmel, UF 1:161f.; CAD muparrit¬u and mur®du). A verb šalk-“to knead” is already known. The action of pap(a)- seems to be a later step, from which loaves of unbaked bread result, which because of their distinctive size and shape can receive different names. Hence, the tentative translation “to shape(?).” 
The verb pāp(a)- seems to be the base from which the two nouns GIŠpāpu- and GIŠpāpul(a/i) derive. The a in the first syllable is long in all but one instance, GIŠpa-pu-u-un, which may show a 

96

compensatory lengthening of the second syllable. For the stem formation, cf. parku-“high” and park-

v. “to elevate.” 

Sommer, KlF 1 (1930) 344 (“das Haus mit Sitzgelegenheiten bzw. Tischen versehen??”); Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 52; eadem, MIO 3 (1955) 365 n. 45 (papuwai-); Otten, StBoT 17 (1973) 53f. (*papuwai-?); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 34 (papuwae-“(mit bestimmten Möbeln) ausstatten”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 59 (papuwai-“mit Tischen ausstatten”); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 136 w. n. 428 (pap-instead of papuwai-); idem, IF 89 (1984) 306; Hoffner apud McMahon, AS 25 (1991) 257 (an action carried out in the bakery on dough), 257 n. 55 (connected w. GIŠpāpu-, GIŠpāpul(a/i)-). 

Cf. GIŠpāpu-, GIŠpāpul(a/i)-. 
pappa[…] (mng. unkn.); NH†. 

nÚanÚkan x[…] / MAÓAR pa-ap-pa[-… parā] / nehhun “So I sent him [out] to meet p.” KBo 18.112:24 (letter, NH), translit. THeth 16:220 (restoring pappa[~ nikni(?)]; MAÓAR is always followed by a logogram or PN. Here, perhaps <µ>Pappa[-…]? 

papan see pappenna. 

pappan(n)egna-n.; brother sharing the same father, paternal brother; wr. syll. and pappa-ŠEŠ; from OH/NS.† 
pl. nom. pa-ap-pa-né-eg-né-eš KUB 29.1 iii 49 (OH/NS), [pa-ap-pa-a]n-né-eg-né-eš VBoT 58 i 37 (OH/NS), pa-ap-pa-ŠE[Š.MEŠ …] KBo 22.178 ii 5. 
(The participants in the ceremonies take their seats in the following order: 1. gods, 2. the lords of the household, i.e., the king, the queen, and the non-reigning wives, 3. the daughters of the household) nuÚzan pa-ap-pa-né-eg-né-eš ešantari “The brothers having the same (royal) father (i.e., the king) take their seats” KUB 29.1 iii 49 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 18, 30, Marazzi, VO 5 158f., Carini, Athenaeum 60:500f., cf. Schwartz, Or NS 16:44 (p. corresponds to DUMU.NITA.MEŠ ibid. iv 2); araš ar[an UL kane]šzi / annaneke[š UL kan]ēššanzi / pa-ap-pa-(!) ŠE[Š.MEŠ UL kan]ēššanzi / annašÚza DUMU-a[nÚšin UL k]anē
šzi / [DUMU-ašÚza A]MA-a[nÚ šin UL k]anešzi “One does [not] [recogni]ze the other. Sisters having the same mother do [not rec]ognize (each other). Brother[s] having the same father do [not re]cognize (each other). A mother does 

paparriy[a(-)] 
[not r]ecognize [her] own child. [A child] does [not r]ecognize [its own] mother” KBo 22.178 ii 3-7 (+) KUB 
48.109 ii 4-8, ed. Hoffner, Sachs Mem. 191f. □ the terms an~ nanegeš and pappa-ŠE[Š.MEŠ] (or perhaps pappa-ŠE[Š-eš]) were chosen in this context to indicate close blood relations; nuÚwa dÓašammiliaš ŠEŠ.MEŠÚŠU / [pa-ap-paa]n-né-eg-né-eš nuÚwa apūš hahhimaš UL IÙBAT “The brothers of Óašammili were (Óahhima’s?) [paternal broth]ers; (therefore) Óahhima did not seize them” VBoT 58 i 36-37 (myth., OH/NS), translit. Myth. 24, tr. Gaster, Thespis 290, De Vries, Diss. 11 (“(mere) lads”), 183 n. 51, Hoffner, Hittite Myths 27 §7. In contrast to Óašammili’s brothers, who are brothers (of Óahhima?) on the paternal side, whom Óahhima has not yet seized, the gods ZA. BA›.BA›, dLAMMA, and Telipinu, unrelated to Óahhima, were already captured by him. The restoration MAÓAR paap-pa[-ni-ik-ni …] / nehhun KBo 18.112:3-4 (letter) by Hagenbuchner, THeth 16:220 (without tr.) is highly improbable in view of the preceding Akkadian preposition MAÓAR and the meaning of p. 
Other terms for sibling relations are negna“brother,” nega-“sister,” annanega-“maternal sister, sister having the same mother as another.” 
Schwartz, Or NS 16 (1947) 44 (“son, son of the house,” Hitt. syll. reading for DUMU.NITA); Gaster, Thespis (1950) 290 (“weaklings(?)”); Kronasser, WZKM 58 (1962) 221; De Vries, Diss. (1965) 11, 183 (“(mere) lads”); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 25 (“junger Bursche”); Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 84 (“i giovani(?)”); Kellerman, Diss. (1980) 30 (“les jeunes garçons”); Marazzi, VO 5 (1982) 166 (“i giovani(?)”); Hoffner, Sachs Mem. (1988) 191f. (brothers by the same father). 
paparriy[a(-)]; to suffer from colic(?), be flatulent(?), NH.† 
(Sum.) [LÚ.ŠÀ.TA.DI.IL] = (Sum. pronunciation) lu-ša-taad-li = (Akk.) em-ru “one suffering from colic” = (Hitt.) papár-ri-i[a(-)…] KBo 1.39 obv. ii 2 (Proto-lú vocab.), ed. MSL 12:216f. The gloss is used in this vocab. consistently as a marker indicating that the word in question had run over its appropriate column, and p. consequently must not be taken as a “glossenkeil word” (i.e., Luwian). Possible restorations for the rest of the line are: pa-pár-ri-i[a-zi ku-iš] or pa-pár-ri-i[a-anza UN-aš]. 
CAD E translates Akk. emru “suffering from colic” and emēru “to have intestinal distress (colic or the like)”; cf. AHw s.v. emru “aufgetrieben” (“bloated”). p. begins in the Akk. col. which means 
97

that it was only the first word in a longer definition. If emru, emē
ru really have something to do w. “flatulence,” then p. may be derived from the same root as parai- “to blow,” and pariparai- “to blow, to be flatulent, fart.” For the spelling w. doubled r cf. pár-ri-ia-an-zi KBo 4.11 obv. 25. 
papparš-v., to sprinkle; from OS. 
pres. sg. 3 pa-ap-pár-ši KBo 23.23 obv. 30 (MH/MS), paap-pa-ar-ši KBo 13.260 ii 40 (NS), pa-ap-pa-ar-aš-zi 2Mašt. iii 20 (MH/MS), pa-ap-pár-aš-zi KUB 15.34 ii 26 (MH/MS), KBo 6.34 iv 4 (MH/NS), KBo 12.122:8, KBo 17.69:12, 18, 20, KUB 15.31 i 17 (MH/LNS), KUB 46.57 i 9, pa-ap-pár-<aš->zi KBo 7.44 rev. 10. 
pl. 3 pa-ap-pa-ar-aš-ša-an-zi KBo 13.164 i 6 (OH/NS), paap-pár-aš-ša-an-zi IBoT 2.113 ii (6), KBo 29.94 i 16, KUB 55.36:(2), KBo 23.1 iv (25) (NH), KBo 30.102 iv? (8), pa-appár!-aš-ša-an-zi KUB 58.60 vi 6, pa-ap-pár-ša-an-zi KUB 7.2 i 22 (NH), KUB 31.113:13, KUB 51.22 i? 12, KUB 54.10 iii 12, KUB 58.60 vi 10, pa-pár-ša-an-zi KUB 15.5 iii 56 (NH), KUB 
53.30 obv. 19. pret. sg. 1 pa-pa-ar-aš-hu-un KUB 17.10 ii 29 (OH/MS). imp. pl. 3 ≠pa±[-ap-pár-(aš-ša-an-du)] KUB 57.36 obv.? 8 
w. dupl. KUB 31.113:21 (NS). inf. pa-ap-pa-ar-šu-u-wa-an-zi KBo 21.12 rev.? 22, pa-ap-pár-šu-u-wa-an-zi ibid. rev.? 20. 
part. sg. nom. com. pa-ap-pár-aš-ša-an-za KUB 33.8 iii 17 (OH/NS); nom.-acc. neut. pa-ap-pár-ša-an KUB 30.32 i 20 (MS?), pa-ap-pa-ar-iš-š[a-an?] HKM 116 ii 25 (OH?/MS); pl. nom.-acc. neut. pa-ap-pár!-aš-ša-an-ta KUB 17.10 ii 29 (OH/ MS). 
iter. pres. sg. 1 pa-ap-pár-aš-ki-mi KBo 21.12 rev.? 20, 19!; sg. 3 pa-ap-pár-aš-ki-iz-zi KBo 17.18 ii 11, KBo 17.43 i 10 (both OS), KUB 12.40 rt. col. 8, KUB 15.34 i 32 (MH/MS), KUB 
41.8 ii 11 (MH/NS), pa-ap-pár-iš-ki-iz-zi KBo 10.45 ii 46 (MH/ NS); pl. 3 pa-ap-pár-aš-kán-zi KBo 5.2 iii 52 (MH/NS), KUB 
10.91 ii 10 (NH?), KUB 51.14 rev. 20, pa-ap-pár-še-eš-kán-zi KUB 36.67 ii 26, pa-ap-pár-ši-iš-kán-zi KUB 12.49 i 17. 
a. objects sprinkled w. (abl. or inst.) a liquid — 1' a path (palša-, KASKAL): kāša IŠTU ‰.DÙG. GA ŠA dTelipinu KASKAL.ÓI.AÚKA pa-pa-ar-ašhu-un nuÚššan dTelipinuš ‰.DÙG.GA-it pa-ap-pár!aš-ša-an-ta KASKAL-ša iyanni “I have herewith sprinkled your paths with fine oil, O Telipinu. So walk, Telipinu, on the path sprinkled with fine oil” KUB 17.10 ii 28-30 (Tel.myth, OH/MS); kāša «‰.DÙG. GA» ŠA dTelipinu KASKAL-aš IŠTU ‰.DÙG.GA pa-ap-pár-aš-ša-an-za ēšdu “Let the path of Telipinu be sprinkled with fine oil” KUB 33.8 iii 16-17 (Tel.myth, OH/NS). 

papparš- a 7' 

2' statues of gods: “When they bring the gods into the forest before the kippa-house, the exorcist circles them with (i.e., holding) the shelduck” witenazÚaš arha pa-ap-pár-aš-zi “and sprinkles them with water” KBo 21.34 ii 29-30 (fest. for Teššub and Óebat, MH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 2:120, 129. 
3' a temple or portico: nuÚkan É DINGIR-LIM p[arā] šanhanzi pa-ap-pár-ša-an-zi “They clean o[ut] the temple (and) sprinkle (it)” KUB 31.113:1213 (instr.); cf. b 1', below, for collocation w. šanh-; nÚašta DINGIR-LAM kuedaš ANA É-TIM ÉhilamniÚkan anda ēššanzi nÚat arunaš w<e>tenit pa-ap-pa-araš-ša-an-zi nammaÚatÚkan šanhanzi “They sprinkle with seawater the house (namely) the portico in which they treat the deity, and then they clean it out” KBo 13.164 i 5-7 (rit., OH/NS); cf. further KBo 22.108 ii 6-9, KBo 23.1 iv 25 (Ammihatna’s rit., NH). 
4' a tent: nÚašta MUNUS ŠU.GI EN.SISKUR kuedaš GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-aš anda aniyat nÚašta šanhanzi pa-ap-pár-ša-an-zi-ia “They clean out and sprinkle the tents in which the Old Woman treated the sacrificer” KUB 27.29 i 16-17 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/ NS). 
5' warm NA›aku-: (The man of the Stormgod takes warm NA›aku-[stones?, seashells?], brings them in with a bowl of oil, and puts them down in front of the king) [n]ÚašÚkan šuppit we[(tenit p)]aap-pár-aš-zi “he sprinkles them with holy water (and recites the following incantation)” Bo 3686 iv? 8-9 (rit.), w. dupls. VBoT 126:1-2, KUB 28.105 ii? 4-5, ed. Otten/Rüster, ZA 64:248. 
6' an animal hide: (The sacrificer says:) KUŠ UR.MAÓÚwa pa-ap-pár-aš-ki«-iz»-mi KUŠ AMÚ wa U x[…] pa-ap-pár-aš-ki-mi pāišÚanÚmu DUMU LÚ.U⁄·.LU KUŠ-an pa-ap-pár-šu-u-wa-an-z[i] “I will sprinkle the lion’s skin; I will sprinkle the aurochs(?) skin and the […]. The mortal gave it (i.e., a hide) to me to sprinkle” KBo 21.12 rev.? 19-20, cf. ibid. 22; cf. CHD pezza-; 2 KUŠ UDU BABBAR pa-ap-párša-an KUB 30.32 i 20 (inv.). 
7' horses: nu ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ wetenit p[a]ap-pár-š[a-an-zi] “They sprinkle the horses with water” KUB 51.14 rev. 16 (rit. or fest. for dPirinkir). 

98

8' liquids used for sprinkling in the above examples: ‰.DÙG.GA “fine oil” KUB 33.8 iii 16-17 (a 1', above), water KBo 21.34 ii 29-30 (a 2', above), KUB 51.14 rev. 16 (a 7', above), seawater KBo 13.164 i 5-7 (a 3', above), šuppi watar “[hol]y water” Bo 3686 iv? 9 w. dupls. (a 5', above). 
b. obj. a liquid sprinkled upon something else — 1' water: [nuÚššan šu]ppi watar pa-ap-pa-ar-iš-š[aan?] “[Ho]ly water is sprinkled upon (it)” HKM 116 ii 25 (rit. in myth, OH/MS), ed. Güterbock, JKF 10:207f.; GIM-anÚmaÚašÚkan ´D-an tap≠uš±a ari nuÚšmašÚ kan wātar šarā pa-ap-pár-aš-kán-zi “But when it (the army?) reaches the side of the river, they sprinkle water over them” KUB 17.28 iv 53-55 (rit., MH/ NS); nuÚššan pahhueni wā
tar pa-ap-pár-aš-zi “Then he sprinkles water onto the embers” KBo 6.34 iv 4 (Soldiers’ Oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:14f.; ZAG-naza wā
tar pa-ap-pár-aš(var.-iš)-ki-iz-zi KUB 41.8 ii 10-11 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 47 (LNS), ed. Otten, ZA 

54:124 ii 47-48; EGIR!-ŠUÚma šehelliy[aš] widā

r paap-pár-ša-an-zi “Next they sprinkle water(s) of purification” KUB 17.8 iii 1-2 (incantation rit., pre-NH/NS); EGIR-ŠUÚma LÚpurapšiš wātar TI°MUŠEN-aš par~ taunaz arha 3-ŠU pa-ap-[pár-aš-zi] “Next the pu~ rapši-man sprinkles water three times from an eagle’s feather” KBo 8.155 ii 8-10; nu LÚpalwattallaš TI°MUŠEN-aš partaunit LUGAL-i menahhanda wā
tar 3-ŠU pa-ap-pár-aš-zi KBo 15.48 v! 5-7 (MH/NS), cf. ibid. v! 26-28 (and passim in hišuwaš fest.); [… š]anhanzi wā
tar pa-ap-pár-ša-an-zi “They clean out […] (and) sprinkle water” KUB 54.10 iii 12 (cult); nuÚššan ANA GAL GIR› [k]uit wātar lāhūwān MUNÚyaÚkan anda išhuwā
n nÚatÚkan É-ri anda pa-[a]p-pár-ašz[i] ANA BE_L S´SKURÚyaÚšš[a]n šarā pa-ap-páraš-zi “(S)he sprinkles on the house and the sacrificer the water poured into the earthenware crock and into which salt has been poured” KUB 35.54 iii 12-16 (rit.); obj. ātar KUB 51.22 i? 11 (rit.); nu

rrumaš wawā

tar I[ŠTU (GIŠGIDRU) …] duwan duwannÚa paap-pár-aš-ki-iz-z[i] “He sprinkles water this way and that with a staff” KUB 12.40 rt. col. 7-8 (rit.), ed. StBoT 3:68f. 
2' fine oil (‰.DÙG.GA): ‰.DÙG.GAÚmaÚšši peran pa-ap-pár-še-eš-kán-zi “They sprinkle fine oil before him” KUB 36.67 ii 26 (Gurparanzah story), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:86f.; nu S´G.SAﬁ-it ‰.DÙG.GA pa-ap

papparš- b 
pár-aš-z[i] “(S)he sprinkles fine oil with red wool” KUB 15.34 ii 26 (evocation rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas and Wilhelm, AOATS 3:192f., tr. ANET 353; “The exorcist takes fine oil” nÚat dUTU-i! menahhanda pa-ap-pár-ašzi “and sprinkles it in the direction of the sun” KUB 
15.31 i 16-17 (evocation rit.), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:150f.; “The patili-priest next takes one kappi-vessel of fine oil” nu ANA dLUGAL-ma IGI-anda 3ŠU pa-ap-pár-aš-z[i] nÚašÚzaÚkan IGI.ÓI.A-wa EGIR-pa neyari nu ANA DINGIR.MEŠ Éšinapšiy[aš IG]I-anda [pa-ap-pár-aš-zi] “and sprinkles (it) three times toward Šarruma. He turns around (lit. turns his eyes back) and [sprinkles] (it) [to]ward the gods [of] the šinapši-house” KBo 17.69:12-14 (rit.); cf. KUB 55.36:9-11; namma LÚSANGA ‰.DÙG.GA ANA dIM menahhanda 3-ŠU attaššÚa DINGIR. MEŠ-aš menahhanda 3-ŠU pa-ap-pár-aš-zi “Then the priest sprinkles fine oil three times toward the Stormgod and three times toward the gods of the father(s)” KBo 21.34 ii 61-62 (MH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 2:121, 130. 
3' harnai-liquid: (An acrobat and prostitutes walk in front, holding lighted torches) harnā
in per~ an pa-ap-pár-aš-kán-zi “(and) they sprinkle harnailiquid in front” KUB 10.91 ii 10 (fest.); wātar har~ nainnÚa pa-ap-pár-ši-iš-kán-z[i] KUB 12.49 i 17 (rit.); cf. KBo 17.93 obv. 6-7. 
4' tawal and walhi drink: [… taw]al walhi papár-ša-an-z[i] KUB 53.30 obv. 19 (rit. frag.). 
5' wine (wiyana-, GEŠTIN): (The practitioner takes a little bit of cedar resin, honey, ‰.GIŠ, and ‰.DÙG.GA) nÚatÚkan ANA DUGGAL GEŠTIN an~ [d]a zappanuzi namma gangatiyaz GEŠTIN šarā DINGIR.MEŠ-aš menahhanda 9-ŠU pa-ap-pár-ašzi (var. has appiškizzi instead of 9-ŠU pa-ap-páraš-zi) “and drips them into a cup of wine, and then with the gangati-plant she sprinkles wine nine times upward toward the gods” KUB 43.58 ii 36-38 (purif. rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.42 ii 25-27 (NS). 
Other liquids sprinkled are expressed in the instrumental case in the exx. cited above under a. Note that in the construction treated under section a instrumentals always indicate the liquid sprinkled, while in those under b the implement(s) used 
99

for the sprinkling (e.g., an eagle’s wing, a staff, a gangati-plant, red wool). 
c. w. no acc., but a locative: nu harnā
wi pa-appár-ša-an-z[i] “They sprinkle at/on the birth stool” KBo 21.45 i 5 (birth rit.), ed. StBoT 29:206f. 
d. Use w. preverbs, adverbs, etc. — 1' anda: cf. KUB 35.54 iii 12-16 (b 1', above). 
2' arha: cf. KBo 21.34 ii 29-30 (a 2', above) and KBo 
8.155 ii 8-10 (b 1', above). 
3' šer arha: [nuÚka]n MUNUS ŠU.GI [AN]A 2 EN.SISKUR wā
tar šer arha [pa-ap-pár-aš-zi n]Úaš parkunuzi KBo 2.3 ii 28-29 (1Mašt., MH/NS), rest. from par. 2Mašt. iii 20-21 (w. šarā p.); ANA UDUÚyaÚkan [(še)]r arha pa-ap-pár-aš-zi HT 5:12-13 (rit.), w. dupl. KUB 39.70 
+ KUB 32.1 ii 1. 
4' menahhanda: nu ANA DINGIR-LIM menah~ handa pa-ap[(pár<-aš>-zi)] KUB 20.35 iii 25 (rit.), w. dupl. KBo 7.44 rev. 10; cf. also b 2', above. 
5' parā: [… (wāta)]r parā pa-ap-pár-aš-z[(i)] “He sprinkles water out […], (and the king washes his hands over the pebbles)” KUB 48.10 ii 4. 
6' peran: cf. KUB 36.67 ii 26 (b 2', above), KUB 10.91 ii 10 (b 3', above). 
7' šarā: cf. KUB 17.28 iv 53-55 (b 1', above), KUB 43.58 ii 36-38 (b 5', above), 2Mašt. iii 20-21 (MH/MS). 
Synonym: zap(pa)nu-“to drip (something).” 
Friedrich, ZA 35 (1924) 188 (“schütten”); Götze, Madd. (1928) 44 (“sprengen”); Ehelolf, KlF 1 (1930) 147 (“sprengen”). 
:papartama Luw. part. or adj.?; (describes the goddess IŠTAR); NH.† 
dIŠTAR-an :pa-pa-ar-ta-ma<-an> aušdu “Let him see IŠTAR/Šaušga paparta-ed” KBo 13.241 rev. 19 + KUB 44.4 rev. 32 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:178f., 198 (“the :papartama Ištar”). The unemended form appears to be that of a Luw. passive part. neut. nom.-acc. pl. (“Let him see IŠTAR (namely her) p.-ed (things)”). However, some parallel constructions in the context show full agreement w. the noun preceding the passive participle, while others like this one appear to require an emended <-an>. See further discussion s.v. (:)palha- and (:)palpadami-. 

UZUpap(p)aššala-

Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 276; Melchert, CLL (1993) 165 (parallels suggest that p. refers to a destructive act). 
:pappaša(i)-v.; to swallow up(?); NH.† 
pres. sg. 3? :pa-ap-pa-ša-i KBo 4.14 iii 37 (NH). 
(Do not rejoice at the king’s misfortunes) “I saw this matter in regard to you during the campaign of Nihiriya” § kāššÚaÚza kuiš memiyaš kišat nuÚkan EN.MEŠ :pašattarmaš arha :pa-ap-pa-ša-i nuÚkan BE-an ANA LUGAL ‰R.MEŠ ZI akkanzi zikÚmaÚ za [LUGAL]-i karšiš ‰R-iš ēš “This is/was the matter that happened. Does pašattarma- swallow up(?) (the) lords? If/When the personal servants (‰R. MEŠ ZI) die for the king, be a loyal servant to [the king]!” KBo 4.14 iii 36-39 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:46, van den Hout, Diss. 294f. (“der Umsturz stürtzte die Generäle”), both of whom read BE-an iii 37 as UGﬂ-an (hinkan) “death.” The king contrasts the loyalty of the servants w. the behavior of the lords who are earlier (ii 56, 74, 79) described as treacherous. 
This would seem to be a reduplicated form of the verb paš- “to swallow.” Kammenhuber’s pašat~ tarÚmaÚaš in the middle of the clause is out of the question, but her suggestion of a figura etymologica is possible. Both words appear to contain paš-. Although the marker wedge probably indicates that this verb is Luw., the ending (in a Hittite context) could still be Hittite. Indeed, unless it is to be translated as an imperative 2 sg. (so Laroche, DLL 80), it does not show a Luwian verbal ending. 
Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 438 n. 93 (pašattarÚmaÚaš … :pappašai as figura etymologica); Alp, Anatolia 2 (1957) 15 (“wegschlucken”); Laroche, DLL (1959) 80 (analyzes the form as imp. sg. 2 based on paša(i)-); Meriggi, WZKM 58 (1962) 87 (“schlucken,” pres. sg. 3); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 94 n. 1 (pappaš- “dresser”); eadem, RHA XXII/75 (1964) 139 (pappaš- “dresser de façon durable, soulever, révolter,” based on Hitt. pašk-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 555 (pres. sg. 3, from :pappaša-(?)); Tischler, HDW (1982) 59 ((:)pappašai- “sich verschlucken”); van den Hout, Diss. (1989) 294f. (“umstürtzte” reflects a belief in some connection w. Hittite arha pippa-); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 311, 497 (from pašš- “schlucken”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 165. 
Cf. paš-, UZUpappaššala-, pašattarma-. 
UZUpap(p)aššala-, UZUpappaššali-n.; throat(?), esophagus(?); NH.† 

100

UZUpap(p)aššala

sg. acc. UZUpa-ap-pa-aš-ša-la-an KUB 7.1 iii 3, 23, KUB 
43.52 iii 16, UZUpa-pa-aš-ša-≠la±-an KUB 43.52 iii 7, UZUpa-appa-aš-ša-li-in KUB 7.1 iii 15 (all NH). 
(In an incantation listing body parts, roughly from top to bottom) “He was bound with respect to his mouth, his tongue, his trachea” nÚaš UZUpa-appa-aš-ša-la-an hamikta kattaÚmaÚaš UZUGAB ha~ mikta “he was bound with respect to the esophagus. Beneath, he was bound with respect to the chest” KUB 7.1 iii 3-4 (rit., NH) (= cumulative 37-38), ed. Alp, Anatolia 2:42f., Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:158f.; the dupl. IBoT 3.107:4 has the same spelling: UZUpa-ap-pa-aš-š[a-…]; cf. KUB 7.1 iii 15, 23 (= cumulative 49, 57). 
UZUp. lies between head and chest, i.e., the neck. Since “windpipe, trachea” is (UZU)huhhurti- (cf. also huhhurtalla- “necklace”), UZUp. could be “esophagus(?).” If so, a connection w. the verb paš- “to swallow,” more specifically w. the reduplicated form pappaša(i)- “to swallow up(?),” is likely. 
Alp, Anatolia 2 (1957) 14f. (“Schluckorgan,” “Speiseröhre”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 94, 128 (“oesophage”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 307, 310-12, 319 n. 1117, 330 n. 1169, 334; Melchert, CLL (1993) 165. 

Cf. paš- v., :pappaša(i)-. 

pappa-ŠE[Š] “paternal brother”; see pappa~ negna-. 

pappi-A n.; danger(?), harm(?); OH/NS.† […]ā

i pa-ap-pí nahhanteš ešer “They were cautious(?) about trouble(?) (and) danger(?)” KUB 11.1 iv 7 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:50f., 52f. (differently). In the ensuing context (iv 11-12) the subjects fare well because of their caution: they are calm, and whatever they do brings them success (galankanteš ešer kuitÚza ienziÚma / [… nÚatÚ šama]š kikkištari, see StBoT 5:89); nÚe āi pa-ap-pí UL n[ahhanteš ešer(?)] / [(n)]Úe apadd[a] šiuniyahhati “They [were] not ca[reful(?)] about trouble(?) (and) danger(?), and therefore (apadda) they (-e) were(!, verb singular) smitten by a god” ibid. iv 14
15. Hoffmann, THeth 11:50f. (w. n. 1) and 52f., implausibly emends both occurrences to an Akk. A-A-I QA!-AB-BI, which she translates “was auch immer (es war)” □ for šiuniyahhati cf. StBoT 5:156. 
p. seems to be the sg. loc. of a noun. Since the noun ai-, grouped w. the near synonyms wai- and 

URUpabilili a 3' 
pittuliya-, means something like “woe,” one expects a similar meaning for p. But since the persons who are respectful or careful regarding ā
i. p. are rewarded, a translation such as “danger” might be better than “woe.” Those who are on guard against danger calmly succeed in their undertakings; those who are not careful about danger are smitten by a god. 
HW2 1 (1975) 47 (s.v. ai, “ach”); Otten, ZA 66 (1976) 92 (“das Ach”); Berman apud Puhvel, HED 1-2 (1984) 14 s.v. ai (connects ai p. w. the Greek expression Šãì ÷∆÷∆dé). 
pappi-B see pappenna. 
URUpabilili adv.; (in) Babylonian, (in) Akkadian; from OH/NS. 
pa-bi-li-li KBo 3.21 iv 12 (OH/NS), pa-bi-li<-li?> KBo 

18.54 obv. 16 (MH/MS). 
URUpa-a-bi-li-li KUB 39.71 ii 4, 11, 19, 29, (47), (50), iii 8, (15), 19, (21!), 24, (43), (47), URUpa-bi-li-li KUB 32.1 iv 12, KUB 32.3 obv. 7, KUB 39.69 rev. 1, KUB 39.70 i (9), KBo 
7.29 ii 23, HT 5:21, URUKÁ.DINGIR.RA-li KUB 60.42:6, KUB 

39.88 iv (3) (all NS). 
a. in reference to Akkadian incantations addressed to dIŠTAR/Pirinkir (all CTH 718); usually it is the priest (LÚšankunniš) who speaks, but occasionally a singer (LÚNAR) — 1' in general: mah~ hanÚma LÚNAR AWATEMEŠ URUpa-a-bi-li-li memi~ yauwanzi zinnai nuÚza LÚšakuneš BAL-uw[anz]i ēpzi “But when the singer finishes speaking the words in Akkadian, then the priest begins to make offer[in]g” KUB 39.71 ii 29-31. 
2' w. the verb memai-and quoted Akkadian: [nu URUp]a-bi-li-li MIŠI (for MISÂ) ŠU.MEŠÚKI memai “and he says in Akkadian: ‘Wash your hands’” HT 
5:15 (rit.), ed. Friedrich, SV 2:148, cf. KUB 39.71 iii 8-10 and KBo 7.29 ii 23; nu LÚšankunniš URUpa-bi-li-li kiššan memai dIŠTAR BE_LTI ŠA KUR.KUR.ÓI.A AKLÂ LU_ T≥A_B “Then the priest speaks as follows in Akkadian: ‘O IŠTAR, Lady of the Lands, eat! And may it be pleasant (to you)’” KUB 32.1 iv 11-14. 
3' w. the verb išhamai-/S‰R-RU: LÚNARÚŠU [U]RUpa-a-bi-li-li ki[ššan išh]ameškizzi KUB 39.71 ii 1819; cf. also KUB 39.78 rev. 18-19 and KUB 39.70 i 7; on the interpretation of these Akkadian sayings cf. Goetze, JCS 18:95f. 
101

b. of the language of a tablet: T˘UPPUÚma mahhan UR[Upa-bi-li-li aniy]an? ē
šta nuÚmu LÚDUB. SAR ku-i[t? halziššai(?)] nuÚza pa-bi-li<-li?> an[ku? …] / UL ša-a[k-ki] “But when the tablet was [copi]ed(?) [in] A[kkadian(?),] (because) the scribe w[ho regularly reads(?)] to me d[oes] not kn[ow(?)] Akkadian” KBo 18.54 obv. 14-17 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. Pecchioli Daddi, Mes. 13-14:203, 206 (no restorations attempted), Beckman, JCS 35:110 w. n. 59 (w. tentative restorations), Hagenbüchner, THeth 16:58f. (no restorations attempted); for the date of the tablet cf. van den Hout, Diss. 192f.; while the context is fragmentary, the presence of “tablet” and “scribe” harmonize w. the designation of a language here. 
c. designation of a scribe: DUB.SAR pa-bi-li-li, KBo 3.21 iv 12 (hymn to Adad, MH/NS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:24, 26. 
For other linguistic designations in -ili see hat~ tili, luwili, našili/nešumnili, palaumnili. 
Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 187; Friedrich, SV 2 (1930) 148; HW (1952) 158; HE 1 (1960) 129 (§227b); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 358 n. 1, 360; Kammenhuber, HbOr (1969) 270f. 
pappenna, papan, pappi B Hurr. n.; mountain; from MH/NS. 
pa-ap-pé-en-na KBo 15.65 iii 3, 5, etc., KBo 15.66 iii 4, 6, etc., KUB 20.95:2, 5, etc. (all MH/NS), pa-ap-pí KUB 40.102 ii 12 (NS), pa-a-pa-an KUB 32.52 iii? 3, 4 (NS). 
[E]GIR-ŠU-ma pa-ap-pé-en-na Manuz[iya] ši~ panti “Afterwards, he libates to Mt. Manuzi” KUB 
20.95:2 (hišuwaš fest., NH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 59:248f.; 1 GAL KÙ.BABBAR ANA pa-ap-pí Manuzi[ya] “One silver cup for Mt. Manuzi” KUB 40.102 ii 12 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS); x MUŠENÚma pa-a-pa-an(-) x[… (or: pa-a-pa-an-n[i/a?) …] / nu pa-a-pa-an šinap[ši] KUB 32.52 iii? 3-4 (list of Hurr. gods, NS). Haas/ 
Wilhelm, AOATS 3:38 compare this to ÓUR.SAGŠi-na-ap-[ši …] 1273/v:2. From the context, it seems certain that all spellings refer to the Hurr. word for “mountain,” although GLH s.v. pabani does not list papan and lists pappi as a separate lemma without a cross-ref. to pabani. 
Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 38; GLH (1977) 190f. (pabani), 195 (pappi). 

paprahh- c 

paprahh-v.; to defile, make impure; from MS.† 
pres. sg. 2 [pa-a]p-ra-ah-ti KUB 24.7 ii 10 (NH); sg. 3 paap-ra-ah-hi KUB 33.120 ii 32, 33 (NS). 
pret. sg. 1 pa-ap-ra-ah-hu-un KUB 30.10 obv. 14 (OH/ MS), KBo 25.111:(6); sg. 3 pa-ap-ra-ah-ta KUB 12.58 ii 7, 8 (NH); pl. 3 pa-ap-ra-ah<-hi>-ir KUB 12.58 ii 6 (NH). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pa-ap-ra-ah-ha-an KUB 29.8 i 39 (MH/MS). 
iter. pret. sg. 3 pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš-ki-[(≠it±)] KUB 30.38 i 25 (NH), [pa-a]p-≠ra-ah-hi-iš-ke-e-et± KBo 23.1 iii 37 (NH); pl. 3 pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš-kir KUB 7.53 ii 16 (NH), pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš<ki->ir ibid. ii 19; broken at end: pa-ap-ra-ah-he-eš-ki[-…] KUB 60.129:10. 
a. paired w. maršahh-“to desecrate”: mānÚwa ŠA DINGIR.MEŠ KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI našma NA›.ÓI.A našma UNU_T TÚG kuiški maršāhhan našma pa-ap-ra-ah-ha-an kuēz imma kuez uddanaz maršahhan harzi “If someone has desecrated or defiled, or desecrated by whatsoever means(?), the deities’ silver and gold, or gems, or utensils made of boxwood(?)” KUB 29.8 i 37-40 (rit., MH/MS), cf. CHD maršahh-1.
	b. resulting from a violation of taboo: “I have never eaten that which is holy (šuppi) to my god and hence not permitted for me to eat” nuÚza tu~ ekkamman natta pa-ap-ra-ah-hu-un “I have not defiled my own (-za) body” KUB 30.10 obv. 14 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 112, 116, tr. ANET 400, cf. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:154. 
	c. resulting from unspecified actions: DINGIR-LAMÚwa kuiš kuit pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš-ki[(-≠it±)] ki~ nunaÚwaÚkan apā

t papra[(tar)] ANA DINGIR-LIM arha arran ēš[(du)] “May that impurity that someone has brought upon the deity, now be also washed away from the deity” KUB 30.38 i 25-27 (purif. rit., NH), w. dupls. KBo 23.1 iii 36-39, KBo 24.50 rev. 5-7 □ HW2 1:232a restores paprahhiški[tta] but traces in KBo 23.1 iii 37 favor -it over -ta; cf. the elongated -it in ku-it ibid. iii 36; kūn antuhšan kuieš pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš-kir¢… idala~ wešÚan(!) kuiē
š antuhšiš pa-ap-ra-ah-hi-iš<-ki>-ir “They who defiled this person … the evil persons who defiled him” KUB 7.53 ii 15-16, 18-19 (purif. rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 12f.; kuiēšÚan dankuneškir hahlan[ešk]ir paap-ra-ah<-hi>-ir naššu(w)Úan PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ kuiški pa-ap-ra-ah-ta našmaÚan aggandaš kuiški peran pa-ap-ra-ah-ta našmaÚan PA_NI DUMU. LÚ.U⁄·.LU kuiški pa-ap-ra-ah-ta “(Those) who 

102

made him dark, yellow, and unclean: whether anyone made him unclean before the gods, or anyone made him unclean before the dead, or anyone made him unclean before mankind, (for him I am performing the ritual of uncleanness)” KUB 12.58 ii 5-8 (purif. rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 12f. ii 30-33, cf. Riemschneider, MIO 5:144. The verbal act of defiling is also expressed in this text by paprannaz collocated w. the verbs tiyaneški-and elane~ ški-(ii 10). 
d. others: (Deities inside Kumarbi discuss through what opening of his body they should come out: [m]ā[nÚwarÚašta] ≠x x x± parā [uwam]i nuÚ waÚmu apaddaya (apāt + -aya) anda pa-ap-ra-ahhi … nuÚwaÚmu anda ištaminit pa-ap-ra-ah-hi “If I come forth [through the …], that too will defile me. … it will defile me on the ear” KUB 33.120 ii 3133 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), ed. Meriggi, Athenaeum 31:116f., translit. Myth. 156, tr. Hittite Myths 41, cf. Kum. 38; TÚG. N´G.LÁ[M.MEŠÚma(?)]ÚašÚza GIM-an parku~ waya waššeškiši nu kuin [pa-a]p-ra-ah-ti kuinÚmaÚ za parkun(sic)Úpat arha piddalaši “You put them (sc. men) on like clean festive garments. You soil one and you scorn/neglect another, even though he is clean(!)” KUB 24.7 ii 9-10 (hymn, NH), ed. Archi, OA 16:307, 309, Lebrun, Hymnes 404, 406, Güterbock, JAOS 
103:158 □ the -za w. wašš-requires the translation “to put (clothes) on oneself,” which requires interpreting the preceding -aš as acc. “them” (i.e., the men); this favors Lebrun’s rather than Güterbock’s restoration; mān UN-aš p[a-ap-r]a-ah-haan lingan harzi KUB 30.51 i 17 + KUB 30.45 iv 10, as restored by Laroche, CTH p. 158, is contradicted by the traces, which together w. the dupl. KBo 14.68 i 15 suggest a reading: mān UN-aš U[(N-ši) me-n]a-ah-ha-an<-da> lingan harzi. 
Kammenhuber, ZA 56 (1964) 154 (“verunreinigen (im rituell magischen Sinn)”); Moyer, Diss. (1969) 41 (“to make impure, pollute”). 

Cf. papre-, paprant-, papratar, paprešš-, papreššar. 

paprannant-see papratar. 

paprant-adj.; 1. impure, unclean, 2. proven guilty by ordeal; from MH/MS.† 
sg. nom. com. pa-ap-ra-an-za KUB 21.29 iv (3), 6 (Óatt. III). 

acc. [pa-ap-r]a-an-da-an KBo 16.27 ii 11 (MH/MS). 

abl. pa-ap-ra-an-da-za KUB 13.4 iii 66 (MH/NS), KUB 

13.5 iii 37 (pre-NH/NS). 
papratar 
inst. pa-ap-ra-an-ti-it KUB 50.91 iv 11 (NH). 
pl. nom. com. pa-ap-ra-an-te-eš KBo 16.27 ii 10 (MH/MS), KUB 13.4 iv 54 (MH/NS), KUB 13.17 iv 15 (pre-NH/NS). 
frag. pa-ap-ra-an-ta[(-)…] KBo 9.78 obv. 5. 
1. impure, unclean: “If a kitchen worker does not throw it (sc. the defiled vessel) away” nu apāš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pa-ap-ra-an-da-za adanna pāi “but causes the gods to eat from an unclean (vessel), (then the gods will give him dung and urine to eat and drink)” KUB 13.4 iii 66-68 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.5 iii 37-38 (NS), ed. Chrest. 160f., Süel, Direktif Metni 68f.; nÚatÚšamaš peran paprante[š …-andu nu NINDA(?)-an pa-ap-r]a-anda-an azzikandu “Let unclean […]s […] it (-at) before them. Let them eat unclean [bread(?)]” (as a punishment for a broken oath, line 7) KBo 16.27 ii 10-11 (treaty, MH/MS), translit. Kaškäer 136; (a saying:) nuÚwa UR[.TU]R pa-ap-ra-an-za arhaÚmaÚwa ŠA 1 MA[.N]A(?) GIŠGIGIR ēzzai “A puppy is unclean; yet it eats up a chariot of one mina value” KUB 21.29 iv 6 (decree, Óatt. III), tr. Kaškäer 148 (proverb meaning “kleine Ursachen — grosse Wirkungen”).
2. proven guilty by ordeal: nuÚza mān parku~ waēš šumel dLAMMAÚKUNU takkuÚza pa-ap-raan-te-ešÚma “If you are found innocent (it is due to) your patron deity, but if you are found guilty (you will perish together with your wives and your children)” KUB 13.4 iv 53-55 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.17 rev. 15 (NS), ed. Chrest. 164f., Süel, Direktif Metni 84f., tr. ANET 210, cf. Friedrich, ArOr 
6:359 n. 2. Note the equivalent passage ibid. iv 32-33, construed w. parkuešteni … paprišteni, see CHD paprešš-. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 158. 
Cf. papre-, paprešš-. 
paprašš-see paprešš-. 
papratar n. neut; impurity, defilement (opp. parkunummar), impropriety; from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pa-ap-ra-a-tar KBo 17.3 iii 20, ABoT 4 i 2, KBo 17.4 ii 6 (all OS), KBo 17.54 i 15 (OH or MH/MS), KUB 

29.7 rev. 32, 46, passim, KUB 29.8 i 41 (both MH/MS), KBo 
23.57 l.e. (3) (pre-NH/NS), KBo 19.145 iii 7, KUB 30.38 i (26), ABoT 29 i 35 (all NH), pa-ap-ra-tar KUB 43.58 i 17 (MH/MS), KUB 7.41 obv. 18 (MH/NS), KBo 13.109 iii 10, KUB 41.8 ii 15, 17 (both MH/NS), KUB 13.3 ii 29 (MH?/NS), KBo 3.63 i 15 (OH/NS), KUB 7.53 i 7, passim, KUB 9.34 i 27, 
103

KUB 30.45 iii 17 (all NH), KUB 1.4 iii 33 (Óatt. III), KUB 
41.21 i 13, iv 9 (Šupp. II), pa-ap-ra-tar«-aš» VBoT 132 ii 12 (Šupp. II), pa-ap-ra<-tar> KUB 7.53 iii 10 (NH), pa-ap-ra-ta KUB 24.9 ii 10 (MH/NS). 
erg. pa-ap-ra-an-na-a[n-z]a-š(a) KUB 29.7 rev. 29 (MH/ MS), for KUB 12.58 iv 2 see abl. gen. pa-ap-ra-an-na-aš KUB 7.41 i (1) (MH/NS), KUB 
7.53 i 6, etc. (NH), KUB 17.18 ii (31), pa-ap-ra-na-aš KUB 
7.53 i 8 (NH). loc. pa-ap-ra-an-ni KUB 41.8 iv 25 (MH/NS), KUB 7.53 i 2, 3, KUB 30.45 iii 12 (both NH), KBo 23.1 i 19. 
abl. pa-ap-ra-an-na-az KUB 7.53 ii 10, KUB 12.58 iii 7, KUB 30.38 i 11 (all NH), KUB 15.41 rt. col. 10, pa-ap-ra-anna-za KBo 13.109 ii 11 (MH/NS), KBo 23.1 iii (11), KUB 
24.13 ii 20, pa-ap-ra-an-na-an-za KUB 12.58 iv 2 (NH) (see d, below). 
a. in general: mānÚkan antuhšaš! (copy/photograph: an-uh-tu-uh(?)) naššu LÚ-LIM našma MUNUS-za pa-ap-ra-an-ni kuedanikki anda tianza našmaÚa<n>ÚzaÚanÚkan tamaiš kuiški pa-ap-raan-ni šer halzian harzi … naššu LÚ-ni našma MUNUS-ni pa-ap-ra-an-na-aš uddananza UZUÚR. ÓI.A-ša arha šarran “If a person, either man or woman, is placed in any uncleanness, or (if) anyone else has named him for uncleanness … or if a man’s or woman’s body parts are disabled (lit. divided up) because of a matter of uncleanness” KUB 
7.53 i 1-3, 5-6 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 4f., w. comments on 42f. 
□ Goetze translates the last line as “if in consequence of a formula of uncleanness the sexual parts are disabled”; Goetze’s interpretation of UZUÚR.ÓI.A as “sexual parts” becomes problematic when one compares the same verb (arha šarra-) later in the same text (KUB 12.58 iii 6-11) applied to the “twelve UZUÚR.ÓI.A,” which even Goetze does not try to translate as “sexual parts”; the -ša complement on UZUÚR.ÓI.A is for happešša(r), which must be added to the one syllabic example given by Neu in FsNeumann 225 n. 84, and therefore has no female reference; (The king and queen have pure (parkui-) offerings for you, gods) nÚašta IŠTU KUR LÚ.KÚR idā
lauwaz pa-ap-ra-a[n-na-az (arha uwatten(!))] “therefore come back home from the enemy land (and its) evil uncleanness” KUB 15.34 ii 5 (evocation, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 13.29 left col. 12, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f.; “Just as this onion consists of skins which are wrapped together …” idālauwanziÚya NÂŠ DINGIR-LIMÚya hurtaiš paap-ra-an-na-a[n-z]a-ša (i.e., paprannanz(a)šÚa) ≠i±ni É DINGIR-LIM šuppi[wašhan]aš iwar anda hū
laliyan hardu “let evil and perjury, curse and un

papratar d 1' 

cleanness envelop that temple like (the layers of) an onion” KUB 29.7 rev. 29-30 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Laroche, BSL 57:32, tr. ANET 346; idā
luÚya uttar NÂŠ DINGIR[LIM hu]rtaiš pa-ap-ra-a-tar ANA DINGIR-L[IM GAM-a]n arha QA_TAMMA šippaiddu “In the same way let it peel away the evil thing, perjury, curse, (and) uncleanness from the deity” ibid. rev. 31-32, ed. AlHeth 108, Lebrun, Samuha 123f., 131:39-41, tr. ANET 346; mānÚkan UN-ši parni pa-ap-ra-tar kuitki anda ēšzi “If there is some uncleanness in a man’s house (… I perform the following ritual)” KUB 7.14 obv. 1-2 (rit.), ed. Götze, ArOr 5:2, translit. LTU 57; ANA DINGIR-LIMÚ yaÚššan [ÓUL-l]u pa-ap-ra-a-tar [namm]a anda lē “Let there be no uncleanness on the deity. (Just as the porridge is pure (parkuiš), so let the deity be pure)” KBo 23.1 iii 19-21 (rit. vs impurity, NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 3:146, 153; cf. KUB 7.53 ii 9-12 (g, below). 
b. caused by neglecting proper regulations: [(nuÚza URUKalašma)]š aniyattat [µÓ(antiliššÚ a)]Úz namma UL aniyattat [ … U]L uit nuÚkan paap-ra-tar [šarā µÓa]nteliš udaš “The city of Kalašma treated (i.e., purified) itself ritually, but Óantili did not treat himself ritually, he did not come [to … ] and so he brought uncleanness up (to the palace of Óattuša)” KBo 3.63 i 13-16 (hist., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.66:11-15, cf. KBo 3.63 i 8-9, w. dupl. KBo 3.64 i 11, cf. StBoT 5:3 and HW2 1:82a; kuišÚwa pa-ap-ra-tar iyazi nuÚwa LUGAL-i harran wā
tar pai “Whoever causes impurity and pours out polluted water for the king (may the gods pour out his soul like water)” KUB 13.3 ii 29-30 (instr., MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:47, 49, tr. ANET 207; “When I started hostilities against him” nu apā
t pa-ap-ra-tar UL DÙ[(-nun)] “I did not do that (as) impropriety” (by treacherous secrecy, but by open confrontation) KUB 1.4 iii 33 (Óatt., NH), w. dupl. KUB 1.6 iii 13, ed. Óatt. 28f., StBoT 24:22f. (iii 66). 
	c. prevented by observing regulations: (Offerings are placed in three vessels …) nÚat parkunu~ wan pa-ap-ra-tarÚkan anda NU.GÁL “and they are purified (so that) there is no uncleanness in them” KUB 43.58 i 16-17 (purif. rit., MH/MS); cf. also KBo 3.63 i 13-16 (b, above). 
	d. removed by the actions of — 1' anš-: šan~ kuišÚaÚt<ta>Úkan pa-ap-ra-an-na-za (dupl. pa-ap

104

ra-an-na-a[z]) anšan ē

šdu KUB 24.13 ii 19-21 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.41 rt. col. 9-11, ed. Haas/ Thiel, AOAT 31:104f. 

2' arha arrai-: kinunaÚwaÚkan apā

t papra[(tar)] ANA DINGIR-LIM arha arran ēš[(du)] “Now let that uncleanness be washed off the deity” KUB 30.38 i 26-27. 
3' la-¢: pa-ap-ra-a-tar lingain [… alw]anzatar laūKBo 17.54 i 15-16 (incant., OH or MH/MS). 
4' mutai-: KUB 12.58 i 13-14 (rit, NH), ed Tunn. 6-8 (i 37-38), cf. CHD L-N 336a. 
5' parkunu-“to purify,” parkuešš-, parku- eš-“to be/become pure”: parkunuddu [(š)]uppiš A-anza ÓUL-lun EME-an pa-ap-ra-tar ēšhar waštul hur~ dain kurkurain pan≠ga±uwa<š> EME-an “May the holy water purge the evil tongue, impurity, bloodshed, sin, curse, intimidation, (and) tongue of the multitude” KBo 10.45 ii 49-51 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 ii 14-15, ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f.; cf. ibid. ii 5-7, iv 13-14; nuÚššan apā
š maršaštarriš paap-ra-a-tar-ra kēdaš ēšdu ŠA DINGIR.MEŠÚmaÚ wa KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI NA›.ÓI.A UNU_T TÚG. ÓI.AÚya parkuwae ē
šdu “Let that profanement and defilement be on these (i.e., the scapegoats). Let the silver, gold, gems, and boxwood(!) utensils(?) be pure” KUB 29.8 i 41-43 (mouth-washing rit., MH/MS); cf. KBo 13.109 ii 10-11 (rit., MH/NS), ed. s.v. (:)mulatar A; KUB 41.8 ii 15-16 (MH/NS), ed. CHD L-N 198b, KUB 41.11 rev. 33-34; nÚat parkunuwan pa-ap-ra-tarÚkan anda NU.GÁL “It is purified. There is no uncleanness in it (the vessel)” KUB 43.58 i 16-17 (MH/MS); wappuwaš DINGIR.MAÓ-aš kā
šaÚza 12 UZUÚR pa-ap-ra-anna-an-za tuel ŠU-it šappiyan[za] parkunuwanza “O Óannahanna of the riverbank! See, you are the one who scrubs and purifies the twelve parts of the body from uncleanness with your own hand” KUB 12.58 iv 1-3 (purif. rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 20f. □ since the subjects in nominal sentences containing -za must be either first or second person, Goetze’s tr. which makes the twelve body parts the subject must be abandoned; and since there is nothing in the broader context to indicate that the riverbank deity and the Sungod were being purified, we must understand šappiyanza and parkunuwanza both here and in iv 6 as rare active participles of transitive verbs; Laroche, BSL 57:32 considers p. as a possible “erg.” (“the uncleanness of the twelve body parts has been 

papratar g 
scrubbed and purified by your hand”) while Melchert, Diss. 449, lists this ex. among “secure ablatives” in -anza. 
6' šippai-: KUB 12.58 iv 1-3 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH) see d 5', above; KUB 29.7 rev. 32 (Šamuha rit., MH/MS) see a, above. 
7' (arha) dā-: kāša LU[GAL-a]š MUNUS. LUGAL-šÚa DUMU.MEŠ URUHattušaššÚa pa-apra-a-tar-ša-me-et hatugauš lāluš AN.B[AR?(-)…] išhaškantuš dahhun “See, I have taken the uncleanness, (and) the terrible tongues of i[ron?], bloodied, of the king, and of the queen and of the people of Óattuša” KBo 17.4 ii 5-7 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.5 ii 10-12, ed. StBoT 8:22-25, cf. KBo 17.1 iv 2-3; [(mānÚši te~ tanaš kuiš)k]i pa-ap-ra-tar«-aš» dā[š] § … man¢Úši ŠU.M[(EŠ-aš GÌR.MEŠ-aš kuiški pa-ap-ra-tar) dāš] “If someone took from him/her the impurity of the hair … if someone took from him/her the impurity of hands and feet” VBoT 132 ii 12-14 (purif. rit., Šupp. II), w. dupls. KUB 41.21 i 11-13 and KBo 2.32 i 5-7, ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:280f. 
e. listed w. other evils: idalu pa-ap-ra-tar al~ wazatar ā
štayaratar DINGIR.MEŠ-aš karpin NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM pangauwaš EME-an manikūwandan MU-an “evil, uncleanliness, sorcery, sin, the anger of the gods, perjury, the slander of the masses, a short life” KUB 7.53 iii 5-8 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 18f. (iii 3942); cf. FHL 105:3-5; most frequently associated w. al~ wanzatar KUB 7.53 ii 11, passim (NH), KUB 12.39:5, KUB 
24.9 ii 10 (MH/NS), KUB 24.13 ii 19-20 (OH/NS), KUB 41.21 iv 4 (NH), 7/t:3f., Bo 3660 ii 6 (both exx. Otten, ZA 66:101); and ēšhar KBo 10.45 ii 5, and passim in this rit. (MH/NS), KBo 19.145 iii 7 (NH), KBo 23.57 l.e. 2-3, KUB 7.29 obv. 2, KUB 17.18 ii 31. 
f. pa-ap-ra-an-na-aš S´SKUR/aniur “uncleanliness ritual, ritual to remove uncleanliness”: KUB 
7.53 i 8 (NH), ed. Tunn. 4f., KUB 12.58 ii 9, 31 (NH), ed. Tunn. 12f. (ii 34), 14f. (ii 56). 
g. pa-ap-ra-an-na-aš alwanzena-“the sorcerer of the impurity”: kuiēššÚan ALAMÚŠU haštai m®~ luli(!, text m®eli) kē
z pa-ap-ra-an-na-az tiyaneškir elaneškir (var. elineškir) kinuna pa-ap-ra-an-na-aš alwazenaš ALAMÚŠU haštai m®lū¢ša EGIR-pa
li katiyaneššwi elaneškimi “Whatever persons were t.ing and e.-ing his form, bone(s), and miluli-with this impurity, now I am t.-ing and e.-ing in return 
105

the form, bones(s), and miluli-of the sorcerer of the impurity” KUB 7.53 ii 9-12 (Tunnawi’s rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 39.65:2-5, ed. Tunn. 10f., see m®luli; cf. w. reverse order: linki≠yaš hu±r[tiyaš a]lwanzenaš pa-apra-an-na-aš iē

šnaš KUB 60.161 ii 3-4 (rit.). 

Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 179; Götze, Óatt. (1925) 95f.; Moyer, Diss. (1969) 38f. On the loss of the final r cf. Neu, FsNeumann 215. 
Cf. paprahh-. 
papre-v.; 1. to be proven guilty by ordeal, 2. to do something impure; (opp. parkue-, parkuešš-); from OS.† 
act. pres. sg. 3 pa-ap-ri-iz-zi KBo 6.2 i 56, 57, 59 (OS), KBo 6.3 i (66, 67) (OH/NS), KBo 16.25 iii (19) (MH/MS), KUB 43.35:(3) (pre-NH/MS), 359/u + Bo 4410:(6) (contra ZA 67:55). 
pret. sg. 3 pa-ap-ri-it 359/u + Bo 4410:8 (Otten, ZA 67:55f.), KUB 13.3 iii (32) (MH?/NS). 
mid. pret. sg. 3 pa-ap-ri-it-ta KBo 3.28 ii 19 (OH/NS). 
iter. pret. pl. 3 pa-ap-re-eš-kir KBo 3.28 ii 17 (OH/NS). 
1. to be proven guilty by ordeal: attašÚmaš haršan® d´D-ya mekkeš pa-ap-re-eš-kir šÚuš ABI LUGAL natta huišnuškēt µKizzuwašÚpat ANA SAG<.DU> ABIYA d´D-ya pa-ap-ri-it-ta šÚan at~ tašÚmiš µKizzuwan nat<ta> huenūt “Many were proven guilty in the river ordeal in (the matter of offending) the person of my father and (my, i.e.,) the king’s father did not let them live. Kizzuwa in particular was proven guilty by the river ordeal in (the matter of offending) the person of my father, and my father did not let Kizzuwa live” KBo 3.28 ii 17-19 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Watkins, TPS 1971:79, Laroche, FsOtten 187 □ papritta has been interpreted in several ways: Friedrich, HW 158 (“luwisch”), Kronasser, EHS 
1:590 (in a chap. “Fremde Verbalendungen”), Neu, StBoT 
12:48 n. 20 (not Luwian, but Hitt. pret. act. sg. 3), Oettinger, Stammbildung 283 (“keinesfalls … sprachwirklich”); the most convincing interpretation is that by Watkins TPS 1971:80f. (pret. mid. sg. 3), cf. StBoT 6:28 (under -ta), 147; cf. also parkuitta; (The king decreed: Let Zuliya go to the river ordeal) mānÚaš park[(uešzi)] / [nu] ziqqÚa parkuiš (var. nuÚza ZIÚŠU parkunuddu) mānÚaš pa-a[p-ri-iz-zi-ma] (par. pa-ap-ra-aš-zi-ma)] / [z]iqqÚa ®t (var. nÚwarÚaš ak[u]) man¢Úe pa[¢ir …] µZuliyaš pa-ap-ri-it (var.: nu µZuliyaš hapā pait nÚ aš pa-ap[-ri-it]) “If he is found innocent, you too 

papre- 2 

will be innocent (var. let him consider himself exonerated). But if he is found guilty, you too must go (var. he shall be put to death). When they (Arnili and Zuliya) had gone [to the river], Zuliya was found guilty” 359/u + Bo 4410:6-8 (Otten, ZA 67:55f.) (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), w. par. KUB 13.3 iii 3032 (NS), for the rest. pa-a[p-ri-iz-zi] see Oettinger, Stammbildung 282; anda[Úma] mān antuhšeš hann[ešni ap~ panteš nuÚkan] / huwappi kuiški kuedani nÚaš […] / […] nÚašta mā
n apeantu[hšeš … manÚaš]/[BE] GAL nammaÚaš happinanza a[…] / […] huwappi kueda[ni …] / [nu kuiš] p[a]-ap-ri-iz-zi nÚaš ak[i] “Now if men are engaged in a lawsuit, and one does harm to the other, he […] And if those men […] if he is a great [lord], and further he is rich, […] if one does harm to the other, whichever is proven guilty, he shall die” KBo 16.25 iii 14-19 (instr., MH/MS) □ on huwappi cf. Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. 106 paragraph 2; [mā
]nÚwa uk paim[i] / [… pa-a]p-ri-izzi nu apā[š] / […] ištamašzi nÚa[š? …] / […]-iš IŠTU d´D / […] “If/Whenever I shall go, […] is found guilty, then he […] hears, and […] by the river ordeal […]” KUB 43.35:2-5 (instr.). 
2. to do something impure (i.e., cause impurity): [takku L]Ú.U⁄·.LU-aš DUGÚTUL-i našma luliya pa-ap-ri-iz-zi karū [6 G´]N KÙ.BABBAR piškir paap-ri-iz-zi kuiš 3 G´N KÙ.BABBAR pāi (par. da[a-i]) [ha-aš-šu-w]a!?-an-na (so Otten apud HG) parna 3 G´N KÙ.BABBAR daškē
r kinuna LUGAL-uš ŠA É.GAL-LIM [pešši]t kuiš pa-ap-ri-iz-zi (par. pár-kue-eš-z[i]) nu apāšÚpat 3 G´N KÙ.BABBAR pāi “If a person brings impurity in a bowl or a vat/pond, formerly they would pay six shekels of silver; he who brings the impurity gives (par. takes) three shekels of silver, and they used to take three shekels of silver for the palace. Now the king has waived (the fee) of the palace. Only he who brings the impurity (par. is pure) pays three shekels of silver” KBo 6.2 i 56-59 (Law §25, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 6669 (NS), and par. KBo 12.49 ii 1-5 p. is traditionally interpreted here as “to cause impurity,” i.e., to urinate, spit, or the like 
— Friedrich, ArOr 6:359 n. 4 (“Notdurft verrichten”), HG 23 (“Unreinheit bringen”), 93, Imparati, Leggi 47 (“compiere (dell’) impurità, commettere impurità”), Watkins, TPS 1971:80 (“‘is impure’ … presumably a euphemism for ‘urinates’”). The reading parkuešzi “is pure” in the par. KBo 12.49 is hard to ex

106

plain. Some parts of A and B (e.g., the king waiving the share 
of the palace) are missing in the par. We should therefore be 
cautious in assuming that the unexpected parkuešzi is really a 
variant to paprizzi. After all, why should one found innocent 
(parkuešzi) pay anything at all? Yet parnaššea šuwaizzi follows 

immediately in the next line. 
The basic meaning is “to be impure.” 

Watkins, TPS 1971:79-82 (“‘be, prove impure’ (whence ‘guilty’ by ordeal)”); Starke, StBoT (1977) 23:56 (“unrein sein, sich als unrein erweisen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 282f. (“sich als unrein (schuldig) erweisen”). 

Cf. paprahh-. 
papriya-v.; to blow (an instrument); NH† 

“He offers one sheep to the god Óilašši, they slaughter annali-(sheep) on the offering table” LÚ<.MEŠ> SI!.BÚN pa-ap-ri-an-zi “the men(!) of the thunder-horn blow, (the female crier cries)” IBoT 2.103 iv 12 (cult inv., NH). This form is cited by HW 158, Oettinger, Stammbildung 282, and Watkins, TPS 1971:80, as belonging to the paradigm of papre/a-“to be unclean.” The context, however, requires a different tr. 
p. can be analyzed as a reduplication of the type lalukki-w. an a vowel in the reduplicated syllable, see van Brock, RHA XXII/75:120f. SI!.BÚN (= SI!. KAZIM) is read following KBo 2.1 iv 2 and KBo 2.16:10, both cult inventories, cf. Güterbock, Or NS 15:486, and Carter, Diss. 194. Another possibility, considering the number of emendations already needed in this line, would be to emend to pa«-ap»-rian-zi (< parai- “to blow (a horn)”). 

Cf. parai-A, pariparai-. 

paprešš-, paprišš-, paprašš-v.; 1. (literally “to become unclean,” whence the extended, and only attested, meaning:) to be found guilty (by ordeal) (opp. parkuešš-), 2. (part.) uncleanness; from pre-NH/NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pa-ap-re-eš-zi KUB 43.56 ii 10, KUB 13.3 rev. iv (5), pa-ap-ri-iš-zi KUB 13.3 ii 17, pa-ap-ra-aš-zi KUB 13.3 iii 31 (all MH?/NS); pa-a[p-ra-aš-zi] 359/u + Bo 4410:(6) (ZA 67:55), restore instead pa-a[p-ri-iz-zi], see CHD papre-. 

pl. 2 pa-ap-ri-i[š-te-ni] KUB 13.4 iv 33 (MH/NS). 

part. pa-ap-re-eš-ša-an KUB 28.82 i 12 (OH?/NS), pa-apre-eš-ša-aš-ša!(text -ta)-an (i.e., paprešša(n) + -šan) KUB 41.7 i 8. 

paprešš
1. to be found guilty (by ordeal) (opp. parkuešš): (As a result of an ordeal) takku parkuešteni šumel dLAMMAÚKUNU takku pa-ap-ri-i[š-te-ni-]ma nuÚšmašÚat SAG.DU-aš waštul “If [you] are found innocent, (it is due to) your tutelary deity. If, however, you are found guilty, (it is considered) a capital crime (lit. sin of the head/person) for you” KUB 
13.4 iv 32-33 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 80f., tr. ANET 210; “I will hand you over to the river (ordeal)” nu kuiš parkuē
šzi nÚaš LU~ GAL-aš ‰R-iš kuiš pa-ap-ri-iš-ziÚma nÚanÚzaÚan LUGAL-uš UL ilāliyami “whoever is found innocent, will remain the king’s servant. But whoever is found guilty, I, the king, will not wish (to retain) him. (They shall put him to death together with his wife and children)” KUB 13.3 ii 16-18 (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:46, 48f., tr. ANET 207, Laroche, FsOtten 185f.; cf. ibid. iii 29-31, w. par. 359/u + Bo 4410:5-6 (Otten, ZA 67:55f.), treated above papre-1. 
2. (part.) uncleanness: (Katahzipuri purified the hearth, the land, cattle, and sheep) [(LUGALÚšan ÓU)]L-lu pa-ap-re-eš-ša-an [(SAG.DU-az dāš)] “he took the evil uncleanness from the king’s head (and went to the pyre)” KUB 28.82 i 12-13 (rit. of Óatuši, OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.106 i 11-12 (NS); cf. the par. text pa-ap-re-eš-ša-aš-ša!(text -ta)-an SAG.DU-iÚšši da!-iš KUB 
41.7 i 8-9, ed. Otten, HTR 141 (the reading of the first sign follows Otten, the copy looks like pa-iš). papreššan KUB 
28.82 i 12 was interpreted as part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. of papreš-v. in HW 158b; papreššaššan KUB 41.7 i 8 was interpreted as paprešša(r) + -šan by Otten, HTR 
141. Neu, FsNeumann 209, also considers possible the option we have chosen. Since both exx. belong to the same text and therefore most likely represent the same word, we take papreššan as the main ex. The stem could be an a-stem or n-stem neut. paap-re-eš-ša-az-za-an Bo 3947:10 (Neu, FsNeumann 209 n. 21) cannot be analyzed without the context, but it may also belong to this lemma. Neu analyzes it as paprešša(r) + -z(a) + -šan. 
Laroche, FsOtten (1973) 185 (“être sali: condamné”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 282f. (“sich als unrein (schuldig) erweisen”). 
Cf. papre-. 
107

papreššar n.; impurity, uncleanness; from NH.† 
loc. pa-ap-re-eš-ni KUB 36.83 i 16, KUB 9.34 ii (18) (NH). 
≠x-x± kāša EN.S´SKUR idalawi pa-ap-re-eš-n¢[i] / [x-]ešni alwanzanni hullanzanni […] KUB 36.83 i 1617 (rit.); [… pa-ap-r]e-eš-ni UÓ‡-ešni hullanzešni KUB 9.34 ii 18 (rit., NH). 
Otten, HTR 141, considered the form pa-ap-re-ešša-aš-ša!-an of KUB 41.7 i 8 as an example of pap~ rešša(r) + -ššan. Neu (FsNeumann 209) considers this possible, although he also notes another possibility, which we have followed, namely, that the first element is the neut. participle of paprešš-; see pa~ prešš-mng. 2. 
Otten, HTR (1958) 141 w. n. 2 (“Unreinheit”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 290. 
Cf. papre-, paprešš-. 
GIŠpapū-n. com.; (a wooden implement used in a bakery); NH.† 
sg. acc. GIŠpa-pu-u-un KUB 16.34 i 14 (NS); possibly also [GIŠp]a-a-p[u]-u-un?-na KBo 29.70 i 28. 
“We questioned them further and they said”: ŠÀ É LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙÚwaÚkan UR.[GI‡-aš] pait nuÚ wa GIŠpa-pu-u-un arha hurutait “A dog came into the bakery and knocked over(?) the p.” KUB 16.34 i 13-14 (oracle questions, NH), see maršaštarri- for fuller context. For treatment of the context of KBo 29.70 i 28 see pāp(a?)-. 
Sommer, KlF 1:344 compared this passage w. KUB 
5.7 obv. 24-25 (see laknu-1) where a dog overturned (laknut) a table in a temple. Because of this parallel, and because GIŠBANŠUR is a u-stem, he suggested that p.-was the syllabic writing of GIŠBAN~ ŠUR. But since it is not clear that arha hurutai-is synonymous w. laknu-, and since every implement becomes unclean on contact w. a pig or a dog (see Moyer, Diss. 106), the parallel w. “table” is not in itself persuasive. 
Both GIŠpapū-and GIŠpāpul(a/i)- appear to be derived from the verb pap(a)-(q.v.), and may denote specific implements used in a bakery. If a pāpul(a/i)-(q.v.) is a “bread tray(?),” a papū-is probably something similar. 

GIŠpāpul(a/i)

Sommer, KlF 1 (1930) 344 (GIŠpapu = GIŠBANŠUR?); Laroche, RA 52 (1958) 188 (thinks of a Hurr. origin, cf. GLH 192 sub pabu); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 251, 478 (“Tisch(?)”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 59 (“Tisch”??); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 253f. (refers to Laroche’s interpretation); Hoffner apud McMahon, AS 25 (1991) 257 (connects w. verb pap(a)- and noun pāpul(a/i)-). 
Cf. pāp(a)- v., GIŠpāpul(a/i)-. 
[*papuwāi-] v. “mit Tischen ausstatten(??),” HW 158, see pap(a?)- v. 
GIŠpapul(a/i)-n. neut.; (a wooden implement for
¢carrying or arranging loaves of freshly baked bread; a bread tray?).† 
lukkattaÚma karuwariwar hū¢
dak [išnan] / šarakar!-pa-an-zi nÚan É UDUN pē[danzi] / nu 3 NIN~ DA.GUR›.RA ŠA ŠA_TI ienzi mahhanÚmaÚ[at ze~ yantari(?)] / nÚašÚkan GIŠpa!-a-pu-li tianzi šerÚ maÚašÚša[n GAD-it] / LÚGUDU⁄¤ kariyazzi nÚaš INA É [… udanzi(?)] “The following day in the morning they immedi[atel]y take up [the dough. They ta]ke it into the bakery. They make three thick loaves of one SU_TU (each). And when [they are baked(?)], they place them on the bread tray(?). The GUDU⁄¤ priest covers them over [with a cloth, and they take] them into the house [of …]” KUB 55.43 iii 30-34 (fest.), ed. McMahon, AS 25:152f. The restoration [-at zeyantari] (instead of [-aš pā

panzi]) is based 

on the fact that immediately after this action the loaves are cov
ered w. a cloth and removed from the É UDUN “bakery.” They 
would never have been removed without being baked. There 
is therefore in this passage no mention of the action pap(a)-. 
Since some i-stem nouns have locatives in -i rather than the more usual -iya, the locative form papuli suggests either an l-stem, an a-stem, or an i-stem. Since both papu- and papuli describe implements used in a bakery, it is likely that pāpul(a/i)is derived either directly from the noun GIŠpapu or from the verb pap(a)- which may be the base of the u-stem noun. 
The verb pāp(a)- seems to denote the subdividing of the dough lump and shaping parts of it into loaves for baking. One would assume that the pāpu-and pāpul(a/i)- would be different implements for performing this and related actions. In the 

108

above passage the pāpul(a/i)- is used to carry the freshly baked loaves which have been placed on it, hence, the translation “bread tray(?).” The p. cannot be a “shovel” or “peel,” since one uses this to retrieve the loaves from the oven. One does not “place” the (hot) loaves on it. 

Hoffner apud McMahon, AS 25 (1991) 152f., 257. 
Cf. pap(a)-, GIŠpapu-. 

parā adv., prev., postpos.; 1. (prev.) out (to), forth, toward (w. d.-l. or all., generally w. -kan), 2. (postpos.) out of, from (w. abl. or inst.), 3. (prev.) forward, further, along (w. d.-l. or all., generally without loc. particle), 4. (adv.) further(more), moreover, additionally, still (denoting addition), 5. (adv.) then, after that (denoting temporal posteriority), 6. (prev.) over to (transfer or passage from one person to the next), 7. (prev.) fully, completely, 8. (prev.) (idiomatic or unclear), 9. kuitta/kuišša parā, 10. kuwapitta para,¢11. parā in combination 
w. other (local) adverbs, 12. parā in nominal compounds; from OS. 
1.	(prev.) out (to), forth, toward (w. d.-l. or all., generally 

w. -kan) 
2.	(postpos.) out of, from 
	a.	w. abl. 
	b.	w. inst. for ablative 

1	(prev.) forward, further, along (w. d.-l. or all., generally without loc. particle) 
	4. (adv.) further(more), moreover, additionally, still (denoting addition), sometimes implying temporal sequence (as in mng. 5) 
	
	a.	sentence initial and marked w. -ma 

	b.	sentence initial and marked w. -ma in a series of clauses 
	
c.	sentence initial without -ma 
d.	not sentence initial 

e.	not sentence initial, adding comparative value (“more and more …,” “even …-er”) to denominal verbs 

	5.	then, after that (adv. denoting temporal posteriority) 

	
	a.	sentence initial w. -ma 

	b.	preceding a noun which has a temporal indication (mostly d.-l. or all.) 
	6.	(prev.) over to (transfer or passage from one person to the next) 
	
	a.	in general 

	b.	w. speech or information as object expressed or understood 

2	(prev.) completely, fully 
3	(prev.) (idiomatic or unclear) 
1	

parā 1 b 
9.	kuitta/kuišša parā “each in turn” 
	a.	w. tepu 
	b.	w. the items following 
	c.	w. other additions 

1	kuwapitta parā 
	11.	parā in combination w. other adverbs 
	a.	w. local adverbs 
	b.	w. other adverbs 
	12.	parā in nominal compounds 
	a.	LÚparauwant¢- “inspector, supervisor” 
	b.	LÚparauwatallā- “lookout” 
	c.	*parā negna- (a half-brother or step-brother?) 

pa-ra-a passim, pa-ra(-ma- …) KBo 24.63 ii? 12. 
1. (prev.) out (to), forth, toward (w. d.-l. or all., generally w. -kan) — a. parā allapahh- “to spit out” 
	(w. -kan): (The patient spits into the mouth of a puppy, and the Old Woman says to him:) pa-ra-aÚ waÚkan allapa[hta(?) (apel UD-aš)] EME-an “‘You have spit out the curse of that day.’ (Then they kill the puppy and bury it)” KBo 8.75:7-8 (2Mašt., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 32.115++ ii 17-18 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:358f., Collins, JCS 42:218 w. n. 38. 
	b. parā ar-“to arrive out at, come out to, extend/reach to” (w. local particle, rarely also without): “Then the king mounts the chariot and leaves the huwaši-stone” mahhanÚmaÚššan LUGAL-uš ANA KASKAL GAL pa-ra-a ari “When the king arrives (out) at the main road” KUB 10.18 i 24-25 (fest., OH/NS), ed. Haas/Wäfler, IM 23/24:19; “The Sungod of Heaven turned his rays” nÚašÚkan aruni pa-ra-a pa-it [(nu mā)n] ≠d±[UT]U-uš aruni pa-r[(a-a ar)]aš “and he went out to the sea. When the Sungod arrived (out) in the sea, …” KBo 26.58 iv 37-38 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.92 (+) KUB 36.10 iii 23-24, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f.; (The Tigris asks Gurparanzahu: Why are you weeping?) nuÚwaÚtaÚkkan šuppaya~ za [šāk]uwaza išhahru pa-ra-a araš¢“and tears have come forth from your sacred [ey]es?” KUB 17.9 i 2122 (Gurparanzahu, NH), one expects here a form of the verb arš-“to flow” (so Friedrich, ZA 39:45, HW2 1:215b); cf HW2 1:215f. s.v. ar-/er-III 6; (You know, O Stormgod, my lord) nuÚkan x[…] ANA ŠA DINGIR.MEŠ šaklāi pa-ra-a UL ari “[what] does not reach out to (i.e., attain or conform to) the requirement of the gods” KBo 11.1 obv. 20-21 (prayer of Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:106, 115 (“do not correspond to the usage of the Gods”), cf. šaklai-; (without local particle): mah~ 

109

hanÚmaÚat pa-ra-a aranzi “When they arrive outside (the gate)” VBoT 24 ii 15 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 110f. (“depart”), cf. ibid. ii 19; cf. HW2 s.v. ar-/er-III 215 “weiter gelangen.” 
c. parā arra-“to wash off” (w. -kan): DIN~ GIR.MEŠÚzaÚkan KAZUÚKUNU (var. É[.MEŠÚ KUNU]) [(pa-ra-a)] idālauwaz uddānaz linkiaz hūrd[(iyaz)] ēšhanaz išhahruaz ā
rranteš (var. ar~ ranza) ēšten “May you, O gods, be cleansed/ washed off with respect to your mouths (var. temples) from evil words, perjury, curses, blood (and) tears” KUB 43.58 ii 39-41 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.42 ii 28-31 (MH/NS). 
d. parā arrirra- “to scrape off” (w. -kan to be restored?): “In the inner-house they scrape off all the rafters and windows” a[ndurziyaÚma?Úkan? kuttaš k]uwapitta pa-ra-a purut arrirranzi “[and] i[nside, on the walls] they scrape off the plaster everywhere” KUB 7.13 obv. 8-9 (rit., NS), ed. THeth 12:122
124. 
e. parā arnu-(see also 3 a and 6 b 2') — 1' “to bring (an object) out, carry (a task out)” (w. -kan): “They open the door(leaves) and bring out (paraudanzi) Óebat” nÚanÚkan mahhan Éh®li arnuanzi nÚašta 2 GAL.ÓI.A GEŠTIN-it šūwanduš lāhū~ wanzi mahhanÚmaÚk[an] dÓebat Éhilamni pa-ra-a arnuanzi “When they bring her to the courtyard, they pour out two cups filled with wine. When they bring Óebat out (of the courtyard) to the portico, (then the king drinks the Sungod hāri (and) the deity Mušuni)” KBo 21.34 ii 4-6 (fest., MH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 2:119, 128; UMMA µ.GIŠPA-DINGIR-LIM ANA µÓimu-DINGIR-LIM ŠEŠ.DÙG.GAÚYA QI~ BIÚMA ŠA GIŠGIGIRÚmu kuit ŠA ANŠE.KUR.RA. ÓI.AÚya uttar hatrā
eš nu kaša EGIR-an tiyami nÚ atÚkan pa-ra-a arnumi “Thus says Óattušili: speak to my dear brother Óimuili: ‘Regarding the matter of a chariot and horses about which you wrote to me: I am tending to it now and will carry it out” HKM 27 rev. 11-16 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 168f.; for parahamešhanda arnuzi KBo 6.3 iv 60-61 see 5 b 3', below. 
2' “to cause (offerings, etc.) to reach out to or correspond to (a requirement or standard [šaklai])” 
(w. -kan): “But as I, My Majesty, bid the gods enter the country of Kummanni — [because negli

parā 1 g 2' 

gence oc]curs” nuÚkan x[ o o o o] ANA ŠA DIN~ GIR.MEŠ šaklāi pa-ra-a UL ari … nuÚkan Š[A DINGIR.M]EŠ [kuit š]aklayaš pa-r[a-a UL] arnu~ an harmi dUÚat ENÚYA šakti “[offerings] did not reach up to (i.e., correspond to) the rite of the gods. … and [what] I have not made to reach up to (i.e., correspond to) the rules/standards of the gods, you, Stormgod, my Lord, know it” KBo 11.1 obv. 20-23 (prayer, NH), ed. Houwink ten Cate/Josephson, RHA XXV/ 81:106-107, 115-116. 
f. parā arš(iya)- “to flow out/forth” (w. -ašta or -kan): “They enter the city of Taur®ša” nÚašta wā
tar kuwapi pa-ra-a aršzi “and where water flows forth, (there they put a table in front of it)” KUB 
15.34 iii 23-24 (evocation, MH/MS?), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:196f., Zuntz, Scongiuri 34f., cf. eadem, Ortsadv. 61; takkuÚkan antuhšaš GIŠNÁ-aš šešzi nuÚššiÚkan KAZU-az iššalli [(pa-r)]a-a GÙB-li mieni āraš~ šiyazi “If a man sleeps in (his) bed and saliva runs out of his mouth onto his left cheek” KUB 29.9 i 13-15 (tr. of Akk. šumma ālu type omens, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79, cf. meni- A 2; “The Stormgod sat down on the ground” nuÚššiÚkan išhahru [pa-ra-]a PAﬁ. 
¢	ÓI.A-uš mān aršanzi “and his tears flow forth like streams” KUB 33.113 i 16-17 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:12-13 (i 29'-30'), rest. after similar phrases in KUB 8.48 i 18, KUB 17.3 ii 5 (both Gilg., NS), KBo 19.112:18 (Óedammu, NS) and KUB 36.25 iv 4 (Kumarbi frag., NS). In this expression parā is absent in KBo 10.47c+h iv 31 (Gilg., NS), w. dupl. KUB 8.53 rev. 5-6. 
g. parā au(š)-— 1' “to disregard, overlook, ignore” (w. -kan): zik[Úza DAMÚK]A DUMUÚKA ‰R.MEŠÚKA ANA TI LUGAL LÚ.MEŠuškiškattalluš [LÚ.MEŠh]aliyattalluš ē
šten ÓUL-uiÚmaÚkan pa-raa [lē] uškatteni “You, y[our wife], your son, your servants, must be lookouts (and) [wa]tchmen for the king’s life and do [not] ignore (any) evil” KBo 
4.14 iii 9-12 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. van den Hout, 
Diss. 292f., Stefanini, AANL 20:44, tr. (differently) THeth ¢ 20:252 (“Do not look forth to evil”). 
2' LÚ.MEŠpa-ra-a(-)uwatalluš “lookouts”: [ANA] 
ZI LUGAL UGU DAMÚKA DUMU.MEŠÚKA 
‰R.MEŠÚKA ā

ššau[waš] / [LÚ.MEŠ]haliyatalluš ašan~ 

du	ÓUL-uwašÚmaÚk[an?]/ [LÚ.M]EŠhaliyatalluš 
LÚ.MEŠpa-ra-a(-)uwatalluššÚa lē “Concerning the 

110

life of the king — your wife, your sons, (and) your servants must be watchmen for the good. May they not be watchmen and lookouts for the bad” KBo 4.14 iii 16-18 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 292f., differently, in the sense of “disregard, overlook”; also differently: van Brock, Dér.Nom.L 82 (“négligeur”), THeth 
20:252 w. n. 959 (“Let them not be inattentive men and haliya~ talla-s of evil”), Stefanini, AANL 20:45 (restores āššau[š] and takes ÓUL-uwaš as nom. pl. com.). 
3' parā(-)uwant-“supervisor”: see separate lemma. 
h. parā ehu “come out!”: cf. VBoT 24 i 25-29 s.v. lulim(m)i- a. 

i. parā

epp-/app- (w. -kan) “to take out, select”: “His (i.e., the Protective Deity of Karahna’s) temple has been beautified on the inside by the goldsmith and the stonecutter. His resettled persons have been counted” PAP (marking a short section illegible for the Hittite scribe) LÚ.MEŠhilammatešÚ šiÚkan pa-ra-a DIB-anza annallešÚši 9 LÚ.MEŠhi~ lammateš kinunÚaÚššiÚkan 9 LÚ.MEŠhilammatten annallaš É-aš EGIR-anda pa-ra-a DIB-ir nÚaš 18 LÚ.MEŠhilammateš annallaš É-aš “His hilammatamen have been selected. Formerly he had nine hil~ ammata-men, but now they have selected afterwards nine additional hilammata-men of the old temple: that makes 18 hilammata-men of the old temple” KUB 38.12 i 3-7 (cult inv., NH), cf. ibid. ii 19, iii 6, KBo 2.1 i (23) (w. -kan), ii 4 (without -kan) (cult inv., NH; for another mng. of parā ēpp-see 3 b, below. 
j. parā hahharš-/:hahrešš- “to laugh out loud at, mock” (w. d.-l. and -kan): “The people of Dalauwa killed Kišnapili and Partahulla” µMa[ddu~ watt]ašÚmaÚšmašÚkan pa-ra-a hahharaškit “and Ma[dduwatt]a laughed at them” KUB 14.1 obv. 72 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f. (“hatte sie aufgehetzt”), for interpretation see Sommer, HAB 84 (“führte Spottreden über sie(= Kišnapili and Partahulla)” or “… bei, zu ihnen (= people of Dalauwa)”), the restoration of [hahharaškit] after parā in KUB 14.1 rev. 42 is less likely because of the implied local interpretation of the dat.-loc.; “I (i.e., the queen) started to lament” nuÚmuÚkan LÚ.MEŠKARTAPPU pa-ra-a :hahreškanzi “and the chariot-drivers laughed out loud at me” KUB 31.71 iii 5-6 (dream report of the queen, NH), ed. Sommer, HAB 84, THeth 6:122f., THeth 20:188 w. n. 699, tr. Güterbock, OrNS 25:124. 

parā 1 n 
k. parā handai- “to straighten out (wool), stretch out straight”: “She takes black wool, yellow wool, red wool, (and) blue wool, she unravels them” nammaÚat pa-ra-a handān anda tarnai “And then she lays them together stretched out straight” KUB 
7.1 ii 15 (rit., pre-NH/NS), cf. malk-, malkiya- 2. Since a verbal substantive of handai-w. the form handauwar is attested (KBo 1.35 iv 12, KUB 15.31 i 11, KUB 41.21 iv 17), it is unlikely that parā handatar or parā han~ dandatar, q.v., is a verbal substantive from parā handai-. 
	l. parā hark- “to be missing, disappear”: [takku GIŠMAR.G´D.D]A-aš GIŠhišši 2 MUL pa-ra-a h[(arkzi)] “[If on The Wago]n’s pole a double star disappears (i.e., falls out)” KUB 8.14 obv.! 12 (omen, NS), w. dupl. KUB 34.16 ii 5, ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 130, 132, see also 346f.; similar KUB 34.16 ii 7-8; in frag. context, […]x Égurdaz dTitiwattiš […]x BIBRIÓI.A pa-ra-a harkir Bo 3948 ii 1-2, ed. StBoT 29:162 n. 391. 
	m. parā huwai- “to hasten/rush forth” (without local particle): warraš udda[n]i šumeš mahhan para-a huyadduma LÚ.MEŠ URUPahhuwaÚya pa-raa QA_TA[MMA huyandaru(?)] “as you hasten/rush forth at a call for help, may also the people of Pahhuwa like[wise hasten/rush] forth” KUB 23.72 rev. 20 (Mita of Pahhuwa, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 5:61, cf. Gurney, AAA 28:36, Zuntz, Ortsadv. 62. 

n. parā huittiya- “to pull or drag out; close(?)” 
(w. -ašta and -kan): [(nÚaš)]ta [(DINGIR-LIM-ni) :zuwan kuw(at)] KAZU-it pa-ra-a SUD-atteni nÚ anÚza [arha (datteni)] “Why do you pull the food out of the god’s mouth and take it [away] for yourselves?” KUB 13.4 ii 16-17 (instr., pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 13.5 ii 25-26, KUB 13.6 ii 9, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 38f.; “A dog ran off with a kugulla-bread from in front of an oven” pa-ra-aÚanÚkan huittiat UDUN-niyaz “It pulled it out from the oven” KBo 32.14 iii 10 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil., MH/MS), cf. ibid. rev. 28; mahhanÚma UD-az wahnuzi nÚušÚkan pa-ra-a huittiyanzi “When the day turns, they pull them (i.e., the horses) out (of the stables) (and hitch them up)” KUB 29.40 ii 11 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 178f., cf. also ibid. iv 17; “When it becomes night time, he puts up the lamps” nuÚkan É.DINGIR-LIM [p]a-ra-a SUD-anzi LÚSANGAÚmaÚkan LÚÓALÚya [P]A_NI KÁ-aš še~ 
111

šanzi “and they close(?) the temple (by pulling outward the doors that opened toward the inside), and the priest and the exorcist sleep in front of the gate” KUB 31.113:15-16 (instr.?, NS), w. dupl. KUB 57.36 obv. 3-4, ed. Haas, KN 130f.; cf. nuÚkan É.DINGIR-LIM pa-raa huittiyanzi KBo 2.4 i 21-22 (NH), ed. Haas, KN 278f., cf. Ehelolf, OLZ 29 (1926) 987f. (“schliešen”), Zuntz, Ortsadv. 69 (“schliessen”); for a different mng. of parā huittiya- see 3 i, below. 
	o. parā iya- (mid.) “to go out (to …)” (w. -kan): pa-ra-aÚmaÚašÚkan UL iya[(ttari manqa)] “but he (sc. the substitute king) never goes out” KBo 15.2 iv 5 (substitution rit.), w. dupl. KUB 17.31 i 7, ed. StBoT 3:60f.; cf. also KUB 22.50:7 (oracle question, NH); for a different mng. of parā iya-see 3 l, below. 
	p. parā iyannai-“to start moving out(?)” (w. -kan): māhhanÚma[Úka]n GIŠhuluganniš pa-ra-a iyannai “But when the cart begins to move out(?)” IBoT 1.36 ii 23-24 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:16f. 

q. parā išhuwai- (w. -ašta or -kan) — 1' (lit.) “to pour out/away, discard: [n]Úašta šanhanzi nÚašta SAÓAR.ÓI.A-uš pa-ra-a išhū¢
wanzi “They swept/ cleaned and poured out the dust” KUB 7.49:2-3 (fest., NS), ed. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 62. 
2' (fig.) “to discard, violate (a custom or rite)(?)”: “Thus (said) Pallū
: ‘… [and] they performed a ritual in the house’” šaklainÚmaÚwaÚ kan pa-ra-a UL išhuwair [nuÚwaÚ]zaÚkan apez azzikimi § “but they did not discard(?)/violate(?) the rite, [and] therefore I will eat’” KBo 13.64 obv. 18-19 (oracle question, NH). 
	r. parā išparnu- “to sprinkle out, disperse”: 1 DUMU É.GALÚma IŠTU GAL pa-ra-a watkunu~ maš wātar pāi šuwaruÚyaÚkan anda nu wātar šuwaruwa[š(?)] 1-ŠU pa-ra-a išparnuzi “From a cup one palace attendant gives water for sprinkling (cf. 1 ddd 2', below), and šuwaru is in (it); and he (i.e., the palace attendant) sprinkles out the water of šu~ waru (i.e., water with šuwaru in it) once” KBo 27.40 obv.? 6-9 (fest. for deities of the netherworld, NS) □ for an early study of šuwaru see StBoT 2:14f.; cf. 1 aa and 1 ddd 2' below. 
	s. parā ištap-“to shut out” (w. -kan): idaluÚkan pa-ra-a (var. ša-ra-a) ištapdu ā

ššuÚwaÚkan anda 

parā 1 y 

kurkdu “Let it (sc. the door which they have just closed and anointed with fine oil) shut out (var. up) evil and hold good inside” KUB 9.31 ii 38 (Zarpiya’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. HT 1 ii 12, ed. Schwartz, JAOS 85:342f., translit. Otten, LTU 16, HED 1-2:472 s.v. ištap(p)-; ištapptakes preverbs anda (“shut in”), āppa (“shut up”), and (in our dupl.) šarā. šarā makes no sense here; the parā reading of KUB 
9.31 which forms an excellent contrast to anda kurk-is to be preferred. 
	t. parā karp- “to pick out” (w. -ašta): “Then the same guard who brings in the defendants, runs back; he goes and takes his stand with the gold-spear-man” nÚašta namma 1 DÂNAM pa-ra-a kar~ panzi “and they pick out the next case” IBoT 1.36 iii 11 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f., to be restored also ibid. iii 3 (without -ašta); for a different mng. of parā karp-see 3 o, below. 
	u. parā la(h)huwai- “to pour out”: “[The exorcist] takes two jugs of water” nÚašta wā

tar 7-ŠU anda [lāhui
hu]i pa-ra-aÚyaÚkan ´D-i anda 7-ŠU la“he pours the water seven times into them, and pours it out seven times into the river” KBo 5.2 i 5354 (rit., MH/NS); “The priest holds out water with a pitcher to the deities’ hands” ANA EN.SISKURÚ yaÚkan apezÚpat IŠTU ZA.ÓUM KÙ.BABBAR ŠU.MEŠ-aš wā¢[i] “and for the
tar [(pa-)]≠ra±-a lahusacrificer he pours out hand water (sc. water for washing hands) from that same silver pitcher” KUB 
39.71 iii 40-42 (rit. for Ištar/Pirinkir, NH), w. dupl. KUB 39.70 ii 2-4, cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 63; cf. KBo 10.45 i 26 s.v. la(h)~ huwai- 1 b. 
	v. parā lalukkešš- (w. -kan) “to shine forth”: see lalukkeš- 2. 
	w. parā maušš- “to fall out”: see maušš- b 7'. 
	x. parā nai-“to send out/off, dispatch” (usu. w. -ašta or -kan): see nai- 4 a 3'-4 b; this combination normally occurs w. -ašta or -kan; there seems to be only one passage that lacks a sentence particle: kāšma ariyašeššar pa-ra-a neyauen “Herewith we have sent off the oracle result” KBo 18.140:3-4 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:198f., cf. mahhan 3 c; for another mng. of parā nai-see 3 q, below. 
	y. parā pai- A “to go forth (to)/out, leave” (w. -ašta, -kan, -šan, and without local particle): nuÚ 

112

kan MUNUS.ŠU.GI pa-ra-a paizzi nu–kan Éhīli šāwātar pariparāi “The Old Woman goes out and blows the horn in the courtyard” KUB 35.163 iii 17-18 (rit. containing Pal., OH?/NS); n–ašta GAL MEŠEDI Éhīli pa-ra-a paizzi nu ANA LÚ GIŠGIDRU tezzi zinir zinir “The chief of the guards goes out into the courtyard and says to the staff-bearer: ‘Lyre, lyre!’” KBo 4.9 v 32-33 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS); n–at–šan ´D-i pa-ra-a pānzi “And they go out to the river” KUB 29.4 iii 41-42 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 24f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 63; n–aš–kan pa-ra-a Éhīli paizzi “He goes out into the courtyard” KUB 7.41 i 22 (rit., MH/ MS?), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f.; n–e–šta namma pa-ra-a hīla paizzi “He then goes out into the courtyard” KBo 21.90 obv. 21 (rit., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 23:154; cf. further exx. in pai-A “to go” 1 j 19' a'; for a different meaning of parā pai-A see 3 r, below. 
z. parā pai-B to give out(ward) (w. -kan) (opposite of andan pai-B): ANA LÚ.MEŠ É.NA›–ya– kan AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM andan peškandu pa-ra-a–ma–kan DUMU.NITA DUMU.MUNUS AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM LÚandaiyandanni–ya lē kuiški paī“Let them give (women) into (the royal mausoleum) as brides to the men of the mausoleum, but let no one (there) give out a son or a daughter as a bride or a son-in-law” KUB 13.8:13-15 (decree, MH/NS), ed. Otten, HTR 106f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 59; for another mng. of parā pai-B see 6 a 3', below. 
aa. parā papparš- “to sprinkle (out)”: [… (wāta)]r pa-ra-a papparšz[(i)] “He sprinkles out the water, (and the king washes his hands above the pebbles)” KUB 48.10 ii 4 (fest.), w. dupl. 115/t, ed. Kühne, ZA 70:96; cf. also parā watkunu-(1 ddd 2') and parā išparnu(1 r). 
bb. parā parh- “to chase out” (w. -ašta): n–ašta LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· LÚ.MEŠhalliyarēš LÚ.MEŠpalwatallaš LÚkītann–a pa-ra-a parhanzi “They chase out (of the temple of ZA.BA›.BA›) the performers, the singers, the criers, and the declaimer” KBo 4.9 iii 2325 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:58f. (who mistranslates parā parhanzi as “corrono fuori”), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 64; for an OS example see StBoT 23:141 (no. 204). 
cc. parā parkunu- “to clean out” (w. -kan): “The aforementioned prince repeatedly says: ‘What formerly (was) in the grain-storage pits, that has al-

parā 1 hh 1' 

~	ready been completely emptied’” nu–wa–kan para-a parkunuwan≠du±? n–ašta pa-ra-a šanhir par~ kunuir “‘and they must clean (it) out.’ And they swept (and) cleaned it out” KUB 31.71 iv 20-21 (dream, NH), ed. Werner, FsOtten 328f.; cf. also parā peššiya-(1 gg). 

dd. parā pīya- “to send forth/out to, dispatch” (without local particle): [mān–an] LUGAL-uš–ma lamnizzi n–an–za pa-ra-a pīē[zzi appezziš–ma– aš(?)] mān LÚ-LUM n–an–za ZI-it pa-ra-a UL pīē[zzi] “But [if] the king names [him], then he (i.e., the gatekeeper) dispatch[es] him. [But] if [he] is a [lowly(?)] man, he does not dispatch him on his own initiative” IBoT 1.36 i 30-32 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:8f. 
ee. parā pehute-“to lead out” (w.-kan): n–uš– kan LÚ.MEŠ GIŠGIDRU pa-ra-a pehudanzi “the staff-bearers lead them (sc. dignitaries seated before the king) out” KBo 34.185 i 5 (fest.); for parā pehute“to lead forward” see 3 s, below. 
ff. parā penna- “to drive forth/out” (w. -ašta, -kan): kinun–a–wa–kan kue kallar idālu uddār LÚ.MEŠ GIŠGIDRU ŠA DINGIR.MEŠ pa-ra-a pe~ nirir nu–war–at EGIR-pa INA É-TIM lē tarnaši “You must not allow back into the house the ominous (and) evil words that the staff-bearers of the gods have now driven out” KBo 4.2 ii 19-21 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Collins, JCS 42:212, cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 64; n– ašta SILA› pa-ra-a pennanzi “They drive forth a 

~ 

lamb” KBo 23.15 i 35 + KBo 23.5 i 8 (rit., NS); nu UDU (var. UDU–ma–kan) LÚM[(UHALDIM pa-ra-a)] pennāi “The cook drives forth a sheep” KUB 32.2 ii 10 + FHG 3:11 (rit., NS?), w. dupl. KUB 39.71 iii 31 (NS); for a different mng. of parā penna-see 3 t, below. 
gg. parā peššiya- (w. -kan): “to throw out, discard”: “Good must enter the house, …” n–at–kan pa-ra-a peššiyaddu parkunuddu “it must discard it (i.e., evil) (and) clean it out” KUB 41.8 ii 13-14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f.; text probably corrupt; for a different mng. of parā peššiya-see 3 u, below. 
hh. parā peda- “to bring/carry out to/toward” — 1' w. -ašta: “The cupbearer brings (in) here one thick-bread from outside (arahza udai). The king breaks (it). The cupbearer takes (it)” t–ašta para-a pē
dai “and carries (it back) out” KBo 17.11 i 7 + KBo 30.25 i 23 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.74 i 23 (OH/ 
113

MS), ed. StBoT 12:12f.; [n–ašt]a? NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A para-a parna pedai “He carries the sweet oil cake out to (his) house” KUB 33.62 iii 5 (rit., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 
23:154. 
2' w. -kan: (The king breaks the bread) LÚSAGI. A–kan LUGAL-i NINDA.GUR›.RA ēpzi n–an–kan pa-ra-a pēdai “The cupbearer takes the bread from the king and carries it out” KUB 11.35 v 13-15 (fest., OH/NS); nu–kan kue GIŠŠUKUR.HI.A ā
šzi n–at–kan pa-ra-a pēdanzi n–at ITTI LÚ.MEŠ‰.DU° tianzi “Then they carry out those spears that are left and deposit them with the gatekeepers” IBoT 1.36 i 14 (instr., MH/ MS), ed. AS 24:6f. 
ii. parā piddai- A (w. -kan) “to run out”: nu– kan EN.SISKUR [p]a-ra-a piddāizzi UN-aš–ma EGIR-pa tūwa tiyazi nu tezzi uizzi EN.SISKUR UH‡-anza UN-aš “The sacrificer runs out. A person steps way back and says: ‘Here comes the sacrificer, the bewitched person’” KUB 30.36 iii 4-7 (rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 3:74; “And Kešši saw a seventh dream: he went to the lions (i.e., to hunt)” n–aš– kan pa-ra-a ā¢
ški (var. aškaš) piddait “and he ran out to the (city) gate. (In front of the gate he found serpents and sphinxes)” KUB 17.1 ii 12 (myth., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.121 iii 13 (NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:238f. (“lief hinaus ans Tor”). 
jj. parā piddai- B (w. -kan) “to carry out”: [kī k]uit NU.SIGﬁ-[t]a nu–kan DINGIR.MEŠ–ma para-a piddaiškiuan [tianz]i UL–ma–kan kuit pa-ra-a piddāiškir [nu–kan] apaddan šer ANA DINGIR. MEŠ kuedaniya ANA DINGIR-LIM [1 UDU za]n~ kilatar BAL-anzi “[Regarding the fact t]hat it (i.e., the oracle result) was unfavorable: Or shall th[ey start] carrying out (the statues of) the deities? But because they did not use to carry (them) out, shall they therefore for the gods, for each deity, offer [one sheep as co]mpensation?” KUB 22.40 ii 18-21 (oracle question, NH), cf. ibid. ii passim. 
kk. parā
šai-/šiya- “to sprout forth”: [man p]ara-a–ma šiyati “[When,] however, it sprouted forth (i.e., became spring)” KUB 36.101 ii 9 (Zukraši text, OS), cf. similar [… pa-ra-]a šiyati KBo 3.54 obv. 11 (hist., OH/NS), cf. Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:61, differently Kempinski/Košak, Tel Aviv 9:90, 93 (= line 42, “he pounces forward”); 14 kappiš ŠE pa-ra-a šiyannaš GIŠŠINIG 

parā 1 oo 

tepu GIŠERIN tepu “fourteen kappi-vessels of barley able to germinate (lit. barley ‘of sprouting forth’), a bit of tamarisk, a bit of cedar” KBo 5.2 i 38-39 (rit., MH/NS), cf. Laroche, BSL 58:75 (“grain de plantation”), Kronasser, EHS 1:505 (“keimfähige Gerste”), differently Zuntz, Ortsadv. 74 (“Gefäše mit Getreide zum Versiegeln”); cf. KBo 5.5 i 10. 
ll. parā šalik- “to reach out(?)/forward(?)” — 1' (without local particle): nu LÚAZU pa-ra-a ša~ likzi nu EN.SISKUR ŠU-an ēpzi “The exorcist reaches out/forward and takes the sacrificer by the hand” KBo 5.2 iii 36-37 (rit., MH/NS). 
2' (w. -kan): ašannaš–ši GIŠŠÚ.A-an tiyandu (sic; error for tīēr) n–aš–za UL [eš]at adannaš– ma–šši GIŠBANŠUR-un unuē
r nu–kan pa-ra-a UL šal[ikt]a “They set up a chair for him (sc. the Sun-god) to sit down on, but he did not [s]it down. They set a table for him to eat, but he did not reach out. (They gave him a cup, but he did not put his lip to it)” KUB 33.96 iv 15-16 + KUB 36.7a iv 52-53 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:160f., tr. Hittite Myths 55; cf. KBo 19.112 rev.? 6 (Hedammu, NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.112A:5 (NS). 
mm. parā šanh- “to clean/sweep out” (w. -kan): É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–ya–kan pa-ra-a šanhdu harniyaddu “And he (i.e., the priest) must clean out the temples (and) sprinkle (them)” KUB 56.48 i 18 (fest., NS), translit. StBoT 26:55 n. 261; cf. above cc and similar KUB 31.113:12-13, ed. Haas, KN 130f.; KUB 41.30 iii 8. 
nn. parā šartai- “to wash away, dislodge” (without local particle): appaliyallaš–a É?[-ir–šet] / karaitti pēran w[etan] / karaīz lāhu[i] / n–at para-a šartai n–at / aruna [pēdai(?)] “The fool’s house is b[uilt] in the path of the flood (i.e., in a dry riverbed); the flood will flow, wash it away, and [carry] it to the sea” KUB 36.110 rev. 17-21 (benedictions for Labarna, OS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi2 50f., cf. lah(h)uwai- 3 □ the appaliyallaš is “(the man) of deceit,” i.e., one easily deceived; hence the tr. “fool.” The fool plays a principal role in wisdom stories. The formation of appaliyalla-, ap~ pali + -alla-proves (contra Puhvel, HED 1-2:95f.) that the base noun is a neut. i-stem, not common gender a-stem. Puhvel’s tr. “trapper, ensnarer, ambusher” makes no sense in this passage. 
oo. parā šippa- “to scrape(?) off”: […]x–ma INA É LÚKUŠ‡ GUD SI pa-ra-a šippanzi “… in the house of the chariot warrior they scrape(?) off the 

114

…” KUB 51.15 rev. 3 (fest., NS) □ GUD SI is not likely to be for SI GUD “horn of an ox”; although a reading GUD UDU! would fit the sequence of the signs and the approximate shape of the second sign, if šippanzi is from the verb šapp-/šipp-/ šapiya-, no established meaning of this verb fits GUD UDU as an object; a remote possibility is that GUD.SI stands for GUD. SI.DILI “battering ram” (cf. Steinkeller, NABU 1987 no. 2, item #27, written so at Ebla, without det. GIŠ), otherwise known at Bo©azköy in the writing GIŠGUD.SI.DILI; if so, then the House of the Chariot Warrior was a kind of general armory in which work could be done on siege implements. 
pp. parā šuwai- “to drive out” (w. -kan): nu– wa–kan kuit kuit kallar idālu uttar kedanīÉ-ri anda nu–war–at–kan pa-ra-a šūwandu “Let them drive out whatever ominous (and) evil thing (is) in this house” KBo 4.2 i 66-68 (rit., pre-NH/NS), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 70; for a different mng. of parā šuwai-see 6 a 5', below. 
qq. parā šuhha- “to pour/scatter out” (without local particle): namma LÚAZU anahita dāi hubrušhi pa-ra-a šuhhāi “Then the exorcist takes morsels (and) pours (them) out into the hubrušhi-vessel” KUB 11.31 i 22-23 (rit., MH/MS?), ed. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 66. 
rr. parā šuppiyahh- “to clean/wash out”(?) (w. -kan): lukatt[a–ma–kan LÚAZU KAZU–Š]U para-a kiššan šuppiyahhi … nu–za–kan KAZU–ŠU pa-ra-a šuppiahhi “The next mornin[g the exorcist] cleans out(?) [he]r (i.e., the pregnant woman’s) [mouth] as follows: … and she cleans out her own mouth” KBo 17.65 obv. 10-12 (rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:132f. 

ss. parā

da- “to take out (of a group), pick out, select” — 1' (without local particle): U 1 kapunu A.ŠÀ pa-ra-a dāš “and one kapunu-measure of field he selected” KBo 22.1 obv. 14-15 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46; cf. also KBo 17.105 ii 41 (invoc., MH/ MS); (The Egyptian queen writes to Šuppiluliuma: “My husband has died …”) ‰R–YA–ma–wa nūwan¢pa-ra-a dahhi “but I do not want to pick out a subject of mine (and make him my husband)” KBo 5.6 iii 14 (DŠ), cf. nūman, nūwan, cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 71. 
2' (w. -kan): [… n]amma–kan LÚpātiliš DUMU. NITA pa-ra-a dāi “[… F]urther, the patilli-priest takes the (stillborn) boy baby out” Bo 4951 rev.? 10 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:124f. 

parā 1 vv 2' 
tt. parā dai- “to put forth, bring out” — 1' (w. -kan): nu–kan karūlā [pa-r]a-a ti~
iliya URUDUardayandu nepiš tekann–a kuēz arha kuerir “Let them bring [ou]t the old saw, with which they cut apart heaven and earth” KUB 33.106 iii 52-53 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:28f.; UNU_TE_ 
MEŠ–ya–kan hantezzi para-a tiškanzi “First they will bring out the implements” KUB 22.70 rev. 48 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:94f.; cf. ibid. rev. 61-62. 
2' (w. -šan): nu MUNUS [ p]aizzi harnāui UŠ~ KÊN namma–šša[n] QA_TAM harnāui pa-ra-a dāi “The woman [g]oes (and) bows to the birth-stool, then she puts forth (her) hand toward the birth-stool” KUB 9.22 ii 33-35 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:92f.; cf. similarly ibid. iii 36-37. For phrases like kuitta parā tepu daī see 9 a, below. 
uu. parā talliya- “to call forth”: parhuenaš–šan kitta nu–ššan pa-ra-a tallianz[a?] ≠ēš± kalaktar–šan kitta nu–ššan parā k[alankanza ēš(?)] “parhuenagrain is lying (here), so be called forth. kalaktar is lying (here), so [be] fully p[acified]” KUB 33.62 ii 1415 (rit., OH/MS); fragmentary: pa-ra-a talliškanzi KBo 
26.207:5. 
vv. parā tarna-(cf. 6 a 6', below) “to let go, release, set free, let out” — 1' (without local particle) — a' to set free, let go: nu UDU pa-ra-a tar~ nanzi “and they let the sheep go” KBo 24.1 i 24 (3Mašt., MH/MS); man¢–ta–kkan pa-ra-a tarnumar–ma [āššu(?) nu] tuel ‰R-TAM GÉME-TAM p[a-ra-a tarna] “If [it is] your [wish(?)] to set free(?), then set free your male and female slave” KBo 32.15 iii 34 (MH/MS), restored after Hurr. version (iv 2-3: a-i ú-ri-u kire-en-zi ki-ru-un-na bu-ra-am-mi-ib ki-i-ru(-)nu-ul-mi-ib) (Hurr. bil., MS), ed. Neu, Hurritische 11f.; for parā tarna- in the Hurr. bil. see Neu, Hurritische 10-15. 
b' “to let out” (words): eni–za kuit dUTU-ši AWAT MUNUS LUGAL antuhšaš katta GUL-ah~ handaš pa-ra-a UL tarnaš “Concerning the aforementioned matter of the queen and the beaten people which His Majesty would not let out (saying do not say anything to me)” KUB 22.70 rev. 44 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:92f. 
2' (w. -kan): n–ašta anda–ya UL kuinki tarnai pa-ra-a–ya–kan UL kuinki tarna[i] “He (i.e., a guard) lets no one enter and lets no one leave” IBoT 
115

1.36 i 73 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:12f.; nu–kan GUD UDU UL kuiški pa-ra-a tarnai “and no one will let out an ox (and/or) sheep” KUB 17.35 iv 7 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 132, 146. 
3' (w. -ašta): n–ašta nakkuššahiti pa-ra-a UN-an tarnai man–ši ZI–ŠU–ma n–ašta pa-ra-a GUDun tarnai “He will release a man in the status of a scapegoat, or, if he wishes, he will release an ox” KBo 5.2 iii 33-35 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH/NS), ed. van Brock, RHA XVII/65:128, cf. nakkuššahit- and Zuntz, Ortsadv. 71; “They inflate a [wal]ū
la, then they flatten it with (their) feet” n–ašta parāš pa-ra-a [tar]nattari “(so that) the air is released” KBo 6.34 iii 31-32 (soldier’s oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:12f. 
ww. parā uwa- “to come out/forward, protrude(?)” — 1' (w. -ašta): n–ašta mān «GI» appez~ ziš DUMU É.GAL pa-ra-a uizzi “If a palace-attendant of the lowest rank comes out” IBoT 1.36 i 20-21 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:4f. 
2' (w. -kan): LUGAL-uš–kan pa-ra-a uizzi “The king comes out (of the palace)” IBoT 1.36 ii 15 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:16f.; n–at–kan pa-ra-a ŠA LÚME~ ŠEDI Éhīlaz uiškandari “Then they come out of the guards’ courtyard” ibid. i 74, ed. AS 24:12f.; “Let the tower of … be x gipeššar around the top, but around the bottom let it be six gipeššar; and let it be encircled by a gutter and a mariyawanna” mariyawan~ na–ma–kan peran arha 6 gipeššar ē[(št)]u pa-raa–ma–at–kan 5 šekan uwan ē
štu “Let the mariya~ wanna be six gipeššar in circumference(?) (peran arha), and let it protrude(?) five šekan” KUB 31.84 ii 3-4 (BE_L MADGALTI), w. dupl. KUB 31.86 ii 3-5 + KUB 48.104:12, ed. Dienstanw. 42, cf. mariyawanna-. 
xx. parā uwate- “to lead out” — 1' (w. -šan): nu– ššan É[RIN.MEŠ URU]Dalauwa KASKAL-ši para-a ≠uwater± “Then they led the tr[oops of the city of] Dalauwa out onto the road (and blocked it)” KUB 14.1 obv. 71 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f. 
2' (w. -kan): kuin uwateši n–an GIŠAN.ZA.GÀR GIM-an parganuši kuin–ma–[ka]n apel–pat we~ tandaš pa-ra-a uwateš[i] “Another you bring and make him high like a tower, still another you lead out to his wetanda-s” KUB 24.7 ii 11-13 (hymn to Ištar, NH), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:158f., cf. ibid. 162f. 

parā 1 bbb 

yy. parā uiya- “to send forth/out to, dispatch” 
(w. -za but without local particle): šummaš–ma kuiēš LÚ.MEŠSAG nu–za pa-ra-a kuinki kuedanikki uiyami “You who (are) eunuchs(?): (if) I send someone (of you) out to someone” KUB 26.1 iii 61-63 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 14. 
zz. parā unna- “to drive out” (w. -kan): “You will take birds and a goat around inside the house, and he will beat them in the four corners” n–uš– kan pa-ra-a ū
nnatti “then you will drive them out” KUB 30.34 iv 12 (purif. rit., MH/NS). 
aaa. parā uda- “to bring out” — 1' (without local particle): nu–ššan mahhan UZU.‰ ari nu UZUN´G.GIG UZUŠÀ UZU–ya hū
man ANA DINGIRLIM pa-ra-a udanzi “When the fat is hot, they bring the liver, the heart, and all the meat out (sc. of the kitchen) to the deity” HT 1 i 49-50 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 67 (“bringen sie weiter zu dem Gotte”), Schwartz, JAOS 58:338f. □ The wider context indicates activities at a gate, i.e., outside. It is unclear if the above-mentioned materials are fetched from inside the temple, in which case “bring out” would be preferred to “bring forward” (= mng. 3). This passage, including its duplicate KUB 54.65 iv! 6-7, seems to be the only one without sentence particles. In all other cases parā uda- is accompanied by either -ašta or -kan; perhaps the -šan of the preceding clause has carried over its force to the parā udanzi clause. 
2' (w. -kan): “They put the livers (and) the breads in front of the deity. Then they leave the livers (and) breads right in the temple” UL[–a]t– kan pa-ra-a udanzi “They do not bring them out” IBoT 3.148 iii 4 (rit., MH?/NS). 
3' (w. -ašta): “One hapiya-man and a hartagga
man follow him(?), and a taraši-man goes to the nik NINDAku
oven” t–ašta NINDAtūittann¢–a pa-ra-[a] udai “and he brings out a tunik-bread and a kuittabread” KUB 56.46 vi 7-9 (frag. mentioning a NIN.DINGIR, OH/NS), translit. StBoT 25:102 (= lines 14'-16'); [n]–ašta LÚSANGA 2 BIBRU DINGIR-LIM [I]ŠTU É.DIN~ GIR-LIM pa-ra-a udai [n]–aš arahza pēdai “The priest brings two BIBRU-vessels of the god out of the temple and carries them outside” KBo 23.1 ii 3234 (rit., NH). 
bbb. parā warš- “to wipe/brush(?) out” (w. -kan): nu NUMUN.HI.A hūmand[a (dāi)] n–at 

116

IŠTU NA›ARAﬁ mallizzi ŠA NA›ARAﬁ–ma hararazi (var. ŠA NA›hararazi, omits ARAﬁ–ma) NA›kunk[(u~ nuzit)] walhannai n–aš–kan pa-ra-a waršanz[(i)] “He takes all the seeds (neut. pl.) and grinds them (neut.) with the millstone. He pounds them (neut.) with the basalt(?) of the millstone and wipes/brushes(?) them (obj. changes to common gender) out” KBo 10.45 iii 2-5 (rit. for infernal deities, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 ii 37-40 (MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:126-129 (“Man wischt sie aus”). 
ccc. parā watku- “to spring forth” (w. -ašta or -kan): [ta]kku–wa–šta É-irz[a arha kuiški(?)] paizzi n–ašta āšk[uēš …] pa-ra-a hanti watkuanz[i] “[I]f [somebody] goes [out of] the house, and ā
šku-animals […] jump separately out, (then … will fall)” KUB 34.22 i 1-3 (omen, NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 204f., Collins, Diss. 260f.; dUTU-uš–kan AN-za GAM auš[ta … A]NA GUD ZI-aš pa-ra-a watkut “The Sungod looked down from heaven. His (sexual) desire for the [fat(?)] cow sprang forth” KUB 24.7 ii 53-54 (tale of the Sungod and the cow, NH), ed. Hoffner, FsLacheman 191, tr. Hittite Myths 65; similar KUB 33.98 + KUB 36.8 i 16-17 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146-149. 
ddd. parā watkunu-— 1' “to cause (something) to leap out” (w. -šan): cf. in fragmentary context, nu–ddu–ššan x[…] ZI–KA pa-ra-a wa[tkunu(zzi)] “and … ar[ous]es your desire”(?) KUB 26.38 iii 7-8 (Huqq., Šupp. I), w. dupl. KUB 23.74:2. 
2' parā watkunumaš watar “water for sprinkling”: see parā išparnu-(1 r, above); cf. 1 aa, above. 
eee. parā zappanu-“to cause to drip away/out” 
(w. -šan): (The king writes to an official in Tapikka:) kišš[a]n–ma–mu kuit hatrāeš kuitman–wa– mu dUTU-ŠI kī ŠA LÚ.MEŠ URUGašga takšulaš uttar hatrā
ši ammuga–wa memian INA KUR URUIšhupita huškimi nu karū kuit DINGIR.MEŠ [i]mman[…] ziga–mu–ššan pa-ra-a zappanuškiši nu–mu QA_TAMMA hatreškiši “Concerning what you wrote me as follows: ‘I will await word in Išhupitta until you, Your Majesty, write me about the matter of the peace of the Kaškaean men’: Because the gods already […], you keep causing me to drip away (i.e., you exhaust me, in that you) keep writing to me the same thing!” HKM 10:23-32 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 134f. □ for the psychological use of zappiya-see ištan~ 

parā 2 a 
zaš–miš tamatta pēdi zappiškizzi “my soul steadily drips away to another place” KUB 30.10 rev. 15 (prayer of Kantuzili, OH/ MS), cf. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:68 n. 50; cf. also the horrible fate called ÚŠ-an zappian “a dripping (i.e., slow, excruciating?) death” KUB 44.4 rev. 32 + KBo 13.241 rev. 20 (rit., NH). 
The antonym of parā “out” is anda(n) “in(to).” Note anda pai-— parā uwa- KBo 24.63 ii? 11-12 + KBo 23.43 ii? 3-4, w. dupl. IBoT 2.46 rt. col. 6-8, ed. below in discussion at end; andan peške-— parā pai- KUB 13.8:13-15 (1 z, above); anda tarna-— parā tarna- IBoT 1.36 i 73 (1 vv 2', above); parā ehu — anda uwa- VBoT 24 i 25-29, ed. lulim(m)i- a; and the examples quoted by Starke, StBoT 23:140 (no. 196) and 142 (no. 212); but note parā
penna-— appa tarna-KBo 4.2 ii 1921 (1 ff, above). 
2. (postpos.) out of, from — a. w. abl.: n–ašta Éirza pa-ra-a peššiyandu “They must throw (him) out of the house” KUB 11.1 iv 18 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth. 11:52f.; ANA dUTU-ŠI–ya–at–kan INA URUZithara INA BURU⁄› KAZU-az pa-ra-a aniya~ wen “For His Majesty we wrote it (i.e., the foregoing text) ‘from (his) mouth’ in the city of Zithara at harvest time” KUB 29.8 iv 38-39 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas, ChS I/1:100; [ANA dUTU-ŠI–y]a–at–kan KAZUaz URUZi[thara INA BURU⁄› p]a-ra-a aniya~ wen “We copied it out [in the summer in] Zi[thara] from the mouth [of His Majesty]” KBo 23.6:9-10 (rit.), ed. ChS I/1:65 (= lines 37-38); cf. kī–ma–kan tuppi ANA dUTU-ŠI KAZU-az pa-ra-a m.GIŠPA-DINGIR-LIMiš aniyat “But Hattušili copied this tablet from His Majesty’s dictation” KUB 15.31 iv 38-40 (rit., MH/NS); cf. HW2 ani¥a-I 2 b β6 ANA dUTU-ŠI–at–kan [KAZUa]z pa-ra-a [IN]A URUZithara I[N]A BURU⁄› [ani~ yau]en FHG 21 + KBo 20.126 iv 35-37 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas, ChS I/1:77; LÚAZU–ma–kan GIŠZA.LAM.GARaz pa-ra-a hurlili kiššan memai “The exorcist speaks in Hurrian from the tent as follows” KUB 
12.11 iv 19-20 (fest., MH/NS); cf. GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-az pa-ra-a namma–pat QA_TAMMA memai ibid. iv 24-25; mān–wa–kan DINGIR.MEŠ-aš šanezzin :zūwan KAZU-az pa-ra-a anzāš hūittiyawen “If we pulled the fine bread from the gods’ mouth” KUB 13.4 iv 7172 (instr. for the temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 88f., Chrest. 166f.; [ū]k–ma–kan ZI-za pa-ra-a kaniššun DINGIR.MEŠ kuit “Because I honored the gods from (the depths of) my soul” KUB 54.1 i 43 (dep., NH), ed. Archi/Klengel, AoF 12:54, 58. 
117

b. w. inst. for abl.: [(n–ašt)]a [(DINGIR-LIMni):zūwan kuw(at)] KAZU-it pa-ra-a SUDatteni “Why will you take bread from the god’s mouth?” KUB 13.4 ii 16 (instr. for the temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.5 ii 25-26, ed. Chrest. 152f., Süel, Direktif Metni 38f. 
Some syntactical observations: It is often difficult to decide between parā used as a preverb and parā used as a postposition w. abl. In the many cases where the order is abl. — parā — verb, a decision between preverb or postposition for parā is impossible and unnecessary. The four examples given above, 2 a, w. the expression iššaz (KAZUaz) parā aniya- “to write down ‘from the mouth’ (of His Majesty)” taken from several colophons and all obviously meaning the same, demonstrate the difficulties. The apparent free distribution of the phrase iššaz parā throughout the sentence shows parā in postpositional function as a linguistic reality to be separated from preverbial parā. 
3. (prev.) forward, further, along (w. d.-l. or all., generally without local particle) — a. parā arnu- “to cause to arrive” (see also 1 e and 6 b 2') — 1' (without local particle): (If you take food devoted to the gods) n–at DINGIR.MEŠ-aš ZI-ni pa-ra-a UL ar~ nutteni “and you do not make it arrive for the desire of the gods” KUB 13.4 i 51 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150, Süel, Direktif Metni 30f. 
2' (w. -kan): nu–ššan mā
n halkieš aranteš n–aš– kan arha waršten n–aš–kan ANA KISLAH pa-ra-a arnutten n–aš LÚ.KÚR lē dammešhaizzi “When the crops are ripe, reap them and cause them to arrive at the threshing floor; do not let the enemy damage them” HKM 25 rev. 15-21 (letter from the king, MH/ MS), ed. HBM 164f. 
b. parā epp-(cf. 1 i, above) — 1' “to hold out in front, present, proffer, show (to someone)” (w. dat.; without local particle); = German “hinhalten” (HW2 2:73b-78a): ta–šmaš hurtiya[llan (pa-r)]a-a ēpmi DUMU É.[(GA)]L šuppi wātar pa-ra-a ēpzi [(LUGAL-)]i MUNUS.LUGAL–ya “I hold the bo[wl] out to them (i.e., the king and queen). The palace attendant holds out holy water to the king and queen” KBo 17.1 i 13-15 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 9-10 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:18f., StBoT 23:137f.; nu LÚzakken~ 

parā 3 c 

niš ANA µAttalli kī T˘¢
UPPU pa-ra-a epzi “The prefect presents this tablet to Attalli” RS 17.109:17-19 (legal document, Hatt. III/Tudh. IV), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:770, von Schuler, UF 3:227; nu DINGIR-LUM aši Ù-TUM ANA MUNUS.LUGAL apaddan pa-ra-a IÙBAT “Did the god therefore show (lit. hold out, present) that dream to the queen?” KUB 52.72 obv. 14-15 (oracle question, NH), cf. ibid. 7, 8,16, 22; memahhi–tta kuit nu– mu GEŠTU-an pa-ra-a ēp “Present to me (your) ear for what I will tell you” KUB 24.7 iv 44-45 (tale of the fisherman, NS), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. Hittite Myths 66 (“pay close attention to”). 
2' “to reach(?), touch(?), affect(?), afflict(?)” 
— a' “to reach(?)” (without local particle): mah~ han–ma–šta LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· Éhilamnaš [KÁ. GA]L-aš anda aranzi … māhhan–ma ANŠE.G‰R. NUN.NA.HI.A KÁ.GAL-aš pa-ra-a [ap?]panzi nu LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· LÚkītašš–a halzāi “But as soon as the performers arrive in (reach) the gate of the portico, (they call out ‘Welcome.’ But the reciter again does not call out.) But when the mules [re]ach(?) (this) gate, then (both) the performers and the reciter call out” IBoT 1.36 iv 5-6 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:32f., [ap] panzi restored from iii 77 (cf. comments on p. 57), but cf. ibid. iii 76-77 w. -kan; pa-ra-a [ap?]panzi seems parallel to anda aranzi here. 
b' “to touch(?), affect(?), afflict(?)” (w. -kan): “You yourself had said repeatedly ‘I hope even something minor will get difficult for him’” ŠA MUNUS–ya–mu–kan kuit GIG pa-ra-a appiškit “because a woman’s sickness was repeatedly afflicting me” KBo 4.14 iii 25-26 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 294f., cf. Stefanini, AANL 20:45 (“sorgere”), Puhvel, HED 1-2:281 (“and whereas woman’s sickness afflicted me”); cf. perhaps IBoT 1.36 iii 76-77, ed. AS 24:32f. 
c. parā eš-/aš- (act.) “to be more, extra, be added to(?)” (w. -ašta or -kan): kī kuit iyaš n–ašta! kāša ÉRIN.MEŠ.HI.A pa-ra-a tuk–pat ēšzi § kāša– za peran dameidani ANA ÉRIN.MEŠ lamni~ yanza nu liliwahhuwanzi unni uwat duwaddu “What is this that you have done? Only you have extra troops. § You are (hereby) assigned to command another troop. So drive (here) quickly. Pronto!” HKM 70:4-13 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 252-255; nu–kan ammel MU.HI.A-u[š] UD.KAM-uš ANA µ≠KÙ?±. 

118

G[A?.TÚL(?)] (or ≠Šu±-≠up±?-p[í?-lu-li-ia-ma)]) pa-ra-a ašandu “May my year[s] (and) days be added(?) to Šupp[iluliyama(?)]” KUB 31.106 + KUB 
23.44 iii 8-9 (oath, Šupp. II), ed. Laroche, RA 47:72f. (“soient offerts”), cf. HW 339 (“zur Verfügung stehen”), HED 1-2:288f. (“offered up to”), HW2 2:95a (following Laroche). 
d. parā eš-/aš- (mid.) “to be stationed forward or in front”: “With my troops I went to the country of Taggašta” ÉRIN.MEŠ URUTaggaštaš–ma para-a ešanza KUR URUŠadduppa [KUR UR]UKarahna KUR URUMarišta–ya ešan harta “The troops of Taggašta, however, which were advance troops (lit. which were stationed in front), kept the countries of Šaduppa, Karahna, and Marišta occupied” KBo 
5.8 i 4-5 (Murš. II), ed. AM 146f. (“vorgeschobene(?) Taggaštäische Truppen”), cf. AM 254, Zuntz, Ortsadv. 78, StBoT 6:118 (“vorgeschoben, exponiert”); nu–šmaš para-a ašatar µHantiliš iyat “Hantili made an outpost (or forward station) against them. (But the first Labarna (and) Hattušili did not let them across the river Kumešmaha)” KUB 21.29 ii 3-5 (decree, Hatt. III), tr. von Schuler, Kaškäer 146 (“errichtete … Vorposten”), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 78, CHD labarna-a 1' a'; unclear: nu–za uni HUR.SAG-an pa-ra-a eša[-…] KUB 19.37 iii 13 (Murš. II), ed. AM 174f.; cf. AM 284 (parā eš- = “besetzen”); HW2 2:110a (proposes parā = “weiter” but does not give a tr.). 
	e. parā haliya- in fragmentary context: nu nam~ ma[…] pa-ra-a UL hāliyat KUB 33.114 i 10-11 (Kingship of dLAMMA, NH), translit. Myth. 146. 
	f. parā halzai- “to call up/forward/forth” (without local particle): kuedani–ma–ššan URU-ri EGIR-pa āmanduš pa

rti nu LÚ.MEŠ URU-LIM hura-a halzāi “(If) you return to some city, then summon (lit. call forward) all the men of the city (and hold court)” KUB 13.2 iii 29-30 (BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 48 (“herausrufen”); LÚšakunneš–ma EN. SISKUR pa-ra-a halzāi “The priest calls up the sacrificer” KUB 39.71 iii 38 (rit., NS). 
g. parā hink-: fragmentary […]x pa-ra-a hikzi KUB 35.58 iii 5 (rit., NS), translit. StBoT 30:164. 
h. parā hinganu-: [… p]a-ra-a hinganu[zzi] IBoT 

	2.6:6 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NS). 

	i. parā huittiya-(cf. also 1 n, above) — 1' (lit.) “to pull forward” (without local particle): [mān–ma] 

parā 3 j 
UL paššariš n–an hapurin EGIR-pa damašzi […]x iškizzi namma–an hapurin pa-ra-a huittiy[azzi] “[If, however,] he is not circumcised(?), he presses his foreskin(?) back [and] anoints [his glans(?)], then he pulls his foreskin(?) forward” KUB 44.61 rev. 2526 (med., ENS), ed. StBoT 19:20f., cf. also paššari-; “They wash their (i.e., the horses’) heads and their ears” namma–aš GEŠTU.HI.A–ŠUNU kiššerit pa-ra-a huitt[iyanzi] “then [they] pull their ears forward (i.e., make them stand upright) with (their) hands” KUB 29.40 iii 32 (MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 184f. (“behand[elt] man ihre Ohren besonders mit den Händen”). 
2' (figurative) — a' “to prefer, further, advance or promote (someone)” (w. acc., without local particle): “Aparru, the man from Kalašma had come to Hattuša before (me,) My Majesty” n–an para-a huittiyanun n–an EN-LAM iyanun “and I had promoted him, made him a lord (and had given him the land of Kalašma to govern)” KBo 16.17 iii 25-26 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Otten, MIO 3:172, 174 (“Ich hatte ihn ausgezeichnet”), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 69 (“bevorziehen”); cf. also KBo 4.12 obv. 16 (obj. Mittannamuwa). 
b' w. aššu/aššui/aššuli or idalu/idalawanni “to increase/advance favor or hostility to/against someone” (w. acc. of the person or land): [UL–an LÚSANGA iyanun] / n–an pa-ra-a aššūi hui[t~ tiyanneškinun] “[Did I not make him a priest,] and pr[omote] him [always] in a good way?” KUB 1.16 ii 16-17 (Hatt. I/NS); na[(šma–za mān ap)]āt KUR-e našma URU-an aššu[(l)]i našm[(a idāl)]u pa-ra-a huittiyan [h]armi “or if I have furthered that country or city in either a good or bad way” KBo 5.3 iii 21-22 (Huqq., Šupp. I), w. dupl. KBo 19.44 rev. 10-11 (ENS), ed. SV 2:124f. 
c' “to prolong/delay” (w. -šan): nu–mu–ššan mān ÉRIN.MEŠ-it ANŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A-it lammar UL ārti nu–z–(š)an pa-ra-a imma huittiyaši “If you do not immediately come to my (aid) with troops and horses, but you rather prolong/delay (your coming to help) in your own interest (-za)” KBo 5.3 ii 28-29 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:116f. 
j. parā huške-: in fragmentary context, [… -]šan pa-ra-a huškizzi[…] Bo 4951 rev. 21 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:126f. (“he waits longer?”). 
119

	k. parā iya- (act.): […]x.MEŠ–ŠU KI.MIN n– aš–kan pa-ra-a i-ez-zi na-aš […] in run-over line from otherwise lost rev. between KBo 21.14 obv. 16-17 (purif. rit., MS). 
	l. parā iya- (mid.) “to go on, go further” (without local particle): “I burnt down the city of Iyahrišša and took (it) including captives, oxen, (and) sheep. §” lukatti–ma INA URUTaptina pa-ra-a iyah~ hat “Next morning I went on to the city of Taptina” KBo 4.4 iii 43 (Murš. II), ed. AM 128f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 62; for a different meaning of parā iya-see 1 o, above. 
	m. parā iyannai-(cf. 1 p, above) — 1' (lit.) “to move forward” (without local particle): nu– šši UL pa-ra-a i[y]anniyauwa[nzi] «UL (eras.)» kišari UL–ma–šši EGIR-pa ti[yauwanzi] kišari “He was not able to move forward nor was he able to s[tep] back” KUB 8.53:18-19 (Gilg., NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:12f. 

2' (fig.) “to make progress, thrive(?)”: “I submitted in subservience to the goddess together with my family, and in the family we formed for ourselves, the goddess had a place” nu–nnaš É-ir para-a [iy]anniš “and our family thrived; (that was the recognition of IŠTAR, My Lady)” KUB 1.1 + 1304/u iii 7-8 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:16f. (“machte <gute> Fortschritte”). 
	n. parā išhamai- “to sing (all the way) along” (without local particle): “The priest consecrates/ sanctifies (šipanti) the bull, hits it with an iron rod, and it starts to walk. They start walking behind it” nu KASKAL-an pa-ra-a S‰R-RU “and along the road they sing” KUB 20.87 i 14-15. 
	o. parā karp- “to lift (and bring) forward” (without local particle): “The chief-of-guards announces to the king:” GIŠ.dINANNA.HI.A–wa pa-ra-a karpanzi LUGAL-ušš–a tezzi pa-ra-a–war–uš karpandu “‘They will bring the lyres forward’ and the king says: ‘Let them bring them forward’” KBo 

4.9 v 29-31 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS); for a different mng. of parā karp-see 1 t, above. 
	p. parā lak- “to incline (the ear) forward, turn (one’s ear) to(ward)”: see lak- 2. 
	q. parā nai-(cf. 1 x, above) — 1' “to continue, carry on” (w. -šan or -kan); see nai-13. 

parā 3 u 

2' “to postpone(?)” (w. -šan): see nai- 14. 
3' parā neyant- “pointed straight ahead, battle-ready”: see nai-2 c 5'. 
r. parā pai-A — 1' “to go forward” (without local particle): LUGAL-i pa-ra-a 1-ŠU paizzi ā
ppa– ma–ašta nēa “He goes forward toward the king one time; he turns back” KBo 17.43 i 11-12 (fest., OS), ed. StBoT 23:140 (no. 198), translit. StBoT 25:105, for more context see LÚmeneya- a and nai- 2 b 1' c'; n–aš pa-ra-a tepu paizzi “She goes a little forward” KUB 24.9 ii 40 (rit., MH/NS); for other meanings see 1 y and 3 r 2'. 
2' “to go further, go on” (without local particle): “Then I killed him (i.e., the enemy)” namma para-a pā
un “After that I went on (and burned down the city of Tapapanuwa)” KUB 19.39 ii 6 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 162f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 63f.; “He (i.e., the king) breaks a bread in front of the stela and makes an offering” namma–aš pa-ra-a dān NA›ZI.KIN paizzi nu apiya NINDA.GUR›.RA paršiya šipanti– ya “After that he goes on to a second stela and breaks a bread there and makes an offering” KUB 
10.18 i 19-21 (rit., OH/NS); for further exx. see pai-A 1 j 19' c'; see also parā iya-mid. 1 o, above; for other meanings of parā pai-A see 1 y and 3 r 1'. 
s. parā pehute- “to lead (someone) forward” — 1' (w. -kan): [n–(an GAL LÚ.MEŠMEŠED)]I namma [(TÚGšekn)]un ē
pzi [(n–an–ka)]n LUGAL-i pa-raa (var. anda) [(pē)]hutezzi “Then, the chief-ofguards takes him (i.e., the lord of the army) by the šeknu-garment and leads him forward(?) (var. in) to the king” IBoT 4.63:8-11 (fest., NS), w. dupl. KBo 21.78 i 11-12 (NS); for parā pehute-w. -kan “to lead out” see 1 ee, above. 
2' (without local particle): Bo 3652 ii? 11, (14), ed. Alp, Tempel 296-299. 
	t. parā penna- “to drive along” (without local part.): nu UDU.N´TA ANA KASKAL LÚ.KÚR para-a penniyanzi “They drive a wether along the road (leading to) the enemy” HT 1 ii 22-23 (rit., MH/ NS), ed. Friedrich, AO 25/2:10, Zuntz, Ortsadv. 64, tr. Goetze, ANET 347; for a different mng. of parā penna-see 1 ff, above. 
	u. parā peššiya- (without local particle) “to throw over to/toward”: nu–šši NINDA-an pa-ra-a peššizzi “and she (i.e., the Old Woman) throws 

120

bread toward it (i.e., the flock of sheep?)” KBo 17.92 obv. 8 (rit., MS), ed. ChS I/5:445; for a different mng. of parā peššiya-see 1 gg, above. 
	v. parā šamenu- “to let pass by, slip away” (without local particle): zig–an GIM-an ištamašti n–an–mu mān apedani lamnī UL mematti n¢–an para-a imma šamenuši “If you hear of him (i.e., some adversary) and if you do not at that instant report him to me, but you even let him slip away” KBo 5.3 ii 34-35 (Huqq., Šupp. I/NS), ed. SV 2:116f.; cf. ibid. iv 23-24 
	
 w. -za–(š)an. 

w. parā tarku- “dance forward”(?): EGIR-ŠU– ma EGIR-pa p[a-r]a-a tarkuwar “Thereafter dancing backward and forward” KUB 4.1 iv 39-41 (list, OH/ NS), ed. de Martino, La danza 37f., and cf. lapat(a/i)-. 
x. parā tekkuššanu- “to show (eyes), reveal” (without particle): “He reports whatever dreams he sees” mān–ši DINGIR-LUM IGI.HI.A-wa pa-ra-a tekkušnuškizz[i] nu–šši mān DINGIR-LUM katti– šši šešzi “whether the goddess reveals her eyes to him and whether the goddess sleeps with him” KUB 

7.5 iv 7-10 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:279 w. n. 42 (“i.e., removes her veil?”). 
	y. parā tiya- “to step forward” (without local particle): “If someone among the remaining guards has no spear, since they take (only) staffs” n–at– kan ŠA GIŠkalmušaš DUMU É[.GAL] UL han~ dā[n]t[ar]i pa-ra-a damāēš 2 DUMU É.GAL tienzi “(such guards) will not be lined up (with) the palace attendant of the lituus, (rather) two other palace attendants will step forward, (and these will line up with him. But the guards who hold staffs will walk behind them)” IBoT 1.36 iii 43-45 (instr., MH/ MS), ed. AS 24:26f.; nu INA É.GAL-LIM kuiēš šer šēšanzi n–at pa-ra-a tīanzi LÚ‰.DU°–ma–aš–kan ha[tti]li lamnit halziššai “Those who spend the night on top of the palace step forward, while the gatekeeper calls them by their Hattic titles (lit. names)” (a list of Hattic titles with their Hittite equivalents follows) KBo 5.11 i 5-7 (instr., MH/NS), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 66, CHD L-N 34b, and Hoffner, POT 198, 226 n. 3; for parā menahhanda tiya- see 11 a 5', below. 
	z. parā tittanu- “(to cause to step forward >) to present” (functionally, the causative of parā tiya-) (without local particle): “She (i.e., the Old Wom

parā 3 aa 2' 
an) breaks one bread (and) a cheese and libates wine and speaks as follows” dUTU-i išhā–mi [(kāša–wa–tta)] EME.HI.A mantallieš pa-ra-a tit~ tanunun “‘O Sungod, my Lord, I have presented to you mantalli-tongues’” 2Mašt. i 21-22 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:348f.; nu kuiš LÚhuyandan uemiškizzi n– an appiškidd[u] n–an auwariyaš išhī pa-ra-a titta~ nuddu “(If) someone finds a runaway man, he must take him in custody and present him to the district commander” KUB 26.17 ii 4-5 (instr. of a Tudh., MH/MS). 
aa. parā wahnu- (without local particle) — 1' “to turn forward, conduct to(?)”: nu LÚSANGA dT[etešhapin] šarā dāi nu GIŠhulugannin pa-ra-a wahnuwanzi nu–za–kan NIN.DINGIR ešari nu INA URUDawiniya andan paizzi “The priest takes up T[etešhapi]. They turn the cart forward (or: pull it around further?). The NIN.DINGIR-priestess sits down (on it) and goes to the city of Dawiniya” KUB 
11.32 iii 5-13 (fest., OH?/NS), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 66; “And if some inhabitant of Hatti-Land places himself behind you (in support), or if you have people bound to you by oath, and someone says to you as follows: ‘Now is the moment!’” zik–ma–an LUGAL-i par[a-a] BAL-nuši “Then you must conduct him to the king” KBo 4.14 ii 33-34 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. differently van den Hout, Diss. 286f., Stefanini, AANL 20:41 (both reading BAL-nuši as waqqariyanuši). 
2' “to turn (or lead around) further”: “They offer them water with a huppar-vessel. One horse drinks one huppar (of water)” [n–uš G‰R-i]t 6-ŠU pa-ra-a wahnuanzi “Then on [foot] they lead [them] around further six times (= lead them through six rounds?)” KUB 29.40 iii 31 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 184f. (“Man bewegt sie … weiter”) □ parā wahnu- occurs here in a series of seven preserved paragraphs in which is described how the horses are each time suddenly dowsed, given water and/or some hay and then “put away.” After the horses are fed, the text often (iii [6], 9, 18, 24) says n–uš wahnuškanzi “They ‘turn’ each of them (i.e., lead them in rounds?) repeatedly” (Kammenhuber: “Man bewegt sie (eine Weile)”). Only in iii 31 would this wahnu-occur w. parā in the meaning suggested. If the restoration in KUB 29.46:9 (see next ex.) is correct, the interpretation of parā as “further” would be better than “out” or “forward”; “The horses gallop for one mile. They unhitch them” n–uš G‰R-it pa-ra-a [wahnuanzi] “and on foot they [lead] them [around] further” KUB 
121

29.46:9 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 190f.; also possibly in KUB 11.32 iii 5-13 (fest., NS), cited above in 3 aa 1'. 
Antonym of parā
“forward”: appa “back.” Note āppa damašš-— parā huittiya- KUB 44.61 rev. 25-26 (3 i 1', above); parā iyannai-— āppa tiya- KUB 8.53:18-19 (3 m 1' a', above); parā nai-— āppa peššiya-/maušš- KUB 10.93 iv 1-2, KUB 1.16 iii 49-53 s.v. nai-14; but note parā penna-— āppa tarna-KBo 4.2 ii 19-21 (1 ff, above). 
4. (adv.) further(more), moreover, additionally, still (denoting addition) (sometimes (4 c) implying temporal sequence (as in mng. 5)) — a. sentence initial and marked w. -ma: namma–ta dUTU-ŠI kue KUR.KUR.MEŠ ADDIN pa-ra-[(a)]–ma–kan kue ZAG.HI.A ŠA KUR URUHatti ašanzi “Further (nam~ ma), regarding the countries that I, My Majesty, gave to you, and (-ma) what further (parā
) borders belong to Hatti-Land, (if an enemy comes, and you undertake no action, may the oath-deities chase you)” KUB 21.1 iii 44-45 (Alakš.), ed. SV 2:72f. 
b. sentence initial and marked w. -ma in a series of clauses: “Then, arrange the watchmen of the inside as follows” INA GIŠ.HI.A KÙ.BABBAR [… 2 LÚ.MEŠEN.N]U.UN arantari pa-ra-a–m[a …]x 2 LÚ.MEŠEN.NU.UN arant[ari pa-ra-a–ma KÁ.GA]L haniyaš 2 LÚ.MEŠE[N.NU.UN arantari p]a-ra-a–ma INA É dHal[(kiaš) 2 LÚ.MEŠEN.NU.UN] ara[nt]ari pa-ra-a[–m(a) …] “[two wat]chmen will stand among the silver trees(?) […], further [at …] two watchmen will stan[d,] further at the haniya-[gat]e two wat[chmen will stand, f]urther in the temple of Halki [two watchmen] will stand, further …” etc. KUB 26.9 + Bo 69/1256 + 340/z i 13-19 (instr. for the HAZAN~ NU, MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.58 i 8-13, ed. Otten, Or NS 52:134-137; [p]a[-r]a-a–ma–šši HUR.SAGx[… ZAG-a]š pa-ra-a–ma–šši HU[R.SAG…] ZAG-aš pa-ra-a–ma– šši U[RU …] ZAG-aš etc. “Further, the mountain of [… (is) for him the bound]ary, further the mou[ntain of …] (is) for him the boundary, further the c[ity of …] (is) for him the boundary” etc. KUB 19.27 obv. 10-13 (treaty w. Šarrikušuh of Kargamiš, Šupp. I), cf. also ibid. rev. 5-9, ed. Forrer, Forsch. 2.1:48f.; “She (i.e., the NIN.DINGIR priestess) comes into the temple of dG‰R and pours a libation to dG‰R” § pa-ra-a–ma dParga BAL-anti pa-ra-a–ma ANA dÉ.A BAL-an[ti] pa-ra-a–ma ANA dAllatum BA[L-an]ti pa-ra-a–ma ANA dDAG-ti BAL-anti etc. “Then she pours a li

parā 4 d 

bation to Parga, then she pours a libation to Ea, then she pours a libation to Allatum, then she pours a libation to Halmašuit” etc. (there follow ten more deities each introduced by parā–ma) KBo 10.27 iv 1821 (fest. frag., pre-NH/NS), cf. StBoT 27:28f.; [pa-ra-a-m]a ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URUTaptagga 1 [NINDAmulatin 

1

ŠA / 2] UPNI 5 NINDA.SIG.MEŠ–ya paršiya GEŠTIN–ya [šipanti] § pa-ra-a-ma URUŠešni dU-ni URUAššešni–kan 1 […] 1 NINDAmulatin Š[A] 1/2 UPNI 5 NINDA.SIG.MEŠ–ya parš[iya] GEŠTIN–ya ši~ panti etc. KBo 20.123 iv 3-18 (Kizzuwatnean rit., ENS?), tr. RGTC 6:361 s.v. Šišna.; cf. also mema- 13 d 1'. 
	c. sentence initial without -ma (possibly parā ešhere; adv. as predicate): pa-ra-a (over erasure) nāwi ariyan §§ “(The matter has) not yet been further investigated by oracle” KUB 5.6 ii 12 (oracle, NH), cf. nawi c 1' b', HW2 1:294b (mistakenly reads ariyanzi), Zuntz, Ortsadv. 74 (mistakenly reads ariyair and translates “aus-, fertigorakelt”). 
	d. not sentence initial, w. free distribution throughout the sentence, but not preverbial; often accompanied by redundant namma “further, then,” dān “a second …” or some form of tamai- “another”: “See, I have given you the country of Mount Zippašlā

; inhabit that” namma–ma–wa–[z] pa-ra-a tamāin hapātin tamai KUR-e ZI[-i]t lē e[¢š]tari “further, however, you should not on your own initiative additionally occupy another river land(?) (or) another country” KUB 14.1 obv. 20 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 6f.; nu–šši tezzi DUGkaltiya–wa kattan paimi apāš–a pa-ra-a dametani LÚMEŠEDI tezzi apaš–a pa-ra-a LÚtarriyanalli tezzi “He (i.e., a guard) will say to him: ‘I am going to the latrine.’ And that (man) will pass the word on to another guard, and that one will pass it on to a man of third rank” IBoT 1.36 i 36-37 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:8f.; namma kuitki pa-ra-a [(d)]amai [(šanhatti)] “(and if) further you seek something else in addition” KBo 19.44b:7-8 (Huqq., ENS), w. dupl. KUB 26.38 iii 15 (NS) □ note that parā šanhis attested only in the sense of “to clean out,” see 1 mm and see 1 cc, above; uizzi–ma–za–kan mā
n apez IŠTU É DINGIR.GEﬂ pa-ra-a tamai É DINGIR.GEﬂ wetezzi “If it happens that, apart from that temple of the Deity of the Night, he builds still another temple of the Deity of the Night” KUB 29.4 i 2-4 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 6f.; “If only (-pat) you, O Sungoddess of 

122

Arinna, are angry, we will not yet go through an oracle investigation concerning you a second time” namma–ma–ta–kkan dammaiš DINGIR-LUM para-a UL kuiški aranza “(If) in addition, however, no other deity further (parā) is standing (i.e., in agreement) with you (in your anger against me), (then let the exta be favorable)” KBo 2.2 ii 47-48 (oracle question, NH), cf. HW2 1:215b and 295a (which assumes a stem ariya-), and Zuntz, Ortsadv. 77 (who translates “erzürnt,” from arai-); in oracle questions in connection 
w. illnesses, cf. nu–kan … ANA GIG … pa-ra-a aranza KUB 5.6 ii 66-67, KUB 5.21 obv.? 4-5, KUB 16.28 obv. 6, 14-15, KUB 50.56 i (1-2); “If somebody buys the field of a GIŠTUKUL-man …” takku A.ŠÀ.HI.A kuē¢¢zzi “If he buys
lla pa-ra-a waši luzzi UL karpīeanyone else’s field in addition, he will render no luzzi-services” KBo 6.4 iv 33-34 (Laws, OH/NS), ed. Friedrich, HG 58f. (“darüber hinaus”), cf. Hoffner, Diss. 49 □ parā … waš- (without local part.) is not a preverbial expression “to buy further,” but merely the verb wašš-“to buy” w. the adv. parā “further(more)”; for KUB 10.18 i 19-21 (rit., OH/NS) see 3 r 2', above; cf. KUB 24.3 ii 46 (prayer, Murš. II, pre-NH/ NS), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:30f. 
e. not sentence initial, adding comparative value (“more and more …, even …-er”) to denominal verbs (often w. namma, sometimes w. intensive double parā
para): “And exactly that matter affected Hatti-Land, and [Hatti-]Land because of [that] matter began to perish (…)” kinun–a hinkan pa-raa namma d[aššaue]šta “and now the plague became even he[avier]” KUB 14.14 obv. 38 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Pestgeb. 168f. (“und jetzt wurde die Pest noch schlimmer”); nu mā
n uizzi É dUTU URUTÚL-na pa-ra-a [ha]ppi~ nešzi … mā
nn–a É dUTU URUTÚL-na uizzi pa-ra-a ašiwa[ntešzi …] “If the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna gets richer, … gets poor[er …]” KUB 26.43 obv. 56-57 (land grant, Tudh. IV), ed. Imparati, RHA XXXII 30f., cf. Goetze in personal communication to Meriggi apud Imparati, RHA XXXII 94 (“when the house of the Sungoddess … happens to become richer (…) happens to become poorer”); “Since I repeatedly saw, time and again, the favor of IŠTAR” IŠTU DINGIR-LIM–mu pa-ra-a pa-ra-a SIGﬁ-iškittari “Because of the goddess my circumstances get better and better” KBo 6.29 i 10-11 (shorter version of the Apology of Hatt. III), ed. Götze, Hatt. 44-47, cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 73 (“weiter und weiter”); nu labarnaš 

parā 5 b 1' 
LUGAL-waš antu–ššit(coll.) pa-ra-a pa-ra-a mak~ kiškittaru KUB 57.63 ii 39-41 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Archi, FsOtten2 20f., and makkešš-1; “If it becomes a matter of concern (:kuwatai) for the king as follows …” tuk– ma apedani mehuni ANA ZI LUGAL UGU pa-ra-a namma :kuwayatadu “then, at that time there should be even more concern to you for the life of the king” … tuk–ma 10-ŠU pa-ra-a :kuwayatallu “then, at that time let me be ten times more a matter of concern to you” KBo 4.14 iii 45-46, 51 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 294-296. 
5. (adv.) then, after that (denoting temporal posteriority) — a. sentence initial w. -ma: “Next (EGIR-ŠU), the cupbearer once pours wine with a silver tapišana-vessel” pa-ra-a–ma 1 NINDA. GUR›.RA ANA 2 dTiyapentašša DINGIR.MEŠ hapalkiyaš paršiya “after that he breaks one bread for the two Tiyapentašša-deities, the gods of iron” KBo 30.71 iii 16-18 (fest., NS), ed. Košak, FsGüterbock2 134; “They hitch them (i.e., the horses) up, and he drives them two miles, of which he gallops them 7 IKU” pa-ra-a-ma 1/ 2 DANNA pennai parhai–ma ANA 10 IKU.HI.A anda “after that (parā–ma) he drives (them) half a mile of which he gallops (them) ten IKU” KUB 1.11 ii 4-5 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth.112f. □ for IKU see Melchert, JCS 32:53-55; “These enemy countries I defeated with my own hand in ten years …” pa-ra-a–ma–mu dUTU URUTÚL-na GAŠAN–YA kuit peškizzi n–at aniyami n–at katta tehhi “and what the Sungoddess of Arinna, My Lady, gives me further (to do), that I will carry out and that I will deposit (as a record before the deity)” KBo 3.4 iv 47-48 (hist., Murš. II), ed. AM 136f.; “And I went to those Kaškaean cities that were hostile to me” nu pāun KUR URUTaggašta harnin~ kun pa-ra-a–ma KUR URUIštalubba harninkun para-a–ma KUR URUKappuppuwa harninkun pa-ra-a– ma KUR URUHutpa harninkun “I proceeded to destroy the city of Taggašta, thereafter I destroyed the land of Ištalubba, thereafter I destroyed the land of Kappuppuwa, thereafter I destroyed the land of Hutpa” KBo 2.5 ii 5-9, ed. AM 182f. 
b. preceding a noun that has a temporal indication (mostly d.-l. or all.); cf. w. a different prev.-adv. āppa(-)šiwatti and ištarni šiwatti — 1' parā UD(.KAM)ti/parā UD-an “on the following day”: GIM-an 
123

zēnaš kišari ANA MU.KAM-TI ITU.8.KAM [ti~ yazi?] pa-ra-a UD.KAM-ti warpuanzi LÚSANGA– za LÚ.MEŠ É.DINGIR-LIM x[…-anzi] “When it becomes fall, (and) the eighth month in the year [arrives], on the following day the priest (and) the temple officials [prepare] to wash (the deity)” KUB 
38.32 obv. 8-9 (cult inv., NH), ed. Ehelolf, KlF 1:149f. □ The new moon, signaling the arrival of the eighth month, would have been first observed at sunset; parā šiwatti would have been on the following day. In line 8 Ehelolf restores [tiyazi] after ITU.8.KAM. In the break after LÚ.MEŠ É.DINGIR-LIM in line 9 he restores S[AL.MEŠ É.DINGIR-LIM–ya(?) w. šanhanzi as the main verb of the clause that starts w. parā UD. KAM-ti (“so fegen der Priester, die Tempelmänner und Tempelfrauen, um weiterhin am Tage das (allgemeine?) warpuar vornehmen zu können(?)”). But, because of -kan at the beginning of line 10 (É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–kan), a verb is assumed here at the end of line 9; cf. further […] pa-ra-a UD-ti wa-x[…] KBo 8.72 obv.? 4; pa-ra-a UD-an KUB 29.4 i 54 (NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 12f.; […]haššan pa-ra-a UD. KAM-an hantanzi KBo 13.155:6. 
2' parā MU.KAM-anni “in the following year”: nu mān DUMU.NI[TA k]uwapi miyari nu MUNUSŠÀ.ZU k[iššan] tezzi kā[ša–w]a kinun ŠA DUMU.NITA āššū uda[hhun] pa-ra-a–ma–wa M[U-an]ni ŠA DUMU.MUNUS āššū udallu “If a bo[y] is [e]ver born, the midwife speaks as [follows]: ‘now I have brought the good news of a boy, but next y[ea]r may I bring the good news of a girl’” KBo 17.62 iv 13-15 + KBo 17.63 rev. 8-10 (MH?/ENS), ed. StBoT 29:34f. (tr. āššū as “goods”); “Then, when I finish the festivals, I will go to Nerik and perform a ritual for the deity, but do nothing (else)” pa-ra-a– ma MU.KAM-anni ANA KASKAL URUNeriqqa EGIR-an–pat arhahari “but the following year I will tend to the Nerik trip as before (-pat)” KBo 
16.98 ii 15-16 (oracle question, NH), ed. Cornil/Lebrun, Hethitica 1:3, 7 (“l’année suivante”); cf. pa-ra-a MU. KAM-aš KUB 22.53:4; pa-ra-a MU-anni KUB 50.111:6 (oracle questions, NH). 
3' parā hamešhanda/hamešhi “next spring”: “If someone sets fire to a shed, he will feed his (i.e., the owner’s) oxen” n–uš–šan pa-ra-a hamešhanda arnuzi “and bring them (through the winter) to the following spring” KBo 6.3 iv 60-61 (Laws §100, OH/NS), ed. Friedrich, HG 48f., cf. ibid. 104 (“im nächsten Frühjahr”), 

parā 6 a 5' 

Hoffner, Diss. 76 (“in the next spring”), StBoT 23:136, 154; uwanzi kedani ŠE⁄¤-ti … § pa-ra-a hamešhi … “Will they come this winter? … § Next spring?” KUB 22.56 rev. 7-8 (oracle questions, NH). 
6. (prev.) over to (transfer or passage from one person to the next, cf. German “über-” in übergeben, Greek ÷†¤†éé
in ÷†¤†īdīŠºd) — a. in general — 1' parā happirai- “to sell” (without local particle): “Or (if) someone steals/abducts a man from Arzawa out of the army camp, and you enslave him” našma–an–za–an pa-ra-a happirānzi “or (if) they sell him” KBo 5.4 rev. 40 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:66f., cf. Neu, WO 11:84 n. 44, 86. 
2' parā har(k)- “to hold for, i.e., to condemn to” (without local particle): “They brought in Tanuwa, Tahurwaili, and Taruhšu” n–uš pankuš pa-ra-a hingani harta “and the assembly held them (sc. the culprits) for death” KBo 3.1 ii 28 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth.11:30f.; cf. parā hark-, 1 l, above. 
3' parā pai- B/piya- “to hand over, deliver” (without local particle): “When later it (i.e., the city of Hattuša) was oppressed by hunger” š–an dHalmaš[uiz] dšīuš–šmiš pa-ra-a paiš š–an išpandi nakkit dāhhun “and their god Halmaš[uit] handed it over (to me), and I took it at night by force” KBo 
3.22 obv. 46-48 (Anitta, OS), ed. StBoT 18:12f.; on this passage cf. Singer in Atti II CIH (forthcoming); lalameš ŠA GIŠPISAN pa-ra-a SUM-uaš “Receipt for delivery of a chest: …” KBo 9.91 obv. 5 (list, NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 332f.; for another mng. of parā pai-B see 1 z, above. 
4' parā peda- “to bring/carry over to” (without local particle): LUGAL-aš nakki–šet tāš DINGIR. MEŠ pa-ra-a petāš “He (i.e., ‘Zikiltu’) took the ‘king’s power’ and brought (it) over to ‘the gods’” KBo 18.151 obv. 3-4 (KIN oracle, atypical OS), ed. Ünal/Kammenhuber, KZ 88:164f.; cf. KBo 18.151 obv. 10, (15), rev. 17; cf. also KBo 20.10 i 8-9, KBo 20.33 obv. 11 (both fest., OS). 
5' parā šuwai- “to hand over, relinquish, lose” (without local particle): “If a slave hides a fugitive” mān–wa–kan BE_L–<ŠU>–ma šer UL šarnik~ zi nu ‰R–pat pa-ra-a šūiēzzi “if <his> master, however, does not pay compensation, he will forfeit/ lose the slave” KUB 8.81 iii 6-7 (Šunaššura treaty, MH/ MS), ed. del Monte, OA 20:217f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 70; for a different mng. of parā šuwai-see 1 pp, above. 

124

6' parā tarna-— a' (legal idiom) “to hand over” 
(w. -ašta or -kan): mān tayizzilašš–a kuiški šar~ nikzel piyan harzi nu mān A.ŠÀ n–ašta pa-ra-a UL tarnanzi mān ‰R–ma dayat n–an tayazzilanni harzi (eras.) n–aš mā
n tašuwahhanza n–an–ši–šta pa-ra-a UL tarnanzi mān–aš UL tašuwahhanza n– an–ši–šta pa-ra-a tarnanzi § takku ELLUM–ma kuiški daiyazi nu daiyazilaš šarnikzel ≠pi±[yan harzi] ≠n–an± UL tašuwahhanzi [n–an–ši–šta pa-ra-a tar]nanzi “Also, if someone has paid compensation for a theft — if (it is) a field — they will not hand (him) over. If, however, a slave has committed a theft, and he (i.e., the owner?) has held him for theft; if he has been blinded, they will not hand him over to him; if he has not been blinded, they will hand him over to him. If, however, some free man commits a theft and has paid compensation for the theft, they will not blind him, [(but only) ha]nd [him over to him]” KUB 13.9 ii 8-19 (instr. of a Tudh., MH/NS), 
w. dupl. KBo 27.16 obv. 1-4, ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 447, 449f. (“überläšt man ihn … dem (Bestohlenen) … (zum Prozeš)”), cf. Otten, FsLaroche 274; takku ‰R-iš ANA MUNUS-TIM kūšata piddāizzi n–an–za ANA DAM–ŠU dā
i n–an–kan pa-ra-a UL kuiški tarnai “If a slave pays a brideprice for a woman and takes her as his wife, no one will hand her over (to a slave-master)” KBo 6.3 ii 23-24 (Laws §34, OH/NS), ed. HG 26f.; cf. similar ibid. ii 27-28 (§36) □ this interpretation follows von Schuler, FsFriedrich 452 (“Ihn (den Unfreien) darf niemand (einem Verfahren/einer Strafe) unterwerfen”). The passage from the Instructions of a Tudhaliya makes it clear that the expression parā tarna- in legal idiom indicates that a person committing an unlawful deed is handed over to his victim or his victim’s heir. The same idiom in the two passages from the Laws refers to not turning over a free woman (§34) or an LÚantiyant- (§36) to a slave-master, although each has had her/ his brideprice paid by a slave; alternatively, one might translate “no one shall release (parā 1 vv) him (sc. from slavery, just because he has married a free woman).” Many different interpretations of this passage have been published: Friedrich, HG (“so kann sie ihm niemand entziehen”), similarly Haase, THR 26, Imparati, Leggi 55, Götze, NBr. 73f. (“versklaven”), similarly Hoffner, Diss. 36f., 203f.; again differently Güterbock, JCS 15:68 (“no-one shall sell him”), cf. also Beckman, FsGüterbock2 17; “They (i.e., the hilammi-men) must be free from šahhan and luzzi. A dog barks, but (if) he comes there, he will be silent. If oil is poured 

parā 6 a 7' 
out, they must not come out” nu–šmaš–kan pean GIŠeyan artaru pa-ra–ma–aš–kan lē kuiški tarnai “In front of them an eya-tree must stand, and no one may hand them (?) over (??) (for work)” KUB 13.8:9 (decree, MH/NS), ed. Otten, HTR 106f. (“und niemand soll sie <zu Dienstleistungen> heranziehen”), cf. also Klengel, FsCarratelli 107; alternatively one could translate “no one shall release (parā 1 vv) them (sc. from their duties for the Stone-house)”; see 1 vv, above, and 6 a 6' b', below, for other meanings of parā tarna-w. local particles). 
b' (fig.) “to turn over to, allow” — 1'' (w. -kan): našma kī kuiški memai kēdani–wa–kan tuppi kē INIM.MEŠ UL GAR-ri nu–war–at–mu–kan para-a tarnan ēšdu “Or (if) somebody speaks as follows: ‘on this tablet these things are not laid down, so they must be allowed for me’ (Do not let that happen)” KUB 26.1 iv 49-51 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 17, cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 72. 
2'' (without local particle): kāša–wa ŠA [(dIŠT)]AR išnū¢
riš nu–wa–šmaš aššui TI-anni para-a t[(arn)]an hardu idālawi–ma–wa–šmaš–kan uddanī QA_TAMMA munnāiddu “Behold, (this is) IŠTAR’s dough pan. May it keep you turned over to well-being (and) life, but may it likewise hide you from the evil word” 2Mašt. iii 26-28 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:360f.; “What words of mine, however, you (pl.) do not hear/listen to, I will make them into a prayer to the gods, and they will come straight up from my human mouth” n–at DINGIR.MEŠ EN. MEŠ ištamaššuwanzi pa-ra-a tarništen “and you, O gods, permit/allow them to be heard” KUB 6.45 i 3132 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 258, 274 (“daignez une fois les écouter”), differently Goetze, ANET 398a (“Those words … refrain from hearing”). 
7' parā uššaniya- “to sell” (without local particle) (cf. parā happirai-, 6 a 1', above): namma–at–za–kan ŠÀ É-TI lē–pat tāliyazi pa-ra-a–pat–za uššani~ yaddu uššaniyazi–ma–at–za kuwapi n–at harwaši <pedi> lē ušniyazi EN.MEŠ URUHatti arantaru nu uškandu “Then, he must not leave it in (his) house, he must rather sell (it). But when he sells it, he must not sell it in a secret <place>, but the lords of Hatti must be present and observe (as witnesses)” KUB 13.4 ii 38-41 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Neu, WO 11:79, Süel, Direktif Metni 44f.; cf. KUB 13.35 iii 23-24 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:10f., Neu, WO 11:79f. (p. “un
125

terstreicht wohl nur die an der Verbbedeutung haftenden Bewegungsrichtung”). For nearly synonymous arha uššaniya- see KUB 26.69 v 8-9, KUB 40.91 iii 13-14. 
b. w. speech or information as object expressed or understood — 1' parā armizziya- “to pass (a rumor) further along” (without local particle): “Or if it is some evil, whatsoever, against the life of My Majesty, and you know it” n–at pa-ra-a armizziyaši “and you pass it on” KUB 26.1 iii 28 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 13 (“und läšt es zu(?)”) w. note 4 (“Wörtlich: baust ausserdem eine Brücke”). 
2' parā arnu-“to bring further, transfer, pass on (information)” (usually without local particle): “And if you, Zintuhi, My Lady, hear these words” n–at ANA d≠IM± tuel huhhi [U] ANA dUTU URUTÚLna tuel hanni pa-ra-a arnuši “and you pass them on to the Stormgod, your grandfather, [and] the Sun-goddess of Arinna, your grandmother, (then for you, Zintuhi, My Lady, I will make a decorated […])” KUB 21.27 iv 9-10 (prayer, Hatt. III), without -kan also in ibid. iv 21-22, 24f., 35, 47, 48f., but note in iv 4-7 w. -kan, ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:116f.; for other mngs. of parā arnu-see 1 e and 3 a, above. 
3' parā mema- “to pass on, divulge, reveal” (without local particle): see mema- 13 d 2'. 
4' parā watarnahh- “to give instructions to someone” (w. -kan): našma!–kan LUGAL pa-ra-a kuedanikki watarnahzi ŠA LUGAL uttar wahnuzi tamāīn memian memai “Or (if) the king gives instructions to someone, and he falsifies the words of the king and speaks a different message” KUB 
21.42 iv 7-9 (SAG 2 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 27f. 
7. (prev.) fully, completely (possibly related to the comparative force illustrated in 4 e above) — a. parā išta~ mašš- “to listen to, obey fully” (w. -šan): nu–ššan µKeššiš pa-ra-a ANA DAM–ŠU–pat IŠME “Kešši fully listened only to his wife” KUB 33.121 ii 6 (myth., NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:234f. (“hö[rte] nur auf seine Gattin hin”). 
b. parā kalank- (always -šan kalankant- eš-) “to sooth/satisfy completely”: “See, I keep invoking you with harši-bread (and) a libation” nu–ššan para-a kalānkanza ēš “Now be completely satisfied” KUB 24.2 i 13 (prayer, Murš. II, pre-NH/NS), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:16f. 

parā 8 a 

	c. parā karš- “to cut (oneself) fully off (from), refrain (from)”: MUNUS-aš ZI-anza haddanza tapariyaza–ma [ pa]-ra-a karšan harzi “A(n ideal) woman’s mind is clever, but she has cut (herself) fully off from command(ing others)” KUB 24.7 iv 4950 (cow and fisherman, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. Hittite Myths 67, cf. mitnaz(a) b. 
	d. parā šarnink- “to compensate fully/completely, refill(??)” (without local particle): “Because the festival ‘of standing up’ for the Stormgod of Hatti had already taken place” mān–ma–aš pa-ra-a šarninkanza [DING]IR-LUM–an kinun UL [k]uitki šanahheškiši “If it (the festival?) has been fully compensated, and you, O god, are not in any way seeking it now, (then let the oracle be favorable)” KUB 16.66 obv. 16-17 (oracle question, NH), cf. obv. 30-31; cf. n–aš–kan KASKAL-az arha tiyat n–at IŠTU SAG.D[U–Š]U karū pa-ra-a šarnikta KUB 21.19 ii 1415 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:92f. □ in ŠA ƒDanuhepa–ma uttar [kuiš] parā iyat karū apāš–pat šarnikt[a] KUB 21.19 + 1303/u ii 21-22 (prayer, Hatt. III), parā has been misplaced by the scribe and should be read before šarnikta. 
	e. parā tamašš-/tamešš- “to oppress completely” (as far as attested always said of illnesses) (without local particle): dUTU-ŠI kuit GIG-anza pa-ra-a tamašta “Regarding the fact that an illness has completely oppressed His Majesty” KUB 5.6 ii 38 (oracle question, NH), ed. Sommer, AU 280f. (“bedrängt”), cf. ibid. ii 39, 65; differently Zuntz, Ortsadv. 73 (“weiterhin bedrängt”); cf. w. subject not preserved KBo 16.99 i 3. 
	f. parā dušk- “to rejoice fully” (w. -kan): [(É. MEŠ)].DINGIR.MEŠ–ya–tta kue iyami šaklaušš–a kuēš [iyam]i nu–za–kan dU Pihaššaššiš EN–YA para-a duškatti “Now you, Stormgod Pihaššašši, my Lord, fu[lly r]ejoice over the temples that I will build you and the rites that I will perform for you” KUB 6.46 iv 31-32 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.45 + KUB 30.14 iii 62-64, ed. but misread by Lebrun, Hymnes 268, tr. Goetze, ANET 398b (“Thou, Stormgod P. shalt rejoice over”); cf. also in broken context KBo 25.184 iii 7. 
	g. parā zinna- “to finish completely(?)” (w. -kan): […]x–kan pa-ra-a zinnai KBo 33.198 i 6 (rit.). 

8. (prev.) (idiomatic or unclear) — a. parā kanešš-: nu–mu–za ammel LÚ.MEŠaruš lē namma pa-ra-a kaniššuwanzi x[…] / markiškiwanzi–ya– 

126

mu–za mā

lawanzi RI-za leha-ap-x-an-zi KUB 40.1 rev.! 24-25 (NH), cf. Kühne, ZA 62:237f. (reading ha-at!ra!-an-zi and tr. “Mögen … meine Kollegen nicht mehr … schreiben, um mich anzuzeigen (herauszustellen? zu loben?)”) and malai- a 1', for immediately preceding context see nak~ kiyatar 4. 
	b. parā nakke(šš)- (?): [o o] pa-ra-a DUGUDzi NU.ŠE-du KUB 50.30 rev. 1 (oracle question, NH). 
	c. parā nanna- “to drive forward, drive on(?)”: nu pa-ra-a-pát nanništen KUB 31.101:21-22 (NH), ed. Ünal, RHA XXXI:49, 51 (“führet aus(?)), 52 (“wörtl. ‘wegtreiben’”), Archi, SMEA 16:137f. (“marciate dritto”). 
	d. parā pāp(a?)- “to shape(?) out”: (Someone goes into the arzana house) […-]eš-túh-ha pa-ra-a pāpanzi / […]≠x±.HI.A LÚMURÂDI / […]x daškir “they shape(?) out [the …], and the food server(s) used to take [the …-]s” KUB 60.41 obv. 13-15 (fest., OS), translit. StBoT 25:109. Cf. pap(a-?). 

e. parā tamenk(anu)- “to make (words, etc.) to be attached or to be pleasing(?), ingratiate (oneself) (?)”: LUGAL-<i>–ya–wa–kan memiy[anu]š pa-ra-a UL kuitki tamenganušk?[imi?] “[I will] not in any way make (my) words ingratiating to the king” KUB 13.35 i 26 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:4f. (“betrügerisch umdeuten”), cf. p. 16; cf. KUB 31.99 obv. 22; nu–tta hatreššar kue hatreškimi nu–tta mān aššul hatramīzik–ma–at–za pa-ra-a damenkūwar halzeššatti DIšar–ma–ta hatrā
mi zik–ma–mu hurzakiši “Regarding the messages that I keep writing you: if I write you in a friendly way, you call it ‘ingratiating (yourself),’ whereas (if) I write you about (our) disagreement, you keep cursing me” KBo 18.24 i 4-8 (letter, Hatt. III?), ed. Otten, AfO 22:112 w. n. 7, THeth 16:241f. (“Anschmiegung”(?)), Heinhold-Krahmer, AfO 35:99f. w. different interpretation (“nennst du es jedoch Anbiederung”); cf. also KBo 18.24 i 16. It is possible but in no way demonstrable that this usage of parā belongs sub mng. 7 (“completely”). 
9. kuišša/kuitta parā “each in turn, every kind of … namely” (referring to a series of items) — a. 
w. tepu: KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI NA›ZA.G‰N NA›KÁ. DINGIR.RA NA›parašhaš NA›DU°.ŠÚ.A lulluri NAGGA URUDU kuitta pa-ra-a tepu dāi “… of each in turn he takes (only) a little” KBo 15.10 i 8-9 (rit. to pacify the gods of blood, MH/MS), ed. THeth.1:12f., 

parā 9 b 
cf. lulluri- a; nu–ššan katta kī hāndan 3 NINDA. GUR›.RA.HI.A Z´D.DA.A KU‡ tarnaš GIŠPÈŠ GIŠGEŠTIN.HÁD.DU.A kallaktar parhuenaš ŠA DINGIR-LIM memal kuitta pa-ra-a tepu [UDU]iyan~ daš S´Ghuttulli [1 DUG]KUKUB GEŠTIN “The following things are put in order next to it: three loaves of thick, sweet bread (made) of moist flour (weighing) one tarna, figs, raisins, kallaktar, par~ huena-, meal of the deity, a little of each in turn (which precede), a tuft of wool from an iyant[sheep, one] pitcher of wine” KUB 9.27 + KUB 7.8 i 611 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277; TU‡ gan~ gatiSAR TU‡ BA.BA.ZA TU‡ GÚ.GAL TU‡ GÚ. GAL.GAL TU‡ GÚ.TUR TU‡ euwan TU‡ ARSAN~ NUM kuitta 1/ 2 UPNI INBI HI.A HÁD.DU.A kuitta para-a tepu ZÀ.AH.LISAR ŠU.KIŠSAR ‰.DÙG.GA tepu etc. “gangati-stew, porridge stew, stew of beans, stew of broad beans, stew of lentils, stew of euwan, stew of ARSANNU-meal, each of half a handful, dried fruits, a small quantity of each in turn, garden cress, ŠU.KIŠ-herb, and oil, a little” KUB 29.4 ii 50-53 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 18f. (“jede (Sorte) für sich (und) ein wenig”), cf. KUB 29.4 ii 64; ANA EN.S´SKUR– ma 1 MUNUS 1 GU›ÁB 1 UDU.U⁄‚ 1 UZﬂ–ya tar~ nanz[i] nu EGIR-anda zapzagaya KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI NA›.HI.A hūmanteš kuitta pa-ra-a tepu S´G SAﬁ S´G ZA.G‰N S´G hanzanaš S´G SIG‡.SIG‡ kuitta tepu«š» n–at–šan ANA GAD anda išhiyanzi “They let go to the sacrificer, one woman, one cow, one ewe, and one nanny goat. Afterward (they take?) glass, silver, gold, all the (precious) stones, a little of each, red wool, blue wool, black wool, yellow-green wool, each in small quantity in turn, they tie them in a piece of cloth” KUB 29.8 i 31-36 (rit., MH/MS), ed. ChS I/1:88 (“von jedem fernerhin ein wenig”). 
b. w. the items following: 1 GIŠD´LIM.GAL INBU kuitta pa-ra-a GIŠPÈŠ GIŠGEŠTIN.HÁD.DU.A GIŠSERDUM “One vessel (and?) one bowl of every kind of fruit, namely: figs, raisins, (and) olives” KBo 18.193:4-5 (ingredients for rit., NS); TU‡.HI.A–ya hūmanda [kuitta pa-ra-a … hūmanda] kuitta para-a NINDA.LÀL h[ū
manda kuitt]a pa-ra-a GIŠIN~ BI HI.A–ya hūman hādan huē
lpi kuitta pa-ra-a n–at udanzi n–at PA_NI DINGIR-LIM tianzi KUB 27.16 iv 4-8 (fest., NS); “He makes the following offering: …” GIŠPÈŠ GIŠGEŠTIN.HÁD.DU.A GIŠSERDUM kuitta 
127

pa-ra-a huielpi GIŠINBIHI.A GIŠHAŠHUR GIŠHAŠ~ HUR.KUR.RA GIŠŠENNUR “figs, raisins, olives, every kind of fresh fruits; namely, apples, apricots, medlar(?)” KUB 43.55 iii 17-18 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Haas, OA 27:89, 92 (“und was darüber hinaus frische Früchte sind”). 
c. w. other additions: 6 NINDAharašpauwanteš 6 NINDA.SIG ŠA ‰ 5 NINDAšarā marranteš NINDAam~ pānzi NINDA.LÀL kuišša pa-ra-a ŠA Z´Z “six loaves of haršpauwant-bread, six loaves of thin bread with oil, five breads glazed on top(?), am~ pānzi-bread, honey bread, each in turn (made) of wheat” KBo 10.34 i 11-12 (enthronement rit., MH/NS), cf. marra- 1 e; “He goes to the riverside and takes oil” KAŠ GEŠTIN walhi marnuwan kuitta pa-ra-a GAL.GIR› NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A memal TU‡ BA.BA. ZA dāi “and he takes beer, wine, walhi, marnuwan, each in turn a cupful, sweet oil cake, memal, (and) porridge” KBo 10.45 i 32-33 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f. (“jedes gesondert (in einem) Tonbecher”). 
10. kuwapitta parā “further in different places”: “Then (namma), where in the vineyard the Maliyanni-deities are, (there) I dig (paddahhi, cf. also ibid. 3) the earth before them and move two šēkanmeasures (of earth)” namma–ya–kan ANA GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN anda kuwapitta pa-ra-a 9 AŠRA paddā[hhi] “and after that I dig further in the vineyard in nine different places” KUB 12.44 iii 14-15 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas, FsOtten2 138f. 
11. parā in combination w. other adverbs — a. 
w. local adverbs — 1' parā
(-)anda: see mema- 7 b 3'-4' and parranda. 
2' andan parā only in fragmentary context where andan is likely to be postposition: […]x-aš INA URUTū
pa andan pa-r[a-a …] KBo 19.52:7 (frag. of ann., NS); in nu URUPalunta(!) andan pa-ra-a(-)x (= ma?)[…] KUB 34.43 obv.? 8 (frag. of itinerary, NS), parā might be adverbial “after that, furthermore” because of the sentence structure nu GN andan nu etc. elsewhere in the text (cf. ibid. obv.? 10) and because of the lack of space between the -a of parā and the next sign. 
3' ā: [(n–an)] ANA µA[rm]a-dU EGIR
ppa parapa pa-ra-a pehhun “And I handed it (i.e., Armatarhunta’s property) back over to Armatarhunta” KUB 19.67 + 1513/u i 27 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KUB 

parā 11 b 2' 

1.7 iii 1, ed. StBoT 24:18f.; see further nai- 4 a 4' □ as in the combination andan parā, the local adverb āppa (EGIR-pa) functions in all the relevant passages as a postposition. 
4' parā arha: [ANA dUTU-Š]I–kan kuit LUGALuiznani / [ašā
tar] pa-ra-a arha zalukišta “As to the fact that [His Majest]y’s [sitting down] on the throne was further delayed” KUB 18.59 obv. 12-13 (oracle question), ed. van den Hout, ZA 81:282f., restored after par. [ANA dUTU-ŠI–kan LUG]AL-iznani ašātar kuit zaluqa~ numen KUB 18.36:11-12 (oracle question, NH), ed. van den Hout, ZA 81:279f. □ the assumption by Zuntz, Ortsadv. 50, that parā might have been in postposition to a noun in the abl. lost in the break is unlikely because of the par. KUB 18.36. See also frag. KUB 40.68 ii? 10. 
5' parā menahhanda “forward against”: n–aš– mu–kan uit INA URUKappuppuwa–pat HUR.SAG-i šer pa-ra-a menahhanda tīēt “It happened that he (i.e., the enemy) attacked me (lit. stepped forward against me) in the aforementioned Kappuppuwa on top of the mountain” KBo 5.8 i 33-35 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 150f. □ menahhanda is an adverb and makes the movement implied by parā more explicit. See 3 y, above (parā tiya-). 
6' peran parā “beforehand, in advance”: see peran. 
b. w. other adverbs — 1' parā tarrū/tarrauwa (mng. unclear) (once opp. to EGIR-pa par(a)šza): cf. discussion by Weitenberg, U-Stämme 141 (“vorwärts (parā) der Länge nach”). 
2' duwan parā “until now, heretofore”: BE-an– ma–mu–za dU URUNerik SAG.DU DINGIR-LIM-iš duwān pa-ra-a GIM-an SAG.KI-za harta kinuna– ya QA_TAMMA kēdani–za–kan L´L-ri kuwatan imma kuwatan neyahhari nu–mu pean hūiyaši “If you, Stormgod of Nerik, (are) my personal deity, as you helped (me) heretofore will it be likewise so now? Will you assist me now too, wherever I turn on this campaign?” KUB 5.1 iii 53-54 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth. 4:72f. (“wie du mich bisher hilfreich war-est”), cf. Starke, BiOr 46:667f. (“wie du einst das Gesicht nach vorn hieltest”); (It has been found out by way of an oracle investigation that the Sungoddess of Arinna is angry because of certain vows that apparently have not been fulfilled) [DIN]GIR-LUM kuit du~ wan pa-ra-a [š]allakartan harkun nu–z[a DINGIR

128

L]UM apaddan šer kartimmiyauwanza nu TE.MEŠ NU.SIGﬁ-du GIŠŠÚ.A!-hi GÙB-an NU.SIGﬁ § mān– za DINGIR-LUM appaddan–pat šer kartimmiyau~ wanza duwan–ta kuit pa-ra-a šallakartan harkun “Because I [o]ffended the [dei]ty heretofore (du~ wan parā
), are you, O deity, therefore angry? Let the signs then be unfavorable. The throne (is on the) left: unfavorable. § If you, deity, are angry just because of that, because I have offended you heretofore” (follows another oracle result; in the next paragraphs a compensation for the vows already mentioned is settled upon, after which they return to the alleged offence:) DINGIR-LUM–ya kuit du~ wan pa-ra-a šallakartan harkun nu apaddann–a šer SISKUR SUM-anzi “and will they give an offering also therefore, because I offended the deity heretofore?” KBo 2.2 iii 19-27, iv 2-4 (oracle questions, NH), cf. Güterbock, Cor.Ling. 66 (“weiterhin noch(?)”). The foregoing passage (iii 26: duwan–ta kuit parā
) shows that duwan and parā can be separated. For further exx. see duwan. 

12. parā in noun compounds — a. LÚparā

uwant“inspector, supervisor”: see 1 g and as a separate lemma para(-)uwant. 

b. LÚparā
uwatalla- “lookout”: see 1 g 2', above. 

c. *parā negna-(a half-brother or step-brother?): ANA dUTU-ŠI–ya ŠEŠ.MEŠ–ŠU maiqqauš pa-ra-a ŠEŠ.MEŠ-ušš–a–šše meqqaēš LUGAL. MEŠ arahzenušš–a meqqauš “and His Majesty has many brothers, furthermore he has many ‘parabrothers,’ and there are many foreign kings” KUB 
26.1 iii 58-60 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 14 (cf. ibid. i 9-13 which lacks parā but has [ŠEŠ] ≠A±-BIMEŠ s.v. mekki- A, mekk- 1 a), cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 60; Goetze (JCS 13:67) proposed emending to ŠEŠ <ABI>MEŠ-uš “uncles”; note that, whether one reads -ša-mu or -ša-aš-še, parā and ŠEŠ. MEŠ-uš are ‘univerbiert,’ which prompts our translation “parabrothers.” 
The position of the preverb parā in a sentence: The term “preverb” is best understood as indicating a close semantic relationship between parā and the verb in question. In the majority of cases paradoes occupy the position immediately before the verb. As a rule, however, certain elements can separate parā from the verb. These are negations (UL/ 

parā 
natta, nawi, numan, lē), indefinite pronouns (kuiški etc.), adverbs, or a combination of these, e.g.: n– at–za pa-ra-a lē kuiški kuedanikki memai “and no one may tell anyone else” KUB 26.1 iii 24-25 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 13, cf. parā uiya- (1 yy, above); nu–wa–kan pa-ra-a apaddan–pat uškinun “and only for that reason I disregarded (it)” KUB 
13.35 iv 41 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:14f.; see further nai- 4 a 3' b' and c'(hūdak¢), lalukkeš- 2 (mekki), and 1 rr parā šuppiyahh(kiššan), above. Although separation of parā and the verb by these elements was apparently preferred to placing these elements before the parā
, it was not mandatory. 
Frequently a d.-l. or all. indicating the direction implied by parā is inserted between the preverb and the verb: for a d.-l. see above parā arš- (1 f), parā har(k)- (6 a 2'), parā ištamašš- (7 a), parā pai- A (1 y), parā piddai-A (1 ii); for the all. see KUB 33.62 iii 5 in parā peda(1 hh 1'). Other adverbial phrases can take the immediate preverbial position, too, although much less frequently: [par]ā PAﬁ.HI.A-uš mān aršanzi KUB 33.113 i 16-17, above, 1 f; pa-ra-a–ya–kan ´D-i anda 7-ŠU lā
hui-KBo 5.2 i 54, above, 1 u; n–at–kan para-a ŠA LÚMEŠEDI Éhīlaz uiškandari IBoT 1.36 i 74, above, 1 ww; or DINGIR.MEŠ–za–kan É.[MEŠ?– (KUNU)] (var. KAZU–KUNU) pa-ra-a idā
lauwaz uddanaz lin[(kiaz)] hurtiyaz išhanaz išhahru[(az)] ā¢šten “O gods, be washed/
rranza (var. arranteš) ecleansed off with respect to your temples (var. mouths) from evil words, perjury, curses, blood, 
¢	(and) tears” KUB 15.42 ii 28-31 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 43.58 ii 39-41 (MH/MS); [t]a ANA QA_TI LUGAL wā¢¢i “And he
tar pa-ra-a [tu]hhuešnit 3–ŠU lahuwa(i.e., the chief cook) pours the water with resin(?) out onto the king’s hands three times” KUB 41.40 i 19-20 (fest., OH/NS); DUMU-aš TUŠ-aš GEŠTIN GUNNI pa-ra-a 3-ŠU ka[r]uiliyaš DINGIR.MEŠ
¢	[aš lāh]uwaī“The prince, sitting, [pou]rs out wine at the hearth three times for the primeval gods” KUB 53.13 iv 20-22 (fest., NS), cf. ibid. iv 28 (+ KUB 54.11:12), 38, v 12. 
Sometimes preverbial parā is moved to the first 
¢	position of the clause for emphatic reasons: e.g., našma (var. n–ašta) EN.SISKUR DUGpalhi arraz anda [(pai)]zzi pa-ra-<a>–ma–aš–kan pūriyaz uizzi “The sacrificer goes into the palhi-vessel 
129

through its rear end and comes out through the front end (lit. lip)” KBo 24.63 ii? 11-12 + KBo 23.43 ii? 3-4 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. IBoT 2.46 rt. col. 6-8; ANA LÚ.MEŠ.É. NA›–ya–kan AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM andan peškandu pa-ra-a–ma–kan DUMU.NITA DUMU.MUNUS AŠŠUM É.GI›.A-TIM LÚandaiyandanni–ya lē kuiš~ ki pāi “They may give <daughters> as a bride to the men of the royal mausoleum, but no one (there) may give out a son or a daughter as a bride or a son-in-law” KUB 13.8:13-15 (decree, MH/NS), ed. Otten, HTR 106f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 59. Unlike, Zuntz, Ortsadv. 59, these cases are regarded as examples of preverbial parā and not adverbial. 
In some isolated cases, the subject or object separates parā and the verb in cases where a preverbial interpretation of parā seems to be the only possibility. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 112, views these nouns as having special emphasis. For a subject separating parā from the verb see n–uš kiššan pa-ra-a ´D-aš pē
dau “The river must carry them forth in this way” KBo 11.72 iii 16 (rit., MH?/NS); for an object see KBo 5.2 iii 33-35, above, 1 vv. For rules concerning preverbs and their placement see Zuntz, Ortsadv. 111-115, although she did not use them in the ordering of the material. Goetze, JCS 17:98101, used these rules to distinguish between preverbs and post-positions. Starke, StBoT 23:127-131, denies the existence of preverbs and accepts only adverbs. 
Although exceptions exist, most exx. of parā 1 have a local particle, while most of parā 3 do not. 
Zuntz, Ortsadv. (1936) 58-83, 109-110, 111-115; Sturtevant, AIPHOS 6 (1938) 285-287; Goetze, JCS 17 (1963) 98-101; Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 127-162. 
parā-n. com.; air, breath(?); MH/NS.† [wal]ū
lan pariyanzi n–an G‰R-it [išpar]ranzi n– ašta pa-ra-a-aš parā [ta]rnattari“They inflate a [wal]ū
la-and flatten it with (their) foot, so that the air is expelled” KBo 6.34 iii 30-32 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:12f.; restored from the parallel tar!-na-at-ta-ri KBo 27.12 iii 6 (MH/NS); [GIŠw]awarkimaš tametar~ wanza EGIR-an kēdani tarrū […] / [k]ēdani tarrū pa-ra-a-an ištappir “The tametarwant-hinge [… -s] afterward tarrū for/from this one(?); they have stopped the breath(?) tarrū for this one(?)” KBo 21.6 obv. 4-5 (Tunnawi’s rit.), ed. Weitenberg, U-Stämme 142, translation uncertain. 

parā handandatar 

It is possible that parašši-(q.v.) is a Luw. genitival adj. based upon this noun. Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 46f. n. 111; idem, Stammbildung (1979) 468f.; Tischler, HDW (1982) 60. 
Cf. parai-A, parip(pa)rai-, NINDAparapri-. 
parā handant-part.; 1. rightly guiding (deity), 
2. rightly guided (human); NH.† 
pa-ra-a ha-an-da-a-an-za KUB 1.1 i 47, pa-ra-a ha-an-daan-za KUB 6.46 iv 27, KBo 3.6 i 39. 
1	rightly guiding (deity): handan–wa aši DIN~ GIR-LIM šarkuš UR.SAG-iš pa-ra-a ha-an-da-a[(nza DINGIR)-L]UM (var. DINGIR-LIM) “Truly that deity is an outstanding hero, a rightly guiding deity” KUB 6.45 iii 57-58 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 iv 26-27, tr. ANET 398 (“Surely that god is a strong, valiant, (and) glorious god”). This active meaning of the part. underlies the denominative verb parā han~ dantešš-“to become one who rightly/divinely guides,” q.v., and parā handātar/parā handandatar “divine guidance/power.” 
2	rightly guided (human): ammuk–ma–za para-a ha-an-da-a-an-za (var. pa-ra-a ha-an-da-anza) kuit UN-aš ešun ANA PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ kuit pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-an-ni iyahhahat “But because I was a divinely guided person, and I walked before the gods in divine guidance” KUB 1.1 i 46-48 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 i 39-40, ed. StBoT 24:6f. 

Cf. parā handandatar, parā handantešš-. 
[ parā handanda(i)-] HW 52 and Oettinger, Stammbildung 33 (handandae-“begnaden”), does not exist. See parā handantešš-. 
parā handandatar n. neut.; 1. divine guidance, 
2. divine power; NH.† 
nom.-acc. ≠pa-ra-a±[ha-an-da-a]n-ta-tar KBo 4.4 (= BoTU 58B) i 46, pa-ra-a ha-an-ta-an-ta(coll. W)-tar KUB 14.15 ii 2, pa-ra-a ha-an-ta-an-da-tar KBo 3.6 i 5, pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-datar KBo 27.60:6, KUB 21.27 iv 3, KBo 19.76 i (19), KUB 1.1 i 5, KUB 19.67 i 3, pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-ta-a-tar KBo 4.4 ii 76, pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-a-tar KBo 3.4 ii 16, KUB 19.37 iv (3), KBo 3.6 iii 54, KUB 14.11 iv 19, [pa-ra-a h]a-an-da-a-an-datar KBo 10.17 iv 1, [pa-r]a-a ha-an-da-a-an-da-tar KBo 16.1 iii 17, pa-ra-a ha-an-da-a-an-ta-tar KUB 1.8 iv 6, KUB 14.10 iv 15, [pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-d/t]a-a-tar-še-et KBo 26.100 iv 12. 

130

parā handandatar 

gen. pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-ta-an-na-aš KUB 56.19 i 32 (NS), pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-an-na-aš KUB 2.1 ii 20, KUB 40.108 v (2), [ pa]-ra-a ha-an-ta-an-ta-an-na-aš KUB 2.1 iv 7, KUB 

44.16 iv (10). dat.-loc. pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-an-ni KUB 1.1 i 48. 

1	divine guidance: ammuk–ma–za parā han~ dānza kuit UN-aš ešun ANA PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ kuit pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-an-ni iyahhahat “Because I was a divinely guided person, and because I ‘walked’ (i.e., conducted my affairs) before the gods in divine guidance, (I never committed the evil deeds of mortals)” KUB 1.1 i 46-48 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:6f., cf. HED 2:332f. and commentary by Wolf, Diss. 28-34. 
2	divine power — a. in acc. — 1' obj. of au(š)“to see, experience, witness”: nu–za ŠA dIŠTAR p[(a-ra-a ha-an)]-da-an-da-tar (so dupls. A and M; dupl. B: pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-a-tar) apiya– y[(a)] mekki ūhhun “At that time too I witnessed the divine power of IŠTAR in great measure: (IŠTAR shut Urhiteššup up in Šamuha like a pig in a pen)” KUB 1.1 + KUB 26.44 iv 23-24 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupls. B: KBo 3.6 iii 54-55, and M: KUB 1.8 iv 10, ed. StBoT 24:24f. 

2' obj. of mema-“to speak of, tell of, describe”: In the prologue of the Apology of Hattušili III, the king announces the purpose of his text: ŠA dIŠTAR pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-tar (var. ha-an-ta-an-datar) memahhi “I will tell of the divine power of IŠTAR” KUB 1.1 i 5 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 i 5, ed. StBoT 24:4f., Hatt 6f.; on this prologue see von Schuler in FsNeumann 389-400; this could also belong under mng. 1. 
3' obj. of tekkuššanu-“to show, display”: nu–za dU EN–YA pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-ta-a-tar (var. [h]aan-da-a-an-da-tar) ma[hhan mekki] tetkušnut! (text: te-et-ku-nu-uš-ut, var. [te-e]k-≠ku-uš±-ša-nu-ut) “When the Stormgod, my lord, showed his divine power [mightily]” KBo 4.4 ii 76-77 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 10.17 iv 1-2, ed. AM 122f.; nu–za dU NIR. GÁL EN–YA pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-a-tar (var. pa-ra-a ha-an-da-a-an-da-tar) tekkuššanut nu GIŠkalmišanan šiyāit “The mighty Stormgod, my lord, displayed his divine power: he hurled a lightning bolt (and struck the land of Arzawa)” KBo 3.4 ii 16-17 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 16.1 iii 16-18, ed. AM 46f.; nu–za DINGIR.MEŠ BE_LU_ 
MEŠ–YA pa-ra-a ha

parā handandatar 
an-da-a-an-ta-tar (pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-a-tar) tikkušnuwandu “Let the gods, my lords, show (their) divine power” KUB 14.10 iv 14-15 (PP 2), w. dupl. KUB 14.11 iv 19-20, ed. Götze, KlF 1:218f., Lebrun, Hymnes 209f., 215; mahhan–ma uit IŠTU ≠É± LUGAL han~ neššar kuitki EGIR-pa hu≠it±tiyattat nu–za dIŠTAR GAŠAN–YA pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-tar apēdani mēhuni tikkušnut (var. tikkuššan[ut]) “But when some judgment proceeded to be withdrawn/revised by the king’s house, at that time my lady IŠTAR revealed her divine power: (a new judgment reversed the old judgment)” KUB 19.67 i 1-4 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:18f. iii 15-16; nu–za dIŠTAR GAŠAN–YA pa-ra-a ≠ha±-an-da-an-da-tar (var. haan-da-a-tar) a[p]iya–ya mekki tekkuš[(šanu)]t KUB 

1.1 + KUB 26.44 iv 18-19 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 
3.6 iii 49-50 + Bo 69/256 (StBoT 24 pl. III) iii 60-61, ed. StBoT 24:24f.; (O Zintuhi, my lady) [… p]a-ra-a ha-an-daan-da-tar [tekkuššanut] nu–kan dIM-ni tuel huhhi [U ANA] dUTU URUTÚL-na tuel hanni [ŠA µHa]ttušili ‰R–KA TI-tar MU.HI.A G´D.DA–ya [par]ā arnut “[Show] (your) divine power, and bring the life and long years of your servant Hattušili to the Storm-god, your grandfather, and the Sungoddess of Arinna, your grandmother” KUB 21.27 iv 3-7 (prayer, Pud.), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 334, 340, Sürenhagen, AoF 8:116f., tr. ANET 393f., cf. parā 6 b 2'; cf. KBo 19.76 i 24-25 + KUB 14.20 i 11-12 (ann., Murš. II), KBo 2.5 iv 14-15, ed. AM 192f. and KBo 4.4 i 46-46a, ed. AM 112f. and cf. parā handatar. 
b. in gen.: dA_laš pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-da-a[n-naaš] “A_la of divine power/guidance” KUB 40.108 v 2 (fest. for all dLAMMAs), ed. McMahon, AS 25:126f.; cf. KUB 

2.1 iv 7; cf. also KUB 56.19 i 31-32, ed. s.v. parā handantešš-. 
Sommer and Ehelolf (Pap. 30f.) already noted that parā handātar is a variant of the longer parā handantātar in the duplicate passages KBo 3.6 iii 50 and KUB 1.1 iv 18. They took the longer form, derived from the part. parā handant-, as the original, from which the shorter arose through haplology. In all passages the word denotes an outworking of divine power, almost always to bring help or deliverance. The part. parā handant-denotes a person enjoying the guidance, protection, and help of a deity. But this part. is also the base of the derived verb parā handantešš-, q.v., which denotes becoming a person who offers divine guidance (active, 
131

not passive!). The evidence of the derived verb indicates that parā handant-, like a few other participles of trans. verbs, could have either active or passive meanings. 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 30f.; Götze, Hatt (1925) 52-55; Sturtevant/Bechtel, Chrest. (1935) 86, 229; Goetze, Kleinasien2 (1957) 145f.; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 104, 158, 293, 548; Wolf, Diss. (1967) 28-34; Archi, SMEA 14 (1971) 188; Hoffner, in POT (1973) 211; Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 23 n. 3; idem, Stammbildung (1979) 33 (handandae-“begnaden”); Hoffner, Or NS 49 (1980) 315-317; Neumann, IF 90 (1985) 289f.; Sürenhagen, StMed 5 (1985) 82, 85; Puhvel, HED 3 (1991) 105f. (“providence”). 
Cf. handai-, parā handant-, parā handantešš-, parā handatar. 
parā handantešš-v.; to become one who guides rightly, become a divine guide; LNS.† 
pres. sg. 2 [ pa-ra-a ha-an<-da-an>-t]i-iš-ti KUB 56.19 i 31; pret. sg. 3 pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-te-eš-ta KUB 1.1 i 21, pa-ra-a ha-an-ta-an-te-eš-ta KBo 3.6 i 18, KUB 1.2 i 19. 
nu–mu dIŠTAR GAŠAN–YA ŠU-za I[(ÙBA)]T n– aš–mu–kan pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-te-eš-ta (vars. haan-ta-an-te-eš-ta) “IŠTAR, my lady, took me by the hand, and she became for me one who guides rightly” KUB 1.1 i 21 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 3.6 i 18 and KUB 1.2 i 19, ed. StBoT 24:4f.; mā
nn–a–mu–kan dU EN–YA kē
daš uddana[š pa-ra-a ha-an<-da-an>t]i-iš-ti nu–tta EZEN parā handantannaš iya[mi] “And if you, O Stormgod, my lord, will become my divine guide in these matter[s], [I] will make a festival of divine guidance for you” KUB 56.19 i 31-32 (vow, NH), the space in the hand copy is not enough to accommodate pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-, but in view of the following line the restored verb should have meant “to guide.” Perhaps it was an entirely different, but synonymous verb. 
Our interpretation of the verb as an -ešš-stem is based on the observation that the enclitic subject pronoun -aš occurs w. it. Watkins apud Garrett, JCS 42:227-242, has shown that the enclitic third person pronoun (-aš, -e, -at) is not used w. trans. verbs. Therefore -mu must be an indirect object. 
Cf. parā handandatar, parā handant-. 
parā handatar n.; 1. divine guidance, 2. divine power; from MH/NS.† 

parā handatar 2 

nom.-acc. pa-ra-a ha-an-da-tar KBo 19.76 i 24, pa-ra-a haan-ta-tar KBo 6.29 ii 30, pa-ra-a ha-an-da-a-tar KBo 19.76 i 27, KBo 3.6 iii 50, KBo 2.5 iv (15). 
dat.-loc. p[a-r]a-a ha-an-da-a-an-ni KUB 26.41 obv. 13 (MH/NS), pa-ra-a ha-an-da-an-ni KUB 15.32 i 50 (MH/NS), KBo 5.1 i 43, KUB 13.29 i (4). 
1. divine guidance: nu–ššan ANA LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL [DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL …] / p[ar]a-a ha-an-da-a-an-ni ZI-ni […] “[Let them act] toward the king, queen, [and princes] in (their) soul in divine guidance, (and let no one [plan] evil)” KUB 26.41 obv. 12-13 (treaty of Arn. I w. Išmeriga, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:192f. (“im göttlich geleiteten(?) Sinne,” although parā handanni is not a part.); “If you are angry (with us), or (if) someone (else) has drawn you away, implored (and) invoked (you), and that evil (and) wicked (person) has been calling you to a secret place” kinuna–wa–šmas kā
ša anzaš pa-raa ha-an-da-an-ni dUTU-i kattan aššuli hū
ittiyanneš~ kiuwani talleškiuwani mukišgaweni “but now we are continually drawing you forth, evoking and invoking you in divine guidance (or: in honesty) (and) in good will under the sun (or: together with the Sungod)” KUB 15.32 i 49-51 (evocation, MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:152f., and mugai-a 1' a' 2''; “If your mother or father have afterward allowed some sin to occur” našma–wa zik kā pa-ra-a ha-an-da-anni našma zašhit kuitki waštanuwan harta “or you have (text: had) allowed some sin to happen here in (your) divine guidance/command or by means of a dream (message)” KBo 5.1 i 42-44 (rit. of Papanikri), ed. Pap. 4*f. (“in (eignem) göttlichem Wirken”). 
2. divine power, obj. of tekkuššanu-: nu–šmaš DINGIR.MEŠ MA_MÂTI [ pa-ra-]a ha-an-da-a-tar tikkušnuer “The oath deities showed them their divine power (and seized the oath-breakers)” KBo 2.5 iv 14-15, ed. AM 192f.; cf. also perhaps KBo 4.4 i 46-46a, ed. AM 112f.; dU NIR.GÁL[–ma–mu] EN–YA pa-ra-a ha-an-da-tar namma tetkušnut!(text:-un) nu GEﬂ-an hūmandan hēuwanešk[i]t [nu] IMBARU–ya dāiš “The mighty Stormgod, my lord, again showed(!) [me] his divine power: he rained all night long [and] laid a fog too (so that the enemy could not see the camp fire of my army)” KBo 19.76 i 24-25 + KUB 14.20 i 11-12 (ann., Murš. II); (I myself went to Urhiteššup in Šamuha) dIŠTAR URUŠamuha–ma–za GAŠAN–YA apiya–ya pa-ra-a ha-an-ta-tar tikkuš~ 

132

parā handatar 2 

šanut “Then too IŠTAR, my lady, showed her divine power” KBo 6.29 ii 29-30 (Hatt. III), ed. Hatt 50f. (“bezeigte mir auch da ihre beständige Fürsorge”); cf. KUB 1.1 
+ KUB 26.44 iv 18-19, w. dupl. KBo 3.6 iii 49-50 + Bo 69/256 (StBoT 24 pl. III) iii 60-61 in parā handandatar 2 a 3'. 
parai-A v.; (trans.) 1. to blow (a horn), 2. to blow on, fan (a fire or burning materials), 3. to blow up, inflate; from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pa-ri-ih-hi KBo 11.11 ii 6 (NH); sg. 3 pa-ra-a-i KBo 20.78 i 15 (= KBo 23.97 i 23), KBo 24.106:(22), KUB 
7.19 obv. (20), KUB 20.74 i 21, KUB 40.97 iii (3), KUB 45.53 iv (8), KUB 51.16:(17). 
pl. 1 pa-ri-i-wa-ni KBo 20.37 rev. 6 (OS); pl. 2 pa-ra-iš-teni KBo 3.27 obv. (24), 26 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pa-ra-an-zi KBo 21.57 ii 4 (OH?/MS), pa-ri-ia-an-zi KUB 2.3 ii 30 (OH/NS), KBo 6.34 iii 30 (MH/NS), KBo 27.12 rev.? (5), KUB 10.88 i 8, 11, KUB 

45.49 iv 15, IBoT 3.67 rt. col. 4, pa!(text: pár)-ri-ia-an-zi KBo 
4.11 obv. 25 (NS), pa-ri-an-zi KUB 43.56 iii 15, (17) (MH/NS). 
pret. sg. 3 pa-ra-iš KBo 3.60 i 14 (OH/NS), KUB 55.37 iii 8, 412/b ii (23), 25 (Ertem, Flora 118), [ p]a-ra-a-iš KUB 33.11 iii 19, KUB 33.53 iii (11); pl. 3 pa-ri-ir KBo 3.34 i 3, KBo 13.44 i 3 (both OH/NS). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pa-ri-ia-an KUB 43.58 i 16 (MH/ MS). 
The pl. nom.-acc. neut.? [… p]a-ra-a-an-ta KUB 35.164 rev.! 3 (OS), which Oettinger, Stammbildung 468, regards as a complete form [from parai-?], while Neu, StBoT 25:226, transliterates as [… (-)p]a-ra-a-an-ta (earlier translit. in StBoT 10:31), is probably a form of parranda, q.v. 
1	to blow (a horn) — a. subj. performers: šawa~ tarr–a 3-ŠU pa-ri-ia-an-zi “And they (the LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·) blow the horn three times” KUB 
1	
  ii 29-30 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS). 

	b. subj. lyre players: [LÚBALA]G.DI šauwatar [2-ŠU p]a-[r]a-a-i KUB 45.53 iv 7-8 (hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KUB 51.16:16-17; LÚBALAG.DI šauwatar 2-ŠU pa[-ra-a-i] KBo 24.106:22 (Hattic fest.). 
	c. subj. ašušatalla-men: (The ašušatalla-men speak sacred words before the Stormgod) EGIR-ŠU–ma SIšawitra šuhhi pa!(text: pár)-ri-ia-an-zi “Afterward they blow the horn on the roof (and sing a song in Luwian)” KBo 4.11 obv. 25 (Ištanuwian fest., NS), translit. DLL 163f. 
	d. subj. unexpressed: “When they lift the deities” SIšāwata[r 3-ŠU(?)] / [p]a-ri-ia-an-zi “they blow the horn [three times(?)] (and exclaim: ‘hari’)” KUB 45.49 iv 14-15 (Hurr. rit., NS); cf. KUB 7.19 

parai- A 3 
obv. 20 (fest. for Titiwatti, NS), w. dupl. KBo 23.97 i 23 (NS); cf. KUB 20.74 i 20-21 (hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 15.69 i 10, KUB 40.97 iii 3 (hišuwaš fest.); cf. papriya-. 
2. to blow on, fan (a fire, or burning materials) 
— a. obj. a fire (cf. pahhur 1 a 1' a'): m[ān]–šan haššī p[ah]hur [n]atta pa-ra-iš-≠te±-ni “If you do not kindle/fan fire in the brazier” KBo 3.27 obv. 25-26 (edict of Hatt. I, OH/NS), cf. ibid. obv. 23-24; INA UD.3.KAM–ma kēz 7-an pahhur kezzi–ya 7-an pahhur pa-ri-ih-hi “On the third day, I fan seven fires on this side and seven fires on the other side” KBo 11.11 ii 5-6 (rit., NH); cf. […] pahhur pa-ri-ir “They kindled/fanned a fire […]” KBo 3.34 i 2-3 (anecdotes, OH/NS); (Men from the city Zikkurik make piles of meat; they set up tables for the gods; then they set up eighteen tables for the king, the queen, the princes, and the dignitaries) pahhurr–a pa-ri-ia-an-zi “and they kindle/ fan fire(s). (They pile up forty-three tables for the lands) pahhur UL pa-ri-ia-an-zi “and do not kindle/ fan fire(s)” KUB 10.88 i 8-11 (Nerik fest. frag.); […] ≠pahhun±alli 1 DUGG‰R.KI[Š] / […]x pittā
nzi (or: pèta-a-an-zi) nu–ššan / [… p]ahhur pa-ra-an-zi “They bring […] fire-pan(s) (and) one … vessel, and they fan the fire [on …]” KBo 21.57 ii 2-4 (OH?/MS); [… pahhur?] / pa-ri-ia-an-zi […] / pahhur kišta[ri] “They fan [a fire …], the fire goes out […]” (and they sing) IBoT 3.67 rt. col. 3-5; cf. [… GIŠ]AB-yaš šuppi pahhur pa-ra-iš […]-in UDU iyantan warnu~ men “He kindled/fanned a sacred fire at the windows(?) […] we burned an iyant-sheep” KUB 55.37 iii 8-9 (rit.); [… g(imri)] šuppi pahhur tepu pa-r[a-ai] KBo 34.38 i 3, w. dupl. KUB 57.20:4, cf. Košak, ZA 78:310f. 
b. obj. the burning materials: n–an–za dKam~ rušepašš–a dāš AN.BAR-aš GUNNI n–an daiš nu pa-r[a-iš] GIŠšahin GIŠparnulli–ya pa-ra-iš-ma GI.DÙG.GA GIŠhappuriyan[n–a] “And Kamrušepa also took the iron brazier (GUNNI), she put it (in place), fanned the šahi-wood and the parnulliwood, and fanned the sweet reed and the happu~ riya-wood” 412/b ii 22-25 (bil. Hattic rit.), ed. Ertem, Flora 118f. □ for GI DÙG.GA see CAD Q 88. 
3. to blow up, inflate: [wal]ū
lan pa-ri-ia-an-zi n– an G‰R-it [išpar]ranzi n–ašta parā
š para[(tar!)]~ nattari “They inflate a [wal]ūla-and [fla]tten it with (their) foot, so that the air is expelled” KBo 
6.34 iii 30-33 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:12f., rest. 
133

from par. KBo 27.12 iii 5-6 (MH/NS); (They kill a pig, hold thin breads under the blood, and place it back before the deity) ŠAH–ma ē
ššanzi [n]–an–kan pit~ talwan markanzi n–ašta UZUgenzu pa-ri-an-zi “But the pig (i.e., its carcass) they ‘work’ and butcher it ‘plain,’ and inflate(?) its genitals (i.e., scrotum?)” KUB 43.56 iii 14-15 (rit., MH/NS) □ for pittalwan see discussion in mark-. 
4. (other): (Stews in BUR.ZI bowls are set out) 
arha–ma–at dā
n pa-ri-ia-an n–at parkunuwan (var. pár-ku-u-an) papratar–kan anda NU.GÁL “but it is blown off (i.e., cooled off??) for a second time, and it is purified (so that) there is no impurity in/on it” KUB 43.58 i 16 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.42 i 14 (NS). 
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 164 n. 1; idem, ZA 37 (1926) 199; idem, ZA 39 (1930) 49; Sommer, HAB (1938) 212 n. 2; von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1943) 51f. n. 2; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 468f. (“blasen, anfachen”); Roszkowska, Orientalia Varsoviensia 1 (1987) 28f. 
Cf. parā-n., parip(a)rai-, NINDAparapri-. 
parai-B v.; (intrans.) to appear(?), emerge(?); from OH/NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pa-ra-a-i KUB 8.1 ii 17, iii 10, KUB 43.19:2. verbal subst. sg. gen. pa-ra-an-na-aš HKM 26:8 (MH/MS). uncertain: pa-ra[-…] KUB 43.14 rt. col. 2. 
“If the moon dies in the fifteenth day of the eighth month, it will rain; the crops will be abundant” daganzipaš [hu]≠i±dār pa-ra-a-i n–apa halkin karapanzi “the grubs (lit. the creatures of the earth) will appear and devour the grain” KUB 8.1 iii 9-10 (lunar omen, OH/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 102, 106, and Hoffner, AlHeth 25, 87f.; cf. KUR-e anda mašaš para-a-i BURU⁄›.HI.A karāpi “The locust will appear in the land and devour the crops” ibid. ii 16-17, see tr. 
s.v. maša-b; Riemschneider apud Neu, StBoT 18:89 n. 178, regarded p. as a mistranslation of the Akk. itebbi “will rise” (= Hitt. arai) by confusing it w. the Akk. edē
pu “to blow” (= Hitt. parai-). Since the same text, KUB 8.1, uses both verbs, paraiii 17, iii 10, and arai-in iii 3, his explanation is not convincing; in a Maˆat letter from the king to Himuili: “You wrote me how the enemy [set] an ambush for thirty teams of horses at Panata” nu LÚKUŠ‡ KÙ.GI kuit pa-ra-an-na-aš wahannaš [LÚ-aš ē
šta] EGIR-an–ma–an–kan LÚ.KÚR kue[nta] n–at AŠME “and that the Gold Chariot-Warrior [was a man] of ‘ap-

GIŠparanalla

pearing and turning,’ yet (-ma) afterward the enemy killed him. I have heard it (all)” HKM 26:7-10, ed. HBM 166f. (“und dass der ‘Goldknappe’ die Kriegswagenpferde(?) [gerettet hat?],” and regards parannaš as a term for horses). For our restoration see šarkuš LÚ.MEŠ (var. LÚ-eš) ēšta akiš–ma–aš tepšauwanni “he was an outstanding man, yet he died in disgrace” KBo 3.34 ii 11-12 (anecdotes, OH/NS), 
w. dupl. KBo 3.36 obv. 18-19. 
Otten, OLZ 60 (1965) 547 (“erscheine(?)”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 25, 87f., w. lit. (“appear(?),” “emerge(?)”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 472 (“erscheinen, auftreten”). 
GIŠparā

la-n.; (mng. unclear).† 

sg. or pl.(?) GIŠpa-ra-a-la KBo 9.129 obv.? 10; abl. GIŠpara-la-a-az KBo 21.23 i 15; frag. GIŠpa-ra-la-x[…] ibid. i 9. 
mān–aš MUNUS-za–ma GU›ÁB tarpall[in] / [i]yanzi n–an hattan[zi] / [nu–š]ši GIŠpa-ra-a-la iyan[zi] “But if she (i.e., the patient) is a woman, they make the substitute a cow and slaughter it, and they make a wooden p. for it” KBo 9.129 obv.? 8-10 (rit.); ANA GU›.HI.A APIN.LAL–ma […] / n–an ūnnianz[i nu–kan SI.HI.A–ŠU ‰-az(?)] / iškanzi namma–šši […] / GIŠpa-ra-la-a-az karpan[zi …] (or: karpan [harkanzi …]) / nannianzi “To/For the plow oxen [they …] / and they drive it (i.e., a plow ox) in […] / they anoint [its horns with oil(?)]. Then they lift (or: hold lifted up) […] from him (or: his […]) by means of (or: from) the p. And they drive […]” KBo 21.23 i 12-16 (Kizz. rit.). 
GIŠparanalla-n.; (a wooden object or structure); NS.† 
pl. loc. [G]IŠpa-ra-na-al-la-aš KBo 11.52 ii 24, KUB 20.76 i (9), iv (6). 
[(LÚ)].MEŠALAN.ZU·–ma–kan [G]IŠpa-ra-na-al≠la±-aš šar[(ā pānzi)] LÚkītaš–ma Éar[(kiwi)] kattan tiyaz[i] “The performers go up to the GIŠp. The kitaman steps near the arkiu (canopy?)” KBo 11.52 ii 2326 (fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 20.76 iv 6-8 (NS), ed. Gonnet, Mém.Atatürk 50f., cf. pai-A 1 j 25' šarā pai-A w. d.-l. “to go up to.” 
GIŠp. is pl. It could be pl. tantum. 
Van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 104 (“estrades(?), tribunes(?)”); Gonnet, Mém.Atatürk (1982) 67 (“galerie ouverte ou loggia(?)”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 60 (“eine Pflanze”); Alp, Tempel (1983) 343 (“eine Art Balkon”?). 

134

parannaš see parai-B. 

parrant-adj. or part.; (modifying straw fodder); MH/MS.† 

sg. d.-l. pár-ra-an-ti KUB 29.53 i 4, KBo 14.63 i 5, 14. 

nu–šmaš 4 UPNU mema[l ANA 4 UPNI IN.NU] pár-ra-an-ti an[da i]mmiyanzi “They mix for them (sc. for the horses) four handfuls of groats [together with four handfuls of] p.-ed [straw]” KUB 29.53 i 3-4 + KUB 29.46:16-17 (horse-training text, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 192f.; [EGIR-anda–m]a–šmaš 2 UPNU kantan [ANA] 2 UPNI IN.NU pár-ra-an-t[i karšanti anda immiyanz]i “[Afterward,] they [mix] for them two handfuls of kant-grain with two handfuls of p.ed (and) [cut] straw” KBo 14.63 + KBo 8.52 i 4-5 (horsetraining text, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 216f.; cf. [pár-r]a-anti karšanti anda [immiyanzi] KBo 14.63 i 15; and cf. ibid. 19 □ for the tr. of kant-“einkorn(?)” see AlHeth 73. 
	p. in all exx. modifies IN.NU “straw, chaff” (for which see AlHeth 37f.) used as one of the ingredients for horse fodder. The straw in the horse-training texts is sometimes cut up, chopped (karšant-), or, as in Ullik. (KUB 33.93 iii 21!), “crushed, ground, chopped” (puššai-). Other fodder ingredients are either “rinsed, soaked” (arrant-, said of ŠE/hal~ ki-), “dried” (hatant-/HÁD.DU.A, said of welku-, uzuhri-“grass”), or “plain, unsalted” (pittalwant-). 
	
p. must therefore refer to some other attribute. Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth (1961) 216f. n. 4, 342 (index). 

parranda postpos., adv., prev.; w. -kan or -ašta except in mng. 4; 1. across, over (w. -kan and d.-l. of what is crossed), 2. over to, across to (w. -kan and d.-l. of person or place to which one crosses over), 3. (w. two d.-l. expressions, one indicating what is crossed and the other what is crossed over to), 4. (special uses w. verbs of speech), 5. (prev., 
w. tittanu-) “to make one stand over/beyond the boundary, to lead astray, tempt(?)”; from OS. 
pa-ra-a-an-ta KBo 15.10 i 20 (MH/MS), ≠pa±-ra-a-an-ta KBo 30.39 rev. 6 + KUB 35.164 “ii” 3 (OS), pa-ra-a-an-da KBo 
17.105 ii 20 (MH/MS), pa-ra-an-da KUB 57.123 obv. 9 (NH), KUB 16.16 rev. 6 (NH), pár-ra-an-ta KUB 14.1 rev. 43 (MH/ MS), KUB 41.8 ii 16 (MH/NS), KUB 34.23 i 3, 9 (Murš. II), KUB 31.20 iii 10 (Hatt. III), KUB 23.98 obv. 3, (NH), KUB 
40.40 ii 5 (NS), KBo 13.119 ii 18 (NS?), KUB 31.118:6 (NH), 

parranda 1 d 
KUB 35.145 rev. 6 (NH), VBoT 44:6, pár-ra-a-an-da KUB 
36.87 iv 13 (NH), pár-ra-an-da KUB 23.21 iii 26, KUB 41.8 ii 19 (both MH/NS), KBo 5.3 iii 41, KBo 3.4 ii (29), 31, KBo 
14.8 ii 3, KUB 19.37 ii 10, KUB 19.49 i 50 (all Murš. II), KBo 
4.14 iii 56 (LNS), KUB 16.16 rev. 7 (NH), pár-ra-an<-da> KBo 18.24 iv 17 (NH); uncertain pár-ra-da KBo 26.91 iii 8 (NH). 
1. across, over (w. -kan and d.-l. of what is crossed) — a. HUR.SAG-i parranda “across the mountain(s)”: perhaps KUB 16.16 rev. 5-7 below in 3. 
b. aruni parranda “across the sea”: nu–kan INA KUR URUArzauwa pár-ra-an-da pā
un “I went across Arzawa (or: across to Arzawa, = mng. 2)” (… I entered Apaša, Uhhaziti’s city. … He fled from me” n–aš–kan aruni pár-ra-an-da :guršauwananza pait “He went across the sea by ship(?)” (or, “to the islands(?)”) KBo 3.4 ii 28-29, 31-32 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 50f., cf. Starke, KZ 95:143, 147; ezzan GIM-an IM-anza pittenuzzi n–at–kan aruni pár-ra-an-ta (dupl. and[a] aruni) pē
dai … n–at–kan aruni pár-ra-anda (dupl. anda aruni) pē¢
dau “Just as the wind blows away the chaff and carries it across (or: across to [mng. 2]; dupl.: into) the sea (let it likewise blow away the murder and impurity of this house), and let it carry it across (or: across to [mng. 2]; dupl.: into) the sea” KUB 41.8 ii 15-16, 18-19 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 52-54 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124-127, see discussion below. 
c. huriptaš parranda “across the desert”: dIŠ~ TAR-i[š]–ma–[(ka)]n MUŠEN-iš iwar huript[aš] pár-ra-an-[t]a pi[dd]ait nu–kan dU-an hurip[(taš)] anda wemiyat “IŠTAR flew like a bird across (or: across to [mng. 2]) the desert places and found the Stormgod in (anda) the desert” KUB 31.118:5-7 + KUB 
36.37 ii 10-13 (myth, NH), w. dupl. KUB 12.61 ii! 12-14, trans-lit. Myth 27, tr. Hittite Myths 69f. □ for iwar see Hoffner, IM 43:39-51; for huriptaš see Hoffner, RHA XXIII/76:10 n. 34. 
d. kēdani ANA GIG [= irmani] dUTU-ŠI par~ randa “beyond this sickness of His Majesty”: mān– ma–kan DINGIR-LUM kē
dani ANA GIG dUTU-ŠI HUL-anni pár-ra-an-ta UL namma kuitki šalikti “But if you, O deity, will not reach in a harmful way even beyond this sickness of His Majesty, (let the KIN oracle be favorable)” KUB 5.6 i 41-42 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:101 (“darüber hinaus … näherst”), tr. Güterbock, ZA 44:91 n. 2 (“es wird gefragt, ob die Gottheit 
135

‘noch über diese Sache hinaus (zürnend oder strafend) vorgehen’ werde”), AU 276 (“über … hinaus … herfallen wirst(??)”); cf. parranta/parrianta šalik-s.v. šalik-. 
e. obscure: […]x šēr ui≠te±ni(?)/ui≠la±ni(?) šarā¢
uwar [katta]n(?) umeni man harharši ≠naš±ma [hēu]š(?) kīša n–an anni (or AN-ni) pa-ra-a-an-ta ≠ummē¢¢¢k kīša [m]an¢–
ni± [ma]n–at–šan šer n–e hudaat kattann–a huy[a]nta nu ištantā
īzzi § “We will see [a …] above, (and) a šarāwar in the water(?)/ clay(?) [below]. If lightning or [rain(?)] will happen, we will see it (com. sg.) across … If it (sg. neut.) is above, they (pl. neut.) will happen quickly. If it is running below, it will tarry” KBo 30.39 + KBo 25.139 rev. 4-8 + KUB 35.164 rev.! 1-5 (Palaic rit., OS). 
2. over to, across to (w. -kan and d.-l. of person or place to which one crosses over) — a. to a person: […] ANA LÚ.KÚR pár-ra-an-da apāšila [iyatt]at “He himself [we]nt over to the enemy” KBo 
14.8 ii 3-4 (DŠ, Murš. II), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:81; (From the city of Duhdušna, they supplied the deity with salt) kinun–ma–wa–kan UN.MEŠ-[u]š ANA LÚ.MEŠKUŠ‡ KÙ.GI pár-ra-an-da pāir “But now, the people went over to the Gold Chariot Warriors (i.e., went over to work for them) (and they stopped supplying the salt)” IBoT 2.129 obv. 14-15 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 20:177 w. n. 652; “When he reached the other bank of the river” nu–kan ANA LÚ.KÚR IŠTU 1 GIŠGIGIR pár-ra-an-ta parhaš “he raced across to the enemy with a single chariot, (and the enemy fled)” KUB 31.20 iii 9-10 + KBo 16.36 iii 12-13 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Alp, Belleten 41/164:644f.; cf. KUB 16.16 rev. 5-7 (oracle question, NH), below 3 and in pai-A 1 j 21'; “The settlers from Mira, Hatti, or Arzawa” [kui]š– wa–mu–kan kuiš [pár?-ra?-an?-d]a uwanza “whoever has come [over t]o(?) me (I will extradite them all)” KUB 19.49 i 44-45 (Man., Murš. II), ed. SV 2:8f., cf. ibid. i 49-52; am≠m±el–ši–kan? kuwapi LÚ.MEŠMUN~ NAB[TI pár-r]a?-an-ta? pait “When my fugitives went over to(?) him” KUB 14.3 iii 46-47 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 14f. 
b. to a city or land: ŠA KUR URUHatti–ya–kan kuiš NAM.RA.[HI.A] ANA KUR URUHayaša pár-raan-da pānza “The Hittites’ resettled people who have gone over to the land of Hayaša (these you must extradite)” KBo 5.3 iii 66-67 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:128-131; ŠÀ KURMā

ša–wa–kan KURKarkiya pár-ra
parranda 4 b 1' a' 

an-≠da± pā
imi “I will go over into the lands of Maša (or) Karkiya (and leave my family behind in the land of Ahhiyawa)” KUB 14.3 iii 53-54 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 14f.; “Do not let anyone out of your country” n–an–kan INA ŠANI KUR-TI [p]ár-ra-an-≠da± lē ta[rna]ši “Do not let him go over into another country (but round up the fugitives and extradite them to me) KUB 19.49 i 56-57 (Man., Murš. II), ed. SV 2:8f.; n– at–kan ANA KUR–KA ≠pár-ra±-a[n]-ta(coll.) uēr “They came over into your land” KUB 31.47 rev. 5 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:442f. (reading kat-ta-a[n]-da); perhaps also here KBo 3.4 ii 28-29 (ann., Murš. II); and KUB 41.8 ii 15-16 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 52-54 (both 1 b, above); and KUB 31.118:5-7 + KUB 36.37 ii 10-11 (myth, NH) (1 d, above). 
3. (perhaps w. two d.-l. expressions, one indicating what is crossed and the other what is crossed over to): nu–kan apū¢nna
š INA LÚ.MEŠ URUAraupa-ra-[a]n-da pā
ir apuš–ma–kan INA LÚ.MEŠEN.NU. UN HUR.SAG-i pár-ra-an-da pāir “Some went across to the men of Araunna, and some went across the mountain to the watchmen (or: to the mountain-watchmen)” KUB 16.16 rev. 6-7 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 20:259 w. n. 973 (“to the mountain-watchmen”). 
4. (special uses w. verbs of speech) — a. w. halzai-“to call”: (If a slave angers his master, he is either executed, or mutilated) našma–an–za–an– kan DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU… [DIB-zi]–pat n– ašta pár-ra-an-da halzianzi–pat n–an UL kuitki DÙ-anzi “or [they] only [seize] him, his wife, his children …; do they only (-pat) make a proclamation(?) (lit. they call across) and do nothing to him (at all)?” KUB 13.4 i 32 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 24f. (“O zaman adı geçeni öte yana ça©ırırlar (da) ona hiç bir ˆey yapmazlar mı?”), Chrest. 148f. (“Then they revile him in public(?)”), tr. ANET 207 (“They may (either) impose the extreme penalty”) □ meaning of p. halzai-is very uncertain; for -ašta … anda halzai-see Josephson, Part. 189. 
b. w. mema-: “to speak (words) across to, mention (someone) across to” (cf. mema-7 b 3'-4') — 1' (w. negative or evil intent) — a' w. parā anda in the sense of parranda: kuiš–a–kan LUGAL MUNUS. LUGAL ANA dU āi pa-ra-a an-da idālu memai
ššu“But whoever mentions the king and queen across to the beloved(?) Stormgod in an evil way” KUB 
33.68 ii 17-18 (OH/MS), see mema-7 b 3' b'. 

136

parranda 4 b 1' b' 

b' w. pa(r)rand/ta: [kui]š–mu–kan DINGIR. MEŠ-aš pár-ra-an-ta idalā
uwanni memai “He who mentions me in an evil manner across to the gods” KUB 35.145 rev. 6 (myth and rit.), ed. StBoT 29:194f.; “One tablet: words of Belazzi, wife of Hauniya …” [n]– ašta ANA DINGIR.MEŠ pár-ra-an-da HUL-lu memiškizzi “[…] and (someone) speaks an evil (thing) across to the gods” KBo 10.6 i 4 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 184f., cf. KUB 30.67:8-9, KBo 10.37 iv 51-53 (OH/ NS); [n–aš]–kan DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pár-ra-an-da HUL-it KAZU-it memišta “He spoke across to the gods (the evils just mentioned) with an evil mouth” KUB 9.34 ii 19 (rit., NH). 
2' (w. a positive intent) — a' w. adv. specifically indicating “favorably”: “He prays: ‘You (the table) which stand in front of the Sungod’” nu–wa– kan dUTU-i pár-ra-an-da SIGﬁ-in memiški “‘Keep mentioning (me) favorably across to the Sungod’” KUB 17.28 iii 9 (incant., NS); LÚSANGA–ma–kan LUGAL-un ANA DINGIR-LIM pár-ra-an-da aššuli memāi “The priest mentions the king favorably across to (lit. over to, across to) the deity” KUB 30.40 iii 2-4 (hišuwaš fest., NH); n–ašta zigga haššāš ANA dLAMMA KUŠkuršaš dIMIN.IMIN.BI U ANA DIN~ GIR.MEŠ hūmandāš pa-ra-a-an-da āššu memiški “O brazier, speak favorably across to the patron deity of the hunting bag, to the Heptad and to all the gods” KBo 17.105 ii 19-20 (incant., MH/MS), ed. Popko, Kultobjekte 52f., Archi, SMEA 16:86 (translit. pa-ra-a an-da against hand copy); nu–kan mān dLiliwa[ni]š GAŠAN– YA [DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pá]r-ra-an-da āššu mematti “If you, Liliwani, my lady, will speak favorably across [to the gods]” KUB 21.27 iii 36-37 (prayer, Pud.), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes, 334, 340, Sürenhagen, AoF 8:116f., tr. ANET 394, Otten, Pud. 23; cf. ibid. iii 28-29. 
b' without such an adv.: “I have made a prayer from afar” n–ašta dIM EN–YA ANA DUMU.NITA– KA āššiyanti pár-ra-a-an-da memi “Speak across to your beloved son, O Stormgod, my lord” KUB 
36.87 iv 11-13 (prayer, NH), ed. Haas, KN 192f.; “If you two Šarrumanni-gods and the Allanzunni … hear me in this matter” ANA dLUGAL-ma–kan pár-ra-an-da mematteni “and speak (it) across to Šarruma” KUB 
15.1 ii 31 (dream, NH), ed. Laroche, Syria 40:289f.; par~ randa mema-differs from menahhanda mema-/ halzai-, etc., in that p. sometimes indicates hostili

parandaššan 
ty (b 1' vs 2'), while menahhanda does not (cf. menah~ handa 2 b 2'). 
5. (prev., w. tittanu-) “to make one stand over/ beyond the boundary, to lead astray, tempt(?)”: […]x apūnn–a pár-ra-an-ta titnut “He led him (sc. Kupanta-dLAMMA) astray as well” KUB 14.1 rev. 43 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 30f. (“verführte”); possibly to be restored in (Madduwatta made the rulers and the elders of Pitašša swear allegiance to himself) [n–uš pár-ra-an-ta] titnut “and he led them astray” KUB 14.1 rev. 39-40; (Do not break any regulation) man–ta–kkan apeniššuwanti uddanī damaišš–a kuiški pár-ra-an-da tittanuzzi “Even if someone else were to lead you astray to such a thing (do not listen to him)” KBo 5.3 iii 40-41 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:126f. (“zu einer … Sache … verführen”); cf. Götze, Madd. 29, 31, 171; Friedrich, SV 2:154. 
The passage KUB 33.68 ii 17-18 in 4 b 1' a' (also mema- 7 b 3' b') may indicate that OS and MS parā
n~ d/ta and later parrand/ta developed from the composite adverb parā anda. The writing parā(+)anda in mema-7 b 4' (heading) already suggests this. Note that parā anda … mema-takes -kan, just as par~ randa mema-does. HW2 1:106a claims “anda(n) nie in Verbindung mit einem weiteren Prävb. bezeugt.” Yet parā
(+)anda can be compared w. appan–anda (HW2 1:100 [andan III 3], 152 [appa3 VI 1 b]). The variant readings in KBo 10.45 ii 52-54 cited above under mng. 1 b are important, since they may show that p. in its adverbial or preverbial use + d.-l. of place was felt by native speakers to be similar in meaning to either the bare d.-l. or the d.-l. w. anda, i.e., “to/ into.” 
Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 156f.; Sturtevant, AIPHOS 6 (1938) 283-287; Friedrich, HW (1952) 159 (“1. Adv. ‘hinüber, darüber hinaus; aušerdem’; 2. Postpos. mit D.-L. ‘über … hinaus; — aušer’”); idem, HE2 (1960) 130 §233; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 354, 540. 
parandaššan (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
[…]-x-x-uš paizzi DINGIR-LUM pa-ra-an-daaš-ša-an-≠kán± / […] KUB 41.11 rev. 25 (rit., NH), in a broken context. Coll. confirms copy. Possible analysis: parandašš–an–kan, or parandaššan–kan. parandaš–šan–kan (< *parandan–šan, w. -šan as enclitic possessive pronoun) can be excluded, since the form -šan of the possessive is only OH. Also 
137

possible is a reading: pa-ra-an-da-aš-ša-an-≠niza?±, w. p. a d.-l. of a noun in -atar and the sentence particle -za. Its position in the clause indicates that DINGIR-LUM p. is a single unit. 
NINDAparapri-n. com.; (a kind of bread); NH.† 
1 NINDApa-ra-ap-ri-iš KUB 54.94 rt. col. 9; [x NINDAp]a-ra-ap-ri ŠA 3 BÁN KUB 42.85:11 (cult inv., NH). 
If NINDAp. and pariparai-“to blow” were different ablaut grades of the same reduplicated stem, NINDAp. may have been a type of bread which produced flatulence, as Hoffner proposed AlHeth 175 (cf. German: “Pumpernickel”). Or it could have been something like a “puff,” a pastry so leavened that it is hollow (cf. German: “Windbeutel”). 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 175. 
Cf. pariparai-. 
pararahh-v.; to chase; OH/NS.† 
pres. or pret. pl. 2? pa-ra-ra-ah-t[a?-ni?] KUB 31.110:7 (OH/NS). 
pret. sg. 3 pa-ra-ra-ah-hi-iš KBo 3.60 ii 10 (OH/NS). 
(The Sutaean Kaniu, and the city of Uqā
puya went to battle against DUMU.dEN!.L´L) µDUMU. dEN!(text has MAH instead of the intended ligature dEN).L´L-in pa-ra-ra-ah-hi-iš ša[r]ā URU-ya pēhute[t] “He (i.e., Kaniu) chased DUMU.dEN!. L´L (and) led (him) up to the city” KBo 3.60 ii 9-10 (cannibal tale, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:106f., Soysal, VO 7:118 n. 38; š–uš pa-ra-ra-ah-t[a-ni?] KUB 31.110:7 (hist. frag., OH/NS); Soysal, VO 7:118 n. 38, restores pa-rara-ah-t[a?] and interprets this as a pret. sg. 3. But because of the pl. 2 address (ibid. line 5: QA_TAMMA ‰R LUGAL šume[š]) and the possessive pron. (pl. 2 or 3) in auri–šmit (line 7) on the one hand and ziga (line 10) and i-e-e[š …] pret. sg. 2 on the other, it is impossible to decide between restoring pa-rara-ah-t[a] and pa-ra-ra-ah-t[a-ni]. We have arbitrarily chosen pl. 2 here and under palahh-. 
If pararahhiš were a noun subject, one would translate: “The p. led DUMU.dEN!.L´L up into the city (and he also led his troops in)” (so Güterbock, ZA 44:107). But in this case the position of the subject after the object would be unusual. Also, p. does not have a det. (LÚp.). The word is not discussed as a 

parašant

possible military title in either Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri, or Beal, THeth 20, which suggests that they did not take it as a nomen agentis. We prefer taking p. as a verb, following Josephson, Part. 140, and Soysal, VO 7:118 n. 38. 
Pursuing the implications of Josephson’s translation “chased,” Soysal derives parh-“to chase” from this older verb pararahh-(VO 7:125f. [Nachtrag to n. 38]). For comparison we may add pres. sg. 3 kari-ra-pí KUB 30.49 iv 24 and ka-re-e-ra-a-mi KUB 7.1 iv 11 (dupl. [ar-h]a ga-ri-ra-mi IBoT 4.11 rev. left col. 1), forms related to the verb karap-“to eat, devour” (Friedrich, HW 99, Sommer, OLZ 42 (1939) 687). While in the case of pararahh-the longer stem is restricted to OH, marking it as archaic, kare/irap- occurs in NS passages which give no sure indication that they are based on an OH archetype. 
Güterbock, ZA 44 (1938) 110 (“nach dem Zusammenhang eher ein Nomen in Nom. als ein Verbum in der 3. sg. prät.”); Josephson, Part. (1972) 222 (as a verb, “he chased”); Watkins, TPS 1971 (1973) 55 n. 5; idem in Flexion und Wortbildung (1975) 365 (pararahhiš as a noun based on the verb pararaht[a]); Soysal, VO 7 (1988) 118 n. 38 (follows Josephson). 
[pararahhi-n.] cf. pararahh-v. 
parari(ya)-(form and mng. unclear); OH/MS?. † 
nu–zata (for *–z–šta) dTelipinu[(space for about 10 signs)] / nu MUNU› BAPPIR kūkuš≠zi± [(space for about 9 signs)] / pa-ra-a-ri-it n–ašta ā
ššu[(space for about 8 signs)] / aška karšta KUB 
17.10 ii 3-6 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 32, tr. Hittite Myths 15 □ Laroche, Myth 32, also considered the possibility of reading kūkušta for kūkušzi (ii 4), but the traces in the ed. permit only ≠-zi±. 
Given the length of the lacunae, it is impossible to decide if p. at the end of a clause is a noun in the instrumental or a finite verb form. 
LÚpar(a)š(ša)na-see LÚparš(ša)na-. 
parašant-adj. or part.; (modifies troops); NH.† 
sg. nom. pa-ra-ša-an-za KBo 16.9:5, KBo 16.10:6, KUB 14.19:12; acc. pa-ra-ša-a[n-ta?-an?] ibid. 11. 
[nu–kan kui]tman iyahat ÉRIN.MEŠ pa-ra-šaa[n-ta?-an? …] / [o o o-]hhun nu ÉRIN.MEŠ pa-ra

138

ša-an-za-ma x[…] “While I was going, I […]-ed the 
p. troop, and the p. troop […-ed]” KUB 14.19:11-12 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:173, 181, cf. 188; the placement of the “[” is incorrect in Houwink ten Cate’s transliteration. The correctness of his restoration of p. as an acc. in the second sentence depends on whether the verb ending in […-]hhun in the following line belongs to the same sentence; [… z]ehhun (or [… halz]ehhun)/[… -u]n ÉRIN. MEŠ pa-ra-ša-an-za–ma–kan /[…]≠u±wai tittanuir “I crossed (or: I summoned) […]. I […]-ed […] And the p. troop […] brought harm […]” KBo 16.10:5-7 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:173, 181; cf. KBo 16.9:5, ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:172, 180. 
ÉRIN.MEŠ pa-ra-ša-an-za occurs always in a broken context and always introduces the sentence. With Houwink ten Cate, we posit an -ant-stem. But a Luw. pl. is also possible. If p. is the subject of tittanuir in KBo 16.10, it is an ad sensum agreement. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:188, proposed that “these troops seem to be sent ahead of the main army, bringing harm to the population. All this suggests light-armed soldiers, a sort of ‘flying column,’ useful for a surprise attack.” The passages give little evidence to confirm his interpretation. 

The long ā

in parašanu-does not exclude a connection w. parašant-, which could be a part. of the verb whose causative is parā

šanu-. 

Friedrich, HW (1952) 159 (parašai-/parašešša-“sich zerstreuen(??)”); Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25 (1966) 188 (“flying column”). 

Cf. parāšanu-, parašešš-. 
parā
šanu-v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pret. sg. 1 pa-ra-a-ša-nu-nu-un KBo 18.55:9. 

In a small frag. of a letter: […] pa-raa(-)ša-nu-nu-un “I …-ed” KBo 18.55:9 (NH), ed. THeth 16:142f. 
Although there is no clear word space between pa-ra-a and ša-nu-nu-un, it is possible that at the end of the line the scribe cramped his writing. If we have two words, the second might be the nu-causative of the verb šā-“to become angry,” and the parā would be a preverb or adverb. The resulting translation “I made [so-and-so] exceedingly (parā?) angry,” Hagenbuchner (THeth 16:142f.) not-

NA›parašha- b 
withstanding, is by no means implausible. On the other hand, there is no word space, and without context we cannot exclude the possibility that this is the -nu-causative of the verb paraša-underlying ÉRIN.MEŠ parašant-and the derived stem parašešš-, q.v. 
NA›parašha-, NA›parušha-n. com., NA›paraš~ hi-neut.; (a semiprecious stone); from MH/MS.† 
sg. nom. NA›pa-ra-aš-ha-aš KBo 15.10 obv. 8 (MH/MS), KBo 26.105 iv? 18 (NH), NA›ba-ra-aš-ha-aš KBo 11.14 i 10 (MH/NS), [(NA›p)]a-r[u]-≠uš±-ha-aš KUB 58.109 + IBoT 2.126 obv. 18, w. dupl. KUB 52.107 obv. 20. 
acc. NA›pa-ra-aš-ha-an KBo 20.129 i 32 (MH/MS?), KBo 
11.14 ii 13 (MH/NS). 
neut. nom.-acc. sg. NA›ba-ra-aš-hi KUB 27.67 iii 62, iv (35) (MH/NS), NA›pa-ra-aš-hi KUB 7.48 obv. 12 (NS). 
a. w. other valuable stones comprising a part of the tribute brought to the Seagod: utatten aruni arkamman § [N]A›kunan NA›ZA.G‰N NA›pa-ra-aš-haaš KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI A-ni an[da kittari(?) nu– kan …] / [A]-ni anda peššiyaweni “Bring tribute to the Seagod. § Kun(n)a(n)-stone, lapis lazuli, p.stone, silver, (and) gold [lie(?)] in the water. We will throw […] into the [wat]er” KBo 26.105 iv? 17-19 (Kumarbi myth, NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 71f. (w. transcriptional errors and failure to observe the space to the left edge indicated in KBo). 
b. listed w. other valuable stones in rit. texts: KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI NA›ZA.G‰N NA›.KÁ.DIN~ GIR.RA NA›pa-ra-aš-ha-aš NA›DU°.ŠÚ.A lulluri AN.NA URUDU kuitt–a parā tepu dāi “He takes silver, gold, lapis lazuli, ‘Babylon-stone,’ DUŠU_stone, p.-stone (from Marhaši), lulluri-stone, tin, copper — a little bit of each” KBo 15.10 i 8-9 (rit., MH/ MS), ed. THeth 1:12f. (differently) and remarks of Kammenhuber, THeth 7:97 (who erroneously transposes gen. NA›pa-raaš-ha-aš and acc. NA›DU°.ŠÚ.A to tr. “p.-Stein des dušû-Quarzes”), Polvani, Minerali 70, does not transliterate this passage, but indicates in her paradigm that she understands the form of 
p. as nominative □ one could think that p. is a gen. depending 
upon the preceding (“Babylon-stone”) or following noun 
(DUŠU_-stone), if one compares the passage from the trilingual 
Signalement lyrique, where the Akk. version’s ≠NA›DU°±.ŠÚ.A 
bá-r[a-ah-ši] “she is dušû-stone of Marhaši” corresponds to 
Hitt. URUKÁ.DINGIR.RA-aš–m[a–aš …] “[She is the …-stone] 
of Babylon,” possibly “[she is the dušû-stone] of Babylon” RS 
139

25.421 (= Nougayrol, Ugar. 5 no. 169) line 16, Akk. ed. Nougayrol, Ugar. 5:313, 315 (“un[e t]opaze de Bar[haši]”), Hitt. ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5: 773, 775, cf. 776; in the Akk. version the [NA›d]ušû ba-r[a-ah-ši] is a genitive construction; note also marhašītu defining a variety of NA›GUG (sā
mtu/sandu) in Akk. glass texts. However, the next two passages support Polvani’s understanding: nu–kan anda KÙ.GI KÙ.BABBAR NA›ZA.G‰N NA›GUG NA›ba-ra-aš-ha-aš NA›TI NA›. KÁ.DINGIR.RA kuitt–a parā tepu dāi “Inside are gold, silver, lapis lazuli, carnelian, p.-stone, ‘lifestone,’ Babylon-stone; (s)he takes a little of everything” KBo 11.14 i 9-10 (rit., MH/NS); (In the next col. of the same rit. text the practitioner prays to the Sungod:) nu–za NA›TI dā EN SISKUR–ma–mu EGIR-pa pāi nu–za NA›pa-ra-aš-ha-an dā EN SISKUR–ma–mu EGIR-pa [pāi] “Take the ‘lifestone’ for yourself, but give the sacrificer back to me. Take the p.-stone for yourself, but [give] the sacrificer back to me” KBo 11.14 ii 12-13 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 71; nu KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI NA›ZA.G‰N NA›GUG N[A›?… N]A›.KÁ.DINGIR.RA NA›lulluri NA›ba-ra-aš-hi AN.BAR AN.NA URUDU ZABAR ANA DINGIR-LIM kuitta tepu šuhhāi “He pours out silver, gold, lapis lazuli, carnelian, […], ‘Babylon-stone,’ lulluri-stone, p.-stone, iron, tin, copper, bronze — each a little bit — to the deity; (and says: Go travel through the mountains, … go speak good things to all the gods)” KUB 27.67 iii 6163, cf. also ibid. iv 34-35; NA›GUG NA›DU°.ŠÚ.A kuit tep[u(?) …] / U NA›pa-ra-aš-hi n–aš INA x[…] KUB 
7.48 obv. 11-12 (rit. frag., NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 70. 
Hitt. parašhi-may correspond to Akk. mar~ ha/ušu (cf. CAD M/1:281). If so, NA›p. is connected w. the GN Marhaši, Barašhi, Paraši, for which see Edzard/Farber, RGTC 2:25, 127f. 
Albright, BASOR 98 (1945) 24 (“marhašîtu glass,” from Marhaši in Luristan); Goetze, JCS 1 (1947) 312 n. 31 (agreeing w. Albright); Friedrich, HW (1952) 159; Nougayrol, PRU 4 (1956) 214 n. 2 (“b/parašhi … ‘pierre de Parašhi-Marhaši,’ nôtre marcassite”; English “marcasite” is defined as iron disulphide [FeS¤], or iron pyrites); Friedrich, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 19; Laroche, RHA XXIV/79 (1966) 178f. (on the basis of RS 25.421:15-16 [only Akk. and Hitt. versions preserved, for the Sum. version see Civil, JNES 23:2f.] concluded that NA›DU°. ŠÚ.A equals NA›parašhi/a-), 184; Kümmel, UF 1 (1969) 162f. (ideogram unclear, perhaps NA›KA.GI.NA); Oppenheim, Glass and Glassmaking (1970) 53f. (translates NA›.GUG marha~ šītu as “(glass in the color of the) red stone [NA›.GUG] com

parašešš- b 

ing from Marhaše”; Wilhelm, WO 7 (1974) 290 (on the phonology and etymology); Kammenhuber, THeth 7 (1976) 97; CAD M/1 (1977) 280f. s.v. marhušu and marhašû; Polvani, SCO 31 (1981) 246-256 (“forse il diaspro” = Engl. jasper); Steinkeller, ZA 72 (1982) 237-265, esp. 251f. (“steatite, chlorite,” “soft stone, used for making small figurines, bowls, alabastrons”); Polvani, Minerali (1988) 69-73 (has doubts about Steinkeller’s identification). 
parašši-adj. (mng. unkn.; probably a Luw. genitival adj.); NH.† 
ziqqa–wa–mu–za dIŠTAR pa-ra-aš-ši-in iya “You must worship me (as) IŠTAR p.” KUB 1.1 iv 1516 (Hatt. III), w. dupl. 832/v + Bo 69/256 iii 59 (StBoT 24, pl. III), ed. StBoT 24:24f., Starke, KZ 100:253 n. 38. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 159 (“Vertrauen(?)” oder “Vertraute(r)(?)”); Laroche, RHA XIX/69 (1961) 60; Starke, KZ 100 (1987) 253 n. 38 (“Verheišung”; derives the word from a Luw. verb of speech pra-/pratta-“zusagen,” “verheišen,” or negatively “verwünschen”; cf. discussion sub parattašatta-). 
Cf. parā-B, parattašatta-. 
parašešš-v.; to disperse(?); NH.† 
pres. sg. 3 pa-ra-še-eš-zi KUB 50.104:10 (NH). 
pret. pl. 3 pa-ra-a-še-eš-ši-ir KBo 5.8 i 20, 22, pa-ra-še-ešše-er KUB 19.36 i 15, 17 (both Murš. II), pa-ra-še-eš-š[e?-er?] KUB 52.63:14. 
a. intrans.: “The levies of Taggašta who had come to aid” n–at arha pa-ra-a-še-eš-ši-ir (dupl. pa-ra-še-eš-še-er) šēnahha–ya–mu namma peran natta tiškir mahhan–ma ŠA KUR URUTaggašta ÉRIN.MEŠ NA_RA_RE arha pa-ra-a-še-eš-ši-ir (dupl. pa-ra-še-eš-še-er) “dispersed(?) and did not again lay an ambush before me. When the levies from Taggašta dispersed(?), (I was released again by means of a bird sign and proceeded toward Taggašta)” KBo 5.8 i 20-22 (det. ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 
19.36 i 15-17, ed. AM 148f. 
Although Götze, AM 254f., determined the meaning of p. for wrong reasons, the context clearly describes a situation where an obstacle was put on the road for the Hitt. king, and after the enemy position was betrayed by a bird (or birds), the enemy arha p.-ed, and the road was cleared. 
b. trans.(?): nu aršiuš arha pa-ra-še-eš-š[e?-er?] KUB 52.63:14 (sacrificial-animal behavior oracle), cf. nu paru-ši-uš arha […] ibid. 17; […]x.HI.A pa-ra-še-eš-zi 

140

NU.ŠE-du S[IGﬁ] “Will (s)he disperse(?) the … (pl.). Then let it be unfavorable. (Answer:) Fav[orable]” KUB 50.104:10 (oracle question, NH). An intrans. meaning is not excluded, since the pl. word ending in HI.A might be a neut. pl. subject of the sg. verb, and a noun ending in -uš can be com. pl. nom. in a later NH text. 
Götze, AM (1933) 254f. (“sie zerstreuten sich”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 159 (stem parašešša- “sich zerstreuen(??)”). 

Cf. parašant-. 
LÚpar(a)š(ša)na-see LÚparšna-/LÚparšana-. 

:paraštarrašši-Luw. genitival adj.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
ŠA Labarna kurraštarraššiš dLAMMA-i ŠA La~ barna :pa-ra-aš(-!)tar-ra-aš-ši-iš dLAMMA-i ŠA Labarna ŠA UD.SIGﬁ«–ya » dLAMMA-i “to the patron deity, the one of the Labarna’s kurraštar~ r(a/i)-, to the patron deity, the one of the Labarna’s :paraštarr(a/i)-, to the patron deity of the Labarna’s Propitious Day” KUB 2.1 iii 15-19 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, Tudh. IV), ed. McMahon, AS 25:106f., translit. Archi, SMEA 16:110. 
However one interprets this passage, there is clearly a grammatical error. Perhaps our scribe’s limited Luw. taught him that the Luw. ending -aššiš was the equivalent of his own genitive -aš. The seemingly random alternation of dLAMMA-aš/-ri seen (e.g.) in KUB 2.1 ii 15-16, 18-19 opens the possibility that dLAMMA-aš was intended in iii 16, 18, although elsewhere in col. iii the complemented form is always the dative. Our translation implies kuraš~ tarrašši and :paraštarrašši, i.e., dative forms in apposition to dLAMMA-i. While kurraštarraššiš is written as one word, there is a clear word space between :pa-ra-aš and tar-ra-. Since both words seem to belong together, this represents an inconsistency in spelling. Laroche, DLL 57, took kurraš~ tarrašši- as the correct one, while Archi, SMEA 16:110, took :p. as the correct one. The common ending of the two words makes one think of a genitival adj. formation *maršaštarraššiš of maršaš~ tarri-. Kronasser, EHS 1 §125,4 (p. 226), postulates a possible -star suffix in Luw. on the basis of maršaš~ tarri- and ā

ttaštari-. 
:parattašatta-
Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 128; Laroche, DLL (1959) 78 (:paraštarrašši- as one word); Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 102 (:paraš tarrašši- as two words); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 398 (as one word; gen. adj. > *paraštar “Hoheit, Erhabenheit” > parra¥a(/i)- “hoch”); McMahon, AS 25 (1991) 107 n. 114 (as one word); Melchert, CLL (1993) 167 (“?,” abstract in -š(t)ra/i-, perhaps to same base as :paratta-“impurity” or the like). 
[pa-a-ra-aš-ti-] KUB 42.34 obv. 3, KUB 42.64 rev. 12 (THeth 10:54f., 149f.) is to be read (coll. Siegelová, Verw. 56f., 426f.) ú-ra-aš-ti-. 
paraššuwant-adj.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
[… GAM ti-an-n]a-aš ZU· AM.SI pa-ra-aš-šua-an-za “[One implement ‘of putt]ing [down],’ of ivory, p.” KUB 42.32 left col. 6 (inv., NH), ed. Güterbock, Anadolu 15:5, cf. THeth. 10:176, Siegelová, Verw. 436f., 610 (“mit (Stein) p. versehen(?)”). Siegelová’s tr. suggests that the suffix -want-“having” has been added to a noun *parašš-. Other ivory objects in the context are further qualified by the color words “white” or “red.” 
:parattašatta-(Luw.) n.; (a bad quality); NH.† 
mān ani-UD.KAM-ti U[D.KAM-z]a SIGﬁ-ešzi nu–šmaš µUrahešmaš ƒPiha-IR-i[šš–a] arha ani~ yanzi a[r]ha–ma–šmaš iwar ƒDuttarriyatiyaš :pa-raat-ta-ša-at-ta-[a]n aniyanzi “If today the d[a]y is propitious, Urahešma and Piha-IR-i will ritually remove (it) […] from them. They will ritually remove from them the p. in the manner of Duttariyatti” or “They will ritually remove (it) from them like the p. of Duttariyatti” KBo 24.126 obv. 27-29, ed. Starke KZ 100:253 (“werden sie ihnen wie <?> die Verwünschungen der d./D. … wegbehandeln”), and van den Hout, Diss. 129 (“Wie den Fluch der Tochter werden sie (es) ihnen wegbehandeln”), for rest. U[D.KAM-z]a see KUB 57.3:14 □ the semi-logographic spelling of the rare anišiwat- should be added to HW2 1:94 s.v. 
Although the normal syntax of iwar calls for it to follow its genitive noun, the position preceding its noun is not unusual. But usually the word or name which follows it bears no Hitt. inflection (i.e., it is a logogram or proper name in the stem-form of a proper name; on this see Hoffner, IM 43:39-51 [“Akkadographic iwar”]), whereas here what follows it 
141

is either ƒDuttariyaš or ƒDuttariyaš parattašattan, both of which are inflected. In this sense Starke is quite right to call attention to the unusual syntax. Since Hoffner showed that pre-positioned iwar precedes logograms or proper-names, Duttariya must be a name. Perhaps the text has not been copied correctly from its original. 
Starke, KZ 100:253, derives p. from a Luw. verb pra-, pratta-“verheišen, verwünschen.” He identifies this verb with hieroglyphic Luw. LOQUIpá-ra/ita-, which, however, is read by Melchert, AnSt 38:3638, as LOQUImax-ra/i-ta-. See also Marazzi, Il geroglifico 103f. p. is something undesirable, cf. EME “slander” in EME m.dSÎN-dU ANA DINGIR.MEŠ LUGAL-UTTI pe(r)an arha aniyanzi KBo 2.6 i 32. From the context of parattašatta-, Laroche, DLL 78 
s.v. paratta-, proposed the idea of “impurity” or perhaps “fault” for the stem paratta-(in parattašattaand parattašši-), which Melchert, CLL 167, follows. 
Starke, KZ 100 (1987) 253; Melchert, CLL (1993) 167 (“‘impurity’ or sim.”). 
Cf. (:)parattašši-. 
(:)parattašši-Luw. genitival adj., of paratta-; (mng. unknown); NH.† 
1	in field texts: 1 A.ŠÀ :pa-ra-at-ta-aš-ši-iš 4 PA. NU[MUN–ŠU …] “One field of :p., four PARÂSU-measures are [its] se[ed grain]” KUB 8.75 iii 66 (list of fields, NH), ed. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:20f. All words in the field texts of known meaning that describe fields (cf. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:390f.) are topographical in nature: anturiyaš “inner,” ANA KASKAL … GÙBaz “to the left of the road,” ŠA ´D “of (i.e., on) the river,” ŠA PAﬁ “of (i.e., on) the irrigation ditch,” wappuwaš “of the riverbank.” This might indicate that the *paratt(a/i)- was also some topographical feature. Yet Starke, KZ 100:253 n. 38, interprets the related forms parattašatta- and parašši-(q.v.) as “of promise/curse.” 
2	In a deity’s epithet: “Thus says Puriyanni: ‘When a person has some papratar (impurity) in his house” nu L´L-aš dU-an dpa-ra-at-ta-aš-si-in kiššan BAL-hi “I sacrifice as follows to the Storm-god of the Steppe, (to) him of paratta-” KUB 7.14 obv. 2-3 (rit.). Also in a list of deities w. Luw. names 

(LÚ)parā(-)uwant-

ŠA dIM pa-ar-≠at±-t[a-aš-š]i?-[i]š KBo 29.33 rt. col. 6 + KBo 20.72 iii 4 (cult of Huwaššanna). 
Laroche’s translation “impurity” in KUB 7.14 i 23 is based on the assumption that the deity’s epithet relates him to the plight of the sufferer, who has papratar in his house. On the other hand, KUB 
8.75 suggests that the word denotes some topographical feature. Note that even in KUB 7.14 i 23 parattašši-“of the paratta-” is parallel to L´L-aš “of the countryside.” Thus in both exx. parattaššimight denote something topographical. This word’s relationship to parattašatta-, q.v., is unclear. 
Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 128; Laroche, DLL (1959) 78 (s.v. paratta- “impurity(?)”); Starke, KZ 100 (1987) 253 n. 38 (“Verheišung; Verwünschung,” mentions parattašatta-and parašši-, not paratašši-; yet his idea, if correct, would apply also here). 
Cf. :parattašatta-. 
paratiš n. neut.; (an object); NH.† 
sg. nom. pa-ra-ti-iš KUB 13.33 ii 7. 
Possibly also :ba-ra-ti-i[š] KBo 18.170a rev. 11. 
“They inquired” [namma?–w]a 1-EN pa-ra-ti-iš ē¢
šta / [nu–w]ar–at anda UL SIGﬁ-in appan ešta [nu– w]ar–at–kan arha :tarpašatta “There was [furthermore(?)] a single p., not well held(?), and he had …-ed it off/away (or intrans.: and it …-ed out)” KUB 13.33 ii 7-9 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:34f. □ this neut. part. appan seems not to be registered or intepreted in HW2 2:86f. 
□ for arha :tarpaša- see Güterbock, Or NS 25:124 and HW 1. Erg. 20f. (“auslaufen(?) … herausfallen(?)”); possibly also in an inventory text: [… T]APAL KUŠIGI.TAB. ANŠE 13 TAPAL ŠA KUŠKIR›.TAB.ANŠE :ba-rati-i[š] “[…] pairs of blinkers(?), thirteen pairs of :p. of the bridles” KBo 18.170a rev. 11 (inv., NH), ed. THeth. 10:110f., Siegelová, Verw. 486f. (reading :BA-RA-TI-I[T-TI-INNU], an Akk. word denoting part of the bridle; cf. parattitinnu AHw 832b (Hurr. lw.) “ein Teil des Griffs v. Peitschen, usw.”). 
Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 130; Melchert CLL (1993) 167. 
(LÚ)parā
(-)uwant-n./part.; supervisor, one exercising oversight; from MH?/NS.† 
sg. nom. pa-ra-a ú-wa-an-za KUB 13.3 iii 28 (MH?/NS); sg. acc. LÚpa-ra-a(-)ú-wa-an-da-an KUB 23.80:9 (NH), Bo 4962 obv. 3 (KN 252, Alp, Tempel 262f.). 

142

(LÚ)parā(-)uwant

(When the king complained that he had discovered a hair in his drinking water, he was told:) µZu~ liyaš–wa pa-ra-a ú-wa-an-za ē
šta “Zuliya was the supervisor (of the water bags)” KUB 13.3 iii 28 (instr., MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:47, 50 (no tr.), HW2 1:621a, tr. ANET 207; LUGAL-uš LÚpa-ra-a(-)ú-wa-an-da-an kuin [ANA] EZEN wurulli lamniyazi Bo 4962 i 3-4, tr. lamniya- 4 c; “When I returned from Babylonia” nu– wa–mu LÚpa-ra-a-ú-wa-an-da-an-n–a uiēr “they sent to me also a supervisor” KUB 13.35 i 23 + KUB 
23.80:9 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:4f. (“einen parāuwanda-
Mann”), Güterbock, Cor.Ling. 67 (“‘zur para-u∑ant-schaft’” = 
“im Range eines Hervorgekommenen” all. of parā uwandatar 
> parā uwa-), cf. Kammenhuber, MIO 3:375 (following Güter
bock), eadem, HW2 1:621a (not from *parā uwandatar but part. 

parā uwant- > parā auš-). 

For the indication of compounds such as this by the placement of determinatives see Neu, FsRisch 107-115. 
Güterbock, Cor.Ling. (1955) 67; Kammenhuber, MIO 3 (1955) 375; Hoffner, Or NS 35 (1966) 393; Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 16 (“Aufsichtsperson”); Tischler, GsAmmann (1982) 220; Kammenhuber, HW2 1 (1984) 621a. 

Cf. auš-, parā. 

parh-, parhai-, parhiya-v.; 1. to chase, pursue, hunt, 2. to expel, drive out, banish, usher out, 
3. to attack, put to flight(?) (cities, lands), 4. make (horses) gallop, 5. to hasten, hurry (intrans.), 6. (mng. unkn.), 7. parhuwar as a token in a KIN oracle; from OS. 
act. pres. sg. 1 pá[r-a]h-mi KUB 8.34 ii 6 (NS); sg. 2 párah-ši KBo 16.47 obv. 18 (MH/MS); sg. 3 pár-ah-zi KBo 25.2 ii 
(11) (OS), KBo 23.92 ii 16 (OH/MS), KBo 16.47 obv. 18 (MH/ MS), KUB 1.13 i 5, KBo 3.5 ii 36, 70 (MH/MS) [what looks like a glossenkeil on :pár-ah-zi KBo 3.5 ii 70 only indicates that the line is indented], pár-ha-zi KUB 1.13 ii 14 (MH/NS), párha-i KBo 3.5 iii 30 (MH/MS), pár-ah-ha-i ibid. iv 3, pár-ha-a-i ibid. i 22 and passim, KUB 1.11 i 8, pár-ah-ha-a-i KBo 3.5 iv 13, 14. 
pl. 3 pár-ha-an-zi KBo 14.63a i 3, 5, KUB 29.50 i (24), 27, iv (14), 17 (both MH/MS), KBo 4.9 iii 25 (OH?/NS), KUB 13.7 i 12 (MH/NS), KUB 13.3 ii 13 (MH?/NS), KBo 15.7 obv. 10 (NH), pár-ah-ha-an-zi KUB 39.7 ii 39 (MH?/NS). 
pret. sg. 1 pár-hu-un KUB 24.14 i 23 (NH); sg. 3 pár-ah-ta KUB 14.1 obv. (1) (MH/MS), KBo 3.1 ii 12 (OH or MH/NS), KUB 26.87:5, KUB 33.9 iii 5 (both OH/NS), KBo 13.99 rev. 12 (NH), pár-ha-aš KBo 16.36 iii 13 (Hatt. III), [ p]ár-hi-ia-at HHT 82 + KBo 16.36 iii 5 (Hatt. III); pl. 1 pár-hu-en KBo 3.60 

parh- 1 a 1' b' 
iii 11 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pár-hi-ir KBo 3.67 ii 7 (OH/NS), KUB 
50.4 iv 11 (NH), pár-ah[-hi-ir] KUB 19.49 i 16 (Murš II). 
imp. sg. 3 pár-ah-du KUB 33.5 iii? 4 (OH/MS), KBo 17.61 rev. 2 (MH/MS); pl. 2 pár-ah-tén KBo 10.37 ii 9, 19 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pár-ah-ha-an-du KBo 12.109:13 (NS). 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pár-ha-at-ta-≠ri± KUB 14.1 rev. 92 (cf. Madd. 38) (MH/MS); pl. 3 pár-ha-an-ta 312/e obv. 2 (StBoT 5:136) (OH). 
mid. imp. pl. 3 pár-ha-an-ta-ru KUB 34.41:10, KUB 36.109:(10), KUB 36.114 rt. col. 8 (all MH/MS), [ pár-]ha-anda-ru KUB 34.41:5 (MH/MS), pár-ha-an-da[-ru?] IBoT 
3.131:7. sup. pár-hu-wa-an KUB 33.14 i? 5 (OH/MS), KBo 14.8:6 (Murš II). inf. pár-hu-wa-an-zi KBo 8.35 ii 19 (MH/MS), pár-ah-≠hu
wa±-[an-zi] KBo 16.29 i 7 (MH/MS). verbal subst. pár-hu-wa-ar KBo 3.5 i 48 (MH/MS), KUB 
5.1 ii 69 (NH), pár-hu-u-wa-ar KBo 3.5 i 78 (MH/MS). 
part. sg. nom. com. pár-ha-an-za KUB 8.1 ii 7 (OH/NS); acc. com. pár-ha-an-d[a-an] KUB 35.145 rev. 13 (NS); pl. acc. com. pár-ha-an-du-uš KBo 7.15 i 2 (OH/NS), KBo 3.2 rev.! 34 and passim in Kikk. (MH/MS). 
dur. act. pres. 3 pár-ha-an-na-i KBo 3.5 ii 52 (MH/MS). 
iter. act. pres. sg. 3 pár-hi-iš-ki-iz-zi KUB 19.20 rev. 20 (Šupp. I), KBo 3.5 i 4 (MH/MS), pár-ah-hi-iš-ki-iz-zi ibid. iii 32; pl. 3 pár-he-eš-kán-zi KUB 20.2 iv 23 (NS), pár-ah-hi-iškán-zi KUB 21.4 i 22 (Muw. II), KBo 23.97 i 17, VAT 7474 ii (4') (Alp, Tempel 286f.), pár!(= BE, coll.)-hi-iš-kán-[zi…] KUB 36.25 iv 8. 
pret. sg. 3 pár-hi-iš-ki-it KUB 14.1 obv. (2) (MH/MS), KUB 21.27 i 44 (Pud.), pár-he-eš-ki-it KUB 49.17 iv 6 (NH); pl. 3 pár-hi-iš-ki-ir KUB 13.2 iii 13 (MH/NS). 
imp. sg. 2 pár-he-eš-ki KUB 13.4 iv 77 (MH/NS); sg. 3 párhi-iš-ki-id-du KBo 19.145 iii 19, 21 (NH), pár-he-eš-ki-id-du KBo 6.28 rev. 42 (Hatt. III); pl. 3 pár-hi-iš-kán-du KUB 13.2 iii 14 (MH/NS), KUB 6.44 iv 33 (Murš. II), KUB 40.54 rev. 4 (NS), pár-he-eš-kán-du KBo 4.3 i 34 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 56, KUB 21.5 iv 6 (both Muw. II), pár-ah-he-eš-kán-du KUB 
21.5 iii 45. mid. pres. pl. (or sg.?) 3 pár-he-eš-kán(sic; error for -kat?)
ta-ri KUB 17.16 i 5 (NH) (cf. 1 a 2'). sup. pár-≠hi-iš-ki±-u-w[a-an] KBo 9.77:13. 
1. to chase, pursue, hunt — a. in general — 1' OH — a' obj. persons: n–uš–šan hahhalaš pár-hi-ir “They chased them into the bushes” KBo 3.67 ii 7 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:22f. §17 (“jagten sie in die Büsche”), cf. Helck, WO 15:107. 
b' obj. foxes: [(KAﬁ.A.HI.A-uš h)ahhalaš] párha-an-du-uš [w(erir)] “They summoned (the Hurrian troops), foxes chased/driven into the bushes” KBo 7.15 i 2 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.1 i 42 (NS), ed. THeth 11:20f. 
143

2' MH and NH: [tuqq]a µMa≠d±duwattan t[ue]l KUR-yaz µAttariššiyaš LÚ URUA[hhiy]ā ar≠ha± pár≠ah-ta± [namm]a–aš–ta–kkan EGIR-an–pat ≠kittat± nu–tta [pá]r-hi-iš-ki-it “Attariššiya, the man of Ahhiya, expelled you (parh-mng. 2 a 1'), Madduwatta, from your country. Then he kept after(?) you (EGIR-an–pat kittat), and pursued (mng. 1) you constantly (and sought to bring you to a bad end)” KUB 
14.1 obv. 1-2 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 2f., Hart, TPS 1971:133 □ for EGIR-an–pat ki-see ABoT 65 rev. 9-10 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Güterbock, AnDergi 2:400 (“setzt mir zu(?)”), Rost, MIO 4:346f. (“verfolgt mich”), Melchert, JCS 
	31:60 (differently: “will continue to (-pat) stand behind me,” i.e., support); [… i]yattaru n–an pár-hi-iš-ki-id-du “May he go and pursue him” KBo 19.145 iii 19 (rit., NH), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:300f.; KALAG.GA-az ak~ kiškattari n–aš KALAG.GA-za pár-he-eš-kán(sic; error for -kat?)-ta-ri “(Mankind, oxen, and sheep) are dying frightfully, and they (-aš is a collective sg.) are being pursued frightfully” KUB 17.16 i 4-5 (incant., NH), ed. StBoT 5:136; ≠EN–ŠU–an± pár-hi-iš-ki-it “His lord (i.e., Urhi-Teššub) kept pursuing him (sc. Hattušili III)” KUB 21.27 i 44 (prayer, Pud.), ed. Archi, SMEA 14:192, Güterbock, FsOtten2 116f. □ instead of ≠EN–ŠU–an±, Haas, in KN 13, and Lebrun, Hymnes 331, read [UKÙ-ŠU]-an, and Sürenhagen, AoF 8:110 reads pa-ri-an; cf. KUB 14.1 rev. 92 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 38f. 
	b. in curses — 1' obj. persons: (If you violate the border, you break the oath) nu–tt[(a)] NÂŠ DINGIR.MEŠ pár-he-eš-kán-du “and may the oath deities pursue you continuously” KBo 4.3 i 34 (Kup., Murš II), w. dupl. KUB 6.41 ii 25, ed. SV 1:118f. (ii 25), and passim in Kup.; (If you, Alakšandu, do not report a plot against the king, you will break the oath) nu– tta N[(ÂŠ DINGIR.MEŠ) pá]r-he-eš-kán-du (var. pár-ah-hi-iš-kán-z[i]) “may the oath deities pursue you continuously” KUB 21.5 iii 17 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.4 i 22, ed. SV 2:66f. (iii 2), and passim in Alakš.; cf. KUB 40.54 rev. 5; (If we have taken any meat intended for the deity) nu–wa–nnaš zik DINGIRLUM … QADU DAM.MEŠ–NI DUMU.MEŠ–NI pár-he-eš-ki “may you, god, pursue us together with our wives and children” KUB 13.4 iv 76-77 (instr. for temple officials, pre-MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 166f., Süel, Direktif Metni 88f. (“kovala”). 

parh- 2 a 1' 

2' obj. persons compared to animals (cf. 1 a 1' b') 
— a' compared to a bull (GU›.MAH): “Whoever violates the regulations of this tablet …” ANA dU– ma–aš GU›.MAH ē
šdu n–an pár-he-eš-ki-id-du “let him become the bull of the Stormgod, and may he (i.e., the Stormgod) drive him continuously” KBo 
6.28 rev. 42 (decree, Hatt. III); cf. IBoT 3.131:5-7. 
b' compared to a nanny goat (UZﬂ) or gag~ gapa-: nu–šmaš UZﬂ-an iyanzi nu–šmaš–kan HUR. SAG-an pár-ha-an-zi gaggapan–ma–š[m]aš iyanzi nu–šmaš–kan NA›pē
runi pár-ha-an-zi “They (sc. the king’s gods) will make you (pl.) a nanny goat and pursue/chase you into the mountain, they will make you a gaggapa-animal (perhaps a kind of mountain goat) and pursue you to the rock(s)” KUB 13.3 ii 1113 (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:46, 48, tr. ANET 207. 
2. to expel, drive out, banish, usher out — a. said of people — 1' (w. arha): cf. KUB 14.1 obv. 1 above in 1 a 2'; (Huzziya intended to kill Telipinu and Ištapariya, but his plot became known) n–uš µTelipinuš arha pár-ah-ta “So Telipinu drove them (sc. Huzziya and his brothers) out” KBo 3.1 ii 12 (Tel.pr., OH/ NS), ed. Chrest. 186f., THeth 11:26f.; (Punish the offenders according to local customs — in a city where they used to execute persons practicing hurkel, let them continue to execute them) kuedani–ma–aš– kan URU-ri arha pár-hi-iš-ki-ir n–aš–kan arha párhi-iš-kán-du “In a city where they used to expel/ banish them, let them continue to expel/banish them” KUB 13.2 iii 13-14 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 47, cf. Hoffner, FsGordon 85 n. 19; n–an arha pár-ha-an-zi “They will banish/expel him (i.e., the offender)” KUB 13.7 i 12 (decree of Tudh., MH/NS); (When Ura-Tarhunta broke his oaths, the oath-deities seized him) n–an–kan LÚ.M[EŠ ´DŠeha arha] pár-ah[-hi-ir] “and the people [of the Šeha River (Land)] banished/expelled him” KUB 19.49 i 15-16 (Man., Murš. II), ed. SV 2:4f.; “If the moon is eclipsed on the twentieth day” DUMU.LUGAL kuiš arha pár-ha-an-za n–aš EGIR-pa uizzi “the prince who is expelled/banished will return” KUB 8.1 ii 7-8 (lunar omen, OH/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 101, 104; [n]u–šmaš arha pár-ah-ha-an-du “May they chase you away” KBo 12.109:13 (rit. frag., OH/NS). 

144

2' (w. parā): n–ašta LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· LÚ.MEŠhal~ liyareš¢LÚ.MEŠpalwatallaš LÚkītann–a parā pár-haan-zi “They chase out the performers, the halliyarimusicians, the reciters and the kita-man” KBo 4.9 iii 23-25 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:58f.; cf. […]x parā pár-ah-ha-an-zi KUB 39.7 ii 39 (MH?/NS), ed. HTR 38f. 
3' (without prev./adv.): (After a contest between the men of Hallapiya and the performers) “the king gives a signal to the guard” t–uš pár-ahzi “and he chases them out” KBo 23.92 ii 16 (fest. frag., OH/MS); (If you harm the sons of the grandees, …) nu–tta pár-ha-an-ta-ru “let them banish you” KUB 
36.114 rt. col. 8 (protocol, MH/MS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 14:91f., SMEA 18:190f.; (He who does not recognize the heir designate, may he become an enemy) n– an pár-ha[-an-ta-ru] “and [may they] banish him” KUB 36.109:10 (protocol, MH/MS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:190f. 
b. said of intangibles: “I have extinguished the fire in your head and set it in the head of the sorcerer” ŠA UR.GI‡–ma–tta waršulan awan arha párhu-un “I have driven out/dispelled from you the stench of the dog. (I have made the excrement of the dog and the bones of the dog disappear)” KUB 
24.14 i 22-23 (rit., NH) □ for waršula- “(good or bad) odor” see Güterbock, JKF 10:212 (“smell”), Engelhard, Diss. 168 (“scent”), Laroche, BSL 58:61 suggests a metaphorical mng. “essence, humeur, arôme” but guesses for the above ex. a mng. “sperme(?)”; HW 3. Erg. 36, following Laroche, gives waršula“Tropfen; Saft; Duft”; “Likewise, here lies wax for you” [dTelipinuwašš–a karp]in kardimiyattan [waštul šauwar katt]i–tti arha pár-ah-du “May it drive out the [rag]e, anger, [sin, and wrath fr]om you, [Telipinu]” KUB 33.5 iii 3-4 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), ed. Otten, Tel. 22f.; [nu–š?]še–šta N´.TE-az arha pár-ahta “It drove out of her body (sc. the rage, anger, sin, and wrath of Hannahanna)” FHG 2 iii 22 (myth.), ed. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:167, translit. Myth. 81; cf. pár-ahta in broken context w. a number of evils in the acc. KBo 34.27 i 7 (NS); nu dUTU dU dLAMMA HUL-lun EME ANA TUR-RU a[wan] arha pár-ah-tén “O Sungod, Stormgod, Patron god! Expel the evil tongue from (this) child” KBo 10.37 ii 18-19 (rit., OH/ NS), see lala- 4. 

parh- 4 a 1' 
3. to attack, put to flight(?) (cities, lands): ≠n– aš–kan± INA KUR URUGašga [… K]UR–SUNU párhu-wa-an daiš “And he […] into the Kaškaean country [and] began to attack […] their country” KBo 14.18:5-6 (DŠ frag. 51), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:118 □ note that KUR–SUNU (i.e., Akk. māssunu. not [ina] matišunū) indicates an acc. rather than a loc. or all. form; […] KUR LÚ.KÚR pá[r-a]h-mi “I will attack the enemy land” KUB 8.34 ii 6 (omen, NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 159, 162, alternatively if the lacuna contained [INA], then = mng. 1; nu mā
n ANA KUR URUHatti pár-hu-wa-anzi (dupl. pár-ah-≠hu-wa±[-an-zi]) uwatteni “When you come to attack the land of Hatti (may ZA.BA›. BA› turn back your weapons)” KBo 8.35 ii 19 (treaty, MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 16.29 i? 7, tr. Kaskäer 111 □ the d.-l. (ANA) is because of uwa-(“come to the land … in order to attack”), not because of parh-; (Before we have a decision by oracle) nu–wa dUTU-ŠI tuel KUR-i [UL] pár-ah-zi ≠ziga–wa ŠA dUTU<-ŠI> KUR±-i lē párah-ši “My Majesty will [not] attack your country and you must not attack My Majesty’s country” KBo 16.47 obv. 17-18 (treaty, MH/MS), ed. Otten, IM 17:56f.; KUR-i need not be a loc., but an *utni writing of utne (nom.acc.); “When we left Nuhayana” nu paiuwen KUR URUIlanzuraKI pár-hu-en “we proceeded to put Ilanzura to flight(?)” KBo 3.60 iii 10-11 (cannibal story, OH/ NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:108f. □ URUIlanzuraKI is not a Hitt. case in -a (i.e., all.), but “Akkadographic” (stem form) of a proper name ending in a; it is syntactically a direct object of parh-; [… SUR⁄›].DÙ.AMUŠEN 1-aš UL pár-hi-iš-kiiz-zi “A single falcon does not put [an entire army(?)] to flight” KUB 19.20 rev. 20 (letter, Šupp I), ed. van den Hout, ZA 84:67, 70 (“vertreiben”), cf. 79-81, THeth 16:305, 307 (“jagen”). 
4. to make (horses) gallop (synonymous w. lahlah~ heškinu-, q.v.) — a. in hipp. texts — 1' basic stem: n– aš tū
riyazi n–aš 3 DANNA pennai pár-ah-zi-ma-aš ANA 7 IKU.HI.A EGIR-pa–ma–aš ANA 10 IKU. HI.A pár-ah-zi n–aš arha lāi “He hitches them (sc. the horses) up and drives them out three DANNAs of which he canters them seven IKU, but (of the three DANNAs) back he canters them ten IKU, and he unhitches them” KUB 1.13 i 4-6 (Kikk., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 54f. and Melchert, JCS 32:53f. Güterbock, JAOS 84:270f., suggested more neutral, non-technical terms for various speeds, e.g., penna- (slow speed) vs parh- (fast speed). His caution was based on the longest distance covered in one run, 
145

which was the 120 IKU of the return trip (KUB 1.13 ii 14-15). He calculated this to be approx. 12 km. According to a recalculation of distance using different values for DANNA and IKU suggested by Melchert, JCS 32:50-56, this would be only 1800 m, which is acceptable for a sustained run. But a longer value for the DANNA is again advocated by equine interval training specialist Ann Nyland, JNES 51:293-296. Many more exx. occur passim in Kikk. and the Hitt. horse-training manual; for 2!anki pár-hu-wa-ar “twofold cantering” KBo 3.5 i 48 see the suggestion of Starke, StBoT 31:274f. n. 929 (alternations between left-leading and right-leading legs of the horses). 
2' w. “durative” (-annai-) suffix: tū
riyawaš–ma tū
riyawaš KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši 8 IKU pár-haan-na-i “Each time he makes team after team gallop eight IKU” KBo 3.5 ii 51-52 (Kikk. tablet II, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 90f. For the iterative-distributive suffix -annaisee Friedrich, HE § 137 (p. 73) and Oettinger, Stammbildung 81, 493-495. 
b. other: (Whoever should prepare evil for this child) “let him see Šanda shooting, let him see dZA.BA›.BA› […]” dPirwan pár-ha-an-d[a-an auš~ du] “[let him see] Pirwa galloping” KUB 35.145 rev. 13 (rit., NH), translit. StBoT 29:194. 
1	to hasten, hurry (intrans.): “When he reached the other bank of the river” nu–kan ANA LÚ.KÚR IŠTU 1 GIŠGIGIR parranta pár-ha-aš “he raced across to the enemy with a single chariot, (and the enemy fled)” KUB 31.20 iii 9-10 + KBo 16.36 iii 12-13 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Alp, Belleten, 41/164:644f., cf. parranda 2 a; “Then [he went] to Anzi[liya …]. § And when Anzil[iya …]” ABU–YA–ma ≠pár±-hi-i[š-ki-it] “my father [kept] hurrying …” KUB 19.18 iv 11 (DŠ frag. 17), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:78; (Behind the virgin of Titiwatti walk the priestess of Titiwatti, the supervisor of the prostitutes, and the prostitutes) perann–a–šmaš 2 LÚ.MEŠ UR.BAR.RA hūy[anteš …] nu–šmaš per~ an arha pár-ah-hi-iš-kán-zi “Two wolf-men precede them, and they race out in front of them” KBo 23.97 i 16-17 (fest. for Titiwatti, NS), w. dupl. KUB 7.19 obv. 13-14. 
2	(mng. unkn.): “The Zuliya River was swollen(?)/flooding(?) (uwanza, lit. ‘coming’) and IŠ~ TAR of Šamuha stood by him” nu ´DZuliyan uwan~ dan parā parhiyat “She drove out the swollen(?) river Zuliya” KUB 31.20 iii 1-2 + HHT 82 iii 4-5 + KBo 

16.36 iii 4-5 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Alp, Belleten 41/164:644f. 

parh- 8 i 

(“ve (suları) yükselmiˆ (olan) Zuliya ırma©ından dıˆarıya sürdü”); note pret. sg. 3 [pá]r-ha-aš in the same text (KBo 
16.36 iii 13); “When he says this” nu EGIR-p[ap]árha-an-zi “they hasten(??) back” KBo 15.7 obv. 10 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:36f. (“sprengt man (zu Pferde?) zurück”). 
1	parhuwar as a token in a KIN oracle: LU~ GA[L-u]š–za–kan pa.-an pár-hu-wa-ar KASKAL IZI URUKÙ.BABBAR GIŠTUKUL URUKÙ.BAB~ BAR–[y]a ME-aš “The ‘king’ took (various symbols named) ‘chasing across(?),’ ‘the road,’ ‘Hittite fire,’ and ‘Hittite weapon’” KUB 5.1 ii 69 (NH), ed. THeth 4:62f. (“Hetzen”) □ pa-an here would seem to be a preverb, pariyan, w. parh-, rather than an abbreviation for panku-see pariyan mng. 6. 
2	w. associated preverbs, postpositions, and adverbs — a. anda: KUB 1.11 iii 52, ed. Hipp.heth 118f.; […] UR.GI‡.HI.A-uš ŠAH.HI.A-uš nu–mu anda pár!(= BE, coll.)-hi-iš-kán-[zi…] “Dogs and pigs […]. Th[ey] are chasing(!?) me in. (I became […]. Who is biting me?)” KUB 36.25 iv 8, ed. Collins, Diss. 264f., translit. Myth 188. 

b. ā

ppa: KBo 15.7 obv. 10, above mng. 6. 
	c. arha: see above 2 a 1'; and KBo 12.109:13, above 1 a 2'; KUB 8.1 ii 7; KUB 13.7 i 12; KUB 14.1 obv. 1, above 1 a 2'; KUB 19.49 i 15-16; KUB 23.34:3; FHG 2 iii 22, above 2 b; KUB 33.5 iii 4, above 2 b. 
	d. awan arha: KUB 24.14 i 22-23, above 2 b; KBo 10.37 ii 18-19, above 2 b. 

e. peran arha: KBo 23.97 i 17, above 1 a 2'. 
f. katta: […] ≠É?±.GAL-az katta pár-ah-ta KUB 26.87:5; […]x-šaz katta pár-ah-ta KUB 57.105 iii 32. 
	g. para:¢see 2 a 2', above; namma–aš parā ANA 90 IKU.HI.A pár-ha-a-i KUB 1.11 i 8, ed. Hipp.heth 106f.; KUB 31.20 iii 1-2 + HHT 82 + KBo 16.36 iii 4-5, see above mng. 6; KUB 39.7 ii 39. 
	h. pariyan (wr. pa.-an) in KIN oracle: KUB 5.1 ii 69, see mng. 7, above. 
	i. peran: (They sit down in the coach) EGIR-ŠU dU URUHa[ru]ādda(?) ANA DINGIR.MEŠ peran pár-he-e[š-kán-z]i “and afterward they drive (the statue of) the Stormgod of Haruwadda (in the coach?) before the gods” VAT 7474 ii 4, ed. Alp, Tem-pel, 286f. 

146

j. šarā: […] LÚP‰RIG.TUR-an šarā HUR. SAG-a pár-[…] Bo 6594 i 11 (OS), ed. StBoT 23:34, 141, translit. StBoT 25:99. 
Normally the verb p. requires no “local” particle. When -šan or -kan do occur in the same clause as the verb, it is conditioned either by the presence of a location in(to) which the object is chased (1 a 1'; 1 b 2' b') or by the preverb arha (2 a 1').-(a)šta occurs once where there is an abl. and arha (FHG 2 iii 22 in 2 b). 
Forrer, ZDMG 76 (1922) 252; Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 164f.; Götze, Madd. (1928) 44; Potratz, Pferd (1938) 179f.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 159; Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. (1961) 342 (mng. 4 “galoppieren lassen,” “Terminus für die schnellste Gangart der an den Wagen gespannten Pferde”); Güterbock, JAOS 84 (1964) 270 (mng. 4: “use neutral, non-technical terms”); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 25 (mng. 3 “angreifen”); Melchert, JCS 32 (1980) 54-56 (mng. 4 “gallop”). 

Cf. pararahh-, parhanu-, parheššar. 
parha-n. com.; nipple(s) (?); OH/NS.† pl. acc. pár-hu-uš KBo 3.35 i 8 (OH/NS). 

In a frag. context: [… µIšputah]šun µKelen~ tiunn–a AHI LUGA[(L IŠŠ)I–M(A)] / […(-?)]šer– ma LUGAL-i–ma arandati […] / [… ŠA] AHI–YA takkaniaš–šaš pár-hu-uš-šu-uš […] / [… ū]k BE_L GIŠTUKUL ešun āppa–ma G[AL … kišhat] / [appā– ma … kišh]at ā
ppa–ma LUGAL-uš DUMU-a(n)– ššan pa[-…] “The king’s brother elevated(?) [Išputah]šu and Kelentiu. They stood above(?), by the king. […-ed(?)] the nipples(?) [of] my brother’s chest. […] I was ‘Master of the GIŠTUKUL.’ After that [I became] Chi[ef …. After that] I [beca]me […]. And after that the king […-ed] his son […]” KBo 3.35 i 6-10 (= BoTU 12B) (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.34 i 31 (= BoTU 12A) (NS), translit. Beal, AoF 15:296 
n. 145. The reading IŠ-ŠI–MA (pret. sg. 3 of Akk. našû) seems to fit the traces in i 31 of both KBo 3.34 and BoTU 12A. See CAD N/2 p. 84 (našû A 1 c) for “to elevate a person to a high position.” The first person references in lines 8-10 could indicate that the text contains quoted speech at this point. If the AHI LUGAL of line 6 speaks in lines 8-10, the AHI–YA of line 8 would be the king himself. 
The (acc.?) pl. parhuš is something two or more in number which belong to the takkaniya-. In KUB 
1.16 Hitt. tagga[niya-] (iii 72) translates Akk. IRTU 

parheššar b 
(= Sum. GAB) in ibid. iv 71 and it must therefore mean “chest, breast” (HAB 198). We already know Hitt. words for hair (tetana-, išheni-). A good possibility for parhuš would be the nipples, although UZUtita-would then be a synonym or near synonym. UZUUBUR.HI.A in Hitt. can denote either the breasts of a female (KBo 11.1 rev. 19) or the nipples of the Stormgod (125/r ii 5-6, Otten, MDOG 93:76, Güterbock, FsAlp 238). Cf. Hoffner in FsDYoung (forthcoming). 
parhanu-v.; to make gallop; MH/MS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pár-ha-nu-zi KBo 3.5 i 8, ii 56. 
iter. pres. sg. 3 pár-ha-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi ibid. ii 6, pár-ah-hanu-uš-ki-iz-zi ibid. i 32. 
INA MU_ŠI MU_ŠI–ya 7 IKU pár-ah-ha-nu-uš-kiiz-zi “Each night he makes (the horses) gallop seven IKUs” KBo 3.5 i 32 (Kikk.), ed. Hipp.heth. 82f.; “They hitch them (sc. the horse to the chariot)” namma– aš 1-edani MU_ŠI 3 DANNA pennai pár-ha-nu-zi– ma–aš ANA 8 IKU “Then in one night he drives them three miles (of which) he makes them gallop eight IKUs” KBo 3.5 ii 55-56 (Kikk. tablet II), ed. Hipp.heth. 92f., cf. Melchert, JCS 32:54. 
Although parhanu-is formally a nu-causative of parh-, it does not function that way. As there is no difference in translation between pahš-and pahšanu-, tekkušai-and tekkušanu-, neither is there a difference between parh-and parhanu-. 
Cf. parh-, parhannai-, parheššar. 
parheššar n. neut.; haste, urgency, forced march; from OH/NS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pár-he-eš-šar KBo 3.46 rev. 10 (OH/NS). 
sg. d.-l. pár-he-eš-ni KBo 4.4 iii 32, KBo 14.19 iii 25 (both Murš. II), KUB 5.1 i 16, 71, iv (70) (Hatt. III), KBo 8.25:3?! (NH), pár-hi-iš-ni KUB 14.18:6 (Murš. II). 
sg. abl. pár-hé-eš-n[a-za] KUB 31.64 iii 8 (OH/NS), párhe-eš-na-az KBo 14.19 iii 23 (Murš. II), pár-he-eš-na-za KUB 
50.84 ii? 9, KUB 50.90 obv. 10 (both NH), pár-hi-iš-na-az KUB 
9.15 ii 9 (NH), pár-hi-iš-na-za KBo 18.54 obv. 8 (NH). 
	a. in nom.-acc.: […]x pár-he-eš-šar–šet / […] “his haste” KBo 3.46 rev. 10 (hist., OH/NS), translit. Kempinski/Košak, Tel Aviv 9:91. 
	b. in loc.: “I changed days into nights” nu KARAŠ.HI.A pár-he-eš-ni huittiyanun “and led the army in haste” KBo 4.4 iii 31-32 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 

147

126f. (“im Eilmarsch”); [išpandaz–ma iyahhat nu INA U]D.9.KAM pár-he-eš-ni iyahhat “[But I marched by night, and] I proceeded in haste [for] nine days” KBo 14.19 iii 25 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:176, 183; cf. KUB 14.18:6, ed. JNES 25:172, 180; EGIR-pa–ma URUHahani pár-he-eš-ni paizzi “He (sc. His Majesty) will return to Hahana in haste” KUB 5.1 i 15-16 (oracle question, Hatt. III), ed. THeth 4:34f., cf. ibid. i 
71, iv 70. 
c. in abl.: LUGAL-waš–a pár-hé-eš-n[a-za ANA …] pait šiūš!ša[n (i.e., šiun–šan) …] hullanun “[As a result of] the king’s hast[e], […] went [to …;] and I (the king) defeated his god […]” KUB 31.64 iii 8-10 (hist., OH/NS); µWandapa-LÚ-iš kuit MAHAR EN–YA pár-hi-iš-na-za ū
nnešta “Since Wandapaziti drove before my lord in haste …” KBo 18.54 obv. 7-8 (letter, Hatt. III), ed. THeth 16:57f., Pecchioli Daddi, Mes. 13-14:203, 206; nu MUNUS.LUGAL INA URUTÚL-na pár-heeš-na-za paizzi “The queen will go to Arinna in haste” KUB 50.84 ii? 8-9 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 
50.90 obv. 10 (oracle question, NH); našma UN-aš [IŠTU] É.GAL-LIM KASKAL-an pár-hi-iš-na-az uiyanza “or (if) a man is sent on a trip [from] the palace in haste” KUB 9.15 ii 8-9 (instr., NH). 
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 277 (parhešni, parhešnaz “in Hast, in Eile”); Götze, AM (1933) 127 (“im Eilmarsch”). 
Cf. parh-. 
parhuwayaš or mašhuwayaš gen. of n.; (a creature whose meat was dried and eaten); from OH/NS.† 
UZU.GU[D] UZU.UDU UZU.EDIN.NA MU~ ŠE[N.HI.A] / UZU[.HÁD].DU.A pár-hu-u-wa-ia-aš “beef, mutton, hare meat, bird[s], dried meat of the p.-animal” KBo 10.33 + KBo 10.28 v 1-2 (KI.LAM fest., OH/ NS), ed. Berman/Hoffner, JCS 32:49; [U]ZUikunan UZUku~ zaniy[an …] / [U]ZU ARNABI MUŠEN.HI.A párhu[-…] “ikuna-meat, kuzaniya-meat, […], hare meat, birds, p. […]” KBo 10.36 iii 3-4 (fest. frag., NS). 
Since in a similar list of foodstuffs, KBo 10.52:10, MUŠEN.HI.A is followed by KUﬂ.HI.A “fishes,” Otten, KBo 10 p. V n. 2, suggested that p. was the phonetic reading of KUﬂ. Berman and Hoffner argued that parhuwayaš could not be the gen. of the word for “fish,” since the phonetic complements of KUﬂ 

parhuena

show it to be a u-stem. Eichner (KZ 96:236 n. 20), adducing -u-/-ui-stems such as hallu-/hallui-, proposed that the word for “fish” had two stems: *parhu-and parhui-(the gen. of which was parhu~ wayaš). Cf. also Weitenberg, U-Stämme 270-271, who provides nominal examples of the same phenomenon. This makes it once again conceivable that the reading of KUﬂ was *parhu-, but it does not prove it. Parallels in lists that are not duplicates should not be pressed. Since parhuway(a)- and LÚparhu~ wala- are always written w. the BAR sign, one cannot exclude the possibility of a (less likely) reading mašhuwayaš. If the word is read in the second way, one might consider a connection w. the noun *mašhuil-“mouse” abstracted from the semi-logographic writings of the PN µMašhuiluwa as µPÉŠ (.TUR)-wa (NH 116 #779). 
Otten, KBo 10 (1960) p. V n. 2; Friedrich, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 19; Ertem, Fauna (1965) 127-129; Carruba, StBoT 2 (1966) 24; Berman/Hoffner, JCS 32 (1980) 48f.; Tischler, HDW (1982) 60; Eichner, KZ 96 (1982-83) 236 n. 20. 
LÚparhuwala-or LÚmašhuwala-n.; (a functionary having to do w. garments); from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom. LÚpár(or: maš-)-hu-wa-la-aš KBo 21.82 iv 17 (OH/MS), LÚpár(or: maš)-hu-u-wa-la-a[š] KBo 22.157:6 (OH/ ENS?), KBo 22.158:(5) (NS). 
(In a list of various items supplied by different functionaries) 1 TÚGBAR.SI LÚpár-hu-wa-la-aš pāi “The p.-man supplies one turban(?)” KBo 21.82 iv 17 (rit., OH/MS); LÚpár-hu-u-wa-la-a[š …]/ [(TÚG)]iš~ kalli[ššar …] / [(and)]a pē[dai] “The p.-man […] brings in a torn garment […]” KBo 22.157:6-8 (fest. frag., OH/ENS?)), w. dupl. KBo 22.158:5-7 (NS). 
Pecchioli Daddi suggests a connection w. par~ hu[…] “pesce(?),” on which see above parhu~ wayaš. Despite the close phonetic similarity of the two words, both passages show that the parhuwalaman’s duties concern garments (headband, torn garment). The iškalleššar-garment was torn intentionally for use in lamentation rites. It is often paired w. “sackcloth” (TÚG.BÁR). 
Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 252f. 
parhuena-, parhuina-n.; (a kind of grain); from OH/MS. 

148

sg. nom. pár-hu-e-na-aš KUB 33.62 ii 14 (OH/MS), KUB 
15.34 i 11 (MH/MS), KUB 33.34 obv.? 11 (OH/NS), VBoT 24 iii 10, KBo 15.24 ii 23 (both MH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 10 (pre-NH/ NS), pár-hu-e-na-š(a-…) KUB 33.68 iii 15 (OH/MS), KBo 
17.105 iii 18 (MH/MS), pár-hu-u-e-na-aš KUB 33.11 ii (18) (OH/NS), KBo 10.34 i 23, KBo 11.14 i 6, 12 (both MH/NS), KUB 7.60 ii 16 (NS), KBo 26.125:(1), 7, KUB 36.96 obv. (15) (NH), pár-hu-i-na-aš KUB 20.1 iii 9 (NH), KUB 33.19 iii (15) (OH?/NS), ABoT 1 i 21 (NS), pár-hu-≠u-i±-[na-aš] KUB 33.75 ii 8 (OH/NS). 
acc. pár-hu-u-e-na-an VBoT 24 iii 31, iv 19 (MH/NS), pár

hu-≠e±-na-an KUB 44.50 i? 13. gen. pár-hu-u-e-na-aš KBo 10.34 i 13 (MH/MS). stem form: pá[r-h]u-e-na KBo 10.45 iii 51 (MH/NS). 

a. in the “all (kinds of) seeds” (NUMUN.HI.A 

hū

manta) lists and elsewhere various seeds are listed together: namma NUMUN.HI.A hūmanta ŠE Z´Z GÚ.TUR GÚ.GAL [GÚ.GAL.GAL] pár-hu-ena-aš šeppit karaš MUNU° BAPPIR “Further, all (kinds of) seeds: barley, wheat, lentils, chick peas, [broad beans], p., šeppit-grain, karaš-grain, malt, beer-bread. (All ingredients, a handful of each)” KBo 15.24 ii 22-23 (foundation rit., MH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 168, 175 (ii 43-45); “He places all (kinds of) seeds before the deity” ŠE Z´Z šepit p[ár-h]u-e-na (dupl. pár-hu-u-≠e±-[…]) GÚ.GAL GÚ.GAL.GAL GÚ. TUR karaš MUNU° BAPPIR KBo 10.45 iii 51 (rit., MH/ NS), w. dupl. 427/t:8-9, ed. Otten, ZA 54:132f. (iii 42); Z´Ztar šeppit pár-hu-u-e-na-aš ewan karaš hattar zi~ nail–!ku«u» tiyan nu kuitta NUMUN-an arhayan šuhhan “Wheat, šeppit-grain, p., ewan, karaš-grain, lentils, and chick peas are placed. Each (kind of) seed is poured out/heaped up separately” KBo 11.14 i 6-7 (rit., MH/NS); nu Z´Z-tar ŠE zē
nantaš ŠE haššar~ nanza šepit karaš pár-hu-e-na-aš ewan GÚ.TUR GÚ.GAL GÚ.GAL.GAL nu–kan kī NUMUN.HI.A hū
manda ŠE.LÚSAR–ya IŠTU DUGD´LIM.GAL šan~ hunzi “Wheat, autumn barley, haššarnanza-barley, šepit, karaš, p., ewan, lentils, chick peas, broad beans — all of these seeds and coriander they roast in a large bowl” KBo 4.2 i 9-11 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:90, 95, AlHeth 80f., 105, cf. also Al-Heth 42, 62, 74, THeth 1:56; cf. KUB 13.248 i 18. 
b. quantities: 1 UPNU pár-hu-e-na-aš KBo 21.1 i 15 (MH/MS); 2 PA. pár-hu-e-na-aš KBo 5.5 i 11; cf. KUB 

	42.97:6 (probably 1 PA.). 

	c. used in bread-making: (Several sorts of bread) kuišš–a parā ŠA Z´Z haršanilaš euwanaš 

parhuena- e 
pár-hu-u-e-na-aš ŠA GÚ.TUR ŠA GÚ.GAL.GAL šamaiznaš(coll.) GIŠhaššiggaš šapšamaš “each (made) of haršanil wheat, euwana-, p., lentils, broad beans, šamaizna-, haššigga-, and sesame” KBo 10.34 i 12-14 (rit., MH/NS), cf. Güterbock, JAOS 88:69 
□ for a possible tr. haršanilaš “high-grade(?)” see Hoffner, AlHeth 66; [… 2 NINDA] a-a-an šeppittaš 2 NINDA a-a-an luwannaš / [… 2 NINDA a-]a-an pár-hu-ue-na-aš 2 NINDA a-a-an ŠE Bo 3648:7, cf. Otten, ZA 
	65:297 n. 2. 
	d. tied up with/in a strand of wool: galaktar–ma pár-hu-u-e-na-an UDUiyandaš S´Ghuddullit anda išhaī“He ties the galaktar and parhuenaš with a strand of wool from the iyant-sheep (and gives it to a virgin. She repeatedly shrieks while saying as follows: § ‘Come in O dLAMMA of the hunting bag’)” VBoT 24 iii 31-33 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112-115, cf. ibid. iv 1920, KUB 15.34 i 11-13 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm AOATS 3:184f.; pár-hu-e-na-ša-kán kuiš DINGIR<LIM->ni anda išhiyanza n–aš–kan MUNUS.ŠU. GI DINGIR-LIM-ni arha lāīzzi KBo 17.105 iii 18-19 (incant.), see lā
	-1 a. 
	e. belonging to a deity (designating a specific variety?): “[I take] the following: …” 1 GIŠBAN~ ŠUR 1 TÚGkureššar galaktar pár-hu-e-na-aš ŠA DINGIR-LIM “one table, one kureššar garment, galaktar, p. of the deity” VBoT 24 iii 9-10 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112f.; later in the same rit., iii 31, iv 19, the p. is mentioned without the adjunct “of the deity”; nu MUNUS ŠU.GI UDU!iyandaš S´Ghu[ttul]li ≠TI°MUŠEN±-[aš] par~ tauwar galakta[r] / [DINGIR].MEŠ-[n]aš pár-hu-ue-na-aš ZAG-na[š wallan] / [ZA]G-naz ŠU-az harzi “The Old Woman holds in her [righ]t hand a strand of wool, an eagle’s wing, galaktar, p. of the [god]s, and [walla-o]f the right (hand)” KUB 7.60 ii 14-17 (rit. near enemy border), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 11:105, 108; DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pár-hu-e-na-aš halkiyaš pá[r-h]ue-≠na±-aš galaktar hāranaš partauwar UDUiyantaš [S´Gh]ud[d]ulli anda išhiyan kitta “There lie p. of the gods, p. of grain (or “of the grain deity”?), galak~ tar, a wing of an eagle, and a strand of sheep wool tied together” KUB 15.34 i 11-13 (evocation rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:184f.; cf. KBo 20.129 i 34-35 + FHG 23:2-3. Unless the halkiyaš parhuenaš means “p. of the grain deity,” it seems to describe a part of a grain plant, e.g., the stalk; DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pár

149

h[u-…] (var. dUTU-aš pár-hu-u-e-na-aš) KUB 43.57 i 12 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.14 i 12, cf. mumuwai-B; DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pár-hu-i-na-aš KUB 20.1 iii 9 (NH), cf. KUB 30.15 + KUB 39.19 obv. 23-24 below, f 3'; (The following ingredients are being made ready for the ritual) 3 NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A Z´D.DA.DURUﬁ KU‡ [t]arnaš GIŠPÈŠ GIŠGEŠTIN.HÁD.DU.A kal~ laktar pár-hu-e-na-[a]š ŠA DINGIR-LIM memal kuitta parā tepu “three sweet thick loaves of moist flour (weighing) one tarna, figs, raisins, galaktar, 
p. of the deity, groats — a little of everything” KUB 
9.27 + KUB 7.8 i 7-9 (rit., MH?/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277 (§2 “parhuenaš, groats of the deity”), and memal a 5', tr. ANET 349, where ŠA DINGIR-LIM is also taken to define memal “the god’s meal.” 
f. used w. other substances to attract deities and souls (often paired w. galaktar) — 1' implied subject of verb talliya-: cf. kāša galaktar kitta [ištan~ za–šiš (?)] / galankanza ē¢ša pár-h[u-e-na-aš
štu kakitta] karaz¢–šan tal!līed¢[du] “Here lies galaktar; let [his soul(?)] be made tranquil. Here [lies] p.; let it implore(?) his karaz” KUB 17.10 ii 12-14 (Tel.myth, OH/ MS), cf. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:165; pár-hu-e-na-aš–šan kitta nu–ššan parā tallianz[a(?)] ēš kalaktar–šan kitta nu–ššan parā k[alankanza eš¢(?)] “p. is lying (here); so be called forth; kalaktar is lying (here); so [be] completely p[acified]” KUB 33.62 ii 14-15 (OH/ MS); cf. KUB 33.34 obv.? 10-11. 
2' implied subject of verb mugai-: kāša–t[ta m]ukišni pár-hu-≠u-i±[-na-aš] kittar[i] “Behold, here lies p. to invoke y[ou]” KUB 33.75 ii 8-9 (myth of Hannahanna, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 85; pár-hu-e-n[a-aš kitta] n–aš–ši–pa anda mugānza [ēšdu] “p. [lies here; may he be] invoked by it” KUB 33.21 iii 18-19 □ the presence of the –aš– excludes Laroche’s restoration of the imp. sg. 2 [ēš ]. 
3' other: (In the middle of the pyre they fashion(?) a statue made of figs, raisins, and olives in the form of a man) GIŠINBI–ma–ššan DINGIR. MEŠ-aš pár-hu-e-na-an gala[k]tar [ZA]G-aš wallan UDUiyandaš S´Ghuttuli ištarna pedi tianzi “In the middle they put fruit, p. of the gods, galaktar, walla- of the right, a strand of wool of an iyant-sheep. (… § The Old Woman … calls the soul by name)” KUB 
30.15 + KUB 39.19 obv. 23-24 (MH/NS), ed. HTR 66f. (“der Götter süše Leckerbissen”); cf. VBoT 24 iii 9-10, 31-33, iv 19

:parri

20 (MH/NS), KUB 15.34 i 11-13 (evocation rit., MH/MS), KUB 20.1 iii 9-(10) (evocation rit., NH); [… pár-h]u-u-ena-aš galak[tar] / […]x-ta talliya-x[…] KUB 36.96 obv. 15-16 (prayer, NH). 
As a “seed” (usage a) p. falls in the same category as the grains and the legumes. The measures (under b) and use as an ingredient for NINDA also fit grains and legumes best. Under usage d it is likely to be the whole plant, stem and seeds. Under usages d, e and f it is paired w. galaktar. Güterbock, JAOS 103:162, suggested that galaktar might be the (opium) poppy. 
Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:14 n. 2, claim p. to be a product of diverse plants, such as beans, peas, wheat, barley flour, barley, and of wine (they read ú-i-ia-an-da-aš instead of correct UDUiyandaš). Their interpretation is based on an incorrect analysis of the foodstuffs listed. 
Zuntz, Scongiuri (1937) 530 (“bevanda”); Otten, Tel. (1942) 59 n. 8 (on galaktar and parhuena-: “angenehme, süše Produkte pflanzlicher Art”); Ertem, Flora (1974) 23-25; Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 14 n. 2 (“vermutlich ein Getränk”); Ünal, AfO 40-41 (1993-1994) 124f. 
[GIŠpár-hur(?)] Ertem, Flora 162, Tischler, HDW 60; should be read GIŠBAR.K´N, see Güterbock, FsOtten 79. 
:parri-Luw. v.; to apply (a medicine); NH.† 
pres. sg. 3 :pa-ar-ri-it-ti KUB 22.61 i 19; pl. 3 :pa-ar-reen-ti ibid. i 6. 
uncertain: :pa-≠ar±-x-x-x ibid. i 5. 
“Because there are many herbal medicines, I will inquire which herb is determined by oracle. I will also inquire about physicians” kuiš–mu LÚA.ZU SIZSÁ-ri nu–kan Ú ANA dUTU-ŠI ŠÀ IGI.HI.A apāt :pa-ar-ri-it-ti “The physician who is designated to me by oracle, will apply that herb(al medicine) to His Majesty’s eyes” KUB 22.61 i 18-19 (oracle question, NH), ed. StBoT 19:4 (“soll … selbiges Kraut streichen”); it is not clear why the apāt is separated from the Ú in this clause; cf. ibid. i 6. 
Friedrich, RHA VIII/47 (1947-48) 6 (“schmieren(??), streichen(??)”); Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 123 (“smears”); Laroche, DLL (1959) 78 (“enduire”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 417; Melchert, CLL (1993) 168 (“smear, coat”(?), cf. Úpariyawanza). 
Cf. pariyawanza. 

150

pariyan, parean postpos., prev., adv.; 1. across, over, beyond (postpos., prev. or adv., w. -kan or -ašta and acc. of thing crossed), 2. over to, across to (postpos. w. -kan and d.-l. of thing crossed over to), 3. in opposition to (postpos. w. d.-l., -za and -kan), 4. in front (adv., without local particle) (opp. of āppa, or appezziyaza), 5. beyond(?), be
ppan, asides(?) (adv.), 6. as part of a phrase designating a symbol in the KIN oracles; from MH/MS. 
pa-re-e-an HKM 46:9 (MH/MS), pa-ri-ia-an KUB 29.7 rev. 50 (MH/MS), KBo 12.89 ii 6 (MS?), KUB 15.32 ii 27, iv (36) (MH/ENS), KUB 19.31 iii 8 (Murš. II), ABoT 47 obv. 11, KUB 
18.5 i 24, 31 and passim, pa-a-ri-ia-an KUB 14.16 i 18, ii 20 (Murš. II), KUB 47.59 obv. 7 (NS), pa-ri-an KBo 16.42 rev. 14 (ENS), KBo 5.8 iii 34 (Murš. II), KUB 21.29 ii 5 (Hatt. III), KUB 43.8 ii 3a, 10a, KUB 5.22:24 and passim, KUB 22.38 i 11 (NH), pa-ri-ia-n(a-aš-kán) KUB 42.100 iii 10 (Tudh. IV), pari-ia(-za-kán) KUB 17.16 i 7, pa-ri-ia KBo 5.13 i 31 (Murš. II), [p]a-ri KBo 15.28 obv. 9, rev. 2 is probably an abbreviated writing of pariyawan, pa.-an KUB 16.46 iv 4, 11 and passim in bird oracles. 
1. across, over, beyond — a. postpos., preverb or adv. w. acc. and -kan — 1' w. trans. verbs (in these cases there are two accusatives, the direct obj. of the verb and the acc. w. pariyan) — a' tar~ na-: hantezziyaš–ma–aš–kan µLabarnaš µHa[t]~ tušiliš ´DKumišmahan pa-ri-an UL tarneškir “The first Labarna (and) Hattušili did not let them (-aš) across the Kumišmaha River” KUB 21.29 ii 4-5 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. labarna-, tr. Kaškäer 146 (differently). 
b' penna-: “I chased him up Mt. Elluriya … then I let my army go after him” n–an–kan HUR.SAGEl~ luriyan pa-ri-an pennir n–an–kan INA ´DDahara kattanta arnuer “and they drove him across Mt. Elluriya and brought him down into the Dahara River Land” KBo 5.8 iii 34-35 (Murš. II), ed. AM 158f. 
c' išhuwa-: (They take yarn of various colors and mix them with fodder) n–at KASKAL-aš had~ dareš<šar> pa-ri-ia-an išhū
wanzi “They scatter it across the fork in the road” KUB 7.54 ii 13-14 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:139 (“They scatter them about at the crossing of the road”), Neu, Lok. 44 (§15.2 “und über die Wegkreuzung? hin(aus) schütten sie es”), 54 (§19.3); Neu correctly observes that this usage of the postpos. pariyan “across” requires the acc., not the d.-l.; but the absence of a local particle here is unusual (contra Neu), since its employment is not influenced 

pariyan 1 a 3' 
by the verb išhuwa-(so Neu) but by the pariyan-phrase, which in the acc. construction almost always has the local particle. 
d' nai-: KAZU–ma–za–kan pa.-an nāiš “(The bird) turned its beak to the other side (lit. across itself [-za])” KUB 5.24 ii 50-51 (bird oracle, NH); note that here the direct obj. of nai- is KAZU and the “acc.” w. pariyan is the -za; cf. also KAZU–ma–za–kan pa.-an [nāiš] KBo 11.68 rev. 7 (oracle frag., NH), and KUB 16.67 iii 9. 
2' w. intrans. verbs (w. -kan or -ašta) — a' uwa(in bird oracles, NH): “We saw another marša~ našši-bird tarwiyallian behind the river” n–aš–kan ´D-an pa-ri-ia-an taru.-an uit namma–aš pariyawan taru.-an pait “and it came across the river tarwi~ yallian, then it went pariyawan tarwiyallian” KUB 
18.5 + KUB 49.13 i 23-25; in this passage pariyan and pari~ yawan are distinguished in meaning; “Behind the river one ā” n–aš–kan ´D-an pa-ri-ia
lliya bird was GUN-iš an GUN-an uit “and it came across the river GUN-an” ibid. iii 13. 
b' pai-“to go”: nu–wa–kan arunan p[a-ri-ia-an GIM-an(?)] / pāiši “[When(?)] you go a[cross] the sea” KUB 8.50 iii 8-9 (Gilg.), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:24f., restoring after Akk. tē
tebir tâmta; 1 TI°MUŠEN–ma pariyawan taru.-an uit n–aš–kan ´D-an pa-ri-ia-an taru.-an pait “But one eagle came pariyawan tarwiyallian and went across the river tarwiyallian” KUB 18.5 i 39-40 (bird oracle, NH); iparwaššiš–ma aramnaza dUTU-un GUN-li pa.-an pait “An iparwašši-bird went aramnaza across the sun GUN-li” KUB 18.9 ii 9-10 (bird oracle, NH). 
c' ar-“to arrive”: n–aš pariyawan uit ´D–ma– aš–kan pa-ri-ia-an UL āraš n–aš takšan arha pait “It came pariyawan, but it did not arrive across the river, it went off in the middle” KUB 18.5 + KUB 49.13 i 30-32 (bird oracle, NH). 
d' mazz-“to offer resistance”: nu kā
ša […]x-war kuit mekki n–ašt[a LÚ(?).MEŠ] / URUMezzari [KUR?…-]nīta pa-ri-an UL ma-a[z?-zé-er(?)] “And because the … was great, [the men] of Egypt made no resistance beyond GN” KBo 16.42 rev. 13-14 (hist. frag., ENS) □ [KUR?…-]nita is syntactically acc. but written as stem form. 
3' w. verb not preserved: n–ašta HUR.SAG. HI.A-aš pa-ri[-ia-an …] “Across the mountains 
151

[…]” KBo 16.42 obv. 23 (hist. frag., ENS) w. acc. pl. in -aš; this seems to be one of two instances w. -šta instead of -kan, both in KBo 16.42 (1 a 2' d'); […]x x na[š]ma AH ´D pari-a[n …] “or across the riverbank […]” KUB 16.68:12 (oracle question, NH). 
b. preverb w. what is crossed or crossed over to unexpressed — 1' pai-“to go” — a' w. -za and -kan: ammuk–ma–za–kan pa-ri-ia-an pāuwa[nzi] UL tarnaš “You/he did not allow me to go across” KUB 23.87:10-11 (letter), ed. THeth 16:227f. 
b' without -kan: šalwayaš–ma GUN pa-ri-an p[ait] “The šalwaya-bird went across GUN-li” KUB 
5.22:24 (bird oracle, NH); cf. n–aš pa.-an tar.-li pait KUB 
5.24 ii 48 (bird oracle, NH). 
2' uwa- (without local particle): TI°MUŠEN tar.-li pa-ri-an uit “The eagle came across tarwiyalli” KUB 5.22:45 (bird oracle, NH). 
3' iya-(mid.) “to go” (w. -kan): ≠nu±–šši–kan GI-aš IŠTU GIŠBAN pa-ri-≠ia-an± MUŠEN-iš mān iyattari “Like a bird his arrow went from the bow across (to the target)” KUB 36.67 ii 21-22 (Gurparanzahu), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:86f., cf. nata-. 
4' nai-“to send” (cf. nai- 4): nu–kan idālu uddar¢pa-ri-ia-an neyan ēštu “Let the evil matters (or words) be sent beyond” KUB 29.7 rev. 50 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS). 
5' peda-“to carry” (without particle): n–at pari-ia-an pē
danzi “They carry them across” KUB 41.17 i 30 (rit. against epidemic in the army). 
6' uiya-“to send” (w. -kan and once w. -za): UL–kan LÚTARTE_NU pa-ri-ia-an uiyanun īt–wa– kan pa-ri-ia-an penni nu–war–an ŠU-an ēp “Did I not send the crown prince over (to you, saying:) ‘Go drive across and take him by the hand’” KUB 
14.3 i 67-69 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 6f., cf. natta d 1'; [nu]– ≠wa–za±–kan [U]N-an pa-ri-ia-an uiyat KUB 40.109 obv. 6 (dep., NH). 
7' penna-“to drive (intrans.)”: see above 6'. 
8' ištamašš-“to hear” (w. -za and -kan): [L]Ú URUAššur–ma–za–kan mahhan pa-a-ri-ia-an išta~ mašzi “But when the Assyrian overheard: (‘The army [of Hatti] is coming’)” KUB 14.16 i 18, ed. AM 28f. (“Wie aber der Assyrer hinüber erfuhr”), and mahhan 6 b 1'. 

pariyan 4 

2. over, across (something unmentioned) to (postpos. w. d.-l. and -kan) — a. without a verb, i.e., 
w. verb “to be” implied: 1 A.ŠÀ luwarešši–kan pari-ia-an “One field: (extending) across to the luwa~ rešša-” KUB 42.1 iii? 8 (field list, NH), ed. luwarešša/i-. 
b. w. pai- “to go”: nu–kan INA URUMā
rišta pari-ia-an pā
un “I went over to Marišta” KBo 16.17 iii 21-22 (AM), ed. Ehelolf, MDOG 75:65f., Otten, MIO 3:172174; [nu–kan] INA URUAnziliya pa-a-ri-ia-an pā
un KUB 14.16 ii 20, ed. AM 44f.; n–aš–kan mā
n INA KUR HUR.SAGŠakaddunuwa pa-re-e-an paizzi “If he goes across to Mt. Šakaddunuwa Land” HKM 46:8-9 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsLaroche 30, HBM 200f. 
	c. w. tarna-“to let (something) go” (without local particle): EGIR-ŠU ANA DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ pa-ri-ia-an tarnanzi “Afterward they let (their offerings go) across to the male deities” KBo 4.11:17, translit. DLL 163. 
	d. w. tiya-“to step”: […-]x-waš pedi pa-ri-ia-an tiyaz[i] “He steps across to the place of the …” KBo 

	19.143:5 (rit. or fest. w. Hurr.). 
	e. w. zai-“to cross” (w. -kan): “In that direction let the KASKAL.KURs of Wiyanawanda be the boundary for you” nu–kan INA URUAura pa-ri-ia (var. pa-ri-ia-an) lē ¢

zaītti “and do not cross over to Aura” KBo 5.13 i 31 (Kup., Murš. II), w. dupls. KBo 4.3 i 19, KUB 6.41 ii 8, ed. SV 1:116f., Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:83. 
3. in opposition to (w. d.-l., -za and -kan): (Someone tells another of a plot against the king) kē
dani–ma–za–kan ≠ANA± NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM pa-riia-an UL memai “But in opposition to the oath (namely the one mentioned in line 19) he does not tell (it)” KUB 21.42 i 23-24 (instr. for LÚ.SAG, NH), ed. Dienstanw. 23 (differently: “sagt es aber dieser, gegen den Eid, nicht”) □ -za mema-here is not usage mema-12 b. 
4. in front (adv.; without local particle) (opp. of āppan, āppa, or appezziyaza): [EGI]R–ŠU–ma 4 MÁŠ.GAL DINGIR.MEŠ dIMIN.IMIN.BI pianzi 1EN EGIR-an 1-EN pa-ri-ia-an 1-EN ZAG-az 1-EN GÙB-az “Afterward they give four billy goats to the Seven Deities: one ‘behind’ (on the near side of the pit), one ‘in front’ (on the far side), one on the right, (and) one of the left” IBoT 3.148 iv 6-7 (evocation, MH?/NS); […]x UN-ši SAG.DU pa-ri-an G´D. 

152

DA-aš § … § […]x UN-ši SAG.DU EGIR-yaza G´D.DA-aš “[If] a man’s head in front is long § … § [If] a man’s head in back is long …” KUB 43.8 ii 3a-4a (physiognomic omens) □ for G´D.DA-aš, nom. and thus not for dalukiš, see G´D.DA-aš KUB 26.1 iii 15 (Tudh. IV); [KAZ]KAK pa-ri-an al[pu] “His [no]se is poi[nted] in front” KUB 43.8 ii 10a; 3 NINDA.SIG.MEŠ–ma paršiya n–at ābiyaš DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-aš pa-ri-iaan EGIR-pa–ya marzaizzi “He crumbles three thin-breads (and) scatters them in front and behind for the male gods of the ritual pit” KUB 15.32 ii 26-27 (evocation rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:158f., cf. ibid. iv 5, w. dupl. KUB 15.31 iii 44-45. 
1	beyond(?), besides(?) (adv.; note that -kan is once absent and once present in this usage): n– aš dammeli [p]edi pa-ri-ia-an ANA dIMIN.IMIN.BI arha kuranzi “Beyond(?), in an uncultivated place they cut them up for the Seven Deities” KUB 7.54 ii 21-22 (rit. against epidemic in the army, NH); kēz–ma–kan pa-ri-ia-an / [… UL ša]ggahhi “Beyond (this) I [do not kn]ow” KUB 37.1 rev. 11-12 (Hitt. sec. within an Akk. medical text), ed. Köcher, AfO 16:49, 51; (After the case against mGAL-dU is stated and preliminary testimony is taken from Ukkura) mGAL-dU-aš–za–ka[n AN]A PA_NI DINGIR-LIM pa-ri-ia-an kī IQBI “Great-is-the-Stormgod spoke this before the god for himself (-za) besides(?)” KUB 13.35 + KBo 16.62 i 35 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:6f. (“aušerdem”). 
2	as part of a phrase designating a symbol in the KIN oracles — a. pariyan parhuwar: LUGAL[u]š–za–kan pa.-an parhuwar KASKAL IZI URUKÙ.BABBAR GIŠTUKUL URUKÙ.≠BABBAR±– ya ME-aš “The ‘king’ took (various symbols named) ‘chasing across(?),’ ‘road,’ ‘Hittite fire,’ and ‘Hittite weapon’” KUB 5.1 ii 69 (NH). pa-an here would seem to be a preverb pa.-an for pariyan, w. parh-, rather than an abbreviation pa-an. for pan~ ku-. The existence of pa.-an for pariyan in pariyan waštul (b, below) would seem further to support the reading pariyan parhuwar of pa.-an parhuwar; cf. parh-7. 

b. pariyan waštul (similar to EGIR-an arha waštul): KARAŠ.HI.A–<š>maš–kan pa.-an waštul ZAG-tar KASKAL-NU MÈ–ya ME-er “The ‘troops’ took for themselves ‘pariyan waštul,’ ‘rightness,’ ‘road,’ and ‘battle’” KUB 5.1 iii 34-35 

:pariyašši
(NH), pa.-an wa.-tul (or wa<š>tul) VBoT 136 obv. 12; [p]a-ri-ia-an waštul 378/t rev.? 7. 
Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 161 (“hinüber; aušerdem, über seine erste Aussage hinaus”); idem, ZA 39 (1930) 55 w. n. 5; idem, HW (1952) 160 (“hinüber; darüber hinaus; aušerdem”); Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 36, 41; Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 167f. (in ornithomancy; “oltre, dall’altra parte”; considers p. equivalent to pariyawan in this kind of text); Meriggi, AANL 24 (1980) 374 (parranda governs d.-l., pariyan the acc.); Neu, Lok. (1980) 44 w. n. 99 (p. w. the acc.); Beal in Magic and Divination (forthcoming) (in bird oracles). 
Cf. menahhanda, parranda, pariyawan, peran. 
pariyanalla-n.?; (an evil).† 
[…] HUL-uaz panqauwaz EME-azz[a] / […-]xaz [p]a-ri-ia-na-al-la-az […] / KBo 12.139:6-7 (rit. frag.). 
Melchert, CLL (1993) 169 (no tr.). 
parrianta adv.; beyond; NH.† 
pár-ri-an-ta KBo 2.2 ii 56, pa-ri-ia-an-t[a] KBo 12.89 ii 6, pa-ri-an-da KUB 6.3:13. 
nu dUTU URUTÚL<-na> ŠA URUHatti–ma kuiš nu–kan edani memiyani zik pár-ri-an-ta šalikti “Or is (the angry deity) the Sungoddess of Arinna of Hattuša? And will you (O Sungoddess of Arinna of Hattuša) press on(?) beyond this matter?” (Answer: No. The angry deity turns out to be the Sun-goddess of Arinna of Progeny) KBo 2.2 ii 54-56 (oracle question), cf. parranda 1 d; perhaps also: [nu?]–war– at–ši–ššan pa-ri-ia-an-t[a?] / […] “[Let] it […] beyond it” KBo 12.89 ii 6-7 (incantation), there is insufficient space between -an and t[a] for word division, and any additional word beginning w. that ta would have had to be written out on the edge; kī kuit TI-anni SIGﬁ-išta pangur–za pa-ri-an-da šianna GIM-an taparti “Because this was favorable for the life (of His Majesty), (will you take him through to that time,) as you commanded for yourself the pressing(?) beyond the pangur?” KUB 6.3:13-14 (oracle question), cf. pankur. 
Cf. parranda, pariyan. 
:pariyašši-adj.; (modifies leather).† 
nom. com. :pa-ri-ia-aš-ši-iš KUB 60.29 obv.? 11; pl. nom.acc. neut. :pa-ri-ia-aš-ša-i KUB 42.29 v? 3, (8). 
153

1 KUŠ :pa-ri-ia-aš-ši-iš(-)x[…] “One p. skin” KUB 60.29 obv.? 11 (list of leather goods), the trace could be -š[a(-)…] or Š[A…]; § É-TUM RABÛ 2 GIŠGIGIR-TUM [Ø?] / :pa-ri-ia-aš-ša-i-ma (eras.) [Ø?] / [1 GIŠGIG]IR AŠABI SAﬁ 1 GIŠGIGIR […] “The great house/big room: two chariots, […], and they are p.; [one?] red [char]iot with a seat; one chariot […]” KUB 42.29 v? 2-4 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 154f. (no tr.); […-]ya 2 GIŠGIGIR-TUM / [:pa-ri-ia-aš-ša]-i-ma ibid. 7-8. Since chariots contain a considerable quantity of leather, it seems likely in view of the first example that it is the leather part of the chariot that is being referred to as p. in the latter two examples. 
Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 610 (pariyaššaimi-“ein Attribut des Wagens”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 169 (“‘?’ (modifies ‘wagon’)”). 
pariyawan adv.; (a direction or manner of bird flight, as recorded in oracles); NH.† 
pa-ri-ia-wa-an KBo 24.130 i 5, (9), 15, rev. 6, KUB 16.73:12, KUB 18.5 + KUB 49.13 i 24, 30, 34, 39, 51, ii 5, 11, 16, 23, 27, 30, 35, 53, iii (6), 9, 15, 402/q ii 2, 4, 6, iii (9); perhaps abbreviated pa-ri. KBo 15.28 obv. 9 and pa.-an KUB 
16.46 iv 4, 11 and passim in bird oracles; cf. Archi, SMEA 16:167f. for listing under parij(wa)n. 
Occurs only in bird oracles and always modifying the verbs uwa- or pai-: 1 TI°MUŠEN–ma pa-ri-iawa-an taru.-an uit n–aš–kan ´D-an pariyan taru.an pait “But one eagle came p. tarwiyallian and went across the river tarwiyallian” KUB 18.5 i 39-40; “Behind the river, (the aliya-bird) came up behind the good side/sector (or: in the good way)” n–aš– kan ´D-an pariyan uit namma–aš pa-ri-ia-wa-an taru.-an pait “It came across (pariyan) the river, then it went p. tarwiyallian” KUB 18.5 ii 15-16; nam~ ma–at pa-ri-ia-wa-an uēr [… ´]D-an pariyan uēr “Then they came p. … They came across (pariyan) the river” ibid. 30-31; cf. ≠n±–aš pa-ri-ia-wa-an pa-it KBo 24.130 i 15; for further exx. see pariyan 1 a 2'. 
Possibly also [… uria]nnešMUŠEN tar-u. pa-ri. pait KBo 15.28 obv. 9 (report of a bird oracle contained in a letter, NH). Since both pariyawan and pariyan can be associated w. tar-u. and the break creates uncertainty about the presence of -kan, we cannot determine if this is pari(yawan) or pari(yan). pariyawan, unlike pariyan, never takes an acc. 

parili- a 

Since pariyan and pariyawan are used side by side (KUB 18.5 ii 15-16) w. some distinction, one cannot simply regard them as interchangeable, as Archi does (SMEA 16:167f.). 
Goetze, Kl2 (1957) 141 (“drüben(?), jenseits(?)”); Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 41; Beal in Magic and Divination (forthcoming). 
Cf. pariyan. 
pariyawanza to be applied(?).† 
(In an oracular inquiry concerning the medicinal use of certain herbs) Ú pa-ri-ia-u-wa-an-za kuit DUMU.MUNUSx-na-a-ia MUNUS? memiyaš namma–ya LÚ.MEŠA.ZU kuit šekkanz[i] nu Ú.HI.A kuit meggaya n–at–za ariyami “Since a medicinal herb is to be applied(?) …, since there are many herbs which the physicians know about, I will investigate them” KUB 22.61 i 14-16; for continuation of this context see :parri-. 
The translation “is to be applied(?)” comes from the context, but the morphology of pariyawanza is unclear. It is possible that the same form stood in line 5, where the traces after Ú pa-are unclear. If so, one could translate there “the herb to be applied(?) they shall apply to the eyes.” 
Melchert, CLL (1993) 168 s.v. parri-(reads Úpariyawanza and wonders if it relates to the verb :parri-despite the double r in the latter). 
Cf. :parri-. 
parili-, parli-, paliri (Hurr.) n. neut.?; offence, crime; from MH/MS.† 
Hitt. gen. pa-ri-li-ia-aš KBo 21.45 i 14, pa-ar-li-ia-aš HT 24 obv. 5 (both NS). 
Hurr. case in -ya pa-ri-li-ia KUB 15.34 iv 50 (MH/MS), pa-li-ri-ia KUB 17.8 iii 3 (pre-NH/NS), pa-ar-li-ia KBo 23.1 ii 8, iv (27) (NH), KUB 45.79 rev.? 3 (NS), pa-a-ri-l[i-ia] KBo 
24.60 rev.? 8 (NS). 
Note that the form parli-is never written w. pár-. In the opinion of Laroche, GLH 196, the form pa-li-ri-ia is “fautif.” 
a. (paired w. Hurr. arni “sin”): burning a bird par(i)liya (Hurr. case in -ya): nu ANA DINGIR. MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ GIŠERIN-aš 1 MUŠEN pa-ri-li-ia 1 MUŠEN arniya warnuanzi “For the male cedar gods they burn one bird for the (expiation of) crime and one bird for (the expiation of) sin” KUB 15.34 iv 50-51 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Zuntz, Scongiuri 524f., Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:206f.; EGIR-anda–ma 2 MUŠEN. 

154

GAL ŠA É.DINGIR-LIM KÁ-aš peran pa-ar-li-ya arniya warnuanzi KBo 23.1 ii 7-8, cf. ibid. iv 26-28, KUB 

17.8 iii 3. 

	b. in gen.: pa-ri-li-ia-aš-ša MUŠEN.HI.A [… a]rha warnumašš–a MUŠEN.HI.A “birds of p. … birds of burning up” KBo 21.45 i 14-15 (rit. frag., NS), cf. […] MUŠEN.HI.A pa-ar-li-ia-aš […] HT 24 obv. 5 (EZEN hišuwaš). 
	p. is a Hurr. term, frequently paired w. arni “sin,” cf. Hitt. parallel nu 2 MUŠEN haratni waš~ duli warnuwanzi “They burn two birds for offence (and) sin” KBo 5.1 ii 2 (Pap., MH/NS). Note the sg. gen., since Hurr. offering terms usually occur only in the case in -ia, for which see Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:130-134. For the form pár-li-iš-ši-ma-kán KUB 41.19 rev. 9 (MH/NS) see parla-. 

Laroche, DLL (1959) 79 (s.v. parli-); idem., RA 54 (1960) 197; Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 62f.; Laroche, GLH (1979) 195f. s.v. par(i)li (“crime” … “Joint à arni ‘péché’; correspond au hitt. haratar”). 

Cf. parla-. 

parip(pa)rai-v.; 1. to blow (a horn or pipe) (act.), 2. to be flatulent, bloated (mid.); from OH/ NS. 
act. pres. sg. 3 pa-ri-pa-ra-a-i KUB 35.163 iii 18 (OH?/ NS), KBo 15.52 v 10 (= KUB 34.116:10) (MH?/NS), KBo 
20.60 v? (1) (NS), pa-ri-ip-pa-ra-a<-i> KBo 25.60 ii 3 (NS). pl. 3 pa-ri-pa-ra-an-zi KBo 15.49 iv 9 (MH?/NS), pa-ri-ippa-ri-ia-an-zi KBo 13.177 i 16 (NH?). mid. pres. sg. 3 pa-ri-pa-ri-it-ta-ri KUB 44.64 iii 9, iv (4) 

(NH). 
verb. subst. pa-ri-pa-ri-ia-u-wa-ar KBo 26.34 iv 8. 

iter. act. pres. pl. 3 pa-ri-ip-ri-iš-kán-zi KUB 25.39 i 25 
(NS). mid. pres. sg. 3 [p]a-ri-pa-re-eš-kat-ta-ri KBo 20.101 rev.? 10 (NS). 
p. like its unreduplicated base parai-belongs to the hi-conjugation. 
(Akk.) nap-pa-ah-hu (for napāhu) “to blow” = (Hitt.) pari-pa-ri-ia-u-wa-ar KBo 26.34 iv 8 (Sa voc.); the Sum. col. is missing, for restoration see StBoT 7:40 (MUL) and CAD N/1 263b (NAB). 
1. to blow (a horn or pipe) (act.): “One BALAG.DI-man stands in the door of the god” šawā
tar pa-ri-pa-ra-a-i “(and) blows the horn” KBo 
15.52 v 10 (hišuwaš fest., MH?/NS); cf. KBo 20.60 v? 1, KUB 

park
25.39 i 24-25, KBo 20.56 obv. 10, KUB 35.163 iii 18; […]x GI (erasure) pa-ri-ip-pa-ra-a<-i> “he/she blows the reed (pipe)” KBo 25.60 ii 3 (NS); note the Palaic pres. sg. 3 pa-ri-≠pa±-ra-a-i KUB 35.163 ii 20, the part. nom.-acc. sg. neut. [pa]-ri-pa-ra-≠a-an± KUB 35.159 ii 2 and the Hitt. pa-ri≠pa±-ra-a-i KUB 35.163 iii 18 forms on the same tablet, which indicates an early date for this type of reduplication, contra Oettinger, Stammbildung 469 (“jungheth.”). 
2. to be flatulent, bloated (mid.): mān–kan antuhšaš pa-ri-pa-ri-it-ta-ri “If a person is flatulent” KUB 44.64 iii 8-9 (med. rit., NH), translit. StBoT 19:49, cf. colophon ibid. iv 2-4; [mā
n antu]hšan andurza ištark~ [zi] / [našma … p]a-ri-pa-re-eš-kat-ta-ri “[If a per]son is internally ill, [or …] he/she is flatulent” KBo 22.101 rev.? 9-10 (shelf list, NH), translit. StBoT 19:47. 
Van Brock, RHA XXII/74 (1964) 155 (mng. 1 “souffler dans un instrument de musique”); Neu, StBoT 12 (1970) 72 n. 16 (mng. 2 “bläht,” “unter Blähungen leidet”); Roszkowska, Orientalia Varsoviensia 1 (1987) 28-29. 
Cf. parai-, NINDAparapri-. 
pariššān n.; (mng. unkn); MH/MS.† 
In the MH Hurr.-Hitt. bil.: (Hurr.) i-ša-aš a-ruu-la ú-un-na a-ar-ti-wuu-uš-ša ki-re-en-zé a-ri-iaam-ma wuú-ut-ki-iš µWaa-a-za-ni-ga-ar-waa-aš µZaa-za-al-la-aš ki-re-en-zé a-ri-ia-am-ma KBo 32.15 iv 15-18 = (Hitt.) ug–an pē[šk]imi pa-ri-iš-ša-a-an ammel–ma–a[n UR]U-aš UL pāi ŠA µPazz[ani~ k]arri–ma DUMU–ŠU µZā
zallaš paratarnu[mar] UL pāi (translation of the Hitt.) “I will keep giving it, the pariššān, but my [ci]ty will not give it. Zazalla, the son of Pazzanikarri will not give a debt release” KBo 32.15 iii 15-18 (Song of Release, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32 (forthcoming). Hitt. pariššān is by context acc. and seems to correspond to ú-un-na in the Hurr. 
park-, parkiya-v.; 1. (trans.) to raise, lift, elevate, grow, 2. (intrans.) to rise, go up, grow, 3. to lift/take away, remove; from OH/MS. 
act. pres. sg. 3 pár-ki-ia-az-zi KBo 19.136 i (7), iv (7), KBo 
23.12 rev.? 11 (MS), KUB 45.3 i 33 (pre-NH/MS?); pl. 3 párki-ia-an-zi KBo 15.33 iii 10 (MH/MS), KUB 39.7 iii (1) (MH?/ NS), IBoT 3.148 iii 13 (NS), pár-kán-zi KUB 51.14 rev. 18 (NS). 
pret. sg. 1 [pá]r?-ki-ia-nu-un KBo 18.23 obv. 13 (NH); sg. 1 (Luw.)? see below mid. pres./pret. sg. 1; sg. 3 pár-ki-ia-at KUB 33.68 ii 1 (OH/MS) (not mid., as interpreted in StBoT 5). 
155

imp. sg. 2 pár-ki-ia KUB 36.89 obv. 26 (NH). mid. pres.(pret.?) sg. 1 pár-ak-ki-ia-ah-ha[-ha-ri/at?] KBo 
18.115 rev. 4 (NH), pár-ki-ia-ah[-ha-ha-at] KUB 57.123 obv. 7 (NH) (if these forms are interpreted as parkiyahha, they could also be Luw. pret. act. sg. 1 in -hha), pár-ga-ah-[ha-ri] or act. pres. sg. 1 pár-ga-ah-[hi] KUB 58.74 obv. 2; pres. sg. 3 pár-ki-ia-ta-ri KUB 58.65:2 (OH??/NS?); pl. 3 pár-ki-ia-an-tari KUB 8.16:4 + KUB 8.24 rev. 5 (OH/NS). 
pret. sg. 3 pár-ki-ia-at-ta-at HKM 71:13 (MH/MS), pár-kii-ia-at KUB 57.66 iii 16; pl. 3 pár-ki-ia-an-ta-at KBo 11.10 iii 11 (MH?/NS). 
imp. sg. 3 pár-ak-ta-ru KUB 33.68 ii 2 (OH/MS). 
inf. pár-ki-ia-u-wa-an-zi Bronze Tablet i 97, ii 1 (Tudh. IV). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pár-ki-ia-an KUB 8.17 ii 3, 7, 9, 
12, KUB 9.1 ii 16. 
1. (trans.) to raise, lift, elevate, grow (HW 1. Erg. 15) — a. (act.) — 1' obj. a sacrificial victim: “The master of the house offers them (sc. a bull and a ram) to the Stormgod of Kuliwišna” nu UDU.ŠIR GU›.MAH–ya LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM pár-ki-ia-an-zi “and the cooks lift (the heads of) the (living) ram and the bull (and they give bronze knives to the master of the house, who places his hand with the bronze knife on the jugular vein of the ram and the bull)” KBo 15.33 iii 10 (rit., MH/MS); “The practitioner passes the bird on to another practitioner” [n]–an pár-ki-ia-az-zi “[and] he ‘lifts’ it, (takes its heart out, and throws it into the huprušhi-vessel at the brazier)” KBo 23.12 rev.? 11 (rit., MS), cf. KBo 19.136 i (7), iv (7), KUB 45.3 + KUB 47.43 i 33. 
2' obj. a representation of the human form in fruits: n–ašta ALAM GIŠkurakkiya pár-ki-ia-an[-zi] “They lift the form on the kurakki (and seat it on a golden throne in the midst)” KUB 39.7 iii 1 (rit., MH?/ NS), ed. HTR 40f. 
3' obj. an arrow or reed: […]x-ya 1 GI pár-kánzi KUB 51.14 rev. 18 (fest. or rit. for Pirinkir). 
4' obj. the [dark?] earth: perhaps KUB 58.74 obv. 2, see b 1', below. 
b. (mid.) obj. the dark earth: [(tagn)]aš dUTUuš kāša LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL GEﬂ-in KI-an pár-ki-ia-an-ta-at “O Sungoddess of the Netherworld! The king and the queen have raised up the dark earth (i.e., evoked and pacified the infernal powers by making offerings in a pit)” KBo 11.10 iii 10-11 (rit., MH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.72 ii 47, ed. StBoT 

park- 2 b 

5:138, assuming act. = “to raise,” mid. = “to rise,” Neu translates “König und Königin haben sich (in bezug auf) die dunkle Erde erhoben”; and is followed by Otten in StBoT Beih. 1:45f.; act. or mid.(?): [dankuin da-g]a-zi-pa-an pár-gaah[-…] KUB 58.74 obv. 2 (NS), translit. Popko, AoF 16:84 (reading [D]UGzi-pa-an), act. if restored pár-ga-ah[-hi], mid. if pár-ga-ah[-ha-ri]. 
2. (intrans.) to rise, go up, grow — a. (act.): nakkīš(!)–wa–kan ´D[Marašš]antaza pár-ki-ia “O honored one, rise from the Marraššanta River” KUB 
36.89 obv. 26 (prayer, NH), ed. nakki-A 1 a; cf. 1 a 2', above; nu GIŠIG kuiš hašzi nu (coll. photograph) šuhha pár-kiia-an-zi n–an–kan šarā SUD-anzi “As for him who opens the door — they go up to the roof and draw him up” IBoT 3.148 iii 13-14 (evocation rit., NS), ed. Kühne, ZA 76:97 n. 49, THeth 12:118, Otten, StBoT Beih. 1:46 w. n. 82a w. coll. photograph (intrans. “nun steigen sie auf das Dach”); nu šankuš alil mahhan pár-ki-ia-at tuell–a ŠA dU ZI–KA alil pár-ak-ta-ru “Just as the šankuflower grew, so may your, the Stormgod’s, soul grow (like) a flower” KUB 33.68 ii 1-2 (myth., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 5:138 (“wie eine bunte(?) Blume sich erhoben hat”), translit. Myth. 68, tr. HW2 1:59 (“wie der šankuš als alel wächst”?), not cited in HED 1:32 s.v. alel. pár-ki-ia-at KUB 
33.68 ii 1, classified by Neu, StBoT 5:138 as mid. pret. sg. 3, is act. The mid. ending -at belongs to the hi-conjugation, while park-/parkiya- is a mi-verb, cf. mid. forms parktaru, parkiyatari and act. forms parkiya, parkiyazzi, parkiyanun, parkiyat. By every interpretation the form is pret., which is unusual in the generalizing observations of such mahhan clauses; one cannot take alil as the direct object, since this would require the word order šankuš mahhan alil pár-ki-ia-at; the problem of gender discord between šankuš and alil can only be solved by considering šankuš as a noun w. alil in quasi-apposition. 
b. (mid.): takku MULwā
nuppaštaluš arha pár-kiia-an-ta-ri “If the wā
nuppaštala-stars rise (and then converge)” KUB 8.16:3-4 + KUB 8.24 rev. 4-5 (star omen, OH/NS), ed. Leibovici, Syria 33:143, StBoT 5:138, Riemschneider, Omentexte 235, 238, 444f. (“wenn … sich von einander fortbewegen”); on the arha here and in mng. 3 see StBoT 5:138 n. 3 w. lit.; […]U›.SAKAR-aš pár-ki-i-iaat “The moon crescent arose(?)” KUB 57.66 iii 16, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:46; cf. tuell–a ŠA dU ZI–KA alil pár-akta-ru “(so) may your, the Stormgod’s, soul grow (like) a flower” KUB 33.68 ii 2 (myth., OH/MS) see 2 a, above; nu–mu–ššan imma kuit pár-ki-ia-at-ta-at nu– 

156

za LÚ.MEŠ T˘E_MI–ŠUNU [k]uit UL wemiyat “Since you actually rose(?) to me, why have you not received their (i.e., the Kaškaeans’) messengers (wishing to make peace)?” HKM 71:12-14 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. HBM 254f. (“Da du mir doch so schmeicheltest”); [am]muk–ma–kan (over erasure) kuit ANA dUTU-ŠI pár-ki-ia-ah-[ha-ha-at?] “but because I rose(?) to His Majesty” KUB 57.123 obv. 7 (letter), ed. THeth. 16:20f.; in a broken context: […] / pár-ak-≠ki±-ia-ahh[a(-?)…] KBo 18.115 rev. 3-4 (letter), translit. THeth. 

16:133. 

3. to lift/take away, remove — a. (inf.): “But my father (Hattušili III) did not know how the matter of the permanent hekur was inscribed within the Stormgod’s kuntarra” NA›hekur SAG.UŠ–kan mah~ han zilatiya ANA m.dLAMMA pár-ki-ia-u-wa-an-zi UL kišari “how from now on the permanent hekur will never be taken away (lit. lifted) from Kurunta” Bronze Tablet i 96-97, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:14f. (differently); for our tr. see Stefanini, AGI 67:143 (“My father, however, did not know (at that time) that the inscription of the Imperial Mausoleum is inscribed/reads ‘abode of the Storm-God’ and that (consequently) it is not possible to take the Imperial Mausoleum away from Kurunta in the future”), and Beal, AnSt 
	43:37 (“it shall not happen in the future that the mausoleum be forfeited by (lit. rise up/be raised up for/from) Kurunta”); cf. also ibid. ii 1. 
	b. (part.: trans. or intrans.?): “If the sun has a halo” [(n–ašta dUTU)-aš hilā

š] / kuez pedaz pai[(š~ kittari nu apēz)] / arha pár-ki-ia-an “and (it) is lifted away(??) on the place from which the sun’s halo goes forth” KUB 8.17 ii 5-7 (solar omen), w. dupl. KUB 
34.13 obv. 4-6, ed. Laroche, RHA XV/60:16f. (“est élevé”), Riemschneider, Omentexte 195-97 (“geteilt ist”); “If the sun has a halo” n[(u hilaš dUTU-aš)] ZAG-az arha párki-ia-an “and the sun’s halo is lifted away(??) on the right” KUB 8.17 ii 8-9 (solar omen), w. dupl. KUB 34.13 obv.? 8, ed. Laroche, RHA XV/60:16f. (“est élevé”), Riemschneider, Omentexte 196f.; Akk. par.: UD dUTU [(TÙR l)a-wi-ma a-na ZAG-šu (pa-ri-is)] “If the sun has a halo, and it is divided on the right” KUB 4.63 ii 1 (solar omen), w. dupl. KBo 13.22 obv. 1-2, ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 73, 79 □ in Hitt. there is a failure of gender concord between com. gender hilaš and neut. predicate parkiyan. 
There appears to be no correlation between voice and transitivity. 

parganu- a 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 161; idem, HW 1. Erg. (1957) 15; Güterbock, Oriens 10 (1957) 354; Otten, HTR (1958) 135; Friedrich, 
2. Erg. (1961) 19f.; Riemschneider, Omentexte 442-445 (“geteilt” (tr. of Akk. paris), but better “sich zerdehnt(?)” > adj. parki-“ausgedehnt, weit(?)”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 138; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 356 w. n. 207; Kühne, ZA 76 (1986) 88f., 96f.; Otten, StBoT Beih. 1 (1988) 45f., 37 n. 40; Stefanini, AGI 67 (1992) 133-152 (on mng. 3a), Beal, AnSt 43 (1993) 34-37 (on mng. 3a). 
Cf. parganu-, pargašti-, pargatar, pargaweške/a-, parkiyanu-, parkešš-, parkeššar, parku-, parkušš-. 
parganu-, parknu-v.; to make high, raise, elevate; from MS.† 
pres. sg. 1 pár-ga-nu-mi KBo 12.54:6; sg. 2 pár-ga-nu-ši KUB 24.7 ii 11 (NH); sg. 3 pár-ga-nu-zi KBo 24.67 i 3. 
pret. sg. 2 pár-qa-nu-ut KBo 12.70 rev.! 11 (NS), pár-ganu-ut KBo 34.260:5 (without context; could also be pret. sg. 3 or imp. sg. 2), pár-ak-nu-ut KBo 32.13 ii 8 (MH/MS), [the form pár-ga-nu-uš KUB 12.63 obv. 25 is a scribal error for pár-gamu-uš, see parku-]; pl. 3 pár-ga-nu-úr! (text -la) KUB 12.63 obv. 31 (OH/MS). 
imp. sg. 2 [… p]ár-ga-nu-ut KUB 60.143 rev. 5, see also KBo 34.260:5, above. 
iter. mid. pres. pl. 3 pár-ga-nu-uš-kán-≠ta±-[ri] KUB 
31.91:9. 
(Akk.) […] DALTA TU-UL-LI “you lifted/raised a door […]” KBo 12.70 rev.! left col. 10 = (Hitt.) atti–me É-er–za wetet n–at marnan pár-qa-nu-ut “My father! You built a house for yourself and made it as high as a marnan” ibid. rt. col. 1011 (bil. wisdom, NS), cf. Goetze, JCS 18:91; see tr. and discussion under marnan A. 
[pár-ga-nu-nu-na-an?] KUB 1.16 ii 4 restored on the basis of Falkenstein’s unnecessary emendation of the Akk. to ú-ših!?šu ibid. i 4, see HAB 2f., 34f. For the correct reading ú-ºu-ú-rišu from wuººuru(m) “to instruct” see Forrer, BoTU 8 i 4 and AHw 1472a; cf. ibid. iv 75 ú-wa-a-ru. 
(Hurr.) a-pí-ha-ar-ri-wee-ne-el-la u-re-el at-mi-né-e / ge-lege-le-eš-tu-um KBo 32.13 i 5-6 = (Hitt.) A.ŠÀ 7 tawallaš–ma– ššan ANA GIŠG‰R.GUB G‰R.HI.A–ŠU pár-ak-nu-ut “he raised his feet on a footstool (consisting of) seven tawalla-s of field” ibid. ii 7-8 (bil. wisdom, MH/MS). 
a. obj. a man: n–an GIŠAN.ZA.GÀR GIM-an pár-ga-nu-ši “You elevate him (sc. a man) like a tower” KUB 24.7 ii 11 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), ed. Archi, OA 16:307, 309, Güterbock, JAOS 103:158; […] ABI–KA kui[t(-)…] / [… A]Š!-ŠUM DAM-UTT[IM] ≠we±[kta] / […]x-andaš / [… D]AM.MEŠ–ya / [… nu–tta …] pár-ga-nu-mi “Because […] your father [… he/you] requested […] in marriage, … […] and wives […] I will elevate [you(?) …] KBo 12.54:2-6 
157

(letter or treaty prologue frag.), similar to KBo 5.3 i 1-11, ed. SV 2:106f.; note that Huqq. i 10 uses tekkuššami for this text’s parganumi, the same variation as in sec. c, below. 
	b. (implied) obj. a tower: KUB 24.7 ii 11 (see a, above). 
	c. obj. foundation stones/damp course (šam~ mana-): (The crumbling plaster must be removed from the wall) [nu š]ammanuš lē pár-ga-nu-uš-kán≠ta±[-ri] “and let the foundations not be (built too) high” or, if the meaning is the same as the variant, “and let (the debris around) the foundations not be piled up” KUB 31.91:9 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 45 nn. 11 and 29 (“Die Grundsteine soll man nicht hoch anbringen(?)”) and THeth 12:41 (“Die Fundamentmauern darf man nicht (zu) hoch führen”); par. n–ašta šamanuš tekkuš~ nuškandu “Let them keep the foundations visible” KUB 13.2 ii 17-18, ed. Dienstanw. 45 (“und man soll die Grundsteine zeigen”) and THeth 12:40 (“und man soll die Fundamentmauern zeigen”). For the care and maintenance of damp courses and foundations see CAD s.v. asurrû, išdu mng. 1. 
	d. obj. a house: see bil. sec., above. 
	e. obj. feet: see bil. sec., above. 
	f. obj. low (maninkuwant-, kappi-) mountains: HUR.SAG.MEŠ pargam!uš manikuandahten mani~ kuanduš–a pá[r-ga-nu-ut-tén?] “You have made high mountains low and [have] m[ade] low (ones) [high]” KUB 12.63 obv. 25 (rit., OH/MS), ed. maninkuwant1 b; “[They did not shorten] the long [roads], they did not lengthen the short roads; [they did not lower] the high mountains” kappauš HUR.SAG.MEŠ UL–uš pár-ga-nu-úr!(text:-la) “they did not raise the low (lit. small) mountains” KUB 12.63 obv. 31 (rit. of Zuwi, OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, Or NS 13:210, van Brock, RHA XX/71:98f., cf. Pedersen, JCS 1:60-64. See discussion under [ parganula]. 
	g. obj. lost in lacuna: […]x–kán tepu pár-ga-nuzi “raises […] a little” KBo 24.67 i 3 (Hitt.-Hurr. rit.). 

Götze, Madd. (1928) 145; Sommer, HAB (1938) 35; Friedrich, HW (1952) 160. 
Cf. parku-, parkešš-, pargaweške/a-, park(iya)-. 
[ parganula-] 
pár-ga-nu-la KUB 12.63 obv. 31 (OH/MS). 

[parganula-] 

(Among six tasks the demons have to perform): “Shorten the long roads and lengthen the short ones. Lower the high mountains and raise the low ones …” dalugauš [KASKAL.HI.A UL maniku~ andahhir] / manikuwanduš–a KASKAL.HI.A-uš UL–aš da-lu-ug-nu-la (sic, perhaps úr!) HUR. SAG.HI.A pargamu[š UL manikuandahhir(?)] kap~ pauš HUR.SAG.MEŠ UL–uš pár-ga-nu-la(sic, perhaps úr!) “[They did not shorten] the long [ways], they did not lengthen the short ways; [they did not lower] the high mountains, they did not raise the low (lit. small) mountains” KUB 12.63 obv. 24-31 (Zuwi’s rit., OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, Or NS 13:210. 
Pedersen, JCS 1:60-64, understood dalugnula and parganula as verbal adjectives in PIE *-lo-, which govern the acc. Van Brock, RHA XX/71:98f., rejected this hypothesis and held two other interpretations possible: (1) all. in -a of an abstract noun in -ul: “the short mountains, they are not for elevation,” and (2) neut. pl. adj. in -ula : “the short mountains, they are not things capable of elevating” (“les montagnes basses, ce ne sont choses élevables”). In both interpretations she must interpret the pl. accusatives in -uš as nominatives. This is unlikely in an OH/MS text like KUB 12.63 w. its archaic grammar (obv. 9 nu–z–apa, 18 n–at–še–pa, etc.). Since Neu, KZ 102:16-20, has recently identified pret. pl. 3 forms in -ar from stems in -a-(wemiya-, “šaušiya-” (actually šapašiya-), haniya-), it becomes possible to raise yet another possibility here. The -nu-causatives may have occasionally formed 3 pl. preterites w. a zero grade *dalugnur, *parga~ nur. If so, since KUB 12.63 is a later copy of an OH text, the scribe could have misread an OS úr in his “original” as la. The two signs are similar, even if not very much so. Because neither *parganur nor parganula would have been easy readings for the MH scribe, we would not assume the change to have been a “correction” (lectio facilior), but a copying error. Although it is true that the UR sign is more common in syllabic writings of Hitt. words than ÚR, the latter is by no means unusual. Examples can be found in all stages of the language: ani-ú-úr KBo 19.92:4 (OH/NS), URUKu-úr-ša-a[n-…] KBo 
3.1 iii 41 (OH/NS), GIŠmu-úr-ta-an-za HKM 72:35 (MH/ MS), µÚr-hi-dU-aš KUB 26.70 obv. 2 (late NH), MUNUSTuúr-la-aš HT 2 v 10 (NH), HUR.SAGTa-ku-úr-ga KUB 6.45 

158

ii 44 (Muw. II), ša-ma-an-ku-úr-wa-an-te-eš KUB 7.1 + KBo 3.8 iii 25 (NH), šu-úr-ku[-uš] KUB 60.113:6, cf. 5, S´SKURzu-úr-ki-an-za KUB 58.57 obv.? 11, cf. 14, etc. 
Friedrich, Or NS 13 (1944) 208-213; Pedersen, JCS 1 (1947) 60-64 (“one cannot make … high”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 98f. (“élevable, exhaussable”). 

Cf. parku-, parganu-. 

pargašti-n.; height; NH.† sg. d.-l. pár-ga-aš-ti KBo 22.90:7, KBo 26.147:10, KUB 
8.57 i (7), KUB 29.4 i 29, KUB 29.5 i 13, KUB 33.92 iii 14, KUB 33.113 iv 6, 7, KUB 33.106 iii (14), KUB 38.21 obv. 2, KUB 48.104:6, pár-qa-aš-ti KUB 38.1 i 12, 16, 30, iv 10, KUB 

38.3 i 3, 10, 19, iii 13, KUB 38.19 obv. 10, rev. 6. uncertain: pár-ga-aš-ti[(-)] VBoT 42:2. 

1-NUTIM GIŠkišhita pár-ga-aš-ti 6 šekan “One set of kišhi-chairs, six šekan in height” KUB 29.4 i 2829 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 8f.; […] pár-ga-aš-ti 1 še~ kan KBo 26.147:10; 1 ALAM AD.KID MUNUS-TI TUŠ-an KÙ.BABBAR GAR.RA pár-qa-aš-ti 1 SIG.KÙŠ 1/2 SIG.KÙŠ “One seated figure of a woman made of wickerwork, plated with silver, one and a half small cubits in height” KUB 38.3 i 10 (inv., NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 16f., tr. Rost MIO 8:182 □ for AD.KID as a material for making statues see Bossert, MIO 2:271f.; dLAMMA GIŠŠUKUR ALAM GIŠ-ÙI LÚ GUB-a[n]≠pár±-qa-aš-ti-ia-at 1 UPNU 3 ŠU.SI 1 UM[BIN] “The patron deity of the spear: a wooden statuette of a man standing; it (measures) in height one ‘fist,’ three fingers, and one fingernail” KUB 38.19 obv. 9-10 (inv., NH), ed. Rost MIO 8:203. 
For measurements see Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:176-178, and van den Hout, RLA 7:517-530; cf. CAD s.v. ammatu A, mng. 2 k 6', and Melchert, JCS 32:50-56. 
Ehelolf apud Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 77; Neu, Lok. (1980) 48f. 

n. 113. 
Cf. parku-, pargatar, parkeššar. 

pargatar, parkuwatar n.; 1. height, 2. length (of a course); from MH/MS.† 
sg. nom. pár-ga-tar KBo 13.2 obv. 15 (NH), KBo 3.2 rev. 26 (MH/MS), KBo 26.65 i 17, 20, pár-ku-wa-tar KUB 1.11 iv 23 (MH/NS). 
(Sum.) […] = (Akk.) […]x = (Hitt.) pár-ga-tar-me-et “my height” KBo 13.2 obv. 15 (vocab., NH). 

pargaweške
1	height: (The Basalt grew tall) nu–šši pár-gatar peran 1 LÂM 9 ME–ya DANNA … nu Ékuntar~ ran ≠É±.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–ya [a]nda wemišk[i]zzi pár-ga-tar-še-et 9 LÂM DANNA “At first, his height was 1,900 DANNAs. … (Then later) he reached the kuntarra-sanctuary and the gods’ temples. His height was 9,000 DANNAs (… his width was 9,000 DANNAs)” KBo 26.65 i 17, 19-20 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:18f. (without joins 1160/v and 1121/v). 
2	length: ANA wašanni–ma pár-ga-tar-še-et 6 IKU palhatar–šet–ma 4 IKU.HI.A “The length of the course is six IKUs, its width is four IKUs” KBo 
3	 rev.! 25-26 (Kikkuli tablet IV, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 138f.; n–aš pár-ku-wa-tar-še-et 5 IKU DAGAL– SU–ma 3 IKU 1/ 2 IKU–ya “It (sc. the course) — its length is five IKUs, its width is three and a half IKUs” KUB 1.11 iv 23 (Kikkuli tablet III, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 120f. (“Höhe”), Potratz 163 n. 7 (“Gemeint ist die Länge”). Note that the field texts employ the expected dalugašti- “length.” Neu, FsGüterbock2 158 w. n. 23, wonders if parkuwatar as opposed to pargatar should be considered a neologism. 

Cf. parku-, parkeššar, pargašti-. 
pargawar (mng. unkn.).† 
pár-ga-a-u-wa-ar KBo 33.163 i 14. 
1 NINDA.ÉRIN.MEŠ–ma–ššan katt[a …] / párga-a-u-wa-ar UDU-i-ya[…] KBo 33.163 i 13-14 (frag. of the Hurr. cult). The form looks like a verbal substantive of a stem *pargai-, but no such verb is presently known. 
pargaweške-v.; to become high or tall, grow high or tall; NH.† 
iter. mid. imp. sg. 3 pár-ga-u-e-eš-kad-[d]a-ru KUB 33.98 iii 15, (16); cf. note in nakkušš-morphology sec. 
INA UD.1.KAM–war–aš (var. adds “1”) AM~ MATU pár-ga-u-e-eš-kad-[d]a-ru (par. [n]aiškittar[u]) INA ITU.1.KAM–ma–war–aš (var. adds “1”) IKU-an pár-ga-u-e-eš[-kad-d]a-ru (par. naiš~ kittar[u]) “In one day let him grow a cubit (var. one cubit) high, but in one month let him grow an IKU (var. one IKU) high” KUB 33.98 iii 15-16 (Ullik.), w. dupl. KBo 26.61 iii 25-26 and par. KUB 33.95 iv 3-4 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:156f. (without KBo 26.61), StBoT 5:123, 
159

137, cf. parkešš-and nai-mng. 15. On the AMMATU and IKU see Melchert, JCS 32:50-56, and van den Hout, RLA 7:517-530. 
Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 137; Watkins, TPS 1971:84; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 241. 
Cf. parku-, parkešš-. 
parkī-adj.; (mng. unkn.).† 
pár-ki-i KUR-i KUB 8.2 rev. 11 (frag. context of omen), was tr. by Riemschneider as “ein ausgedehntes(?) Land” (neut. nom.-acc.). An etymological connection w. park-(v.), parku-(adj.), parkešš-, parkiya-, etc. seems likely (on this family of words see Weitenberg, U-Stämme 84, 130-132), but the etymological approach would indicate a translation “a high land.” Without context we simply cannot be sure of case (nom.acc. or loc.?) or meaning. 
Riemschneider, Omentexte 109, 111. 
parkiyahh-v.(?) is cited by Oettinger, Stammbildung 243, perhaps referring to pár-ak-ki-ia-ahha[-…] KBo 18.115 rev. 4 (NH) and/or pár-ki-ia-ah[-…] KUB 57.123 obv. 7. Both exx. could be forms of the verb park-, q.v. for possibilities. 
parkiyanu-v.; to raise, make to rise; NH.† 
pres. pl. 3 pár-ki-ia-nu-wa-an-zi KUB 8.48 i 20 (NH), pár(coll.)-ki-i[a]-nu(coll.)-an-zi KBo 1.28 rev. 4 (NH). 
	a. causing someone to rise from a chair: [… -k]án / [ANA(?) d]UTU-ŠI GIŠŠÚ.A-az / lē pár(coll.)ki-i[a]-nu(coll.)-an-zi “Let them not make [him] rise from (his) chair [before] His Majesty” KBo 1.28 rev. 2-4 (hist., NH), ed. Otten, ZA 50:234, w. coll. 
	b. causing someone to rise from the dead: “My brother, you are my dear brother” ANA ŠEŠ–YA– mu–kan [UL] pár-ki-ia-nu-wa-an-zi namma “will they [never] let me rise again before my brother? (I will sit down among the dead; I will [cross] the threshold of the dead. Never again [will I see] my dear brother with my eyes)” KUB 8.48 i 19-20 (Gilg., NH), ed. (incorrectly) Friedrich, ZA 39:18f., see improved translit. in Myth. 132, tr. Otten, ZA 50:235. 

Otten, ZA 50 (1952) 234f. (“aufstehen lassen”). 
Cf. parku-, parganu-, park(iya)-. 

parku

parkešš-v.; to become high or tall, grow high or tall; NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 pár-ki-iš-ta KUB 33.93 iv 22, KBo 26.65 i (17). iter. mid. pres. sg. 3 pár-ki-iš-kat-ta-ri KUB 33.93 iv 18, 19. 
≠I±NA UD.1.KAM–ya–aš 1 AMMATU pár-ki-iškat-ta-ri [(I≠NA ITU.1.KAM±–ma–aš 1 IKU-≠an±)] pár-ki-iš-kat-ta-ri … [(mān INA UD.15.KAM ti)yat n]u NA›-aš pár-ki-iš-ta “In one day he grows one cubit, in one month he grows one IKU … When the fifteenth day came, the Stone had grown high” KUB 
33.93 iv 18-19, 22 (Ullik.), w. dupl. KUB 33.92 + KUB 36.10 iii 9-10, 12, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:156f., cf. Melchert, JCS 

32:53. 

Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 137; Watkins, TPS 1971:84; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 242 n. 8; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 109. 
Cf. parku-, pargaweške-. 
*parkeššar n.; height; NH.† 
loc. pár-ke-eš-ni(-ta-at-kán), or inst. pár-ke-eš-ni-t(a-atkán) KUB 24.13 ii 7 (rit., NH); for the discussion see *palheš~ šar. 
Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 109. 
parknu-v.; see parganu-. 
parku-adj.; high, tall, lofty, elevated; from OH/ MS. 
sg. nom. com. pár-ku-uš KBo 22.90:5 (NH), KUB 43.8 ii 5a (NS), KBo 26.34 iv 4. 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ku KBo 3.34 ii 25 (OH/NS), KBo 4.4 iv 7 (Murš. II), KBo 22.87 rev. 11 (NS), KUB 24.1 i 25 (NH), KUB 10.72 v 11, KBo 29.109:13, pár-ku-u KUB 35.136 i 12 + KBo 29.209:5. 
[gen. pár-ku-wa-aš KUB 10.11 i 11 (HW 161a), is from parkui-.] 
d.-l. pár-ga-u-e-i KBo 3.8 iii 10 (NH), [pár-ga-u-]≠e± ibid. iii 29, pár-ga-u-i KUB 46.57 i 6 (NS), KBo 12.53 rev. 3. 
abl. ≠pár±-ga-u-az KBo 22.129 obv. 15, pár-ga-wa-az KBo 
4.10 obv. 28 (Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), pár-ga-u-wa-az Bronze 
Tablet (StBoT Beih. 1) i 49 (Tudh. IV). pl. nom. com. pár-ga-u-e-eš KBo 18.192 rev. 9 (NH). acc. pár-ga-mu-uš KUB 17.10 i 24, KUB 12.63 i 30, KUB 
33.10 ii 1 (all OH/MS), KUB 33.24 i 27, KUB 33.13 ii 22 (both OH/NS), KBo 3.8 iii 3 (NH), pár-ga-u-uš KBo 3.8 iii 22 (NH), pár-ga-mu!(text -nu-)-uš KUB 12.63 obv. 25 (OH/MS), pár-ga-u-e-eš KBo 4.4 iv 30 (Murš. II). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ga-u-wa KUB 36.81 obv.? 12. d.-l. pár-ga-u-wa-aš KBo 17.61 rev. 18 (MH/MS), KUB 
27.67 ii 39 (MH/NS), KBo 20.82 iii 7 (OH?/NS?), KUB 33.106 

160

ii 4 (NH), pár-ga-a-u-wa-aš KUB 27.67 iii 43 (MH/NS), pár-ga-u-wa-š(a-aš-kán) KBo 17.54 i 4 (MH/MS). 
(Sum. pronunciation) [an] = (Sum.) [AN] = (Akk.) [ša-q]úú = (Hitt.) [p]ár-ku-uš “high” KBo 26.34 iv 4 (Sa), cf. StBoT 7:40; (Sum.) [NIM] = (Akk.) [ša-qú-ú] = (Hitt.) pár-ku-uš KUB 

3.94 i 13 (Sa suppl.), ed. Laroche, RHA XXIV/79:164f. 

a. (said of mountains or of people on mountains): [HUR.SAGAri]nnandaš–ma [mekki nakkiš nam~ m]a–aš pár-ku-uš “But Mt. Arinnanda [is very hard to climb, and fur]thermore it (is) high” KBo 22.90:45 (ann., Murš. II?), ed. del Monte, Athenaeum NS 63:165f.; (The population of Aripša occupied mountains and rocks) namma–at mekki pár-ku “and it (i.e., the population [= URU-riašeššar] on the mountain) (was) very high” KBo 4.4 iv 7 (Murš. II), ed. AM 134f., cf. mekki B c and panku-A 1 a; cf. ibid. iv 29-31; pár-ga-waaz-ma-aš-ši (par. pár-ga-u-wa-az-ma-aš-ši) HUR. SAG-za URUŠaliyaš ZAG-aš “In the direction of the High Mountain, the city of Šaliya (shall be) his frontier; (Šaliya itself belongs to Hatti)” KBo 4.10 obv. 28-29 (treaty w. Ulmiteššub, Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 18f., w. par. Bo 86/299 i 49 (bronze-tablet treaty w. Kurunta, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:12f.; īt–war– ašta pár-ga-mu-uš-kán HUR.SAG.DIDLI.HI.A šāh “Go and search the high mountains” KUB 17.10 i 2425 (myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 31, tr. Hittite Myths 15, cf. KBo 3.8 iii 3, 10, 22, (29), KBo 13.86 obv. 17, KBo 17.54 i 4, KBo 17.61 rev. 18, KBo 22.129 obv. 15, KBo 26.135:(1), KUB 
12.63 obv. 25, 30, KUB 27.67 ii 39, iii 43, KUB 33.10 ii 1, KUB 

33.13 ii 22, KUB 33.24 i 27, KUB 33.33:3. 

b. (said of buildings): É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–ta pár-ku IŠT[U KÙ.(BABBAR KÙ.GI ≠unuwanta±)] INA KUR URUHatti–≠pat± [ēšzi] “Only in the land of Hatti are your temples high/lofty, adorned with silver and gold” KUB 24.1 i 25-26 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.2 i 21, cf. KUB 36.81 obv.? 12-13, w. dupl. KUB 
24.3 i 12-13; n–aš–kan pár-ga-u-wa-aš auriyaš šarā pai[t] “He (sc. Tašmišu) went up into the high towers” KUB 33.106 ii 4 (Ullik., NH), ed. JCS 6:20f., also as pl. in HW2 1:633a; [… š]er pár-ga-u-wa-aš šuhhaš […] KBo 20.82 iii 7 (rit.). 
c. (said of places): paršanaš tašša<u>i pedi hamikta<t> ulipanan pár-ga-u-e-i hamikta<t> “The leopard was bound in a strong place; the wolf was bound in a high place” KBo 3.8 iii 9-11 (myth in rit., NH), ed. Collins, Diss. 49f., Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:157, 159, cf. 

parkuwa- 1 
ibid. iii 27-29, see disc. at paršana-a 1'; […]-ar minuzzi~ aš–a pár-ga-ú-aš-ši ŠA DINGIR-LIM / […]x(-)mali kitta KUB 58.63 ii 4-5 (fest. frag.) comparable because of the mention of wolves (ulupanniuš) in lines 9 and 11; “Before the sun rises” nu–ššan LÚAZU pár-ga-u-i pedi / [o] x-na-i šarā paizzi “the diviner …-s (and) goes up to a high place” KUB 46.57 i 6-7 (rit., NS). 
	d. (said of furniture): kuida µŠuppiumni µMa~ raššaya GIŠŠÚ.A LÚŠU.I pár-ku iēr “Therefore they elevated (lit. made high) a barber’s chair for Šuppiuman and Marašša” KBo 3.34 ii 24-25 (anecdotes, OH/ NS), ed. THeth 20:535f., translit. Jasink, Mesopotamia 1314:215f.; 1 GIŠŠÚ.A pár-ku-u tianzi “They set up one high chair” KUB 35.136 i 12 + KBo 29.209:5 (Ištanuwian rit.); nu ANA DINGIR-LIM ZAG-[naz GI]ŠBANŠUR AD.KID pár-ku tianzi “They set up for the deity a high wicker table on the right” ibid. 20 + 13. 
	e. (said of body parts): [BE-an U]N-ši SAG<.DU>-aš tarnaš UGU pár-ku-uš “[If] the crown(?) of a man’s head on top is high (there will be no match for him)” KUB 43.8 ii 5a (omen), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 242, 245. 
	f. (said of a deity?): [… p]ár-ga-u-i ANA dx-[o] dUTU-ŠI kī dāiš “His Majesty established this for the high DN” KBo 12.53 rev. 3 + KUB 48.105 rev. 27. 

pár-ku-un-pát KUB 24.7 ii 10 is probably to be emended to pár-ku-in!-pát; see Güterbock in JAOS 103:158, 162. 
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 278f.; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 130-133. 
Cf. park-, parganu-, parganula-, pargašti-, pargatar, parga~ weške-, parkiyanu-, parkešš-, parkeššar, parkuešš-B. 
parkuwa-v.; 1. (trans., act.) to clear or discharge (an obligation, oath, debt), 2. (trans., act.) to clear up or correct (a previously incorrectly decided case), 3. (intrans., mid.; mng. unclear).† 
act. pres. pl. 3 pár-ku-wa-an-zi KUB 13.9 iii 20 (MH/NS), KUB 14.14 rev. 7 (Murš. II). 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pár-ku-wa-at-ta KBo 19.121: 6 (NH). 
1. (trans., act.) to clear or discharge (an obligation, oath, debt): nu šuma[š ANA DINGIR.MEŠ] EN.MEŠ–YA ŠA MA_MÂTI S´SKUR [pe]ran arha iyanzi nu–š[maš–an peran] / (erasure) pár-ku-waan-zi “They (sc. the people of Hatti) are now performing these sacrifices of (i.e., for) the oaths be
161

fore you, [O gods,] my lords, and are clearing [it (i.e., the obligation or oath)] [before yo]u” KUB 
14.14 rev. 5-7 = PP 1 rev. 17-19 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Pestgeb. 172f., Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 200f. (“on purifiera”). 
2. (trans., act.) to clear up or correct (a previously incorrectly decided case): anda–ma mān hannan DI-šar kuiški EGIR-pa dāi nu apāt uttar SIGﬁ-in pár-ku-wa-an-zi “Then, if someone reopens(?) (lit. takes back/again) a decided case, they will thoroughly clarify that matter” KUB 13.9 iii 19-20 (instr., MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 448, 451 (“Wenn dabei aber jemand einen entschiedenen Prozeš wieder (auf)nimmt, wird man diese Sache ordentlich bereinigen”), translit. Westbrook/Woodard, JAOS 110:644, cf. Freydank, ArOr 38:266f. 
3. (intrans., mid.; mng. unclear because previous context is lost): (§) ≠m±ān pár-ku-wa-at-ta– m[a(–)… memiškiwan daiš] / [k]uiš–wa–mu DIN~ GIR-LUM uit [… mān dU-aš–ma] / [U]RUKummiyaš šarku[š LUGAL-uš memiyawanzi] / zinnit n–aš a[nda URU…] / iā
nniš “But when he p.-ed, [he began to speak to …]: ‘Which god came to me?’ [But when Teššub,] Kummiya’s heroic [king], finished [speaking], he set out for […]” KBo 19.121:4-8 (myth, NH), partially ed. Oettinger, Stammbildung 334 n. 154 □ contra Otten, KBo 19 p. vii, and Oettinger, this frag. shows no evidence of being a part of the Gilgamesh epic; on the contrary, the fact that Teššub, the “heroic king of Kummiya,” plays a role makes it likely that it belongs to the Kumarbi cycle; in this frag. it is Teššub who performs the parkuwa-action and afterward asks the question. 
Cf. parkui-A, parkuyatar. 
Éparkuwa(ya)-n., (a building); from OH/NS.† 
pl. gen. Épár-ku-wa-aš KUB 10.11 i 11 (NH); pl. d.-l. Épárku-wa-ia-aš KBo 10.20 iii 4 (OH/NS), KUB 11.13 vi (11); pl. abl. Épár-ku-wa-i-ia-z[a] KBo 11.22 iv 3; w. pl. det. É.MEŠpárku-wa-ia[-…] KBo 13.245 i 4 (OH/NS). 
lukkatti–ma–za–kan LUGAL-uš Épár-ku-wa-iaaš dU pihaššaššin iyazi “The next day, the king worships the Stormgod pihaššašši in the Éparkuwayaš (while the queen worships the Sungoddess of Arinna in the palace (halentuwa-)” KBo 10.20 iii 4-5 (AN~ DAHŠUM fest., OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, JNES 19:83, 86; cf. [m]ahhan–ma–aš Épár-ku-wa-i-ia-z[a] uiz!zi KBo 

parkuwalli

11.22 iv 2-4; dU pihaššaššin–z[a? …] LÚHAL É.MEŠpárku-wa-ia[-…] KBo 13.245 i 3-4 (OH/NS); mahhan–ma– kan LUGAL-uš IŠTU KÁ Épár-ku-wa-aš uizzi KUB 
10.11 i 10-11 (NH); [m]ān–za LUGAL-uš dU pihaš~ šašin dUTU URUArinna–ya hamešhi INA Épár-ku-waia[-aš?] šer iyazi KUB 11.13 vi 9-12; n–ašta LUGALuš KÁ Épár-ku-wa[-ia-za?/aš?] parā tīezzi KUB 51.13:9-10; [… Épár-ku-w]a-ia-aš šer 1 GUNNI […] / […]x Épár-ku-wa-ia-aš šer Bo 5256:5-6, ed. Alp, Tem-pel 302f. 
From the abl. form Épár-ku-wa-i-ia-z[a] KBo 11.22 iv 3 it would seem that É is indeed a det., and in Épár-ku-wa-aš KUB 10.11 i 11 p. declines like an a-stem com. gender noun. But it is equally apparent from the example of Éarzana-that such forms often originated as free-standing genitives; i.e., “the (house) of p.” > “the p. (house).” Since parku~ wayaš is a pefectly good form of parkui-, one might think of parkui-A “pure” or of the noun parkui-B “bronze(?),” q.v. 
parkuwalli-adj.; pure(?); NS.† pl. nom.-acc. neut. pár-ku-wa-al-la KUB 36.38 rev. 10. 
(The officiant offers to Kunirša and says:) ≠d±[Kuniršaš] (or: DIN[GIR-LUM]) / [BE_LI?–Y]A? pēiškattallaš man¢–kan taknaš dUTU-uš […] / [o-or]iyat nu–šši niwalla pár-ku-wa-al-la […] / [nu– tta–kan k]artimmiyanut (or perhaps: [nu–tta–kkan kuiš k]artimmiyanut) “[O Kunirša (or: O god), m]y [lord(?)], merciful (one). If the Sungoddess of the Netherworld has […-]ed, and [… has …-ed] innocent (and) pure(?) [lands(?)] for her, and has made [you] angry (or perhaps: [who] has made [you] angry?)” (§, tablet breaks off here) KUB 36.38 rev. 8-11 (rit., NS), different tr. Meriggi, RHA XVIII/67:94 (“bien qu’il fut innocent (et) pur”), who erroneously made kartimmiyanut the verb in the sentence beginning w. nu–šši in line 10. 
Cf. the PN µPár-ku-wa-al-la-an-ni HKM 100:6. 
Formally, niwalla parkuwalla might be attributive adj. + noun (both neut.). But given the meaning “innocent” of niwalla-, it is unlikely that its noun would be neut. pl. We have therefore — with Meriggi — assumed that niwalla and parkuwalla are both attributive adjectives. Yet an adj. formed from another adj. (parkui-) is somewhat unusual. 

162

van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 167 (“pur”). 
Cf. parkui-. 

[pár-ku-u-an] KUB 15.42 i 14 see under parkunu-1 a 1'. 
parkuwantariya-v.; to be(come) pure(?); NS.† 
nu AN[A d… EN?/GAŠAN?–YA …] / dudd[u halziššahhi nu–…–za arkuwar?] / iyami nu–k[an …] / pár-ku-wa-an-ta-ri-i[a-mi?] “[I cry] ‘Pity’ to […, my lord/lady, and] I make [petition …] and … I become pure(?)” KBo 14.75 iv 1-4 (prayer frag., NS); for the rest. see i-ia-mi ibid. iv 3. Because the function of the derivational suffix -ariya-(cf. gimmantariya-, ne~ kumantariya-, šakuwantariya-) is not clear, p. may mean “to be/become pure,” or “to make pure, purify,” cf. Kronasser, EHS 1:508, and Oettinger, Stammbildung 352; neither Kronasser nor Oettinger cite this as a verb in -ariya-. 

Cf. parkui-. 

NINDAparkuwaštannanni-n.; (a type of bread or cake).† 
EGIR-anda–ma ŠA ‰R.M[EŠ …] / nu–ššan kuedaniy[a …] 2 NINDAhuddunatiyata x[…] / NINDApár-ku-wa-aš-ta-an-na-an-ni-i[n …] / nu apēa ANA LÚ.MEŠ[…] KBo 24.25 i 8-12 (cult of Huwaššanna); among other breads/cakes perhaps also NINDApárk[u?-…] ibid. i 6, a reading NINDApár-š[u-ul-li …] would also be possible in line 6. 
The ending -annanni-of this word reminds one of NINDAšiwandannanni-, which also occurs often in the cult of Huwaššanna. 

parkuwatar see pargatar. 

parkue-v. (intrans./stat.); to be pure, clear, fully visible (from parkui-), or perhaps: to be high (from parku-) (of the moon or some other heavenly body); from OH/NS.† 
act. pres. sg. 3 pár-ku-ez(coll. photograph)-zi KUB 8.2 rev. 8, (10) (OH/NS), pár-k[u-e-e]z-zi (coll.) ibid. rev. 10 (OH/NS). 
§ [takku dSÊN-aš …-w]anza (mišriwanza or aiwanza?) nu–šš[i …] / [menahhanda] arai n–aš 

parkui- A 
pár-ku[-ez-zi …]§[takku dSÊN-]aš miante–š<ši?> nu appi-x[…] / [ar]ai n–aš pár-ku-ez(coll.)-zi … § [takk]u dSÊN-aš miyante–šši nu–šši tar[-… IGIanda(?)] / [ar]ai n–aš pár-k[u-e-e]z-zi (coll.) … “[If the moon is …bri]ght(?)/[ai]want-(?), and […] arises [opposite(?)] it, and it is clear/high, … [If the moon] is in its growing/waxing state(?), and […] arises […], and it is clear/high, (Amurru will fall). [I]f the moon is in its growing/waxing state(?), and […] arises [… opposite(?)] it, and it is clear/high, (Akkad will fall)” KUB 8.2 rev. 5-10 (lunar omens, OH/ NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 109, 111 (“[wird] hell”). 
The derived verbs in -e-, first isolated as a class by Watkins (TPS 1971:51-93), may have had a stat. (“to be …”) as opposed to an inchoative (“to become …”) meaning in pre-Hittite. But already in OH the two classes are indistinguishable in meaning. Cf. arawe-, lalukke-, marše-, miyahunte-, nak~ kuššiye-, papre-, parkuiye/a-. 
The form pár-ku-uz-zi from Bo 7787:4' cited by Oettinger, Stammbildung 334, as belonging to parkue-is to be emended to pár-ku<-nu>-uz-zi. Bo 7787 (translit. courtesy of H. Klengel) probably is an indirect join to KBo 2.6+. Its line 4', on the basis of KBo 2.6 i 34, is to be restored [dUTU-ŠI–ya–z] pár-ku<-nu>uz-zi “[And His Majesty] will purify [himself ].” 
Riemschneider, Omentexte 446 (parkuwai-“rein werden, hell(?) werden”); Watkins, TPS 1971:51-93 (parkue-“be pure, purify oneself”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 246, 334 w. 
n. 153 (parkue-“reinigen”). 
Cf. parku-, parkui- A, parkuiye/a-, parkuemar. 
parkui-A adj.; 1. pure, free of impurities, unalloyed, undiluted, unadulterated, 2. (physically) clean or clear, (ritually) pure, 3. free of, 4. (proven) innocent (by ordeal, opp. paprant-); from OS. 
sg. nom. com. pár-ku-iš KBo 16.47:14, KUB 43.58 i 49, 56, ii 5, HKM 46:24 (all MH/MS), KUB 33.6 iii (6) (MS), KUB 
8.9 obv. 10 (OH/NS), KBo 5.2 iv 62, KUB 29.7 obv. 5, 6, and passim (both MH/NS), KBo 5.3 iv 33 (Šupp. I), KUB 32.114 obv. 3, KUB 41.22 iv 2 (both NH), pár-ku-i-š(a-aš) KBo 4.6 obv. 13 (Murš. II), pár-ku-i-iš KUB 31.74 ii 10 (OH/NS), KBo 
22.161 rev. 5, VBoT 22:4 (both NS), KUB 9.22 iii 30 (NH), 21/p (THeth 2:33 n. 3), pár-ku-eš KBo 16.47:23 (MH/MS), pár-ku-u-i[š] KUB 35.92 rev. 19, pár-ku-ú-≠iš!± KUB 46.23 rev. 23 (NS). 
acc. com. pár-ku-in KUB 36.110 rev. 7 (OS), KBo 15.10 ii 9 (MH/MS), KUB 27.67 iii 52 (MH/NS), KUB 19.37 ii 30 
163

(Murš. II), KBo 24.93 iv 6 (NS), ≠pár-ku-i-in± KUB 35.29 i 15, pár-ku-un (sic) KUB 24.7 ii 10. 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ku-i KUB 17.10 ii 25 (OH/MS), KUB 
32.108 rev. 5 (OH/MS), KUB 15.34 ii 3, KUB 43.58 i 41, iv 11 (both MH/MS), KBo 2.9 i 36 (MH/NS), KBo 4.1 obv. 42, KBo 
21.20 rev. 15, KUB 12.58 iii 31, KUB 24.3 i 25, KUB 46.38 ii 6, 14 (all NH), pár-ku-ú-i KUB 46.23 rev. 20 (NS), pár-ku-u-i KUB 24.5 obv. 29 (NH), see also separate lemma on UZUparku(i) haštai. 
gen. pár-ku-wa-ia-aš KBo 10.20 iii 4, KUB 11.13 vi (11) (both NS) (see also separate lemma Éparkuwa(ya)-), pár-kuwa-aš KUB 10.11 i 11 (NS), KUB 51.13:(9). 
loc. pár-ku-wa-i KUB 15.34 ii 15 (MH/MS), KUB 13.29:13 (MH); perhaps pár-ku-wa-ia KUB 40.1 rev.! 22. 
abl. [pá]r-ku-wa-ia-az KUB 9.6 i 2 (NS), pár-ku-wa-ia-za KUB 22.35 iii 14 (NH), pár-ku-wa-i-ia-z[a] (NH). 
inst. pár-ku-wa-a-it KBo 21.8 ii 4 (MH/MS). 
pl. nom. com. pár-ku-wa-e-eš KUB 29.7 rev. 24 and passim, 
KUB 43.58 i 48, ii (11) (both MH/MS), KBo 9.106 ii 8, KUB 
15.42 ii 11, 32, KUB 13.4 iv 53 (all MH/NS), pár-ku-wa-e<eš> KUB 13.17 rev. 15 (pre-NH/NS), pár-ku-wa-a-eš KUB 
30.31 i 17, 42 (NH), [p]ár-ku-wa-a-iš KUB 17.16 iv 3 (NS), pár-ku-wa-iš KUB 13.4 i 14 (MH/NS), pár-ku-i-e-eš KUB 30.31 i 43 (NH), pár-ku-e-eš KUB 29.7 rev. 48 (MH/MS), pár-ku-ue-eš KUB 41.22 iii 2 (NH). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ku-i KUB 17.21 i 2, KUB 29.7 rev. 56, KUB 43.58 ii 12 (all MH/MS), pár-ku-e KUB 43.58 ii 23 (MH/ MS), pár-ku-wa-e KUB 29.8 i 43 (MH/MS), KUB 15.42 ii 33 (MH/NS), pár-ku-wa-ia KBo 13.245 i 4 (OH/NS), KUB 13.4 i 16, 23, iii 62 (MH/NS), KUB 13.5 iii 32 (NS), KUB 24.7 ii 9, pár-ku-wa KBo 20.111:13 (NH). Note the erroneous (É.HI.A– KUNU …) pár-ku-wa-e-eš KUB 15.42 ii 12 (MH/NS), dupl. correctly pár-ku-e KUB 43.58 ii 23 (MH/MS). 
loc. pár-ku-wa-ia-aš KUB 15.34 ii (38) (MH/MS), KUB 
46.44 rev. 24, KUB 5.3 ii 53 (both NH), KUB 21.9 rev. 2 (Hatt. III), KUB 11.14:7, pár-ku-ia-aš KUB 5.6 ii 61 (NH), pár-ku-iia-aš KUB 5.6 iii 4 (NH). 
(Sum.) SAG.´[L] = (Sum. pronunciation) ša-an-ke-el = (Akk.) ša-≠qú±-ú “high” = (Hitt.) pár-ku-[i]š “pure, clean” (apparently translating Akk. zakû “pure”) KBo 1.35 iii 3 + KBo 
26.25 iii 7; (Sum.) SAG!(text KA).´L.LÁ = (Akk.) ša-qú-ú “high” = (Hitt.) pár-ku-iš “pure” KBo 1.44 rev. 5 + KBo 13.1 rev. 39 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. MSL 17:116 and StBoT 7:20, 33. StBoT 7:33 interprets the rendering of the Akk. šaqû “high” by Hitt. pár-ku-iš “pure” as either a slip, writing -iš for -uš (but note that both dupls. write -iš), or as the Hitt. scribe’s mistaking Akk. šaqû for the similar sounding zakû “pure.” We follow MSL 
17:116 n. 39 in preferring the second explanation. (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) […] = (Hitt.) [pár-ku-i]š / (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) […] = (Hitt.) [me-e]k-ki pár-ku-iš KBo 26.20 ii 3-4 (Erimhuš Bogh.). 
1. pure, free of impurities, unalloyed, undiluted, unadulterated (cf. AlHeth 67) — a. wine: n–ašta GAL KÙ.GI-a[š] / [GEŠ]TIN-nan pár-ku-in akkuškē

wani 
parkui- A 2 c 

“We shall drink undiluted wine from (lit. of) a cup of gold” KUB 36.110 rev. 6-7 (benediction for Labarna, OS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi2 50f. 
	b. gold: nu KÙ.GI mahhan uktūri namma–at pár-ku-i daššu–ya “Just as gold is durable, unalloyed, and solid” KBo 4.1 obv. 41-42 (foundation rit., NH). 
	c. silver: KÙ.BABBAR-aš!(text -ni, coll.)– wa–z iwar PA_NI DINGIR.<MEŠ> DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ pár-ku-iš ēš “Like silver may you be free of impurity before the deities, (both) gods and goddesses” KBo 5.2 iv 61-62 (Ammihatna’s Kizz. rit., MH/NS); alternatively, one could think of the few cases in which postpos. iwar does not govern the gen.: MUŠEN-iš iwar KUB 36.37 ii? 10 + KUB 31.118:5, huelpi GA.RASSAR iwar KUB 24.7 ii 5, LÀL-it iwar KUB 27.29 ii 19, [UZUš]uppa–kan iwar KUB 58.11 obv. 18 (on iwar see Hoffner, IM 43:39-51), and decide to accept the complement -ni. If so, since this is a Hurr.-influenced Kizzuwatnean rit., perhaps what underlay the ideogram was Hurr. ušhuni/išuhni (cf. Goetze, RHA V/35:105 n. 11, Laroche, GLH 289, Giorgadze, AoF 15:71, Hoffner in FsOtten2 163f., Neu, Das Hurritische 16 
	
 n. 39). 

d. Z´Z-tar “wheat (free of chaff or spikelets?)”: KUB 33.5 iii 5 (OH/MS) (cf. discussion in AlHeth 67). 
e. BA.BA.ZA “porridge (free of lumps or inedible particles)”: [(BA.B)]A.ZA GIM-an pár-ku-iš KBo 23.1 iii 22 (rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 24.50 i 15; cf. KBo 

23.1 i 37-38 (NH); 3 BÁN BA.BA.ZA pár-ku-iš KUB 
36.89 obv. 5 (NS). 
2. (physically) clean or clear, (ritually) pure — 
a. sky: “The chief cook speaks the words of consecration (šuppiyahuwaš)” ne≠piš±[mā]n pár-ku-≠ú-i± / ≠DINGIR.MEŠ±[-ašš–a ištananaš] auleš«iš» [NINDA haršišš–a DUGišp]anduzi / [apeniššan] párku-ú-≠iš! ē
šdu± “Just as the sky is pure/clear/clean, may the sacrificial animals for the gods’ altars, bread, libation vessels be likewise (ritually) pure” KUB 25.20 iv 16-17 + KUB 46.23 rev. 20-23 (ANDAHŠUM fest.), rest. from par. KUB 11.23 vi 1-3 (OH/NS). 
	b. water: KUB 43.58 i 40-41 (rit., MH/MS), KBo 17.93:6, KBo 21.20 rev. 15, KUB 9.6 i 2, KUB 57.63 i 13 (all rits., NS). 
	c. foodstuffs: pár-ku-in išnan BA.BA.[ZA] “pure/clean dough (of) BA.BA.ZA” KBo 14.108 ii 4; cf. KUB 42.85:8; taluppi-“pieces of dough” KBo 22.143 

164

i (1), KBo 24.45 obv. 18, 20, KUB 35.29 i 9; NINDA. GUR›.RA “thick bread” KBo 20.111:13; see also NINDA haršiš KUB 25.20 iv 16-17 + KUB 46.23 rev. 21-23, above, 2 a. 

d. gangati-plant: KUB 29.7 obv. 30 (MH/MS). 

e. tables (GIŠBANŠUR): namma dUTU-ŠI šak~ nuwantaš ANA GIŠBANŠUR pár-ku-wa-ia-aš-ša ANA GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A EGIR-an hinkzi “Further, should My Majesty bow to the unclean tables and the clean tables?” KUB 5.6 ii 53-54 (oracle question, NH), ed. Friedrich, ArOr 6:366; cf. ibid. ii 61, iii 4-5; “They will give compensation to the deceased” ANA DINGIR. MEŠ URUHalpa–ya šarnikzel šaknuwandaza pár-kuwa-ia-za SUM-anzi “They will also give compensation to the gods of Aleppo from the unclean and from the clean” KUB 22.35 iii 13-15 (oracle question, NH), ed. Friedrich, ArOr 6:366. 
f. kinds of seats (tapri-, GIŠŠÚ.A): (sg. loc.) KUB 
15.34 ii 15-16, (pl. loc.) 37-38 (MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:192f. 
	g. throne dais (GIŠDAG-ti): KUB 15.34 ii 37-38 (MH/ MS). 
	h. tents: […] pár-ku-i GIŠZA.LAM.GAR “tent” KUB 12.58 iii 31 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH). 
	i. garments: pár-ku-wa-ya TÚG.HI.A waššan harkandu “Let them wear clean garments” KUB 13.4 i 16 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 148f., Süel, Direktif Metni 22f., tr. ANET 207, cf. i 23, iii 62, cf. KUB 

29.8 i 43 (MH/MS), KUB 24.7 ii 9 (NH). 

j. S´Gali-: KUB 15.42 ii 8 (MH/NS), KUB 30.38 i 10 + ABoT 29 i 29 (NH), KBo 24.50 i 6-7, KBo 24.45 obv. 18, KBo 

14.108 ii 9. 

k. persons: (The Old Woman consecrates (šup~ piyahh-) the clients saying:) pár-ku-wa-e-eš–wa– šmaš (par. pár-ku-e-eš–wa–za) [(na)]mma ēšten KAZU-it EME-it “May you be pure again with mouth and tongue” 2Mašt. ii 24 (MH/MS), w. par. KBo 
2.3 i 36-37 (MH/NS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:354f.; MUNUS-za “woman” KUB 29.7 obv. 38, 48 (MH/MS), KBo 23.1 iii 3 (NH), KUB 30.38 i 6 (NH); MUNUS.ŠU.GI “Old Woman” KBo 22.161 rev. 5; NINDA.[GUR›.]RA UD-MI kuiēš ēššanzi “(bakers), who make the daily thick bread” KUB 13.4 i 14 (pre-NH/NS); (woman substitute) KBo 4.6 obv. 13 (Murš. II), ed. Tischler, Gass. 12f.; cf. KBo 

parkui- A 2 o 
13.71 rev. 5 in mekki (adv.) c; ≠lukkatta±–ma INA UD.3. KAM LÚpat[iliš] paizzi nu MUNUS punušzi nu mān [(MUNUS)] tešhit (var. tešhaz) pár-ku-iš (var. párku-i-iš) “In the morning of the third day the patilipriest goes, and questions the woman. If the woman is ‘pure’ through/from (her) sleep/dream, …” ABoT 17 iii 4-6 (birth rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 9.22 iii 29-30, ed. StBoT 29:94f. (“if she is (shown) by a dream (to be) pure”) 
w. comment on p. 114, cf. Melchert, Diss. 420 (“when she is free of sleep”); cf. mān–aš tešhaz–ma UL pár-kui[(š)] “But if she is not ‘pure’ through/from (her) sleep/dream” ibid. iii 9, w. dupls. KUB 9.22 iii 35 and KBo 17.64:4, ed. StBoT 29:96f. The purpose of the questioning (mentioned in ABoT 17, but not in KUB 9.22) would seem to be to determine if she was pure. Beckman (p. 114) cites other passages from birth rituals where dreams are investigated. Instead of the sec. from lukkatta to punušzi, KUB 9.22 iii 29 has: lukkatta–ma nu–za MUNUS ārri “In the morning the woman washes herself.” Cf. passages containing tešhaz and the verb parkuiye/a-(q.v.). 
l. animals: ≠nu dama±ı¢n PÉŠ.TUR pár-ku-in udanzi nu dTar[pattaššan] kuiš p[er]an wehatta n– an–kan apē
dan[i] šipanti “They bring another pure mouse and she offers it to the one who turns before the Tarpattašša-deities” KUB 27.67 iii 52-54 (MH/NS); UDU “sheep” KBo 15.10 ii 9-10 (MH/MS). 
m. land of Hatti: 545/u:5-6 + KUB 17.21 obv. 1-2 (Arn. I/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 133, 143, Kaškäer 152f.; KUB 
15.34 ii 6 (evocation, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 13.29:13, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f.; KBo 2.9 i 35-36 (rit. for IŠTAR of Nineveh, MH/NS). 
	n. temples: [(nu EGIR-pa šumenzan Éka)]rim~ n[(aš SIGﬁ-a)]ndaš pár-ku-wa-ia-aš [(uwatten)] “Come back to your good pure temples” KUB 60.151 obv. 6(-7) (evocation, MH), w. dupl. KUB 15.34 ii 13-14 (MH/ MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190 (without KUB 60.151 which contains the form pár-ku-wa-ia-aš). 
	o. festivals, rituals (EZEN, SISKUR, aniur): [(nu–tta E)]ZEN.HI.A S´SKUR.HI.A INA KUR URUHatti–pat pár-ku-i [(šuppi piška)]nzi “And in the land of Hatti alone they give festivals and sacrifices to you in a pure and holy manner” KUB 24.2 obv. 18-19 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.1 i 21-23, ed. Gurney, AAA 27:18f. □ since EZEN is common gender elsewhere (cf. GAL-in EZEN-an KBo 2.5 iii 42, 45; apūn EZEN 

165

KUB 13.4 iii 39), the neut. parkui šuppi here must be adverbial; cf. mā
n ANA dLAMMA Éhuwapraš EZEN pár-kuin […] KUB 56.51 i 4; cf. KUB 24.3 i 23-26 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 158, 167; S´SKUR–ya–wa–šmaš šanezzi pár-ku-i pešgaueni “We always give you pleasant (and) pure rituals” KUB 15.32 i 51-52 (evocation, MH/ENS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:152f.; see also KUB 15.34 ii 3 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f., KUB 17.21 i 2-3 + 577/u i 6-7 (prayer, MH/ MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 133, 143, Kaškäer 152f.; [EGIRan]da–ma–z parnaš KIN-ur pár-ku-u-i KIN-ur DÙzi “[Afterw]ards he performs the ritual of the house, the pure ritual” KUB 24.5 obv. 28-29 (royal substitution rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:10f.; cf. KUB 46.38 ii 6. 
3. free of — a. undesirable things: nu–za DINGIR.MEŠ idā
lauaz uddanaz linkiyaz hurdiyaz ē¢
šhanaz išhahruwaz humandazz–(i)ya pár-ku-wa-eeš ēšten “May you, gods, be free of the evil words, perjury, curse, murder, tears, and of all (such things)” KUB 43.58 i 46-48 (purif. rit., MH/MS), cf. KUB 
30.31 i 15-18 + KUB 32.114 obv. 1-3 and passim (rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 2:95, 103; KUB 35.92 + KBo 9.146 rev. 1819 (rit. for Išhara, NH), KUB 24.9 ii 12-15 (Alli’s rit, MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:32f., KUB 29.7 rev. 31-32 and passim (rit., MH/ MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 123f., 130. 
b. parkui tuppi/T˘
UPPU “final draft” (lit. “pure tablet, one free of errors, corrected”; cf. German: Reinschrift): “First tablet, with more following, of the nuntariyašha-festival, when the king goes to Arinna for the nuntariyašha-festival §” [k]ī párku-i T˘UPPU ANA GIŠ.HUR–kan handan “This is a final draft, collated against the wooden tablet” KUB 
2.9 vi 9-10; cf. KUB 20.8 vi 6, KUB 32.108 rev. 5, KUB 35.18 iv 7, KUB 43.58 iv 11, KUB 58.43 vi 10, IBoT 2.1 vi 12. 
c. free of vegetation, bare: “On the other side of the city of Tapapanuwa” nu–kan MULU_ pár-kuin kuwapi EGIR-an šarā uwaši “when you come up behind the Bare Peak (the peak is the border)” KUB 
19.37 ii 30-31 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 170f. 
d. free from enemy activity, safe: HUR.SAGaš–wa ŠA LÚ.KÚR uddanaza pár-ku-iš “The mountain is safe from the activity (lit. matter) of the enemy” HKM 46:23-24 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsLaroche 30f. and HBM 202f. 

parkui- A 

e. free of an oath, innocent of violating an oath, absolved from further obligation to the oath: (You have transgressed the divine oath) URUHattušaš–a linkiyaz pár-ku-iš ēštu “(Now) let Hatti too be absolved from the oath” KBo 16.47:14 (treaty, MH/MS), cf. also line 23; nu–za dUTU-ŠI apē
z linkiyaz ANA PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ pár-ku-iš ēšlit “May I, My Majesty, be absolved of that oath before the gods” KBo 5.3 iv 32-33 (Huqq.), ed. SV 2:134f. iv 48-49; see lingai- 3 b. 
f. trouble-free: “I held fast the command — that very one which you approve, O Your Majesty, my lord” kāšma MU.KAM-za pár-ku-wa-ia–pát tar~ nanza kēdani MU.KAM-ti nakkiyatar UL namma kuiški ēšzi “The (present) year has been turned to the clean (one) (meaning: the present year will be trouble-free); in this year no longer will anyone be a nuisance” KUB 40.1 rev.! 22-23 (letter, NH), cf. nakkiya~ tar 4 (w. slighly different tr.). 
4. (proven) innocent (by ordeal, opp. pap~ rant-): nu–za mā
n pár-ku-wa-e-eš (dupl. pár-ku-wae<-eš>) šumel dLAMMA–KUNU “If you (pl.) are found innocent (it is due to) your patron deity” (but if you are found guilty, you will perish) KUB 13.4 iv 53-54 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
13.17 rev. 15, ed. Chrest. 164f., Süel, Direktif Metni 84f., tr. ANET 210; (Let Zuliya go to the river ordeal) mān– aš park[(uešzi)] / [nu] ziqqa pár-ku-iš mān–aš pa[(prašzi–ma)] / [z]iqqa īt “If he is shown innocent, you too are innocent; but if he is shown guilty, you too must go” 359/u + Bo 4410:5-7 (instr. for palace servants), w. differing dupl. KUB 13.3 iii 30-31, translit. Otten, ZA 67:55f.; kuiš pár-ku-i-iš n–aš ‰R–KUN[U …] “Whoever is (shown) innocent will be your servant” KUB 31.74 ii 10 (frag. naming Alluwamna, OH/NS) in context mentioning a river (ordeal); […]x mā
n pár-ku-iš (-)x[…] KBo 18.66 rev.? 9 (letter mentioning d´D and DÂNU), ed. THeth 16:109f. 
Hrozny™, HKT (1919) 66 n. 5; Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 32; Otten, Das Altertum 1 (1955) 79 (mng. 1 d “Reinschrift”); Moyer, Diss. (1969) 24-26 (general study of concept of purity); Kestemont, Diplomatique (1974) 616 (mng. 3 e “être dégagé, être quitte (d’une obligation)”) and 593 under Akk. zakû. 
Cf. parkuwa-, parkuwalli-, parkuwantariya-, parkue-, parkui-B, parkuiye/a-, parkuyatar, parkui haštai, parkuemar, parkuešš-A, parkunu-. 

166

parkui-B n. (probably a metal, possibly bronze); from OS.† 
(Sum.) S‰LA ZABAR = (Akk.) qa-a ZABAR “a qû-measuring vessel of bronze” = (Hitt.) pár-ku-ia-aš ha-zi-la-aš “a hazila-measuring vessel of bronze(?)” KBo 13.1 i 52 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. StBoT 7:11, 17 (Otten takes p. as the adj. and translates the Hitt.: “des reinen h.-Mašes” or “h.-Maš des Reinen”), MSL 17:104, cf. van den Hout, RLA 523b, 524b. 
[…-]yaš pár-ku-wa-ia-aš GIŠMAR-an KBo 26.105 iv? 8 (Kumarbi myth, NH), cf. occasional GIŠMAR ZA~ BAR “spade of bronze” adduced by Otten, StBoT 7:17. 
Possibly: […] / pár-ku-wa-aš haššī […] “on/in a brazier of bronze” Bo 3752 ii? 6 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:179; cf. GUNNI ZABAR “bronze brazier” KUB 
20.59 iv 8-9 (ANDAHŠUM fest.), KBo 22.142 rev. 5 □ the hašša-/GUNNI can be made of various materials: GUNNI KÙ.BABBAR … GUNNI KÙ.GI … GUNNI NA›ZA.G´N … GUNNI AN.BAR … GUNNI ZABAR KBo 4.1 rev. 17-19, cf. KUB 43.49 rev.? 26; GUNNI GIŠ KUB 43.49 rev.? 21, KUB 
9.1 iii 6, KUB 15.34 i 21; AN.BAR-aš GUNNI 412/b ii 23 (Ertem, Flora 118f.); ŠA SIG› GUNNI.MEŠ “braziers/fireplaces of brick” KUB 58.88 iii 24, translit. ZA 72:285. 
p. appears to be used in the gen. w. either nominal (pár-ku-ia-aš) or adjectival (pár-ku-wa-ia-aš) infl. 
If the vocab. entry is not faulty, the equation of ZABAR w. parkui- would assure a tr. “bronze.” But to call “bronze” parkui-is distinctly odd. parkuiadj. means “pure, free of admixture, unalloyed” (see parkui-adj., 1 b, c). There is allegedly also a Hitt. harašu “bronze,” Otten apud Laroche, RHA XXIV/79:181, 184, followed by Muhly, Copper and Tin 177, and HEG 1:172. Since harašu is not in the CHD files, it is probably in an unpubl. text. Otten, StBoT 7:17, apparently revoked his harašu communication: “Die heth. Lesung von ZABAR ist bis heute unbekannt (so trotz der Bemerkung RHA 79, 1966, 181).” For these reasons we have not committed ourselves to the tr. “bronze” and have not included the many occurrences of the logogram ZABAR. 
Otten apud Laroche, RHA XXIV/79 (1966) 181, 184; Otten, StBoT 7 (1968) 17. 

Cf. parkui-A, Éparkuwa(ya)-. 
parkuyatar 
parkuiye/a-v. mid.; to be(come) pure(?); from OH?/NS.† 
mid. pret. sg. 3 pár-ku-i-ia-ta-at KUB 24.8 obv. i 31 (pre-NH/NS), pár-ku-i-id-d[a-at] KBo 22.6 i 6 (OH?/NS). 
[µAp]puš Ù-az pár-ku-i-ia-ta-at “Appu became pure as a result of (or: from) (his) dream/sleep” KUB 24.8 i 31 (Appu, pre-NH/NS), ed. Watkins, TPS 1971:82, StBoT 14:6f. w. n. 16 (differently), cf. Güterbock, Oriens 10:354, who had proposed emending this to pár-ki!-i-ia-ta-at before the discovery of KBo 22.6; […]x-pa LUGAL-ginaš tešhaz pár-ku-i-id-d[a-at] “[…] Sargon was pure as a result of (or: from) (his) dream/sleep” KBo 22.6 i 6 (lit., OH?/NS), ed. Watkins, TPS 1971:81, Güterbock, MDOG 101:19, 22 (differently: “[Als(?) Šarrukinaš sich vom Schlafe erhoben hatte”), 23 (favored a derivation from parku-“high”). 
Cf. also tešhit/tešhaz … parkuiš StBoT 29:94f., 96f., 114 and CHD parkui-A 2 k. 
Watkins, TPS 1971:82 (the form is stat. verbal predicate “was-pure/purified-himself”). 
Cf. parkue-, parkui-A, parkuešš-A. 
parkuyatar n.; purification; from OH/NS and MH/MS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pár-ku-ia-a-tar KUB 1.16 ii 67 (OH/NS). gen. pár-ku-ia-an-na-aš KUB 17.21 i 19 (MH/MS), KBo 
17.65 i 16 (MH?/MS?), pár-ku-e-an-na-aš KUB 26.42 iii 3 (MH?/ENS?). 
harnuwaš–ma mahhan šu[p]piy[ahhuwaš] párku-ia-an-na-aš-ša i[šhiul nu ap]ē–ya QA_TAMMA– pat “Those things are the same as the r[egulation] of (or ‘pr[otocol] for’) the consecrat[ing] and purification of the birth stool” KBo 17.65 i 15-16 (birth rit., MH?/MS?), ed. StBoT 29:132f.; cf. pár-ku-e-an-na-aš išhiu[l] KUB 26.42 iii 3 (instr., MH?/ENS?); (The palaces of Tappaššanda were not purified) ziga pár-ku-iaa-tar iya “You must perform the purification” KUB 
1.16 ii 67 (edict, OH/NS), ed. HAB 8f.; namma–šmaš–ša[n S]´SKUR.HI.A-aš (var. maltešnaš) pár-ku-ia-anna-aš uddani nahšaratt[a]n kiššan UL kuiški tiyan harta “No one had established such respect in the matter of making purification rituals/recitations for you (gods)” KUB 17.21 i 19-20 (prayer, Arn. I and Ašm., MH/MS), w. dupl. 398/u + 1945/u i 5-6, ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 134, 143, Kaskäer 152f., tr. ANET 399 (“cleanliness connected with your sacrifices”), cf. malteššar 3 and nahšaratt-2. 
167

On the basis of form this word has been considered an abstract noun (“purity”) derived from the adjective parkui-(so Kammenhuber, HbOr 186 “Reinheit”). Although our third reference (KUB 17.21 i 1920, ANET 399 “cleanliness”) might support such an analysis, the first two occurrences (KBo 17.65 i 15-16 and KUB 1.16 ii 67) show parkuyatar to be rather an action noun “purification, act of purifying,” confirming earlier opinions (see below). Such action nouns in -atar are well-known in Hitt. (HE §271). The underlying verb ought to be parkuwa-(q.v.), or the as yet (in published texts) unattested trans. act. of parkuya- “to purify” (an intrans. mid. is known). Although the singular spelling pár-ku-e-an-na-aš KUB 26.42 iii 3 seems to reflect the stem parkue-, this is probably rather the stem parkuye/a-w. e representing the i/e glide between the vowels. 
Sommer, HAB (1938) 9 (“die Entsühnung”), 113 (“zu parkui‘rein’” w. refs.); Friedrich, HW (1952) 161 (“Reinigung, Entsühnung”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 290, 294 (“Reinigung”); Kammenhuber, HbOr (1969) 186, 276 (“Reinheit”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 61 (parkuya-/parkuwai-“(sich) reinigen, entsühnen” mit N. act. parkuyatar … ‘Reinigung, Entsühnung’”). 
Cf. parkui-, parkuwa-, parkuešš- A, parkunu-. 
(UZU)parku(i) haštai n.; (a body part or cut of meat; lit. “pure-bone”); NH.† 
[(1 NINDAt)uh]urai 1 UZUpár-ku-i ha-aš-ta-i / [HUR.SAG.MEŠ] hūmanteš ´D.MEŠ hūmanteš / [ŠA KUR UR]UArzauwa dUTU-ŠI kuiēš / [šiyata]l~ liškizzi “One tuhurai-bread and one ‘pure-bone’ for all [the mountains] and all the rivers [of] Arzawa through which His Majesty (Tudhaliya?) [hu]nts” KBo 11.40 vi 13-16 (fest. for all dLAMMAs, NH), w. dupl. KUB 40.107 rev.? 26-28 □ for a dating of KBo 11.40 prior to Tudhaliya IV see McMahon, AS 25:140; Houwink ten Cate, Records 75, sees in the Tudhaliya mentioned in these texts a ref. to the much earlier “Tudhaliya II”; n–ašta ANA UDU UZUšuppa UZUGAB UZUZAG.LU UZUauli pár-ku haaš-ta-a-i UZUHAŠÊ UZUN´G.GIG <dāi> “(The offer-ant) <takes> from the sheep meat cuts (to be used in a stew): breast, shoulder, auli, ‘pure-bone,’ lungs, and liver” KUB 35.133 ii 31-32 (Ištanuwa rit., NS), translit. LTU 110, StBoT 30:280, ed. HW2 1:628a (“den hohen Knochen”(!), apparently unaware of UZUparkui haštai) □ for 

parkuešš- A 

UZUauli see HW2 1:627-631, HED 1:229-232, and Kühne, ZA 76:85-117. 
Since an adj. should not have a det., UZUparkui haštai must have been taken as a compound of the type adj. + subst. (see Kammenhuber, KZ 77:188-190, Hoffner, Or NS 35:378-380, and, for the placement of the determinative, Neu, FsRisch 107-115). Since the uncompounded haštai almost never bears a determinative, and parkui-is an adjective, it would seem that UZUparkui haštai takes UZU precisely because it is not a bare “bone,” but a real cut of meat on a bone. Possibly the same is true of UZUwallaš haštai, since walla-, when it stands alone, rarely bears a determinative, yet in UZUwallaš haštai almost always has UZU and inevitably represents not a (bare) thigh bone, but a cut of meat on that bone. 
The loss of -i in parku haštai KUB 35.133 ii 32 may be due to a simple scribal lapse, pár-ku<-i>, since the scribe also accidentally omitted the verb dāi a few words later. Alternatively, it may represent a real phonetic variant in the compound conditioned by the labio-velar /kw/ (cf. parkunu-< parkui-). 
Cf. parkui-, haštai-. 
parkuemar(?) n.; purification(?).† 
[…] SISKUR parnaš aniūr SISKUR pár-ku-em[ar? …] / […] kišan piēr KUB 59.62 i? 3-4 (rit. frag.), hand copy differs in details from translit. in Otten, ZA 72:285 (as Bo 3061). If the trace is to be read -m[ar], from a purely formal aspect one is reminded of the de-adjectival noun alpuemar. On the OH athematic verbs in -e- see Watkins, TPS 1971:51-93, IESt 1:167-215, IESt 2:323-331, and Puhvel, HED 1:40 s.v. alpu-; opposed by Oettinger, Stammbildung 340-342 w. nn. 166, 167. 
Cf. parkue-v. 
parkuešš-A v.; 1. to be/become pure, clean, clear, 2. to be found innocent; from OS. 
pres. sg. 3 pár-ku-e-eš-zi KUB 13.3 ii 16, iii 30 (MH?/NS), KBo 12.49 ii 5, pár-ku-eš-zi KBo 3.28 ii 11 (OH/NS), pár-kuiš-zi Bo 4951 rev. 5 (StBoT 29:124f.), [for KUB 8.2 rev. 8 and 10 see parkue-; coll. from photograph]; pl. 2 pár-ku-eš-te-ni KUB 13.4 iv 32 (MH/NS). 
pret. sg. 1 pár-ku-e-eš-šu-un KBo 3.6 i 33, KUB 1.5 i 13 (both Hatt. III), pár-ku-u-e-eš-šu-un KUB 1.1 i 39 (Hatt. III); 

168

sg. 3 pár-ku-e-eš-ta KBo 8.42 rev. 9 (OS), pár-ku-iš-ta ABoT 47 obv. 10. 
imp. sg. 3 pár-ku-e-eš-tu KUB 17.10 ii 25 (OH/MS), párku-e-eš-du KUB 33.5 iii 7 (OH/MS), pár-ku-eš-du KBo 13.109 ii 13 (MH/NS). 
1	to be/become pure, clean, clear: “Just as wheat is pure” dTelipinuš ZI–ŠU QA_TAMMA párku-e-eš-tu (par. [pá]r-ku-e-eš-du) “likewise let Telipinu’s soul become pure” KUB 17.10 ii 25 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. par. KUB 33.5 iii 7 (MS), translit. Myth. 33, 42, tr. ANET 127, Hittite Myths 16, 19, cf. AlHeth 67; [mahhan– ma–aš (var. GIM[-…])] pár-ku-iš-zi “[But when he(?)] is/becomes pure, (they strike a stick for a second time)” Bo 4951 rev.? 5 (birth rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 17.68:2, ed. StBoT 29:124f.; HUL-uwašša UN.MEŠ-aš ANZELLU … [UZU]N´.TE LUGAL QA_TAMMA párku-eš-du KBo 13.109 ii 10-13 see s.v. (:)mulatar. 
2	to be found innocent (opp. paprešš-): “He went to the river ordeal” š–aš pár-ku-e-eš-ta “and he was found innocent” KBo 8.42 rev. 9 (anecdotes, OS), ed. Laroche, FsOtten 185; cf. KBo 3.28 ii 11 (anecdotes, OH/ NS), ed. Laroche, FsOtten 186f.; (Muwatalli called me to (the ordeal of) the “(divine) wheel,” but IŠTAR reassured me) nu DINGIR-LIM-za pár-ku-u-e-eššu-un (var. pár-ku-e-eš-šu-un) “and through the goddess I was found innocent” KUB 1.1 i 39 (hist., Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 3.6 i 33 and KUB 1.5 i 13, ed. StBoT 24:6f.; takku pár-ku-eš-te-ni šumel dLAMMA–KUNU KUB 

13.4 iv 32 (instr., MH/NS), cf. paprešš- mng. 1; “Let Zuliya go to the river ordeal” mā
nn–aš pár-ku-e-eš-zi nu– za ZI–ŠU parkunuddu “If he is proven innocent, let him consider himself exonerated/vindicated (lit. let him cleanse his own mind, i.e., put his mind at ease)” KUB 13.3 iii 30 (instr., MH?/NS), cf. parkunu- mng. 2 a; nu kuiš pár-ku-e-eš-zi n–aš LUGAL-aš ‰R-iš kuiš paprišzi–ma … ibid. ii 16-17, cf. paprešš- 1, parkui-A 4; uncertain: kuiš pár-ku-e-eš-z[i] KBo 12.49 ii 5 (Laws §25, OH/NS), cf. disc. papre- mng. 2. 

Götze, Hatt. (1925) 128 (“rein, schuldlos werden”). 
Cf. parkui-, parkunu-. 

parkuešš-B v.; to become high, tall, big; NS.† 
pret. sg. 3 pár-ku-iš!-ta KUB 33.97 i 6 (NS); imp. sg. 3 párku-e-eš-du KBo 10.37 ii 30 (OH/NS). 
(Said of a child) n–aš šalliēšdu pár-ku-e-ešd[u…] KBo 10.37 ii 30, cf. Weitenberg, U-Stämme 131; dIM

parkunu
aš šalliš[ta n–aš LÚ-aš?] / [me]huni araš … nepiš mān pár-ku-iš!-ta “The Stormgod grew up [and] reached [man]hood … He became as high as the sky” KUB 33.97 i 2-3, 6 (myth., NS), ed. Güterbock, Kum. *24, 23 (“wurde wie der Himmel hoch”), tablet -uš (coll.), emendation Weitenberg, U-Stämme 131. 
[parkueššar] Götze, Madd. 63 n. 1 (“Reinigung”), Fried-rich, HW 161 (“Reinigung”), Tischler, HDW 61 (“Reinigung”), Kammenhuber, HbOr 276 (as the “jung” counterpart to “alt” parkuyatar “Reinheit”); cf. also HbOr 187, is not attested in any publ. text. [pár]-ku-e-eš-š[ar] VBoT 131:6, cited by Kronasser, EHS 1:290, is to be read [hal]-ku-eeš-š[ar] on the basis of dupl. hal-ku-eš-šar-ra ABoT 14 iii 24. 
parkunu-v.; 1. to cleanse, clean, purify (someone or -thing defiled), 2. to declare or consider (a person) innocent, to exonerate, pardon, clear, to declare or consider (a cause or an action) just or right, to justify, 3. to castrate, 4. to clarify (a matter), 5. to clean up, reform (life in a kingdom)(?), 
6. to remove (impurities), purge, 7. (w. adverbs); from OS. 
act. pres. sg. 1 pár-ku-nu-mi KBo 17.61 obv. 18 (MH/MS), KUB 1.16 ii 54 (OH/NS), pár-ku-nu-um-mi KBo 3.1 ii 43 (OH/ NS), KBo 14.69 iii 6! (NH), IBoT 2.116:5, pár-ku-nu-uh-hi 708/z obv. 12 (Neu, Kratylos 12:165). 
sg. 2 pár-ku-nu-ši KBo 3.1 ii 44 (OH/NS), KUB 56.19 i 21 (NS). 
sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-uz-zi KBo 6.2 iii 33, 35 (OS), KBo 6.3 ii 55 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 45 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 2.6 i 34 (NH), KUB 
30.47 iv (8) (NH), KUB 41.11 rev. 34, pár-ku-nu-zi KBo 6.3 iii 37, 40, 43 (OH/NS), KBo 10.45 ii (33), 34, 35 (MH/NS), KUB 
16.41 iii 5, KUB 16.77 iii 12, 21, 40, KUB 50.6 ii 41 (all NH), pár-ku-<nu->uz-zi KBo 13.109 ii 8 (MH/NS), Bo 7787:4 (translit. courtesy H. Klengel). 
pl. 1 pár-ku-nu-um-me-ni KUB 21.27 ii 1 (Pud.). 
pl. 3 pár-ku-nu-wa-an-zi KUB 43.58 i 42, 43 (MH/MS), KUB 7.41 i 2, KUB 27.67 ii 28, iii 32 (both MH/NS), KBo 2.6 i 33, KUB 5.6 ii 47, KUB 8.27 rev. 4, KUB 16.77 iii 40, KUB 
22.70 obv. 85, KUB 32.35 iii 3 (all NH), pár-ku-nu-an-zi KUB 
16.39 ii 15, KUB 50.6 ii 40, iii 5, 49 (both NH). 
pret. sg. 1 pár-ku-nu-nu-un KUB 17.10 iii 34 (OH/MS), KBo 15.25 obv. 8 (MH/NS), KUB 23.45:16 (NH), KBo 26.132:2, KUB 24.13 ii 3. 
sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-ut KBo 10.37 i (46), KBo 3.63 i 5 (both OH/ NS), KUB 30.34 iv 5, KUB 39.103 rev. (1) (all MH/NS). pl. 3 pár-ku-nu-e-er KUB 23.79 obv. 5 (MH/NS), KUB 
12.58 iv (38) (NH), pár-ku-nu-er KBo 11.1 rev. 11 (Muw. II). 
169

imp. sg. 2 pár-ku-nu-ut KUB 33.5 ii 8 (OH/MS), KUB 33.9 ii (6) (NS), KBo 11.1 obv. 42 (Muw. II), KUB 12.58 i 9 (NH). 
sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-ud-du KUB 43.58 i 45 (MH/MS), KUB 
28.82 i 20 (OH?/NS), KBo 10.37 i 47 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 46 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 10.45 iv 41 (MH/NS), KUB 24.9 ii 11, KUB 
41.8 ii 14 (both MH/NS), HT 44 obv. 16. pl. 2 pár-ku-nu-ut-tén KBo 10.45 ii 7, KUB 41.8 iv 13 (both MH/NS). 
pl. 3 pár-ku-nu-wa-an-du KUB 27.67 ii 30 (MH/NS), KBo 19.134:(18), pár-ku-nu-wa-an-≠du±? KUB 31.71 iv 20 (NH?), pár-ku-nu-an-du KBo 19.134:19, 20. 
mid. pret. sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-ut-ta-ti KBo 3.63 i 10 (OH/NS), pár-ku-nu-ta-ti KBo 3.66:9 (pre-NH/NS). 
verbal subst. nom. pár-ku-nu-mar KBo 21.22 rev. 47 (OH/ MS), KUB 27.67 iii (2) (MH/NS), KBo 1.35 iv 9, Bo 3617 i 13 (AfO 23:34), Bo 3078:12 (AfO 23:35). 
gen. pár-ku-nu-um-ma-aš KBo 10.45 ii 32 (MH/NS), KUB 
33.24 ii (5) (OH/NS), pár-ku-nu-ma-aš KUB 41.8 iii 17 (MH/ NS), KUB 30.50 rev. 11 (NH), pár-ku-nu-ma[-aš] 78/e rev.? 18 (StBoT 5:150 n. 7). 
part. sg. nom. com. pár-ku-nu-wa-an-za KUB 5.6 iii 32 (NH), KUB 12.58 iv 3, 6 (NH). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ku-nu-wa-an KUB 43.58 i 16 (MH/ MS), w. dupl. pár-ku-nu!(copy:-u)-an KUB 15.42 i 14 (MH/ NS). 
pl. nom. com. pár-ku-nu-wa-an-te-eš KBo 23.8:8 (MS?), KUB 46.39 iii 20 (NH). iter. pres. sg. 1 [pár-k]u-nu-uš-ki-mi(?) KBo 18.24 i 18 (NH). sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi KUB 12.63 obv. 14 (OH/MS), KUB 43.58 i 44 (MH/MS), KUB 28.82 i 10 (OH?/NS), KUB 
41.7 i 3, 4, (7) (pre-NH/NS), KUB 7.53 iii 14 (NH), KBo 
13.106 i 10, 11, IBoT 2.128 rev. (1). pret. sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-uš-k[i-it(?)] KBo 27.68:5. imp. sg. 3 pár-ku-nu-uš[-ki-i]d-du KBo 9.146 obv. 44 (NH), 
pár-ku-nu[-u]š-ki-du ibid. obv. 50. pl. 2 pár-ku-nu-uš-kat-tén KUB 11.1 iv 22 (OH/NS). pl. 3 pár-ku-nu-uš-kán-d[u] VBoT 111 iii 17. 
(Sum.) [(UD.DU)] = (Sum. pronunciation) [ta]m-ma = (Akk.) ub-bu-bu = (Hitt.) pár-ku-nu-mar “(action of) clearing” KBo 1.35 iv 9 (Erimhuš Bogh.), w. par. KBo 1.37 iii 5, ed. MSL 17:117, cf. mng. 2. 
1. to cleanse, clean, purify (someone or -thing defiled) — a. gram. obj. is person or thing from which impurity is to be removed — 1' physical cleansing: “Just as this water is clean (parkui)” TÚGN´G.LÁM.MEŠ–kan kēzza arranzi n–at pár-kunu-wa-an-zi UNU_TEMEŠ kē¢
z arranz[i] n–at pár-kunu-wa-an-zi nu kāman pár
š mahhan witena[nza] huku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi šuppiyahhiškizzi “and they wash festive garments with this and clean them, they wash utensils with this and clean them, and just as 

parkunu- 1 a 1' 

this water cleans and sanctifies everything, (may it now likewise clean you, O gods)” KUB 43.58 i 4144 (purif. rit., MH/MS); kaš¢–wa GIM-an haš¢GAD.HI.A iškunanta pár-ku-nu-uz-zi nu–war–at harkē
šzi “Just as this soap cleans dirty linens (so that) they (neut. pl.) become white, (may it likewise cleanse the bodies of the king, the queen, and the royal palace)” KBo 4.2 i 44-45 (incant. rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:91, 96; cf. [n–at GIM-an kāš] haššaš pár-ku-nu[-ut n]–at harganut “[As this] soap has cleaned [it] and made it white” KBo 10.37 i 46 □ parkunu- is used in both physical and rit. senses in many of the analogies that follow; “I wash (warpmi) Wišuriyanza with clay of the riverbank and with šuwaru and speak as follows:” kāš[a–wa–]tta pár-ku-nu-nu-un nu–wa–tta k[att]a šappišarahhun “I have just cleansed you and scrubbed(?) you down” KBo 15.25 obv. 8-9 (conjuration, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:2f., cf. Puhvel, JAOS 101:214; (The sacrificer passes through a gate made of alanza-wood, and the Old Woman says:) kāš GIŠalanza mahhan LÂM SIG‡ LÚSIPA.UDU LÚSIPA.GU› pár-ku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi kēdani–ya–kan ANA EN.SISKUR … idalu papratar … awan arha QA_TAMMA pár-ku-nu-ut “Just as this alanza-wood cleanses a thousand and ten thousand shepherds and cowherds, may you likewise cleanse/remove evil uncleanness … from … this client” KUB 7.53 iii 13-19 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 20f. iii 47-53; “When the sacrificer washes himself, the Old Woman [says:]” ŠA KASKAL-NI–za A-az ā
rrahhut x[…] / A-it N´.TEuš pár-ku-nu-nu-un “‘Wash yourself off with water of the road.’ So I cleansed (my) body with water [of the road]” 873/u:9-10, ed. StBoT 5:11 □ note how arra“to wash” and parkunu-are used interchangeably here; (Several vessels with offerings are prepared) arha–ma– at dā
n pariyan n–at pár-ku-nu-wa-an (var. pár-kunu!(copy: u)-an) “They (neut. pl.) are twice blown off (sc. the offerings), (so that) they are cleaned/ purified (and there is no impurity in them)” KUB 
43.58 i 16 (purif. rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.42 i 14 (MH/ NS); n–ašta DUMU-an GIŠkurtaliaš / […-i]t? pár-kunu-mi “I purify the prince/child with the […] of a kurtali” KBo 17.61 obv. 17-18 (rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:42f., this could be either physical cleaning or a rit. act; in broken and obscure context: […] / šanhanzi pár-kunu-wa-an-zi … KUB 46.39 iii 6-7, (and 12 lines later) párku-nu-wa-an-te-eš ešir ibid. iii 20 (Kizz. rit.). 

170

parkunu- 1 a 2' a' 

2' ritual cleansing — a' obj. gods or humans: (When you find Telipinu …, wipe him off with wax) [(n)]–an pár-ku-nu-ut n–an šup<pi>yahh “purify him, consecrate him, (and bring him to me)” KUB 33.5 ii 8 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.141 i 14, ed. Otten, Tel. 16, 18 i 21, translit. Myth. 40, tr. Hittite Myths 18, par. KUB 33.9 ii 6 (Tel.myth, 3rd vers., OH/NS), ed. Otten, Tel. 31, 33, tr. Hittite Myths 19 (omits n–an šup~ piyah); in this ex. the pairing of parkunu-w. šuppiyahh-points in the direction of ritual cleansing; n–an (var. nu dTelipi~ nun) pár-ku-nu-nu[-un] “I have purified him (var. Telipinu)” KUB 17.10 iii 34 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.1:8, translit. Myth. 36, tr. Hittite Myths 16; nu DIN~ GIR-LUM pedi–ši pár-ku-nu-wa-an-za “The deity is purified on the spot (and brought back to His Majesty)” KUB 5.6 iii 32 (oracle question, NH); takku antuhša[(n k)]uiški pár-ku-nu-uz-zi “If someone purifies a person (he must carry the impure remnants to the incineration place)” KBo 6.3 ii 55 (Laws §44b, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.2 ii 34 (OS) and KBo 6.5 iv 17-18 (OH/NS), ed. HG 30f.; [… t]uzzin pár-ku-nu-ut … nu–kan INA URUHatti ANA É.GAL-LIM [(papratar µH)]antiliš šarā udaš “[…] purified the [a]rmy […], and Hantili brought the uncleanness up to the palace in Hattuša” KBo 3.63 i 5-9 (OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 
3.64 i 1-6 and KBo 3.66:5-8 (both NS); “The Old Woman sprinkles water on the client” n–an pár-ku-nu-zi “and purifies him” KBo 8.75:10 (Mašt., MH/NS); cf. w. two sacrificers n–aš pár-ku-nu-zi “and she purifies them” KBo 2.3 ii 29 (1Mašt., MH/NS), 2Mašt. iii 21, ed. Rost, MIO 1:358f.; mā
n alwanzahhandan UN-an pár-ku-nuu[m]-m[i?] “When(ever) I purify a bewitched person” KUB 30.65 iii 5-6 + KBo 14.69 rt. col. 4-5 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 170f.; EN.SISKUR–ma–wa dUTU-uš dLAMMA–ya pár-ku-nu-uš-kán-d[un–an] ≠alwa±n~ zešnaza hurtiyazi–ya pár-k[u-nu-uš-kán-du] “May the Sungod and the Tutelary Deity purify the sacrificer. [May they] purify [him] from sorcery and curse” VBoT 111 iii 17-18 (rit. of Zuwi); “I call out the name of the man whom I am treating. He holds a figure of himself as an old man (lit. a figure of his old age)” nu–za anni[škimi kuin LÚ-an] / nu–za [o o] LÚ.MEŠSIPA.GU› MUNUS.MEŠ[(UŠ.BAR.HI.A párku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi)] “[The man whom] I am treating purifies for himself (-za) the cattle herdsmen and the weaver women” KBo 22.118:11-12 (rit. of Zuwi, OH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 12.63 obv. 13-14 + KUB 36.70:2-3 (OH/ 

parkunu- 1 a 2' d' 
MS); (They took beef and mutton from your mouth, O god) nu–šmaš pár-ku-nu-wa-an-zi “Now they will purify themselves (and compensate ox for ox and sheep for sheep)” KUB 16.39 ii 15 (oracle question, NH), ed. HTR 108f.; MUNUS-za–ma–za […] / [… harā]uni dān pár-ku-nu-zi “The woman purifies herself a second time [… at the birth-s]tool(?)” Bo 4951 rev.? 15-16 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:126f.; dUTU-ŠI–ya–z pár-ku-nu-[u]z-zi “and His Majesty will purify himself” KBo 2.6 i 34 (oracles about Armatarhunta and Šaušgatti, NH), ed. del Monte, AION 33:382f., cf. d, below; (O Hannahanna of the riverbank, take this clay in your hand) nu kūn EN.SISKUR apez šapiyai n¢– an 12 UZUÚR pár-ku-nu-ut “Scrub this sacrificer with it and cleanse the twelve parts of (his) body” KUB 12.58 i 8-9, ed. Tunn. 6f. (iii 32-33); (The Old Woman goes to the riverbank and addresses Hannahanna of the riverbank:) wappuwaš DINGIR.MAHaš kāša–za 12 UZUÚR paprannanza tuel¢ŠU-it šapī~ yan[za] pár-ku-nu-wa-an-za “O Hannahanna of the riverbank! You are the one who has scrubbed the twelve body parts and purified (them) from defilement by your own hand” KUB 12.58 iv 1-3, ed. Tunn. 20f. (differently), cf. also ibid. iv 5-6, 26-27 □ in these nominal sentences, the -z(a) is present to denote a first or second person subject, as it usually does in NH (cf. Hoffner, JNES 28:225-230); the participles are active and perfective, like adanza “one who has eaten” (KUB 9.34 iv 15, Friedrich HW 44, Lat. pransus “gegessen habend”) and akuwanza “one who has drunk” (HW 40, Lat. po¢tus “getrunken habend”). 
b' obj. livestock: “If someone’s livestock has been smitten (with disease) by a god” t–at pár-kunu-zi (dupl. pár-ku-nu-uz-zi) “and he (sc. the owner) purifies them” KBo 6.26 i 22-23 (Laws §163, OH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.18 iv 2, ed. HG 74f., cf. Güterbock, JCS 
15:71 and Ivanov, ArOr 47:91. 
c' obj. land or city: [(u)]tni–ma–wa gullakkuwan … KUR-e–y[(a pá)r-k]u-nu-ud-du “The land is polluted … Let him purify the land also” IBoT 3.98:4-7 + KUB 28.82 i 18 (Huduši’s rit., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.106 i 17-20; nu KUR-e pár-ku-nu-e-er “They (i.e., the primeval deities, cf. line 1) purified the land” KUB 
23.79 obv. 5 (myth, MH/NS), translit. Myth. 115. 
d' obj. buildings (houses, palace, temple): “As for Arma-Tarhunta’s slander which was established 
171

by oracle, they proceed as follows …” AŠRIHI.A LUGAL-UTTI GIŠ≠DAG±(coll.).HI.A–ya pár-ku-nuwa-an-zi dUTU-ŠI–ya–z pár-ku-nu-uz-zi “They will purify the ‘places’ of kingship and throne daises, and His Majesty will purify himself” KBo 2.6 i 33-34 (oracle question, NH), ed. del Monte, AION 33:382f.; cf. KUB 
16.41 iii 4-5, KUB 16.77 iii 40, KUB 50.6 ii 39-40, iii 4-5, 4849; see 1 a 2' a', above; [m]ā
n É-er ešhanaš papran[naš] kurkurimaš linkiyaš pár-ku-nu-wa[-an-zi] “When they purify a house of bloodshed, defilement, intimidation, (and) perjury” KUB 7.41 i 1-2 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116. 
e' other: “But now they have treated that bird and released it” kē–ma[…] / apun ŠA¢GIDIM NIN~ DA-an pár-ku-nu-er “and these […] purified that food of the dead” KBo 11.1 rev. 10-11 (prayer, Muw. II), translit. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:109; [dU?-aš– ]wa–za daganzipan parku[n]uddu nepiš–wa–zan / [AN-aš(?)] dIM-ašš–a [p]arkunuddu § [nu–wa–za] dKušuhiš parkunuddu a[run]aš–wa–za parkunuddu / [ANA d]U URUHATTI–wa–za parkunuwan[du a]nnaš–wa–za attaš / [dHalma]ššuitti parkunuandu ša-x[-o-o-]naš–wa–z–(š)an DINGIR.MEŠ / [o-on]i (either [dIM-n]i or [hi-lam-n]i) parkunuandu hilamnaš–wa–z[–(š)an dU]TU-uš dLAMMA–ya / [KI.MIN] dHalmaššuizza–wa–za p[arkunuddu?] “May [the Stormgod] purify the earth for himself. May also the Stormgod [of Heaven(?)] purify heaven for himself. § May the Moongod purify [himself]. May the Sea purify himself. May they purify themselves [for] the Storm[god] of Hatti. May the mother and father purify themselves for the Thronegoddess. May the gods of š. purify themselves for [the Stormgod] (or: at the [portico])]. May the Sundeity of the Portico and the Tutelary Deity [purify] themselves. May the Thronegoddess p[urify] herself” KBo 19.134:15-21 (rit. frag.); “The following day [the …] performs the festival [of …], and […-s] a sheep” nu–šši peran hū
mant[e]š párku-nu-wa-an-te-eš wehanda “and all go about before him/it in a purified state” KBo 23.8:7-8 (rit.); [(dKatahzipuriš hašš)]an pár-ku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi [(utni–šet pár-ku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi GU›)].HI.A–šan UDU.HI.A-uš [(pár-ku-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi LUGAL–šan HU)]L-lu papreššan [(SAG.DU-az dāš)] “Katahzipuri purifies the fireplace, purifies his land, puri

parkunu- 2 a 

fies his cattle and sheep, and took the evil uncleanness from the king’s head” KUB 28.82 i 10-12 (Huduši’s rit., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.106 i 9-12. 
	b. gram. obj. is unexpressed: kāš SAHAR.HI.A GIM-an katta pár-ku-nu-z[i] “Just as this sand cleans thoroughly …” KUB 24.9 iii 2 + JCS 24:37 obv.? 9 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.1 iii 16, ed. THeth 2:42f. (iii 7'); 1 T˘UPPU QATI ešhanaš pár-ku-nu-ma-aš “One tablet, (on which the entire composition is) finished, of purification (of a city) from murder. (When the practitioner treats a city for murder)” KUB 30.50 v 11 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH p. 167; [(z)]i[(k– ma–za)] ´D-aš pár-ku-nu-mar DUMU-lannaš h[(uidumar :u)]šant[(ar)]ahiša tatta “You, O River, took for yourself purification, life of progeny, and procreative power(?)” Bo 3617 i 13-14, ed. Otten/ Siegelová, AfO 23:33. 
	c. subj. a bird of good omen, which by settling on the roof of a building confers purity: “It (a šū¢ra-bird) has settled either on the roof of the

rašupalace or on the roof of the temple” kinuna Éhalin~ duwa«š» É.DINGIR.MEŠ–ya pár-ku-nu-ut “Now it has (thereby) made the palace and the temple pure. (Go (pl.), šūrašūra(!)-bird, wherever this sickness, bloodshed and perjury goes. Let the bloodshed, and perjury not seize the palace and temple)” KUB 30.34 iv 4-5 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
39.103 rev. 1. Note that it is considered good luck in Turkey for a stork (Turkish leylek) to perch on one’s roof. 
2. to declare or consider (a person) innocent, to exonerate, pardon, clear (cf. bil. sec.), to declare or consider (a cause or an action) just or right, to justify — a. to declare or consider (someone) innocent, to exonerate, pardon, or clear (someone): “Let Zuliya go to the river ordeal. If he is proven innocent (parkuešš-)” nu–za ZI–ŠU pár-ku-nu-ud-du “let him consider himself exonerated/vindicated (lit. let him cleanse his own mind, i.e., put his mind at ease)” KUB 13.3 iii 30 (instr., MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:48, 50 (“er soll sich reinigen”), tr. Laroche, FsOtten 186, Sommer, HAB 96 n. 2 (“er soll seine Seele ins Reine bekommen = freibekommen”); cf. parkuešš-2; possibly also in a long list of actions which someone formally (cf. anda pēdaš line 7) denies having done: našma– ma–wa ƒTi[(-)…] / [-a]z(?) (or: [… ammu]k) pár

172

ku-nu-nu-un “or if I cleared (the woman named) Ti[(-)… of …] (and gave the … to her husband, <may I be cursed>)” KUB 23.45:15-16 (dep. [not a letter!], Hatt. III?), translit. Ünal, THeth 4:132. 
b. to declare or consider (an action) just or right, to justify (an action): “Let no one say: ‘The king will secretly do what he pleases’” [n]–at pár-kunu-mi “I will justify it, (whether it is (so) or not)” KUB 1.16 ii 54 (Hitt.-Akk. bil., OH/NS), ed. HAB 8f. (“d[a] will ich es (ihm) hingehen lassen”). 
1	to castrate: takku ANŠE.KUR.RA.MAH kuiški wemiyazzi t–an pár-ku-nu-zi (dupls. pár-kunu-uz-zi) “If someone finds a stallion and castrates it (the offender has to pay to the owner seven horses in compensation) KBo 6.3 iii 40 (Laws §61, OH/ NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.2 iii 35 (OS) and KUB 29.16 iii 9 (NS), ed. HG 38f.; cf. GU›.MAH “bull” KBo 6.3 iii 37 (Laws §60) and UDU.A.LUM “high-breed ram” ibid. iii 43 (Laws §62) in similar context. Güterbock, JCS 15:76, suggested this mng. because the action of parkunu- is performed only on procreative male animals and requires a high penalty because the offence greatly reduces their value, disc., Haase, Hethitica 5:29-39. 
2	to clarify (a matter): “[But what no] venerable old man tells to me” nu–mu DINGIR-LIM kūn memian tešhit pár-ku-nu-ut “may you, O god, clarify this matter to me in a dream” KBo 11.1 obv. 42 (prayer of Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:108, 

117. 

5. to clean up, reform (life in a kingdom)(?): (Telipinu addresses a future sovereign) kiššann–a lē ¢
teši arha–wa pár-ku-nu-um-mi pár-ku-nu-ši–ma– za UL kuit nu–za anda imma hatkišnuši “Do not say: ‘I will thoroughly clean up,’ while however you yourself (-za) clean nothing up, but you yourself (-za) rather oppress” KBo 3.1 ii 43-44 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. Chrest. 190f., THeth 11:32f., cf. Sommer, Heth. 2:3 w. n. 1; [(UR)]UHattuši alwanzannaš [(n)]–ašta uddā
r pár-kunu-uš-kat-tén “(Regarding cases) of sorcery in Hattuša: keep cleaning up (i.e., investigating and punishing) (all) instances (thereof)” KUB 11.1 iv 22 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iv 10 (NS), ed. Chrest. 192f., THeth 11:54f. 
6. to remove (impurities), purge — a. physical cleansing: “Just as the fullers make the linen cloth plain/empty” nu–šši–kan :S´Gmarihšin [arha] pár

parkunu- 6 b 
ku-nu-wa-an-zi n–at harkešzi “and remove the lint/ fuzz(?) from it, so that it becomes white” KUB 27.67 ii 27-28 (rit. of Tarpattašši, MH/NS), cf. (S´G)marihši-; cf. ibid. iii 32 and the corrupt par. KBo 13.109 ii 7-9 (w. var. spelling pár-ku-uz-zi); (The prince tells the queen in the dream:) “‘What w[a]s inside that grain storage jar has already been emptied’” nu–wa–kan parā párku-nu-wa-an-d[u?] n–ašta parā šanhir pár-≠ku-nu±[i]r “‘(So) let them clean (it) out.’ (So) they swept (it) out and cleaned (it) out” KUB 31.71 iv 20-21 (dream, NH), ed. Werner, FsOtten 328f. □ for ÉSAG “grain storage jar” see AlHeth 34f.; cf. šanhanzi pár-ku-nu-waan-zi KUB 46.39 iii 7. 
b. ritual purifying: (dIŠTAR asks the TÚL and the BUGIN for water, adding) pár-ku-nu-um-maaš-w[a k]uiš witenanza ešhar NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM párku-nu[-zi kui]š Éhilammar pár-ku-nu-zi kuiš pan~ g[auwaš EME-an hurdā]in waštul kurkurain pár-kunu-zi (var. [pár-ku]-nu-uš-ki-≠iz-zi±) “Which water of purification purges (i.e., removes) murder and perjury? Which purges (i.e., cleans, mng. 1 a 2') the portico? Which purges [the slander of the] multi[tude, cur]se, sin, (and) intimidation?” KBo 10.45 ii 32-35 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. IBoT 2.128 rev. 1, ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f.; cf. KBo 10.45 ii 4-7, ed. Otten, ZA 54:122f.; párku-nu-ud-du [(š)]uppiš A-anza HUL-lun EME-an papratar ē
šhar waštul hurdain kurkurain pan≠ga±u~ wa<š> EME-an “May the holy water purge the evil tongue, impurity, bloodshed, sin, curse, intimidation, (and) tongue of the multitude” KBo 10.45 ii 4951 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.8 ii 14-15, ed. ZA 54:124f.; n–ašta É-erza URU-az HUL-lu p[(ap)]ratar ē
šhar NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM waštul hurdāin arha p[(ár-kunu)]-ut-tén “Thoroughly purge from (this) house (and) city the evil defilement, bloodshed, perjury, sin, (and) curse” KBo 10.45 iv 13-14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. ZA 54:136f.; “As the downpour (lit. flood) washes (arri) urine and mud from the city, (as) the water washes the roof, and flows down the gutters” kēll– a URU-aš parnaš HUL-lun EME-an kāš aniya~ waranza (var. apiranza) QA_TAMMA pár-ku-nu-uddu “let this ritual(?) likewise clean away the evil tongue of this city (and) house” KBo 10.45 iv 39-41, ed. ZA 54:138f. □ on aniyawaranza see Otten, ZA 54:157, Puhvel, HED 1:70, HW2 1:90a (erg. of aniur/*aniyawar); (The Old Woman next takes white wool and says:) k[āš 
173

S´G.BABBAR?] GIM-an nakki kurur takšulaizzi kī– ya alwanzata paprata kāš S´G.BABBAR QA_TAM~ MA pár-ku-nu-ud-du “Just as thi[s white wool(?)] pacifies difficult enmity, so also may this white wool clean away this sorcery and defilement” KUB 
24.9 ii 8-11 (Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:32f.; see KUB 
7.53 iii 15-19 (Tunn. iii 49-53) mng. 1 a, above. 
7. (w. adverbs) — a. āppa (“re-purify”): t–an EGIR-pa pár-ku-nu-zi mā¢
n É-ri–ya kuitki idalawešzi n–an EGIR-pa–pat pár-ku-nu-zi “He must re-purify him; and if anything in (his) house goes bad, he must re-purify him yet again (-pat)” KBo 6.4 iv 1-2 (NH reformulation of Laws §44b), ed. HG 56f.; cf. also […] EGIR-pa kiššan pár-ku-nu[-an-zi? …] KBo 22.161 obv. 2 (frag.). 
b. ā

ppanda: KBo 3.63 i 10 (OH/NS). 

c. arha: KBo 3.1 ii 43 (see mng. 5, above), KUB 16.77 iii 21, KBo 10.45 iv 14 (see mng. 6 b', above), w. dupl. KUB 
41.8 iv 13, KBo 13.109 ii 8 (see mng. 6 a, above), KUB 52.68 iii 38 (oracle question, NH), HT 44 obv. 16, KBo 24.41 i 9. 
	d. awan arha “remove (impurity from the twelve body parts)”: KUB 7.53 iii 18-19, ed. Goetze, Tunn. 20f. (iii 52-53) (see 1 a and 6 b, above). 
	e. katta “clean thoroughly”: JCS 24:37 obv.? 9 (cf. mng. 1 b). 

f. parā: KUB 31.71 iv 20 (cf. mng. 6 a). 
Delitzsch, APAW (1914) 43 (on KBo 1.35 iv 9, Akk. ubbubu in the juristic sense, our mng. 2); Hrozny™, HKT (1919) 118 n. 1; Sommer, Heth. 2 (1922) 3 n. 1; HAB (1938) 96 w. n. 2 (mng. 2, “‘reinmachen’ hier im Sinn von ‘für gereinigt erklären, straflos hingehen lassen, entschuldigen’”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 162; Güterbock, JCS 15 (1961) 76 (mng. 3); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 139; Moyer, Diss. (1969) 27-28; Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 126, 132, 135, 137, 138, 143 (on parkunummaš); Haase, Hethitica 5 (1983) 29-39 (in the Laws). 
Cf. parkui-, parkuešš-. 
[pár-ku-uš-ta] KUB 33.97 i 6 (NS) read pár-ku-iš!ta, see parkuešš-B. 
parla-n.; (mng. unknown), from MH/NS.† 
sg. d.-l. pár-li KUB 41.19 rev. 9 (MH/NS). 
stem form? [… A?-N]A EZEN pár-la KUB 25.26 ii 16 (NH). 

NINDAparlai B 

a. pár-li-iš-ši-ma-kán / [o o] arha ā
nšun “I wiped away […] from his p.” KUB 41.19 rev. 9-10 (rit., MH/ NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:94f., who tr. “die Sünde ihm aber […] wischte ich weg,” interpreting parli as sg. acc. and –šši as dat. of 3 sg. pron. If this were correct, the order of enclitics would have been *parli–ma–šši–kan. Laroche, GLH 195, cites the passage in his lemma par(i)li “sin” w. the notation “cf. hitt. pár-li-” but without analysis. 
b. [… A?-N]A EZEN pár-la KUB 25.26 ii 16 (cult inv., NH), cf. DLL 79 s.v. parli-. 
The Hurr. word par(i)li “sin” is written pa(-a)ar-li-/pa-ri-li-, which distinguishes it graphically from this word. The words registered here under sections a and b may not be the same word. 
GIŠparlai A n.; (wooden part of a bed).† 
neut. nom.-acc. sg. GIŠpár-la[-a-i] IBoT 4:15:4; sg. d.-l. GIŠpár-la-a-i 482/u:4 (IBoT 4, p. XXVI). 
[…] šarā tit[(tanuanz)i …-]anza nu–kan šaš~ ta[(š GIŠpár-la)-a-i …]x-an-kán GIŠpár-la-a-i še[r (šašnuwanz)i n–ašt]a IŠTU TÚG kariya[nzi] “They set up [… And … is] …-ed. [They …] the wooden 
p. of the bed(ding). They cause [(someone)] to lie down on the p. [They] cover (him) with a cloth” 482/u:2-5 (rit.?), w. dupl. IBoT 4.15:3-6. 
NINDAparlai B n.; (a type of bread or pastry); NH.† 
ŠU.NIGIN 22 UDU 44 PA. (or: 40 NINDA PA.) NINDApár-la≠-i±[(-?)…] / ŠÀ.BA 1 PA. 3 ŠA_TU Z´D. [DA …] / 98 DUG KAŠ 4 ŠA_TU G[A …] / [o] GEŠTIN 1 GA.KIN.AG a[-…] “Total: twenty-two sheep, forty-four PARÂSU (or: forty loaves containing a PARÂSU), p.-breads […], among which are one PARÂSU and three SU_TU of flo[ur …], ninety-eight jugs of beer, four SU_TU of […] m[ilk …], […] wine, one cheese […]” KUB 42.87 iv 4-7 (cult inv.). 
Although this word could be incomplete, it could also be the same word as GIŠparlāi, but w. a different determinative. It is more probable that a kind of bread was named after a wooden object whose shape it shared than that the wooden object was named after the bread. For a comparable stem in other bread names see NINDAgatai and NINDAtuh~ hurai. 

174

LÚparlašalla-n.; (a functionary); NH.† 

EGIR-ŠÚ–ma–za EN.SISKUR ANA 2 DINGIR. MEŠ IGI-anda matalliya [LÚpár-l]a-šal-la MU[NUSkanqatitalla-(?) … arha] / aniyanzi “But afterward the sacrificer matalliya-s himself toward two deities; they nullify(?)/ cancel(?) the […] to/ on the p.-man [and kanqatitalla-(?)] woman” KUB 
46.38 ii 12-13 (Kizz. rit., NH); [EN.SISKUR–za ANA 2 DINGIR.MEŠ IGI-and]a? matalliya LÚpár-la-šal-la [… ar]ha aniyanzi “[The sacrificer] matalliya-s [himself toward two deities]; they nullify(?) [the …] to/on the p.-man” KUB 46.42 ii 15 (rit.); in both exx., the case is uncertain (stem form?). Cf. also matalli(ya)-. 
The apparent formation of p. compares w. the functionary-name LÚIGI-zišalla- (or LÚšizišalla-?) which occurs in the same text (paired w. the MUNUSkanqatitalla-) KUB 46.42 iii 14, iv 12, (17?). Cf. also LÚIGI-ziašši-KUB 46.38 ii 9 (NH). 

parli see parla-and parili-. 

[DUGparmaš(-)x-x] VBoT 89 i 13 should be read ga(coll.)-pár-ma-aš x-x. 
parmi, parni (Hurr. offering term); NH. pár-ni KUB 27.1 ii 1 (NH), pár-mi KBo 25.190 + KBo 
33.107 obv. 11 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:147), pár-mi-ia KBo 4.2 iv 3 (Murš. II), KUB 45.78 iii 11 (NH), 499/w obv. 18 (Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:61), ≠pár-±ni-ia KBo 8.86 obv. 12 (NH), pár-mi-i[š] KBo 8.86 obv. 19, par(sic)-mi KUB 32.84 iv 9. 
(In a list of offerings for burning) 1 MUŠEN ilmiya pár-mi-ia “one bird for the oath/curse (and) for p.” KBo 4.2 iv 3 (aphasia of Murš. II), ed. MSpr. 6f. (obv. 33); [1 NINDA.]GUR›.RA ŠA 1 UPNI dahašiya … el[miya] ≠pár-±ni-ia KBo 8.86 obv. 10-12 (rit., NH); cf. elmiya(coll. photograph) pár-mi-ya ā
riya 499/w obv. 18, translit. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:61; and cf. KUB 45.78 iii? 11; [E]GIR-anda–ma par(sic)-mi takruwāri kūwahī[d]Teššuppina GUB-aš ekuzi KUB 32.84 iv 9-10 (Hurr. offering list); for the sequence of offering terms see Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:59. 
Perhaps this Hurr. term is related to the Hurr. verbal expression pár-nu-uš-du-uš (i.e., parn–ost– o–s) KBo 23.23 rev. 46, 47 = (Hitt.) parkuiš ē
šdu VBoT 120 i 6, 7, see Wilhelm, ZA 73:97f. n. 3, Wegner, Xenia 21:152 

[parn-] 
(citing ChS I/5/1 no. 2 line 64, p. 59). If so, it could mean something like “purity” here. 
Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 61; Lebrun, Samuha (1976) 99f.; Laroche, GLH (1979) 196 (s.v. parmi, parn- 2). 
GIŠparmil n.; (the name of a tree and its wood?); MH?/MS?.† 
In a list of offerings made “before the king goes outside” (line 16): [… (-)]ā
liš 2 MUŠEN 1 GI […] / [… UDU?/ANŠE?.K]UR.RA GIŠpár-mi-il x[…] / [… +]2 huppar marn[uwan …] KBo 16.78 iv 21-23 (MH?/MS?). 
In a cultic context like this one a statue or animal-shaped vessel (BIBRU) of an antelope (UDU. KUR.RA) or a horse (ANŠE.KUR.RA) is possible. For the antelope see gold-plated (wood?): UDU. KUR.RA KÙ.GI GAR.RA KUB 12.1 iv 13 (cult inv.); gold and jeweled: UDU.KUR.RA KÙ.GI NA› KUB 
38.38 obv. 10, cf. also KBo 18.172 rev. 3; iron: 2 UDU. KUR.RA AN.BAR KBo 2.1 iv 4; tin-plated wood: 2 UDU.KUR.RA GIŠ AN.NA hališšiyan KUB 38.1 iv 4; silver BIBRU: 1 BIBRU UDU.KUR.RA KÙ. BABBAR 4 G‰R.MEŠ aranza KUB 42.100 iii 28. For the horse see the cult inv. passages ANŠE. KUR.RA KÙ.BABBAR GAR.R[A] KUB 38.4:2; [BI]BRU ANŠE.KUR.RA KÙ.GI ibid. 8, cf. also KUB 
38.21 rev. 6. 
Although GIŠpár-mi-il is not formally genitive, it may serve like uncomplemented GIŠ when it follows an object in a list to indicate its material. The trace after p. could be U[P] or K[Á]. UPNU/NI as a unit of measure of capacity would fit a BIBRU better than a statue. 
parn-n.; see per-. 
[parn-v.] in […]x x pár-nu-un 1 KAŠ.A pa[-…] KUB 31.69 obv.? 2 (Pud.), without context, was read […]x-qa-nu-un by de Roos, Diss. 274, but should probably be read […]x-x ≠DÙ±-nu-un (coll.). For pár-na-an-zi KBo 30.127 iv? 12 read pár-<aš->na-anzi. There is no exclamation point in Otten’s hand copy. 
175

TÚG/GADparna-n.; (an article made of lightweight fabric; a tapestry, something like a Turkish kilim); from OH?/NS.† 
sg. nom. TÚGpár-na-aš KBo 18.175 v 7, KBo 18.179 v? 4, KBo 18.181 obv. 17, rev. 24, KBo 18.187:4, KUB 12.1 iii 27, KUB 13.35 i 48 (all NH), KBo 8.95 obv. 5, KUB 42.40 ii (6), iii 4, GADpár-na-aš KUB 42.106 rev.? 11; acc. TÚGpár-na-an KUB 13.35 i 47, iii 48, iv 6, 10, 17 (NH); abl. TÚGpár-na-az KUB 44.60 iii 12, 13, 19 (OH?/NS). 
pl. acc. TÚGpár-nu-uš KUB 60.60 rt. col. 15 (NH). 
	a. used (like a bull-fighter’s cape) to separate calves from the herd: “But who will cull them (the calves mentioned two lines before) out (of the herd)? The Stormgod [will cull] them [with] a rod, both with a rod and a crook. The priests(?) will cull them with a (wooden) šahut(a)-. The tazzelli-men will cull them with a boxwood(?) rod” tabarna[š– a]t–kan SIGﬁ-antet TÚGpár-na-az karšeškizzi tawan~ [nanaš–a]t–kan walkit TÚGpár-na-az karšeškizzi “The Tabarna will cull them with a good p.-cloth; the Tawannana will cull them with a walki p.-cloth” KUB 28.9 rev. 13b-14b + KUB 44.60 iii 12-13 (Hattic-Hitt. bil., OH?/NS) □ in lines 9-10 the object(s) is expressed by acc. pl. com. –aš, but in lines 11-13 by neut. –at. For karš- “to separate/cull (animals) out from a herd” see Laws §85, KUB 30.10 obv. 15 (both OH) and KUB 13.4 iv 56 and 59 (MH/NS). 
	b. in inventory tablets: TÚG!pár-na-aš tapriaš “p.cloth of the tapri-chair” KBo 18.181 rev. 24 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:120, 123, Siegelová, Verw. 376f. (“Decke des Sessels”); TÚGpár-na-aš watarmaš(-)ša[(-)…] KBo 

18.181 obv. 17 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 372f. (“Wandbehang ∑.”) □ compare NINDA watarmašši- AlHeth 190, perhaps indicating goods from a city Watarma; (In a list of garments and textiles) […] TÚGpár-na-aš ŠÀ 1-EN wašha[niyaš(?)] “[…] p.-cloths, among them one (in the fashion/style) of the city W.(?)” KBo 18.187:4 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 480 □ for a garment or cloth from, or in the style of, Wašhaniya see NBC 3842 obv. 1, trans-lit. Finkelstein, JCS 10:101; for the spelling without det., in a similar context, see ikkuwaniya (from URUIkkuwaniya “Iconium/ Konya”) KUB 42.59 rev. 23, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 342f.; 14 TÚGpár-na-aš ŠÀ.B[A] 2 x-x[…] “fourteen p.-cloths among which are two […]” KBo 18.175 v 7-8 (inv.), ed. THeth 10:11, Siegelová, Verw. 420f.; 7 TÚGpár-na-aš KÙ. GI NA› ŠÀ.BA 1-EN hūda-x[ca. 8 signs] KÙ.GI anda “Seven p.-cloths (decorated with) gold and gems, among them one … […] gold thereon” KUB 

parnalli- a 

12.1 iii 27-28 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:100, 104, Siegelová, Verw. 444f. 
	c. in a (NH) list of textiles for the royal coronation: 192 TÚG≠pár-na±-aš KBo 18.179 v? 4 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 40f. (“192 Tapisserien”); cf. also TÚGpárna-aš šar-ra?[-aš-ši-…] “p.-cloth(s) of royal[ty(?)]” KUB 42.40 rev.? rt. col. 4 (inv.). 
	d. in depositions: TÚGpár-na-an-na-wa kuwapi tianzi nu–wa TÚGpár-na-an GIBIL INA É.LUGAL dahhi TÚGpár-na-aš LIBIR.RA–ma–wa kuiš nu– wa–mu mašiwan ZI-anza nu–wa–za apeniššan daš~ kinun “Whenever they lay the p.-cloths, I take the new p.-cloth to the royal palace, but I take as many as I wish of the old ones for myself” KUB 13.35 i 4750 (NH), ed. StBoT 4:6f.; cf. also in broken context of KUB 

60.60 rt. col. 10, 15 (NH). 
TÚG/GADp. is an article made of linen cloth, occasionally decorated with gold and gems, sometimes associated with royalty (KBo 18.179, KUB 13.35, KUB 
28.9 + KUB 44.60). As a covering for a tapri to sit upon, as something to be waved at a calf to shoo it away from the herd, as a valuable item expensively decorated and used at the coronation, it may have been something like a Turkish kilim, i.e., not a real carpet, but something of lighter weight. If the term is derived from per/parn- “house,” it may describe an article for domestic use. 
Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 17 (“‘Kleid des Hauses’ = ‘Wandbehang’”), 81 (“Wandbehang?, Teppich?”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 612 (“Wandbehang, Tapisserie”). 
Cf. per/parn-. 
parnalli-adj.; of the house or estate; NH.† 
sg. nom. com. pár-na-al-li-iš KUB 5.6 iii 13 (NH); pl. nom.-acc. neut. pár-na-al-la KUB 25.27 i 18. 
a. modifying a Zawalli-deity: “Since it was established that Mašhuiluwa let his tongue go (arha tarna-) before a deity” nu pár-na-al-li-iš kuiš dZa~ walliš ŠA dUTU-ŠI µP´Š.TUR-aš kuin URUArza~ uwa harta nu apē
dani peran EME-an arha tarnan harzi IGI-zi TE.MEŠ NU.SIGﬁ-du “if he has let (his) tongue go before that Zawalli-deity of the house(hold) of His Majesty, whom Mašhuiluwa held (with him) in Arzawa, let the first set of exta be unfavorable” KUB 5.6 iii 13-15 (oracle question, NH), ed. 

176

Archi, AoF 6:87f., cf. AU 285; Zawalli-deities are further qualified either by “of PN,” “of GN” (e.g., ŠA URUZithara KUB 5.6 ii 45, ŠA URUAnkuwa ibid. ii 69), or “of the house of PN/of the king” (ŠA É µÉ.GALPAP KUB 22.67:13, cf. Archi, AoF 6:87; ŠA É LUGAL KUB 16.46 i 10). parnalliš … dzawalliš ŠA dUTU-ŠI seems to be the functional equivalent of dzawalliš ŠA É dUTU-ŠI, w. ŠA É = parnalliš. 
b. modifying foodstuffs (produced on the estate): [TA?] É dUTU–ma EZEN hadauri 1 GU› 10 UDU aššanumaš–ma māšiwan lamniyanzi LÚ.MEŠhalliyarišš–a dDAG-ti iyanzi 2 UDU 2 PA. Z´D.DA 2 DUG KA.DÙ ŠA É–ŠU<NU> 1 UDU 1 PA. Z´D.DA 1 DUG KA.DÙ LÚ.MEŠ É.GAL pár-na-al-la pianzi “But [from?] the temple of the Sungod, for the hadauri-festival: one ox, ten sheep 
	— they name how much to provide, and the halli~ yari-people make for dHalmaššuit: two sheep, two PARÂSU-measures of flour, two jugs of thin beer of their(!) (lit. his) estate. The palace attendants give one sheep, one PARÂSU-measure of flour, one jug of thin beer, of (= from) (their) estate” KUB 25.27 i 14-19 (hišuwaš fest., NS), cf. Alp, Beamt. 26 □ for sg. -ŠU 
	w. pl. subject see ibid. i 22-24, iii 13-15. p. is probably pl. nom.-acc. neut., referring to the foods; although the word order is unusual, p. or perhaps LÚ.MEŠ É.GAL p. was inserted later (cf. many corrections and erasures, e.g., i 8, 13, 14, 21, 22). It seems possible that p. corresponds to ŠA É–ŠU(NU) “of their(!) estate.” Whether the latter logographic writing was pronounced parnaš–šaš or parnalla in this context is unclear, but its equivalence in meaning to parnalli- is clear, both here and above under a. 

Alp, Beamt. (1940) 26; van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 107 (“qui appartient à la maison (royale)”); Archi, AoF 6 (1979) 88 (“familiare”), 92 (“della casa”). 

Cf. per/parn-, parnawiške-. 

[GIŠparnalli-] cited by de Martino, SMEA 24:143, does not exist. See GIŠparnulli and GIŠparanalla-. 
[LÚ.GIŠparnanata-n.] Mestieri 561f. citing 1 MU~ NUS.S‰R ŠA LÚ.GIŠpár!(copy: qa)-na-na-ta-a[š?] HT 2 iv 1. However this text clearly distinguishes pár and qa: pár iii 18, iv 19, qa iv 20, v 16, etc. For other exx. 

parnawiške
of MUNUS.S‰R ŠA LÚ… in this text see i 1, iii 22, 23, iv 2, 3; 
for MUNUS.S‰R + male PN + LÚ… see iv 5-6, 9-10, 11-12, etc. 
See GIŠqananata-. 
parnawaiške-see parnawiške-. 
parnawiške-, parnawaiške-v.; to make into the property of the royal house; NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 pár-na-wa-iš-ki-it KUB 1.1 iv 63, pár-na-ú-i-iški[-it] KUB 1.8:40, pár-na-≠ú±[-…] KBo 3.6 iv 24 (all Hatt. III). 
imp. pl. 3 pár-na-wiﬁ-iš-kán-du KUB 21.38 obv. 20 (Pud.). 
uncertain pár-na[-a]-wa-x[…] KUB 60.60 rt. col. 10. 
a. obj. a place: “I took up my [nephew] Kurunta” nu–za ŠEŠ–YA µNIR.GÁL-i[(š)] / [(kuit AŠ)]RU URU.dU-aššan pár-na-wa-iš-ki-it (vars. párna-ú-i-iš-ki[-it], pár-na-≠ú±[-…]) “and (in) Tarhuntašša, the place which my brother Muwatalli made into property of the royal house, (there I installed Kurunta in kingship)” KUB 1.1 iv 62-63 (Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 3.6 + KUB 19.70 iv 23 and KUB 1.8:40, ed. Hatt. 36f., NBr 32f. (“für den Hof in Anspruch nehmen”), Chrest. 80f. (“used for (his) palace”), and (less appropriately) StBoT 24:28f. (“ausgebaut hatte,” in glossary p. 97 “bauen, besiedeln”). 
b. obj. people and animals: (Puduhepa wrote to Ramses II:) “As to the resettled persons, cattle, and sheep which I will give to my daughter, there is no grain in my lands. When my envoys reach you, [send] me mounted messenger(s), my brother. Let them bring records to the lords of my land” nu–wa NAM.RA.MEŠ kuin [GU›].MEŠ UDU.HI.A pē harkanzi nu–war–an–kan arha daškandu nu–war– an pár-na-wiﬁ-iš-kán-du “And let them take over the resettled persons, [ca]ttle, and sheep which they (sc. the lords) keep ready and make them into property of the (Egyptian) royal house” KUB 21.38 obv.19-20 (letter, Pud.), ed. Güterbock, Symb.Koschaker 35, Helck, JCS 17:89 (“zum Eigentum nehmen”), Stefanini, Pud. 7-9 (“esse le prelevino e se ne approprino” [emphasis his]). 
Götze, NBr (1930) 34f. (“verhoflichen,” “zum Krongut machen”); Güterbock, Symb.Koschaker (1939) 35 (“zu Eigentum des Hofes machen(?)”); Stefanini, AttiAccTosc. 29 (1964) 28 (“Il denominativo riposa su un’accezione economica di ‘casa’ e corrisponde molto bene all’it. incamerare,” i.e., “to confiscate, annex”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 382 (“zur Behausung machen”); Otten, StBoT 24 (1981) 97 (“bauen, besiedeln”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 538 n. 1986. 
177

parni see parmi. 
parnili adv.; (reading and mng. uncertain).† 
namma–at adanna [ešanta(r)]i(?) (or: [hal~ ziantar]i(?)) nu–za pár-ni-li ada<n>zi LÚ É DIN~ GIR-LIM […]x UL halziyanz[i] “Then they [sit(?) down] to eat (or: they [are called] to eat). They eat 
p. They do not call the temple-man […]” KBo 14.95 iv! 4-5 (+) KBo 29.82 iv 5-6 (witaššiyaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 
14.93 iv 2-3. For adverbs in -ili see EHS 1:360. 
If the form is correct as written, it might be an adverb in -ili based upon parn-“house, household” (eating “by households”). However, there are no attested exx. of nouns for buildings w. the -ili adverbial suffix. On the other hand, it could be a scribal error for pár-aš-ni-li, in which case it might mean “in a squatting position” or “in the manner of a leopard”; cf. paršanili. 
[…(-)]parninkin (mng. unkn. or acephalic).† [… (-)]pár-ni-in-ki-in KBo 24.51 obv.? 13. 
parneški-Hurr. n.; (mng. unkn.); from MH/MS.† 
pl.?/sg.? nom.-acc. pár-né-eš-ki KBo 23.23 rev. 78 (upside down) (MH/MS), KUB 24.13 iii 12 (MH/NS); Hurr. det. sg. pár-né-eš-ki-n[e] KBo 23.23 obv. 28 (MH/MS). 
Hurr. det. pl. pár-né-eš-ki-n[a] KBo 23.23:49 (MH/MS) (in Hurr. context). 
“The Old Woman places the images (ALAM. MEŠ) into the basket” MUNUS.ŠU.GI namma 2 pár-né-eš-ki (var. 2 pár-né-eš-ki [namma]) IŠTU 2 ŠU.MEŠ–ŠU dāi “The Old Woman then takes two p.-s with her two hands,” (rushes behind the client’s back, begins to seize him body part by body part from his head downward, and keeps wiping him off while repeating an incantation) KUB 24.13 iii 11-12 (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 23.23 rev. 78 (upside down) (MH/MS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:106f., 212f., ChS I/5:112, 63 (line 100); [EN S´]SKUR harwašiya pedi tīēzzi MUNUS.ŠU.GI pattar pár-né-eš-ki-n[e …]x(-)āppa dāi / […]-an šanhanzi nu–z–(š)an MUNUS.ŠU.GI INA QA_TI–ŠU šehuriēzz[i … QA_]TAM ārri / [… IŠTU ZA.HU]M tepu papparši MUNUS.ŠU.GI widanta ā
rri “The [sa]crificer enters a secret place. The Old Woman takes/places back a basket (and) a parneški, [and] they clean(?) 

(NINDA)parnuwami

[the …]. The Old Woman urinates in her own hand. She washes the hand […]. He/she sprinkles a little [… from a ZA.HU]M-vessel, and the Old Woman washes (herself) with water (or: and he washes the Old Woman with water)” KBo 23.23 obv. 28-30 + KBo 
33.118 obv. 46-48 (rit., MH/MS), ed. ChS I/5:57. 
Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:45, 319, suggest that p. was a substance made of barley flour, mixed w. water and herbs (like a poultice?), based on a par. KBo 
11.19 obv. 10-14. Since both passages are only remotely similar, this suggestion cannot be substantiated. Oettinger, Stammbildung 318 n. 127, apparently arrived at a mng. “feather(?)” on the basis of the juxtaposition to pattar and his IE etymology. 
For another noun of Hurr. origin ending in -iški see the noun šehelliški-(Laroche, GLH 196, Kronasser, EHS 1:211, §117.5). 
Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 45 (“Diese … Materie besteht vor allem aus Gerstenspelt, aus Wasser und dareingemischten Kräutern”), 125f., 237, 319; Laroche, GLH (1979) 196 s.v. parn- 3 (en hitt., désigne une sorte de figurine magique (ALAM)”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 318 n. 127 (“Feder(?),” assumes PIE rather than Hurr. origin, from *perneski-); Wilhelm, ZA 73 (1983) 97f. n. 3 (Hurr. parn-= “rein”). 
(NINDA)parnuwami-adj. and n. com.; (a kind of bread or pastry); NS.† 
	a. as an adj.: (In a list of breads) [1 NINDA. G]UR›.RA BA.BA.ZA alpaššiš 1/ 2 UPNI 1 NINDA. G[UR›.RA BA.BA.ZA?] / [pá]r-nu-wa-mi-iš ŠA 1/ 2 UPNI KBo 23.95 obv. 9-10 (fest., NS), ed. Haas, KN 298f. 
	b. substantivized w. NINDA as det.: 1 NINDApárnu-wa-mi-iš Bo 3784 i 11, translit. StBoT 15:25. 

The word “a-pár-nu-wa-mi-iš-ša,” which was listed among (dried) fruits in 1328/z 1-5, translit. Ertem, Flora 136, but which under muthaya-we emended to NINDA!pár-nu-wa-mi-iš-ša, Otten, ZA 81:118, has determined from a photograph to be a-pár-ša-nu-wami-iš-ša. 
The word was originally an adj. (actually a Luw. passive part. of a verb parnuwa-) modifying bread. It developed into a substantive. Cf. also NINDAharki-, NINDAharši-, etc. 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 175. 

178

GIŠparnulli-n. (neut./com.); (an aromatic woody plant or its product); from OH/NS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. GIŠpár-nu-ul-li KUB 33.67 iv 3, 6 (OH/NS), KBo 19.109:7, KUB 12.53:13, KUB 41.13 ii 23! (text: GIŠpárnu-m[i-l]i-ia), KUB 51.38:4, IBoT 2.39 rev. 22 (MH/ENS), 412/b ii 24 (Ertem, Flora 118), KBo 30.3 iv 15. 
acc. GI[Špár-nu-ul-l]i-in KUB 33.84:4 + KBo 19.109:6, KBo 

19.110:4. gen. [GIŠpár-nu-ul-l]i-ia-aš VBoT 58 iv 24 (OH/NS). 

(In a list of objects and materials for the performance of a rit.) šanezzi kināhiy¢[aš GIŠpár
nta GIŠšanu-ul-l]i-ia-aš GI.DÙG.GA “Assorted/selected(?) sweet-smelling pieces of šahi-wood, p.-wood, (and) sweet reed (and the Old Woman sprinkles aromatic oil over them)” VBoT 58 iv 23-24 (myth, OH/ NS), translit. Myth. 26, cf. KUB 51.38:3-4, KUB 41.13 ii 2123; šanezzi GIŠšā
hiš [… GIŠ]pár-nu-ul-li keiškallanta “The sweet-smelling things — šahi, […] and p. — these were (lit. are) broken open” KUB 12.53:12-13; cf. apāš–a GIŠERIN iškallan GIŠeyan GIŠš[a-o-]x GIŠantar-≠x-x± GIŠtaprinnin šanizzi hū
manda GIŠ≠x-xin± GI.[DÙ]G.[G]A GIŠpár-nu-ul-li happuriyan alil hū≠man d±aīIBoT 2.39 rev. 20-22 (mouth-washing rit., MH/ ENS); n–an–za dKamrušepašš–a dāš AN.BAR-aš GUNNI n–an daiš nu par[aiš] GIŠšahin GIŠpár-nuul-li–ya paraiš–ma GI.DÙG.GA GIŠhappuriyan[n– a] “Kamrušepa also took the iron brazier (GUN~ NI), and put it (in place), fanned the šahi-wood and the p.-wood, and fanned the sweet reed and the happuriya-wood” 412/b ii 22-25 (bil. Hattic rit.), ed. Er-tem, Flora 118f.; for GI DÙG.GA see CAD Q 88; see also parai- 2 b; “In the sacrificer’s house, there burns [olive wood], there burns šahi-wood […]” GIŠpár-nuul-li warān[i] “there burns p.” KUB 33.67 iv 3 (rit. in myth, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 29:74f., translit. Myth. 77; cf. KBo 
30.3 i 14-15, ed. StBoT 29:214; [(nu–kan āššiya)]tar GIŠšahin GI[Špár-nu-ul-l]i-in-na daššawaš A.HI.Anaš [(šunniyat nu–kan A.HI.A-aš a)]nda āššiyatar GIŠš[ahiš GI]Špár-nu-ul-li waršit “(IŠTAR) strewed aphrodisiac(?), šahi-wood, and p. into the mighty waters. And in the waters (Hedammu) smelled the aphrodisiac(?), šahi-wood, and p.” (so that Hedammu became drowsy) KUB 33.84:4-5 + KBo 19.109:6-7 (Hedammu, ENS), w. dupl. KBo 19.111:4-5, ed. StBoT 14:58f., tr. Hittite Myths 51. 
GIŠp. always occurs together w. other aromatic woods or their products, such as olive and cedar 

parš- A b 
wood, GI.DÙG.GA, GIŠšahi-, and (GIŠ)happuriya-. Its aroma was released by breaking/cracking (iš~ kallai-) the wood or fruit open, by burning it, or by soaking it in water. The word is of Hattic origin. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 162f. (“Baum und sein Holz”; derived from Hattic); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 126; Ertem, Flora (1974) 137f. 
[GIŠpár-nu-m[i-l]i-ia] KUB 41.13 ii 23 is to be emended to GIŠpár-nu-u[l!-l]i-ia. 
parš-A v.; to flee, escape (often w. -kan or -ašta); from OH/MS. 
act. pres. sg. 3 pár-aš-zi KUB 31.71 iii 15 (NH); pl. 3 pár[-aš-ša]-an-zi ibid. iii 15 (NH). 
pret. sg. 3 pár-aš-ta KUB 14.1 obv. (48) (MH/MS), KUB 
1	 iv 29 (MH/NS), KBo 2.5 i 3, ii 18, KBo 3.4 ii 33, KBo 
2	 ii 8 (all Murš. II), KBo 6.29 ii 19 (Hatt. III); pl. 3 pár-šeer KBo 3.46 rev. 38 (OH/NS), KUB 14.15 iii 34, 36 (Murš. II), pár-[aš-še]-≠er± KUB 23.11 iii 13 (MH/NS). 

imp. sg. 3 pár-aš-du KUB 19.28 iv 2 (Murš. II); pl. 2 párša[-at-tén(?)] KBo 14.19 ii 2 (Murš. II). mid. pret. sg. 3(?) pár-aš-ta-at 48/e obv. 6 (StBoT 5:140 n. 8). part. sg. acc. com. pár-aš-ša-an-da-an KUB 17.29 ii 15 (pre-NH/NS). 
a. w. a local particle (-kan, -ašta): KUR URUAr~ zawa–ma–kan hū
man pár-aš-ta “The entire country of Arzawa fled. (Some inhabitants took refuge at Mt. Arinnanda, some in the city of Puranda, and others went across the sea to Uhhaziti)” KBo 3.4 ii 33 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 16.1 iii 39, ed. AM 52f.; cf. KBo 5.2 ii 18, KBo 14.20 ii 8, (17), KUB 14.19:(3), KBo 14.19 ii 2; “It rained all night, and a mist arose, so that the enemy did not see the camp fires” nu–kan LÚ.KÚR UL pár-aš-≠ta± “and the enemy did not flee” KBo 19.76 i 26 (ann., Murš. II), tr. Otten, AfO 22:113; (The army of Arzawa destroyed Madduwatta’s troops) n–aš[ta µMad]duwattaš 1[-aš] pár[-aš-ta] “[Mad]duwatta alone esca[ped]” KUB 14.1 obv. 47-48 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 12f. 
b. without local particle: (If you steal a plow ox belonging to the temple, explaining its disappearance:) “It died from emaciation …” naššu–war–≠aš pár±-aš-ta “or it escaped/ran away” KUB 13.4 iv 29 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 164f., Süel, Diretif Metni 78f.; (The queen describes what happened to her in a dream:) “When I set out, I said 
179

as follows:” nu–wa UL Étargašša[naz hu]yanza–pat pár-aš-zi LÚ.MEŠKUŠ‡–ya–wa pár[-aš-ša]-an-zi “Is it not (or perhaps: It is not) from the house of the tar~ gaššana-that the [ru]nner(?) flees? Will the chariot-warriors also flee?” (Whereupon the […] actually said to me: ‘Since the gods know your mouth, do not curse deliberately’) KUB 31.71 iii 14-15 (dream report, NH), DLL 92 restored É targašša[nali]yanza–pat, but this reading leaves É w. neither IŠTU nor abl. ending to indi
cate its case. 
c. w. preverb — 1' arha: cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 20; “When I, Tudhaliya, the Great King, came to Hattuša” n–ašta ÉRIN.MEŠ LÚ.KÚR arha pár[-ašše]-≠er± “the enemy troops fled. (I pursued them and went to war against the Kaška-Land)” KUB 
23.11 iii 13 (ann., Tudh. II), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:160f.; (When Urhi-Teššub heard about countries taking side with Hatt. III) n–aš–kan URUMaraššantiyaza arha pár-aš-ta “he fled from Maraššantiya (and went to Šamuha, but I pursued him)” KBo 6.29 ii 19 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 48f. 
2' peran arha: cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 51; “The city of Šunupašši did not wait quietly for me to approach” n–aš–mu–kan peran arha ≠pár±-aš-ta “It fled before me, (and I burned the city down)” KBo 2.5 i 2-3 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 180f. 
Götze, Hatt. (1925) 109; Friedrich, HW (1952) 163; Laroche apud Bader, BSL 69 (1974) 5f. 
Cf. paršanu A. 
parš-B, parši-, paršiya-v.; 1. to break (into large fragments), to crumble (into small fragments) (trans., act. and mid.), 2. to break, disintegrate (intrans., mid.), 3. to violate (a boundary) (trans., mid.); from OS. 
act. pres. sg. 1 pár-ši-ia-mi KBo 15.25 obv. 13, 21, 33 (MH/ NS), KUB 7.30 rt. col. 8 (pre-NH), KUB 17.28 i 21 (MH/NS), KBo 22.137 iii 5-6, pár-ši-ia-am-mi KBo 13.101 i 11 (NS), párši-ia-ah-hi VBoT 24 iv 6 (MH/NS), KBo 27.108 iii 28 (NS). 
sg. 3 pár-aš-zi KUB 17.29 ii 9, 11 (pre-NH/NS), pár-ši-azzi KBo 24.1 i 39 (MH/MS), KUB 35.151 iii 7 (MS?), pár-ši-iaaz-zi KBo 21.11 rev.? 9 (MS?), KUB 45.3 i 37 (pre-NH/MS?), KUB 11.31 i 20 (NH), KUB 6.46 iv 52, 53 (Muw. II), KUB 
10.51 rt. col. 8, KUB 39.71 i 26, ii 32, iv (2), 4, 8, KUB 39.90:3, 6, KUB 39.91:10, KBo 22.126 rev. 12 (all NS), pár-ši-ia-zi KUB 1.17 i 13 (OH/NS), KBo 9.106 ii 58 (MH/NS), KUB 11.30 iii 10, KUB 27.68 i 9-10, KUB 32.1 iii 12, KBo 24.4 rev.! 16 

parš-B 

(all NS), KBo 2.8 iii 20, KUB 20.1 iii 25, IBoT 2.23:9 (all NH), pár-ši-i-e-ez-zi KUB 39.101 ii 11 (NS), pár-ši-ia-iz-zi Bo 3315 rev. 16 (KN 277), pár-ši-zi KUB 17.35 i 21 (Tudh. IV), pa-arši HT 1 i 60 (MH/NS), pár-ši KBo 4.11 obv. 15 (carried over to rev.) (NS), [ pár-ši-i KBo 11.28 iii 4 read pár-ši-ia! as elsewhere in the same text]. 
pl. 1 pár-šu-wa-ni KBo 17.4 iii 16 (OS) [not certain if it belongs to this paradigm, fragmentary context]. 
pl. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-zi KBo 21.85 i 46, 50, iv 29 (OH/MS), KBo 24.29 iv 9 (MS), KBo 21.52 ii? 4, KUB 10.21 iii 10, iv 14, 16 (both OH/NS), KUB 15.32 iv 32, (38), KUB 51.57 obv. 19, VBoT 24 ii 22 (all MH/NS), KBo 2.4 l.e. 1, KUB 10.27 iv 5, KUB 36.89 obv. 8, KUB 39.17 iii 8 (all NH), KBo 2.13 obv. 15, 20, rev. 9, KUB 7.24 obv. 9, KUB 38.25 i 23, KUB 46.27 obv. 8 (all Tudh. IV), pár-ši-an-zi KUB 15.32 ii 34 (MH/NS), KBo 2.7 obv. 11 and passim, KBo 26.158 i 11, KUB 17.37 i 10, iv 12 (all NH), KUB 17.35 i 9 and passim, KUB 44.1 rev. 6, 8, 9 (both Tudh. IV). 
pret. sg. 1 pár-ši-ia-nu-un KBo 15.10 ii 33, 40 (MH/MS), KUB 40.110 rev. (7) (NS). 
sg. 3 pár-ši-ia-at KBo 15.10 ii 18, iii 68 (MH/NS), KUB 
35.4 iii 6 (NS), pár-ši-at KBo 15.10 iii 63, 65 (MH/MS). imp. pl. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-du KUB 40.110 rev. 8 (NS). mid. pres. sg. 1 pár-aš-ha KBo 17.1 iii 14, KBo 17.6 iii (6) 
(both OS), pá[r-a]š-ha-ri KBo 17.1 iv 10 (OS). 
sg. 3 pár-ši-ia KBo 17.35 iii? 10, 14, 15, KBo 20.10 ii 17, KBo 20.25 i? (1), KBo 25.61 iii? 11, 18, KBo 20.39 left col. 4, 13, KBo 25.149 obv. 1 (all OS), KBo 13.165 iii 3, 7, KBo 17.74 iv 25 (both OH/MS), KBo 15.33 ii 26, KUB 12.19 iii 18, KUB 
15.34 i 26, 28 (all MH/MS), KBo 25.72 rt. col. 9, KBo 7.37 obv. 6, 7 (both pre-NH/MS?), KBo 14.91:5, KBo 25.189 ii 5, KBo 25.190 obv. 25, 27, KUB 45.47 iii 7, 9, VBoT 117:5 (all MS), KBo 6.26 i 46 and passim, KBo 17.75 iii 15, 39, 46, KBo 
19.161 i 2 and passim, KUB 33.40 i 6, 10 (all OH/NS), KBo 
2.9 iv 1, 3, KBo 15.24 iii 29, KUB 27.67 ii 44, 45, 46 (all MH/ NS), KBo 2.14 iii 8, 13 and passim, KBo 5.1 iii 18 and passim, KBo 26.151 i 3, KUB 12.26 ii 20, KUB 30.41 v 19, KUB 46.21 obv. (1), VBoT 128 ii 5, 11 (all NH), KUB 6.45 iv 9 and passim (Muw. II), pár-aš-ši-ia KBo 21.90 i 9 (OH/MS), KBo 25.48 ii 13 (MS), KUB 33.79 iv? 14 (OH/NS), KUB 11.23 i 5 (NS), pár-ši-ia-ri KBo 23.12 i 26, iv 17, KBo 24.66 ii 8 (MS), KBo 
19.136 iv 16, KBo 13.159:(10), KBo 21.98 ii 24, KUB 35.133 ii 39, KUB 45.9 iii? 8, KUB 45.32 iii 17, 20, 28 (all NS), párši-it-ta-ri KBo 6.34 ii 10 (MH/NS). 
pl. 3 pár-ša-an-da KBo 20.8 rev.? 10 (OS), pár-ši-an-ta KBo 24.115 i? 16 (MS), pár-ši-an-ta[(-)…] KBo 17.36 ii 12 (OS), pár-ši-an-da KBo 25.53 rt. col. 5 (OS), pár-ši-ia-an-da KBo 25.88:7 (OS), KUB 34.123 i 22 (OH/MS), KUB 17.28 iii 6 (NS). 
[pret. sg. 3 pár-aš-ta-at 48/e obv. 6 (StBoT 5:140 n. 8), probably belongs to parš- A, q.v.] imp. sg. 3 pár-ši-it-ta-ru KBo 6.34 ii 16 (MH/NS), pár-šiia-ad-da-ru ibid. i 38. pl. 3 [p]ár-ši-an-da-ru 1674/c ii 10 (StBoT 5:139). 

180

inf. [pá]r?-šu-wa-an-zi KBo 21.41 rev. 28 (MH/MS) (traces against [pá]r-), pár-šu-u-wa-an-zi 196/t left col. 8, pár-ši-ia-u-wa-an-zi KBo 33.189 iv? 4, KBo 15.37 i 65, iv 6, KUB 12.12 vi 38, KUB 25.48 iv 20 (all MH/NS), KBo 22.134 iv 8, 10, 18, KUB 25.46 iii 13, KUB 55.54 iii? 14, IBoT 2.60:8 (all NS), KUB 6.45 iv 45 (Muw. II), pár-ši-ia-u-an-zi KUB 12.12 v 32, 
(39) (MH/NS), KUB 20.1 ii 7 (NH), KBo 24.45 obv. 16, KUB 
55.65 iv 38 (NS), KBo 33.194 vi 17, pár-ši-u-wa-an-zi KUB 9.2 i 7 (NH). 
verbal subst. nom. ≠pár±-š[i-i]a-u-wa-ar KUB 55.54 iv 8 (NS); gen. pár-ši-ia-u-wa-aš KUB 42.85:9, KUB 54.94 rt. col. (8). 
part. sg. nom. com. pár-ši-ia-an-za KUB 10.52 vi 9, KUB 

56.46 i 2 (both NS). 

acc. pár-ši-ia-an-ta-an KBo 9.140 iii 10, KBo 21.85 iv 10 (both OH/MS), KBo 13.164 iv 3 (NS), Bo 3083 iii 11 (Ehelolf, ZA 43:175; StBoT 29:81f.), pár-ši-ia-an-da-an KBo 23.72 rev. 15 (OH/MS), KBo 21.34 ii 38 (MH/NS), KUB 7.30 rt. col. 10 (pre-NH/NS), pár-ša-an-da-an IBoT 3.148 iii 48 (NS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ša-an KUB 15.34 i 37 (MH/MS), KUB 39.82:9, KBo 23.93 ii 18 (both NS), pár-ši-ia-an KBo 17.65 rev. 21 (MH?/MS?), KBo 24.66 i 30 (MS), KBo 12.122:5, KBo 
19.129 obv. 23, KUB 35.116:5 (all NS). pl. nom. com. pár-ši-ia-an-te-eš KBo 15.37 ii 50 (MH/NS), ABoT 26:11. 
acc. pár-ši-ia-an-du-uš KUB 7.5 ii 9, VBoT 24 ii 33 (both MH/NS), KBo 23.15 ii 19, KBo 24.57 i 5, KUB 2.13 i 24, iv 5, KUB 12.11 iii 20, KUB 25.46 ii 6, KUB 10.52 vi 13 (all NS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ši-an-da KBo 17.16:3, 8 (OS), pár-šiia-an-da KUB 43.26 i (9) (OS), KUB 34.123 i 22 (OH/MS), KBo 23.44 i 4, KBo 24.78 iv? 13 (both NS), KUB 32.128 i 9 (NH), pár-ši-ia-an-ta KBo 21.33 i 5 (MH/MS), KBo 21.52 ii? 8, 10 (OH/NS), Bo 3112 iii 15 (KN 313). 
d.-l. pár-ši-ia-an-da-aš KBo 25.178 i 24 (OH/NS), pár-šiia-an-ta-aš KBo 20.67 i 10, ii 42 (pre-NH/NS). 

inst. pár-š[i-a]n-t[e-et] KUB 39.7 ii 15 (MH?/NS). 
iter. act. pres. pl. 3 pár-aš-ká[n]-zi KBo 12.113:7 (NS). 
mid. sg. 3 pár-aš-ki-ta-ri KUB 41.19 obv. 15 (MH/NS). 

uncertain: pár-aš-ki-x[…] (perhaps -i[z-zi?]) KBo 9.146 rev. 10 (NS). 
dur. pres. sg. 1 pár-ši-ia-an-na-ah-hi KUB 7.5 ii 26, 27, 28 (MH/NS). 
sg. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-na-i KBo 20.4 iv! 6 (OS), KUB 32.87 rev. 15 (OH/MS), KBo 7.37 obv. 5 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 25.189 ii 3, 8 (MS), KBo 11.32 obv. 6 (OH/NS), KBo 23.67 ii 18 (MH/ NS), KUB 17.24 iii 10 (NH?), KUB 55.55 iv 11, pár-ši-ia-anna<-i> KUB 56.54 rev. 24, pár-ši-an-na-i KUB 32.49a rev. 8, KBo 21.33 iii 17 (MH/MS), KBo 20.72 iii! 27, 32, KBo 25.109 iii 11 (both MS?), pár-ši-ia-an-na-a-i KUB 10.21 v 30, KUB 
25.32 i 30 (both OH/NS), KUB 30.24 ii (22) (MH?/NS), KUB 27.7:8, pár-ši-i-ia-an-na-i KUB 27.1 iii 70 (NH). 
pl. 3 pár-ši-an-ni-an-zi KBo 7.37 obv. 10 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 24.98:(11) (MS?), KUB 27.70 iii 9 (OH/NS), KBo 17.86 iv 9, pár-ši-ia-an-ni-an-zi KUB 25.32 iii 24 (OH/NS), KUB 

parš-B 1 a 1' 
46.47 obv. 12 (MH/NS), KUB 32.98:7, pár-ši-ia-an-na-an-zi 
KUB 25.32 ii 22 (OH/NS). 
pret. sg. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-ni-it KUB 20.8 i 5 (NS). 
pl. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-nir ibid. i 6 (NS). 
iter.-dur. pres. sg. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-ni-iš-ki-iz-zi KBo 2.5 v 6 (OH?/NS). 
pl. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-ni-eš-kán-zi KBo 23.27 ii 39 (MS), párši-ia-an-ni-iš-kán-zi KUB 25.14 iv 7 (OH?/NS), pár-ši-ia-ni-iškán-zi KUB 56.51 i 3. 
pret. sg. 3 pár-ši-ia-an-ni-iš-ki-it KBo 5.1 i 31, 38 (MH/ NS). 
1. to break (into large fragments), crumble (into small fragments) (trans., act. and mid.) — a. (said of bread and cheese) — 1' in general: mašē mašē NINDAtakarmuš LUGAL-uš pár-ši-ia 1/ 2 NINDA LÚ.MEŠSAGI U 1/2 NINDA LÚ.MEŠNAR daškanzi KUB 
10.52 i 8-10, tr. s.v. maši- 2 b; LÚSAGI 1 NINDAwageššar LUGAL-i pāi LUGAL-uš pár-ši-ia n–at–z–(š)an INA GIŠBANŠUR–ŠU dāi “The cupbearer gives one wageššar-bread to the king, the king breaks (it) and places it on his table” KBo 15.36 iii 4-5 (rit., MH?/MS?) 
□ note that after p. the verb is dai- “to place” rather than either zikke-(iter.) or išhuwai-“to scatter”; (The diviner sets soldier-breads in three places on the altar) n–ašta namma awan arha 3-ŠU pár-ši-ia-az-zi “and breaks off three times (i.e., one piece of each?)” KBo 15.36 
	+ KBo 21.61 ii 10 (rit., MH?/MS?); namma 1 <(NIN~ DA)>.SIG pár-ši-ia šer–a–ššan NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A dāi n–[a]t KASKAL.MEŠ-aš pe[(r)]an katta daī 1 NINDA.SIG arha paršāizz[i] n–at–šan KASKALši [(iš)]huwāi “He breaks a thin bread, puts an oil cake on top, and places it down in front of the road. He crumbles one thin bread and pours/scatters it on the road” KUB 15.34 i 26-28 (evocation, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.33b i 26-28, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:184f., cf. paršai-; cf. KUB 15.34 iii 31-34; [… NINDAhar]zazun GIŠDAG-ti [1-ŠU GUNNI-i] ištarna pedi 1-ŠU [párši]-ia hattalwaš GIŠ-i 1-ŠU [namma G]UNNI tapušza 1-ŠU “(The king) breaks the harzazu-bread once at the throne-dais, once at the hearth from the center, once at the door bolt, and once at the hearth from the side” KUB 11.19 iv 4-7 (fest. frag.), cf. KBo 21.52 rt. col. 14-18; NINDA.GUR›.RA–ma pár-š[(i-ya-)]au-an-zi NU.GÁL “There is no breaking of thick bread” KUB 55.65 iv 38 (Ištanuwa rit.), w. dupl. KUB 32.123 
	+ KBo 29.206 iv 39, ed. StBoT 30:314f., cf. also KBo 33.189 iv? 3-4, ed. ChS 1/4:186, and KBo 33.194 vi 16-17, translit. ChS 1/4:179 (both EZEN hišuwaš); (They place thick loaves 

181

on the table in front of the deity) pár-ši-ia-an-zi– ma–aš UL “but they do not break them” KUB 60.147 iv? 8 (fest. frag.); EGIR-ŠU–ma ā
piti 7 NINDA.SIG pár-ši-ia n–at–kan āpiti kattanda išhuwāi “Afterward, he crumbles seven thin breads at the pit and pours/scatters them down into the pit” KBo 24.45 rev. 14 (Kizz. rit., MH?/MS), w. dupl. KBo 27.202:14-15 (NS). 
2' to break off a little (tepu): n–ašta EN. SISKUR ANA NINDA.GUR›.RA awan arha tepu pár-ši-ia “The client breaks a little (piece) of the thick loaf (and eats it)” KBo 13.164 iv 6 (rit., NS), cf. KBo 25.158 rev.? 10, KUB 10.27 iv 5, KUB 35.133 ii 22, KUB 
51.83 obv.? 11, KUB 31.147 ii 6. 
3' other: 8? GIŠBANŠUR TUR! pár-ši-ya-u-wa-aš “Eight small tables for (bread-)breaking” KUB 
42.85 rt. col. 9 (cult inv.), cf. Neu, GsKronasser 130. 
4' w. associated preverbs, postpositions, or adverbs — a' arha: nu NINDALABKA arha pár-ši-ia KBo 
15.34 ii 7 (rit., MH/NS); KBo 17.93:14 (rit. frag.), KBo 24.4 rev.! 16, KUB 10.63 vi 2 (fest., MH?/NS), ed. s.v. dninattanni-, KUB 39.71 i 26, ii 32 (rit. for IŠTAR-Pirinkir, NH), KUB 40.110 rev. 7, 8 (see 1 b, below), IBoT 1.29 obv. 48 (haššumaš fest., MH?/MS?), KUB 47.45 iii 8 (rit.), ed. ChS 1/2:331 (= 10), HT 1 i 60 (Zarpiya’s rit., MH/NS); cf. in broken context KUB 39.91:10, KUB 9.14:13, 14. 
b' awan arha: KBo 15.36 + KBo 21.61 ii 10 (rit., MH?/ MS?) (see 1 a 1', above), KBo 13.164 iv 6 (rit., NS) (see 1 a 3', above), KBo 13.181:15. 
c' awan katta: nu LÚAZU 1 NINDAmū¢
latin witeni awan katta pár-ši-ia n–an tagāi “The exorcist
n dabreaks one mulati-loaf alongside(?) the water and places it on the ground” KBo 5.2 ii 17-18 (MH/NS). 
d' peran: KUB 51.2 obv. 11. 

e' peran arha: nu LUGAL-uš NINDA a-a-an NINDA.KU‡.HI.A kue paršiya n–ašta hū
ma<n>daz peran arha tepu pár-ši-ia-an-na-i “What warm bread (and) sweet breads the king breaks, from all he keeps breaking off a little at the outset” KBo 30.69 iii 11-13, see peran a 2' a' and d 3 j'; KBo 24.41 iv 18 (temporal peran arha). 
f' šer: KUB 39.71 iv 2-4 (rit. for IŠTAR-Pirinkir, NH), w. dupl. KUB 32.1 iii 9-12. 

parš-B 

b. (said of countries, by analogy): NINDA. GUR›.RA GIM-an arha pár-ši[(-ya-nu-un LÚ. KÚR-ašš)a] KUR-e QA_TAMMA arha pár-ši-ya-andu “As I crumble this thick bread, so may they (sc. the gods) crumble the land of the enemy” KUB 
40.110 rev. 7-8. 
1	to break, disintegrate (intrans., mid.): (May the oath deities seize him who breaks the oath) n– aš–kan inanaš šer arha pár-ši-ia-ad-da-ru “and may he be completely broken by disease” KBo 6.34 i 38 (Soldiers’ Oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:8f. (= 44), 29; MUN-aš–ma–kan GIM-an hašši anda pár-ši-it-tari “Just as the salt disintegrates on the hearth …” ibid. ii 9-10, cf. ibid. ii 15-16; [teka]n pár-aš-ki-ta-ri ne[piš … pár-aš-ki-t]a-ri “the earth breaks, the sky breaks” KUB 41.19 i 15-16 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:94f. 
2	to violate (a boundary) (trans., mid.): takku A.ŠÀ-an ZAG-an kuiški pár-ši-ia “If someone violates the boundary of a field …” KBo 6.26 i 46 (Laws §168, OH/NS), ed. HG 76f., Imparati, Leggi 154f., tr. ANET 195, Hoffner, Diss. 106f., TUAT 1.1:118; (Formerly your ancestors were very careful about the matter of borders and roads) nu ZAG-an KASKAL-ann–a UL kuiški pár-aš-zi … nu mān ZAG-an kuiški páraš-zi nu dU-an genu(š)šuš dariyanuzi mān KAS~ KAL-an–ma kuiški [par-aš]-zi “No one violates a boundary or a road (for boundaries are the knees of the Stormgod and a road is his chest). If someone violates a boundary, he weakens(?) the Storm-god (in) his knees, if someone [viol]ates a road, (he weakens(?) the Stormgod (in) his chest)” KUB 

17.29 ii 10-12 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. SV 2:40 n. 1, Eichner, Heth.u.Idg. 47 (differently: “niemand wagt eine Grenze und einen Weg zu verletzen (wörtlich: ‘bricht, darf/will brechen’)”), Güterbock, Oriens 10:358 (“makes weary, sore, hurts” for dariyanu-), Laroche apud Bader, BSL 69:5f. w. n. 20 (tr. “rompre” (trans.) but treats it as the same verb as parš“s’enfuir” (intr.); he also suggests that parš(iya)- “briser, rompre, fendre” belongs to the same verb). 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 21-25, 65f.; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 139f.; Watkins, Idg.Gr. (1969) 102; Otten, StBoT 13 (1971) 39; Laroche apud Bader, BSL 69 (1974) 5f.; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 217f.; Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 53 n. 5 (vs duwar~ nai-); idem, Stammbildung (1979) 377, 519 (parš(iya)= “(Brot) entzweibrechen,” paršae-= “(Brot) zerbrückeln”). 

182

Cf. NINDAparša-, paršai-, paršanu-B, paršil(a)-, paršeššar, paršulai-, paršulli-, paršur. 
(NINDA)parša-n.; 1. a morsel or fragment, 2. (a kind of bread); from OS.† 
sg. nom. pár-ša-aš KUB 12.58 i 24, 25 (NH). acc. NINDApár-ša-an KUB 17.27 ii 19, 27 (MH?/NS), KUB 
20.75 ii 11 (NS), NINDApár-ša-a-an KUB 27.62 obv. 10 (NH). 
pl. acc. pár-šu-uš ABoT 35 obv. 8, KBo 20.22 left col. 10, KBo 25.58 ii 6 (all OS), KUB 27.64 i 8 (NH), NINDApár-šu-uš KUB 27.63 iv 11 (NH), KBo 23.93 i 12 (NS), NINDA.HI.Apáršu-uš KBo 29.133 iii 11, KBo 34.222 + KBo 29.133 iii 14. 
d.-l. NINDA.HI.Apár-≠ša±-aš KUB 27.63 iv 7 (NH), KBo 
34.222 + KBo 29.133 iii 13, NINDA.HI.Apár-ša-a-aš KUB 27.62 obv. 7 (NH). 
uncertain [… p]ár-ša-aš KBo 29.115 iv 7, NINDApár-ša-ax[…] KBo 24.28 iv 13. See also NINDApaš(š)a-. 
1. a morsel or fragment — a. (without det.): “Two priests sit in front of the taršanzipa-” nu 1 NINDA-≠an±? parši[yanta nu–]z 3 pár-šu-uš 2 G´N pē[ran katta tianzi] “They break one loaf and place down in front three morsels (of) two shekels (in weight)” ABoT 35 obv. 7-8 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:122; cf. 2 LÚ.MEŠSANGA tarš[anzipaš pēr]an ešanta nu 2 GIŠBANŠUR 2 NINDA [paršiyanta(?) (StBoT 25:129 restores tianzi) 3] pár-šu-uš 2 G´N pēran katta tia[nzi] KBo 25.58 ii 4-6 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:129f. 
□ the weight is normally expressed by either “x G´N/MA.NA [product]” “x shekels/minas …,” or “[product] ŠA x G´N/ MA.NA” “… of x shekels/minas”; for the construction without ŠA see KUB 34.87 obv. 14-22; ŠA NINDAwakkišar pár-šaaš [ŠA NINDAx?-] harnandaš pár-ša-aš ŠA NINDA. ÚKUŠ pár-ša-aš “a morsel of wageššar-bread, a morsel of leavened(?) bread, a morsel of cucumber bread” KUB 12.58 i 24-25 (Tunn., NH), ed. Tunn. 8f. (= 48-49), AlHeth 106. 
2. a kind of bread or cake (crumb cake?), always w. det.: 1 NA›girenniyašš–a [k]unnan 4 NINDAmulatiš 5 NINDA.SIG.MEŠ! ŠA GA.KIN.AG 
[o] NINDApár-šu-uš 2 DUGKUKUB GEŠTIN–ya 2 NINDAašhumā
i I[NA] É DINGIR-LIM pedanzi “They bring into the temple one bead of kirenni-stone, four mulati-breads, five thin breads of cheese, […] p.-breads/cakes, two pitchers of wine, (and) two ašhumāi-breads” KBo 23.93 i 11-13 (Kizz. rit.); note that NINDAp. is listed here w. other kinds of bread or cake, indicating that it denotes not just a crumb of any kind, but a specific 

paršai- b 
type of pastry; […] ANA NINDA.HI.A ≠pár±ša-aš menahhanda a[-…] nu–za–kan NINDA.HI.A páršu-uš iššī zikka[nzi] KBo 34.222 + KBo 29.133 iii 13-14; (The Old Woman kindles a fire) nu–kan wātar NINDApár-ša-an-na anda peššiyazzi “She throws the water and the p.-bread/cake into it (and speaks as follows)” KUB 17.27 ii 26-27 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347. 
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 9 (“crumbs”); idem, ANET (1969) 347 (“broken loaf”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 175; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 519 (“Brotbrocken”). 
Cf. parš(iya)-, paršulli-, paršulai-, paršur. 
paršahannaš see parzahannaš. 
paršai-v.; to break up into small pieces, crumble; from OH?/NS and MH/MS. 
pres. sg. 3 pár-ša-i-iz-zi KBo 17.105 ii 27 (MH/MS), párša-a-iz-zi KUB 15.34 i 27, iii 33 (MH/MS), KUB 34.78 i 9, KUB 45.47 iii 17 (both MS?), KUB 41.17 i 27 (NS), KUB 17.12 ii 10, 23 (NS), pár-ša-iz-zi KUB 10.91 iii 6 (NH?), KUB 20.75 ii 8 (NS). 
pl. 3 pár-ša-a-an-zi KUB 25.14 iv 9 (OH?/NS), KBo 
16.100:16 (NS), pár-ša-an-zi KBo 2.8 iii 21 (NH), KUB 44.1 rev. 5 (Tudh. IV), KUB 25.49 iii (14) (NS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pár-ša-a-an KUB 15.34 iii 44 (MH/MS), KBo 19.128 iii 21 (OH?/NS), KUB 17.12 iii 27 (NS), KUB 29.4 iii 64 (NH), KBo 29.89 iv 21. 
	a. obj. NINDA.GUR›.RA “thick-bread”: 1 NIN~ DA.GUR›.RA paršiyazi n–an–[k]an ANA KAŠ anda pár-[š]a-an-zi “(The MUNUSpalwatallaš) breaks one thick loaf and crumbles it into beer” KBo 2.8 iii 20-21 (cult inv., NH). 
	b. obj. NINDA.SIG “thin-bread”: nu 7 NINDA. SIG [MUNUStaprit]aššiš ´DAlta paršiya [n–at–kan] ´D-i anda pár-š[a-a]n-zi “The woman who carries the tabri breaks seven thin loaves for the river Alta and crumbles [them] into the river” KUB 25.49 iii 1214 (EZEN hišuwaš, NS); namma 1 <(NINDA)>.SIG paršiya šer–a–ššan NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A dāi n–[a]t KASKAL.MEŠ-aš pe[(r)]an katta dāi 1 NINDA. SIG arha pár-ša-a-iz-z[i] n–at–šan KASKAL-ši [(iš)]huwāi “Then he breaks a thin bread, puts a fat cake on top, and places it down in front of the road. He crumbles one thin bread and pours/scatters it on the road” KUB 15.34 i 26-28 (evocation, MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 15.33b i 26-28, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:184f., cf. parš- B, paršiya-; cf. also KUB 15.34 iii 31-33. 

183

	c. obj. NINDA.KU‡ “sweet-bread, cake”: nu 1 NINDA.KU‡ TUR MUNUS ŠU.GI dāi n–an–za– kan kiššarī pár-ša-i-iz-zi n–an IŠTU ‰.UDU šalkizzi n–an NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A iēzzi “The Old Woman takes one small sweet loaf and crumbles it in her own hand; (then) she kneads it and makes it into NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A” KBo 17.105 ii 26-28 (incant. rit., MH/ MS). 
	d. other NINDA “breads”: [1 NINDA o]-x-ma kuin šeppit [par]šiyanniškanzi [n]–an–kan ANA DUGÚTUL ‰.NUN GA–ya [a]nda pár-ša-a-an-zi “The barley loaf which they break they crumble into a bowl of ghee and milk (and make it into NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A)” KUB 25.14 iv 6-9 (nuntarriyašhaš fest., OH?/NS); similarly in KUB 17.12 ii 22-23 (NS); see also f 3', below. 
	e. NINDA.GUR›.RA GA.KIN.AG “cheesebread or loaf of cheese” (cf. AlHeth 121f.): EGIR-ŠU 7 NINDA.GUR›.RA GA.KIN.AG ANA TÚL par~ šiya nu–kan NINDA.GUR›.RA GA.KIN.AG TÚL-i anda pár-ša-iz-zi “Afterward he breaks seven cheese loaves for the spring and crumbles the cheese loaves into the spring” KUB 10.91 iii 5-6 (fest., NH?). 

f. associated preverbs, postpositions, or adverbs 
— 1' anda: KBo 2.8 iii 21, KUB 20.75 ii 8, KUB 25.14 iv 9 (OH?/NS) (cf. d, above), KUB 41.17 i 27, KUB 10.91 iii 6 (e, above), KUB 25.49 iii 14 (b, above). 
2' arha: (pár-ša-a-an) KBo 19.128 iii 21; (pár-šaa-iz-zi) KUB 15.34 i 27 (b, above), iii 33, KUB 17.12 ii (4), 10, KUB 45.47 iii 17. 
3' katta: […]x ta mā
n (var. [da]main) NINDA EMÙU katta pár-ša-a-an [harzi] KUB 29.89 iv 21 (+ KBo 24.24 iv 24) (šahhan fest.), w. dupl. KBo 24.37 (+) KBo 
29.91 iv 5-6. 
The verb parš(iya)- has both the meaning “to break (into several large pieces)” and “to crumble, break (into many small pieces),” while paršai- has only the second meaning. 
Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 377, 519 (correctly separates this stem from parš-B/paršiya- w. the meaning “zerbröckeln”). 
Cf. parš-B/paršiya-. 
paršayašši-see maššayašši-. 

paršana- a 1' 

paršana-n.; leopard; wr. syll. and P‰RIG.TUR; from OS. 
sg. nom. pár-š[a-an-aš] KBo 1.52:8 (NS), P‰RIG.TUR-aš KUB 29.1 i 29 (OH/NS), KUB 25.51 i 2 (NS). 
gen. P‰RIG.TUR-aš KBo 21.22:13 (OH/MS), pár-ša-na-aš KUB 21.1 ii 43 (OH/NS), KUB 29.1 ii 43 (OH/NS). 
d.-l. ANA P‰RIG.TUR KBo 20.33 obv. 14 (OS). 
pl. nom. pár-ša-né-eš KBo 21.22:38 (OH/MS), P‰RIG. TUR.HI.A KBo 23.55 i 10 (NS). 
case uncertain pár-ša-na-aš KBo 3.8 iii 9 (NH), P‰RIG. TUR-aš-ša ibid. iii 27. 
fragmentary pár-ša-na[-…] KBo 17.39:4. 
pár-ša-na-aš KBo 3.8 iii 9 alternates w. P‰RIG.TUR-aš-ša ibid. iii 27, P‰RIG.TUR-aš KUB 29.1 i 29 w. pár-ša-na-aš ibid. ii 43. 
(Sum. pronunciation) ni-ib = (Sum.) PIRIGZKAL = (Akk.) ni-im-ru = (Hitt.) pár-š[a-na-aš] KBo 1.52 obv. 8 (Sa Voc. L), ed. MSL 3:63, rest. following Friedrich apud Landsberger, Fauna 76 n. 2. 
a. In myths, rituals, festivals, and lists of materials — 1' live animals or persons imitating them: “The stag (DÀRA.MAŠ) was bound under the eyan-tree” pár-ša-na-aš tašša<u>i pedi hamikta<t> … P‰RIG.TUR-aš-ša [dašša]wi pedi lāddat “the leopard was bound in a strong place; (the wolf was bound in a high place; … the stag under the eyantree was released;) the leopard in the strong place was released; (the wolf in the high place was released)” KBo 3.8 iii 9-10, 27-28 (myth in rit., NH), ed. Collins, Diss. 49f., Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:157, 159 (“Panther”) 
□ this text has many irregularities in grammatical agreement and a confusion between act. and pass. pár-ša-na-aš (iii 9) could be pl. acc. in form, if p. is the object, or sg. nom., if it is the subject; P‰RIG.TUR-aš-ša appears to be sg. nom. + conj. –a, but elsewhere in the list the text uses asyndeton, as pointed out by Stefanini, AGI 54:154f. (he suggests –šša<n>, like ulipzaššan iii 28, zamnišan iii 11); cf. also Neu, StBoT 5:38 n. 2; we follow la-6 c, where hamikta<t> is interpreted as passive, and all the nouns are subjects of passive verbs. Pictorial evidence on the Schimmel rhyton relevant to the stag under the eya-tree is cited in Alp, Tempel 93-100, Güterbock, Anadolu 22:1-5, and HW2 2:23b; “You (sc. the trees) grow under the sky” UR.MAH-aš<–šmaš> kattan šeškit P‰RIG.TUR-aš–šmaš kattan šeškit “The lion would sleep beneath <you>; the leopard would sleep beneath you” KUB 29.1 i 28-29 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 26, Marazzi VO 5:117-169, Collins, Diss. 51f., tr. ANET 357; “Go to the funeral pyres and bring 

184

a kinupi-vessel” kinupi–ma–ššan anda ŠA UR. MAH šešai pár-ša-na-aš UZUšišai šumumah n–at hark n–at tarup n–at 1-EN iya n–at LÚ-aš ŠÀ–ši peda nu LUGAL-waš ZI-aš kardi–šši–ya taruptaru “šumumah-in the kinupi-vessel, the šišai of the lion, and the šišai of the leopard — hold them, join them, make them one, and bring them to the heart of the man; and let the king’s soul be joined to his heart also” KUB 29.1 ii 42-46, ed. Kellerman, Diss. 15, 28, Starke, ZA 69:88f. w. n. 89, Collins, Diss. 53f., tr. Goetze, ANET 357; […] P‰RIG.TUR kuit kunan harzi “… because he has killed a leopard” KUB 44.61 rev. 14 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 19:20f.; nu P‰RIG.TUR-aš uizzi “A leopard(-man) comes (and a miniya-man follows him. He holds a bow of the goddess and takes his stand (tiyazi) before the goddess; the cupbearer gives to them a drink, and they bow)” KUB 25.51 i 2 (fest. of Tetešhabi), ed. Haas, UF 13:108, Collins, Diss. 76, cf. LÚmeneya-a. 
2' leopard skin: KUŠ P‰RIG.TUR KUŠ UR. MAH KUŠ ŠAH.GIŠ.GI [… KUŠ DÀ]RA.MAŠ udanzi “They bring a leopard skin, a lion skin, a reed-pig skin, […], a deer [skin]” KBo 25.180 rev.? 34 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. Collins, Diss. 22, translit. StBoT 28:97, cf. StBoT 27:92; cf. KBo 26.157 i 4. 
3' leopard’s head: (In a list of weapons, garments, furniture, pottery, and wicker work) 1 SAG. DU UR.MAH 1 SAG.DU P‰RIG.TUR “one lion’s head, one leopard’s head” KUB 28.87 rev. 7 (rit.), cf. Collins, Diss. 36 n. 126. 
	b. in historical texts: [(šaniya šiwat)] 2 UR. MAH 70 ŠAH.HI.A 60 ŠAH.GIŠ.GI! [(120 AZ. HI.A L)]U P‰RIG.TUR LU UR.MAH.HI.A LU DÀRA.MAŠ LU DÀRA U LU [… (UR)]UNeša ANA URU–YA udahhun “The same day I brought to Neša, my city, two lions, seventy hogs, sixty ‘reedpigs,’ one hundred twenty wild animals(?), whether leopards, lions, stags, mountain goats, or […-s]” KUB 26.71 i 8-10 (Anitta, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.22 rev. 6063 (OS), ed. StBoT 18:14f. (= 60-63), cf. Collins, Diss. 99 and Hoffner, JIES (forthcoming). 
	c. representations: (Describing a fountain of the Sungod:) n–at pár-ša-ni-eš pā

hšanta “and the leopards guard it” KBo 21.22 rev. 38 (benedictions for Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi2 46, 48, Collins, Diss. 78; 

*paršanatar 
nu DINGIR.MEŠ-naš [hu]itar P‰RIG.TUR KÙ. BABBAR UR.MAH KÙ.GI [ŠA]H.GIŠ.GI KÙ. BABBAR ŠAH.GIŠ.GI NA›ZA.G‰N [A]Z KÙ. BABBAR uwanzi nu–za ITTI DÀRA<.MAŠ>.HI.A AŠAR–ŠUNU appanzi “The [an]imals of the gods arrive: leopard of silver, lion of gold, ‘reed-pig’ of silver, ‘reed-pig’ of lapis lazuli, [be]ar of silver, and they take their place with the stags” KBo 10.25 vi 4-8 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. Starke, ZA 69:79f., Haas, UF 13:107, Collins, Diss. 21f., translit. StBoT 28:52, cf. StBoT 27:75; cf. KBo 10.23 v 16; 2 P‰RIG.TUR 4 G‰R.MEŠ GUB-a[nteš] “two leopards standing on all fours” KUB 42.69 rev. 12 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:118; cf. KBo 18.167 rev. 7; IŠTU É dInar [hui]tar KÙ. BABBAR udanzi 1 hupar GEŠTIN ANA P‰RIG. TUR 1 hupar GEŠTIN ANA ŠAH.NITA lahuanzi “From the temple of Inar, they bring the [ani]mals of silver. They libate one hupar-vessel of wine to the leopard and 1 hupar-vessel of wine to the boar” KBo 20.33 obv. 13-15 (rit., OS), ed. Haas, UF 13:107, Collins, Diss. 74, translit. StBoT 25:53f.; here? […KU]Škuršaš P‰RIG.TUR UR.MAH […] pē harkanzi KUB 11.21 ii 5-6 (fest. frag.). 
pár-ša-na-a-an harzi KBo 17.15 obv.? 16, w. dupl. KBo 17.40 iv 10 certainly belongs to paršnai-; cf. ed. Haas/Wäfler, UF 8:82f. who tr. “hat sich … hingehockt” but consider on page 83 n. 74 the possibility “er hält einen Leoparden.” 
Friedrich apud Landsberger, Fauna (1934) 76 n. 2; idem, HW (1952-55) 163 (“Panther, Leopard”); Goetze, JCS 16 (1962) 29 (“small bear”); Ertem, Fauna (1965) 147f. (“pars”; references); Haas, UF 13 (1981) 104-111 (pictorial and textual evidence); Ardzinba, Ritualy (1982) 105f.; Collins, Diss. (1989) 68-78; de Martino, La Danza (1989) 46. 
Cf. *paršanatar, paršanili, LÚparšna-/LÚparšana-. 
LÚparšana-see LÚparšna-B. 
paršanai-see paršnai-. 
*paršanatar n. neut.; quality of a leopard; wr. P‰RIG.TUR-tar.† 
[…]x-tar–šet x[…] / […]x-tar–šet P‰RIG.TURtar-š[e-et …] / […]x-tar–šet x[…] KBo 22.42 obv.? 5-7 (frag., MS?). Although the nouns in -atar occasionally mean “an image of (e.g., DINGIR-LIM-niyatar, 
185

UR.MAH-tar), the frag. seems to be part of a laudatory description of someone (a god or hero) characterized by impressive deeds (kuiš and iter. or durative verb forms) and a list of qualities. 
Cf. paršana-. 
paršanili, paršnili adv.; in the manner of a leopard (i.e., dressed in leopard skins or representing leopards); OH/NS.† 
pár-ša-ni-li KBo 10.23 iii 3' (OH/NS), pár-aš-ni-li KBo 
33.41:5 (NS), perhaps pár<-aš?>-ni-li KBo 29.82 iv 5. 
nu–kan pedi–[šš]i wehantari nu pár-ša-ni-li tarweškan[zi] “They (i.e., the LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·) whirl on the spot and they dance dressed in leopard skins. (They hold their hands up and shout [pal~ wai-])” KBo 10.23 iii 1'-3' (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. Haas, UF 13:108, Collins, Diss. 75, translit. StBoT 28:12, cf. ibid. p. 59, Oettinger, Stammbildung 226 (differently: “sie toben wie Panther”), quoted also in KBo 33 p. V No. 41; [LÚ].MEŠA~ LAN.ZU· A[-…] / [T]ÚG.GÚ.È.A GÙN.A [waššan harkanzi?] § [nu?] kē pár-aš-ni-li tar-ú[-i-eš-kánzi?] / [k]ē–ma GIŠŠÀ.A.TAR.HI.A ha[zzikanzi] “[…] the performers [… wear(?)] colorful clothes. § Some dance dressed in leopard skins, others play ŠÀ.A.TAR-instruments” KBo 33.41:3-6 (fest. frag., NS); somewhat parallel in a general way is KBo 4.9 i 42-44; perhaps here KBo 14.95 iv! 4-5 (+) KBo 29.82 iv 5-6 (witaššiyaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 14.93 iv 2-3, for which see parnili-. 
Goetze, JCS 16:29, translated UG.TUR/P‰RIG. TUR as “small bear,” arguing from KBo 10.23 iii 1'-3' that leopards do not dance. But paršanili does not necessarily imply that the animal in question dances. The probable subjects in both passages are the LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU·. They may have worn animal masks (for which see Jakob-Rost, Or NS 35:420-422, and Haas, Berggötter 39f.). Note also LÚ P‰RIG.TUR Bo 6594 i? 11 (StBoT 25:99). Humans dancing in leopard skins are known in Anatolia as early as Çatal Hüyük (Mellaart, Çatal Hüyük 174 and pls. 61-62). In the listed examples of -ili in EHS 1:359-360 there are several other exx. of -ili adverbs derived from animal names, which favors the idea that parš(a)nili derives from paršana-“leopard.” The theory proposed by Güterbock (apud Singer, StBoT 27:59 n. 21), that “to dance paršanili” was to dance in a squat

paršanu- A 

ting position, would still be a possibility, particularly if the emendation of KBo 14.95 iv! 4-5 (+) KBo 
29.82 iv 5-6 proposed under parnili is correct. 
Friedrich, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 20; Collins, Diss. (1989) 74-76, 303f. 
Cf. paršana-. 
paršantai-v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pres. sg. 3 pár-ša-an-ta-iz-zi KBo 21.20 rev. 13 (NH). 
§ “I do as follows” ANA PA_N dAN ≠x±[…] / ZÚ. LUM ANA Z´D.DA ≠x x x± mena-[…] / KAŠ-eššar šippanti GIŠ?iya[-…] / pár-ša-an-ta-iz-zi ≠x x x± eninu-x[- …] / lukišΩi “Before the Skygod of […]city […] dates into flour […] … […] he libates beer. A wooden(?) […] he paršantai-s. … […] it dawns” KBo 21.20 rev. 10-14 (med. rit., NH), translit. StBoT 

19:44. 

Burde, StBoT 19 (1974) 44, 70. 
Cf. paršantinu-. 
paršantinu-v.; (mng. unkn.); OH/NS.† 
nu GEŠTIN paššūilašš–a wātar šippanti [nu– kan? ap]ū
n antuhšan pár-ša-an-ti-nu-ši nu kiššan memai “He/she libates wine and paššuilaš-water. You will p. that person. He/she speaks as follows” KUB 4.47 rev. 30-31 (rit. against insomnia, OH/NS) □ the change to pres. sg. 2 appears awkward here. 
Cf. paršantai-. 
paršanu-A v.; to make flee, chase away; NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 pár-aš-ša-nu-ut KUB 23.91:6; pl. 3 pár-ša-nu-ir KBo 19.76 i 22 (Murš. II). 
uncertain whether p. A or B: pa-ar-ša-nu-ut KUB 32.121 ii 31. 
(The inhabitants of Šunupašši and Pittagalaišša brought the message to the people of Malazziya) nu–kan LÚ.KÚR UL pár-ša-nu-ir “but they did not chase away the enemy” KBo 19.76 i 22 (ann., Murš. II), tr. Otten, AfO 22:113 (w. join KUB 14.20); “He sent Wattanta and Kuwagulli” nu–wa–kan KUR-TIM páraš-š[a-nu]-ut … nu–wa–kan apāt[t–a]ya pár-aš-šanu-ut “He made the land flee … and he made that (land) also flee” KUB 23.91:5-6 (dep., NH). 
Cf. parš- A. 

186

paršanu-B v.; to break up, (w. arha) break open; NS.† 
pret. sg. 3 ≠pár-ša±-nu-ut KUB 33.120 ii 36 (NS), pa-ar-šanu-ut KUB 32.121 ii 31. 
uncertain whether p. A or B: pa-ar-ša-nu-ut KUB 32.121 ii 31. 
iter. pres. pl. 3 pár-aš-ša-nu-uš-kán-zi KUB 36.12 iii 10 (NS). 
“May they call forth the thunderstorms” kueuš– kan ANA 90 IKU NA›peruni[š] pár-aš-ša-nu-uš-kánzi 8 ME–ma waššanzi heuš IM.MEŠ-uš halziyandu “May they call forth the rains and winds that break up the rocks for ninety IKU-measures and (that) cover (them) for eight hundred (IKU-measures)” KUB 36.12 iii 9-11 (Ullik., NH), ed. Ullik. JCS 6:14f., see comment ibid. 40f., tr. Hittite Myths 56; cf. ≠NA›?±-an–war– an ≠GIM?±-an ≠pár-ša±-nu-ut KUB 33.120 ii 36, ed. Kum. 38, tr. Hittite Myths 41; (in a description of a dream:) šarā
–aš–kan uit / […]-uš nu taganzipan arha / […] mahhan pa-ar-ša-nu-ut “(Someone or -thing) came up, […-ed], and broke the earth open like a […]” KUB 32.121 ii 29-31 (rit. frag.). 
Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 38 (“zerkleinern (?)”); idem, JCS 6 (1952) 33 (“break”). 

Cf. parš-B. 

[paršaza-] For [G]UD?pár-ša-za-an-na 438/s ii 4, ed. Alp, Tempel 146f., D. Yoshida, BMECCJ 6:122f. read [GU]D pár-ša-ha!-an-na<-aš> and see parza~ hannaš. 

parši(ya)-v.; see parš-B. 

[TÚGparšiya-] n.; (a garment), thus translit. by Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:353 (“Rock”), is to be read TÚGmaššiya-, q.v. 
[…] pár-ši-ia-nu-uš […] in KBo 24.88:4 could be a pret. sg. 2 of paršiyanu- or, despite the lack of word space, paršiya n–uš[…]. 
paršil(a)-n.; a fragment (of bread)(?); OH/NS.† 

pl. acc. pár-ši-la-aš KBo 11.32 obv. 12. 

2 NINDA.GUR›.RA hazila[š ?] pár-ši-la-aš paršiya “He breaks two thick breads weighing a hazila into fragments(?)” KBo 11.32 obv. 12 (fest. of netherworld deities, OH/NS). 

parše/ina-
Cf. parš-B. 
parše/ina-, paršna-A n. com.; cheek, buttock, loins, male sexual parts; from OH/NS.† 
sg. d.-l. pár-ši-ni KBo 13.34 iv 7 (MH?/NS). 
pl. nom. pár-še-e-nu-uš KBo 26.139:6. 
acc. pár-še-e-n[u-uš] KBo 13.34 iv 21 (MH?/NS), pár-šenu-š(u-uš) KBo 13.34 iv 15 (MH?/NS), pár-ši-nu-uš KUB 
33.120 i 25 (NS). gen. pár-aš-na-aš KUB 35.148 iii 27 (OH/NS). d.-l. pár-še-na-aš KUB 43.59 i 17 (NH). unclear pár-še-na-aš-ša KBo 30.156 iv 4. 
takku MUNUS-za hāši nu–šši [ZA]G-an GEŠ~ TU–ŠU pár-še-nu-šu-uš [m]anninkuwan kit[t]a[ri] “If a woman gives birth, and (of the offspring) its [ri]ght ear lie[s] near its cheeks” KBo 13.34 iv 14-16 (teratological omen, MH?/NS), ed. StBoT 9:28f., cf. ibid. iv 2022 □ the Akk. forerunner of this omen probably read uzun imit~ tišu ina letišu t¬ehât, “its right ear approaches its cheek,” see StBoT 9:31; takku MUNUS-za hāši nu–šš[i GEŠTU. HI.A–ŠU] pár-ši-ni-ši kittar[i] KBo 13.34 iv 6f.; (Kumarbi pulled Anu down from heaven) pár-ši-nu-uššu-uš wakkiš LÚ-natar–šet–kan ANA dKumarbi ŠÀ–ŠU anda ZABAR mān ulišta “He bit off his sexual parts, and his manhood fused/united with Kumarbi’s insides like (copper and tin fuse to make) bronze” (A jubilantly mocking Kumarbi is then informed that his act has resulted in his impregnation with three deities) KUB 33.120 i 25-26 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), tr. Hittite Myths 40 §5 (“loins”), Goetze, ANET 120 □ Forrer, FsCumont 692 tr. “Knien?,” followed by Güterbock, ZA 44:91 n. 4, and Kumarbi 35, who proposed to emend here to gi!-nu-uš-šu-uš, a suggestion apparently accepted by Goetze, ANET 120. Otten, KUB XXXIII, p. iv, already questioned this emendation, and was supported by Sommer, ArOr 17:376. Further evidence now available for the existence of the word paršina- indicates that the latter view is correct; arraš–šaš inan … genuwaš–šaš inan … páraš-na-aš-ša-aš inan “(Let the puppy lick away) the sickness of his anus, … sickness of his knees, … sickness of his buttocks/sexual parts” KUB 35.148 iii 25-27 (rit., OH/NS); kalulup[uš] … pár-še-e-nu-uš “toe[s] … ‘cheeks’” KBo 26.139:5-6 (myth?). 
While a part of the body is clearly indicated in each of these passages, it is difficult to derive a single meaning that fits all. The teratological omen translation suggests an equation w. Akk. lētu, 
187

“cheek,” but this can hardly be the meaning of paršina- in the other contexts. Its appearance in anatomical lists in the company of “anus” and “knees” in one case, and “toes” in another, along 
w. its use as an apparent euphemism for “sexual parts” in the mythological text, strongly indicates a location in the lower part of the body. Rather than postulate scribal confusion of two different words (see Riemschneider, StBoT 9:36f.), it seems best to understand a semantic development similar to that undergone by English “cheek” and German “Backe.” In both of these cases a word originally signifying “cheek” progressed to the meaning “buttock” (German “Hinterbacke”). 
Sommer, ArOr 17 (1949) 375-78 (“Lende(n), Oberschenkel”); Riemschneider, StBoT 9 (1970) 36f. (“Wange”); Oettinger, GsKronasser (1982) 172 n. 40 (“(Hinter)backe” w. denom. paršnae-). 
Cf. paršnai-. 
[TÚGpár-ši-na] KBo 18.175 i 8 is to be read TÚGmašši-aš BABBAR, q.v. 
paršeššar n.; crack, crevice.† 
(Sum.) […] = (Akk.) né-en-giﬁ-≈a-at i-gaﬁ-a-ri = (Hitt.) kuut-ta-aš pár-še-eš-šar “crack in a wall” / (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) né-en-giﬁ-≈a-at qa-aq-qa-ri = (Hitt.) KI-aš pár-še-eš-šar “crack in the ground” KBo 13.1 rev. 10-11 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. StBoT 7:19, 21, and CAD s.v. nigi≈≈u. 
Cf. parš-B. 
paršiul see (NINDA)paršulli-. 
paršna-A see parše/ina-. 
LÚparšna-B, LÚparšana-n. com.; “leopardman” (a cult functionary who imitates a leopard); wr. syll. and LÚ P´RIG.TUR; from OS.† 
sg. nom. LÚpár-aš-na-aš Bo 6594 i? 12 (StBoT 25:99, OS), <LÚ>P‰RIG.TUR-aš KUB 25.51 i 2(?); (free-standing) gen. LÚpár-aš-ša-na-aš KBo 25.48 ii 10 (NS); acc. LÚpár-aš-na-an KBo 19.163 i 21 (OH/NS). 
“The NIN.DINGIR [goes] to the arzana-house. ‘To the inner room’ [is] call[ed] out” [NIN. DINGIR-aš] / parā uizzi n–aš dA_n-x[… 13? LÚ.MEŠhāpieš URUHatti] / EGIR-ŠU išgaranteš mān– u[š(?) …] / LÚ P´RIG.TUR-an šarā HUR.SAG-a 

LÚparšna-B 

par[hanzi(?) nu kuitman(?) …] / nawi ari LÚpár-ašna-aš-t[a …] “[The NIN.DINGIR] comes out (of the arzana-house) and she […-s] dAn[-…. 13(?) hapiya-men of Hatti/Hattuša] are lined up behind her (i.e., the NIN.DINGIR). When [she(?) …-s] them (i.e., the hapiya-men), they dr[ive(?)] the ‘leopard-man’ up into the mountain. And [be]fore […] (he/she) arrives, the ‘leopard-man’ […-s]” Bo 6594 i? 8-12 (fest. of Tetešhawi, OS), translit. StBoT 25:99, cf. StBoT 23:30, 34, 141, 155, Haas, UF 13:109; for the restoration of line 10 see KBo 25.41 + KBo 30.114 obv. 4; [tu]n~ nakkišna halziya [DU]MU.MEŠ É.GAL-TIM / [GAL LÚ.]MEŠhapiya LÚhapiyan t[an¢] ped¢[aš] / [LÚ GIŠ]GIDRU-an LÚpár-aš-na-an LÚSANGA dTe≠teš~ h±[awipí] / [LÚm]iniyan LÚ.[G]´R <ašešanzi> LÚšerhalaš arta “There is a summons to the inner room. <They seat> the palace servants, the [Chief] of the hapiya-men, the second-in-command hapiyaman, the staffbearer, the leopard-man, the priest of Tetešhawi, the miniya-man, and the knife man. The šerhala-man stands up” KBo 19.163 i 19-22 (fest. of Tetešhawi, OH/NS) □ Otten (KBo 19) allowed too little space to the left edge in his copy of lines i 15-25; restorations are based upon parallel passages in KBo 19.163 ii 28-30, iv 1-3, and KBo 25.48 ii 9-11 (see below); [D]UMU.MEŠ É.GAL ašešanzi GAL LÚ.MEŠhapiya LÚtan pe[daš] / [LÚ GI]Š[GID]RU LÚpár-aš-ša-na-aš LÚSANGA dTeteš~ hawipí / [LÚmin]iyan LÚšerhalan ašešanz[i] “They seat the palace servants. They seat the Chief of the hapiya-Men, the second-in-command, the staff-bearer, the leopard-man, the priest of Tetešhawi, the miniya-man, and the šerhala-man” KBo 25.48 ii 9-11 (fest. of Tetešhawi, NS) in broken context. In this passage both LÚtan pe[daš] and LÚparaššanaš are syntactically direct objects, but formally free-standing genitives, i.e., they should be translated “him of the second place” and “him of the p.” We interpret the LÚ as a determinative, rather than a logogram (= pešna-), because it is omissible in the case of (LÚ)tan pedaš. That the title is thus proven to mean “he/him of the p.” strengthens the case that the man is named after the p.-animal, i.e., the leopard. Possibly also in nu <LÚ>P‰RIG.TURaš uizzi … KUB 25.51 i 2, on which see paršana-a 1. 
This functionary is attested only three or four times, always in fragmentary passages of the Festival for Tetešhawi (CTH 738). Due to the difference in the type of contexts in which they appear, 

188

LÚparšna- is probably to be kept apart from (LÚ)paršnauwaš, “(cupbearer) of squatting,” for which see paršnai-. Although paršana- “leopard” is elsewhere consistently spelled pár-ša-…, not pár-aš-…, Neu, StBoT 26:139, and Pecchioli Daddi, Hethitica 8:364f., 375 n. 48, are probably right to see LÚparšna-as the “leopard man” (LÚ P‰RIG.TUR). Note also that in Bo 6594 i? 10-12, where LÚP‰RIG. TUR-an and p. occur in the same immediate context, it is possible to consider them the same person, but certainly not to prove this conclusively. 
Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 252; Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 139; Pecchioli Daddi, Hethitica 8 (1987) 364f., 375 n. 48; Collins, Diss. (1989) 303f. 

Cf. paršana-, paršanili. 

paršnai-, paršanai-v. act.; to squat, crouch; from OH/MS. 
pres. sg. 3 pár-ša-na-a-iz-zi KBo 23.55 i 23, KUB 25.37 ii 23 (NS), pár-ša!-na-iz-zi KUB 59.32 iii? 13 (Haas, KN 313), pár-aš-na-a-iz-zi KUB 20.11 ii 10 (OH/MS?), KUB 10.7:11, KUB 25.16 ii (51) (OH/NS), KUB 56.54 rev. 9, pár-aš-na-iz-zi KBo 4.9 v 8 (OH?/NS), KUB 25.1 v 58. 
pl. 3 pár-ša-na-a-[an-zi] KBo 24.97 i 6, pár-ša-na!-an-zi KUB 11.32 + KUB 20.17 ii 9 (OH?/NS), pár-aš-na-a-an-zi KUB 10.54 iii 5, KUB 20.28 ii 11 (both OH/NS), KUB 11.24 vi 11, 15, KBo 11.37 obv. 6, 9, KUB 41.44 i 15, pár-aš-na-an-zi KUB 10.54 iii 2, KUB 20.28 ii 8 (both OH/NS), KBo 4.9 iv 44, v 2 (OH?/NS), KBo 21.94 ii 4, KUB 11.13 ii 14, KUB 28.95 iii 7 (NS), KUB 44.30:4, pár-aš-ša-na-an-zi KBo 27.42 ii (3), 15, iii 20 (OH/NS). 
part. sg. neut. nom.-acc. pár-ša-na-a-an KBo 17.40 iv 10, KBo 24.97 obv. (6) (both OH/MS?), pár-ša-na-an KUB 59.8 v 16, pár-aš-ša-n[a-an] KBo 8.121:11, pár-aš-na-a-an KUB 10.21 iii 21, KUB 11.16 iii 5 (both OH/NS), pár-aš-na-an KUB 10.21 ii 24, 26, KUB 11.16 iii 8, KUB 41.40 i 11 (all OH/NS), KBo 
4.9 vi 7, 10 (OH?/NS), KBo 13.177 i 15 (NH?), KUB 25.1 vi 
12. d.-l. pár-aš-na-«u-wa-»an-ti KUB 25.1 vi 3. pl. nom. com. pár-aš-na-a-an-te-eš KUB 2.3 ii 16 (OH/NS), 
KBo 11.38 vi (7), 12 (NS), pár-aš-na-an-te-eš KUB 25.1 ii 4, pár-aš-ša-na-an-te-eš KUB 25.1 ii 8, pár-aš-ša-<na->an-te-eš KBo 27.42 iii 15 (OH/NS). 
verbal subst. gen. pár-ša-na-a-u-wa-aš KUB 1.17 i 1 (OH/ NS), KBo 23.76 ii 11, (16), KUB 44.9 iii 9, iv 5, pár-ša-na-a-u-aš KUB 11.34 i 53 (pre-NH/MS?), pár-ša-na-u-wa-aš KUB 
20.78 iii 8, 27, [ pá]r-ša-na-wa-aš KBo 30.182 iv 13, pár-aš-ša-na-a-u-wa-aš KBo 20.67 i 16 (pre-NH/NS), pár-aš-ša-na-u-wa-aš KBo 25.173 i 4, pár-aš-ša-na-u-aš KBo 27.42 iv 8 (OH/NS), pár-aš-na-a-u-wa-aš KUB 1.17 ii 16, iii 46 (OH/NS), KUB 
25.17 vi 10 (OH?/NS), KBo 9.105:(10), KBo 11.28 ii 18, 31, iii 

paršnai
6, 15, 24, etc. (MH/NS), KUB 28.101 iv 4, KUB 46.4 i 23, pár-aš-na-a-u-aš KUB 20.11 ii 14 (OH/MS?), KBo 10.26 v 6, KUB 
1	 v 17, vi 39, 45, KUB 2.3 i 13, 24 (all OH/NS), KBo 14.31:1, IBoT 2.89 ii 9, pár-aš-na-a-wa-aš KBo 20.67 ii 53, 64 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 20.26 i (2), (11)? (MH/NS), pár-aš-na-u-wa-aš KBo 11.30 rev. 15, KUB 10.40 iii 1, iv 6, KUB 11.16 iv 12, KUB 20.28 iv 7, v 21, KBo 10.25 ii 4 (all OH/NS), KUB 
2	 i 1, 6, ii 19, KUB 28.101 iv 11, pár-aš-na-u-aš KUB 20.28 iii 1, KUB 25.6 iii 21, 28, iv 4, 18, v (15) (both OH/NS), KUB 

10.14 i 8, KUB 25.12 v 10, IBoT 2.16 rev. 5, pár-aš-na-wa-aš KUB 10.89 i 36, ii 11, 26 (OH/NS), KBo 14.32 v (1), KUB 
41.42 iii 9, IBoT 3.4 ii (3). 
nu LÚSAGI kuiš hašši tapušza pár-aš-na-an harzi t–aš šarā tīyazi t–aš LUGAL-i UŠKEN^“And the cupbearer who had squatted beside the brazier, stands up, and does obeisance to the king” KUB 25.1 vi 11-15 (ANDAHŠUM fest.); DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL–ma hūmanteš pár-aš-na-an-zi ta–kkan 3 LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI anda uwanzi tā GÙB-laza NINDAšaramnaš awan kat~ ta pár-aš-na-a-an-zi “All the palace functionaries squat. Then three guardsmen come in, and they squat on the left below the šaramna-loaves” KUB 
20.28 ii 7-11 (fest., OH/NS); mān–ašta LUGAL-uš GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-az uizzi t–aš tiyazi GUNNI-aš kattan marnuwandaš lūliya 2 LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· nekumanteš lūli–kan anda pár-aš-na-a-an-te-eš 
“When the king comes out of the tent, and he steps near the brazier to a vat of marnuwan-beer, two performers are squatting naked inside the vat” KUB 
2.3 ii 11-16 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:64; (A cupbearer performs a dance together with another man, who grasps his šeknu-garment) [m]ahhan–ma 3-ŠU we[h]anzi nu LÚSAGI katta pár-ša-na-a-iz-zi išk[i]ša–ma–an kuiš EGIR-an harzi n–an–kan TÚGšiknu[a]z–pat anda SAG.DU–SU kariyazi [L]ÚSA[GI–ma]–kan GIŠhuhupal ANA G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU [GUL-ahz]i “[W]hen he whirls three times, then the cupbearer squats down. The one who holds him behind his back covers his head with his šeknu-garment, [while] the cupbearer [beat]s the huhupalinstrument (which lies) at his feet” KUB 25.37 ii 2226 (Lallupiya fest., NS), w. rest. of ii 26 from i 10; LUGALuš GAD-an arha peššiē¢
zzi nu man LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI kuē¢
z pár-aš-na-an harkanzi n–at apez peššiezzi n– at LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI danzi mān DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL kuē¢
z pár-aš-na-an harkanzi n–at apez peššiezzi n– at DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL danzi “The king throws aside the cloth. If he throws it to the side where the 
189

guardsmen have squatted, then the guardsmen take it; if he throws it to the side where the palace functionaries have squatted, then the palace functionaries take it” KUB 10.21 ii 23-28 (fest., OH/NS), cf. KBo 
4.9 vi 5-12, KUB 11.16 iii 3-iv 1; LÚSAGI–ašta LUGAL-i GAL-ri ē
pzi LUGAL-uš eša LÚSAGI-aš pár-aš-naa-iz-zi “The cupbearer holds out a goblet to the king 
— the king sits down (and) the cupbearer squats” KUB 10.7:9-11 (fest.); pár-ša-na-a-u-wa-aš-kán LÚSA~ GI-aš uizzi ta–kkan DUMU É.GAL LUGAL-i ginuwaš GAD-an dāi “The cupbearer ‘of squatting’ comes. The palace functionary puts the knee-cloth on the king” KUB 1.17 i 1-3 (fest., OH/NS), w. many parallels; [p]ár-aš-na-a-u-wa-aš LÚSAGI-li LUGAL-uš IGI.HI.A-it iē[zzi] “The king ge[stures] with his eyes to the cupbearer ‘of squatting’” KBo 23.64 ii 3 (fest.). 
Unlike hink- and aruwai-, both of which indicate a gesture of deference or obeisance, and both of which may stand behind the Akkadogram UŠKE^
N/ UŠKE^NNU, the action paršnai- is never directed toward a person or thing. That it denotes some lowering of the body is shown by KUB 25.1 vi 11-15, where a cupbearer stands up after having performed p. Note also the use of the preverb katta w. this word (e.g., KUB 34.115 rev. 16). The etymological connection w. paršina-, “cheek, buttock,” is supportive of a translation “to squat” for paršnai-(see Sommer, ArOr 17:374-78). For a depiction of a figure performing this action see the third worshiper before the two deities on the silver stag vessel (Muscarella, Schimmel no. 123). It is uncertain, however, whether the posture on one knee depicted here is a necessary aspect of the action paršnai-, or whether this position in the scene is due simply to artistic convention. 
Squatting, which is mentioned exclusively in festival texts, is performed near the brazier (e.g., KUB 25.1 v 57-58), or over šaramna-breads (e.g., KBo 
4.9 v 7-8). More frequently, however, no specific location is given in the texts. Persons who carry out this activity include royal bodyguards (LÚ.MEŠME~ ŠEDI, KBo 11.37 obv. 7-9), palace functionaries (DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL, KBo 11.37 obv. 5-6), table servers (LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR, KUB 41.40 i 10f.), cooks (LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM, KBo 24.97:6), the cupbearer 

(GIŠ)paršdu

(LÚSAGI, KUB 25.1 v 57-58), entertainers (LÚ.MEŠA~ LAN.ZU·, KUB 2.3 ii 14-16), the halliyari-men (KUB 
11.13 ii 13-14), the hešta-man (KBo 17.40 iv 10), the NIN.DINGIR-priestess, the “daughter” (DUMU. MUNUS), and the MUNUSAMA DINGIR-LIMpriestess (all in KUB 11.32 + KUB 20.17 ii 8-9). 
Squatting was regarded as so characteristic of the duties of at least some cupbearers that there is frequent attestation of the phrase paršnauwaš LÚSAGI, lit. “cupbearer of squatting,” especially in the sentence paršnauwaš–kan LÚSAGI-aš uizzi “the cupbearer ‘of squatting’ comes.” LÚSAGI could also be ellipsed, and the sentence paršnauwaš–kan uizzi (e.g., KBo 11.28 iv 25) must always be understood as referring to this functionary (see Gonnet, Anadolu 19:148f.). There is even a case in which this word bears a professional determinative, having seemingly assumed the status of an independent noun: LÚpár-aš-na-u-w[a-aš-kán] uizzi KUB 46.9 iii 8-9 (fest.). 
Sommer, ArOr 17 (1949) 374-378; Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 119f.; Oettinger, FsOtten2 (1988) 277f. 
Cf. paršina-. 
paršnili see paršanili. 
paršteha-n.; shell, husk (of a nut)(?); OH/MS.† 
“Just as he breaks (duwarniezzi) the šamamanut” nu pár-aš-te-hu-uš arha peššīē
zzi “and throws away the shells(?)…” KUB 33.68 ii 9-10 (myth, OH/MS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 88:70, translit. Myth. 68. 
Güterbock, JAOS 88 (1968) 70 (“shells?”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 127 (“shells (or skins or husks)”). 
(GIŠ)paršdu-n. com. and neut.?; leaf, foliage; from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom. com. GIŠpár-aš-du-uš KUB 33.24 i 14 (OH/NS), KBo 34.108:2, pár-aš-du-uš KUB 17.10 i 16 (OH/MS); acc. pár-aš-du-un KUB 44.57:(7) (OH?/NS), KBo 11.13 rev. 3, (4), KUB 12.44 ii 30, KUB 44.63 ii 9 (all NH), KUB 28.101 iii? 8, KUB 44.65:8; nom.-acc. neut.? pár-aš-tu(eras.) KBo 25.14 ii 7 (OH/MS); d.-l. pár-aš-du-i KUB 58.52 ii 12. 
pl. nom. pár-aš-tu-e-eš KBo 32.14 l.e. 4 (MH/MS); acc. pár-aš-du-uš KUB 60.144:4; nom. or acc.? ≠pár±-aš-du-uš-miiš (i.e., paršduš-šmiš) KBo 21.19 i 9, pár-aš-du-uš ibid. i 8, 10. 
a. (said of trees or bushes): nu GIŠhatiwaš páraš-du-uš dahhi […] / karpan harzi nu kē GIM-an 

190

ha[danzi …] / EME–ŠU QA_TAMMA hazzadu nu– šši […] / kūš–wa GIM-an hūwanza pēda[i nu …] / QA_TAMMA ≠pēda±u “I take the leaves of a hatiwatree. […] has lifted […]. And just as these [are] dri[ed up], let his (sc. the sorceror’s) tongue likewise dry up, and […] to him. Just as the wind carries these (dry leaves) away, let […] likewise carry off [the sorceror’s evil words]” KUB 60.144:4-8 (rit.); “May [Teššub] strike it (i.e., the foolish tree, rev. 69). May its branches fall into a canal” GIŠpáraš-tu-e-eš–ma–kan anda weteni išhu[wanteš ašan~ du] “and [may] its leaves [be] scatte[red] in the water” KBo 32.14 l.e. 4 (Hurr.-Hitt. bil. wisdom, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32 (forthcoming); “The mountains dried up; the trees dried up” n–ašta pár-aš-du-uš UL uēzzi “the foliage did not come out; (the pastures dried up; the springs dried up)” KUB 17.10 i 16-17 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 30, tr. Hittite Myths 15 (“shoots did not come forth”), ANET 126 □ Goetze translates “(the tree) would bring forth no fresh shoots,” taking uezzi from uiya- and p. as pl. acc. See, however, ú-e-ez-zi KUB 34.121 + KBo 17.1 iii 13 (OS) from uwa-; cf. Weitenberg, KZ 89:71; cf. KUB 33.24 i 14. The parallel passage from the myth of the missing Stormgod, KUB 
33.24 i 14, has GIŠpár-aš-du-uš, w. the “wood” determinative routinely used on words for parts of trees or bushes. 
b. (said of herbs): nu(-)ut-ni-šaSAR pár-aš-du-un dāi “He takes the leaf of the utniša-herb (and washes it)” KUB 44.63 ii 9 (med., NH), translit. StBoT 19:28f.; nu–šši pár-aš-du-uš x-x[-o-]x-ni takk[i …] nu Úšuwaritašš[i(-)o] ≠pár-aš±-du-uš-mi-iš […] Úā
rni~ tašši[(-)o pá]r-aš-du-uš … KBo 21.19 i 8-10 (med.), translit. StBoT 19:36; cf. KUB 44.65:8, KBo 11.13 rev. 3, 4. 
	c. (said of vines): “If some vineyard never bears fruit, I will perform the following ritual, and it will begin to bear fruit:” … pár-aš-du-un išparhi “I spread out a leaf” KUB 12.44 ii 30 (rit., NH), ed. Weitenberg, KZ 89:71. 
	d. other: [p]ár!-aš-du-un lu[kk]anzi “They set leaves on fire” KUB 44.57:7, cf. pár-aš-tu(eras.) luk~ kizzi KBo 25.14 ii 7 (OH/MS), ed. lukki/a- c; [GIŠa-l]a-anza-aš pár-aš-du-uš (§) KBo 34.108:2 (rit., NS). 

Götze, Madd. (1928) 143 w. n. 2 (“Trieb”); Weitenberg, KZ 89 (1976) 66-75; idem, U-Stämme (1984) 236 (“Schöšling”); Hilmarsson, Baltistica 20 (1984) 40-45 (etymology). 

paršuil 
parštuhha-n.; an earthenware cup(?); wr. syll. and occasionally (DUG)GAL GIR›; from MS.† 
sg. acc. pár-aš-du-uh-ha-an KBo 21.18:15 (MS); inst. páraš-tu-uh-hi-it KUB 41.4 ii 20 (NS). 
pl. acc. pár-aš-tu-uh-ha-aš KBo 19.138 obv. 13 (NS). 
sg. or pl. acc. pár-aš-tu-uh-ha(-ma) KBo 21.13 iv 4; frag. pár-aš-tu-u-uh-h[a(-)] KBo 25.167:8 (MS). 
[n(u)] pár-aš-tu-uh-ha-aš (var. DUGGAL GIR›) harzi “He (sc. the priest of Telipinu) holds earthenware cups(?). (There is incense in them)” KBo 
19.138 obv. 13 (NS), w. dupl. KBo 24.98:7 (rit. mentioning a NIN.DINGIR, MS?); pár-aš-tu-uh-ha-ma pa-ah-hur-ra har[(iē
zzi)] “He (the practitioner) buries the earthenware cups(?) and the embers” KBo 21.13 iv 4 (rit.), 
w. dupls. IBoT 2.125 ii 6-7 and KUB 39.101 ii 17; nu–ššan Ú.HI.A TI-an (var. TI-an-na) IM-an ≠4± ā
ntet páraš-tu-uh-hi-it dāi n–an šallanuzzi “She (the Old Woman) takes herbs and living clay by means of four warm earthenware cups(?) and raises(?) it” KUB 41.4 ii 19-20 (rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 51.83 obv.? 2-3. 
pár-aš-tu-uh-ha-aš KBo 19.138 obv. 13 corresponds to DUGGAL GIR› in the dupl. KBo 24.98:7 (see Otten, KBo 24 p. VII n. 4). In addition to this, there are some functional parallelisms between the two spellings, e.g., GAL GIR› filled w. embers KBo 11.14 i 18; buried KUB 9.31 iii 31 (Ašhella’s rit.), ed. Dinçol, Belleten XLIX/193:14, 23; forms a set w. another, larger vessel (perhaps like a scoop or ladle) in the following: 1 DUGGAL GIR› apel–pat huprušhiaš KBo 17.95 ii 7, cf. pár-aš-du-uh-ha-an apel–pat dāi KBo 21.18:15, and LÚSAGI-aš kangur GEŠTIN udai šer–a–ššan GAL GIR› kitta KUB 25.36 ii 17-18. But (DUG)GAL GIR› alternates in several texts w. (DUG)GAL, Hitt. zeri-, teššummi-(HW 3. Erg. 40), see Güterbock, RHA XXII/ 
74:112 n. 7. For other substitutions of synonyms for names of containers see Güterbock, RHA XXII/74:111 nn. 4-6. 
Otten, KBo 24 (1978) p. VII n. 4. 
Cf. (DUG)GAL GIR›. 
paršuil n.; (mng. unkn.); MH/NS.† 
2 DUGKUKUB ŠÀ.BA INA 1 DUGHAB.HAB KAŠ akuwannaš pár-šu-il šūš 1 GI [(š)]uhmiliš tarnanza “Two pitchers: in one pitcher of beer for drinking, a rigid(?) drinking straw full (of?) p. (or: ‘a full 
191

p.’(?)) is inserted” KUB 9.28 iii 22-24 (rit. for Heptad, MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.132 rev.? 10-11, ed. Kammenhuber, Materialien 4 (eku-/aku-) 78 (differently). 
Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 324 (“ein Getränk oder zumindest eine Flüssigkeit” >? papparš-). 
paršul(l)āi-v.; to break into pieces, crumble; from OH/MS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pár-šu-ul-la-a-iz-zi KBo 19.128 iv 8 (OH?/NS). 
pl. 3 pár-šu-la-a-an-zi KBo 15.37 ii 53 (MH/NS). 
part. nom.-acc. neut. pár-šu-u-la-a-an KBo 10.52 obv.? 3 (MS). 
“The king breaks a warm bread and a sweet bread and calls all the gods by name” namma–kan ANA NINDA ān NINDA.KU‡–ya peran arha teput~ tit pár-šu-ul-la-a-iz-zi “Afterward, he crumbles teputtit off of the front of the warm bread and the sweet bread” KBo 19.128 iv 6-8 (rit., OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 13:10f. (w. a different interpretation) □ teputtit looks like an instrumental adverb (see Melchert, Diss. 257) “little by little, in little pieces” or it could be an inst. used as object (cf. KUB 
33.52 ii 7, Melchert, Diss. 255); nu ≠NINDA.GUR›±.RA GA.KIN.AG GAL kuiš NINDA.GUR›.RA ŠA 3 PA. Z´D.DA–ya addaš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš paršiyanteš ištanani–ma–ššan kuiēš EGIR-pa kiyantari n–aš arha pár-šu-la-a-an-zi KBo 15.37 ii 48-53 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), translit. Otten, BiOr 8:227 n. 21, tr. (NINDA)paršullimng. 1 b 2'; [… T]U‡ pár-šu-la-a-an KBo 10.52 obv.? 3 (fest. frag., MS), in a list of soups and stews (KBo 10.52 obv.? 3-8 + KBo 15.16 ii 14-18), translit. AlHeth 99. 
Otten, StBoT 13 (1971) 39 w. n. 67. 
Cf. (NINDA)paršulli-, parš-B, paršur. 
(NINDA)paršulli-, (NINDA)paršul-, paršiulli-n. com. and neut.; 1. morsel, fragment, crumb (without det.), 2. a type of bread (w. NINDA det.); from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. neut. pár-šu-ul-li KBo 25.88:11, KBo 25.98 left col. 7, 8, 9 (both OS), KBo 19.161 i 3, 4 (OH/NS), NINDApár-šu-ul-li KBo 19.128 iii 17 (OH?/NS), KBo 2.29 obv. 5, 6, 7, and passim, KBo 14.39:2, 3, 7, 8, KUB 2.6 i 7, ii (1), 6, KUB 44.41 obv.? 9 (all NS), KUB 10.11 iii 8 (NH), pár-aš-šuul-li KBo 19.163 iii 9, 10 (OH/NS), KBo 21.98 ii 25 (NS), NINDApár-aš-šu-ul-li KUB 10.11 iii 10, 11 and passim (NH), NINDApár-šu-ul KBo 10.28 v 13 (OH/NS); perhaps pár!-≠šu-ul± KBo 11.36 v! 4. 
acc. com. pár-šu-ul-li-in KBo 15.37 ii 55-56 (MH/NS). 

(NINDA)paršulli- 1 b 1' 

pl. nom.-acc. neut. pár-šu-ul-li KBo 17.16:(6), 9 (OS), KUB 25.36 ii 11 (OH?/MS), KBo 20.97 iii? 9, (10), 11 (MS), KUB 34.124 obv. 8, 11 (OH?/NS), NINDApár-šu-ul-li KBo 20.68 iv 12 (MH/MS), KBo 24.24 ii? 10, 12 (MS), KBo 11.50 vi 14 (both OH/NS), KBo 11.49 i 13, 14, 17, KUB 10.75 i 13, 17 (both NS), pár-ši-ú-ul-li IBoT 2.39 rev. 25 (MH/MS?), NINDA.HI.Apár-šu-ul-li KUB 25.36 ii 11. 
acc. com. NINDApár-šu-u[l-]li-e-eš KBo 17.65 rev. 22 (MH/ NS). 
d.-l. NINDApár-šu-ul-li KBo 11.45 iv 11, 14 (OH/NS). 
uncertain pár-šu-la-aš HT 12:5. 
Note common gender agreement in KUB 53.13 iv 17-19. 
1. morsel, fragment, crumb — a. in general: “Then he breaks thick and thin loaves and puts them onto the brazier” pár-ši-ú-ul-li-ma-kán aran ari anda nāi “and he turns the fragments (of the thick and thin loaves) to face each other” IBoT 2.39 rev. 25 (rit., MH/MS?), ed. AlHeth 176, HW2 1:223a (differently); “The NIN.DINGIR-priestess breaks (a sour loaf), the cup-bearer holds up the bread” nu páršu-ul-li ANA DUMU É.GAL pāi pár-šu-ul-li–ma ANA GAL LÚ.MEŠhāpiya ŠA URUTawiniya pāi “and gives (one) fragment to the palace attendant, (one) fragment to the supervisor of the hāpiya-people of Tawiniya, (and a half a loaf to the singer)” KBo 
19.161 i 3-5 (fest. for Tetešhabi, OH/NS); [LÚGUDU⁄¤ pa]izzi NINDA.GUR›.RA SAﬁ paršiya šū
raš [katta 3 pár-šu-u]l-li NA›-ašš–a katta tagān 3 pár-šu-ull[i dāi LÚGUDU⁄¤ p]aizzi NINDA.GUR›.RA BAB~ BAR paršiya šūraš [katta 3 pár-šu-ul-l]i NA›-ašš–a katta tagān 3 pár-šu-ul-li dāi “[The GUDU⁄¤-priest] goes and breaks a red thick loaf and [places three morsels under] the šura-s, and three morsels on the ground under the stones. [The GUDU⁄¤ priest] goes and breaks a white thick loaf and places [three morsels under] the šura-s, and three morsels on the ground under the stones” KUB 34.124 obv.? 7-11 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. Popko, Kultobjekte 132f.; [(namm)]a–kan(?) LÚSAGI.A IŠTU NINDA. GUR›.RA [(2 pár-šu-u)]l-li paršiya “Then the cupbearer breaks two fragments from the thick bread” KUB 51.79 obv.! 6-7 (fest.), w. dupl. 412/s, ed. McMahon, AS 25:198f. 
b. said of — 1' varieties of breads and pastries: KBo 25.98 left col. 7-9 (OS), KBo 20.97 iii? 7-12 (MS?), KUB 
10.11 iii 6-9 (NS), KUB 53.11 ii 10-15 (fest. for dLAMMA), ed. StBoT 12:71 (as Bo 2309); “He crumbles 1[+] dan~ naš-bread(s) and places it/them on the brazier.” § 

192

NINDAdannaš–ma [pár-š]u-ul-li iyanzi ≠x± 1 NINDApáršu-ul-li [GIŠDAG-t]i dāi [1 NINDApár-š]u-ul-li GIŠABya dāi [1 NINDApár-šu]-ul-li GIŠGIDRU.HI.A-aš [pera]n(?) dāi “They make dannaš-bread crumbs. [The]n(?) they place one crumb [on the dai]s, they place [one cru]mb at the window, and they place [one cru]mb [before(?)] the staffs” KBo 30.53:4-10 (fest. frag.). 
2' cheese (GA.KIN.AG), cf. Hoffner, AlHeth 121
123: “On one hand a large loaf of cheese and a thick bread (made) of three PARÂSU-measures of flour are broken up to the gods of the fathers; on the other hand (bread and cheese) are placed again on the altar” n–aš arha paršulānzi namma ANA PA_NI DINGIR.MEŠ hū
mandaš kuwapiya 1 pár-šu-ul-li-in GA.KIN.AG 1 pár-šu-ul-li-in NINDA–ya uppiyanzi “They break them into pieces. Then they send one morsel of cheese and one morsel of bread before all the gods to each place, (and they place them before the gods)” KBo 15.37 ii 53-57 (hišuwaš fest., MH/ NS), ed. Hoffner, AlHeth 122; cf. KUB 9.28 i 22, KBo 17.100 iv 8. 

3' figs (GIŠPÈŠ): KUB 9.28 i 22. 

2. a type of bread (always w. the det. NINDA): (In lists of breads and pastries) 7 GIŠBAN[ŠUR AD.KID??] anda pēdanzi nu–ššan kuet[aniya GIŠBANŠUR-i] 2 NINDAhuddunatiyan 2 NINDAwal~ paim[anniš 2 NINDApár-šu-ul-li] 1 NINDAšiluhāš kitta ŠU.NIGIN 14 NINDAhudd[u]natiy[an 14 NINDAwal~ paimanniš] 14 NINDApár-šu-ul-li 7 NINDAšiluhāš “They bring in seven [wicker??] tables; on each table there lie two huddunatiya-loaves, two wal~ paim[anni]-loaves, [two paršuli-loaves] and one šiluha-loaf; the total is fourteen hudd[u]natiy[a]loaves, [fourteen walpaimanni-loaves], fourteen paršulli-loaves, and seven šiluha-loaves” KBo 29.65 iv 12-16 (cult of Huwaššanna); 1 NINDAwageššar [1] NINDApár-šu-ul 1 NINDA.KU‡ 1 NINDAšilu[h]aš 1 NINDAgahariš… KBo 10.28 v 13-14 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:86, cf. KBo 24.24 ii? 9-12, KBo 24.25 i 5-6, KBo 29.157 rev.? 8-9. 
Against Friedrich, HW 164, no ex. shows an adjectival use of (NINDA)p. 
Sommer, HAB (1938) 173 (“Brocken”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 164 (“‘Brocken’ (Subst.) oder ‘zerbröckelt’ (Adj.)”) [HW 

paršur 
translates NINDAparša- as “Brotkrume”]; van Brock, RHA XX/ 71 (1962) 114 (“miette”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 176 (accepts Friedrich’s translation). 
Cf. parš(iya)-. 
:paršunti(-) n.; (a vegetable ingredient in a mixture used to make a compress).† 
:pár-šú-un-ti[-x] KUB 37.1 obv. 19, ed. Köcher, AfO 16:48, 50, cf. p. 54; :p. is written on the right edge but was omitted in Köcher’s hand copy in KUB 37. It occurs in a list of herbs and fruits to be mixed together, moistened with wine, and used in a compress for medicinal purposes. The text is Akk., w. Hitt. or Luw. words marked by a single gloss wedge. :p. may be either Hitt. or Luw. Köcher transliterates :maš-. Some of the non-Akk. words marked w. the gloss wedge are clearly real “glosses,” i.e., translations of the Sum. or Akk. terms preceding them, e.g., (Akk.) ina GIŠGAZ tahaššal “you crush with a wooden pestle” = (Luw.) :mamanašati battunāti puwāti “he crushes with m. (and) b.” obv. 15-16. In at least one case there is such a gloss without the use of the gloss wedge: G[IŠ…] / šattiyarhinni hur~ lili “[…] (which is) šattiyarhi–nni in Hurrian” obv. 18-19. Unfortunately, however, the traces of the word immediately preceding :paršunti[…] were not drawn on the copy, and Köcher transliterates only as “x [x x x].” So it is impossible to know what Sum. or Akk. term paršunti translates. The ingredients preceding and following it in the list are all plants, almost all have the Ú determinative, while a few have GIŠ. The preserved parts of the text do not indicate the nature of the ailment, the affected part(s) of the body, or what part of the man is bandaged. 
paršur n. neut.; 1. cooked dish, 2. in the expressions paršuraš EN-aš, EN/BE_L TU‡, and paršuraš peda-“cooking area(?), kitchen(?)”; wr. syll. and TU‡ (for TU‡ instead of “UTÚL” see Hoffner, AlHeth 102f., and HZL); from OS. 
nom.-acc. pár-šu-u-ur KBo 25.79 iv? 6 (OS), KBo 21.70 i 26 (OH?/MS), KBo 11.41 i 6, KBo 13.227 i 13, KUB 11.28 iii 11, KUB 25.8 vi 2, IBoT 2.93:13 (all OH/NS), KBo 5.1 i 55 (MH/NS), KUB 17.23 ii 20 (NS), KUB 10.60:2, pár-šu-ur KUB 
25.8 vi 4 (OH?/NS), [ pár-šu-u]r?(–šmett–a) KUB 1.16 iii 51 (OH/NS). 
193

paršur paršur 1 b 7'

gen. pár-šu-u-ra-aš KUB 60.157 ii 7 (MS), KUB 13.4 i 20, iii 59 (MH/NS). 
abl. pár-šu-u-ra-az-zi-(ia) KBo 20.72 iii! 28 (MS), KBo 
24.68 rev. (6), KUB 34.102 iii 1 (both NS), pár-šu-ra-az-zi 
(-ia) KUB 10.51 rt. col. 10 (NS). inst. pár-šu-u-ri-it KUB 11.28 iii 19 (OH?/NS). Sumerogram sg. TU‡ KUB 25.36 ii 10 (OH?/MS), IBoT 
1.29 rev. 14 (MH?/MS?), KBo 15.16 ii 14 (MH/MS), KBo 
19.128 iii 43 (OH/NS), KBo 5.2 i 29 (MH/NS), KBo 21.20 i 9 (NH), KUB 51.23 obv.? 13 (Tudh. IV). 
pl. TU‡.HI.A-TIM KUB 7.38 obv. 25 (MH/NS), KUB 39.30 rev. 9, TU‡.HI.A KBo 15.16 ii 13 (MH/MS), KBo 19.128 iv 13 (OH/NS), KUB 13.2 iv 25 (MH/NS), KUB 29.4 iii 59 (NH), TU‡.TU‡.HI.A KUB 25.24 ii 12 (NS). 
uncertain TU‡-aš KUB 30.28 rev. 15, IBoT 3.148 i 37, 50 (both NS), KUB 31.114 iii! 5. 
1. cooked dish — a. soups, broths: nu šuppa šarā dānzi n–at zanuwanzi TU‡ ME_ UZU iyanzi “They take up the meat and cook it, they make a meat broth” KUB 20.84 obv. 6-7 (fest. frag.); nu ŠA GU› TU‡ ME_ UZU tianzi KUB 25.3 iii 17 (fest.), cf. KBo 4.9 v 46; ta LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM TU‡ A UZU.GU› tianzi KBo 
11.46 v 13, cf. KUB 20.76 i 12, iv 9; 1 TU‡ GA “milk soup” KUB 41.26 i 29; TU‡ GA.A “whey(?) soup” FHL 4 rt. col. 12. 
b. stews (or soup w. pieces of meat?) — 1' in general: [… (pár-š)]u-u-ra-az-zi-ia-kán [(UZUkūtar dāi)] “And (the priest) takes the kūtar-meat from the stew” KBo 24.68 rev. 6-7 (fest., NS), w. dupl. KBo 
20.113 iii 4-5; LÚMUHALDIM DINGIR-LIM ANA LÚ.MEŠSANGA-TIM hūmand[aš] ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUHuršama MUNUS.MEŠAMA.DINGIR.MEŠ hazqa~ rayaš pangawe TU‡ UZU pittalwan NINDA.HI.Aparšulli pianzi “The cook(s) of the deity give plain meat stew and bread fragments to all the priests, to the men of Huršama, to the ‘mother-of-the-deity’ priestesses, to the hazgara-women, to the congregation” KUB 25.36 ii 8-11 (fest., OH/MS); cf. KUB 17.28 iv 39-40, KUB 47.90 ii 1, KBo 2.14 iv 8, VBoT 24 iii 16. 
2' meat varieties — a' mutton (UDU): “They bring a lamb and a sheep …. They butcher the lamb ‘plain’” UDU–ma pár-šu-u-ur iyanzi “but they make the sheep into stew” KUB 17.23 ii 20 (mugawar, NS); UDU.HI.A TU‡.HI.A iyanzi KBo 12.96 iv 18, cf. KUB 25.24 ii 10-12. 
b' goat (MÁŠ.GAL): VBoT 24 iv 27 (MH/NS). 
c' beef (UZU.GU›): KBo 21.78 ii 11. 
d' pork (ŠAH): KUB 31.114 iii! 5. 
3' grains and legumes: euwaš pár-šu-u-ur KBo 
13.227 i 13 (storm fest., OH/NS); cf. TU‡ euwaš (var. TU‡ euwan) 102/f ii 9 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 71:123), w. dupl. KUB 
29.4 ii 63, cf. KUB 44.52:8, FHL 4 rt. col. 12; [6 PARÂSI] pár-šu-u-ur ha[¢t(tar–ku zinail¢–ku)] “[Six PARÂSU]measures of soup, either lentil or chick pea” KBo 
25.79 iv? 5-6 (rit., OS), w. dupl. Bo 3123 iv 6, translit. StBoT 25:157, 159, ed. Watkins, FsKnobloch 494f.; cf. IBoT 2.93 obv. 13-14 and KBo 11.41 i 6-8 (OH?/NS); if the equation hattar = GÚ.TUR, zinail = GÚ.GAL, šumeššar = GÚ.GAL.GAL, suggested by Watkins, FsKnobloch 494f., is correct, see also TU‡ GÚ.GAL, TU‡ GÚ.GAL.GAL, TU‡ GÚ.TUR KUB 44.52:8, cf. KUB 29.6 + 102/f (ZA 71:123) ii 9, KUB 17.23 i 8, KUB 46.31 ii 6, VBoT 24 iii 17-18 (MH/NS); also TU‡ N´G.ÀR.RA “stew of groats” KBo 29.89 ii 26. 
4' flour or porridge: TU‡ SIQU_QI FHL 4 rt. col. 13, KUB 20.11 ii 11 □ for SIQU_QU = Akk. ISQU_QU (a kind of flour) see Berman, JCS 28:244 w. n. 2 and BiOr 38:656; 1 DUGD´LIM.GAL TU‡ šemehunaš KBo 16.49 iv 6 □ for šemehuna-as a foodstuff grouped w. meal and grains see Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. 109; TU‡ ARSANNI (var. TU‡ ARSANNUM) “A soup of groats” KUB 29.6 ii 10, w. dupl. KUB 29.4 ii 63; cf. KUB 20.11 ii 7 □ for the ARSANNU-dish see Hoffner, FsGüterbock 116f.; [T]U‡ BA.BA.ZA (dupl. TU‡ Ø) 155/q iii 3, w. dupl. KUB 45.47 iii 17; mān TU‡ BA.BA.ZA mān TU‡ UZU KUB 17.25 i 5; cf. KBo 
7.46 iv 11, KBo 12.91 i 12, KBo 24.62:13, KBo 24.108 rev. 78, KUB 15.31 i 23, 31, iii 4, 12, KUB 32.46 obv. 2, 11, KUB 
38.25 i 17, KUB 43.58 i 14, Güterbock, FsLaroche p. 138 obv. 8, 19, p. 140 (“a dish of porridge”). 
5' vegetables — a' TU‡.SAR: KBo 13.249:5, 16, KBo 
23.111 rev.? 9 (NS), KUB 25.29:5, KUB 38.25 i 19 (NH), KUB 
42.103 iii? 11, KUB 50.44 ii 11, IBoT 2.10 rt. col. 10, HFAC 

24:4. 

b' TU‡ kangati(yaš): KBo 22.246 ii (10), KBo 23.42 i 14 (NH), KBo 23.46 rev. 11, KUB 27.1 i 38, 42 (NH), KUB 
29.6 ii 10, VBoT 16 obv.? 4, (7). 
6' fat: UZU.‰–ma hū
man TU‡.HI.A-TIM iyanzi “They make all the fat into stews” KUB 20.88 vi? 20 (fest.); UZU.‰–ma TU‡.HI.A ienzi KUB 20.13 iv 6 (fest., MH?). 
7' šaknāš pár-šu-u-ur “a soup/stew made with oil/fat (cf. *šakna-‘oil, fat,’ šaknuwant-B ‘filled with oil/fat,’ 

194

Hoffner, KZ 107:104-112)”: LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR šak~ nāš pár-šu-u-ur LUGAL-i tianzi “The table attendants set before the king a soup/stew made with oil/ fat” KUB 10.60:1-2 (fest. frag.), see StBoT 26:154 n. 458 w. refs.; […] / TU‡ ša-ak-na-a-aš tianzi “[…] they set out a soup/stew made with oil/fat” KBo 21.107 ii 8-9 (fest.); wr. logographically TU‡ ‰: LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBAN~ ŠUR TU‡.‰ tianzi KBo 17.88 ii 14 (pre-NH/NS); cf. KUB 
1.17 iii 28 (fest. of month, OH/NS), KUB 2.5 ii 18 (AN~ DAHŠUM fest.), KBo 17.75 iii 18 (thunder fest., OH/NS), KUB 
25.3 iv 17 and KUB 25.9 iv 18 (both Great Festival of Arinna), KUB 10.21 iii 15 (fest., OH/NS), KUB 47.90 ii 8; KBo 19.128 iv 46 (OH?/NS), tr. StBoT 13:13 (“Fleisch-Gericht”); cf. Hoffner, AlHeth 102 “stew (with) oil/fat.” 
8' TU‡ pittalwan “plain stew”: KBo 23.67 iii 6 (MH/ NS), KBo 29.199 rt. col. 16, KUB 32.123 iii 55 (NH). 
9' “white stew”: 1 TU‡ BABBAR IBoT 1.29 rev. 14 (MH?/MS?); TU‡ harki VBoT 24 iii 16 (MH/NS); cf. AHw 1414b (weiš). 
10' TU‡ ÉRIN.MEŠ “army stew”: KBo 10.30 ii 8, KBo 10.31 iv 7, 13 (both OH/NS). 
11' TU‡ GIŠKIRIﬂ “garden soup”: KUB 46.17 iv 14. 
For other soups and stews w. syll. spellings see Reichert, RHA XXI/73:140 (s.v. UTÚL), and Hoffner, EHGl 42 (s.v. “FOODS”), as well as the extensive list of syll. written names of stews in KBo 10.52 obv. 3-8 + KBo 15.16 ii 14-18 (MH/MS), w. par. HT 12:6-11; cf. Akk. ummaru (AHw 1414b, q.v.). 
c. bread pudding(?) (NINDA paršur/ TU‡): see AlHeth 203; 1 NINDA ān 1 NINDA.GÚG 1 NINDA pár-šu-u[r …] / 1 NINDA KU‡ … KUB 46.17 i 11-12; 3 NINDA TU‡ BA.BA.ZA TUR.MEŠ-TIM KUB 
38.25 i 16 (NS); NINDA ān NINDA TU‡ kue parši~ yannai KUB 27.70 ii 12-13, cf. KUB 25.32 ii 21-22, and passim; 6 NINDA TU‡ UPNI KBo 22.246 ii 23. 
d. other cooked dishes: nu EGIR-anda 9 TU‡. HI.A iyan BA.BA.ZA TU‡ gangati TU‡ haramma TU‡ kappāra TU‡ GÚ.GAL TU‡ hapattulli ŠA GIŠINBIHI.A memal ŠA LÀL memal GA.KU‡ šaripu~ waš GA kašdulaš “Nine dishes are prepared: porridge, soup/dish of gangati-vegetable, harammasoup/dish, kappara-soup/dish, chick pea soup/dish, hapattulli-soup/dish, groats (flavored) with fruit, honeyed groats, cream for sipping, (and) milk for 

paršur 2 a 
kašdul-action, (and they bring them in)” KUB 17.23 i 7-10 (mugawar, NS), ed. AlHeth 97f. □ cf. a similar list of nine dishes, introduced as 9 etri VBoT 24 iii 16-20 (MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 112f., AlHeth 98; TU‡.HI.A–ya–tta menahhanda karū zanuwan “The dishes have long been cooked for you” KUB 33.98 ii 10 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.102 i 12, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:148f.; [L]ÚMUHALDIM.HI.A TU‡.HI.A uter “The cooks brought the dishes, (and the cupbearers brought him sweet wine to drink)” KUB 33.98 ii 23 (Ullik.), w. dupl. KUB 33.102 i 27, ed. JCS 5:150f. 
e. in vessels — 1' DUGD´LIM.GAL: KBo 10.30 ii 8, KBo 10.31 iv 7, 13 (both OH/NS), KBo 16.49 iv 6, KBo 22.193 iii (4), 12, KBo 23.42 i 14 (NH), KBo 23.46 rev. 11, KBo 24.57 i 13, KBo 24.62:13; DUGD´LIM.GAL.MUŠEN IBoT 2.4 obv. 9, 13; DUGD´LIM.GAL SIG KBo 5.2 i 29 (MH/NS). 
2' DUGÚTUL: KBo 5.1 i 55 (MH/NS), KBo 13.249:5, 16, KUB 10.95 iii? 9, KUB 27.13 iv 24 (NH), KUB 42.103 iii? 11, KUB 50.44 ii 11. 
3' DUGBUR.ZI/DUGPURSÂTUM: KBo 2.4 iii 33-34 (NH), KBo 22.246 ii 10, KBo 27.130 i 9, KUB 42.91 ii 2-3, KUB 43.58 i 13, 14. 
4' DUGkappiš: KBo 2.4 ii 29, iv 9-10 (NH), DUG!qa-píi-eš/qa-pé-eš KUB 38.25 i 17-19 (NS) (5Z) (same vessel?). 
f. attributed to officials: TU‡.HI.A ŠA LÚMU~ HALDIM LÚ GIŠBANŠUR “soups ‘of the cook and (those) of the table attendants’” KUB 42.91 ii 3; TU‡.HI.A LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM TU‡.HI.A LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR tiyanzi KBo 4.13 iv 31-32 (NH); TU‡.HI.A LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM TU‡ LÚ.MEŠ GIŠBANŠUR tianzi [T]U‡.HI.A URUNeri<k> pittalwan tianzi KUB 
41.35 ii 10-11; cf. KBo 2.4 ii 1, 29, iii 33-34, iv 9-10 (NH), KUB 11.35 iii 21, KUB 17.37 i 11, KUB 51.25 rev. 5-6, Bo 2840 iii 11 (StBoT 15:22). 
2. in the expressions — a. paršuraš EN-aš, EN/ BE_L TU‡ “kitchen worker”: anda–ma šumēš BE_LU_ MEŠ TU‡ hū
manteš LÚSAGI.A LÚ GIŠBANŠUR LÚMUHALDIM LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙ LÚdāwalalaš LÚwal(a)hhiyalaš LÚZABAR.DAB LÚpašandalaš LÚEPÂŠ GA LÚkipliyalaš LÚšurralaš LÚtappālaš LÚharšiyalaš LÚzuppālaš “Further, all the kitchen personnel: the cupbearer, the table-attendant, the cook, the baker, the tawal-keeper(?), the walhikeeper(?), the cupbearer, the food-taster(?), the 
195

dairy-man, the kipliyala-man, the šurrala-man, the tappala-man, the keeper of the loaves, (and) the keeper of the zuppala-vessels” KUB 13.3 ii 20-25 (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:47, 49, tr. ANET 207; anda–ma–za šumaš kuiēš EN. MEŠ TU‡ DINGIR.MEŠ-aš hūmandaš LÚSAGI.A LÚ GIŠBANŠUR LÚMUHALDIM LÚNINDA.DÙ. DÙ LÚKÚRUN.NA “Further, all you who are kitchen workers of the gods: the cupbearer, the table-man, the cook, (and) the keeper of the cellar” KUB 
13.4 iii 55-56 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.95 iii 6-7 + KUB 13.5 iii 26-27, ed. Chrest. 160f., Süel, Direktif Metni 66f.; “Let a brewer take malt, beer bread, and fine flour. Let a gardener take all the vegetable seeds, let a table-attendant take the lentils, chickpeas, and broadbeans, let a cook take the rennet, cheese, and GÚG-bread” LÚ.MEŠpár-šu-u-raaš išhēš kāša–wa–šmaš IŠTU TU‡ šarninkanteš ešten “Kitchen personnel — now be compensated (or: you have been compensated) with stew” KUB 
60.157 ii 7-8 (rit., MS); cf. EN.MEŠ TU‡ KBo 8.58:6, KUB 
5.4 i 51 (NH); BE_LU_ MEŠ TU‡ KBo 8.57 obv. 6; LÚ.MEŠBE_~ LU_ TU‡ KUB 51.65 obv. 3; EN TU‡ KUB 51.23 obv.? 13; for EN TU‡ = paršuraš EN-aš see Ehelolf apud Sommer, HAB 173 n. 2; since no texts are cited, it remains unknown whether this equation is based on a dupl. or merely on par. passages. 
	b. [UG]ULA LÚ TU‡ “supervisor of stew-cooks”: KBo 11.68 i 26. 
	c. paršuraš pedan, ŠA TU‡.HI.A AŠRIHI.A “cooking area(?), kitchen(?)”: nu–šmaš–kan pár-šu-ura-aš pē¢šdu “Let the kitch

dan šanhan harnuwan een be swept and sprinkled by you (sc. the kitchen workers). (Let no pig or dog pass over the threshold)” KUB 13.4 iii 59-60 (instr. for temple officials, MH/NS), 
w. dupl. KUB 31.95 iii 10 + KUB 13.5 iii 30, ed. Chrest. 160f. (“the place of broken bread(?)”), Süel, Direktif Metni 66f. (“(ekmek) bölme yeri”); ŠA TU‡.HI.A AŠRIHI.A (dupl. AŠRIHI.A É.MEŠ TU‡–ya) SIGﬁ-yahhan ē
štu “Let the cooking areas (var. ‘the cooking areas and the kitchen buildings’) be kept in good condition” KUB 
13.2 iv 25 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), w. par. KUB 13.24:14, ed. Dienstanw. 51, cf. Hoffner, JCS 24:31, 35. 
The equation between paršur and TU‡ was first suggested by Ehelolf apud Sommer, HAB 173 n. 2 (see 2 a', above) and endorsed by Hoffner, AlHeth 102f., and 

paršza a 1' 

Watkins, FsKnobloch 494. Since p. and TU‡ are functionally equivalent, the equation is, if not proven, very likely. 
Ehelolf apud Sommer, HAB (1938) 173 n. 2 (paršur = TU‡), 173 (“Brockengericht”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 271 (EN TU‡ = “(Suppenherr) = Küchenmeister”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 102f. (on TU‡), 203 (NINDA paršur “bread pudding(?)”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 57 (EN TU‡ =“impiegato della cucina”); Watkins, FsKnobloch (1985) 494f. (TU‡ = paršur). 
Cf. parš- B/parš(iya)-, paršulli-. 
paršza, parza, pirza(?) adv.; “…-ward” (indicating direction); from OS.† 
pár-za KBo 17.30 iii 10 (OS), KBo 25.109 ii 14 (MS? or OS?), KUB 33.28 iii 14 (OH/NS), KUB 7.1 ii 14 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 12.1 iv 11, KUB 42.78 ii 8, KUB 22.37 rev. 5 (all NH), KUB 33.54 rt. col. 10, KUB 49.77 iv 2, HT 35 rev. 5, 7, IBoT 2.28:7, pár-aš-za KUB 9.4 ii 29 (MH/NS), KUB 9.39 i 4 (NH), pí-≠ir-za±(?) 633/v left col. 4 (StBoT 15:46). 
uncertain: pá[r- …] KBo 22.216:14. 

a. ā

ppa p. “backward, in reverse” — 1' in general: “He (sc. the client) comes and lies face-downward (parā tarru); she (sc. the Old Woman) holds it (the sheep) over his back” … n–aš–za uizzi EGIR-pa pár-aš-za (par. šar-ku-x[…]x) šešzi “He comes and lies backside-downward (and she holds the sheep over his chest)” KUB 9.4 ii 29-30 (rit., NH), 
w. par. KUB 9.34 iii 13, ed. Beckman, Or NS 59:38, 46 (“lays 
himself spread out(?) forward … lays himself out backward”), 
Götze, ArOr 5:6 w. n. 2, Laroche, DLL 149f., cf. Watkins, GsKronasser 257f.; [x BI]BRU KÙ.GI ŠÀ.BA 2 UDU. KUR.RA IGI-zi GUB-anteš / [… GUB-a]nteš EGIR-pa pár-za uškanteš “[x rh]yta of gold, among them two (in the shape of) antelopes, standing on their front (legs), [x animals, sta]nding, looking back” KUB 12.1 iv 10-11 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:101, 105; GIŠŠEN-aš GIM-an ≠āppa pár-za± UL aršīē
zzi “Just as (the water?) of the pipe does not flow backward (likewise let Hannahanna’s rage, wrath, misbehavior, and anger not return)” KUB 
33.54 rt. col. 10 (myth, NS), translit. Myth. 79, tr. Hittite Myths 28; cf. KUB 17.10 iii (25)-26 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), ed. Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:27 w. n. 1 (“wie [das Wasser] der Regenrinne [vom Hause] nicht zurückfliešt”), tr. Hittite Myths 16, ANET 128 (“Just as (water in) a pipe flows not upward”); cf. also KUB 33.28 iii? 14 (myth, OH/NS); the tr. “(water) of the pipe” is problematic, since another passage 

196

may indicate that the pipes are the subject: GIŠŠEN. HI.A … aršiyanzi IBoT 3.141 iv 4-5 (myth, OH/MS?), ed. Otten, Tel. 25f. w. n. 3 (“[Wie] die Wasserrohre [zurück aufwärts(?) nicht] fliessen”), tr. Hittite Myths 19. 

2' ā

ppa parza malk- “to unravel” (lit. “to spin backward”): KUB 7.1 ii 14 and perhaps HT 35 rev. 5, 7, see malk(iya)- mng. 2. 

3' ā

ppa paršza malla- “to mill ‘backward’”: KUB 

43.59 + KUB 9.39 i 4-5, see malla- a 1'. 

4' EGIR-pa pirza: n–at EGIR-pa pí-≠ir±-za 633/v left col. 4 (StBoT 15:46); reading uncertain; Otten, StBoT 
15:46 n. 1, suggests an alternative reading pí-≠un± which is, however, semantically meaningless and, moreover, according to the photograph, the traces are too long for -≠un±. Although the traces of -≠ir± show two parallel lines, this is still the likeliest reading. Even if a var. pirza is accepted, it is questionable whether one should read pár-za, pár-ašza in all instances of pirx-(cf. StBoT 18:108 n. 242). 
b. ≠kat-±[t]a-an pár-za! “downward(?)”: KBo 
25.109 ii 14 (rit., OS? or MS?), in broken context; 1-EN AŠ.ME KÙ.GI NA› katta pár-z[a …] “One sun-disk of gold (and) stone(s), downwar[ds(?)…]” KUB 

42.78 ii 8 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:112f. 

c. parā pár-za “forward(?)”: KBo 17.30 iii 10 (fest. frag., OS), broken context, translit. StBoT 23:141 (differently). 
Götze, ArOr 5 (1933) 6 w. n. 2 (“rücklings(??)”); Otten, Tel. (1942) 25f. (“aufwärts(?)”); Laroche, RHA XXVIII (1970) 40 (“à rebours, à reculons,” “en s’éloignant de l’avant”). 
parta/i-n. com.; (an item associated with beds, bed linens, and eagles), leg(?), talon(?); NH.† 
sg. nom. pár-ta-aš KBo 18.170 obv. (9), KUB 42.34:19, KUB 42.43 obv. 13, 308/v 4 (THeth 10:192). 

Luw. acc. pár-ti-an-za KBo 3.8 iii 6, 24. 

a. (an item associated with beds and bed linens): [o o o?-]x-zi pár-ta-aš KÙ`
.GI GAR.RA KUB 
42.34:19 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 58f., translit. THeth 10:55; in an inventory listing bedsteads and bed linens: 1-NU (var. [1-NUT]UM) GIŠNÁ GIŠTAŠKARIN 1-NU (var. 1-NUTUM) GADlak[(kušanzani)…] / […]x GIŠESI pár-ta-aš ZU·.<(AM.)>SI KUB 42.43 obv. 12-13 (inv., NH), w. dupl. KBo 18.170 obv. 8-9, ed. 

partai-
Siegelová, Verw. 484f., translit. THeth 10:112, 109; in a list of furniture: 1-EN GADint[ana …] / […]x GIŠTAŠ~ KARIN pár-ta-aš […] / [… la]kkušanzani[(-)…] 308/v:3-5, translit. THeth 10:192; Košak, THeth 10:56, 227f., followed by Siegelová, Verw. 611, read this word as maš-ta-aš and associated it with a word m/bašta-. We have preferred the more common value of the sign pár, since we do not consider the evidence strong enough to associate this word with other words containing mašt-… The m/b alternation assumed by Košak, THeth 10:227f., disappears in view of the fact that collations have shown the alleged ma-aš-ta-writings of bašta-and baštaimi-all to be ba-aš-ta-. For pár-du-uš(-) KBo 18.170 rev. 7, considered relevant by Košak, see pardug(g)anni. If this word is related to Luw. parta/i-, a body part of which a sheep has four (KUB 35.43 ii 12, translit. StBoT 30:144), “leg, hoof(?)” (Melchert, CLL 171 and personal communication), then perhaps the above texts refer to furniture legs or to the carved hooves, paws, or talons at the bottom of a furniture leg. 
b. (an item associated with eagles): pár-ti-anza hā
raš[MUŠEN] hamikta “The eagle was bound with respect to the leg(?)/talon(?)” … pár-ti-an-za [hārašM]UŠEN laddat¢“The eagle was released with respect to the leg(?)/talon(?)” KBo 3.8 iii 6-7, 24-25 (rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:157, 159, Collins, Diss. 217f., the interpretation of p. as a Luw. acc. of respect is courtesy of Melchert (personal communication); see paršanamng. a. Stefanini, AGI 54:154, following Meriggi apud Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:112, interprets p. haraš as “the wings of an eagle” (cf. partawar). However, the gen. should precede p., cf. dIM-aš wellu “the meadow of the Stormgod” ibid. iii 5, 23. 
Meriggi apud Kronasser, Die Sprache 8 (1962) 112 (“luw. Plural ‘Flügel’”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 503 (“möglicherweise ist p. (Attribut zu ‘Adler’) das part. dazu [sc. of partai-v.] als ‘gefiedert’(?)”); Meriggi apud Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 194 (“ac. pl. C.(?) ‘die Flügel’(?)”); Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 56 (“line(?), stripe(?)”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 611 (“ein Verzierungselement”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 171 (“?”, formally appears to be adj. to parta/i-“leg” or “hoof”). 
Cf. NINDApartanni-. 
partai-v.; to disentangle(?), unravel(?); from MS?.† 
act. pres. sg. 3 pár-ta-a-iz-≠zi± KUB 12.58 i 31 (NH). 
pret. sg. 2 or 3 pár-ta-iš KBo 12.77:10 (MS?). 
197

mid. pret. sg. 3 pár-ta-it-ta-at KUB 43.62 ii? 9 (NS). 
namma MUNUSŠU.[GI S´G ZA.G´N] S´G SAﬁ dāi n–at pár-ta-a-iz-≠zi± “Then the Old Woman takes [the blue wool] and the red wool and unravels(?) it.” (She throws it over the body of the sacrificer) KUB 12.58 i 30-31 (Tunn., NH), ed. Tunn. 8f.; MUŠ-aš iwar [Ø?] taruptat kunkuliyatiyaš i[war?] § pár-ta-it-taat “He (sc. the son of the Sungod?) coiled up like a snake, he unraveled like a kunkuliyati-” KUB 43.62 ii? 7-9 (incant., NS), ed. Collins, Diss. 213 □ our interpretation requires the paragraph line to be in the wrong place; it could also be analyzed: GEﬂ-anti uleštat MUŠ-aš iwar § taruptat kunkuliyatiyaš i[war] pár-ta-it-ta-at ŠA NIM.LÀL <iwar?> “In the night, he blended in like a snake (or he blended into the night like a snake), he was bunched up like a kunkuliyati-, he was unraveled(?) <like?> a bee, (he took off like an eagle)”?; […]x-an pár-ta-iš t[u-…] KBo 12.77:10 (mugawar, MS?) 
□ there is a clear space between -iš and t[u- on the photograph, not so definite in the hand copy. t[u-…] is written already on the edge but there is space for 4-5 signs, see line 4. 
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 9 (“disentangle”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 283f., 503 (“Macht (Wolle) locker, entwirrt, zupft auseinander,” “macht fedrig”?; also adds part. pár-ti-an-za “gefiedert(?)” KBo 3.8 iii 6, 24, which may also be Luw. pl. acc. 
(p. 194)); Stefanini, JNES 28 (1969) 46 (rejects the verb partipartiške- and reads partiške- as iter. of partai-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 376 n. 243; Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 56 (reads maštai, connects w. mašta- “strip, filament(?)” and S´Gmaišta-). 
Cf. partipartiški-. 
NINDApartanni-Luw. n.; (kind of bread or pastry); NS.† 
Luw. pl. nom. NINDApár-ta-an-ni-in-zi KUB 17.12 ii 21, 33. 
(In a list of foodstuffs offered to the zamnaššaš deities) 2 NINDA.GUR›.RA ‰ 1 NINDA.GUR›.RA pittalwanza 4 NINDApár-ta-an-ni-in-zi ‰ 1 NINDA alalunza ‰ KAŠ–ya dāi “He takes two thick breads with oil, one plain thick bread, four p.-loaves with oil, one alalunza-loaf with oil, and beer, (breaks them up and makes NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A)” KUB 17.12 ii 20-22 (rit., NS), ed. van der Hout, KZ 97:65; cf. NINDApárta-an-ni-in-zi ≠‰±? ibid. ii 33. 
If this word is related to Luw. parta/i-, then perhaps this is a “leg, hoof-shaped bread.” 

(UZU)partawa(r) 1 a 1' 

Laroche, DLL (1959) 80; Meriggi, WZKM 58 (1962) 106; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 176; Melchert, CLL (1993) 171 (“Type of or epithet of bread,” probably a diminutive of Luw. pārta/i-“leg” or “hoof”(?)). 
Cf. parta-, partiyanza. 
partariyanuant-(mng. unkn.); NH.† 
[… pá]r-ta-ri-ia-n[u-an-te-eš …] / […]x-ša párta-ri-ia-nu-an-t[e-eš …] KUB 52.2:2-3 (oracle question). 
(UZU)partawa(r) n. neut.; 1. wing, 2. feather(?); from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pár-ta-u-wa-ar KUB 17.10 ii (35) (OH/MS), KUB 15.34 i 12, (33) (MH/MS), KBo 15.48 ii 9, 33 (MH/NS), pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar KUB 45.3 i 35 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 1.42 i 35, 36 (NH), pár-ta-a-u-ar KUB 32.122:(4) (MS?), KUB 15.32 i 61 (MH/NS), VBoT 72 iv 7 (NS), UZUpár-ta-a-wa-ar KBo 
19.136 i 9 (NS), pár-ta-wa-ar KBo 19.136 iv 20. d.-l. (ZAG-ni) pár-t[a-u/ú?-ni] KUB 45.3 i 25 (pre-NH/ MS?). abl. pár-ta-u-na-az KBo 8.155 ii 9 (NS), pár-da-u-na-az KBo 27.163:7, pár-da-a-u-na-za KBo 33.188 iii? 14. 
inst. pár-ta-ú-ni-it KUB 32.122:6, 7 (MS?), pár-ta-ú-ni-t(u-uš) KBo 17.1 i 6 (OS), pár-ta-ú-ni-it KUB 33.8 ii (16), (17) (OH/NS), pár-ta-a-u-ni-it KBo 4.2 i 4 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 
15.31 i 35, ii 40 (MH/NS), pár-ta-u-ni-it KUB 15.32 i 37, KBo 
15.48 ii 6, 27 (both MH/NS), pár-ta-u-wa-ni-it KUB 45.43 ii? 13 (NS). 
pl. nom.-acc. [pár-t]a-a-u-wa-a(š-ši-it) KUB 33.5 ii 13 (OH/MS), [pá]≠r-ta±-u!-wa!-a(š-še-et) KUB 17.10 i 38 (OH/ MS), pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar(-še-et) KBo 24.66 ii 5 (MS), KUB 32.49a iii 8 (MH/MS), pár-ta-u-wa-ar(–še-e[t]/–ši-it) KBo 
15.24 ii 15, 29 (MH/NS). d.-l. [pá]r-ta-ú-na-aš(-ša-aš) KUB 36.49 i 8 (OS?), pár-ta-u-na-aš VBoT 125:3 (NS). 
sg. or pl. nom.-acc. pár-ta-u-wa KBo 20.28 obv. 20 (OH/ NS), pár-ta-u-wa-ar KUB 7.60 ii 15 (NS), pár-da-a-u-ar KBo 
18.193:9 (NH). 
(Sum.) [Á.BÚR] = (Akk.) ab-ru = (Hitt.) pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar / (Sum.) [Á.TIR] = (Akk.) ab-ru = (Hitt.) pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar KBo 1.42 i 35-36 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 13:134, cf. CAD s.v. abru B. 
1. wing — a. said of an eagle — 1' in myth: “Furious, Telipinu came … Kamrušepa saw him” nu– za haranaš MUŠEN pár-ta-u-w[a-ar] ≠x x x± arnut “She moved an eagle’s wing … for herself” KUB 
17.10 ii 35-36 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), ed. Collins, Diss. 124f. (differently), translit. Myth. 34 (restoring the lacuna a[n?-da?-a]n? against the traces), cf. HW2 332a, tr. ANET 127 and Hittite Myths 16 (differently); cf. KUB 33.8 ii 16-17. 

198

2' in rit.: “He draws them (sc. the gods) by means of red wool, of a tuft from a sheep, and of a kerchief ” ŠA TI°MUŠEN–ya pár-ta-a-u-ni-it (dupl. pár-ta-u-ni-i[t]) wiyan[(zi)](dupl. wiyaizzi) “And they cry (var. he cries) (while gesturing) with an eagle’s wing” KUB 15.31 i 35 (evocation, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 i 37, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:152f., Collins, Diss. 121; cf. KUB 15.34 i 33-34 (MH/MS), FHG 4:10-11, KBo 

	18.193:9. 

	b. said of unspecified birds: kunnan–ma–šši– kan UZUpár-ta-a-wa-ar dāi “He (the practitioner) takes the right wing (of a bird, MUŠEN, see i 5, 7), (and places it on a flat bread on a wicker table)” KBo 19.136 i 9 (rit., NS), cf. ibid. iv 8, 20; cf. ZAG-ni párt[a-u/ú?-ni] KUB 45.3 i 25 (rit., pre-NH/MS?), ZAG-an pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar KUB 47.43 + KUB 45.3 i 34-35 (rit., pre-NH/MS?); “He breaks the flat loaves likewise” MUŠEN.HI.A–ma pár-ta-a-u-wa-ar-še-et an[d]a QA_TAMMA wišūriškizzi “He presses together the birds’ wings likewise” KBo 21.33 iii 17-18 = KUB 32.49a iii 8-9 (rit., MH/MS), cf. StBoT 2:50; cf. KBo 24.66 ii 5-6; párta-ú-ni-tu-uš LUGAL-un MUNUS.LUGAL-ann–a ašaškizzi “With a wing, he seats them, the king and the queen (i.e., he signals them to sit down)” KBo 

17.1 i 6 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:18f., 73. 

	c. said of a bee: “Shall this bee go out and find him (sc. Telipinu)?” [pá]r-≠ta±-u!-wa!-aš-še-et ammiyanta “Its wings are small; (it is small itself)” KUB 17.10 i 38 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), w. par. KUB 33.5 ii 13 (OH/MS), translit. Myth. 32, tr. ANET 127, Hittite Myths 15. 
	d. said of a mythological animal: “They placed in each corner a bronze statue of dNIN.É. MU.UN.DÙ” … 1 GU›–y[a …] / pár-ta-u-wa-ar-šeet ZABAR ŠA 1 MA.NA “and one ox of […], (with) wings of bronze, weighing one mina” KBo 

15.24 ii 28-29 (foundation rit., MH/NS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:200f., Kellerman, Diss. 168, 175. 
2. feather(?): nu LÚpalwattallaš TI°MUŠEN-aš párta-u-ni-it LUGAL-i menahhanda wā
tar 3-ŠU pap~ paršzi palwaizzi–ma 1-ŠU § LÚpalwattallaš GAL A TI°MUŠEN-ašš–a pár-ta-u-wa-ar harzi–pat … nam~ ma–kan LÚpalwattali TI°MUŠEN-aš pár-ta-u-wa-ar arha dāi [n]–at–kan EGIR-pa ANA DUGKUKUB GEŠTIN [a]nda paški “The crier sprinkles water with an eagle’s feather(?) three times toward the 

partipartiški
king and cries out once. As before (-pat), the crier holds a cup of water and an eagle’s feather(?) … (The priest) takes the eagle’s feather(?) from the crier and sticks it back into the pitcher of wine” KBo 
15.48 ii 5-9, 32-35 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), cf. also KBo 33.188 ii 4-5 (hišuwaš fest.), translit. ChS 1/4:136 (calls it col. v!); [(EGIR-ŠU-ma MUNUSpalwattallaš LUGA[L-i wā
tar (TI°MUŠE)]N-≠aš± pár-da-a-u-na-za (var. pár-ta-u[…]) 3-ŠU pap[paršzi] ibid. iii 13-14, w. dupl. KBo 33.192 rev.? 7-8, ed. ChS 1/4:115f., 135, 140; Bo 5351 left col. 6 (ChS 1/4:68) uses the part. paškan. 
The evidence from passages cited under mng. 1 
— the “right(hand)” partawar (b, above), the bee’s partawar (c, above), and the ox with partawars of bronze (d, above) — clearly shows the meaning “wing.” Mng. 2 “feather” is possible, if the eagle in question has large wings, and the p. is fully inserted (pašk-) in the pitcher. Also supporting this assumed pars pro toto meaning is the analogous situation with pattar/pittar, which can mean both “wing” and “feather.” Cf. also keššar “hand, arm” and pada-“foot, leg.” 
Götze, Madd. (1927) 93 n. 2; Neu, FsNeumann (1982) 220 (on forms without -r). 
partiyanza see parta/i-. 
partipartiški-v.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
GIM-an–ma ≠lu±katta nu d.GIŠGIM!.MAŠ-uš iwa[r …] / pár-ti-pár-ti-iš-ki-iz-zi “But when on the following day Gilgameš p.-s like […]” (In the following sentence, Gilgameš encounters the barmaid Ziduri) KUB 17.3 iii 7-8 (Gilg., NS), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:20f., translit. Myth. 133 □ the lacuna after iwar must contain either a logogram or a PN, see Hoffner, IM 43:39-51. 
Stefanini, JNES 28:46f., suggests two words, parti partai- “combs his hair,” i.e., unravels the locks of his thick hair as he would disentangle wool. He compares this w. āppa parza malk-, restores [… ā
ppa] parti partai- and explains parti : parza on the analogy hanti : hanza. But in the hand copy there is no space between -ti- and -pár-, and the comparison w. [… u]tniyanza wa-al-ti-wa-al-ti-eš-ki-izzi KUB 60.60 rev. 2 is too strong to ignore. 
Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 20f., 52 (allows also for a reading maštimaštiške-, rejects a connection w. partai-); Kronasser, 
199

EHS 1 (1966) 587 (“fliegt, eilt(??),” related to partai-, par~ tawar); Stefanini, JNES 28 (1969) 46f. (two words, parti adv., and partai-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 376 n. 243 (redupl. of partai-). 
Cf. partai-. 
parduwalli-A, adj.; (modifies a statue).† 
(The king returns to the halentu-house and stands by the window) […] ALAM pár-du-wa-alli-in GUN udai “[…] brings a p. statue of a talent/ weighing a talent” KUB 56.52:11 (fest. frag.), ed. Alp, Tempel 56. 
parduwalli-B n.(?); (mng. unkn.); MS.† 
[o-o].HI.A DINGIR-LIM QADU GIŠBANŠUR GIPISAN.NINDA karpanzi n–at / [o-o p]eran hui~ nuanzi āppann–a DUMU.MEŠ SANGA LIBIR pár(coll.)-du-wa-al-li / [o o ā]ppann–a GIŠGIDRU. HI.A huinuanzi KBo 25.109 iii 14-16 (rit. frag.). For LÚSANGA.LIBIR see KUB 17.35 i 20, alternating w. LIBIR.RA in i 24. For LIBIR in Hitt. see EHGl. 17 n. 1 (overlooked by HZL 225-226). Perhaps the same as parduwalli-A. 
TÚGpartuitt(a)-n.; (a type of garment or cloth); MH/MS.† 
(In a description of a statue of the substitute king in regal attire) [… (x-ya ALAM T)]ÚGpár-tuu-it-ta-aš i[-…] KBo 24.96:7 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 
15.15 iii? 8 (MS), KBo 15.15 ed. StBoT 3:136f. In KBo 24.96:7 there appears to be a space between [T]ÚG and pár-. 
(KUŠ)pardug(g)anni n.; bowcase; from MH/ MS.† 
sg. d.-l. KUŠpár-du-ug-ga-an-ni IBoT 1.36 ii 40 (MH/MS); unclear pár-du-k[a-…] KBo 18.170 rev. 7 (NH). 
“One palace attendant steps (forward)” nu–šši LÚŠÀ.TAM GIŠBAN huittian and[a–m]a–at–kan (coll.) KUŠpár-du-ug-ga-an-ni tarnan 1 KUŠÉ.MÁ. URUﬁ.URU-ši(coll.) ŠA LÚ GIŠŠUK[UR o?] IŠTU ≠GI±.KAK.Ú.TAG.GA šū¢
ntan pai “and the quartermaster gives him a strung bow, inserted in a bow-case, and a spearman’s quiver, full of arrows” IBoT 
1.36 ii 39-41 (instr. for the MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:18f. 
(w. collations), Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:184-187; perhaps also […] 1-NUTUM KUŠKIR›.TAB.A[NŠE] / […] ≠1±NUTUM pár-du-k[a-…] “One set of bridle and 

LÚparwala

reins, […] one bowcase(?)-set” KBo 18.170 rev. 6-7 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 488, translit. THeth 10:109 (both reading as maš-du-uš-x[…] > mašta-/bašta-). 
The stem could be pardugganna-, pardugganni-, or parduggatar. 
Jakob-Rost, MIO 11 (1965) 187 (“Lederwams”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 62 (“KUŠparduganna- (lederner Bestandteil der Bewaffnung)”); Beal, Diss. (1986) 575f., 588. 

partūni-n.; (a bird); OS. † pl. acc. pár-tu-u-ni-uš KBo 17.1 iv 37, KBo 17.3 iv 33, KBo 
25.7 + IBoT 3.135 iv 2 (all OS). 
2 ≠MUŠEN pár-±tu-u-ni-uš tuttumili harmi “I hold two p.-birds hidden. (I release them onto a branch)” KBo 17.3 iv 33 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.1 iv 3738 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 8:38f., StBoT 25:18; [Z´Z.HI.A]≠š–a± harš≠ār± [hāran]an pár-tu-u-[n]i-uš-ša […] “And [I …] ears (lit. heads) of [wheat], [the eagl]e and the p.-birds (and I take these outside and fix them in place)” KBo 17.7 + KBo 25.7 + IBoT 3.135 iv 2 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:22, ed. (without KBo 25.7) StBoT 8:40f. 
Otten/Sou√ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 120; Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 141. 
NINDApardušimi-n.; (a type of bread or pastry).† 
(In a list of breads and pastries) 1 NINDApár-duši-i-mi-i[š …] Bo 3784 i 12, translit. StBoT 15:25. 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 176 (“Luw. pass. part. in -mi-?”). 
LÚparwala-n.; (a functionary); NH.† 
pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠpár-wa-la-aš KUB 40.95 ii 6, (8), 17 (NH), LÚ.MEŠpár-wa-la-aš(-ša) KBo 22.36:8 (Hatt. III). 
1 GUN URUDU 3 BI≠BRU± NA›NUNUZ 1/ 2 BÁN N[A›NU]NUZ LÚ.MEŠpár-wa-la-aš LUGAL SUMer 3 GUN URUDU ≠x± [G]UN A[N].NA 2 U[RUDUŠ]EN ≠6 URUDU±KIN 5 URUDUwakšur 2 BIBRU GU› NA›NUN[UZ] 1/ 2 BÁN NA›NUN[UZ LÚ.MEŠpárw]a-la-aš LUGAL EGIR-anda SUM-er “The p.men gave (to) the king one talent of copper (and) three animal-shaped vessels of beads (containing) one-half BÁN of beads. In addition (EGIR-anda), the p.-men gave (to) the king three talents of copper, ≠x± talents of tin, two copper pipes, six copper sickles, five copper wakšur-vessels, and two ox

200

shaped vessels of beads (containing) one-half BÁN of beads” KUB 40.95 ii 5-8 (inv., NH), ed. Kempinski/Košak, Tel Aviv 4:88f.; LÚ.MEŠp. LUGAL may also be tr. “the p.-men of the king, the royal p.-people,” cf. Mestieri 115 

(“Nessi genitivali”). 
Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 115. 
parunka-n.; (a vessel); OH?/NS?.† 
pl. acc. pa-ru-un-ku-uš KUB 44.60 iii 1. 

pa-ru-un-ku-uš-ma-aš-kán dan[zi] n–aš–kan ak~ kuškan[zi] “They take the p.-vessels from them and they drink (from) them” KUB 44.60 iii 1-2 (Hattic and Hitt. bil., OH?/NS), ed. Kammenhuber, Materialien 4, No. 5:65. 

NA›parušha-see NA›parašha-. 
parušiuš n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 

nu pa-ru-ši-uš arha […] KUB 52.63:17 (animal behavior oracle, NH). p. is either the subj., sg. nom. of a stem parušiu-, or obj., pl. acc. of paruši-. 

parza see paršza. 

parzahannaš, paršahannaš, pirzahannaš, pirešhannaš, piršahan(n)aš n. gen.; (modifying livestock); from MH/MS.† 
pár-za-ha-an-na-aš KUB 13.1 iv 16 (MH/MS), pí-ir-ša-ahha-an-na-aš KBo 5.7 obv. (12), rev. (14) (spacing favors [pí…], not [É-…]), 29 (Arn. I/MS), É-ir-ša-ah-ha-na-aš ibid. rev. 42, pí-ir-za-ha[-an-na-aš] KUB 20.52 i 24 (MH/NS), pí-re-ešha-an-na-aš KUB 13.2 iv 28 (MH/NS), pár-ša-ha!-an-na<-aš> 438/s ii 4 (Alp, Tempel 146f.). 
(Oxen and sheep are sent in advance. The king goes to URUMatila, where there is a great assembly) ≠GU›± pár-ša-ha!-an-na<-aš> aušzi “He inspects (lit. sees) the oxen of p.” 438/s ii 4 (ANDAHŠUM fest.), ed. Alp, Tempel 146f. and D. Yoshida, BMECCJ 6:122f.; Alp recognized [GU]D, while Yoshida read only “x”; both editors read pár-ša-za-an-na uncorrected; (Take care of your gardens and fields and keep them enclosed) ANA GU›.HI.A pí-re-eš-ha-an-na-aš-ša (par. pár-za-haan-na-aš) [kui]š HA.LA-az “The share (of fodder) for the oxen of the p., (let it regularly eat its share)” KUB 13.2 iv 28-29 (instr. for BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.24:17 (MH/NS), and par. KUB 13.1 iv 16 (MH/ MS), ed. Dienstanw. 51f., 62; (In a list of deliveries for 

:parzahanašši
a festival by individual townships) “Further, one thick loaf made of one PARÂSU-measure of wheat flour” katti–šši–ma 1 UDU 1 GU› pí-ir-za-ha[-anna-aš] 1 DUGhaššuwawannin GEŠTIN URUEll[i]pra pē harkanzi “But along with it, they keep ready one sheep, one p.-ox, and one haššuwawanni-vessel of wine in Ellipra” KBo 9.123 + KUB 20.52 i 24-26 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS), cf. KUB 30.40 v 5; 15 GU› 22 UDU.HI.A 2 ANŠE.HI.A ŠA SAG.GÉME.‰R.MEŠ 22 GU› Éir-ša-ah-ha-na-aš “fifteen oxen, twenty-two sheep, two donkeys of the servants; twenty-two oxen of the p.” KBo 5.7 rev. 42 (land grant, Arn. I/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:352f., cf. 10 GU› ŠA SAG.GÉME. ´R.MEŠ 10 GU›.HI.A [pí-ir]≠ša±-ah-ha-an-na-aš ibid. rev. 14; 2 GU›.HI.A 22 UDU 6 GU›.APIN.LÁ. HI.A pí-ir-ša-ah-ha-an-na-aš ibid. rev. 29. In ibid. obv. 12 and rev. 42, p. apparently stands in opposition to ŠA SAG. GÉME.‰R.MEŠ. We see no justification for Riemschneider, MIO 6:339 and ArOr 33:333 n. 6, trying to restore the same symmetry in rev. 14, 29 by inserting <SAG.GÉME.‰R.MEŠ>. 
Laroche, RHA XV/61:128, proposed to analyze p. as pir šahhanaš “house of fief.” Alternate spellings parzahannaš and pirešhannaš, as well as the prevalent spelling w. -nn- (the only -n- occurs in KBo 
5.7 rev. 42 at the end of the line, onto the edge) make this suggestion suspect, see Kammenhuber, KZ 77:245, and Hoffner, Or NS 35:388. If, despite the difficulties, Laroche’s basic identification is correct, one would expect that the genitive -aš connects the entire compound to the primary noun GU›, and that *piršahhan as a compound meant “house-šahhan” in the sense of property subject to šahhan on the estate (per). 
Laroche, RHA XV/61 (1957) 128 (“Il s’agit évidemment d’un juxtaposé de É-ir = pir ‘maison’ et de šahhanaš, gén. de šahhan ‘fief(?)’”); Kammenhuber, KZ 77 (1961) 245; Riemschneider, ArOr 33 (1965) 333 (“zum Lehnsbesitz gehörig”); Hoffner, Or NS 35 (1966) 388. 
Cf. :parzahanašši-. 
:parzahanašši-Luw. gen. adj.; (defines cattle); NH.† 
sg. nom. (sic, acc. expected) :pár!(tablet pa-, coll. from photograph)-za-h[a]-na-aš-ši-iš 1628/u 3 + KUB 27.70 iii 16. 
“When the king celebrates the Stormgod of the House, the king approaches and sacrifices” 1 
201

GU›.MAH :pár!(tablet: pa-, coll. from photograph)za-h[a]-na-aš-ši-iš 3 UDU 1 SILA› 2 MÁŠ.GAL 1 MÁŠ.TUR ANA dU É BAL-anzi “They sacrifice one bull of the p., three sheep, one lamb, two billy goats, and one kid to the Stormgod of the House” 1628/u:3-4 + KUB 27.70 iii 16-17 (fest., NH), ed. Dinçol/Darga, Anatolica 3:110f. iii 49-50. Dinçol/Darga suggest an emendation of the first sign to pir!- (= UD), although it is pointed out by the authors that there is no other ex. of an initial pir-. With pár!-, there is only one superfluous horizontal wedge. 
Dinçol/Darga, Anatolica 3 (1969-1970) 315 (“zum Lehensdienst gehörig”). 
Cf. parzahannaš. 
NINDAparzahi-n. com.; (a cereal product); MH/ MS.† 
(Several ingredients are mixed in a DUGG‰R. KIŠ-vessel) nu 2 UPNI NINDApár-za-hi-iš ienzi n– an–šan ANA DUGG‰R.K[IŠ … (enough space to finish this sentence and introduce a new one)] / šer 1 NINDA idurin 10 NINDA SIG dāi “They make p. (of) two UPNU(-measures) and [place?] it in the DUGG‰R.K[IŠ …]. He places one iduri-bread and ten thin breads on top” KBo 23.34 iv 8-9 (rit., NH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:368f. The sequence “x UPNU + ingredients” seems to be used exclusively for loose or shapeless materials (fruits, salt, grains, liquids, porridges, etc.), while a sequence “product (ŠA) x UPNI” is used for shaped loaves. NINDAp. is probably not a bread or pastry but a pulpy product. NINDAp. is formally sg. nom. but functionally acc. For a similar use of kanza see AlHeth 69 w. further references. 
parzai-v.; (mng unkn.); NS.† 
[…] / pár-za-a-iz-z[i] KBo 35.247 i (13-)14 (cult of Teššub and Hepat) in broken context. 
(:)parzaki-n.; label(?), bulla(?); NH.† 
1 GIŠtuppaš GAL KANKU GIŠ.HUR pár-za-kiš NU.GÁL “One large chest, sealed. No GIŠ.HUR (or) bulla(?)” KBo 18.179 v 9 (inv., NH), ed. THeth. 10:50 (ii 5), 52, Siegelová, Verw. 40f.; 2 GIŠtuppaš TUR.TUR :pár-za-k[iš …] KUB 42.22 rt. col. 13 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 42f. In the first ex., it was recorded 

(:)parzašša 

that the p. is missing or not yet made after the storage chest was inventoried and sealed; the word perhaps refers to a clay label or bulla, attached to the chest. 
Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 51f., 231; Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 40f. w. n. 7. 
parzagulliya n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
§ 30 HUB.HI.A ŠA LÚ KÙ.GI x[…] / 1-NUTUM pár-za-gul-li-ia […] § “Thirty earrings of gold for men, x[…] / one set of p. […] KUB 12.1 iii 2-3 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:100, 103, Siegelová, Verw. 442f., 611 (ein Schmuckstück). Since p. is listed in a paragraph together w. earrings (and presumably other jewelry), it is probably a type of ornament; cf. THeth 10:231 (“(an ornament)”). Cf. [… pirm]ušhiya pár-gul-li-ia x[…] KBo 24.80 obv. 8 (Kizz. rit.), in a long sequence of Hurr. terms without a Hitt. context. 
(:)parzašša Luw. adj.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
	a. describing arrows: GIŠTUKUL GIŠBAN GIKAK. TAG.GA :pár-za-aš-ša UNU_T ZABAR URUDUPA_~ ŠU GAL URUDUHAÙÙINNU G´R! GAL ZABAR “Mace(s), bow(s), arrow(s) (which is) :p., utensils of bronze, large hatchet(s), ax(es), large sword(s) of bronze” KUB 13.35 iii 46-47 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:12f. (“Köcher?”). 
	b. describing two leopard protomes: 2 GÚ P´RIG.TUR KÙ.GI NA›ZA.G‰N NA›mušnuwa[n~ tit(?)…] / pár-za-aš-ša “Two gold leopard protomes p.-ed (with) lapis lazuli and [with] mušnuwa[nt]stone” Bo 87/5a ii 22-23 (cult inv., NH), ed. Otten, FsTÖzgüç 366f. 
	c. unclear: [d]UTU-ŠI–ma EN–YA [HUR. SA]G?-an kē¢

zza ZAG-za nuntaraš auwan arha [z]ai :pár-za-aš-š[a(-)o ku?]≠e±qa :dāyalla mehurriHI.A artari KUB 40.1 rev.! 15-16 (letter, NH); see mehur r; here :p. introduces the clause. 
The alternate interpretation, as the noun “quiver,” which was possible when only KUB 13.35 iii 4647 was known, can now be excluded on the basis of Bo 87/5a ii 22-23. 
Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 129 (“name of a weapon (‘quiver’?)”; Laroche, DLL (1959) 80 (“epithète de ‘flèches’ ou ‘carquois’?”); Carruba, OA 9 (1970) 85 (“‘faretra’ … ma che più 

202

probabilmente è un aggettivo riferentesi alla parola precedente 

o seguente”). 

(:)paš(š)-v.; to swallow, gulp down; from MH/ MS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pa-aš-zi KUB 7.1 i 30 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 
60.56:7 (NS), KUB 60.75:5, pa-a-ši KUB 27.29 iii 9, HT 1 i 42 (both MH/NS); pl. 3 pa-≠ša?±-a[n-zi] KBo 34.2:40, paš?(or piš)ša-an-zi KUB 51.33:4. 
pret. sg. 2 pa-aš-ta KUB 33.120 i 29 (MH/NS); sg. 3 paaš-ta KUB 29.7 rev. 55 (MH/MS), KUB 33.120 i 26 (MH/NS), pa-a-aš-ta KUB 43.38 rev. 15 (NH), :pa-aš-ta KUB 49.2 i 14 (NH). 
imp. sg. 3 pa-aš-du KUB 29.7 rev. 55 (MH/MS), pa-a-šu KBo 10.45 iv 4, KUB 41.8 iv 3 (both MH/NS), KUB 43.38 rev. 11, (16) (NS). 
inf. pa-a-aš-šu-an-zi KBo 32.114 obv.? 6, Luw. pa-aš-šuu-na KUB 24.7 iii 31 (NH). 
iter. pres. sg. 3 pa-aš-ki-iz-zi KUB 8.65 i 10 (NH), :pa-aški[-iz-zi] KUB 8.67 iv? 19 (NH); pl. 3 pa-aš-kán-zi KBo 12.103 obv. 11, 5/i:4 (StBoT 14:72 n. 2), KUB 56.57 iii? 4. 
pret. sg. 3 pa-a-ši-iš-ki-it KBo 32.14 iii 18, rev. 32 (MH/ MS). unclear pa-aš-šu-u-x[…] 36/k:13 (either Luw. inf. pa-aš-šu-u-n[a], or verb. subst. gen. pa-aš-šu-u-a[š]). 
(Hurr.) šallaena neššēna ēprita pišešhum KBo 32.14 iv 1819 = (Hitt.) nu IGI.DU°.HI.A kue pa-a-ši-iš-ki-it n–at PA_NI BE_LI–ŠU lilhuwan daiš “He began to pour out before his lord, those taxes which he was continually swallowing” ibid. iii 1819; cf. par. (Hurr.) ibid. rev. 27 = (Hitt.) ibid. rev. 32. 
a. without prev./adv.: ANA GI.A.DA.GUR–ya– ššan purin dā
i nu pa-a-ši “He puts his lips to the drinking straw and swallows” HT i 41-42 (Zarpiya’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Schwartz, JAOS 58:338f., Friedrich, JCS 1:287, HTR 120; […] šarapi nu pa-a-ši 7-ŠU “He (sc. the client) sips and swallows seven times” KUB 27.29 iii 9 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:142f.; (Anu is saying to Kumarbi) ANA PA_NI ŠÀ–≠KA±–wa–z duškiškitta LÚ-natar–mit–wa kuit pa-aš-ta “You rejoice in your heart because you have swallowed my manhood” KUB 33.120 i 28-29 (myth), ed. Kum. *2, 7, tr. Hittite Myths 40, cf. ibid. i 25-26 (w. katta); of a sword swallower in the KI.LAM festival text: [TU]Š-≠aš± dHalkin ekuzi LÚ.MEŠ URUHu[r]hurna G´R.HI.A pa-≠ša?±-a[n-zi] “In a sitting position he drinks the grain deity; the men of Hurhurna swallo[w] swords” KBo 17.46:16 + KBo 34.2:40; similar: [LÚ URUHu-]u-hur-na G´R pa-aš-zi “[A man(?) of the city(?) of H]uhurna swallows a sword” KUB 60.56:7 (fest.?, NS), ed. Ünal, AnSt 44:213f.; collation by Klengel ex

(:)paš(š)- c 
cluded the reading [URUHu]r-hur-na, although the KI.LAM passage proves the city is the same; note in the immediate context the [LÚ.]MEŠ GIŠKUNﬁ “ladder-climbers” who are depicted next to the sword-swallower in the Alaca Hüyük relief shown in Bittel, Hethiter 193; see Ünal, AnSt 44:207-218, differently Gurney, AnSt 44:219f.; the rest. [LÚ.]MEŠ is supported by the par. 2 LÚ.MEŠ GIŠK[UNﬁ] KBo 27.39 rt. col. 13, on which see Ünal, AnSt 44:215; […]x 3 G´R ZABAR dāi n–at–za– kan […] / [… L]Ú.G´R–ma–at namma pāšzi “He takes three bronze swords and […-]s them. The sword-swallower furthermore swallows them” KBo 
32.106 rev.? 11-12, ed. Ünal, AnSt 44:214; cf. also KBo 32.114 obv.? 6; perhaps also [… pa]-aš-zi in KBo 32.106 rev.? 7. 
b. w. katta: BIL.ZA.ZA–at išši[t (dāi) …] / kat~ ta pa-aš-zi “The frog takes it with its mouth […] swallows [it] down” KUB 60.75:4-5 (purif. rit.), w. par. KBo 13.131 obv. 15-16, ed. StBoT 14:72f., Watkins, Kerns Mem. 346; EGIR-anda–ma–šši–kan išši–šši lahuhhi n–at katta pa-aš-zi “I then pour (the infusion) into its (i.e., the child’s) mouth and it swallows it down” KUB 7.1 i 29-30 (Ayatarša’s rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:143, 145, Friedrich, ArOr 6:374; mān dKu~ marbiš ŠA dAnu LÚ-natar katta pa-aš-ta “When Kumarbi swallowed down Anu’s manhood” KUB 
33.12 i 26 (Kingship in Heaven, NH), ed. Kum. *2, 7, tr. Hittite Myths 40, cf. ibid. i 28-29 (without prev.); nu–kan GUNNI KUﬂ-un ēpt[a] / […]x GUNNI–pat GAM :pa-aš-ta “[The snake] caught a fish at the ‘hearth’ and […] at the same ‘hearth’ swallowed [it] down” KUB 49.2 i 13-14 (snake oracle, NH); (Animals devoured by Hedammu are listed) [… mil]it GIM-an katta pa-aš-ki[-iz-zi] “He swallows [them] down like [hon]ey” KUB 8.67 iv? 19 (Hedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:40f., cf. […]x pa-aš-ki-iz-zi KUB 8.65 i 10; (The client pours water from a vessel, saying:) “Whoever has spoken evil in the presence of the god” nu kī māhhan wātar dankuiš taganzipaš katta pa-aš-ta apā
tt–a idalu uttar taganzipaš katta QA_TAMMA paaš-du “just as the dark earth has swallowed up this water, so let the earth swallow up that evil word” KUB 29.7 rev. 54-55 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 125, 132, tr. ANET 346; cf. KBo 10.45 iv 1-4 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:134f., and KUB 43.38 rev. 8-16 (rit., NH), ed. Gentili Pieri, SR 1:42 n. 25; KUB 24.7 iii 31 (tale, NH). 
c. w. anda: anda–ma–kan galaktar pa-aš-kán-zi KUB 56.57 iii? 4. 
203

Friedrich, ArOr 6 (1934) 374 (“einen Schluck tun, schlürfen”); Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 54 n. 9 (pāšu vs pašdu); idem, Stammbildung (1979) 435f. 
Cf. pappaša(i)-, UZUpappaššala-, pašattarma-. 
NINDApaš(š)a-n.; (a type of bread or pastry); MH/NS.† 
pl. acc. NINDApa-aš-šu-uš KUB 24.9 ii 44, NINDApa-≠šu±-[uš] KBo 10.41:1. 
nu–ššan kar-aš halkin NINDApa-aš-šu-uš (dupl. E: NINDApa-≠šu±-[uš], B: pár-šu[-uš]) GIŠ[(BAN 3 GIŠGI. HI.A x)] paddani anda dāi “She (the Old Woman) places wheat, barley, p.-loaves, a bow, (and) three arrows into a basket” KUB 24.9 ii 44-45 (rit., MH/NS), 
w. dupls. KUB 24.10 ii 2 (B), KBo 10.41:1 (E), ed. THeth 2:38f. Jakob-Rost, THeth 2:111, cites the stem as NINDApaš(š)u-; since the preceding halkin is acc., NINDApaššuš must be pl. acc. Note that the dupl. B has NINDApár-šu[-uš]. Read in both exx. pár!-? 
Cf. NINDAparša-. 
pašai[…] (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
(In a letter, context fragmentary) pa-ša-i-x-x(-)x[…] KBo 9.85:8. 
pašaniš (a term used in extispicy); NH.† 
nu IGI-zi SU.MEŠ ≠SIGﬁ±-ru EGIR SU.MEŠ [NU.SIGﬁ-du…-n]i-iš pa-ša-ni-iš NU.SIGﬁ “Let the first exta be favorable; let the second exta [be unfavorable …-n]i-iš pa-ša-ni-iš. Unfavorable” KUB 
49.30 rev.? 15-16. 
The context is too fragmentary to determine whether the stem is pašana- or pašani-, or whether this term is a noun referring to a part of the exta or an adjective modifying a part of the exta. 
LÚpaš(š)andala-n.;(a type of kitchen personnel, ‘food-taster(?)’); from OS.† 
sg. nom. LÚpa-ša-an-da-la-aš KUB 13.3 ii 23, iv (20) (MH?/NS). 
pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠpa-aš-ša-an-da-le-eš KUB 43.29 iii 8 (OS). 
gen. LÚ.MEŠpa-aš-ša-an-ta-l[a-aš] KBo 17.29 i 4 (pre-NH/ NS). 
frag. LÚpa-aš-š[a-…] KBo 20.13 rev. 8 (OS), 558/u + 1968/ 
u:6 (StBoT 15:44), LÚpa-aš-ša-[…] KUB 31.57 ii 16 (OH/NS), LÚpa-aš-ša-an-x[…] KBo 25.159:6 (OS? or MS?). 

MUNUSpaššariyatti

	a. in general: anda–ma šumēš BE_LU_ MEŠ TU‡ hūmanteš LÚSAGI.A LÚ GIŠBANŠUR LÚMUHAL~ DIM LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙ LÚdāwalalaš LÚwal(a)h~ hiyalaš LÚZABAR.DAB LÚpa-ša-an-da-la-aš LÚEPÂŠ GA … KUB 13.3 ii 20-25 (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), see tr. in paršur 2 a; cf. 558/u + 1968/u:5-8 (StBoT 15:44), KBo 25.159:6 (OS? or MS?), KUB 31.57 ii 15-18. 
	b. house of the p.-men: […-y]amiš ≠É± LÚ.MEŠpaaš-ša-an-ta-l[a-aš] KBo 17.29 i 4 (pre-NH/NS). 

LÚp. is probably derived from the verb paš- “to swallow,” hence something like “food-taster(?).” 
van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 92 (“celui qui goûte aux mets servis au roi?”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 172 (“vielleicht ‘*Vorkoster’”); Hoffner, RHA XXV/80 (1967) 67 (“foodtaster(?)”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 58f. (“addetto al pašanda” w. lit.). 

Cf. paš-. 

paššari-adj.; “circumcised(?)”; NH.† 
(Describing the treatment of a penis ailment) “[If] he does not get cured by this, he fills in […] with this medicine” n–aš mā
n pa-aš-ša-ri-iš n–an [… n–aš mān] UL pa-aš-ša-ri-iš n–an hapurin EGIR-pa damašzi “If he is circumcised(?), he […]-s him, [but if] he is not circumcised(?), he presses his foreskin(?) back” KUB 44.61 rev. 24-25 (med., NH), ed. StBoT 19:20f., Puhvel, HED 3:131. 
Burde, StBoT 19 (1974) 24f. (p. = “beschnitten”; hapuri= “Pflanzenwuchs”); Tischler, HDW (1982) 62 (“beschnitten”); Melchert, JCS 35 (1983) 139f. (“‘circle, ring’ is used for ‘the one having a ring, circle (around his penis)’ = ‘circumcised,’” cf. kiklubaššar[iš–m]a–aš “She is an iron ring” RS 
25.421 rev. 22); Puhvel, HED 3 (1991) 131f. 
paššariya[…] (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
[…]x-aš-za pa-aš-ša-ri-ia-a[t(?)-…] KUB 51.81 obv.? 8 (hist. frag., Šupp. II). The sign before -aš-za could be HU (or MUŠEN), RI, AR or LI. Due to the lack of context, it is unclear what part of speech 
p. can be. 
MUNUSpaššariyatti-n.; (a type of personnel); NS.† 
MUNUS.MEŠpa-aš-ša-ri-i[a-…] FHL 32:7, [MUNUS.MEŠp]a-ašša-ri-ia-at-ti KBo 10.9 rev.? 6. 

204

MUNUSpaššariyatti

(At dawn, the anointed priest … of Kuruštama washes the head of the SANGA-priest, and he sits down to [ea]t) MUNUS.MEŠpa-aš-ša-ri-i[(a-at-ti-≠ma±) …] / […]x tianzi FHL 32:7-8 (frag., NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.9 rev.? 6. 

[:pašattar] KBo 4.14 iii 37, see :pašattarma-. 

:pašattarma-n. or adj.(?); (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
nu–kan EN.MEŠ :pa-ša-at-tar-ma-aš arha :pap~ pašai “Does pašattarma- swallow up(?) (the) lords?” KBo 4.14 iii 36-37 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:46, van den Hout, Diss. 294f. (“der Umsturz stürtzte die Generäle”); for the context see s.v. :pap~ pašai-. :p. could also be a noun, pl. acc. “Does it swallow up the :p.-s of the lords?,” or, sg. gen.; or, an adj. pl. acc. “the p.lords.” Kammenhuber, MIO 2:438 n. 93 and MIO 3:353, analyzed it as pašattar–ma–aš; Meriggi, WZKM 58:88 as pašat~ tar–maš (i.e., –ma–šmaš). Stefanini, AANL 20:69, posits a stem :pašattarma-, since the pron. encl. belongs to the beginning of the sentence. 
Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 438 n. 93; eadem, MIO 3 (1955) 353 (:pašattar); Alp, Anatolia 2 (1957) 15 (:pašattar “Schluck”); Laroche, DLL (1959) 80; Meriggi, WZKM 58 (1962) 87 (:pašattar “Schluck”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 94 n. 1 (:pašattar “‘dressement’”); Stefanini, AANL 20 (1965) 69 (:pašattarma-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 555; Tischler, HDW (1982) 62 (pašattar “Schluck”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 497; Melchert, CLL (1993) 172 (“swallowing”(?) > *pašattar). 

Cf. paš-, UZUpappaššala-, :pappaša(i)-. 

(:)pašihai-v.; 1. to rub, squeeze, crush, 2. (in the idiom UZUGAB-i/GAB-ši :p.) to betray(?), double-cross(?), disregard(?); from MH/NS.† 
act. pres. sg. 3 pa-ši-ha-iz-zi KUB 44.63 ii 14 (NH), VBoT 120 ii 4 (MH/NS), pa-ši-ha≠-a±-[iz-zi?] ibid. ii 21, Luw. :pa-šiha-a-ti KUB 14.3 ii 25 (Hatt. III). 
pret. sg. 1 Luw. pa-a-≠ši±-ha-ah-ha KUB 40.1 obv. 9 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II?); sg. 3 Luw. :pa-ši≠-ha-a-id-d±[a(coll. photograph)] KUB 14.3 ii 24 (Hatt. III), pa-ši[-ha-a-it-ta] 1303/u obv.? 18 (AoF 8:92 [= 33]). 

imp. sg. 3 pa-ši-ha-id-du KUB 33.93 iii 22 (NS). 

mid. pres. sg. 3 pa-ši-ha-≠ta±-[r]i VBoT 120 ii 25 (MH/NS). 
iter. pres. sg. 3 ≠pa!-ši-h±a!-iš-ki-iz-zi VBoT 120 ii 6 (MH/ NS). 
1. to rub, squeeze, crush (par. to puššai- “to trample”): nu–war–an ezzan GIM-an arha puš~ šaiddu lalakuešan–ma–war–an–[kan GIM-an] 

(:)pašihai-
G‰R-it anda pa-ši-ha-id-du KUB 33.93 iii 21-22 (Ullik. I A), see tr. in lalaweš(š)a-a; “The Old Woman mixes together sand, alkali, flour, [and] b[itter vetch]” nu UN-an N´.TE.MEŠ–ŠU pa-ši-ha-iz-zi “and she rubs it on the parts of the man’s body. (The Old Woman says: ‘The sacred bitter vetch like a lion’)” GU›Še[rin] GU›Hurrin arha ≠pa!-ši-h±a!-iš-ki-iz-zi “‘rubs off the bulls Šeri and Hurri’” VBoT 120 ii 3-6 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:138-141 (= ii 17-20), AlHeth 101, cf. ibid. ii 21-25 (= 35-39); mahhan–ma–at ziyari n–at ŠU-az! (text -uk) anda pa-ši-ha-iz-zi “When it (sc. the infusion of herbs) is done (lit. cooked), he squeezes/rubs it with (his) hand (and strains it through a cloth)” KUB 44.63 ii 13-14 (med., NH), ed. StBoT 19:28f. 
2. (in the idiom UZUGAB-i/GAB-ši :p.) to betray(?), double-cross(?), disregard(?) (lit. to rub (something) on one’s chest): (Hatt. III tells the gods about the favors he had bestowed on Urhi-Teššub) apāš–ma ŠA dUTU URUArinn[a…] / nu– šmaš–kan UZUGAB-i :pa-ši[-ha-a-it-ta …] “He (sc. Urhi-Teššub), however, […] of the Sungoddess of Arinna, and he betrayed(?) you (sc. the gods)” KUB 
21.19 ii 32-33 + 1303/u obv.? 17-18 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:92f.; (The Hittite king, probably Hatt. III, speaks to Atpa:) “Because my brother (sc. the king of Ahhiyawa) wrote to you: ‘Go and deliver him (sc. Piyamaradu) to the Hittite king.’ Deliver him now” nu–wa–za–kan ≠ka±r[ū] ≠GIM-an± a[m]≠mel± memian GAB-ši :pa-ši-ha-a-≠id±-d[a(coll. photograph) tuēll–a–]w[a]–za–kan memian GABši :pa-ši-ha-a-≠ti± “Just as he has earlier disregarded(?) my word/command(s), so he will disregard(?) [your] affair(s)/word(s)” KUB 14.3 ii 23-25 (Taw., Hatt. III?), ed. AU 8f. (reading DU°-ši not GAB-ši), see also Sürenhagen, AoF 8:106 (reading GAB-ši) and memiya- 1 b 7'; cf. [… GAB-i?] INIM-an :pa-a-≠ši±-ha-ah-ha “Have I ever disregarded(?) an affair/command(?)?” KUB 40.1 rev.! 9 (letter, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II?), cf. Kühne, ZA 62:239 n. 10. 
Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 64 (“(den Körper mit einer Salbe, die Augen mit einer Arzneipflanze) einreiben,” “(mit dem Fusse) zerreiben, zermalmen”); Friedrich, RHA VIII/47 (194748) 7; Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 123 (on Luw. forms); Laroche, DLL (1959) 80 (“broyer, fouler”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 481; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 484 (“ein-, zerreiben, zerdrücken”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 172 (“pulverize”(?)). 
205

(NA›)paššila-, NA›paššilu-, NA›paššili-n. com.; 
1. stone, pebble, 2. gem, precious stone(?); from OH/MS. 
sg. nom. NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš KBo 23.10 iv 20 (MS), VBoT 24 iii 15 (MH/NS). 
acc. pa-aš-ši-la-an KBo 3.34 i 2, (3), KBo 13.44 i 2 (both OH/NS), NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an KBo 21.89 iii 20 (MS?), KUB 15.34 iii 43 (MH/MS), KBo 5.2 i 56, 57, 58, VBoT 24 iii 26 (both MH/ NS), KUB 39.31:8, 10 (NS), KBo 19.142 iii 31 (NH), NA›pa-ašši-lu-un KUB 15.31 i 61, KUB 15.32 i 62 (both MH/NS). 
gen. NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš KBo 21.22:45 (OH/MS). 
pl. nom. pa-aš-ši-le-eš KBo 21.22:40 (OH/MS), […]pa-ašši-li-iš KBo 15.32 iv 3 (MH/MS), NA›pa-ši-lu-uš KUB 41.29 iii 13 (OH/NS), [… p]a-aš-še-lu!-uš KUB 36.95 ii 4 (NS). 
acc. NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš KBo 20.73 iv 18 + KBo 17.54 iv 4 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 17.61 rev. 5, KUB 15.34 i 36 (both MH/ MS), KUB 33.49 ii 6, (8) (OH/NS), KBo 10.45 ii 59, KUB 
27.29 iii 10, VBoT 24 iii 28, iv 1 (both MH/NS), KUB 12.26 ii 18 (NH), KUB 54.48:7, KUB 59.15 i 9, NA›pa-še-lu-uš KUB 
20.31:3 (NS), NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš KUB 27.16 i 34 (NS), pa-ašši-la-aš KUB 41.8 ii 25 (MH/NS), KUB 59.54 obv. 3. 
d.-l. NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš KUB 44.56 rev. 4 (OH or MH/NS), KUB 48.10 ii 5 (NS), KUB 59.54 obv. 6, NA›pa-aš-ši-li-ia-aš KUB 44.56 iii 6 (OH or MH/NS). 
stem and case uncertain NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš KUB 39.45 obv. 8 (MH?/NS) (sg. nom. or pl. acc.?). 
frag. NA›pa-a-aš-š[i …] KUB 20.57:6 (NS), NA›pa-aš-ši-l[i…] KBo 17.54 iv 11 (OH or MH/MS), NA›pa-aš-[…] KBo 9.109 rev. 7. 
The u-stem is predicated upon sg. acc. NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-un KUB 15.31 i 61, KUB 15.32 i 62 (both MH/NS), the i-stem upon pl. d.-l. NA›pa-aš-ši-li-ia-aš KUB 44.56 iii 6 (OH or MH/ NS). 
1. stone, pebble — a. found in — 1' rivers: [o o o 2-ŠU] ≠7± NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an ´D-az šarā daī “He (sc. the practitioner) takes from the river [two times] seven pebbles. (He throws seven pebbles into one jug of water, and seven pebbles into another jug of water)” KBo 5.2 i 56 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 89, Witzel, HKU 102f.; cf. šer–ma–ššan ´D-aš NA›pa-ašši-l[i-…] KBo 17.54 iv 11 (incant., OH or MH/MS). 
2' ponds: [namma] 2-ŠU 7 pa-aš-ši-la-aš (dupl. NA›pa-a[š-š]i-lu-uš) TÚL-az dāi “[Then] he (sc. the practitioner) takes two times seven pebbles from the pond” KUB 41.8 ii 24-25 (rit. for infernal deities, MH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 ii 59 (LNS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 83, Otten, ZA 54:126f. ii 61-62; n–ašta kuē
zzi TÚL-az NA›paaš-ši-la-an š[a]rā daī“He takes a pebble from each pond” KUB 15.34 iii 43 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 91f., Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:198f. 

(NA›)paššila- 1 b 2' 

3' roads: nu 2 NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš IŠTU KASKALši K[A.G‰R]–ya dāi “He takes two pebbles from the road and the footpath” KUB 15.34 i 36 (evocation, MH/ MS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 91, Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:186f.; cf. KUB 15.32 i 61-62 (evocation, MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:154f. 
4' fields: 9 NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš A.ŠÀ terippiaš VBoT 24 iii 15 (rit., MH/NS), cf. ibid. iii 26, ed. Polvani, Minerali 87f., Sturtevant, TAPA 58:12f., Chrest. 112f.; on the magic significance of findspots and numbers of pebbles, see Haas, Berggötter 174f. 
5' sea: ŠA A.AB.BA akun NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an-na KUB 36.12 ii 5-6, see below, mng. 2; NA›pa-aš-ši-li-ia-aš KUﬂ.HI.A x[…] / n–at aruni irhe–šše […] KUB 44.56 rev. 6-7 (OH or MH/NS). 
b. use in rituals — 1' warm pebbles: kattan–ma– šši NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš ā
nduš DUGpahhunaliaz harkanzi KUB 7.53 ii 22-23 (rit., NH), ed. Polvani, Minerali 81, see DUGpahhunalli-; cf. KUB 17.23 ii 12-13, 16-17, ed. Polvani, Minerali 81; KBo 20.73 iv 18 + KBo 17.54 iv 4, ed. Polvani, Minerali 83f.; nu–ššan NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš ANA GUNNI išhuwāi “He scatters the pebbles on the brazier” VBoT 24 iii 28-29 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 87f.; cf. KUB 33.49 ii 6-8, w. dupl. KUB 33.50 rev. 3-4, ed. Polvani, Minerali 93f.; KBo 23.10 iv 20, ed. Polvani, Minerali 86f.; VBoT 24 iv 1. 
2' other: [nu–tta namma G‰R.MEŠ–KA ha]h~ halla U! (copy: -u-ur over erasure) NA›pa-aš-ši-[leeš lē dammeškanzi] “[Let not br]ushwood and pebb[les hurt your feet again]” KUB 60.115:6 (rit.), w. par. KBo 14.86 i 4-5 (A), KBo 15.32 iv 2-4 (B), cf. OLZ 86:172, and cf. KUB 15.34 i 43-44 for the same thought; [LUGALuš] GÙB-lit ki[ššarit NA›]pa-aš-ši-lu-uš harz[i] “[The king] holds pebbles with his left hand (and passes them with the left hand to the palace attendant)” KUB 2.7 i 3-4 (fest., NH), ed. Polvani, Minerali 75, Košak, Linguistica 16:62, 57; [(nu–za–kan LUG)]AL-uš NA›pa-ašši-la-aš šer [(ŠU.MEŠ–Š)]U arriškizzi “The king washes his hands over the pebbles” KUB 48.10 ii 5-6 (rit. frag., NS), w. dupl. 115/t, ed. Polvani, Minerali 78, Kühne, ZA 70:96; (They draw the gods from the sea) “When they are finished” nu NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš danzi “they take the pebbles. (The gods avert their eyes)” KUB 
15.31 iii 50 (evocation, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 iv 9, ed. Polvani, Minerali 90, Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:164f.; 7 

206

(NA›)paššila- 1 b 2' 

NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš ANA NINDA.ÉRIN.MEŠ […] KUB 
27.16 i 34, ed. Polvani, Minerali 77; [na]mma–kan 14 NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-u[š …] KBo 34.56:8 (frag. of royal funerary rit.). 
	c. unclear: “In Kuššar, the father of the king […]” pa-aš-ši-la-an IÙBAT “He seized a stone. (They went, and in the mountain […] they fanned a fire. They …-ed a baker)” KBo 3.34 i 2 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.44 i 2 (OH/NS). 
	d. symbolic use: n–an pahhašnuandu lab[arn]an [LUG]AL-un pa-aš-ši-le-eš “May the stones protect him, the Labarna, the king” KBo 21.22:39-40 (benedictions for the Labarna, OH/MS), ed. Archi, FsMeriggi2 46f.; cf. AWAT NA›pa-aš-ši-la-aš QATI “The spell (lit. word) of pebbles: finished” KBo 21.22:45; taknaš–at–za dUTU-uš NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš iēddu “May the Sungoddess of the Netherworld turn them (sc. various evils) into pebbles” KBo 17.61 rev. 5 (birth rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 29:44f., 54. 

2. gem, precious stone(?): 14 NA›pa-aš-ši-lu-uš ŠÀ.BA 7 NA›D[U°.ŠÚ.A 7 N]A›.KÁ.DINGIR.RA “Fourteen gems(?), among them seven pieces of ro[ck crystal(?) and seven pieces of] Babylon-stone” KUB 39.45 obv. 8-9 (funerary rit., MH?/NS), ed. Polvani, Minerali 82, Otten, WO 2:477f.; “IŠTAR sang” nu–za–kan ŠA A.AB.BA akun NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an-na anda zikkizzi “and she put on herself the shell and gem(?) of the sea” KUB 36.12 ii 5-6 (Ullik., NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:14f., tr. Hittite Myths 56 (“a seashell and a pebble (as adornment)”); Puhvel, HED 1:24 (mistranslates –za–kan … zikkizzi as “engages (to attention?),” as if IŠTAR were singing to the stones of the sea instead of to Ullikummi). 
Witzel, HKU (1924) 102f. (“Kiesel(?)steine”); Sturtevant, TAPA 58 (1926) 22; idem, JAOS 50 (1930) 126 (“gravel”); Polvani, Minerali (1988) 73-97 (w. lit.) (“ciottolo, sasso”). 

Cf. NA›paššilant-, pahšuil-, NA›paššuela-. 
NA›paššilant-n.; stone, pebble.† 

[…]x-ta NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an-du-uš […] Bo 69/386:10; cf. NA›pa-aš-ši-la-an ibid. 8, and [… NA›p]a-aš-ši-liia-aš ibid. 11. 

Cf. NA›paššila-. 
pašk- 1 b 
pašk-, paški(ya)-v.; 1. to stick in, fasten, plant, 
2. to set up, 3. to impale, stick, 4. (w. associated preverbs, postpositions, and adverbs); from OH/ MS.† 
pres. sg. 1 pa-aš-ga-mi KBo 22.116 obv. 2 (NS), pa-aš-gaah-hi KUB 56.30 rev. 6; sg. 3 pa-aš-ki-iz-zi KBo 24.30:(3), KBo 
19.142 iii 33, pa-aš-ki KBo 15.48 v 35 (MH/MS), KBo 25.184 iii 65, KUB 58.107 iv 3. 
pl. 3 pa-aš-kán-zi KUB 45.47 i 21 (MS?), KBo 15.25 rev. 27 (MH/NS), KBo 22.182:9 (NS), KBo 15.1 ii (16), KUB 12.18 obv. 7, KUB 27.49 iii 22, KBo 29.199 rt. col. 5, KUB 58.100 iii? 2, [p]a?-a-aš-kán-zi KBo 29.92 ii 14 [broken context, so it may be the iter. of paš-]. 
pret. sg. 1 pa-aš-ga-ah[-hu-un?] KUB 8.50 iii! 4 (NH), [paaš-ku-un Bo 2792 i 18 (Oettinger, Stammbildung 326) reads paaš-šu-un according to hand copy KUB 58.22]; sg. 3 pa-aš-≠ki±it KUB 33.36 ii 1 (OH/MS?). 
pl. 1 pa-aš-ki-ia-u-en Bo 5451 ii 17 (Oettinger, Stammbildung 326); pl. 3 pa-aš-ki-ir KUB 17.8 iv 24 (pre-NH/NS). 
imp. sg. 3? pa-aš-ki-i[d-du?] KUB 54.1 ii 24. 
part. sg. nom. com. pa-aš-kán-za KBo 17.65 rev. (56) 
(MH?/MS?), KBo 15.27 iv? 3; nom.-acc. neut. pa-aš-kán KUB 
15.34 i 6 (MH/MS), KUB 9.31 i 21 (MH/NS), KUB 32.65 i 14 (NH), KUB 27.16 i 17, KUB 38.21 rev. 6, HT 1 i 14, KUB 11.31 i (3), KBo 34.68 iii 19, KBo 34.195 i 5. 
pl. nom. com. pa-aš-kán-te-eš KUB 53.15 i! 16, KUB 58.83 ii 27(!). verbal subst. nom. pa-aš-ga-u-wa-ar KBo 1.42 iv 25, pa-aš-ga-wa-ar ibid. iv 26. iter. pres. pl. 3 pa-aš-ke-eš-kán[-zi?] HT 10:12 (MH/NS). 
(Sum.) [ZAG.TAG.GA] = (Akk.) za-qa-pu = (Hitt.) pa-aš-ga-u-wa-ar / (Sum.) [ZAG.TAG.GA] = (Akk.) zi-qip-tù = (Hitt.) pa-aš-ga-wa-ar-pát KBo 1.42 iv 25-26 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 13:141 (= line 253). 
1. to stick in, fasten, plant — a. obj. TÚG or TUDITTU: [(TÚG DINGIR-LIM–wa–za–kan 2 TUDITTIHI.A)] ≠EGIR-pa pa±-aš-≠ki±-it “She (sc. the goddess) fastened (her) garment of deity (and) both toggles(?) backward” KUB 33.36 ii 1 (myth., OH/ MS?), w. dupl. KUB 33.67 i 29, ed. Laroche, RHA XIX/68:26, translit. Myth 76; if the scribe has just accidentally reversed the proper order (–wa–ši–za–kan) of the enclitic particles, we could read this: TÚG-an–ši–wa–za–kan. 
b. obj. šepikkušta-“pin”: TÚGkurešni–ma–šši– kan andan apūš–pat [URUDUZI.KIN.BAR.HI.A] (var. [apūš–p]at TÚGšapikkušduš) pa-aš-kán-zi “They stick those same pins into the kerchief ” KUB 
27.49 iii 21-22 (fest.), w. dupl. KBo 29.97 iv 5, tr. and rest. Güterbock, Oriens 10:357; see StBoT 29:64 n. 166 on the dupl.; GIŠhatalkešni–ma kattan URUDUšipi[kkuš]tan [pa-]aš
207

kán-zi “Beneath the hawthorn they stick the pin” KUB 45.47 i 20-21 (rit., MS). 
	c. obj. welku-“herb”: (They place fresh fruit for the deity) kattan–ma–šmaš welku kittari n–at–kan anda apiya pa-aš-kán “Underneath, a herb is placed and planted there” KUB 27.16 i 16-17 (fest.). 
	d. obj. branch, twig: GIŠeyaš GIŠa[lk]ištanuš paaš-kán-z[i] “They plant twigs of the eya-tree” KUB 

58.180 iii? 2, ed. Otten, ZA 66:99; cf. HW2 2:23a s.v. eya-; [INA (G)]IŠKIRIﬂ–y[(a–kan and)a GI]Šalkištanuš pa-aš-ki nu–kan ANA GIŠKI[(RIﬂ-y)ah]antezz[i halhal]tumari anda AN.ZA.GÀR IM DÙ-zi “(The Old Woman) sticks branches into the (model) garden and makes a clay tower in the first corner of the garden” KUB 58.107 iv 3-4 (Allaiturahi’s rit.), ed. Popko, AoF 16:87; nu–šši LÚAZU kiššara[š GIŠERIN …] GIŠpaini–ššan kue[dani] peran pa-aš-kán KBo 
34.195 i 3-5 (rit. frag.), rest. from par. KUB 11.31 i 1-3; “One thick porridge loaf is placed in (sc. a hupparavessel)” nu–ššan ANA NINDA.GUR›.RA šer GIŠERIN pa-aš-kán “a cedar (branch) is stuck on top of (šer) the thick loaf, (beneath the cedar branch red wool is tied in front)” KBo 15.34 i 5-7 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:182f. 
e. obj. eagle’s wing(?)/feather(?): TI°MUŠEN-aš partauwar arha dāi [n]–at–kan EGIR-pa ANA DUGKUKUB GEŠTIN [a]nda pa-aš-ki “He (sc. the priest) takes the wing(?)/feather(?) of an eagle and sticks it into a KUKUB-vessel of wine” KBo 
15.48 ii 33-35 (hišuwaš fest., MH/MS), see also partawar. 
f. obj. a reed or arrow (GI): kēz kēzzi–ya GIŠKA[K …] / ištarna pēdi–ma kuin x[…] / n–aš– kan ištarna pē
di h[a-…] / nu–kan GI anda pa-aškán KBo 34.68 iii 16-19. 
g. obj. lost or unmentioned: “For Šarruma of Urikina […] I will make one RITTUM” […] / UZUGAB-i pa-aš-ga-ah-hi “(and) I will fasten […] onto (his) breast” KUB 56.30 rev. 6 (vow, NH) □ the RITTUM is probably the usage of Akk. rittu “hand” referred to in AHw 2:990 (rittu(m) B 1 a), where KUB 32.129 i 14 (GEŠPÚ KÙ.BABBAR RI-IT-T[Ù KÙ.BABBAR]) is also cited. Is this a clasp in the shape of a hand? Is the implied object of pašgahhi the RITTU?; probably also KUB 53.34 obv. 1 (cult inv.?). 

(:)pašku(wai)

1	 to set up: (The deity is brought into the temple and offerings are arranged) nu–ššan DINGIRLUM katta pa-aš-kán-zi “and they set up (lit. stick down) the deity” KBo 15.25 rev. 27 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:6f.; […]x-anti NINDA KAŠ pa-aš-kán-te-eš “Bread and beer are set up on the […]” KUB 53.15 i! 16 (rit.), ed. StBoT 19:8 (= i 15); [… ALAM(?) AN]ŠE. KUR.RA KÙ.BABBAR pa-aš-kán arta “[… statue of a h]orse of silver, standing, (having been) set up(?)” KUB 38.21 rev. 6 (cult inv., NH), ed. Rost, MIO 8:213f.; ALAM/ešri is restored because of the nom.acc. neut. paškan; cf. [(nu ANŠ)]E.KUR.RA.MEŠuš pa-aš-ke-eš-kán[-zi?] HT 10:12 (Gilg., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.47c+h rev. 26. 
2	to impale, stick: nu–war–aš–šan lappiya[š ] peran LÚSIPA-aš GIŠtū

riya pa-aš-ki-ir “Because of (lit. before) the heat they impale them(?) on a shepherd’s staff” KUB 17.8 iv 23-24 (incant., pre-NH/NS), translit. Myth. 107. 
4. (w. associated preverbs, postpositions, or adverbs) — a. anda: KBo 15.48 ii 35 (see 1 e, above); KUB 
27.16 i 17 (see 1 c, above); KBo 34.68 iii 19 (see 1 f, above). 
b. andan: KUB 27.49 iii 21 (see 1 b, above). 

c. ā

ppa: KUB 33.36 ii 1 (see 1 a, above). 
	d. katta: KBo 15.25 rev. 27 (see 2, above). 
	e. kattan: KUB 45.47 i 10 (see 1 b, above). 

f. peran: KBo 34.195 i 5, w. par. KUB 11.31 i 3 (see 1 d, above); KUB 17.8 iv 24 (see 3, above); […]x GIŠTUKUL N´G.MUNUS.ÚS! (text: MA) peran pa-aš-ki KBo 
25.184 iii 65 (funerary rit.); KUB 8.50 iii 4 (Gilg. frag.). 
g. šer KUB 15.34 i 6 (see 1 d, above); KBo 24.30:3 (cult of Huwaššanna frag.); KUB 12.18 obv. 7 (cult of Huwaššanna). 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 165 (“aufrichten, aufplanzen”); Laroche, RHA XIX/68 (1961) 26 (“fixer,” “planter”); Carruba, StBoT 2 (1966) 44 (“aufrichten, aufplanzen”). 
Cf. paški/a- = paš-, iter. 
(:)pašku(wai)-v.; 1. to reject, ignore (people), 
2. to neglect, ignore (words/matters), 3. to remove; from OH/MS.† 
act. pres. sg. 3 Luw. [pa-aš]-ku-ti KUB 39.71 iv 20 (NS); pl. 3 pa-aš-ku-wa-an-zi KUB 30.11 obv. 8 (OH or MH/MS), KUB 31.127 + ABoT 44 i 47 (OH/NS), 544/u ii 2 (Güterbock, AnSt 30:41) (Murš. II). 

208

pret. sg. 1 pa-aš-ku-wa-nu-un KBo 4.2 iii 44, KUB 43.50 obv. 5 (both Murš. II), pa[-aš-ku-w]a-a-n[u-u]n IBoT 2.112 + KUB 48.100 obv. 5 (Murš. II), :pa-aš-ku!-wa-nu-un KUB 60.60 left col. 10 (NH). 
sg. 3 ≠pa-aš-ku-ut±-ta KUB 30.10 rev. 2 (MH/MS), pa-ašku-wa-it KBo 9.85 obv. 4 (NH). 

imp. sg. 3 pa-aš-ku-tu› KUB 39.71 iv 20 (NS). 

mid. pres. sg. 2 pa-aš-ku-i-it-ta KUB 1.16 iii 65, 70 (OH/ NS). 
uncertain perhaps mid. pret./pres. paš-ku-wa-ad-d[a(-)…] KUB 49.25 i 7 (oracle question, NH); for the paš reading of PIŠ see NH no. 955, THeth 10:22, and HZL no. 244. 
[pa-aš-ku-ši Oettinger, Stammbildung 335, should be read pa-aš-ku-wa-an-[zi] KUB 31.127 + ABoT 44 i 47; part. pašku~ want-, HW 165, is not attested.] 
mng. 2 “The Great King Tabarna said to Haštayar” [lā tee]p-pé-ri-ik-ki-i-an-ni “Do not ignore (Akk. naparkû) me” KUB 
1.16 iv 65, cf. ibid. iv 69 = (Hitt.) lē–ma–mu–ššan pa-aš-ku«aš-»i-it-ta “Do not ignore me (i.e., do not ignore my admonitions)” ibid. iii 65, cf. ibid. iii 70 (Hatt. I bil., OH/NS), ed. HAB 16f., cf. MSpr. 20 (“‘weiche nicht von mir’ d.h. ‘schlage meine Mahnungen nicht in den Wind’”), and Güterbock, Oriens 
10:355 (“do not reject, neglect, or ignore my admonitions”). 
1. to reject, ignore (people) (par. to arha peš~ šiya-, opp. of ā
ppa kappuwai-, genzuwai-): antuh~ š[a]nn–a–z kuin DINGIR.MEŠ šānzi n–aš–šan arha pa-aš-ku-wa-an-z[(i)] n–an āppa zik kappuwaši n–an genzuw[(aši)] “The person at whom the gods are angry and whom they reject, you (sc. Sun-goddess of Arinna) consider him again and have mercy upon him” KUB 31.127 + ABoT 44 i 46-48 (OH/ NS), w. parallels KUB 30.11 obv. 7-8 + KUB 31.135 obv. 1415 (OH or MH/MS) and 544/u ii 1-2 (Murš. II), ed. Güterbock, AnSt 30:48; [… nu–mu–ššan kuiš DINGIR–YA] šāit nu–mu–ššan arha ≠pa-aš-ku-ut±-ta ā
ppa–ya–mu–za [apāš–pat kappuiddu] “[My God who] was angry [at me] and ≠rejected± me, [let that very one] again [take me into account]” KUB 30.10 rev. 2-3 (prayer, MH/ MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 114, 117, tr. ANET 400 □ note the par. [nu–mu]–ššan kuiš DINGIR–YA šaīt [nu–mu a]rha piššiyait [āppa–y]a–mu–za apāš–pat kappuidd[u] ABoT 44a ii 6-8, cf. Güterbock, Oriens 10:355. 
2. to neglect, ignore (words/matters) — a. without preverb: see above in bil. sec. 
b. w. arha: “The speech in my mouth is hesitant (lit. ‘small, sparse, scarce’) and the word came up somewhat hesitantly” nu–kan aši memian arha–pat pa-aš-ku-wa-nu-u[n] (var. pa-[aš-ku-w]a-a-n[u-u]n) “I neglected the matter entirely” KBo 4.2 iii 44 (apha

bašta
sia of Murš. II), w. dupl. IBoT 2.112 + KUB 48.100 obv. 5, ed. MSpr. 4f., cf. Güterbock, Oriens 10:355 (“I ignored this matter”) □ the tr. tepu “hesitant” follows Houwink ten Cate, Mursilis II … Karakterscheets 34 (“haperend”). The mng. “to forget” was suggested by Friedrich, ZA 36:288 ad sensum, and developed by Oppenheim, Dreams 230f., as a Freudian repression. There is no reason to posit a mng. 3 “to forget” based on this passage, since Muršili may have been subsequently punished by the Stormgod for having failed to perform the necessary rituals soon after the incident. 
c. ambiguous because of preceding textual break: […] :pa-aš-ku!-wa-nu-un “I neglected/ignored […]” (or possibly: “I did [not] neglect […]”) KUB 60.60 left col. 10 (dep. frag., NH). Although the copy has :pa-aš-šu-wa-nu-un, the context makes our reading preferable. 
3. to remove: ŠEN–ma–wa mahhan [arha paaš]-ku-ti idālu–ya–wa arha QA_TAMMA pa-aš-kutu› “Just as the gutter removes (rain water), likewise let (it) remove the evil” KUB 39.71 iv 19-20 (rit., NH), ed. Güterbock, Oriens 10:355 □ Kronasser, EHS 1:481 treats this s.v. paškuwai- and tr. “böses soll er (magisch) verdrängen!,” while on p. 583 he cites it as a form of paš- “to swallow.” 
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 288; Götze/Pedersen, MSpr. (1934) 20, 63 (= Akk. naparkû; “etw. (aus dem Bewusstsein) verdrängen, sich mit etw. abfinden”); Friedrich, OLZ 39 (1936) 305 (“vergessen”); Sommer, HAB (1938) 190, 241 (“sich sperren(?), sich in den Weg stellen”); Güterbock, Oriens 10 (1957) 355 (“reject, remove; neglect, ignore”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 481 (“verdrängen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 334f. (“vernachlässigen”). 
pašpana-n.; (an insect pest); NH.† 
(Sum.) DAG.[KI]SIMﬁZ[ ? ] = (Akk.) i-ši-ku-ú = (Hitt.) paaš-pa-na-aš KUB 3.94 ii 24 (vocab., NH), in a list of insect pests, ed. MSL 2:115, AlHeth. 87, 90, Collins, Diss. 282. Cf. a similar list in Ea vocab., MSL 14:357. 
Ertem, Fauna (1965) 249; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 87, 90; Collins, Diss. (1989) 281f. 
bašta-n. com.; trim(?), filigree(?), embroidery(?); NH.† 
nom. com. ba-aš-ta-aš KBo 9.92:5. 
In a sequence of short paragraphs listing GÚ. HALs of gold: [1]-NU GÚ.HAL KÙ.GI ba-aš-ta-im[a-aš…] x (numeral) ba-aš-ta-aš KÙ.GI 11 x[…] KBo 9.92:4-5 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 500 (no tr.). 
209

Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 611 (= mašta-, “einzierungselement”). 
Cf. baštaimi-, baštant-. 
baštaimi-Luw. part.; trimmed(?), filigreed(?), embroidered(?); NH.† 
Luw. sg. nom. com. (or Hitt. pl. nom.?) ba(coll.)-aš-ta-imi-iš HT 50 rt. col. 12. 
Luw. pl. nom. com. ba(coll.)-aš-ta-i-me-en-zi KUB 12.1 iii 
34. 
broken: ba-aš-ta-i-m[a-…] KBo 9.92:4; ba-aš-ta!-≠i!±[-…] KUB 42.43 obv. 14. 
	a. in lists of garments, describing the TÚGE.´B “sash”: 9 TÚGE.´B KÙ.GI NA› ŠÀ.BA 1-EN KÙ. G[I …] 2 KÙ.GI NA› NUNUZ annantilaš-x[-…] 4 ba-aš-ta-i-me-en-zi KÙ.GI[…] KUB 12.1 iii 32-34 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 444f. (“verziert”), Košak, Linguistica 18:101, 104 (“woven (and ornamented) with”); [1]-EN TÚGE.´B ba-aš-ta!-≠i!±[-mi-iš] KUB 42.43 obv. 14 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 484f. 
	b. describing a gold GÚ.HAL: [1]-NU GÚ.HAL KÙ.GI ba-aš-ta-i-m[a-aš…] x (numeral) ba-aš-taaš KÙ.GI 11 x[…] KBo 9.92:4-5 (inv, in a sequence of short paragraphs listing GÚ.HALs of gold), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 500. 

The spelling w. ba- as well as the obvious correlation in KBo 9.92:4-5 (b, above) w. the noun baštaindicate that the part. baštaimi-is ultimately based upon the noun bašta-, which was cited from KUB 42.78 ii 20 by Laroche, DLL 70 (as Bo 2762). Some connection w. S´Gmaišta, as claimed by Laroche, DLL 70, and Hoffner, JCS 28:61f., is also possible, though less obvious. The sole occurrence of the ma-writing (HT 50 rt. col. 12) is rather ba-aš-ta-i-mi-iš (coll.). 
TÚGE.´B (= Akk. miserru) in Hitt. texts is described as TÚGE.´B G´R, TÚGE.´B TAHAPŠI, TÚGE.´B MAŠLU — on which see TÚGE.´B. Since of all these only MAŠLU seems to represent a (passive) participial idea (Akk. verbal adj.), it is possible that baštaimi- is synonymous w. the Akk. verbal adj. mašlu, which CAD, M/1:380, following Goetze, Cor.Ling. 53f., translates “trimmed(?).” The existence of the noun bašta- and the pass. part. baštaimi- to describe garments finds a close parallel in laliniand lali(n)naimi-q.v. 

(:)paštarnu- a 

Laroche, Onom. (1951) 135; Goetze, Cor.Ling. (1955) 55 n. 67; Laroche, DLL (1959) 70; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 219 (“gewebt”); Hoffner, JCS 28 (1976) 61f.; idem, Finkelstein Mem. (1977) 109; Košak, Linguistica 18 (1978) 109 (= maš~ taimi-“woven”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 611 (“in einer bestimmten Weise verziert, mit b.-elementen verzehen”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 172 (“decorated with strips(?),” var. of maštaima/i-). 
Cf. bašta-, baštant-, S´Gmaišta-. 
baštant-part.; trimmed(?), filigreed(?), embroidered(?); NH.† 
part. nom.-acc. neut. ba-a-aš-ta-an KUB 42.78 ii 20, baaš-ta-a-an KUB 42.55 i 2. 
1-NUTUM iššaralladdara KÙ.GI x[…] arah~ zanda(!)–at ba-a-≠aš±-ta-an […] KUB 42.78 ii? 19-20, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 464f. (“es ist aussen herum verziert”), Košak, Linguistica 18:112f. (no tr.); [x +]23 TÚGkušiši ŠÀ.BA 2 T[ÚG…] 1-ŠU ba-aš-ta-a-an KUB 42.55 i 1-2, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 518f. (“gemustert(?)”). 
Košak, Linguistica 18 (1978) 114 (= maštai-?); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 611 (“in einer bestimmten Weise verziert, mit b.-elementen verzehen”). 
Cf. bašta-, baštaimi-. 
:paštari-v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 Luw. :pa-aš-ta-ri-it-t[a] KUB 18.57 ii 67. 
[…] tar-li⁄¤-an :pa-aš-ta-ri-it-t[a] (KUB 5.24 +) KUB 18.57 ii 67 (bird oracle, NH), cf. urayanniš–ma tar-li⁄¤an :pa-aš-ta-ar-nu-wa-at-ta KUB 5.24 (+ KUB 18.57) ii 46-47, referring to an (agitated?) mode of flying. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 81; Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 38; Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 168; Melchert, CLL (1993) 172 (“?”). 
Cf. (:)paštarnu- v. 
(:)paštarnu-v.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pres. pl. 3 pa-aš-tar-nu-wa-an-zi KUB 35.146 ii 14; pret. sg. 3 Luw. :pa-aš-ta-ar-nu-wa-at-ta KUB 5.24 ii 47. 
a. action of human beings or gods: “Those who make him angry, let them take harnantašši-bread” pa-aš-tar-nu-wa-an-zi-an kuiē
š nu–za GIŠHAŠHUR [d]andu kumarnuwanzi–an kuiēš nu–za ku-un-kuma-a-an [d]andu “those who p. him, let them take apple(s), those kumarnu-him, let them take kun~ kuma-, (those who worried him, let them take […])” KUB 35.146 ii 14-17 (incant. containing Luw., NH?). 

210

b. action in bird oracles of the urayanni-bird: nu MUŠEN.HI.A SIZSÁ-andu pattarpalhiš–kan pi.an SIGﬁ-za n–aš 2-an arha pait urayanniš–ma tarli⁄¤-an :pa-aš-ta-ar-nu-wa-at-ta KUB 5.24 ii 45-47 (bird oracle, NH), translit. Archi, SMEA 16:168. 
Since in the first ex. paštarnu-and kumarnu-are sandwiched between kartimmiyahh-and lahlah~ hinuške-, they probably belong to the same semantic sphere (“to be mentally or physically upset”?). In the second ex., :p refers to the behavior of a bird, perhaps agitation. Because of the gloss wedges and the infl. of the pret. sg. 3, it seems likely that paštarnu(wa)-is a Luw. verb. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 81; Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 38; Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 168; Tischler, HDW (1982) 62 (“Verb u.B. in Omentexten, ‘wegfliegen’??”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 172 (“?”). 

Cf. :paštari-v. 
pā
šteni Hurr.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 

MUNUSŠU.GI–ma hurlili eraduwan pa-a-aš-te-ni memai “The Old Woman says in Hurrian: ‘eradu~ wan p.’” KUB 45.26 ii 4-5 (rit., NS). 

Laroche, GLH (1977) 198 s.v. pašt-. 

paštištila-n. or adj.; (epithet of the Divine Heptad); OH/NS.† 
3 NINDA SIG paršiya KI.MIN nu ANA dIMIN.IMIN.BI pa-aš-ti-iš-ti-la-aš dāi “He breaks three thin breads ditto, and places them for the (divine) Heptad p. (or, for the Heptad of p.)” KBo 
13.245 rev. 12-13 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH/NS). p. may be either pl. d.-l. or sg. gen. Cf. dIMIN.IMIN.BI dpí-išti-iš-t[i(-)…] KBo 17.85:12. 
paššu-n.; (an elevated structure [e.g., a step, podium, or pedestal] or elevated locality [e.g., a terrace]); from MH/MS.† 

sg. nom. ba-aš-š[u]-uš KUB 42.46:3 (NH). 
acc. pa-aš-šu-un KUB 58.22 i 18, KBo 34.160:5. 

d.-l. pa-aš-šu-i KUB 15.34 iii 48 (MH/MS), KUB 2.7 i 17 (NH), KUB 7.24 obv. 4 (Tudh. IV), KUB 24.7 iv 15, 18 (NS), KBo 34.160:2, IBoT 4.35 rt. col. 4, pa-aš-šu-ú-i KUB 22.25 obv. 15 (NH), KUB 58.11 obv. 5, pa-aš-šu-wiﬁ KUB 18.56 iii 12, 14, (18), (19) (NH), paš(= PIŠ)-šu-u-i KUB 25.23 l.e. a 1 (Tudh. IV), pa-aš-šu-u-i Bo 6404 (StBoT 14:60) iv 20. 

pl. d.-l. pa-aš-šu-wa-aš KBo 26.105 iv? 10 (NH). 
paššu- a 
It is not necessary to posit a phonetic variant piššu- (HW 165, 170; Carter, Diss. 193; Tischler, HDW 62, 64). For the paš reading of PIŠ see NH no. 955, THeth 10:22, and HZL no. 244. 
	a. in settled areas: “The chief scribe of wooden tablets, the chief palace attendant, the scribe, the Man of the Stormgod, and the anointed priest go before the dahanga-. The Man of the Stormgod holds a noisemaker” n–at–kan pānzi GIŠdahangaš pa-aš-šu-ú-i šer tianzi “They step on the p. (raised entrance?) of the dahanga- (but they do not yet enter the dahanga-)” KUB 58.11 obv. 3-5 (fest.), ed. KN 214f. □ since in the dahanga- there is a big tree, perhaps it is a grove or clearing in a forest; nu–kan INA URUKaš~ tariy[apa] pa-aš-šu-ú-i peran(-)x šešzi “He (sc. the king) will spend the night in front of the p. in Kaštariyapa” KUB 22.25 obv. 14-15 (oracle question, NH), ed. Kaškäer 176f.; dU hēuwaš INA URUDUﬂ-LÚÚ.HÚB-aš– kan paš(= PIŠ)-šu-u-i šer artari “The (statue of the) Stormgod of Rain: he stands on a p. in (the town of) Deaf Man’s Tell” KUB 25.23 l.e. a 1 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 163, 173; NA›ZI.KIN–ya–an– kan INA URUTahniwara pa-aš-šu-i šer tiyanzi “And they set it (sc. a deity) (namely his) huwaši on the 
	p. in Tahniwara” KUB 7.24 i 4 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 116, 119, tr. Güterbock, Or NS 15:491f.; URUAn~ kuwa[(-) …] / pa-aš-šu-i-ká[n šer …] IBoT 4.35:3-4 (frag. of cult inv.); EGIR-ŠU–ma URUTauriša–pat–kan anda pa-aš-šu-i-ša-a[n šer] IŠTU HUR.SAG.MEŠ QA_TAMMA huittiyanzi “Afterward, (they go back to) Tauriša itself; (standing) on a p., they draw the gods from the mountains” KUB 15.34 iii 48-49 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:200f.; (The king travels. When he comes away from the city Hišarluwa) t–ašta LÚHAZANNU ZAG-az [(pa-aššu-)]i šer artari GIM-an–ma–šši–kan [LUGALu(š? han)]daittari (par. hā

ndaizzi) t–aš (par. n–aš) U[(ŠKE)]N [t–aš–ka]n pa-aš-šu-un E[GIR-a]n kat~ ta paizzi (par. piddāi) “the HAZANNU stands on the right, on top of the paššu. But when [the king] is lined up with him/it, he bows and goes (par. runs) down the back of the p.” KUB 58.22 i 15-18 (nuntarriyaš~ haš fest.), w. dupl. KUB 2.7 i 16-20 and par. KBo 34.160:2-6, ed. Popko, AoF 13:220, dupl. ed. Košak, Linguistica 16:57, 62; cf. pai-A 1 j 14'; [… URUHa]ttušaz URUTā
winiya / [o-oo-]pa?-aš pa-aš-šu-i āri / [o-o.H]I.A apiya pēdi arta “[…] (Coming) from [Ha]ttuša to Tawiniya (he/ she) arrives at the paššu of […]; […-]s are standing in that place” KBo 34.167 i 1-3 (fest.). 
211

	b. in bird oracles: […M]UŠEN.HI.A SIZSÁandu / [… N]IMUR n–aš–za pa-aš-šu-[w]iﬁ / […]xaš IŠTU G‰R.MEŠ / […p]a-aš-šu-wiﬁ SAG.DU-i KUB 18.56 iii 11-14, cf. ibid. 18-19. 
	c. a miniature pedestal on which an eagle is mounted(?): [… ZU· AM.S]I ba-aš-š[u]-uš TI°MUŠEN KÙ.GI šer x[…] “[… of ivo]ry, a b. (with) an eagle of gold on top” KUB 42.46:3 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 

	10:182. 
	p. is a raised structure or area, sometimes at the entrance to a city (KUB 58.22 i 15-18), once in front of a dahanga-structure, on which dignitaries step or stand, and where statues can be erected. In bird oracles, it appears to stand in the area where bird flight was observed. […(-)p]a-aš-šu-wiﬁ SAG. DU-i “on the p., on (its) head (i.e., top)” KUB 18.56 iii 14 might indicate a rounded top. There is no indication whether a p. was man-made or natural. The only reason for the common tr. “rock” is the similarity w. NA›paššila-. But if it were a rock one would expect at least once the det. NA›. The exx. suggest something like “step(?),” “podium(?),” “pedestal(?),” or “terrace(?).” 

Zuntz, Scongiuri (1937) 66 (“Con un po’ di fantasia si potrebbe pensare ‘rocce’”); Friedrich, ZA 49 (1950) 252 (“Sockel eines huwaši-Steines”); Güterbock apud Bossert, Belleten XVI/64 (1952) 519 (“Felsen?, Postament?”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 165 (“Felsblock(?), Steinblock(?)”); Carter, Diss. (1962) 193 (“block of stone(?)”); Haas, KN (1970) 218 (“Stufe”); Popko, Kultobjekte (1978) 33 (“ein Felsblock bzw. eine steinerne Stufe”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 197-199 (“Sockel?”). 
[NINDApaš(š)u-] THeth 2:111 see NINDApašša-. 
[paššuwa-v.] in pret. sg. 1 :pa-aš-šu-wa-nu-un KUB 60.60 left col. 10; probably to be read :pa-aš-ku!wa-nu-un. See paškuwai-. The word occurs in a badly broken sec. of a NH deposition, probably a portion of the testimony or affadavit. 
paššuil-see pahšuil-. 
NA›paššuela-n.; (a kind of stone or thing of stone).† 
“[The gre]at Hapantaliya took(?) [pebbles] from [an uncultivated] place [and hea]ped them up [on] the brazier. § Herbs are cooking” [d o o o?] 

-pat 

waššiaš MUNUS.LUGAL-aš [o o o o] GIŠalanza~ nan [GIŠhatalkiš]naš GIŠšamaliyaš [lahhuwa]rnuzzi [kaluišna]n tuhhueššar šumanzan[a] [o o o o] NA›paaš-šu-e-la-aš šer šu[hha]i “[The goddess …], queen of remedies, he[aped …], alanzana-wood, foliage of [hawtho]rn, šamaliya, kalwišna, tuhhueššar, and a string on top of the p.-stones” HKM 116 ii? 19-24 (rit. in myth), ed. Güterbock, JKF 10:207f. (“pebbles”). 
Güterbock, JKF 10 (1986) 212, considers this a biform of NA›paššila-, which is restored in ii 16 based on the parallel text KUB 7.23:5. Cf. pahšuil-, paššuil-. 
paššuir[(-)…] (mng. unkn.).† 
pa-aš-šu-i-ir[(-)…] IBoT 4.35 rt. col. 4 (cult inv.), in a frag. context. 

pašūraz (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
pa-šu-u-ra-az[(-)…] KBo 23.73 ii? 4 (fest. frag., NS). 
p. is perhaps abl. of a stem pašur(a)-, or perhaps to be emended to pár!-šu-u-ra-az[(-)…]. In the hand copy, there is a small space after pa- but PA šu-u-ra-az is difficult to interpret. The word introduces the paragraph, therefore an introductory particle would be expected (nu, or an encl.) on PA. 
-pat clitic particle of specification, limitation, and identity; 1. the same, the aforementioned (anaphoric), 2. likewise, as before, in the manner just mentioned (calling attention to the repetition of a verbal phrase), 3. to continue to …, to … as before, to go on …-ing, 4. -self (as in himself, herself, itself), 5. own (w. possessive pronouns), 
6. only, exclusively (restrictive/exclusive use modifying a single word), 7. likewise, also (representing another of the same kind), 8. in addition, also, still again (attached to predicates and indicating an additional action), 9. rather (marking a positive statement contrasted w. a negative statement of identical meaning, but differently worded), 
10. even, even though, nevertheless (contrary to expectation), 11. surely, certainly, 12. (distribution in the sentence); from OS. 
1.	the same, the aforementioned (anaphoric) 
a.	w. nouns and pronouns
1' w. wording repeated
2' w. wording not repeated

212

	b.	w. adverbs
1' w. apiya “the very same place”
2' w. apaddan
3' w. kuwapi “what same place”

	
	c.	w. hūmant-“each (or ‘all’) of the aforementioned,” “each/all of them” 
	d.	w. numbers 1' 1-EN–pat “one and the same” 2' 2–pat “the two aforementioned, the two of them” 3' 3–pat “the three aforementioned, all three of them” 4' #-ŠU–pat “the same … times” 
	
e.	w. distributives 

2.	likewise, as before, in the manner just mentioned (calling attention to the repetition of a verbal phrase) 

	a.	w. -pat attached to the verb or preverb 
	b.	w. -pat attached to the negation 
	c.	w. -pat attached to a non-preverbial adverb 

	d.	w. -pat attached elsewhere in the sentence, but referring to the repetition of the whole sentence 
	e.	w. -pat attached to namma “yet again, again as before” 
	f.	w. -pat attached to apeniššan = QA_TAMMA 1' as the predicate “the same as before/as the previous” 2' w. repetition of the action “the same as before” 3' QA_TAMMA … QA_TAMMA–pat “in the same way … 

likewise in the same way”
a' w. the same verb in both clauses
b' w. a different verb in each clause
c' on the final member of a series of mahhan V⁄ …

QA_TAMMA V⁄, mahhan V¤ … QA_TAMMA V¤ clauses 

g.	w. -pat attached to kiššan “in this same way” 
3.	to continue to …, to … as before, to go on …-ing 

	a.	w. repetition of the verb 1' w. -pat attached to the verb or preverb 2' w. -pat attached elsewhere in the sentence 

	b.	where the action has not been specifically mentioned in the preceding context 

4.	-self (as in himself, herself, itself) 
	a.	w. proper nouns 
	b.	w. personal pronouns 
	c.	w. common nouns 

1	own (w. possessive pronouns) 
2	
1	
	6.	only, exclusively (restrictive/exclusive use modifying a single word) 
	a.	in historical narrative 
	b.	in legal texts
1' expressing exclusive rights to something
2' expressing the limits of liability
3' expressing the limits of an offer

	c.	in oracular inquiries 
	d.	in prayers 
	e.	in other types of texts 
	7.	likewise, also (representing another of the same kind) 
	a.	in general 
	b.	in lexical texts 

-pat 
8.	in addition, also, still again (attached to predicates and indicating an additional action) 
	a.	attached to preverbs or verbs 
	b.	attached to non-preverbial adverbs 

9.	rather (marking a positive statement contrasted w. a negative statement of identical meaning, but differently worded) 
	a.	negative clause preceding the positive one w. -pat 
	b.	positive clause w. -pat preceding the negative 

10.	even, even though, nevertheless (contrary to expectation) 
a.	even (modifying a single word within a clause) 1' in general 2' in the introduction to a proverb or a saying, imbed
ded in the royal prayers 
	b.	modifying an entire clause
1' on the first noun/adj. of the clause
2' on the finite verb
3' elsewhere in the sentence

	c.	in the second clause, “nevertheless” (contrary to expectation) 

11.	surely, certainly 
	a.	w. imperatives 
	b.	w. optatives 
	c.	w. prohibitives “certainly not” 
	d.	w. simple negation 

12.	(distribution in the sentence) 
	a.	w. sentence particle chains
1' in OH
2' in MH and NH
3' in lit. texts
4' in rituals
5' in divination

	b.	w. a word and its modifiers in general 
	c.	in verbal groups 

1'	preverb–pat + verb 
a'	anda–pat 
b'	āppa–pat 
c'	āppan–pat 
d'	āppanda–pat 
e'	arha–pat 
f'	katta(n)–pat 
g'	parā–pat 
h'	peran–pat 
i'	šarā–pat 
j'	šer–pat 
2'	preverb⁄ + preverb¤–pat + verb 
3'	adverb (or “separated preverbs”)–pat … + verb 
4'	preverb + verb–pat 
5'	negative–pat + verb 
6'	negative + verb–pat 
7'	preverb + negative + verb 
a'	preverb + negative–pat + verb 
b'	preverb–pat + negative + verb 
c'	negative–pat + preverb + verb 
8'	infinitive–pat + finite auxiliary verb 
213

d.	w. (pro)nominal groups 

1'	w. enclitics that are not a part of the initial chain of 
sentence particles 
a'	noun + possessive suffix 
b'	w. potential optative man 
c'	w. -ya “and” and -ma “but” 
2'	adjective–pat + noun 
3'	genitive–pat + noun 
4'	demonstrative–pat + noun 
a'	w. apa
b'	w. ka
5'	demonstrative–pat (not construed w. a noun) a' w. apab' w. kac' [a]pašila–pat 

	e.	in distributive expressions 
	f.	attached to the following adverbs 1' annaz–pat “once before too(?)” 2' annišan–pat “already before” 3' apadda–pat 4' apaddan–pat 5' apeniššan–pat “in the same manner as before” 6' apiya–pat 7' arahza–pat 8' hudak–pat 9' kā–pat 10' kezza–pat 11' kinun–pat 12' kiššan–pat 13' kuwapi–pat 14' mekki–pat marri 15' namma–pat 16' nuwa–pat 17' šuwaru–pat 18' aru–šuwaru–pat 19' ukturi–pat 

Normally written w. the BE sign (HZL sign no. 13, pp. 96f.), which in Bo©azköy texts has several syllabic values (on these see Güterbock, ZA 42:225-232, Hart, TPS 1971:96-102, Hoffner, FsOtten 100-104, and Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 216f., but cf. comments in padda-B). Ehelolf (apud Friedrich, SV 2:170) proposed the following as evidence for a resolved spelling: n– aš URUHattuši UL hūiššūizzi a-ki-pa-a[t?-š]a-an “In Hatti he will not go on living; rather he will die there” KBo 5.3 iii 31, ed. SV 2:124f. This interpretation was doubted by Goetze (Tunn. 48 n. 152), Carruba (Or NS 33:425), Kammenhuber (Materi-alien 1:3, 16), and Puhvel (Heth.u.Idg. 217 n. 43). Carruba preferred to take a-ki-pa as *aki–(a)pa. Strangely Otten (Saeculum 21:163) read this line a-ki-p[a-aš-š]a-an although all of -pa and the heads of the two horizontals of -a[t are clearly visible in the hand copy. He rejected the reading a-ki-pa [nu-ušš]a-an on the grounds of insufficient space. The -pat interpretation was defended by Hart (TPS 1971:96-102), who concluded cautiously that “of the two particles [-pat and -(a)pa] … the 

-pat 1 a 1' 

case for -pat is much stronger” (TPS 1971:102). Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 216f., argued that the reading -pat or -pit for the particle flouted normal syllabification and gemination patterns: we find 2-uš-pát-at (KUB 13.4 ii 50) rather than the expected *2-uš-pát-ta-at, and a-pí-ya-pát rather than *a-pí-ya-ap-pát. However, a-pí-ya-pát causes difficulty only if we assume a voiceless /p/ in the etymology. Despite this objection we concur w. Ehelolf, Hoffner, and Hart in the reading -pa-a[t-š]a-an. 
1. “the same, the aforementioned” (anaphoric, 
w. reference to someone or something just mentioned, German “eben, ebenfalls”) — a. w. nouns and pronouns — 1' w. wording repeated: man–an– kan µA_škaliyaš kuienzi … š–aš µA_škili–pát tiēt (var. tīet) “Aškaliya wanted to kill him … He stepped up to this same Aškaliya: (saying, ‘you are deceitful!’)” KBo 3.34 ii 17, 19 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 
3.36 obv. 22-24; “Furthermore, if a fugitive comes from Hattuša” n–aš takšulaš URU-ya ari našma– za–kan LÚ takšulaš–pát apenzan A.ŠÀ kueri anda wemiē
zzi “and arrives in a city allied (with Hatti), or a man of the aforementioned allied<-city> finds (him) in his fields” KUB 23.77:59-60 (treaty w. Kaškaeans, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 121; nu–kan µU_hha-LÚ-iš aruni anda BA.ÚŠ DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU«NU»–ma–za arha šarrandat nu–kan 1-aš ŠÀ A.AB.BA–pát (= aruni–pát anda, or aruni anda–pát?) ē
šta 1-aš–ma– kan arunaz arha uit “Uhhaziti died in the midst of the sea (i.e., on an island). His(!) sons parted from one another. One remained in the midst of the aforementioned sea, while the other left the sea” KBo 3.4 ii 52-54 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 60f., HE 1 § 293a, Stefanini, Pud. 54f.; cf. ibid. iv 36-37; “I attacked Taggašta. I burned down the city of Taggašta and the land of Taggašta” namma–kan INA URUTaggašta–pát šer tuzziyanun “Then I camped in that aforementioned Taggašta” KBo 5.8 i 29 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 150f.; “When a slave has stolen, and his owner says: ‘I will make the compensation in his behalf,’ he shall make the compensation” takku mimmai–ma nu ‰Ran–pát šū
izzi “But if he (the owner) refuses, he forfeits the aforementioned slave” KBo 6.3 iv 47 (Laws §95, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 48 (OS), KUB 29.19:7; (After wintering in Hattuša) nu LUGAL [MUNUS. LUGAL UR]UHattuš[az (URUT)]ā
hurpi anda panzi … § … nu anda URUTāhurpi–pát (dupl. omits –pát) paizzi “the king and queen go from Hattuša into Tahurpa.” … § (If the king winters in some other city, as soon as it is spring he leaves there) “and 

214

enters into the aforementioned (dupl. omits) Tahurpa” KUB 30.39 obv. 3-4, 8 (ANDAHŠUM fest.), w. dupl. KBo 10.20 i 5-6, 10. 
2' w. wording not repeated: šipanzakizi–ma kūš– pát DINGIR.MEŠ … nu kuš–pát DINGIR.MEŠ 12ŠU ekuzi “And they libate (to?) those same gods. … They drink those same gods twelve times” IBoT 
1.29 rev. 32, 37 (haššumaš fest., MH?/MS?); (Šuppiluliuma conquered Hurri, Kinza, Amurru, Irrita, Šū
ta) n– at–za–kan pedi–pát ‰R-ahta “He subjugated them in the aforementioned place” KUB 19.9 i 15 (hist., Hatt. III); “But when they release the defendant” nu–za GAL MEŠEDI pē
tan–pát harzi “The GAL MEŠEDI stays in (lit. occupies) the same place” IBoT 1.36 iii 14 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f. For passages from the lexical texts, in which the repeated Hitt. entry is marked w. -pát, which are often indistinguisable from the above cited usages translated “the aforementioned,” see mng. 7 b, below; for KUB 23.1 ii 29 see mng. 10 a 1', below. 
b. w. adverbs — 1' w. apiya “in the very same place”: “If sometime a bird flies up for some bird-catchers/bird-watchers someplace (kuwapi)” n–an UL apiya–pát huškanzi “do they not await it (a bird) in the very same place?” KUB 31.101:14 (letter concerning birds), ed. Ünal, RHA XXXI 49-51, Archi, SMEA 16:137f.; § arhayan–ma apiya–pát manninkuwan Ékip[(pan)] iyanzi “Separately near that very same place they make a kippa-building” KBo 15.2 i 5-6 (substitution rit.), w. dupl. KUB 15.2 i 8, ed. StBoT 3:56f. (“ebendort”); n–aš šešzi kuwapi nu–za–kan apiya–pát warpzi “He bathes in the very same place where he sleeps” KBo 15.34 ii 19-20 (rit. for the Stormgod of Kuliwišna, MH/NS); (If a woman is on the birth stool, and something breaks), and if that woman has not yet given birth” n–aš–kan apiya–pát anda ē
šzi “and she is still in that same place” KBo 5.1 i 5 (Papanikri’s rit., NH), ed. Pap. 2*f.; see also KUB 15.31 iii 57-58 (evocation rit., MH/LNS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:164-166; KUB 
23.72 rev. 50 (Mita of Pahhuwa instr., MH/MS); KUB 39.12 rev. 4-6 (rit.), w. dupl. KUB 12.48 obv. 7, ed. HTR 70-73, and CHD pedašahh-; cf. 12 f 6', below. 
2' w. apaddan, which possibly belongs in this list of adverbs w. -pat: see 12 f 4', below. 
3' w. kuwapi: kuwapi–kan andan INA HUR.SAGKandurna šer ešuwaštati … [ o o k]uwapi– 

-pat 1 d 1' 
pát andan arnummeni “In what place shall we sit up on Mt. Kandurna? … To what same place shall we carry in […?]” KUB 33.106 ii 13, 16 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:22f., tr. Hittite Myths 58, LMI 159f.; cf. 12 f 14', below. 
c. w. hū
mant-“each (or ‘all’) of the aforementioned, each/all of them”: dUTU-az utnē [kuit k]uit– pát araiš n–uš hū
manduš–p[át h]u[llanu]n “Whatever lands rose up dUTU-az (in the direction of the sunrise?), I defeated all of the aforementioned” KBo 3.22 obv. 11-12 (Anitta, OS), ed. StBoT 18:10f. □ since dUTU-az stands in the relative clause, not the main one, one cannot translate “defeated … with the help of the Sun-deity”; ŠUMHI.A–ŠUNU hūmanduš–pát halzāi KBo 19.128 iii 11; cf. KUB 39.9 obv. l2; eki BÀD-ni LUGAL-aš KASKAL-ša takšuanzi GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN-aš tuhhu~ šuanzi [(ŠA LÚURUD)]U.≠NAGAR± natta kuiški arauaš LÚ.MEŠNU.GIŠKIRIﬂ hūmantiya–pát luzzi [(karp)]ianzi “From participating in ice(-cutting), wall(-building), and royal campaigns, and from harvesting vineyards no copper worker is exempt. Gardeners shall perform luzzi in each of the aforementioned cases” KBo 22.62 iii 24-25 + KBo 6.2 iii 21-22 (Laws §56, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.6 i 30-32; cf. also KUB 26.1 iii l3-14 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 13; [LÚ.]MEŠÙA_RIPU_TI kuēš kueš ammel ešer¢[n–at–kan h]ū¢
manduš–pát anda handair ŠA dUTU-ŠI–ya kueš [kuēš LÚ.MEŠÙA_R]IPU_TI n–at–kan hūmanduš–pát anda handair “Whatever …-men belonged to me, all of them joined in and whatever …-men belonged to His Majesty, all of them joined in” KUB 
19.5 obv. 9-11 (letter, NH), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JEOL 28:39f. (“all of them without exception”); nu hūman–pát ammē
taz tiyat KBo 6.29 ii l7 (hist., Hatt. III); “My father Muršili sired us four children: Halpašulupi, Muwattalli, Hattušili, and Maššanauzzi, a daughter” nu– za hū
mandaš–pát EGIR-izziš DUMU-aš ešun “Of all the aforementioned, I was the youngest child” KUB 1.1 i 11 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:4f.; cf. ibid. iv 71-73, ed. StBoT 24:28f. 
d. w. numbers — 1' 1-EN–pat “one and the same”: nu–za apā
š antuhšaš naššu LÚ-aš našma MUNUS-za paprannaš S´SKUR kiššan šipanti ŠA ´D-at–za S´SKUR halziššanzi nu kī S´SKUR 1-EN– pát “Then such a person, whether man or woman, performs the ritual of uncleanness as follows — 
215

some call it ‘the ritual of the river,’ but this ritual is one and the same” KUB 7.53 i 7-10, ed. Tunn. 4f. (“and this is just one ritual”); cf. DUB.1.KAM ŠA S´SKUR paprannaš ŠA ´D–ya S´SKUR kī–pát ibid. iv 6-7 (colophon); “Whatever kind of defilement occurs” n–at 1-EN–pát aniūr “it is one and the same ritual (which they perform), (and the men of Lalupiya per[form] this ritual)” KUB 7.29 i 4; 1-edaz–pát KBo 
14.20 ii 14-15, ed. below mng. 10 a 1'. 
2' 2–pat “the two aforementioned, the two of them”: n–uš 2-ila–pát šakuwanzi “They will (punish in some manner) the two of them” KUB 13.9 iii 18, ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 448, 451, Freydank, ArOr 38:264, 266, cf. AM 203; takku tezzi 2–pát akkandu “If (the husband) says: ‘Let the two of them die’” KBo 
6.26 iv 13 (Laws §198, OH/NS), ed. HG 86f.; kuiš–ma–an ēpzi n–an munnāizzi n–an LUGAL-an āška UL uwatezzi n–ušš–at 2–aš–pát SAG.DU-aš ÚŠ-tar 2uš–pát–at akkandu “Whoever seizes him, harbors him, and does not bring him to the king’s gate, it is a capital crime for the two of them, the two of them shall die” KUB 13.4 ii 48-50 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 154f. ii 55-57, Süel, Direktif Metni 46f.; 2-e–pát KUB 17.27 iii 10. 
3' 3–pat “the aforementioned three, all three of them”: nu NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A 3-uš–pát QA_TAMMA paršianzi “They break apart all three (i.e., the aformentioned three) loaves of bread in the same manner” KBo 21.85 i 47-48 (fest., OH/MS). 
4' #-ŠU–pat “the same … times” (-pat on adv.): nu–mu LÚ.MEŠ URUUlma MÈ-ya menahhanda 2ŠU awir n–aš 2-ŠU–pát hulliyanun “The men of Ulma twice saw me coming for battle, and the same two times I defeated them” KBo 10.2 i 34-35 (ann., Hatt. I/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:46f., tr. Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:49, cf. menahhanda 4 a; possibly KBo 17.83 iii 7 (in broken context); nu akū
wanna 3-ŠU pianzi nu 3-ŠU–pát apel ≠ZI±–ŠU akūwanzi “They give to drink three times and the same three times they drink his soul” KUB 30.15 obv. 19 (royal funerary rit., MH/ NS), ed. HTR 68f. 
e. w. distributives: “However many times (ma~ šiyanki) they hitch them (i.e., the horses) up” nu KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši–pát INA 7 IKU.HI.A anda penneškizzi “he drives them 7 IKUs on each 

-pat 2 a 

of those aforementioned (-pat) occasions” KBo 3.5 ii 14-15 (Kikk., NH), ed. Hipp.heth. 88f.; cited by Güterbock, RHA XV/60:4, cf. palša-7 d; hantezzi palši uzuhrin UL pāi INA 2 KASKAL–ma 1 UPNA uzuhrin pianzi INA 3 KASKAL–ma namma UL pianzi INA 4 KASKAL–ma namma 1 UPNA uzuhrin pā
i watar– ma KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši–pát IŠTU 1 UPNI akkuškanzi “On the first occasion he gives no hay; but on the second occasion they give one handful of hay; on the third occasion, however, they again give no hay; but on the fourth occasion he again gives one handful of hay. On each of those aforementioned occasions they drink one handful of water” KBo 3.5 i 51-54, ed. Hipp.heth. 84f.; cf. ibid. i 62, ii 1-3, 41-46; nu UD-at UD-at 1-ŠU [arri]škanzi … [ŠÀ. GAL–ŠUN]U–ya uzuhrinn–a UD-at UD-at–pát [azzi]kkanzi “Each and every day they [was]h (the horses) once. … And the same each and every day [they eat the]ir [fodder] and hay” KUB 1.13 iii 5-8 (MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth 62-65; [EZEN.ITU? k]uit ITU-mi ITU-mi UL ē
ššahhi … […]x-za EZEN.ITU ITU-mi ITU-mi–pát ešešta “Because I do not perform the [monthly festival(?)] month by month, … […] He performed the monthly festival the same month by month” KUB 22.7 obv.? 2-3 (oracle question, NH). 
2. “likewise, as before, in the manner just mentioned” calling attention to the repetition of a verbal phrase (verbal equivalent of the usage in mng. 1) (German “ebenfalls”); cf. Hoffner, FsOtten 111f. — 
a. w. -pat attached to the verb or preverb: n–ašta ÉRIN.MEŠ µMadduwatta [h]ūmantan–pát arha hašpir … apāt–ma–kan ≠hūman± a[rha hašpi]r–pát “They disposed of the troops of Madduwatta, all of them. (… Those few troops who escaped,) they likewise disposed of all them” KUB 14.1 obv. 47, 48 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 12f. (“auch noch”), cf. HED 3:233 (“too”); (If you take food devoted to the gods) n–at DINGIR.MEŠ-aš ZI-ni parā UL arnutteni “and you do not make it arrive for the desire of the gods. ((Or if) some guest comes, and you give it to that person and take it from the desire of the god)” n– at–ši parā–pát UL arnutteni “and as before you do not make it arrive for it (the desire of the god)” KUB 13.4 i 51, 56 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f. (“straight”), Süel, Direktif Metni 30f. □ for the use of parā see parā 3 a; “As soon as the sun comes 

216

up” nu–za hū¢k war[ pd ]u “let him immediately
dabathe” … nu–za warptu–pát “and let him bathe as before” ibid. iii 72, 77, ed. Chrest. 160f. (“anyway”), Süel, Direktif Metni 70f.; t–an EGIR-pa parkunuzi … n–an EGIR-pa–pát parkunuzi “He shall make it pure again. (If something goes bad in a house,) he shall likewise make it pure again” KBo 6.4 iv 1-2 (Laws § XXXIV, NH), ed. HG 56f.; ABU–YA–ya ANA ABI ABI–YA lahhi GAM-an–pát iya[ttat] “And as before my father went with my grandfather on campaign” KUB 19.10 i 12 (DŠ frag. 13), ed. Güterbock, JCS 
10:65 (no tr. of -pat); ABU–YA–[šši ka]ttan ē[šta] “As before my father was with him” KUB 19.11 iv 41 (DŠ frag. 13), ed. JCS 10:66 (“still”); n–at IŠTU ÉRIN.MEŠ– ŠUNU [ANA] ABI–YA U ANA ABA ABI–YA lahhi kattan–pát [i]yantat ammug–at kattan lahhi iyan~ tat–pát “They and their troops went on campaign with my father and my grandfather. They likewise went on campaign with me” KBo 5.8 iv 6-8 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 160f.; EGIR-pa–ma–aš kuwapi uizzi n–aš ā
ppa–ya–pát apun KASKAL-an uizzi “But when he returns, he also returns by the same route as before” IBoT 1.36 iii 24-25 (instr. for MEŠEDI-guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f.; nu–za EZEN namma iyauwanzi ēpzi § nu mān EN.S´SKUR happinanza n–ašta DUGhar~ šialli[(HI.A)] kuedani U[(D-ti)] šunnāi EZEN–ya–z apēdani U[(D-ti)] iyauwanzi ēpzi–pát “Next he then begins the festival. § If the sacrificer is rich, on that day on which he fills the storage-vessels, he begins the festival as just mentioned” KUB 27.59 i 23-28 + 209/t obv. 1-3 (witaššiyaš fest.), w. dupls. KUB 54.24 i 10-12, KBo 29.68:5-7; nu LÚSANGA IŠTU PA_NI DIN~ GIR-LIM 1 GAL ZABAR dāi n–ašta IŠTU G‰R. GÁN KÙ.BABBAR GEŠTIN takšan hāni … § … LÚSANGA–ma–kan IŠTU G‰R.GÁN KÙ.BABBAR GEŠTIN haniškizzi–pát KBo 15.37 iv 47-49, v 8-9 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS); cf. duwarneškimi … duwar~ nahhi–pát KUB 60.118:15, 18. 
b. w. -pat attached to the negation: ANA ŠEŠ– YA kuiš ZI[-ni :l]umpaštiš ammuk–man ANA ŠEŠ– YA UL namma iyami … nu A[N]A ŠEŠ–YA :lum~ paštin UL–pát iya[mi] “I will not do to my brother again that which is offensive to my brother’s mind … I will not do anything offensive to my brother as before” KUB 21.38 rev. 11, 13 (letter to Ramses II, Pud.), ed. :lumpašti-a, Helck, JCS 17:93 (differently), Stefanini, Pud. 16 (“assolutamente”). 

-pat 2 e 
c. w. -pat attached to a non-preverbial adverb: n–aš kinuna–pát [aku?] “Now, [let him] likewise [die(?)]” KUB 1.16 iii 38-39 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 12f. (“auch schon jetzt”); a[p]āš–ma nūwa–pát mem[iš~ kit n]ahheškimi–wa “He still [kept] say[ing] as before: ‘I keep on being afraid’” KUB 14.3 ii 28-29 (letter, NH), ed. AU 8f., nahh-a 1' a', nuwa b 2'; nu É.MEŠ. DINGIR.MEŠ mekki marri pahhašten … §§§ … nu–za pahhū
en[(a)]š uddanī mekki–pát marri pah~ haššanuant[(e)]š ēšten “Be exceedingly careful concerning the gods’ temples … §§§ … As before, be exceedingly careful in the matter of fire” KUB 
13.4 iii 17, 54 (instr. for temple personnel, MH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 56f., 66f. 
d. w. -pat attached elsewhere in the sentence, but referring to the repetition of the whole sentence: “When they plant seed for the resettled people” nu auwariaš EN-aš [hūma]ndašša IGI.HI.A– ŠU šer huyanza ēštu … nu šer auwar[iy]aš–pát ENaš IGI.HI.A–ŠU huyanza ē
štu “Let the governor’s eyes keep watch over [eve]rything” … “let the governor’s eyes, as before, keep watch” KUB 31.84 iii 60-61, 63-64 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 49 (“besonders”). 
e. w. -pat attached to namma “yet again, again as before” (cf. namma 2 b): nu–kan LÚ-an ŠUM–ŠU halzi[hhi…] … nu–kan namma–pát ŠUM–ŠU hal~ zi[hhi…] “I call the man by name. … then I call his name yet again” KBo 21.14:6-7 (rit. frag.); MUNUS.MEŠzintuhiyaš–ma–šši EGIR-pan kī S‰R S‰RRU … MUNUS.MEŠzintuhiyaš–ma–šši EGIR-pan nam~ ma–pát talāyata išhamiškanzi “Behind him
ya talathe zintuhi-women sing this song … And behind him the zintuhi-women sing talāya talayatāagain as before” KUB 11.32 iii 14-16, iv 11-14 (fest. of Tetešhabi, OH?/NS); nu–šši GIŠNÁ namma–pát GIŠBANŠUR pe~ ran katta išparranzi “Yet again down in front of the table they spread a bed for him (s.c. the patient)” KUB 7.8 iii 14-15 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:276, 279; cf. KUB 7.5 ii 16 (Paškuwatti’s rit.); LU~ GAL-uš [Q]A_TAM ≠dāi± … § LUGAL-uš QA_TAM namma–pát dāi LÚGUDU⁄¤ DINGIR-LIM-ni nam~ ma–pát 3-ŠU BAL-ti … LÚ.DINGIR-LIM namma– pát DINGIR-LIM-ni 3-≠ŠU BAL±-ti “The king places his hand. … § The king places his hand again as before. The GUDU⁄¤-priest libates three 
217

times to the god again as before. … The Man of the God libates three times to the god again as before” KUB 58.41 v? 6-10 (fest. celebrated by a prince); cf. ibid. 18-19; cf. § ā
ppa–ma namma–pát 1 NINDA.SIG šarā ēpmi “Afterward, again as before I hold up a thin bread” KUB 7.30 rt. col. 5 (rit. frag.), repeated verbatim in ibid. 12; for KUB 14.3 ii 55 see namma 2 b 3' (mistakenly cited as l. 56); tekkušnut … namma tetkušnut(!) … namma–pát tetkušnut “showed … showed again … showed yet again” (KUB 14.20 i 6, 11, 14 +) KBo 19.76 i 19, 24, 27, more fully cited under namma 2 b 1'; “The exorcist says out from the tent in Hurrian as follows § … From the house they say into the tent: …§ …” LÚAZU–ma–kan GIŠZA.LAM.GAR-az parā nam~ ma–pát QA_TAMMA memai IŠTU É–ya–šši–kan anda namma–pát QA_TAMMA memanzi “The exorcist speaks out from the tent again the same as before, and from the house they say again into it (i.e., the tent) the same as before” KUB 12.11 iv 24-26 (hišu~ waš fest., MH/NS); INA U[D.1.(KAM)] INA UD.2. KAM–ya mahhan memiy[auwanz(i irhaizzi)] INA UD.3.KAM–ya–at namma–pát QA_TAMM[A i(r~ hāizzi)] “Just as they make the rounds for speaking on the first and second days, in the same way on the third day they make the rounds again as before” KBo 19.144 iv 17-19 (counter magic rit.), w. dupl. KUB 47.51 iv 22-24; LÚ.MEŠSANGA–ma TUŠ!-aš dI[M URUN]erik namma–pát QA_TAMMA akuwanzi “The priests, seated, drink (to) the Stormgod of Nerik again in the same way as before” KUB 53.13 iii 37-38, referring back to iii 15-18; cf. in broken context KUB 39.12 rev. 11, ed. HTR 70f.; KUB 54.13 ii 3 (cult of Huwaššanna); KUB 55.65 iv 11 (Ištanuwian fest.), translit. StBoT 30:313; Bo 4869 ii 3, translit. StBoT 25:103; QA_TAMMA–pát … namma–pát QA_TAMMA: “in the same way as before … yet again in the same way” in namma 2 b 2'; for other usages of namma–pat see namma 2 b. 
f. w. -pat attached to apeniššan = QA_TAMMA — 1' as the predicate “the same as before/as the previous”: “If someone strikes a pregnant sow and she dies” A[(WASSU QA_TAMM)]A–pát (dupl. omits –pát) “its disposition is the same as the previous (case)” KBo 6.3 iv 17 (Laws §84, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 21 (OS), ed. HG 44f.; IŠTU MUNUS ŠU.GI ER.TUM QA_TAMMA–pát “The question (posed) by the Old Woman is the same as the previous (one)”; KUB 5.3 i 21 (oracle question, NH) and passim in oracle ques

-pat 2 f 3' b' 

tions; cf. KUB 23.103 obv. 9 (letter, NH), ed. Otten, AfO 19:40f. (“ebenso(?)”). 
2' w. repetition of the action “the same as before”: MUNUS ŠU.GI QATAMMA_ –pát memai “The Old Woman says the same as before” KUB 7.53 iii 20-21 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 20f. (= iii 54-55; “in just the same way”); DINGIR.MEŠ–ma hū
manduš irh[an~ z]i … DINGIR.MEŠ–ma QA_TAMMA–pát irhāizzi “And they make the circuit of all the gods … And they make the circuit of the gods the same as before” IBoT 1.29 obv. 28, 31-32 (haššumaš fest., MH?/MS?); šipanzakizi–ma kūš DINGIR.MEŠ § … šipanza~ kizzi–ma QA_TAMMA–pát § “And he libates (to) those gods § … and he libates the same as before” ibid. rev. 32, 45; “As I was on good terms with your lord […] nu–za apēdaniya QA_TAMMA–pát SIGﬁanza “I am on good terms with that one too (his successor) the same as before” KUB 23.103 rev. 7 (letter, NH), ed. Otten, AfO 19:42f. (“ebenso”). 
3' QA_TAMMA … QA_TAMMA–pat “in the same way … likewise in the same way” — a' w. the same verb in both clauses: ANA 4 halhaldummariya QA_TAMMA paddai ha[ššī tapušza] QA_TAMMA–pát paddai “He digs in the four corners (of the house) in the same manner. Likewise in the same manner he digs [beside the hea]rth” KUB 7.41 obv. 7-8 (rit., MH/ ENS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f.; ANA PA_NI dPirinkiriya šarā
[huittiyauar dupšahinn–a] QA_TAMMA iezzi … […] šarā huittiyauar dupšahinn–a QA_TAMMA–pát [iē
zzi] “Before Pirinkir he performs the [drawing]upward [and the dupšahi-rituals] in the same way, (likewise in the same way he speaks,) and [he performs] the drawing-upward and dupšahi-rituals likewise in the same way […]” KUB 29.7 rev. 6-7 + KBo 21.41 rev. 14-16 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 122, 129f. (“précisément de la manière déjà indiquées”). 
b' w. a different verb in each clause: nu EN. SISKUR–ya S´Galit QA_TAMMA aniyazi anda–ma– kan QA_TAMMA–pát memai “The patient makes a wool-ali in the same way and he speaks likewise in the same way” KUB 15.42 ii 18-19 (purification rit., MH/ NS); ANA PA_NI dPirinkiriya šarā h[uittiyauar dupšahinn–a] QA_TAMMA iēzzi anda–ya–kan QA_TAMMA–pát memai “Before Pirinkir he per

218

forms the [drawing]-upward [and the dupšahi-rituals] in the same way, likewise in the same way he speaks” (and [he performs] the drawing-upward and dupšahi-rituals likewise in the same way) KUB 
29.7 rev. 6 + KBo 21.41 rev. 14-15 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 122, 129. 
c' on the final member of a series of mahhan V⁄ … QA_TAMMA V⁄ mahhan V¤ … QA_TAMMA V¤ clauses: nu šihelliyaš wā
tar mahhan INA UD-MI MAHRÊ daškizzi n–at INA UD.7.KAM–ya QA_TAM~ MA daškizzi S´SKUR mahhan INA UD.KAM MAHRÊ iššai n–at UD.7.KAM QA_TAMMA iššai waššiHI.A–ma mahhan INA UD-MI MAHRÊ ekuzi n– at INA UD.7.KAM QA_TAMMA–pát akkuškizzi “As he takes water of purification on the first day, he takes it in the same way on the seventh day. As he performs the ritual on the first day, he performs it in the same way on the seventh day. As he drinks the ingredients(?) on the first day, he drinks them on the seventh day likewise in the same way” KBo 

5.2 iv 43-48 (Ammihatna’s rit., NH). 

g. w. -pat attached to kiššan “in this same way”: (a list of ingredients) kiššan–pát daška[nzi] § “They take in this same way” KBo 13.227 i 16 (Storm fest., OH/ NS); “Thus speaks Dū
iša and Mahhuzzi […]” kī–wa kiššan–pát harkweni “This <means>: We will perish in this same way” KBo 16.59 obv. 6 (dep.), ed. StBoT 4:54f. (“Folgendermašen”); LUGAL-uš MUNUS. LUGAL-ašš–a namma dIM GUB-aš IŠT[U BIBRI] 3-ŠU kiššan–pát akuanzi “The king and queen standing then drink the Stormgod three times fro[m an animal-shaped vessel] in this same way” KBo 
20.67 ii 44-45 (monthly fest., pre-NH/NS); nu–šši ANA EZEN kišan–pát pianzi § “They give to him for the festival in this same way” KUB 12.4 iv l0 (cult inv.); danzi–ma–at kišan–pát […]-ai tezzi–ma kišan–pát “But they take it/them in this same way; he […]-s, but he speaks in this same way” KUB 58.87 i 10-11; ER.-TUM kišan–pát nu GUL-ahmi–ma pa-x[…] “The question is the same as before: Or shall I attack […?]” KUB 50.40 i l, cf. ibid. 4 (oracle question, NH); less clear because of broken contexts: “The king kept asking him: ‘What will we [do(?)]?’” UMMA– ŠU–MA kiššan–pát […] “He replied: ‘In this same way […]’” KBo 8.42 i 4 (anecdotes, OS); LUGAL-i kiššan–pát […] KUB 39.9 obv. 13 (funerary rit.), ed. HTR 

-pat 3 a 2' 
54f.; in broken context: KBo 24.117 left col. 8 (cult inv.). apeniššan–pát (QA_TAMMA–pát) means “in that same way”; kiššan–pát means “in this same way.” While the reference of apeniššan (and derivatives of apa-in general) is usually to what has preceded and that of kiššan (and derivatives of ka-in general) to what follows, several exx. of kiššan–pát seem to have retrospective reference. Nevertheless the -pat functions the same w. both adverbs. 
3. “to continue to …,” “to … as before,” “go on …-ing” — a. w. repetition of the verb — 1' w. -pát attached to the verb or prev.: “If there is a rite for someone up in Hattuša” mān LÚSANGA LÚGUDU⁄¤ LÚ.MEŠhaliyattallē
š kui[š kui]š tarneškizzi n–aš tar~ neškiddu–pát “If a priest, GUDU⁄¤-priest, or some other temple official is accustomed to admit (them), let him continue to admit them” KUB 13.4 iii 22-23 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 158f., Süel, Direktif Metni 58f.; “I honored the temple of Hatipunā
which is behind Kapperi and did not plunder it” ‰R.MEŠ DINGIR-LIM–ya–ššan kuiē
š INA URUKappēri EGIR-an ešir n–aš arha dalahhun n–at ešir–pát “I left alone the temple servants who lived behind Kappēri, and they continued to live there” KUB 19.37 iii 38-40 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 176f.; aruwā
izzi … ta namma aruwāizzi § n–aš–kan kuitman ilanaš šarā ari [t]a arūškizzi–pát “He bows … he bows again; and all the while he is mounting the stairs he continues to bow repeatedly” KUB 20.46 iii 11, 1316; nu URUPahhuwan walhten namma–an walhan~ niškitten–pát kuitman ŠA dUTU-ŠI tuzzi[š ari] “Attack Pahhuwa and then keep on attacking Pahhuwa until My Majesty’s army [arrives]” KUB 23.72 rev. 28 (Mita of Pahhuwa, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:37 (“yea chastise it thoroughly”); nu HA.LA–ŠUNU azzikanzi nu kuitman 8 MU_ŠU šarā tittanuanzi HA.LA.MEŠ– ŠU–ma azzikkanzi–pát “They eat their rations. While eight nights pass(??), they continue to eat their(!) rations” KBo 3.5 i 60-62 (hipp., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 84f.; cf. KBo 5.8 i 35, ed. 10 c, below. 
2' w. -pat attached elsewhere in the sentence: IŠTU ŠA dUTU-ŠI ma[hhan] artati nu IŠTU ŠA dUTU-ŠI–pát EGIR-an ā
rhut “As you have stood on His Majesty’s side, afterward continue to stand on the side of His Majesty as before” KBo 5.13 ii 7-8 (Kup. §13), ed. SV 1:122f. 
219

b. where the action has not been specifically mentioned in the preceding context: GAL A TI°MUŠEN-ašš–a partauwar harzi–pát “He keeps holding a cup of water and an eagle’s feather” KBo 
15.48 v! 8-9, ed. palwai-a 4', LÚpalwatalla-a 3', and partawar; “The GUDU⁄¤-priest goes to the altar and takes an išgaruh-vessel of wine and libates three times before the altar, three times at the hearth, and once at the door bolt. §” LÚGUDU⁄¤ išgaruh harzi–pát “The GUDU⁄¤-priest continues to hold the išgaruhvessel” KUB 10.15 iv 14; ašeššar–ma LÚUBARU_TIM arantari–pát “But the assembly (and) foreigners continue to stand” KUB 25.1 vi 41-42 (ANDAHŠUM fest.). 
4. “-self” (as in himself, herself, itself) — a. w. proper nouns: [(takku URU)]Hattuši–pát LÚ URUHatti LÚ URULuı¢n (var. URULū¢īzzi “If some
iyan) kuiški taHittite steals a Luwian in Hatti itself (and leads him off to the land of Luwiya)” KBo 6.2 i 39 (Laws §19b, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 47-48 (NS), ed. HG 20f. (“hier”); mā
n–kan man ANA µPittaggatalli–pát (var. omits -pát) warpa tehhun “If I had tried to surround Pittaggatalli himself, (Pittaggatalli’s advance guards would have seen me and … he would have slipped away before me)” KBo 5.8 iii l5-16 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 16.8 iii 19(-20), ed. AM 156f. (“ausgerechnet”), CHD man b 2' b'; nu–mu–kan µPittaggatalliš–pát 1-aš išparzašta “Pittaggatalli himself escaped me alone” KBo 5.8 iii 31-32 (ann., Murš. II); n–ašta µMadduwattaš– pát nekumanza [išparzašta] “Madduwatta himself [escaped] naked” KUB 14.1 obv. 51 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 12f.; for an ex. of -pat w. a personal name in a different mng. see KBo 3.34 ii 19, ed. 1 a 1', above; [U]L memaš µTawagalawaš–pát–kan kuwapi LUGAL.GAL [ANA] URUMellawanda tapuša uit “He said ‘no,’ when the Great King Tawagalawa himself came to the side to Mellawanda” KUB 14.3 i 71-72 (Taw., Hatt. III), cf. Güterbock, Or NS 59:160-162, also citing anterior literature. KBo 5.8 iii 31-32 and KUB 14.1 obv. 51 above could also be understood as “only” (see 6 a, below). 
b. w. personal pronouns: nu–mu kāšma šumeš– pát kuit hatrā
tten “Concerning what you yourselves have just written to me” HKM 17:13 (MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsOtten2 2 and HBM 142f. (both w. no tr. of -pat); ≠apā±š– ≠at± apāšila–pát ŠAPAL NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM kiššan zikk[it] “He himself placed it under oath as follows” KUB 14.1 + KBo 19.38 rev. 44 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 30f. (with

-pat 5 

out the join); cf. ibid. 48; kūn S´SKUR uddanaš EN-aš damēdaš É.HI.A-aš andan apašila–pát eššaī“The person involved in the matter shall himself perform this ritual in different houses. (He shall not perform it in the palace)” KUB 43.57 iv 18-19 (Hantitaššu’s rit., MH/NS); cf. KUB 21.37 i 38 (Hatt. III); for discussion see Hart, TPS 1971:113f. 
c. w. common nouns: nu–zza unattallan–pát ar~ nuzzi “He must bring the merchant himself for burial” KBo 6.2 i 6 (Laws §5, OS), ed. HG 16f. (“nur”), Hart, TPS 1971:116f. (differently). 
5. “own” (w. poss. pronouns), German “eigen” (HE 1 § 293b, Hart, TPS 1971:122f., Hoffner, FsOtten 115): ammel–pát–wa–za GU›-un dahhi “I will take my own ox” KBo 6.3 iii 71 (Laws §74, OH/NS), ed. HG 40f.; takku LÚ-aš (var. LÚ-iš) apēl–pát anna[(š–šaš katta waštai)] “If a man sins with his own mother” KUB 29.34 iv 8 (Laws §189, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.26 iii 26, ed. HG 82f.; nu–za–(š)an mā
n ANA dUTU-ŠI šer SAG.DU–KA–pát šer autti “If you regard His Majesty (in the same way as) your own person (lit. head)” KBo 5.3 ii 18-19 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:114f.; nu–wa uizzi tuēl–pát Ékarimmi nakkiyahhan “Your own temple will come to be revered” KUB 39.8 iii 35-36 (rit., NS), ed. HTR 44f. (= iv 4-5); waršīmaš–at apē¢¢
l–pát mīyaš išhai aliyan–kan aliyanzinaš apel– pát mīyaš kuenzi “The waršīma-(that is) its own miya-will bind it; the aliyanzina-(that is) its own miya-will strike the aliya-animal” KUB 30.36 ii 10-12 (rit. for the purification of a town, MH/NS), ed. meya-; ŠUMann–a tuēl–pát ŠA DINGIR-LAM memiškizzi “She will repeatedly speak your own name, O deity” KBo 
4.6 i 19-20 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Tischler, Gass. 12f.; cf. tuel–pát GUL-ašša KBo 3.21 ii 3-4 (hymn to Adad, OH?/ NS); nu tuekkanza–šiš–pát (dupl. omits -pát) šar~ nikzi “His own body shall make compensation” KBo 
6.2 ii 54 (Laws §49, OS), w. dupl. KUB 29.14 iv 2 (NS), ed. HG 32f.; cf. IŠTU N´.TE–YA–pát KUB 19.9 ii 8 (hist., Hatt. III); “When you come to attack the land of Hatti, may ZA.BA›.BA› turn back your weapons (GIŠTUKUL.HI.A)” nu šumenzan–pát UZU‰ ēzzašdu (var. ē
zdu) … nu šumenzan–pát ker–šmet iškarran~ niandu “and may they (neut. pl. subj. GIŠTUKUL. HI.A takes a sg. verb) eat your own flesh. (May he turn back your arrows) and may they pierce your own hearts” KBo 8.35 ii 20-21 (treaty w. the Kaškaeans, 

220

MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 16.29 (+) KUB 31.104 i 8, tr. Kaškäer 111; cf. KBo 16.25 i 44 (MH/MS); nu–šmaš apēl–pát UZU.‰ werıē[¢r] “(The gods) summoned their (the people of Kadeš) own flesh against them.” (Niqmaddu, eldest son of King Aitakama of Kadeš, killed his father) KBo 4.4 ii 2, ed. AM 112f.; cf. ibid. ii 12

13. 

6. “only, exclusively” (restrictive/exclusive use; modifying a single word) — a. in hist. narrative: n– ašta URUHattušaš–pát URU-riaš 1-aš ā
šta “Only the one city Hattuša was left” KBo 10.2 i 26 (OH/NS), ed. Hart, TPS 1971:115, Imparati, SCO 14:46f.; nu–šši ANA KUR URUKargamiš URUKargamiš–pát 1-aš URU-aš UL takšulait “In the land of Kargamiš, only Kargamiš, the single city, did not make peace with him” KBo 5.6 ii 9-10 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:92; kappū~ wanteš–pát–mu–kan antuhšeš išparter “Only a few people escaped from me” KUB 19.37 iii 25 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 174f.; perhaps here KBo 14.12 iv 23-24 (DŠ frag. 28), see 12 f 9', below; nu ŠEŠ–YA punuš–pát mān UL kišan “My brother, only inquire if it is not so” KUB 
14.3 i 27 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 2f.; for two other possible exx. (KBo 5.8 iii 31-32 and KUB 14.1 obv. 51) see 4 a, above. 
b. in legal texts — 1' expressing exclusive rights to something: LUGAL-uš–šan hantezziyaš–pát DUMU.LUGAL DUMU-RU kikki[(š)]taru “Let a son, only a prince of the first-rank, become the king” KBo 3.1 ii 36 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 7.15 ii 11 
+ KBo 12.4 ii 5, ed. THeth 11:32f.; n–e ŠA dUTU-ŠI– pát ašantu … n–e µPilliyaš–pát a[šantu] “Let them (i.e., certain cities) belong exclusively to His Majesty. … Let them (i.e., other cities) b[elong] exclusively to Pilliya” KUB 36.108 obv. 4-5 (treaty w. Pilliya, OS), ed. Otten, JCS 5:129 (“wieder … wiederum”); (Hattušili I instructs his adopted son, Muršili I, that in all serious legal matters) nu E[ME-ašš–a] EGIR-pa pangawi–pát [w]ahanza ē
šdu “let the matter (lit. tongue) be turned back only to the pankuš” KUB 1.16 iii 61-62 (Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 16f.; takku d´D-ya ≠x± mim~ ma<i> INA É–ši–pát ē
štu “If he refuses to take the river ordeal, he must remain only in his house” (i.e., under house-arrest) KBo 3.28:12 (anecdotes, OH/ NS); “Formerly … his house was exempt and his associates and his people were exempt” kinuna É– SU–pát [(ELLUM)] “Now only his house is exempt. (His associates and his people must bear 

-pat 6 b 2' 
šahhan and luzzi)” KBo 6.9 i 3 (Laws §51, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.6 i 7-8, ed. HG 34f. (“nur”), Imparati, Leggi 68f. (“soltanto”), tr. ANET 191 (“only”), Hoffner, Diss., 53 (“only”), TUAT 1/1:106 (“allein”), Hart, TPS 1971:121; U A.ŠÀ-LAM karū¢¢¢i (var.
–pát kuiš šuniet ta–z apaš dawarašše) “And only he who sowed it first may take (var. reap) (it) for himself” KBo 6.26 i 39-40 (Laws §166, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.30 iii 4, ed. HG 74f.; cf. KBo 
6.26 i 44-45 (Laws §167), w. dupl. KUB 29.30 iii 7-8; mān ŠA É.NA›–ma hinkanaš uaštul kuiški waštai n–aš aki É–SU–ma–šši ŠA É.NA›–pát “If someone belonging to the ‘stone house’ commits a capital crime, and he is executed, his estate shall belong exclusively to the ‘stone house’” KUB 13.8 obv. 11-12 (Arn. I/NS), ed. HTR 106f.; [k]āša–wa–tta KUR HUR.SAGZippašlā AD[DIN] nu–wa–za apun¢(sic)–pát eši “I have given to you the mountain land of Zippašlā; occupy only it” KUB 14.1 obv. 19 (Madd., MH/ MS), ed. Madd. 4f. □ Hitt. “mountain” is common gender, whereas “land” is neut.; nu–za zik µHuqqanāš dUTU-ŠI– pát AŠŠUM BE_LU_TIM šak¢“You Huqqana must recognize only My Majesty for lordship” KBo 5.3 i 8 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:106f.; cf. also ibid. i 31-32, ed. SV 2:108-111 and KUB 26.1 i 15-16 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 26.8 i 5-6, ed. Dienstanw. 9; KUB 26.1 i 24-25, w. dupl. KUB 26.8 i 15, ed. Dienstanw. 9; nu–wa–nnaš kāš EN-aš–pát “This one is our only lord” KUB 21.42 i 10-11 (SAG 2 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 23 (= i 17-18); cf. KUB 21.42 iv 19, 21-22 (SAG 2 instr.), ed. Dienstanw. 28; (If there are no heirs in the male line) nu NUMUN ŠA DUMU.MUNUS ŠA µUlmi-dU-up–pát EGIR-an šanhandu “Let them seek out the seed of a daughter only of Ulmi-Teššub” KBo 4.10 obv. 13 (Ulmi-Teššub treaty), ed. van den Hout, Diss. 12f.; cf. ibid. obv. 11, rev. 2425; and cf. KUB 26.32 ii 6; ibid. iii 1-2 + KUB 31.106:14-15 + KUB 23.44 iii! 10-11 (Šupp. II), ed. Laroche, RA 47:72f. 
2' expressing the limits of liability: nu SAG.DUaz–pát šarnikdu “Let him pay with his (own) person only, (but let no one harm his house or his children)” KBo 3.1 ii 55 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:34f.; “Formerly they used to pay six shekels of silver; the injured person would take three shekels, and they would take three shekels for the palace; but now the king has waived the share of the palace” nu–za hūninkanza–pát 3 <(G´N)> KÙ.BABBAR dāi “and only the injured person takes three shek
221

els of silver” KBo 6.3 i 23-24 (Laws §9, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.2 i 15 (OS), KBo 6.5 i 3, ed. HG 18f.; “If someone steals the slave of a Luwian from the land of Luwiya and transports him to the land of Hatti, and his owner recognizes him” nu–za ‰R–SU–pát dāi šarnikzil [(NU.GÁL)] “he shall take only his slave, there will be no compensation” KBo 6.3 i 55 (Laws §21, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 i 47 (OS), ed. HG 20f.; ta[(kku)] MÁŠ.GAL enanza takku UDUU° takku UDU.N´TA ašauni harpta išhaš–šiš–an wemiezzi n–an–za šakuaššara[(n–pát d)]ā
i LÚN´.ZU–an natta epzi “If a tamed billy goat, if a ewe, if a wether reassociates itself with a (different) fold, and its owner finds it, he shall take only what is rightfully his. He shall not seize him (i.e., the fold’s owner) as a thief” KBo 6.2 + KBo 19.1 iii 48-50 (Laws §66, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 iii 52-54 (OH/NS), ed. HG 38f.; other šakuwašar(an)– pát passages, where an additional fine is levied are Hitt. Laws §§70, 94, 95; for KBo 6.9 i 3 (Laws §51, OH/NS) see 6 b 1'. 
3' expressing the limits of an offer: (If I take Iyaruwanda by force, I will give the empty city to you Abiratta. But if some son or brother of Tette kills him or hands him over to me and says:) ‰R dUTU-ŠI–wa–z kā–pát pēdi [(ēšmi)] “‘I will be Your Majesty’s servant only here in place.’ (I will not take Iyaruwanda from him)” KBo 3.3 i 30-31 (Barga treaty, Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:34, 40 (no tr. of -pát). 
c. in oracular inquiries (HE 1 §293d): mān–kan ÚŠ-an INA URUHatti šer DINGIR-LUM GIBIL–pát DÙ-zi namma–ma! tamaiš DINGIR-LIM UL kuiški DÙ-zi “If only a new god is causing the plague up in Hattuša and some other further god is not causing (it)” KUB 5.3 ii 5-6 (NH); ≠mā±n DINGIR-LUM zankilatar IŠTU SISKUR–pát šanhiškiši “If you, O god, are seeking compensation together with a ritual-sacrifice only” KUB 22.70 rev. 41 (NH), ed. THeth 6:92f.; mān–za–kan DINGIR-LIM ŠÀ É.DINGIRLIM–KA–pát TUKU.TUKU-anza ITTI dUTU-ŠI– ma–za UL kuitki TUKU.TUKU-uanza “If you, O god, are angry only (at something) within your temple, but you are in no way angry with His Majesty” ibid. obv. 6, ed. THeth 6:54f.; mān–za DINGIRLIM apadda–pát šer TUKU.TUKU-uanza “If you, O god, are angry only on that account” ibid. obv. 11; BE-an ≠k±ī–pát KI.MIN nu MUŠEN HURRI SIGﬁ

-pat 6 d 

ru, “If this and only this ‘ditto’ (i.e., ‘is the cause of the god’s wrath against us’), then let the HUR~ RI-bird oracle be favorable” AT 454 ii 12; cf. ibid. i 16; and cf. namma–ma GUR-i UL kui[tki] “And there is noth[ing] else in addition” ibid. i 27; and passim in oracle questions; (Fever was ascertained for His Majesty there (apiya) within the land of Nerik) § mān dUTU-ŠI :tapaššaš apiya–pát ŠÀ KUR URUNeriqqa wemiyazi kā–ma UL “If fever will find His Majesty only there within the land of Nerik, but not here, …” KBo 
2.2 i 12-14 (NH), ed. van den Hout, ZA 81:289f. 
d. in prayers: “You guide the land” tarhū
ilatar zik–pát peškiši zik–pát handanza anda genzū daškiši zik–pát mugāuwar zik–pát ēššatti zik–pát genzu~ walaš dUTU-uš nu genzu zik–pát daškiši handanza– kan antuhšaš tuk–pát ā
ššuš n–an zik–pát šarliškiši “Only you give valor. Only you are just. Only you show mercy. Only you act upon invocations, only you are the merciful Sungod, and only you show mercy. Only to you is the just person dear, and only you exalt him” KUB 31.127 i 3-10 (prayer to the Sungod, OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 94, 101; cf. ibid. 14-15 and passim; cf. KUB 30.10 obv. 8 (prayer, Kantuzzili, OH/MS), ed. maniyahh-4 b, tr. ANET 400; cf. ibid. 6-7; nu šumāš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš URUHattušaš–pát handān parkui KUR-e S´SKUR.HI.A–a–šmaš parkui šalli šanezzi URUHattušaš–pát KUR-ya pišgaueni nu–ššan šumāš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš nahšarattan URUHattušaš–pát KUR-ya zikkiuwani “Only Hatti is a true pure land for you gods and only in the land of Hatti do we repeatedly give you pure, great, fine sacrifices. Only in the land of Hatti do we establish respect for you gods” 545/u + 577/u i 5-9 + KUB 17.21 i 1-5 (Arn. I/Ašm., MH/MS), ed. Kaškäer 152f., Lebrun, Hymnes 133, 143; nu–tta DINGIR-LIM–YA U É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ INA KUR URUHatti–pát tašnuwan namma–ma–tta ≠tamē±dani KUR-e UL kuwapikki ēšzi [(nu–tta E)]ZEN.HI.A S´SKUR.HI.A INA KUR URUHatti– pát (dupl. omits –pát) parkui [(šuppi piškan)]zi namma–ma–tta tamē
dani [KUR-(e UL kuwapik)]ki piškanzi “Only in the land of Hatti are you, my god, and the temples considered important. In no other land do they exist. Only in Hatti do they give you pure, consecrated festivals and rituals. Furthermore, in no other land anywhere do they donate to you” KUB 24.2 obv. 15-20 (prayer to Telipinu, Murš. II), w. 

222

dupl. KUB 24.1 i 19-24, ed. Gurney, AAA 27:16-19; cf. KBo 
3.21 iii 8-9 (hymn to Adad), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:24, 26 (no tr. of -pat). 
e. in other types of texts: (Kešši’s wife was beautiful and well-endowed) nu–ššan µKeššiš parā ANA DAM–ŠU–pát IŠ[ME] … n–aš–šan parā ANA DAM–[ŠU]–pát IŠME “Kešši listened only to his wife. (Furthermore, he didn’t take care of the thick bread and offering vessels of the gods and further he didn’t go hunting in the mountains.) He listened only to his wife” KUB 33.121 ii 6, 8 (Kešši story, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:234f.; “But the new table which was used (lit. stands) for the entreaty” [n–a]t ŠA DIN~ GIR-LIM–pát kišari “becomes the exclusive property of the goddess” KUB 7.5 iv 18 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/ NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:276, 279; KUR-e dU-aš–pát nepeš tekann–a ÉRIN.MEŠ-az dU-aš–pát “The land is the exclusive property of the Stormgod. Heaven and earth (and) the army are the exclusive property of the Stormgod” IBoT 1.30:2-3 (OH?/NS); “If someone angers the soul of a god” n–at–kan DINGIRLIM apē
dani–pát 1-edani anda ša[nh]zi “Does that god seek out only that person, singly for it? (No. He seeks out his wife, [his children,] his descendants, … for it)” KUB 13.4 i 35 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 26f.; n–ašta DINGIR.MEŠ-aš–pát ZI-ni iyatten “Work for the will of the gods only” ibid. ii 69-70; ammel kāš–pát 1aš dammešhaš kī–ya–an 1-an dammešhanunun IŠTU É.GAL-LIM–pát–kan kuit katta uiyanun “This was my only punishment (for her); in this way alone did I punish her: the fact that I expelled her only from the palace (and removed her from Tawannana-ship for the gods)” KBo 4.8 ii 12-14 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188 (no tr. of second -pát), Hart, TPS 1971:104 (“just the fact that I expelled her from the palace”); n–aš kuwapi–pát SAﬁ-ešzi “Only when it becomes red” KBo 21.20 i 8 (med., NH), ed. StBoT 19:42f. (“eben”); maršanza GU›-uš hamešhi–pát SIGﬁ-ri “Only in the spring will a poor-quality ox look healthy” KUB 4.3 obv. rt. col. 13-14 (wisdom, NH), ed. maršant-2 (“particularly in the spring”), and Laroche, Ugar. 5:781. 
7. “likewise, also” (representing another of the same kind) — a. in general: 1 MUNUS-TUM ƒKattittahi µTatilē
ni Š[UM–ŠU] 1 DUMU.MUNUS 

-pat 8 a 
ŠEŠ–ŠU ƒKattittahi–pát Š[UM–ŠU] “One woman, [her] n[ame] is Kattitahi of Tatilē
ni. One daughter of her brother, [her] na[me] is also Kattittahi” KUB 
31.50 obv. 8-9 (donation of Pud.), ed. StBoT 1:20f.; nu ABU– ŠU kuē
l waštai katta–ma DUMU–ŠU UL wašdulaš– pát “Someone’s father sins, but his son is not also a party to the sin” KBo 5.13 i 15 (Kup. § 7), w. dupl. KBo 
4.3 i 4 + 360/u:9, ed. SV 1:114f.; cf. KBo 3.4 ii 78, KUB 23.103 obv. 25. 
b. in lexical texts (Hoffner, FsOtten 108): (Sum.) ME.TA = (Akk.) immati = (Hitt.) kuššan “when” / ME.TA.A = immatima = nu kušsan “And when” / ME.TA.A.KAM = ana immati = nu kuššan–pát “Also ‘and when’” KBo 1.44 rev. 13-15, ed. MSL 17:116:47-49; (Sum.) ‰.NE.ÉŠ = (Akk.) inanna = (Hitt.) kinun “now” / A.DA.LAM = inanna–ma = kinun–pát “also ‘now’” ibid. obv. 14-15, ed. MSL 17:102; GÚ = napharu = taruppeššar “totality” / GÚ.SI = namharu = taruppeššar–pát “also ‘totality’” / GÚ = kellā¢¢
tu = human “all” / GÚ.SI = kellatu = human– pát “also ‘all’” KBo 1.42 ii 15-18, ed. MSL 13:135:90-93; GÚ.G´D.G´D = hitnuqu = wešurišgatallaš “strangler/oppressor” / GÚ.G´D.G´D = hitnuzu = wešu~ riškattallaš–pát “also ‘strangler/oppressor’” ibid. ii 41-42, ed. MSL 13:136:115-116; note the curiosity: GÚ. DÙ = zā
ru= wišuriškattallaš “strangler/oppressor” / GÚ.DÙ.A = zāruru = KI.MIN–pát “also ‘strangler/oppressor’” ibid. ii 27-28, ed. MSL 13:135:102-103. Occasionally such a pair reveals the Hitt. syllabic reading of a Sumerogram: (syllabic Sum.) [NA. AR] = (standard Sum.) [NAR] = (Akk.) [n]ā =
ru(Hitt.) LÚNAR-aš “musician” / [NA.AR] = [NAR] = [zamma]ru = LÚkinirtallaš–pát “also ‘musician’” KBo 1.52 obv. 15-16 □ this shows that LÚkinirtallaš was the reading underlying LÚNAR-aš, cf. Güterbock, JCS 6:35; cf. Sommer, OLZ 24:197f. 
8. “in addition, also, still again” (attached to predicates and indicating an additional action), German “auch noch” (verbal equivalent of mng. 7) 
— a. attached to preverbs or verbs: “That son of mine (is) important; he breaks up the soil, plows, irrigates” halkinn–a [DÙ-zi]–pát “and in addition [produces] the grain” VBoT 58 i 30-31 (Missing Sungod myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth 24, tr. Hittite Myths 27; cf. KUB 
1.16 ii 38 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 6f.; “When I, Tudhaliya, the great king, arrived in the land of Hatti, 
223

the enemy troops f[led]” namma–an–zan EGIRanda–pát IÙBAT (var. [EGI]R-an–pát ēpp[un]) “But, then in addition, I (so var., text “he”) set out after him” KUB 23.11 iii 14 (ann., Tudh II/NS), w. dupl. KUB 23.12 iii 15, ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:160f.; “If from the palace they give to (some)one silver, gold, garments, bronze utensils as a gift for him, let it be labeled (lit. named): ‘The king gave it to him,’ and however much is its weight” n–at iyan–pát ēšdu “let that also be recorded (literally: ‘made’)” KUB 
13.4 ii 35 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 154f. (= ii 42) (“furthermore”), Süel, Direktif Metni 44f.; “If a resettled person (Hitt. arnuwalaš) leaves your district, for him who remains in his place” nu–šši NU[M]UN.HI.A aniya–pát “sow seeds in addition for him” KUB 13.2 iii 40 (instr. for BE_L MADGALTI, MH/ NS), ed. Dienstanw. 48 (“ebenso”); “And, when my father had become a god, my brother, Arnuwanda, seated himself on the throne of his father” EGIR-an–ma–aš irmaliyattat–pát “but afterward he also became (deathly) ill” KBo 3.4 i 5-6 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 14f., HE 1 § 293c; “When it became spring, I reviewed the troops at the Red River” namma tuz~ ziyaš–miš hūīttiyanun–pát “Then, in addition, I drew up my troops” KBo 2.5 ii 3 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 182f.; man INA URUHayaša pāun–pát “I would have also proceeded into Hayaša, (but the year was too short)” KBo 4.4 iii 22-23, ed. AM 124f.; namma apē
dani MU-ti INA KUR Arzauwa iyanniyanun–pát “Furthermore in that year I set out also for the land of Arzawa” KBo 3.4 ii 8-9, ed. AM 44-47; namma URUKaš~ kaš uit–pát “Furthermore the Kaškaean city also came” ibid. i 31, ed. AM 22f.; nu–mu–kan hū
wa[(p)]pir nu–mu :arpašatta–[(pá)]t “They were hostile to me, and in addition bad luck befell me” ABoT 62 + KBo 3.6 i 30 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupls. KUB 1.1 i 34-35 and KUB 1.5 i 9, ed. Hatt. 10f., StBoT 24:6f. i 34-35 (reading -x for -pát). 
b. attached to non-preverbial adverbs: kinun– ma–at SIZSÁ-at … mā
n dudduš halziyauwanzi ki~ nun–pát SIZSÁ-ri “It has now been ascertained (to be the cause of divine anger) … If crying out ‘woe’ now too will be ascertained” KUB 22.70 rev. 45, 46 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:92f. 
9. “rather” (marking a positive statement contrasted w. a negative statement of identical mean

-pat 10 a 

ing, but differently worded) — a. negative clause preceding a positive one w. -pat: “He who does such a deed” n–aš KUR URUHattuši UL hūiššūizzi aki–pa-a[t–š]an “will not go on living in the land of Hatti; rather he will die there (-šan)” KBo 5.3 iii 31 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:124f. (differently), cf. Ehelolf apud SV 2:170 (see discussion above in morphology sec.); ištappulli–šmit A.GARﬁ-aš kuit–kan anda paizzi n– at–kan namma šarā UL uizzi anda–pát–kan harkzi 
“Their lids are of lead. What goes in does not subsequently come (back) up. Rather it perishes therein” KUB 33.8 iii 8-10 (Tel.myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 44, tr. Hittite Myths 19; [ū
kk]–a–wa–kan ku[ru]raš memian kuēz KUR-yaz arha [ištamaš]mi [nu–wa–ta–kkan ANA ABI dUTU-ŠI apū¢t KUR-e [UL
n ant]uhšan apašannahhi n]u–war–aš–ta hatreškimi–pát “From whatever land I hear a matter of enmity, [I will not conceal that] person (and) that land [from you, the father of His Majesty]. Rather I will write about them to you” KUB 14.1 obv. 24-25 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 6f.; UL–ma–mu GIŠTUKUL LÚ.KÚR kuwa~ pikki šer wahnut dIŠTAR–mu–za–kan GAŠAN–YA hūmandaza–pát daškit “And she never at any time allowed the weapon of the enemy to circle over me. Rather IŠTAR, my lady, kept taking me (from danger) in every instance” KUB 1.1 i 41-43 (Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:6f.; mān–aš aki–ya kuwapi n–aš UL 1-aš aki MÁŠ–≠ŠU–ma–š±ši tettia[(n–p)]át “And if he ever dies, he does not die alone, rather his family is included with him” KUB 13.4 i 33 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.92:3, ed. Chrest. 148f., Süel, Direktif Metni 24f. Note the same construction without -pát: [ziladu]wa(?)–ššan UL huīšteni nu harkteni “In the future(?) you will not live; you will perish” KUB 1.16 iii 37 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 12f.; perhaps here KBo 14.12 iv 23-24 (DŠ frag. 28) see 12 f 9', below. 
b. positive clause w. -pat preceding the negative: (If someone revolts and seeks the kingship of Wiluša) [nu–za dUTU–ŠI] tuk–pát µAlakšandun šaggahhi apūn–ma–za [UL šaggah]hi KUR-eyaš– ši–šan anda harnikmi “I, my Majesty, will rather recognize you, Alakšandu; I will not recognize him. I will destroy his lands” KUB 21.5 ii 9-10 (Alakš.), ed. SV 2:58f. 
10. “even,” “even though,” “nevertheless” (contrary to expectation) (Hoffner, FsOtten 112-114) — a. 

224

“even” modifying a single word within a clause — 1' in general: nu–za–kan :irmalaš–pát ŠA DINGIRLIM handandatar šer uškinun “Even as an ill person (although I was ill,) I kept seeing the divine power of the deity on my own behalf (-za … šer)” KUB 1.1 i 44-45 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:6f.; allallāš–ma memiyaš kišan LÚ.MEŠhappinanteš–pát UL ašiwanteškantari “The saying about treachery (goes) this way: ‘Do not even the rich become poor?’” KBo 4.14 ii 52-53 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II); nu–mu kappin–pát DUMU-an dIŠTAR URUŠam[uh]a ANA ABU–YA wē
kta “even when I was but a small child, IŠTAR of Šamuha requested me from my father” KBo 6.29 i 7-8, ed. Hatt. 44f. (“als ich noch klein war”); (Mašturi did not support his patron Muwattalli’s son Urhi-Teššub, saying:) LÚpahhuršin–pát pah~ hašhi “Shall I be loyal even to a pahhurši-?” KUB 
23.1 ii 29 (Šaušgamuwa treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 16:10f., CHD LÚpahhurši-; kuin–ma–za LÚ-an LÚGURUŠ-an– pát harnikta “But another man, even in his prime, you have destroyed” KUB 24.7 ii 4 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:158, cf. von Brandenstein, Or NS 8:74f. (“und gar einen starken Mann”); “The cliff of Kuruštama (is) very s[teep, …]; furthermore on this side and that side it (is) [very high and rugged]” nu–šši–kan KASKAL-aš 1-edaz–pát [šarā pennu~ manzi?] UL kišat “The path on it was impossible [to drive?/proceed? up], even single file (i.e., although one goes single file, the road still doesn’t suffice)” KBo 14.20 ii 14-15 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:174, 182 (“And merely on one side there was a road [to the top …] was impossible”); [han]tez~ zin–pát auriyaš URU-an walhuwani … weš–a EGIR-pa takšulaš–pát URU-an walh[uwani] “We will attack even a first-rank border city … we [will] also attack even a city allied (with us?)” KUB 23.77a rev. l5-16 (treaty w. Kaškaeans, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 124 (“sogar eine Stadt”); nu–š<ši> kappuwauwar–pát UL [kišari] “Even the counting of it [is] im[possible]” KUB 8.67:12-13 (Hedammu myth, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 14:40f.; 
nu šallaš–pát haššannaš ēšhar pangariyattati 
“(Now) blood(shed) even of the ‘Great Family’ has become common” KBo 3.1 ii 31 (Tel.pr, OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:30f., cf. Neu, StBoT 5:135 (“die Bluttat gerade der grošen Familie”); nu INA URUZippašna pāun nu–kan URUZippašnan GEﬂ-az–pát šarā
paun “I went to Zippašna and went up Zippašna even at night” KBo 10.2 

-pat 10 b 1' 
ii 48-50 (ann., Hatt. I/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:50f., cf. Melchert, JNES 37:18-20 (“in the dead of night”); nu kuin [pa]prahti kuin–ma–za parkun(sic)–pát arha pid~ dalaši “You soil one and you scorn/neglect another, even though he is clean(!)” KUB 24.7 ii 10 (hymn to Ištar), ed. paprahh-d, Güterbock, JAOS 103:158; ammuk– ma LUGAL-UTTA dIŠTAR GAŠAN–YA annišan– pát kuit memiškit “Because IŠTAR, my lady, had even before promised me the kingship” KUB 1.1 iv 7-8 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:24f. (“schon früher”); “When I Tudhaliya, Great King, had not yet even (cf. 10 b 2') become king” ūk–ma m.dLAMMA-ann–a DINGIR-LUM annišan–pát āššuwanni anda arnut nu–nnaš annišan–pát nakkēš aššawēš ešū¢en “The god even before had brought Kurunta and I(sic) together in friendship and even before we were already great friends” Bronze Tablet ii 32-33 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f. (“schon damals”). 
2' in the introduction to a proverb or a saying, imbedded in the royal prayers: ANA DUMU.NAM. LÚ.U⁄·.LU–pát–kan anda memian kišan me≠miš~ kanzi± “Even among mankind they are in the habit of speaking a word as follows” KUB 21.27 ii 15, tr. Goetze, ANET 393 (no tr. of -pat); mān UN-aš–pát atti anni DUMU-an šallanuzi “If even a person raises a child for (its) father (and) mother (and the father and mother do not pay him the fee of the child-custodian, would he be happy?)” KUB 14.7 iv 11-12, cf. Sommer, HAB 73, Archi, SMEA 14:196 n. 37 □ in both of these instances the queen cites a human precedent and by means of the particle -pat implies that, if this rule is valid on a merely human level, it should be much more so on the divine. 
b. modifying an entire clause — 1' on the first noun/adj. of the clause: EN–YA–pát kuwapi URUAn~ kuwa ištarkit “Even when my lord became ill in Ankuwa, (at that time they had already defected)” KUB 19.23 rev. 12; “A MEŠEDI-guard [may not go forth through] the gate whenever he wishes” mān– an–za–kan šēhunanza–pát tamāšzi “even when urine presses him, (… he must say to the MEŠEDIguard who stands before him …)” IBoT 1.36 i 33-34, ed. AS 24:8f. (no tr. of -pat), Rost, MIO 11:176f. (“gerade”); “If there is a certain matter” [na]šma–aš :kuništa~ yalliš–pát kuiški [naš]ma–aš ŠA MUNUS-TI “even (if) either it is something confidential, or it is concerning a woman, (do not conceal it (when) I, My 
225

Majesty, ask you)” KUB 26.1 iv 12-13 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 15. 
2' on the finite verb: ūk–ma µTudhaliyaš LUGAL.GAL kuitman LUGAL-izziahhat–pát naui “When I, Tudhaliya, Great King, had not yet even become king” Bronze tablet ii 31 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:16f.; apūn–ma–za MUNUS-an m.dLAMMA-aš ANA PA_NI ABI–YA datta–pát naui “Kurunta during the reign of my father had not yet even taken that woman” Bronze Tablet ii 87, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:20f. 
3' elsewhere in the sentence: [ANA ABI–KA– ma–wa?] ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ mekki– pát ē
šta “Although [your father ha]d many troops and horses,” (you are a child) KUB 19.29 iv 19-20 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 18-21; KUR URUNerik hūdak–pát karūiliyaš ANA LUGAL.MEŠ k[arū] harkanza ēšta “Even though in the old days under the former kings Nerik was suddenly destroyed (I rebuilt it)” KUB 21.19 + 1303/u iii 11-13 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:94f., Lebrun, Hymnes 314, 320. 
c. in the second clause “nevertheless” (contrary to expectation); (cf. Tenner, HAT 101, Pedersen, ArOr 7:83); on the semantic development from “ebenfalls” to “trotzdem” in Tenner and Pedersen’s thinking see Hart, TPS 1971:107: [nu]–za mān irma~ lanza–(š)a ēšta dUTU-ŠI–ma–tta [ANA] AŠAR ABI–KA tittanunun–pát “Although you were also ill, nevertheless I, My Majesty, installed you [in] the place of your father” KBo 5.9 i 16-17 (Dupp., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:10f.; µUrhi-dU-upaš–ma–mu mān HULlušš–a ēšta ammuk–ma IŠTU INIM µMiddanna~ mūwa UL–pát karuššiyanun “But although Urhi-Teššub was hostile to me, nevertheless I was not silent about the matter of Middanamūwa” KBo 4.12 obv. 24-26 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 42f.; “In the morning I went through the land of Ištaluppa” nu INA KUR URUTakkuwahina andan pāun … dUTU-ŠI–ma pāun–pát “and entered the land of Takkuwahina. (While I was going through Ištaluppa, the enemy from Kappuppa and all the Kaškaean lands mobilized and took a position before me atop the mountain in that same (-pat 1 a 1') Kappuppuwa.) But I, My Majesty, nevertheless went (and burned the lands of Takkuwahina and Tahantattipa)” KBo 5.8 i 31, 35 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 150f.; (They always say:) akkantaš–wa LÚHADANU [:š]uwaru–pát LÚHADA~ 

-pat 11 c 

NU “A son-in-law of a deceased person is nevertheless a true son-in-law” KUB 23.85 rev. 7-8 (queen’s letter), ed. Stefanini, Athenaeum 40:4f. (no tr. of -pat), THeth 
	16:15 (no tr. of -pat), Beckman, JNES 45:20 w. n. 10 (“in every sense”), van den Hout, Diss. 128 (“doch ganz und gar”), Güterbock, Oriens 10:358 (no tr. of -pat), Stefanini apud HW 3. Erg. 30 (“šuwaru = ein Sproš), Puhvel, JAOS 101:213f. (šuwaru–pát = “very much”), cf. 12 f 17'. 
	11. “surely,” “certainly” (Hoffner, FsOtten 114) — 
	a. w. imperatives: “Rather than give Nerik to another” nu–wa ANA URUNerik šer aggallu–pát “I will surely die for [the city of Ne]rik” KUB 21.19 iii 35, ed. StBoT 16:41 (“fürwahr”); n–at akkandu–pát “they shall surely die” KBo 16.25 i 14 (instr., MH/MS), ed. THeth 

20:476 w. n. 1758 (“both”); cf. ibid. iii 12; n–aš aku–pát “he shall surely die” ibid. iii 9; cf. KUB 13.7 i 23 (MH/ NS); mā¢
n LÚhaliyattallaš kuedanikki ešzi n–aš hali paiddu–pát “If someone has an escort, he shall surely go into the courtyard” KUB 13.4 iii 23-24 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 158f., Süel, Direktif Metni 58f. (“kesinlikle”), cf. HED 3:25 (differently); cf. ibid. iii 29. 
	b. w. optatives (-man): (This the Assyrian king keeps saying:) iyami–man–pát–wa kuitki “I surely would like to do something” KUB 23.103 rev. 13 (letter), w. dupl. KUB 23.92 rev. 12, ed. Otten, AfO 19:42f. (“gewiš), Güterbock, Or NS 12:154 on § 276. 
	c. w. prohibitives “certainly not”: (at the end of a series of prohibitions) kušduwā handān–pát

ta leēšdu “May defamation certainly never be right (with you)” KUB 1.16 ii 51 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 8f., HED 3:103; cf. ibid. ii 55; utniyanza–ašta lē–pát kuiški memai “Let a land certainly not speak (to you)” KUB 1.16 ii 62, ed. HAB 8f.; nu lē–pát zaluganumi “I shall certainly not delay” KUB 21.38 obv. 37 (letter to Ramses II, Pud.), ed. Helck, JCS 17:90; (If someone begs you to postpone a festival that he is supposed to sponsor) n–ašta UN-aš ZI-ni lē–pát iyatteni “you shall certainly not do it at the wish of a person” KUB 
13.4 ii 63-64 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 48f.; cf. KUB 13.5 ii 10, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 34f.; “(If) someone finds a fugitive … let the governor send (him) before the king” nu–za–kan LÚhu~ yandan […] lē–pát dalaī“He shall certainly not let a fugitive go” KUB 26.17 ii 6-7 (instr., MH/MS). 

226

d. w. simple negation: n–an–kan UL–pát wah~ nunun “I certainly did not change it” KUB 21.17 ii 10 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. Samuha 145, 148 (“du tout”); tamē~ dani–ma–wa kuedani ANŠE.G‰R.NUN.NA šarnik~ zilaš EGIR-pa pehhi nu–wa–šmaš SIGﬁ-anduš UL– pát pehhi “I gave back mules as compensation to some other, but I certainly did not give them good ones” KUB 13.35 ii 6-8 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:6f. (“ja keinesfalls”); for KUB 21.38 rev. 11, 13 see 2 b, above. 
12. (distribution in the sentence) — a. w. sentence particle chains: since -pat is not a sentence particle, -pat does not occur within the chain of such sentence particles as -wa(r), -aš, -mu, -za, and -kan (cf. Friedrich, HE 1 § 288; Hart, TPS 1971:102; Hoffner, FsOtten 104). If a chain of sentence particles attaches itself to any word which also carries -pat, -pat will precede the entire chain — 1' in OH: ammel– pát–wa–za KBo 6.3 iii 71 (Laws §74, OH/NS); anda–pát– kan KUB 33.8 iii 10 (Tel.myth, OH/NS), w. dupl. IBoT 3.141 iv 13 (OH/NS) which substitutes anda–at–šan. 
2' in MH and NH: parā–pát–za KUB 13.4 ii 39 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS); 2-uš–pát–at ibid. ii 50; kuiš–pát–kan ibid. iii 4; kā–pát–wa KBo 14.12 iv 24 (DŠ frag. 28); kappū
wanteš–pát–mu–kan KUB 19.37 iii 25, ed. AM 174f.; IŠTU É.GAL-LIM–pát–kan KBo 4.8 ii 14; hūmandaza–pát–mu–kan KUB 1.1 i 58 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:8f.; [zi]k–pát–za KUB 24.3 i 39; zik–pát–ma–za KBo 5.4 rev. l (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:60f.; annišan–pát–an Bronze Tablet i 12 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:10f.; ANA DUMU.NAM.LÚ.U⁄·.LU– pát–kan KUB 21.27 ii 15. 
3' in lit. texts: ŠA dKumarpi–pát–war–a[t] KUB 
33.95 + KUB 36.7b iv 17 (Ullik.); kuwat–pát–wa KUB 
33.103 ii 9 (Hedammu); DAM–KA–pát–wa–ta–kkan ā

ššiyattat KUB 33.121 ii 9 (Kešši). 

4' in rituals: URUTauriša–pát–kan KUB 15.34 iii 48. 
5' in divination: arha–pát–kan KUB 5.1 iii 87; ANA MU.KAM-TI–pát–wa–kan KBo 14.21 ii 64; UN.MEŠtar–pát–kan KUB 22.70 rev. 51. 
b. w. a word and its modifiers in general: When -pát is construed w. a word and its modifiers (noun attributive adjective, noun genitive modifier, verb preverb, verb adverb, verb negative), it will usually attach itself to that modifier which serves to par

-pat 12 c 1' h' 
ticularize or define the construction to the highest degree (Hoffner, FsOtten 105). Hart, TPS 1971:102, describes the distribution differently, claiming that -pat is regularly attached to the first word in nominal groups. Hart, TPS 1971:103, points out that “a consequence of this fixed position … is that position cannot be used to decide whether -pat belongs functionally w. the adjective etc. or to the noun.” 
c. in verbal groups — 1' preverb–pat + verb (Sommer, OLZ 24:199f. n. 1; for exceptions see 4', below) — a' anda–pat: anda–pát–kan harkzi KUB 33.8 iii 10; anda–pát šešzi KBo 4.2 i 37, anda–pát […-]anzi KBo 
13.119 iii 9-10. 
b' ā
ppa–pat: EGIR-pa–pát parkunuzi KBo 6.4 iv 2 (Laws § XXXIV, NH); EGIR-pa–pát wahnut KUB 6.41 iii 51 (Kup., Murš. II); nu EGIR-pa–pát pal[-…] KUB 
57.9:2. 
c' ā
ppan–pat: EGIR-an–pát AÙBAT KBo 3.4 ii 28, ed. AM 50f.; EGIR-an–pát harkanzi KBo 21.41 rev. 12, 18; EGIR-an–pát arwašta KUB 17.21 iv 6; [namma]– aš–ta–kkan EGIR-an–pát ki≠ttat± nu–tta [pa]rhiškit KUB 14.1 obv. 2 (MH/MS). 
d' āppanda–pat: EGIR-anda–pát IÙBAT (var. [EGI]R-an–pát ē
ppu[n]) KUB 23.11 iii 14 (ann., Tudh II, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 23.12 iii 15, see 8 a, above. 
e' arha–pat: arha–pát uiyanun KUB 1.1 i 72 (Hatt. III); arha–pát pait KUB 1.1 ii 49 (Hatt. III); [arha–pá]t peššiyanun KBo 6.29 iii 29; arha–pát peššiya KUB 14.7 iv 11; arha–pát paškuwanun KUB 43.50 obv. 5 (MSpr); arha–pát–kan kuermi KUB 5.1 iii 87 (oracle question, NH). 
f' katta(n)–pat: GAM-an–pát iya[ttat] KUB 19.10 i 12 (DŠ frag. 13E); ABU–YA–[ya–šši ka]ttan–pát ē[šta] KUB 19.11 iv 41 (DŠ frag. 13D). 
g' parā–pat: n–at–ši para–¢pát UL arnutteni KUB 
13.4 i 56 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), parā– pát–za uššaniyaddu KUB 13.4 ii 39; nu parā–pát dahhi KUB 5.1 iii 52 (oracle question, NH); nu parā–pát nan~ ništen KUB 31.101:21-22 (letter), ed. nanna-4 d (no tr.), Archi, SMEA 16:137f. 
h' peran–pat: GIŠzuppariyaš–šmaš peran–pát harkanzi KBo 10.24 i 4-5 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS); GAL MUNUS.MEŠ[KAR.KID MUNUS.MEŠKAR.KID–ya] per~ an–pát hūyanteš KUB 7.19 obv. 6-8. 
227

i' šarā–pat: a[mmuk–man–kan] / [INA] HUR.SAGTehšina šarā–pát pāu[n] KUB 19.37 iii 52-53 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 178f. 
j' šer–pat: LUGAL U MUNUS.LU[GAL šarā] tienzi šer–pát aruwā
nzi KBo 30.66 iii 9 + KBo 17.74 iii 19 (weather fest., OH/MS); cf. KUB 14.16 ii 10 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 42f. 
2' preverb⁄ + preverb¤–pat + verb: ≠EGIR±-an [ar]ha–pát naiš KUB 14.1 obv. 73 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f.; cf. KBo 12.3 iii 12; separated from verb by nominals: nu ā
ppa para–pát INA URUTanipiya A.ŠÀ kueraš LUGAL-waz piyanza KBo 3.7 iv 22-23. 
3' adverb (or “separated preverbs”)–pat … + verb (Hart, TPS 1971:103f.): n–aš āppa–ya–pát apūn KASKAL-an uizzi IBoT 1.36 iii 25 (MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f., and 2 a, above. 
4' preverb + verb–pat: a[rha hašpi]r–pát KUB 
	14.1 obv. 48 (Madd., MH/MS); n–at x[…] / arha pānzi– pát KUB 20.76 iii 18-19 (fest.); n–ašta parranda halzi~ anzi–pát KUB 13.4 i 32 (instr., pre-NH/NS). Götze, AM 207-209 w. n. 1, and Hart, TPS 1971:104, noted exceptions to the pattern given in 1' above, but did not explain. Three of those noted are only apparent exceptions. In n–at–mu–kan UN-az KAZU-az šarā uizzi–pát KUB 6.45 i 30-31 ša-ra-a is not a preverb, but rather a postposition governing the abl. KAZUaz (contra Götze, AM 209). The EGIR-pa e-šu-u-wa-ar of KBo 1.42 i 7-8 is not a finite verb form, but a verbal substantive and the predicate of an implied nominal sentence: “(The Akkadian word [tukultu or takaltu]) is (equivalent to Hittite) āppa ešuwar.” Thus in line 8 the second ā
	ppa ešuwar as a unitary predicate noun carries the -pat (“likewise”) at the end of the unit. The situation is very similar in KBo 
2	 v 1-2, where the neut. pl. part. anda hū

laliyan~ da–pát modifiying GIŠGIDRU.HI.A DINGIR-LIM bears -pat at the very end of the unitary participle. 
5' negative–pat + verb (AM 208; cf. natta f): KUB 
1.1 ii 50, KUB 21.38 rev. 13, KBo 4.12 obv. 26, KUB 23.103 rev. 23, KUB 13.4 ii 30, KUB 13.35 ii 8, KUB 14.8 rev. 34, KUB 18.2 iii 5, and passim. 
6' negative + verb–pat: […]UL paimi–pát–wa KBo 14.8 iii 18 (DŠ frag. 23). Other exceptions to the rule regarding the negations (5', above) like the ex

-pat 12 d 2' 

ceptions to Sommer’s rule (1' and 4' above) regarding the preverbs are only apparent and can be explained by the same principle applied above. In lē handān–pat ēšdu KUB 1.16 ii 51 and 55 (HAB 8f.; ed. 11 c above) the form handān is the predicate of a nominal sentence. The -pat here governs that predicate rather than the negated verb lē … ēšdu. 
7' prev. + negative + v. — a' prev. + negative– pat + v.: dUTU-ŠI–ma tuk [µAl]akšandun arha UL– pát peššiyami KUB 21.5 ii 6-7 (Alakš. treaty, Muw. II), see also KUB 14.14 rev. 25, KUB 14.10 i 15; KBo 15.33 ii 20; KUB 
16.41 + 7/v iii 12 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 62:106). This is the normal pattern; for exceptions to this rule see the next two sections. 
b' preverb–pat + negative + verb (Hart, TPS 1971:103f.): parā–pát UL arnutteni KUB 13.4 i 56. 
c' negative–pat + preverb + verb: UL–pát parā udanzi KUB 22.40 ii 35. 
8' infinitive–pat + finite auxiliary verb: zahhiyauwanzi–pát ēpzi KUB 19.18 i 26 (DŠ frag. 15G). 
d. w. (pro)nominal groups — 1' w. enclitics that are not a part of the initial chain of sentence particles — a' noun + possessive suffix: -pat does not break the nexus between noun and possessive suffixes: É-er–šet–pát KBo 6.2 i 38 (OS); INA É–ši–pát ēštu KBo 3.28:12, cf. ibid. 14; É-ri–šši–pát KBo 3.68 iv 14; tuekkanza–šiš–pát KBo 6.2 ii 54 (Laws §49, OS). 
b' w. potential-optative man: -man precedes -pat: KUB 23.92 rev. 12, KUB 23.103 rev. 13. 
c' w. -ya “and” and -ma “but”: in two instances, -pat follows -ya: ā
ppa–ya–pát IBoT 1.36 iii 25, ed. 2 a above; cf. 12 c 3'; […] apē–ya–pát–ši–kan […] KUB 
23.40 obv. 5 may be read as apē
ya–pát–ši–kan or apí-ia!-ia–pát–ši–kan (for apiya see 12 f 6') and in one case precedes -ma: zik–pát–ma–za išhāš [ēš ] KBo 
5.4 rev. 1 (Targ.). 
2' adjective–pat + noun: nu šallaš–pát haššan~ naš ē
šhar KBo 3.1 ii 31 (Tel.pr., OH/NS); LUGAL-uš– šan hantezziyaš–pát DUMU.LUGAL DUMU-RU kikk≠it±taru ibid. ii 36; [hante]zziuš–pát happariuš KBo 
6.10 iii 21 (Laws §146); kappu[wanteš–pá]t antuhšeš KUB 14.1 obv. 52 (Madd., MH/MS), [han]tezzin–pát auriyaš URU-an KUB 23.77a rev. 15; KUB 19.37 iii 25, ed. 6 a, above; KBo 6.29 i 7; cf. also on apa-, ka-, below. Ex

228

ception: šallāi huššili–pát KUB 31.100 rev. 10 is conceived as a single speech unit. 
3' genitive–pat + noun: nu kuit ēšhanaš–pát išhā
š tezzi “Whatever the aforementioned avenger of blood decides (lit. says)” KUB 11.1 iv 19-20 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.68 iv 7-8 + KBo 12.7:4-5; KUB 23.77a rev. 16; KUB 1.1 i 11 (Hatt. III); ammel–pát–wa–za GU›un dahhi KBo 6.3 iii 71 (Laws §74, OH/NS); ammel–pát ÉRIN.MEŠ.HI.A KUB 14.1 rev. 41 (MH/MS); apēl–pát anna[(š–šaš katta)] “with his own mother” KUB 
29.34 iv 8 (Laws §189), w. dupl. KBo 6.26 iii 26; šumenzan– pát UZU.‰ “your own flesh” KBo 8.35 ii 20; šumen~ zan–pát ker–šemet “your own heart” ibid. ii 21; tuel– pát NUMUN-anza Bronze Tablet ii 98; ŠA m.dLAM~ MA–pát NUMUN-anza “Only the seed of Kurunta” Bronze Tablet iii 10; URUHattušaš–pát KUR-ya “Only in the land of Hatti” KUB 17.21 i 3; NUMUN ŠA DUMU.MUNUS ŠA µUlmi-dU-up–pat KBo 4.10 obv. 13; KBo 10.16 iv 6; KBo 11.10 iii 23; ŠA É.MEŠ– ŠUNU–pát VAT 7687 ii 16 (Hoffner, FsOtten 105). 
4' demonstrative–pat + noun — a' w. apa-: apē~ dani–pát UD-ti KBo 10.20 i 39; KBo 15.37 iii 1; KUB 29.7 
+ KBo 21.41 obv. 58; KBo 21.41 rev. 1; KUB 30.31 iv 20, 2728; KBo 33.194 vi 25; apē
dani–pát UN-ši KBo 3.68 iv 14; apēdani–pát mēhuni KBo 3.13 obv. 8; apēdaš–pát U[D.KAM.HI.A-aš] KBo 3.1 ii 5; namma GIŠAL GIŠMAR apē–pát KUB 34.65:9; apiya–pát URU-ri KUB 12.48 obv. 7; apūš–pát GAL.HI.A KUB 53.17 iii? 23; apē¢
[dan]i–pát huprušh[i] KBo 17.95 ii 1; apel–pát [… h]uprušhiyaš ibid. ii 3; apūn–pát GU› KUB 43.77 obv. 7; apūš–pát DINGIR.MEŠ KUB 27.16 v! 24; apēz– pát GIŠzupparit KBo 15.48 v! 24; ape–¢pát uddar¢ibid. v! 25-26. 
b' w. ka-: kūš–pát DINGIR.MEŠ IBoT 1.29 rev. 32, 37; DINGIR.MEŠ-muš kuš¢–pát KUB 10.5 vi 5; kun¢–pát šēnan Bo 3286 ii 17 (Hoffner, FsOtten 105); kedanī–pát INIM-ni KUB 15.21:9; kūš–pát waškuš KUB 18.20:11; kī–pát S‰R.HI.A KBo 23.103 iv 18-19; mān kūš–pát maršaštarraš waškuš KUB 5.9 obv. 29. 
5' demonstrative–pat (not construed w. a noun) (Friedrich, HE 1 § 293a, apāš–pat = “eben der, idem”) — a' 
w. apa-: KBo 6.2 i 19, 53, 59, ii 32; KBo 6.4 i 13; KBo 11.1 obv. 6; KBo 17.29 i 3; KUB 7.5 ii 23; KUB 14.1 obv. 19; KUB 
24.4 rev. 13; KUB 27.22 i 14; KUB 36.127 rev. 11; KUB 37.1 rev. 14; KUB 40.92 obv.? 7; KUB 58.63 ii? 9; Bo 3626:8, 9 (Hoffner, FsOtten 106). 

-pat 12 f 9' 
b' w. ka-: KBo 19.1 iii 43; KUB 5.7 obv. 8, 11; KUB 6.37 obv. 9, 13; KUB 7.53 iv 7; KUB 18.2 ii 16; KUB 18.32:10; KUB 
23.103 rev. 20; AT 454 i 27. 
c' [a]pāšila–pat: KBo 11.14 iv 21. 
e. in distributive expressions: With pairs of nouns in distributive expressions it occurs on the second (i.e., last) noun: KASKAL-ši KASKAL-ši– pát KBo 3.5 i 54, ii 14 (hipp., NH); UD-at UD-at–pát KUB 
1.13 iii 7 (hipp., MH/NS); ITU-mi ITU-mi–pát KUB 22.7 obv.? 3 (oracle question, NH); [kuit k]uit–pát KBo 3.22 obv. 12 (hist., OS), ed. 1 c, above. 
f. attached to the following adverbs — 1' annaz– pát “once before too(?)”: KBo 13.35 iii 5 (here there is the possibility also that annaz ŠÀ-az is a case of partitive apposition, on which see Friedrich, HE 1 §213a, in which case annaz would be the abl. of anna-“mother”); cf. KUB 58.32 i 2 in broken context but w. no mention of a woman in the context. 
2' annišan–pat “already before”: KUB 1.1 iv 7, Bronze Tablet ii 32, 33, both 10 a 1', above. 
3' apadda–pat: KUB 22.70 obv. 11 (NH), ed. 6 c, above. 
4' apaddan–pat: “The itemized list was not sealed” nu–wa–kan parā apaddan–pát uškinun “and for that aforementioned (cf. 1 b 2') reason I disregarded (it)” (or: “for only (cf. 6) that reason”) KUB 13.35 iv 41 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:14f. (“eben”). 
5' apeniššan–pat “in the same manner as before”: see 2 f, above. 
6' apiya–pat: KBo 2.2 i 13, ed. 6 c, above (“only there”); for more exx. see 1 b 1', above (“in the very same place”). 
7' arahza–pat: Bo 3192:5 (Hoffner, FsOtten 106). 
8' hudak–pat: KUB 21.19 + 1303/u iii 11-13 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:94f., Lebrun, Hymnes 314, 320, and 10 b 3', above. 
9' kā–pat: (We Egyptian ambassadors are seeking a son of yours to marry our queen) namma–wa damēdaniya KUR-e UL kuedanikki paiuen kā–pát– wa uwaeuen(sic) “We did not further go to any other land. We came only (-pat 6 a) here” alternatively: “rather (-pat 9 a) we came here” KBo 14.12 iv 23-24 (DŠ frag. 28), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:98 (“only”); for KBo 3.3 i 30-31 (Barga treaty, Murš. II) see ed. 6 b 3', above. 
229

10' kēzziya–pat: nu–šši IŠTU SAG.DU–ŠU [kē¢
zza 2 NINDA.GUR›.R]A kezziya–pát 2 NINDA. GUR›.RA tianzi [IŠTU] G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU–yašši kē
zza 2 NINDA.GUR›.RA kē
zz[iya 2 NINDA.GUR›.RA] tianzi “They place two thick-breads on this side and two on that side of his head and they place two thick breads on this side and [two] on that side of his feet” IBoT 1.29 rev. 51-54 (fest., pre-NH/MS?). 
11' kinun–pat: [kin]un–pát wēš µArnuwanta LUGAL GAL [U] ƒAšmunikal MUNUS.LUGAL GAL šumāš DINGIR.MEŠ [EGI]R-an arwaštat “Now, we Arnuwanda, the Great King, and Ašmunikal, the Great Queen, have continued to (?, cf. 3 b, above) care for (lit. stood behind) you gods” KUB 23.115:11-13 (prayer, Arn. I), ed. Kaškäer 160f. (“gerade”); [n(u kī ≠memišk±izzi)] iyami–man–pát–wa kuitki … nu apāš kinun–pát kuit memiškizzi “(The young king) keeps saying: I surely (cf. 11 b) want to do something … The mountains are difficult […] And since now nevertheless (?, cf. 10 b) he keeps saying …” KUB 23.103 rev. 11-12, 22 (letter, Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 23.92 rev. 12, 21, ed. Otten, AfO 19:42f. (“eben jetzt”); for KUB 22.70 rev. 46 see 8 b, above; and as predicate in implied nominal sentence KBo 1.44 obv. 15 (vocab.), see 7 b, above; kinun–pát–wa Bo 4991:5; kinuna–pát KUB 
1.16 iii 38, see 2 c, above. 
12' kiššan–pat: see 2 g, above. 
13' kuwapi–pat: for mng. “only when” in KBo 21.20 i 8 see 6 e, above; for mng. “in/to what same place” in KUB 

33.106 ii 13-16 see 1 b 3', above. 
14' mekki–pat marri: see 2 c, above. 
15' namma–pat: see 2 e, above, and namma 2 b. 
16' nuwa–pat: see 2 c, above. 
17' šuwaru–pat: KUB 23.85 rev. 7-8, ed. 10 c, above; in broken context: KUB 36.2b ii 22 (Kingship of dLAMMA), translit. Myth 147, tr. Hittite Myths 44; and KUB 57.107 rt. col. 
16. 
18' aru–šuwaru–pat: nu dKumarbiš aru–šuwa~ ru–pát kuit dU-ni IGI-anda aggatar šanheškizzi “Because Kumarbi truly(?) plans death against the Stormgod” KUB 33.106 iii 33-34 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:26f. (no tr. of key words), cf. Carruba, StBoT 2:14 (no tr. of -pát); differently, HED 1:177 (“high and mightily”). 

-pat 

19' ukturi–pat: “As by day man surrounds you, O hearth, by night the gods surround you” … § nu– wa tuk haššān uktūri–pát LUGAL-waš MUNUS. LUGAL-aš DUMU.MEŠ.LUGAL haššeš hā
nzaššeš anda hūlališkandu “May the children, grandchildren, (and) great grandchildren of the king and queen surround you likewise (-pát 2 c) forever” KBo 
17.105 ii 23-24 (rit. for dLAMMA of the hunting bag, MH/MS); “If a god or goddess …-s against a person” nu–šši– kan ZI-anza uktūri–pát anda […] “And his will/soul […-s] therein also(?, -pát 8) forever … and at night he doesn’t sleep)” KUB 4.47 obv. 2 (rit. against insomnia, NS); uktūri–pát UL ziennat[tari] “It will not end even(?, -pát 10 a 1') forever” KUB 43.22 rev. 12; KUB 
55.43 left edge 6 (renewal of the hunting bags, NS), ed. Otten, FsFriedrich 353, 355 (“zum beständigen Fest”); in broken context: KBo 29.92 ii! 9 (šahhan fest.) and KBo 13.114 iv 14 (rit., MH/NS). 
Hrozny™, SH (1917) 37 n. 2 (reading -mit or -pe; “eine hervorhebende Partikel,” equivalent to Akk. -ma), 185 (-mit preferable); Hrozny™
, BoSt 2/3 (1919) 32 w. n. 1, 102 n. 1 (reading -mit); Sommer, OLZ 24 (1921) 197-200 (reading -pe; “auch, gleichfalls, ebenso, auch noch”; never purely emphatic); Forrer, BoTU 1 (1922) 16 (-be is impossible, -mid unlikely, read -bid or -bat, no discussion of the particle); Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 88 (reading -bat; “eine identifizierende Partikel, ‘eben’”); Götze, Hatt (1925) 56, 128 (reading -pat; “identifizierende und hervorhebende Partikel”); Tenner, HAT (1926) 101 (on verbs of clauses preceded by concessive clauses, meaning “dennoch, trotzdem”); Götze, Madd. (1928) 55-57 (reading -pit or -pat); Sturtevant, JAOS 50 (1930) 127 (etymology, reading -pe); Ehelolf apud Friedrich, SV 2 (1930) 170 (the reading is -pat); Sturtevant, Gl. (1931) 53 (-pe or -pet; “particle of identity, ‘likewise, only, nevertheless’”); Hrozny™, OLZ 35 (1932) 258; Götze, AM (1933) 207-209; Sturtevant, CGr (1933) 77 (reading -pe; “particle of identity” = Greek ‰≤é), 131; Götze/Pedersen, MSpr (1934) 64 (on nouns “bis,” on verbs “trotzdem”; reading -pit or better -pat; etymology); Pedersen, ArOr 7 (1935) 80-88 (basic mng. “ipse,” “ipsius”; never purely emphatic; prefers reading -pat); Sturtevant, Gl.2 (1936) 121 (be, but perhaps -pit or -pat; “ipse, idem, itidem”); idem, Language 13 (1937) 289-291; Pedersen, Hitt. (1938) § 60; Sommer, HAB (1938) 68, 177, 221; Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 48f. (“the particle of identity”); Friedrich, HE 1 (1940) § 296; Benveniste, Word 10 (1954) 251-254; idem., Le vocabulaire des institutions indo-européennes 1 (1969) 87-93; Vanstiphout, OLP 2 (1971) 89-90 (position in a particle chain); Hart, TPS 1971:94-162 (all usages; reading -pat); Hoffner, FsOtten (1973) 99-117 (all usages; reading -pat); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 216f. (prefers -pe, etymology); Lebrun, Hethitica 6 (1985) 113. 

230

pata-, (Luw.) pati-n. com.; 1. foot, 2. leg(?), 3. foot, leg (of furniture, etc.), 4. (metaphorical use) step(?), turn(?), 5. in pittiyališ pataš “Fleet Foot,” the name of the harziyala-(salamander or snail), 
6. (proverbial use); wr. syll. and (UZU, GIŠ)G‰R, and ŠE_PU (i.e., G‰R-P´); from OS. 
sg. nom. G‰R-aš KBo 1.52:9 (NS), Luw. G‰R-iš KUB 9.4 i (14), 33 (MH/NS), IBoT 2.109 ii 25 (MH/MS). 
acc. G‰R-an KUB 11.1 iv 6 (OH/NS), KBo 10.45 iv 3 (LNS), KBo 4.14 i 22 (Late NH), KBo 26.79:10 (LNS). 
gen. G‰R-aš KBo 1.51 rev. 10 (NH), G‰R-an KUB 9.4 i 33 (MH/NS). 
d.-l. G‰R-i KUB 9.4 i 14 (MH/NS), KUB 9.34 ii 31 (MH/ LNS), KBo 11.19 obv. 11 (NS); [≠pa±-te-iš-ši KUB 53.15 ii! 6 read ≠kat±!-te-iš-ši]. 
abl. G‰R-az KBo 24.1 i 13 (MH/MS), KBo 13.99 rev. 10, KUB 12.58 ii 18 (both NH), G‰R-za KUB 44.57:5 (OH or MH/ NS?). 
inst. G‰R-it KBo 3.13 rev. 4 (MH/NS), KUB 19.37 ii 7 (Murš. II), KUB 14.3 i 24 (Hatt. III), KBo 18.79 obv. 6 (NH), KBo 6.34 iii 25, 28, 30 (MH/NS). 
pl. acc. pa-a-tu-u[š] KBo 25.46:3 (pre-NH/MS), G‰R.MEŠuš KBo 22.6 i 5, KUB 33.41 ii 4 (both OH/NS), KUB 10.63 i 30 (MH?/NS). 
gen. pa-ta-a-n(a) KBo 20.8 obv.? (4), 19 (OS), pa-ta-a-an KBo 17.74 i 9 (OH/MS), [ p]a-a-ta-an KUB 34.120:6, KUB 
44.36 ii 14 (both OH/NS), G‰R.MEŠ-an HHT 79:13 (NS). d.-l. pa-ta-a-aš(-ša-aš) KBo 17.15:10 (OS), G‰R-aš KBo 
24.76 left col. 10 (NS), KUB 33.79 i? 4 (OH/NS), G‰R.HI.Aaš KBo 17.40 i 7 (OH/MS?), G‰R.MEŠ-aš KUB 15.34 ii (41), 43 (MH/MS), KBo 4.4 iv 32, KUB 14.15 iv 29, 31 (both Murš. II), KUB 19.49 i 40 (NH), KBo 14.86 i 5 (NS). 
abl. G‰R.HI.A-az KBo 17.60 obv. 4 (MH/MS), KUB 12.59 iii 13 (MH/NS), G‰R.MEŠ-az KUB 27.29 ii 9 (MH/NS), FHG 13 iii 4 (NH), G‰R.MEŠ-za KBo 11.5 vi 25 (NS). 
inst. pa-te-et KUB 51.20 rev. 5 (NS), G‰R.MEŠ-it KUB 
27.67 i 20, iii 26 (MH/NS), KUB 20.2 iii 36 (NS), KUB 1.13 iii 34 (MH/NS), KBo 14.19 ii 7 (Murš. II). 
ambiguous (pl. d.-l. or pl. gen.) G‰R.MEŠ-aš KUB 12.5 iv 11 (MH/ENS). 
Sumerogram without Hitt. complement G‰R KBo 6.2 i 20, 22, KBo 17.1 iv 28, KBo 17.3 iv 25, 29 (all OS), KBo 6.4 obv. 27, 30 (OH/NS), KUB 27.67 iii 39 (MH/NS), KUB 29.9 i 20, 24 (NH), KUB 4.47 i 20 (NS). 
G‰R.HI.A KBo 17.43 i 14 (OS), KUB 33.5 ii 6 (OH/MS), KBo 5.1 iv 20, KUB 22.51 obv. 6, 9 (both NH), G‰R.MEŠ KUB 
15.34 i 43-44 (MH/MS), KUB 46.52:11 (OH/NS?), KUB 17.8 iv 6 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 6.34 i 23, 26, KUB 13.9 ii 7, VBoT 24 i 11 (all MH/NS), KUB 42.69 rev. 11, 12 (NH), KUB 21.27 iii 41 (Pud.), KUB 15.3 i 19, KUB 24.13 ii 20 (both NS). 
w. det. GIŠG‰R.MEŠ KUB 32.49a iii 12 (MH/MS), UZUG‰R KUB 25.48 iv 11 (MH/NS), UZUG‰R.MEŠ KBo 10.31 iii 32, 

pata- 1 a 
KBo 25.178 i 20 (both OH/NS), KUB 27.1 i 16 (NH), KUB 
32.123 iii 50 (NS), KBo 29.70 i (11). 
w. Akk. complement G‰R-P´ KBo 11.5 vi 12 (NS). 
The i-stem occurs only once, in KUB 9.4 i 33. 
(Sum. pron.) ki-ri = (Sum.) G‰R = (Akk.) ši-pu = (Hitt.) G‰R-aš “foot” KBo 1.52:9 (Sa vocab.), ed. MSL 3:64; (Akk.) [še-pu] = (Hitt.) G‰R[-aš] “foot” / (Akk.) [ki-bi-iš] ≠G‰R± = (Hitt.) pa-tal-ha[-aš] “sole of the foot” / (Akk.) [ú-ba-an] G‰R = (Hitt.) G‰R-aš ka-lu-lu-≠pa±[-aš] “toe (lit. digit) of the foot” KBo 1.51 rev. 8-10 (Akk.-Hitt. vocab.), cf. Weidner, Studien 89 (reads GU-aš). 
“Before me, no one crossed the Euphrates” (Akk.) [LUGAL.GA]L Tabarna ina G‰R–šu i«ub»biršu u ÉRIN.MEŠ– šu EGIR–šu [in]a G‰R.MEŠ–ŠUNU itabru = (Hitt.) n–an ūk LUGAL.GAL T[abarnaš G‰R-it] zihhun KARAŠ.H[I.A …] G‰R.MEŠ-it zāiš “I, Tabarna, the great king, crossed it [on foot], and my army […] crossed it on foot” Akk.: KBo 10.1 rev. 1920, ed. Saporetti, SCO 14:79, 83, tr. Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:54, Hitt.: KBo 10.2 iii 30-32 (ann., Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:52f., Güterbock, JCS 18:1f.; (Akk.) GÁL–ma [G‰R nak]rū
ti ana A.ŠÀ–ka (var. tutar(??) G‰R–ka [n]akrāti ina A.ŠÀ–ka) = (Hitt.) nu–za–kan LÚ.KÚR-aš G‰R– [Š]U anda tarnatti “And you let an enemy’s foot in” Akk.: KUB 
4.3 i 7-8, translit. Nougayrol, Ugar. 5:288, w. dupl. RS 22.439 iii 6-7, ed. Nougayrol, Ugar. 5:279, 282, Hitt.: KUB 4.3 ii 8 (bil. proverbs), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:781. 
1. foot — a. in general: [I]NA G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU– ma–za KUŠE.SIR.HI.A-uš liliwandu[š IM.MEŠ-uš] šarkuit “(Tašmišu) put on his feet [the winds] as winged shoes” KUB 33.106 ii 3-4 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f.; cf. ibid. i 31-32, KUB 24.7 iii (65)-66; nu–šmaš– kan hahhal ANA G‰R.MEŠ–KUNU lē ¢
tiezz[i] nu– šmaš–kan NA›.HI.A G‰R.MEŠ–KUNU lē tamaš~ šanz[i] “May the brush not obstruct your feet, may the stones not hurt (lit. press) your feet” KUB 15.34 i 43-44 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:186f., HED 3:3, HW2 3:3f.; cf. similar thought but different verbs in KUB 60.115:5-7 and KBo 14.86 i 4-5, cf. paššila-1 b 2'; “The king says: ‘Grant me life, health, sons, and daughters for all eternity’” nu–wa–mu LÚ.KÚR. MEŠ–YA ŠAPAL G‰R.MEŠ–YA zikki “and place my enemies under my feet” KBo 21.34 ii 2 (fest., MH/ NS), ed. Otten, BagM 7:139f., and Lebrun, Hethitica 2:119, 128; cf. KBo 20.60 v? 5-6, w. dupl. KBo 15.52 v 14-15, IBoT 
3.148 iv 44, w. dupl. KUB 58.73 iii 13, ed. Otten, ZA 65:301; “The Old Woman breaks the pot (DUGUTÚL)” DUGD´LIM.GAL–ma 2 BE_L S´SKUR G‰R-it tuwar~ nanzi “and the two clients smash a large bowl with their feet” 2Mašt. iv 14 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:364f.; 
231

lalakuešan–ma–war–an–[kan GIM-an] G‰R-it anda pašihaiddu KUB 33.93 iii 22, see tr. s.v. lalaweš(š)a- a, and 
s.v. pašihai-; n–an G‰R-it išparranzi “They flatten it with their feet” KBo 6.34 iii 25 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:12f.; cf. ibid. iii 28, 30-31, KUB 17.27 iii 12 (MH?/NS); ku[n]ni G‰R-iš-ši [dāi] “[(S)he puts] (it) on his/her right foot” KUB 53.15 iv! 39(-40) (rit. frag.); 1 SILA› 1 MUŠEN.GAL ŠA dIM ANA 2 G‰R.MEŠ– ŠU “One lamb (and) one big bird (offered) to/for the two feet/legs of the Stormgod” 125/r ii 13-14 (rit.), ed. Güterbock, FsAlp 238; (In a song called arrumaš S‰R “song of washing” sung by dancers, the following somewhat enigmatic words begin it:) nu G‰R.MEŠaš kuit wā
tar kiššaraš KÙ.BABBAR ANA DINGIRLIM GÙB-laz kit[ta …] “What water (is) at the feet? A silver hand lie[s] on the left of the deity” 53/w + Bo 8034:20-21, ed. de Martino, La Danza 58-60; n–at ANA LÚ.MEŠNAR G‰R.MEŠ-aš GAM-an lahū
wanzi “And they pour it (i.e., beer) at the feet (of) the singers” KUB 55.60 iv 16 (cult of Nerik frag.); for KUB 4.3 ii 8 (bil. proverbs) see bil. sec. 
b. opp. of “head”: “She (the Old Woman) takes a cord” n–an–šan ANA BE_LU_TI IŠTU G‰R.MEŠ– ŠUNU ANA SAG.DU–ŠU kē¢
z kezziya huittiyai “and strings it from the sacrificers’ feet to their heads on either side” KUB 27.67 ii 15-17 (rit., MH/NS), tr. ANET 348; cf. ibid. i 14-(15); nu–šši IŠTU SAG.DU–ŠU [kē¢
zza 2 NINDA.GUR›.R]A kezziya–pat 2 NINDA. GUR›.RA tianzi [IŠTU] G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU–yašši kē
zza 2 NINDA.GUR›.RA kē
zz[iya 2 NINDA.GUR›.RA] tianzi “They place two thick-breads on this side and two on that side of his head and they place two thick breads on this side and two on that side of his feet” IBoT 1.29 rev. 51-54 (fest., pre-NH/MS?), cf. Hoffner, FsGüterbock 120; nu DUGUTÚL.HI.A kuiēš kitkarza G‰R.MEŠ-za ≠na±[-…] “And the pots which stand at the head and feet, …” KBo 11.5 vi 25 (rit., NS), ed. Neu, Lok. 25; kitkar G‰R.HI.A-az tapušza KBo 17.60 obv. 4 (birth rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:60f., Neu, Lok. 25; [… kit]karza G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU–ya KBo 8.72 obv.? 7; nu 1-an SAG.DU-az […] 1-an–ma IŠTU G‰R-P´ […] KBo 11.5 vi 11-12 (rit.). 
c. par. w. “hands”: QA_TI HI.A–ŠU G‰R.HI.A–ŠU KUB 33.5 ii 6 (Tel.myth, OH/MS), cf. KUB 33.10 ii 5 (OH/ MS), KBo 15.10 i 25 (MH/MS), KBo 13.119 iii 18 (NS), KBo 
13.177 i 11 (NH?), KUB 27.67 ii 35 (MH/NS); ŠU-aš 

pata- 1 g 1' b' 

G‰R.MEŠ-a[š] KUB 41.21 i 13 (NH), cf. KUB 1.14 ii 11-12 (OH/NS), KUB 27.67 iii 26 (MH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 27, 33 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 4.47 i 20 (NH), KUB 21.27 iii 41 (Hatt. III), KBo 2.32 obv. 7; G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU ŠU.MEŠ–ŠU VBoT 24 i 11, KBo 10.45 ii (8) (both MH/NS), KUB 35.79 i 9. 
d. foot washing: n–an–kan anku G‰R.HI.A–ŠU ā[rri (or, a[¢rranzi) …] dāi G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU arumaš– ma x[…] KBo 22.49 iii? 4-5 (Kizz. rit.); n–ašta DINGIRLUM G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU arri / [… Š]A DINGIR-LIM G‰R.MEŠ-aš arrumaš S‰R-in KUB 45.5 ii 21-22, cf. KUB 41.13 ii 11-14; referring to a lamb: KAZU-an G‰R–ŠU arha ā
rri KBo 5.1 iv 4-5 (Papanikri’s rit., NH), ed. Pap. 12*f. 
	e. foot or leg ornaments: EGIR-ŠU–ma–za 2 HAR.ŠU.HI.A 2 HAR.G‰R.MEŠ nāi [n–at? ANA 2 ŠU.MEŠ–Š]U U ANA 2 G‰R.MEŠ–ŠU anda nāi “Afterward he winds two bracelets and two anklets on him/herself (-za) and winds them onto his/her two arms and two legs” KUB 12.51 i 22-23 (Hurr. rit.), cf. nai- 5 a, cf. KUB 42.98 i 15. 
	f. patān GIŠG‰R.GUB “footstool”: “The attendant of the king and the attendant of the queen go” ta LUGAL-aš MUNUS.LUGAL-ašš–a [(ginuw)a]š GAD.HI.A pa-ta-a-an-na GIŠG‰R.GUB dānzi “and they take the king’s and queen’s knee-cloths and footstool(s)” ABoT 9 i 9-10 + KBo 17.74 i 9 (fest., OH/MS), 
	w. dupl. KBo 20.12 i 9-10 (OS), ed. StBoT 12:10f.; cf. KUB 34.120:5, KUB 44.36 ii 14, KBo 20.8 i? 4, 18. 
	g. in doing reverence — 1' in general — a' w. hink-: G‰R.MEŠ-aš–šaš GAM-an hinkiškitta “He bows repeatedly at his feet” KUB 33.120 i 17 (myth, NS), ed. Kum. *2, 6, tr. Hittite Myths 40, LMI 129; cf. ibid. i 

10. 

b' w. haliya-(cf. HW2 3:35 s.v. haliya-[“niederknien,” although observing that the Akk. equivalent is maqā
tu “to throw oneself down (as gesture of greeting or homage)”], HED 3:28f. [“kneel”]): G‰R.MEŠ-aš kattan h[aliya-…] KBo 12.35 iii 3 (ann., Tudh. II(?)/NS); n–at–ši G‰R.MEŠ-aš [kat~ tan h]aliēr “(The king’s enemies) fell down at his feet” KUB 19.13 i 50-51 (ann., Šupp. I), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:110; cf. KBo 10.12 i 23 (treaty, Šupp. I); (An opponent sent his mother to the king) n–aš–mu G‰R.MEŠ-aš kattan haliyattat “She fell down at my feet” KUB 
14.15 iv 28-29, ed. AM 70f.; cf. KBo 4.4 iii 46-47 and passim 

232

in AM, KUB 19.49 i (40) (treaty, Murš. II), KBo 3.3 i 12-13 (hist., Murš. II). 
2' in letters, a West Semitic idiom translated into western peripheral Akk., the usage is attested at Amarna, Ugarit, Emar, and Bo©azköy (cf. Gruber, Studia Pohl 12:162-169, and THeth 15:56f.): [kāša] ANA G‰R BE_LIYA UŠTEHI[HIN] “I have prostrated myself at the foot of my lord” KBo 18.50 obv. 5 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:96f. □ for the verb see Heidel, AS 13:37-46, SBo 
2:37 n. 139, AHw 1263a s.v. šukênu 2 e, and CAD šukênu 2 b 2'; in the greeting formula of a letter sent to Hattuša from Assyria ul-tu-hé-hi-in “I prostrate myself (in greeting)” SBo 2:36:3, ed. ibid. 36f.; AMQUT ANA GAM G‰R.MEŠ EN–YA 2-ŠU 7-ŠU “I fall at the feet of my lord two times seven times (i.e., fourteen times)” KBo 9.82 obv. 3, cf. KBo 18.52 obv. 3; kāša ANA GAM G‰R.MEŠ GAŠAN–YA 3-ŠU 9-ŠU AMQUT “Lo, I fall at the feet of my lady three times nine times” KBo 18.1 rev. 4 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:84f., cf. KBo 18.11 obv. 3, KBo 

18.12 rev.? 3 (both letters, NH). 

	h. diseases and abnormalities: G‰R-iš G‰R-an GIG-an [karpzi] “The foot will remove (lit. lift) the illness of the foot” KUB 9.4 i 33 (rit., NH), ed. Alp, Anadolu 2:40f., Beckman, Or NS 59:36, 45; KUB 9.4 i (14), 33 contain the only exx. of an i-stem pati-; although the text displays many Luw. forms, note that pata- is an a-stem in Luw., see DLL 81, CLL 173; cf. KUB 9.34 ii 31 (rit., NH), ed. Hutter, Behexung 32f.; KBo 17.61 rev. 16 (birth rit., MH/MS), ed. StBoT 29:44f.; KUB 17.8 rev. 12 (conjur., pre-NH/NS); IZI ŠA G‰R.MEŠ–ŠÚ KUB 15.3 i 19 (dream, NH), tr. pahhur 6; mān GÙB-laš ŠU-aš našma GÙB-laš G‰R tapan~ nittari “If his left hand or left foot gets pins and needles” KUB 29.9 i 23-24 (omen, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79; cf. ibid. i 10; [B]E-an UN-ši G‰R.MEŠ GŠD. DA-ya “If a man has long feet” KUB 43.8 iii 8a (omen, OH/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 244, 246; takku IZB[U …] / 6 G‰R.MEŠ–Š[U …] “If a malformed newborn animal has six feet/legs” KUB 34.20 rt. col. 5-6 (omen, OH), ed. StBoT 9:51. 
	i. describing representations of animals — 1' w. G‰R: 1 UDU.KUR.RA KÙ.GI 4 G‰R GUB.BA “One gold ‘mountain sheep’ standing on four feet” KBo 18.172 rev. 3 (cult inv., NH); 1 BIBRU UDU.KUR. RA KÙ.BABBAR 4 G‰R.MEŠ aranza “One silver animal-form vessel (in the shape of) a ‘mountain sheep’ standing on four feet” KUB 42.100 iii 28, cf. Col

pata- 1 j 1' 
lins, Diss. 180; 4 BIBRU GU› ŠÀ 1-EN 4 G‰R.MEŠ [GUB]-za KÙ.GI NA› 1-EN 4 G‰R.MEŠ šašanza KÙ.GI NA› 2 IGI-zi G‰R.MEŠ GUB-te-eš KÙ.GI NA› “Four animal-formed vessels depicting oxen: Among which one standing on four legs, (made of) gold (and) gems, one reclining (with) four legs (showing), (made of) gold (and) gems, two standing on their two front legs, (made of) gold (and) gems” Bo 87/5a ii 9-11, ed. Otten, FsTÖzgüç 366f.; a stag (LU.LIM) is similarly described in ibid. ii 12-14, a lion figure in ibid. ii 16, and a leopard in ibid. ii 21; 2 PIRIG.TUR 4 G‰R.MEŠ GUB-a[nteš] KUB 42.69 rev. 12; […]x.UD-aš 4 G‰R KÙ.GI KI.G[UB] KUB 38.9:5 (cult inv., NH), ed. Rost, MIO 8:190. For evaluation of possible G‰R-aš (or ANŠE-aš) šappui tepu lipš[an~ za] KUB 55.35 obv. 7 see šappu-. 
2' without G‰R: 4 aranteš KBo 18.153 rev. 3-4; 1 GU›.MAH KÙ.BABBAR 4 GUB-za KBo 2.1 i 34; LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL TUŠ-aš dZA.BA›.BA› IŠTU BIBRI UR.MAH 4 arantet akuwanzi “Sitting, the king and queen drink ZA.BA›.BA› with an animal-form vessel (in shape of) a lion standing (on) four (feet) KUB 10.89 i 20-21 (fest.), ed. Güterbock, Oriens 10:361; 4 KI.GUB KUB 38.1 i 30 and passim, KUB 38.3 i 2. 
j. (adv.) pa-te-et, G‰R-it, G‰R.MEŠ-it “on foot” 
— 1' in general: for KBo 10.2 iii 30-32 (ann., Hatt. I/NS) see bil. sec.; […-a]lli GIM-an G‰R-it anda warpa~ nu[n] “On foot, I enclosed [it/them] as in a …” KBo 
3.13 rev. 4 (hist., OH/NS), ed. Melchert, Diss. 228, cf. Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. 107 and Weitenberg, Hethitica 2:48; G‰R. MEŠ-it hūwa[-…] “fled on foot” KBo 12.26 iv 3 (DŠ, NH); cf. “Since it was not favorable for driving up with horses” nu KARAŠ.HI.A G‰R.MEŠ-it peran huyanu[n] “I led the troops on foot” KUB 19.39 ii 4 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 162f. and passim in AM; nu–kan G‰R-it šarā paū[¢n] “I went up on foot” KUB 14.3 i 24 (Taw., NH); t–aš G‰R-it ANA Éhalen[tuwa paizzi] “[He goes] to the palace on foot” Bo 3339 ii? 10, trans-lit. Alp, Tempel 72; [… Éarhuzn]aš LUGAL-i peran / […-a]n-zi § [… Éarh]uznaš pa-te-et / […]x huwa~ šiaš / [… t]i-ya-zi “[…] before the king they […]; […] to the arhuzna-house on foot […] steps [to the …] of the stela […]” KUB 51.20 rev. 3-7 (fest. frag., NS), in implied opposition to the other passages in fest. texts where they reach the arhuzna-house by chariot or cart □ for the Éarhuz(za)naš see also ibid. obv. 3, (5). 
233

2' in hipp.: “They cover the horses” [n–uš–kan KISLAH-]ni G‰R-it 10-ŠU wahnua[nzi] “and they (sc. the trainers) lead [them] on foot ten times around the th[reshing floor]” KUB 29.50 iv 36 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 214f., cf. ibid. i 38, KUB 29.40 iii (31), KUB 29.41:9, KUB 29.46 obv.! 9; [n–aš G]‰R.MEŠ-it ka[tt]an 10 IKU.HI.A arnuanzi “They move [them] (sc. the horses) ten IKU on foot along with (themselves)” i.e., “they take them along on foot for ten IKU” KUB 1.13 iii 27 (Kikk. tablet I, MH/NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 84:271, cf. Hipp.heth. 64f.; Hipp.heth. 356 s.v. G‰R, and p. 65 n. g), interprets G‰R(.MEŠ)-it not as referring to the trainer but to the fact that the horses are not harnessed to a chariot; cf. also HW2 1:331f., s.v. arnu- 1 b. 
k. the toe as the “digit of the foot”: see lex. sec. 
	l. ÉRIN.MEŠ G‰R-P´ “foot soldiers, infantry”: kāša KUR URUHatti h[ūma]nza BE_LU_ME[Š ÉRIN. MEŠ GIŠGIGIR] ÉRIN.MEŠ G‰R-P´ ÉRIN.MEŠ šarikuwaš hūmanza “Now, all the land of Hatti — lords, [chariot troops], infantry, (and) šarikuwatroops, every one” KUB 26.24 iv 2-3 (MH), ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:228, 231, THeth 20:46 w. n. 181; cf. also nu–šši zilatiya ŠA KUR URUHatti lahhiyanni 1 ME ÉRIN.MEŠ G‰R iyattaru “In the future let one-hundred foot soldiers go for him on a campaign of the land of Hatti” Bronze Tablet iii 35-36. We do not know whether ÉRIN.MEŠ G‰R-P´ was read as a literal two-word tr. in Hitt. (padaš …) or as some other word; for discussion see THeth 20:198-201. 
	m. model or representation of a foot: PA_ŠU KÙ.BABBAR(!)–kan G‰R KÙ.≠BABBAR± kuedani ANA TÚG anda išhiyanza “A garment to which a silver ax (and) silver foot are tied” KUB 55.28 iii 1415 (rit.), ed. Ünal, JCS 40:100f., BiOr 44:482; G‰R.MEŠ KÙ.GI HFAC 9:5 (inv. frag.). 

2. leg(?) — a. of sacrificial animals: “When they finish sacrificing for keldi ” nu šuppa hūišawaza UZUGAB UZUZAG.LU UZUSAG.DU UZUG‰R.MEŠ PA_NI DINGIR-LIM tianzi “they place before the deity raw meat: breast, shoulder, head, and legs(?)” KUB 27.1 i 15-16 (rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 75, 86 (tr. “pieds”); since the whole carcass is butchered into main cuts (head, breast, and shoulder), it seems unlikely that G‰R referred just to “hooves”; cf. UDU–kan arkanzi nu šuppa UZUN´G.GIG 

pata- 2 b 

UZUGAB SAG.DU–SU G‰R.MEŠ PA_NI GIŠBAN~ ŠUR dāi KUB 17.28 iii 4-5 (incant., NS); UDU–ma mahhan arha happišnanzi nu UZUN´G.GIG šup~ pi (for šuppa?) huišu UZUGÚ!.HAL!? UZUSAG.DU UZUG‰R.MEŠ KUŠ.UDU–ya tiyanzi “But when they dismember the sheep, they place the liver, the raw meat, the …-throat(?), the head, the legs/feet and the hide of the sheep” KUB 32.123 iii 48-50 (fest., NS); cf. KBo 25.178 i 19-20, KUB 20.59 iii 10-11, IBoT 1.29 obv. 43-44, KUB 10.95 iii 3-4, KUB 2.6 iv 14-15, KBo 13.114 iii 4, KUB 20.88 vi? 8-10, KUB 10.62 v? 4-5, KBo 10.31 iii 31-34, KBo 22.216:12, KUB 60.121 obv. 3-5; “The one (sc. sheep) which they sacrifice for IŠTAR” [n–a]n–kan hantezziuš G‰R.MEŠ-uš arkanzi “they cut off its forelegs(?)” KUB 10.63 i 30 (fest., MH?/NS), ed. Vieyra, RA 51:88, 94; cf. KBo 13.101 i 8-9 (rit., NS), ed. KN 159f.; “They bring forth a sheep and [slaughter] it” nu– šši–kan UZUšuppa UZUGAB UZUwalla[š haštai] UZUKURÂTU UZUkišširan 1-NUTIM UZUTI.H[I.A] 1 SAG.DU UDU–ya–kan 1 G‰R UDU–ya danzi “They take from it the meat: the breast, thi[gh], the shin, the front hoof (lit. hand), a set of ribs, one sheep’s head, and one sheep’s leg(?) (and they cook it in a stew)” KUB 32.49b ii 16-18 (rit., MH/MS); “They slaughter one sheep and broil the liver and heart” IŠTU DUGUTÚL–ya UZUGAB 1 UZUQA_TAM 1 UZUmuhra[in …] 2 UZUTI \ SAG.DU 1 G‰R zanu~ anzi “They cook in a stew the breast, the front hoof (lit. hand), the muhrai-, two ribs, half a head, and one leg(?)” KBo 23.34 i 27-28 (Hurr. rit.) □ if Weitenberg, Heth.u.Idg. 303, is correct in assuming that UZUKURÂTU = UZUmuhrai- “shin” then G‰R must mean “foot/hoof” in the last two examples. UZUkeššera-/UZUQA_TU “hand” may be “front leg/hoof, foreleg,” cf. Hebrew yād “hand, foreleg,” in which case G‰R is in contrast “hock,” but note hantezzi-G‰R.MEŠ “foreleg” cited above. 
b. other: “Then the Old Woman tears from top to bottom the black shirt that he/she (i.e., the sacrificer) has put on” TÚGGAD.DAM GEﬂ–ya–ši–šan G‰R-az parā dāi “and she takes off from his/her legs(?) the black gaiters/leggings” KUB 12.58 ii 18 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 14f. (= ii 43); while stockings are pulled over one’s feet, gaiters or leggings are unwrapped or unfastened straight from the calf; takku LÚ.U⁄·.LU-an ELLUM QA_SSU našma G‰R–ŠU kuiški tuwa[(r)n]izzi “If someone breaks a free 

234

man’s hand/arm or foot/leg” KBo 6.3 i 29 (Laws §11), cf. ibid. i 31; takku SI GU› našma G‰R GU› kuiški du~ warnizi “If someone breaks the horn or leg/foot of an ox” KBo 6.3 iii 70 (Laws §74). 
3. foot, leg (of furniture, etc.): “They make (lit. ‘spread’) the bed” namma ANA 4 G‰R.MEŠ [(ŠA~ PAL GIŠNÁ 4 NINDA KU‡) tianzi] “and they place four sweet cakes under the bed, at (its) four legs” KUB 32.116:7 (Kizz. rit.), w. dupl. ABoT 34:16-17; nu LÚSA~ GI-aš [šar]azzi ANA G‰R GIŠNÁ 1-ŠU šipanti [kat~ ter]iya ANA G‰R GIŠNÁ 1-ŠU šipanti “The cupbearer libates once at the ‘upper’ bed legs (i.e., those at the head of the bed) and once for the ‘lower’ bed legs (i.e., those at the foot of the bed)” KBo 
20.51 i 9-11 (rit.); GIŠkešhiyaš ANA 4 GIŠG‰R.MEŠ “at the four legs of the kešhiya-chair” KUB 32.49a iii 12 (rit., MH/MS); GIŠhaššalliaš G‰R.MEŠ “legs of a stool” KUB 12.5 i 13 (rit., MH/ENS); 1 GIPISAN SAﬁ TUR G‰R UR.MAH “One small red basket on lion’s feet” IBoT 1.31 obv. 20 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 82f.; cf. KBo 18.176 i (2); 1 GIPISAN SAﬁ G‰R NU.GÁL “One red basket (with) no feet” ibid. 1617, cf. KUB 42.12:1; 4 GIŠBANŠUR 9 G‰R ZU· AM[.SI …] 9 G‰R GIŠESI 4 \ KÙŠ 2 ŠU.SI G´D.DA “Four tables: nine (of their) legs (made of) ivory […], nine (of their) legs of ebony, four and a half cubits and two inches long” KUB 42.37:8-9 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:151f., Siegelová, Verw. 70f.; nu–kan NA›huwašiHI.A G‰R-az lagāri nu kiššan mema[i] kuiš–wa kue weteškit kinuna–war–at kāša BE_L S[´SKUR] pippaš “The stelae lean off (their) base(s). So (the Old Woman) says: ‘The sacrificer has now overturned these which someone built’” KBo 24.1 i 13-15 (3Mašt., MH/MS); Rost, MIO 1:364, restored in 2Mašt. iv 5 G‰R-a[z laknuwan]zi and tr. “stošen die beiden Opfermandanten die Malsteine mit dem Fuš um,” but note that when in ibid. iv 14 they break a vessel “with their feet,” G‰Rit/IŠTU G‰R.MEŠ–ŠUNU, the inst. case is used. It is therefore more likely that G‰R-az in iv 5 is not an abl. used as an inst. “with the feet,” but rather a real abl. “from (the stela’s) base”; cf. G‰R.HI.A NA›huwaš[i-…] KBo 14.84 iii 6, the passage lacks context and it is therefore uncertain whether G‰R refers to the base of the stela; (In context of locations in the temple) […] / G‰R.HI.A-aš peran 1-ŠU šipa[n]ti “in front of the feet [of …] he offers once” KBo 17.40 i 7 (OH/MS?). 

padda- A 
4. (metaphorical use) step(?): idaluš G‰R-aš “false step, misstep”: parnaš URU-aš ēšhar waštul papratar NÂŠ DINGIR-LIM HUL-lun G‰R-an pan~ gawaš EME-an GAM pā
šu “Let him swallow down the bloodshed of the house (and) city, the sin, uncleanness, perjury, the evil step(?) (lit. ‘foot’), and the slander of the multitude” KBo 10.45 iv 2-4 (rit., MH/ NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:134f.; cf. idalun patalhan at patalha-2. 
1	in pittiyališ pataš “Fleet Foot,” the name of the harziyala-(salamander or snail): (The Old Woman attaches blue and red wool to a harziyala-, waves it over the two patient(s) and says:) karp pittiyališ (var. piddalliš) G‰R-aš id[alun] EME-an “O Swift Foot, lift away the evil tongue” IBoT 2.109 ii 25-26 (1Mašt., MH/MS), w. par. KBo 9.106 ii 24-(25) (2Mašt., MH/NS); depending on the identification of the animal, this name could either be literal (a quickly-moving salamander) or ironic (a slow-moving snail). Favoring the latter interpretation are Watkins, Kerns Mem. 345-348, and HED 3:209f., but cf. Siegelová, StBoT 14:40f., 72f., Collins, Diss. 265-268. 
2	(proverbial use): (In a series of curses) ≠MUŠ±-[a(š)] G‰R.MEŠ KI.MIN (= aušdu) “Let him see the feet of the snake” KUB 44.4 rev. 33 (birth rit., NH), w. par. KUB 35.145 rev. 16, ed. StBoT 29:178f., 194, 199 (in the sense of “be dead and buried”). 

Otten, ZA 50 (1952) 230 (G‰R = pata-); Güterbock, Oriens 10 (1957) 361f. (mng. 1 i 2'); Otten, ZA 54 (1961) 135 (mng. 4 “Schritt”); Hoffner, FsDYoung (forthcoming). 
Cf. (TÚG)patalla-, GIŠpatalha, patalhai-, patalli(ya)- n., patal~ liya-v., GIŠpatiyalli-, :padumma-. 
padda- (or: pidda-) A v.; 1. to dig (the ground), 
2. to create (a hole or cavity) by digging, 3. to dig up (something), acquire or retrieve by digging, 4. to bury(?), 5. (implements used), 6. (w. associated prev./adv./postpos.); from OS. 
act. pres. sg. 1 pád-da-ah-hi KBo 17.5 ii 2 (OS), KBo 15.25 obv. 20 (MH/NS), KUB 12.44 iii 3, 13, (15) (NH), KUB 17.28 i 3 (MH/NS). 
sg. 3 pád-da-a-i KBo 10.37 ii 49 (OH/NS), KUB 15.31 ii 12, 13, KUB 24.9 ii 18, KUB 41.1 iv 5 (all MH/NS), KBo 11.9 i 5, IBoT 3.148 iii 7 (both NS), KBo 11.17 ii 3 (NH), pád-da-i KUB 7.41 obv. 6, 7, 8 (MH/ENS), KBo 11.14 iii 8 (MH/NS), KBo 4.1 i 5 (NH). 
pl. 3 pád-da-an-zi KUB 12.59 ii 6, VBoT 24 ii 6 (both MH/ NS), KUB 29.4 iv 34 (NH), pád-da-a-an-zi KBo 21.37 rev.? 24 (MH?/MS), KBo 2.3 ii 4, KBo 11.10 ii 18 (both MH/NS), KBo 
235

3.8 ii 13 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 24.93 iii 19 (NS), KUB 9.32 i 16 
(NH). 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pád-da-a-ri KBo 39.203:3. 
pret. sg. 1 pád-da-ah-hu-un KUB 12.6:9 (NS). 
sg. 3 pád-d[a-iš?] KUB 17.27 ii 6 (MH?/NS). 
pl. 3 pát-te-er KBo 15.10 iii 45 (MH/MS), KUB 40.83 obv. 17 (NH), KBo 22.119:(6). 
part. sg. nom. com. pád-da-an-za KUB 7.44:5, 7 (LNS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pád-da-an KUB 36.83 i 3 (NS). 
inf. pát-tu-an-zi KUB 42.89 obv. 11, rev. 2 (NS), pát-tu-u-ma-an-zi KUB 55.45 ii 4. 
1. to dig (the ground) — a. direct objects tekan or daganzipa- “earth, ground”: nu KÁ-aš EGIR-an kē¢¢¢z
z kezziya tekan pád-da-ah-hi n–ašta kekē
zzi pattešni anda 3 GIŠhatalkiš tittanummi “I dig the ground on both sides behind the gate(s) and erect on both sides in the hole three (branches of) hawthorn” KUB 12.44 iii 2-5 (rit., NH); cf. KUB 36.83 i 3-4 
□ for GIŠhatalkiš see also KUB 43.55 iii 27 (stem -i- or -iš-?); […] GIŠhattalwaš GIŠ-r[ui] tekan pád-da-i KBo 11.14 iii 7-8 (MH/NS); tekan pád-da-i nu 1 ŠAH.TUR dā
i n– an–kan hattešna GAM-anta hattari “He digs up the ground, takes one piglet and stabs/slaughters it down into the pit” KBo 11.14 iii 8-9 (rit., MH/NS), ed. HED 
3:250 (“he sticks it [viz. the piglet] downward into the pit”); cf. KBo 11.17 i 2-3, KUB 17.28 i 3-4 (MH/NS); nu ištarna pedi GIŠkurakkiyaš pedi daganzi[ puš] pád-da-i! “(S)he digs up the ground in the middle place, in the place of the pillar(?)” KBo 4.1 i 4-5 (NH); cf. KUB 
7.41 obv. 6-8 below, 2 c; (They raze(?) those houses from top to bottom, from the huimpa-) namma–at ari[ranzi] daganzipušš–a šarā pád-da-a-an-z[i] “They scrape them (i.e., remove all their plaster covering) and dig up the dirt floors (lit. ground); (they raze(?) walls, timbers, and windows … until they finish, and nothing remains)” KBo 24.93 iii 18-19 (fest. frag.), ed. THeth 12:31f.; (The exorcist holds a hoe, a spade, and a sickle(?)) tekan URUDUAL pád-da-i patteššar URUDUMAR-it [liššaizzi(?)] “He digs up the ground with the hoe, he [clears(?)] the pit with the spade” KUB 7.41 obv. 6 (rit., MH/ENS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f., for the following context see 1 b, below. 
b. locations: apāt AŠRA pád-da-an-zi “They dig that place” KUB 36.83 iv 8; namma–ya–kan ANA GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN anda kuwapitta parā 9 AŠRA pádda-a[h-hi] “After that I dig in the vineyard (in) nine different places” KUB 12.44 iii 14-15 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas, FsOtten2 138f.; nu wappu[i pera]n katta 3 AŠRA 

padda- A 3 a 

pád-da-ah-hi “I dig (in) three places down before the riverbank” KBo 15.25 obv. 20 (rit. against Wišuriyanza, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:2f.; nu KASKAL-an 7 AŠRA pád-da-an-[zi] “They dig the road (in) seven places” KBo 11.17 i 2 (rit., NH); ANA 4 halhaldummariya QA_TAMMA pád-da-i ha[ššī tapušza] QA_TAMMA– pat pád-da-i “He digs in the four corners (of the house) in the same manner. Likewise in the same manner he digs [beside the hea]rth” KUB 7.41 obv. 78 (MH/ENS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f., for the preceding context see 1 a, above; nu PA_NI tapri pád-da-a-i IBoT 3.148 iii 7; namma–ššan BÀD-ešni anda lē kuiški [(pádda)-i] “Then let no one dig inside the wall” KUB 
31.86 ii 22 (BE_L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.89 ii 11 (NS), ed. Dienstanw. 43; [Éhi-lam-m]ar-kán pád-daa-ri “the portico is being dug up” (or: “in the portico there is digging”) KBo 39.203:3 w. rest. from line 6. 
c. obj. lost in lacuna: […]x pád-da-ah-hi t–uš hariemi “I dig […] and bury them” KBo 17.5 ii 2 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:22f. 
2. to create (a hole or cavity) by digging — a. 

ā

bi “sacrificial pit”: nu ANA DINGIR-LIM PA_NI GIŠBANŠUR ā
bi pád-da-an-zi “They dig a sacrificial pit for the goddess in front of the table” KUB 
29.4 iv 34 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Schw.Gotth. 30f. 
b. ÉSAG “grain-storage pit” (cf. AlHeth 34-37): 2 ÉSAG.HI.A pád-da-an-zi 1 ÉSAG taknaš dUTU-aš 1 ÉSAG–ma taknaš dUTU-aš DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ. MEŠ–ya pád-da-an-zi nu–za GIM-an ÉSAG.HI.A pát-tu-u-ma-an-zi (var. pád-du-ma[-an-zi]) appanzi “They dig two storage pits; they dig one storage pit of the Sungoddess of the Earth and another storage pit of the Sungoddess of the Earth and (of) the Male Deities. When they begin digging the storage pits, …” KUB 55.45 ii 2-4 (rit.), w. dupl. KBo 21.1 ii 31-34 + KBo 21.5 ii! 1, ed. Taracha, Hethitica 10:171f., 173, 175; cf. [na]mma ÉSAG pád-da-an-z[i] KUB 43.49 rev.? 37 (subst. rit.), cf. KBo 21.5 rev.? 2; [(namma)]–kan ÉSAG kuiš GAM-an arha pád-da-an-za (var. -zi) KUB 
7.44:7 (rit.), w. dupl. KUB 12.20:3-4; [ÉS]AG.MEŠ pádda-a[n-zi] KBo 22.119:8; [… ES]ÁG?.GAL pád-daan-zi KUB 60.161 ii 45 (rit.). 
3. to dig up (something), acquire, or retrieve by digging — a. in general: (Before sunrise someone buries (hariezzi) a fleshy part (UZUhuitya[(-)…]) in 

236

a clay-pit) huššiliya–war–[at mahhan … -y]a(?) parā pád-!da-a-an-zi n–at parā x[… šalliškizzi apā]š–a QA_TAMMA šalliški[ddu] “[Just as] they dig [it] up in the clay pit, and [it disintegrates/melts(?), let [this one] too disintegrate/melt(?) in the same way” KBo 3.8 ii 13-15 (rit., NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:150f. (= 47-49) (reads parā–pat dānzi), cf. Goetze apud Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:111 (“Just as they dig out [the …] from the plaster pit, and it [disintegrates], let this one too in the same manner”). 
b. purut “mud”: (She throws into the pit the clay [šakuniyaš purut]) taknaz–kan kuit šarā pád-d[a-iš] “which she dug up from the ground” KUB 17.27 ii 6 (rit., MH?/NS), mistranslated in ANET 347 (“which has been dug in the ground”); cf. ABoT 53:3. 
c. wilan (IM-an) “clay”: KUB 43.62 iii? 10 (myth?). 
1	to bury(?) [the usual verb for “to bury” is hariya-]: (They made three images from wax and sheep fat and plastered them with mud; they put names on each of them) n–at pát-te-er “and they buried(?) them” KUB 40.83 obv. 17 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:64f. 
2	(implements used) — a. GIŠAL “hoe”: KUB 7.41 obv. 6, see 1 a, above. 

b. TUDITTU(M) “pectoral(?)/toggle pin(?)”: EGIR-ŠU–ma–za TUDITTUM dā
i apez pád-da-a-i KUB 15.31 ii 12-13 (evocation, MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:156f.; […]x GIŠ G´D TUD[IT]I pát-tu-an-zi “… a pectoral(?)/toggle pin(?) for digging” KUB 
42.89 obv. 11 (list, NS); [… TUD]ITI pát-tu-an-zi ibid. rev. 2 (list, NS); cf. KBo 10.16 i 9. 
c. G´R ZABAR TUR “small bronze knife”: KUB 

27.34 i 19 (Hurr. rit.). 

6. (w. associated prev., postpos., or adv.) — 

	a. katta: KBo 15.25 obv. 20 (MH/NS); see 1 b, above. 

	b. kattan arha: KUB 7.44:7 (2 b, above), KBo 22.111 iii (10). 
	
c. parā: KBo 3.8 ii 13-14 (rit., NS), see 3 a, above. 

	d. šarā: KBo 24.93 iii 18-19 (fest. frag.) see 1 a, above; KUB 17.27 ii 6, see 3 b, above. 

The vocalization of the BE sign in this word is unknown; we have arbitrarily followed the pát/d-

NA›patta-B 
writing chosen by Güterbock (ZA 42:227) and followed by Friedrich (HW 165f.). Puhvel (Heth.u.Idg. 214216), suggests a reading pè-da- and cites as a supporting example (tr. his) “‘if anyone violates the boundary of a field’ 1 akkā
lan pé-e-da-i ‘and digs one (additional) furrow’” KUB 29.30 iii 9 (Laws §168, OS). But since the NS dupls. read 1 aggalan pé-enna-a-i “and drives one furrow(?) there” KBo 6.26 i 46-47, KBo 6.13 i 1-2, and the meaning of aggala-is uncertain (see Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 215 n. 36), this passage cannot serve as proof for a spelling pé-e-da-“to dig.” On this passage see treatment under penna-. The examples for pád-da-show that this activity resulted in obtaining a vertical shaft or a sacrificial pit (patteššar, hatteššar, ābi-). There is no ex. indicating that pád-da-refers to digging an elongated trench or furrow. 
Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 227f. (padda-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 505 (padda-); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214216; idem, FsNeumann (1982) 317 (pè-da-); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 143 w. n. 440 (padda-). 
Cf. patteššar. 
NA›patta-B n. neut.; (kind of small stone object); NH.† 
sg. nom.-acc. NA›pád-da KUB 10.92 vi 4 (NS). 
pl. nom.-acc. NA›pa-at-ta KUB 48.118 i 3 (Pud.), NA›paad-da ibid. i 8 (Pud.). 
d.-l. [N]A›pa-at-ta-aš ibid. i 11 (Pud.). 
[nu]–wa–šši NA›pa-at-ta peran išhū[wa-…] “[…] scatter(s) patta in front of him/it” KUB 48.118 i 3 (vow text, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 295f., 434 (“paddastenen”); [nu– wa] NA›pa-ad-da apāš mān punuškizzi “Someone like (cf. mān 1 d) him/her asks about the padda” ibid. 8 □ de Roos, Diss. 434, takes mān as a subordinating conj. “als die de pattastenen onderzoekt”; namma–wa–kan [N]A›paat-ta-aš anda DUG!hupuwāi duwarna<n> GAR-ri “‘Does a broken jug again lie among the patta-s?’” (or perhaps w. de Roos as a statement: “A broken jug again lies…” ibid. i 10-11 (dream, Pud.), ed. de Roos, Diss. 296, 434 (“Verder lag(en) er op de pattastenen (een) gebroken? kruik(en) en zij zei”); [EGIR-ŠU–ma dH]i-išu-ú-i NA›pád-da(over erasure) / [GUD-aš] 1-ŠU KI.MIN (= ekuzi or akuanzi) “Once, in a standing position, he drinks/they drink Hišue (= Hurr. ZA. BA›.BA›) (in the form of) patta-stones” KUB 10.92 vi 4-5 (fest. for Teššub). 
237

Since the patta-s can be scattered (išhuwa-), they are probably small objects. 
LÚpád-da[(-)…] n.; (a functionary or official); NS.† 
LÚ GIŠGIDRU […] / LÚpád-da[-…] KBo 11.43 ii 3 (NS); an i-vocalization (píd) of the BE sign is also possible. Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri 436, lists it as a variant spelling of LÚpí-it-ta-a-aš KUB 8.75 iii 6, iv 40, which, however, must be read differently, since the LÚ belongs to the immediately preceding name Armaziti (µDINGIR.GEﬂ-LÚ); cf. pīē

tta-. 

Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 26; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 436. 
(TÚG)patalla-n. (com.?); puttee, leg wrapping; from MH/NS.† 
inst. pa-tal-li-it KBo 6.34 i (23), KUB 40.13 rev.! (7) (both MH/NS). 
in a list, case unclear TÚGpa-ta-al-la[(-)…] KBo 7.25:5 (NH). 
	a. in rituals: n–uš kattan G‰R.MEŠ–ŠUNU ≠pata±[(l-li-it)] patalliyandu šerr–aš ŠU.MEŠ–ŠUNU išhiandu “Below, let them tie their (i.e., the oath breakers’) feet (together) with a puttee; above, let them bind their hands” KBo 6.34 i 23-24 (mil. oath, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.13 rev.! 6-7, ed. StBoT 22:6f. (“Fušfesseln”). 
	b. in inv.: 2 TÚGpa-ta-al-la[(-)…] “two puttees” KBo 7.25:5 (inv., NH), in a list of garments which also includes 3 GAD.DAM BA[BBAR] “three (pairs of) whi[te] gaiters” (line 8), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 432f. 

Kühne, ZA 62:249, cites two further exx., KUB 
19.34 iv? 3 and KBo 20.13 rev. 2. The latter is to be read 3 PA-RI-S[I…], see StBoT 25:142, while […] pa-talla-aš 1-aš SA[G…] KUB 19.34 iv? 3 (ann., Murš. II) may refer to the head of a mace and be read hat-tal-… For the spelling of hattalla-w. the initial PA see GIŠhat-tal-la-an KUB 38.2 ii 9 (HED 3:255, where KUB 
19.34 iv? 3 is not cited). 
The passage in the inventory shows that the p. was not the very same thing as GAD.DAM.MEŠ “gaiters.” The passage in the rit. shows that the p. could be used to tie together a person’s feet. This 

(GIŠ)patalha- 1 

suggests that p. was what in English is called a “puttee” and in German a “Wickelgamasche,” i.e., a long strip of fabric that is wound around the leg and fastened at the end to prevent it from unwinding. The GAD.DAM, on the other hand, must have been a real “gaiter,” a solid piece of cloth which enclosed the calf. 
Otten apud Kühne, ZA 62 (1972) 249 (“Fušfessel”); Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 26 (“Fušfessel”); Košak, THeth. 10 (1982) 161 (“leggings,” the Hitt. reading of GAD.DAM); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 611 (“eine Art Fussbekleidung”). 
Cf. patalliya-, pata-, (GIŠ)patalha-, patalhai-. 
(GIŠ)patalha-n.; 1. (a body part:) sole of the foot, 
2. (metaphorical use) sole of the foot or clog > walking > way of acting, behavior, 3. (item worn on the foot or leg), wooden fetter(?) (always w. det. GIŠ), 4. a model in dough of a fetter(?) (without det.); from OH/NS. 
sg. nom. pa-tal-ha-aš KUB 33.8 iii 12 (OH/NS), GIŠba-talha-aš KUB 17.1 ii 10 (NH), [GI]Š?pa-tal-ha-aš KBo 13.260 iii 33 (NS). 
acc. pa-ta-al-ha-an KBo 34.26:4 (MS?), KBo 20.49:4 (ENS or MS), KBo 26.132:5, KUB 33.9 iii (6) (both NS), pa-tal-haan KBo 11.19 obv. 2, KBo 24.17 obv. (4), KBo 24.8:4 (all NS). 
abl. pa-tal-ha-z(a-at-kán) KUB 24.13 ii 21 (MH/NS), 
GIŠpa!-tal-ha-a[z] KBo 26.107 rt. col. 7. inst. GIŠpa-tal-hi-it KUB 33.115 iii 8 (MH/NS). pl. acc. pa-tal-hu-uš KBo 26.65 ii 9 (NH). frag. GIŠpa-tal-ha[-…] KBo 16.42 rev. 21 (ENS). 
(Akk.) [še-pu] = (Hitt.) G‰R (i.e., pataš) “foot” / (Akk.) [ki-bi-is G‰]R = (Hitt.) pa-tal-ha[-aš] “sole of the foot” / (Akk.) [ú-ba-an] G‰R = (Hitt.) G‰R-aš kalulup[aš] “[digit] of the foot, toe” KBo 1.51 rev. 8-10 (Akk.-Hitt. vocab.); cf. CAD kibsu A mng. 1 g (“sole of foot”). Note: This vocab. is only bil. Akk.-Hitt.; there is no missing Sum. col. [ki-bi-is G‰]R is the only possible restoration. In the sequence “foot” — x — “toe,” the x must be a part of the lower leg or foot. “Ankle” and “sole of the foot” are possibilities. The Akk. word for “ankle” is ki≈allu, which does not occur in construction w. a following šēpi. 
1. (a body part:) sole of the foot: G‰R.MEŠ–at– kan anšan ēšdu pa-tal-ha-za-at-kán anšan ēšdu HUL-lu alwanzatar “May the evil hex be wiped (from) the feet/legs, may it be wiped from the soles of his feet” KUB 24.13 ii 20-22 (rit., NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:104f., Alp, Anadolu 2:32; n–an genuwa 3-Š[U kuwašta] / n–an pa-tal-hu-uš 4-ŠU kuwašta “[He kissed] his knees three times; he kissed the soles of his feet four times” KBo 26.65 ii 8-9 (Ullik., NS). 

238

2. (metaphorical use) sole of the foot or clog > walking > way of acting, behavior (cf. KBo 1.51 rev. 9 above bil. sec., and CAD kibsu A mng. 2); called idalu“evil, bad” and paired w. lala- “tongue, speech” and urki-: [idā
l]un EME-an KI.MIN idalun pa-taal-ha-an KI.MIN (= dahhun) “I took (away) the evil speech (lit. tongue), I took (away) the evil behavior” KBo 26.132:5 (myth., NS), both body parts (lala-and patalha-) are used to refer to actions performed by them; cf. KUB 33.8 iii 12, KUB 33.9 iii 6, KBo 34.26:4; note [HU]Lluš EME-aš HUL-lu[šš–a] / [GI]Š?pa-tal-ha-aš KBo 
13.260 iii 32-33 (incant., NS) w. the unexpected (erroneous?) det. for wood; Beckman (StBoT 29:204f.) translates this “evil fetter?”; paired w. urki- “path, course”: [… ŠA?] G‰R.HI.A pa-tal-ha-an ūrk[inn–a? …] “The behavior (lit. sole) [and] track [of] the feet” KBo 20.49:4 (rit., ENS or MS), cf. [… idālu]n ūrkin idālun pa-t[al-ha-an] “The [evi]l track, the evil beh[avior]” KBo 24.17 obv. 4 (birth rit., NS), ed. StBoT 29:204f. who restores pa-t[a-al-ha-an?] against copy. For this usage of pata-see pata- mng. 4. 
3. (item worn on the foot or leg) wooden fetter(?) (always w. det. GIŠ) — a. in fairly clear context: 6-anna–za zašhain aušta nu–kan µKiššiš GIŠSI.GAR UZUG[(Ú-ši)] kittari GAM-an–ma–šši– kan MUNUS.MEŠ-aš GIŠba-tal-ha-aš kitta[ri] “He (i.e., Kešši) saw a sixth dream: Kešši — around his neck a stock is placed; below, a women’s wooden fetter is placed on him” KUB 17.1 ii 9-10 (Kešši, NH), 

w. dupl. KUB 33.121 iii 11(-12), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:238f. 
b. in broken or unclear contexts: […] / hū

manteš DINGIR.MEŠ-muš x[…] / GIŠLAM.GAL-aš GIŠpatal-hi-it na[nnai(?)] “[He will] d[rive(?)] all the gods with (i.e., wearing?) a fetter(?) (made) of pistachio wood” KUB 33.115 iii 6-8 (myth, MH/NS), cf. Hoffner, FsOtten2 155, Hittite Myths 47 (without attempting to harmonize w. other established meanings of patalha-, proposed “with a goad(?)” solely on the basis of the context); cf. GIŠLAM.GAL-aš […] / GIŠpa!-tal-ha-a[z] KBo 26.107:6-7 (myth); […] / anda uw[anun?…]≠a±ruwait GIŠpa-tal-ha[-…] / ANA µUw[a(-)…] ≠u±wanun “[When I] came in [to …, …] bowed down [and removed(??) his] fetter(?). When] I came [in] to Uwa[(-)…]” KBo 16.42 rev. 20-22 (Kumarbi myth frag.). 
4. a model in dough of a fetter(?) (without det.): […-h]an išnāš (var. [i]ššanaš) pa-tal-ha-an TUR 

(:)patalhai-
INA UZUGÚ–ŠU / [tehhi(?)] “I place a […] fetter of dough on his neck” KBo 11.19 obv. 2-3, w. dupl. KUB 
12.47 i 6; cf. KBo 24.8:4. 
Alp, Anadolu 2:35, suggests that GIŠp. is the phonetic reading of HAR.G‰R, which is, of course, attested in Hitt. texts, but there is no evidence for this equation. A denominative verb (:)patalhai-is based on this noun. 
Güterbock, Oriens 10 (1957) 355, 362 (“‘sole’ and wooden sole = ‘sandal,’ or ‘ankle’ and ‘fetter’”?); Alp, Anadolu 2 (1957) 32-35 (mng. 1 “Knöchel,” mng. 2 “Fussreif”); Goetze, JCS 13 (1959) 69f. (“sole”); Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31 (1978) 105 (“Fušsohle”). 
Cf. (:)patalhai- v. 
(:)patalhai-v.; to fetter(?); from OS.† 
pres. sg. 1 [pa]-tal-ha-e-mi KBo 25.150:4 (OS), [ pa-t]alha-e-mi ibid. 5 (both restorations by Neu in StBoT 25:235). 
Luw. inf. :pa-tal-ha-ú-na KUB 44.4 rev. 24 (NH). 
part. sg. acc. com. :pa!-tal-ha-an-da-an KBo 13.241 rev. 20 (NH). 
Luw. part. sg. acc. com. pa-tal-hi-ia-ma<-an?> KUB 
35.145 rev. 15 (NS). 
“‘O tongues, tongues (i.e., magical forces), where are you going?’” … UR.MAH GIŠ-ruanzi KI.MIN (= pā
iweni) UR.BAR.RA :pa-tal-ha-ú-na KI.MIN … kuiš–wa–kan kēdani DUMU-l[i] HULlu takkiš<k>izzi … UR.MAH-an GIŠ-ruandan KI. MIN (= aušdu) UR.BAR.RA :pa!-tal-ha-an-da-an KI.MIN “… We are going to the lion to cage (it); we are going to the wolf to fetter(?) (it) … Let him who prepares evil for this child … see the lion caged, the wolf fettered(?)” KUB 44.4 rev. 23-24, 30, 32 + KBo 13.241 rev. 11-12, 18, 20 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:178f.; cf. UR.BAR.RA pa-tal-hi-ia-ma<-an?> aušdu KUB 35.145 rev. 15 (incant., NS), ed. StBoT 29:194, 
w. brief comments on pp. 195 and 209 (follows Laroche, RHA XV/61:127, in translating the verb as “to fetter” = French “cheviller”). 
The tr. is based on the relationship of the v. pa~ talhai-to the n. patalha-and on the meaning of the 
v. taruwai-. This latter is clearly seen in the passage: išhiyantan–war–an arha lā
wen LÚ GIŠ-ru~ wandan–ma–kan arha tarnumen “Release the tied up one, let out the caged(?) man” KBo 19.145 rev. 3940 (Šalašu’s rit.), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:302f. (“angeholzten”); and UN-an GIŠ-ruanda<(n)> GIŠ-ruwaz 
239

a[(rh)a tarn(ir)] išhiyandan–ma–kan išhiyala[(z arha lāwen)] KBo 33.119:4-5 (Allaiturahi’s rit.), w. dupl. VBoT 120 iii 1-3, ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:271f., 144f. “Caged” is preferable to “angeholzt” considering the v. arha tarna-“let out” and the parallelism w. “tied up.” In KUB 44.4 + KBo 13.241, although “caged” and “fettered” fit well together, both are problematic in the context. Perhaps the caging and fettering of the beasts only enrages them further. The sorcerer “who seeks evil against this child” will see/experience this rage. 
For NA›.[HI].≠A± :pa-tal-ha-a-an-du KUB 31.86 ii 12 (BE_L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), translit. Laroche, RHA XV/61:127, tr. Goetze, JCS 13:69, Košak, Linguistica 30:110, reads NA› (erasure, coll.) tal-ha-a-an-du; see talhai-. 
Laroche, RHA XV/61 (1957) 127 (“chausser, cheviller”); Goetze, JCS 13 (1959) 69 (“to lay out (the bottom of a moat)” > patalhai-“sole”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 291 (“to fetter”); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 143 (restores [pa]-tal-ha-e-mi in KBo 25.150:4, 5, and translates the verb “fesseln, anpflocken(?)”). 
Cf. (GIŠ)patalha-. 
patalli(ya)-n.; fetter(?), tether(?); NS.† 
[… par]ā appanzi pa-tal-li-ia-aš-ša MUŠEN. HI.A / [… a]rha warnumašš–a MUŠEN.HI.A “[…] they hold […] out. Both the birds of p. […] and the birds of the burning up […]” KBo 21.45 i 14-15 (birth rit., NS), ed. StBoT 29:206f., 209, 291 (“the birds of the fettering”); Beckman interprets p. as a verbal subst. gen. of patalliya- “to fetter.” If so, the form ought to be emended to pa-tal-li-ia-<wa->aš-ša. Since an emendation would be arbitrary in such broken context, we prefer to take it as an ordinary noun, perhaps related to the derived verb patalliya-“to tie the feet, fetter.” 
Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 26 n. 15 (“unklar”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 206f., 209, 291. 
patalliya-v.; to tie feet, fetter; MH/NS.† 
imp. pl. 3 pa-tal-li-ia-an-du KBo 6.34 i 24, KUB 40.13 rev.! (7). 
n–uš kattan G‰R.MEŠ–ŠUNU ≠pata±[(llit)] pa-tal-li-ya-an-du KBo 6.34 i 23-24 (mil. oath, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.13 rev.! 6-7, ed. StBoT 22:6f. (“fesseln”). See tr. s.v. (TÚG)patalla-. 

(UZU)pattar A 1 b 

For pa-tal-li-ya-aš-ša KBo 21.45 i 14 see patal~ li(ya)- n. 
Oettinger, StBoT 22 (1976) 26 (“Fesseln (an den Füšen)”). 
pattankura-n. or adj.?; (mng. unkn.; something that could be made of gold?); NH.† 
[o o o dIŠTAR URULaw]azantiya ŠÀ pát-ta-an-kura-an / [o o o o KÙ].GI KI.LÁ.BI NU.GÁL pehhi “I will give [to? IŠTAR of Law]azantiya a p. heart, [and a … of go]ld, its weight unspecified” KUB 
48.123 iv 11-12 (vow, Pud.), ed. de Roos, Diss. 307, 446. De Roos reads, ŠÀ pát-ta-an ku-ra-an and translates “een gegriefd (en) gekwetst hart” (a grieved and wounded heart), taking p. and k. as neut. sg. participles. Since there is no word space between ŠÀ and pát, the tablet would also allow a reading ŠÀpát ta-an-ku-ra-an or even ŠÀ-aš :ta-an-ku-ra-an. From the joins to col. iii (Otten, ZA 68:156, no. 57), each column had ca. 15-17 signs. 
(UZU)pattar A or (UZU)pittar n.; 1. wing, 2. feather; wr. syll. and KAPPU; from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pát-tar KBo 23.12 iv 13 (MS), KBo 1.42 i 34, KBo 13.177 i 17, KUB 7.53 ii 4, KUB 12.58 i 22, KUB 49.60 ii 7, (11) (all NH), KUB 17.35 ii 35 (Tudh., IV), pát!-tar! (text: tar-pát) KUB 38.2 i 22, UZUpát-tar-ra KUB 45.11 obv. 3. 
pl. d.-l. pád-da-na-aš KUB 57.105 ii 22 (OH/NS), pát-tana-aš KUB 38.2 i 13, 26 (NH). 
Akk. KAP-PUHI.A KUB 38.11:11. 
(Sum.) [á]-≠x±-SUD = (Akk.) kap-pu = (Hitt.) pát-tar “wing” KBo 1.42 i 34 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 13:134. 
1. wing — a. unspecified birds: […] pát-tar dāi n–at zanuzi “[The practitioner] takes a wing (cf. MUŠEN rev.? 10) and cooks it” KBo 23.12 rev.? 13 (rit., MS); […]x-anta UZUpát-tar-ra KUB 45.11 obv. 3 (Hurr. rit.), note the use of the UZU determinative. 
b. of Šawuška: “dLIŠ of Calling: a gold statue of a man, standing” ZAG.LU-za pát!-tar! (text: tarpát) u[w]an…[EGIR-and]a–ma–kan pát-ta-na-aš ZAG-za GÙB-za [dNina]ttaš dKulittaš GUB-ri “From the shoulders, the wing(s) are coming … Behind, to the left and right of the wings, Ninatta and Kulitta are standing” KUB 38.2 i 22, 26-27 (descriptions of statues, NH), tr. Wegner, AOAT 36:39 following tr. of Rost, MIO 8:175f. 

240

(UZU)pattar A 1 c 

c. of an awiti-animal (perhaps a sphynx): awi~ tiyaš–ma–ka[n p]át-≠ta±-na-aš Z[AG-az GÙB-za] dNinattaš d[Ku]litt[aš] … GUB-ri “To the left and to the right of the wings of the awiti-animal, Ninatta and Kulitta are standing” KUB 38.2 i 13-14 (descriptions of statues, NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 4f., tr. Rost, MIO 8:175; […] awitiš KÙ.BABBAR G‰R.MEŠ KAP-PUHI.A NU.GÁL “[…] an awiti-animal of silver, legs and wings are missing” KUB 38.11:11 (cult inv., NH), ed. Rost, MIO 8:198. 
2. feather: nu pát-tar arha i[š]h[uwaiš] “It (sc. a pattarpalhi-bird) sh[ed](?) a feather” KUB 49.60 ii 7, (11) (bird oracle, NH); (In a list of paraphernalia for a rit.) TI°MUŠEN-aš pát-tar “a feather of an eagle” KUB 12.58 i 22 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 8f. (= i 46); EGIR– ŠU–ma pát-tar dāi “Afterward she (the Old Woman) takes the feather (and waves it over the patient)” ibid. ii 4, ed. Tunn. 10f.; cf. KBo 19.134:12 (rit. frag., NS). The tr. pattar “feather” is likely because, together w. many other items, it is placed in a single basket (Tunn. i 4351) and because in many rit. passages the pattar of an eagle is manipulated in such a way as to be unlikely for something as large as an eagle’s “wing.” Cf. partawar. 
Unclear whether “wing” or “feather” is intended: […]xMUŠEN pát-tar harzi KBo 13.177 i 17 (NH). 
A synonym, also routinely used of the eagle’s wing/feather, is partawar. 
pattar could also be read pittar. Von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. 27, cited an alleged spelling pa-attar from unpubl. Bo 2650 ii 21: nu 1 pa-at-tar dāi “He takes one wing (not “basket, sieve”). Collation has confirmed from the context that it indeed means “wing,” but it is spelled pát-tar, not pa-attar. 
For KAP-PU E-NI “eye lash” KUB 22.70 obv., 20, 25, 71, Hitt. may have had a separate word. 
Since the pattar basket (q.v.) could have had a shape suggesting a wing, pattar A and pattar B might be the same word. But since the vocalization of “wing” (pa/ittar) is still uncertain, we have listed them as separate words. 
Hrozny™, MDOG 56 (1915) 28 (reads be-tar, pè-tar); idem, SH (1917) 70f. (ditto); von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1943) 26f. (pattar); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 212f. (pittar). 

Cf. pattarpalhi-, partawar. 
(GI, GIŠ)pattar B a 
(GI, GIŠ)pattar B n. neut.; basket (made of wicker or reed); from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pa-at-tar KBo 8.74 i 7 (OS), KBo 3.41 obv.! 1 (OH/NS), pát-ta-ar(-ra) KBo 17.1 iii (24), KBo 17.6 iii 16 (both OS), pát-tar KUB 17.10 iii 6 (OH/OS? or MS?), KBo 
	23.23 obv. 28 (MS), KBo 10.41:6, KUB 24.10 ii 6 (both MH/ NS), KUB 12.58 iii 12, KUB 42.45:12, KUB 43.59 i 9 (all NH), GIŠpád-da-r(a-aš-ša-an) KUB 32.117 rev.! 6 (OS), GIpát-tar KUB 35.146 ii 6, 9 (pre-NH/MS), KBo 12.96 i 6 (MH/NS), KUB 9.6 i 11, 13 (NS). 
	d.-l. pa-at-ta-ni[(-)] KBo 25.122 ii 3 (OS) [listed as d.-l. in StBoT 26:143, but inst. in StBoT 25:204 n. 666], [p]át-ta-ni-i KBo 17.3 iv 17 (OS), pád-da-ni-i KBo 17.1 iv 21 (OS), VBoT 24 i 19, 24 (MH/NS), GIpád-da-ni-i KUB 27.67 i 18, ii 14 and passim (MH/NS), KUB 12.58 i 27 (NH), KUB 9.6 i 12, 14 (NS), pád-da-a-ni KBo 17.4 iii 10 (OS), KBo 10.41:2, KUB 
2	 ii 11 (both MH/NS), GIpád-da-a-ni KBo 13.109 iii 2 (MH/NS), KUB 9.6 i 3 (NS), GIpát-ta-a-ni KUB 9.6 i 3, pádda-ni KBo 17.4 iii 8 (OS), KBo 15.10 i 7, iii 20, 24, 27 (MH/ MS), KUB 35.146 ii 6 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 10.41:12 (MH/NS), KUB 7.53 ii 13, KUB 12.26 iii 10, 17, KUB 43.59 i 10 (both NH), GIŠpád[-d]a-ni KUB 32.117 rev.! 3 + KUB 35.93 rev.! 8, KUB 35.93 rev.! (10) (both OS), GIpád-da-ni KBo 4.2 i 20, 32, 39, 55 (pre-NH/NS). 

inst. pa-at-ta-ni[-it?] KBo 25.122 ii 3 (OS) [see 1st ex. in d.-l.], pát-ta-ni-it KUB 31.4 obv. 8 (OH/NS), pát-ta-ni-it! (text -uš) KBo 13.78 obv. 8 (OH/NS), pád-da-ni-it KBo 12.22 i 12 (OH/NS). 
abl.(?) GIpád-da-n[a-az?] KUB 9.6 i 36 (NS). unclear without context pád-da-na-aš KUB 57.105 ii 22 (OH/NS). 
a. used to contain and carry objects: ammiyan pát-tar… GAL-li pád-da-ni “small basket … in the large basket” KUB 43.59 i 9-10 (rit., NS); EGIR-ŠU–ma–kan GIŠhattalu tarzuwan GIpád-da-a-ni dāi n–at LUGAL-i šer arha BAL-zi “Afterward she places a wooden hattalu tarzuwan in a basket and waves (BAL for wahnuzi?) it over the king” KBo 
13.109 iii 1-3 (rit.); […]x-šan halkin karaš GIpád-dani-i šuhhāi KUB 27.67 iii 13 (rit., MH/NS), cf. Hoffner, Al-Heth 64, HW™ 3:58a, cf. ibid. ii 9-14; 1 UR.TUR 7 qalu~ lupuš išnaš 7 išhahru išnaš n–at–šan pád-da-ni išhuwān “One puppy, seven fingers of dough, seven tear-drops of dough — they have been strewn into the basket” KBo 15.10 i 6-7 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth 1:12f.; (The Old Woman prepares a selection of paraphernalia: two clay figures, twelve clay tongues, two clay oxen, two clay hinges (wawar~ kima-), a little blue and red wool, an eagle’s wing, a little bone, ¬alli-, seeds of […], figs, zinakki-, 
241

heart, liver, a piglet of dough, morsels of different varieties of bread, one figure of wax, one of mutton tallow) nu–ššan kē ¢
human GIpád-da-ni-i katta handaizzi “And all this she arranges in a basket/ tray” KUB 12.58 i 27 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Tunn. 8f. (i 51), cf. HED 3:97 (“on a reed tray”); namma–ššan šanhunda NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A UNU_T GIR› GIŠKAK.HI. A–ya MUŠEN.HI.A–ya ŠA IM DUGKUKUBIHI.A TUR-TIM katta pád-da-ni-i handā
izzi VBoT 24 i 1720 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 106f.; nu 12 NINDA. GUR›.RA hūriyaš 12 NINDApurpuruš DÙ-anzi [n]– aš–kan MUNUS.ŠU.GI GIpád-da-ni katta išhū
wai KBo 4.2 i 19-20 (rit., pre-NH/NS); […]x [GIpát]-ta-ni-i šer karaš šanhuwa[ntaya šu]hha[hhi] KBo 12.96 i 2-3 (rit., MH/NS); nu–ššan pád-da-ni NINDAER´N.MEŠ NINDAwageššar tepu dāi … EGIR-anda–ma–kan namma pád-da-ni GÚ.GAL GÚ.GAL.GAL GÚ. TUR GÚ.ŠEŠ NINDA EMÙA dāi KUB 12.26 iii 10-11, 17-19 (rit., NH); kē¢
–šan humand[a] pád-da-ni-i (dupl. [p]át-ta-ni-i) tēhhi KBo 17.1 iv 20-21 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 iv 16-17 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:38f.; (A man was dressed in colorful clothing) har!-ša-ni-i[š-š]i (var. B 3: SAG[.DU-i–šši …]) pa-at-tar ki[t]ta … kīdan~ da pát-ta-ni-it (dupl. B: pád-da-ni-it, C: pát-ta-niuš) ekan utiškimi “on his head lies a basket; (and he calls out) … with this basket I will keep transporting ice” KUB 31.4 obv. 2, 8 + KBo 3.41 obv.! 1, 7 (OH/ NS), w. dupls. (C) KBo 13.78 obv. 8 (OH/NS) and (B) KBo 
12.22 i 12 (OH/NS), ed. Hoffner, JCS 24:34, cf. Popko, JCS 
	26:181 n. 1, despite Tischler’s approval (ZDMG 140:378) not 
	w. Soysal, Hethitica 7:179 (“[Aus diesem Grunde muss] ich (jetzt) kommen, mit diesem Köcher immer wieder (Todes)kälte bringen” [italics ours]), cf. HW™ 2:27b (“mit diesem Korb Eis bringen”), for the error in C, see Melchert, Diss. 228. 
	b. because of its many holes, used as a sieve: namma–at–šan EGIR-pa kuit GIpát-ta-a-ni katta šuhhāi pát-tar–ma IGI.HI.A-wa šarā nāi “Because she pours it (i.e., the grits) back down into the sieve, she turns the sieve holes up” KUB 9.6 i 2-4 (rit., NS), ed. Popko, JCS 26:181, and see also pakkuššuwant2 for more context of this passage; dāhhun–za pát-tar 1 LÂM IGI.HI.A-wa “I took a sieve (with) a thousand holes (lit. ‘eyes’)” KUB 17.10 iii 6 (Tel.myth, OH/ MS? or OS?), ed. Popko, JCS 26:181. 

That a (GI,GIŠ)pattar was made of wicker or reed is shown not only by the determinatives GI and 

pattarpalhi- a 

GIŠ, but also by its use as a sieve (above, b; cf. Popko, JCS 26:181f.) and its association w. other AD.KID objects in KUB 42.45:11-13 (inv., NH). Another word for which the tr. “basket” has been proposed is e/irhui-(HW™ 2:89-92). 
Friedrich, ZA 37 (1926) 190f. (“Korb”); Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 118 (“tray”); Friedrich, HW 1. Erg. (1957) 15f. (reading pa-at-tar); Hoffner, JCS 24 (1971) 34 (w. lit.); Popko, JCS 26 (1974) 181f. (“sieve”); Soysal, Hethitica 7 (1987) 184f. (“Köcher”); Kammenhuber, HW™ 2 (1988) 27b s.v. eka- and passim (“Korb”). 
pattar C (mng. uncertain).† 
Cult symbol of Yarri of Guršamašša: 2 gurzip pát-tar 2 GIŠTUKUL ZABAR “two hauberks pat-tar, two maces of bronze” KUB 17.35 ii 35 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 128, 142, tr. RGTC 6:226 (“2 Panzer …”). Carter tr. gurzip “helmet.” Akk. gurpisu means “hauberk” or “gorget” which protected chiefly the neck, but could extend to other parts of the body, see Zaccagnini, Assur 2 (1979) 5 w. lit., AHw 929 s.v. gurpi(s)su(m), and CAD s.v. gurpisu (G 139f.). 
This could be either pattar A, B, or a third word. 
Beal, Diss. (1986) 629-631; idem, THeth 20 (1992) 151f. n. 550 (excerpt of preceding). 
pattarpalhi-, pattarpalha-(?) n. com.; (an oracle bird, the name means ‘broad-winged’; NH. 
sg. nom. pát-tar-pal-hi-iš KUB 18.5 ii 15 and passim, KUB 18.12 i 13, pát-tar-pal-he-eš KUB 5.11 i 40, iv 59, KUB 
22.33 rev.? 5, 6, KUB 49.11 iii 20, KBo 24.126 rev. 22. acc. pát-tar-pal-hi-in KUB 16.46 i 11, KUB 18.5 i 33, 
KUB 49.37:14, pát-tar-pal-he-en AT 154 i 30. gen. pát-tar-pal-hi-ia-aš KUB 18.57 iii 14. pl. nom. pát-tar-pal-hi-iš KUB 16.46 i 7, KUB 16.72:20. acc.(?) pát-tar-pal-hu[-uš] KBo 11.68 i 20. Note pát-<tar->pa[l-hi-…] KUB 49.16 i 8. 
a. flying toward observer (uwa-): in pairs KUB 
16.46 i 7-8, KUB 16.72:20; singly (all other exx.); flight described as EGIR GAM kuš(tayati) KBo 24.126 obv. 21, KUB 5.11 i 22, 40, iv 59, KUB 5.24 ii 40, KUB 18.9 ii 5, KUB 49.11 iii 20, KUB 49.19 iii? 4; EGIR UGU SIGﬁ-za, EGIR-an šarā aššuwaz KBo 24.126 rev. 23, KUB 16.46 i 8, 11-12, KUB 18.12 i 22, KUB 18.66 iii 10, KUB 18.5 ii 26, iii (5); pariyawan tarw(iyalli)an KUB 18.5 i 33-34; 

242

pe(an) kuš(tayati) KUB 18.11 obv. 10-11, KUB 22.45 obv. 26; ´D-an āppa ibid. ii 27; GUN-li⁄¤ zi(law)an KUB 18.12 ii 17; zi(law)an GU[N-li⁄¤] KUB 18.9 ii 5; dUTU-un EGIR GAM kuš(tayati) KUB 5.11 i 22; ´Daz šarā peran aššuwaz KUB 18.5 ii 48-49, cf. 24-25; ´Daz šarā tarw(iyall)iš KUB 18.5 iii 15. 
b. flying away from the observer (pai-): flight described as ´D-an pariyan KUB 18.5 i 34; pariyawan tarw(iyalli)an KUB 18.5 iii 15; pariyawan […] mekki ibid. ii 27-28; pean arha KUB 5.24 ii 40, KUB 
16.46 i 8, 12, KUB 16.72:(21), KUB 18.11 obv. 11, KUB 18.12 i 22, KUB 49.19 iii? 5; 2-an arha KBo 24.126 obv. 22, KUB 
5.11 i 24, 41, iv 60, KUB 5.24 ii 46, KUB 49.11 iii 20, KUB 49.37:15; tar(wiyal)li(an) pa(riy)an KUB 18.15 obv. 8; zilawan aššuwaz KUB 18.5 ii 50; zilawan tarw(i~ yalli)an ibid. iii 3. 
	c. subject (w. an eagle) of the verb šakiyahh-: KUB 16.46 i 5-8. 
	d. shedding a feather: nu pattar arha i[š]h[u~ waiš] KUB 49.60 ii 7. 
	e. observed (aumen, NI_MUR “we observed”): KUB 5.24 i 14, KUB 16.46 i 11, KUB 18.5 i 33, KUB 18.3 rev.? 12, KUB 18.11 obv. 10, KUB 18.12 ii 16, KUB 49.37:14, KUB 49.38 iv (7). 
	f. observed in association w. other birds — 1' aliya-: KUB 49.6:15. 

2' aliliya-: KUB 18.12 i 13. 

3' aramnant-: KUB 5.24 ii 39, KUB 16.46 i 16, KUB 

18.15 obv. 8-10. 
4' halwašši-: KUB 16.46 i 11-12. 
5' huwara-: KUB 18.12 ii 16. 

6' iparwašši-: KUB 5.11 i 40-41, iv 59-60, KUB 22.51 obv. 8. 

7' maršanašši-: KUB 49.56 obv. 5-6. 
8' šalwini-: KUB 18.5 iii 4. 

9' TI°MUŠEN “eagle”: KUB 18.3 rev.? 9, KUB 22.33 rev.? 6. 
10' SÚR.DÙ.AMUŠEN “falcon(?)”: KUB 50.1 iii 15. 
g. other: mān–ma aši pát-tar-pal-hi-iš uniu[š MUŠEN.HI.A] tarhzi INIM pát-tar-pal-hi-[y]a-aš 

patti(-) 
k[išar]i “But if that p.-bird defeats(?) tho[se birds], will the word of the p.-bird [come to pass]? (If so, then let the oracle birds confirm)” KUB 18.57 iii 13-14. In lines 15-21 the behavior of the birds under observation is described w. the verdict in line 22: SIZSÁ-at–wa “it is confirmed,” but the p.-bird seems not to be mentioned in lines 15-21, unless it is to be restored as p[át-tar-pal-h]i!-iš in line 19. 
A head-initial compound of pa/ittar A and palhi-A “broad.” Riemschneider, JCS 27:233f., suggested that p. is a loan-translation from the Akk. bird name kappu-rapšu, since both words “correspond to each other both in the meaning of the components and in their sequence” and they “both denote a bird which is mentioned exclusively in divination.” The Akk. kappu-rapšu, however, denotes a bird which does not fly but runs, and is tr. as a kind of poultry by Gurney Oracles and Divination 
154. 
Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 36; Kammenhuber, KZ 77 (1961) 181 (“der Flügelbreite”); Hoffner, Or NS 35 (1966) 386 (“broadwinged, broad of wing”); Riemschneider, JCS 27 (1975) 233f. (= Akk. kappu-rapšu); Tischler, GsAmmann (1982) 220f. 
Cf. pattar A, palhi- A. 
paddada n.; (mng. unkn.); ENS?.† 
[ o ] ŠA Z´Z pád-da-da uda[nzi …] “They bring the p. (made) of wheat” KBo 24.18 i 4 (fest., ENS?). Usually, bread and porridge (BA.BA.ZA) are made from wheat. p. is probably not a bread or pastry, since it lacks the det. NINDA. It may be either a dish or an object (something like a corn doll?). Form perhaps pl. nom.-acc. neut.? The a-vocalization of pád-is only certain if this is a variant wr. of pattiyata. 
[pát(coll.)-hi-iš-kán-zi] KUB 36.25 iv 8 should be emended to pár!-hi-iš-kán-zi; cf. parh-8 a. 
pati-see pata-. 
patti(-) (Hurr. term); NH.† 
(Afterward, he sacrifices one thick loaf to …) mΩtti pa-at-ti[(-)…] KUB 27.10 iv? 16 (hišuwaš fest., NH). 
243

LÚpa-te-x[…] n.; (a functionary); NS.† […]x-hiyaš–ma–kan LÚ.MEŠpa-te-x[…] KBo 
19.88:9 (instr. frag., NS); the last sign could be read -e[n-…] or -S[I]. If the word is Sum., it could be read LÚ.MEŠÉNS[I]. 
[‘PA’-ti-i-ia[ o-o-]x-te-en] KBo 3.7 i 13, translit. Myth. 6, read an-da-ma-!pa ti-i-ia[-a]t-te-en, see Goetze, ANET 125 (“come ye to my aid!”), Carruba, Or NS 33:420, Hoffner, JCS 22:38 n. 52, HW™ 129a and CHD -mu a and b 4'. 
GIŠpatiyalli-n.; leg, foot (of furniture); from MH/NS.† 
sg. acc. GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-le-en KUB 58.34 iii 24. 
d.-l. GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-li KBo 13.260 iii 25 (LNS), KBo 19.129 obv. (23?) (NS). 
pl. d.-l. ANA … GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-le-e-eš VBoT 24 i 13 (MH/ NS), GIŠpa-a-ti-ia-al-li-ia-aš KBo 19.129 obv. 22 (NS), GIŠpati-ia-al-li-ia-aš KBo 13.260 iii 23, 29 (LNS). 
unclear GIŠpa-a-ti-ia[-…] KBo 17.102 obv. 8. 
	a. (part of a bed): nu mahhan nekuzi nu–ššan ANA EN SISKUR hantezzi palši ANA G‰R.MEŠ– ŠU ŠU.MEŠ–ŠU UZUGÚ–ŠU ištarna pedi ANA GIŠNÁ–ŠU 4 GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-le-e-eš hantezzi palši S´G āndaran hamanki “In the evening she first binds blue wool upon the sacrificer, first of all upon his feet, hands, neck, and inside (the house?), upon his bed, upon the four legs” VBoT 24 i 10-14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 106f. | it is not clear whether ištarna pedi “middle” refers to the client’s body, to his house, or to the bed; (He holds water) [nu] ANA GIŠNÁ 4 GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-li-ia-aš [ku]edaniya [AN]A 1 GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-li […(-)a]llit [kištan]uzzi nu ki[ša]n hukzi § [k]ištanunu<n> [kui]t–kan ANA 4 GIŠpa-tiia-al-li-ia-aš [pah]hur “and with … he extinguishes (the fire) on the four legs of the bed, on every leg; and he utters the following spell: ‘I have extinguished the fire on the four legs (of the bed)’” KBo 13.260 iii 23-30 (rit., LNS). 
	b. (part of a kneading trough): ŠA GIŠBÚGIN (LAGAB≈NINDA).TUR ANA 3 GIŠpa-a-ti-ia-al-liia-aš kuedaniya [AN(A 1 GIŠpa-a)-ti-ia-al-li-m]a? 1 NINDA.SIG paršiyan dāi “He deposits a single broken thin bread at each one of the three legs of the small kneading trough” KBo 19.129 obv. 22-23 (Kizz. rit., NS), w. dupl. KBo 34.93 i 10. 

LÚ.MEŠpatilahit

	c. (part of a GIŠŠÚ.A “throne”): [ŠA? G]IŠŠÚ. A–ma–ššan 1 GIŠpa-ti-ia-al-le-en [… G]IŠDAG šer tianzi “They place one leg of the throne upon the throne dais” KUB 58.34 iii 24-25, translit. Starke, ZA 69:87 
	n. 82 (as Bo 2843). 

KBo 13.173:5 is probably not to be read Úpa-ti-ia-al[-…], but ú-pa-ti-ia-al[-…], see KUB 56.12:9-10 and THeth 20:542. 
GIŠp. is a wooden part of the furniture. The mng. “foot, leg” is based on the assumption that GIŠp. is derived from pata-“foot,” as well as on the fact that a bed has four of them and a kneading pan could have three. Cf. also pata-A mng. 3. 
Sturtevant, Chrest. (1935) 107 (“posts” (of a bed)); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 111 (“pied (de lit), bois du pied”). 
Cf. pata-, ¬padumma-. 
[LÚpattiyant-] (Alp, HBM 306, 395) see (LÚ)pitte~ yant-. 
pattiyata n. neut.; (a processed form of grain); MH?/MS?.† 
[… Z´D.DA]-aš pa-ak-ku-uš-šu-an-te-eš dānt[eš …] / Z´D.DA-aš pa-at-ti-ia-ta-aš-še-et dānt[a] / [… Z]´D.DA-aš hātan mallan / [dān] “pakkuššuanteš of [… flour] are taken; its/his(?) pattiyata of […] flour are taken (neut. pl.); dried and milled of […] flour [is taken]” KBo 16.78 i 6-9 (village offerings, MH?/MS?). The three clauses appear to be parallel, yet pakkuššuwanteš and hātan mallan lack possessives. 
Since p. is flanked by terms for forms of cereal, it also probably designates a processed form of grain. Perhaps paddada is the same word. 
LÚ.MEŠpatilahit-(Luw. abstract) n.; patilipriesthood; NH.† 
sg. d.-l. [L]Ú.MEŠ≠pa-ti±-la-hi-ti-ia KBo 26.88 i 7. 
“Down [in]to Hatti in … they will go” [KUR. KU]R?.HI.A URUMittanni–ya–[a]t–kan šani[-…] / [š]anhi nu–za hattanduš UN.HI.A-uš […] / [š]anheški kuiēš–man AŠŠUM [LÚ?/MUNUS?…-UT~ TIM] / [L]Ú.MEŠ≠pa±-ti-la-hi-ti-ia tiyawe[ni?] (end of col.; next col. broken away) “Search […] them, (namely) the [lan]ds of Mittanni; keep searching […] for 

244

wise people, whom we might (-man) install (tiyaweni from dai-) in […-ship] and (-ya) in the patilipriesthood” KBo 26.88 i 4-7 (frag. of the Kumarbi myth, NS), for the preceding context, see mieššar. 
Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 235-238; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 175; Melchert, CLL (1993) 175. 

Cf. LÚpatili-. 

LÚpatili-n. com.; (a priest w. purificatory functions); NH.† 
sg. nom. LÚpa-ti-li-iš KUB 9.22 ii 23, 28, 31, 38, 48, iii (4), 11, 16, 19, (24), 31, 42, 43, iv 3, KUB 43.38 rev. 31, KBo 
5.1 i 7, 14, ii 10, 55, iii 4, 10, 24, 43, iv 2, 9, 12, 24, KBo 17.69:7, 11, (15), KBo 24.126 rev. 7, ABoT 17 ii 12, (18), iii (4), 13, LÚpa-a-ti-li-iš KUB 9.22 ii (13), KUB 30.28 obv. (10), 24, (27), 31, rev. 1(!) [text LÚpa-a-ti-iš], KBo 17.64:(7), Bo 4951 rev. (6), 10 (StBoT 29:124f.), LÚpa-a-te-li-iš KUB 39.23 obv. (14), LÚpa-ti-liš KUB 26.66 iii 11, Bo 4876:9 (StBoT 
29:92 n. n), LÚba-a-ti-li-iš KBo 17.68:(8), KUB 44.58 rev. (3), VAT 6212 rev. 4 (StBoT 29:124 n. f), [LÚb]a?-ti-li-iš KBo 
3.62:7. dat.-loc. LÚba-a-t[i-li-ia?] KUB 44.58 rev. 4. pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-le-e-eš KUB 9.22 ii 36, KBo 5.1 iii 
49, KBo 17.70 obv. 2, LÚ.MEŠpa-a-ti-le-eš KBo 17.67:4, LÚ.MEŠba-ti-le-e-eš Bo 4951 rev. 18 (StBoT 29:126f.). 
gen. ŠA LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-le-e-eš KBo 5.1 ii 46, LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-liia-aš Bo 7953 iii 9 (StBoT 29:237). 
dat.-loc. LÚ.MEŠpa-a-[ti-li-i]a-aš KBo 17.65 rev. 23, ANA LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-le-e-eš KUB 9.22 ii 44, LÚpa-ti-li-ia-aš Bo 4876:5 (StBoT 29:92 n. j). 
Akkadographic LÚpa-ti-li KBo 5.1 i 1, iv 41, LÚba-a-ti-[li] KUB 44.58 rev. 4. 
a. in rituals — 1' birth rituals: (When the birth-stool is damaged by a woman in labor, but the birth has not yet occurred) nu LÚpa-ti-li-iš harnāu šarā dā
i UNU_TEMEŠ–ya–kan kue andan n–at šaradāi n–at–kan mahhan KÁ-aš parā arnuzi nu KÁaš peran 1 MUŠEN ANA dAlitapara warnuzi 1 MUŠEN–ma ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URU-LIM war~ nuzi § namma harnāu UNU_TEMEŠ–ya šinapšiya pēdāi n–at arahza dammili pedi dāi nu–za–kan MUNUS-TUM andan–pat hāši “Then the p.-priest takes up the birth-stool, and he also takes up the utensils which are in it. And when he has brought them out through the gate, then in front of (i.e., outside of) the gate he burns one bird for (the deity) Alitapara and one bird for the deities of the city. Further, he carries the birth-stool and the utensils to the šinapši and places them outside, in 

LÚpatili- b 
a virgin place. The woman then gives birth inside” KBo 5.1 i 7-14, ed. Pap. 2*f.; cf. the activities of the p.-priest throughout this text; [(n–ašta LÚpa-)]a-ti-li-iš MUŠEN.GAL KASKAL-ši [(hattar)]išanaš parā pēt[ai (n–an)] ANA DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ šipa[nti] “The p.-priest carries a ‘great bird’ to the crossroads and off[ers] it to the male gods” KBo 17.64:7-9 (“Hd”), w. rest. from the dupl. ABoT 17 iii 13-15 (“Hb”), ed. StBoT 29:115; nu MUNUS KA≈U–ŠU šuppiyahhi “(The p.-priest) consecrates/purifies the woman’s mouth” KUB 9.22 ii 30; (Various foods are lying ready) nu–za ŠA LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-le-e-eš halziššanzi “and they call them (the property) of the p.priests” KBo 5.1 ii 46-47; nu–z–(š)an damaiš LÚpa-tili-iš kupahin tarnāi nu ANA DINGIR-LIM menahhanda pūriya šipanti “Another p.-priest puts on a kupahi-headdress and sacrifices for puriya toward the deity” ibid. ii 10-12, cf. iii 4-7; also wuriya keltiya šipanti KBo 17.69:7-10. 
2' funerary contexts: [nam]ma–kan LÚpa-a-ti<li>-iš kuiš šuhhi šer nu–kan É-ri katta[nda] halzāi akkanza kuiš n–an–kan ŠUM–ŠU halziššāi ku<wa>p[i–war–aš] pait “Furthermore the p.priest who is on the roof calls dow[n] into the house — he keeps calling by name the one who has died: ‘Wher[e has he] gone?’” KUB 30.28 rev. 13, ed. HTR 96f.; LÚpa-a-ti-li-iš–ma kuēzz[a …] weškizzi n–an–za apΩ<š>–pat dΩ[i] “The p.-priest himself takes for himself the [… with] whi[ch] he laments” KUB 30.28 obv. 31-32, ed. HTR 96f. (ll. 39-40). 
b. in other contexts: nu–šši LÚpa-ti-li-iš šer aštaniyai maškann–a zankilatarr–a IŠTU É. LUGAL SUM-anzi “And on his behalf shall the p.priest perform a …? And shall they give a propitiatory gift and reparation from the house of the king?” KBo 24.126 rev. 7 (oracle question, NH); nu 1 MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR ANA MUNUS harnawaš µLulluš LÚpa-ti-liš pēdaš “And Lullu, the p.-priest, took one mina of silver to the woman of the birth-stool” KUB 26.66 iii 10-11 (inventory), ed. THeth 10:66f. Beckman (StBoT 29:237) cited an unpublished text (Bo 7953, col. iii) in which a number of p.-priests “are said to have transgressed their own rules of conduct (LÚ.MEŠpa-ti-li-ya-aš ša-ak-la-a-in — lines 9'-10') while performing an offering of harnai-.” 
245

He is associated w. MUNUSkatra-and LÚzup~ pariyala-(“torch bearer”) KBo 17.65 rev. 23; w. LÚ GIŠzuppari KBo 9.96 iv 6-7, and w. a MUNUSkatra-in KUB 9.22 ii 44. Elsewhere, the p.-priesthood is coupled w. another status introduced by Akk. AŠŠUM, which requires that the word following it be a logogram ending in -UTTIM, which rules out purely syllabic words like MUNUSkatra-and LÚzup~ pariyala-KBo 26.88 i 6-7. 
Attested personal names of bearers of this title are Lullu (KUB 26.66 iii 11), MANUS(L 60)-mi (hieroglyphic on seal impression SBo 2.73 no. 149 [title pa-tili- according to Meriggi, HhGl 96, and Laroche, HH 146 no. 278]), and Papanikri (KBo 5.1 i 1, iv 41). This latter person is said to be ŠA KUR URUKummanni (iv 42), which suggests a Kizzuwatnean origin for this profession, an impression that is strengthened both by LÚ.MEŠpatilahi(t-)“patili-hood” (q.v.), which is a Luw. abstract in -ahi(t-), and by the entire context of KBo 26.88 i 4-7 (above, s.v. LÚ.MEŠpatilahit-). 
The functions of this type of priest seem to have been chiefly purificatory, often in rituals dealing w. life crises such as birth (e.g., CTH 476, 477) and death (e.g., CTH 488). 
Three observations can be made from KBo 
26.88 i 4-7 (see LÚ.MEŠpatilahit-). (1) “wise people” are needed for patili-priesthood, by which training or professional skill might be in view. (2) Since the speaker commands a search of all the Mittanni lands for persons to become patilipriests, that type of priest was probably at home in the Hurrian lands. (3) Since haddanteš LÚ.MEŠuš “wise men” occurs in the proem of the Song of Silver (HFAC 12 i 8, ed. Hoffner, FsOtten™ 144f.), it is possible that KBo 26.88 belongs to that story. 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 57f.; Ehelolf, OLZ 32 (1929) 322f.; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 253-255; Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 235-238. 
patteššar (or: pitteššar) n.; excavation, pit, hole in the ground, breach (in a wall); from OH/ NS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pát-te-eš-šar KUB 7.41 i 6, 8 (MH/ENS or MS?), KBo 13.101 i 24, 25 (NS), KBo 1.42 iii (7) (NH). 
d.-l. pát-te-eš-ni KBo 13.156 obv. (9) (OH/NS), KUB 24.9 ii 26 (MH/NS), KBo 10.45 i 35 (MH/LNS), KBo 11.10 iii 6, 

patteššar b 2' 

KBo 11.72 ii 5 (both MH?/NS), KUB 12.44 iii 4, (16), KUB 
44.61 rev. 10 (both NH), KBo 13.101 i 9, KBo 22.164:5, KUB 
12.51 i? 20 (all NS), pát-te-iš-ni KBo 11.72 ii 3 (MH?/NS). pl. d.-l. pát-te-e[š-na-aš] ( or sg. d.-l. pát-te-e[š-ni]) KUB 
12.44 iii (16). 
[p]át-te-eš-ši(-ma), cited unpublished in Otten ZA 54:122f. (ii 10, “in das Loch”), 148, is [p]é-te-eš-ši “in its place” in the copy KUB 41.8 i 39; the locative of patteššar would be pát-te-eš-ni. 
(Sum.) gú.gìr = (Akk.) pé-el-šú = (Hitt.) pát-te-eš-[šar] “hole, breach (in a wall)” KBo 1.42 iii 7 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 

	13:137. 

	a. the result of digging (padda-, q.v.): tekan URUDUAL paddai pát-te-eš-šar URUDUMAR-it [liš~ šaizzi(?)] § ANA 4 halhaldummariya QA_TAMMA paddai ha[šši tapušza] QA_TAMMA–pat paddai pát-te-eš-šar–ma URUDUgullubi[t …] “(The exorcist) digs the ground with a hoe and [clears(?)] the (resulting) pit with a spade; at the four corners he likewise digs, and [beside] a he[arth] he likewise digs, and […-s] the (resulting) pit with a copper gullubi” KUB 7.41 i 6-8 (rit., MH/ENS or MS?), ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f.; unfortunately the second verb, which takes pat~ teššar as its object is lost in both lines; “Where a vineyard has gates” nu KÁ-aš EGIR-an kē¢¢kan

z kezzi–ya tepaddahhi n–ašta kēz kēzzi pát-te-eš-ni anda 3 GIŠhatalkiš tittanummi “I dig the ground behind the gate, on this side and that, and I stand three hawthorns in the (resulting) excavation on this side and that” KUB 12.44 iii 2-5 (rit. NH); namma–ya–kan ANA GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN anda kuwapitta parā 9 AŠRA padda[hhi?] § nu NINDA ‰.E.DÉ.A iyanza n–ašta pát-te-e[š-na-aš] (or pát-te-e[š-ni]) anda NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A išhuwannah[hi] “Then [I] dig nine spots in addition at several places in the vineyard. § The oil cake is prepared. I scatter the oil cake into the (resulting) excav[ation]” KUB 12.44 iii 14-17 (rit., NH); cf. also iii 4-5 | sg. “excavation” used as collective for several pits? (see previous ex.). 
b. various uses — 1' breaking sacrificial bread alongside a pit (p. tapušza/tapuša): nu pát-te-eš-ni tapušza 1 NINDA.SIG ANA dMarwayan paršiya “She (the Old Woman) breaks a thin bread for Marwayan at the side of the pit” KUB 24.9 ii 26-27 (rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:34f.; [… pá]t-te-eš-ni tapuša KBo 13.156 obv. 9 (rit.). 
2' cutting up sacrificial animals over a pit to catch the blood: nu–kan MÁŠ.GAL arkanzi nu 

246

šuppa hu[ešu] / [S]AG.DU G‰R.MEŠ UZUGAB UZUZAG.LU pát-te-eš-ni šer [kuranzi] “They butcher a male goat, and [cut off(?)] the r[aw] meat, the head, legs, breast and shoulder over the pit” KBo 13.101 i 8-9 (rit.). 
3' placing offerings down in a pit for the infernal deities: (The exorcist holds a lamb) nu–ššan pát-te-eš-ni GAM-anta hu[k]zi “and he slaughters it down into a pit” KBo 10.45 i 35 (rit., MH/LNS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:120f. (i 42); cf. KBo 11.72 ii 5; n–an–kan pát-te-eš-ni kattanta [ti-a]n-zi “And they [put] it (i.e., the pig) down into the pit” KUB 36.83 i 4-5 (rit.). 
Near synonyms are ābi- and hatteššar. The same uses of the pit as described in usage b are documented for the ā
bi. For the vocalization of the first syllable see padda-“to dig.” 

Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 227f. 
Cf. padda- A. 

[≠pa±-te-iš-ši] KUB 53.15 ii! 6, read ≠kat±!-te-iš-ši. 
[pa-a-du-wa[…]] KUB 33.34 obv. 2 (myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 66, read pa-a-<an>-du–wa “Let them go.” 
[pattuanzi] […]x GIŠ G´D TU-D[I-T]I pát-tu-anzi KUB 42.89 obv. 11; [… TU-D]I-TI pát-tu-an-zi ibid. rev. 2 (list, NS) is the inf. of padda-“to dig,” q.v.; cf. EGIR-ŠU–ma–za TUDITTUM dā¢i
i nu apez padda

KUB 15.31 ii 12-13. 
¬padumma-n.; foot(?) (of a bed); MH/NS.† 

abl. ¬pa-du-um-ma-az-zi(-ia) KUB 24.11 ii 26, KUB 24.10 ii (5) (both MH/NS). 
GIŠNÁ-šaš–šan S´Gešaran kitkarza ¬pa-du-umma-az-zi-ia (dupl. C [¬pa-du-um-ma-a]z-zi-ia, A and E I-NA RA-AB/P-ŠI) hamanki “She (the Old Woman) binds ešara-wool (or: a woollen ešara) at the head and foot(?) of the bed” KUB 24.11 ii 2526 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 24.10 ii 4-5 (C), KUB 24.9 ii 46-47 (A), and KBo 10.41:4-5 (E), ed. THeth 2:38f. (“in der Breite”). 
¬padummazzi–ya is probably abl. of a noun ¬padumm(a?)-. Despite the Glossenkeil the word is not necessarily Luw. Its abl. ending is Hitt., the 

GIŠpaddur 
Luw. abl. ending being -ati. For the abl. ending -azzi (from earlier -ati) in protected, non-final position see kez … kezzi–ya. 
The opposite to kitkarza “at the head” (an adv. also derived from an abl.) would be “at the foot.” One suspects therefore that this word is from pada- “foot” w. a derivational suffix -umma-, as Akk. šēpētu “foot (of a bed)” is a derived form of šēpu “foot.” 
The Akk. variant INA RAB/PŠI is problematic. That the correct Akk. word for “width” ought to be rupšu would not be an insurmountable problem, since one could simply assume the scribe had a defective knowledge of Akk. But the opposite of “at the head” ought not to be “in its width” (for which also one would expect a Luw. form of palh-“wide,” DLL 77), but “at its foot.” In Akk. texts the opposite of the “head (of a bed)” is šē¢
petu “foot (of a bed),” not any word which resembles rab/pšu. Provisionally, we must consider the Akk. variant as semantically worthless and base our translation on the word padumma-and the expected opposition w. kitkarza. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 81; Oettinger, KZ 99 (1985) 51 n. 50; Melchert, CLL (1993) 175. 
Cf. pata-, GIŠpatiyalli-. 
GIŠpaddur n. neut.; mortar(?); OH?/NS.† 
sg. nom-acc. GIŠpád-du-ur KBo 10.37 i 23 (OH?/NS), GIŠpád-dur KBo 10.37 i 18, (52), 56, ii 34, 35, iii 16 (OH?/ NS). 
d.-l. GIŠpát-tu-ni-i KBo 10.37 ii 44 (OH?/NS), GIŠpád-duni-i ibid. i (17), 29, 48, 51 (OH?/NS). 
Akk. ina GIŠNÀGA tahaššal “you pound in a mortar(?)” is glossed by Luw. ˚mamanašati battunāti “(s)he pounds
ti puwawith a ˚mamanaš(a)-mortar(?)” KUB 37.1 obv. 15-16, ed. Köcher, AfO 16:48, 50, see comment ibid. 54, and Friedrich, AfO 19:94. 
Aside from the occurrence in the bil. passage from KUB 37.1 obv. 15-16, paddur only occurs in the rit. KBo 10.37 (rit. against curse, OH?/NS). In that text there is an aššu GIŠpaddur “good paddur” (i 23, ii 35, 46) and a TUKU.TUKU-aš (HUL-lu) GIŠpad~ dur “(evil) p. of wrath” (i 48, 52, 56, ii 34). Various evils, occasionally referred to as “evil tongues” (i 33, 41), are separated (tuhš-) from the sacrificer 
247

(who is called a DUMU-RU “child” in i 58) and placed in a paddur (i 29-30), probably the one elsewhere called the “(evil) paddur of wrath” (i 48, 52, 56, ii 34). Other items, called aššaweš EME.MEŠ “good tongues” (ii 37), are contained in the “good paddur” (i 50-52) and are waved over the DUMU: nu TUKU.TUKU-aš HUL-lu GIŠpád-dur katta dāi nu–za āššu GIŠpád-dur daī“(The practitioner) puts down the evil mortar(?) of wrath, takes the good mortar(?), (waves it over the DUMU, and recites an incantation)” ii 34-35; (After the practitioner has said his incantation for the DUMU, they carry the “good paddur” off, dig in the ground (ii 49), manipulate foodstuffs, and speak further incantations (ii 52); then in the next column a practitioner urges the gods to give life, health, longevity and other benefits to the DUMU, and then) GIŠpád-dur-makán apiy[a] / [AN]A A[.Š]À mar[iyan]ī šuhhai “he/ she pours (the contents of) the mortar(?) there onto the mariyani-field” iii 16-17. We are not told whether this paddur is the “good” or the “evil” one, although it seems to have been the “good” one in ii 46 that was carried out to the field. 
The choice of the vocalization pád/t-is based on the assumption that GIŠp. is identical w. Luw. ba-attu-na-a-ti KUB 37.1 obv. 16, cf. Laroche, RHA XXIII/76:48. But the vocalization of this Hitt. cognate to Luw. battunati could still be an i, since Hitt. e/i sometimes corresponds to Luw. a (DLL §16, p. 134). 
GIŠGAZ/KUM, pronounced *naga, is Akk. esittu, see CAD E 337 s.v. esittu A (“pestle”) and AHw 250 s.v. esittu (“(Mörser-)Stöšel”) and see Starke, KZ 95:156 n. 62 (battun“Stöšel”). The correct interpretation as “mortar” goes back to Landsberger, Date Palm (= AfO Beiheft 17) 56 n. 200, cf. Borger, Zeichenliste no. 192 (GIŠNÀGA = Akk. esittu “Mörser”). 
Köcher, AfO 16 (1952) 54 (correctly Luw. battun- “Mörser”); Friedrich, AfO 19 (1959-60) 94 (Luw. battun- “Mörser”); Goetze, JCS 16 (1962) 30 (“seems to be a variant of (GI)pattar;” mistakenly cites spelling GIŠpa-ad-du-ur); Laroche, RHA XXIII/76 (1965) 48 (compares Luw. battun“mortier, pilon,” w. Hitt. GIŠpaddur); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 210 w. n. 12 (“variant term [of (GI)pattar]”); Starke, KZ 95 (1981) 156 n. 62 (Luw. battun- “Stöšel”); Kammenhuber, HW™ 1 (1984) 503a (“p.-Gefäš”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 175 (“(a container of some sort)” <? *padd-/ patz(a)- “carry” (?)). 

[pa-du-uš-mi-it] 

patturi- (or pitturi-) n. com.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
sg. nom. pát-tu-ri-iš KUB 19.20 rev. 17 (Šupp. I). 
pl. acc.? pát≠-tu-ri±-[uš?] KUB 36.95 ii 4 (NS). 
(Šupp. I writes to the Pharaoh:) […]x ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ walluškiši … [kui]t mekki memiškiši nu–ššan nepiši / […-]ma pát-tu-ri-iš mašiwanza nu tuqqa / [KARAŠ? apeniššu]wan “You boast about […] (and) horses. … What you call much […]. But in heaven there is a … the size of a p. And your [army? is th]us” KUB 19.20 rev. 12, 16-18 (letter, Šupp. I), ed. van den Hout, ZA 84:66f., 69f. (reading pitturiš), Forrer, Forsch. II/1:30 (read: [… na-a]š-ma pát-tu-ri-iš); (They sing various songs; all of them bow down) [katta]n–ma–šši / [… p]aššelus pát≠tu-ri±[-uš? išhui]škanzi “they [strew] pebbles (and?) p.-s [at] his [feet]” KUB 36.95 ii 3-4 (frag. of unkn. nature, NS). 
The exx., although fragmentary, seem to indicate that a p. was an object of small size, since in festival texts they strew at the feet of the king small things like balls (purpuruš) of dough or bread, bits of cheese (GA.KIN.AG paršan), and fruits (GIŠINBIHI.A). 
This word should be kept apart from LÚpidduribecause of the lack of det. and the different spelling (i.e., LÚpí-id- vs pát-/pít). 
Otten, MDOG 94 (1963) 15 n. 34 (separates from LÚpidduri-); Imparati, RHA XXXII (1974) 73 w. nn. 102, 103; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 436f.; van den Hout, ZA 84 (1994) 78f. (the last four connect this word w. LÚpidduri-). 
pΩdušhi, paduši, wadušši (Hurr. offering term); NS.† 
tiyari pa-a-du-uš-h[i] IBoT 2.27 i 5 (list of Hurr. gods, NH), w. par. tiyari pa-du!(text -ap-)-š[i] KBo 11.5 i 26 (rit., NS); tiyarra waa-du-uš-ši KBo 20.119 i 22, all trans-lit. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:111f. 
paduši see pādušhi. 
[pa-du-uš-mi-it] KUB 43.60 i 17 read kad-du-ušmi-it; cf. the shape of PA ibid. i 5, 11, 16, and passim. 

248

paddušriya n. (Hurr. offering term); NS.† 

(He offers bread and libates to)… iddušhiya pa-ad-du-uš-ri-ia KUB 7.51 rev. 15 (Kizz. rit., NS), ed. Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:111 but mistranslit. pa-ad-du-uš-hi-ia. 

Laroche, GLH (1979) 198. 

padudileš n. or adj.? (mng. unkn.); pre-NH/NS.† nu NUMUN.HI.A kue hū
man šanhuta NINDA. GUR›.RA.HI.A hūrīēš pūrpuriēš išnaš NINDA (or: 4) IM pa-du-di-le-e-eš ašaraš mitiēš GIpad~ dani–ššan kue kitta “Seeds, all of which were toasted (šanhuwanta), thick loaves, hūrīeš¢, balls of dough, …, p., (and) a red band — what things are placed in a basket” KBo 4.2 i 62-64 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:92, 97. Kronasser translates p. as a noun modified by colors “die weišen und roten Wollfäden”; HW™ 1:384a translates ašaraš miteš “rotes Band,” which makes p. either an independent item in the list, or an adj. modifying it. 
p. is either sg. nom. of a stem padudili-, or pl. nom. of padudila/i-. 
Kronasser, Die Sprache 8 (1962) 104f. (“‘Wollfaden’ (o.ä.)”); Tischler, HdW (1982) 63 s.v. padudila- (“‘Wollfaden’ o.ä.”). 
[pawant-] in N´G.HAR-aš pawant-HW 166, read NINDAharšpawant-. See AlHeth 154f. 

pawarri-Luw. v.; to light a fire; NH.† 
pret. sg. 3 pa-wa-ar<-ri>-it-ta KUB 14.20 i 11 

INA URUPittag[aišša t]uzziyanun nu–za mah~ [h]a[n] KARAŠ.HI.A–ma pa-wa-ar<-ri>-it-ta dU NIR.GÁL[–ma–mu] EN–YA parā handatar nam~ ma tetkušnun (scribal error for tetkušnut) nu GEﬂan hūmandan heuwaneškit¢ ≠nu± IMBARU–ya dāiš nu–kan namma LÚ.KÚR ŠA KARAŠ pahhur UL aušta “I, (My Majesty,) encamped in Pittaga[išša]. But when the army lit the camp fires, the mighty Stormgod, my lord, showed(!) [me] (his) divine power again: it rained all night, and he laid a fog as well; so the enemy no longer could see the camp fires” KUB 14.20 i 10-13 + KBo 19.76 i 23-26 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 194f., tr. Otten, AfO 22:113. 
The mention of the enemy no longer being able to see the camp fires immediately after the action 

piyanΩi
pawarritta argues in favor of Neu’s (StBoT 12:48 n. 20) suggested translation. Although the word has no marker, its Luw. character has been recognized by Oettinger and Starke. 
Götze, AM (1933) 195, 266 (“biwakieren(?)”); Otten, AfO 22 (1968) 113 (“Biwak beziehen”); Neu, StBoT 12 (1970) 48 n. 20 (“Feuer machen,” but ending not Luw.); Oettinger, MSS 34 (1976) 102f. (“Feuer machen”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 570f. (< Luw. noun pāhur¢ “fire”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 175. 
pazahanašši-see parzahanašši-. 
pazzanant-part. or adj.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
Describing a chair: “One complete kešhi-chair (lit. one set of chairs), six šekan in height” n–at 2ŠU pa-az-za-na-a-an “it is twice/doubly p.-ed” KUB 29.4 i 29 (transfer of the Goddess of the Night, NH), ed. Schw. Gotth. 8f. As Kronasser observed, this shows the high quality of the chair (“doubly …-ed”). We think of doubly secured, doubly polished, etc. 
Kronasser, Schw. Gotth. (1963) 43 (“‘geleimt’ o.ä. ? Vgl. doppelt genäht”); idem, EHS 1 (1966) 568 (“doppelt geleimt, gefalzt (?? o.ä.)”); Xacatrjan, VONA 12 (1963) 92f. (“perekopannyj, izvajannyj” = Engl. “scooped, carved”). 
GIŠpazzi[-…] n.; (a tree, its wood, or a wooden object); OH?/NS.† 
GIŠpa-az-zi-[o-o?-i]a GIŠkalmušatiya KUB 28.9 rev. 10b + KUB 44.60 iii 9 (Hattic bil. frag., OH?/NS). 
Ertem, Flora (1974) 162. 
pazim[-…-]iš; (epithet of the Kaškaean Storm-god); MH/MS.† 
dU pa-zi-im-x[…]-iš KUB 23.77a obv. 14 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer, 117. 
pË see pË har(k)-. 
[-pe] Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 216f. see -pat. 
piya-see piye-. 
piyanΩi-, pËyanai-v.; to reward (someone); from OH/NS and MH/MS. 
pres. sg. 1 pí-ia-na-a-mi KUB 31.103:29 (MH/MS), pí-iana-mi KBo 9.96 i 14 (NH); sg. 3 pí-ia-na-a-iz-zi KBo 17.65 rev. 64, l.e. 7 (MH?/MS?), KUB 29.4 iii 10 (NH), KUB 27.49 
249

iii 13, KBo 29.87 rev. 16 + KBo 7.39 rev. 9, pí-ia-na-iz-zi KBo 
17.65 l.e. 5 (MH?/MS?), KBo 6.5 iv 22 (OH/NS), KUB 27.2 
iii 6, KUB 30.40 iii 1, pí-i-ia-na-iz-zi KBo 14.133 iii 11 (NH). 
pl. 3 pí-ia-na-an-z[i] KUB 41.28 ii 14. 
pret. sg. 3 pí-ia-na-it KBo 22.3:6 (OH/NS), KUB 19.5 obv. (22) (NH), pí-ia-na-a-it KBo 16.43:5, KUB 19.5 obv. 22 (NH). 
imp. pl. 2 [pí-i]a-na-at-te-en KBo 16.61 i 6 (NS). 
inf. pé-e-ia-na-u-wa-an-zi KUB 11.13 v 14, pí-ia-na-u-wa
an-zi KUB 2.5 ii 24, KUB 25.3 iv 41, pí-ia-na-u-an-zi KUB 
10.13 iv 5 (OH?/NS), KUB 51.80 rt. col. 7, IBoT 2.139 obv. 5. [for sup. pí-ia-an-ni-wa-an KBo 8.42 rev. 3 (OS), see pai-B]. iter. pret. pl. 1 pí-i-ia-ni-iš-ki-nu-un KUB 14.15 iv 25 
(Murš. II). 
broken pí-ia-ni[(-)…] KBo 18.83:15. 
The /e/ vocalization of the first syll. is assured by pé-e-ia-na-u-wa-an-zi KUB 11.13 v 14. It is unclear whether pí-i-ia-niiš-ki-nu-un KUB 14.15 iv 25 is for /piyani…/ or /peyani…/. If the latter, the graph -i-ya-would then be analogous to the -uwa-in the writings of the sup. (e.g., pí-iš-ki-u-wa-an for /piš~ kiwan/). 
a. in hist., law, administrative texts: “If someone finds implements, [he shall give] them back [to their] owner” [(ap„)]n pí-ia-na-iz-zi “(The owner) shall reward him (i.e., the finder)” KBo 6.5 iv 22 (Laws §45, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 58 (NS), ed. HG 30f., Imparati, Leggi 62f.; (Muršili II sends a message to Manapa-Tarhunta:) “Your brothers chased you from your land; I gave orders to the men of Karkiša concerning you” namma–wa–tta LÚ.MEŠ URUKarkiša šer pí-i-ia-ni-iš-ki-nu-un “and I furthermore rewarded (iter.) the men of Karkiša (for giving protection and support) for you, (but despite this you have betrayed me)” KUB 14.15 iv 25, ed. AM 68f.; cf. also presumably [piyanišk]inun KUB 14.15 iv 15; š–uš pí-ia-na-it “and he rewarded them” KBo 
22.3:6 (Syrian wars, OH/NS); […] / pí-ia-na-a-mi “I will reward […]” KUB 31.103:28-29 (instr. in the format of a sealed land grant, MH/MS); […]x dUTU-ŠI pí-iana-a-it KBo 16.43:5; “But when we arrived in Hattuša, … he said the following”: 2 LÂM PA. ŠE.HI.A-x[ dΩtten nu …] / [pí-i]a-na-at-te-en “[Take(?)] 2000 PARÂSU of grain, [and] reward [the …]” KBo 16.61 i 5-6 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:60f. (“‘Zweitausend Halbmaš Gerste … […] sollt ihr mir <als Schmiergeld> zahlen!’”), but the trace after ŠE.HI.A cannot be -m[u], and since no personal obj. for piyanai-is expressed in the clause w. the grain, we suggest two short clauses, w. p. taking a person or persons as its obj. in the second clause. 

piyanΩi- d 

	b. in a vow: [… K]Ù.≠GI±-za pí-ia-na-mi “[…] with [go]ld I will reward […]” KBo 9.96 i 14 (vow, Muw. II), ed. de Roos, Diss. 286 and cf. pp. 52-55. 
	c. in a letter: (Piyamaradu said to Atpa:) tuk– wa dU-u[p?-aš o pí-i]a-na-it “The Stormgod(?) has rewarded you” KBo 19.79 obv. 9 + KUB 19.5 obv. 22 (NH), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JEOL 28:39f. 
	d. in rituals and festivals: [… šipa]nti kuiš n–an EN S´SKUR pí-ia-na-a-iz-zi kuit–ši Ωššu “The sacrificer rewards the one who libates (with) whatever (seems) good to him” KBo 17.65 rev. 64 (birth rit., MH?/MS?), ed. StBoT 29:144f. (“pays a fee”); namma–aš 3 BAL (or: 3 pal<-ši>) pí-[i]a-na-iz-zi kuit–š[i Ωššu] “Again he rewards them (-aš) (with) three libations(?) (or: on the third occasion?), according to what seems [right] to him” KBo 17.65 l.e. 5; cf. […-k]uwa–pat pí-ia-na-a-iz-zi ibid. 7; namma–aš pí-ia-n[a-…] ibid. 8; “[…] speaks thus to the husband of the sacrificer”: MUNUS-an DINGIRLUM IÙBAT nu–war–an–za apΩš dΩi n[u–wa] EN.SISKUR pí-i-ia-na-iz-zi kuit–ši Ωššu nu[–wa– šši …] pΩi “‘The god will seize the woman and take her for himself. He will reward the sacrificer (i.e., the woman) as seems right to him, and he will give [her …].’ (Then the sacrificer stands before the god)” KBo 14.133 iii 10-12 (rit.?, NH); pí-ia-naiz-zi kuit–ši Ωššu KUB 30.40 iii 1-2 (hišuwaš fest.); nu B´LTI É-TI LÚ.MEŠEN DINGIR.MEŠ pí-ia-na-a-izzi kuinza(nasalized abl.?)–kan imma kuËz duškizzi “The lady of the house rewards the ‘lords-of-thedeities’ (priests) with whatever she pleases; (they bow and take them)” KUB 27.49 iii 13-14 (witaššaš fest.); “Inside they offer for wellbeing before the deity” nu EN.S´SKUR DINGIR-LAM LÚSANGA MUNUS.MEŠkatrešš–a pí-ia-na-a-iz-zi “The sacrificer rewards the deity, the priest and the katra-women” KUB 29.4 iii 8-10 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 22f. (differently); cf. KUB 45.3 iv 24 (rit. of Geziya, pre-NH/MS?); […] MUNUS.MEŠ DINGIR-LIM–ya pí-ia-na-iz-zi “and he rewards/pays [the …-s] and the women of the deity” KUB 44.52:16 (rit.); cf. … wašš„wanzi NINDAwagata piyanna KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI pí-ia-na-u-wa-an-zi (var. … waššuwanti NINDAwagatan KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI pianna) “(The Chief Guard announces to the king) the dressing, the giving of wagata-bread, and the rewarding (with) silver and 

250

gold (var. ‘the dressing, the giving of w.-bread, silver and gold’)” KUB 2.5 ii 22-24, w. dupl. KUB 25.1 iii 46-47; cf. also waššutri waššuwanzi KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI pé-e-ia-na-u-wa-an-zi KUB 11.13 v 12-14 (all ANDAHŠUM fest.); LÚSANGA LÚtazel LÚGUDU⁄¤ LÚham[enann–a …-]it pí-ia-na-an-z[i] “They reward the priest, the tazel, the ‘anointed one’ [and] the chamberlain with […]” KUB 41.28 ii 12-14; nam~ ma LÚ.Ékarimnal[a- …] / TÚGšaštaz šarΩ arnua[nzi (or: arnu[zzi]) n–aš LUGAL(?)-i] peran tiezzi nu ap„[n LUGAL-uš(?)] / pí-ia-na-a-iz-zi šarΩ–an kui[š arnuzzi] / nu–šši naššu KUŠE.SIR.HI.A našma [… pΩi] “Then they arouse the temple servant (or: the temple servant arouses …) from bed, and he stands before [the king(?)]. And [the king(?)] rewards him, and [gives(?)] to the one who rouses him either shoes or […]” KBo 29.87 rev. 11-17 + KBo 

7.39 rev. 6-9; cf. KUB 10.13 iv 5, ed. maniyahh-3 a 2'. 

On the semantic level it is important, in view of the occasional translation of p. by “give gifts” (cf. Archi, FsLaroche 46f., cited above on KBo 22.1 rev. 28 “il te fera des cadeaux”), to stress that the assembled evidence indicates that the v. always expresses the idea of rewarding or paying someone for services rendered or expected. It is not used for simple gifts which expect nothing in return. For this, one uses pai-B “to give” (cf. usage b). The direct object of 
p. is the person receiving the reward. The reward itself is usually expressed in the instrumental. 
Friedrich, SV 2 (1930) 23 n. 2 (undecided whether this is pai“to give” + -ann-or a separate v.; correctly understands the mng. in law §45 as “(mit Finderlohn) beschenken”); Walther, HC (1931) 254f. (“reward”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 169 (lemma pi¥anΩi-“beschenken, belohnen, mit Finderlohn bedenken”; still uncert. whether perhaps dur. to pai-“to give”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 81 w. n. 64 (identifies separate stems pi¥ann¥e-hhi [pi¥e-hhi “to give” + productive stem ending ¿ann¥e-] and pi¥anae-in the older language and translates both “beschenken,” while not committing himself to the priority of either), 368 (pi¥anae-“beschenken” is perhaps pi¥e-hhi “to give” + productive stem ending ¿anai-). 

Cf. pai-B “to give.” 
piyanazziya-v. mid.; to be rewarded. 

pres. sg. 2 pí-ia-na-az-zi-at-ta KBo 22.1:28; pl. 3 [pí ?i]a?-na-az-zi-an-da KUB 40.76:8. 

piyanazziya
“You (magistrates) go to your district, and do not investigate the murder of a poor man. You (pl.) do not question his provision carriers. You (pl.) do the (wishes) of the rich man; you (sg.) go to his house; you (sg.) eat and drink” pí-ia-na-az-zi-at-ta “and you (sg.) are rewarded” KBo 22.1 rev. 28 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f. (“il te fera des cadeaux”), Melchert, Diss. 172f., cf. Starke, StBoT 23:33 (“Es wird reichlich zugeteilt,” taking piyanazziyatta as a mid. verb), 176, Melchert, Phon. 126, Oettinger, Stammbildung 81 n. 64 (“entweder Med. pi¥anazzi¥atta oder Akt. pi¥anazzi–at–ta”), HW™ 1:406a (“und er bezahlt dich”); Neu, AfO 31:99 (correctly as mid. pres. sg. 2); [… LÚš]ulluš–a kuiuš pÏwe[ni …] / [… pí ?-i]a?-na-az-zi-an-da “And the hostages […] which we give, […] they will be [re]warded(?)” KUB 40.76:7-8 (treaty fragment, MH/MS). 
pí-ia-na-az-zi-at-ta KBo 22.1:28, was read as mid. pres. sg. 3 by Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 33 (“Es wird reichlich zugeteilt”), and mid. pres. sg. 2 by Neu, AfO 31 (1984) 99 (without translation, but presumably implying “you are rewarded”). Neu’s interpretation makes slightly better sense than Starke’s and allows for the standard translation “to reward” (instead of “zuteilen”) for the active. Neu added [pí-i]a-na-az-zi-an-da KUB 40.76:8, which he interpreted as mid. pres. pl. 3, and defended the formation on the basis of šunni/az~ zi(y)a-“übervoll sein.” Oettinger, Stammbildung 81 n. 64, allowed for either interpretation of KBo 22.1:28, although his analysis piyanazzi–at–ta instead of piyanazzi–a–tta contradicts the pattern of the active verb which takes the person rewarded as accusative. Although there is no duplicate of KUB 40.76:8 to establish Neu’s restoration, the general context is understandable and favors the translation “they will be rewarded.” Since the active of piyana(i)-takes the person rewarded in the accusative, a hypothetical *piyanazzi–an–da would mean “he will reward him for you” with an unusual, but not unparalleled writing of -ta with -da. The traces would also support a reading [… šu-u]n-na-az-zi-an-ta “they are/will be full,” the verb cited by Neu in StBoT 5:157 n. 1. But such a meaning seems inappropriate in the context of KUB 40.76, which deals with hostages. This means that the evidence for a middle verb piyanazziya-, although weak, is plausible. 
Neu, AfO 31 (1984) 99. 
251

NINDApiyantalli/a-n.; donated bread; from OS. sg. nom. NINDApí-ia-an-ta-al-li-iš KBo 17.29 iv 3, KUB 
35.126 obv.? (2) (both OS), KBo 11.36 v 8 (OH?/NS), KBo 
22.190:12 (pre-NH/NS), 665/u rt. col. 9 (Alp, Tempel 204), NINDApí-an-ta-[al-li-iš] KUB 58.27 ii 16, NIN[DApí-an-ta-]li-iš KBo 20.3 rev. 12 (OS), NINDApí-ia-an-tal-li-i[š] KBo 7.40 rev.? 7 (OH/NS). 
acc. NINDApí-ia-an-ta-al-la-an KUB 40.63 i 15 (LNS), [NINDAp]í?-an-tal-la-an KBo 38.39 rev. (5), 6. 
sg. or pl. NINDApí-an-ta-al-l[i-iš] KBo 20.21 obv. 8 (OS), NINDApí-ia-an-ta-al-li-iš KBo 26.56 + KBo 30.27 iv (8) (OS), KBo 12.66 + VAT 13583 (Bab 4:225) i 7 (NS), NINDApí-ia-antal-li-i[š] KUB 31.57 iv 14 (OH/NS). 
pl. acc.(?) NINDApí-an-tal-la-aš IBoT 2.93:2 (OH/NS), NINDApí-ia-tal-la-aš KBo 7.42 iv 15 (NS). 
NINDAp. occurs in lists together w. other varieties of breads and pastries. Quantities given range from one, e.g., KBo 11.36 v 8, KBo 20.3 rev. (12), 665/u rt. col. 9 (Alp, Tempel 204f.); four: KBo 25.16 rev.? 2; twenty-five: KBo 7.42 iv 15; fifty-four: KUB 41.36 i 6 + KBo 12.66 
+ VAT 13583 i 7; four or five hundred: KUB 31.57 iv 14; to one thousand: KBo 20.21 obv. 8, IBoT 2.93:2. 
(If you <priests> are able to eat and drink <the sacrificial offerings> in that day, then eat and drink them. But if you can’t) [n–at INA] UD.3. KAM azzikkitten akkuškitten [(NINDApí-ia-an-ta-alla-an-ma) šumeš ANA DAM].MEŠ–KUNU(text: –ŠUNU) DUMU.MEŠ–KUNU(text: –ŠUNU) SAG.GÉME.‰R.MEŠ–KU[NU(text: –ŠU[NU) lË pešteni] “then eat and drink [them over a period of] three days, but [don’t give] the p.-bread to yo[ur](!) wives, children or slaves” KUB 13.5 ii 8-9 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 40.63 i 15 (LNS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 34f. (“ba©ıī ekme©ini”); […]x ≠2± mΩriËš 2 NINDAp[í-an-ta-al-l]i-iš […] KBo 
25.56 + KUB 30.27 iv 8 (fest., OS), translit. StBoT 26:365; 1 NINDApí-ia-an-ta-al-li-iš 12-iš \ NINDAtunik 50-iš \ NINDAkΩharit 50-iš NINDA.‰.E.DÉ.A h„pparaš ANA zipatani 12–ŠU paiš KBo 11.36 v! 8-13 (KI.LAM fest.); 1 NIND[Apí-ia-an-ta-al]-li-iš 40-iš KBo 20.3 rev. 12 (KI.LAM, OS); (five hundred of one kind of bread, five hundred of another, one thousand of another) 1 LI<M> NINDAp[í]-an-ta-al-l[i-iš x-iš] “one thousand p.-breads” KBo 20.21 obv.? 8 (KI.LAM, OS); cf. 1 LIM NINDApí-an-tal-la-aš IBoT 2.93:2; again w. kaharit-bread: KBo 25.16 + KBo 20.7 rev.? 2 (KI.LAM); 
w. NINDAkaharit, NINDAZI.HAR.HAR, and NINDAša~ rama: KBo 7.40 rev.? 5-8 (fest.), KUB 41.36 i 6 + KBo 12.66 

*piyatar 

+ VAT 13583 i 7; [n]u IŠTU É MUNUS.LUGAL ANA LÚGUDU⁄¤ […] ANA MUNUSammama 3 UDU.HI.A […]x 25 NINDA.KU‡ 25 NINDApí-ia-tal-la-aš […] 3 DUG tawal pianzi “They give from the queen’s house to the GUDU⁄¤-priest and the ammamawoman three sheep, […], twenty-five sweet loaves, twenty-five p.-loaves, […], and three jugs of tawal-drink” KBo 7.42 iv 13-16 (fest. frag.). 
Size of loaves: 12-iš “twelve (units)” KBo 11.36 v 8; 20-iš KUB 58.67 vi 7; 30-iš KBo 12.66 + VAT 13583 i 7; 40-iš KBo 20.3 rev. 12. 
KUB 13.5 ii 8-9 suggests bread “donated” to the priests, which only they could eat. 
van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 128 (“a l’air d’être un dérivé du participe piyant- de pai- ‘donner’”); Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 177. 
piyaškattalla-, see pe/iškattalla-. 
*piyatar n.; giving; wr. SUM-tar; NH.† 
nom.-acc. neut. SUM-tar KUB 6.39 obv.? 6. 
gen. SUM-an-na-aš KBo 2.2 iv 22, 23, 27, 34, KBo 8.58:9. 
[d.-l. pí-ia-ni KBo 3.1 ii 60 (thus THeth 11:37 n. 1) is more likely a mistake for piyanna, inf. of pai-.] 
eni INIM SUM-an-na-aš kuit SI≈SÁ-at eni kuit INIM SUM-an-na-aš µKatapa-DINGIR-LIM IDI nu TE.MEŠ NU.SIGﬁ-du … NU.SIGﬁ § mΩn eni–pat INIM SUM-an-na-aš µKatapa-DINGIR-LIM kuin IDI namma–ma K[I.M]IN nu TE.MEŠ SIGﬁ-ru … SIGﬁ § pΩnzi aši INIM SUM-an-na-aš kišan iš~ hiulahhanzi “Concerning the aforementioned matter of giving which was ascertained, is it because Katapaili knows about the matter of giving? (If so) let the exta be unfavorable. … Unfavorable. § If it is only this aforementioned matter of giving, which is known to Katapaili, and there is nothing further, then let the exta be favorable. … Favorable. § Should they then proceed to give instructions (concerning?) the aforementioned matter of giving?” KBo 2.2 iv 22-35 (oracle questions); “They will give instructions on account of that matter as follows” mΩn–ma INIM SUM-an-na-aš apez arha hark[zi] “If as a result of that the matter of giving will disappear, (let the KIN-oracle be favorable)” KBo 8.58:9 (oracle question); [n]–at–ši–at–kan GUR

252

iš–ma kuiški ¬m[i?- …] / [m]Ωn GIG mΩn MUD mΩn SUM-tar x[…] “But if someone else [has …] it/them to him, whether sickness, bloodshed, or giving […]” KUB 6.39 obv.? 5-6 (oracle question). 

Cf. pai- B. 

pihaim(m)i-Luw. denom. adj.; (epithet and/or name of a stormgod); NH.† 
nom. pí-ha-i-mi-iš KUB 12.2 i 18, pí-ha-i-mi-i-iš ibid. iii 1, pí-ha-im-mi-iš KBo 4.10 obv. 53, pí-ha-im-me-iš AT 454 l.e. vi 1, dpí-ha-i-mi-iš KUB 38.6 iv (2), 11, KUB 38.10 iii 6. 

stem form pí-ha-i-mi KUB 38.12 iii 19. 
frag. pí-ha-a-e-m[i(-)…] KBo 26.161 iii 3. 

dU pí-ha-i-mi-i-iš NA›ZI.KIN “The Stormgod p.: a stela” KUB 12.2 iii 1, cf. pí-ha-i-mi-iš ibid. i 18 (cult inv., NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 76, 84; cf. 1 NA›ZI.KIN dU píha-im-me-iš AT 454 l.e. vi 1 (oracle question, NH); dpíha-i-mi-iš dU URUAššur KUB 38.10 iii 6 (cult inv., NH), translit. Rost, MIO 8:195; note the immediate juxtaposition to piha(m)mi-in: dU Kaštama dpí-ha-i-mi-iš dpí-ha-mi-iš dMilkuš ibid. iv 11, cf. ibid. + Bo 6741 iv 2, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:141. 
Starke, StBoT 31:314 n. 1089, describes pihaimma/ias deverbal from a hypothetical stem *piha¥i-and pihamma/i-from *piha-i. But they are more easily derived directly from the n., Melchert, CLL 176. As Starke showed, these two derived forms must be semantically distinct, since they occur as DNs in immediate juxtaposition. But the distinction may have been slight, somewhat analogous to English “joyful” and “joyous.” Both adjectives could mean simply “imbued with splendor/might (piha-),” the more original sense being “splendor” and the derived one “power, might.” 
Goetze, JCS 5 (1951) 72f.; Laroche, DLL (1959) 81; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 314f. w. n. 1089 (two semantically differentiated v. stems derived from the n. piha-“Glanz, Macht, Blitz”: piha¥i-> pihaimma(/i)- and piha-i > pihamma(i)-); Melchert, CLL (1993) 176 (“imbued w. splendor/might,” rejects Starke’s deverbal derivation); Singer, Muw.Pr. (1996) 56, 185. 

Cf. pihaššašši-, pihaddašši, PN Pihame. 
pË har(k)
piham(m)i-Luw. denom. adj.; (epithet and/or name of a stormgod); NH.† 
nom. pí-ha-mi-iš KUB 6.46 ii 31, KUB 6.45 i (66), KUB 
51.88 rt. col. 3, dpí-ha-am-mi[-iš] KBo 2.16 obv. 6 (NH), dpíha-mi-iš KUB 38.6 i 4 (NH), KUB 38.6 + Bo 6741 iv 2 (ZA 72:141), 11, KUB 38.10 iv 14. 
acc. pí-ha-am-mi-in KUB 18.6 i 24. Akkadographic gen. ŠA … pí-ha-mi KUB 6.45 i 66 w. dupl. KUB 6.46 ii 31. 
dU pí-ha-mi-iš [(DINGIR.MUNUS-TUM ŠA)] ≠d±U pí-ha-mi ŠA URUŠanahuitta “The Stormgod p. and the goddess (consort?) of the Stormgod p. of Šanahuitta” KUB 6.46 ii 31 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.45 i 66, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 12, 34; cf. 1 GIŠKAPPU dZA.BA›.BA› 1 GIŠKAPPU dpí-ha-am-mi[-iš] “one (wooden) bowl (representing) Zababa, one (wooden) bowl (representing) dPihammi” KBo 2.16 obv. 6 (cult inv., NH); and cf. dpí-ha-mi-iš KUB 38.6 i 4 (cult inv., NH), translit. Rost, MIO 8:185; note immediate juxtaposition to pihai(m)mi-in: dU Kaštama dpíha-i-mi-iš dpí-ha-mi-iš dMilkuš ibid. iv 11, cf. ibid. + Bo 6741 iv 2, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:141; for another ex. of the stem piham(m)i-, see Msk 74.176:21, 45 (StBoT 31:314 n. 1089). 
For discussion and bibliography, see s.v. pihaim(m)i-. 
pË har(k)-v.; 1. to have or hold (in one’s possession), keep, keep possession of, 2. to hold ready, 3. to present, deliver, bring, 4. (associated adverbs, postpositions, and prev.); from OH/MS. 
pres. sg. 3 pé-e har-zi KUB 26.17 ii 12, 13 (MH/MS), KBo 
6.4 i 6, KUB 10.21 ii 34, KUB 10.54 ii 14 (all OH/NS), KBo 
4.9 vi 21 (OH?/NS), KBo 4.2 ii 25 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 11.38 i 21, KBo 11.52 i 11, KBo 13.237 obv. 11, KUB 25.1 ii 20, KUB 
25.16 i 24, KUB 51.57 obv. 10 (all NS), KBo 14.4 i 25 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 50 (Muw. II), KBo 2.13 rev. 3, KBo 23.1 i 11 (both NH). 
pl. 1 pé-e har-ú-e-ni KBo 12.42 rev. 5, (9), (14) (pre-NH/ ENS); pl. 2 pé-e har-te-ni KUB 13.4 i 52, iv (4), 37 (pre-NH/ NS); pl. 3 pé-e har-kán-zi KUB 27.16 i 21 (MH/MS), KUB 2.2 iv 18 (OH/NS), KBo 21.37 rev.? 4 (MH?/NS), KBo 14.129 rev. 12, KBo 29.72 rev. 12, KUB 9.17 obv. 8 (all ENS?), KUB 17.8 iv 28, 29 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 11.39 i 6, KBo 25.163 v 14, KUB 
11.21 ii 6, KUB 25.11 ii 11, KUB 46.28 rev. 21, IBoT 3.53:7 (all NS), KUB 21.15 iii 3 (Hatt. III), KUB 21.38 i 19 (Pud.), KUB 17.35 ii 17, KUB 25.25:8 (both Tudh. IV), KBo 12.38 i 23 (Šupp. II), KBo 2.13 obv. 12, KBo 15.2 i 18, KBo 26.182 i 8, KUB 16.27:7, KUB 49.90:14 (all NH). 
253

pret. sg. 1 pé-e har-ku-un KUB 26.92:8 (NH); sg. 3 pé-e har-ke-er KUB 18.21 ii 5 (NH), pé-e har-ker KUB 46.69 ii 10 (NS), KUB 19.37 iii 48 (Murš. II), KBo 18.22 obv. 10, KUB 
16.42 obv. 38, IBoT 2.129 obv. 12, 14 (all NH). 
imp. sg. 2 [pé-e har-ak HW 167 is not in our files]; sg. 3 pé-e har-d[u] KUB 26.25 ii? 4 (Šupp. II); pl. 2 pé-e har-tén KUB 13.4 iv 4, 38 (pre-NH/NS). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pé-har-kán (sic, i.e., pé<-e>?) KUB 16.83 obv. 49 (NH). 
1. to have or hold (in one’s possession), keep, keep possession of — a. obj. aššu “gods”: “If anyone kills a Hittite merchant for his goods, he must pay […] minas of silver and make threefold compensation for his goods” [mΩn] Ωššu–ma UL pé-e har-zi “But [if] he has no goods in his possession (and someone kills him in a quarrel, he must pay six minas of silver)” KBo 6.4 i 6 (Laws §III, NH), ed. HG 50f.; n[ašm]a ŠA B´<L>TUM Ωšš„ / [… p]é-e harzi našma a[nt]uhšan dayan wedai[zzi] / [našma da~ main LÚh]uyandan p[é-e harzi] našma GUD.HI.A UDU.HI.A / [wedaizzi] KUB 26.17 ii 12-15 (instr., MH/ MS); (Muršili I destroyed Babylon and then fought against the Hurrians) nu URUKÁ.DINGIR.RA-aš [(NAM.RA.MEŠ Ωššu–ššet URUHatt[u]ši)] pé-e har-ta “and kept the persons to be resettled and the goods of Babylon in Hattuša” (or mng. 3: “delivered/brought … to Hattuša”) KUB 11.1 i 29-30 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.1 i 29-30, ed. Chrest. 184f., THeth 11:18f. (“er brachte … mit”); [EGIR-anda–ma] KUR URUŠanhara [pait n–an harnikta nu ašš]„ URUHattuši pe-e [harta] “[But afterwards he (Muršili I) went] to Babylonia [and destroyed it, and ke]pt [its goo]ds in Hattuša” (or: “[deliv]ered/ [brou]ght [its goo]ds to Hattuša, mng. 3)” KUB 
26.74 i 10-11. 
b. obj. other moveables: “[…] they give continually” EGIR.KASKAL–ya–aš pé-e-pát har-kán-zi “and (on) the return trip they keep possession of them (i.e., the DINGIR.MAH.HI.A)” KBo 17.65 obv. 48 (birth rit., MH?/MS?), ed. StBoT 29:138f. (Text K); ANA µWalmu–ma kue GIŠ.HU[R.HI.A iyanun(?) n–at] µKARAŠ.ZA pé-e har-ta “Kuwalanaziti kept the documents which [I had made] for Walmu (and is now bringing them to you)” KUB 19.55 rev. 38 + KUB 
48.90 rev. 6 (Milawata letter, NH), ed. Hoffner, AfO Beiheft 19:131f.; “May they bring the documents to the lords of my land” nu–wa NAM.RA.MEŠ kuin 

pË har(k)- 1 c 

[GUD].MEŠ UDU.HI.A pé-e har-kán-zi nu–war– an–kan arha daškandu “and may they take away the persons to be resettled’s, cattle and sheep which they hold” KUB 21.38 i 19-20 (letter, Pud.), ed. Helck, JCS 17:89; ANA µZAG.ŠEŠ–ma kuit T˘UPPU INA É.GAL-LIM pé-e har-ku-un “The tablet which I kept in the palace for Bentešina, (was with Takuw[a(?)] the man of Ariyanta)” KUB 26.92 obv. 8 (letter, NH), ed. Laroche, Syria 31:105 (“je conservais”); “Then the Old Woman picks everything up and carries it out” UR.TUR–ma appuzziyaš LÚMUŠEN. DÙ pé-e har-zi “The augur holds/keeps the puppy (made) of tallow” KBo 4.2 ii 25 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:93, 97; NINDA.SIG–ya DUGKUKUB GEŠTIN ‰.DÙG.GA S´G SAﬁ pé-e har-zi “He also holds/keeps flat bread, a pitcher of wine, perfumed oil, and red wool (and uses them)” KBo 23.1 i 11 (rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 3:141, 149; nu–šmaš–at arha INA É.MEŠ–KUNU pé-e har-te-ni “And you keep them (food offerings) away from them (the gods) in your houses” KUB 13.4 i 51-52 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 30f. (“alıp götürürseniz”), Chrest. 150f.; […] wellu pé-e har-kán-zi nu Ú.SAL wara[ni] / [… H]UR.SAG.MEŠ pé-e har-kán-zi nu HUR. SAG.MEŠ wara[ntari] “They hold the meadow […], and the meadow burns; they hold the mountains, and the mountains burn” KUB 17.8 iv 27-28 (myth, pre-NH/NS). 
c. obj. territory or city: kuit–ma pé-e har-ta [n]– at–ši ABU–YA arha daškit “But my father took away from him (sc. the enemy) what (territory) he held in possession” KBo 14.13 iii 19-20 (DŠ frag. 14), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:67; (The king attacked an enemy city) n–an aššawaz QADU [NAM.RA].MEŠ GUD UDU pé-e har-ta “and held it together with its goods, civilian captives and livestock” KBo 14.3 iv 19-20 (DŠ frag. 15F); cf. KUB 14.4 i 25 (DŠ frag. 18A); našma LÚ.KÚR GUL-ahzi nu pé-e har-zi “… or if an enemy attacks and keeps possession (sc. of the conquered people and territory) …” KUB 21.1 iii 50 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:74f., tr. DiplTexts 86 (“holds (forces?) ready”); (After describing the victory over the Kaškaeans) URUHattušan–ma kuin pé-e har-ta n–an–kan arha dahhun “I took away from him (sc. the Kaškaean enemy) the Hittite territory that he 

254

had in his possession (and resettled it)” KBo 3.6 ii 10 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:12f. (ii 26). 
2. to hold ready: “Two palace servants bring to the king and the queen water for (washing) their hands in a golden basin” GAL DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL GAD-an EGIR-an–šamet pé-e har-zi “The chief of the palace attendants holds a linen ready behind them. (The king and the queen wash their hands, the chief of the palace attendants hands them the linen and they wipe their hands)” KBo 4.9 vi 20-21 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), tr. ANET 360; cf. KUB 
10.21 ii 33-34 (OH/NS), KUB 10.54 ii 13-17 (OH/NS), KUB 
25.16 i 22-24 (OH/NS), and KBo 11.38 i 19-21; “The table men and the cooks pick up the thick loaves” n–aš LUGAL-i peran pé-e har-kán-zi “and hold them ready before the king” KBo 11.39 i 5-6 (spring fest., NH?); GIŠzupparu lukkan pé-e har-kán-zi “They hold lighted torches ready” KUB 10.91 ii 9-10 (NH); cf. further exx. 4 d and g, below. 
3. to present, deliver, bring: “We, the merchants of Ura and Zallara will come” nu–wa iyata [t]amËta pé-e har-ú-e-ni “and we deliver/have on hand (mng. 1-2) plenty and abundance” KBo 12.42 rev. 4-5 (epic, pre-NH/ENS), ed. Hoffner, JCS 22:35f.; naššu kuit huelpi šumaš LÚ.MEŠAPIN.LAL DINGIR.MEŠaš pé-e ha[r-t]e-[ni n–a]t h„dΩk mehunaš mehuni pé-e har-tén “Whatever firstfruits you farmers present to the gods, present them promptly at the right time” KUB 13.4 iv 3-4 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 162f. (“bring”), Süel, Direktif Metni 74f. (“sunarsınız … sununuz”); nu–šši naššu AMAR SILA› MÁŠ.TUR našma UZUŠALÂTEMEŠ HAK~ [KUR]R¸TEMEŠ pé-e har-te-ni n–at lË ištanta~ nuškatteni mËh„naš–at mËh„ni pé-e har-tén “Or if to him (a god) you present either a calf, a lamb or a kid, or afterbirth(?) and HAKURR¸TE-flesh, do not delay them, present them at the right time” KUB 13.4 iv 36-38, ed. Chrest. 164f., Süel, Direktif Metni 80f.; “I made the towns Kapperi, Karaššuwa and Hurna tributaries” nu URUHattuši GEŠTIN-an arkamananni pé-e har-ker “and they presented/delivered wine to Hattuša for the purpose of tribute” KUB 19.37 iii 48 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 176f. (“hielten bereit”); nu–šmaš–kan kuin arkamman šarΩËpmi n– an ANA dIŠTAR URUŠa[m]uha GAŠAN–YA pé-e har-kán-zi “And the tribute which I impose on 

pË har(k)- 3 
them they will present to/will deliver to IŠTAR of Šamuha, my lady” KUB 23.127 iii 6-8 (hist., Hatt. III), 
w. dupl. KUB 21.15 iii 3 + 186/v:4 (Otten, ZA 63:84), ed. NBr. 48f. (“bereit halten”); cf. (following a list of tribute obligations:) [… URUHatt]uši pé-e har-kán-zi KBo 12.38 i 23 (hist., Šupp. II); GIŠ-ÙU GIŠwaršaman GIŠuËppiya x x ANA GIŠZAG.GAR.R[A-ni] išparru~ manzi pé-e har-ker “They delivered/presented wood … for spreading on the altar” IBoT 2.131 obv. 22-23 (cult inv., Tudh. IV); cf. nu ANA dPir[w]a GIŠ-ÙU GIŠwar[š]aman GIŠuËppi[ya … AN]A GIŠ≠ZAG. GAR.RA-ni± išparrum[m]anzi UL pΩi ibid. obv. 2526; GEŠTIN–ya ANA DINGIR-LIM URUNahitaza URUHiliqqaza pé-e har-[k]er kinun–ma–war–at kar(a)ššanuer MUN–ya–wa ANA DINGIR-LIM URUDuhdušnaza pé-e har-ker “They presented wine to the deity from the towns of Nahiti and Hiliqqa, now they have neglected it. They also presented salt to the deity from Duhdušna (but now …)” IBoT 2.129 obv. 12-14 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 18.16 ii 1-2, KUB 16.27:7 (both oracle questions, NH), and passim in cult inv. and fest.; HUR.SAGZiwan[aš k]uedani pedi IGI-anda nu DINGIR-LUM ANA EZEN› T´ŠI ap[iya] pé-e harkanzi “Opposite to what place (the real) Mt. Ziwana (stands), there they deliver the deity (i.e., the iron statue of Mt. Ziwana as a male deity) for the Festival of Spring” KUB 38.32 obv. 4-6 (cult inv.); (In a list of deliveries for a festival by individual townships) “Further, one thick loaf made of one PARˆSUmeasure of wheat flour” katti–šši–ma 1 UDU 1 GUD pirzaha[nnaš] 1 DUGhaššuwawannin GEŠTIN URUEll[i]pra pé-e har-kán-zi “along with it, (the people) of Ellipra present one sheep, one pirzaha[nna]-ox and one haššuwawanni-vessel of wine” KBo 9.123 + KUB 20.52 i 24-26 (hišuwaš fest., MH/ NS); lukatti–ma–kan DINGIR-LUM TA GIŠZAG. GAR.RA ME-anzi nu DINGIR-LUM INA NA›Z[I. K]IN pËdanzi NINDA.GUR›.RA DUGharši P¸NI DINGIR-LIM pé-e har-kán-zi “On the morrow they take the (statue of the) deity from the altar and carry the deity to the stela, and they present thick loaves (and) a harši-vessel (there) before the deity” KUB 17.35 ii 16-17 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss., 127, 140 (“they present”); nu T˘UPPU kuit MAHAR EN–YA pé-e har-da n–at arha peš~ šiyat “The tablet that (Wandapaziti) had brought 
255

to my lord he has (now) thrown away” KBo 18.54 obv. 9-10 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:57f. (“hinhielt”). 
4. (associated adverbs, postpositions, and prev.) — a. Ωppan: KBo 4.9 vi 20-21; KUB 10.21 ii 33-34 (OH/NS); KUB 10.54 ii 13-17 (OH/NS); KUB 25.16 i 22-24 (OH/NS); KBo 11.38 i 19-21 (for all of which see mng. 2, above); KUB 20.66 iv 2. 
	b. Ωppanda: KBo 9.85 obv. (18) (letter), context obscure. 
	c. arha: KUB 13.4 i 51-52 (mng. 1). 
	d. kattan: KUB 38.26 obv. 12 (mng. 2); […] INA KUR URUMira kattan pé-e [harta …] KUB 14.24:13, ed. AM 144f. 
	e. kattanda: KUB 26.25 ii? 4 (mng. 1). 
	f. peran (all mng. 2): KBo 2.13 obv. 12, rev. 3, KBo 

11.39 i 6, KBo 29.72 rev. 12, KUB 20.66 iv 1, KUB 38.26 rev. 12, KUB 51.42 ii? 5. 
g. šarΩ: IŠTU NINDA KAŠ GEŠTIN INA É DINGIR-LIM h„man šarΩ pé-e har-tén “Deliver everything up into the temple including the bread, beer and wine” KUB 13.4 i 60 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f. (“Of the bread, beer (and) wine carry everything up into the temple”), Hoffner, AlHeth 218 (“keep … in readiness”), Süel, Direktif Metni 32f. (“tapınakta … sununuz”). 
Note that pË and har(k)- were not considered one word by the Hittites. Cf. pé-e-pát har-kán-zi KBo 17.65 obv. 48 (MH?/MS?), KBo 23.13 rt. col. 8 (NH); [pé?]-≠e±(coll.)-ma-at kuwapi har-kán-zi KUB 17.14 iv 12, rest. StBoT 3:56. 
Götze, Hatt. (1925) 83f.; Friedrich, HW (1952) 167; Melchert, Phon. (1984) 162f. w. anterior lit. (on etymology of pË). 
(URU)pihaššaš(š)i-Luw. gen. adj.; (epithet of a stormgod; probably gentilic); from OH/NS. 
nom. pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-iš KUB 6.45 i 41, iii 25, 28, 51, 63, KUB 6.46 iv 32, KUB 30.14 iii 68 (all Muw. II), Bronze Tablet iii 86 (Tudh. IV), pí-ha-aš-[š]a-aš-ši-eš KUB 38.12 iii 18 (NH), URUpí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-iš KUB 21.1 iv 41 (Muw. II). 
acc. pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-in KBo 13.245 i 3 (OH/NS), KUB 
6.45 iii (61), KUB 6.46 iv 30 (both Muw. II), KUB 11.13 iii 7, KUB 57.92 obv. 7, KBo 10.20 iii 5, KBo 22.169:3 (all NS), píha-aš-ša-ši-in KUB 11.13 vi 9 (NS), pí-ha-ša-ši-i[n] VAT 13016 i 10 (StBoT 31:103). 

(URU)pihaššaš(š)i-

Akkadographic gen. ŠA dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši KUB 6.45 iii 48, iv 10, 35, 37, 44, KUB 6.46 i 68(!), 72 (both Muw. II), Bronze Tablet iii 50 (Tudh. IV), (NARAM) dU pí-ha-aš-ša-ašši KUB 21.1 iii (81) (all Muw. II), ŠA dU pí-ha-ša-aš-ši KUB 
6.46 iv 17 (Muw. II), (NARAM) dU pí-ha-aš-ša-ši KBo 19.74 iv 13 (Muw. II), ŠA dU URUpí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši KUB 6.45 iv 42, (NARAM) dU URUpí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši KUB 21.1 iv 29-30 (both Muw. II). 
d.-l. ANA dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši KUB 6.45 iii 55, iv (8) (Muw. II), Bronze Tablet ii 16 (Tudh. IV), (P¸NI) dU pí-haaš-ša-aš-ši KBo 10.20 iii 10 (NS), Bronze Tablet iv 49 (Tudh. IV). 
inst. [IŠ]TU dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši KUB 6.45 iii 33 (Muw. II) (this would have been phonetically realized as tarhuntit pihašaššit w. both words in inst.). 
[k]inuna ammuk µNIR.GÁL LUGAL-uš tuedaz [IŠ]TU dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši šallanuwanza ark„Ëš~ kimi “I, Muwatalli, a king raised by you, O Storm-god p., am now praying” KUB 6.45 iii 32-33 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 21, 40, Lebrun, Hymnes 267, 281, tr. ANET 398; dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-iš EN–YA ne~ pišaš LUGAL-uš “Stormgod p., my lord, the king of heaven” ibid. iii 51; nu–za kuËl walliyatar UL–za ŠA dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši (var. pí-ha-ša-aš-ši) EN– YA walliyatar nu mΩn DINGIR-LAM našma DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU-TI aušzi nu kiššan memai han~ dan–wa dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-iš EN–YA nepišaš LUGAL-uš UN-an kaništa nu–war–an ˚kulΩnitta nu–war–an–kan aššanut nu–war–an–kan mËhunaš arnut “Whose praise am I? Am I not the praise of the Stormgod p., my lord? And if a god or mortal sees, he will say: ‘Truly the Stormgod p., my lord, the king of heaven, has honored the man and made him successful(?) and provided for him and brought him through the times” KUB 6.45 iii 48-53 (prayer of Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 iv 17-22, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 22f., 41, cf. Hutter, FsLochner von Hüttenbach 81f.; dU (dupl. incorrectly DINGIR.MEŠ) URUpí-ha-ašša-aš-ši-iš KUB 21.5 iv 46 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 
21.1 iv 41, ed. SV 2:82f., tr. DiplTexts 87; nu kΩšma apËdani [memini dUTU–ŠI µLaba(rnaš)] LUGAL GAL NARAM dU pí-h[a-aš-ša-aš-ši LIM DINGIR. MEŠ] halzihhun n–aš kut[(ruwahhu)n] “And now concerning that [matter, I, My Majesty, Laba]rna, Great King, beloved of the Stormgod ≠p.±, have invoked [the thousand gods], and have called them to witness” KUB 21.1 iii 80-82 (Alakš.), w. dupl. HT 8:6-7, ed. SV 2:76f., tr. DiplTexts 86; INA URUDunna–ya 1N¨TI kuwappala ANA dU pihaššašši piyan “One 

256

(URU)pihaššaš(š)i

kuwappala in Dunna is given to the Stormgod p.” Bronze Tablet ii 15-16 (treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. Otten, StBoT Beiheft 1:16f., tr. DiplTexts 111; ŠÀ-BI KUR URUHatti– ya–kan ŠÀ-BI HUR.SAGH„watnuwanta ŠÀ-BI KUR URUKizzuwatni KUR URUHurniya KUR URUIkkuwa~ niya U INA ŠÀ-BI KUR URUPitašša kuedani imma kuedani KUR-e kuiËš URU.DIDLI.HI.A ŠA dU píha-aš-ša-aš-ši DINGIR-LIM URUParša dIŠTAR URUInuita ŠA NA›hekur SAG.UŠ ŠA LUGAL KUR dU-tašša–ya ŠA É–ŠU kuiËš URU.DIDLI.HI.A ašanzi ibid. iii 47-52, ed. StBoT Beih.1:22f., tr. DiplTexts 115; n–at–ši ANA dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši dŠarrumma DUMU dIM U ANA DINGIR.MEŠ URU.dU-tašša h„mandaš EGIR-an pehhun n–an–kan arawahhun “I gave it back to him for the sake of the Stormgod p., Šarruma the son of the Stormgod, and all the gods of Tarhuntašša and I exempted him” ibid. iii 67-69, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:24f., tr. DiplTexts 115; in a list: dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši-iš ibid. iii 86, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:24f.; LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL GUB-aš dU píha-aš-ša-aš-ši-in ekuzi “The king and queen drink the Stormgod p. KUB 11.13 iii 7-8 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NS); U DUB.1.KAM P¸NI dU pí-ha-aš-ša-aš-ši “One tablet before the Stormgod p.” ibid. iv 49, ed. StBoT Beih. 1:28f.; (In a list of divine names:) DINGIR.MEŠ URUHatti DINGIR.MEŠ URUUluša DINGIR.MEŠ (sic; var. dU) URUpí-ha-aš-ša-aš-šiiš (var. HI.H[I(-)…]) ŠA SAG.DU dUTU-ŠI KUB 
21.1 iv 40-41 (Alakš.), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iv 46, KUB 21.4 iv 10-11, ed. SV 2:82f.; dU HI.HI dHebat URUŠamuha DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ DINGIR.MUNUS.MEŠ HUR. SAG.MEŠ ´D.MEŠ ŠA URUŠamuha § dU pí-ha-ašša-aš-ši-iš dUTU URUTÚL-na dHebat MUNUS. LUGAL ŠAM´ dU.GUR DINGIR.MEŠ ŠA É.GAL huhhaš KUB 6.45 i 40-42 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 10, 33; dU pí-ha-aš-[š]a-aš-ši-eš dU HI.HI dU pihaimi KUB 38.12 iii 18-19 (cult inv., NH). 
The last ex. shows that dU p. is not identical w. dU HI.HI(-ašši-) despite the appearance of dU p. in one text Bronze Tablet ii 16 and dU HI.HI in the par. KBo 4.10 obv. 36, and dU URUp. in two copies of the Alakšandu treaty w. dU HI.HI in the third (see above), contra Goetze, JCS 5:72 w. n. 56, Starke, StBoT 31:103f., Melchert, CLL 176, and Singer, Muw.Pr. 185-189, cf. Friedrich, SV 2:84f. The det. URU could be a scribal error as suggested by Friedrich, SV 2:84. But since this writing occurs several times in different 

pehute
texts (KUB 21.1 iv 30, 41 [Alakš.], KUB 6.45 iv 42 [Muw. II prayer]), not only in dupls. of the same composition, the existence of an URUP. is probable, see Laroche, NH 273, cf. DLL 81, although it is not accepted by RGTC 6. For the frequent omission of the URU det. in a divine epithet, see CHD manu(z)zi(ya). 
Friedrich, SV 2 (1930) 84f. (discussed possibility of dU p. = dU HI.HI “ein blitzender Wettergott”); Laroche, RHA VII/46 (1947) 69; Goetze, JCS 5 (1951) 72f. w. n. 56 (*piha-“make ‘good’” i.e., HI read DÙG); Laroche, DLL (1951) 81; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 103-106 (> *pihaš-“Glanz, Blitz”); Hawkins, Natural Phenomena (1992) 71-73 (> pihaš “lightning,” but used in hierogl. to mean “effulgence, splendor” = HH no. 200 = Stormgod + lightning jags); Melchert, CLL (1993) 176 (> pihašša/i-“‘luminous’; subst. ‘lightning’ > ‘that which is luminous’”); Hutter, FsLochner von Hüttenbach (1995) 79-90; Singer, Muw.Pr. (1996) 185-189 (“of lightning,” but does not exclude GN). 
Cf. pihaimi-. 
pihaddašši-Luw. adj.; of splendor(?) (modifies bread and deities); NS.† 
“Afterwards, he breaks three thick loaves for the deity”: [1 NINDA.G]UR›.RA šarladdaššiš [1 NINDA.GU]R›.RA pí-ha-ad-da-aš-ši-iš [1 NINDA.GUR›.R]A kuwanzuwa!?naššiš “one of exaltation, one of splendor(?), and one of heaviness(?)” KUB 17.12 iii 23-25 (rit., NS), ed. AlHeth 169, cf. CLL 177; cf. in frag. context, listed among diverse foodstuffs for pí-ha-ad-da-aš-ši«-iš» dLAM[MA-i] KBo 12.60:4 (fest., NS), ed. AS 25:124, w. par. ≠x±-ha«-la/ ad»-ad-da-aš-š[i] KUB 2.1 iii 10 where, despite Archi’s (SMEA 16:110) restoration of [(pí)]- from the par., the trace in the copy does not appear to be pí-; on this see McMahon, AS 25:106 n. 110. See DLL s.v. haladdašši-. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 82; Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 176f.; Melchert, CLL (1993) 177 (“of splendor”). 
Cf. pihaimi-, piham(m)i-, pihaššašši-. 
pehute-v.; to lead, bring, conduct (there); from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pé-e-hu-te-mi KUB 23.77a rev. 9 (MH/MS), KBo 18.74 obv. 7 (MH?/MS?), KUB 33.55 ii (10) (OH/NS), KUB 36.37 iii (16) (NS), KUB 34.64:3. 
sg. 2 pé-e-hu-te-ši KBo 20.82 ii 35 (OH?/NS?), KUB 
31.112:25 (MH/NS), KBo 13.55 rev. (9), KUB 31.68:9, 10 (all 
257

NH), pé-hu-te-ši KBo 5.4 rev. 23 (Murš. II), KUB 18.17 i 2 (NH). 
sg. 3 pé-hu-te-zi KBo 20.10 i 4 (OS), pé-hu-te-ez-zi KBo 
6.2 i 40, KBo 20.10 i 10, ii 7 (all OS), KBo 17.61 rev. 18, 19, KBo 21.33 i (13) (both MH/NS), KUB 14.3 ii 69 (NH), ABoT 17 iii 7 (NS), pé-e-hu-te-ez-zi KBo 21.85 i 9 (OH/MS), KBo 19.58:(3), 14 (MH/MS), KBo 6.3 i 46, 48, (75), KBo 6.4 iv 6, KBo 10.51:12, KUB 10.1 ii 14, KUB 20.4 i 21 (all OH/NS), KBo 3.2 obv.! 55, KBo 3.5 i 10, 19, and passim, KUB 1.13 i 8, 19, ii 9, KUB 13.20 i (7), 17, KUB 26.24 ii 7, KUB 31.42 ii 10, KUB 31.44 ii 7 (all MH/NS), KUB 9.22 iii 39, KUB 16.47:5, KUB 22.70 rev. 64 (all NH), pé-e-hu-te-zi KUB 2.5 v 1, IBoT 
2.14 obv. 9 (both NS), KBo 13.195:3, [pé]-e-hu-ut-te-ez-zi KBo 29.123 rev.? 8 (ENS?), pé-e-hu-u-te-[zi] IBoT 4.82 ii 14, (pé-h[u-d]a-i KUB 27.1 iii 22 as read by Lebrun, Samuha 82, is rather pé-≠e±-[d]a-i?[coll.]). 
pl. 1 pé-e-hu-tum!-me-e-n[i] KUB 50.111:4 (NH). 
pl. 2 pé-e-hu<-te>-et-ta-ni KUB 12.63 obv. 23 (OH/MS), pé-e-hu-te-et-te-ni KUB 23.77 rev.! 78 (MH/MS), KUB 1.16 ii 45 (OH/NS). 
pl. 3 pé-e-hu-da-an-zi KBo 25.54 i 9 (OS), KBo 25.109 iii 18 (OS? or MS?), IBoT 1.29 rev. 37, 40 (MH/MS?), KBo 3.2 obv. 40, 44, and passim, KBo 3.5 ii 24, and passim, KBo 6.34 iv 19, KUB 30.34 iv 22 (all MH/NS), KUB 49.9 ii 19 (NH), KBo 12.26 i (19) (Murš. II), KBo 4.14 ii 80 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), KBo 11.52 v 13, KBo 25.31 ii 16, pé-hu-da-an-zi KBo 25.109 ii 24 (OS? or MS?), KUB 29.40 ii 6, 15, iv 12, 19, KUB 29.45 iv 3 (both MH/MS), KBo 20.61 i 5 (OH/ENS?), pé-hu-ta-an-zi IBoT 1.36 iii 52 (MH/MS), VBoT 74:6 (NS), pé-e-hu-ta-an-[zi] KUB 29.56:9, [pé-e]-hu-u-da-an-zi KUB 23.83:25, pé-e<-hu>-da-an-zi KBo 3.5 iv 50 (MH/NS), [pé]≠e±-hu-te-en-zi KBo 25.50 left col. 7. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-e-hu-te-nu-un KBo 3.16 rev. 1, 4, KBo 3.18 rev. 6, KUB 26.71 i 18, KUB 36.98b obv. 2 (all OH/NS), KBo 
5.13 i 11 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 ii 72 (Hatt. III), pé-hu-te-nu-un KBo 3.16 rev. 2 (OH/NS), KUB 31.68:5 (NH); sg. 2 pé-e-hute-et KBo 3.4 iii 78 (Murš. II); sg. 3 pé-hu-te-et KUB 14.1 obv. 68 (MH/MS), KBo 3.34 i 19 (OH/NS), 1407/u:(4) (StBoT 
1:32 w. n. 1, Pud.), KUB 26.69 v 20 (NS), pé-e-hu-te-et KUB 
17.5 i 3 (MH?/MS?), KBo 3.7 i (27), KBo 3.38 rev. 26, KBo 
3.60 ii 10, 11, KUB 12.60 i 4, 18 (all OH/NS), KBo 4.4 i 43, KUB 31.71 iv 8, 24 (both NH), KBo 3.4 ii 70, 73, KBo 16.1 iv 30 (both Murš. II), KUB 1.1 ii 51, KUB 19.67 i 6 (both Hatt. III), pé-e-hu-te-eš KUB 30.28 rev. 12 (NS). 
pl. 2 pé-e-hu-te-et-te-en KUB 31.4 obv. 10 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pé-hu-te-er HKM 8:10 (MH/MS), KBo 18.66 rev.? 8 (MH?/ MS?), KBo 16.34:7 (ENS), KBo 3.34 i 16, KBo 13.44a:8 (both OH/NS), KUB 26.69 v 8 (MH/NS), KUB 21.34 rev. 6 (text péhu-te-ni), pé-e-hu-te-er HKM 58:7 (MH/MS), KUB 31.79:16 (MS?), KBo 26.128:8 (MS? or ENS?), KBo 3.36:(7) (OH/ NS), KUB 12.63 i 33, KUB 17.8 iv 23 (both pre-NH/NS), KBo 
19.53 iii? 9, KUB 14.8 obv. 22 (both Murš. II), KUB 31.71 iii 8, KUB 48.119 rev.? 11 (both NH). 
imp. sg. 2 pé-hu-te HKM 24:48 (MN/MS), KBo 13.131 rev. 12 (NS), [pé-e-h]u-ti 350/z iii 9 (ZA 67:57), pé-e-hu-te 

pehute- a 1' b' 

KUB 14.3 ii 22, KUB 7.1 iii 11 (both NH), KUB 23.1a:3 (Tudh. IV), KBo 10.47c:29, KBo 4.4 iv 23 (both NS); sg. 3 péhu-te-ed-du HKM 24:13, 50, HKM 41:15, HKM 45:21 (all MH/MS), [pé-e-hu-te]-ed-du KUB 40.63 i 19 (LNS). 
pl. 2 pé-e-hu-te-et-tén KUB 12.63 obv. 27 (OH/MS), KBo 
22.6 iv 2 (OH/NS), pé-e-hu-te-et-te[-en] KBo 3.41 rev. 10 (OH/NS); pl. 3 pé-e-hu-da-an-du KUB 21.29 iv 5 (Hatt. III). 
part. sg. nom. com. [pé-e-]hu-ta-an-z[a] KBo 25.21:5; nom.-acc. neut. pé-e-hu-da-an KBo 4.4 ii 64, KUB 14.16 i 23 (both Murš. II); pl. nom. com. pé-hu-da-an-te-eš KBo 34.72 obv. (4) (MH), KUB 29.7 obv. (44) (MH/MS). 
iter. pres. sg. 3 pé-hu-te-eš-ki-iz[-zi] KUB 23.44 iii! 12 (Šupp. II); pl. 3 [pé]-≠e±-hu-te-eš-kán-zi KUB 8.55 ii 4 (NH), [pé-e-h]u-te-iš-kán-z[i] KUB 8.51 rev. 6 (NH). 
The plene writing of the first syll. (pé-e-) in this word is no indicator of an older manuscript. 
(Sum.) […] = (Akk.) […] = (Hitt.) [ar-h]a pé-e-hu-da-anzi KBo 26.18 iv? 6 (vocab. Diri, see KBo 26 p. iv). 
a. (w. animate obj.) — 1' obj. people (opp. uwate-KUB 14.3 ii 22-23, cf. a 1' b') — a' OH: [takku– a]n lahha–ma pé-e-hu-te-et-te-n[i SIGﬁ-in] EGIR-pa uwateten “But [if] you take him on a campaign, bring (him) back [safely]” KUB 1.16 ii 45 (hist., Hatt. I/ NS), ed. HAB 8f.; “If a Luwian abducts a person, man or woman, from Hattuša” n–an ANA KUR Lui[ya] (dupl. ANA KUR URUArzauwa) pé-e-hu-teez-zi “and leads him off to Luwiya (dupl. Arzawa) …” KBo 6.2 i 37 (Laws §19A, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 i 46 (OH/NS), ed. HG 20f.; “When I returned to Neša” [(nu LÚ URUPurušh)]anda katte–mi pé-e-hu-te-nuun “I brought the man (i.e., ruler) of Purušhanda with me” KUB 26.71 obv. 18 (Anitta, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 3.22 rev. 77 (OS) and KUB 36.98b rev. 5 (OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:14f.; cf. also KBo 3.60 ii 9-10 (cannibal text, OH/ NS), KUB 31.4 + KBo 3.41:10 (Puhanu, OH/NS), KBo 3.34 i 15-16, 19, ii 6-7 (anecdotes, OH/NS). 
b' MH and NH: n–aš šulliyat n–aš–š[an ne~ pišaz(?)] katta pé-e-hu-te-et n–an [munnait] “(The Seagod) quarreled, and brought him (–aš–šan is assimilated for –an–šan) down [from the sky] (to the sea) and [hid] him” KUB 12.60 i 3-4 (myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth 19, tr. Hittite Myths 25; nu dInaraš µH„paš[iyan p]é-e-hu-te-et n–an m„nnΩit “Inara led Hupašiya off and hid him” KUB 17.5 i 3-4 (Illuy. myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:13, 18 (§9), tr. LMI 51, Hittite Myths 12; kËdaš URU.DIDLI DUMU. MUNUS.MEŠ taruppanzi [n–uš?] / [pé]-e-hu-u-da-an-zi “They assemble girls in these cities [and] 

258

lead [them] off” KUB 57.84 iii 21-24 (rit.), ed. Forlanini, ZA 74:256, 258; nu µKišna[pili]š ÉRIN.MEŠ-an URUHinduwa zahhiya pé-hu-te-et “Kišnapili led the troops to battle against Hinduwa” KUB 14.1 obv. 68 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 16f., tr. DiplTexts 147 (differently); cf. exx. w. lahhi/lahha p. s.v. lahha- mng. 1 c; DUB. 2.KAM mΩn ÉRIN.MEŠ-an lenkiya pé-e-hu-da-anzi “Second tablet: When they lead the troops to the oath” KBo 6.34 iv 18-19 (mil. oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:14f.; (An Old Woman picks up some clay) DUMU.É.GAL–ma–an TÚGšeknun harzi n–an–kan LUGAL-i anda pé-e-hu-te-ez-zi “but she holds a palace attendant by the šeknu-garment (lit. ‘him (namely his) š.’) and leads him in to the king” KUB 35.163 iii 12-14 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kammenhuber, RHA XVII/64:68f., w. a different tr. (“Ein Palastjunker aber hat einen Rock (/Mantel?). Der bringt es [i.e., das Gebilde/Ding aus Lehm, cf. also HW™ 1:89b] dem König hinein”); cf. IBoT 
2.14 obv. 8-9, KBo 20.67 iii 9-10, KBo 21.85 i 8-9, KBo 10.51:10-12, KBo 13.195:2-3, Bo 3652 ii? 11-12 (Alp, Tempel 296f.); “Since your brother wrote to you”: īt–war– an ANA LUGAL ≠KUR URUKÙ.BABBAR-ti pé-e±hu-te nu–war–an uwati “‘Go conduct him to the Hittite king, and bring him (back)’” KUB 14.3 ii 2223 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 8f.; n–ašta ŠÀ É-TI DUMU. MUNUS šuppeššaran pé-e-hu-da-an-zi “They conduct a virgin into the house” VBoT 24 i 25-26 (rit., MH/ NS), ed. Chrest. 106-109; “But when at night a star twinkles” n–ašta MUNUS harnΩui and[a pé]-≠e±hu-te-ez-zi “he leads the woman in to the birth-stool” KUB 9.22 iii 39 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:96f.; (Murš. II tells in his plague prayer how the Egyptians asked for Šuppiluliuma’s son to be king) nu– šmaš mahhan ABU–YA apel [(DUMU)]Ò–ŠU pešta n–an mahhan pé-e-hu-te-er n–an–kan kuËnner 
“When my father gave them his son, and when they led him off, they killed him” KUB 14.8 obv. 2223 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Götze, KlF 1:210f.; (Gilgameš said to the hunter:) MUNUSKAR.KID pé-e-h[(u-te nu–w)a …] šešdu “Lead the harlot off, and let him/her sleep […]” KBo 26.101:3-4 (Gilg.), w. dupl. KBo 10.47c:28-29, translit. Myth 124 (where, however še-eš-ki should be disregarded); nu µ.dLAMMA-aš pait nu ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A pé-e-hu-te-et “Kurunta went, led the ‘troops and horses’ (and destroyed the crops of the land of Nuhašše)” KBo 
4.4 i 43 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 112f.; (If I send you 

pehute- b 
‘troops’ and ‘horses’) zig–an a[nda ANA] LÚ. KÚR UL pé-e-hu-te-ši “and you don’t lead them [against] the enemy” (you break the oath) KBo 5.4 rev. 22-23 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:64f., tr. DiplTexts 67; “That province might turn away, or those lords might (man) defect” „qqa–man–wa pé-e-hu-daan-zi “and might lead me away with them” KBo 
4.14 ii 80 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:44, cf. man c 1'; [… GA]L.GEŠTIN pé-hu-te-er! (text: -ni) “They led away [… the Field-]Marshal(?)” KUB 21.34 rev. 6 (letter, NH); (If a resident alien who has access to the temple and the palace comes to anyone) [(n–an) apΩš(–a šarΩ) pé-e-hute]-ed-du “let that man [conduct] him up (to the temple)” KUB 40.63 i 19 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.5 ii 13, ed. Chrest. 152f., Süel, Direktif Metni 36f.; cf. peran 12 c 2' d'. 
2' obj. animals: MÁŠ.GAL–ma arahza pé-e-huda-an-zi “But they lead the billy-goat outside” IBoT 1.29 rev. 37 (fest., MH/MS?), cf. HW™ 1:235b; […]x ME NAM.RA.MEŠ IŠTU GUD UDU ANŠE pé-eh[u-te-er] “[They] brough[t] … hundred civilian captives together with cattle, sheep and donkeys” KUB 31.6:8, 9, 12 (ann., NS) | logically the v. governs even those nouns introduced by Akk. IŠTU; “When they lead (sc. the horses) back (arha uwate-) for the fifth time” n–aš INA É LÚKUŠ‡ anda pé-e-hu-da-an-zi “they lead them into the stable” KUB 1.11 iv 55 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 124f.; [… ANŠE. KUR.RA].MEŠ ištarna arha pé-e-hu-d[a-an-zi] KBo 10.44 obv. 18, cf. ibid. obv. 14 (fest.?, NS); “I began to wail, but the chariot drivers just laughed at me” nu–mu–kan imma uniuš ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ ≠TUR?± awan arha pé-e-hu-te-er “They even led away from me those small(?) horses” KUB 31.71 iii 7-8 (dream, Pud.), ed. THeth 6:122f.; obj. various animals (wolf, snake) in KUB 12.63 obv. 26-27, cf. HW™ 1:409b. 
b. (w. inanimate obj., representation, something intangible; no OH exx.): mΩn–kan apΩš–ma DUMU.LUGAL našma B´LUM tuzziya peran arha idΩlu uttar pé-e-hu-te[-ez-zi] “But if that prince or lord parades bad word(s) before the army (and offends My Majesty, seize him)” KUB 
13.20 i 26 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:392f., 407; cf. KBo 19.58:14; našma–kan LÚaraš LÚari kuiški 
259

k„ruraš memian peran pé-e-hu-te-ez-zi “Or, (if) one brings before the other a hostile word/affair” KUB 31.42 ii 8-10 (instr., MH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 31.44 ii 6-7 and KUB 40.15 + KUB 26.24 ii 12-13, ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:226, 230, cf. HW™ 1:223a; cf. KBo 13.55 rev. 8-9; [n]u hannišnanza DI-eššar EGIR-pa pé-e-hu-te-et “The judgment brought again a judgment” KUB 19.67 i 5-6 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:18f. (= ll. 16-17); [ida]lamuš–ma–šmaš–kan memiyanuš / [lË p]é-hute-ši nu–šmaš x[…] / [… per]an lË mema[tti IGI. HI.A-wa–kan] / [HUR.SAG-i lË] naitti “[Don’t] bring evil words to them; don’t speak […] before them; [don’t] turn [their eyes to the mountain]” KBo 13.55 rev. 8-11; cf. peran 12 c 2' d'. 
	c. (uncert. exx.): takku UN¨T´MEŠ kuiški naš~ ma GUD UDU ANŠE.KUR.RA ANŠE uemiyazi n– an EGIR-pa EN-i–šši pennai n–an pé-e-hu-te-ez-zi “If someone finds implements or an ox, sheep, horse or donkey, he must drive (the animal) back to its owner, and he (the owner?) will lead it off” KBo 6.4 iv 4-6 (Laws §XXXV), ed. HG 56f. (differently), tr. Hoffner in LawColl 223; since there are two categories of property found, penna- may refer to one and pehute- to the other. Friedrich, HG 56f. considers both verbs synonymous “so treibt er es und (beziehungsweise) bringt er es seinem Herr zurück”; Imparati, Leggi 111 “lo sospinga e lo porti”; Hoffner, Diss. 46 tr. pehute- as “he must … return it” referring to livestock only; Goetze, ANET 191 “he shall reward him” is an ad hoc construction; in the older par. laws unna-is used for the animals (Laws §71) and pai-/piya-“give” for the UN¨T´MEŠ (§45); since the UN¨T´MEŠ is resumed by n–at in §45, the n– an obj. of pehutezzi here cannot be the implements. 
	d. (associated adverbs, postpositions, and prev.) — 1' anda (HW™ 1:100b, 443a): nu–wa–mu–kan anda kuedanikki pedi pé-e-hu-te-et “He brought me into some place” KUB 31.71 iv 7-8 (dream. Pud.), ed. Werner, FsOtten 327f., cf. ibid. iv 22-24; KBo 3.2 obv. 15, rev. 28-29, and passim; KBo 3.5 ii 9, iii 45, and passim; KBo 5.4 rev. 22-23 (above, a 2'); KBo 10.23 i 27-28; KBo 10.51:12; KBo 11.52 v 13; KBo 20.10 i 4, 10, ii 7; KBo 21.33 i 13; KBo 

21.78 i 12, 16; KUB 1.11 i 20, and passim (cf. above, a 3'); KUB 1.13+ i 56 and passim; KUB 9.22 ii 17, iii 1, 32, 39 (above, a 1' b'); KUB 25.1 v 50-51, ABoT 17 iii 7. 
2' andan: “The chief of the MEŠEDI-guards seizes a kÏta-official by (his) šeknu-garment” n– 

pehute- d 14' 

an–kan andan pé-e-hu-te-ez-zi “and leads him in” KUB 58.20:9-10 (NS). 
3' Ωppa (HW™ 149a): “They captured Tamnaššu alive” [š]–an URUHattuša EGIR-pa pé-e-hu-te-e[t] (var. URUHattuša uwatet) “and he (sc. the king) led him back there (OS var. here) to Hattuša” KBo 
3.38 rev. 26 (Zalpa legend, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 22.2 rev. 9 (OS), ed. StBoT 17:12f.; HKM 36:46-48 (letter, MH/MS); KUB 19.11 iv 15; KUB 19.67 i 6 (above, b), iii 17; KUB 24.5 
+ KUB 9.13 i 26. 
4' Ωppannanda (HW™ 1:164b): KBo 19.150 + IBoT 2.35 obv. 4. 
5' arha (cf. HW™ 1:265b, 443a): ÉRIN.MEŠ–ya–za ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ ŠA KUR URUHatti peran huinut n–an arha pé-e-hu-te-et “He (Muwatalli) took command of the troops and horses of the land of Hatti (and) led them off” KUB 1.1 ii 50-51 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:14f.; KBo 3.34 ii 7 (HW™ 1:261a); KBo 13.131 rev. 12; KUB 18.17 i 2; KBo 26.70 i 13; KBo 4.4 iv 23 (cf. HW™ 1:213a “führe uns nach … heim”). 
6' awan arha (HW™ 1:265): KUB 31.71 iii 8 (above, a 3'). 
7' ištarna arha: [… ANŠE.KUR.RA].MEŠ ištarna arha pé-e-hu-d[a-an-zi] KBo 10.44 obv. 18, cf. ibid. 14 (above, a 3'); KUB 29.56:9. 
8' peran arha: KUB 13.20 i 26 (b, above and HW™ 1:265b-266a); KUB 7.59 iii 5-6; KBo 6.34 iii 23. 
9' katta: KBo 3.2 obv. 29, rev. 2; KBo 16.1 iv 30; KUB 
1.11 + KUB 29.57 iv 18-19; KUB 12.60 i 4 (a 1' b'); KUB 
30.34 iv 21-22, ed. HW™ 1:146. 
10' kattan: KUB 1.1 ii 72; KUB 12.60 i 15. 
11' kattanda: KUB 31.54:14. 
12' parΩ: KUB 2.5 v 1; GAL LÚ.MEŠUŠ.BAR–ašta parΩ pehutezzi KUB 11.20 i 15-16 (cf. HW™ 1:437a); KUB 
22.70 rev. 64; KUB 29.55 + KUB 19.44 i 16; KBo 17.75 i 25; KBo 21.85 i (8)-9; KBo 34.185 i 5. 
13' peran: KUB 31.42 ii 8-10 (see b, above); cf. also KBo 19.58:14; KUB 26.24 ii 13. 
14' šarΩ: KUB 40.63 i 19, cf. a 1' b', above; HKM 58:6-7 (letter, MH/MS); KBo 5.4 rev. 50, 51; KUB 5.1 i 46 (oracle question, NH); KUB 6.48 ii? 2; KUB 13.5 ii 13-14 (above, a 1' b'). 

260

Götze, Hatt. (1925) 128; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 465; Josephson, Part. (1972) 139-141; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 37f. 

Cf. uwate-. 
pe(i)ye-, pe(i)ya-v.; to send; from OS. 

pres. sg. 1 pé-i-ia-mi KUB 23.77:65 (MH/MS), pé-i-e-mi KBo 5.3 ii 78, 79 (Šupp. I), KUB 32.130:12 (MH/NS), pé-e-imi KUB 29.1 i 51 (OH/NS), pé-ia-mi KBo 19.44a:5 (NH); sg. 2 pé-i-e-ši KUB 14.1 obv. 32, (36) (rest. Oettinger, Stammbildung 58 n. 45) (MH/MS); sg. 3 pé-i-e-ez-zi KUB 36.106 obv. 5 (OS), KBo 24.26 iii 11, IBoT 1.36 i (21), (32) (MH/MS), KUB 36.45:1 (OH/NS), KUB 43.55 iii 25 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 
13.228 i 5 (NS), KBo 29.80:8, pé-i-e-zi KUB 58.48 iv 12 (OH/ NS), pé-e-ez-zi (probably realized as /peyezi/) KBo 16.24 ii 2 (MH/MS), KUB 27.66 ii 31 (NH), pé-e-ia-zi KUB 13.9 iii 5 (MH/NS), pé-e-i-ia-i[z-zi] KBo 24.93 iii 4 (NS). 
pl. 3 pé-e-i-ia-an-z[i] KUB 12.19 iii 14 (MH/MS?), pé-iia-an-zi KUB 2.8 v 35, pé-i-e-an-zi KUB 10.93 i (11) (NS), IBoT 3.115 rev. 9. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-i-e-nu-un HKM 7:5 (MH/MS), KBo 16.42 rev. 15 (ENS); sg. 3 pé-i-e-et KUB 36.105 rev. (8) (OS), KBo 
3.1 ii (6), 8, KBo 3.13 rev. (11), KUB 12.60 i 16, KUB 33.33:(8), VBoT 58 i 21, 25 (all OH/NS), KUB 9.34 iii 36 (MH/NS), IBoT 3.141 i (6), 11 (NS), KUB 33.57 ii 7, KUB 33.58:(5). 
pl. 3 pé-i-e-er KBo 16.45 obv. 9 (OS? or OH/MS?), HKM 81 rev. 21 (MH/MS), KBo 3.1 ii 25, KUB 2.2 iii 28 (both OH/ NS), KBo 4.2 i 14 (pre-NH/NS), pé-i-er KBo 3.34 ii 18 (OH/ NS). 
imp. sg. 2 pé-i-e-ia HKM 7:11 (MH/MS), pé-i-ia KUB 

10.83 vi? 2 (NS). 

mid. pres. pl. 3 pé-an-da-ri 46/h obv. 7 (StBoT 5:141) [here or to pai-“give,” neither of which have other attested mid. forms]. 
part. sg. nom. com. pé-e-ia-an-za IBoT 1.36 i 12 (MH/ MS); pl. nom. com. pé-e-ia-an-te-eš⁄‡ KBo 13.126 rev. 12 (MH/ENS?), pé-ia-an-te-eš ibid. rev. 11, KUB 15.34 iii 35 (MH/MS), pé-an-te-eš 1897/u:13 (AOATS 3:198 n. d). 
iter. pres. sg. 1 pé-e-i-iš-ki-mi HKM 46 rev. 21 (MH/MS); pret. sg. 3 pé-e-eš-ki-it ABoT 65 obv. 14 (MH/MS). 
inf. pé-i-ia-u-wa-an-zi KUB 15.36 obv. 6, ibid. obv. 3 + KUB 43.50 obv. 11, pé-ia-u-wa-an-zi KBo 4.2 iii 53, pé-ia-u-an-zi ibid. iii 50 (all Murš. II), SUM-u-an-zi KUB 19.55 rev. 4 (NH). The first three are from this v., not from pai-“to give,” the inf. of which is pí-an-na, see pai-B “to give” in morphology sec. But SUM-wa-an-zi could conceal the iter. peškiwanzi from pai-B “to give.” 

frag. pé-e-an[-…] KUB 31.21:10 (Šupp. I). 

Writings like pé-e-i-ia-i[z-zi] KBo 24.93 iii 4 (NS) and pée-i-ia-an-z[i] KUB 12.19 iii 14 (MH/MS?) establish a pronunciation /peiy/ (pe + iye/a) for the stem. Other spellings could sustain this interpretation, but are not compelling: e.g., pé-i-iaan-zi KUB 2.8 v 35, where pé-i-could also be read pí-i-. But 

pe(i)ye- a 2' 
there is no unambiguous evidence for an i-vocalism of the first syll. of this word. And since the BI-i-(before another vowel) writings can be interpreted as either /pey/ or /pi/, whereas BI-e-i-or BI-e-ia-must be interpreted as /pey/ and /peya/, we have chosen to read BI as pé in all cases. This vocalism also fits best w. the derivation of the word from the pe in pehute-, penna-, peda-, etc. pe(i)ye-/pe(i)ya-“to send (there)” is contrasted w. uiye-/uiya-“to send (here).” 
a. w. acc. obj. — 1' sending a person: µZ„rušš– a GAL LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI duddumili apËdaš–pat U[(D.KAM.HI.A-aš)] haššannaš–šaš DUMU–ŠU µTahurwailin LÚ GIŠŠUKUR KÙ.GI [(pé-i-e-et)] “In those very days, Zuru, chief of the body guards, secretly sent (a member) of his family, his son Tahurwaili, a Man of the Golden Spear (and killed the family of Titti together with his sons)” KBo 12.5 + KBo 3.1 ii 5-6 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
11.1 ii 11-13, ed. Chrest. 186f., Bin-Nun, RHA XXXI:8, and THeth 11:26f.; cf. ibid. ii 8 (pé-i-e-et), (for ii 25 w. dat. µTanui, see d, below); [mΩn] dUTU-ŠI–ma LÚKAŠ›.E INA KUR URUKašga pé-i-ia-mi “But [when] I, My Majesty, send a courier to the Kašga land” KUB 
23.77:65 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 121; nu LÚ.MEŠšap~ šalliuš pé-i-e-ia “Send spies (and let them spy well)” HKM 7:10-11 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 130f.; cf. ibid. 4-5; “Was I [no]t(?) in Maraššantiya before His Majesty?” p[ar]Ω–mu–za [kËd]aš uddanΩš pée-eš-ki-it “He kept sending me out in these matters” ABoT 65 obv. 13-14 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:345f.; see also c, below. 
2' sending an animal (as one would a person): “The Stormgod was worried about Inara” NIM.LÀL-an pé-i-e-et “He sent the bee (saying: ‘You go search for her’)” KUB 33.57 ii 7 (myth, OH/ NS), translit. Myth 91, tr. Hittite Myths 30; cf. KUB 33.33:8, KUB 33.58:5, KUB 33.4 + IBoT 3.141 i 12, VBoT 58 i 25; “The goddess Halmaššuit calls the eagle”: ehu–tta aruna pé-e-i-mi “Come, I will send you to the sea” KUB 29.1 i 51 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 12, 27, and Marazzi, VO 5:152f.; kΩša tuel LÚ T≥´MI SÚR.DÙ.A appandan antuhšan ANA MUŠEN. HI.A h„mandaš haluki pé-i-e-u-en “We have just sent out your own messenger, the falcon, (as?) a captive person with a message to all the birds” KBo 20.107 + KBo 23.50 ii 21-23 (rit., MS), see mannaimmi-, for the construction, see haluki nai-, and see HE 1 §207.a. 
261

3' sending plenty and abundance: “The gods looked in” nu pé-i-e-er iyata tamËta “and sent plenty and abundance” KUB 2.2 iii 28-29 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. HHB 73 (“(sie) gaben,” i.e., from pΩi- “to give”). 
4' sending an object: 3 NINDAΩn 1 DUG KAŠ LÚ.MEŠ É.GAL <URU>Gazzimar pé-i-ia-an-zi “The men of the palace of Gazzimar send three warm loaves and a pitcher of beer” KUB 2.8 v 33-35 (fest., NH). 
5' object uncertain: mΩn ANA EN.S´SKUR–ma UL ZI–ŠU nu tamain pé-i-e-ez-zi “But if the client doesn’t like it, they send another one” KUB 43.55 iii 24-25 (rit., pre-NH/NS). 
	b. w. inf.: ammuga–kan ŠA KASKAL G´D.DA LÚ.MEŠN´.ZU-TIM HUR.SAGHapidduini anda šašanna pé-e-i-iš-ki-mi “I propose to send the scouts of the main/long road to spend the night in Mt. Hapidduina” HKM 46:18-21 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, FsLaroche 30 (“J’envoie…s’installer”) and HBM 202f. (“Ich werde … wiederholt schicken”); nu B´L S´SKU[R AN]A MUNUSalh[ui]tra LÚ.MEŠB´L DINGIR.MEŠ–ya [k]allišuwanzi pé-i-e-ez-zi “The client sends (people) to call the a.-woman and the lords-of-thegods” KBo 24.26 iii 9-11 (cult of Huwaššanna, MH/MS), cf. KBo 29.80:7-8, KUB 10.93 i 9-11; nu INA HUR.SAGŠid~ duwa [… GIŠeyan] karšuanzi pé-e-i-ia-an-z[i] “They sent […] to Mt. Šidduwa to cut [… the eyan-tree]” KUB 12.19 iii 13-14 (rit., MH/MS?). 
	c. (without acc., but w. dat., indirect obj.): cf. KBo 24.26 iii 9-16 (b, above); nu µTan„i LÚ GIŠGIDRU duddumili pé-i-e-e[r] “and they secretly sent to Tanuwa, the Man of the Staff” KBo 3.1 ii 25 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:28f. (elsewhere in this text w. acc. obj., see a, above); arunaš dU-ni pé-i-e-et “The Sea sent to the Stormgod: (‘Telipinu, your son, has taken my daughter for his wife…’)” KUB 12.60 i 16 (myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 20, tr. Hittite Myths 26; ANA K[UR-e–y]a–wa haluk[i ZI-i]t lË kuedaniki pé-i-eši “Do not send a messenger to any country on your own accord” KUB 14.1 obv. 32 (hist., Arn. I/MS), ed. Madd. 8f., tr. DiplTexts 146; cf. ibid. obv. 35; “Aškaliya wanted to kill him (sc. Išpudaš-Inara), so (Aškaliya?) put (Išpudaš-Inara?) in prison. A rumor arose against Aškaliya” µIšputašinari–ma pé

pÏËtta

i-er “They sent for Išputaš-Inara (and released him from prison)” KBo 3.34 ii 18 (anecdotes, OH/NS); dIM-aš dUTU-i pé-i-e-et “The Stormgod sent for the Sungod: (‘Go and bring the Sungod.’ They went, searched for the Sungod and could not find him)” VBoT 58 i 21 (myth, OH/NS), translit. Myth. 23, tr. Hittite Myths 27. 
	d. without acc. or dat.: nu dUTU-ŠI pé-i-e-mi nu–mu dIŠTAR Ù´RI katti–mi udanzi “I, My Majesty, will send (a message) and they will bring IŠTAR of the Plain to me” KUB 32.130:12-13 (MH/NS). 
	e. part. (describing persons): “If there are twelve bodyguards ready” naššu KASKAL-an kuiški pé-e-ia-an-za “either because one has been sent on a journey …” IBoT 1.36 i 12 (instr., MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:174f., AS 24:6f.; “Then he attracts (sc. the gods) from the fire [and says]”: mΩn–za DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ … IZI-i pé-ia-an-teeš mΩn–za UDUN harša[š …] … pé-e-ia-an-te(m)eš “whether you female deities … have been sent to the fire, or have been sent to the bread-oven … (we are attracting you back from the fire)” KBo 13.126 rev. 10-12 (evocation, MH/ENS?), w. dupl. KUB 15.34 iii 58, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:200f. w. note f; cf. KUB 15.34 iii 35. 
	f. Associated prev., adverbs, and postpos. — 1' anda: HKM 46 rev. 20-21. 

2' arha: KUB 36.106 obv. 5. 
3' parΩ: ABoT 65 obv. 13-14. 
Not yet attested is any finite form of the v. piya-, peya-which might correspond to the mng. expected in the nomen agentis piyašgattalla-, pe/iškattalla-, “merciful, pitying, sparing, delivering one” unless it is KBo 3.34 ii 18 (anecdotes, OH/NS) d, above, where they “sent for” (pé-i-er) Išpudaš-Inara and released him from prison. 
Götze, Madd. (1927) 113; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 495; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 348. 
Cf. uiye-/uiya-. 
pÏËtta-, pitta-n. neut. (pl. tantum??); allotment; from MH/NS.† 
pl. nom.-acc. pí-e-≠et-ta± KUB 31.84 iii 67, pí-it-ta KUB 
13.2 iii 41, KUB 4.1 i 13 (all MH/NS), pí-i-e-et-ta KUB 30.29 

262

i 9, pí-id-≠da± KUB 41.20 obv.? 5 (both NH), [pí]-id-da(-ia

kán) KUB 26.43 obv. 6 (Tudh. IV). 
gen. pí-it-ta-a-aš KUB 8.75 iii 6, iv 40 (NH). 
uncert. pí-it-ta KUB 28.6 ii 9b (NS). 

[píd-da KBo 14.12 iv 10, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:97, is probably to be emended to <a->pád-da “for that reason” (haplography after YA?); suggestions by Otten apud von Schuler, Kaškäer 174, and Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 213 n. 28, are untenable since a sequence of encl. nu–wa–mu DUMU–YA–padd–a is unlikely (the suggested analysis –pad–da is impossible on a word which is not clause initial) and there is a word space between -YA and pád-]. 
a. said of land: harkantaš ŠA LÚ GIŠTUKUL kuiš A.ŠÀ.HI.A ta!(text ša-)nnΩtta–ya kue pí-e-etta n–e–tta h„man gul(a)ššan Ëštu “What fields there are of a GIŠTUKUL-man who has disappeared and what unoccupied (lit. empty) pietta-allotments there are, all this must be put in writing for you” KUB 31.84 iii 66-67 (instr. for B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed., w. different tr. Dienstanw. 50, Alp, JKF 1:121, Neu, StBoT 5:152 n. 2, Marazzi, VO 2:88f., tr. Beal, AoF 
15:293 | a full record of idle land must be made, in order to organize land reclamation, ibid. iii 68-71, see Marazzi, VO 2:84f. The two parallel relative clauses are harkantaš ŠA LÚ GIŠTUKUL kuiš A.ŠÀ.HI.A and ta!nnΩtta–ya kue piËtta. The part. harkant- most probably refers to a tenant who has left his holding. Alp, JKF 1:121, suggested the emendation šannΩtta to ta!nnΩtta, but see Tischler, HdW 69 s.v. šanatta- “leer, unbebaut (Feld, Acker)”; [DING]IR.MEŠ-naš pí-i-e-et-ta piškanzi … [DINGIR.]MAH–ma–kan pËdan UL Ωšta nu–šši–kan DUMU.LÚ.U⁄°.LU [pË]dan Ωšta “Allotments are given to the gods.” (Six deities receive one locality each) “but for Hannahanna there did not remain a place,” (and she received mankind instead) KUB 30.29 i 9, 14-15 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:22f., peda-n. a 2' b'; (If a resettled person [arnuwala-] leaves the land, the one who replaces him must be provided with seed) nu–šši pí-it-ta h„dΩk hinkandu “and they should issue him an allotment promptly” KUB 13.2 iii 41 (instr. for the B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 49, Alp, JKF 1:122; ANA dZithariya kue ukt„ri pí-it-ta Ëšta “Whatever permanent allotments belonged to (the temple of) Zithariya (now the Kaskeans have taken)” KUB 4.1 i 12-13 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 213, Kaškäer 168f., tr. ANET 354; 1 A.ŠÀ … ŠA µDINGIR.GEﬂ-LÚ pí-it-ta-a-aš “one field, … of Armaziti, (the beneficiary) of the allotment” KUB 8.75 iii 6 (list of fields, 

piggapilu[(-)] 
NH), ed. Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 214, Sou√ek, ArOr 27:14f., cf. ibid. iv 40, Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 214, interprets the gen. as a haplographic ŠA DINGIR.GEﬂ.LÚ <LÚ> pittΩš; (Šahurunuwa divided his estate as follows: he gave … to Taddamaru and to Duwattannani) [pí]-id-daia-kán µŠahurunuwaš IŠT[U N]AM.RA.HI.A GIŠTUKUL-it … pešta “Šahurunuwa also gave the allotments together with the settlers and the weapons …” KUB 26.43 obv. 6-7 (land grant, Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 58, Imparati, RHA XXXII:24f., 207f. w. n. 1 (restoring [ku-]id-da; [pí]-id-da suggested by Güterbock, ZA 42:231; KUR-eyaz GUD UDU pí-id-da […-u]š? mΩknuškimi KUB 41.20 obv.? 5-6 see maknu-. 
b. other: kuiš kuwapi arta nu NINDA-LAM píit-ta azzikizzi “Who is standing somewhere and eating(?) (his) bread-allotment?” or: “He, who stands somewhere, eats his bread-allotment” KUB 
28.6 ii 8b-9b (Hattic bil., NS), ed. Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 213; the ex. is uncert. because of the unclear word spacing between AZ and ZI (i.e., pittaz zikizzi?), see Güterbock, ZA 42:231, and the sg. phonetic compl. NINDA-LAM (i.e., AKALAM). 
Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 230f. (“von Rechtswegen Zukommenden”); idem, JCS 10 (1956) 97 (“duty”); von Schuler, Dienstanw. (1957) 58 (“Landlos” corr. to Gr. klËros “that which is assigned by lot; allotment of land; piece of land, farm, estate; legacy inheritance, heritable estate”); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 213f. (“gift, grant, allotment”); Oettinger, KZ 97 (1984) 45; Sürenhagen, StMed 5 (1985) 58-63 (“Rechtstitel” = Engl. “legal title”). 
Cf. piddai- C v. 
pieda-v.; see peda-v. 
piggapilu[(-)] (onomastic epithet); MH/MS.† 
µŠunΩiliš pí-ig-ga-ap-pí-lu[-…] (dupl. [pí-]igga-pé-e[-…]) 1691/u! rev. 8 (Kaškäer 94) (prayer, Arn. I), 
w. dupl. 1241/u + 766/v obv. 9; probably adj. or n., not <µ>P., cf. µŠunaili pikuryalli KBo 16.27 iv 24. One of several Kaškaean epithets on PNs, among which are pikuryalli, pikuduštenah, pippalala, pittau~ ri(ya)-, and pit„nt„na[-…], q.v. Cf. von Schuler, Kaškäer 94. P. may be a descriptive nickname based on a distinguishing characteristic. Because of the lack of the det. LÚ, p. is not likely to be a title. Cf. the Kaškaean PN Piggapazz„i KBo 8.35 iii 3. 
von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94; Tischler, HdW (1982) 64. 
263

pikuryalli-(onomastic epithet); MH/MS.† 
[µŠ]unaili pí-ku-úr-ia-al-li LÚ URUHalmatix[…] “Šunaili, the p., the man from H.” KBo 16.27 iv 24 (treaty, MH/MS), translit. Kaškäer 138; cf. [µNan]azitiš pí[-ku-úr-ia-al-l]i LÚ URUIšhupitta ibid. iv 6. For a list of sim. onomastic epithets, see piggapilu[(-)]. 
von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 562; Tischler, HdW (1982) 64. 
pikuduštenah (onomastic epithet); MH/MS.† 
[(µTep-x-x)] pí-ku-du-uš-te-na-ah 1691/u rev. 9 (Kaškäer 94), w. dupl. 1241/u + 766/v:10. For a list of sim. onomastic epithets, see piggapilu[(-)]. 
von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94; Tischler, HdW (1982) 64. 
NA›pilahΩti-n.; (a rock or stone); NH.† 
[1] A.ŠÀ ŠA NA›pí-la-ha-≠a-ti± “One field: (that) of the p. rock” KUB 8.75 iv 61 (list of fields, NH), ed. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:24f. NA›p. is a rock of prominent size, color, or shape, in order to serve as a distinguishing feature of a specific field; cf. [1 A.ŠÀ] NA›pé-ru-na-aš “[One field:] in (i.e., among) boulders” KBo 19.14:2 (list of fields, NH), restored from KUB 
8.75 i 45 in peruna-c. Sou√ek, ArOr 27:390 n. 107, suggests that NA›p. is an Akk. word but lists it in his index among certain Hitt. words, ArOr 27:304 w. n. 
128. However, no ex. of this word is cited in AHw, nor is it to be found in the CAD files; if it is Hitt., it occurs in stem form. A non-Akkadian Hurrian(?) word at Nuzi, pilahΩºu AHw 863 exists but its meaning is unknown. A Hurrian word pilΩhi “thread” (on which, see Neu, StBoT 32:342) is probably unrelated. 
Souc√ek, ArOr 27 (1959) 304 w. n. 128, 390 n. 107; Polvani, Minerali (1988) 108 (no tr.). 
pililišaSAR n.; (a herb or vegetable); NS.† 
ankišaSAR nΩruSAR […] / handalašSAR pip~ pitarS[AR …] / pí-li-li-šaSAR gakkušša[SAR …] KBo 
13.248 i 8-10 (rit. frag., NS), in a list of herbs and vegetables; if ŠA GIŠKIRIﬂ.SAR ibid. 4, 14 applies to the entire list, they are cultivated herbs. 
Ertem, Flora (1974) 49. 

penna

pilima-n. com.; (mng. unkn.).† 
279/s:10, 12, cited by Berman, Diss. 50, in broad transcription only. 
penna-, pinna-, penni-, penniya-v.; 1. to drive (there) (opp. unna- to drive (here)), to ride(?), 2. to accept(?), acknowledge(?) (opp. mimma- “to reject”); from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pé-en-na-ah-hi KUB 41.18 iii 3 (MH/NS), KBo 
18.17 rev. (7), KUB 9.32 obv. 15 (both NH), pé-na-ah-hi HT 1 iii 21 (MH/NS). 
sg. 2 pé-en-na-at-ti KUB 23.87:15 (NH), pé?-[e?]-n[a]?[a]t-[t]i HKM 66:9, [pé-]e-na-ti HKM 77:14 (both MH/MS, both very uncert.). 
sg. 3 pé-en-na-i KBo 6.2 iv 13, KBo 25.2 ii 2 (both OS), KBo 18.57 obv. 7 (MH/MS), KBo 17.65 rev. 25, KUB 36.55 ii 11 (both MH?/MS?), KBo 22.142 i 2 (ENS?), KBo 6.3 iv 8, KBo 6.4 iv 5, KBo 6.10 iii (1) (all OH/NS), KUB 9.1 i 16, KUB 43.55 iii 24 (both pre-NH/NS), KBo 3.5 i 7 and passim, KBo 3.2 obv. 2 and passim, KUB 1.11 i 2 and passim, KUB 
1.13 i 4 and passim, KUB 13.2 ii 26 (all MH/NS), KBo 10.20 iv 14 (NS), pé-en-na-a-i KBo 6.26 i 23, 26, 47 (OH/NS), KUB 
39.14 i 6, FHG 3 rt. col. 11 (both NS), pé-en-<na->i KBo 3.5 iv 8 (MH/NS), pé-e-en<-na>-i KUB 25.22 obv. lower edge 3 (NS), pé-en-na!-i! (text pé-en-ia or -i-a) IBoT 2.136 iv 67 (MH/NS). 
pl. 1 pé-en-ni-ú-e-ni KBo 17.4 iii 11 (OS). pl. 3 pé-en-ni-ia-an-zi KBo 21.85 iv 15 (OH/MS), KUB 
29.44 iii 6, KUB 29.48 rev. (14) (both MH/MS), IBoT 1.29 obv. 27 (MH/MS?), KUB 9.1 ii 20 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 9.31 ii 50, HT 1 ii 23, iv 21, 35 (both MH/NS), KUB 24.5 obv. 11, KUB 36.121 obv. (5) (both NH), KUB 35.135 rev. 19 (LNS), pé-en-ni-an-zi KUB 32.49b ii 15 (MH/MS), KBo 24.83:7 (MS?), KBo 27.161 iv? 5 (ENS), KBo 15.34 ii 28, KUB 46.47 rev. 5 (both MH/NS), KUB 12.58 iv 14 (NH), KUB 41.11 rev. 19 (LNS), pé-en-na-an-zi IBoT 1.29 obv. 38 (MH/MS?), KBo 
3.5 i 37, ii 28 (MH/NS), KUB 17.35 i (25), 26 (Tudh. IV), KBo 4.10 obv. 33 (Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), pí-in-na-an-zi KUB 
25.14 i 32 (OH?/NS), [pí-i]n-ni-ia-an-zi KBo 33.204 iv 7, pé-een-ni-ia-an-zi KUB 54.44:6. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-en-na-ah-hu-un KBo 16.42 obv. 22 (ENS), KBo 16.61 rev.? 11 (ENS?), KUB 13.35 ii 27, KUB 14.3 ii 16 (both NH). 
sg. 3 pé-en-ni-iš-ta KUB 17.10 iv 24, 25 (OH/OS? or MS), KUB 1.1 iv 35 (Hatt. III), KUB 5.6 ii 33 (NH), KUB 24.7 iii 9 (NS), pé-en-ni-eš-ta KUB 33.29 iv (7) (OH/MS), KBo 3.6 iii 65 (Hatt. III), KBo 10.45 iii 46 (pre-NH/LNS), KUB 39.49:19 (NS), pé-en-ni-iš ABoT 65 obv. 9 (MH/MS), KBo 3.34 i 25, VBoT 33:5 (both OH/NS), KBo 3.8 iii 18 (NH), pé-en-ni-eš HKM 10:38, [p]é-en-ni-it KUB 41.8 i 32 (MH/NS), pé-en-naaš KUB 57.111:16 (NS) (Oettinger, Stammbildung 492). 
pl. 2 pé-n[a?]-[t]e?-ni HKM 66:12 (MH/MS, very uncertain) 

264

pl. 3 pé-en-né-er KBo 18.86 rev. 34 (MH/MS?), KUB 
31.38 obv.? (32) (OH/NS), KBo 5.8 iii 34 (Murš. II), pé-enner KBo 18.86 obv. 12, rev. 37, 39 (MH/MS?), KUB 26.19 ii 36 (MH/NS), KUB 50.32 iii 6, ABoT 14 iv 12 (both NH), KUB 12.31 rev. 7 (Murš. II), KUB 26.69 vi 7, ABoT 48:10 (both NS), pé-nerer KBo 4.2 ii 20 (pre-NH/NS). 
imp. sg. 2 pé-en-ni HKM 84 rev. 17, HKM 89:24 (both MH/MS), KUB 27.67 ii 42 (MH/NS), KBo 16.22 obv. 7, KUB 
8.63 iv 15, 16, KUB 14.3 i 68 (all NH). pl. 2 pé-en-ni-iš-tén KUB 26.19 ii 34 (MH/NS). inf. pé-en-nu-ma-an-zi KBo 3.5 i 31, ii 11, 12, 50, KUB 
1.13 iii 56, iv 6, 47 (all MH/NS), KUB 19.39 ii 3, KUB 14.15 iii 43 (both Murš. II), pé-en-nu-um-ma-an-zi KBo 2.5 ii 21 (Murš. II), pé-en-nu-an-zi KBo 3.5 ii 4, pé-en-ni-ia-u-an-zi ibid. i 58 (both MH/NS). 
verbal subst. gen. pé-en≠-nu-±ma-aš KUB 46.37 l.e. 2 (NH). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pé-en-ni-ia-an KUB 12.58 iv 18 (NH), [p]é-en-na-an KUB 39.49:16 (NS). 
iter. pres. sg. 3 pé-en-ni-eš-k[i-i]z-zi KBo 3.2 obv. 4, rev. 48, KBo 3.5 i 3, KUB 1.13 iii (57), iv 7 (all MH/NS), pé-<enni->eš-ki-iz-zi KBo 3.5 iii 31 (MH?/NS). 

pl. 3 [pé-e]n-ni-eš-kán-zi KUB 17.35 i 29 (Tudh. IV). 

1. to drive (there) — a. (obj. animals): (If someone finds stray oxen in his field he can use them all day) “As soon as the stars come out” n– uš Ωppa išhi–šši pé-en-na-i “he must drive them back to their owner” KBo 6.2 iv 13 (Laws §79, OS), ed. HG 42f.; [n]u–kan GUD.MAH TI-an harpi UGU péen-ni-ia-an-zi “They drive a live bull up the mound (and sacrifice it on top of the mound)” KUB 
24.5 obv. 11 (subst. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:8f.; “I appropriated three oxen belonging to the ‘coachman’” nu– war–aš–za INA É–YA pé-en-na-ah-hu-un “and I drove them to my own (-za) estate” KUB 13.35 ii 27 (depos., NH), ed. StBoT 4:8f.; (The evil is transferred to a mouse in order to be carried off to a distance) “She (i.e., the sacrificer) turns the mouse loose (saying)”: dAlauwaimi k„n–za zik pé-en-ni “Alauwaimi! You drive this away (and I will give you a goat to eat)” KUB 27.67 ii 41-42 (rit., MH/NS), tr. ANET 348 (“This one pursue!”); nu–kan 1 UDU.NITA anda unnianzi … n–an INA É LÚMUHALDIM péen-ni-an-zi n–an hattΩnzi “They drive in one wether … They drive it to the kitchen and slaughter it” KBo 15.34 ii 26-28 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Goetze, JCS 23:90f.; nu 11 UDU Ëpper nu 1-an INA URUArinna ANA dArunitti pé-en-ner 10 UDU–ma kΩ pīËr “They seized eleven sheep, drove one to Arinna for Arunitti, while they sent ten sheep here” ABoT 

penna- 1 c 
14 iv 10-13 (oracle question, NH) | penna- and piya- are near synonyms; nu UDU.NITA ANA KASKAL LÚ.KÚR parΩ pé-en-ni-ia-an-zi “They drive the wether along the road leading to the enemy” HT 1 ii 22-23 (Uhhamuwa’s rit., MH/NS), ed. parΩ 3 t, tr. ANET 347; cf. KUB 41.17 ii 11-13, see menahhanda 2 a 5'; [(2 UDU.HI.A–ma–z)a (LÚ.MEŠ URULallupiya)] arha pé-en-ni-ia-an-zi (dupl. ne-in-ni-ia-an-zi) KBo 8.101 obv. 9, w. dupl. KUB 32.123 ii 28-29, see nenniya-; nu 1 MÁŠ.GAL 1 UDU 1 ŠAH unnianzi … n–aš L´L-ri namma tamËdani AŠRI pé-en-ni-ia-an-zi (dupls. A pé-en-na-an-zi, B and D pé-en-ni-an-zi) “They drive in one billy-goat, one sheep and one pig … and in the steppe, they drive them to still another place” HT 1 iv 19-21 (C), w. dupls. KUB 9.32 rev. 10-12 (A), KUB 9.31 iv 14-16 (B), KUB 41.17 iv 7-9 (D) (Ašhella’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:19, 25, tr. Friedrich, AO 25/2:12f.; [… UDU(?) nakk]uššiušša [L]´L-ri péen-na-an-z[i] KBo 24.16:10, tr. nakkušši-, cf. 2 UDU nakkuššiËš unniyanzi KUB 39.71 iv 22. 
b. (obj. gods and humans): dU-aš–šamaš–kan kuwapi GAM-anta GEﬂ-i taknÏ pé-en-ne-eš-ta “When the Stormgod drove you (sc. the primordial gods) down to the dark underworld (he set for you this offering/these offerings)” KBo 10.45 iii 45-46 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:132f. (= iii 36-37); [(šumešš–a kar„iliyaš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš dU-aš LÚAZU taknaza) p]é-en-ni-it (dupl. uiyat) “The Stormgod, the exorcist/diviner, drove (dupl. sent) you, former gods, from the earth” KUB 41.8 i 32, w. dupl. KBo 10.45 i 51-52, ed. Otten, ZA 54:120f.; n–an–kan INA HUR.SAGElluriyan parian pé-en-né-er “They drove him beyond Mt. Elluriya” (obj. µPittaggatalli) KBo 
5.8 iii 34 (ann., Murš. II), tr. pariyan 1 a 1' b'. 
c. (obj. inanimate): GIŠGIGIR–ya–kan t„≠riyan± QADU GIŠBAN [(KU)]ŠMÁ.URU.URUﬁ ANŠE. KUR.RA.HI.A parΩ nΩer n–at pé-en-ner “They dispatched a harnessed chariot together with bow, quiver, and horses, and drove it away” KBo 4.2 iv 26-28 (aphasia, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 12.31 rev. 6-7, ed. MSpr. 10f.; nu–wa GIŠMAR.G´D.DA.MEŠ pé-en-ni “Drive the carts/wagons” KUB 8.63 iv 15 (Atramhasis epic, NH), ed. Kum. *30, 31, translit. Myth. 190; “Just as you did not let the evil matter/word(s) into the house at night” kinuna–wa–kan kue kallar idΩlu uddΩr LÚ.MEŠ GIŠGIDRU ŠA DINGIR.MEŠ parΩ 
265

pé-ner er nu–war–at EGIR-pa INA É-TIM lË tarnaši “do not let now these malicious evil words which the gods’ staffbearers drove out, back into the house” KBo 4.2 ii 19-21 (incant., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:92, 97; “Just as this tree is covered” [n– at mahh]an šarΩ GIŠtarša pé-en-ni-ia-an har[zi] “and just as it has driven up shoots(?) …” KUB 
12.58 iv 18 (Tunn., NH), ed. Tunn. 22f.; “If someone violates the boundary of a field” 1 aggalan pé-en-naa-i (OS dupl. pé-e-da-i) “(and) drives (dupl. carries) one furrow(?) (into the neighbor’s field) (or: drives one plow, see StBoT 22:50) …” KBo 6.26 i 46-47 (Laws §168, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.30 iii 9 (OS), ed. HG 76f., for disc. of this passage, see padda- v. 
d. (in hipp. texts) — 1' (obj. horses): “In the morning, they bring them (sc. the horses) out of the stable, they hitch them up” n–aš \ DANNA 20 [I]KU–ya pé-en-na-i parhzi–ma–aš ANA 7 IKU mahhan–ma–aš [EG]IR-pa „nnai “and he drives them out half a mile and twenty IKU (i.e., 1,800 m), of which he gallops them 7 IKU (= 105 m). When he drives them back …” KUB 1.13 iv 33-34 (Kikk. tablet I, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 72f., for the tr., see Melchert, JCS 32:53f. 
2' (in the phrase pennumanzi arnu-): “In the morning” nu INA 7 MUŠI pé-en-nu-ma-an-zi 2-ŠU 7 DANNA arnuanzi “they move (the horses) twice seven miles for driving during seven nights” KBo 3.5 ii 50-51 (Kikkuli II tablet, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 90f.; penna- in hipp. retains its general mng. “to drive” comprising the distance driven on the outgoing leg of a given exercise (or half the total distance of the exercise). Different speeds or gaits within the total distance are expressed by parh-, lahlahheški-, or w. the adv./abl. zallaz (Luw. zallati). See Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. 285-292; Güterbock, JAOS 84:270f.; Melchert, JCS 32:54f.; Kammenhuber, HW™ 1:331b332a; Starke, KZ 95:155 n. 58; StBoT 31:337-340, 544-547; Neu apud Alp, HBM 310f. 
e. (intransitive, i.e., elliptic, implied obj. is animal drawn vehicle): “(Šanda) was afraid of the Hurrians” nu ešhe pé-en-ni-iš “and drove to his master” KBo 3.34 i 25 (anecdotes, OH/NS); nu URUHattuši pé-en-ni-iš “He drove to Hattuša” ABoT 65 obv. 9 (letter, MH/MS); dKamrušipaš–za ANŠE. KUR.RA.HI.A–ŠU t„riet nu INA ´D GAL pé-enni-iš “Kamrušipa harnessed her horses and drove 

penna- 1 f 1' 

to the big river” KBo 3.8 iii 17-18 (myth in rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:157, 159, translit. Myth. 110; kuedani–ma–ššan URU-ri auriyaš EN-aš EGIR-pa pé-en-na-i nu–za LÚ.MEŠ.ŠU.GI LÚ.MEŠSANGA LÚ.MEŠGUDU⁄¤ MUNUS.MEŠAMA.DINGIR kapp„id~ du “Let the lord of the frontier district keep an accounting of the elders, the priests, the anointed priests, the mothers-of-god in any town to which he drives again” KUB 13.2 ii 26-27 (instr. for B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.90 ii 7-8, ed. Dienstanw. 45; namma URUManzana kuwapi pé-en-naah-hu-un “Furthermore, when I drove to Manzana …” KBo 16.42 obv. 22 (hist. frag., ENS); man INA KUR URUKarandu<(ni)>ya pé-en-ni-eš-ta (dupl. A: péen-ni-iš-ta, M: [pé-en-ni-i]š-ta) “He would have driven to Babylonia” KBo 3.6 iii 65 (B) (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupls. KUB 1.1 iv 35 (A), KUB 1.8 iv 17-18, see man b 1'; “When evening comes” n–aš turiyanzi nu \ DANNA 20 IKU–ya pé-en-na-i “they hitch them and he drives half a mile and twenty IKU” KBo 3.5 i 16-17 (Kikk. II tablet, MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 80f.; 
[LUGAL-u]š ANŠE.KUR.RA-it (dupl. [ANŠE. K]UR.RA.MEŠ-it) šarΩ pé-en-na-i … LUGALuš–kan GIŠGIGIR-az katta tiyazi “The king drives up by means of horse(s) (dupl. horses) … (then) the king dismounts from the chariot” KUB 10.3 i 11 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NS), w. dupl. KBo 8.119 obv. 2-7, ed. differently Sommer, AU 90 n. 1 (“reiten”), and Alp, Tempel 150f. (“reitet”), i.e., to ride on horseback. But if the subj. is indeed [LUGAL-u]š, and the dupl. is not corrupt, then the latter refutes such a tr., since the king would not ride several horses at once. ANŠE.KUR.RA(.MEŠ)-it would then stand as pars pro toto for “horse(s and chariot).” Sommer, AU 90 n. 1, supports the tr. “reitet” with KUB 7.25 i 6-9 ta–ššan ANA ANŠE.KUR.RA tiyazzi … IŠTU ANŠE.KUR.RA katta tiyazi “he mounts … dismounts the horse” but see the par. Iliad 3.265 cited by Kronasser, EHS 1:566 for pars pro toto; nu–kan IŠTU ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ kuit šarΩ pé-en-nu-ma[-an-zi UL SIGﬁ-i]n? Ëšta nu ANA KARAŠ.HI.A GÌR. MEŠ-it peran huyanu[n] “Since it was [no good] driving up with horses (i.e., by chariot), I led the troops (lit. marched before the troops) on foot” KUB 19.39 ii 3-4 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 162f. 
f. Associated prev., adverbs, and postpositions — 1' anda: KUB 46.47 rev. 5 (-kan), KBo 13.179 ii 8-9 (-kan). 

266

2' andan: KUB 35.135 rev. 18-19. 

3' Ωppa: KUB 13.2 ii 26 (-šan) (see 1 e, above), KBo 
6.2 iv 13 (Laws, OS) (see 1 a above), KBo 6.3 iv 8 (Laws, OH/NS)), KBo 6.4 iv 5 (Laws, NH), HKM 17:7 (letter, MH/ MS), KUB 12.58 iv 14 (Tunn., NH). 
4' arha: KBo 6.26 i 23 (Laws, OH/NS), KBo 8.101 obv. 9 (see 1a, above), HKM 89:24 (letter, MH/MS), KBo 9.141 rev. 19, KUB 35.15 ii 6, KUB 41.11 rev. 19 (LNS), HT 1 ii 33 (Uhhamuwa’s rit., MH/NS), tr. ANET 347. 
5' katta: KUB 9.1 i 16 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 29.48 rev. 14 (MH/MS). 

6' kattanta: KBo 10.45 iii 45-46 (see 1 b, above). 

7' menahhanda: KUB 41.17 ii 11-12 (1 a, above and menahhanda 2 a 5'). 
8' parΩ (see parΩ 1 ff and 3 t): KBo 23.5 i 8 (see parΩ 1 ff), KUB 32.49b ii 15 (MH/MS), KUB 2.13 ii 55 (all w. -ašta), KBo 4.2 ii 20 (see 1 c, above and parΩ 1 ff), KBo 15.30 iii 8, KBo 15.42 rev.? 10, KBo 22.180 i 7, KUB 9.22 iii 19, KBo 
21.85 iv 14-15, KUB 36.121:5, KUB 39.71 iii 31 (all w. -kan), IBoT 2.136 iv 62, KBo 3.14:2, KUB 2.13 iii 5, KUB 9.31 ii (49)-(50), KUB 35.148 iii 8, KUB 39.91:3, KUB 41.17 ii 24, HT 1 ii 23 (see 1 a, above, and parΩ 3 t). 
9' pariyan: KBo 5.8 iii 34 (see 1 b. above and pariyan 1 a 1' b'), KUB 14.3 i 68 (see pariyan 1 b 6') (both w. -kán). 
10' šarΩ: KUB 12.58 iv 18 (see 1 c, above), KUB 19.39 ii 3 (see 1 f, above), KUB 24.5 obv. 11 (see 1 a, above), KUB 
25.22 obv. lower edge 3 (all w. -kan), KBo 2.5 ii 21, KUB 

10.3 i 11 (see above 1 e). 

2. to accept(?), acknowledge(?) (opp. mimma“to reject, disown”): nu–za annaš DUMU–ŠU péen-ni-iš-ta UDU-uš SILA›–ŠU pé-en-ni-iš-ta GUD AMAR–ŠU pé-en-ni-iš-ta “The (human) mother accepted(?) her child, the sheep accepted her lamb, the cow accepted her calf” KUB 17.10 iv 24-25 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), tr. ANET 128 (“tended”), Hittite Myths 17 (“looked after”), LMI 83 (“accudì”), translit. Myth. 38; cf. KUB 33.12 iv (7, 8, 10), translit. Myth. 47; and KUB 33.29 rev. 6-7 (missing Stormgod myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 
33.24 iv 13-14 (OH/NS), translilt. Myth. 58, tr. LMI 100; Otten, Tel. 40 n. f, compares this usage of p. to par. passages 
w. kaneš-, KUB 33.70 ii 14-iii 1 (OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 33.71 iv 6-8. While mother cows and sheep might “drive” their young, the human mother does not. 

(˚)penkit-
Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 52f. (“hintreiben,” opp. unna- “hertreiben”); Götze, Hatt. (1925) 101 (mng. 1 e “… wird implicite mitverstanden sein: ‘sein Gespann’“); Sommer, AU (1932) 90 n. 1 (mng. 1 e “reiten”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 167 (mng. 2 “hüten, leiten, betreuen”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 566; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 492. 
pennati-, pinnati-n. com.; necklace; NH.† 
sg. nom. pé-en-na-ti-iš KUB 42.78 ii 9, KUB 42.64 rev. 14, pí-in-na-ti-iš KUB 38.3 i 12. 
(Description of a statuette of the goddess Išhašhuriya of Tiliura: a wickerwork (AD.KID) statuette of a seated woman … one silver headband, on (it) five gold fruits) 8 pí-in-na-ti-iš KÙ.GI ŠÀ ≠3 KÙ±.[BA]BBAR ANA GÚ–ŠU–kan anda “eight necklaces, (most) of gold, (but) of which three (are) of silver (which means five of gold and three of silver); (they are) on her neck” KUB 38.3 i 12 (cult inv., NH), ed. Bildbeschr. 16f., tr. Rost, MIO 8:183; restore in KUB 38.3 i 21; pé-en-na-ti-iš NA›NUNUZ “necklace of beads” KUB 42.78 ii 9 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:112f., Siegelová, Verw. 462f. (“p. (aus) Perle(n)”), cf. NA›kunnaš kuttanalli KUB 9.28 i 18 (rit. for divine Heptad); 12 pé-en-na-ti-iš KÙ.G[I] KUB 
42.64 rev. 14 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:149-151; 2 BIBRU awiti[… NA› ZA].G‰N / NA›mušnuwanteš [INA GÚ awi]ti–kan / [pé-]en-na-ti-iš KÙ.GI […] “Two rhyta in the form of awiti-animals [… of(?)] lapis l]azuli (and) mušnuwanti-stone; on [the neck of the awi]ti (is) a gold necklace” Bo 87/5a ii 27-29 (cult inv., NH), ed. Otten, FsT.Özgüç 366 (second half of citation untranslated). 
References known to us show the necklace was contructed of gold, silver, and beads (NA›NUNUZ). 
Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 232 (“an ornament”); Siegelová, Verw. (1982) 611 (“ein Schmuckstück”). 
penni(ya)-see penna-. 
[pininu-v.] KUB 13.35 i 14, ed. StBoT 4:4f., as read by Werner, StBoT 4:16, 81 and Tischler, HdW 64; read pirnu- v (coll.). 
(˚)penkit-Luw. n. neut.; (an ornament); NH.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pé-en-ki KBo 18.161 obv. 14, KUB 40.93:(9), KUB 42.11 i 6, KUB 42.64 rev. 7, pé-en-gi KUB 
42.59 obv. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. 
267

pl. nom.-acc. pé-en-ki-ta KUB 22.70 obv. 25, pí-in-ki-ta ibid. obv. 71, ˚pí-in-ki-ta ibid. obv. 20. 
kattann–a–šši SUR⁄›.DÙ.AMUŠEN KÙ.GI GIŠGEŠTIN ISHUNATU NA› 8 AYARI ˚pí-in-ki-ta Š¨R ´NI KAPPI ´NI ŠA NA› kittat “(They have found the gold headband) and beside it there lay a gold falcon, a bunch of grapes (made) of precious stones, eight rosettes, p.-s, an eyebrow(?), an eyelid of precious stone (perhaps lapis)” KUB 22.70 obv. 19-20 (oracles on the cult of Arušna), ed. THeth 6:58f.; cf. KUB 22.70 obv. 71, ed. THeth 6:76f.; cf. comments by Ehelolf, ZA 43:192 n. 1 (on KAPPI ´NI, ŠUR ´NI), Starke, Or NS 50:470 (on the wedge preceding p.); cf. KUB 22.70 obv. 71, pé-en-ki-ta ibid. obv. 25; no number occurs before pen~ kita in obv. 25 and 71, suggesting that the single winkelhaken which precedes it in obv. 20 is not the no. “10,” but a Luw. marker wedge, as Starke suggests; 1-N¨TUM pé-en-ki KÙ.G[I NA]› 2-ŠU harpΩn “One set of p. of gold and stone(s), folded double(?)” KUB 42.64 rev. 7 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:149-151, Siegelová, Verw. 426f. (“zweimal gegliedert”); [… pé-]en-ki KÙ.GI 2 G‰N KUB 40.93:9 (dep., NH); 4 pé-en-ki NA›N´R ANA GAL dΩer “They took four p.-s of chalcedon for (adorning) a cup” KBo 18.161 obv. 14 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 10:103, Siegelová, Verw. 182f.; in a list of women’s clothing: 1 TÚG E.´B 1 TÚGipuli 13 pé-en-gi KÙ.GI “One tunic with kilt, one ipulli (with) thirteen p.-s of gold” KUB 42.59 obv. 10, cf. ibid. obv. 6-15 (inv., NH) | for ipulli- “strap worn on or across the chest, sometimes decorated with precious stones,” see Beckman, StBoT 29:104-106 
w. n. 256; [x p]é-en-ki KÙ.GI ištarna ZA.G‰N “[x] p.’s of gold (with) blue center (lit. ‘blue inside’)” KUB 42.11 i 6 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:31, 35 perhaps these p. belong to the ipulli ibid. i 5. 
p. is an ornament, usually of gold but also of chalcedon (NA›NŠR) and other precious stones. The only weight given is 2 shekels (KUB 40.93:9). It is used as a decoration on garments, vessels, and bracelets (see penkitawant-) but it also serves as jewellery in its own right, coming in sets (KUB 42.64 rev. 7). p. may have been borrowed from Akk. pinku, pingu “mounting, decorating knob, decorated mace-head, cap, endpiece of a necklace.” The pl. penkita and adj. penkitawant-point to a stem penkit-. As is normal in Luw., the final t is not wr. in the nom.acc. sg. (cf. malli “honey,” cf. DLL mallit- and 132). 

pendihi 

Laroche, DLL (1959) 82; Ünal, THeth 6 (1978) 112; Tischler, WZKM 72 (1980) 209f.; Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 699 (“Knauf,” Akkadogram); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 217f. (“Knauf,” probably not borrowed directly from Akk., but through Hurrian); Melchert, CLL (1993) 177 (“knob, boss”). 
Cf. penkitawant-. 
[penkitaiman] Ünal, THeth 6:112, Starke, StBoT 31:217, Melchert, CLL 177, read penkitawan; see penkitawant-. 
penkitawant-adj.; having penkit; NH.† 
1 HAR.ŠU KÙ.GI NA›<ZA.>G‰N pé-en-ki-ta≠u?±-an “One bracelet of silver (and) lapis, having penkit” KUB 42.64 rev. 11 (inv.), ed. Ünal, THeth 6:112 (pé-en-ki-ta-i-ma-an), Košak, THeth 10:149f. (pí-en-ki-ta-xmi-i[š]), Siegelová, Verw. 426f. (P´-EN-KI ta-x(-)mi-x[…]). 
Cf. penkit-. 
˚pintanza Luw. n. pl.; oars(?); NH.† 
“They boarded the boat, Gilgameš and Uršanabi” nu µUrš[anabiš] ˚pi-in-ta-an-za ŠU-za Ëpta “and Uršanabi seized the oars(?) with his hand (while Gilgamesh held [the rudder(?)] with his hand)” KUB 8.50 iii 19-20 (Gilg., NH), ed. ZA 39:26f.; for a comparison w. the Akk. vers., see Tigay, The Evolution of the Gilgamesh Epic, Philadelphia 1982:116. ˚p. is Luw. pl. acc., not w. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:94 “Und Uršanabi ergriff (ihn) mit der rechten Hand,” connecting ˚p. w. Hurr. pendihi “justice” and analyzing ˚pintanza ŠU-za as sg. abl. 
Sommer apud Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 57 (“die Ruder”); Laroche, DLL (1959) 82 (“rames”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 177 (“?”; sg. neut. nom.-acc., pl. animate acc. also possible). 
pendihi n., Hurr.; justice; NH.† 
pé-en-ti-hi-ia KUB 45.75 iii 6, KUB 45.79 rev.? (15), KUB 47.87 obv. 11, KUB 47.89 iii 12 (all NH), pí-in-di-hi-ia KUB 12.31 obv. 28, w. dupl. KBo 4.2 iv (8) (Murš. II). 
“He burns birds in the following manner: …” 1 [(MUŠEN an)]išhiya pí-in-di-hi-ia “one bird for a. and justice” KUB 12.31 obv. 28 (aphasia of Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 4.2 iv 8, ed. MSpr. 8f., Lebrun, Heth. 6:106, 111; 1 MUŠEN ananišhiya pé-en-ti-hi-ia KUB 45.75 iii? 6 (hišuwaš fest.), KUB 45.79 rev.? (15) (oracle questions concerning offerings, NH). 

268

Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 94 (“Recht, Gerechtigkeit(?),” connect w. Hurr. wa/end-“‘recht(s)’ (entspricht sumerisch ZAG)”); Laroche, GLH (1979) 200 (without tr.). 

(-)pinzantaš n. (mng. unkn.); NH.† 

[…(-)]pí-in-za-an-ta-aš KUB 42.29 v 15 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 10:143; frag. context, perhaps acephalic. 
pippa-v.; 1. to knock down/apart/off, tear down, overturn, overthrow, destroy, 2. to turn up, throw up (usually w. šarΩ), 3. (mng. uncert.); from OS. 
act. pres. 2 ˚pí-pa-at-ti HKM 17 l. e. 6 (MH/MS); pres. 3 pí-ip-pa-i KBo 25.109 iii 8 (OS? or MS?), KBo 23.23 obv. 26 (MH/MS), KUB 7.2 ii 21 (NH), KUB 35.58 iii 8 (NS); we agree w. Melchert, JCS 35:142 n. 18, who thinks pí-ip-pa-i in KUB 41.3 rev. 5 is corrupt; see mng. 2, below. 
pl. 3 pí-ip-pa-an-zi KUB 37.223 obv. C 3 (OS), KBo 24.26 iii 18-19 (overrun from the obv.) (MH/MS), KBo 18.54 rev. 18 (late MH/MS), KBo 23.1 iii 31 (NH), KBo 13.15:9, KUB 
7.52:11 (both NS), IBoT 2.43 iii 6, pí-ip-pa-an<-zi> IBoT 
2.115 obv. 4, KBo 15.23 rev. 3, KUB 7.2 iv 8 (all emended by Melchert, JCS 35:142 n. 18). 
pret. sg. 1 pí-ip-pa-ah-hu-un KUB 17.27 ii 33 (MH?/NS); sg. 3 pí-ip-pa-aš KUB 33.10 ii 12 (OH/MS), KBo 24.1 i 15 (MH/MS), KUB 24.14 i 25, KUB 50.90 obv. 5, KUB 52.63 iii? 13 (all NH), ≠pí-±ip-pa-a-aš KBo 10.45 i 3 (pre-NH/LNS). 
pl. 3 pí-ip-pé-er KUB 31.124 ii 11 (MH/MS?), KBo 12.44:9, KBo 16.36 ii 15 (both Hatt. III), KBo 12.132:3 (NS). imp. pl. 3 pí-ip-pa-an-du KBo 22.6 iv 23 (OH/NS), KBo 12.1 iv 5 (NS). mid. pres. sg. 3 pí-ip-pa-at-ta-ri KUB 34.22 i 9 (NS). verbal subst. pí-ip-pu≠-u-±wa-ar KBo 26.20 ii 26 (NH), pí-ip-pu-wa-ar KUB 26.1 iv 46 (Tudh. IV). 

inf. pí-ip-pa-wa-an-zi KBo 18.54 rev. 11 (late MH/MS). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pí-ip-pa-an KUB 42.61 obv. 12, KUB 7.2 iv 8 (NH), KBo 23.34 iv 3 (ENS?), KUB 60.81:8 (Hatt. III?), (KUB 7.2 iv 8, KBo 15.23 rev. 3 and IBoT 2.115 obv. 4 all emended to pí-ip-pa-an<-zi>, cf. above); pl. nom. com. pí-ip-pa-an-te-eš KUB 60.81:10 (Hatt. III?). 
iter. pres. sg. 3 pí ≠-ip-±pé-eš-ki-iz-zi KBo 22.84:3 (NH). 
pl. 2 possibly [… p]í?-ip-pí-iš-ki-it-ta-ni KBo 18.66 obv. 4 (MH/MS!) [hardly, w. HW™ 2:50 e-ep-pí-iš-ki-, since the -škestems of ablauting verbs are always “tiefstufig”!]; pl. 3 pí-ip-pa-aš-kán-zi KBo 29.125 rev. 7, [pí-ip-p]a-a-aš-kán-zi KBo 

29.92 iii! 14. 

broken pí-ip-p[a?-…] KBo 30.174:26, KUB 58.61 i 5 (both w. arha and in sim. context). 
(Sum.) KAZKAK-te[-r]i-a = (Akk.) na-≠ka±-sú “to cut down, fell” = (Hitt.) pí-ip-pu≠-u±-wa-ar “to topple, fell” KBo 
26.20 ii 26 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. MSL 17:107; cf. also KBo 
13.1 (+ KBo 1.44 + KBo 26.20) i 35, where we have Akk. naka›(qa)-sú, ed. MSL 17:103; Hitt. entry still encrusted, so it is 

pippa- 1 a 2' 
uncertain if it is pippuwar. For an equivalence w. Akk. nabalkutu, see 1 a 2', below. 
1. to knock down/apart/off, tear down, overturn, overthrow, destroy — a. (trans.; sometimes contrasted w. wete-, parallel to lak-) — 1' without prev. (mostly in older texts): URU.DIDLI pí-ippa-an-zi “They will overthrow cities” KUB 37.223 obv. C 3 (liver model, OS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 227, Güterbock, FsReiner 152; (Telipinu became furious) [… URU?.DIDLI.HI.]A-uš pí-ip-pa-aš É.HI.A-TIM pí-ip-[pa-aš] “He overthrew [citie]s(?), [he] overthr[ew] houses” KUB 33.10 ii 12 (Tel. myth 3rd vers., OH/MS), translit. Myth. 45, tr. Hittite Myths 20; [(URUPu)]rušhandaš BÀD-eššar KÁ.GAL hanti pí-ip-pa-an-du “Let them knock/break down the wall (and) the gate of Purušhanda separately” KBo 22.6 iv 23 (hist., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 12.1 iv 4-5, ed. Güterbock, MDOG 101:21, 23; “When the moon is eclipsed on the 16th day, [the enemy] will surround the city …” […]-zi BÀD.HI.A–ŠU pí-ip-paa[(n-zi)] “They will knock/break down its walls” KBo 13.15:9 (lunar omen, NS), w. dupl. KUB 34.7 rt. col. 6, ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 48f.; nu–kan NA›huwa~ šiHI.A G‰R-az lagΩri nu kiššan memai kuiš–wa kue wËteškit kinuna–war–at kΩša B´L S[´SKUR] pí-ippa-aš “The stelae lean off (their) base(s). (The Old Woman) speaks thus: The sacrificer has now overturned what someone (else) built” KBo 24.1 i 13-15 (3Mašt., MH/MS), cf. KBo 2.3 iii 17-22, ed. lak- 4 b and pata-3; since the two verbs lagΩri and pippaš are not synonyms, the former must mean something like “are leaning” and the second “has (completely) knocked down”; [… GIŠZAG.GA]R?.RA.HI.A pí-ip-pé-er É DINGIR. MEŠ–ya šarwaer “(The enemies) broke down [the alt]ars(?); they plundered the temples” KBo 
12.132 obv. 3 (prayer of Arn. I and Ašm., MH); […] U DUGKULL¨ INA É–ŠU pí-ip-pa-i “(S)he knocks over the […] and the KULL¨ vessel in his/her house” KBo 25.109 iii 8 (rit. frag., OS? or MS?). 
2' w. arha: nu mΩn BÀD kuwapi arha UL pí-ippa-an-zi “If they do not knock/break down the wall someplace (they will not be able to epuraiit)” KBo 18.54 rev. 18 (letter, late MH/MS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 187, w. a different tr. StBoT 5:45, and HED and HW™ 2 epurai-; for mΩn … kuwapi, see mΩn 10 b and KBo 16.50:9-10; on the dating, see van den Hout, Diss. 192f., THeth 16:58f. 
269

(differently); (The sorcerer was building up (weteš~ kit) sorcery like a tower and twining it together like a cord) nu UH‡-naš uddΩr–šet AN.ZA.GÀR GIM-an arha pí-ip-pa-ah-hu-un išhaminan–ma–an GIM-an arha lΩnun “I have torn down these words of sorcery like a tower; I have untwined them like a cord” KUB 17.27 ii 33-34 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347; cf. Bo 5549:7, translit. Klengel, FsPugliese Carratelli 108 n. 39; (On the Zuliya River, the Kaškaeans seized the bridge in front of him) nu GIŠarmizzi arha pí-ip-péer “and they tore down (lit. knocked apart) the bridge” HHT 82 + KBo 16.36 ii 15 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Alp, Belleten 41/164:644, tr. Otten, FsBittel 433 w. n. 3, cf. KBo 12.44:8-9 (+) KUB 19.8 v! 12-13 (same composition); nu kËtaš ANA KUR.KUR.HI.A šumenzan ŠA <DINGER.MEŠ> É.HI.A DINGIR.MEŠ–KUNU kue Ëšta n–at LÚ.MEŠ URUGašga arha pí-ip-pé-er “The Kaskeans have destroyed what temples of you <gods> were in these lands” (followed by nu šumenzan … ALAM.MEŠ arha huller) KUB 31.124 ii 10-12 (prayer, Arn. I), ed. Otten, Tel. 34 n. 14, von Schuler, Kaškäer 156f. (= l. 26, differently), Lebrun, Hymnes 137, 145, tr. ANET 399; nu MUNUS.ŠU.GI GIR›.HI.A arha píip-pa-i n–at arha duwarniyazzi “The Old Woman knocks over the clay vessels, breaks them up (and throws them into the fire)” KUB 17.27 ii 35 (rit., MH?/ NS), tr. ANET 347; cf. KUB 35.58 iii 8 (rit.), ed. LTU 64; ŠA GIŠTUKUL KÙ.GI–ya–wa–kan ipulli IŠTU N[A›] arha pí-ip-pa-[an] “The ipulli of the gold weapon/ mace has been knocked off from the sto[ne] (macehead)” KUB 16.83 obv. 51 (oracle question, NH), ed. HED 2:379 ipul(li)-, Vieyra, RA 51:133, 136 (“a été abattu”), Bildbeschr. 65 (“abgerissen”); in the copy there is no space after N[A›] for the suggested restoration N[A› ZA.G‰N]; cf. KUB 42.61 obv. 12 (inv.); (In a context of extended direct speech which may be describing a dream or vision [cf. the many clauses w. mΩn “like” in usage 1 d]) [… kuie–wa] imma unuwašhuš m[Ωn Ëšta(?)] / [nu–war–at(?)…] arha mΩn pí-ip-pa-an n[u–war–at …] / […] EGIR-pa mΩn SIGﬁ-ahher […] / [… arha mΩn pí]-ip-pa-an-te-eš ešer nu– war–a[t(?)…] “[What]ever (things were) like ornaments, it was as if [they had] fallen out (or: been knocked off) … it was as if they repaired [them …]; as if the […-s] (com. gender subject) had fallen (or: been knocked) [off], and [they(?)…]” KUB 60.81:7-10 (Hatt. III?); for the preced

pippa- 2 a 

ing context, see :palhaya/i-; EGIR-p[a] kamzuriti pak~ mariti–ma–za arha pí-ip-pa-aš “The latter (examination): (the sacrificial sheep) turned itself over at kamzuriti and pakmariti” KUB 50.90 obv. 4-5 (šaštaoracle, NH), see pakmariti; cf. KUB 6.19 + KUB 52.63 iii? 13 (šašta-oracle, NH); in Akk. šumma immeru texts, which constitute the archetype of these Hitt. šašta-oracles, the corresponding verb is nabalkutu “to turn over” (intrans.); for discussion, see Hoffner, FsHallo 116-119; cf. 1 b, below. 
3' w. -kan, loc., and anda: (Afterwards the katra-women and the sacred exorcists go to the river, take natron, and wash two rhyta of the deity) namma–kan 2 BIBRU ´D-≠i± anda pí-ip-pa-anzi “Then they overturn/invert two rhyta at the river, (drip oil into the river, anoint the rhyta, and speak an incantation)” KBo 23.1 iii 30-31 (rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 24.50 rev. 1-2, ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 3:146, 153 (“ils plongent”); cf. ibid. i 42-44, KUB 7.52 i 11; and cf. IBoT 
2.43 iii 6 mng. 3, below. 
b. (mid. used as a pass.): “If the ašku-animals jump from under the throne” nu apΩt GIŠŠÚ.A [Ø?] arha pí-ip-pa-at-ta-ri “that throne will be overthrown” KUB 34.22 i 8-9 (animal omen, NS), ed. StBoT 5:141, HED 1-2:215. 
2. to turn up, throw up (usually w. šarΩ) — a. in the phrase (TÚG)šeknun (šarΩ) pippa-, a gesture of uncertain meaning: “A man has committed either perjury or murder” nu–ššan TÚGšeknuššan (i.e., *šeknun–šan) kËdaš parnaš [šarΩ p(í-ip-pa-a-aš)] “and has turned [up] his šeknu-garment over these houses” (or, has committed several other sins, may now this house be released from impurity and sin) KUB 7.41 i 13 (rit. for purif. of a house, pre-NH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 i 2-3, ed. Otten, ZA 54:116f. Otten, ZA 54:143 interprets this as “eine magisch-symbolische Handlung mit dem Gewand, wodurch man eigenes Unrecht (und daraus resultierendes Unheil) auf einen anderen überträgt” and equates it w. ibid. i 15 “or (if) a murderer or perjurer entered (the house).” This clause, however, is only part of the list of sins beginning in ibid. i 13, and the nuššan … pippaš clause is merely an explanation to the preceding one; nu–šši–ššan T[(ÚGšeknuwa šarΩ)] pí-ip-pa-i KUB 
7.2 ii 20-21 (Pupuwanni’s rit., NH), w. dupl. VBoT 97 ii 8 recopied in JCS 21:94; “If the gods are bewitched against a person” namma–šta apËdani UN!-ši TÚGšeknuš šarΩ pí-ip-pa-an “(If) in addition, for 

270

that man the šeknu-is turned up (I perform the following ritual for him)” KUB 7.2 iv 6-8 (Pupuwanni’s rit., NH), w. dupls. IBoT 2.115:4, KBo 15.23:2, KUB 41.3 rev. 4-5, ed. Goetze, JCS 2:234, AlHeth 72; cf. the var. colophon to the same rit.: mΩn DINGIR.MEŠ kuedani UH‡-anteš našma–aš–kan apËdani UN-ši! (text -aš) TÚGšek[nuš] <kuiški> UGU pí-ip-pa-i “If the gods are bewitched against someone or <someone> turns up (his) šeknu-s against that person” KUB 41.3 rev. 3-5; mΩn–šan [antuhša]š ANA LÚTAP~ PI–ŠU TÚGšeknun [šarΩ pí-i]p-pa-a-i nu–šši–ššan DINGIR.MEŠ [anda ka]riyazi “If [a man] turns [up] (his) šeknu-against his comrade and he hides the gods from him” KUB 30.36 i 1-4 (rit., MH/NS); cf. KBo 15.1 ii (8), ed. StBoT 3:141, 144, and KUB 43.72 iii 11; cf. Melchert, JCS 35:141-145, Weitenberg, U-Stamme 229232; (without šarΩ): [(našma–za)] kÏ M¸M´TUM šeknuš pí-ip-pu-wa-ar [(kuiški i)]yazi našma–za– at arha [(a)]niyazi “Or, (if) someone makes this oath for himself into a turning up of šeknu-s or he annuls it (the oath) for himself (let this be put under oath)” KUB 26.1 iv 46-48 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. lingai- 1, Dienstanw. 16f. 
b. (w. other objects): [… š]aštan šarΩ pí-ip-paan-zi “They turn up(?) the bedding” KBo 24.26 overrun from the obv. is written between iii 18 and 19; n–uš– du–ššan idaluwatar kuiš šarΩ pí-ip-pa-aš “Who threw them (–uš, i.e., the evils of a sorceror) (as) evil upon you, (now I will draw it away from you and throw it away, I will throw it (back) upon the man who caused the sorcery)” KUB 24.14 i 25 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:145 n. 23; “The cook takes up plain stew (TU‡ pittalwan) from the pot and places it in front of the priest” n–ašta UZU‰ šarΩ pí-ip-pa-i n– at–šan katta ANA DUGD´LIM.GAL MUŠEN han~ d[aizzi] “He throws animal fat on top (of the stew) and arrang[es] it (i.e., the stew, with the fat on top) down on a bowl (in the shape of) a bird; (temple personnel are standing there; they eat before the god; but no one else eats)” KBo 23.67 iii 8-9 (Hurr. rit., NS); cf. KBo 23.23 obv. (26) (Allaiturahi’s rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:206f.; cf. mng. 2, below. 
3. (mng. uncert.): nu LÚAZU pí-ip-pa-an 2 UPNI GIŠNU.ÚR.MA 2 UPNI GIŠGEŠTIN HÁD. DU.A x[…]x “The exorcist […-s] two UPNU (of) 

pippeššar 
cracked open(?) pomegranate (and) two UPNU of raisins” KBo 23.34 iv 3 + KBo 33.120 iv 3 (rit.), translit. ChS 1/2:290; pippan is neut.; perhaps it modifies the pomegranate; if UPNU lit. means a “handful” here, obviously the exorcist cannot simultaneously hold two of pomegranate and two of raisins; these must be sequential acts; w. object broken away: […]-az šarΩ tiyat […] pí-ip-pé-eš-ki-izzi nu–za P¸NI ZI–Š[U memiškiwan daiš] “[…] arose from the […], pippa-s [the …], and [began to say] to himself” KBo 22.84:2-3 (frag. of Kumarbi myth); […]x anda haššī pí-ip-pa-an-zi “They pippa[…] on the hearth” IBoT 2.43 iii 6 (fest. of Tetešhabi); cf. [… k]uit pí-ip-p[a-…] KBo 32.78:1 (MS), translit. StBoT 32:532. 
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 223 n. 1 (opp. of wete-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 530 (1. “zerstören, vernichten; umstürzen,” 2. w. šeknu- “umdrehen, das Innere nach aušen, das Obere nach unten drehen”); Kümmel, StBoT 3 (1967) 145 (“das Darüberstülpen,” mng. 2), 145 n. 23 (“geworfen hat”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 489, 498; on šeknun Ωppa huittiya-and šeknun pippa-: Moore, JNES 40 (1981) 51 n. 20; Haas, OLZ 77 (1982) 254; Melchert, JCS 35 (1983) 141-45 (“turn up the robe,” “expose oneself ”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 227f. 
pippalala (onomastic epithet).† 
[…] µTuttu pí-ip-pa-la-la 457/e:10 (Kaškäer 145) (MH/MS). For a list of sim. onomastic epithets, see piggapilu[(-)]. 
Since these epithets may be in the Kaškaean language, there is no reason to connect this w. Hitt. pippa-. 
von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94; Tischler, HdW (1982) 64 (“unklarer Beiname eines Mannes”). 
[p]ippata (function and mng. unkn.); NH.† 
nu TE.MEŠ NU.SIGﬁ-du / [2-3 signs p]í-ip-pa-ta NU.SIGﬁ KUB 50.93 iv 13-14 (exta oracle, NH); whole word or acephalic? 
pippeššar n. neut.; shipment, consignment, present, gift; MH/MS.† 
sg. acc. pí-ip-pé-eš-šar VBoT 1:28 (MH/MS). 
nu–tta kΩšma pí-ip-pé-eš-šar uppahun aššul[i] kiššari–šši µIršappa LÚhalu[gatallaš–maš] “In (i.e., by) the hand of my messenger Iršappa, I 
271

have sent you a shipment/consignment in good will” (followed by the list of presents) VBoT 1:28-29 (letter from Amenhotep III to king of Arzawa), ed. Rost, MIO 4:335f., tr. Haas apud Moran, Amarna Letters 101. 
p. occurs only in this letter from Amarna, wr. in a non-standard Hitt., probably by a non-Hitt. scribe. It could be that the non-Hitt. scribe mistakenly conceived p. as a viable form contrasting w. uppeššar in the same way as peda-does w. uda-. The language certainly is not standard Hitt., but the main deviations are in the word order. The opinions are divided into two main camps: 1. The scribe was an Egyptian (Kronasser, Die Sprache 7 (1961) 168f.; Berman, Diss. (1972) 174; Starke, ZA 71 (1981) 221-231 (his two main arguments are that the word order corr. to that of the Egyptian and that zinnuk is a direct Egyptian word). 2. The scribe was an Arzawan (i.e., speaker of some Luw. dialect) (Forrer, Forsch. II/1 (1926) 60-64; Sturtevant, CGr (1933) 29; idem, CGr™ (1951) 7; Goetze, JCS 1 (1947) 179). Since the Egyptians corresponded w. Hittites in Akk., they would probably not have trained an Egyptian scribe just to write to Arzawa. There were quite a few Arzawans employed in the Egyptian court from Thutmoses III on (see LÄ 1:455 
s.v. Arzawa). If Goetze JCS 1:179 is right and TÚGkušit~ ti- is a loanword from Akk. kusītu, and in contrast to Hitt. kušiši-non-assibilated, we would have a nice Luw. form. It is difficult to conceive of a complete foreigner mastering such niceties as the assimilation of enclitics (halugatallattin line 19). 
Goetze, ArOr 5 (1933) 22 n. 3 (“… klärlich das Gegenstück zu uppeššar ‘Sendung’”); Kronasser, Die Sprache 7 (1961) 168; idem, EHS 1 (1966) 291 (“wohl Verwechslung mit up~ peššar”); Berman, Diss. (1972) 174. 
[pipištunni] KBo 15.51:4, KBo 15.68:7, is a Hurr. river name, see RGTC 6:542. 
pippit n. neut.; possessions(?); MH/MS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pí-ip-pí-it VBoT 1:5, 8. 
katti–mi SIGﬁ-in É.HI.A–mi DAM.MEŠ–mi DUMU.MEŠ–mi LÚ.MEŠ GAL.GAL-aš ÉRIN. MEŠ–mi ANŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A–mi pí-ip-pí-it–mi KUR.KUR.HI.A–mi–kan anda h„man SIGﬁ-in § duqqa katta … pí-ip-pí-it-ti … h„man SIGﬁ-in Ëštu “With me, everything is well: with my estates, my 

pipeda

wives, my children, the grandees, my troops, my horses, whatever is mine in my lands. (May everything be well with you. With your estates, your wives, the grandees, your troops, your horses,) whatever is yours (in your land,) may they all be well” VBoT 1:3-10 (letter, Amenhotep III), ed. Rost, MIO 4:334f., tr. Haas apud Moran, Amarna Letters 101. 
The closest par. in a greeting formula is found in Akk. letters of Tušratta where p. seems to correspond to ana mimmû–ka “with your possessions, your everything” in EA 19:8, EA 20:7, EA 21:12, EA 23:12, EA 26:6, EA 29:5, cf. CAD mimmû 2 b. This led Forrer, Forsch. II/1:60-64 to the conclusion that p. is a dialectical (Lydian?) form of the indef. pron. (pippit < *pitpit < *kuitkuit) “whatever, everything.” But Forrer’s theory about a pippitlanguage has not been followed. A rel. pron. is an unlikely thing to borrow from another language. The par. exx. of –mi in the series of nouns argue that pippit also is a noun. 
Forrer, Forsch. II/1 (1926) 60-64 (corr. to Hitt. kuit kuit); Sturtevant, CGr (1933) 29, 119 n. 73 (corr. to Hitt. kuit kuit); Pedersen, Hitt. (1938) 117 n. 1 (“Wagenpark, Stall”), 198 (“Hab und Gut”); Sturtevant, CGr™ (1951) 7 (corresponds to Hitt. kuit kuit); Kronasser, Die Sprache 7 (1961) 168f. (a scribal error); Starke, Göttinger Miszellen 53 (1982) 59 (“fehlerhaftes … bis heute unklar”); Haas apud Moran, Amarna Letters (1992) 101f. w. n. 3 (“property, all one’s possessions”). 
pipeda-v. mid.; to carry out; pre-NH?.† 
GAL LÚ.MEŠ MEŠEDI URUZipla[ndaš] LÚSANGA-n–a GIŠzΩu KÙ.BABBAR dΩi UGULA LÚ.MEŠ GIŠGIDRU NINDAhΩlin dΩi t–ašta pí-pé-eda-an-ta (end of the col.; continuation lost) “The chief of the guards takes a silver zΩu of Zippalanda and of the priest(s); the overseer of the staff-bearers takes a hali-bread. And they carry (them) out” (continuation lost) KUB 59.19 v 10 (pre-NH?), ed. StBoT 5:141f. (as Bo 3069). 
The mng. “to carry off” was suggested to Neu (StBoT 5:142 n. 1) by the context, and influenced by the act. v. peda-. Neu interprets p. as a reduplicated stem of peda-, although no other ex. is known where the inseparable prefix pe-on penna-, pehute-, or pai-(“to go”) is reduplicated. See also Oettinger, Stammbildung 62 n. 49 (“… das im Ansatz un

272

sichere pipeda- ‘hinschaffen.’”). Neu, StBoT 5:141, calls the text “ältere Sprache.” There are deponent (“dynamic middle”) verbs like pahš-and šarra-, which are replaced in NH by actives. There are also iter. middles of otherwise act. verbs (e.g., ak~ kiškantari). Iter. and reduplicated verbs share the feature of repeated action or action prolonged or seen in progress, which could explain the mid. form of pipeda-. 
Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 141f.; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 62 n. 49. 
pipita, pipithi (city name and the derived Hurr. gentilic adj., usually modifying dNupatik); from MH?/MS? 
pí-pí-ta KUB 17.5:(13) (MH?/MS?), KBo 20.114 i (11), 22, v 5, vi 3, KBo 15.48 vi! 10, 17, 22, KUB 20.23 iii 10, KUB 
20.49 i 6, KUB 32.99 v (30), VBoT 116:12 (all MH/NS). pí-pí-it-hi KBo 15.37 ii 29, iv 37, KBo 20.114 i 18, KUB 

20.74 i 3, IBoT 2.56:3 (all MH/NS). 

In [dNu]-pa-ti-ik(-)pí-pí-ta KBo 20.114 i 22, KUB 
20.23 iii 10, KUB 20.49 i 6, and dNu-pa-ti-ik(-)pí-pí-ithi KBo 20.114 i 18, IBoT 2.56:3, there is no word space between ik and pí. 
p. usually modifies dNupatik in the hišuwaš fest. but note 1 MUŠEN 3 NINDA.SIG a-a-pí-ri pí-pí-it-hi “one bird and three thin loaves for ¸piri of Pipita” or, “for ¸piri (and Nupatik?) of P.” KBo 

17.98 v 10 (EZEN› hišuwaš); cf. HW™ 1:185b (s.v. (d)apiri). 

Cf. […dLA]MMA URU!Pí-pí-ta[(-)…] (last three signs over eras.) KUB 42.90 rev. 13, dNupatik URUPí-pí-it-hi KUB 46.48 obv. 13 + KBo 17.103 obv. 10, KUB 51.73 rev.? 15. The GN is not listed in RGTC 6. For a sim. type of epithet, see CHD manuzi(ya), manuzuhi. Cf. the PN µPí-pí-ta-hi-in HKM 17:16 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 144f., disc. ibid. 87. 

pippitarSAR n.; (an herb or vegetable); NS.† 

ankišaSAR nΩruSAR […] / handalaš SAR pí-ip-pítarS[AR …] / pililišaSAR gakkušša[SAR …] KBo 13.248 i 8-10 (rit. frag., NS), in a list of cultivated vegetables and herbs, see GIŠKIRIﬂ.SAR ibid. 4, 14. 

Ertem, Flora (1974) 49. 
pipithi see pipita. 
per 
pipue-v.; to invoke(?), summon(?); MH/MS(?).† 
(In an invocation on an amulet:) dUTU-uš–da nepiši pí-pu-et dIŠKUR nepiši pí-pu-e-et Ωppa URUHattuša KUR–YA (or: –ya) ehu “The Sungod has p.-ed you (i.e., some benevolent demon or deity) in the sky. The Stormgod has p.-ed (you) in the sky. Come back to Hattuša, my land (or: the land)” (In what follows certain sweet substances [honey, oil, etc.] commonly used in evocation-rituals are listed) KBo 8.66 obv. 1-4 (“Étiquette: invocation(?) en hittite barbare”; KBo 8 Inhaltsübersicht “Gebetsamulett?”), lines 2-4 translit. Otten, MDOG 87:24 n. 38. 
per, parn-n. neut. (and com. used as erg.); 1. house, structure for habitation, 2. portion of a complex structure, 3. structure for other purposes, 4. household including both human members (family) and the total aggregate of property, 5. (in divination texts); from OS. 
1. house, structure for habitation 
	a.	dwelling of an ordinary person 1' associated w. other types of real property 2' construction 3' in other contexts 
	b. residence of a king and his family, palace 
	c. dwelling of a god, temple 

1' writings 
a' šiunaš parn-or šiunaš É 
b' É DN 
c' É + DINGIR
2' construction or donation 3' maintenance 4' respect for temples 5' disrespect for and destruction of temples 6' divine images, possessions, and furnishings 7' personnel 8' activities 9' in myths 10' as home of a deity 
	d. structure to house animals 
	e. a model of a building 

1	portion of a complex structure 
	3. structure for other purposes 
	a. royal or government buildings (É.HI.A B´L¨TIM) 
	b. work place, work area, shop, office 
	c. storehouse 
	d. other 
2	household, family, totality of assets 

a.	composition of households
1' in general
2' master and/or mistress

273

	b. establishing (iya-, ešša-) and dissolving households 
	c. donating or transferring households 
	d. obligations of households 
	e. punishment of households 
	f. the household in general 
	g. royal household 
	h.	aggregate of property of all kinds, estate
1' of the king
2' of the queen
3' of others

5. (in divination texts) 
	a. (a part of the liver) 
	b.	(as a token/symbol in a KIN oracle)
1' alone
2' in the expression parnaš Ωššu

c. (location in a snake oracle) sg. nom.-acc. É-er KBo 3.22 rev. 56, KUB 36.110 rev. 13 (both OS), KUB 30.10 rev. 14 (OH/MS), KUB 1.16 iii 18 (OH/NS), ABoT 65 rev. 5 (MH/MS), KUB 23.68 obv. 27 (MH/NS), KBo 4.8 ii 7 (Murš. II), KUB 21.38 i 10 (Hatt. III), 
KUB 26.43 rev. 17 (Tudh. IV), É-r(a)-KBo 24.57 i 7, É-TUM KUB 23.68 obv. 27 (MH/NS), KBo 3.6 iii 67 (Hatt. III), KUB 
4.10 obv. 10 (NH), É-TAM KBo 13.114 iv 12 (MH/NS), KUB 
30.47 i 4, KUB 39.54 obv. 7 (both NH), KUB 46.40 obv. 11, É-TIM KBo 3.7 iv 25 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 51 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 
17.24 ii 4, É KBo 17.65 rev. 58 + ABoT 21 rev. 11 (MH/MS?), KUB 48.105 rev. 17, 18, KBo 4.14 iii 44 (NH). nom. com. pár-na-aš KBo 10.45 i 8, iv 31, KUB 41.8 i 5 (both MH/NS). erg. pár-na-an-za KUB 17.10 iv 9 (OH/MS), KUB 41.8 iv 30, 34 (MH/NS). 
gen. pár-na-aš KUB 43.23 rev. 10, IBoT 2.121 obv. 17 (both OS), KBo 16.45 obv. 11 (MH/MS), KUB 32.137 ii 8 (MH/NS), KBo 22.55:4 (Tudh. IV), KUB 5.1 i 96, 103 (NH), É-na-aš KBo 25.68 rev. 1 (OS), HT 4:17 (NS), É-aš KBo 
17.13 rev.! 9 (OS), KUB 29.1 iii 41 (OH/NS), HT 1 i 55 (MH/ NS), KUB 38.12 i 5, 7, KUB 49.78 ii 3 (both NH), pé-e-r[i-aš] KUB 51.56:4 (restored on the basis of dupl. É-aš KUB 29.1 iii 41), É-TIM KBo 5.1 ii 9 KBo 4.13 vi 25 (both NH), ŠA É-TIM KUB 43.23 rev. 45 (OS), SBo 2 obv. 7, KUB 24.13 iii 25 (MH/ NS), HT 2 v 24, KBo 6.4 ii 24 (NH), É-TI KUB 38.2 ii 14, KUB 24.7 i 20 (both NH), ŠA É-TI KBo 2.6 i 35, KUB 22.27 iv 21 (both NH). 
d.-l. pár-ni KBo 17.55 i 9 (OS), KUB 29.9 i 8 (OH/NS), KBo 15.33 ii 40 (MH/MS), KUB 13.4 ii 27 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 
2.8 i 34 (NH), É-ni KUB 24.7 i 15 (NH), KUB 54.10 ii 11, KUB 57.1 obv. (5), É-er KBo 13.175 rev. 7 (OS), KBo 6.4 i 23 (NH), pé-e-ri KUB 51.56 rev. 4 (OH/NS), É-ri KBo 6.2 i 17, KBo 16.84:2 (both OS), KBo 3.1 ii 54 (OH/NS), KUB 15.32 i 44, 54, KUB 30.34 iv 10 (both MH/NS), KUB 42.100 iv 35 (Tudh. IV), KUB 6.32:13, KUB 39.30 rev. 19 (both NH), É-i KBo 22.55:5 (Tudh. IV), KUB 50.20 i 22 (NH)(?), É-i(š)(-) KBo 25.5:4 (OS), KBo 3.28:14 (OH/NS), INA É-TIM KBo 4.2 i 51, 65, ii 18 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 12.11 iv 15 (MH/NS), KBo 
20.53 ii 6, KUB 12.57 i 10, INA É-TI KBo 4.2 ii 9 (pre-NH/ 

per 

NS), KUB 24.13 i 22 (MH/NS), ANA É-TIM KUB 29.52 i 5 (MH/MS), KBo 13.164 i 5 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 i 57 (pre-NH/ NS), ANA É-TI KUB 12.5 iv 19 (MH/ENS), KBo 4.2 ii 7 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 4.3 iv 39, 43 (Murš. II), KBo 11.1 rev. 7 (Muw. II). 
all. pár-na KBo 6.2 i 2, 3, and passim, KUB 34.121 iv 7, KBo 25.109 ii 19 (all OS), KBo 8.35 i 14, IBoT 1.36 iii 61 (both MH/MS), KBo 5.1 iii 2, HT 7 iv 15 (both NH), É-na KBo 25.68 rev. 16 + KBo 17.13 rev. 8 (OS), KUB 17.6 i 27, KUB 29.1 i 19 (both OH/NS), KUB 41.21 i 17 (NH). 
abl. pár-na-az KBo 25.176 obv. 5 (OH/NS), pár!-na-az KUB 20.54:5 (OH/NS), pár-na-za KUB 13.35 ii 40 (NH), KBo 22.234:2, É-er-za KBo 20.5 ii! 6 (OS), KBo 20.33 obv. 16 (OH/MS), KBo 10.45 iv 13 (MH/NS), KUB 8.50 ii 6, KUB 
30.32 i 19 (both NH), É-az KBo 30.20 iii 3 (OS), KBo 17.74 ii 38, KBo 21.22:24 (both OH/MS), KBo 18.191 rev. 3, 5, KBo 
18.192 rev. 3, 5 (both NH), É-za KUB 39.21 i 16, KUB 39.46:9, KUB 46.38 i 7 (all NH), IŠTU É-TIM KUB 46.30:4, KUB 11.10:9, KUB 52.98 ii 2, IŠTU É-TI KBo 13.29 ii 19 (NH). 
pl. nom.-acc. É-er KUB 1.16 ii 66 (OH/NS), É-TUM KBo 
5.7 obv. 26 (MH/MS), KUB 31.59 ii 32, KUB 38.12 i 7, É.HI.A-TUM KBo 5.7 rev. 40, 45 (MH/MS), É.HI.A-TIM KBo 
5.7 rev. 31, 38 (MH/MS), KUB 33.10 ii 12 (OH/MS), É.MEŠ KBo 3.1 ii 13, KUB 29.1 iii 29, 37 (both OH/NS), KUB 30.51 iv 25 (NH), É.HI.A KBo 3.7 iv 25 (OH/NS), KBo 5.7 rev. 7, KUB 14.1 rev. 71, KUB 36.118:4 (all MH/MS), KBo 16.65 i 7, KUB 12.40 rt. col. 9 (both NH). 
gen. É.MEŠ-na-aš KBo 10.6 i 12 (NH), ŠA É.MEŠ KBo 
4.1 i 14 (NH). 
d.-l. pár-na-aš KBo 17.65 rev. 31 (MH/MS?), KBo 21.34 i 60, KUB 7.41 i 13 (both MH/NS), KUB 7.29 obv. 19 (NH), KBo 11.14 iv 20, É-na-aš KBo 23.103 i 18, KUB 20.1 ii 33 (NH), É-aš KBo 17.65 obv. 49 + ABoT 25 obv. 27 (MH/MS?), É.HI.A-aš KUB 43.57 iv 18 (MH/NS), ANA É-TI KUB 31.51 rev. 9, ANA É.MEŠ KUB 7.13 obv. 23, ANA É.HI.A KUB 29.4 iii 27, 36 (NH). 
abl. IŠTU É.MEŠ IBoT 1.13 v? 6, IŠTU É.HI.A KBo 20.33 obv. 5 (OH?/MS). 
É construed w. gen. (other than DN, GN, PN): É UN¨T MUNUS.LUGAL KBo 20.7 rev.(?) 5 (OS), É MUNUS. LUGAL KBo 5.7 rev. 8, É B´LI KBo 15.10 i 12 (both MH/ MS), É LÚ-LIM KBo 13.34 iv 5 (NH). 
É w. Akk. poss. pron. KBo 25.5:3 (OS), KBo 6.3 iii 10 (OH/NS), KUB 1.16 iii 45 (OH/NS), KBo 16.25 iii 12 (MH/ MS), KBo 4.10 rev. 10 (NH). 
É in pl. w. Akk. poss. pron. É.MEŠ KBo 3.1 ii 57 (OH/ NS), KUB 13.8:4 (MH/NS), KUB 13.4 i 52 (pre-NH/NH), KUB 32.133 iv 4 (Murš. II), É.HI.A KBo 6.2 ii 60 (OS), KUB 
11.1 i 20 (OH/NS), KUB 15.42 ii 12 (MH/NS). 
The gen. per[iaš] (w. -i-, as opposed to *peraš) must be compared w. kardi(y)aš, the gen. of ŠÀ-er (*ker) “heart” based upon the stem kard(i)-(HAB 93-96). Other oblique forms of “heart” show the stem kard-without the -i-stem extension. Although oblique cases of “house” include several from the stem 

274

per(i)-: abl. É-er-za, loc. É-ri and gen. pé-e-r[i-aš], no oblique forms of “heart” show the stem *ker. Laroche, RHA XXIII/ 76:52, mentions without citation a nom.-acc. pí-ir. No such form is found in the CHD files. pí-ir ša-ah-ha-na-aš KBo 5.7 rev. 29, cited by Hroznyπ
, SH 60 as Bo 2004, is a single word, cf. parzahanna-, q.v. In IBoT 2.131 obv. 27 read pí-<e->er, “they gave.” For the possibility that É.GAL-ni in KUB 20.88 rev. 7 is to be read parni, see HAB 111, and below 1 b. On the optional use of a gram. pl. in reference to a single building, see Güterbock, CRRAI 19:308, and StBoT 29:171f. 
(Akk.) u É SIGﬁ umtalli KBo 10.1 obv. 10 = (Hitt.) nu Éer–mit Ωššauit šarΩ šunnahhun “And I filled up my house with goods” KBo 10.2 i 20-21 (bil. ann. of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. Saporetti, SCO 14:77, 80 (Akk.), Imparati, SCO 14:44f. (Hitt.); (Hattic) an-na eš-ka-a-he-er-bi ta-ba-ar-na-[an? ka-at-te-e?] lee-waa-e-el = (Hitt.) mΩn–at tapariyaweni–ma l[abarnaš LUGA]L-waš É-er “But when we govern the house of Labarna, the king” KUB 2.2 ii 45-46, 48-49 (rit., OH/NS), ed. HHB 66f.; (Hattic) bi-e-wii-il iš-bi-e-el ta-aš-te-e-ta-nu-u-ši = (Hitt.) idaluš–wa–kan UN-aš É-ri anda lË uizzi “Let no evil person enter the house” ibid. iii 40-41, 43-44, ed. HHB 72f.; (Hattic) Eš-ta-a-an-hu le-e-wee-e-el a-an-te-eh = (Hitt.) nu–za dUTU-uš É-er-še-et wetet “The Sungod built a house for himself” KBo 
37.1 obv. 6-7 (rit.), ed. Kammenhuber, RHA XX/70:2-4 (as 2121/c++). 
Note also the alternation of É and syll. writings in zik am~ mel É-na lË uwaši uga tuel pár-na UL uwami “Don’t you come to my house; I will not come to your house” KUB 29.1 i 19-20 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 25, Marazzi, VO 5:148f., and cf. the sim. addresses to a magic figure of a watchdog in a rit.: nu–wa–kan UD.KAM-az mahhan damain an~ tuhšan pár-na-aš anda UL tarnaši keti–ma–wa–kan GEﬂ-anti kallar uttar anda lË tarnatti “As during the day you do not allow a strange person into the house, tonight do not allow in an ill-omened word” KBo 4.2 i 24-26 (pre-NH/NS), and nu–war– at EGIR-pa INA É-TIM lË tarnaši “Do not allow it back into the house” ibid. ii 21. Finally, see the various writings parnaš/É-aš Ωššu/SIGﬁ/ŠE in 5 b 2' below. 
1. house, structure for habitation — a. dwelling of an ordinary person — 1' associated w. other types of real property: takku LÚ-aš damËdani A.ŠÀ A.GÀR anda aki takku LÚ ELLAM A.ŠÀ A.GÀR É 1 MA.NA 20 GŠN KÙ.BABBAR–ya pΩi “[I]f a man is killed on someone else’s field, if he (the victim is) a free man, he (the owner) will give fields, a house and 1 mina 20 shekels of silver” KBo 6.4 i 9-10 (NH par. law §IV), ed. HG 50f., tr. ANET 189, TUAT 1.1:98; (If someone performs a purificatory rite and does not dispose properly of the ritual materials) [(takk)]u–at A.ŠÀ-ni našma pár-ni kuelga pËdai “if he carries them to someone’s field or house, (it is 

per 1 a 2' 
sorcery and a case for the king)” KBo 6.3 ii 56 (Laws §44b, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 19, ed. HG 30f., tr. ANET 191, TUAT 1.1:104; DUMU.MEŠ LUGAL–ma kue~ dani [še]r harkiškantari UL ANA É.MEŠ–ŠUNU A.ŠÀ.HI.A–ŠUNU GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN.HI.A–ŠUNU [KISL]AH.HI.A–ŠUNU SAG.GÉME.ÌR.MEŠ– ŠUNU GUD.HI.A–ŠUNU UDU.HI.A–ŠUNU “But why are the princes being killed? Is it not for the sake of their houses, lands, vineyards, threshing floors, servants, cattle and sheep?” KBo 3.1 ii 56-58 (Tel.pr., OH/NS); 6 kapunu A.ŠÀ 1 kapunu GIŠKIRIﬂ. GEŠT[IN] É-TIM U KISLAH 3 É.HI.A SAG. GÉME.ÌR[.MEŠ] “Six kapunu of fields, one kapunu of vineyards, a house and threshing floor, three houses of/for domestic servants” KBo 3.7 iv 24-26 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:17, 20; GIŠTIR É-TUM KISLAH “grove/orchard, house, threshing-floor” KBo 19.32:3 (land grant); […] QADU É–ŠU A.ŠÀ–ŠU GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN–ŠU “Together with his house, field (and) vineyard” KUB 23.68 rev. 28 (treaty, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:198f.; cf. KUB 
26.41 obv. 16; nu–šma[š–kan kË] NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM šumenzan SAG.DU.MEŠ–KUNU QADU DAM. MEŠ–KUNU DUMU.MEŠ[–KUNU ŠEŠ].MEŠ– KUNU NIN.MEŠ–KUNU MÁŠ.HI.A–KUNU É.MEŠ–KUNU A.ŠÀ.HI.A–KUNU U[RU.DIDLI. HI.A–KUN]U GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN–KUNU KISLAH. HI.A–KUNU GUD.HI.A–KUNU UDU.HI.A– KUNU [QADU MIMMU–KUNU–ya] kattan arha <harninkandu> “May these oath deities destroy your persons, together with your wives, children, brothers, sisters, relatives, houses, lands, villages, vineyards, threshing floors, cattle, sheep and (all) your possessions” KBo 5.3 iv 36-40 (Huqq., Šupp.I), ed. SV 2:134-136, tr. DiplTexts 29 (“households”); kinuna–šši– kan apΩt É-er GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN–ya ar[ha] lË kuitki tatti “Now you shall not in any way take that house and vineyard aw[ay] from him” Msk. 73.1097:17-19, cf. 6-8 (letter, NH). 
2' construction (cf. in general THeth 12): [(takku)] LÚ-aš ELLUM É-er lukkizzi É-er [EG]IR-pa we~ tezzi “If a free man sets fire to a house, he will rebuild the house” KBo 6.3 iv 52 (Laws §98, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 53 (OS), ed. HG 48f., tr. ANET 193, TUAT 1.1:112, cf. KBo 6.3 iv 55, w. par. KBo 6.2 iv 55 (Laws §99); 5 ŠEŠ.MEŠ–ŠU nu–šmaš É.MEŠ taggašta pΩndu– 
275

wa–z ašandu nu–wa–za azzikkandu akkuškandu idΩlu–ma–šmaš–kan lË ku[itki] taggašši “(Huzziya) had five brothers. (Telipinu) built (taggašta) houses for them, saying: ‘Let them dwell there, eat and drink, and let no one harm them in any way’” KBo 3.1 ii 13-15 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. Chrest. 186f., Josephson, Part. 247, Hoffner in Unity and Diversity 54, THeth 11:28f. (“teilte er Häuser zu”); atti–me É-er–za wetet n– at marnan parqanut palhašti–ma–at 9-an haštΩi DÙ-at “O my father! You built yourself a house and made it (as) high (as) a marnan. In width you made it nine ‘bones’” KBo 12.70 rev.! 10-11 (bil. wisdom, NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:782; cf. -mi-e 2' a', marnan A, and parganu-. Examination of the attestations of parn-/ per/É reveals that a Hitt. building could include the following structural elements: foundations (ša~ maneš KBo 6.10 ii 22, KUB 29.1 iii 21, KUB 13.2 ii 17, KBo 
32.14 rev. 46), wall (kutt-, KUB 29.4 iv 24), floor (da~ ganzipeš, KUB 9.15 iii 5-8), threshold (GIŠkattaluzzi-, KUB 13.4 iii 5), four corners (4 halhaltumari KBo 4.2 i 29, 34, KBo 4.1 i 14), floorboards (GIŠhuimpa-, KBo 
24.45 obv. 22), doorway (KÁ, VBoT 56 obv. 7), door (GIŠIG, KBo 6.10 ii 17-18, w. dupl. KUB 29.28:8), a door bolt (GIŠhattalwaš GIŠ-ru KBo 4.2 i 30, 35), window (GIŠluttai-, KUB 17.6 i 23), roof (šuhha-, KBo 10.6 i 12; KUB 9.15 iii 8), beams (GIŠÙR.HI.A, KUB 15.42 iii 24), inner chamber (tunnakkeššar/É.ŠÀ, KBo 23.23:(63)), court (hila-, KBo 23.23:63), pillar(?) (šarhuli-KUB 
7.2 i 13), hearth/brazier (hašša-KBo 6.2 i 54-55, KUB 
17.10 i 6, iv 22), and gate structure (hilammar KBo 
17.15 rev.! 12). For disc. of architectural terms, see THeth 12 passim. 
3' in other contexts: ≠takku LÚ±-an ELLAM tapešni appan[(zi anda–š)]an pár-na ≠nΩwi paizzi± “If a free man is seized at the outset (of a break-in), (when) he has not yet entered the house (he shall pay 12 shekels of silver)” KBo 6.3 iv 35-36 (Laws §93, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 iv 37 (OS), ed. HG 46f., tr. ANET 193, TUAT 1.1:111, Hoffner in LawColl 228; takku GIŠIG šullannaz kui[ški] tayËzzi kuit kuit (var. adds É-ri andan) harkzi t–at šarnikzi “If some[one] steals a door as the result of a quarrel, he shall replace whatever is lost (dupl. adds: in the house)” KBo 6.10 ii 17-18 (Laws §127, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.28:8, ed. HG 68f., tr. ANET 194, TUAT 1.1:115; takku DˆN LU[GA]L kuiški h„llazzi É–SU pup[u]lli kÏša “If someone re-

per 1 a 3' 

jects the verdict of the king, his house will become a ruin(?)” KBo 6.26 ii 11-12 (Laws §173, OH/NS), ed. HG 76f., tr. ANET 195 (“his house shall be made a shambles”), TUAT 1.1:119; takku LÚ-aš MUNUS-an HUR.SAG-i Ëpzi LÚ-naš waštul n–aš aki takku É-ri–ma Ëpzi MUNUS-naš waštaiš MUNUS-za aki “If a man takes a woman (sexually) in the mountain, it is the man’s sin, and he shall die. But if he takes (her) in (her) house, it is the woman’s sin — she shall die” KBo 6.26 iv 6-8 (Laws §197, OH/NS), ed. HG 86f., tr. ANET 196, TUAT 1.1:123, cf. comments in Hoffner, Diss. 239, 269; takku LÚ-aš DAM–ŠU dΩi n–a[(n pár-na–šš)a] pËhutezzi iwaru–šši[(t–a–z)] anda pËdΩi takku MUNUS-za [(a)piya aki]… takku [a]ddaš É-[(ri aki)] “If a man takes a wife and conducts her to his house, he takes her dowry along too. If the woman [should die] t[here], …. If she should die in the house of (her) father, …” KBo 6.5 ii 4-9 (Laws §27, OH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 1-4 (OH/NS), ed. HG 24f., tr. ANET 190, TUAT 1.1:101f., cf. AlHeth 33; “What have I done to my god” nu–mu É–YA inani peran pittuliyaš É-er kišat “so that from sickness my house has become a house (full) of anguish?” KUB 30.10 rev. 14 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 114, 117, Güterbock, JNES 33:326, nu A a 1' c' 1'', tr. ANET 401; GIŠluttΩuš kammarΩš IŒBAT É-er tuhhuiš [IŒBAT] “Mist seized the windows; smoke [seized] the house” KUB 17.10 i 5 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth 37, tr. ANET 128, Hittite Myths 14; cf. also (When the god returned and cared for his land) GIŠluttai kammaraš tarnaš É-er tuhhuiš tarnaš “mist released the windows, smoke released the house” ibid iv 21, ed. Hittite Myths 17; [(takk)]u–kan antuwahhaš INA É–ŠU an~ dan paizzi “If a man enters his house” KUB 29.9 i 4 (omen, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 34.129:7, ed. Güterbock, AfO 18:79, and pai-A 1 j 4' b' (partially); B´LU-uš–šan B´LIYA ammel ANA É–YA IGI.HI.A-wa hark n–at lË dammišhiškanzi “O lord, please, my lord, keep an eye on my house, and let them not harm it” HKM 52:25-28 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Or NS 59:109f., HBM 216f. | the form B´LU-uš does not permit a reading w. išha“lord.” Since the person addressed is not the king (haššuš), perhaps the Akk. word bËlu itself was read together w. a Hitt. ending; (The incantation priest says:) “The ram mounts the ewe, and she becomes pregnant” kΩšš–a–za URU-az pár-na-an-za-aš-ša (two ergatives, for which the var. gives nom. com. URU-aš pár-na-aš) [(UD)]U.A. 

276

LUM DÙ-ru nu LŠL-ri GEﬂ-in KI-an argaru “Let this town and house become a ram, and in the steppe let it mount the Dark Earth (so that the latter will become pregnant with the blood, pollution, and evil)” KUB 41.8 iv 30-31 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 iv 31-32, ed. Otten, ZA 54:138f.; mΩn LÚpitteantan–ma kuiški munnaizzi n–an INA É–ŠU wemiyanzi “But if someone hides a fugitive, and they find him in his house” KUB 8.81 ii 13-15 (treaty, MH/MS), ed. Götze, ZA 36:11f., Petschow, ZA 55:242f., del Monte, OA 20:217; (Concerning your greetings to Hattušili and Armaziti, they are not here. Hattušili has driven to Hattuša) m.dSÎN-LÚ-inn–a INA É–ŠU tarner “and they let Arma-ziti (go) to his house/home” ABoT 65 obv. 9-10 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 4:345f.; see also IBoT 1.36 i 12-13 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:6f.; mΩn–kan ŠÀ URU-LIM–ma É DINGIR-LIM É LUGAL UL kuitki Ëšzi nu–šmaš É LÚMAŠ.EN.KAK kuitki šešhanzi n–at–kan parΩ šanhanzi “But if in a city there is absolutely no temple (or) royal structure (lit., house of the king, see 1 b 1'), then they requisition for themselves some commoner’s (lit. poor man’s) house, and they sweep it out (and carry out the ritual)” KUB 9.15 iii 17-20 (instr., NH), tr. SV 1:45 (partially); (The priest Hutarli testifies that his father had possessed two divine images of precious metal) nu–war–aš–za INA É DINGIR-LIM šippanzakit kinun–ma–wa–za „k INA É–YA BAL-kimi “He used to make offering (to them) in the temple, but now I make offering in my house” KUB 38.37 iii 10-12 (depos., NH), ed. StBoT 4:56f.; (Nunnu was an official in Arzawa) KÙ.BABBAR–y[a KÙ.G]I natta udai kuit wemiezzi apašš–a [(pár-)]na-aš-ša pittaizzi “He does not bring the gold and silver (i.e., state revenues). (Instead), he carries off to his house that which he finds” KBo 3.34 i 11-12 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.104 obv. 9-10 (OS), ed. Kümmel, StBoT 3:162, cf. piddai-B 1 a 1', tr. Jasink, Mesopotamia 13-14:215 n. 15 (“egli corre a casa sua”), this ex. might also belong under mng. 4; mΩn–šmaš ABI pár-na–šma tarnai “When my father (the king) lets you go to your house(s)” KBo 22.1:21-22 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f.; Ït–[wa– za] eku nu–za ninqa nu–za pár-na-aš-ša(sic) iya[n]ni«š» “Go, drink, get drunk and go to your (text: his) house” KUB 24.8 ii 6-7 (Tale of Appu, pre-NH/ NS), ed. StBoT 14:6f.; cf. ibid. i 24-25, ii 10-11; (After various practitioners complete a ritual) nu–za apËya 

per 1 b 
INA É.MEŠ–ŠUNU arha pΩnzi “Then they go off to their houses” KUB 32.133 iv 3-4 (rit., NH), cf. Kronasser, Schw.Gotth. 59 (“man geht nach Hause”); n–aš–za arha INA É–ŠU paizzi KUB 29.4 ii 39 (rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Schw.Gotth. 18f. (“geht heim in sein Haus”); cf. KUB 27.29 i 15 (rit., NH); (The mortal Hupašiya was settled in a house away from his family by the goddess Inara, who then went on a trip) mΩn dInarašš–a gimraz EGIR-[(pa u)]it apašš–a wËšgauan dΩiš [(Ω)]ppa– wa–mu É-na tarna “When Inara returned from the countryside, he (Hupašiya) began to whine: ‘Let me (go) back home (lit., to the house)’” KUB 17.6 i 25-27 (Illuy., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.7 ii 7-8, ed. Beckman, JANES 14:14, 19, translit. Myth 8, tr. Hittite Myths 12; LÚŠU.PIŠ URUUrma URU-ri Ωraš n–aš–kan INA É– ŠU an[d]a pait n–aš–za–kan GIŠŠÚ.A-ki ešat “The fisherman arrived at the city Urma, went into his house, and sat down on a chair” KUB 24.7 iv 42-43 (tale of the fisherman and foundling), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. Hittite Myths 66; (In the course of a ritual there is a hiatus:) mΩn–aš pár-na–ma Ωppa uizzi “But when she comes back home (then she performs a ceremony with an eya-tree) KUB 27.67 iii 67 (rit., MH/NS), tr. ANET 348 (“when she comes home”). 
b. dwelling of a king and his family, palace: cf. KBo 10.2 i 20-21 in bil. sec.; Labarnaš É-er-še-et tuškarattaš haššaš–šaš hanzaššaš–šaš n–e–ššan NA›pËruni wetan appaliyallaš–a É[-er–šet] karaitti pËran w[etan] “The house of the Labarna is one of joy, (and) of his offspring to the third generation (i.e., it will last for generations). It is built on rock but the misguided/deceived one’s (i.e., the fool’s) house [is] bu[ilt] in the path of the flood” KUB 36.110 iii 13-18 (benedictions for Labarna, OS), ed. Forrer, MAOG 4:32, Laroche, RHA XI/53:69, Hoffner, AlHeth 20; huitti–wa namma–ma DUMU.DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU LUGAL-waš pár-na luttiya “Furthermore draw his grandchildren to a window of the king’s house (i.e., palace)” KUB 
29.1 ii 11-12 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 13, 27, and Marazzi, VO 5:152f., tr. ANET 357; [DUB.]1-PI mΩn LUGAL-uš É-TAM wete[zzi] “First [tab]let, when the king build[s] a palace” KUB 30.47 i 4 (cat., NH), ed. CTH pp. 183f.; (The lands of Mira and Kuwaliya I gave back to Mašhuiluwa) nu–šši É ABI–ŠU GIŠGU.ZA [ABI–ŠU–ya] EGIR-pa ADDIN “and I gave back to him the palace of his father [and] the 
277

throne [of his father]. Furthermore I made him lord to the land of Mira” KBo 4.7 + KBo 22.38 i 19-21 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. (without join) SV 1:108f., tr. DiplTexts 69; nu dUTU-ŠI µEN-urtan QADU É–ŠU U KUR–ŠU arha harninkun ŠARRUTTA–ŠU–ma–šši–kan GIŠGU.ZA–ŠU É–SU KUR–SU–ya kuit daliyanun n–at ANA µAbiradda pehhun “And I, My Majesty, destroyed EN-urta together with his palace and his land. But such kingship, throne, palace, and land as I left him — that I gave to Abiradda” KBo 3.3 ii 1-4 (edict, NH), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:35, 41; (If you, Ulmi-Teššub, should violate this treaty) nu–tta–kkan k„š LIM DINGIR.MEŠ QADU SAG.DU–KA DAM–KA DUMU.MEŠ–KA KUR–KA É–KA KISLAH–KA KIRIﬂ–KA A.ŠÀ A.GÀR–KA GUD.MEŠ–KA UDU.HI.A–KA MIMMU–KA arha harninkandu “May these thousand gods destroy you including your person, your wife, your children, your land, your palace (lit. house), your threshing-floor, your garden, your fields, your cattle, your sheep, (and all your other) possessions” KBo 4.10 + 1548/u rev. 6-7 (treaty, Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. THeth 38:44f., translit. Otten/ Rüster, ZA 63:86; cf. ibid. rev. 9-10; DUB.1.KAM INA É LUGAL P¸NI dZithariya GAR-ri DUB.1.KAM– ma µ.dLAMMA-aš KUR URU.dU-tašša INA É–ŠU harzi “One tablet (i.e., copy of the treaty) is deposited in the king’s house before Zithariya; and Kurunta has one tablet in his house in the land of Tarhuntašša” Bronze Tablet iv 50-51. 
Although the usual word for “(residential) palace” was (É)halentuwa-, q.v., the building could also be referred to simply as the king’s “house,” parn-/per. In addition, despite the basic distinction established by Güterbock, CRRAI 19:306f., between the Sumerogram É.GAL as “palace fiscus,” and É LUGAL as “estate of the king,” there are occasions when the writings are employed interchangeably — see Archi, OA 12:212. Because of this uncertainty, and in order to present the material to the user without prejudice, É LUGAL will be given a separate entry in the Sumerographic sec.; cf. also É dUTU-ši “House of His Majesty” HKM 31:13 (letter, MH/MS); HKM 34:8 (letter, MH/MS), HKM 101:3 (MH/MS); mΩn LUGAL-uš MUNUS.LUGAL-ašš–a taranzi ta DUMU.MEŠ-an pár-na paimi “If the king and queen say (so), then I go to the House of the Princ

per 1 c 1' b' 

es; (If they do not say so, then I do not go)” KBo 
17.1 iv 11 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:32f., cf. ibid. iii 17. 
c. dwelling of a god, temple — 1' writings — a' wr. šiunaš parn-or šiunaš É: šiunaš É-az 3 GIŠzalu~ waniuš udanzi … t–uš EGIR-pa ANA É DINGIRLIM pËdanzi “They bring three zalwani’s from the god’s house … and they carry them back to the god’s house” KBo 17.74 ii 38-40 (OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:22f.; DA[M] LÚGUDU⁄¤ andan šiunaš É-ri ša[(rhul)]iyaš per[(an arta)] “The wife of the GUDU⁄¤ priest stands inside, in the god’s house, in front of the šarhuli” KBo 17.15 rev.! 13 (fest., OS), w. dupls. KBo 17.40 iv 7 (OH/MS?), KBo 20.125 iii? 4-5, ed. Haas/Wäfler, UF 8:82f., translit. StBoT 25:73; cf. rev.! 3; 1 IM.GŠD.DA mΩn LUGAL-uš DINGIR-uš kišari nu INA KUR URUZalpΩ GIM-an šiunaš pár-na-aš aniyatti newahhanzi “One ‘long tablet’ (entitled) ‘If the king becomes a god (i.e., dies), how they renew the regalia of the god’s house in the land of Zalpa’” IBoT 2.130 rev. 1-5 (rit. colophon, NS), ed. HTR 92f., cf. HW™ 1:89; cf. KUB 56.46 vi 17-18 (OH/NS), translit. StBoT 25:103. 
b' wr. É DN: nu É dIŠTAR [µD]udhaliyaš DUMU–YA ¬tapardu “Let my son Tudhaliya govern the house of dIŠTAR” KUB 1.1 iv 77-78 (Apol. of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:28f. For other exx., see below sub c 2', c 6', c 8', c 10', etc. The following are some of the DNs attested in the É + DN construction: É dAllani KUB 
32.128 i 25, É dAšhaluga KBo 2.4 i 17, É dAškašipa KBo 
10.20 iii 23, É DINGIR.GEﬂ KUB 29.4 i 4, É dÉ.A KUB 
10.5 vi 9, KBo 9.140 ii 22, É dHalkiaš/dNISABA KUB 
26.9 i 18, ABoT 14 iii 10, 21, KBo 10.20 i 33, É dHal~ maššuittaš KBo 3.22:57, É dHannu KBo 10.20 ii 40, É dHaškalan KUB 53.14 ii 2, É dHebat KUB 30.31 + KUB 
32.114 iv 21, 36, É dInar KBo 20.33 obv. 13, É dIšhara KUB 32.128 i 24, É dIŠTAR KUB 1.1 iv 77, É <d>Katahha Bo 3117 ii 6 (in Alp, Tempel 238), KUB 58.61 i 2, É dkuršaš KBo 14.76 i 13, É dLAMMA URUHa[tti …] KUB 51.26 rt. 15, É dLelwani KUB 13.35 i 8, É dMADANIM KUB 
4.47 obv. 24, É DINGIR.MAH KBo 10.20 iii 19, É dMaliya KBo 15.49 iv 10, ABoT 14 iv 6, É dMezzulla KBo 
10.2 i 13, 40, É dNupatig KBo 20.114 i 11, 22, É dParga KBo 10.27 v 9, É dŠarrumma KUB 41.48 iv 5, É dTe~ lipinu KUB 52.14 ii 7, É dTetešhapi KBo 21.100 rev. 12, É dUTU URUArinna KBo 10.2 i 37, É dZA.BA›.BA› KBo 
4.9 i 11, 1 É DINGIR-LIM ŠA dZA.BA›.BA› KUB 

278

42.100 iii 12, É dZAR[PANITIM] KUB 4.47 obv. 24, É dZiparwa KBo 10.20 ii 14, 25, É dZi[thariya] KBo 22.228:13, 16. 
c' wr. É + DINGIR: É DINGIR-LIM: KBo 25.17 i 4 (OS), KUB 30.42 iv 22 (NH), KUB 13.4 iii 25, 34 (pre-NH/ NS); É DINGIR-LUM: AT 454 i 4 (NH); w. phonetic compl., perhaps gen.: uncert. […]É DINGIR-LIMaš kui[t] SI≈SÁ-tat “What […] in/of(?) the temple(s?) was determined” KBo 23.114 obv. 7; ŠA! É DINGIR-LIM-aš(-)ša-a[n??…] (over eras.) KUB 11.30 iii 19 | these are the only attested exx. of possible phonetic Hitt. complementation w. this Sumerogram, and the reading of each is questionable; É.MEŠ DINGIR-LIM: KUB 6.45 i 22 (Muw. II); É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ: KUB 13.4 iii 10, 17 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 14.14 rev. 4 (Murš. II), KUB 6.45 iii 24 (Muw. II), KUB 21.17 ii 7 (Hatt. III), KBo 20.90:2, 6 (Tudh. IV); É DINGIR.MEŠ: KUB 30.34 iv 3, 4, 8 (MH/NS), KUB 18.41 obv. 19, KBo 12.132 obv. 3, KBo 24.117 left col. 3, KUB 17.21 i 7 (MH/MS); É.HI.A DINGIR.MEŠ: 1852/ 
u:14 (Alp, Tempel, 366f.), KUB 15.42 ii 32 (MH/NS). As in some other ancient Near Eastern cultures (cf. Akk. bÏt ili, bÏt DN), the temple, as the dwelling of a deity, was referred to simply as the “house” or the “house of the god” (šiunaš parn-/per). Ideo
graphically, it was wr. É DINGIR-LIM or É plus divine name. Cf. the writing É dLAMMA in KBo 
22.189 ii 3 w. dInaraš pár-na in ii 8 of the same text. Ékarimmi-, given in HW 270 as the reading of É DINGIR-LIM, is probably not strictly equivalent to the Sumerogram. See Güterbock, CRRAI 20:125, and Starke, ZA 69:97 n. 109. Writings of the pl. of É DINGIR(-LIM) as É.HI.A DINGIR(-LIM/.MEŠ) or É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ/DINGIR-LIM show that the customary connected transcription É.DINGIRLIM (as one word) is incorrect. Only the differing status of the owner of the per “house” — ordinary person, ruler, or god — requires the differing translations “house,” “palace,” or “temple”; see Naumann in Bittel, Yaz™ 124; cf. also É.KUR.RA HZL p. 189. 
2' construction or donation: É dHalmašuittaš É dIM-naš [(B´LIYA U É dŠiunašummiš ABNI)] KASKAL-za kuit Ωššu utahh[un … (apËdanda hališšiyanun)] “I built the temple of Halmašuitt, the temple of the Stormgod, my lord, and the temple of Šiunašummi. I decorated [them] with goods that I brough[t] from the campaign” KBo 3.22 rev. 57

per 1 c 2' 
58 (hist., OS), w. rest. of ungrammatical dŠiunašummiš from late copy KUB 26.71 i 6-7, cf. -mi-a 1', ed. StBoT 18:14f.; mΩn É [DINGIR-LI]M! G[IBI]L našma É.MEŠ GIBIL.MEŠ dammeli pedi wedanzi “When they build a new [temp]le(!) or new houses on virgin soil” KBo 4.1 i 1 (rit., NH), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 126, 134; kΩša kË kue É DINGIR-LIM tuk ANA DINGIR-LIM wetummen … nu–war–at UL anzΩš wetummen DINGIR.MEŠ–ya–war–at h„manteš weter “These temples which we have just built for you, the deity … it is not we who built them; all of the gods built them” KBo 4.1 obv. 28-30, (foundation rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 2.2 i 33-37, ed. Kellerman, Diss. 128, 135, cf. KBo 4.1 obv. 1, ed. 1 a 2', above, and ibid. obv. 11-13; pΩnzi–kan ANA DINGIR-LIM GIBIL É DINGIR-LIM URUKÙ.BABBAR-ši šer wedanzi “They will build a temple for the new deity up in Hattuša” KUB 50.89 ii 15-16 (oracle question, NH); URUTaram<me>qa dZA. BA›.BA› DINGIR-LIM-tar … É DINGIR-LIM GIBIL–ši LÚSANGA DÙ-wen “The city of Taram<me>qa: (its deity is) Zababa; (the cultic equipment is:) a divine image … We have made a new temple (and) a priest for him” KUB 38.1 i 4, 9 (cult inv., NH), tr. Rost, MIO 8:178; uizzi–ma–za–kan mΩn apËz IŠTU É DINGIR.GEﬂ parΩ tamai É DINGIR.GEﬂ wetezzi “If in addition to that temple of the Night Deity he proceeds to build another temple of the Night Deity” KUB 29.4 i 2-4 (rit.), ed. Schw.Gotth. 6f. (differently); cf. also KUB 29.4 + KBo 24.86 iii 17 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 22f. (without join); 2 T˘UPPU mΩn É DINGIR-LIM GIBIL wedan[zi] “Two tablets — Whenever one build[s] a new temple” KUB 30.45 + HSM 3644 iii 3 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 160f.; 1 É DINGIR-LIM ú-e-tan˛ LÚSANGA–kan watkut “One temple is built. The priest has fled” KBo 2.1 ii 30-31 (cult inv., NH), ed. Carter, Diss. 54, 64, 4 É DINGIR-LIM wedan “Four temples (are) built” ibid. i 26, cf. ibid. i 26, ii 7, 18, 38, 44, iii 5, 11, 19, 32, 41, and iv 14-15 (É [DINGIR-LIM] nawi ú-e-da-an); nu–ddu–za paizzi DINGIR-LAM DÙ-zi nu–tta pËdan hinkzi nu–tta É-er pΩi “He will make you his own deity. He will allot you a place, he will give you a house/ temple. (He will give you servants and cattle)” KUB 
7.5 i 19-20 (rit., MH?/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:273, 277, tr. ANET 349, cf. peda-(n.) a 2' a'; namma–za–kan dLIŠ URUŠamuhi ANA P¸N ŠEŠ–YA šarrahhun nu–šši É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ INA URUUrikina iyanun 
279

“Then during the reign of my brother I ‘divided’ Šaušga of Šamuha, and I made (new) temples for her in Urikina” KUB 21.17 ii 5-8 (indictment, Hatt. III), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 145, 148; dU URULihzina DINGIR-LIMtar kinun EGIR-pa DÙ-er É DINGIR-LIM–ši weter “The Stormgod of Lihzina: now they have made a divine emblem/statue again, they built a temple for him” KUB 38.12 ii 6-7 (cult inv.); 2 TAPAL É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ GIBIL-TIM ŠA dU AN-E dUTU URUTÚL-na weter “They built two new sets (of) temples (each having cellas) for the Stormgod of Heaven and the Sungoddess of Arinna” ibid. ii 14-15, ed. Rost, MIO 8:200; cf. ibid. iii 13; 1 É DINGIR-LIM µ.dSÎN-LÚ wedai “Arma-ziti is building one temple” KBo 12.56 i 8 (cult inv., NH). 
3' maintenance: mΩn É DINGIR-LIM–ya kuitki zappiyatta n–at auriyaš EN-aš LÚMAŠKIM. URUKI–ya EGIR-pa SIGﬁ-ahhandu “And if some temple has a leaky roof, let the commander of the border district and the city inspector (Akk. rΩbiœ Ωli) repair it” KUB 13.2 ii 37-39 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 46, cf. mΩn 10 a 2'; nu–kan É DINGIR-LIM parΩ šanhanzi daganzipuš tattarΩnzi nu É DINGIR-LIM andurza arahza harniyanzi šuhhuš zappiyaz pahšanuwanzi “They will clean out the temple and sweep(?) the floors. They will sprinkle the temple inside (and) out. They will keep the roofs from leaking” KUB 9.15 iii 5-8 (instr., NH); cf. KUB 56.48 i 18; nu–kan É DINGIR-LIM p[arΩ] šanhanzi papparšanzi “They clean out (and) sprinkle the temple” KUB 31.113:12-13 (instr.?), ed. KN 130f.; (At the conclusion of a ceremony) n–ašta GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A arha šanhanzi É-r–a–kan P¸NI DINGIR-LIM šanhanzi nu haššuš INA huššulli išhuw[anzi] “They clean off the tables, and clean the temple before the deity. Then [they] pou[r] out the ashes in the garbage dump” KBo 24.57 i 6-8 (rit.) | this is the text that clarifies the mng. of ha-aš-šu-uš in KUB 
31.100 rev. 10, mistakenly taken as the nom. sg. of “king” by Güterbock in Oriens 10:353; and[a–m]a–z[a p]ah~ h[u]enašš–a uddanÏ mekki nahhanteš Ëšten n–ašta [m]Ωn [INA] É DINGIR-LIM EZEN› nu IZI mekki pahhašten mahhan[–ma] GEﬂ-[a]nza kÏša n–ašta pahhur kuit ANA GUNNI Ωšzi n–at–ka[n] wedanda SIGﬁ-in keštanutten “In addition be very conscientious in the matter of fire. If there is a festival [in] 

per 1 c 5' 

the temple, then watch the fire carefully. [But] when nighttime comes, then extinguish well with water such fire as remains in the brazier” KUB 13.4 iii 44-47 (instr., pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 158-61 and Süel, Direktif Metni 62-65. 
4' respect for temples: [namma–š]an É DINGIRLIM–K[A BIBR]IHI.A–KA [GAL.HI.A–KA] UN¨~ T´MEŠ–KA nahšaraza tiyanza “[Then] for your temple, your [animal-shaped vess]els, [your cups,] (and) your implements reverance has been established” KUB 24.1 ii 16-17 (prayer of Murš. II), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:20f., Lebrun, Hymnes 182, 186, tr. ANET 397; (When I occupied the town of Kapperi) nu–ššan INA URUKappËri kuit É DINGIR-LIM ŠA dHatipunΩ EGIR-an n–at huldalΩnun n–at UL šaruwΩer ÌR. MEŠ DINGIR-LIM–ya–ššan kuiËš INA URUKappËri EGIR-an ešer n–aš arha dalahhun n–at ešer–pat “I spared (huldalanun) the temple of Hatipuna which was back in Kapperi, and they did not plunder it. What servants of the god were back in Kapperi I left alone, and they remained (there)” KUB 
19.37 iii 36-40 (AM), ed. AM 176f.; cf. also ibid. iii 41-46, and KBo 5.6 iii 31-38 (DS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:95, and šalik-, in a descr. of Šupp. I’s capture of Kargamiš, where Güterbock restored É.MEŠ DINGIR-LIM in l. 36; cf. passim in KUB 17.21 and its dupls. (prayer of Arn. and Ašm.), ed. Kaškäer 152-163, Lebrun, Hymnes 132-154, tr. ANET 399f., which describes many items belonging to the temples that were treated w. respect by the Hittites (e.g., ibid. i 11-13), but plundered by the Kaška and restored (ibid. ii 14-17, 26-iii 3); cf. in general the passages cited under nahh-b 2', nahšaratt-2, nahšariya-2, pahš-2 d, 3 a, pahšanu-4. 
5' disrespect for and destruction of temples: (The enemy lands that are disrespectful to you, Telipinu, and the other gods) kuiËš(!)–ma–z (so w. better var. kuiËš–ma–z; text incorrectly kuedaš) šumenzan É.HI.A DINGIR.MEŠ–KUNU arha warnummanzi ilališkanzi “and (those) who constantly desire to burn down your temples (and who endeavor to plunder your possessions)” KUB 24.1 iii 21-22 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.2 rev. 5-6, ed. Gurney, AAA 27:32f., (The Kaška(?) are accused:) nu É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ arha warnutten “And you burned down the temples” KUB 21.8 iii 13 (Hatt. III) in fragmentary context, cf. KN 40 w. n. 1; cf. passim in KUB 17.21 and its dupls. (prayer of Arn. and Ašm.), ed. Kaškäer 152-163, and 

280

discussed in preceding paragraph and cf. pippa-1 a; cf. also KUB 24.3 ii 29-30 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.4 + KUB 30.12 obv. 18-19, ed. (¬)lawarr- (without dupl.). 
6' divine images, possessions and furnishings: (Of the booty of Ulma) nu 7 DINGIR.MEŠ INA É dUTU URUTÚL-na [pË]dahhun 1 GUD KÙ. BABBAR DINGIR-LIM MUNUS-TUM ƒKatiti HUR.SAGAranhabilanni Ωššer–ma–kan kuiËš DINGIR.MEŠ n–aš INA É dMezzulla pe<da>hhun “I transported seven deities to the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna (including) one silver bull, a female deity Katiti (and) the mountain (deity) Aranhabilanni. What gods remained I transported to the temple of Mezzulla” KBo 10.2 i 37-40 (ann. of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:46f. | cf. Akk. version KBo 10.1 obv. 18-20; (Of the booty of Zalpa) 1 GUD KÙ.BABBAR 1 GEŠPÚ KÙ.BABBAR INA É dIM pe<da>hhun Ωššer–ma–kan kuiËš n–aš INA É dMezzulla pe<da>hhun “I transported to the temple of the Stormgod one silver ox (and) one silver fist. But what (gods) remained I transported to the temple of Mezzulla” KBo 10.2 i 12-14 (bil. ann. of Hatt. I, OH/ NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:44f. | the Akk. version KBo 10.1 obv. 5-6 (both here and in the previously cited passage) shows ušËli, which presupposes the v. pedahhun rather than the pé-ehhu-un that KBo 10.2 gives; for the silver fist, see Güterbock in FsEVermeule 45-60; É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–ta par~ ku<i?> IŠT[U KÙ.(BABBAR KÙ.GI unuwanta)] INA KUR URUHatti–pat [Ëšzi namma–ma–tta] tamedani KU[R-e (UL kuwappikk)i Ëšzi GA]L(?). HI.A–ta BIBRIHI.A KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI(!) N[A›. HI.A] INA KUR Hatti–pat Ëšzi “Only in Hatti do you have lofty (or: pure) temples adorned wi[th silver and go]ld. [Beyond (this),] in [no] other count[ry do] you have (any). Only in Hatti do you have [cu]ps(?) (and) rhyta of silver, gold, (and) precious st[ones]” KUB 24.1 i 25-ii 2 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 24.2 i 21-23, w. additional restorations from par. KUB 24.3 i 12-15, ed. Gurney, AAA 27:18f. and Lebrun, Hymnes 182, 185 (tr. omits parku); nu mΩn uizzi É dUTU URUTÚL-na parΩ [ha]ppinešzi … mΩnn–a É dUTU URUTÚL-≠na± uizzi ašiwa[ntešzi] “If it happens that the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna becomes richer … or if it happens that the temple of the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna [becomes] poorer” KUB 26.43 obv. 56-57 (land grant to Šahurunuwa, Tudh. IV); 

per 1 c 8' 
U IŠTU É DINGIR-LIM (var. É.GAL-LIM) kÏ dΩi 1 UDU.NŠTA 1 MÁŠ.GAL … UN¨T BÁHAR! (wr. DUG.GA.QA.BUR) UN¨T [AD.KID.HI.A] kÏ–ma LÚzilipuriyatallaš [dΩi] “And from the temple (var. palace) he takes these things: one wether, one male goat (… many other provisions), pottery implements, (and) implements [of wicker]. These things the zilipuriyatalla-man [takes]” KUB 2.2 iv 1, 10-11 (rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 19.162 rev. 1-10, ed. HHB 76f. | for a disc. of halkueššar/MELQ´TU “cult provisions,” see StBoT 27:147-49 and HW™ 2:3 s.v. halkueššar. Cf. hal~ kueššar ŠA É dkuršaš–pat “(They are) the cult provisions of the temple of the same deified Hunting Bag” KUB 50.82:13 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 22.27 iv 3, 12, 29, 32, 35 (oracle questions, NH). For the renewal of furnishings, etc., see IBoT 2.130:1-5 (rit. colophon, NS) cited c 1', above; and for further exx., see (EGIR-pa) newahh-and (EGIR-pa) hališšiya-. 
7' personnel: The most common and general terms for “priest(ess)” are šankunni-(LÚSANGA), LÚGUDU⁄¤, and šiwanzanna-(MUNUSAMA.DINGIRLIM). In addition to the various other terms for types of priests, cultic functionaries, and craftsmen active in the temple (cf. Mestieri 204-435), there are also generic expressions like LÚ(.MEŠ) É DINGIR-LIM “man/men of the temple e.g., KUB 13.4 iv 78 (instr., pre-NH/NS) (cf. refs. in Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri 204-207), MUNUS.MEŠ É DINGIR-LIM “women of the temple” KUB 25.49 ii 26, 27, 28 (fest.) and LÚ.MEŠhi~ lammatteš “temple personnel” cf. Sommer, HAB 133, n. 2, Hoffner, AlHeth 131f., not w. Puhvel, HED 3:307f. “courtiers”; in KBo 2.1 i 24-25 and ii 5-6 they include a cook, a baker, a vintner, a potter, a singer, a reed-mat weaver, etc., and in KUB 38.12 i 17 they are the personnel of the É GIŠ.KIN.TI which was located in the “Südareal” of Temple I). Since there is no certainty that the Hitt. behind LÚ/ MUNUS.MEŠ É DINGIR-LIM involved the word parn-/per, they will be found in the Sumerographic sec. Note also LÚMAŒŒAR É DINGIR-LIM, “watchman of the temple” KUB 53.4 rev. 39 (fest.) and KUB 
53.14 ii 10 (fest.). 
8' activities: EGIR-anda–ma uizzi LÚSANGA ŠU.GI ŠA dLAMMA k„n EZEN›-an apel INA É– ŠU URUHattuši zËni [A]NA dLAMMA kiššan iËzzi “But afterwards the senior (lit. old) priest of the Protective Deity will perform this festival for the 
281

Protective Deity in his own temple in Hattuša in the autumn as follows” KUB 10.93 iv 3-6 (fest.); ≠É.MEŠ± [(DINGI)]R.MEŠ–ya kue TUR-R¨TI ŠA dŠulikatti U ŠA dHašammili EZEN› hadauri kuedaš iyanza n– an INA É dIM mahhan iËr apËdaš–an ANA É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ Q¸TAMMA iyanzi “And the small temp[le]s of Šulikatti and of Hašammili, in which the hadauri-festival is performed — as they performed it in the temple of the Stormgod, shall they perform it likewise in those temples?” KBo 24.118 + ABoT 14 ii 8-14 (oracle question, NH), w. dupl. KUB 22.27 i 911, ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 12:46, 61f.; cf. KBo 24.118 + ABoT 14 i 10-15, 26-27, ii 21-26, iii 1-4; [lu]kkatti–ma LUGALuš INA É dU URUHalab [pa]izzi INA É DINGIR. MAH–ma ANA dHattagga dU.GUR dHa[š]ammeli U ANA dÉ.A [E]ZEN› hadauri iyanzi “At [d]awn the king [g]oes into the temple of the Stormgod of Aleppo, but in the temple of the Mother-goddess they perform the hadauri-festival for Hattagga, Nergal, Hašammeli, and Ea” 438/s iii 8-11 (fest. outline), ed. Alp, Tempel 148f. (“Kultraum”), tr. Güterbock, NHF 65; luk~ katti–ma LUGAL-uš INA É dZiparwΩa [paizzi] nu EZEN› … [I]NA É dUTU–ma EZEN› hadauri iyanzi “On the following day (day 12) the king [goes] into the temple of Ziparwa: a festival (takes place); … but in the temple of the Sungod(dess) they celebrate the hadauri-festival” KBo 10.20 ii 14-15, 17 (outline of ANDAHŠUM fest.), ed. Güterbock, JNES 19:82, 86; INA É dLAMMA [EZ]EN hadauri DÙ-anzi Bo 3117 ii 8 (fest.), ed. Alp, Tempel 238f.; EZEN›.ITU–ši ŠÀ É DINGIR-LIM Ëššanzi “They perform the monthly festival for him (the deity Kantiputti) in the temple” KUB 38.14 obv. 8 (cult inv., NH); nu–kan É-ri parkuin EZEN› [aniy]a?nzi “They [per]form(?) a pure festival in the temple” KBo 24.93 rev. 6-7 (fest.); (When the king comes to Hattuša during the nuntarriyašhafestival) [n–a]š INA É dU mahhan [G]UD.MAH. HI.A kuranzi É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ h„manda wehzi “while they are cutting up bulls in the temple of the Stormgod, he makes the circuit of all the temples” KUB 25.12 vi 14-17 (fest.); UZUšuppaHI.A kue ZAG. GAR.RA-aš peran kittat n–e–z lukkatta LÚ.MEŠSANGA danzi INA É DINGIR-LIM zanu~ wanzi “On the morrow the priests take the cuts of meat which were deposited before the altar, and cook them in the temple” KUB 53.14 ii 3-4; EGIRanda–ma–kan É dZA.BA›.BA› šanhanzi šuppa 

per 1 c 8' 

h„ešu ŠA GUD.MAH ŠA GUDÁB.HI.A ŠA UDU. HI.A U ŠA MÁŠ.GAL.HI.A ištanani peran P¸NI DINGIR-LIM šanÏ pedi tianzi “But afterward they clean the temple of Zababa. They place the raw meat of a bull, cows, sheep, and goats before the offering table, before the god, in the same place” KBo 
4.9 i 11-15 (fest., pre-NH/NS); [nu–k]an dUTU-ŠI ANA É DINGIR-LIM apΩšila ari nu–za ANA DINGIR-LIM arkuwar DÙ-zi “[And] should His Majesty himself arrive in the temple and make an arkuwar prayer to the deity?” KBo 18.146 rev. 14-15 (letter, NH); n–aš–kan pár-[ni/na] anda paizzi … nu–za arkuwar kiššan! iy[a(zi)] “And he enters the temp[le] … Then he m[a]kes an arkuwar prayer as follows” KUB 24.5 + FHL 125 rev. 1-3 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:12f., w. dupls. KUB 
36.93 rev. 7-8, KBo 15.14:5; (In shelf list entries:) 1 IM.GŠD.DA mΩn LÚNAR INA É dInar išpanti NINDA haršauš paršiya ta kiššan mΩlti hattili QATI “One ‘long tablet’: When the singer by night in the temple of Inar breaks thick bread and recites as follows in Hattic. (The text of the composition is) finished (on this tablet)” KUB 30.42 iv 8-10 (shelf list, NH), ed. CTH pp. 163f.; DUB.1.KAM ŠA MUNUS.MEŠzinduhiyaš ANA P¸NI LUGAL INA ŠÀ É dUTU-aš GIM-an memieškanzi QATI “One tablet of the zintuhi-women: how they speak before the king in the temple of the Sungod. Finished” ibid. iv 11-13; MUNUSzintuhi[… INA É] dUTU ANA P¸NI LUGAL IDABBUB “A zintuhi-woman[…] speaks before the king [in the temple] of the Sungod” KUB 28.7 iv 1-2 (fest., pre-NH/NS); nu LUGAL kuwapi INA É dKubaba pait nu–za–kan apËdani Ù-[an aušta nu–za?] kuin Ù-an aušta GAL LÚ.MEŠHAL ariyadu “And when the king went into the temple of Kubaba and s[aw a] drea[m] within it — let the chief of the diviners investigate by oracle the dream which he saw” KUB 22.69:4-5 (oracle question, NH); nu LUGAL-uš INA É dIŠTAR LŠL annalaš URUŠam„ha paizzi … nu–šši kuwapi Ωššu n–aš apiya šešzi P¸NI dIŠTAR LŠL– ma eša LÚ.MEŠNAR LÚ.MEŠAZU–ya GEﬂ-an laknu~ wanz[i] “The king enters the old temple of IŠTAR of the Field in Šamuha … (and he performs libations.) And if he prefers, he can spend the night there. He sits before IŠTAR of the Field, but the singers and exorcists keep active through the night” KUB 27.1 iv 46-50 (fest., NH), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 85, 94, laknu-7; UM~ MA MUNUS.LUGAL–MA pΩndu–wa LÚ.MEŠKUŠ‡ 

282

KÙ.GI LÚ.MEŠšalašhuš MUNUS.LUGAL µGAL.dUaš µUkkuraš LÚUGULA.10 šakuwaššaruš INA É dLelwani linkandu “Thus said the queen: ‘Let the golden chariot-fighters, the šalašha-men of the queen, GAL.dU, (and) Ukkura, the commander of ten, go and swear šakuwaššaruš in the temple of Lelwani.’ (And Ukkura testified as follows under oath)” KUB 13.35 i 6-8 (dep., Pud.), ed. StBoT 4:4f.; although the word “house” (temple) does not appear when the colophon of the Bronze Tablet iv 44-51 directs that six of the seven copies be deposited “before” six different gods, the expression “before the god X” clearly indicates a temple; cf. also: weš–a– za kΩša UGULA LIM LÚ DUGUD ŠA ÉRIN. MEŠ[…] h„manza QADU DAM.MEŠ–NI DUMU.MEŠ–NI katta DUMU.DUMU.M[EŠ–NI] QADU KUR–NI linkiyaš T≥UPPU ZABAR ha[n~ tezzi … iy]awen n–at INA URUHatti ANA P¸NI DINGIR[ … NIŠK]UN “We … have made a bronze tablet of the oath and have [dep]osited it in Hattuša before the go[d] (or: before DN)” KUB 26.24 iv 8-12 (instr. to LÚ.DUGUD, MH); cf. also (The agreement that was imposed by the Stormgod of Hatti by which the Hittites and Egyptians were made to swear) ddam~ naššaruš–kan kuit INA LIBBI É dIM URUHatti B´LIYA “Because the damnaššara-deities were in the temple of the Stormgod of Hatti, My Lord (is the breaking of this agreement the cause of the god’s anger?)” KUB 14.8 obv. 35 (PP2), ed. Goetze, KlF 1:212f., cf. pp. 228f. on the damnaššara-deities, tr. ANET 395; and the fragmentary passage: [T≥U]PPU M¸MˆT […] É DINGIR-LIM x[…] KBo 18.28 iv 18 (letter, NH) | It is clear from references in Akk.-language treaties to the placing of the documents “before the god” that copies of these documents were kept in temples — see Korošec, Hethitische Staatsverträge 100f.; mΩn–za–kan dNISABA URUHatti INA ŠÀ É DINGIR-LIM–KA UL kuitki TUKU. TUKU-wanza “If you, O grain deity, are not at all angry within the temple (let the omen be favorable)” KUB 5.7 rev. 18 (oracle question, NH), tr. ANET 498; dUTU URUTÚL-na–kan kuit ŠÀ É DINGIR-LIM TUKU.TUKU-ti S[I≈SA-at] ariyawen–ma “Because the Sungoddess of Arinna [was] es[tablished] in anger (i.e., shown to be angry) in her temple, we made oracular inquiry (and she was shown to be angry concerning neglected festivals and blasphemy)” KUB 22.57 obv. 1-2 (oracle question, NH), cf. passim 

per 1 c 10' 
in oracle questions; mΩn–wa ANA P¸[NI] DINGIRLIM kuiški EN SŠSKUR idalawanni memian harzi paiddu–wa–kan edani DINGIR-LIM-aš pár-ni and[a]n hurtaiš lingaiš paprΩtarr–a hΩšuwΩyaš iwar kišaru “If some sacrificer has spoken in an evil way before the deity, in that temple let (his) curse, perjury, and pollution become like the soapwort (which grows up quickly but is eventually harvested and pulverized)” KUB 29.7 rev. 16-17 + KBo 
21.41 rev. 25-26 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 123, 130, tr. ANET 346 (differently). 
9' in myths: nu–za[(n)] dInaraš (var. dLAMMAaš) NA›peruni [(šer)] É-er wetet INA KUR URUTΩ[(rukki)] nu µHupašiyan andan É-[(ri)] ašašta “Then Inara built herself a house on a rock in the land of Tarukka, and she settled Hupašiya in the house” KUB 17.6 i 14-17 (Illuy., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.84:3-5 + KBo 12.84:1-3, ed. Beckman, JANES 14:14, 18, tr. Hittite Myths 12 (§13); dTelipinuš Ωppa pár-na-aš-ša uit nu–za KUR–SU kappuwet “Telipinu came back to his house (i.e., temple) and cared for his land” KUB 
17.10 iv 20 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth 37, tr. ANET 128 (“to his house”), Hittite Myths 17; (Ullikummi grows rapidly, reaching a great height) nu Ékuntar~ ran É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ–ya [a]nda wemišk[i]zzi “And he reaches the sanctuary(?) and the temple(s)” KUB 33.106 + KBo 26.65 i 19-20 (Ullik., NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:18f. (without join), cf. ibid. iv 27-28; [nu–kan mΩn AN]A KÁ É dÉ.A peran erweni “[And when] we arrive at the entrance to Ea’s house” KUB 
33.106 ii 21 (Ullik., NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:40f.; cf. taknaš dUTU-waš Éhalent„waš KBo 32.13 ii 12 (myth, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:221. 
10' as home of a deity: URUZippiri–ma–z dUTUwaš ukturi URU-ri dunnakkešnaš É-ri andan Ëšhut “Seat yourself in Sippar, the permanent city of the Sungod, in the House with an Inner Chamber” KBo 
3.21 iii 14-15 (hymn, pre-NH/NS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:24, 26; nu–za–kan É NAM.HÉ Ωššiyanti É-ri anda Ëšhut “Seat yourself in the House of Abundance, your beloved house” KBo 3.21 iii 21 (hymn, pre-NH/NS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:24, 26; dUTU-ŠI–ma kuwapi lahhaz neyari nu dZithariyan kuwapi INA É–ŠU tarnanzi nu–šši EZEN› kuin iyanzi “And when His Majesty breaks off the campaign, and when they allow (the deity) Zithariya (to return) home (lit. ‘to his temple’), 
283

then such festival as they will perform (— will such-and-such arrangements be acceptable?)” ABoT 14 v 12-15 (oracle question, NH); cf. KUB 13.27 rev.! 19-21 + KUB 26.40:90-92 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 122. 
	d. structure to house animals: takku É GUD kuiški [(wetezzi)] “If anyone builds a barn (lit. house of oxen)” KBo 6.10 iii 14 (Laws §145), w. dupl. KUB 29.29 obv. 6; (After giving the horses a workout, they cool them down, etc.) [n–uš TÚG-it] anda waššiyanzi n–uš–kan pár-ni anda pehudanzi “[Then] they cover [them with a blanket] and lead them into the stable (lit. house)” KUB 29.40 ii 6 (hipp.), ed. Hipp.heth. 178f.; cf. n–uš TÚG-it wašš[anzi n–u]š–kan pár-ni anda pehudanzi ibid. ii 14-15; n– uš–kan ANA É-TIM anda tittanwanzi “Then they install them (the horses) in the stable” KUB 29.52 i 5 (hipp.), ed. Hipp.heth. 196f. | It is uncert. if Sumerographic writings such as É GUD, “cattle barn” (KBo 6.10 iii 14 (see above 1 a 2'), KUB 33.37 + KUB 33.39 iv 1, KUB 31.87 ii 14), É LÚKUŠ‡ “stable” (KBo 3.5 i 10, ii 24), and É NIM.LÀL “beehive” (KBo 6.3 iv 31, 33, KBo 13.29 ii 6), represent forms of parn-/per. See also 5 b below. 
	e. a model of a building: UMMA ƒHepa-SUM É.MEŠ ZABAR–wa iyanzi nu–war–at ANA DINGIR-LIM GAL SUM-anzi nΩwi “Thus says Hepa-SUM: ‘They will make houses of bronze, and they will give them to the Great Deity. (It has) not yet (been done)’” KUB 48.122 i 6-8 (dream, NH), cf. de Roos, Diss. 204, 342f. (i 49-51); (They construct a miniature landscape, including towns, mountains, and rivers) 1 É KÙ.BABBAR 1 GŠN.GŠN 1 É KÙ.GI 1 GŠN.GŠN DÙ-anzi “They make one house of silver, one shekel, (and) one house of gold, one shekel (and they set them up, along with other objects, in the landscape)” KUB 43.49 rev.? 27 (rit., NS), see Hoffner, IEJ 19:178-180 and Popko, Kultobjekte 31. 

2. portion of a complex structure: n–ašta(!) 1 MÁŠ.GAL anda „nniyan[zi] namma–an warpanzi n–an–kan ŠA É.GAL-LIM É.MEŠ kuedaš anda pennanzi n–at–kan šanhanzi namma–at harnu~ wanzi “They driv[e] a male goat (here), and then wash him. Then into whatever rooms of the palace (or buildings of the palace complex) they drive him, these they sweep and furthermore sprinkle (with water)” KBo 13.179 ii 6-10 (rit.); perhaps also É.HI.A TUR-TIM KBo 30.118 rev. 7 (fest.) and É 

per 3 b 

GIŠÙR.RA “attic”(?) ibid. rev. 4. | See below, 3 b, d, for the use of É w. both independent structures and portions of larger buildings. Also relevant is the use of the det. É on syll. wr. names of rooms, such as Édu-un-na-ak-ki-iš-na KUB 55.39 i 12 (EZEN› ITU), whose Sumerogram is É.ŠÀ. Other syll. wr. exx., which could be either rooms or buildings are listed in Reichert, RHA XXI/73:123. 
3. structure for other purposes — a. royal or government buildings (É.HI.A B´L¨TIM): [m]ani~ yahhiya–ta–kkan kue É.GAL-LIMHI.A-TIM É. HI.A B´L¨TI–ya (var. É.HI.A B´L¨TIM É.GALLIM–ya) [(and)]a n–ašta EGIR-an arha punuški “Such palaces and government buildings (lit. ‘houses of lordship’) as are in your district, keep investigating them (with regard to whether anyone has damaged them or stolen from them)” KUB 13.2 iv 13-14 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 13.1 iv 4, ed. Dienstanw. 51, 62; cf. É.HI.A B´L¨MEŠ-TIM KBo 20.107 iv 24 (rit.). 
b. work place, work area, shop, office: parΩ–ma KÁ É LÚuriyanni 1 UDU appanzi “Further, they seize one sheep (at) the entrance of the House of the Chief Provisioner(?) (and slaughter it for the Sungod of the Portico)” KUB 53.12 iv 1-2 (fest.), ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:51f.; IŠTU É LÚuriyanni GÙBlaš–ma 3 NINDAparšulli kar„ udanteš “Three bread fragments have already been brought from the House of the Chief Provisioner(?) of the Left Side” KUB 53.13 iv 16-18 (fest.); cf. also É LÚuri(y)anni in KBo 5.7 rev. 22, IBoT 2.9 + KUB 52.102 i 6, KBo 30.74 rev. 12, KUB 
53.3 i 21, KUB 53.49 obv. 9, rev. 2, and Bo 3689:12 (StBoT 10:34) | on this official, see Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri 266-68, and see Otten’s tr. “Küchenchef” in AA 1991:347; and tuga– kan apiya maniyahhiya anda ŠA LÚDUB.SAR 1 É-TUM–pat “There in your administrative district there is only one scribal office” HKM 52:10-11 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 214f., tr. Beckman, StMed 9:26. Other professions for which an É is attested include MUNUSalhuitra-(KBo 29.121 obv. 4), LÚhaliyami-(KUB 
11.28 iv 4), LÚhΩpiya-(KBo 10.27 iii 32), LÚtaršipΩliya(KUB 13.3 iii 9), LÚtuppΩ-(KUB 13.3 iii 10), and É KI~ SALLUHI HKM 100:21; w. comp. Sumerograms: É LÚBÁHAR “potter’s shop” KUB 36.41:12; É LÚKUŠ‡ “stable(?)” lit. “house of the chariot-warrior” KBo 
3.5 i 10, ii 24; É (LÚ.MEŠ)DUB.SAR.GIŠ “office of the wood-tablet scribes(?)” KUB 25.31 obv. 8, KUB 34.89 

284

rev. 5; É (LÚ)AD.KID “wicker-worker’s shop” KBo 12.34:11; É LÚÁZLAG “fuller’s(?) shop” KBo 9.125 iv 3; É(.HI.A) NA›.ARAﬁ “milling/grinding house(s)/ room(s)” HKM 58:8, HKM 59:6, KBo 15.33 i 10; É (LÚ)NINDA.DÙ.DÙ “bakery” KUB 13.4 i 18, KUB 25.1 i 4; É (LÚ)MUHALDIM “kitchen” KUB 13.3 iii 5; É LÚSAGI “house of the cupbearer” KUB 13.2 ii 21; É LÚZABAR.DAB “wine cellar” KUB 2.6 i 11; É TU‡ “soup kitchen” KUB 13.24:14, cf. paršur 2c; and É LÚ(.MEŠ) ŠÀ.TAM “magazine, warehouse, storeroom” KUB 22.70 obv. 14, 18, KUB 25.28 i 2, É.GIŠ. KIN.TI “house of the craftsmen” KUB 38.12 i 17, cf. 1 c 7', above; we cannot be certain that the Hitt. reading in each case is the gen. of a professional designation and parn-/per, although in most cases it is likely; cf. also É.DUB.BA(.A) “tablet room, scribal workroom” ABoT 65 rev. 8, HKM 71:36; in most of these instances it is not possible to determine whether the structure mentioned is independent or a portion of a more extensive building. 
	c. storehouse: IŠTU É URUAnkuwa harpan DUG KAŠ–ya arta “A heap and a jug of beer from the storehouse of (the city of) Ankuwa are available (lit. standing). (The administrator of Ankuwa is presented to the king)” KBo 10.24 iv 22-23 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:20, cf. StBoT 27:62; other geographic names which are attested w. É in this manner include Halab (KUB 31.100 obv. 19), Hanhana (KUB 53.3 i 19-20), HΩriyaša (KUB 51.23 obv.? 12), Hupišna (KBo 23.38:1), Karahna (KBo 30.8 left col. 6), KΩtapa (∫nandık 13), Gazzimara (KUB 26.82:2), Šugazziya (KUB 3.89 i (14), KBo 16.82 rev. (4) (= l. 20 w. join KBo 23.91 rev.)), T„wanuwa (KBo 10.24 v 1), Zallara (KBo 23.91 rev. 10). Cf. also StBoT 27:62, 135; cf. É NA›KIŠIB = šiyannaš per “seal house, magazine” KUB 11.5 rev. 2 (Tel., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.67 iii 9-10, and see šiyannaš per; É IN.NU.DA “barn” (lit. “straw house”) KUB 13.15 rev. 5 (Laws §158). 
	d. other: DUMU.LUGAL arzana pár-na paizzi “The prince goes to the inn (lit. the arzana house)” IBoT 1.29 obv. 29; NIN.DINGIR-aš arzanaš É-ri [paizzi?] KBo 19.163 iv 42-(43); n–ašta DUMU-aš Éhalentiwaz pa[izzi] ar-za-na-a-aš p[ar-n]a paizzi “The prince comes out of the palace (and) enters the inn” Bo 7937 left col. 10-11 (fest.), ed. Alp, Tempel 234f.; n–aš ar-za-na-aš pár-na paizz[i] KUB 60.41 ii 12 

per 4 a 1' 
(fest., OS), translit. StBoT 25:109 | The alternation among genitival constructions w. parn-/per such as these last two, appositional constructions like ar-za-na pár-na IBoT 1.29 obv. 29, 50, and instances where É is employed as a det., e.g., Éar-za-naan KBo 5.6 i 16 is probably due to the creation of new nominatives from original “free genitives.” Cf. Hoffner, FsGüterbock 114f. Since the construction w. the det. is by far the most common, the primary treatment will be found under arzana-. However, the range of terms bearing the det. É must be kept in mind in any consideration of the semantic field of parn-/per; É ŠURˆPI w≠e±dan Ëštu “Let an ice (storage) house be built” KUB 13.2 iv 26 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/NS), É ŠURˆPI is probably to be read *egaš per; other Sumero- and Akkadographic constructions w. É could be genuine genitival constructions w. per in Hitt.; cf. LUGALuš <(INA)> É GIŠBAN (var. É BAN) ari “The king arrives at the ‘gate of the house of the bow’” (and makes offerings) KUB 2.3 iii 40 (KI.LAM-fest., OH/NS), 
w. dupl. KBo 25.66 i 16, translit. StBoT 28:67, cf. StBoT 27:80; cf. also É DU⁄‚.ÚS.SA “wash-house” KUB 13.2 ii 21; É EN.NU.UN “prison” KBo 3.34 ii 17, 19, KBo 3.28:14; É KˆLI “prison?” KUB 21.29 iii 31, 32; ≠É± NAPØARI “guest house” KBo 30.27 i 12, translit. StBoT 26:365; É.MEŠ NA›.HI.A IBoT 1.13 v 5; É.HI.A NA› KBo 
20.33 obv. 5 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:53; NA›-an par-na-aš hilamni “in the portico of the mausoleum” KBo 17.15 obv.! 12 (OS), translit. StBoT 25:73, cf. HTR 133, StBoT 
26:260 w. n. 45, Kammenhuber, Or NS 41:300. 
4. household, aggregate of property of all kinds, estate (on É as “household,” see Riemschneider, MIO 6:338 n. 76) — a. composition of households — 1' in general: É µP„lliyanni 2 LÚ µPulliyanniš µAššartaš 3 DUMU.NITA µAparkammiš µIriyattÏš [µH]apiluš ≠4 MUNUS ƒTešmuš±ƒZidanduš ƒŠakkummilla<š> ƒHuliyΩšuhaniš 3 DUMU.MUNUS [ƒ]Kapaš~ ša≠nniš±ƒKapurtiš ƒPaškuwΩš 2 MUNUS ŠU.GI ƒ¸rhuwaššiš ƒTuttuwaniš [1]4 SAG.DU 4 GUD. HI.A 2 ANŠE 2 GUDÁB 1 AMAR.ÁB 2 GUD. APIN.LAL ANA GUD.MAH kattan 1 AMAR n–aš 6 GUD.HI.A 10 MÁŠ 7 MÁŠ.TUR [n–]aš 17 MÁŠ 1-NUTUM É.HI.A-TIM GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN GIŠSER~ DUMHI.A GIŠPÈŠ.HI.A ŠA É µPurlišari [I]NA URUŠayanuwanta 7 \ IKU GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN INA URUAntarlΩ ŠA É µHantapi “Household of Pulliyanni: two men: (named), three boys: (named), four women: (named), three girls: (named), two old 
285

women: (named) — four[teen] persons (lit. “head(s)”) (in all); four oxen, two asses, two cows, one female calf, two plow oxen — as for bulls, a (male) calf — that is six head of cattle, ten goats (and) seven kids — that is seventeen goats, one set/ complex of buildings, a vineyard, olive trees, fig trees (formerly?) of the estate of Purlišari in (the town of) Šayanuwanta, 7\ IKU-measures of vineyard in (the town of) Antarla (formerly?) of the estate of Hantapi” KBo 5.7 rev. 34-39 (land grant, MH/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:352f., for KBo 5.7 rev. 12-13, see pešna- b; cf. passim in this text and see Laroche apud T. Özgüc, TTKYayın V/29:115; É µŠuna-DINGIR-LIM 4 LÚ 1 MUNUS ŠU.NIGIN 5 SAG.DU[.MEŠ] 1 MUNUSTUM–ma–šši ED´NU EGIR-anda piyan[za] ANA GIŠTUKUL–ma–šši LÚNINDA.DÙ.DÙ artar[i] “The household of Šunaili: four men, one woman 
— a total of five persons (lit. “heads”). One solitary woman has been giv[en] to it afterwards. A baker has been given to him/it for GIŠTUKUL” KUB 56.1 i 12-14 (vow, Pud.), ed. StBoT 1:30f., cf. passim in this text; µ.dUTU-LÚ-iš ƒPaškuwammiš DAM–ŠU (there follow six more names) É µ.dUTU-LÚ “Tiwataziti, Paškuwammi, his wife, … (These persons comprise) the household of Tiwataziti” KUB 31.59 ii 3-4, 11 (list, NS); [U]RUGaggadd„wa dU 4 É ŠÀ 50 [NAM.R]A URUArzauwa … dUTU-Š[I pΩ]i “In (the town of) Gaggaduwa His Majesty [gi]ves (to) the Stormgod four households/estates containing (a total of) fifty Arzawan [civilian ca]ptives (and other livestock and articles)” KUB 48.105 rev. 38-41 + KBo 
12.53 rev. 15-16 (cult inv., NH), cf. passim in this text and see Klengel, SMEA 16:195f.; [namm]a–za zik µKupantadLAMMA-aš tuel ZI-an tuel É–KA [tue]l LÚ.MEŠAMA.A.TU–KA mahhan Ëššatti “[Furth]ermore, as you, Kupanta-dLAMMA, treat your own person, your (immediate) family (lit. house), and [you]r domestic servants (so look after my garrison)” KUB 6.41 iv 9-10 (treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:132f., tr. DiplTexts 74; note how the circles widen from the individual himself, to his family, to his servants, which themselves form a part of his household in the broadest sense; mΩn–kan É-ri anda SAG.GÉME.ÌR EN É-TI našma GAŠAN É-TI […] “If in a household the servants of the master of the house or (of) the mistress of the house […]” KBo 21.20 i 19 (frag. of med. rit.), ed. StBoT 19:42f.; “Decide well the cases of the land which you judge” n– 

per 4 b 

at–za–kan apËl ŠA É–ŠU ŠA ŠEŠ–ŠU NIN–ŠU haššannaš–ši pankunaš–ši LÚkaenanti LÚare–šši ŠA NINDA KAŠ mΩniyahhiyatti lË kuiški iyazi “Let no one do it (i.e., make a judgment) for (someone) of his immediate family, (one) of his brother(s) (or) sister(s), (one) of his (extended) family, (one) of his clan, his relative by marriage, his friend, (or) for an allotment of bread and beer” KUB 13.20 i 32-34 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:392-395, 407. 
2' master and/or mistress (refs. in Mestieri 489f. n. 1): mΩn–za LÚEN É-TIM dIM URUKuliwišna [… MU-ti] mËyani iyazzi “Whenever the master of the house worships the Stormgod of Kuliwišna […] in the course of the year” KBo 15.32 i 1-2, cf. ibid. 4, ed. Moore, Thesis 68, 70; nu–šša[n anda wahnut] pár-naaš išhÏ pár-na-aš išhaššari DUMU.NITA.MEŠ-aš DUMU.MUNUS.MEŠ-a[šš–a T]I-anni hattulanni innarauwanni MU.HI.A G[ŠD.DA EGIR.UD-MI DINGIR.MEŠ-]aš aššiyaunit DINGIR.MEŠ-naš miumnit “[Turn yourself] (O Stormgod of Kuliwišna) toward the master of the household (and) the mistress of the household and to the sons, daughters, for life, health,” etc. KUB 33.62 ii 17-20 (prayer in rit., MH/MS), ed. Moore, Thesis 102, 105; for rest. and another ex. of this usage, see ibid. ii 7-10, quoted miu(m)mar; (The male gods of the entourage of the Stormgod of Kuliwišna are addressed:) n–ašta pár-na-aš išhuš ANA dIM URUKu[liwišna] Ωššu memiškiten “Speak well of the masters of the household before the Stormgod of Kuliwišna” KBo 15.31 i 14-15 (prayer in rit.), translit. Moore, Thesis 117; nu–za B´LTI É-TI AŠRIHI.A ŠA DINGIR-LIM IŠTU DINGIR-LIM arha arÏyezzi “The mistress of the house determines by oracle the places of the deity from the deity” KUB 17.24 ii 9-10 (EZEN› witaššiaš); cf. also KUB 
27.49 iii 13 (EZEN› witaššiaš); KUB 54.10 ii 4-6 (cult of Huwaššanna), w. dupl. KUB 54.6 iv? 3-4; cf. Haroutunian, VDI 200:126f. 
b. establishing (iya-, ešša-) and dissolving households: “If a free man and a slave girl are lovers, and they move in (together), so that he takes her as his wife” nu–za É-er U DUMU.MEŠ ienzi appizziann–at–kan naššu idΩlauËššanzi našma–at– kan harpantari nu–za É-er takšan šarranzi DUMU. MEŠ–a–z LÚ-aš dΩi 1 DUMU-AM MUNUS-za dΩi “and they make a household and children — if af

286

terwards either they become incompatible or agree to separate, then they divide the household between them, and the man will take the children for himself, (but) the woman will take one child” KBo 6.3 ii 18-20 (Laws §31, OH/MS?), ed. HG 26f., tr. ANET 190 (“found a family”), TUAT 1.1:102 (“sich Haus und Kinder schaffen”); (You temple employees must behave in a manner pleasing to the gods) nu NINDA-an Ëzzatteni wΩtar–ma ekutteni É-er-ra-za iyatteni “so that you will eat bread, drink water, and establish household(s) for yourselves” KUB 13.4 ii 70-71 (instr., pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 156f., Süel, Direktif Metni 50f. 

c. donating or transferring households: (Queen Ašmunikal endows a mausoleum:) “And such villages as are given to the mausoleum, such artisans as are given, such plowmen, oxherds (and) shepherds as are given, such šarikuwa-men as are taken” n–at QADU É.MEŠ–ŠUNU URU.HI.A–ŠUNU ANA É.NA› piyanteš “they are given to the mausoleum, together with their households (and) their villages” KUB 13.8:2-5 (edict, MH/NS), ed. HTR 106f.; (As a result of the sorcery practiced against me by Armatarhunta, my patron deity humbled him) ŠEŠ–YA–ya–an– mu QADU DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU É–ŠU peran nΩiš “And my brother (Muwatalli) turned him over to me together with his wife, his children, (and) his household” KUB 19.67 i 11-12 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:18f.; (I married Puduhepa, and we had sons and daughters; IŠTAR commanded me in a dream:) [QAD(U)] É-TI-ma!-mu ÌR-ahhut nu ANA DINGIR-LIM QADU É-TI–YA [ÌR-a]hhahat nu– nnaš É-er kuit Ëššuen nu–nnaš–kan DINGIR-LUM anda artat nu–nnaš É-er parΩ ≠iyan±niš “‘Serve me with your household (i.e., family and posterity).’ So I served the deity with my household (i.e., family). And the deity stood among us, (in) the household which we established, so that our household [de]veloped(?) (lit. ‘went forward’)” KUB 1.1 + 1304/ u iii 6-8 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:16f.; É-er–ma kuit ANA DINGIR-LIM ADDIN [(nu h)]„manza ANA DINGIR-LIM ¬karnan ¬marnan Ëššau “In the household which I gave to the goddess let everyone perform karna-and marna-for the goddess” KUB 1.1 iv 79-80 (edict, Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 iv 41, ed. StBoT 24:28f., cf. :marnan B; nu k„n kuin DUMU-an AŠŠU[M LÚSA]NGA-UTTIM É-er-ra ANA dIŠTAR [URUŠa~ 

per 4 d 
m]uha ÌR-anni [pehhu]n “Then this son whom for [pr]iesthood, and the household (which) I [gav]e to serve Šaušga of [Šam]uha” (shall remain through the generations in that office) KUB 21.12 ii 9-10 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. NBr 48f. 
d. obligations of households: kuiš URUA[rinna k]uiš URUZiplanti LÚSANGA-eš INA URU.DIDLI h„mant[i] É.HI.A–ŠUNU ELLU “Whoever in A[rinna], whoever in Zip(pa)landa, is a priest — in each of (these) cities his household is exempt. (But his partners render corvée)” KBo 6.2 ii 58-60 (Laws §50, OS), ed. HG 32f., tr. ANET 191, TUAT 1.1:106, cf. Hoffner, BiOr 40:410; kar„ kuiš URUArinna LÚ[(UŠ. BAR ki)šat] U É–SU arΩuwan LÚ.MEŠHA.LA[(–ŠU U LÚ.MEŠNIŠ¨–ŠU)] arΩweš kinuna É–SU–pat 
[(ELLUM LÚ.MEŠHA.LA–ŠU)] U LÚ.MEŠNIŠ¨–ŠU šahhan [lu(zzi)] karpÏzzi “Formerly whoever be[came] a weaver in Arinna was exempt (from service obligations), along with his household. His partners and his people were (also) exempt. But now only his household is exempt. His partners and his people will render the šahhan (and) luzzi” KBo 
6.9 i 1-5 (Laws §51, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 iii 3-6, KBo 
6.2 iii 1-4, KBo 6.6 i 6-9, ed. HG 34f., tr. ANET 191, TUAT 1.1:106; n–ašta mΩn É-ri 4 LÚ.MEŠ [andan] nu 2 LÚ.MEŠ ŠA É.GAL-LIM KIN-an a[niyandu] 2 LÚ.MEŠ–ma–aš pár-na-aš KIN-an an[iyandu m]Ωn–kan É-ri–ma 2 LÚ.MEŠ and[an nu–kan?] 1 LÚ [ŠA É.]GAL-LIM KIN-an an[iyaddu na]šma pár-na-aš-ma-aš KIN-an a!-ni-[ya-ad-du mΩn]– ašda É-ri–ma 1 LÚ andan nu INA UD.4.KAM ŠA É.GAL-LIM KIN-an aniyaddu INA UD.4.KAM–ma KIN ŠA É-TI–ŠU aniyaddu “If [in] a household there are four men, then let two men pe[rform] the work of the palace, and let two men per[form] the work of the household. But if i[n] a household there are two men, [then] let (each) single man p[erform] (either) the work [of] the [pal]ace [o]r the work of their household. But [if] in a household there is (only) one man, then let him perform the work of the palace for four days, and let him perform the work of his household for four (alternate) days” KBo 16.54:9-14 + ABoT 53:5-13 (edict, NS), ed. (without join) Riemschneider, ArOr 33:337f. In support of the emendation in line 10, note that this word is wr. over an eras.; (In return for his loyalty to My Majesty I have distin
287

guished µGAL.dIM) nu–šši–kan É–SU šahhanaz luzziyaz … arawa!hhun nu–šši–kan šahhani luzzi KÁ-aš lË kuiški ti[yazi] “And for him I have freed his household from tax and corvée (and from many other obligations). No one shall appro[ach] his door for tax or corvée” KUB 26.58 obv. 8, 12-13 (decree, Hatt. III), ed. NBr 54f. w. n. 1, cf. KBo 6.29 iii 18-27. 
	e. punishment of households: mΩn–kan ANA URU-LIM–ma ištarna 1 É-TUM w[ašdai nu] apΩt É-er LÚ.MEŠ-it aku “If within a town a single household s[ins, then] let that household, with (its) men, die” KUB 23.68 obv. 27 (treaty, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:194f.; cf. KBo 11.1 obv. 37-38 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:108, 117; (If among the princes and princesses someone should do evil, he shall pay with his head. But do not kill him secretly) É-ri-iš-ši-iš-ši ANA DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU idΩlu lË takkiššanzi “Let them not undertake evil against his household, against his wife (or) his children” KBo 3.1 ii 54 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:34f., Chrest. 190f., cf. ibid. ii 59-60. 
	f. the household in general: (If a woman produces a certain type of monstrous birth) É LÚ-LIM ašiwante[šzi] “(her) husband’s household will [become] impoverished” KBo 13.34 iv 5 (omen, NS), ed. StBoT 9:28f. 
	g. royal household: LUGAL-i–ma–mu DINGIR.MEŠ dUTU-uš dIM-ašš–a utnË É-er-miit-ta maniyahhir nu–za LUGAL-ušš–a utne–met Éer-mi-it-ta pahhašmi “The gods, the Sungod and the Stormgod, entrusted the land and my house to me (as) king, and I, also (as) king, protect my land and my house” KUB 29.1 i 17-19 (rit. OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 11, 25, and Marazzi, VO 5:148f., tr. ANET 357, cf. maniyahh-2; for continuation of passage, see above in bil. sec.; nu–zan É-aš B´L¨MEŠ-TIM (var. nu–šan pé-e-ri pé-e-r[i-aš išheš]) LUGAL-uš MUNUS. LUGAL-š–a DAM.MEŠ pahhuwaršeš ešantari “The masters of the house — the king, the queen and the secondary wives — take their seats (var. adds: in the house/palace)” KUB 29.1 iii 41-43 (rit., OH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 51.56 rev. 4-6 (NS), translit. Hoffner, HS 108:193; (UR.MAH-ziti is reported to have said:) UL–wa–za ŠA É labarna ANA GAL LÚ.MEŠDUB. SAR.GIŠ–kan? LÚHATANU nu–wa–mu–kan kar„ kuwapi ANA GAL LÚ.MEŠDUB.SAR.GIŠ LÚkainanni 

per 4 h 1' 

arha dΩer ŠA É labarna–ma–w[a] UL “Am I not a member of the king’s house, a son-in-law to the Chief of the Wood Scribes? Formerly, when they took me away from in-lawed status to the Chief of the Wood Scribes, (was) he not of the Household of Labarna?” KBo 16.58 ii 3-6 (dep., NH); | the subjects of the nominal sentences are determined on the basis of -za; the dependence of the kuwapi clause on the following clause seems clear, making it past tense, even though the v. Ëšta might have been expected in such a case; (The Hittite queen informs the pharaoh:) namma–kan ŠÀ É-TI kuwapi uwanun DUMU.MUNUS.MEŠ LUGAL kuiËš ŠÀ É-TI wemiyanun nu–mu[–za–ka]n ŠU-i hΩšir “Furthermore, such princesses as I found in the (royal) family upon my coming into the Household have given birth with my assistance (lit. ‘in my hand’)” KUB 
21.38 i 59-60 (letter, Pud.), ed. Helck, JCS 17:92, Stefanini, Pud. 13f.; cf. the answering letter w. variant writing: “[My sister] has written [to me thus]”: ŠÀ É LUGAL–wa–kan [kuwapi uwanun DUMU. MUNUS.MEŠ LUGAL kuiËš we]miyanun “[When I came] into the king’s house (for the first time as queen), [the daughters whom] I found (there) …” KUB 21.36:1-2 (letter), ed. Helck, JCS 17:96f., cf. also Edel in Geschichte und AT 39; these passages could also be cited above in usage 1 b (palace of the king); cf. LUGAL-aš Éer KUB 19.28 iii 9 (treaty, NH), and LUGAL-waš párna-aš KUB 26.10 i 9 (protocol), where the contexts are not sufficient for the establishing of nuance; ŠA Labarna La~ barnaš pár-na-aš dLAMMA-ri “For Labarna’s Protective Deity of the house of Labarna” KUB 2.1 iii 2122 (fest., NH), ed. McMahon, AS 25:106f., dU É µLabarna “The Stormgod of the household of Labarna” KBo 
13.238 ii 10 (fest.), and dU ŠA É MUNUSTawannanna “Stormgod of the household of Tawannanna” KUB 
6.45 iii 4 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 19, 39; here also the Stormgod of the House(hold) — dU É (KUB 
13.32 rev. 9, KUB 30.41 vi 29), and dU É-TI (KUB 11.35 v 8, KUB 38.2 ii 14), since the term probably refers to some protector of the royal family. 
h. aggregate of property of all kinds, estate — 1' of the king: (If someone causes contamination in a bowl or a vat(?), formerly the penalty was six shekels of silver) paprezzi kuiš 3 GŠN KÙ. BABBAR pΩi (var. dΩi) [ha-aš-šu-w]a?-an-na párna 3 GŠN KÙ.BABBAR daškËr kinuna LUGAL-uš 

288

ŠA É.GAL-LIM [pešš]it “The one who causes the contamination pays three shekels of silver — and they used to take three shekels of silver for the [pal]ace (as fiscus) (lit. ‘house of the [ki]ng’), but now the king has [relinquish]ed (the share) of the palace (ŠA É.GAL-LIM)” KBo 6.2 i 57-59 (Laws §25, OS), w. dupl. KBo 12.49 ii 3-4 (NS), ed. HG 22f., tr. ANET 190, TUAT 1.1:101, for restoration in line 58, see Otten apud HG 93; notice how [haššuw]ann–a (or [LUGAL-w]ann–a) parna alternates w. É.GAL-LIM later in the same law; nu LUGAL-wan É-er-za 6 PA. ZŠ[D.DA … pianzi?] “And they [will provide(?)] six PARˆSU of […] flo[ur …] from the king’s house (i.e., royal property)” KUB 28.79:6 (fest, OH/NS); LUGAL-wan É-az tarnatta[n?] / […-a]nzi “They [give?] rations from the king’s house (i.e., royal property)” KBo 20.74 iii 7-8 (fest.); (Šuppiluliuma carried off booty to Hattuša) nu–za NAM.RA.MEŠ ku[(in)] INA É LUGAL uwatet n–aš 3 LIM 3 ME 30[(–ya)] Ëšta “And the civilian captives which he carried off to the royal estate were 3,330 in number” KBo 5.6 iii 42-43 (DŠ), rest. from KBo 14.12 iii 14-15, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:95; for other references to É LUGAL, see under the Sumerogram; (I conquered all these lands in one year) nu–za LUGAL-uš INA É–YA [… L]IM 5 ME 30 NAM.RA.HI.A uwatenun “And I, the king, brought 1,530+[…] civilian captives to my estate, (but what the Hittite soldiers brought home was boundless)” KUB 19.37 ii 42-43, ed. AM 170f.; (The blood guilt of Tudhaliya has now devolved upon me, king Muršili) n–at ammuqqa IŠTU É-TI–YA šarnikzilaz maškanna[z] šarnenkiškimi “And I will make restitution for it from my estate (i.e., my financial resources), with restitution (and) a propitiatory gift” KUB 14.14 rev. 13-14 (PP 1), ed. Pestgeb. 172f., Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 201, cf. maškan b; nu–mu É-er kuit Ëšta nu–kan IŠTU É–YA dIŠTAR URUŠamuha hantiyanun “And such an estate as I possessed — I supported Šaušga of Šamuha from my estate” KBo 
6.29 i 15-16 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 46f.; tr. Güterbock, Oriens 10:352. 
2' of the queen: MUNUS.LUGAL É šiyannaš kuiš ŠA É MUNUS.LUGAL n–an GAL LÚ.MEŠ[…] MUNUS.LUGAL Ëššai “The […] men of the queen worship she who is (divine) queen of the ‘seal-house’ of the queen’s estate” ABoT 14 iv 23-25 

per 4 h 3' 
(oracle question, NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 12:52, 66; “You wrote me …” URUKappušiya mahhan ŠA É MUNUS.LUGAL walhta nu ŠA É MUNUS. LUGAL 1 GUD happutri [dΩer(?)] “How (the enemy) attacked the (possessions of the) queen’s estate and took an ox-happutri” HKM 8:6-8 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. HBM 130f. 
3' of others: takku LÚ.U⁄°.LU-an kuiški h„nikzi t–an ištarnikzi nu ap„n šaktaizzi pËdi–šši–ma LÚ.U⁄°.LU-an pΩi nu É-ri-iš-ši anniškizzi kuitmΩn– aš lΩzziyatta “If someone injures a man and makes him sick, he will take care of him. He will give a man in his place, who will work on his estate until he recovers” KBo 6.2 i 16-18 (Laws §10, OS), cf. NH par. law §IX, KBo 6.4 i 23 (É-er-ši “on his estate” is thus endingless loc., cf. Neu, Lok. 29), ed. HG 18f., tr. ANET 189, TUAT 1.1:99, for a disc. of this paragraph in connection w. sick-maintenance in Indo-European, see Watkins, Ériu 27:21-25; [kΩša] DUMU-mi Labarni É?-e[r] pehhu[n A.ŠÀ.HI.A-še me]kki pehhun GUD.HI.A-še me[kk]i pehhu[n UDU. HI.A-še mekk]i pehhun nu azzikkiddu [a]k[k]uš~ kidd[u] “[Now] I have given my son Labarna an estate(?) — I have given [him m]uch in the way [of fields]. I have given him mu[c]h in the way of cattle. I have given [him muc]h in the way of [sheep.] Let him eat (and) drink” KUB 1.16 ii 30-33 (political testament of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. HAB 6f., the similarity of the situation of the young Labarna to that of the five conspirators in the previous passage supports the reading É-er in ibid. ii 31; (Those who opposed my grandfather — now how much time has passed?) ŠA LÚ.GAL.GAL-TIM É– SUNU kuwapi UL–at harker “Where are the estates of the nobles? Have they not perished?” KUB 1.16 iii 45 (political testament, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14f.; “But when later the servants of the princes became corrupt” nu É.MEŠ–ŠUNU karip„wan dΩer “then they began to devour their estates” KBo 3.1 i 20-21 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), ed. THeth 11:16f.; mΩn ŠA É.NA›–ma hinqanaš waštul kuiški waštai n–aš aki É–SU–ma–šši ŠA É.NA›– pat “But if someone of the mausoleum(?) commits an offense (calling for) execution, he shall die, but his estate belongs to the mausoleum(?) alone” KUB 13.8:11-12 (edict, MH/NS), ed. HTR 106f., cf. KBo 4.10 obv. 10-11 (treaty, Tudh. IV); (When Appu’s sons grew up, they separated) É-er–ma–kan katta [šarrer?] “And they [divided?] the estate” KUB 24.8 iv 3 (Appu, pre-NH/ 
289

NS), ed. StBoT 14:10f.; (If a descendant of µGAL.dU should commit an offense, let him be punished) É– SU–ma–ši–kan [arha?] danzi n–at damËdani an~ tuhši damedani NUMUN-ni lË pianzi mΩn–ši DUMU–ŠU DUMU.DUMU–ŠU Ëšzi n–ašta É-er ANA DUMU–ŠU DUMU.DUMU–ŠU ŠA µGAL. dIM Ωšdu “They shall take his estate [away(?)] from him, but they shall not give them to the descendants of another man (lit. “to another person, to another seed”). If he has a son or grandson, let the estate remain with the son (or) grandson of GAL.dIM” KUB 
26.58 obv. 18-22 (edict, Hatt. III); (I have deposed my stepmother from her position as priestess) nu–šši Éer ADDIN nu–šši–kan ZI-ni UL kuitki waqqΩri NINDA–a–šši wΩtar nu h„man šarΩ artari “And I gave her an estate. Nothing is lacking to her desire. She has bread and water. Everything stands at (her) disposal” KBo 4.8 ii 7-9 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188; (Thus Tudhaliya and Puduhepa:) [(ANA µŠahur)]unu!wa pár-na-aš uttar kiša[n …] “For Šahurunuwa the matter of the estate is thu[s …]”: KBo 22.55:4 (edict, Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 26.43 obv. 3, see in the same text [µŠ]ahurunuwaš–za GAL NA.GADA ANA DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU É–SU kišan šar[(raš)] “Šahurunuwa, the ‘overseer of shepherds,’ has divided his estate among his sons, as follows” KUB 26.43 obv. 4, w. dupl. KBo 22.55:5, ed. Imparati, RHA XXXII:24f. (“il suo patrimonio”); kÏ URU.DIDLI. HI.A É µUtti “These villages (belong to) the estate of Utti” KUB 40.2 obv. 34 (cult inv., NH), ed. Kizz. 62f.; note also pár-na-aš LÚMAŠKIM “bailiff(?) of an estate” KBo 25.106:5 (fest. frag., OS); w. the abl. parnaz or IŠTU É–ŠU “out of (someone’s) estate (or resources)”: (If someone receives only a portion of a parcel of fields) luzzi natta karpizzi IŠTU É ABI– ŠU–ma k[arpianzi] “He shall not render the corvée, but from his father’s estate [they will render] (it)” KBo 6.2 ii 40 (Laws §46, OS), ed. HG 32f., tr. ANET 191, TUAT 1.1:105, cf. also IŠTU É ABI–ŠU–ma karpianzi KBo 6.4 iv 24-25 (NH par. law §XXXVIII); kinun–ma–šši 12 EZEN›.ITU.KAM 1 EZEN› zËni EZEN› hamešhi LÚSANGA IŠTU É–ŠU Ëššai “Now for him (the deity) the priest will celebrate using his own means (lit. “from his own house”) twelve monthly festivals, one autumn festival (and one) spring festival” KUB 42.100 iv 22-23 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), cf. also LÚSANGA IŠTU É–ŠU peškizzi KBo 14.21 ii 56 (oracle 

per 5 b 2' 

question, NH), LÚSANGA IŠTU É–ŠU iyazi KUB 25.27 ii 19 (fest.), and LÚGUDU⁄¤ URUKartapaha IŠTU É– ŠU pΩi KUB 11.33 iii 20-21 (offering list); (If an official commits a certain offense against the king, they shall expel him) DI!-NAM IŠTU É–ŠU šarnikzi “He shall make restitution in this legal case from his own estate” KUB 13.7 i 12-13 (legal text); (An official testifies:) “Some of the asses in my care died” nu– war–aš pár-na-za šarninkun “and I replaced them from (my) estate” KUB 13.35 ii 40 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:8f.; (If someone blinds a free man or knocks out his tooth) kar„ 1 MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR pišker kinuna 20 GŠN KÙ.BABBAR pΩi pár-na-aš-še-a šuwaÏzzi “formerly they paid one mina of silver. Now he (the offender) shall pay twenty shekels of silver. In regard to it, however, he (the injured party) shall look to (i.e., have a claim upon) the house/ estate (of the offender)” KBo 6.2 i 10 (Laws §7, OS), ed. HG 16f., tr. ANET 189, TUAT 1.1:99, and passim in the laws, on the interpretation of the phrase parnaššea šuwaizzi, see Güterbock, Or NS 52:73-80 w. antecedent bibliography, and Haase, BiOr 19:117-122. On the writings -še-e-a, see Melchert, Phon. 163. 
5. (in divination texts) — a. a part of the liver: URUZipaldaš NU.SIGﬁ-du ni. šer–aš ZAG-za UGU É GÙB-za arhan ši. ZÉ hili. GIŠŠÚ.A GÙB-an “(Concerning the town of) Zipal(an)da, let (the oracle) be unfavorable — the nipašuri-: above, it is on the right (and) high(?) the “house” is loose(?) (lit. ‘away’) on the left, the šintahi-, the gallbladder is hilipšiman, the stool is the left hand one ” KUB 22.52 obv. 3-4 (NH). 
b. (as a token/symbol in a KIN oracle) — 1' alone: n–at–za URUŠankawa–ma DÙ-ri NU.ŠE-du SI[Gﬁ]-za É ME-aš ANA GIG.GAL “Or will it happen in Š. Let it be unfavorable. Goodness took the House (and gave it) to the Great Sickness” KUB 
16.36:11 (NH); cf. also KUB 16.13 iii 3, 4, KUB 18.65:7, KUB 
22.37 obv. 9, KUB 52.68 i 5 (all NH). 
2' in the expression parnaš Ωššu: IŠTU MUNUSŠU.GI ER.-TUM Q¸TAMMA–pat nu KIN NU.SIGﬁ-du DINGIR-LUM–za dapian ZI-an párna-aš Ωššu KUR-eašš–a Ωššu ME-aš “The question put to the Old Woman is the same. Let the symbol oracle be unfavorable. The Deity took for himself 

290

the Complete Soul, the Goods (or Goodness) of the House and the Goods (or Goodness) of the Land” KUB 5.3 i 26-27 (NH); elsewhere the same spelling is found, e.g., KUB 5.4 i 14; but cf. pár-na-aš(-ša) SIGﬁ KUB 5.1 i 96, 103, ii 8, etc.; É-aš SIGﬁ KUB 49.78 ii 3 (all NH), cf. HW™ 1:519; cf. pár-na-aš aššul “Well-being of the House” KUB 34.22 iv 4 (omen). 
c. (location in a snake oracle): MU.16.KAM NU.SIGﬁ-du MUŠ.SAG.DU–kan ANA É-TI ŠUMen “The sixteenth ‘year’ — let it be unfavorable: We have summoned the Snake of the Head to the House <of the King?>” IBoT 1.33:64-65, ed. Laroche, RA 52:154, 157, Laroche’s translation “Palais” indicates that he interprets É-TI in this passage as a var. of the É.LUGAL more usual in this text (lines 21, 33, etc.); 3 dušgaranaza ui[t] É-ri AN x x mun<na>it “Third (observation): It (the snake) came from Rejoicing and concealed itself … in the House” IBoT 1.33:16, ed. Laroche, RA 52:152, 156. | Laroche reads the broken signs here as dx x and translates “il s’est caché au Temple-de-…,” but it would be unusual to have the name of the deity following directly É w. phonetic compl. 
Hroznyπ, SH (1917) 59-61; Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 55 (infl.); Otten, ZA 54 (1961) 143 (nom. parnaš); Laroche, RHA XXIII/ 76 (1965) 52-54 (etymology); Riemschneider, MIO 6:338, n. 76 (mng. 4). 
Cf. parnili, É ABUBˆTI, É.GAL, É-TIM GAL, É LUGAL and other comp. Sumerograms w. É. 

[pera-] HW 167 see peri-. 

peran adv., prev., and postpos.; 1. (local postpos.) before, in front of, in the presence of, in the sight or hearing of, 2., (local prev.) in front, 3. (temporal adv.) previously, at first(?), in advance, ahead of time, beforehand, provisionally, 4. (temporal prev.) in front, first (temporally), 5. (temporal postpos.) facing a person in the future, ahead of someone, temporally prior to someone’s activity, 6. (postpos.) during the reign of (a king), 7. (postpos.) under the supervision of (a superior), 8. pe~ ran eš- (act.) to be responsible for, 9. (in verbal idioms with karti or ištanzani), 10. (causal postpos.) because of, from, out of, 11. peran nai- to turn (someone or something) over to (someone), 12. (in 

peran 
combination with a second postpos., prev., or adv.); from OS. 
1.	(local postpos.) before, in front of, in the presence of, in the sight or hearing of 
	a.	w. poss. pron. suff.
1' in OH
2' in MH

	b.	w. the gen. (OH)
1' in OH/OS
2' in OH/MS
3' in OH/NS

	c.	w. the dat.-loc. 

1' before persons (gods or humans) a' before, in the presence of (in general) b' in front of, ahead of someone who (or some
thing which) is moving c' in someone’s hearing 
1'' w. halzaia'' “to read” b'' “to cry out” 
2'' w. kutruwahh-“to give testimony”
3'' w. link-“to swear”
4'' w. markiya-“to find fault”
5'' w. mema-“to speak, say, declare”
6'' w. memian pehute-“to bring a word”
7'' w. (anda) peda-“to bring (testimony)”
8'' w. puqqanu-“to make hateful”
9'' w. šunna-“to fill”
10'' w. tarna-“to confess”
11'' w. uddΩr daššanu-“to make words

important” 12'' w. taštašiyai-“to whisper” 13'' w. te/tar-“to speak, mention” 14'' w. tepawahh-“to belittle, demean” 15'' w. tepnu-“to belittle, demean” 16'' w. watarnahh-“to commission” 
d'	in someone’s sight/eyes 
e' in someone’s mind, knowledge or estimation 1'' eš-(act.), either expressed or implied 2'' w. other verbs 
2' before objects a' w. ar-(act.) “to arrive” b' w. ar-(mid.) “to stand” c' w. epp-“to seize, hold” d' w. pai-“to go” e' w. pašk-“to erect” f' w. šeš-“to spend the night, sleep” g' w. dai-“to place/deposit (before the statue of 
a deity)” or ki-“to be placed/deposited” h' w. tiya-“to take a stand” i' w. tittanu-“to erect, station” j' w. tuzziya-“to encamp” k' w. weda- “to build” 
d.	w. dat.-loc. but preposed 
291

2.	(local prev.) in front 
a.	peran huwai- “to go/march in front” 1' lit. “to march/go in front, run/go before” 2' (of humans) “to lead, take charge of ” (MH and 

NH) 3' (of gods) “to run/go before, or lead (troops in order to give them victory)” 

b.	peran huinu1' “to cause B (acc.) to run/go before A (dat.), i.e., put B (acc.) in the charge of A (dat.)” 

2'	w. -za instead of the dat. n. or pron. (“A”), “to cause someone to run before oneself, i.e., put oneself in charge of someone, take charge of someone” 

	c.	peran huyatalla-“leader” 
	d.	peran iya-(mid.) “to walk in front” 
	e.	peran lΩ-“to dispel” 
	f.	peran lamniya- “to name (someone to be) before/in 

charge of”
g peran pai-A “to go in front, go ahead”

	h.	peran palwai
	i.	peran šazki-“to shove to the fore(?)” 
	j.	peran tiya1' “to step in front, advance, be promoted to higher rank” 

2'	“to step in front/before (sometimes in the sense of to intercede)” 

	k.	peran wahnu- “to be or become important, vital, preeminent, gain preeminence, get the upper hand” 
	l.	-za peran weriya- “to involve oneself with” 

3.	(temporal adv.) previously, before, at first(?), in advance, ahead of time, beforehand, provisionally 
a.	simple peran 1' “previously, at first” 2' “in advance, ahead of time, beforehand, provision

ally” 

	b.	peran parΩ (or parΩn) 1' “previously” 2' “in advance, beforehand, ahead of time” 3' pé-ra-an parΩ UD-an “before daybreak(?)” 
	c.	peran šarΩ “beforehand(?), in advance(?)” 

4.	(temporal prev.) in front, first (temporally) 
a.	peran arnu-or huinu-“to move something temporally 

to the first position,” i. e. “to give priority to” 1' w. arnu2' w. huinu

b.	peran walh-“to beat (someone) out, beat (someone to something), act first, anticipate (someone), prevent (someone)” 
5.	(temporal postpos.) 
	a.	“before, facing (a person in) the future, ahead (of someone)” 
	b.	temporally prior to someone’s activity 

1	(postpos.) during the reign of (a king) 
2	(postpos.) under the supervision of (a superior) 

peran 

1	w. eš- (act.) to be responsible for 
	9.	in verbal idioms with karti or ištanzani 
	a.	karti peran or P¸NI ŠÀ 
	b.	ištanzani peran or P¸NI ZI 
	10. (causal postpos.) because of, from, out of 
	a.	inani peran “from sickness” 
	b.	kardimmiyatti peran “from anger” 
	c.	kašti peran “from hunger, because of hunger” 
	d.	w. a verb of “fearing” 
	e.	lappiyaš peran “from/because of the heat” 
2	peran nai- to turn (someone or something) over to (someone) 
3	(in combination with a second postpos., prev., or adv.) 

a. peran Ωppa “before (and) back,” w. verbs of “going/ 
coming” means “back and forth” = “again and again” 
1'	w. iya-(mid.) “to frequent” 
2'	w. pai-A “constantly approach” 
3'	w. tarna-“to allow to come and go, allow free ac

cess” 

4'	w. uwa
a' to carry out the cult
b' to surround

	b.	peran Ωppann–a “before and behind” 
	c.	peran arha “away from in front of, from before, out in front, by/along in front, around” 

1'	“away from in front of, from before, out in front” 

a'	w. huittiya- “to pull from in front of(?)” 
b'	w. išpart- “to escape from before” 
c'	w. lahuwa-“to pour out in front” 
d'	w. munnai-“to hide from before” 
e'	w. pai-A “to go away from in front of” 
f'	w. parh-“to race/run out in front” 
g'	w. parš-“to flee before (someone)” 
h'	w. paršiya- “to break off from the front” 
i'	w. paršullai-“to crumble off the front” 
j'	w. peda -“to carry away from in front” 
k'	w. piddai-““to run/flee from before” 
l'	w. da-““to take from before” 
m' w. tarna-“to flee before” 
n'	w. tiya- “to move away from before (tempo
rally)” > “to be disposed of, removed (from 
agenda), attended to 
o'	w. uiya-“to send away from before” 
p'	w. watku-“flee (lit. jump away) before” 

2'	by/along in front 

a'	w. arš-“to flow by/along in front(?)” 
b'	w. gulš-“to draw (a line) across the front 
of(?)” 
c'	w. pai-A (w. acc.) “to pass in front of” 
d'	w. pehute- “to parade before” 
e'	w. dai-“to place along the front” 
f'	w. uwa-“to pass in front” 
g'	w. wida(i) “to parade before” 

3'	“around,” w. eš-(act.) “to be in circumference(?)” 

292

	d.	peran aššuwaz uwa-“to fly in on the good side in front” 
	e.	peran katta “down in front of” 1' w. ar2' w. huek3' w. iya-(act.) 4' w. išhuwa5' w. išparr6' w. gang(a)7' w. ki-(mid.) (functions as pass. of peran katta 

dai-)
8' w. paršnai
9' w. peda
10' w. šipand
11' w. šeš
12' w. dai
13' w. tarna

a' “to let down in front” b' “to abandon (someone) before (an enemy)” 14' w. uwa
	f.	peran kuštayaz/kuštayati uwa-“to fly in on the kuštaiside in front” 
	
g.	peran parΩ 
h.	peran šarΩ 

pé-e-ra-an KUB 29.29 obv. 9, (12), KUB 29.30 ii 3, KUB 
36.110 rev. 18, KBo 13.137:6, 11, KBo 17.36 ii 6, KBo 20.4 iv! 2, KBo 20.22 left col. 9, KBo 20.26 obv. 21, KBo 34.17:4, HT 95 right col. 2 (all OS), KBo 30.92 rev. 3 (OS?), (for OS occurrences in festivals, see StBoT 26:144-147), KUB 33.38 iv 6, KUB 33.59 iii 3 (both OH/MS), KBo 10.11 i (4), KBo 24.87 rev. 3, KUB 54.50 iv? 2 (all OH/MS?), KUB 31.74 ii 6 (OH/ NS), “pí-i-e-ra-an” KUB 58.50 iv 17 was shown by collation (Rüster/Neu, HZL 20 n. 16) to be a copyist error for the tablet’s pé-e-ra-an, pí-i-ra-an KBo 25.23 obv. 7, (8) (OS). 
pé-ra-an KBo 7.14 obv. 2, 9, KUB 36.100 rev. 8, KBo 22.2 obv. 14 (all OS), (for OS exx. in festivals, see StBoT 26:144147), KBo 3.34 ii 25, 26, KBo 3.41 + KUB 31.4 obv. 26, KBo 
3.60 i 14, ii 13 (all OH/NS), KBo 16.27 ii 10, KUB 23.77:18, 36, KUB 23.77a rev. 11, HKM 25:25, HKM 13:9, KUB 23.72 obv. 19, 43, rev. 4, 17, 61, 62, 66, KUB 14.1 obv. 11, 23, 37, 62, 70 (all MH/MS), KBo 13.55 rev. 2, 3, (10) (MH), KUB 
23.11 ii 29, iii 17, KUB 23.21 obv. 28, KUB 23.68 obv. 17, 21 (all MH/NS), passim in NH. 
pé-ra-a-an KBo 2.8 ii 10, iv 3 (NH), KUB 58.83 iii 20 (NS), [pé-r]a-a-an HKM 24:7 (MH/MS). To our knowledge this spelling of peran in published texts is found only in these four places. 
With assimilation of the final n to the following consonant: pé-ra-aš-ma-aš (for *pera(n)–šmaš) KUB 12.63 obv. 5 (cited in Zuntz, Ortsadv. 86); further exx. below under forms with poss. pron. suff.; and see ex. with sandhi: n–aš–kan URUKum~ miya GIŠKÁ.GAL-aš pé-ra-aš GIŠši-ia-tal mΩn tiyat “In Kummiya he (Ullikummi) took his stand before the gate like a š.” KBo 26.65 i 21 (Song of Ullik.) below 3 c 2' b' 8'', where pronounced peran + šiyatal > peraš šiyatal. 

peran 
Abbreviated writings: pé.-an (Zuntz, Ortsadv. 84; Kronasser, EHS 1:67, 353) are exceptional in MH/NS: KUB 13.8:9. The vast majority are from the end of the New Kingdom in: (1) historical texts: KUB 14.3 iv 46 (“Taw.,” Hatt. III); (2) legal texts, land grants, depositions, etc.: KUB 26.43 rev. 27, 35 (Tudh. IV), KUB 54.1 i 47, ii 24, iv 17; (3) myths: KUB 33.96 i 5, 9, KUB 33.98 i 10, KUB 17.7 iii 13 (JCS 5:154 line 42); 
	(4) rituals: KUB 46.45 rev.? 10, 13, KUB 39.54 obv.? 13, 14; 
	(5) dreams and vow texts: KUB 15.23:9 (dream of the queen), KUB 15.18 iii 6, KUB 15.20 ii? 2, KUB 15.22:10, de Roos, JEOL 25, plate XII, line 15; (6) festivals: IBoT 3.1:11, 12, KUB 34.69 + KUB 34.70 obv. 2; (7) oracle inquiries: KUB 5.1 i 15, 19, and passim, this is the regular spelling in late Hitt. oracle texts, in which it occurs hundreds of times. This is an abbreviated writing and is irrelevant to the question (e.g., HE™ §30b) of the loss of intervocalic r in Hitt. 

pé. (Zuntz, Ortsadv. 84) occurs exclusively in late oracle texts: KUB 5.22:12, KUB 16.50:2, KUB 50.10 right col. 11, KUB 52.24 i 7, KUB 49.30 rev.? 21, etc. 
Written w. Akkadogram: PA-NI: KBo 16.73 iii 7 (StBoT 25 no. 10) (OS), KUB 53.14 ii 23, iii 22 (OH), HKM 22:6, 12!, HKM 81:29, KUB 13.27 rev.! 8 (all MH/MS), KUB 13.9 iii 7, KUB 31.42 iii 15 (MH/NS), KUB 19.29 iv 8, KBo 5.8 ii 15 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 30 (Muw. II), KUB 1.1 ii 72 (Hatt. III), KUB 26.1 iii 42 (Tudh. IV), PA-AN KUB 14.10 i 9 (Murš. II), KUB 21.17 ii 6, KUB 21.37 obv. 21, 22 (all Hatt. III). 
With poss. pron. suff.: ≠pé-e±-ra-am-mi-it KBo 3.22 rev. 79 (OS) w. var. pé-ra-a-≠am±-mi-i[t] KUB 36.98b rev. 6 (OH/NS), cf. Neu, StBoT 18:67 w. n. 99, pé-ra-an-te-et KUB 26.35:9, péra-an-ti-it KUB 1.16 iii 57 (OH/NS), pé-e-ra-aš-še-et KBo 
17.1 i 33 (OS), pé-ra-aš-še-et KUB 9.28 i 22 (MH/NS), KUB 
41.15 obv.? 12 (LS), KUB 54.50 i? (5) (OH/MS?), pé-ra-ašši-it KBo 22.196 rev. 12 (OS), IBoT 1.36 i 35 (MH/MS), péra-aš-ši-it-ta KUB 43.23 rev. 59, [pé?-r]a-aš-ši-it[-?] KBo 30.137:7, pé-ra-an-ši-it KBo 10.37 i 25 (OH/NS), KBo 25.190 obv. 25 (MH/MS or ENS), KBo 21.34 i 34 (MH/NS), KBo 
19.129 obv. (6), 9 (NS), pé-e-ra-aš-mi-it KBo 25.56 i 11 (OS), KBo 17.33:5 [same tablet] (OS), pé-e-ra-a[š-mi-it] KBo 
23.65:8 (OH?/NS?), pé-ra-aš-mi-it KUB 36.104 rev. 7 (OH/OS or MS), KBo 12.126 i 8 (MH/NS), KBo 21.47 ii! 7 (MS?), KUB 53.15 ii! 20 (LS), pé-e-ra-aš-mi KUB 31.74 ii 8 (OH/ NS), pé-e-ra-az-mi-it KBo 17.4 iii 13 (OS), cf. StBoT 8:71f., pé-ra-an-ša-mi-it KBo 25.190 i 27 (MH/MS or ENS). 
The customary transliteration pí-ra-an is based upon the assumption that the writing pí is “unmarked” or neutral. We believe that such a writing actually tends to prejudice the case against an e vocalism, and that a truly neutral writing would be pé/í. The only evidence for an i-vocalism of the first syll. of this word is the occurrence of pí-i-ra-an in KBo 25.23 obv. 7, (8) (OS). We think there is a good possibility of a vocalization /peran/ throughout the Hitt. period. 
mng. 1 c 1' b' (Akk.) (The city of Parmanna was the ‘head’ of those kings) irt≥ub itabbula (from wabΩlum?) “It kept governing(?) (them)” KBo 10.1 obv. 28 = (Hitt.) KASKAL.HI.A
293

aš–šamaš apΩš pé-ra-an takšanniškit “(and) it kept leveling the roads before them” KBo 10.2 ii 4-5 (annals of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:48f. (“essa (infatti) le vie a loro dinanzi segnava [letter.: spianava]”), Starke, StBoT 31:494 (differently: “und der hatte sie vorher immer wieder zu Kriegszügen zusammengeschlossen”); a difficulty for Starke’s interpretation, however, is the dative(!) case of -šamaš which he takes as the obj. of takšanniškit; cf. Melchert, CLL 202; according to either Imparati’s or Starke’s interpretation of the Hitt. there appears to be no reflection of Hitt. peran in the Akk.; mng. 6 (Akk.) ana pa-ni abiya kÏ ta[rhu] an[a pa-ni-ia] kannama tarhu KUB 3.14:13 = (Hitt.) [(µAziraš–ma AN)A ABIYA pé-ra-an GIM-a]n Ëšta ammuqq–aš pé-ra-an Q¸TAMMA–pat Ëšta “As Aziru was [during my father’s reign,] (it) was likewise during my reign” KUB 21.49 obv. 10 (treaty w. Dupp. of Amurru, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 3.119 i 12, ed. SV 1:6f., tr. DiplTexts 
55. 
For two P¸NI phrases flanking a peran phrase, all with the same meaning, see KUB 12.58 ii 6-8, ed. Tunn. 12f. ii 31-33. Note also ištanani peran P¸NI DINGIR-LIM “before the altar before the god” KBo 4.9 i 14-15. 
1. (local postpos.) before, in front of, in the presence of, in the sight or hearing of — a. w. poss. pron. suff. — 1' in OH: mΩn Ωppa–ma URUNËša [uwan(un)] nu LÚ URUPurušhanda katti–mmi [(pË~ hutenun)] ≠m±Ωn tunnakišna–ma (var. URUZalpa– ma) paizzi ap[(Ωš–a)] pé-e-ra-am-mi-it (var. pé-raa-am-mi-i[t]) kunnaz ešari “But when I returned to Neša, I brought the king (lit. man) of Purušhanda with me. But when he goes into the inner chamber (var. to Zalpa), he sits down before me on the right” KBo 3.22:76-79 (Anitta text, OS), w. dupls. KUB 36.98b rev. 5-6 (NS), KUB 26.71 i 17-19, ed. StBoT 18:14f., 38 w. n. 6, 66, 67 w. n. 99; ≠DUMU±.É.GAL-š–a pé-e-ra-aš-še-et (var. -ši-it) GIŠzupΩri harzi “The palace attendant holds a torch before him” KBo 17.1 i 32-33 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 26 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:20f., translit. StBoT 25:6f.; uddΩr–met–ta pehhun nu kÏ [tupp]i ITU-mi ITU-mi pé-ra-an-ti-it halzeššandu “I have given you my words. So let them read this tablet before you every month” KUB 1.16 iii 56-57 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14f.; on pé-ra-an–tit cf. Friedrich, ZA 37:182f. 
2' in MH: nu–šši kuiš LÚ M[EŠED]I pé-ra-ašši-it artari nu–šši tezzi DUGkaltiya–wa kattan paimi “And he shall say to the [gua]rd who stands in front of him, ‘I shall go to the pot’” IBoT 1.36 i 35-36 (instr. for MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:8f.; LÚ.MEŠ ŠU.GI URUŠu[d]ulumniš pé-ra-an–šit adanna ašanzi “The men of Šudul sit before him (Appu) eating (lit. to 

peran 1 b 3' 

eat [inf.])” KUB 24.8 i 17-18 (Appu story, NS), ed. StBoT 14:4f.; dAlaluš–šan GIŠŠÚ.A-ki Ëšzi daššuš–a–šši dAnuš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš ha≠n±tezziyaš–šmeš pé-raan–še[t] a[rt]a “Alalu was (lit. is) sitting on the throne, and the mighty Anu, the foremost of the gods, was (lit. is) standing before him” KUB 33.120 i 8-10 (Song of Kumarbi, MH/NS), ed. Kum. *1, 6, tr. Hittite Myths 40. 
b. w. the gen. (OH) — 1' in OH/OS: LÚ.MEŠUB¸~ RU L[Ú-na?-a]š kuiš kuiš LUGAL-waš pé-ra-an Ëšzi “The privileged foreigners and whatever man sits before the king” KBo 20.12 i 5 (thunder fest., OS), ed. StBoT 12:10f. (the hand copy shows more space in the break than needed for Neu’s L[Ú-a]š); same text uses pé-e-ra-an in line 8. 
2' in OH/MS: nu taknΩš dUTU-waš pé-ra-[an ašš„ memiškitten] “[Say good things] before the Sungoddess of the Earth” KBo 7.28:46 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, RSO 32:220, 222, Lebrun, Hymnes 85, 88, cf. 1 c 1' c' 5''; note that elsewhere in this text the d.-l. taknΩš dUTU-i pé-ra-an is used: ibid. 18, 19, 28, 29, 33, 34; cf. 1 c 1'; dTe~ lipinuwaš pé-ra-an GIŠeya arta “An eyan-tree (or pole) stands before Telipinu” KUB 17.10 iv 27-28 (Tel. myth, OH/MS), tr. Hittite Myths 17; LUGAL-uš l≠utti±yaš [pé-]≠e±-ra-an aruwΩizzi MUNUS.LUGAL-a[šš–a lu]ttiy[a]š pé-ra-an [ar]uwΩizzi “The king bows before the window; the queen too bows before the window” KBo 17.74 + ABoT 9 i 12-14 (thunder fest., OH/ MS), ed. StBoT 12:12f.; ≠UGULA LÚ.±MEŠMUHALDIM haššÏ 1-iš kuršaš pé-ra-a[n 1-iš halmaš]uitti 1-i[š] lut[t]iya 1-iš hattaluwaš GIŠ[-i 1-iš …] namma x[…] / haššÏ 1-iš šipan[ti] “The supervisor of the cooks offers/libates once at the brazier, [once] before the hunting bag, once at the throne dais, once at the window, [once] at the bar (of the door), and again […] once at the brazier” KBo 17.74 ii 4-6 (OH/ MS), ed. StBoT 12:18f.; cf. kuttaš pé-ra-an “before the wall” ibid. ii 16, iii 16, 36, 41, 51. 
3' in OH/NS: ap„n ubatiyaš–šaš pé-ra-an ašešer ap„nn–a ubatiyaš pé-ra-an ašešer “They seated this one in front of his ubati, and that one in front of (his) ubati” KBo 3.34 ii 25-26 (anecdotes, OH/ NS), ed. Josephson, Part. 302, Jasink, Mes. 13/14:215f., THeth 20:535f.; UZUšuppaHI.A kue ZAG.GAR.RA-aš pé-raan kittat “The cuts of meat which have been placed before the altar” KUB 53.14 ii 3 (fest. for Telipinu, OH/ 

294

NS?), ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:41, 45; [(mΩn dUTUwaš–a) pé-r]a-an paiš[i …] “If/When you go before the Sungod” KUB 33.60 rev. 2 (myth of Hannahanna and ZA.BA›.BA›), w. dupl. KUB 33.61 iv 1, translit. Myth 93, tr. Hittite Myths 31; mΩn LUGAL-waš pé-ra-an šieš~ kanzi kuiš hazzizzi nu–šše GEŠTIN-an akuwanna pianzi “Whenever they shoot (arrows) before the king, they give wine to drink to him who hits the mark” KBo 3.34 ii 33 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Josephson, Part. 305, AlHeth 39 w. n. 186, THeth 20:536; µKani„š UZU ŠAH zËandan dΩš š–an µDUMU-dEN!.LILaš pé-ra-an dΩ≠iš± “Kaniu took cooked pork and placed it before µDUMU-dEN!.LIL” KBo 3.60 ii 1213 (cannibal text, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:106f., cf. Soysal, VO 7:107-128; LUGAL-aš pé-ra-an “before the king” KBo 16.68 iii 17 (MELQETU list, OH/MS?), cf. ibid. iii 11, 23; n–at GIŠAB-yaš pé-ra-an dΩi “He places it/ them in front of the window (gen. luttiyaš)” KUB 

55.39 obv. 17 (fest. of the month, OH/NS). 

c. w. the dat.-loc. — 1' before persons (gods or humans) (for the Luw. expression for “before the gods” maššananza or DINGIR.MEŠ-anza parran cf. Meriggi, Schizzo 374) — a' before, in the presence of (in general): nu–šmaš–kan pé<-ra>-an GIŠeyan artaru “Let an eya-tree/pole stand before them” KUB 13.8:9 (instr. for Stone House, Arn. I/NS), ed. HTR 106f.; nu–za PA-NI LÚ.KÚR pahhašnuanza Ëš kuitman ÉRIN.MEŠ EGIR-anda uizzi “(So) guard yourself against (lit. before) the enemy while the troops are coming behind” HKM 22:6-8 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 154f.; Ït– wa–šši KUR–K[A p]é-ra-an pahšanuwan hark “Go keep your land protected against him (the enemy)” KBo 2.5 iii 33 + KBo 16.17 iii 33, ed. AM 188f. (without KBo 
16.17 iii 33 = line 28); DINGIR.MEŠ–ya kuwapi Ëššanzi nu PA-NI DINGIR.MEŠ lË kuiš≠ki± ninikzi (var. niniktari) “When they worship the gods, let no one make a disturbance in the presence of the gods” KUB 13.2 iii 17-18 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.86 iv 1-2, ed. Dienstanw. 47; nu–wa–mu dUTU URUArinna GAŠAN–YA kattan tiya nu–wa– mu–kan uni arahzenaš KUR.KUR LÚ.KÚR pé-raan kuenni “O Sungoddess of Arinna, my lady, stand beside me, and smite those surrounding enemy lands before me” KBo 3.4 i 25-26, ed. AM 22f.; IŠTU NAM.RA–ma–at GUD UDU anda IŒBAT n–at–mu INA KUR URUPahhuwΩ pé-ra-an šarΩ uwatet “He 

peran 1 c 1' a' 
seized it together with (its) civilian captives, cattle (and) sheep, and led it up into the land of Pahhuwa into my presence” KBo 5.8 iv 19-20, ed. AM 162f., cf. KUB 14.15 ii 9 (restoring u[watet] instead of AM 48’s u[daš]); nu ANA µŠarrikušuh kuit ŠEŠ–YA LUGAL URUKargamiš ha[trΩn harku]n n–aš–mu ÉRIN. MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ INA URUŠallapa pé-raan šarΩ u[watet] “Because I had written to Šarrikušuh, my brother, the king of Kargamiš, he had b[rought] up infantry and chariotry to Šallapa in(to) my presence (lit., before me)” KUB 14.15 ii 89, ed. AM 48f.; INA KUR URUT„mmanna–ya kuwapi iyahhat nu–mu namma LÚ.MEŠ ŠU.GI–ya pé-raan šarΩ UL uËr “When I went to the land of Tummanna, even the elders did not come up into my presence again” (or “no longer came up before me”) KBo 5.8 iv 10-12, ed. AM 160f.; nu šuma[š ANA DINGIR.MEŠ] EN.MEŠ–YA ŠA M¸MˆTI SŠSKUR [pé]-ra-an arha iyanzi “Before you [gods], my lords, they will make the ritual/sacrifice of the (broken) oath” KUB 14.14 rev. 5-6 (PP 1, Murš. II), ed. Götze, KlF 1:172f. (differently), Lebrun, Hymnes 196, 200f., peran is a postpositional governing ANA DINGIR.MEŠ with arha modifying iya-as a prev.; DINGIR-LIM-anni–aš pé<-ra->an aranza “He was standing before the deity” KUB 33.93 iv 6 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:156f. “A iv 11,” tr. Hittite Myths 54; n–aš–kan w[alliw]alliyaš tiyat dIŠTAR-iš nu ANA 2 [AT~ H¨TI–Š]U pé-ra-an šarΩ tiyat(!) “IŠTAR took a stand walliwalliyaš, and stood up before her two [brothers]” KUB 33.113 i 7-9 + KUB 36.12 i 20-22 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:10f., tr. Hittite Myths 55; GIŠBANŠUR-un–ma–w[a–šš]i pé-ra-an tiyand[u] “Let them place a table before him” KUB 33.102 ii 24 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:150f., tr. Hittite Myths 53; ≠n±–aš mahhan iyattat n–aš PA-NI dAa tiyat “When he went and took his stand before Ea” KUB 
33.120 ii 39 (Song of Kumarbi, MH/NS), ed. Kum. *3, 8, tr. Hittite Myths 41; nu PA-NI DINGIR-LIM EN–YA kΩš MUNUS-aš wehattaru “Let this woman go back and forth before the deity (as a substitute)” KBo 4.6 obv. 15 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Tischler, Gass. 12f.; n–an ANA DINGIR-LIM GAŠAN–YA pé-ra-an tehhi “And I will deposit it (scil. a weapon) before the goddess, my lady” KBo 3.6 ii 28 (Apol. of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:12f., 71. 
295

b' in front of, ahead of someone who (or something which) is moving: ≠k±Ωšma–[w]a [ÉRIN]. MEŠ ≠URU±Hatti ≠URU±Hinduwa zahhiya pait nu– [w]a–šmaš K[ASKAL-a]n pé-ra-an Ëpten nu– war–aš walhten “The [troop]s of Hatti have gone to battle against Hinduwa; so seize the road ahead of them and attack them” KUB 14.1 obv. 70 (Madd., MH/ MS), ed. Madd. 18f. (“Verlegt ihnen den Weg”), tr. DiplTexts (“block the road before them”); ≠m±Ωn–ši pé-ra-an–ma kuwapi KASKAL-iš hatkuš n–aš anda ≠paiz±[z]i “But if anywhere in front of them the road is narrow, they converge” IBoT 1.36 ii 63 (Instr. for MEŠEDI guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:22f.; man–kan HUR.SAGTeh~ šinan š[arΩ] pΩun [KASKAL.MEŠ]–ma–mu pé-raan arpuwanteš eš[er][namm]a–at warhuiš ešer “I would have gone up Mt. T., but [the roads] before me were difficult(?); [fur]thermore they were overgrown(?)” KUB 19.37 iii 49-51, ed. AM 176f.; cf. also ibid. 51-53; nu–mu pé-ra-an šËnahha tiškanzi IŠTU ÉRIN.MEŠ–ya–at–mu–kan menahhanda ešan harker “They set an ambush before me (i.e., where I was going to come) and they held it (-at is the šËnahha?) occupied awaiting (menahhanda) me” KBo 5.8 i 10-11, ed. AM 146f., notice how pé-ra-an and menahhanda are used here with hardly any difference in mng.; nu–kan mahhan ANA KASKAL URUTaggašta tiya~ nun man iyanniyanun nu–mu eniššan kuit LÚ.MEŠ URUTaggašta šËnahha pé-ra-an teškanzi (var. teš~ kiyazi) nu–mu MUŠEN arΩn harta KBo 5.8 i 14-17, w. dupl. KUB 19.36 i 9-12, ed. AM 148f., cf. also KBo 5.8 i 2021; nu–šši ANA ŠDZuliya pË-r[a-an] GIŠarmizzi Ëpper nu GIŠarmi[zz]i! arha pipper “(The enemies) seized the bridge ahead of him on the Zuliya River, and they destroyed the bridge” HHT 82 ii 13-15 + KBo 16.36 ii 13-15 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Riemschneider, JCS 16:111f., Alp, Belleten 41/164:644f., tr. Otten, FsBittel 433; Ì.DÙG.GA– ma–šš[i p]é-ra-an papparšeškanz[i] KASKAL. MEŠ IŠT[U TÚG.HI.A i]šparrer “They sprinkle fine oil before him; they spread the roads with [garments]” KUB 36.67 obv. 26-27 (Gurparanzah legend, NS). 
c' in someone’s hearing — 1'' w. halzai-— a'' “to read”: kΩšma–šmaš tuppi µPiše[niyaš] up~ pahhun–pat nu–šmaš–at–kan pé-ra-an halzi[andu] “I have also sent the tablet of Pišeni to you (pl.), [let them] read it aloud before you (pl.)” HKM 25:2225 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten 44/173:46f., HBM 164f.; 

peran 1 c 1' c' 3'' 

cf. also HKM 22:9-14 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten 44/ 173:44f., HBM 154-57; namma kÏ kuit tuppu tuk µAla[(kšan)du (iyan)]un n–e–tta–kkan MU.KAMti MU.KAM-ti pé-ra-an 3-Š[U (halzeša)n]du “Furthermore, let them read this tablet which I made for you, Alakšandu, aloud before you three times yearly” KUB 21.1 iii 73-75 (Alakš., NH), w. dupl. KBo 19.74 + KUB 21.5 iv 7-8, ed. SV 2:76f. (without KBo 19.74), tr. Dipl-Texts 86; nu–šmaš–kan mahhan tuppi pé-ra-an hal~ zer namma–šmaš ABU–YA kiššan IQBI “And when they had read the tablet aloud before them, my father then addressed them as follows” KBo 14.12 iv 3334 (DŠ, NH), ed. Güterbock JCS 10:98; kÏ–kan tuppi PA
NI µPa[ll]ann[a] B´LI–YA MUNUSB´<L>TI–YA 
SIGﬁ-in halzai namma–mu EGIR-pa aššul hatrΩndu “Read this tablet clearly (lit. well) before Pallanna, my lord, and (before) my lady; then let them write (their) greeting back to me” HKM 81:2932 (MH/MS), ed. HBM 274f. 
b'' “to cry out”: kinun–a šiuni–mi pé-ra-an tu~ waddu halziššahhi nu–mu DINGIR–YA ištamaš “And now in my god’s hearing (lit. before my god) I cry ‘Mercy.’ Hear me, O my god” KUB 30.10 rev. 22 (OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 115, 118, tr. ANET 401, RTAT 188-91, NERT 169. 
2'' w. kutruwahh-“to give testimony”: dUTU-ŠI–ma–tta punušmi [(n–a)]n lË šannatti memian [(nu–za–kan)] dUTU-ŠI pé-ra-an kutruwah “I, My Majesty, will question you. Do not conceal a thing (from me); give testimony before My Majesty” KUB 
26.1 iv 13-15 (instr., Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 26.8 iv 2-3, ed. 
von Schuler, Dienstanw. 15 (“Rufe vor der Sonne Zeuge an”). 
3'' w. link-“to swear”: nu ANA LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL … katta AN[A D]UMU.MEŠ–ŠU DUMU.DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU … šer ANA PA-NI [d]U URUHarranašši kuitman li≠n±kweni “While we are swearing allegiance to (šer) the king and queen … and subsequently to his [son]s and grandsons, in the presence of (ANA P¸NI = peran) the Stormgod of Harranašši” KUB 31.42 iii 11-16 (protocol for dignitaries, MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:227f., 231; M¸M´~ T´MEŠ–mu kue pé-ra-an lenqan harta nu–kan UL kuitki wahnut “He violated (lit. turned/changed) none of the oaths which he had sworn in my hearing” Bronze Tablet ii 49-50 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:18f. 

296

peran 1 c 1' c' 4'' 

4'' w. markiya-“to find fault”: ABU–YA–mu–za pé-ra-an UL kuiški markiyat … kuwat–wa–du–za attaš–ti[n …] pé-ra-an markiškanz[i] “No one found fault with my father in my hearing … Why are they continually finding fault with your father in [your(?)] hearing?” KUB 31.66 ii 18, 25-26 (dep.?, NH). 
5'' w. mema-“to speak, say, declare”: cf. KBo 7.28:18-19 (prayer, OH/MS) cited in 1 c 1' c' 13'' below and ibid. 46 cited in 1 b 2', above; nu–šmaš LÚEN É-TIM EGIR–ŠUNU! UŠKÊN nu PA-NI DINGIR-LIM apΩšila memai “The owner of the house bows behind them, and he himself speaks before (the statue of) the god” KBo 15.33 iii 19-20 (MH/MS); namma– šmaš PA-NI DINGIR-LIM memian ≠me±mešten “Furthermore, in the presence of the god speak for yourselves these words” KUB 13.4 i 63-64 (Instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f., Süel, Direktif Metni 32f.; nu mekki aniyatteni ANA LÚSANGA–ma– at pé-ra-an tepu mematteni “You sow much, but before the priest you declare it to have been only a little” ibid iv 14-15, ed. Chrest. 162f.; Süel, Direktif Metni 76f.; [(apΩš P)]A-NI dUTU-ŠI memai UL–war–at [(iyami) E]GIR-az–ma–at iyazi “Before His Majesty he declares: ‘I won’t do it’; yet afterwards he does it” KUB 26.1 iv 26-27 (instr., Tudh. IV), w. dupl. KUB 
26.8 iv 14-15, ed. Dienstanw. 16; mΩn tuk–ma ANA µAlakšandu ŠA dUTU-ŠI ku[(išk)]i HUL-lun memiya[n p]é-ra-an mema[i] “If someone speaks an evil word concerning My Majesty before you, Alakšandu” KUB 21.1 iii 26-27 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iii 41-42, ed. SV 2:70f., tr. DiplTexts 85; [idal]amuš–ma–šmaš–kan memiyanu[š] / [lË p]Ëhuteši nu–šmaš k[i-…] / [pé-ra-a]n lË mema[tti IGI.HI.A-wa–kan] / [HUR.SAG-i lË] naitti “Don’t take evil words to them; don’t speak […] before them; don’t turn their eyes to the mountain” KBo 
13.55 rev. 8-11 (treaty w. Mukiš, NH); cf. also KUB 14.1 obv. 23, 37 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 6f., 10f. 
6'' w. memian pehute-“to bring a word”: naš~ ma–kan LÚaraš LÚari kuiški kururaš mem[i(a)]n péra-an pËhutezzi “Or, (if) one brings before the other a hostile word/affair” KUB 31.44 ii 6-7 (instr., MH/NS), 
w. dupl. KUB 26.24 ii 12-13, ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:226, 230, ed. HW™ 1:223a. 

peran 1 c 1' c' 11'' 
7'' (anda) peda-“to bring (testimony)”: UMMA µArlawizzi PA-NI DINGIR-LIM–wa–za– kan kÏ anda pËdahhi “Thus speaks Arlawizzi: ‘I bring this (testimony) before the god’” KUB 13.35 + KBo 16.62 iv 20-21 (dep. of Ukkura, NH), ed. StBoT 4:12f.; cf. nu–šmaš–kan PA-NI DINGIR-LIM kiššan anda pËdatteni KUB 13.4 iv 48 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 82f., Chrest. 164f. 
8'' w. puqqanu-“to make hateful”: KUR URUHatti–[y]a–kan LÚ.MEŠpittiyandaš ≠pé-ra-an l±[Ë p]uqqanuškatteni nu–šmaš–a[t pé-ra-an walluš~ kitten] “Do not keep making the land of Hatti hateful before the fugitives, but [keep praising] it [before] them” KUB 23.68 obv. 17 (Išmerika treaty, Arn. I/ NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:194f. | for the restoration of walluškitten, see KUB 13.27 rev.! 8 + KUB 23:77:79 (treaty, MH/MS). 
9'' w. šunna-“to ‘fill’ (words)”: a[(mme)]l–ma ŠA µNIR.GÁL ÌR–KA AWATEMEŠ ŠA EME–YA [(dΩ)] n–≠at±–kan ANA PA-NI DINGIR.MEŠ ≠š±unni “Take the words of my, your servant Muwatalli’s, tongue, and ‘fill’ them before the gods” KUB 6.45 iii 36-37 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 iv 46, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 21f., 40 (> “transmit them before”), Lebrun, Hymnes 267, 281, tr. ANET 398 | perhaps šunni refers to filling the gods’ ears with the words. 
10'' w. tarna-“to confess” (cf. below 12 a 3'): dU EN AN.KI LUGAL DINGIR.MEŠ halziyawen nu– šši harΩtar waštul–a ≠pé-ra±-an t[arnumeni nu ŠA dU TUKU.TUKU-an pé-ra-an laweni] “We have invoked the Stormgod, lord of heaven and earth, king of the gods, and [we will] co[nfess] offence and sin before him, [and we will dispel the Storm-god’s anger]” KBo 11.1 obv. 1 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate/Josephson, RHA XXV/81:105, 114, 128 (discussion); nu–za–kan kΩš[a ANA PA-NI dIM waš]tul tarnahhun KUB 14.8 obv. 40 (PP 2, NH), ed. Götze, KlF 1:212f. (coll.). 
11'' w. uddΩr daššanu-“to make words important”: dImpaluri kË–mu u[dd]Ωr ištamaš n–at Ït ANA dK[uma]rbi pé-ra-an daššanut “O Impaluri, hear my words, and go make them (i.e., the words) important before Kumarbi” KUB 33.102 ii 5-6 (Song of Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:148f., copy C. 
297

12'' w. taštašiyai-“to whisper”: nu–tta uizzi pé[(ra-an kui)]ški t[(Ωštašiyaizzi)] “And someone comes and whispers before you” KUB 21.1 iii 17 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupls. KUB 21.4:42, KUB 21.5 iii 32, ed. SV 2:68f., tr. DiplTexts 85. 
13'' w. te-/tar-“to speak, mention”: nu taknΩš dUTU-i pé-ra-an LUGAL-un Ωšš[u] memiški n– ašta ŠUMMI LUGAL taknΩš dUTU-i pé-ra-an Ωššu tarški “Keep mentioning the king favorably before the Sungoddess of the Earth. Mention the king’s name favorably before the Sungoddess of the Earth” KBo 7.28:18-19 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, RSO 32:218, 221, cf. mema-7 b 2'; LÚ.MEŠUR.SAG-iš–wa–mu halziyandu KASKAL-an–wa–[mu] kuiËš pé-ra-an hatugan taršiker “Let them summon for me the warriors who in [my] hearing were describing the journey as frightening” (or perhaps: “who were describing the road (which was) before me as frightening”) KBo 22.6 i 8-9 (Sargon King of Battle, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, MDOG 101:19, 22. 
14'' w. tepawahh-“to belittle, demean”: nu–šši– za EGIR-an UL memaš n–an ANA PA-NI KUR. KUR.MEŠ tepaw[a]hta! “He said ‘no’ to him and demeaned him before the lands” KUB 14.3 i 12-3 (“Taw.,” Hatt. III), ed. AU 2f. 
15'' w. tepnu-“to belittle, demean”: “And [if] any city [of] the enemy sues for peace” šumeš–a– šši KUR URUHatti pé-ra-a[n i]da[lu lË mem]atteni [nu–kan IGI.]HI.A–ŠU HUR.SAG-i lË naišteni ANA KUR.KUR.HI.A–ya pé-ra-an KUR URUHatti m[em]iyani [lË t]epnuškiteni “You shall [not] [por]tray the land of Hatti before him in a bad light. You shall not turn his eyes to the mountain. And don’t belittle the land of Hatti in word before the lands” KUB 23.72 + 141/w rev. 61-63 (Mita, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:39 (without 141/w). 
16'' w. watarnahh-“to commission”: tuzziya– ma pé-ra-an mΩ[n DUMU.LUGAL] našma B´L GAL kuinki watarnahmi nu mahhan ŠA dUTU-ŠI išhiul apel–a Q¸TAM<MA> i[ššatten] n[–a]n tuz~ ziš h„manza ištamaškiddu “If I commission (lit. command/instruct) some [prince] or great lord before the army, then [you must] d[o] his commands just as (you would) those of My Majesty, and let the entire army keep listening to him” KUB 13.20 i 

peran 1 c 1' e' 2'' 

13-15 (military instr. of Tudh., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten 11/ 43:390f. 
d' in someone’s sight/eyes: ÌR–ŠU kuwapi ANA EN–ŠU pé-ra-an šarΩ artari “Whenever a servant stands up before (i.e., in the sight of) his lord, (he is clean and properly dressed)” KUB 13.4 i 22 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 148f., Süel, Direktif Metni 22f.; ANA PA-NI DINGIR.MEŠ kuit parΩ handandanni iyahhahat “Because I walked before (i.e., in the sight of) the gods in divine justice” KUB 1.1 i 48 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:6f. 
e' in someone’s mind, knowledge or estimation 
— 1'' eš-(act.), either expressed or implied: “The daughter of Babylon and the daughter of Amurru, whom I the queen have taken” n–at–mu ANA LÚ. MEŠ KUR URUHatti pé-ra-an UL imma walliyatar “is it not a cause of praise to me before (i.e., in the estimation of) the men of Hatti?” (the verb eš-is implied but unexpressed) KUB 21.38 obv. 48 (letter of Pud.); kΩš UN-aš pé-ra-an parkuiš Ëšdu “May this person be pure before (everyone)” KUB 24.9 ii 15 (rit. of Alli, MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:32f.; mΩn DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pé-ra-an kuiški attaš–maš annaš–maš waštaiš Ëšzi “If there is some sin of my father (or) mother before the gods (i.e., which the gods know about)” KUB 21.19 + 1193/u iii 44-45 (prayer of Hatt. III and Pud.), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:96f.; µTanuwaš–ma [(µTahur~ wailiš µTaruh)]šušš–a INA PA-NI-KU-NU IZKIMiš Ëš≠du± “Let Tanuwa, Tahurwaili and Taruhšu be a warning sign before you” KBo 3.1 ii 68-69 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 11.6 ii 16-17, KUB 11.2:5-7 + IBoT 3.84:5-7, ed. THeth 11:36f. 
2'' w. other verbs: [nu–m]u LUGAL-an Ωški DINGIR–YA UL aššanuwandan anduhšan lË iššatti nu–mu da[nduk]išnaš DUMU-li pé-ra-an šΩ[kl]i~ man (i.e., *šaklin–man) lË ≠GÙB±-lahhiškiši “O my god, don’t make me (like) a person who does not receive just treatment at the King’s Gate; don’t make my behavior appear wrong in the estimation of mortals” KUB 30.10 rev. 22-24 (OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 115, 118, tr. ANET 401, RTAT 191, NERT 169; aši– wa–kan PA-AN dUTU-ŠI laknut zik–ma–a[t iy]aši n–an–kan laknuš[i] “‘Make that one fall before His Majesty (i.e., from His Majesty’s favor)’ And you do it: you cause him to fall” KUB 26.1 iii 39-41 (instr., 

298

peran 1 c 1' e' 2'' 

Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 12-15; namma kuitman–a µAbirattaš TI-anza nu mΩn µDU-dU DUMU–ŠU ANA PA-NI µAbiratta ABI–ŠU kuitki waštai ABA– ŠU HUL-anni šanhzi “If, while Abiratta is yet alive, his son DU-Teššup somehow sins in his father’s estimation (lit. before) and seeks to harm his father” KBo 3.3 ii 13-16 (Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:35f., 42; nu kΩšma zik µ[(Alakšanduš PA-NI NˆŠ DING)]IR.MEŠ waštaši nu–tta NˆŠ DING[(IR. MEŠ parheškandu)] “You, Alakšandu, are sinning before the oath gods. So let the divine oaths continually pursue you” KUB 21.1 iii 1-2 (Alakš.), w. dupls. KUB 21.5 iii 15-17, KUB 21.4 i 20-22, ed. SV 2:66f., tr. Dipl-Texts 84; cf. KUB 21.1 iii 29-30; wašdul kuË≠lqa±[aut]ti naššu DINGIR-LIM-ni kuiški pé-ra-an wašti našma u[ttar kui]ški [ku]itki tezzi “(If) you [see] a sin of someone — either someone sins before a god, or someone says some word” KUB 1.16 iii 59-61 (edict, Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 14-17. 
2' before objects — a' w. ar-(act.) “to arrive”: [nu–kan mΩn AN]A KÁ É dÉ.A pé-ra-an erweni “[When] we arrive before the door of the house of Ea” KUB 33.106 ii 21 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:22f. 
b' w. ar-(mid.) “to stand”: n–aš UD-ti GEﬂ-ti– ya ANA PA-NI DINGIR.MEŠ artari nu DAM[–YA hurzakizzi] “Day and night (Tawananna) stands before the gods (i.e., in the temple in front of the cult statues) and [curses my] wife” KUB 14.4 ii 13 (prayer of Murš. II about Tawannanna); cf. Ugar. 3:101-103, cf. iii 18-20. 
c' w. epp-“to seize, hold”: dUTU–za ŠU-an SAG.KI-i–šši pé<-ra>-an Ëpta “The Sungod held his hand before his forehead” KBo 26.58 iv 38 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f. 
d' w. pai-“to go”: GIM-an LÚ.MEŠSANGA LÚHAL–ya kariwariwa[r] PA-NI É DINGIR-LIM pΩnzi “When in the morning the priests and the exorcist go before the temple” KUB 31.113:10-11 (instr.). 
e' w. pašk-“to erect”: GIŠpaini–ššan kue[dani] pé-ra-an paškan “Before what tamarisk it is erected (lit. stuck)” KBo 34.195 i 4-5 (rit. frag.), rest. from par. KUB 11.31 i 1-3. 
f' w. šeš-“to spend the night, sleep”: LÚSANGA–ma–kan LÚHAL–ya PA-NI KÁ-aš še~ 

peran 1 c 2' k' 
šanzi “But the priest and exorcist sleep before the door” KUB 31.113:16-17 (instr.), ed. Haas, KN 130f. 
g' w. dai-“to place/deposit (before the statue of a deity)” or ki-“to be placed/deposited”: n–at INA URUHatti ANA PA-NI d[… NIŠK]UN INA URUArin~ na–ma–at ANA PA-N[I dUTU URU]Arinna NIŠKUN “We placed it (i.e., a bronze tablet) in Hattuša before d[…]; in Arinna we placed it before [the Sun-goddess of] Arinna” KUB 26.24 iv 11-13 (instr. for LÚDUGUD, MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, Or NS 25:228, 231; kuitman–ma–za TUR-aš ešun nu–za KUR.KUR LÚKÚR kue tarhhiškinun n–at ØUPPU hantÏ DÙmi n–at PA-NI DINGIR-LIM tehhi “I will make a separate tablet dealing with what enemy lands I conquered while I was young and will deposit it before (the statue of) the goddess” KUB 1.1 i 73-74 (Apology of Hatt. III); cf. also ibid. ii 46-47; kË–ma ØUPPAHI.A išhi„llaš kar„ aniyan Ëšta n–at INA URUTÚL-na ANA dUTU URUTÚL-na pé-ra-an GARru “These treaty tablets were already/long ago copied; let them be deposited in Arinna before the Sun-goddess of Arinna” KBo 4.10 obv. 38 (Hatt. III treaty w. Ulmiteššub), ed. StBoT 38:34f. 
h' w. tiya-“to take a stand”: n–aš–kan URUKum~ miya GIŠKÁ.GAL-aš pé-ra-aš(sic) GIŠši-ia-tal mΩn tiyat “In Kummiya he (Ullikummi) took his stand before the gate like a šiyatal” KBo 26.65 i 21-22 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:18f., tr. Hittite Myths 57. 
i' w. tittanu-“to erect, station”: namma–kan ANA É–YA LÚUKU.UŠ pé-ra-an tittanut “Then station an UKU.UŠ-soldier in front of my house (and the men of the land and the men of the city will not harass them)” HKM 52:30-31 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 216f. 
j' w. tuzziya-“to encamp”: [a]mmuk–wa uwa~ nu[n nu–wa–ka(n ANA ZAG KUR–KA pé-ra-an) t]uzziyanun “I have come and have encamped before the border of your land, (but I have not attacked your land nor taken captives or livestock)” KUB 14.17 iii 14-15, w. dupl. KUB 26.79 i 6-8, ed. AM 98f. 
k' w. weda-“to build”: (Labarna’s house is built upon a rock) appaliyallaš–a É[-er–šet]/ karaitti pé-e-ra-an w[etan] “but the misguided one’s house [is] bu[ilt] in the path of the flood” KUB 36.110 rev. 
299

17-18 (benedictions for Labarna, OS), ed. Forrer, MAOG 4:32, Laroche, RHA XI/53:69, AlHeth 20. 
d. w. dat.-loc. but preposed: pé-ra-an aški–za DUMU.[(MEŠ kuedaš)] kattan hazzikkinun nu–mu terišk[anzi] “Before the gate (lit. in front, at the gate) what children I was striking down, they are offending me” KUB 17.4:9-10 (Song of Silver, MH/NS), ed. Hoffner in FsOtten™ 149f., tr. Hittite Myths 46. 
2. (local prev.) “in front” — a. peran huwai-— 1' lit. “to march/go in front, run/go before”: n–at LUGAL-i pé-ra-an huyanteš “They are marching before the king” IBoT 1.36 ii 8 (Instr. for MEŠEDI guards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:14f.; nu GIŠhuluganniya pé-ra-an GAL LÚ.MEŠšΩlašhaš huyanza GIŠGIDRU–ya harzi “The Chief of the šalašha-men is marching before the light chariot, and he holds a staff” IBoT 1.36 ii 2223, ed. AS 24:16f.; in OH festival texts cf. also StBoT 26:145; [(nu d)UTU-ŠI AN(A KARAŠ.H)I.]A GÌR-[(i)]t pé-ra-an h„iyanun nu–k[(an INA HUR.SAGA)rin~ n(anda GÌR-it š)]arΩ pΩun “I, My Majesty, marched before the troops on foot and went up into Mt. Arinnanda on foot” KUB 14.15 iii 43-44, w. dupl. KUB 14.16 iii 12-14, ed. AM 54f. 
2' (of humans) “to lead, take charge of” (MH and NH): GEﬂ-ti GEﬂ-ti–ma 1 LÚSANGA GAL LÚ.MEŠwehešgattallaš pé-ra-an h„yanza Ëšdu “Night by night let one high-ranking priest take charge of the patrolmen” KUB 13.4 iii 12-13 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Sturtevant, JAOS 54:380 (“be in command of”), Süel, Direktif Metni 56f. (“yönetsin”), cf. THeth 20:260f.; “At that time I personally defeated the enemy” [(LÚ-LUM–ma kui)]š pé-ra-an h„iyanza Ë[(šta)] nu anda pennu[-… (n–an–ka)]n GIM-an kuenun LÚKÚR–ma–za [(pidd)]aiš “When I killed the man who was the(ir) leader, and …, the enemy fled” KUB 1.1 ii 39-40 + KUB 19.61 ii 39-40 (Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 ii 23-24, ed. StBoT 24:12f. ii 39-41; 10 ÉRIN.MEŠ URUTahpašarr[a …] pé-ra-an-na µHap[-… huwΩiš] pé-ra-an-≠na± µGala[-… hu~ wΩiš] pé-ra-an-na µPí-š[i-… huwΩiš pé-ra-an-na] µŠazinaš huwΩi[š …] KUB 26.62 i 13-17 (list of troops taking oaths), translit. Kaškäer 143; cf. also other exx. where the verb is in the lacuna ibid. i 20-22; cf. THeth 20:514-516. 
3' (of gods) “to run/go before, or lead (troops in order to give them victory)”: (The Stormgod of 

peran 2 b 2' 

Aleppo will run on our side) mΩn–an [… nu]–nnaš uizzi [ap]Ωš–pat pé-ra-an huwΩÏškiwan dΩi “(and) when […] him, he himself will begin to run before (or: lead) us (and thereby give us victory)” KBo 3.40:8-9 (OH/NS), translit. BoTU 14a; [nu–mu DINGIR]. MEŠ pé-ra-an h„iËr nu kÏ kue KUR.KUR.HI.A lamni[y]anun [kuru]r kuiËš Ëpper n–at–mu DINGIR.MEŠ parΩ piyËr “The [god]s ran before [me], and the gods gave over to me these lands which I have named which started war (with me)” KUB 23.11 ii 29-30 (annals of Tudh. II?, MH/NS?); cf. also [nu–mu DINGIR].MEŠ pé-ra-an h„iËr n–ašta KUR URUGašga [… harninker] ibid. iii 24-25; [nu– nn]aš DINGIR.MEŠ pé-ra-an h„wΩer [nu ÉRIN.]MEŠ LÚ.KÚR hullumen “The gods ran before us, (so that) we defeated the enemy [troop]s” KUB 23.21 obv. 28-29 (annals of Arn. I, NS); ABU–YA–ya ANA ABI ABI–YA lahhi GAM-an–pat iya[ttat] nu ANA ABI ABI–YA DINGIR.MEŠ pé-ra-an h„iËr” My father, as before (-pat), accompanied my grandfather on campaign, and the gods ran before (i.e., gave victory to) my grandfather” KUB 19.10 i 12-3 (DŠ frag. 13E), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:65; cf. also KUB 
19.11 iv 34-6 (DŠ frag. 13D); ibid. 36-39; nu ANA ABU– YA [DIN]GIR.MEŠ pé-ra-an h„iËr nu–kan uni LÚ.KÚR URUGašgan ÉRIN.MEŠ ŠUTI kuin kuwapi damaškit [n]–an–kan kuwaškit “The gods ran before (i.e., gave victory to) my father, (so that) he killed the hostile Kaška ‘tribal troops’ wherever he caught them” KBo 14.3 iii 16-19 (DŠ frag. 14 F); cf. also KBo 14.3 iv 31-33 (DŠ frag. 15 F); KBo 5.6 i 26-9, 34-35, ii 34, 34-35 (DŠ frag. 28A); cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 100-102, THeth 20:514-516. 
b. peran huinu-— 1' “to cause B (acc.) to run/ go before A (dat.), i.e., put B (acc.) in the charge of A (dat.)”: kinun[a]–an ANA LÚSIGﬁ pé-ra-an huinut n–an MAHAR dUTU-ŠI liliwahhuwanzi! (text: lilahhuwankan) uwateddu “Now put him in the charge of an officer (lit. cause him to run before an officer) and let (the officer) bring him quickly before My Majesty” HKM 13:9-12 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, HBM 138f. (differently), tr. THeth 20:516; for a different usage of peran huinu-, see 4 a 2', below. 
2' w. -za instead of the dat. n. or pron. (“A”), “to cause someone to run before oneself, i.e., put oneself in charge of someone, take charge of some

300

one”: [(DAM–SU–y)]a–wa–za DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU NAM.RA.MEŠ–ya [(šarΩmnaza pé-ra-an h)]uinut nu–war–an–kan katta pËhutet “Quickly(?) he took charge of his wife, children, and persons available for resettlement, and led them (collective sg.) down” KBo 3.4 ii 72-73, w. dupl. KBo 16.1 iv 29-30, ed. AM 64f.; cf. also KBo 3.4 ii 69-70, ed. AM 62f.; ÉRIN.MEŠ– ya–za ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ ŠA KUR URUHatti péra-an h„inut n–an arha pËhutet “He took charge of the infantry and chariotry of the land of Hatti and led them away” KUB 1.1 ii 50-51 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:14f.; for KBo 5.4 obv. 19-20 and KBo 5.13 ii 34iii 3, see s.v. lammar 2 c. 
	c. peran h„iyatalla- “leader”: pé-ra-an h„iya~ tallaš–ma µAnn[aš pé-ra-a]n h„iyanza Ëšta “As the leader/commander, Anna was [le]ading” KUB 19.18 i 13 (DŠ frag. 15), ed. JCS 10:76; LÚ.MEŠpé-ra-an h„iyat~ talluš–ma Ëpp„n n–aš ANA ŠEŠ–YA hinkun “I seized (the enemy’s) leaders and handed them over to my brother” KBo 3.6 ii 12-13 (Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:12f. ii 28; cf. THeth 20:513-518; on the position of the determinative cf. Neu in FsRisch 107-115. 
	d. peran iya- (mid.) “to walk in front”: pé-raan-na LÚSAGI.A waššanza iyattari “And a ‘clothed’ cupbearer walks in front” KUB 25.1 iv 2-3 w. further citations in Zuntz, Ortsadv. 86; [(n–aš ša)]rΩ tÏyat dKumarbiš [(nu–šši dI)]mpalluriš pé-ra-an i[(y)]attat “Kumarbi got up, and Impaluri walked in front of him” KUB 33.98 ii 15-16 (Song of Ullik.), w. dupl. KUB 33.102 ii 17-18, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:150f. Note: the first example without dative is preverbial. The second, with a dative, is postpositional. 
	e. peran lΩ- “to dispel”: dU EN AN KI LUGAL DINGIR.MEŠ halziyawen nu–šši haratar waštul– ya pé-ra-an t[arnumeni nu ŠA dU TUKU.TUKU-an pé-ra-an laweni] dHebat–ma MUNUS.LUGAL ŠAMÊ halziyawen nu ŠA dU TUKU.TUKU-an péra-an [l]Ω[weni … halziyawen] nu ŠA dU TUKU.TUKU-an pé-ra-an lΩweni “We have invoked the Stormgod, lord of heaven and earth, king of the gods, [we will confes]s offence and sin before him, [and we will dispel the anger of the Stormgod]; we have invoked Hebat, Queen of Heaven, and we will dispel the anger of the Storm-god; [we have invoked …], and we will dispel the anger of the Stormgod” KBo 11.1 obv. 1-3 (prayer, Muw. 

peran 2 j 2' 
II), cf. Houwink ten Cate/Josephson, RHA XXV/81:105, 114, 128f. 
	f. peran lamniya-“to name (someone to be) before/in charge of”: cf. HKM 70:4-13 s.v. parΩ adv. 3 c. 
	g. peran pai-A “to go in front, go ahead”: see pai-A 1 j 24'. 
	h. peran palwai-: see palwai-f 2'. 
	i. peran šazki-“to shove to the fore(?)”: [lË– ma–za–kan] kΩš k„n EGIR-pan šazkitta kΩš–a–za– kan k„n [pé-ra-an šazk]itta “Let one not shove the other one behind, let one not shove the other one [to the fore(?)]” KUB 1.16 ii 58-59 (political testament of Hatt. I, OH/NS), cf. HW™ 1:153b (VI 2 b) without tr.; cf. KBo 

13.119 iii 15 for šazki-(StBoT 5:155); cf. HAB 102, HW 189. 
j. peran tiya-— 1' “to step in front, advance, be promoted to higher rank”: EGIR-pa–ma–kan ištar~ na 1 IKU nu 2 LÚ.MEŠ ŠUKUR <katta> iyanta mΩn–at LÚ.MEŠ DUGUD-TIM mΩn–at pé-ra-an tinteš LÚ.MEŠ SIGﬁ-TIM “Behind, in the middle, one IKU (back) two spearmen are going — whether they are commissioned officers or higher ranked (lit. ‘stepped forward, advanced’) non-commissioned officers” IBoT 1.36 ii 47-8 (MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:20f.; cf. mΩn–at LÚ.MEŠ DUGUD-TIM mΩn– at pé-ra-an tiyanteš LÚ.MEŠ SIGﬁ-TIM “whether officers or higher ranked non-commissioned officers” IBoT 1.36 ii 52-53, ed. AS 24:20f. 
2' “to step in front/before (sometimes in sense of ‘to intercede’)”: nu–mu–kan apiya–ya dI[M URUHatt]i EN–YA pé-ra-an tiyawanzi handΩittat “At that time too the St[ormgod of Hatt]i was determined (to be the one) for my stepping before (i.e., the god whom I should approach)” KUB 14.8 obv. 3940 (PP 2, NH), ed. Götze, KlF 1:212f., Lebrun, Hymnes 206, 212 (differently), tr. ANET 395 (“I should have to account for myself before the Hattian Storm-god”); cf. also DINGIRLIM-[t]ar kuit pé<-ra->an tianna SI≈SÁ-a[t] KUB 
49.33 i 1 (oracle question, NH); dŠeriš–ma EN–YA GUD ŠA dU ŠA KUR URUKÙ.BABBAR-ti pé-ra-an tian~ za nu–mu kËdaš ANA AWATEMEŠ arkuwar tiyau~ waš ANA DINGIR.MEŠ tarkummai “Šeri, my lord, bull of Teššub, the one who steps in front (on behalf) of the land of Hatti, in these words relay for me the prayer to the gods who may be approached 
301

(lit. gods of stepping)” KUB 6.45 i 33-35 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 9, 32 (differently), Lebrun, Hymnes 258, 274, tr. ANET 398; the basis for this preverbial expression is probably the ordinary construction with postpositional peran: nu–wa–kan mΩn DINGIR. MEŠ-aš pé-ra-an DINGIR-LIM kuiški [tiyazi(?)] … n–aš–kan DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pé-ra[-an] lË tiyaz[i] IBoT 3.148 iii 28-31 (rit., NS); in the vast majority of occurrences of peran tiya-the peran is post-positional. 
	k. peran wahnu- “to be or become important, vital, preeminent, gain preeminence, get the upper hand”: “If you, Huqqana, do not in the future protect His Majesty in good will, if the person of His Majesty is not as dear to you as your own person” pé-ra-an-na-[a]t-ta ŠA dUTU-ŠI UL wahnuan harzi “and the (welfare) of His Majesty has not become the most important issue to you” KBo 5.3 i 20-21 (Huqq., Šupp. I), ed. SV 2:108f., tr. DiplTexts 24, discussion Sommer, Heth. 1:8, Götze, KlF 1:224f., Friedrich, SV 2:140; cf. also KBo 5.3 i 26; nu DUMU µTette našma ŠEŠ µTette pé-ra-an wahnuwanzi “(If) the son of Tette or the brother of Tette get the upper hand(?) (and [kil]l Tette)” KBo 3.3 i 27-28 (Murš. II), ed. differently Klengel, Or NS 32:34, 40 (“… (mir) zuvorkommen”), tr. DiplTexts 156 (“anticipate”); cf. KBo 3.3 i 33-34; cf. Sommer, Heth. 1:7f., Götze, KlF 1:224f., Friedrich, SV 2:140, Kammenhuber, ZA 56:159. 
	l. -za peran weriya- “to involve oneself with”: ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUMira–ma–wa–za / [pé-ra-an l]Ë weriyanza pé-ra-an-na–wa–šmaš lË werianniškiši “[Don’t be] involved with the men of Mira, and don’t involve (yourself) with them” KUB 14.15 iv 4849, ed. AM 74f. (“Mit den Leuten von MirΩ [sollen sie sich nicht] einlassen, auch sollst du dich nicht gegen sie verschwören”); a direct join with KBo 16.104 in the immediately following line shows that the break at the beginning of line 49 was larger than the copy indicates; either we should read an-dapát or pé-ra-an should be restored. 

3. (temporal adv.) “previously, before, at first; in advance, beforehand, ahead of time, provisionally” (cf. temporal peran as prev., mng. 4, below and postpos., mng. 5, below) — a. simple peran — 1' “previously, before, at first”: i[(ni–wa–mu uttar kar„i)]liyaz péra-an UL [(kuwapikki kiša)]t “Such a thing has not happened to me previously/before (peran) from 

peran 3 a 2' 

ages past (karuiliyaz)” KBo 5.6 iii 18-19 (DŠ frag. 28A), 
w. dupl. KBo 14.9 iii 7-8, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:95; nu–kan NA›kunkun[uzziš] / [NŠ.TE–š]i parkiš[ta] nu–šši pargatar pé-ra-an 1 LIM 9 ME–ya DANN[A palhaštiš–ma–šši …] / … DANNA p[é-ra-a]n tan~ kui daganzipi katta artari ma[l]tan[išaš]/ mahhan karp[iš]kattari NA›ŠU-U-ziš “The Bas[alt] became high in [h]is [body]. At first (peran) his height was 1,900 miles [and his width was …] miles; at first (peran) he stood (lit. stands) on the Dark Earth, and like a maltaniš the Basalt grows (lit. is lifted up)” KBo 26.65 (incl. KUB 33.106) i 16-19 (Song of Ullik., NH), ed. without join Güterbock, JCS 6:18f., cf. also s.v. par~ gatar 1; for KUB 1.1 i 27-28 (Hatt. III), see 3 b, below. 
2' “in advance, ahead of time, beforehand, provisionally”: nu–za kuit wašiyazi n–at GIŠ.HUR iyandu n–at–kan pé-ra-an šiyandu … n–at–ši šiyandu “Let them make what (the buyer) buys into a document and seal it in advance/provisionally, (but when the king comes up to Hattuša, let him present it in the palace) and let them seal it for him” KUB 13.4 ii 41-42, 44 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), contra ed. Chrest. 154f. (“in his presence(?)”), Süel, Direktif Metni 44f. (“(herkezin) önünde”), but following Sommer, AU 75 (“vorläufig?,” contra Zuntz, Ortsadv. 99) and Güterbock, Symb.Koschaker 29f. n. 13; nu–za mahhan k„n memian ZI-ni EGIR-pa kiššan AQBI nu ANA µNu~ wanza GAL.GEŠTIN IŠTU MUŠEN.HI.A IŠTU SU.MEŠ–ya pé-ra-an ariyanun nu–šši IŠTU MUŠEN.HI.A U IŠTU SU.MEŠ handaittat … kΩša–wa–tta IŠTU MUŠEN.HI.A IŠTU SU.MEŠ– ya ammuk pé-ra-an ariyanun “When I had recalled this word thus to myself (cf. mema-9c, 13c), I made an oracle inquiry in advance (peran) by means of augury and extispicy on behalf of the (absent) Field Marshal Nuwanza, Chief of the Wine; (so I sent Nanaziti after Nuwanza, Chief of the Wine, and wrote to him:) ‘I have made an oracle inquiry in advance (peran) for you by means of augury and extispicy’” KBo 4.4 ii 49-54, ed. AM 118f. (no special tr., possibly reflected in his “für Nuwanza” and “über dich”), HW™ 1:295b (“für PN,” “piran a. sicher nicht ein Begriff (so Zuntz, Ortsadv. 92f.)”), tr. HED A 136 (“behold, I gave you the oracle treatment with birds …,” pé-ra-an = prev.); cf. also KBo 2.2 i 43-47 (“we constantly worry in advance”), ii 1-13 cited s.v. lahlahhiya-v. 1. 

302

b. peran parΩ (or parΩn) (adv.; true compound; peran not construed w. a d.-l. or gen.) (Friedrich, SV 1:75) — 1' “previously”: ≠nu± pé-ra-an parΩ kuitta– ya–za–kan ammuk ANA GIŠGU.ZA ABI–YA Ëšhat (var. Ëšhahat)[nu] MU.≠20.KAM± [… e]di pait “Previously, since I had sat down on my father’s throne, twenty years had passed” KBo 5.8 ii 39-41, ed. AM 154f.; “On the day they decorated the substitute ox, His Majesty bathed” pé-ra-an parΩ–ya–z[(zi ap„)]n ≠GEﬂ±-an IŠTU MUNUS-TI tiešhaš “Previously throughout that night he stayed clear of a woman” KUB 43.50 obv. 19-20 + KUB 15.36 obv. 11-12, w. dupls. KUB 12.31 obv 10- (11), KBo 4.2 iii 58-(59), ed. MSpr 6f., Lebrun Hethitica 6:105f. (“l’avant veille”) | for tišha-, see Tischler, HEG 3:381, following MSpr, against Friedrich, OLZ 39:306, HW 222; the -zzi perhaps is a rare form of -za which was -ti in proto-Anatolian and remained -ti Luw. (see Melchert, AHP 183), cf. abl. in -zzi. 
2' “in advance, beforehand, ahead of time”: péra-an parΩ–ma–kan µKantuzzilin [… INA KUR URUKargamiš n]ehhun “But I sent Kantuzzili in advance [… to the land of Kargamiš]” KUB 14.17 ii 2021, ed. AM 86f.; namma–kan µArnuwandan DUMU– ŠU µZidann–a GAL MEŠEDI IŠTU KUR URUTe~ garama INA KUR URUHurri pé-ra-an parΩn naišta “Then he sent his son Arnuwanda and Zida, the Chief of the Guards, from the land of Tegarama in advance into the Hurrian land” KBo 5.6 ii 29-31 (DŠ frag. 28A), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:93; [m(Ωn) id]alun–ma kuinki INIM BAL-aš pé-ra-a[(n parΩ ištamašti našš)]u LÚ KUR ŠDŠeha kuiški našma LÚ KUR ≠URU±[(Ar)zauwa BAL Ëššai (ki)]nuna–ta kuiËš kueuš LÚ.MEŠkuriwa[(nuš me≠mi±yan–ma)] pé-ra-an parΩ šakti n–an ANA dUTU-Š[I (≠UL± hatraši)] nu– kan apËdaš kuwatqa parΩ ušk[i(≠ši± nu kiššan tËši)] eni–wa HUL-lu DÙ-ru nu memian GIM-an [(i)štamašt(i)] n–an ANA dUTU-ŠI pé-ra-an parΩ kar[(aššaya ŠUPUR)] “[If] you overhear beforehand some [e]vil plan to rebel, and you know the matter beforehand, but you don’t write it to His Majesty, but ignore (lit. you overlook) those who are fellow vassals(?) with you, whether the man of Šeha River or the man of Arzawa, and you say as follows: ‘Let that evil happen!’ <may the gods curse you!> Rather you must send beforehand truthful (words) to His Majesty” KUB 21.1 ii 75-81 (Alakš. 

peran 4 a 1' 
§11, Muw. II), w. dupls. KUB 21.5 iii 1-8, KUB 21.4 i 6-10, ed. SV 2:64-67, tr. DiplTexts 84 (“in advance”); zik–ma ištamašti nu–kan ŠÀ KUR-TI kuiš B´LU nu–šši [p]é-ra-an parΩ UL hatrΩši “But you hear and don’t send beforehand to what lord is in the land” KUB 
21.1 iii 47-48 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:74f., tr. DiplTexts 86; mΩnn–a–za ANA DINGIR–LIM SISKUR šarlatta pé-ra-an parΩ iyazi n–at ANA DINGIR-LIM anda UL weriyantari “If someone makes a šarlatta-sacrifice ahead of time, they will not be called in before the deity” KUB 58.73 iii 15-16 (rit.), ed. Otten, ZA 65:300f.; for KBo 5.13 iii 22-24, see s.v. memiya-n. 1 b 5'; for KBo 4.9 ii 2-6, see s.v. LÚpalwatalla-a 3'. 
3' pé-ra-an parΩ UD-an “before daybreak(?)”: n–an–kan apΩšila pé-ra-an parΩ UD-an kunanzi “They kill it (sheep) themselves before daybreak(?)” KUB 32.123 ii 25-28 (Ištanuwian fest., NH), translit. StBoT 30:307f.; KUB 51.37 obv. 8-13 (rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 41.30 iii 1-7 (NS), see šiwatt-. 
c. peran šarΩ “beforehand(?), in advance(?)”: zik–ma pé-ra-an šarΩ UL wa[(rrišš)]atti “But you do not offer help beforehand(?)” KUB 21.1 iii 51 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iii 67-68, ed. SV 2:74f., tr. DiplTexts 86; cf. same expression in KBo 5.4 rev. 46 (Targ., Murš. II). Other apparent exx. of peran šarΩ are in fact to be analyzed otherwise — In the following two exx. peran is the adv., but šarΩ a prev.: (When I had defeated the chariot corps of the land of Appaya) G[UD.HI.A UDU.HI.A ŠA URUTak]≠šan~ na±ya pé-ra-an šarΩ dahhun “I previously(?) (peran) took up (šarΩ dahhun) the [cattle] of [Tak]šannaya” KBo 10.2 i 54, ii 1 (annals of Hatt. I, NS); [n–at] pé-ra-an šarΩ Ëpdu n–a[t MAHAR dUTU-ŠI uppau] KUB 13.1 iv rev. 8-9 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), translit. Dienstanw. 62; in the exx. of peran šarΩ cited in 1 c 1' a' (KBo 5.8 iv 19-20 and KUB 14.15 ii 8-9) and 3 c 1' d' (KUB 
13.4 i 22) above peran is postpos., and šarΩ is prev. 
4. (temporal postpos.) “in front, first (temporally)” — a. peran arnu-or huinu-“to move something temporally to first position,” i.e. “to give priority to” — 1' w. arnu-: dUTU-ŠI ÉRIN.MEŠ ŠA HUR.SAGHaharwa RA-wanzi pé<-ra>-an arnuzi “His Majesty will give priority to (lit. move to the front) the troops of Mt. Haharwa for an attack. (Afterwards he will go on the double to Hahana)” KUB 5.1 
303

i 15 (oracle questions, NH), ed. THeth 4:34f. (“läšt (Truppen) voranbringen”), cf. Friedrich, HW 1.Erg. 2 (“vorwärtsbringen”), cf. 4 a 2', below; URUNeriqa–za–kan karpmi nu lahiyauanzi URUTanizilan pé<-ra>-an arnumi “I will complete (my duties at) (lit. lift) Nerik and give priority to Tanizila for fighting, (and he will fight the troops of Mt. Haharwa in the same way)” ibid. iii 28-29, ed. THeth 4:68f. (“werde ich T. forttragen, um es zu schlagen”) | for -za–kan karp-“to complete,” see KBo 
16.98 ii 12-14 (oracle question, NH). 
2' w. huinu-: [dUTU]-ŠI ÉRIN.MEŠ ŠA HUR.SAGHaharwa RA-uanzi pé<-ra>-an huinuzi EGIR-pa–ma URUNeriqa [and]an “His Majesty will give priority to the troops of Mt. Haharwa for an attack. He will (go) back into Nerik” KUB 5.1 i 19-20 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:34f. (“läšt (Truppen) vorlaufen”); cf. 4 a 1', above. 
	b. peran walh-“to beat (someone) out, beat (someone to something), act first, anticipate (someone), prevent (someone)”: [(takku É-er našma UR)]U-an GIŠKIRIﬂ našma wešin kuiški ušneš[(kat~ ta ta)maiš–(a pai)]zzi ta–kkan pé-e-ra-an walahzi ta–ššan [(happari) š]Ër happar iËzzi uštulaš (var. waštulaš) 1 MA.NA KÙ.[(BABBAR pΩi) …-š–a– z (han)]tezziyaš–pat (NS var. hantezziuš) happa~ riuš wΩši “If someone has agreed to sell a house, a village, a vineyard or pastureland, and another man (a new buyer or seller?) goes and beats (him, i.e. the previous seller or buyer?) to it, and makes a (new) deal bett[er than] the (old) deal, the offender shall give one mana of silver, [and the buyer] shall buy the items offered for sale only of the first (person) (or: only the first (person) shall buy the items offered for sale)” KUB 29.29 obv. 8-11 (Law §146, OS), 
	w. dupl. KBo 6.10 iii 17-21 (NS), ed. HG 70f., 107f. (differently), Goetze, ANET 194, translates “goes and beats him up,” taking the implied obj. of walh-to be the seller himself; the OS “q” manuscript preserves the original reading hantezziyaš (sg. nom. or gen.), while KBo 6.10 iii 21 (NS) “corrects” it to han~ tezziuš in order to make it modify happariuš; the OS copy permits either of the two translations offered here, while the NS copy allows only the first; [takku LÚ.U⁄·.LU]-an dam~ pupen kuiški ušneškatta [t(amaiš)–a–k]an pé-ra-an GUL-ahzi [(wa)š(tulaš 5) G]ŠN.GŠN KÙ.BABBAR pΩi “[If] someone has agreed to sell an untrained [person], and another man beats (him) to it, [the of

peran 6 

fender] shall give [five s]hekels of silver” KBo 6.10 iii 22-24 (Laws §147, OH/NS), restored from dupls. KBo 14.67 ii 3-4 (NS), KUB 29.29 obv. 15-16 (OS); cf. also Laws §148; the two passages in the laws are the only exx. of this idiom; the peran walh-in KUB 53.14 ii 9 is an adv. “in front”; the peran walh-in KUB 31.69 obv.? 7 is a postpos. governing ANA dUTU-ŠI; von Schuler’s restoration [wa-al?]-ah-mi in KUB 26.1 i 58 (Dienstanw. 11) is unlikely, see Otten, AfO 18:388. 
5. (temporal postpos.) — a. “before, facing (a person in) the future, ahead (of someone)”: BURU⁄›.MEŠ–wa–mu–kan pé-ra-an naššu kušΩta naššu KASKAL-aš našma tamai kuitki uttar nu– wa–mu EGIR-pa tiyatten nu–wa–mu–kan aši kuit~ man memiaš pé-ra-an arha tiyaddu mahhan–ma– wa–mu–kan aši memiaš pé-ra-an arha tiyazi nu– wa EZEN› Q¸TAMMA iyami “‘Harvests are before me’ or ‘(the payment of) a brideprice’ or ‘a trip’ or some other matter. ‘So let me off until this matter before me may be disposed of. Then when this matter before me is disposed of, I will celebrate the festival in the same way (as usual)’” KUB 13.4 ii 58-63 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 154-57, Süel, Direktif Metni 48f., cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 85 who called pe~ ran in this passage an adverb, but it is clearly a postpos. dependent upon the clitic pron. -mu “me”; cf. 12 c 1' n' below. 
b. temporally prior to someone’s activity: pé-raan–ma–at–mu µ.dSÎN-dU-aš DUMU µZida mani~ yahhiškit “Before me Arma-Tarhunta, son of Zida, was governing it” KUB 1.1 i 27-28 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:6f., cf. CHD maniyahh-where this was rendered “under my supervision Armatarhunta the son of Zida was governing it” but must now be interpreted as temporal “before me” (contra Zuntz) in the light of clear temporal peran above. 
6. (postpos.) during the reign of (a king): ANA PA-NI ABI–ŠU–wa ÉRIN.MEŠ ANŠE.KUR.R[A. MEŠ kuiš] [ma]niyahhiškit “[He who] governed the foot soldiers and horse troops during the reign of his father” KUB 19.29 iv 8-9, ed. AM 16f., cf. maniyahh-5 c; cf. also KUB 14.15 iv 38-39, ed. AM 72f., Götze, ArOr 5:2; KBo 3.4 iii 57-58, ed. AM 80f. (“zu Zeiten meines Grošvaters”); KBo 5.8 ii 14-18, ed. AM 152f.; [É LUG]AL U KUR URUHatti ANA PA-NI ABI–YA mahhan [taparta ANA PA-NI ŠEŠ–YA] Q¸TAMMA–pat taparta “As she [ruled the king’s house] and the land of Hatti during the reign of my father (Šuppi

304

luliuma I), so also she ruled [during my brother’s reign]” KUB 14.4 i 7-8 (Murš. II), cf. Goetze, Kl™ 93 n. 2, HW™ 1:173b, THeth 5:177, cf. KUB 14.4 i 10-12; apel–ma ŠA NAM.RA.MEŠ memiyaš ANA PA-NI ABI dUTU-ŠI kiššan Ëšta “The matter of the people to be resettled was as follows during the reign of the father of My Majesty” KBo 3.3 iii 12-13 (Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:37, 43, cf. HW™ 1:337b; ammuk–ma–za ANA PA-NI ŠEŠ–[(YA)] EN KARAŠ kišhahat nu– mu ŠEŠ–YA ANA GAL MEŠEDIUTTIM tittanut “During the reign of my brother (Muwatalli II) I became a general (lit., lord of the troops), and my brother installed me as Chief of the Guard” KUB 1.1 i 24-5 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 i 20-22, ed. StBoT 24:6f.; cf. KUB 1.1 + 1304/u ii 72-74 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:16f.; ANA PA-NI ABBAHI.A–YA ABBA [(AB)BAHI.(A kuiËš)] k„rur ešir ammuk–ma takšula[(e)]r “Those who were hostile during the reigns of my forefathers (lit. fathers and grandfathers) made peace with me” KUB 1.1 iv 58-59 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 iv 18-19, ed. StBoT 24:26f.; nu T˘UPPU RIKILTI kuwapi iËr ap„n–ma–za MUNUS-an µ.dLAMMA-aš ANA PA-NI ABI–YA datta–pat nawi “Kurunta had not yet taken that woman in marriage during the reign of my father, when they made the treaty tablet” Bronze Tablet ii 8687 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:20f.; cf. KUB 21.49 obv. 10 in bil. sec above. 
7. (postpos.) under the supervision of (a superior): [kÏ tuppi] arha harran Ë[šta] n–at ammuk µA[šhapalaš] PA-NI µLÚ IŠØUR(sic) “[This tablet] w[as] worn out, and I, A[šhapala,] wrote it (i.e., a fresh copy) under the supervision of Ziti” KUB 
33.120 iv 24-26; ŠU µPikku PA-NI µAnuwanza IŠØUR “The hand(copy) of Pikku; he wrote (it) under the supervision of (lit. before) Anuwanza” KUB 29.1 iv 29 (NH colophon to OH/NS rit.); and in many other colophons, see sim. usages 2 a, b, f, above. 
8. w. eš-(act.) “to be responsible for”: ANA KÙ.BABBAR–kan KÙ.GI µIyara-SUM-yaš pé-raan Ëšzi “Mr. Yarapiya is responsible for the silver and gold” KBo 2.1 i 26-27 (NH), ed. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 86; [mΩn–war–aš UL–m]a uizzi nu–wa–kan KUR-e pé-ra-an Ëšten nu–wa KUR-e [pahhašnuwan harten] “But [if] he [doesn’t] come, be responsible for the land and [keep] it [protected]” KUB 14.16 i 17

peran 9 b 
18, ed. AM 28f. (“[Wenn er aber nicht] kommt, so besetzet das Land und das Land [haltet beschützt!]”). 
9. in verbal idioms with karti or ištanzani — a. karti peran or P¸NI ŠÀ: nu–zza DUMU.≠NITA±. MEŠ karti–≠š±mi pé-ra-an mËmer “The sons said to themselves (lit. before their heart)” KBo 22.2 obv. 1314 (Zalpa story, OS), ed. StBoT 17:6f., 32, cf. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:169f. and CHD mema- 9 a; ANA PA-NI ŠÀ–[K]A– wa–z duškiškitta LÚ-natar–mit–wa kuit pašta “Are you rejoicing in (lit. before) [your] heart because you have swallowed my manhood?” KUB 33.120 i 2829 (Song of Kumarbi), tr. Hittite Myths 40, cf. also i 30. 
b. ištanzani peran or P¸NI ZI: L[Ú…]x–ma LÚ.MEŠhattalwalaš LÚAPIN.LÁ-aš LUGAL-waš ÉSAG [P]A-NI ZI–ŠU lË kuiški kinuzzi “But let no […]-man, hattalwala-man, (or) farmer on his own initiative (lit. before his mind) open a grain-storage p[it] belonging to the king” KUB 13.9 iii 6-7 (MH/NS), ed. von Schuler, FsFriedrich 447, 450, Westbrook/Woodard, JAOS 110:643; dKumarbiš–za PA-NI Z[I–ŠU memi]škiwan dΩiš “Kumarbi began to say to himself” KUB 33.93 iii 15 + “26” (misjoin in KUB 33) (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:152f.; nu–za PA-NI ZI–ŠU memiškiwan [daiš] KUB 33.93 iii 27 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:152f.; kuit–ta memahhi dU-ta ZI–za KI.MIN (i.e., Ëšša, cf. ibid. iv 24, 30) kiššan harkun ZI-ni–ya–za GALGA-tar pé-ra-an NA›NUNUZ-an GIM-an kišan išgareškinun “What can I say to you, O Stormgod? Do what you wish! I ‘held’ as follows: Before my mind I lined up wise plans (lit. wisdom) like (a string of) beads as follows” KBo 
26.65 + KBo 26.118 iv 25-26 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:30f., translit. w. join Groddek, AoF 21:330; cf. KUB 
33.96 i 9-11, w. dupl. KUB 33.98 i 9-10, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146f.; [n–aš–za hattatar] Z[I-]ni [pé-ra-]an daš~ kizzi “He takes [wisdom] into (lit. before) his mind” KUB 33.96 i 2-3 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146f., tr. Hittite Myths 52; dKumarbiš–za hat<ta>tar ZI-ni pé<-ra>-an d[(aškizzi)] “Kumarbi takes wisdom into (lit. before) his mind” KUB 33.96 i 5, w. dupl. KUB 33.98 i 4-5; cf. also KUB 33.113 i 1-2 + KUB 36.12 i 1415 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:10f., tr. Hittite Myths 55; nu–za idΩlun [˚]luppaštin ZI-ni peran [a]rha uiyaddu “Let him send away the evil annoyance from his mind” KUB 36.97 iv? 1-3 (New Year’s fest.), ed. :lumpašti-, Otten, OLZ 51:103. 
305

10. (postpos.; causal) because of, from, out of (Madd. 79, Ehelolf, MDOG 75:66, Friedrich, AfO 13:155) — 
	a. inani peran “from sickness”: ≠uk–a ANA± DINGIR–YA kuit iyanun nu–mu É–YA inani pé-raan pittuliyaš É-er kišat nu–mu pittuliyai pé-ra-an ištanzašmiš (*ištanz–miš) tamatta pËdi zappiškizzi “What have I done to my god, that from sickness my house has become a house of anxiety, and that from anxiety my soul is steadily dripping away to another place?” KUB 30.10 rev. 13-15 (prayer of Kantuzili, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 114, 117, tr. ANET 401. 
	b. kardimmiyatti peran “from anger” (German “vor Zorn”): nu–šši TUKU.TUKU-atti pé<-ra>-an … tameu[mm]ahtat “and from anger his … changed” KBo 26.58 iv 39-40 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f.; [kË–wa INIM.MEŠ mΩn] dU-aš IŠME nu–wa–šši kartimmiatt[i pé-ra-an … tameu]mmahtat KUB 33.87 i 2-3 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:10f.; nu–šši kartimmiyatti pé-ra-an […] tameummeišta KUB 33.113 i 14-15 + KUB 36.12 i 2728 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:12f. 
	c. kašti peran “from hunger, because of hunger” (German “vor Hunger”): mΩn UL–ma [mΩ]n– ša[m]aš kašti pé-ra-an UR.GI‡.[HI.A] karËper “Otherwise dogs would have devoured you (pl.) from hunger” KUB 14.1 obv. 11 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 4f., Josephson, Part. 309, tr. DiplTexts 145; cf. HKM 24:6-7 (MH/MS), ed. Alp, HBM 158f. discussed above in the morphology sec. 
	d. w. a v. of “fearing” (compare German “Er fürchtet sich vor nichts”): apedani–[ya–za–kan tapariya] pé-ra-an weritešš≠an±za ešu[n] “I was afraid of (lit. before) that [command]” KUB 14.7 i 1011 (prayer of Hatt. III and Pud.), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:90f. 
	e. lappiyaš peran “from/because of the heat”: see KUB 17.8 iv 23-24 s.v. pašk-3. 

1	w. nai-“to turn (someone or something) over to (someone)”: ŠEŠ–YA–ya–an–mu QADU DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU É–ŠU pé-ra-an nΩiš “My brother turned him, his wife and his sons and his house over to me” KUB 19.67 i 11-12 (= Hatt. iii 2021), ed. StBoT 24:18f. (“und mein Bruder überantwortete ihn mir mitsamt seinem Haus(wesen) …”); s.v. nai-7. 
2	(in combination with a second postpos., prev., or adv.) — a. peran Ωppa “before (and) 

peran 12 a 4' a' 

back” (Götze, KlF 1:223f., NBr 52f., 71) w. verbs of “going/coming” means “back and forth” = “again and again” — 1' w. iya-(mid.) “to frequent”: kuetaš (var. kuitaš) ANA É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL pé-ra-an EGIR-pa iyantari kuetaš–a[(t)] ANA É.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ pé-ra-an EGIR-pa UL iyantari “What temples the king and queen frequent, and what temples they do not frequent” KUB 6.45 iii 6-8 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 
6.46 iii 44-46, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 19, 39 (“attend”). 
2' w. pai-A “to constantly approach” (s.v. pai-A 5 c): kuit–at imma kuit šahhan luzzi nu–šmaš pé-raan EGIR-pa lË kuiški paizzi “Whatever šahhan and luzzi there are, let no one constantly approach them (i.e., the above-mentioned cities for the šahhan and luzzi)” Bronze Tablet iii 54-55 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:22f. (“ihnen gegenüber soll niemand (darauf) zurückkommen”); EN[.SISKUR(?) …] UL pé-ra-an EGIR-pa paizzi KUB 46.39 iii 17-18 (rit., NH); NA›[hegu]r Pirwa– ma–kan arauwahhun n–a[t šahhani] luzzi … lË kuiški pé-ra-an EGIR-p[a paizz]i “I exempted the hegur Pirwa; let no one constantly approach it for šahhan and luzzi, …” KBo 6.28 rev. 22-25 (edict, Hatt. III), correct the restoration of line 25 cited s.v. luzzi-b 2' c'. 
3' w. tarna-“to allow to come and go, allow free access”: n–an–za–an dIŠTAR URUŠamuha GAŠAN–YA pé-ra-an EGIR-pa tarnΩu nu–šši–kan NINDA.GUR›.RA išpanduzi ŠU-az arha dΩu “May IŠTAR of Šamuha my lady allow him free (cultic) access, and may she accept from his hand (offering) bread and libations” KUB 21.15 + 715/v iv 12-15, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:85; dUTU-ŠI–ma–wa PA-NI dU URUNerik Ωššianza [n–an–za–an d]U URUNerik pé-ra-an EGIR-pa tarnaš “His Majesty is beloved before the Stormgod of Nerik, and the Stormgod of Nerik allowed [him] free (cultic) access” KUB 56:14 iv 12-13; damΩiš–ma–at NUMUNanza lË Ë≠pzi± DINGIR-LUM damel NUMUN-aš pé-ra-≠an± EGIR-pa lË tarnΩi “Let no other seed seize it (the priesthood); may the deity not allow (one) of another seed free (cultic) access” KBo 6.29 iii 16-18 + KUB 21.12 iii 17-19 (edict, Hatt. III), ed. NBr 48f. 
(w. joins; “Kult ausüben lassen”). 
4' w. uwa-: — a' to carry out the cult (lit. come forward and backward): [namma–š]maš ANA DINGIR.MEŠ Q¸TAMMA pé-ra-an EGIR-pa 

306

[uwawe]ni “[Then] we will carry out the cult for you gods in the same way” KUB 21.27 ii 2-3 (Pud. prayer), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 331, 338; Sürenhagen, AoF 8:112f.; nu–šmaš–kan DINGIR.MEŠ EN.MEŠ–YA [URU.DIDLI.HI.A] lË namma ištappanteš ku[it~ m]an–ma–<šm>aš šumel ÌR–KUNU GÉME– KUNU pé-r[a-a]n EGIR-pa uwaweni “May your [cities], O gods my lords, not be blockaded while we, your servant and maidservant, are carrying out the cult for you” ibid ii 7-10. 
b' to surround: nu Ït ANA dKumarpi [(memi)] kuwat–wa É-ri IGI-anda (var. É–YA pé.-an EGIR-pa) ka[rtimmiy]auwanza uit “Go, say to Kumarbi: ‘Why have you come against (var. surrounded?) my house in anger?’” KUB 33.102 ii 7-8 (Song of Ullik.), 
	w. dupls. KUB 33.98 ii 5-6, KUB 33.93 ii 20-22, ed. JCS 5:148f.; cf. also KUB 33.106 iii 7-8 (Ullik. III A). 
	b. peran EGIR-ann–a “before and behind”: LÚ.MEŠGALA MUNUS.MEŠarkammiyaleš LUGAL-i péra-an EGIR-ann–a h„iyanteš “The singers and the female arkammi-players are walking before and behind the king” KBo 10.24 iv 13-15 (OH/NS). 
	c. peran arha “away from in front of, from before, out in front, by/along in front, around”; cf. Zuntz, Ortsadv. 50-54 — 1' away from in front of, from before, out in front — a' w. huittiya-to pull from in front(?): KUB 55.58 obv. 10 (Hišuwa-fest.), in broken context. 

b' w. išpart- “to escape from before”: ŠA dUTU-ŠI–ya ANA GIŠTUKUL kuiËš pé-ra-an arha išparter “And those who have escaped from before the weapon of My Majesty” KUB 23.72 + 1684/u obv. 43 (Mita text, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:35, translit. Hoffner, JCS 28:61, Otten/Rüster ZA 67:54; ŠA dU[TU-ŠI]–ya kuit tuzziš INA KUR URUKummΩha Ëšta nu[–šši kuiš] / pé-ra-an arha išparza[šta] “[And anyone who], when My Majesty’s army was in the land of Kummaha, escaped from before [it]” KUB 23.72 rev. 16-17 (Mita text, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:36. 
c' w. lahuwa-“to pour out in front: (The chief of the palace attendants takes from the altar a gold vessel) t–an–kan ištanani pé-ra-an arha lΩh„wΩi “and pours it (sc. the vessel, acc. obj.) out in front of the altar” KBo 4.13 vi 22-23 (festival, NH). 

peran 12 c 1' h' 
d' w. munnai-“to hide from before”: DINGIR. MEŠ-eš–kan µKeššiya išpanduzzi šer kartimmi~ yauwanteš nu–šši h„itar h„man pé-ra-an arha munnΩer “The gods were angry with Kešši on account of the libation (which he did not give), and they hid all of the wild animals from him (lit. hid from before him)” KUB 33.121 ii 12-4 (Kešši story, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:234f. 
e' w. pai-A “to go away from in front of”: péra-an arha Ït DUMU–mit lË–mu ≠pé-ra±-an šarΩ arta≠ti± “Go away from in front (of me); (be) with my son; don’t stand up in front of me” KBo 26.65 iv 910 (Song of Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:28f.; in bird oracles: see exx. s.v. pai-A 1 k 2'-3'; for a different usage, see 12 c 2' c', below. 
f' w. parh-“to race/run out in front”: (Two wolf-men run in front of a procession) nu–šmaš péra-an arha parhhiškanzi “and they (i.e., the two wolf-men) race/run out in front of them (scil. the procession)” KBo 23.97 i 17 (fest. for Titiwatti, NS), ed. 
s.v. parh-5. 
g' w. parš-“to flee before (someone)”: NAM. RA.MEŠ–wa–mu–kan kuiËš pé-ra-an arha par≠šer± “The civilian captives which fled before me” KUB 
14.15 iii 28, ed. AM 52f.; cf. KUB 14.15 iii 34, 36, ed. AM 5255; URUŠunupaššiš UL tuhuššiyait n–aš–mu–kan péra-an arha paršta “Šunupašši did not wait (for me), but it fled before me” KBo 2.5 i 1-3, ed. AM 180f. | for tuhušiya-, see also 12 c 1' m', below; cf. also s.v. parš-A c 2'. 
h' w. paršiya- “to break off from the front”: […] NINDA.Ì NINDA.KU‡–ya paršiyannai [pé-r]a-an arha–ya–kan tepu [parš]iyannai nu duwan [duw]ann–a išh„waiškizzi “He breaks up fat bread and sweet bread. He breaks only a little from the front and scatters (it) here and there” KUB 10.72 ii 2124 (pre-NH/NS) | the position of the enclitic in this example shows that peran arha is a syntactic unit; nu LUGAL-uš NINDA Ωn NINDA.KU‡.HI.A kue paršiya n–ašta h„ma<n>daz pé-ra-an arha tepu paršiyannai “The king keeps breaking off a little from the front of all what warm bread (and) sweet breads he breaks” KBo 30.69 iii 11-13; [(nu)] LÚSANGA dIM NINDA ΩnHI.A […-]lanHI.A kue paršiyannai [(n–ašta p)é-raa]n arha kazmita [(paršiyazzi)] KBo 24.68 rev. 3-6, w. dupl. KBo 20.113 iii 2-4; cf. KBo 24.41 iv 18. 
307

i' w. paršullai-“to crumble off the front”: “The king breaks a warm bread and a sweet bread and calls all the gods by name” namma–kan ANA NINDA Ωn NINDA.KU‡–ya pé-ra-an arha teputtit paršullΩizzi “Afterwards, he crumbles teputtit off of the front of the warm bread and the sweet bread” KBo 19.128 iv 6-8 (rit., OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 13:10f. and comment on p. 40 | teputtit looks like an inst. adv. (see Melchert, Diss. 257) “little by little, in little pieces”; see s.v. paršullai-. 
j' w. peda-“to carry away from in front”: GIM-an–ma–kan INA KUR URUMalazziya [anda] ar<h>un nu–mu IMBA≠RU± pé-ra-an arha pedaš “But when I reached Malazziya, (the Stormgod) made the fog to pass away from before me” KUB 
14.20 i 18-19 + KBo 19.76 i 31-32, ed. AM 196f. (without join) | in contrast to IMBARU udaš “(the Stormgod) brought a fog” three lines earlier in the same text; ≠kuit kuit i±dΩlu uttar NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM hurtaiš [pap]rΩtar PA-NI DINGIR-LIM iyan n–at kË nakkuššiËš ANA DINGIR-LIM pé-ra-an arha ≠pË±dandu “Whatever evil word, oath, curse, impurity was done before the god, let these scapegoats carry them away from in front of the god” KUB 29.7 rev. 59-61 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), cf. s.v. nakkušši-. 
k' w. piddai-“to run/flee from before”: tarhta– an–za–an dAlalun n–aš–ši pé-ra-an arha piddΩiš n–aš!(sign an)–kan GAM-tanda dankuwai taknÏ pait “(Anu) defeated Alalu, and he (Alalu) fled before him and went down to the Dark Earth (= Netherworld)” KUB 33.120 i 13-14 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), ed. Meriggi, Athenaeum 31:110f., Kum 6, 2*, translit. Myth. 154, tr. Vieyra, RPO 544, ANET 120f., MAW 156, Hittite Myths 40, LMI 117; cf. KBo 23.1 i 19-20, ed. piddai-A 1 a 1'. 
l' w. da-“to take from before”: nu ANA DINGIR-LIM NINDA.GUR›.RA [LIBIR.RA] péra-an arha danzi nu–kan É DINGIR-LIM p[arΩ] šanhanzi papparšanzi nu–kan NINDA.GUR›[.RA GIBIL] tiyanzi “They take [the old] thick bread from before the deity, sweep out and sprinkle the temple, and set out [new] thick bread” KUB 31.113:11-4; [ … P]A-NI DINGIR-LIM–pat kittari IŠT[U … pé-r]a-an arha UL kuiški dΩ[i] “[…] lies before the deity; no one takes [it] from [be]fore [the deity]” KBo 14.133 iii 5-6 (NH). 

peran 12 c 2' b' 

m' w. tarna-“to flee before”: nu [z]ik µMa≠d~ d±uwattaš nam≠ma µA±ttariššiyan U≠L± mazzašta nu–šši pé-ra-an arha tarnaš “You, O Madduwatta, did not resist Attariššiya any longer; you fled before him” KUB 14.1 obv. 62 (MH/MS), ed. Madd. 16f., cf. Madd. 126 (“ist einer der vielen Ausdrücke für Fliehen”), tr. DiplTexts 147 (“but broke ranks before him”); man–mu UL duhušiyait man–mu pé-ra-an arha tarnaš “(Pitaggatalli) would not have waited for me, but would have fled before me” KBo 5.8 iii 17-18, ed. AM 156f.; partially restored in KUB 14.15 i 7-9, ed. AM 34f.; completely restored in KUB 19.30 i 8, ed. AM 92; cf. nu mahhan INA URUTimmuhala arhhun [n–aš U]L t„hušiyait nu–mu pé-ra-an arha tarnaš “And when I reached Timmuhala, he did not wait for me, but fled before me” KUB 19.37 ii 8-9, ed. AM 168f. 
n' w. tiya- “to move away from before (temporally)” > “to be disposed of, removed (from the agenda), attended to”: cf. KUB 13.4 ii 60-62 (instr., pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 156f., Süel, Direktif Metni 48f., edited above 5 a and s.v. memiya(n)-3 a. 
o' w. uiya-“to send away from before”: see KUB 
36.97 iii 8 - iv 3, in 9 b, above and s.v. lumpašti-b. 
p' w. watku-“flee (lit. jump away) before”: ≠am±mel≠la±–mu–kan kuiËš ANA dUTU-ŠI pé-ra-an arh[a] watkuwanteš “My (people) who fled (lit. jumped away) before His Majesty” KBo 19.70:22-23 (Man. treaty, NH), ed. del Monte, Or NS 49:61, 64; n–aš– mu–kan pé-ra-an arha watkuzi “And he flees before me” KBo 5.13 ii 18-19 (Kup. treaty, Murš. II), ed. SV 1:122-125, tr. DiplTexts 72. 
2' by/along in front — a' w. arš-“to flow by/ along in front(?)”: […] tuzziaz EGIR-pa GIŠTIR IŒBAT pé-ra-an arha–ma–šši–št[a ŠD-aš a]ršzi “The army took refuge in a forest, and along the front of it [a river] flows” (or: “and around it [a river] flows,” cf. 12 c 3') KUB 23.11 iii 16-17 (annals of Tudh., MH/NS), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:160f. (“vor”). 
b' w. gulš-“to draw (a line) across in front of(?)”: n–ašta GIŠhaššalli pé-ra-an ar[ha] / gulšzi “(The exorcist) draws (a line) across in front of(?) a stool ” KUB 12.5 i 16-17 (rit. for IŠTAR of Tamininka, MH/ NS), ed. Danmanville, RHA XX/70:51, 53. 

308

c' w. pai-A “to pass in front of” (w. acc.); (opp. of Ωppan arha pai-; cf. s.v. pai-A 2 f): m≠Ω±n šarkantiš–ma arta ANA LÚ MEŠEDI–ma našma ANA DUMU É.GAL [Dˆ]NU n–aš–kan šarkantin pé-ra-an arha UL paizzi EGIR-an arha–aš–kan paizzi ““If a litigant is standing there, but the case is against a guard or palace servant, he does not pass in front of the litigant. (Rather) he passes behind him” IBoT 1.36 iii 31-33 (MEŠEDI-instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:26f.; cf. IBoT 1.36 iii 29-30, 52, ed. AS 24:26-29; cf. CHD šarkanti-; for a different usage, see 12 c 1' e', above. 
d' w. pehute- “to parade before”: mΩn–kan apΩš– ma DUMU.LUGAL našma B´LUM tuzziya pé-ra-an arha idΩlu uttar pËhute[zzi] “But if that prince or lord parades an evil word before the army” KUB 13.20 i 26 (MH/NS); nu–šmaš–kan MUN[(US LÚIGI. NU)].GÁL LÚÚ.HÚB pé-ra-an arha [(pe)]hudanzi “They parade a woman, a blind man, and a deaf man before them (i.e., the soldiers who take the oath)” KBo 6.34 iii 2-3 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 7.59 iii 5-6, ed. StBoT 22:12f.; cf. g', below, and pehute-b. 
e' w. dai-“place along the front”: (They place tabarwašu-breads alongside the brazier) n–ašta 5.TA.[AN 10 NINDA š]arΩma pé-ra-an ar[ha tianzi] / 5.TA.AN 10 NINDA ša[rΩma–m]a–kan EGIR-an arha ti[anzi] “[Then they place] 5[0] šarΩma-breads along the front (of the brazier), and 50 šarΩma-breads along the rear” KBo 20.67 iii 15-16 (fest. of the month, OH/MS?). 
f' w. uwa-“to pass in front”: EGIR-pa–ma–aš kuwapi uizzi n–aš Ωppa–ya–pat ap„n KASKAL-an uizzi ANA LÚ.MEŠMEŠED¨TI–ma–aš–kan pé-ra-an arha uizzi “But when he returns, then also on his return he follows that same route but passes in front of the guards” IBoT 1.36 iii 24-26 (instr. for MEŠEDIguards, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f. 
g' w. wida(i)-“to parade before”: zig–a–šmaš– kan mΩn AWATEMEŠ SIGﬁ-TIM pé-ra-an arha UL widΩši nu–šm[aš–…] KUR URUHatti pé-ra-an UL SIGﬁ-in memišk[iši] “And if you (sg.) do not parade nice words before them and mention the land of Hatti favorably before them” KBo 13.55 obv.! 1-3 (treaty frag., early NS); cf. d', above. 
3' “around,” w. eš-(act.) “to be in circumference(?)”: “Let the tower of … be x gipeššar around 

peran 12 e 3' 
the top, but around the bottom let it be 6 gipešar; and let it be encircled by a gutter and a mariya~ wanna” mariyawanna–ma–kan pé-ra-an arha 6 gipeššar Ë[(št)]u parΩ–ma–at–kan 5 šekan uwan Ëštu “Let the mariyawanna be 6 gipeššar in circumference(?) (peran arha), and let it protrude(?) 5 šekan” KUB 31.84 ii 3-4 (B´L MADGALTI-instr., MH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.86 ii 3-4 + KUB 48.104:12, ed. s.v. mariyawanna-; possibly here 2' a', above. 
d. peran aššuwaz uwa-“to fly in on the good side in front: TI°MUŠEN–ma–kan pé.-an SIGﬁ–za uit n–aš 2-an arha pait “An eagle, however, flew in on the good side in front. It flew off down the middle” KUB 18.12 i 11 (NH); “We saw an aramnant-bird tarwiyallian” n–aš–kan pé.-an SIGﬁ-za uit “It flew in on the good side in front (and seized a bird GUN-lian and carried it off down the middle” KUB 
16.46 iv 7 (NH); cf. […]x–ma–kan pé. SIGﬁ-za uit KUB 18.3 l.e. 10; cf. with verb unexpressed n–ašta 2 TI°MUŠEN pé-ra-an SIGﬁ-az [z]ilawan SIGﬁ-az HKM 47:29-30 (MH/MS), ed. HBM 204-207, similary ibid. 22, 41, 45, 48-49, 50, 56. 
e. peran katta “down in front of ” (compound postpos. cf. [pé-r]a-an-kat-ta KBo 34.14 iii 11 (fest., OS)) — 1' w. ar-(mid.): GIŠlahh„riš–a–šma<š> péra-an katta arantari GIŠlahh„raš–ma pé-ra-an katta ŠA SIG› GUNNI.MEŠ iyanteš ANA GUNNI.MEŠ– ma namma pé-ra-an katta GIŠlahh„r≠Ëš± arandari “Lahhura-s are standing down in front of them. Hearths of brick are made down in front of the lahhura-s. Down in front of the hearths lahhura-s are again standing” KUB 58.88 ii 22-26 (rit. for Underworld deities), translit. Otten, ZA 72:285. 
2' w. huek-: namma–kan 1 UDU ANA ≠d±Uli~ liyašši šippantahhi n–an GIŠBANŠUR-i [p]é-ra-an katta h„kanzi “Next I offer one sheep to Uliliyašši, and they slaughter it down in front of the table” KUB 7.5 iii 1-3 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:275, 278 (§12). 
3' w. iya-(act.): šer–ma–ššan NINDA.ÉRIN. MEŠ NINDAwageššar NINDAšarlinn–a tehhi pé-ra-an katta–ma GUNNI iyami “On top (of the table) I place soldier-breads, wageššar-breads and šarlibreads, but down in front (of it) I make a fireplace” VBoT 24 iii 23-25 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 
309

112f.; cf. also KUB 15.34 i 20-21 (evocation rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:175f., tr. ANET 352; n–ašta wΩtar kuwapi parΩ aršzi nu GIŠBANŠUR pé-ra-an tianzi pé-ra-an katta–ma 7 TÚL.MEŠ iyanzi n–at wetenit šunnanzi “They put a table in front of where the water flows out, they make seven basins down in front, and fill them with water” KUB 15.34 iii 23-25, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:196f.; cf. KUB 58.88 ii 23-24, above 12 e 1'. 
4' w. išhuwa-: “They string bows and put arrows in place” GI.Ú.TAG.GA.HI.A–ma pé-ra-an katta išh„wai nu memai “and he scatters (other) arrows down in front, and says” KUB 7.54 iii 21-22 (rit. for plague in army, NH), tr. HAB 199. 
5' w. išparr-: nu–šši GIŠNÁ namma–pat GIŠBANŠUR pé-ra-an katta išparranzi “Once more they spread a bed for him down in front of the table” KUB 7.8 iii 14-15 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:276, 279 (§15). 
6' w. gang(a)-: TÚGkureššarHI.A ANA GIŠBAN~ ŠUR pé-ra-an katta gangai “(S)he hangs strips of cloth down from the front of the table” KUB 7.60 ii 56; such a situation is depicted in the reliefs at Fıraktin, cf. Bittel, Die Hethiter plate 198. 
7' w. ki-(mid.) (functions as pass. of peran katta dai-): nu DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU-li kue INIM.MEŠ-ar pé<-ra->an GAM GAR-ri n–at–za–kan haddanaza arha aušten “Look over with wisdom the matters which are placed down in front of the mortal” KBo 12.128:7-8; GIŠBANŠUR-i–ma pé-ra-an GAM taknÏ GAL GIR› kitta nu–ššan IZI šuhhan “Down in front of the table, on the ground, an earthen cup lies, and embers are poured into it” KBo 11.14 i 17-18 (Hantitaššu’s rit., MH/NS). 
8' w. paršnai-: UGULA LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· GIŠza~ hurtiya eša nu–šši 1 LÚMUHALDIM GAL-AM GEŠTIN pΩ[i] namma–šši LÚMUHALDIM pé-ra-an katta paršnΩizzi “The supervisor of the performers sits down on a wooden zahurti, and one cook gives a cup of wine to him; then the cook crouches down in front of him (and gets hit over the head three times from behind)” KUB 20.11 ii 8-10 (fest. frag., OH). 
9' w. peda-: nu DUGišn[„ri pé-]ra-an katta LÚGUDU⁄¤ pedan [harzi? n–aš]/ šipanti [nu DUGiš~ 

peran 12 e 12' 

n]uri PA-NI DINGIR-LIM šešzi “The GUDU⁄¤ priest [has] brought the kneading trough down in front (of the divine hunting bag), [and he] makes an offering, [and the knead]ing trough spends the night before the deity” KUB 55.43 iii 27-28 (fest. for renewing the hunting bag, NH), ed. McMahon, AS 25:152f. w. n. 50 (restoring differently). 
10' w. šipand-: nu 9 Ëtri tehhi [nu–kan] KAŠ pé-ra-an katta 3-ŠU šipandahhi “I deposit nine food servings and libate beer three times down in front” VBoT 24 iv 7-8 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 114f. (differently: “I pour three libations of beer before (the house?) near by”); nu–ššan EN SISKUR GEŠTIN šer šipanti ANA GIŠBANŠUR pé-ra-an katta šipanti “The sacrificer libates wine over (the offering breads) and libates down in front of the table” KUB 
15.42 iii 13-14 (MH/NS); nu GEŠTIN namma ANA DINGIR.MEŠ h„mandaš pé-ra-an katta šipanti “and libates wine again down in front of all the deities” KUB 45.50 ii 15-16. 
11' w. šeš-: dE[nkituš] ANA dGilgameš pé-ra-an katta ≠šeš±ta “Enkidu lay down to sleep before Gilgameš” KUB 8.48 i 16-17 (Gilg., NH), translit. Myth 132. 
12' w. dai-: In OH see StBoT 26:147; KUŠIŠPATU AN.ZA.GÀR mahhan unuwΩer n–at ANA µGur~ pΩra≠nza±hu pé-ra-an katta tÏËr “They decorated a quiver (to look) like a tower and put it down in front of Gurparanzahu” KUB 36.67 obv. 18-20 (Gurparanzah, NS); NINDA.SIG p[ar]šiya … hattešni p≠ér±a-an katta dΩi “(The Old Woman) breaks a thin bread … and puts (it) down in front of the pit” KUB 
58.79 i 9-10, cf. HW™ and HED s.v. hatteššar; nu–ššan NINDA.ÉRIN.MEŠ šer INA GIŠBANŠUR tehhi péra-an katta–ma DUGKUKUB tehhi “Above, on the table, I place ‘soldier breads,’ but down in front (of the table) I place a pitcher” KUB 7.5 ii 7-8 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:274, 278 (§9), cf. KUB 
27.16 iv 10-11 (fest. of Ištar of Nineveh), w. dupl. KBo 34.238:5-6; ANA µM[ita …] pé-ra-an katta tehhun “I placed […] down in front of Mita” KUB 23.72 rev. 3-4 (Mita, MH/MS); nu–za DINGIR.MEŠ kÏ DˆNAM péra-an katta dΩišten n–at punušten “O gods, put this case down in front of yourselves and investigate it” KBo 4.8 ii 16-17 (Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188; [nu– za DINGIR.MEŠ kÏ DˆNAM] pé-ra-an GAM tΩiš~ ten / [n–at punušten kuel–aš dam]mešhaš “[O 

310

gods,] put [this case] down in front of [yourselves and investigate it: Whose is the dam]age?” KUB 
40.94 rev.? 1-2 (probably part of KBo 4.8+, NH); nu–kan ANA µArmatarhunta QADU DAM–ŠU DUMU. MEŠ–ŠU alwanzatar wemier n–at–ši(y)–at pé-raan katta tiËr “They found sorcery in Armatarhunta, his wife and his children, and they placed it down in front of him (i.e., they confronted him with it)” KUB 19.67 i 6-8 (= Hatt. iii 17-19), ed. StBoT 24:18f.; tuk– ma kar„ kuit kË INIM.MEŠ pé-ra-an GAM tiyan DÙ-nun “Concerning the fact that I previously made these words to be put down before you (i.e., to confront you)” KBo 4.14 iii 23-24 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:45. 
13' w. tarna-(NBr 71) — a' “to let down in front”: ŠA[PAL GIŠER]IN–ma–ššan pé-ra-an SŠG SAﬁ išhiya[n] § n–at–kan pé-ra-an katta tarnan “Down in front of the (piece of) cedar red wool is tied, § and it is let down in front” KUB 15.34 i 6-8 (evocation rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:182f. (restoration differs), tr. ANET 352 (“To the front (of the piece) of cedar red wool is tied. It (the wool) is led down (to the ground)”), cf. NBr 71 (“darbringen”); nu–ššan LÚpurapšiš unuwanza šuhhi artari nu GIŠTUKUL kuin harzi n– an–kan pé-ra-an katta tarnai “The dressed-up purapši-man who stands on the roof lets down in front the weapon which he holds” KUB 30.40 i 20-22 (hišuwaš-fest.). 
b' “to abandon (someone) before (an enemy)”: ANA LÚ.KÚR–mu pé-ra-an katta UL kuwapikki tarnaš UL–ma–mu ANA EN DˆNI–YA LÚ.MEŠarša~ natallaš kuwapikki pé-ra-an katta tarnaš “(The goddess) never abandoned me before the enemy; she never abandoned me before my opponent in court or (my) enviers” KUB 1.1 i 52-55 (Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:8f., cf. NBr 71 (“preisgeben”). 
14' w. uwa-: n–ašta mahhan URUTimmuhalan ANA dIM šipandahhun nu–kan INA URUKašimula pé-ra-an katta uwanun “When I had offered Timmuhala to the Stormgod, I came down before Kašimula” KUB 19.37 ii 35-36, ed. AM 170f.; nu–kan mašiËš imma UD!.HI.A UGU pËdai EGIR-pa–ma– aš–kan URUKaštama pé<-ra->an GAM uizzi “However many days (His Majesty) spends up there, he will come back down before Kaštama” KUB 5.1 i 7980 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 4:46f. 

peran pËdumaš a 
f. peran kuštayaz/kuštayati uwa-: “to fly in on the kuštai-side in front” (in bird oracles): TI°MUŠEN– kan pé.-an kuš. uit n–aš–kan pé.-an arha pai[t] “An eagle flew in on the kuštai-side in front. It flew off in front” KBo 2.6 iii 55; cf. nuwayaš–kan pé. kuš. uit n–aš–kan pé. arha pait KUB 5.22:41; “We saw an eagle GUN-lian” n–aš–kan pé.-an kuš. uit n–aš zi.-an kuš. pait “It flew in on the kuštai-side in front. It flew off on the kuštai-side zilawan” KUB 16.46 iv 4-5; “Then it (the Ωlliya-bird) flew across the river GUN-an” namma–aš–kan ŠD-az šarΩ pé-ra-an kuš. uit “Then it flew up from the river on the kuštai-side in front” KUB 18.5 iii 14 (all NH). 
g. peran parΩ: see 3 b, above. 
h. peran šarΩ: see 3 c, above; cf. […]x pé-ra-an šarΩ harzi KUB 60.36:3 in broken context. In KBo 5.8 iv 1012, 19-20 and KUB 14.15 ii 8-9, cited above in 1 c 1' a', it is probably not a compound prev., but rather (so Götze, AM) peran as postpos. with a d.-l. and šarΩ as prev. See above 1 c 1' d' and 12 c 1' e' for pé-ra-an šara ar-(mid.). 
Note the seeming opposite connotations of peran. Temporally it can denote something future (5 a) or previous (5 b). To be before someone can indicate superiority and leadership (2 a 2'-3', 2 c, 2 j 1', 2 k) or subjection to another’s authority and leadership (2 b, 6, 7). 
HroznŸ, HKT (1919) 26 (adv.); Sommer, Heth. 1 (1920) 7f. (adv.), Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 4 n. 1, and p. 8 (postpos.); Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 75 (peran parΩ “vorher”); Zuntz, Ortsadv. (1936) 84-104, Friedrich, HW (1952) 170; idem, HE (1960) §224a; Otten, StBoT 8 (1969) 47, 56, 58, 71f.; Meriggi, Schizzo (1980) 374 §297 (for Luw. equivalent parran); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 144-147. 
peran pËdumaš / peran pËdunaš / peran peddunaš n.; a utensil for carrying forward (lit. ‘that of bringing forth’); NH.† 
pé-ra-an pé-e-du-ma-aš KUB 42.75 obv. 3, 4, KUB 42.11 i 3 (both NH), pé-ra-an pé-e-tum-ma-aš KUB 42.32 i 7 (NH), pé-ra-an pé-du-ma-aš KUB 42.26 obv. 5, 7, 9 (NH), pé-ra-an pé-e-du-na-aš KUB 29.4 i 18, (40), KUB 29.5 i (2), [pé-ra-an] ≠pé±-du-na-a-aš KUB 42.46:1, pé-an pé-tum-ma-aš KUB 42.64 rev. 16 (NH), pé-ra-an pét-tu-na-≠a±-a[š] KUB 12.1 iii 1, [pér]a-an péd-du-na-aš KUB 42.69 obv. 18. 
a. (made of red ivory): 1 pe-ra-an pé-e-du-maaš ZU· AM.SI SAﬁ KUB 42.75 obv. 4 (inv.), ed. THeth 
311

10:188f., Siegelová, Verw. 64f. (“Libationsarm”); cf. KUB 
42.32 i 7 (inv.), translit. Siegelová, Verw. 436f., THeth 10:176. 
	b. (of black iron): [… pe-]ra-an pé-e-du-ma-aš AN.BAR GEﬂ KUB 42.11 i 3 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 398f., THeth 10:31, 35 (“trays”). 
	c. (of black iron and gold): 1 pe.-an pé-tum-maaš AN.BAR GEﬂ KÙ.GI KUB 42.64 rev. 16 (inv.), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 428f. 
	d. (of gold or inlaid w. gold): [… pe-r]a-an péd-du-na-aš KÙ.GI “… p. p. of gold” KUB 42.69 obv. 18 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:115f., Siegelová, Verw. 455f.; 3 pe-ra-an pét-tu-na-≠a±-a[š …] KUB 12.1 iii 1 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:99, 103, Siegelová, Verw. 442f.; [… pe-ra-an] ≠pé±-du-na-a-aš KÙ.GI GAR.RA “… peran p. inlaid with gold” KUB 42.46:1 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:182, Siegelová, Verw. 481f. 
	e. (of ehlipakki-stone): 1 pe-ra-an pé-e-du-maaš ehlipakkiyaš KUB 42.75 obv. 3, ed. THeth 10:188f., Siegelová, Verw. 64f. | ehlipakki-is a precious stone, see CAD and GLH s.v. ehlipakku, not w. Neu, GsKronasser 140 w. 
	n. 61 (“aus Eisen”). 
	f. (of stone): (In a list of objects offered to a deity) 1-EN pe-ra-an pé-du-na-aš ŠA NA› “one peran 
	p. (made) of stone” KUB 29.4 i 18 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 8f. 
	g. (material not known): 3? or 6? pe-ra-an pédu-m[a-aš …] KUB 42.26 obv. 5, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 466f., translit. THeth 10:53, and Neu, GsKronasser 140; 1 pera-an pé-du-ma-aš […] ibid. obv. 7, and 1? ≠pé±-raan pé-du-ma-aš x[…] ibid. obv. 9. 

peran pËdunaš probably designates the same artifact as peran pËdumaš, but is formed w. a different suffix. Similarly, peran peddunaš seems also to designate the same implement as peran pËdumaš and peran pËdunaš, but is perhaps based on piddai-B, mng. 1 “to bring, carry,” a near synonym of peda- v. Therefore, it is unnecessary to assume a rare/unique value pè for the sign pát/pét/pít, as suggested by Košak, Linguistica 18:106f., and Puhvel, Fs-Neumann 318f. 
Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 50 n. 26d (pedunaš: “… liegt eine der vereinzelten Entgleisungen nach der Flexion partawar, partaunaš … vor”); eadem, MIO 3 (1955) 370 n. 54 (“flexivische Ummodelung”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 298f., 

peri

304 (pedunaš not a verbal subst., but from a n. *petwar); Košak, Linguistica 18 (1978) 106f. (“tray”); Neu, StBoT 12 (1979) 67f.; Puhvel, FsNeumann (1982) 317-319; Neu, GsKronasser (1982) 140 w. n. 60 (“(Gerät) zum ‘Nach-vorn-Bringen,’” for pedunaš he compares šanhunaš, on which Neumann, KZ 85:301); Siegelová, Eisen (1984) 163 (“(Kult)löffel”); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 65 n. 2 (“Libationsarm,” cf. Bittel, Bo©azköy III pp. 33-42). 
Cf. peda-v., piddai-B. 
peran pËdunaš see peran pËdumaš. 
peran peddunaš see peran pËdumaš. 
peri-n. com.; (mng. unkn.); from OS.† sg. nom. pé-e-ri-iš KBo 17.43 iv 5 (OS), KBo 22.195 ii! 13 
+ KBo 22.224 obv. 3 (OH/MS), KUB 42.69 obv. 10 (NH), pée-re-eš KBo 20.5 ii! 4, KBo 25.12 ii 17 (both OS), KBo 22.195 ii! 13 (OH/MS). 
acc. pé-e-ri-in KBo 20.33 obv. 15 (OS). 
[IŠTU É d]In[(ar)] šuppištuwareš uenzi h[uit]Ωr šamen[(zi)] pé-e-re-eš uizzi INA UD.2.KAM p[é-er]i-iš (var. [pé]-≠e±-re-eš) huidΩ[(rr–a)] NU.GÁL “From the temple of Inar, the šuppištuwareš come; the animals march along(?). The p. comes. On the second day, there are no p. and no animals” KBo 
22.224 obv. 1-3 + KBo 22.195 ii! 12-14 (OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 20.5 ii! 4-5 + KBo 25.12 ii 16-17 (KI.LAM fest., OS), tr. StBoT 27:96, translit. StBoT 28:34f. and StBoT 25:32 | šup~ pištuwareš are usually “relief plates,” but here probably are animal representations made of metal; pé-e-ri-iš uizzi x[…]x pËran SÌR(coll.)-RU lahmaš paizzi “The p. comes, […] sing in front of […], lahma- goes” KBo 17.43 iv 5-6 (rit., OS); [hu]≠e±tar šaminuanzi pé-e-ri-in šaminuanzi [LÚ.M]EŠALAN.ZU· šaminuanzi “They cause the animals to pass by, they cause the p. to pass by, they cause the performers to pass by” KBo 
20.33 obv.15-16 (fest., OS), tr. StBoT 27:95, translit. StBoT 
28:89 and StBoT 25:54, cf. Güterbock, JNES 48:307-11; [… ar]amniš pé-e-ri-iš 12 SIHPU KÙ.GI anda “[x] aramni-object(s) (and) p.(-s): twelve gold bands/ layers(?) are on (them)” KUB 42.69 obv. 10 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:115f. w. different tr. | for SIHPU = BAR.KŠN, see THeth 10:100, and CAD S sihpu 3c, Siegelová, Verw. 456f. 
Singer StBoT 27:97 suggests for pËri- “bird (i-stem)?,” as a syll. writing for MUŠEN. While nothing contradicts this proposal, the evidence he cites 

312

is insufficient to fix the mng. as “bird.” The suggestion p. “bird(?)” was probably influenced by two factors: 1. the old HW entry pera- based on a misreading for [UR]UPé-e-ra URU-ri KUB 33.131 rev. 5 (i.e., pé-e-ra-xMUŠEN, see Ertem, Flora 232). The correct reading was pointed out by Neu Kratylos 12:163. (URUP. still not mentioned in RGTC 6 or 6/2); 2. by the parallel w. aramni- which was translated as “(a kind of bird)” because of the similarity w. the aramnant-bird which occurs in bird oracles, until HW™ pointed out that aramni- is always made of precious materials and is probably an object. In the context of the procession in the KI.LAM fest., p. might be another object carried: first the metal ornaments (šuppeš~ tuwara-), followed by p. and animals (huitar). 
Neu, Kratylos 12 (1967) 163 (“Ein Nomen noch unbekannter Bedeutung”); Singer, StBoT 27 (1983) 97 w. n. 29 (“… Hittite reading of MUŠEN ‘bird’ (i-stem)?”); Neu, StBoT 26 (1983) 147 (“‘Vogel’(?)”); Melchert, Phon. (1984) 96 n. 45 (“a cult functionary”). 

pirešhannaš see parzahannaš. 

pirnu-v.; to embezzle(?), misappropriate(?) (or the like); NH.† 

pret. sg. 1 pí-≠ir±(coll.)-nu-nu-un KUB 13.35 i 14. 

“I have never handled any property of the king carelessly and I took nothing for myself. Whatever the queen handed over to me” nu–wa–kan arha UL kuitki pí-≠ir±(coll.)-nu-nu-un “I embezzled(?) nothing” KUB 13.35 i 14 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:4f. (read pininu-). The coll. showed a small vertical wedge crossing the horizontal one as in NI or IR; since all other NI’s in this text are wr. w. the uncrossed NI, the sign must be read as IR. In view of the uniqueness of this form, one wonders if some hearing mistake has produced it from mirnu-“to make to disappear,” which would offer the appropriate mng. in this context. 

Werner, StBoT 4 (1967) 16, 81 (“beiseite schaffen lassen”). 
piršahhan(n)aš see parzahannaš. 
NA›peru-see NA›peruna-. 

[pirwa] Sommer’s (AU 421) interpretation of p. as “eine bestimmte Art von Felsen(?)” is based solely on the similarity with NA›peru(n)-(see also Weitenberg, U-Stämme 170 §401). According to the tex-

NA›perul„wa
tual evidence, dPirwa is a deity associated w. horses, see Otten, JKF 2:62-73. There is no indication of his/her association w. rocks. Rock sanctuaries (NA›hegur) were dedicated also to dKammama and dLAMMA. The notion that dP. was originally a com. n., later deified, stems from the fact that the det. was regularly omitted in the phrase NA›hegur Pirwa (except NA›hegur dPirwa KUB 16.42 rev. 1). But note also that the determinative is frequently omitted in similar combinations of NA›hegur + GN, e.g., NA›hegur (URU)Pittalahša, NA›hegur Temmuwa, NA›hegur Haranqa (see the list in Imparati, SMEA 18:63f., and cf. RGTC 6 under appropriate GNs). 
Sommer, AU (1934) 421 (“eine bestimmte Art von Felsen(?); auch als Gottheit”), cf. AU 318 w. n. 1; Laroche, Rech. (1947) 87 (cites NA›pirwa- and refers to AU 318 where no such word is given); Friedrich, HW (1952) 170 (“‘(bestimmte Art von) Felsen’ (auch als Gottheiten)”); Otten, JKF 2 (1953) 72 n. 18 (also understands p. in NA›pirwa as appellative); Hoffmann apud Eichner, MSS 31 (1972) 75 (“der/die des Felsens”), 99 n. 80 (“… nicht unbedingt als ‘Pferdegottheit’ anzusprechen; jedenfalls kann der Bezug zum Pferd leicht als sekundär erklärt werden”); Imparati, SMEA 18 (1977) 39 (mng. in the same semantic range as NA›hegur justified by the existence of a (NA›)pirwa [unkn. to us, cf. above under Laroche]); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 538 (“(eine Felsgottheit)”); Tischler, HdW (1982) 64 (“(eine bestimmte Felsgottheit)”). 
NA›perul„wa-(w. arha?) v. mid.; to free from (small) stones(?); OH/NS.† 
“Go and call Telipinu. That son of mine is noble. He harrows, plows, and irrigates the field” halkinn–a / [arha(?)]–pat NA›pé-ru-lu-u-wa-ri “And he even frees the grain of stones(?) ” VBoT 58 i 30-31 (myth, OH/NS), translit Myth. 24, ed. StBoT 5:142 (“von Steinen befreien”), tr. Gurney, The Hittites™ 156 (differently), LMI 66 (“semina il grano”), Hittite Myths 27 (no tr.), Haas, Gesch.Relig. 443 (“das Getreide läšt er wachsen”), cf. Goetze, JCS 6:101. An inspection of the photograph of VBoT 58 reveals (contra the copy) adequate space to restore [ar-ha]. 
The procedure described was necessary after the threshing on the ground. The activities listed are only the first three and the very last. 
Goetze, JCS 6 (1952) 101 (“he is (hard) as a rock”); Neu, Kratylos 12 (1967) 166 (“nach dem Kontext wäre ‘mähen’ durchaus denkbar (vgl. G. Steiner, RLA 3, 1966, 314)”); Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 142 (“von Steinen lösen/befreien(?)”). 
Cf. NA›peruna-/NA›peru-. 
313

NA›peruna-n. com., NA›peru-n. neut.; 1. rock, cliff, boulder, 2. (in unclear idiom NA›perunaš GURUN “fruit of the rock”); from OS. 
sg. nom.-acc. NA›pé-e-ru KBo 15.10 ii 5, iii 51 (MH/MS), KUB 33.61 obv. 5 (pre-NH/NS). 
nom. com. NA›pé-ru-na-aš KUB 33.93 iii 8, KUB 33.98 i 
(14) (both NH), NA›pé-e-ru-na-aš HT 10:7. acc. com. NA›pé-ru-na-an KUB 15.24 iv 6 (NH), KUB 
26.65 iii 4 (NS). gen. NA›pé-ru-na-aš KUB 8.75 i (45), KUB 44.4 rev. 13 (both NH), perhaps KBo 19.14:2, if not d.-l. pl. 
d.-l. NA›pé-e-ru-ni KUB 36.110 iii 16 (OS), KUB 33.63 obv. 8 (OH/MS?), KBo 15.10 iii 48, 60 (MH/MS), KUB 13.3 ii 13 (MH?/NS), KBo 12.111:10, KBo 22.166 obv.? 10, KUB 
46.42 iv 9 (all NS), NA›pé-ru-ni KBo 13.84:(3), KBo 13.241 rev. 10, KUB 17.6 i 14 (all NS). 
pl. acc. com. NA›pé-ru-nu-uš KUB 36.89 obv. 15 (NH), NA›pé-e-ru-nu-uš KBo 4.4 iv 6 (NH), KUB 33.120 i 35 (NS), NA›pé-ru-ni[-iš] KUB 36.12 iii 9. 
d.-l. NA›pé-e-ru-na-aš KBo 17.4 iii 14, KBo 25.8:(6) (both OS), NA›pé-ru-na-aš KBo 19.14:2 (or perhaps gen.; see below, 1 b). 
sg. or pl. abl. NA›pé-ru-na-az KUB 28.4 ii 26 (NS). 
1. rock, cliff, boulder — a. (enduring) quality: nu AL[AM].HI.A [pedi–šm]i–pat pedumen n–uš dametani NA›p[é-r]u-ni kattan išqarer nu išnaš kurtΩli Ì LÀL kuwΩpi lΩhuwan n–at–šan NA›pé-runi dΩi … nu kiššan memai k[Ï] NA›pé-e-ru mΩhhan ukt„ri “We brought the figurines to their [place]. They lined them up on another rock. When oil and honey are poured into the container of dough, he places it (sc. the kurtali) on the rock… and says as follows: ‘Just as this rock is everlasting, (so may the master, his wife and children be everlasting)” KBo 15.10 ii 1-5 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth 1:20f. (“Fels”), cf. ibid. iii 46-51 | note the interchange of NA›peru and NA›peruni in this passage; ≠har?-ga±-i-iš-ta pé-e-ru x[…] KBo 
34.23 obv. 11 (myth.?). 
b. sizes given (myth. only): nu–ka[n o o] ikunt[a] l„[li a]n[d]a šalliš NA›pé-ru-na[-aš] kittari n–aš dalugašti 3 DANNA palhašti–[ma–aš x DANNA] “In the Cold Pond there lies a large rock of three miles length and [… miles] width” KUB 
33.98 + KUB 36.8 i 13-15 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:146f.; “May they call forth the rains and winds” kueuš–kan ANA 90 IKU NA›pé-ru-ni[-iš] par(a)š~ šanuškanzi “that break up the rocks for ninety IKU-measures (and that cover (them) for eight hundred 

NA›peruna- 2 

IKU-measures)” KUB 36.12 iii 9-10 (Ullik. Tabl. 2), ed. paršanu- B. 
c. as a topographical feature: namma–šši URUriašeššar kuit n–aš HUR.SAG NA›pé-e-ru-nu[-uš EGIR-pa harker] “Its city inhabitants (sc. those of Aripša) (lit. what there was of its inhabitants) [occupied (or took refuge in)] them (namely) the mountain(s) and the cliffs” KBo 4.4 iv 6 (Murš. II), ed. AM 134f., cf. nu LÚ.MEŠ URUAzzi kuiËš URU.DIDLI. HI.A BÀD NA›pé-e-ru-nu-uš HUR.SAG.MEŠ-uš pargawËš nakkÏ AŠRIHI.A EGIR-pa harker ibid. iv 2931, ed. AM 138f.; nu–šmaš UZﬂ-an iyanzi nu–šmaš– kan HUR.SAG-an parhanzi gaggapan–ma–š[m]aš iyanzi nu–šmaš–kan NA›pé-e-ru-ni parhanzi “They (sc. the king’s gods) will turn you into a goat and chase you up the mountain, they will turn you into a gaggapa-animal and chase you on the cliff” KUB 
13.3 ii 11-13 (instr. for palace servants, pre-NH/NS), ed. Friedrich, MAOG 4:46, 48, tr. ANET 207; nu uwaši ŠA HUR.SAGTašša NA›pé-ru-nu-uš IŠTU SAG.DU–KA GUL-ahh„anzi zinniškiši “You will end up striking the boulders of Mt. Tašša with your head” KUB 
33.120 i 34-36 (Song of Kumarbi, NH), ed. Kum. *2, 7, tr. Hittite Myths 41; [1 A.ŠÀ] NA›pé-ru-na-aš “[One field:] in/of boulders” KBo 19.14:2 (list of fields, NH), restored from KUB 8.75 i 45; nu URU-LUM GIŠ-ŒI NA›pée-ru-ni GAM-an tianzi “They place a ‘city of wood’ under the rock” KUB 46.42 iv 9 (Kizz. rit., NS) | for models of cities made of various materials, see Hoffner, IEJ 19:178180; “The house of Labarna is a house of joy for his progeny” n–e–ššan [N]A›pé-e-ru-ni wetan “and it is built on (a) rock” KUB 36.110 iii 15-16 (benedictions for Labarna, OS), ed. Forrer, MAOG 4:31f., Archi, FsMeriggi™ 50f.; nu–za[(n)] dInaraš NA›pé-ru-ni [(šer)] É-er wetet “Inara built herself a house on a cliff” KUB 
17.6 i 14-15 (Illuy., OH /NS), w. dupls. KBo 13.84:3 and KBo 22.99:6, ed. Beckman, JANES 14:14, 18, tr. ANET 126, RTAT 179, LMI 51 (“su una roccia”), Hittite Myths 12. 
2. (in unclear idiom NA›perunaš GURUN “fruit of the rock”): (Together with other ingredients) NA›pé-ru-na-aš GURUN ME-andu “May they (sc. the midwives) take the ‘fruit of the rock’ (and grind it all up and make an ointment to apply to the male child)” KUB 44.4 rev. 13 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:176f., 189 (“crystal?”), Polvani, Minerali 106-8 (“geode??”). 

314

KBo 15.10 ii 1-5 seems to show that the oblique forms of neut. peru are identical to those of com. gender peruna-. The shorter stem peru-seems to have been preserved in the v. NA›perul„wa-. 
Forrer, Forschungen 1 (1926) 61 (“Fels”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 167 (“Fels”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 176f., 189 (mng. 2 “crystal?”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) §§398-404 
(w. lit.); Melchert, Phon. (1984) 52, 89 (etymology and phonology); Polvani, Minerali (1988) 97-108 (mng. 1 “roccia,” mng. 2 “geode??”). 

Cf. NA›perul„wa-, NA›perunant-. 

NA›perunant-adj.; rocky, craggy (mountain); NH.† 
sg. nom. com. NA›pé-e-ru-na-an-za KUB 14.16 iii 9, KBo 
19.76 i (52), NA›pé-ru-≠na-an±-za KUB 14.15 iii 41 (all Murš. II). aši–ma [(HUR.SA)GArinnanda]š mekki [(na)]kkiš … na[(mma–aš mekki parku)]š warhuiš–aš namma–aš NA›pé-ru-≠na-an±-za (var. NA›pé-e-runa-an-z[a]) “That Mt. Arinnanda is very steep, … furthermore it is (also) very high; it is wooded/ 
overgrown, and furthermore it is rocky” KUB 14.15 iii 39-41, w. dupl. KUB 14.16 iii 7-9, ed. AM 54f. 
Although -ant-as a derivational suffix forming adjectives from nouns is rare (HE §48b2), the context of p. clearly favors an adjectival (rather than a nominal, HE §48a) interpretation. 

Forrer, Forsch. 1 (1926) 61 (“felsig”). 
Cf. NA›peru(n)-, NA›peruna-, NA›peruluwa-. 
pirza see paršza. 
pirzahannaš see parzahannaš. 

peš(š)-v.; to rub, scrub (w. soap, etc.); from pre-NH/NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pé-eš-zi KUB 7.1 i 33 (pre-NH/NS); pl. 3 pišša-an-zi KUB 51.33 i 4 (NH). 

pret. pl. 3 pí-iš-ši-ir KUB 12.26 ii 6 (NH). 

a. (in clear contexts): nu–za DUMU-aš Ωrri IŠTU ŠE.NAGA–ma–za pé-eš-zi “The child (sc. the patient) washes himself and scrubs himself with soapwort” KUB 7.1 i 32-33 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:143, 145; nu–wa–kan šuppin ÁŠ. MUNUS.GÀR-an kiššir nu–war–an pí-iš-ši-ir nu– 

(d)pišaišaphi a 
war–an–kan arrer “(The Sungod and Kamrušepa) combed the consecrated female kid, they scrubbed(?) it and they washed it” KUB 12.26 ii 5-7 (myth, NH), translit. Myth. 108, ed. Tunn. 88, and Benedetti, 
SR 1:16 (“la batterono(?)”). 
b. (in broken and therefore unclear context): GEŠPÚ-ši (-)EN[…] / [o] x x piš-ša-an-zi x[…] / P¸NI DINGIR.MEŠ tianzi KUB 51.33 i 3-5 (cult inv. frag., NH). 
For pé-eš-du ABoT 56 iii 17 (Šupp. II) and […]x-an apedani pé-eš-du KBo 18.19 rev. 34, see in the morphological sec. of pai-B “to give,” and cf. Otten, HTR 104 n. 2. By virtue of the existence of the pešstem in the v. “to give,” it is also possible that the two following exx. of pešzi, like pešdu from very late texts, belong to pai-B “to give”: […] EN KUR-TI pé-eš-z[i …] KBo 13.150 iii 3 (NS); nu–wa DINGIR-LUM ŠA [UR]UAnkuwa ŠA ABI d[UTU-ŠI … kuw]api SISKUR pé-eš-zi KUB 18.67 rev.? 7-8 (oracle question, NH). 
Güterbock apud HW (1952) 168 (mng. 1 passages: “einreiben(?)”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 386, 481 (connected w. ¬pašihai-?); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 94, 327 (connected w. pešni-). 
pËšaya[(-)…] (mng. and function unkn.).† 
[… U]RUHalpa pé-e-ša-ia[(-)…] KBo 23.70 i 15 (rit. for Hebat). 
(d)pišaišaphi, pišašaphi, wišaišaphi Hurr. adj. (divine epithet); MH/NS. 
pí-ša-i-ša-ap-hi KUB 45.55 obv. 4 (ENS?), KUB 25.48 iv 18 (MH/NS), KBo 27.199:(6), dPí-ša-i-ša-ap-hi KBo 14.142 i 10, KBo 27.200:(6), pí-ša-ša-ap-hi KUB 25.46 iii 9, KUB 
32.52 iii? 9, pí-ša-ša-ap!(text -at)-hi KUB 20.74 i 9 (MH/NS), dPí-ša-ša-ap-hi KBo 11.5 i (20) (NS), KUB 17.20 ii 27 (LNS), wii -ša-i-ša-ap-hi KUB 34.102 iii 28 (NS). 
a. (w. (d)Hatni): dHatni (dupl. hatni) pí-ša-šaap!(text -at)-hi KUB 20.74 i 9 (hišuwa fest., MH/NS), w. dupls. FHG 15:6, KBo 33.181 obv. 14; cf. dHatni pí-š[a-iša-ap-hi] KBo 27.199:6 (list of Hurr. gods); dHatni dPíša-ša[-ap-hi] KBo 11.5 i 20 (rit., NS); [… Š]aušga hat~ ni pí-ša-i-ša-ap-hi KUB 45.55 obv. 4 (rit., ENS?), cf. KUB 
25.46 iii 9, KUB 25.48 iv 18, KUB 32.52 iii? 9; hatni wii-šai-ša-ap-hi KUB 34.102 iii 28. 
315

b. (w. dIŠTAR): 1 NINDA.SIG ANA dIŠTAR dPí-ša-i-ša-ap-hi DINGIR-LIM KI-pí KBo 14.142 i 
10. The par. text 1 NINDA.SIG dIŠTAR 1 NINDA. SIG dpí-ša-ša-ap-hi KUB 27.13 i 7 shows that two deities are intended. 
c. (by itself): P¸NI dPí-ša-ša-ap-hi KUB 17.20 ii 27 (rit., LNS). 
The suff. -phi is analyzed as Hurr. gen. -we + gentilic adj. -he by Wilhelm, Das Archiv des Šilwa-Teššub 2:99, 131. Laroche, GLH 202, defines p. as “épithète de (d)Hatni.” See the formula dH. p. The formulas dH. dP. and h. p. could be interpreted either as “Hatni of P.” or as “Hatni and P.” For P. as an independent DN, see also dIŠTAR dP. “IŠTAR and P.” (or “IŠTAR of P.”?) and dP. by itself. p. might be derived from the mountain name Pišaiša for which see RGTC 6:316, although Laroche, GLH 202, derives it from a GN *Pišaišpa. Connection w. the mountain name Pišaiša is still unclear. The GN Pišaišpa could be the gen. (-pa) of the n. pišaiš, which according to GLH 202 indicates a plant (un végétal?), possibly a tree and its wood. The GN Pišaišpa would be a toponym sim. to the Hitt. type in -want-such as Wiyanawanda (“having vines”), Haššigašanawanda (cf. GIŠhaššigga-), Hinariwanda (cf. GIŠhÏnari), Kapanuwanta (cf. GIŠkapanu). The Hurrian n. pišaiš occurs in Akk. texts from Amarna and Nuzi, in which ša pí-ša-iš “(made) of p.” describes a throw-stick (addu) and a whip (iltuhhu). The whip is sometimes plated w. gold, and sometimes not. See AHw 867 and CAD I/J 288a. 
Laroche, Rech. (1947) 57; idem, GLH (1979) 202 (“épithète de (d)Hatni; ethnique probablement dérivé du toponyme *Pišaišpa”); Haas, SMEA 22 (1980) 109. 
pišašaphi see pišaišaphi. 
[pí-ša-te] in LÚ.MEŠ pí-ša-t[e …] KUB 60.1:21, and LÚ.MEŠ!? pí-ša-te ibid. 8, in view of the occurrence of LÚ.MEŠ + GN in this same position (cf. 22) might be interpreted as LÚ.MEŠ <URU>Pí-šat[e], for which cf. URUPiš-ša-at-≠te± KUB 50.79 obv.? 
10. Klengel’s publ. copy (KUB 60.1) corrects the translit. of Bo 1016 (= KUB 60.1) in Siegelová, Verw. 280f. 
[[TU‡pí-iš-h]u-u-ru-um-ni-li] see [TU‡h]u-u-ruum-ni-li. 

peš(š)iya/e

peš(š)iya/e-, piš(š)a/e-, peššiyai-, pišya-v.; 
1. to throw, cast, shove, 2. to abandon, 3. to cast off, reject, discard, give up (usually w. arha), 4. to ignore, disregard, neglect, forget, 5. to repudiate (an obligation) w. arha, 6. to remit, waive, relinquish (a claim), 7. to repel (an invading enemy), 8. to cause to drop, to fell, cause to fall, cause to be lost, (w. obj. šarhuwant-/ŠÀ) cause to miscarry, 9. (intrans.; technical term for behavior of internal organs; auli-, nipašuri-), 10. (w. katta, intrans.?; idiomatic in an unclear oracle question), 11. (w. arha in bird oracles; subj. is oracle birds) to reject/exclude (a possible threat, usually one formulated negatively), 12. (mng. unkn.); from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pé-eš-ši-ia-mi KBo 17.3 iv 18 (OS), KBo 15.25 obv. 30 (MH/NS), KBo 4.14 iii 2 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), péeš-ši-e-mi KBo 17.1 iv 22 (OS), pé-eš-še-ia-mi KUB 21.5 ii 7 (Muw. II), pí-iš-ši-ia-mi Bronze Tablet ii 96 (Tudh. IV), [peeš-ši-i]a-am-mi KBo 4.10 obv. 7 (NH). 
sg. 2 pé-eš-ši-ia-ši KUB 26.58 rev. 1a (Hatt. III), KUB 
49.52 obv.? 12 (NH), pí-iš-ša-at-ti VBoT 58 i 34 (OH/NS). 
sg. 3 pé-eš-ši-i-e-ez-zi KBo 17.43 i 16 (OS), KUB 33.68 ii 10 (OS? or MS?), pé-eš-ši-ez-zi KBo 6.2 ii 35, iv 6, KBo 17.18 ii (18) (both OS), KUB 34.123 i 10 (OH/MS), KBo 17.65 obv. 11 (MH?/MS?), KBo 23.23 obv. 23 (MS), KBo 17.92 obv. 8 (ENS?), KBo 6.3 ii 54, iv 9, KUB 30.40 ii 24 (both OH/NS), KBo 10.5 ii 7, KBo 13.58 ii 9, KBo 15.48 iv! 40, KUB 15.42 iii 5, 19 (all MH/NS), KUB 9.18:12 (NH), KBo 27.149:12, KUB 
41.44 ii 13, KUB 45.32 iii 4 (all NS), pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi KUB 
29.8 ii 27, KUB 29.43 rev. 5, KBo 39.8 iii 23 (all MH/MS), KUB 45.3 i 27 (pre-NH/MS?), KUB 32.72 obv. 8 (ENS?), KBo 6.34 i 42, KUB 15.42 iii 11, KUB 41.8 ii 26, 27 (MH/ NS), FHG 13 iii (1) (NH), KBo 5.11 iv 15, 17, KBo 27.158:4, KUB 7.4:8, KUB 10.88 vi 11, KUB 39.71 i 27, KUB 45.22 v 11 (all NS), pé-eš-še-ia-az-zi KBo 6.4 i 41, 43 (OH/NS), pí-išši-ia-az-zi KBo 21.33 i 29, KBo 23.12 rev. 2, 12, (15), KUB 32.49b iii 12 (all MH/MS), pí-i[š-še-]≠ez±-zi KBo 23.12 i 2 (MS), pí-iš-ši-i-e-ez-zi KBo 23.12 rev. 22 (MS), KUB 9.28 ii (22), KUB 24.9 ii 16 (both MH/NS), pé-eš-še-ez-zi KBo 23.12 
+ KBo 24.66 i 35 (MS), KBo 23.45 iv 8, KBo 27.126:5, (11) (all NS), IBoT 3.1:30, 32 (NS), pé-eš-ši-e-ez-zi KBo 17.105 ii 40 (MH/MS), KBo 17.65 rev. (33) (MH?/MS?), KUB 27.22 i 17 (ENS?), KUB 10.21 ii 23, 25, 27 (OH/NS), KBo 24.47 iii? 17 (NS), pí-iš-ši-az-zi KBo 27.42 iii 12, 14, 19 (OH/ENS?), KBo 22.180 i 5 (NS), [p]é-eš-ši-i-e-zi KBo 17.53 obv. 6 (MS?), pé-eš-ši-ia-zi KUB 45.47 ii 16 (MS?), KBo 29.6 i 16, 17 (ENS?), KBo 6.3 ii 35, iii 79, 80, KBo 11.30 i 10, KUB 
10.21 iii 22, KUB 11.16 iii 6, 9 (all OH/NS), KBo 6.34 ii 6, KUB 12.59 ii 12, KUB 43.56 ii 18 (all MH/NS), KUB 34.75:16 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 10.45 i 28 (pre-NH/LNS), KBo 5.1 iii 15, 20, 29, KUB 6.39 obv.? 4, KUB 40.33 obv. 9 (all NH), pé-ešše-ia-zi KBo 2.3 i 19, KUB 15.39 i 18 (both MH/NS), KUB 

316

13.4 iii 66 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 13.164 i 4, KUB 10.93 iv 2, 8, KUB 25.1 ii 7, KUB 51.66 ii? 6, 8 (all NS), pé-eš-ši-ia-az<-zi> FHL 4 rt. col. 7, pé-eš-ši-az-zi KUB 15.42 iii 21 (MH/NS), KUB 8.38 ii 16 (NH), KBo 19.135 iii 20 (NS), pé-eš-ši-zi KUB 6.39 obv.? 10, KUB 27.19 iii 7, pé-eš-ši-ia-iz-zi KBo 6.5 iv 16 (OH/NS), KUB 14.3 iv 23 (NH), KBo 13.216 i 4, 7 (NS), KBo 21.38 rt. col. 10, pí-iš-ši-ia-iz-zi KUB 9.28 ii 16 (MH/NS), pí-iš-ši-i-ia-iz-zi KUB 9.28 iv 19 (MH/NS), pí-iš-šiia-zi KBo 11.38 vi 3, 5 (NS), IBoT 4.96 left col. 8, pí-iš-ia-azzi KUB 7.60 ii 13 (NS), pí-ši-ia-az-zi KBo 5.2 i 48 (MH/NS), pí-iš-<ši?>-zi KUB 57.66 iii 9, piš-ši-ia-zi KUB 50.79 rev.? 5, KUB 50.104:8 (both NH), piš-ši-ez-zi KUB 6.2 obv. 23 (NH), pé-eš-ši-ia-i VBoT 24 ii 13 (MH/NS). 
pl. 1 pé-eš-ši-ia-u-e-ni KUB 35.164 obv. 6 (OS), KBo 
26.105:19 (NS). pl. 2 pé-eš-ši-ia-at-te-ni KUB 26.58 rev. 3a (Hatt. III). pl. 3 pé-eš-ši-ia-an-zi KBo 17.105 ii 42 (MH/MS), KBo 
2.3 iii 27 (MH/NS), KUB 21.29 iii 32 (Hatt. III), KUB 22.70 rev. 55 (NH), KBo 5.1 iii 37 (NH), KBo 9.129 rev.? 10, KBo 
10.27 ii 16, KBo 20.51 i 4, KBo 23.79 ii 7, KUB 39.41 i (3) (all NS), pé-eš-ši-an-zi IBoT 1.36 iv 27 (MH/MS), KBo 7.37 obv. 12 (pre-NH/MS), KBo 21.69 i 3 (MS), KBo 11.72 ii 44 (MH?/NS), IBoT 2.128 obv. 3, KBo 12.123:7, KBo 24.64:4, KUB 35.163 iii 6, KUB 58.14:6 (all NS), pé-eš-ši-ia-zi KBo 
10.45 i 28 (pre-NH/LNS), peš-ši-an-zi IBoT 3.148 iii 48 (NS), pí-iš-ši-ia-an-zi KUB 30.40 iii 14 (OH/NS), KBo 15.9 iv 17 (NS), pé-eš-še-ia-an-zi KBo 13.155:3 (MS). 
pret. sg. 1 pé-eš-ši-ia-nu-un KUB 36.75 iii 15 (OH/MS), KUB 17.27 iii 10 (MH?/NS), KBo 4.7 ii 2, KBo 4.3 i 13 (Murš. II), KBo 5.9 i 12 (NH), KBo 13.133:(8) (NS), KBo 10.14:7, Bronze Tablet iii 34 (Tudh. IV). 
sg. 3 pí-iš-ši-ia-at KBo 16.97 rev. 55 (MH/MS), KUB 5.6 i 12, KUB 5.7 i 25, KUB 16.5 iv 2, KUB 55.48 i 10 (all NH), péeš-ši-ia-at KUB 6.31 iv 14, KUB 6.34:13, KUB 41.8 iii (25) (all MH/NS), ABoT 57 obv. 16 (Hatt. III), KBo 4.10 i 43 (Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), KUB 22.70 rev. 2, 47, KUB 8.50 ii 2, KUB 16.17 i 9, KUB 22.27 i 8, KUB 34.48 left col. 3, KUB 
50.89 iii 10 (all NH), pé-eš-ši-at KBo 3.27 obv. 28, 29, 31 (OH/NS), KUB 5.1 iv (42), KUB 6.39 obv.? 9, KUB 18.49:13, KUB 49.47:8, KUB 50.108:6 (all NH), pí-iš-ši-at Bronze Tablet iii 34 (Tudh. IV) pé-eš-ši-i-e-et VBoT 58 iv 2 (OH/NS), pée-eš-ši-i-e-et KUB 1.16 iii 16 (OH/NS), pé-eš-ši-et KBo 6.3 i 23 (OH/NS), KUB 30.34 iii 14 (MH/NS), KBo 8.55:11, KUB 
49.11 ii 26 (both NH), pí-iš-ši-ia-et ABoT 44a ii 7 (OH/NS), pí-iš-še!-ia-at KUB 30.33 i 14 (MH/NS), piš-še-et KUB 6.2 rev. 1, KUB 22.54:14, KUB 22.56 rev. 22 (all NH), piš-ši-ia-at KUB 6.2 obv. 11 (NH), pí-ši[-et] 292/w:5, pí-še-et KBo 13.76 rev. 6, KUB 22.52 obv. 7, 12 (both NH). 

pl. 1 pé-eš-ši-ia-u-≠en± KBo 32.111 obv. 2. 

pl. 3 pé-eš-ši-er KBo 6.2 ii 57 (OS), KUB 12.63 i 32 (OH/ MS), pé-eš-še-er KBo 12.3 iv 5 (OH/NS), KUB 5.11 i 43, (69), KUB 50.100:5, KUB 52.75 rev. 24 (all NH), pé-eš-šer KBo 24.134 rev. 20, KUB 5.11 iv 36, 62, KUB 18.11 obv. 12, KUB 24.3 ii (43), KUB 52.75 obv. 10, AT 454 ii 6, 37 (all NH), pí-iš-ši-er KBo 13.131 obv. 12 (MH?/NS). 

peš(š)iya/e- 1 a 1' 
imp. sg. 2 pé-eš-ši-ia KBo 17.105 ii 11, iv 33 (MH/MS), KUB 14.7 iv 4, 11, KUB 21.29 ii 44 (all Hatt. III), KUB 36.96 obv. 8, 10 (NS), pé-e-eš-ši-ia KUB 1.16 iii 32 (OH/NS). 
sg. 3 pé-eš-še-ad-≠du± KUB 43.23 obv. 4 (OS), pé-eš-ši-iaad-du KUB 41.8 ii 13 (MH/NS), KUB 31.66 iv 8 (NH). 
pl. 2 pé-eš-ši-at-te-en KBo 15.10 iii 52 (MH/MS), pé-eš-šiia-te-en ibid. ii 10, pé-eš-ši-ia-tén KBo 17.105 ii 33 (MH/MS), pé-eš-ši-ia-at-tén KUB 21.19 iv (24) (Hatt. III), KUB 21.42 iv 21 (NH). 
pl. 3 pé-e-eš-š[i-ia-an-du] KUB 13.1 i 25 (MH/MS), pé-ešši-an-du KBo 24.127 obv. 4, KUB 5.21:6, KUB 16.57 rev. 10, KUB 18.4 iv 3, KUB 22.23:2, KUB 49.64:3, KUB 52.75 rev. 26 (all NH), pé-eš-ši-ia-an-du KUB 11.1 iv 18 (OH/NS), KUB 
40.57 i 11 (MH/NS), KUB 5.13 iv 5, KUB 18.9 ii 3, KUB 
22.33 obv.? 15, AT 454 ii 30 (all NH), pé-eš-še-ia-an-du KUB 
29.1 iii 11 (OH/NS), KUB 49.6:13 (NS), pé-eš-še-an-du KUB 
5.11 i 37, iv 31 (NH), [pé-e]š-ši-ia-an-du KBo 24.126 obv. 12 (NH), peš-ši-ia-an-du KUB 16.59 obv.? 2 (NH), peš-ši-an-du KUB 52.75 rev. 14, 21 (NH). 
part. pl. nom. com. pé-eš-še-an-te-eš KUB 5.11 iv 30, [pée]š-ši-ia-an-te-eš KUB 51.11:6 (NS); nom.-acc. neut. p[é]-ešši-an-da KUB 49.11 ii 16 (NS). 
verbal subst. nom. pé-eš-ši-ia-u-wa-≠ar± KBo 7.12 left col. 20 (NH); gen. pé-eš-ši-ia-u-wa-[aš] KUB 36.7a iv 46 (NS), píiš-ši-ia-u-wa-aš KUB 33.104:6. 
iter. pres. sg. 1 pé-eš-ši-iš-ki-mi KUB 24.14 i 27, 28 (NH), pé-eš-ši-eš-ki-mi KBo 11.11 i 6 (NH); sg. 2 pí-iš-ši-iš-ki-ši KUB 21.19 i 10 (Hatt. III); sg. 3 pé-eš-ši-iš-ki-iz-zi KBo 9.106 ii 52 (MH/NS), KBo 23.8:18, pé-eš-še-eš-ki-iz-zi KUB 45.5 iii 22 (NS). 
pl. 3 pí-iš-ši-iš-ká[n-zi] KBo 17.36 iii 8 (OS), pé-eš-še-iškán-zi KUB 10.60 i 6 (ENS?), pé-eš-ši-eš-kán-z[i] KUB 48.112 i 11 (NS). 
pret. pl. 3 pé-eš-še-eš-ker KBo 24.99 iv 9 (NS). iter.-dur. pres. sg. 3 pé-eš-ši-ia-an-ni-eš-ki-iz-zi KBo 
24.47 iii? 18 (NS). (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) […] = (Hitt.) […]x-kán pé-eš-ši-iau-wa-≠ar± KBo 7.12 left col. 20 (Diri, NH). (Hurr.) ku-lu-u-ru-um i-ia-a-at še-e-du-i-li-ia-ni-iš / ši-ta-a-ra na-a-al-li-iš ˚ku-ut-te / na-a-li ke-e-pí-il-la-a-šu-uš ha-a-i-te ka-ree-na-šu-uš ˚ha-a-i-te-in a-a-še / [k]e-pé-e-il-la-šu-uš a-aš-hi-i-ma / ga-re-e-na-šu-uš KBo 32.14 i 10-15 = (Hitt.) pé-eš-ši-an-du-ia-an / aliyanan LÚ.MEŠŒ¸ID¨TIM dΩndu–ma–an LÚ.MEŠMUŠEN.DÙ-TIM UZU.Ì LÚ.MEŠŒ¸ºID¨TIM dandu “Let the hunters fell him, the deer; let the fowlers take him; let the hunters take its meat; 
(let the fowlers take its hide)” KBo 32.14 ii 13-15 (Hurro-Hitt. bil. wisdom and myth, MH/MS), ed. StBoT 32:74-77. 
1. to throw, cast, shove — a. in general (par. peda-) — 1' without prev./adv./postpos.: “If someone purifies a man, he takes the remnants to the dump” takku–at–an parna–ma kuËlka pé-eš-ši-ezzi (var. [(takk)]u–at A.ŠÀ-ni našma parni kuelga pËdai) “If he throws (i.e., disposes of) them onto 
317

someone’s property (lit. house) (var. carries it to the field or house of someone), (it is sorcery)” KBo 
6.2 ii 35 (Laws § 44b, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.3 ii 56 and KBo 
6.5 iv 19 (both NS), ed. HG 30f. and StBoT 23:34f.; takku LÚ-an pahhueni kuiški pé-eš-ši-ez-zi (dupl. pé-ešši-ia-iz-zi) “If someone shoves a man into a fire (so that he dies …)” KBo 6.3 ii 54 (Laws §44a, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 16 (NS), ed. HG 30f.; […] anda hapuš ≠n–an–kan pahh„e±[ni] pé-eš-ši-ia “Make up [your missing offering(?)] and throw it into the fire” KUB 60.136:1-3; “(The priest) takes wax and mutton tallow in his hand” n–ašta happina pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi “and throws it into the flame(?)” KBo 6.34 i 42 (military oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:8f., cf. ibid. ii 6, KBo 13.216 i 3-4, 6-7, KUB 9.28 iv 19; “I divide one loaf of barley bread, one loaf of fig bread and a small cheese bread” n–aš–šan haššÏ pé-eš-ši-ia-mi “and I throw them into the brazier” KBo 15.25 obv. 29-30 (rit., MH/ NS), ed. StBoT 2:4f.; cf. KBo 2.3 i 55, KBo 13.167 iii 13, KBo 
15.48 iv! 32, 40, KBo 17.105 ii 40, KBo 21.33 i 29, KBo 
22.137 iii 7, KUB 7.60 ii 12-13, KUB 30.40 ii 21, KUB 41.8 iii (25), KUB 45.5 iii 22, KUB 45.47 ii 16, IBoT 3.1:29-30, KBo 
39.8 ii 43; (Since the utensils have been touched by unclean persons) nu–kan eni UN¨T´MEŠ ŠÀ IZI pé-eš-ši-ia-an-zi “they will throw the aforementioned utensils into the fire” KUB 22.70 rev. 55 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:96f.; cf. KBo 5.1 iii 15, 20, 29, 37, KUB 34.69 obv. 6; LUGAL-uš GAD-an arha pé-eš-šiia-zi ta mΩn DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL kuËzzi par(a)š~ nan harkanzi n–at apezza pé-eš-ši-ia-zi n–at DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL dΩnzi mΩn–ma LÚ.MEŠME~ ŠEDI kuËzzi par(a)šnan harkanzi n–at apezza péeš-ši-ia-zi “The king throws aside the linen cloth. If he throws it to the side where the palace attendants are squatting, the palace attendants take it; if he throws it to the side where the guards are squatting, (the guards take it and give it to the table attendants)” KBo 4.9 vi 5-11 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), ed. Alp, Tempel 54, tr. ANET 360, Gurney, The Hittites™ 129, cf. Gonnet, Hethitica 4:79 w. n. 2 and cf. 1 a 2', below; cf. also KUB 10.21 ii 23-27, iii 9-12, KUB 11.16 iii 3-9, KUB 20.76 i 20-24, KUB 25.1 ii 1-7, KUB 25.3 iii 27-34. 
2' w. anda “to throw into”: GAL LÚ.MEŠMU~ HALD[IM wΩ]tar arahza udai nu haššΩz [(hul)]liš dΩi nu an[(da)] pé-eš-ši-ez-zi “The chief of the cooks brings water outside, and takes a cone from 

peš(š)iya/e- 1 a 5' 

the brazier and throws it in (the water)” KBo 21.25 i 39-40 + KUB 34.123 i 9-10 (OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 30.29:2 + KBo 17.11 i 22; “He crumbles two thin breads” n–at– kan ŠD-i anda pé-ši-ia-az-zi “And throws them into the river” KBo 5.2 i 47-48 (Ammihatna’s rit., NH); “The exorcist strikes the neck of the kid-goat with the wood and kills it” n–an anda happina pí-iš-ši-ia-izzi “and throws it into the flame(?)” KUB 9.28 ii 15-16 (rit. for the Heptad, MH/NS); (The Old Woman ignites a fire) nu–kan wΩtar NINDAparšanna anda pé-eš-šiia-az-zi “She throws the water and the parša-bread/ cake into it” KUB 17.27 ii 26-27 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347; cf. KUB 41.8 ii 26-27 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:126f. ii 63-64; KBo 9.106 ii 52 (2Mašt., MH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 39.8 iii 37 (MH/MS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:360f.; KBo 17.65 rev. 33 (birth rit., MH?/MS?), ed. StBoT 29:142f; KUB 29.43 rev. 4 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 172f. 
3' w. andan “to throw to/into the midst of”: nu LUGAL-uš GAD-an arha pí-iš-ši-az-z[(i)] (var. pí-iš-ši-ia-zi) n–at mΩn ANA LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI andan pí-iš-ši-az-zi (var. pí-iš-ši-ia-zi) LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI kuËz paršša<(n)>anteš n–at LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI šarΩ danzi § mΩn–at DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL–ma andan pí-iš-ši-az-zi (var. pé-eš-ši-ia-z[i]) “The king throws away the linen cloth. If he throws it to/into the midst of the royal body-guards, the royal bodyguards pick it up from where they are squatting. If he throws it to/into the midst of the palace servants, …” KBo 27.42 iii 12-19 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.38 vi 2-10, translit. StBoT 28:59, cf. StBoT 27:73. 
4' w. Ωppa: n–at ištanani EGIR-pa pé-eš-ši-ezzi “He throws it (the bread) behind the altar” KUB 
15.42 iii 19 (rit., MH/NS); for different mngs. of peššiya-w. Ωppa, see 3 c and 4 b, below. 
5' w. Ωppan: “When the burning of the kippastructure is finished” nu UN.MEŠ-uš kuiËš Ékippuš GAM tarnanzi nu–šmaš NA›-an EGIR-an pé-ešši-ia-an-zi “they throw stone(s) after the people pitching/erecting(?) the kippa-structures (and shout ‘Go away, you bewitched people!’)” KUB 
30.36 iii 11-13 (rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 3:74; DUMU.LU. U⁄·.LU-UTTI GUD-un mΩn happ„i EGIR-an pí-išši-e-er “They have cast the mortal like an ox behind the happu” ibid. ii 5-6 (purif. rit.), translit. StBoT 5:47; cf. KBo 13.131 obv. 10-12, ed. StBoT 5:46f.; KUB 30.34 iii 13-14; KUB 30.33 i 13-14. 

318

peš(š)iya/e- 1 a 6' 

6' w. arha: see ex. in 1 a 3', above; cf. sim. KBo 4.9 vi 5 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/NS), KUB 20.76 i 20 (Great Fest. at Arinna) and KUB 25.3 iii 27 (Great Fest. at Arinna); “Each one comes through the gate (of hawthorne). The one running through last breaks down the gate” n– at arha pé-eš-ši-ia-i “And throws it away” VBoT 24 ii 12-13 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 110f.; nu– kan Ì.NUN.NA GIŠlutiyaz arha pe-eš-ši-ia-an-zi “They throw ghee out of the window” IBoT 2.121 rev. 13-14 (cult of Pirwa, NH); “They bring in a blue kaparigarment and tear it up before the statue” n–an a≠rh±a pé-eš-ši-eš-kán-zi “and throw it away” KUB 
39.15 i 10 (rit.), ed. HTR 82f.; cf. KBo 15.9 iv 17 (substitute king rit.), ed. StBoT 3:66f.; KBo 23.8:18 (rit.); KUB 10.88 vi 9-11 (fest.); (Šaušga attempted to seduce the monster Ullikummi by adorning herself, singing and playing musical instruments. But she was told that the monster is deaf and blind) “When Šaušga heard this, …” GIŠBALAG.DI–ma ≠gal±galt[„ri] arha péeš-ši-ia-at “She threw away the BALAG.DI and galgalt„ri instruments” KUB 36.12 ii 19-20, ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:14f. (“threw away”), tr. Hittite Myths 56 (“laid down”), LMI 157 (“gettò via”); […]–kan arha Ì.DÙG.GA pé-eš-ši-ia-an-zi KBo 34.240 rev. 8. 
7' w. katta: [(n)]–ašta DUGhaneššan šuhhaz GAM (var. katta) pé-eš-ši-ia-zi (vars. C: pé-eš-šiia-an-zi, E: pé-eš-ši-an-z[i]) “He throws (var. they throw) the hanešša-vessel down from the roof (and breaks it)” KBo 10.45 i 28 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/ NS), w. dupl. C: KUB 41.8 i 12, E: IBoT 2.128 obv. 2-3; see also mng. 10, below. 
8' w. kattanda: “When she arrives at the spring, he crumbles up a flat bread” n–at–kan ANA TÚL kattanta pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi GEŠTIN–ya–kan kat~ tanta šippanti “She throws it down into the spring; and she libates wine down into (it)” KUB 39.71 i 2627 (rit. for IŠTAR-Pirinkir, NH). 
9' w. menahhanda: “Then he grinds (the mar~ ruwašha-) up and pours wine into a bronze cup” uni–ya marru[w]ašhan menahhanda pé-eš-ši-az-zi “and that marruwašha-powder he throws in together with” (the wine, mixes it up, and applies it) KUB 
44.63 iii! 15-16, see (NA›)marruwašha-and menahhanda 8 d. 
10' w. parΩ: “I crumble […] for the Stormgod of the Steppe” […] haššÏ parΩ pé-eš-ši-ia-mi “I 

peš(š)iya/e- 1 b 2' a' 
throw it over to the hearth” KBo 22.137 iii 6-7 (rit.); cf. KBo 21.40 obv. 9-10; KBo 20.114 ii 5-6; KUB 45.57 iii 9-10; nu–šši NINDA-an parΩ pé-eš-ši-ez-zi “(The Old Woman) throws bread over toward it (the flock of sheep?)” KBo 17.92 obv. 8 (rit., MS), ed. ChS I/5:445; [n]– an–kan parΩ Ωška pé-eš-ši-ez-zi KBo 23.23:62 (rit.); see parΩ 3 u; for a different mng., see 3 d, below and parΩ 1 gg. 
11' w. šarΩ: nu–za x[…š(?)]Ënann–a GAM-an DIB-zi nu–kan lΩuwar šarΩ pé-eš-ši-ia-zi “He holds down the […] and the [fig]urine(?) and he throws ‘release’ up onto (them)” KUB 24.5 obv. 18 + KUB 9.13:6 (rit., NH), ed. StBoT 3:11f.; “The Old Woman takes the [blue wool] and the red wool and disentangles it” tueqqaš šarΩ pé-eš-še-ez-zi “She throws it over (the patient’s) body” KUB 12.58 i 32, (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 10f.; “The queen takes a mΩri-spear” nu Ì.UDU GIŠmΩrita≠z±(coll.) dΩi nu–ššan ANA 4 halhaltumariyaš šarΩ(!) pé-eš-ši-ia-zi “She takes sheep fat with the spear and throws it up into (or: throws it over) the four corners” KUB 43.56 ii 16-18 (Kuliwišna rit., MH?/NS). 
12' w. šer: kÏ–ma dapian ANA ALAM.HI.A šer pí-iš-ši-i-e-ez-zi “All this she throws over the statues” KUB 24.9 ii 16 (rit. of Alli, MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:32f.; šËr–a–ššan GAD-an pé-eš-ši-ia-mi “I throw a linen-cloth over (them), (and a man will not see them)” KBo 17.3 iv 18 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:38f., translit. StBoT 25:17. 
b. (idiomatic usage w. various objects) — 1' to lock (obj. (URUDU/GIŠ)zakki-): nu DUMU.É[(.GAL)] GIŠzakkin pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi “The palace attendant throws the bolt” KBo 5.11 iv 16-17 (instr., MH?/NS), w. dupl. KUB 26.28 iv 2; cf. KUB 13.1 i 25, w. dupl. KUB 40.57 i 11; IBoT 1.36 iv 27, ed. AS 24:36f.; KUB 12.65:20, w. dupls. KBo 
26.72 ii 5 and KBo 26.73:3; KBo 15.2 rev. (6), ed. StBoT 3:60f. 
2' to throw on/off (obj. garments) — a' (without prev. or w. arha) to throw off, take off, remove: nu TÚGNŠG.LÁM.MEŠ kuie (dupl. kue)[wašš]an har~ kanzi n–a[(t–za)] ≠(arha)± [p]é-eš-ši-ia-an-zi “They take off the festive garb which they had put on. (The Old Woman takes it for herself)” KBo 2.3 iii 25-27 + IBoT 4.13 rev. 8 (1Mast., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 
12.59 iii 15-16; cf. KBo 5.2 iii 58, w. dupl. KUB 45.12 iii 5; KUB 8.52:11; “The congregation stands” TÚGšeknuš pé-eš-ši-ia-an-zi “They throw off the šeknu-gar
319

ments (and bark like dogs)” KUB 20.90 iv 15-16 (fest. frag., NS); cf. ibid. iv 7 | on the šeknu being the garment worn next to the skin, so that to remove it means becoming nude, see Melchert, JCS 35:141-45. 
b' (w. anda) to throw on: “He pours water on his own head …” mahhan–ma–za–kan <TÚG>GÚ. È.A anda pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi “When he throws (his) tunic on himself, (he sits down on a stool)” KUB 
29.8 ii 26-27 (mouth-washing rit., MH/MS). 
1	to abandon (to): “He who plots evil against the king” ap„nn–a DINGIR.MEŠ idalaue pé-eš-še-iaan-du “may the gods abandon him to an evil (fate)” KUB 29.1 iii 10-11 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 16, 29, and Marazzi, VO 5:156f., tr. ANET 358. 
2	to cast off, reject, discard, give up (usually w. arha) (opp. šarΩ da-) — a. without prev.: [ku]it 2e–pat UH‡-naš UH‡-tar pé-eš-ši-ia-nu-un “Since I have cast off both sorceries of the sorceror, (I spat upon them and trampled them under foot …)” KUB 

17.27 iii 10 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347; dudduwaranza– kan LÚ-aš mΩhhan pít-te-ia-u-wa-ar (par. pít!-tii[a-u-wa-ar]) pé-eš-ši-ia-nu-un “Like a lame man I have given up running” KUB 36.75 iii 14-15 (prayer, OH/ MS), w. par. KUB 31.130 rev. 2, tr. mahhan mng. 1 a 1' a'. 
b. arha peššiya-(par. paškuwai-): [nu–mu]– ššan kuiš DINGIR–YA šaÏt [nu–mu–ššan a]rha píiš-ši-ia-et (par. paškutta) “The god who was angry at me and rejected me…” ABoT 44a ii 6-7 (prayer, OH/ NS), rest. from par. KUB 30.10 rev. 2 (MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 98, 105, cf. Güterbock, JAOS 78:243; (Said of Sun-goddess) šarΩ kuiš daškiši arha kuiš pí-iš-ši-iš-ki-ši “You (are the one) who accepts, you (are the one) who rejects” KUB 21.19 i 9-10 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:88f.; nu–wa[–za MUNUS-aš] šaklin arha namma pé-eš-ši-i[a] “Cast off the habit [of a woman], (and [show] the habit of man)” KUB 9.27 i 27-28 + KUB 7.5 i 1 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277 (w. misjoin), tr. ANET 349; nu idΩlu arha namma péeš-ši-ia-te-en nu ANA B´LI QADU DAM–ŠU DUMU.MEŠ–ŠU Ωššu memiškiten “Again cast off evil and always speak well of the lord, together with his wife and children” KBo 15.10 ii 10-11 (rit., MH/MS), cf. ibid. iii 52-53; nu–mu attaš–miš am≠muk± IGI-anda TUKU.TUKU-an arha pé-eš-ši-ia-ad-du “May my father cast off anger against me” KUB 31.66 iv 6-8 

peš(š)iya/e- 4 b 

(prayer, NH); cf. KUB 24.14 i 27; KUB 33.68 ii 11, KUB 36.96 obv. 8-10, KUB 43.23 obv. 4 (benedictions for Labarna, OS); [nu id]Ωlu ZI-it arha namm[a p]é-eš-ši-ia KBo 34.47 + KBo 17.105 ii 11; mΩn UN¨T´MEŠ GIŠ-ŒI UN¨T´MEŠ GIR› kue harteni n–ašta mΩn ŠAH-aš UR.GI‡-aš kuwapikki anda šΩliqa EN TU‡–ma–at arha UL péeš-še-ia-zi “If a pig or dog (i.e., a ritually unclean animal) ever comes in contact with wooden or pottery vessels which you have, and the soup cook doesn’t discard them” KUB 13.4 iii 64-66 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 68f.; (When Mašhuiluwa was expelled from his country and sought refuge with my father) ABU–YA–ma–an arha UL pé-eš-ši-ia-at n–an šarΩ dΩš “my father did not reject him (lit. ‘throw him out’) but took him up” (and made him his in-law) KUB 6.44 i 5-6 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:106f., cf. KUB 6.41 iv 27-31 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. man b 2' c', SV 1:136f.; KBo 5.9 i 11-12 (Dupp., Murš. II); KUB 21.5 ii 7 (Alakš., Muw. II); KUB 26.58 rev. 1a3a (hist., Hatt. III); KBo 4.14 iii 2 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II); Bronze Tablet ii 96 (Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:20f. 
	c. Ωppa peššiya-: (If a refugee enters a country of another party to the treaty) n–an EGIR-pa pé-eš[ši-ia-ad-du] “he (sc. the other party) must reject him (lit. ‘throw him back’)” KBo 5.4 rev. 4 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:146f. (l. 30). 
	d. parΩ peššiya-: n–ašta É-erza parΩ pé-eš-šiia-an-du “They must cast (him) out of the house” KUB 11.1 iv 18 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 3.68 iv 5, KBo 12.7:3 (both NS), ed. parΩ 5 a, THeth 11:52f., Carruba, Or NS 33:409, and Josephson, Part., 84; “Good must enter the house …” n–at parΩ pe-eš-ši-ia-ad-du parkunuddu “It must cast it (sc. evil) off (and) clean it out” KUB 41.8 ii 13-14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124f., cf. parΩ 1 gg. 

4. to ignore, disregard, neglect, forget — a. without prev.: (opp. pahš- “to keep [a command]”) “As long as you keep your father’s command, you will eat only bread and drink only water … But when you reach old age, you can eat and drink as much as you want” [attašš]–a uttar pé-e-eš-ši-ia “(Then) you may forget your father’s command” KUB 1.16 iii 32 (Hitt.-Akk. bil., Hatt. I/NS), ed. HAB 12f.; cf. ibid. iii 16. 
b. Ωppa peššiya-: (In the guidelines for the priest at a festival, concluding each paragraph): 

320

parΩ–ma–ššan UL kuitki nΩi EGIR-pa–ya–kan UL kuitki pé-eš-še-ia-zi “He will postpone(?) nothing, he will forget/neglect/omit nothing” KUB 10.93 iv 1-2, 7-8, (12-14) (fest., NS), ed. HAB 175, cf. nai-14; for the par. construction w. Ωppa maušš-, see maušš- b 2'. 
	c. arha peššiya-: nu DINGIR-LIM GAŠAN–YA apΩt waštul ANA dU URUNer[ik DUMU–KA] Ωš~ šianti šer arha pé-eš-ši-ia “Goddess, my lady, disregard that sin for the sake of the Stormgod of Nerik, [your] beloved [son]” KUB 14.7 iv 3-4 (prayer, Hatt. III), ed. HTR 118, Sürenhagen, AoF 8:96f.; cf. ibid. iv 1011, and KUB 21.19 iv 22-24; “The matter about which he comes is grave” [UL–m]a–war–aš arha ≠pé-eš±ši-ia-u-wa[(-aš)] “It is not to be ignored/disregarded” KUB 33.93 iv 41 + KUB 36.7a iv 46 (Ullik., NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.11:4, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f., tr. Hittite Myths 55, cf. KUB 33.104 iv 6; perhaps here KBo 6.3 ii 35 (Laws §39), 
	w. par. KUB 29.14 iii 3, here if one restores [A.ŠÀ.HI.A] w. ed. Imparati, Leggi 56f., 224 w. n. 6 (w. lit.), but see below, 5. 

5. to repudiate (an obligation), w. arha: (If a brother of His Majesty makes you swear an oath) nu ap„n M¸M´TUM arha pé-eš-ši-ia-at-tén “repudiate that oath (and protect only the rule of His Majesty and his line)” KUB 21.42 iv 21 (SAG 2 instr., NH), ed. Dienstanw. 28, cf. Stefanini, JNES 42:148; n–ašta kË–ya KUR.KUR.HI.A-TIM AN[(A dUTU UR)]UArinna arauËšta nu argamuš arha [pé-eš-š]er (dupl. pé-e-eš-še-i-e-er) “Now these lands also have set themselves free from the Sungoddess of Arinna and have repudiated (their) tribute” KUB 
24.3 ii 41-43 (prayer, NH), w. dupl. KUB 24.4 obv. 28 - rev. 1 (MH/MS), ed. Gurney, AAA 27:30f., Lebrun, Hymnes 162, 170 (“ils ont refusé leurs tributs”); “If a man holds the fields of another, he must perform his (i.e., that other man’s) šahhan-service” ≠takku±–z[a(?) […] arha pé-eš-ši-ia-zi (var. […] tarnai) “If he repudiates for himself […] (var. lit. ‘lets go, releases’? […]), (and leaves the fields, he cannot sell them)” KBo 6.3 ii 35 (Laws §39, OH/NS), w. par. KUB 29.14 iii 3, here if one restores [šahhan] w. ed. Friedrich, HG 28f., differently Imparati, Leggi 56f., 224 w. n. 6 (w. lit.) see above, 4 c, and cf. Neu, WO 11:83 | there is no word space in the copy between the -ku and the next sign. 
6. to remit, waive, relinquish (a claim) — a. without prev.: (If someone injures a man, the offender used to pay three shekels to the injured party 

peš(š)iya/e- 8 a 2' 
and three shekels to the palace) kinuna LUGAL-uš ŠA É.GAL-LIM pé-eš-ši-et “Now the king has waived (the fee) of the palace (and only the injured party receives three shekels)” KBo 6.3 i 23 (Laws §9, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 i 15 (OS), ed. HG 18f., cf. KBo 6.2 i 58-59 (Laws §25, OS); [halk]uËššar–ma–kan pí-iš-šiia-at KUB 55.48 i 10 (inv. of sanctuaries, Tudh. IV). 
b. arha peššiya-: ANŠE.KUR.RA KARAŠ– wa–šši kuit INA URUHatti ŠA KUR ŠDHulaya É tup~ paš harzi n–at–ši(y)–at dUTU-ŠI arha pé-eš-ši-iaat “His Majesty has waived (his claim) on him (sc. Kurunta of Tarhuntašša) (for) the horses and troops which the storehouse (É tuppaš) of the Hulaya River Land has in the land of Hatti” KBo 4.10 obv. 42-43 (treaty, Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), w. dupl. ABoT 57 obv. 14-16, ed. StBoT 38:24f.; cf. also KBo 6.29 iii 28-29 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. NBr. 50f. (= iii 29-30). 
1	to repel (an invading enemy): mahhan–wa– kan ammuk INA KUR URUIšhupitta Ωrhun EGIR-an–ma–wa LÚ.KÚR URUZikkattan walhta nu–wa 40 GUD.HI.A 1 ME UDU.HI.A penneš nu–war– an–kan arha pe-eš-ši-ia-nu-un ŠA LÚ.KÚR–ya– wa–kan appantet kunantit 16 LÚ.MEŠ peššiyanun “When I arrived in the country of Išhupitta, the enemy attacked Zikkatta behind my back and drove off forty oxen and a hundred sheep. But I repelled him (lit. ‘threw him out’); I felled (i.e., put out of action) sixteen men of the enemy, including captured and killed” HKM 10:34-41 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 134-37, for second peššiya-, see mng. 8, below. 
2	to cause to drop, to fell, cause to fall, cause to be lost, (w. obj. šarhuwant-/ŠÀ) cause to miscarry 

— a. in general — 1' without prev./adv.: ŠA LÚ. KÚR–ya–wa–kan appantet kunantit 16 LÚ.MEŠ pe-eš-ši-ia-nu-un “I felled (i.e., put out of action) sixteen men of the enemy, including captured and killed” HKM 10:39-41 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 136f. (“(zurück) geworfen”), for fuller context, see mng. 7, above; for obj. a deer, see KBo 32.14 ii 13-15 (MH/MS) in bil. sec. 
2' w. katta: “(The priests) said: ‘A dog came into the heart of the temple’” nu–kan GIŠBANŠUR laknut NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A–ya–wa–kan katta pi-iš-ši-ia-at “‘It knocked over the (offering-)table and caused the thick-breads to fall down’” KUB 5.7 obv. 24-25, ed. ANET 497. 
321

b. (w. obj. šarhuwant-/ŠÀ) cause a miscarriage: [(takk)]u MUNUS-aš ELLI šarhuwanduš–šuš kuiški p[é-e]š-š[i-i]a-zi (var. pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi) “If anyone causes a free woman to have a miscarriage (lit. causes a free woman’s foetus to drop) …” KBo 
6.3 i 40 (Laws §17, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 i 20-21 (NS), ed. HG 20f., cf. ibid. §§18, 77a, cf. par. construction w. maušša 1' d', and mng. 3. 
c. (w. obj. an animal): see KBo 32.14 ii 13-15 above in bil. sec.; takku UDU-un UR.BAR.RA-ni kuiški péeš-ši-ez-zi “If someone causes a sheep to fall from (the mouth of) a wolf ” KBo 6.2 iv 14 (Laws §80, OS), ed. HL 85 (differently) but following HL 195, giving additional arguments to support Hroznyπ, CH 67 (“Sie un mouton à un loup quelqu’un arrache”), Imparati, Leggi 86f. (“sottrae”), and Starke, StBoT 23:100 (“wenn jemand dem Wolf ein Schaf entreišt”). Starke is quite right that no meat would be left to be allocated to the owner, if the carcass was abandoned to a wolf. Differently, Walther, HC 260f. (“throw (to bait and slay) the wolf”), ANET 193 (“throws”), HG 42f. (“hinwirft”), Hoffner, Diss. 67 (“abandons”), TUAT 1/1:110 (“hinwirft”), HL 85 (“abandons”). The dative with peššiya-in KUB 24.14 i 27-28, cited in HL 195 as a possible counter example (“Ziel” rather than “Ausgangspunkt”), differs from Laws §80 in the occurrence of both the particle -šan and the place word šarΩ. 
9. (intrans.; technical term for behavior of internal organs; auli-, nipašuri-): [m]Ωn antuhši auleš EGIR-an pé-eš-ši-ia-az-zi “If the a.-organ of a man p.-s behind” KUB 8.36 iii 12 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 
3:105 (“Wenn es … ‘zurückwirft’”), StBoT 19:40f. (“abfällt”), Laroche, CTH pp. 189f. (“se renverse”), Kühne, ZA 76:104 (“nach hinten wirft”), Puhvel, HED 1:230 (gives the implausible tr. “If [a medicine man] neglects a person’s inner organs”); ni.-eš–kan ZAG-na GÙB-la pí-iš-ši-ia-at “The nipašuri p.-ed towards the right and the left” KUB 
5.6 i 12, ed. Laroche, RA 64:131; cf. KUB 5.1 iv 42; ni. ZAG pé-še-et “The nipašuri p.-ed to the right” KBo 13.76 iv 6; cf. KBo 16.97 rev. 55, KBo 24.119 iii 9-10, w. dupl. KUB 
22.27 i 30-31, KUB 6.2 obv. 6, 20, KUB 6.31 iv 14, KUB 6.34:13, KUB 22.52 obv. 7, KUB 22.54:14, KUB 22.70 rev. 2, 47, KUB 46.37 rev. 9, KUB 49.11 ii 26, KUB 49.103 rev. 12, KUB 50.89 iii 10, KUB 50.90 rev. 23, KUB 50.108:6; ni.-eš– kan GÙB-la pé-eš-ši-ia-at “the nipašuri p.-ed to the left” KUB 18.2 ii? 13, cf. KUB 6.2 obv. 32, KUB 16.17 i 9, KUB 22.52 obv. 12, KUB 46.37 rev. 13, 37, KUB 49.74:12-13; ni.–kan ZAG-naš ZAG-na pé-eš-ši-ia-at ≠GÙB±

peš(š)iya/e- 11 a 1' a' 2'' 

laš–ma–kan GÙ[B-l]i pé-eš-ši-ia-at “The right-hand nipašuri-p.-ed to the right, the left one p.-ed to the left” KUB 46.37 obv. 35 (all liver oracles, NH). 
1	(w. katta, intrans.?; idiomatic in unclear oracle questions): ANDAHŠUMSAR kuit NU.ŠE DÙ-at BE GAM piš-ši-ia-at NU.ŠE-du KUB 6.2 obv. 11 (liver oracle, NH), cf. BE GAM UL piš-ši-ez-zi ibid. obv. 23, […G]AM piš-še-et ibid. obv. 24, KUB 6.39 obv.? 3, 4, 10, 13, KUB 50.58:4. 
2	(w. arha) to exclude (subj. is oracle birds, implied object is the threat mentioned in the question), serves to exclude a threatening possibility (in bird oracles), usually one formulated negatively (arha p. is the opp. of handai-= SI≈SÁ which in the bird oracles is usually used to confirm a question phrased grammatically positive) — a. in the request — 1' w. questions formulated in the negative 

— a' in general — 1'' in a simple question: kuitman– kan dUTU-ŠI URUKÙ.BABBAR-ši … mΩn–ma–šši BAL-za UL kuitki HUŠ-weni nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši-ia-an-du “If — while His Majesty is in Hattuša … — we have nothing to fear for him from a rebellion, let the birds exclude (the possibility of a rebellion)” KUB 18.12 i 29-31 + KUB 22.15:3-5 (oracle questions on the festivals of the god of Aleppo, NH); BE-an–ma–an–kan […] HUL-za arha UL kuiški / […-z]i nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši-an-du “But if no harm shall […] him away, let the birds exclude (harm)” KUB 52.75 rev. 25-26; […] / [marš]aštarriš EME–ya UL namm[a …] / [nu MUŠEN.H]I.A arha pé-eš-ši-ia-an-du KUB 5.13 iv 45; mΩn–ma–aš tapašša(-)x[…] / [UG]ULA LÚ.TU‡ UL kuišk[i …] / [n]u MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši[-ia-an-du] KBo 11.68 i 25-27; mΩn–kan! ANA šiutitÏ UL EGIR-an dΩ[i] ANA GIG URU.dU-taša–at UL takkišzi nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši-an-du KUB 49.19 iii? 27-29; BE-an uizzi EGIR-zian kuwapi x[…] / […] UL dΩi nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-šiia-an-du KUB 16.49:12-13, cf. also KUB 18.57 iii 11-12. 
2'' in a series of hypotheses only the last of which is formulated negatively: mΩn kÏ–pat išiyahta ŠA SAG.DU dUTU-ŠI–ma HUL UL kuitki iš[iy]ahta nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši-ia-an-du “If you have foreseen only this, but you have not foreseen any harm to His Majesty, let the birds exclude (harm)” KUB 18.2 ii 16-18; cf. also mΩn unÏuš MUŠEN. 

322

HI.A ŠA NŠ.TE dUTU-ŠI–pat ZARAH-an iši~ yah[her … UL?] / išiyah<h>er nu MUŠEN.HI.A ar~ ha pé-eš-ši-an-du “If the aforementioned birds have foreseen only grief of the body/person of His Majesty, and they have [not(?)] foreseen […], let the birds exclude (the second possibility)” KUB 5.22:32-33. 
b' in a series of paragraphs in which the same question is asked of different types of oracles: nu– za mΩn GIDIM kËdaš–pat waškuwaš šer TUKU. TUKU-uanza namma–ma–za GIDIM tamËdani memini šer UL kuitki TUKU.TUKU-uanza nu IGIziš MUŠEN HURRI SIGﬁ-ru EGIR–ma NU.SIGﬁdu … SIGﬁ … NU.SIGﬁ § IŠTU MUNUS ŠU.GI ER.-TUM Q¸TAMMA–pat nu KIN SIGﬁ-ru … SIGﬁ § IŠTU LÚIGI.MUŠEN ER.-TUM Q¸TAM~ MA–pat nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-ši-an-du “If you, O deceased one, are angry on account of only these misdeeds, but you, O deceased one, are not angry on account of any other matter, let the first MUŠEN HURRI be favorable and the second unfavorable. … Favorable … Unfavorable § The question by means of the Old Woman is the same as before. Let the KIN be favorable … Favorable § The question by means of the augur is the same as before. Let the birds exclude (other sources of anger)” KBo 2.6 iii 7-16 (oracles on Armatarhunta and Šaušgatti), though cf. the same question requesting nu SU.MEŠ SIGﬁru, nu KIN SIGﬁ-ru, but then MUŠEN.HI.A SI≈SÁ-andu ibid. i 15-16, 20, 25; mΩn–x[… apez] / INIM-za ANA µKurakura UL kuitki lahl[ahh]i[yaweni] / nu TE.MEŠ SIGﬁ-ru … NU.SIGﬁ § … § [I]ŠTU LÚIGI. MUŠEN ER.-TUM Q¸TAMMA–pat nu MUŠEN. HI.A arha [pé-e]š-ši-an-d[u] “If [we] have nothing to worry about for PN from [that] matter, let the exta be favorable. … Unfavorable § … § The query by means of the augur is the same as before; let the birds exclude (that matter)” KUB 16.54:4-6, 8-9; cf. similarly KUB 5.11 iv 24-27, 31; KUB 16.62 rev. 6-16; AT 454 ii 24-30. 
2' w. a positively formulated question (i.e., without natta/UL) (rare): INIM IZI kuit SI≈SÁ-at nu pΩnzi INIM IZI išhiulahhanzi [m]Ωn aši INIM IZI apez harkzi nu MUŠEN.HI.A arha pé-eš-š[e?-andu] “Since a matter of fire has been confirmed, they will proceed to give sworn instruction concerning the matter of fire. If the aforementioned matter of 

pe/iškattalla
fire will disappear on that account, let the birds exclude (a matter of fire)” KUB 5.11 iv 55-56, note the same question requesting nu KIN SIGﬁ-ru in KUB 5.4 ii 14-15. 
b. in the answer: the report arha–wa pé-eš-šer “They (the birds) have rejected/excluded (this possibility)” is always explicitly attributed to an augur, often named: UMMA µHalpa-LÚ arha–wa pé-eššer KBo 24.126 obv. 23; UMMA µAlalimi arha–wa péeš-≠šer± KUB 22.68:13; UMMA µPiyammu arha–wa pé-eš-šer KUB 16.46 iv 5; occasionally to two such: U[MMA µPiha-dU] ≠U± µGEﬂ-ŠEŠ arha–wa pé-eššer KUB 18.12 i 22; but sometimes not named: UMMA UGULA LÚ.MEŠMUŠEN.DÙ arha–wa pé[e]š-šer KUB 5.24 + KUB 18.57 i 70. The augur’s report of confirmation is worded not actively *SI≈SÁ-er– wa (*handaer–wa), but passively SI≈SÁ-at–wa (read handaittat–wa) KUB 22.15:3, KBo 24.131 rev. 11. 
12. (mng. unkn.) kΩš–man k„n Ëpz[i k]Ωš–a– man k„n Ëpzi man LUGAL-waš GIŠ.x pé-eš-ši-[er] KBo 6.2 ii 56-57 (Laws §49, OS), perhaps mng. 3, 5, or 8, above, see man b 2' c' (w. lit.). 
HroznŸ, BoSt 1 (1917) 4, 68, etc.; Sommer, BoSt 4 (1920) 15 
n. 1; Götze, ArOr 5 (1933) 22 n. 3 (mng. 1), 34 w. n. 1 (mng. 1 b 2', 2, 3); Sommer, HAB (1938) 175 (mng. 4 b); Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 41 n. 116; Korošec, Symb. Koschaker (1939) 42; Gurney, AAA 27 (1941) 103; Hoffner, Diss. (1953) 175-177; Imparati, Leggi (1964) 87, 262f. (mng. 2); Laroche, RA 64 (1970) 131, 136 (mng. 9); Ünal, RHA XXXI (1973) 33 (mng. 11); Archi, SMEA 16 (1975) 129, 145-150 (mng. 11); Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 100 (mng. 2); Berman, JCS 34 (1982) 121 (mng. 11). 
Cf. šai-/šiya-, uššiya-. 
pišena-see pešna-. 
pe/iškattalla-, piyaškattalla-n. com. (nomen actoris from v. piye-/peya-); sparing or delivering one, deliverer; NS.†. 
sg. nom. pé-e-iš-kat-tal-la-aš KUB 36.38 rev. 9, [p]í?-iaaš-kat-tal-la-aš KUB 31.145 obv. 6, [p]í-iš-kat-tal-la-aš KBo 
13.147 rt. col. 13, pí-iš-ga-ta[l-la-aš] KBo 1.42 iv 48. 
(Sum.) še-be-da = (Akk.) pé-du-ú = (Hitt.) pí-iš-ga-ta[l-laaš] “merciful (one)” KBo 1.42 iv 48 (Izi Bogh., NH), ed. MSL 13:142, line 275, see Hoffner, JAOS 87:302f. for disc.; the Hitt. translator construed pé-du-ú as pËdû (a part.); for this Akk. v. at Bo©azköy, see also ≠úš±-kú = pè-du-ú = (Hitt.) GUD-i EGIR-pa tarnumar (lit.) “to give way for an ox,” as an idiom for “to 
323

spare an ox from work” KBo 1.44 i 18, ed. MSL 17:102 line 18 (cf. Hoffner, JAOS 87:302, and for the same v. w. the acc. cf. n–uš EGIR-pa tarn[anzi] “and [they] spare them [sc. horses] (from exercise)” KUB 29.40 ii 27, ed. Hipp.heth. 180). We follow the CAD (unpubl. draft of article padû/pedû, courtesy Reiner) in the interpretation of the Akk. v. translated by Hitt. pišgatallaš. Von Soden (AHw 861) preferred pËtû “Drescher.” 
	a. describing Kunirša(?): “He libates for Kunirša: nu tezzi d[Kunirša(?)] / [EN–Y]A? pé-eiš-kat-tal-la-aš mΩn–kan taknaš dUTU-u[š…] / […r]iyat nu–šši niwalla parkuwalla [KUR.KUR. HI.A(?) …] / [n–an–kan?] kartimmiyanut “and says: ‘O [Kunirša(?)], my [lord], deliverer! If the Sungoddess of the Earth has […-]ed, and the innocent (and) pure(?) [lands(?) …-ed] to her, [and] angered [her]” KUB 36.38 rev. 8-11 (rit. frag., NS). 
	b. describing Agni: dAgniš EN–Y[A …] / [p]í-iškat-tal-la-aš “O Agni, my lord, […] deliverer” KBo 

13.147 rt. col. 12-13 (rit. frag., NS), ed. Otten, OLZ 60:548 w. 
	n. 2 (“Akni, mein Herr […] / Geber […]”), since the lines are frag., it is uncert. whether p. indeed belongs to dAgniš. 
	c. describing a solar deity(?): [… z]ik harti dUTU […] / […p]í-ia-aš-kat-tal-la-aš “You hold […]; O Sungod […], deliverer” KUB 31.145 obv. 5-6 (invoc., NH), since the context is sim. to the other two exx., this may again be an address to the deity. 
	d. as a PN: µPí-iš-ga-tal-li LÚ URUTaggašta HKM 102:18 (list of persons), discussed in HBM 88, where, however, no reference is made to the n. piškattalla-. 

The deities described by this term offer no clue to its mng., since the characters of Agni (Otten, OLZ 60:548) and Kunirša are uncertain, and the precise identity of the solar deity in c is unknown. For the part. of Akk. pedû used in the same way as Hitt. pi(ya)škattallaš, see pe-du-ú li-ip-da-an-ni “May a merciful one (or: releaser) release me” CT 39.27 rev. 7 (namburbi), ed. Caplice, Or NS 36:10, 12 rev. 10; cf. also (Sum.) SU = (Akk.) pé-du-u ša DINGIR “‘to spare’: (said) of a god” series Aa = nâqu II/7 iv 19', ed. MSL 14:298. The mng. of p. is clear, both from the Akk. equivalence w. pËdû “merciful (one), sparer,” and from the usage in addressing deities (sections a, b, and c) from which the speaker desires help and deliverance. Note also the use of cognates of Akk. pedû in Northwest Semitic of the 15th-13th centuries B.C. (D. Sivan, AOAT 214:256-258). 

pešna-

The verbal base could be piye-/peya-“to send away (harmful or unpleasant things).” The writing piyaškattallaš excludes a derivation from pai-/piya“to give” whose iterative is peške-or piške-. If the 
n. is inherited IE, it is strange to find it as the personal name of a Taggaštan (non-Hitt.) captive (see above in d). 
For the formation see, maniyahheškattalla-, išiyahheškattalla-, weheškattalla-, etc. (cf. Reichert, RHA XXI/73:67). 
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 92, 95 (from piya- “to send out, release, send away”); Meriggi, RHA XIX/67 (1960) 94 (“donateur, libéral,” from pai-“to give”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 80, 166; Otten, OLZ 60 (1965) 548 (“Geber”); Hoffner, JAOS 87 (1967) 302f.; idem, AlHeth (1974) 30f. w. n. 144. 
[piš-ku-wa-ad-d[a(-)…]] KUB 49.25 i 7 (oracle question, NH) see pašku(wai)-, i.e., paš-ku-…. For the reading paš-, see ƒPaš-ku-wa-at-ti vs. ƒPa-aš-…, and see Laroche, NH Nr. 955, and HZL p. 216, sign no. 244. 
pešna-, pišena-, *piš(e)ni- (LÚ-i-) n.; man, male person; wr. syll. and LÚ; from OS. 
sg. nom. LÚ-aš KBo 6.2 i 7 and passim, KBo 17.3 iv 18 (both OS), KUB 4.72 rev. 2, 4 (OS? or MS?), KUB 36.75 iii 14 (OH/MS), KBo 16.25 iii 10, KUB 23.72 obv. 40 (both MH/ MS), KBo 6.3 i 14 (OH/NS), KUB 24.8 i 9 (NH), KBo 4.14 i 15 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), LÚ-š(a) KUB 26.56 ii 4 (OS? or MS?), KBo 30.101 iii 12 (MS?), KBo 22.66 iv 5 (OH/NS), KUB 50.8:2 (NH), LÚ-iš KUB 36.75 ii 18 (OH/MS), KUB 
30.10 rev. 13, KUB 30.11 rev. 9, 22 (both OH/NS), KUB 23.72 obv. 40 (MH/MS), KBo 6.26 iii 20, (26), (27), (28), 40, iv 8 (but LÚ-aš e.g., iii (37), 49, 50), VBoT 58 i 5 (all OH/NS), KBo 12.126 i 13 (MH/NS), KUB 36.83 i 21, KUB 43.22 obv. 10 (both NS), KBo 27.134 i 7, KUB 24.7 i 38, LÚ-eš KBo 
14.66 ii 3, KUB 29.34:5, 19 (both OH/NS), KUB 7.53 i 17 (NH), LÚ-eš⁄‡ KBo 3.34 ii 9, 11 (OH/NS), LÚ KBo 22.1 obv. 14 (OS), KBo 19.37:4 (OH/NS), KUB 23.68 obv. 28 (MH/ NS), KBo 10.12 iii 12 (NH), LÚ-LUM IBoT 1.36 i 31 (MH/ MS), KUB 18.9 ii 18 (NH), KBo 3.6 ii 23 (Hatt. III), (Carruba, IF 98:95, posits a nom. sg. *piššΩš). 
acc. LÚ-na-an-n(a-ta) KUB 33.57 ii 6 (NS), LÚ-an-n(aku) KBo 6.3 i 45 (OH/NS), LÚ-n(a-ku) KBo 6.2 i 36 (OS), KBo 6.3 i 2, 5 (OH/NS), LÚ-LUM KBo 19.44 rev. 3 (Šupp. I). 
gen. pé-eš-na-aš 942/z obv. 3 (Neu/Otten, IF 77:183, Carruba, IF 98:92f. n. 4; case unclear from cited context), LÚ-naaš KBo 20.49:15 (ENS? or MS?), KBo 6.26 i 41, iv 6, 20 (OH/ NS), KUB 17.1 iii 9 (NH), LÚ-aš KUB 29.1 ii 44 (OH/NS), KUB 31.69 obv. 5 (NH), ŠA LÚ-LIM KUB 29.4 i 50 (NH), LÚ-LIM KUB 26.28 iv 10 (MH/NS), KBo 18.170a rev. 9, KUB 
42.69 obv. 17 (both NH), ŠA LÚ KUB 40.2 obv. 38. 

324

d.-l. LÚ-ni KBo 6.3 ii 5, 8, 11, 12 (OH/NS), KUB 15.34 ii 18 (MH/MS), KUB 24.8 iv 2 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 9.27 i 2 (MH?/NS), KUB 7.53 i 5, KUB 26.88 rev. 9 (both NH), KBo 
6.26 iv 22 (Hatt. III), KBo 4.14 iii 50 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), LÚ-i KBo 6.5 ii 10, iii 1 (OH/NS), KBo 11.14 iv 24, KUB 7.5 ii 11 (both MH/NS), ANA 1 LÚ-LIM KUB 35.65 ii 4, ANA LÚ KUB 37.223 obv. C2 (OS), ANA 1 LÚ KUB 26.19 ii 27 (MH/ NS), KUB 34.130 ii? 1. 

inst. IŠTU LÚ-LIM KUB 14.4 i 16 (Murš. II). 

pl. nom. pí-še-ni-eš KUB 43.30 iii 11 (OS), KBo 3.40b:9 (OH/NS), pí-še-ne-iš KUB 41.23 iii (9), 12 (OH/NS), pí-še-niiš 10/g (Neu/Otten, IF 77:184, line not given), [p]é-eš-ne-iš 942/z obv. 4 (Neu/Otten, IF 77:183, Carruba, IF 98:92f. n. 4, the latter also entertains reading [p]í-še!-ne-iš), LÚ.MEŠ-eš KUB 
48.7 iii 9, 14 (OH/NS), KUB 53.15 ii! 4, LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 
11.32:37 (OH/NS), LÚ.MEŠ KBo 6.2 ii 11 (OS), KUB 45.47 iv 37 (MS?), KBo 3.40b obv. 12, KBo 6.26 ii 16, KBo 10.23 iv 8 (all OH/NS), KUB 26.19 ii 27 (MH/NS), KUB 14.15 iv 21, KBo 14.19 ii 17 (both Murš. II), LÚ.HI.A KUB 46.71 rev. 8, LÚ.MEŠ-TIM KBo 13.234 rev. 9; log. without .MEŠ preceded by numbers greater than one: 2 LÚ KBo 12.126 i 2 (MH/NS), 5 LÚ KUB 26.61:13 (Pud.); DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-eš KUB 43.23 obv. 8, KUB 20.99 iii 3, KBo 15.31 i 13, DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-iš Bo 2856 i 14 (IF 77:184), DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-uš KUB 20.24 iii 19, 29, DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 11.32 obv. 36. 
acc. pí-še-e-nu-uš KUB 43.75 obv. 11, KUB 31.4 obv. (20) (both OH/NS), LÚ.MEŠ-uš KUB 24.8 i 2 (pre-NH/NS), HFAC 12 i 8 (NS), KBo 18.115 rev. 12 (NH), KBo 10.16 i 7 (NS), KUB 36.57 ii? 3 (NS), KUB 24.7 ii 14, ŠA LÚ.MEŠ KUB 
10.48 ii 18, KUB 16.38 iv 1, KUB 31.102 iv 2, KUB 47.62:9, ŠA LÚ-TIM KUB 38.35 rev. 10; DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 
25.191 rev.? 11(?), KBo 20.119 vi 5, DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-ša KBo 25.189 iii 5 (MS?). 
gen. LÚ-an-n(a) KBo 3.46 obv. 39 (OH/NS), LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 17.105 iii 15 (MH/MS), DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 21.5 right col. 6. 
d.-l. LÚ.MEŠ-aš KUB 12.19 ii 9 (MH/MS?), KBo 15.34 ii 13 (MH/NS), KBo 4.11:8 (NS), ANA LÚ.MEŠ KUB 43.23 rev. 40 (OS), KBo 2.9 i 25 (MH/NS), KUB 22.25 rev. 29, KUB 
22.25 rev. 29 (NH); DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-aš KBo 25.189 ii 7, 8 (MS), KBo 17.82 obv.? 7, 9, KBo 15.34 ii 6, 13, KUB 27.67 ii 44, 55, ABoT 17 iii 15, DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-na-aš KUB 43.30 iii 
18. inst. LÚ.MEŠ-it KUB 23.68 obv. 27 (MH/NS), KBo 12.26 iv 3 (Murš. II), [IŠ]TU LÚ.MEŠ KUB 13.7 i 7. 
frag.: ANA LÚpí-iš-na[-…] KBo 34.242 rev.? 11, LÚ.MEŠpíše-n[i-…] KBo 30.170 ii 2. 
[p]í-iš-na-a-aš KBo 17.1 iv 6 (OS), StBoT 8:36 and StBoT 26:151, might be read KAŠ-iš-na-a-aš atueni akueni, see StBoT 
8:36 n. 3 and Carruba, IF 98:93 n. 4, but the plene writing of the final syll. would be highly unusual in an -eššar n., and for šÏeššar the oblique form ought to be šiešnaš = KAŠ-eš-na-aš. 
(Sum.) [LÚ] = (Akk.) LÚ-LUM (i.e., awilum) = (Hitt.) LÚ-iš KBo 1.45 rev.! 18 (Sa voc.), ed. MSL 3:60. 

pešna- c 
	a. subdivision of antuhša-(i.e., LÚ.U⁄·.LU-a-), contrasted w. MUNUS “woman”: takku LÚ. U⁄·.LU-aš LÚ-aš našma MUNUS-za takÏya URUri aki “If a person (antuhšaš), male (pešnaš) or female, dies in another town” KBo 6.2 i 7 (Laws §6, OS), ed. HG 16f.; takku LÚ.U⁄·.LU-an LÚ-an-na-ku (dupl. LÚ-na-ku) MUNUS-na-ku URUHattušaz kuiš[ki] LÚ URULuiyaš tΩizzi “If some Luwian abducts a person, male or female, from Hattuša …” KBo 6.3 i 45-46 (Laws §19, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 i 36-37 (OS), ed. HG 20f.; mΩn–kan antuhhaš! naššu LÚ-LIM našma MUNUS-za papranni kuedanikki anda tianza “If a person, male or female, is placed in any uncleanness” KUB 7.53 i 1-2 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 4f.; cf. KUB 17.25 i 12-14, w. dupl. KUB 17.26 i 12-14; KBo 11.14 iv 24-25, w. dupl. KUB 43.57 iv 24-25; KBo 27.134 i 7, 11; KBo 12.106 + KBo 13.146 i 3; KBo 12.126 i 13, 16. 
	b. in lists distinguished from adult females, children and old persons: 1 LÚ 1 DUMU.NITA.G[AB …] “One (adult) male, one nursing boy baby” KBo 

8.28:6 (land grant); 11 É.HI.A 26 LÚ 16 DUMU.NITA 4 DUMU.NITA.GAB 30 MUNUS 11 DUMU. MUNUS 2 DUMU.MUNUS.GAB 1 LÚ ŠU.GI 1 MUNUS ŠU.GI ŠU.NIGIN 91 SAG.DU “Eleven households: 26 men, 16 boys, 4 nursing boy babies, 30 women, 11 girls, 2 nursing girl babies, one old man, one old woman: total of 91 persons (lit. heads)” KBo 5.7 rev. 12-13 (land grant, MH/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:348f.; “The household of Armawiya”: 2 MUNUS 2 DUMU.NITA ŠU.NIGIN 4 SAG.D[(U.MEŠ)] LÚ-aš–kan anda NU.GÁL “two women, two boys: total of four heads, no man among them” KUB 56.1 i 8-9 (vow of Pud.), w. dupl. KUB 
31.63 iii 11, ed. StBoT 1:30f.; namma–za URU-aš h„manza LÚ.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ TUR.MEŠ warpz[i] “Then the entire town — men, women, children — washes” KBo 12.103 obv. 7 (rit.). 
c. paired w. a woman in marriage or in sexual intercourse: takku DUMU.MUNUS LÚ-ni taranza “If a young woman is promised to a man (in marriage)” KBo 6.3 ii 5 (Laws §28, OH/NS), ed. HG 24f.; takku DUMU.MUNUS-aš (var. MUNUS-TUM) LÚ-ni hamenkanza “If a young woman is betrothed (lit. bound) to a man” ibid. 11 (Laws §29), w. dupl. KBo 
6.5 iii 6 | it is possible in betrothal contexts that DUMU. MUNUS should be translated “daughter” or even “girl”; on the 
325

betrothal of girls cf. Balkan, FsGüterbock™ 1-11; the var. MUNUS-TUM simply denotes a human female without respect to age; “If a girl is promised to a man, …” takku– (w)an attaš annašš–a tamËdani LÚ-ni pianzi “If her father and mother give her to another man” KBo 
6.3 ii 8 (Law §28b, OH/NS), ed. HG 24f.; takku LÚ-aš MUNUS-an HUR.SAG-i Ëpzi LÚ-na-aš waštul n– aš aki takku É-ri–ma Ëpzi MUNUS-naš waštaiš MUNUS-za aki “If a man seizes a woman (sexually) in the mountain, it is the man’s sin, and he shall die. But if he seizes (her) in (her) house, it is the woman’s sin — she shall die!” KBo 6.26 iv 6-8 (Laws §197, OH/NS), ed. Friedrich, HG 86f., tr. ANET 196, TUAT 1.1:123; cf. comments in Hoffner, Diss. 268f. 
d. male attributes — 1' in general: mΩn LÚ-ni kuedani haš[š]atar NU.GÁL našma–aš MUNUSni menahhanda U[L L]Ú-aš “If a man has no reproductive power, or, he is not a man with regard to women (i.e., if he is either sterile or impotent)” KUB 9.27 + KUB 7.8 i 2-3 (rit., MH?/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:271, 277, tr. ANET 349 and StBoT 29:18 n. 80 the text is read U[L Z]I-aš, but cf. menahhanda 3 j; nu katta tarnatten … LÚ-ni LÚ-natar tarhu[i]latar MUNUS-ni MUNUS-nΩtar annitalwΩtar “(You gods) release to the man virility and bravery, to the woman femininity and motherhood” KUB 15.34 ii 17-19 (evocation, MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f., Puhvel, JAOS 
100:167 and HED 1:72; cf. KBo 2.9 i 25-27, and see tr. mal mng. a.; [MUNUS-aš] šaklin … LÚ-aš š[ak]lin “behavior characteristic of a woman … behavior characteristic of a man” KUB 9.27 i 28-29 (rit. of Paškuwatti, MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, 277, šaklai-mng. 3. 
2' attire — a' in general: tuel–za wašpan LÚ-aš iwar wašiy[aši] “You (O goddess) dress in the manner of a man” KUB 31.69 obv.? 5 (dream, Pud.). 
b' among the known lists of male attire we give the following ex. (for other exx., see Goetze, Cor.Ling. 4862): 1 TÚG šarΩ huittiyanza 1 TÚGE.ŠB MAŠLU 1 TÚGkariulli 1 TÚGlupanniš 1 TÚGkaluppaš 1-NUTIM TÚGE.ŠB TAHAPŠI 1-NUTIM TUDITTUM KÙ. BABBAR kÏ ŠA MUNUS-TIM 1 TÚG 1-NUTIM TÚGGÚ.È.A 1-NUTIM TÚGGÚ.È.A HURRI 1 TÚGŠÀ. GA.AN.DÙ MAŠLU šup<p>išduwaran 1 TÚGE.ŠB MAŠLU 1-NUTIM TÚGBAR.DUL°.MEŠ 1-NUTIM TÚGŠATURRATU 1-NUTIM TÚGE.ŠB TAHAPŠI 1 GIŠBAN 1 KUŠÉ.MÁ.URUﬁ-RU 1 HAŒŒINNU 1 GŠR 

pešna- f 

kÏ–ma ŠA LÚ-LIM KUB 29.4 i 44-50 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 10f.; cf. KUB 45.22 iii 4-7, w. dupl. KUB 45.23 obv. 5-10; KUB 46.46 ii 17-21; KUB 17.18 ii 18-23; KBo 5.1 ii 50-54. 
c' other references to distinctive men’s (versus women’s) garments: […]x TAPAL KUŠE.SIR LÚ-LIM 11 KUŠE.SIR.HI.A MUNUS-TI SAﬁ “x pairs of men’s shoes, eleven (pairs of) women’s red shoes” KBo 18.170a rev. 9 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:110f., Siegelová, Verw. 486f.; 16 appanziyaš (or, tuppanziyaš?) ŠA L[Ú] “Sixteen man’s appanziyaš (or, tuppan~ ziyaš?)” KUB 42.78 ii 10, ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:112f. (no reading), Siegelová, Verw. (reading: ŠA K[Ù]); 4 TAPAL HUB.BI KÙ.GI LÚ “Four pairs of men’s gold earrings” KUB 12.1 iv 37, ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:103, 106, Siegelová, Verw. 450f., cf. ibid. iii 2, KUB 42.69 obv. 17, KUB 31.76 rev. 19; [… ANA?] LÚ–ma–šši GIŠBAN QATI–ŠU KBo 25.184 ii 60 (rit.); for the symbolic value of these attributes, see Hoffner, JBL 85:326-334. 
	e. (in compound w. a preceding n.): LÚDAM. GÀR-š–a LÚ-iš dUTU-i GIŠËlzi harzi “And the merchant man holds a pair of scales to the Sungod” KUB 30.10 rev. 12-13 (prayer, OH/MS), tr. maršanu- 2; LÚiš is used here in apposition, modifying the first n.; cf. the LÚUR.GI‡-aš LÚ-aš “hunter-man” KBo 12.126 i 27, KUB 24.9 ii 27, 50 (both Alli’s rit., MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:24f.; this construction in Hitt. may have arisen under the influence of the similar Akk. one (cf. CAD A/ II 52: “5' in compounds”). 
	f. “man” in the sense of “husband”: (The fisherman describes an ideal wife:) nu–kan LÚ-aš [mem]iyan UL wahnuzzi [nu] LÚ-aš memian išdammašt[a] “‘She does not disregard (her) husband’s [wo]rd.’ So (the fisherman’s wife) heeded (her) husband’s word” KUB 24.7 iv 51-53 (tale of cow and fisherman, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. Hittite Myths 67, memiya(n)-1 b 16'; cf. also takku LÚ-aš MUNUS-ni (var. DAM–SU) aki “If a man dies while married (lit. dies to a woman/his wife)” KBo 

6.26 iii 36 (Laws §192, OH/NS); cf. (The queen of Egypt writing to Šuppiluliuma I, says) LÚ-aš–wa–mu– kan BA.ÚŠ “(My) husband died on me” KBo 5.6 iii 10 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:94; cf. MU-TI›-IA ibid. iv 5, and Güterbock, JCS 10:94 n. f.; ordinarily one would take the -mu here as dat. of possession, but the use of MUNUS-ni above in law §192 suggests it has another force. 

326

g. “man of GN” in the sense of “ruler(?)” or the like — 1' OH exx.: LÚ URUPurušha[nda] KBo 3.22 rev. 74 (OS) but LÚ.MEŠ URUPurušhanda in dupls. KUB 26.71 i 16 and KUB 36.98a rev. 2 (both OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:14f. | the NH scribes in the thirteenth century B.C. (copies B, C) misunderstood the OH archetype; LÚ URUZal~ pa KBo 22.4:3 (OH/NS); [PN] DUMU µPiazzi LÚ URUEmar KUB 40.5 ii? 4-5 + KBo 22.4:7 (hist., OH/NS). 
2' post-OH exx.: µHuzziya LÚ URUHakmešša KUB 36.120 i 7 (royal lists), cf. KUB 11.4:8; µHuqqanaš LÚ [U]RUAzzi KUB 18.2 iii? 10 (oracle question, NH); išhi„l ŠA LÚ URUAštata KUB 5.6 i 20 (oracle question, NH), LÚ URUNuhašši KUB 14.17 ii 2 (AM); LÚ KUR URUAššur KUB 21.1 iii 12 (treaty, Muw. II), cf. KUB 19.13 ii 34 (DŠ). The Hitt. construction may have been created under the influence of an Akk. usage, cf. CAD amilu 4 d (A/II p. 57). This usage should be distinguished from the more usual collocation LÚ (KUR) URUx “man/person from the land of X,” e.g., LÚ KUR URUHatti KBo 10.12 iii 12, LÚ URUHatti KBo 

5.3 ii 32, the men listed in HKM 99 and HKM 102, etc. 

h. w. a complimentary connotation: “Ašgaliya was the lord of Hurma” apΩšš–a kuwatta kuwatta LÚ-eš⁄‡ Ëšta … šarkuš LÚ-eš⁄‡ Ëšta “He was in every respect a man. … He was a preeminent man” (yet even he, when he offended, died tepšawanni) KBo 3.34 ii 8-11 (anecdotes, OH/NS), ed. Carruba, Or NS 
	33:415 (“er war in jeder Beziehung …”), cf. AU 32, Kümmel, ZA 73:147, van den Hout, Diss. 18, HZL sign #360. 
	i. the construction DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ “male gods” (opp. DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ): DINGIR pí-še-ni-eš KUB 43.30 iii 11 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:78, corr. to DINGIR LÚ.MEŠ-aš in the dupl. KBo 

11.32:36 (OH/NS), and see the score translit. of both texts by Neu/Otten, IF 77:184; am[(muga dU-aš)] DINGIR píše-ni-eš (var. DINGIR LÚ.[MEŠ]) [LUG]AL-i uiËr “The male gods of the Stormgod sent me to the king” KBo 3.40b:9-10 (hist., OH/NS) (= BoTU 14a), w. dupl. KBo 13.78 rev. 8; cf. KBo 4.2 iv 17, KBo 4.11:8, KUB 15.34 i 19; DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS.MEŠ h„manteš KUB 21.1 iv 21 (Alakš., Muw. II), ed. SV 2:80f., cf. ibid. iv 28, KUB 17.14 rev.! 17 for this subdivision of the Hitt. pantheon, see Steiner, RLA 3:549 (s.v. Gott § 2.I.2.c). The gram. form of the words underlying DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ is not known. One possibility is two nouns in appostion to one another 

pešna- k 
*šiuneš pišeneš “the gods, (i.e.,) the males. The DINGIR or DINGIR.MEŠ of DINGIR pišeneš or DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ could equally well be a determinitive “the (divine) males” (see below, k). It should be noted that although LÚ.MEŠ functions here as an adj. in the corr. Hurrian wording enna turuhhina (KUB 27.1 i 72, ii 27; KUB 27.3 iv 10, etc.; cf. GLH 274), pišneš is not otherwise attested as an adj. The sentence adduced by Carruba, IF 98:92 n. 4, to support an adjectival usage for pišna-: mΩn LUGAL-uš pé-eš-na-aš MÁŠ.TUR ka[t??-…] / [DINGIR?] pé-eš-ne-iš dMaliyaš–šmišš–a katti[– šši …] “When/As the king wi[th(?)] a male goat kid […], the male [gods] and their dMaliya, with […]” 942/z obv. 3-4 (“neben einem männlichen Zicklein”), could just as well be translated ‘with the goat kid of a man.’ The gen. case would be appropriate whether it is an adj. dependent on OH postpos. katta or n. dependent on head n. MÁŠ.TUR. Carruba (IF 98:92 
	n. 2) claimed that all exx. known to him at that time of complimented DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ always showed -aš, and proposed an underlying *siunes pisnas or *siunes pisnannas w. postposed gen. However, a nom. pl. DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-eš exists KUB 43.23 obv. 8, KUB 20.99 iii 3, KBo 15.31 i 13, and elsewhere, and a DINGIR.LÚ.MEŠ-iš Bo 2856 i 14 (Otten/Neu, IF 77:14, already known to Carruba). 
	j. in the phrase MÁŠ LÚ: nu µKupantadLAMMA-aš MÁŠ LÚ ŠA LUGAL KUR URUAr~ zuawa IŠTU MÁŠ MUNUS-TI–ma–aš ŠA LUGAL KUR URUHatti “K. is an offspring of a man, (who descends from) the king of Arzawa, offspring of a woman (who descends from) the king of Hatti” KUB 21.1 iii 33-34 (Alakš., Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 21.5 iii 48-50, ed. SV 2:72f.; the MÁŠ “offspring, progeny” refers to Kupanta-LAMMA himself, the LÚ to his father, and the MUNUS to his mother; we would say “on his father’s side he is a descendant of the royal house of Arzawa, and on his mother’s side of the royal house of Hatti.” It follows then that the LÚ and the MUNUS are really nouns here from the Hitt. point of view, not adjectives. 
	k. (unclear): nu ANA LÚpí-iš-na[-…] KBo 34.242 rev.? 11 | the lack of space between LÚ and pí-indicates that the former is a det. (see above, i), a usage paralleled by dšiu(ni)-“deity, god.” 

327

The writings BI-iš/-eš-n¿ are ambiguous and can be interpreted as KAŠ-i/eš-n¿, an oblique case form of šieššar “beer” (Carruba, IF 98:93 n. 4), although writings such as pí-iš-na-a-aš w. a plene writing of the final syll. would exclude *KAŠ-iš-na-aš. 
On the PN µPišeni and a possible var. µMe-šeni at Maīat Höyük see Laroche, NH no. 1023, HBM 460 and 461 and Carruba, IF 98:92 n. 3. 
Neu/Otten, IF 77 (1972) 181-190 (LÚ = pešna-); Popko, JCS 26 (1974) 182; Oettinger, GsKronasser (1982) 171f. (on the vocalism of pišena-); Carruba, IF 98 (1993) 92-97 (from a stem *pes-en-). 
Cf. pišnatar, pišnili, AMIL¨TU. 
pišnatar n. neut.; 1. manhood, virility, courage, 
2. manly deeds, res gestae, 3. male parts, penis, scrotum, etc., 4. (uncert.) semen(?); wr. syll. and LÚ-(na)tar, etc.; from OH/MS. 
sg. nom.-acc. pí-iš-na-tar KUB 20.54:7 (OH?/NS), KUB 
55.2 rev. (3), LÚ-tar KBo 21.22:26 (OH/MS), KUB 9.27 i 27 (MH?/NS), KUB 4.5 obv. rt. col. 9 (NH), KBo 3.6 ii 13 (Hatt. III), KBo 4.14 ii 10 (Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), KUB 33.105 i 12, KUB 36.37 iii? 8 (both NS), KBo 22.159 obv. 9, 787/z obv.? 6 (Otten, ZA 65:298 n. 7), LÚ-i[š-na-tar] KBo 21.48 obv. 1 (MH/MS), LÚ-na-tar KBo 10.2 i 50, KUB 31.1 ii 2 (both OH/ NS), KBo 2.9 i 25 (MH/NS), KUB 7.58 i 6, 17, KUB 26.27 iii 17, 19, KUB 33.12 iv 20, KUB 33.84:13, KUB 33.119 iv (7), KUB 33.120 i 25, 26, 29, ii 9, KUB 36.8 i 18 (all NS), LÚ-naa-t[ar] KUB 34.52:3. 
gen. LÚ-na-an-na-aš KBo 10.2 iv 2 (OH/NS), KBo 19.49 iv 4 (Šupp. I), KBo 2.5 iv 30, KBo 14.3 iv (9), KBo 19.48:3, KUB 19.10 iv 3, KUB 19.13 iv 1, KBo 5.8 iv (24), KUB 
30.75:3 (all Murš. II). d.-l. pí-iš-na-an-ni-eš-ši KUB 13.3 iv 10 (MH?/NS), LÚ
an-ni KUB 36.67 iii 15 (NS). pl. nom.-acc. LÚ-na-tarHI.A KBo 12.38 ii 14 (Šupp. II). 
(Sum.) ki-bi lu-na-me in-pa-a-da KUB 4.5 left col. 9-10 = (Akk.) [a]-ša-ar-šu ma-am-ma-an ú-ul ú-wa-at-ta KBo 12.72:9-10 = (Hitt.) nu-uš-ši LÚ-tar-ši-i[t] Ú-UL ku-iš-ki a[r?…] KUB 4.5 rt. col. 9-10 (hymn, NH), ed. Laroche, RA 58:72, 74 | Laroche, 77, points out that the Hitt. scribe misunderstood the Sum. and Akk. passage and translated the Sum. lú–nam–e lit. w. Hitt. LÚ-tar–šit “son humanité.” 
1. manhood, virility, courage (opp. MUNUS-tar): [k]Ωša–wa–ta–kkan MUNUS-tar arha dahhun nu–wa–tta EGIR-pa LÚ-tar pehhun “I took femininity away from you and gave you virility in return. (You have cast off the ways of a woman, now show the ways of a man)” KUB 9.27 i 26-27 (rit., MH/ 

pišnatar 2 

NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:272, tr. ANET 349; nu katta tar~ natten … LÚ-ni LÚ-na-tar (dupl. LÚ-tar) tarhui~ latar MUNUS-ni MUNUS-nΩtar annitalwatar “Release … to the man virility and bravery, to the woman femininity and motherhood” KUB 15.34 ii 17-19 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. 787/z obv.? 6 (Otten, ZA 65:298 n. 7), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:190f., and Puhvel, JAOS 100:167; (Into a hunting bag, all good things are placed, among them:) [n–ašta anda] LÚ-na-tar tarh„i~ l[a!tar… kitta] “Into it, virility and brave[ry … are placed]” KUB 33.12 iv 20 (myth, NS), ed. Otten, Tel. 40, 44; “They gave me Nara’s wisdom, [DN’s] wisdom they gave to me. I have […]” ŠA dAnu LÚ-tar harmi “I have Anu’s virility. (I have DN’s heroism and good counsel)” KUB 33.105 i 12 (myth, NS), ed. Kum. *6, 10; cf. KUB 33.120 ii 9, ed. Kum. *3, 8; našta ANA LÚ. MEŠ arha LÚ-na!-tar (dupl. LÚ-i[š-na-tar]) tar~ huilatar haddulatar mΩll–a … dΩ KBo 2.9 i 25-27 (prayer, MH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 21.48 obv. 1, tr. mal a; “Do not plan anything foolish against me” ANA ZI–KA– ma–za–kan LÚ-tar lË ti[nnuši(?)] “do not st[ifle(?)] the manliness in your soul” KBo 4.14 ii 40-41 (tr., Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:41f., see comment ibid. 61; anzidaza tÏer DINGIR.MEŠ anzi~ dazz–a memer LUGAL.MEŠ anzitaz nuntarnut pankuš DUMU.NITA.MEŠ-uš anzel ÉRIN.MEŠ-ti pÏer DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ-na-tar walkiyauwar “The gods have sided with us; kings have spoken on our behalf; the multitude has hastened to our side; the gods have given young men for our troops, (as well as) manhood (and) walkiyauwar” KUB 7.58 i 13-17 (rit.), ed. Friedrich, ArOr 6:370, Melchert, Diss. 312f.; cf. Kammenhuber, MIO 2:55; “Just as the hot stone and the pine cone cry out in water and then cool down …” tuËll–a ŠA ÉRIN.MEŠ–KA LÚ-na-tar-te-et zah~ hΩi(š)–šmiš haluga(š)–šmiš apeneššan egattaru “likewise may your troops’ courage, their battle(readiness) and their reputation(?) cool down” ibid. i 6-8, ed. StBoT 5:68 (igai-), tr. Beal, Magic/Ritual Power 73; UN-aš LÚ-na-t[ar] KBo 21.20 i 15 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 19:42f.; cf. [… antuwa]hhaš LÚ-na-tar KUB 
26.27 iii 17 (instr. frag.). 
2. manly deed, res gestae: (Following the description of a successful campaign) nu–mu kÏ IGIzi LÚ-tar-mi-it “This was my first manly deed (and on this campaign, IŠTAR my lady, proclaimed for 

328

the first time my name)” KBo 3.6 ii 13 (apol., Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:12f. (= l. 29); “Just as my father, the great king Tudhaliya was a true king” nu–kan Q¸TAM~ MA ašanda LÚ-na-tarHI.A ≠anda±n gulšun “in the same way I inscribed (his) true manly deeds thereon (sc. on a statue)” KBo 12.38 ii 13-14 (hist., Šupp. II), ed. Güterbock, JNES 26:76, 78; T≥
UPPAHI.A ŠA µMuršili [L]Ú-na-an-na-aš “Tablets of the manly deeds of Muršili” KUB 30.75:1-3 (label, NH); cf. colophons KBo 
10.2 iv 1-2 (ann., Hatt. I), KBo 19.49 iv 3-6 (ann., Šupp. I), KBo 19.48:1-3, KBo 14.3 iv y+8-10, KUB 19.10 iv 1-3, KUB 
19.13 iv 1 (all ann. of Šupp. I, wr. by Murš. II), KBo 2.5 iv 30, KBo 5.8 iv (24) (ann., Murš. II). 
3. male parts, penis, scrotum, etc.: (describing the Sungod) “His form is new; his chest is new…” pí-iš-na-tar-še-et-wa (par. LÚ-tar-še-et-wa) nËu~ wan “his male parts are new” KUB 20.54 + KBo 
13.122:7 (benedictions of Labarna, OH/NS), w. par. KBo 
21.22:26 (OH/MS) and KUB 55.2 rev. 3-4, ed. Neu/Otten, IF 77:182, Archi, FsMeriggi™ 44 w. n. 32, 46f.; (listed among body parts): LÚ-tar UZUSA.DU.HI.A UZUSA.HI. [A…] KUB 36.37 iii? 8 (myth, NS), tr. Hittite Myths 70 (“penis”); (Of Hedammu, seeing the naked IŠTAR) […] LÚ-na-tar parΩ watkuškizzi “His penis becomes erect (lit. ‘jumps forth’)” Bo 6404 + KUB 33.84 iv 13 (Hedammu, NS), ed. StBoT 14:60f. (= 15), tr. Hittite Myths 52; cf. ZI-anza parΩ watkut “He became aroused” KUB 33.98 + KUB 36.8 i 17 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:148f. w. n. m, and ANA GUD ZI-aš parΩ watkut KUB 24.7 ii 54 (the fisherman and the cow), tr. Hittite Myths 65; […] / UDU.A.LUM mΩn LÚ-na-tar-še-e[t …] “[…] like a stud-ram his penis […]” KBo 37.26:3. 
4. (uncert.) semen(?): (Kumarbi became sexually excited and slept/copulated with the rock) nu– šši–kan LÚ-na-tar anda[(-)…] “and his semen(?) [flowed?] into her” or, “his penis [entered(?)] her” KUB 36.8 i 18 (myth, NS), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:148f., tr. Hittite Myths 52; (Kumarbi bit off Anu’s ‘buttocks’) LÚna-tar-še-et-kán ANA dKumarbi ŠÀ–ŠU anda ZABAR mΩn ulišta mΩn dKumarbiš ŠA dAnu LÚna-tar katta pašta “His semen(?)/penis fused with Kumarbi’s insides like bronze. When Kumarbi swallowed Anu’s semen(?)/penis …” KUB 33.120 i 25-26 (Song of Kumarbi, NS), ed. Kum. *2, 7, tr. Hittite Myths 40, ANET 120. As a result, Kumarbi became pregnant. Babylonians were aware of the connection be

*pišnili a 
tween semen and conception (see M. Stol, Zwangerschap en geborte bi de Babyloniers en in de bibel, Leiden 1983, 
p. 3f.), and so probably were the Hittites, although there is no direct evidence for this (except in the second ex. above which is not compelling). 
A possible Akkadographic spelling of p. is LÚx-UT–KA (Akk. zikr„tu?) KUB 36.35 i 17, see markiya1 a 2'; for x, read MEŠ? (i.e., LÚ.MEŠ-UT–KA). 
Güterbock, JCS 10 (1956) 41 n. 1 (mng. 2, w. lit.); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 41 (“‘Männlichkeit’ > 1. ‘Sperma,’ ‘Penis erectus,’ 2. ‘Heldentat’”); Kümmel, Or NS 36 (1967) 371; Neu/Otten, IF (1972) 181-190, esp. 183 (LÚ-natar = pišnatar “Männlichkeit, Sperma, Penis”); Popko, JCS 26 (1974) 182 (LÚ-natar = pišnatar “virility”). 
Cf. *pišnili, pešna-; hapuša-, hurni-, lalu-, genzu. 
*pišnattaš (mng. unkn.); MH/MS.† 
LÚ-na-at-ta-aš HKM 55:38. 
[z]iga–zza µHuilliš [M]A[H]AR dUTU-ŠI kuit ≠Ëš±ta ≠nu–wa–mu LÚ±-na-at-ta-aš MAHAR dU[TU-ŠI] ≠te?-±et “Because you, Huilli, were in the presence of His Majesty, speak/tell(?) my LÚnattaš in the presence of His Majesty” or: “Mention me before His Majesty (as one) of LÚ-natt-” or: “Tell me the LÚ-nattaš (which is) in His Majesty’s presence” HKM 55:36-39 (letter), ed. HBM 224f. 
*pišnattaš cannot be related to any known word. 
*pišnili adv.; in a man’s style or manner; wr. LÚnili; from OS.† 
LÚ-ni-li KBo 20.16 i! 13 (OS), KUB 42.107 iv? 7 (NH), KUB 1.4 iii 35 (Hatt. III), KBo 20.30 iii! 1, KBo 26.65 iv 29 (both NS), KUB 60.118:17 (NH), LÚ«LÚ»-ni-li KUB 
60.118:13 (NH). 
uncert. LÚ-ni!-l[i] or LÚ.KÚR-[l]i KUB 40.39 obv.? 10 (NH). 
a. (opp. MUNUS-nili): (in a list of implements and furniture) 5 zahurti LÚ-ni-li 2 zahurti MUNUS-n[ili] “Five zahurti-seats in men’s style, two zahurti-seats in women’s style” KUB 42.107 iv? 7 (allocation list, NH); cf. 1 GIŠzahurti LÚ-ni-li KBo 20.16 i! 13 (MELQETU list, OS), 1 zahurti LÚ-ni-li KBo 20.30 iii! 1 (fest. frag., NS); […]x-az–ma–za LÚ-ni-li waššiyami “Like a man I clothe myself with […]” KUB 60.118:17 (NH); cf. for the notion of “like a man” as opp. to MUNUS-nili, but w. iwar instead of -ili: tuel–za wašpan LÚ
329

aš iwar waššiy[aši] … MUNUS-nili–ya–ddu–z[a … waššiyaši] “[You] dress yourself like a man … [you dress] yourself like a woman” KUB 31.69 obv.? 5, 9 (frag. of vow, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 274, 411. 
	b. courageously or fairly (opp. to cowardly behavior): (Hatt. III describes the beginning of his hostilities against Urhi-Teššub) LÚ-ni-li-iš-ši watarnahhun “I challenged him in a manly way” (followed by the wording of the challenge) KUB 1.4 iii 35 (apol., Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:22f. (= iii 68); both Hatt. 28f. and Chrest. 76f. (= iii 69) read LÚ.KÚR-li-iš-ši “in a hostile manner,” although the KUB 1.4 copy shows LÚ-ni-li; (Ullikummi replied to Teššub) LÚ-ni-li n[amm]a [walha]nniški “Keep on [fig]hting/[stri]king like a man” KBo 26.65 iv 28-29 (myth, NS). 
	c. in fragmentary context of a vow(?): […]x– mu–za DINGIR-LUM GAŠAN–YA LÚ«LÚ»-ni-l[i …] “The goddess, my lady, […] herself like a man […]” KUB 60.118:13 (NH). 

LÚ-nili occurs also in KUB 48.69:1, a text in an IE dialect closely related to Hitt., Luw., and Pal.; cf. Watkins in M. Mellink, ed., Troy and the Trojan War (Bryn Mawr 1986) 45f. 
Otten, StBoT 24 (1981) 110 (“männlich”). 
Cf. pešna-, pišnatar. 
[NA›pišnuzi] Tischler, HDW 38, is unlikely. Read 
NA›kirnuzi. 
pištal[iy]a n.?; (mng. unkn.); MH/NS.† 
pí-iš-≠ta±-l[i-i]a KUB 31.84 iii 72-75 (instr. for B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 50, in a broken and obscure sec. 
pišdumu[-…]x adj. or n.; (onomastic epithet); MH/NS.† 
µPazziziš pí-iš-du-≠mu±[-o-]x KUB 48.107 i 13 (prayer, Arn. I), translit. Lebrun, Hymnes 142. Similar onomastic epithets of unkn. language include pikur~ yalli, pikuduštenah, pippalala, pittauri(ya)-, and pit„nt„i-, q.v. All are cited by von Schuler, Kaškäer 
94. 
[-pit] see -pat. 

peda- A 

peda-A n. neut.; place, location, position, locality; wr. syll. and Akk. AŠRU; from OS. 
a.	a location, place, or position 1' in general 2' sacred places 
a'	in general 
b'	sacred places (AŠRIHI.A) in the temple (window, 

throne dais, brazier, etc.) where sacrifice is 
made 

3'	a geographical unit
a' region or territory
b' a city, village, or settlement

	b. position, post, rank, status, or station in a hierarchy 
	c. situation or circumstance 
	d. specific places identified by a dependent gen. 

1'	gen. n. 
a'	Ωpiyaš p. “place of the offering pit” 
b'	halluwaš p. “πplace of depth(?)” (as a designa

tion of part of a liver in oracles) 

c'	hapaš p. “place of the rivers” 
d'	haššueznaš p. “the place of kingship” 
e'	hazziwiyaš p. “place of (performing) a rite, cult 

place” 

f'	išhuzziyaš p. “place of the belt” = “beltline” 
g'	*itarkiaš p. 
h'	kariyašhaš p. “place of (showing) mercy” 
i'	GIŠkurakkiyaš p. “place of the column” 
j'	linkiyaš p. “place of oath(-taking)” 
k'	nepišaš p. “place of the sky” 
l'	parnaš p. 
m'	paršuraš p. “place of soup” > “soup kitchen” 
n'	šakiyaš p.“the place of the omen” 
o'	GIŠšarhuliyaš p. “place of the pillar” 
p'	šurziyaš p. 
q'	talpuriyaš p. 
r'	tuliyaš p. “place of assembly” 
s'	walliyaš p. “place of pride” 
t'	wilanaš p. “place of clay” 
u'	zahhiyaš p. “place of battle, battlefield” 
v'	AŠAR ANDAHŠUMSAR “place of the ANDAH~ 

ŠUM-plant” 

w'	AŠAR DINGIR-LIM “the place of the divinity” 
x'	AŠAR DN “place of DN”: 
y'	DUMU.LUGAL-aš p. “place of the prince” 
z'	ÉRIN.MEŠ-aš p. “place of the troops” 
aa'	AŠAR GAL MEŠEDI “the place of the Chief of 

the Guards” 

bb'	AŠAR SISKUR “place of sacrifice” 
2'	gen. of verbal nouns
a' Ωppa appannaš p. “place of retreat”
b' hannešnaš p “place of judgement”
c' haššannaš p. “place of breeding”
d' hinkuwaš p. “place of bowing”
e' irhawaš p. “place of offering”

330

peda- A	peda- A 

f' piddumaš p. “place of running” g' tiyawaš p. “place of dismounting” h' wišiyawaš p. “place of grazing” 
e.	p. modified by adjectives 1' arpuwan p. “inaccessible place” 2' aššiyan p. “beloved place” 3' aššu p. “good place” 
a'	in general 
b' an anatomical term
4' harwaši p. “secret place”
5' hatku p. “tight spot, difficult circumstances”
6' ikunan p. “cool place”
7' innarawan p. “strong position”
8' nakki p.

a'	“important place” 

b' “difficult/hard to reach place” 9' parku p. “elevated place” 10' šalli p. “Great Place” 11' šani p. “one and the same place” 12' šuppi p. “holy place” 13' damai p. “another place” 14' dammel(i) p. “uncultivated land, uninhabited land, vir

gin land”
a' in the nom.-acc.
b' in the d.-l.

15' daššu p. “strong place” 16' tepu p. “little place” (perhaps euphemism for the netherworld or the grave) 

f.	w. preceding adv. 1' apiya pedi “in that place” 2' ištarna p. 
a' “inside, in the interior” b' “in the center, midpoint, middle” 

	g. w. possessive 
	h.	pedi (d.-l.) and pedi–šši “in place, on the spot, in loco” 1' wr. pedi or INA AŠRI 2' wr. pedi– or AŠAR– + poss. pron. 

	i. pedi (d.-l.) and pedi–šši “instead of, in place of, in his 

stead/place”
1' wr. pedi–šši
2' wr. pedi
3' wr. AŠAR

j.	construed w. numbers 1' cardinals a' in general 1'' where pedan is used like a d.-l. a'' wr. AŠRA (which could be an Akk. acc. sg.) 

b'' wr. syll. pedan 2'' 1-edani pedi 3'' others 

b'	places where an object is plated or inlaid, or where the plating is scratched off 

2'	ordinals 
a'	dΩn pedaš “of the second place” 
1''	in competition 
2''	as a designation of rank 
3''	as a designation of quality, opposite of 
“first class” (hantezzi) 
a''	w. wine 
b''	w. garments, probably indicating 
the rank of the wearer 
b'	other ordinals 
k. pedan epp-and har(k)
1'	epp-“to take/assume a position” 
a'	w. -za 
b'	w. d.-l. enclitic personal pron. 
c'	without -za or d.-l. pron. 
d'	w. Ωppa “to take refuge in a place” 
2'	har(k)- “to keep/hold/maintain a position” 
a'	without -za 
b'	w. -za 
c'	w. Ωppa “to remain in or occupy a place of ref
uge” 
sg. nom.-acc. pé-e-da-an KUB 23.77:28, 29, ABoT 60 obv. 20 (both MH/MS), KUB 13.2 i 14, 15, 18, 19, KUB 26.19 ii 11, VBoT 24 ii 16, KUB 7.5 i 19 (all MH/NS), KBo 6.4 i 11, KUB 
29.4 iii 28, 29, KUB 19.13 i 48, KBo 1.28 obv. 14, KBo 3.4 iii 72 (all NH), pé-e-ta-an IBoT 1.36 i 9, iii 14 (MH/MS), KUB 
32.137 ii 8 (MH/NS), KUB 14.7 iv 5 (Hatt. III), KUB 18.11 rev. 11 (late NH), pé-da-an KUB 33.120 ii 77 (pre-NH/NS), pé-e-da<-an> KBo 11.51 iii 6 (NS), pé-e-da-mi-it KUB 31.130 rev. 5, KUB 36.75 iii 20 (both OH/MS), pé-e-da-aš-ši-it KUB 
10.66 vi 5, KUB 58.5 obv. 12, pé-e-da-aš-me-et KBo 20.12 i 4 (OS), Tel Aviv 2:92, l. 21, pé-e-da-aš-ši-me-et KBo 21.85 i 41 (OH/MS), pé-e-da-aš-mi-it KBo 25.47 iv 12, KBo 30.181 right col. 5, AŠ-RU KUB 49.103 rev.10, KUB 19.70 iv 23, AŠ-RA KBo 10.2 i 6 (OH/NS), HT 1 iv 10, HKM 46:4 (MH/MS), KBo 
15.25 obv. 20 (MH/NS), KUB 14.3 i 23 (Hatt. III), KBo 11.17 i 2, KUB 15.1 ii 43 (both NH) (this spelling always preceded by a no. higher than 1, see j 1' a' 1'' a''; perhaps this Akk. acc. writing originated as a logogr. wr. of pedan [nom.-acc.]); the nom.-acc. can also be used where one expects either a gen. (e.g., KUB 10.13 iii 7, KBo 12.4 ii 6 [var. KBo 3.1 ii 37 has sg. gen. pé-e-da-aš]) or a d.-l. (e.g., KBo 16.49 iv 4, 9, KBo 15.25 obv. 20). 
sg. gen. pé-e-da-aš KBo 3.22 obv. 40 (OS), KBo 15.31 iv 10 (OH/MS), KBo 3.1 ii 37 (OH/NS), KUB 9.1 ii 15 (pre-NH/ NS), KUB 6.45 iii 11 (Muw. II), KUB 36.90 obv. 16, KUB 2.1 iii 4 (both NH), pé-da-aš KUB 52.75 obv. 13; in comp. ta-anpé-da-aš KBo 21.91:11; w. word space ta-a-an pé-e-da-aš-ša Bo 3371:9 (Otten/Siegelová, AfO 23:38 n. 18); pé-e-da-aš KBo 
3.1 ii 37 (OH/NS) (w. dupl. pé-e-da-an KBo 12.4 ii 6, NS). 
sg. d.-l. pé-e-di KBo 3.22 rev. 48 (OS), KUB 30.10 obv. 8 (OH/MS), KUB 23.77:27, KBo 15.33 ii 38 (both MH/MS), KUB 36.79 i 24, KBo 6.3 i 26 (both OH/NS), KUB 43.55 iv 4 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 5.2 ii 31, 32 (MH/NS), KBo 4.7 i 16, KBo 
331

5.8 iii 20 (both Murš. II), KUB 41.17 iv 19 (NS), pé-e-ti KBo 
21.90 obv. 13 (OH/MS), KBo 16.50:16 (MH/MS), KBo 20.51 ii 4 (MS), KBo 4.2 i 27 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 19.51:(5) (Murš. II), KBo 22.247 right col. 7 (OH/NS?), pé-e-te KUB 29.1 ii 24 (OH/NS), KBo 4.9 i 49 (OH?/NS), pé-di KBo 3.34 i 14 (OH/ NS), KUB 13.4 i 20, iv 65, 75 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 10.12 ii 18 (Šupp. I/NS), KUB 14.7 iv 7, KUB 14.3 iv 3, KUB 21.38 i 23, ii 15, KUB 19.9 i 15, KUB 5.1 iii 65, 71 (all Hatt. III), KBo 
4.10 obv. 31 (Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), pé-ti KUB 2.8 i 29 (NH), pe-te KUB 6.46 obv. 50, 51 (coll. Singer, Muw.Pr. 20), KUB 
41.8 i 39 (MH/NS). 
sg. abl. pé-e-da-az KUB 33.53:(12) (OH/NS?), HKM 116:(15) (MH/MS), KUB 33.120 ii (75), ii 84 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 30.56 iii 15 (NH), pé-da-az KUB 33.120 ii 34 (pre-NH/ NS), pé-e-ta-az KUB 4.72 rev. 5 (OH/MS?), KUB 43.55 iv 11 (pre-NH/NS), pé-e-da-za KBo 13.101 rev. 23 (NS), KUB 
17.16 iv 12 (NH), KBo 16.81 i 2, pé-ta-za Bo 3315 obv. 13 
(Otten translit. in Haas, KN 277a). pl. nom.-acc. AŠ-RIHI.A KUB 2.8 ii 21, 23, 32 (NH), KUB 
11.21 iv (16), KUB 25.18 iv 34, KBo 30.58 ii? 8, KUB 11.35 
iii 12, KUB 11.26 ii 13. 
pl. gen. pé-e-da-aš KUB 52.15 iii 5, 6. 
pl. d.-l. pé-e-da-aš KBo 19.128 iii (35), 36, 38 (OH?/NS), KBo 15.37 i 2 (MH/NS), KUB 6.45 iii 11 (Muw. II), pé-da-aš KUB 42.97 + HHT 80 rev. 10 (NH), pé-e<-da>-aš KUB 2.1 ii 40 (NH). 
Akkadogram AŠ-RU KUB 21.27 i 15, KUB 48.111:12, KBo 4.10 rev. 18, KUB 7.10 i 6, AŠ-RA see “sg. nom.-acc.” above, AŠ-RI, AŠ-RUHI.A KUB 22.51 rev. 12, AŠ-RIHI.A KUB 34.70:12, 16, 17, IBoT 3.1:18, 50, 51, 58, and passim, A-ŠAR (construct followed by n.) KUB 32.137 ii 11 (MH/NS), A-ŠAR-ŠU KBo 11.45 iii 12, 15 (OH/NS), A-ŠAR-ŠU-NU KBo 
20.8 obv.? (19) (OS), KBo 20.26 obv. 13, A-ŠAR-ŠI-NA KBo 
25.64:9. We write pé-di rather than pí-di on the basis of the plene writings pé-e-di and the absence of exx. of *pí-i-di. 
(Sum.) [Á.ÚR] = (Akk.) ≠pu-uz±-ru = (Hitt.) harwΩši pé-eda-an “secret place” KBo 1.42 i 37 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 
13:134 (l. 47); (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) kà-la-ak-ku “excavation” = (Hitt.) IM-aš pé-e-da-an “place of clay” KUB 3.93:8 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. MSL 17:124. 
(Akk.) ina qaqqari–šu “on its (Ulma’s) site/territory” KBo 
10.1 obv. 17 = (Hitt.) pé-di-iš-ši “on its site” KBo 10.2 i 36 (bil. ann. of Hatt. I, NS), ed. Saporetti, SCO 14:77, 80 (Akk., “sul suo suolo”), Imparati, SCO 14:46f. (Hitt., “al suo posto”), tr. Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 11:48 (Akk.), CAD Q 118b; for the tr. of qaqqaru, see CAD Q 117-119 (mng. 3). 
We have no evidence for an equation KI = peda-, as Sommer, AU 100, 411 maintained. In Hitt. texts KI = tekan, and daganzipa-“earth.” 
The equation of huššulli in KBo 24.57 i 8 w. AŠ-RI in dupl. KBo 23.42 i 8 which Otten notes (KBo 24 p. VII n. 2) is only an interchange of two words w. overlapping semantic fields, “pit” and “place,” not evidence of synonymity. 

peda- A a 2' b' 

a. a location, place, or position — 1' in general: nu ŠD.≠SAﬁ± AN[A] ŠDMaraššanda ku≠ed±ani pé-e-di anda imm[i]škittari nu wΩtar apËdani pé-di UL hΩnanzi “They shall not draw water at the place where the Red River mingles with the Maraššanda River” KBo 23.27 ii 28-30 (incant., MS?); [kue]dani pédi IZKIM-in iyatten kinuna [… a]pΩt AŠ-RU išhar~ nummawen “In whatever place you have given an oracular sign, […] now we have bloodied that place” KBo 13.101 i 27-28 (rit., NS); kue Ëššešta kuedani pé-di “Whatever he has done in whatever place” KUB 17.27 ii 29 (rit., MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347; (Someone [takes] a loaf of bread) nu–kan hatteššar ištΩp[i] [nam]ma–at šer anda [appa]nzi … [nu a]pΩt pé-e-da-an ipu≠ran±zi n–ašta š≠ar±[Ω …] [iš]huwanzi “He blocks the (mouth of the) hole (with it), and [th]en they [dr]aw it (the hole/soil) together on top. … They mound up [t]hat place, they [h]eap (it) u[p…]” KUB 32.137 ii 27-28, 31-32 + KBo 15.24 ii 6-7, 10-11 (foundation rit., MH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 167, 174 | for epurai-, see HW™ 2:89 (“Erdmassen bewegen, flach machen, planieren, Rampe bauen”), HED 1/2:282 (“besiege, dam up”) | for tekan šer anda appanzi, see HW™ 2:68 epp- IV 1.c; cf. KBo 15.24 ii 10; “At the gate (or: outside?) we take seven pegs … and a stone. … And if it (i.e., the door) opens somewhere” nu–za ap„n NA›-an tummeni nu pé-e-da-an tarmiškaweni “we take that stone and keep hammering/securing the place” KUB 17.28 i 12-13 (incant. of the moon, NS). 
2' sacred places — a' in general: nu–tta pé-e-daan hinikzi “He will allot to you (dUliliyašši) a place (where you can receive worship)” KUB 7.5 i 19-20 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:273, 277; [m]Ωn–kan DINGIR.MEŠ pé-e-da-az nininkanzi “When they move (the statues of) the deities from (their) places” KUB 30.56 iii 15 (cat., NH), ed. CTH pp. 181f.; namma–kan DINGIR.MEŠ URUHatti GIDIM. HI.A–ya pé-di ninikta “Moreover he (i.e., Muwatalli II) loosened the gods of Hatti and the manes from in (their) place (and carried them off down to Tarhuntašša)” KUB 1.1 ii 52, ed. Hatt. 20f., StBoT 24:14f. 
b' sacred places (AŠRIHI.A) in the temple (window, throne dais, brazier, etc.) where sacrifice is made: UGULA LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM memalit AŠ-RIHI[.A] irhaizzi haššÏ 1-ŠU GIŠDAG-ti 1-ŠU GIŠAB

332

ya 1-ŠU GIŠhattalwaš GIŠ-i 1-ŠU namma haššÏ ta!pušza 1-ŠU išh„wai “The chief of the cooks makes the rounds of the (sacred) places with groats: he pours (groats) once at the brazier, once at the throne dais, once at the window, once at the wood of the bolt, and finally (or: again) once alongside the brazier” KUB 11.21 iv 16-21 (fest. frag.); EGIR–ŠU tawallit AŠ-RIHI.A Q¸TAMMA irhΩ≠i± “Afterwards he makes the rounds of the places in the same way with tawal-drink” KUB 11.35 iii 11-12 (winter fest., OH/NS); EGIR–ŠU išhanÏ EGIR-anda KAŠ-it GEŠTIN-it tawalit walhit AŠ-RIHI.A irhΩizzi “Afterwards, after the (draining of) the blood [cf. aulin kar-ap-pa-an-zi in line 10], he makes the rounds of the places with beer, wine, tawal, and walhi-drink” KUB 11.26 ii 11-13 (fest.); DINGIR.MEŠ-aš h„mantaš ANA AŠ-RIHI.A–ya h„mantaš peran šipantanz[i] “They libate before all deities and all (sacred) places” KUB 27.15 i 7-8 (cult of Teššub and Hebat), w. dupl. KUB 27.13 i 26; nu–za B´LTI É-TI AŠ-RIHI.A ŠA DINGIR-LIM IŠTU DINGIR-LIM arha arÏËzzi “The mistress of the house makes an oracular inquiry from the deity concerning the places of the deity” KUB 17.24 ii 9-10 (witašš(iy)aš-fest., NH?); cf. Archi, SMEA 1:83-102. 
3' a geographical unit — a' region or territory: mΩn URU-LUM kuiš našma AŠ-RU kuitki ANA µUlmi-Teššub LUGAL KUR URU.dU-tašša piyanna UL ZI-anza “If it is not the wish (of the Hittite king) to give Ulmi-Teššub, the king of Tarhuntašša, any town or place” KBo 4.10 rev. 18 (treaty w. Ulmi-Teššub, Hatt. III?), ed. StBoT 38:46f.; “If His Majesty campaigns against Tanizila in this year” mΩn kuedani pé-di lahiyaizzi “if the place at which he campaigns (he goes from the camp/with the army to the … river)” KUB 5.1 iii 65-66 (oracle question, NH), ed. la(h)hiyai- 1 b, THeth 4:74f., cf. ibid. iii 71 and KUB 
49.103 rev. 10 s.v. mΩn 10 a 2'; BAL-an–mu kuiš IGIanda iyat n–ašta apΩt pé-e-da-an šer arha pΩ„n “Whoever made a rebellion against me, I ignored/ neglected that place” KUB 36.87 iii 8-10 (prayer, NH), ed. pai-A 5 d 1', KN 190f., | Kammenhuber, HW™ 1:444a, following KN 191, tr. “da verlieš ich deswegen(!) jenen Ort” (exclamation point hers); since šer arha w. verbs of movement is a common collocation, we see no reason to translate this šer without a related d.-l. as “deswegen” nor arha pai-w. the 

peda- A a 3' b' 
acc.(!) as “verlassen”; (They drive sheep to the steppe) n–aš–kan pΩnzi ANA ZAG LÚ.KÚR anda arha pittalanzi kuedani pé-di anzel UL aranzi “and they proceed to abandon them in the borderlands of the enemy, in a place to which ours do not come” KUB 
9.31 iii 46-47 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/ 193:15, 24; cf. KUB 8.12 ii 4 (lunar omen), ed. g, below; see also arpuwan pedan (e 1' below) and nakki pedan (e 8' below). 
b' a city, village or settlement: nu–za ŠEŠ–YA µNIR.GÁL-i[(š)] [(kuit AŠ)]-RU URU.dU-aššan parnawaiškit “Tarhuntašša, the place which my brother Muwatalli made into property of the royal house” KUB 1.1 iv 62-63 (Apol. of Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 
3.6 + KUB 19.70 iv 23-24, ed. parnawiške-a, Hatt. 36f., NBr 32f., StBoT 24:28f.; (The different deities settled in different cities, i.e., they have chosen these places as their abodes) [DINGIR.]MAH–ma–kan pé-eda-an UL Ωšta nu–šši–kan DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU [pee]-da-an Ωšta “But for Hannahanna there did not remain a place; so for her, man<kind> remained (as her) [pl]ace” KUB 30.29 obv. 14-15 (birth rit., NS), ed. pÏËtta a, StBoT 29:22f.; nu–nnaš dUTU URUTÚL-na GAŠAN–YA kuedani pé-di tittanut n–at tuel Ωšši~ yantaš DUMU-aš ŠA dIM URUNerik AŠ-RU “The place in which you, Sungoddess of Arinna, my Lady, installed us (i.e., the city of Nerik) is the place of the Stormgod of Nerik, your beloved son” KUB 21.27 i 13-15 (prayer of Pud., Hatt. III), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 330, 337, Sürenhagen, AoF 8:108f., tr. ANET 393; tuel NŠ.TE ZI–KA–ya kuedani pé-di ≠e±hu “Come (from your beloved Mt. Hahruwa) to the place where your body and your soul are (i.e., the city of Nerik)” KUB 36.90 obv. 21-22 (prayer, NH), ed. KN 178f.; “Come, (O Stormgod of Nerik,) to your festival tomorrow” lukkattaš–kan UD.KAM-ti µDudhaliyan tuedaš Ωššiyantaš pé-e-da-aš URUHakmiš URUNerik AŠŠUM LÚ!SANGA-UTTIM iškanzi “Tomorrow they will anoint Tudhaliya to the priesthood of Hakmiš (and) Nerik, your beloved places” ibid. obv. 15-18, ed. KN 176-179, Lebrun, Hymnes 365, 369; cf. KUB 
21.19 + 1193/u iii 40-41; takku LÚ ELLUM ara[(uwan~ ni)]uš annanekuš anna–šmann–a wenzi kΩš takiya utnË kΩšš–a takiya utnË–ya UL harΩ[(tar)] takku 2el (var. šaniya) pé-di nu šakki hurkil “If a free man has sexual intercourse with free sisters who have the same mother and their mother, one in one coun
333

try and the other in another country, it is not an offence, but if (they live) in the same place, and (s)he knows (of the forbidden degree of relationship), (it is) hurkil” KBo 6.26 iii 31-35 (Laws §191, OH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.34:14-17, ed. HG 82f. 
	b. position, rank, status or station in a hierachy: nu–kan ŠA dUTU–ŠI aššulan anda lË daliyanzi nu– šmaš–kan aššulaš A-ŠAR–ŠUNU–ya lË wËhtari “Let them not waste the good will of My Majesty, and let (that) good will and their position (in the king’s favor) not change for them” KBo 4.12 rev. 9-11 (decree of Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 44f. (“Und die Gnade meiner Sonne sollen sie nicht einstellen. Und ihnen soll die Gnade und ihre Stellung nicht umgestossen werden”), HW™ 1:529a (“‘Güte’ des heth. Königs”), HED 1:203 (“may their place of favor”; erroneously joins aššulaš AŠAR–ŠUNU–ya as a gen. phrase, ignoring the connective –ya), StBoT 5:196 (“und (von) ihnen soll sich Wohlergehen und ihre Stellung nicht (ab-)wenden!” — is also possible); GIM-an–ma µMurši~ lin ABU–YA DINGIR.M[EŠ] A-ŠAR ABI–ŠU tit!ta~ nuer “But when the gods installed my father Muršili in the place of his father” KUB 21.16 i 14-15 (hist., Hatt. III); mΩn irmalanzaš–a Ëšta dUTU–ŠI– ma–[t]ta [ANA] A-ŠAR ABI–KA tittanunun–pat “Even though you were sick, I, my Majesty, nevertheless installed you [in] the position of your father” KBo 5.9 i 16-17 (treaty of Murš. II w. Duppiteššub), ed. SV 1:10f., tr. DiplTexts 55; cf. ibid. i 20; [nu–mu–kan] DINGIR-LUM kuiš kËdani pé-di tittanut “The deity who installed [me] to this position” KUB 21.38 ii 15 (letter of Pud.), ed. Stefanini, Pud. 16f., Helck, JCS 17:93; [u]nin–ma UN-an apez pé-e-da-az arha UL–pat tit[t]anuwanzi “They shall likewise not dismiss that person from that position” KUB 5.24 i 45-46 (oracle question, NH), ed. StBoT 38:252f.; cf. ibid. i 56; cf. pé-di tiyat KUB 23.92 obv. 9 (frag.); KUR ABI–ŠU[–ma–š]ši A-ŠAR ABI–ŠU EGIR-pa UL [p]ešta “He did not give him back the country of his father (and) the position of his father” KBo 4.4 iv 64-65 + KBo 19.46:4, ed. AM 142f. (differently: “an Stelle seines Vaters”); cf. Bronze Tablet ii 39-40, ed. Otten, StBoT Beiheft 1:16f.; cf. also dΩn pedaš, j 2' a', below and KUB 13.2 i 14-15, j 2' b', below. 
	c. situation or circumstance: (In a prayer:) n– an–kan i[dΩlawaz]≠dΩ±[n]–an Ωššawi pé-e-di tit≠ta±nut “Take him (i.e., the king) [from evil] and stand him in a favorable place” KBo 7.28:13-14 (prayer, 

peda- A d 1' d' 

OH/MS), ed. Friedrich, RSO 32:218, 221 (rest. from l. 44); cf. KUB 31.127 iv 1 (solar hymn, OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 100, 106; KUB 45.20 ii 16 (rit.); naššu–ma–šta LÚ-aš hatgauwaz pé-e-ta-az išparzizi “Or the man will escape from a tight spot (i.e., difficult circumstances)” KUB 4.72 rev. 4-5 (Akk.-Hitt. liver model, OS?), ed. Güterbock, FsReiner 151 (tr. incorrectly “from a terrible spot” [= hatugaz petaz]); innarΩuwanti–ma–mu pé-e-di iyauwa zik–pat DINGIR–YA maniyahta “Only you, O my god, taught me (how?) to proceed in a difficult(?) position” KUB 30.10 obv. 8 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 112, 115 (“toi seul, mon dieu, tu m’as signifié que faire en un lieu calme/reposant”), cf. maniyahh-4 b, tr. ANET 400 (“Thou, my god, didst show me what to do in time of distress”), cf. also HED 1-2:368 (“to a position of strength you alone, my god, directed my doings”); for further exx., see e 16' (tepu p.) below. 
d. specific places identified by a dependent gen. 
— 1' in general — a' Ωpiyaš p. “place of the offering pit”: nu GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A [šar]Ω karpanzi n–at Ωpiyaš pé-e-di pËdanzi “They lift up the tables, and they carry them to the place of the offering pit” KUB 15.31 ii 6-7 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), cf. ibid. ii 10-11, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:154f. 
b' halluwaš p. “place of depth(?)” (as a designation of part of a liver in oracles): EGIR SU.MEŠ temmeš hall„waš pé-e-ta-an IŒBAT “Second SU-oracle: the temmiš ‘seized’ the place of depth(?)” KUB 18.11 rev. 10-11 (oracle, NH), cf. te-me-eš (or: TE.MEŠ) halluwaš A-ŠAR harzi KUB 22.31 obv. 6. 
c' hapaš p. “place of the rivers”: nu DINGIR. MEŠ šarΩ karpanzi n–aš apiya–pat ŠD.MEŠ-aš pée-di tienzi “They lift up (the statues of) deities and place them in the same place, (namely) in the place of the rivers” KUB 15.31 iii 57-58 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:164-167; cf. KBo 23.27 ii 28-30, ed. a 1' above. 
d' haššueznaš p. “place(s) of kingship”: EME µ.dSÎN-dU ANA DINGIR.MEŠ LUGAL-UTTI pean arha aniyanzi AŠ-RIHI.A LUGAL-UTTI GIŠ[TU]KUL. HI.A–ya parkunuwanzi “They will counteract the slander of Arma-Tarhunta in the presence of the deities of kingship; they will (also) purify the places of kingship (i.e., the places associated with the king’s daily life) and the [we]apons” KBo 2.6 i 31-33 

334

(oracle question, NH), cf. KUB 16.41 iii 2-4; KUB 50.6 ii 3840 (both oracle questions, NH). 
e' hazziwiyaš p. “place of (performing) a rite, cult place”: n–an [DINGIR.MEŠ-aš] hazziwiaš pée-da-aš šarrai “He distributes it (the bread) to the cult places [of deities]” KUB 27.68 i 10-11 (fest.). 
f' išhuzziyaš p. “place of the belt” = “beltline”: nu–šši–kan arunaš [… (išhuzziyaš pé-d)]i TÚG-aš mΩn anda pËdanza (dupl. […]x-zi) “The sea was brought up to his belt-line like a garment” KUB 33.93 iv 24-25 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 33.92 + KUB 36.10 iii 1415, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f., tr. Hittite Myths 54; (IŠTAR drove back the flooding waters of the Zuliya River) n–an–za–an–kan A-az iš[hu]zziya[š pé-d]i šarΩ Ëp[t]a “and held him (Tudhaliya) up out of water (with the water reaching) to the belt-line” KUB 31.20 iii 2-4 + KBo 16.36 iii 5-7 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Riemschneider, JCS 16:112. 
g' *itarkiaš p.: (After extinguishing torches with a mixture of wine and water poured from a bowl, they carry the materials out) n–at INA A-ŠAR itarkÏ QADU DUGDŠLIM.GAL arha peššiyanzi “and discard them (i.e., the extinguished torches) along with the bowl in the place of itarki” KUB 25.42 ii 1415 (hišuwaš fest.), translit. Dinçol, Belleten 53/206:16; n–at mahhan A-ŠAR itarkÏ aranzi “And when they arrive at the place of itarki (they place 1 mulati bread on the altar of Liluri)” KBo 33.186 obv. 12. 
h' kariyašhaš p. “place of (showing) mercy”: ANA DINGIR.MEŠ kariyašhaš pé-e-ta-an da~ hangaš “For the gods the dahangaš-installation is a place of (showing) mercy” KUB 14.7 iv 5 (prayer of Hatt. III and Pud.), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 315, 321 (“un lieu de déférence”), tr. THeth 3:141f. 
i' GIŠkurakkiyaš p. “place of the column”: nu ištarna pé-di GIŠkurakkiyaš pé-di daganzi≠pan± padda≠i± “In the central place, at the place of the column, he digs up the ground” KBo 4.1 obv. 4-5 (foundation rit., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 2.2 i 2-3, ed. Kellerman, Diss. 126, 134; cf. [GIŠkura]kkiaš pé-e-ta-an Ëšzi “There is a place of the column” KUB 30.29 obv. 18 (birth rit.), ed. StBoT 29:22f. 
j' linkiyaš p. “place of oath(-taking)”: [k]inuna– an kΩša […] linkiyaš pé-di dašuwahher “Now they 

peda- A d 1' r' 
have just blinded him at the place of oath” KBo 6.34 i 13-14 (soldiers’ oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:6f. 
k' nepišaš p. “place of the sky”: [(n)]–aš ne~ pišaš pé-di katta tia[nzi] “They put them (i.e., the birds) down at the ‘place of the sky’” KUB 15.32 iv 46 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.31 iv 13 (MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:168f. (wrongly “tritt man zum Platz des Himmels hin”); perhaps a place named “sky” is in view. 
l' parnaš p.: [š]ipanzakanzi–ma apΩt–pat par~ naš pé-e-ta-an KUB 32.137 ii 8 (foundation rit., MH/NS), for full treatment, see under pËdant-a. 
m' paršuraš p. “place of soup” > “soup kitchen”: namma–kan parš„raš pé-di ŠAH-≠aš± UR.GI‡aš KÁ-aš lË tiyazi “Moreover, let a pig (or) a dog not enter the doorway into the soup kitchen (lit. place of soup)” KUB 13.4 i 20 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 148f., Süel, Direktif Metni 22f.; cf. ibid. iii 59-60; ŠA TU‡.HI.A AŠ-RIHI.A SIGﬁ-yahhan Ëštu “Let the soup kitchens be kept in good condition” KUB 13.2 iv 25 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 51. 
n' šakiyaš p.“the place of the omen”: nu–war–at A-ŠAR IZKIM-aš […] Bo 1850 obv. 20, translit. StBoT 
15:19. 
o' GIŠšarhuliyaš p. “place of the pillar”: n–an GIŠšarhuliaš pé-e-di t[iyanzi] “And they deposit it (i.e., the figure of a bull) at the place of the pillar” KBo 15.24 ii 30 (foundation rit., MH/NS). 
p' šurziyaš p.: namma dIM Manuzi DINGIR. MEŠ–ya šurziyaš pé-e-da-aš kattan arha udanzi “Moreover they bring the Storm God of Manuzi and the (other) deities out to the places of šurzi-” KBo 
15.37 i 1-3 (hišuwaš fest., MH/NS); cf. KBo 9.133 obv. 10. 
q' talpuriyaš p.: parΩ–ma talpuriyaš pé-di 1 NINDAmulatin ŠA [\ UPNI …] / … paršiya KBo 
20.123 iv 13-14 (Kizzuwatnean rit.). 
r' tuliyaš p. “place of assembly”: (in a list of deities being invoked) tuliyaš AŠ-RU ≠A±-ŠAR DˆNI DINGIR.MEŠ kue[dani] pé[-di tul]iya [t]iškanzi “O Place of Assembly, the place of judgment, at what place the deities are accustomed to assemble” KUB 31.121 i! 21-22 + KUB 48.111:12 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. 
335

Lebrun, Hymnes 242, 245; tuliyaš pé-e-da-aš (var. tu~ liyaš pé-te coll. Singer) DIN[G]IR.MEŠ kuedani pé-di (var. [p]é-te, coll. Singer) tuliya tiškanzi “O Place of Assembly: at what place the deities are accustomed to assemble” KUB 6.45 iii 11-12 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 6.46 iii 50-51, ed. Singer, Muw.Pr. 20, 39, pé-e-da-aš may be an animate nom. functioning as voc. (Singer, Muw.Pr. 63); n–at duliyaš pé-di anda erer “And they (i.e., the deities) arrived at the place of assembly” KUB 33.106 iv 18 (Ullikummi, 3rd tablet), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:30f.; LUGAL-un dul[iyaš] pé-e-di wakrian≠zi± “They will revolt against the king at the place of asse[mbly]” KBo 10.7 iii 6-7 (omen apod., OH/ NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 39, 44; nu–tta–kkan URUHattušaš DING[IR.MEŠ]-aš tuliya[š AŠ]-RU URUArinnaš tuel Ωššianza U[RU-aš] URUNeriqqaš URUZippaland[a]š ŠA DUMU–KA URU.DIDLI. HI.A uwandaru “Let Hattuša, the pla[ce] of div[ine] assembly, Arinna, your beloved c[ity], Nerik (and) Zippalanda, the cities of your son, be visible/distinguished for you” KUB 21.19 iv 25-28 (prayer of Pud.), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 8:98f. 
s' walliyaš p. “place of pride”: nu URUTimuhalaš URU-aš [ŠA LÚ.MEŠ UR]UGašga walliyaš pé-e-daan Ëšta “The town of Timuhala was a place of pride [of the] Kašgaeans” KUB 19.13 i 47-48 (DŠ frag. 34, Murš. II), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:110. 
t' wilanaš p. “place of clay”: IM-aš pé-e-da-an KUB 3.93:8 (Erimhuš Bogh.), see lex. sec. 
u' zahhiyaš p. “place of battle, battlefield”: [m]Ωn apiya–pat ≠zahh±iyaš pé-e-di arha […] nam~ ma–an munnΩizzi “If in that same place on the battlefield […] away, and then he conceals him” KUB 
23.72 rev. 50 (Mita of Pahhuwa, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:38; nu–za ŠEŠ-an LÚgainan / […-]an LÚaran LÚša-ag-ga-an-ta-an ≠UN±-an zahhiyaš pe-di / [h„dΩk(?) U]L Ëpši UL–ma–an–kan [ku]eš[i] “(If) you do not [immediately(?)] seize brother, in-law, […], friend, (or?) acquaintance in the place of battle, and you do not kill him, (but you put him on the road)” KUB 26.29 + KUB 31.55 17-18 (protocol of Arn. I, MH/NS), cf. Klengel, ZA 57:228 w. n. 1. 
v' AŠAR ANDAHŠUMSAR “place of the AN~ DAHŠUM-plant”: A-ŠAR AND[AHŠUMSAR] KBo 
22.186 ii 5 (fest., NS) (in broken context). 

peda- A d 2' a' 

w' AŠAR DINGIR-LIM “the place of the divinity”: n–ašta 2 KUŠkuršuš LABˆR¨TIM katta danzi nu pé-e-da-an duqqΩri ANA A-ŠAR DINGIR-LIM–pat awan katta GIŠKAK.HI.A walhanteš n–uš apiya gankanzi A-ŠAR DINGIR-LIM–ma 2 KUŠkuršuš GIBIL-TIM gankanzi “They take the two old hunting bags down; (their) place is prescribed; the pegs are (already) driven in directly below the place of the aforementioned (-pat 1 a 2') deity (i.e., the hunting bags); it is there that they hang them; but in the (previous) place of the deity (i.e., of the hunting bags) they hang the two new hunting bags” KUB 
55.43 i 8-11 (rit. for renewing the hunting bags), ed. McMahon, AS 25:144f., Otten, FsFriedrich 352, 354. 
x' AŠAR DN “place of DN”: parΩ–ma LÚ[M]A~ ŒAR A-ŠAR dKatahha 1 UDU TI-an Ëpzi n–an–kan ANA A-ŠAR dKatahha anda hat<tan>zi “Further, the watchman/guard of the place of Katahha seizes a live sheep, and they slit it open at the place of Katahha” KUB 53.12 iii 22-24 (festival for Tel.), ed. Haas/ Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:51f. (differently). 
y' DUMU.LUGAL-aš p. “place of the prince”: 1 LÚSAGI[(.A DUMU.LUGAL-aš)] pé-e-da-an dΩ[i] “One cupbearer ta[kes] the place of the prince” KUB 
51.1 i 2 (fest. for Tel.), w. dupl. KUB 53.1 i 3, ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:40, 44, 48. 
z' ÉRIN.MEŠ-aš p. “place of the troops”: ≠1 ÉRIN±.MEŠ-aš pé-e-da-an KBo 10.31 ii 15 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:102; […] ÉRIN.MEŠ-aš pé-e-di šËr kuit […] KUB 43.29 iii 12 (village offerings, OS); see also ex. in j 1' a' 3'', below. 
aa' AŠAR GAL MEŠEDI “the place of the Chief of the Guards”: LÚUGULA.10 LÚ.MEŠ MEŠEDI– ma pa[izzi] n–aš ANA A-ŠAR GAL M[EŠEDI] ANA LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI k[attan tiyazi] “The Overseer of Ten of the Guards g[oes] and he [steps] n[ext] to the guards in the place of the Chief of the Guards” IBoT 2.84 iii 9-11 (fest. of the month). 
bb' AŠAR SISKUR “place of sacrifice” KUB 
32.137 ii 11 (foundation rit., MH/NS), for interpretation, see pedant-. 
2' gen. of verbal nouns — a' Ωppa appannaš p. “place of retreat”: URU.BÀD (eras.) EGIR-pa ap~ pannaš AŠ-RU NU.GÁL kuiški Ëšta “(In PalΩ) 

336

there was no fortress, no place of retreat” KBo 5.8 ii 24-25, ed. AM 152-155; cf. k 1' d' below. 
b' hannešnaš p. “place of judgement”: han~ nešnaš išhΩš zik nu hannešnaš pé-e-di dariyašhaš– tiš NU.GÁL “You are a (just) judge (lit. lord of judgment); in the place of the judgment you do not tire” ABoT 44 + KUB 36.79 i 24-25 (solar hymn, OH/NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 78:239, cf. KUB 24.3 i 48; KUB 30.11 rev. 22; cf. A-ŠAR DˆNI KUB 31.121 i! 21-22, ed. d 1' r', above. 
c' haššannaš p. “place of breeding”: [ANŠE. KUR.RA] MUNUS.AL–ma haššannaš pé-e-da-aš / [pehud?]anzi “They [lead(?)] the mare(s) to the places of breeding(??)” KUB 9.1 ii 15-16 (rit., pre-NH/ NS) | in view of the part. arnuwant-“pregnant (animal)” perhaps we should restore the v. here as [arnu]anzi. 
d' hinkuwaš p. “place of bowing”: parΩ–ma hinkuwaš pé-di 1 NINDAmulatin ŠA \ UP[NI] 5 NINDA. SIG.MEŠ–ya paršiya “Next (s)he breaks one mulati-bread of one half measure and five thin breads for the place of bowing” KBo 20.123 iv 11-12 (fest.). 
e' irhawaš p. “place of offering”: mahhan–ma d.KUŠkuršaš […] irhauwaš pé-di ari “As soon as the deified hunting bag arrives at the place of offering” KUB 20.25 i 4-5 (winter trip of hunting bag, OH?/NS); cf. KUB 11.30 iv 6. 
f' piddumaš p. “place of running”: [pí ]d-duma-aš pé-e-da-an […] KBo 13.119 ii 7 (purif. rit., NS). 
g' tiyawaš p. “place of stepping”: LUGAL-uš– kan GIŠGI[GIR]-az katta tiyazi LUGAL-uš–kan tiya[uw]aš pé-di eša “The king steps down from the chariot; the king sits down at the place of stepping” KUB 25.18 ii 6-7 (ANDAHŠUM fest.). 
h' wišiyawaš p. “place of grazing”: KUR URUIš~ titina–ma–za h„man dΩš n–at–za apel wiši~ yauwaš pé-e-da-an iyat “He (sc. Pihhuniya) took the whole country of Ištitina and made it his grazing place” KBo 3.4 iii 71-72, ed. AM 88f.; [o+]\ IKU GIŠTIR ŠA GIŠTUKUL LÚIŠ KÙ.GI ≠x-x± INA URUZunauliya wešiy[auwaš pé]-≠e±-da-an “X+\ IKUs of forest belonging to the GIŠTUKUL-estate of the golden chariot-fighter, […] in Zunauli, a place of grazing” KBo 5.7 rev. 10 (land grant, MH/MS), ed. Riemschneider, MIO 6:348f. 

peda- A e 4' 
e. p. modified by adjectives — 1' arpuwan p. “inaccessible place”: [namma–aš] arp„wan AŠ-RU “[Moreover it (i.e., the city of Timmuhala)] is an inaccessible place” KUB 19.37 ii 16 (ann. of Murš. II), ed. AM 168f. | on arpuwant-, see HED 1-2:168-170, HW™ 1:341, Weitenberg, U-Stämme 89f. 
2' aššiyan p. “beloved place”: KUB 36.90 obv. 1518 (prayer, NH), see a 3' b' above. 
3' Ωššu p. “good place” — a' in general: KBo 7.28:13-14 (prayer, OH/MS), see c above; a-aš-ša-wa-az pé-e-d[a-az] KUB 45.20 ii 16 in uncertain context. 
b' an anatomical term: mΩn–ašta Ωš≠šu± n–ašta Ωš≠šu±wa≠z pé-e-d±[a-az eh]u “If it is good (to you), come out through the ‘good place’” KUB 33.120 ii 28 (Song of Kumarbi, pre-NH/NS), translit. Myth. 156, tr. Hittite Myths 41; cf. ≠a-aš-šu?-u?-wa-az±–ma pé-da!-az KUB 
33.120 ii 34; a-aš-šu-u-wa-za pé-e-da-az KUB 33.120 ii 84; [aššuwaz pé]-e-da-az UR.SAG-iš dIM-aš parΩ uit § … nu Ωššu pé-≠e-da±-an-še-≠et± TÚG-an mΩn [anda šËkuer(?)] “The heroic Stormgod came out of [the ‘good p]lace’ … and his good place [they closed up(?)] as (they would mend) a (torn) cloth” KUB 33.120 ii 75-76 (Song of Kumarbi, pre NH/NS), translit. Myth. 158, tr. Hittite Myths 42, based on Hoffner in Mem.Finkelstein 110, who compares nu tarnaššet TÚG-an mΩn[…] anda šËkuËr … [n–ašta SIGﬁ-az pé]-e-daaz UR.SAG-iš dIM-aš parΩ uit KUB 33.120 ii 73-75. 
Note how the adjectival Ωššawaz writing seems to be confined to the non-anatomical expression, while the substantival Ωššuwaz writing is consistently used in the anatomical idiom. For a similar congruence of spelling and semantics, see maniyahhai-n. mng. 3. 
4' harwaši p. “secret place”: For KBo 1.42 i 37 (Izi Bogh., NH), see lex. sec. above; uššaniyazi–ma–at–za kuwapi n–at harwaši pé-di (dupl. omitted pedi) lË uššaniyazi “If at some time he sells it (i.e., the gift) let him not sell it in a secret place” KUB 13.6 ii 30-31 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 154f. (ii 47), Süel, Direktif Metni 44f.; n–at–kan URU-ri ŠÀ É.ŠÀ harwaši pé-di dΩi “And she deposits it (i.e., the ritual paraphernelia) in the city within the inner chamber, in a secret place” KUB 17.27 ii 24 (rit. against sorcery, MH?/NS), tr. ANET 347; nu harwΩši pé-di GIŠ≠ZA.LAM.GAR± tarnan “In a secret place a tent is pitched” KBo 5.2 iii 54 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH?/NS); 
337

nu–wa–šmaš apΩš idΩluš huw[(a)]ppaš harwašiya pé-di mukiškit “And has that evil hostile one kept invoking you (gods) in a secret place(?)” KUB 15.32 i 48-49 (rit. of drawing paths, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.31 i 45-46 (MH/NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:152f., s.v. mugai a 1' a' 2''; cf. [EN SŠSKU]R harwašiya pé-di tÏËzzi KBo 23.23 obv. 28 (MH/MS) | harwašiya (note: not *harwašaya) is an all. of an i-stem adj. of type karuili-(HE §71). 
5' hatku p.“tight spot, difficult circumstances”: cf. KUB 4.72 rev. 4-5 (Akk.-Hitt. liver model, OS?), c above. 
6' ikunan p. “cool place”: […] ikuni pé-di tit~ tanua[nzi] “[They] make [them (i.e., the horses)] stand in a cool place” KUB 29.41:4 (hipp., MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 168, cf. ikuni pé-e-di ibid. line 7. 
7' innarΩwan p. “difficult(?) position”: see KUB 
30.10 obv. 8 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), c, above. 
8' nakki p. — a' “important place” (cf. nakki-A 1 e): nu edašš–a ANA É.HI.A GIBIL.HI.A ehu nu–za nakkÏ pé-e-da-an Ëp nu mahhan iyattari nu–za eni– pat pé-e-da-an Ëp “Come to these new temples and take (them as your) important place. When you go, take this very place” KUB 29.4 iii 27-29 (relocation of the Night Deity, NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 24f.; nu dUTU-ŠI B´LI–YA šΩk pé-e-da-an mekki nakki ANA LÚ.KÚR–ya–aš (sic) arziyan “My Majesty, my Lord, know that the place is very important; it is the bread-basket(??) of the enemy” ABoT 60 obv. 20-21 (letter, MH/MS), ed. THeth 16:76f. 
b' “difficult/hard to reach place” (cf. nakki-A 2 a): n–aš–kan nakki pé-e-di [aš(anza)] “And it (the city of Ura) is [situa]ted in a place hard to reach” KUB 14.17 iii 22-23 (ann. of Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 26.79 i 16, ed. AM 98f.; cf. also nakkÏ AŠ-RIHI.A KBo 4.4 iv 3031, ed. AM 138f., and k 2' c', below. 
9' parku p. “elevated place”: “Before the sun rises” nu–ššan LÚAZU pargaui pé-di [o]x-nai šarΩ paizzi “the exorcist-diviner goes up to a x-nai in an elevated place; (then after the sun rises, …)” KUB 
46.57 i 6-7 (rit.); for pargawei (pedi) KBo 3.8 iii 9-11, see e 15', below. 
10' šalli p. “Great Place”: našma kuiš ŠA µPiyašili NUMUN-aš INA KURKargamiš šalli pé-eda-an tiyazi “Or whatever descendant of Piyašili assumes(?)/ascends(?) the ‘Great Place’ (i.e., the 

peda- A e 13' 

throne) in the land of Kargamiš” KBo 1.28 obv. 12-14 (recognition of Piyaššili, NH) | note that tiyazi governing the acc. instead of the d.-l. is highly unusual; nu–za URU.dU-šan šal[lin AŠ-R]A iyat “And he made the city of Tarhuntašša (his) ‘Gr[eat Plac]e’ (i.e., capital)” KBo 
6.29 i 32 (short vers. of Apology of Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 46f. (“H[auptstadt]”), NBr 46f. (“und machte … zur Residenz”); n–an apiya pé-[(di LUGAL-i)]znanni tittanunun nu–mu dIŠTAR GAŠAN–YA! mašiwan [(da)]tta nu–mu šallai pé-di ANA KUR URUHatti LUGALiznani [(ti)]ttanut “And I installed him in that place (apiya pedi “there in place”) in the kingship. IŠTAR, my Lady, how many times you took me! And you made me to stand in the ‘Great Place’ in kingship over the land of Hatti” KUB 1.1 iv 63-66 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 + KUB 19.70 iv 24-27, ed. NBr 32f., StBoT 24:28f. (“hast du … mich auf hervorragendem Platz im Lande Hatti zur Königsherrschaft eingesetzt”). 
11' šani p. “one and the same place”: šuppa h„ešu ŠA GUD.MAH ŠA GUDÁB.HI.A ŠA UDU. HI.A U ŠA MÁŠ.GAL.HI.A ištanani peran P¸NI DINGIR-LIM šanÏ pé-di tianzi “The raw meat of the bull, cows, sheep (and) billy goats they place before the altar, in front of the deity, in one and the same place” KBo 4.9 i 12-15 (fest., OH?/NS). 
12' šuppi p. “holy place”: mΩn–kan INA É DINGIR-LIM anda šup[p]ai pé-di kuin imma kuin maršaštarrin wemiyanzi “If they find desecration, of whatsoever sort, in the temple, in a holy place, (this is the ritual for/against it)” ABoT 28:2-4 + ABoT 29 ii 19-21 (= KBo 23.1 ii 19-21) (colophon of rit., NH), ed. maršaštarri-, Lebrun, Hethitica 3:144, 151f.; cf. KUB 30.42 iv 21-23 (cat., NH); cf. ABoT 28:8-11 + ABoT 29 ii 25-28 (= KBo 23.1 ii 25-28) (Ammihatna’s rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Heth. 3:144, 152; n–an–kan šuppai pé-di anda pËdai “And he (LÚpatili-) brings it (i.e., the lamb) into the holy place” KBo 5.1 iv 25-26 (Papanikri’s rit., NH), ed. Pap. 12*f.; mΩn–ma HUR.SAG–ma kuiški našma šinapši šuppa AŠ-RU kuitki HUL-ahhan “But if any mountain or any šinapši, any holy place, has been abused” KBo 11.1 obv. 32 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:107, 116. 
13' damai p. “another place”: nu–mu pittuliyai peran ištanzaš–miš tamatta pé-e-di zappiškizzi “Out of anxiety my soul keeps dripping/leaking to 

338

another place (i.e., away from me)” KUB 30.10 rev. 14-15 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 114, 117, tr. ANET 401, RTAT 191, NERT 169, Güterbock, JNES 33:326; nu namma damËdani pé-di GIŠlahur[nuzzin d]Ωi “Then, he/she places the foliage in another place” KUB 27.67 iii 48 (rit. for Tarpatašši, MH/NS); [nu–kan?] DUMU.MUNUS d[a]mËdani kuedanikki pé-di pËdanzi “They will bring/move the daughter to some other place” KBo 18.10:14-17 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:205f. 
14' dammel(i) p. “uncultivated place, uninhabited place, virgin land” (for the mng. of dammeli-, see Güterbock, RHA XII/74:103-105; earlier differently Pap. 12) 
— a' in the neut. nom.-acc.: [UMMA? … LUG]AL. GAL mΩn–za UN-aš dammel AŠ-RU dammelin URU-an ešari “The Great [Ki]ng [(speaks) as follows]: If a person inhabits an uninhabited place (or) an uninhabited town” KUB 45.28 + KUB 39.97 obv. 1 (rit.), translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:154 | since “a place of another” (gen. of damai-) makes no sense here, and the immediate juxtaposition w. dammelin URU-an virtually assures us that the adj. is the same, we can see that the adj. dammeli-also has a stem dammel-; perhaps this stem was preferred w. neuters in order to avoid confusion w. the d.-l. form dammeli; takku LÚ-aš damËdani A.ŠÀ A.GÀR anda aki takku LÚ ELLAM A.ŠÀ A.GÀR É 1 MA.NA 20 GŠN KÙ. BABBAR–ya pΩi takku MUNUS-za–ma 3 MA.NA KÙ.BABBAR pΩi takku UL–ma A.ŠÀ A.GÀR dammel pé-e-da-an duwan 3 DANNA duwann–a 3 DANNA nu–kan kuiš kuiš URU-aš anda SI≈SÁ-ri nu ap„š–pat dΩi takku URU-aš NU.GÁL n–aš–kan šamenzi “If a man has been killed on the field and fallow of another person — if he (the victim) is a free man, he (the land owner) shall give the field and fallow, a house, 1 mina and 20 shekels of silver. If (the victim) is a free woman, he shall pay 3 minas of silver. If, however, it is not field and fallow, (but) an uncultivated place, (then they shall measure) 3 miles in one direction and 3 miles in the opposite direction, and whatever settlement is determined within that area, he (the victim’s representative) shall take the same (payments) as (prescribed) above. If there is no town (within the measured area), he shall give up his claims” KBo 6.4 i 913 (late vers. of laws, par. IV), ed. HL 20, 172-174, tr. Hoffner in LawColl 216. 

peda- A e 16' 
b' in the d.-l.: nu HUR.SAG-i dammeli pé-di [paiwani nu k]uwapi GIŠAPIN-aš UL Ωrškizzi [nu apiya] paiwani “[We go] to a mountain, to an uncultivated place; we go where the plow does not come” VBoT 24 i 31-33 (Anniwiyani’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 108f. (differently: “to the second location”); [mΩ]n ≠É.x.x.x. n±a!šma É.MEŠ ≠GIBIL±.MEŠ dammeli pé-di wedanzi “When they build … house(s) or new houses in an uninhabited place” KBo 4.1 obv. 1 (building rit., NH), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 126, 134, tr. ANET 356 (“in a different place”); n–at arahza dammili pé-di dΩi “And he puts them (i.e., the utensils) outside in an uninhabited/uncultivated place” KBo 5.1 i 13 (Papanikri’s rit., NH), ed. Pap. 2*f.; nu kuit dammeli pé-di tianzi kuit–ma ANA GIDIM SUM-anzi “And the one (compensation) they put in an uninhabited place, the other one they give to the spirit of the dead” KBo 2.6 i 35-36 (oracle question, NH) | this is strikingly sim. to the rit. of the scapegoat in Leviticus 16, where one goat is sacrificed to Yahweh, and one is sent into the wilderness; n–at (dupl. –aš) dammeli pé-e-di (dupl. [p]édi) pariyan ANA d[(7.7.BI)] arha kuranzi “They cut them (i.e., the sacrificial animals) beyond an uncultivated place for the (divine) Heptad” KUB 
56.59 ii 17-18 (rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 7.54 ii 21-22, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 72:140; GIŠZA.LAM.GAR.HI.A mΩn dammili pé-di mΩn–kan GIŠTIR-išni anda tarnanzi “They set up the tents either in an uncultivated place or in the forest/orchard” KUB 17.28 iii 36-38 (incant., NS); cf. KBo 5.2 ii 30-33 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH/NS), translit. HE 36f.; [nu UR.TU]R ŠAH.TUR dam~ mili pé-e-di pËdanzi / [n–aš IZI-i]t warnuwanzi “They bring the [pup]py (and) the piglet to an uninhabited place [and] burn [them] with [fire]” KUB 
12.58 iii 17-18 (NH); cf. KBo 15.34 ii 11-12 (rit. for the Stormgod of Kuliwišna, MH/NS). 
15' daššu p. “strong place”: DÀRA.MAŠ-an katta GIŠeya hamikta paršanan! tašša<u>i pé-di hamikta ulipanan pargawei hamikta “It (sc. the river) bound the deer under the eya-tree, it bound the leopard at a strong place, it bound the ulipana-at a high (place)” KBo 3.8 iii 9-11 (conjuration in Wattiti’s rit., NS), ed. Collins, Diss. 49f., for an earlier interpretation we no longer follow, see paršana-a 1'. 
16' tepu p. “little place,” used as technical term (perhaps a euphemism for the netherworld and/or 
339

the grave; cf. lala-3): [nu–za? A-ŠAR-ŠU?] ANA dHebat menahhanda Ëpta tepawe–wa–mu pé-di pau?[wanzi dU-aš memišta?] kuitman–wa–šši MU. KAM.HI.A kuiËš daranteš nu–war–aš–za šarΩ tit~ tanuzi “He (i.e., Tašmišu) took [his place] across from Hepat (saying): ‘[The Stormgod commanded] me [to] g[o?] to the Little Place, until he fulfills the years that are decreed for him” KUB 33.106 ii 5-7 (Ullikummi), ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:20f., tr. Hittite Myths 58, LMI 159 (“[Il dio della tempesta mi ha detto di anda]re in un posto piccolo fino a che non avesse compiuto gli anni che erano stati stabiliti per lui”); nu tepu pé-e-da-an wËš[(kanzi)] “[They] bewail the Little Place (i.e., the grave?)” KUB 30 25 rev. 10 (funeral rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 39.5 rev. 13, ed. HTR 28f.; (The king drinks) tepu pé-e-da-an EME-aš hantΩnza … dUD.SIGﬁ–ya “the Little Place, true speech … the propitious day” KUB 2.8 v 25-30 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NS), cf. lala-3; cf. KUB 2.8 ii 1214, 44; [t]epu pé-e-da-an EME-an handa≠n±tan lam~ mar tartan dUD.SIGﬁ “the Little Place, true speech, the … moment, the propitious day” KBo 19.128 vi 2224 (ANDAHŠUM fest.?, OH/NS), ed. lammar 1, StBoT 13:16f.; KBo 23.72 rev. 24-25 + KUB 32.87 rev. 13-14 (fest., OH/NS); KBo 13.176:9-10 (ANDAHŠUM fest.); KBo 4.13 vi 36-37 + KUB 10.82 vi 8-9 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NH); tepauwaš pé-e<da->aš lamarhandattiš KUB 2.1 ii 40, ed. lamarhan~ datt-; cf. frag. KUB 36.79 ii 46 (prayer, OH/NS) | lamarhan~ datt-may have to do w. the determining of the hour of death. 
f. w. preceding adv. (on this category cf. HED 1:480f.) 
— 1' apiya pedi “in that place”: mΩn UL–ma nu– šmaš–šan uwanzi apiya pé-e-di tašuwahhanzi “Otherwise, they will come and blind you in that place (i.e., where you are)” HKM 14:10-14 (letter, MH/ MS), ed. HBM 140f. (“an Ort und Stelle”); cf. HKM 16:11-15; [mΩn LUGAL-uš URUHa]ttušaz URUTΩwiniya /[…]paš paššui Ωri / […]x apiya pé-e-di arta “[When the king] arrives in Tawiniya from Hattusa, at the paššu of …, […] stands […] in that place” KBo 
34.167 i 1-3 (fest. frag., MS); for KUB 1.1 iv 63-64 (Apology of Hatt. III), see above e 10'. 
2' ištarna pedi — a' “inside, in the interior”: GIŠkapanu–ma–za–kan MUŠ-aš harzi […] ištarna pé-di–ma–at–za–kan NIM.LÀL ≠harzi± GIŠlahhur~ nuzziaš–šan šer TI°MUŠEN tiya[t] katta–ma–an–za– an GIŠgapanu–šši MUŠ-aš neyat ištarna pé-di–ma– kan NIM.LÀL ney[at] “The snake holds (i.e., occu

peda- A f 2' a' 

pies) the trunk (of the tree), the bee holds (i.e., occupies) it (sc. the tree trunk, namely) the midst. Above an eagle perched in the foliage, below a snake encircled it(?–an faulty for –at) at its trunk; in (its) midst the bee buzzed around(?)” KUB 43.62 iii? 3-7 (myth.), cf. lahurnuzzi b | Eichner, Heth.u.Idg. 45 n. 9, took GIŠg/kapanu as either an Akkadogram or a loan from Semitic, and not a case of an endingless loc.; the antecedent of the -at in 4 is either the tree (neut. taru) or the neut. Hitt. n. g/kapanu; the antecedent of the -an in line 6 is unclear (the eagle??) | for –za–kan … har-, see nu–za–kan LÚ.KÚR kuit [NA›hekur P]ittalahša IŠTU ÉRIN.MEŠ NAM.RA harta “Because the enemy held the hekur of Pittalašha with troops and civilian captives” KBo 2.5 i 11-12, ed. AM 180f.; anda–ya–za– kan GIŠšuruhhaš GIŠGIDRU-an harzi n–aš–kan LUGAL-i me~ nahhanda tiyazi “He holds the staff of šuruhha, and he approaches the king” KBo 4.9 iii 38-40 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH?/ NS); haššÏ (GUNNI-i) ištarna pedi, i.e., the interior of the brazier (or hearth) in opposition to haššÏ ta~ pušza, appears as a place where different cultic activities take place (cf. Popko, Kultobjekte 48-59): haššÏ ištarna pé-e-di 1-ŠU GIŠhalmaššuitti 1-ŠU … nam~ ma haššÏ tapušza 1-ŠU šuhhΩi “He pours once inside the brazier, once at the throne, … again/finally once to the side of the brazier” KUB 53.11 ii 19-21 (fest.); h[ašš]Ï ištarna pé-e-di dΩi “He puts (different offering material) into the interior of the brazier” KUB 53.11 ii 25-26; cf. KUB 11.19 iv 5, KUB 20.13 iv 3; KUB 20.59 vi 4-5 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 30.53:3 and passim in fest.; nu mahhan nekuzi nu–ššan ANA EN SISKUR hantezzi palši ANA GÌR.MEŠ–ŠU ŠU. MEŠ–ŠU UZUGÚ–ŠU ištarna pé-di ANA GIŠNÁ–ŠU 4 GIŠpatiyallËš hantezzi palši SŠG Ωndaran hamanki “When it becomes evening, for the sacrificer she binds wool first of all upon his feet, hands, and neck, and (then) inside (the house?) upon his bed, and upon (its) four legs, first (with) blue wool” VBoT 24 i 10-14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 106f. and s.v. GIŠpatiyalli-; “When they arrive up at the portico” nu–kan šuppiš LÚSANGA ŠA ÉheštΩ U 3 LÚ.MEŠ ÉheštΩ šarΩzziya Éhilamni ištarni pé-di anda tianzi “The holy priest of the hešta-house and three men of the hešta-house step into the upper portico, (namely) in (its) interior” VAT 7470:14-16 (fest.), translit. Otten, OLZ 50:390 n. 2; EGIR–ŠU–ma gangati ANA GIŠÙR.HI.A É-ri ištarna pé-di dΩi EGIR-ŠU– ma kangati É-ri–pat ištarna pé-di dΩi “Afterwards 

340

he (the sacrificer) places gangati on/at the beams inside the house, then he places gangati inside the same house” KUB 15.42 iii 23-24 (purif. rit., MH/NS); [našm]a–aš–kan É-ri ištarna pé-di uizzi “[O]r it (the snake) comes into the interior of the house” KUB 53.50 i 9 (rit.); 10 hazizi ŠA NINDA iyan ANA GIŠBANSUR.GIŠ ištarna pé-e-di GIŠšarhuli–kan menahhanta ANA dÉ.A dΩi “10 ears made of bread (s)he places for Ea upon a wooden table inside (the house) opposite the pillar” KBo 24.109 + KBo 15.24 iii 3-4 (foundation rit., MH/NS), cf. AlHeth 159f., 208; ištarna pé-e-di KBo 34.68 iii 17, 18, 24; for KBo 4.1 obv. 4-5 (foundation rit., OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 2.2 i 2-3, see d 1' i' above. 
b' “in the center, midpoint, middle”: kar„~ wariwar UD.≠KAM±!-ti ištarna pé-di 1-ŠU nekuz mehur 1-ŠU “Early in the morning (once), at the noon time (lit. ‘at midday’) once, (and) at dusk once” (I invoke the deity) KUB 7.5 ii 21-23 (Paškuwatti’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Hoffner, AuOr 5:274, 278, tr. ANET 350, cf. nekuz b 2'; […]x LÚ GIŠGIDRU ištarna pé-e-da<an> harzi “The marshal occupies the central position” KBo 11.51 iii 6 (ANDAHŠUM fest., OH/NS), ed. Badalì, SEL 2:69f. 
g. w. possessive: nu wΩtar mΩhhan kuwapi aršmi nu pé-e-da-mi-it UL šaqahhi “Like water I flow somewhere, but I don’t know my place (i.e., I don’t know where I am)” KUB 36.75 + 1226/u iii 19-20 (prayer of Kantuzzili, OH/MS), w. par. KUB 31.130 rev. 5 (OH/MS), ed. Otten/Rüster, ZA 67:56f., for this couplet, see the lines from an Old Babylonian bil. incant. quoted by W. Lambert, JNES 
33:301 (bottom), and cf. KUB 30.10 rev. 14-15 w. Güterbock, JNES 33:326; “[If the stars(?)] surround the horn of the moon” [(harkan) KUR]-e EGIR-pa pé-e-di–ši eš[(a)] “a depopulated [lan]d will again settle in its place” KUB 8.12 ii 4 (lunar omen), w. dupl. KUB 34.16 iii 13-14, ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 124f.; for approximate Akk. apodoses cf. CAD A/2 403f.; š–an išpandi nakkit dΩhhun pé-e-di–šši–ma ZÀ.AH.LI-an aniy[anun] “I took it (i.e., the city Hattuša) at night with difficulty and on its site [I] sowed [wee]ds” KBo 3.22 rev. 47-48 (Anitta, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 18:12f.; cf. KBo 10.2 i 36-37 (ann. of Hatt. I, NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:46f.; tÏya šalliš MULaš nu HUR.SAG.MEŠ-uš pé-di-iš-mi a[ra]≠i± HUR.SAGPentayaš pé-e-te-et-ti Ëš … HUR.SAGHargaš pé-e-ti-id-di Ëš HUR.SAGTudhaliyaš pé-e-di-it-ti Ëš 
“Rise, O great star. Ha[lt] the mountains in their 

peda- A h 1' 
places. Mount Pentaya stay in your place. … Mt. Harga, remain in your place. Mt. Tudhaliya, remain in your place” KUB 29.1 ii 23-27 (foundation rit., OH/NS), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 14, 28, Marazzi, VO 5:154f. w. previous lit. (both differently), tr. ANET 357 (also differently); n–at NIM.LÀL.MEŠ udandu [n–]at pé-di–šši tiandu “Let the bees bring it and put it in its place” KUB 
43.60 i 9-10; cf. pé-e-di-iš-ši dΩu KUB 43.60 i 8, 13, 15; the difference between the locatives in this category and those in h 2' is not always clear. 
h. pedi (d.-l.) and pedi–šši in place, on the spot, in loco — 1' wr. pedi or INA AŠRI: nu–ššan paizzi INA URUŠam„ha ANA dIŠTAR Œ´RI mukeššar pé-di pΩi “He will proceed to give an invocation ritual to IŠTAR of the Field in Šamuha in place” KUB 32.130 6-7 (cult of IŠTAR, NH), ed. mukeššar 1 b 1', Danmanville, RHA XIV/59:42f., Lebrun, Samuha 168f.; MUNUSalhuitri– ma–ššan akuwanna pé-di (var. pé-e[-di]) pianzi “They give to the alhuitra-woman (something) to drink in place” KUB 27.59 iv 9 + KUB 54.2 iv 10 (fest.), w. dupl. KBo 29.67:13; [URU]Kuru[(št)]amaš URUGaz~ ziurašš–a [(pé-di kururiyahher)] “The cities of Kuruštama and Gazziura started war on the spot (i.e., right where they were)” KUB 1.1 ii 8-9 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupls. KBo 3.6 i 72-73, KUB 1.6 ii 2-3, ed. Hatt. 14f., StBoT 24:10f.; mahhan–ma–ššan MELQ´TA (i.e., halkueššar) h„man pé-e-di handanzi “When they arrange the entire material for sacrifice in place” KUB 32.123 iii 8-9 (fest., NH); EN.SISKUR–ma–za– kan adanna akuwanna pé-di handaiz[zi] “The sacrificer arranges food (and) drink in (that?) place” KUB 27.66 ii 26 (fest.); nu mahhan DINGIR-LAM aniyauwanzi zinnanzi ki–ya–ššan h„man pé-di handΩnzi “And when they finish treating the deity, they arrange all this in place” KUB 29.4 i 50-52 (rit. for Night Goddess, NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 10-13; cf. ibid. ii 13, ed. Schw.Gotth. 14f.; LÚ.MEŠMUHALDIM–ma–ššan MU-ti mËyaniaš 1 UDU.ŠIR 1 GUD.MAH–ya hui~ ku!anzi GIŠzintina pé-e-di handΩnzi “The cooks arrange the zintina in place for the slaughtering of one ram and one bull (as the offerings) of the ‘year-period’ KBo 15.33 ii 37-38 (rit., MH/MS), cf. meya(n)ni-a 2' a' 2''; pé-e-di–ma–kan (var. [pé-e]-ti– ma–kan) [ku]≠e± KUR.KUR.MEŠ daliyanu[(n)] “The countries which I left in place” (to these countries I laid down boundaries) KBo 4.7 i 16-17 
341

(Kup.), w. dupl. HFAC 1:2-3 + KUB 19.51:5-6, ed. SV 1:108f., tr. DiplTexts 69; (If lands rebel against the Hittite king) zik–ma ¬allallΩ pΩuwar 1-eda tiyauwar pédi–kan wašdumar lË šanahti “you must not attempt to defect, to go it alone, (or) to ‘transgress in place’” KBo 4.14 ii 63-65 (treaty, Tudh. IV or Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:43; mahhan–ma nekuttat nu–ššan pé-e-di (var. pé-di) wahnunun “But when it became evening, I turned back on the spot (and went to Pitaggatalli)” KBo 5.8 iii 19-20 (ann. of Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 16.8 iii 24, ed. AM 156f.; nu takšan tarwiškan~ zi pé-di–ya–ššan wahnuškanzi “(The men of Lalupiya) dance together; and they turn in place” KUB 
25.37 ii 18 (tablet of Lalupiya, NS), ed. Güterbock, FsHouwink ten Cate 67; cf. KUB 25.37 i 7, 9, ii 15-16, translit. DLL 172; nu haššuš INA AŠ-RI (dupl. huššulli) i[(šhuw)anzi] “And the ashes they throw in (the proper) place (dupl. in a pit)” KBo 23.42 i 8 (rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 
24.57 i 8, cf. bil. sec. above; [1 ØU]PPU mΩn–kan ŠA GIDIM haštai pé-e-d[i] n[ininkanzi] “[One tab]let: when [they] l[oosen] the bones of a dead person in (their) place” KUB 30.65 ii 12 (cat., NH), ed. CTH p. 170 (“quand on ra[masse …] sur place les ossements d’un mort”). 
2' wr. pedi– or AŠAR– + poss. pron.: ≠pé±-e-diiš-mi–pat ZAG-ni 1-ŠU waha[(nzi)] “They turn to the right once in their same place” KBo 25.31 iii 4 (OS), w. dupl. KUB 56.46 ii 17-18 (OH/NS), translit. StBoT 25:84, cf. KBo 20.26:19, w. dupl. KBo 30.161:3; [(NI)]N. DINGIR-aš pé-e-di-iš-ši–pat tuwanta [(1-ŠU wËhzi)] “The priestess turns once tuwanta in her aforementioned place” KBo 25.41 obv. 8, w. dupl. KBo 
25.42 left col. 12; “Other performers (LÚ.MEŠALAN. ZU·) have put on multicolored garments” n–at LUGAL-i tapušza aranta nu ŠU.MEŠ-uš šarΩ har~ kanzi n–at–šan pé-e-te–ši wehantari paluiškanzi– ya “They stand at the side of the king, hold (their) hands up, turn around in their (text: its) place, and keep shouting” KBo 4.9 i 47-50 (ANDAHŠUM-fest., OH?/ NS), ed. de Martino, SMEA 24:137; nu mahhan LÚAZU kÏ h„man pé-e-di–šši handΩizzi “And when the exorcist arranges all this in its place” KBo 5.2 i 40-41 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH?/NS); arnuwalaš–a–ta–kkan kuiš KUR-az arha uizzi pé-di–ma–šši–šan kuiš Ωšzi “The person-to-be-resettled who comes out of your country (or) the one who remains in his (own) place (i.e., remains where he is)” KUB 13.2 iii 38-39 

peda- A i 2' 

(B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 48 (“wer aber an seiner Stelle bleibt”). 
i. pedi (d.-l.) and pedi–šši “instead of, in place of, in his stead/place” — 1' wr. pedi–šši: takku LÚ.U⁄·.LU-an kuiški h„nikzi t–an ištarnikzi [(≠nu± ap„)]n šaktΩizzi pé-e-di–šši–ma antuhšan (var. LÚ.U⁄·.LU-an) pΩi nu [(É-ri–šši)] ≠ann±eškizzi kuitman–aš SIGﬁ-attari (var. lΩzziatta) “If anyone batters a person and makes him ill, he must care for him. In his stead he must provide a person, who will work his estate until he recovers” KBo 6.3 i 25-27 (Laws §10, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.2 i 16-18 (OS), ed. HG 18f.; (I investigated by means of oracle) n–aš pé-edi–šši INA KUR URUKummanni INA É.DINGIRLIM piyauwanzi SI≈SÁ-at “and it was determined by oracle that it (the substitute ox) must be sent in his (i.e., Mursili’s) stead, to the country of Kummanni, to the temple” KBo 4.2 iii 51-53 (Murš. II’s speech loss), w. dupl. KUB 43.50 obv. 13-15 + KUB 15.36 obv. 5-7, ed. MSpr 4-7 (“an Ort und Stelle”), Lebrun, Heth. 6:105, 110; nu–wa–šši kΩš LÚKARTAPPU pé-di-ši ešaru “Let this chariot-driver sit in his (i.e., the other man’s) place (as a hostage)” KUB 14.3 ii 70-71 (Taw., Hatt. III), ed. AU 10f.; nu–šši apΩš pé-e-de–šši ešaru kuitman–aš u≠izzi± “Let (the hostage) sit down in his (the one whose safe return is being guaranteed) place until he comes (back)” ibid. ii 75; MUNUS.LUGAL–ma–wa ANA DINGIR-LIM URUArušna 2 GILIM KÙ.BABBAR tamΩi pé-di–šši Ëššešta “However, in its stead (i.e., instead of the gold crown which the deity of Arušna had requested in a dream) the queen had two other crowns of silver made for the deity of the city of Arušna” KUB 
22.70 obv. 14-15 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:58f. (“an seiner Stelle”); nu–wa–nna≠š± happar dΩwËn pé-de– šši–ma–wa maklandan tarnu≠mme±n “(Or if) we traded (with that animal) for our own profit and put an emaciated one in its place” KUB 13.4 iv 74-75 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 166f., Süel, Direktif Metni 88f.; cf. ibid. iv 65, ed. maklant-. 
2' wr. pedi: nu–šši 3 LÚ.MEŠ URUGašga pé-e-di Ëpdu “Let him seize three Kaškaeans instead of him” HKM 66:28-29 (MH/MS), ed. HBM 246f.; nu–mu kΩš TI-anza PUH–ŠU pé-di ar[taru] “[Let] this living substitute stand instead of me (dat. -mu)” KUB 
17.14 “rev.” 19 (substitution rit., MH/NS), ed. StBoT 3:58f. 

342

(“an die Stelle treten”); [(nu–wa–za kΩša) k„š ¬tarpal]liuš pé-di SUM-ehhun nu–wa–za k„š dΩ “I have just now given [these subs]titutes instead of myself (-za). Take these, (and let me go)” KUB 24.5 i 10 (substitution rit., NH), w. dupl. KUB 36.92:8! (line missing in copy, cf. StBoT 3:8 n. 11) (NH), ed. StBoT 3:8f.; nu– tta kΩš MUNUS-TUM pé-di artaru “Let this woman stand for you instead of (her, i.e., Gaššuliyawiya)” KBo 4.6 rev. 15 (prayer, NH), ed. Tischler, Gass. 16f.; “You Sungoddess of the Netherworld and gods of the Netherworld be witnesses” kΩš[a] apËdaš kuit idaluwaš uddanaš pé-di k„š tar≠p±alliuš tit~ tanummen “that we have just now installed these substitutes in place of (d.-l. pl.) those evil words” KUB 60.161 ii 7-8 (rit.); nu–za pé-di lË kuitki kapp„watteni “Do not consider anything instead (of them)” ibid. iii 11. 
3' wr. AŠAR: [n]u A-ŠAR UDU 1 GA.KIN.AG pedai “And he carries out one cheese in place of the sheep” KBo 29.65 iv 12 (cult of Huwaššana). 
j. construed w. numbers (cf. AU 61 w. n. 6) — 1' cardinals — a' in general — 1'' where pedan is used like a d.-l. — a'' wr. AŠRA (which could be an Akk. acc. sg.): [ÉRIN.M]EŠ 2 AŠ-RA ašandulanni da<la>hhun “I left troops in garrison in two places” KBo 10.2 i 6 (ann. of Hatt. I, OH/NS), ed. Imparati, SCO 14:44f.; namma IZI 2 AŠ-RA [(warn)]uwanzi “Moreover they light a fire at two places” HT 1 iv 10-11 (Ašhella’s rit.), w. dupl. KUB 9.32 rev. 3 (MH/NS), ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:18, 25; kΩša–kan LÚ.KÚR pan~ garit 2 AŠ-RA zΩi[š] “The enemy just crossed (the border) en masse at two (different) places” HKM 46:3-4 (letter, MH/MS), ed. Alp, Belleten 41/164:638f., HBM 200f.; nu–mu LÚ.KÚR 3 AŠ-RA zahhiya tiyat “The enemy came to battle against me at three (different) places” KUB 14.3 i 23 (Taw. letter, Hatt. III), ed. AU 2f.; (Šarruma urges the queen in her dream) INA HUR.SAG–ma–≠wa±–mu–kan šer 12 AŠ-RA adan~ na pΩi “But up in the mountain in 12 (different) places give me (something) to eat” KUB 15.1 ii 43-44 (queen’s dream, NH), ed. de Roos, Diss. 187f., 327f., 335 n. 27, Sommer, AU 61, tr. RGTC 6:238; nu wappu[i pera]n katta 3 AŠ-RA paddahhi “Below [bef]ore the riverbank I dig in three places” KBo 15.25 obv. 20 (rit. for Wišuriyanza, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 2:2f.; nu KASKAL-an 7 AŠ-RA paddan[zi] “They dig up the road at seven 

peda- A j 1' b' 
places” KBo 11.17 i 2 (rit., NH); namma–ya–kan ANA GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN and[a] kuwapitta parΩ 9 AŠ-RA paddΩ[nzi] “Moreover [they] dig in the vineyard separately in nine (different) places” KUB 12.44 iii 14-15 (rit., NH). 
b'' wr. syll. pedan: EGIR-pa–ma 3 pé-e-da-an lahhurnuzi daiš “Afterwards he put foliage in(?) three places” KBo 15.10 iii 62 (rit., MH/MS), ed. THeth 1:44f.; ŠA 1 pé-e-da-an … 78 pé-e-da-an tianzi KBo 
16.49 iv 4, 9 (fest.); cf. j 2' b'. 
2'' 1-edani pedi: [n–at–ka]n katta 1-edani pé-di dΩi “[And] he will put [them (i.e., the black garments)] down in one place” KUB 12.58 ii 51 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 14f.; [EZEN› …]-annaš–mu INA URUNeriqqa 1-edani pé-di DÙ-wanzi SI≈SÁ-ri “For me it is determined by oracle to celebrate […]-annaš [festival] in Nerik, in one place (i.e., not to visit several cities and temples)” KUB 48.119 obv.? 7 (oracle question, NH); [o-o-o]-ma haštai KUŠ? SILA›–ya 1-edani pé-e-di tianzi “[Afterward]s(?) they put the bones and the hide(?) of a lamb in one place” KBo 
13.164 iv 1 (rit., OH/NS). 
3'' others: [dT]Ωhaša KÁ.GAL 129 A-ŠAR ÉRIN.MEŠ tia[nzi] KBo 16.78 iv 17 (frag. fest., MH?/ MS?), cf. d 1' z', above; takku 1-el pé-di KBo 6.26 iii 35, see a 3' b' above. 
b' places where an object is plated or inlaid, or where the plating is scratched off: 1 SIšawatar 2 AŠ-RU KÙ.BABBAR GAR.RA “One horn inlaid with silver in two places” KUB 38.1 i 34 (inv., NH), tr. Rost, MIO 8:179; [1? BIBR]U GUD 2 AŠ-RA KÙ.GI GAR.R[A] “[One? rhy]ton in the shape of an ox, in two places inlaid with gold” KUB 42.42 iv 11 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:58, Siegelová, Verw. 474f.; 1-EN TI°≠MUŠEN± [Z]U· AM.SI 2 AŠ-RA KÙ.GI GAR.RA “One eagle (made of) ivory, in two places inlaid with gold” KUB 12.1 iv 6 (inv., NH), ed. Güterbock, Anadolu 15:3, Siegelová, Verw. 446f.; x GIŠGIDRU 3 AŠ-RA KÙ.BABBAR GAR.RA “x scepters, in three places inlaid with silver” KBo 2.1 i 31 (inv., NH); […-]x-eššar TA KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.G[I] 3 AŠ-RA hališšianta “… in three places overlaid with silver” KUB 42.97:3 (rit.); 1 GIŠBANŠUR 3 AŠ-RA arha arriran “One table, scratched in three places” KUB 42.39:9 (inv.), ed. THeth 10:152, Siegelová, Verw. 72f. 
343

2' ordinals — a' dΩn pedaš “of the second place” 
— 1'' in competition: EGIR-ŠU–ma 10 LÚ.MEŠKAŠ›. E uwanzi nu tarhzi kuiš dΩn pé-e-da-aš-ša kuiš “Afterwards 10 runners race (lit., come). The one who wins and him who is of the second place (they reward with garments)” IBoT 1.13 v? 14-16 (KI.LAM fest); cf. KBo 30.172 obv. 1; Bo 3371:8-9 (Otten/Siegelová, AfO 23:38 n. 18); KBo 22.196 rev. 11 (all frag. of fest.). 
2'' as a designation of rank (cf. b above): takku DUMU.LU[(GAL)] hantezziš NU.GÁL nu kuiš tΩn pé-e-da-aš (var. pé-e-da-an) DUMU-RU nu LUGAL-uš apΩš kišaru “If there is no prince of the first rank, let one who is a son of second rank become king” KBo 3.1 ii 36-38 (Tel.pr., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 7.15 ii 11-13 + KBo 12.4 ii 5-7 (NS), ed. Chrest. 188f., THeth 11:32f. 
3'' as a designation of quality, opposite of “first class” (hantezzi) — a'' w. wine: GEŠTIN akuwan~ naš [DU]GKUKUB GEŠTIN dΩn pé-e-da-aš “Wine to drink, a pitcher of wine of second quality” KUB 
43.58 i 21-22 (purif. rit., MH/MS). 
b'' w. garments, probably indicating the rank of the wearer: ANA LÚSANGA 1 TÚG hantez[(zin)] pianzi LÚtazze[(lli)] 1 TÚG dΩn pé-e-da-an p[ianzi] LÚhaminΩi 1 TÚG dΩn pé-e-da-an pianzi “To the priest they give one garment of first quality, to the LÚtazze[lli] [they] g[ive] one garment of second quality, to the LÚhamina- they give one garment of second quality” KUB 10.13 iii 4-8 (fest., OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 25.176 rev. 8-10 (OH?/NS); nu 3 LÚ.MEŠSANGA URUDurmitta IŠTU TÚG.HI.A dΩn pËdaš P¸NI GAL DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL waššanzi ta kuedaniya 1-ŠU pianzi “They dress three priests of Durmitta in second-quality garments before the chief of the courtiers, and they give (food) once to each one.” KUB 56.34 iv 12-15 (fest. frag.). 
b' other ordinals: LUGAL-uš–šan namma 3-an pé-di NINDAt[aparwΩ]š„i GIŠkalmuš ta[kšan]≠Ëp±zi “The king again on the third occasion holds the lituus against the taparwašu-bread” KUB 2.10 iv 33-35 (Fest. of the Month, OH/NS), ed. Alp, JCS 1:167f. w. n. 11, against Sommer, AU 61 n. 6 and 272 n. 1, cf. namma dΩn in ibid. iv 24-26, cf. namma 2 a 3' a'; nu–za–kan LÚ.MEŠDUGUD 2 pé-e-da-an 3 pé-e-da-an 4 pé-eda-an pé-di šΩkki “He (i.e., a B´L MADGALTI) 

peda- A k 1' c' 

shall know the officers — second grade, third grade, fourth grade — by (their) rank” KUB 13.2 i 14-15 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), ed. Dienstanw. 42 (differently); cf. KUB 13.2 i 18-19. 
k. pedan epp-and har(k)-— 1' epp-“to take/assume a position” (contrast pedan hark-, below k 2') 
— a' w. -za: DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL-TIM–ma–z LÚ.MEŠMEŠED¨TIM pé-e-da-aš-ši-me-et appanzi 
“But the palace servants and the guards take their places” KBo 21.85 41 (fest., OH/MS); DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL Ωppa [tienz]i ta–z pé-e[-d]≠a±-aš-me-et appanzi “The palace servants step back and take their places” KBo 17.74 i 11 + ABoT 9 i 12 (Storm-fest., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:10f.; nu–za–kan ANA MUNUS. LUGAL menahhanda ZAG-az A-ŠAR–ŠUNU ap~ panzi LÚ.MEŠALAN.ZU· x(erased sign)-az EGIR GUNNI A-ŠAR–ŠUNU appanzi “And they (i.e., the guards) take their places at the right side across from the queen, (while) the performers take their places on the <left?> behind the brazier” KUB 27.69 v 8-14 (fest. of the month, OH/NS) | the force of the -za-kán carries over from the first clause to the following one; nu–za LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI ŠA LÚMEŠEDI ÉhÏli pé-e-ta-an ap~ panzi “The guards take up (their) place in the courtyard of the guards” IBoT 1.36 i 9 (instr. MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:174f., AS 24:6f.; “When the exorcist arranges all this in its place” nu–za kuitman dUTU-uš A-ŠAR–ŠU nawi ≠Ëpzi± “and before the sun takes its place (in the heaven)” KBo 5.2 i 42 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH/NS); [DUMU.L]UGAL UŠKÊN ta– za pé-e-da-aš-ši-it Ëp[zi] “The prince bows and takes his place” KUB 58.5 obv. 12 (fest.), ed. Alp, Tempel 20 (as Bo 2965); cf. HW™ 2:51f. s.v. epp-II 1 d. 
b' w. d.-l. enclitic personal pron.: nu–šmaš pé-eda-an Q¸TAMMA EGIR-pa appanzi “They (i.e., the deities) take (their) places again in the same way” KBo 11.1 obv. 26 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/81:107, 116. 
c' without -za or d.-l. pron.: LÚhatwaayaš pé-eda-aš-ši-it Ëpzi “The hatwaaya-man takes his place” KUB 10.66 vi 5-6 (frag. fest.?); haššan–kan h„y[(anzi)] pé-e-da-aš-mi-it (var. A-ŠAR–ŠUNU) appanzi “[They] run around the brazier and take their places” KUB 56.46 ii 24-25 (fest.), w. dupl. KBo 25.31 iii 8 (OS), translit. (of dupl.) StBoT 25:80; GIŠkarlaš katta 

344

A-ŠAR–ŠU Ëpzi “He takes his place down on the step” KUB 58.72 ii 15-16. 
d' w. Ωppa “to take refuge in a place” (contrast pedan EGIR-pa har(k)-, k 2' c', below): nu–za kuišša [(apel A-ŠAR–ŠU E)GIR-pa Ë]pta “And everyone took refuge in his own place” KUB 34.23 i 11-12 (DŠ frag. 25), w. dupl. KUB 40.8 i 4, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:83 without KUB 40.8, translit. Klengel, OA 7:67, for the following context, see k 2' c' below; for Ωppa appannaš p., see d 2' a' above; for KBo 11.1 obv. 26 (prayer, Muw. II), see k 1' b'; cf. perhaps also KBo 16.86 i 8-9, translit. StBoT 9:13 n. 8. 
2' har(k)- “to keep/hold/maintain a position (HW™ 2:51d), (contrast pedan epp-, above k 1') — a' without -za: [DUMU.MEŠ.É.G]AL pé-e-da-aš-meet harkanzi “The palace servants keep their places” KBo 20.12 i 4 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:63; [(mΩn DUMU.É.GAL)] ≠Ω±ppai DUMU.MEŠ.SANGA A-ŠAR–ŠUNU–pat harkanzi “If the palace servant is ready, the novice(?) priests hold their own place” KBo 25.109 iii 22, w. dupl. KUB 60.31 rev. 1-6. 
b' w. -za: nu–za GAL MEŠEDI pé-e-ta-an–pat harzi “The chief of the MEŠEDI keeps (his) own place” IBoT 1.36 iii 14 (protocol, MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:192f., AS 24:24f. 
c' w. Ωppa “to remain in or occupy a place of refuge” (contrast pedan EGIR-pa epp-, k 1' d', above): nu LÚ.MEŠ URUAzzi kuiËš URU.DIDLI. HI.A BÀD NA›pËrunuš HUR.SAG.MEŠ-uš par~ gawËš nakkÏ AŠ-RIHI.A EGIR-pa harker “And the men of Azzi who were occupying as places of refuge fortified cities, rocky places, high mountains, (and) hard to reach places (became afraid)” KBo 4.4 iv 29-31 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 138f., see e 8' b' above and nakki-A 2 a; “The Išuwans who were previously there” nu–šmaš pé-e-da-an–pát harker “remained in their own places of refuge” KUB 40.8 i 6 (DŠ frag. 25), translit. Klengel, OA 7:67, for preceding context, see k 1' d' above. 
Sommer, Heth. 2 (1922) 36-45; Götze, Madd. (1928) 125; idem, NBr. (1930) 32-35; Ehelolf, KlF 1 (1930) 146 n. 6; Sommer, AU (1932) 100, 164; Szabó, THeth 1 (1971) 71f.; Nowicki, KZ 95 (1981) 267-270. 

Cf. pedaššahh-, tekan-. 
peda- B 
peda-B, pida-v.; 1. to take (somewhere) (contrasted w. uda-“to bring”), carry, transport, 2. to spend (time); from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pé-e-ta-ah-h[é] KBo 25.7 + IBoT 3.135 i? 1 (OS), pé-e-tah-hé KBo 17.7 + KBo 25.7 iv? 3, KBo 20.15 iii 30 (both OS), pé-tah-hé KBo 17.4 iii 10 (OS), pé-e-tah-hi KBo 
17.6 ii 6, KBo 17.1 ii (12), iii 30 (both OS), pé-da-ah-hi KBo 
17.61 obv. 16 (MH/MS), ≠pé±-tah-hi KBo 20.82 i 16 (OH?/ NS?), pé-e-da-ah-hi KBo 3.20 iii 4 (OH/NS), VBoT 24 iv 18 (MH/NS), KUB 24.14 ii 5, 6 (NH), KUB 17.28 i 22 (NS), KBo 24.133:8, KUB 50.114:13, ABoT 56 i 21 (Šupp. II), HT 
10:3. 
sg. 2 pé-e-da-at-ti KUB 37.223 rev. 4 (OS), KUB 33.63 obv. 11 (OH/MS?), KBo 23.8 i 12 (MS?), KBo 10.45 ii 42 (OH/LNS), KUB 30.34 iv (23), 24 (MH/NS), KBo 27.60:8, pé-e-da-ad-d[i] KUB 33.59 ii 2 (OH/MS). 
sg. 3 pé-e-ta-i KBo 17.1 i 32, 34, KBo 17.2 i 5 (both OS), pé-ta-i KBo 17.28:13(!), KBo 17.51 obv.? 3, KBo 20.10 i 8, 9, ii 5, 6, KBo 25.59 iii 5 (all OS), pé-e-da-i KBo 25.12 i 2, KBo 
25.45 rt. col. 10, KBo 25.61 ii? 11, iii? 12, 19, KUB 32.94 rev. 6, KUB 43.30 ii 19 (all OS), KBo 9.140 ii 23, KBo 17.74 i 16, 22, 33, iii 16 (both OH/MS), KBo 17.105 iii 23, IBoT 1.36 i 55 (both MH/MS), KBo 25.72 rt. col. 17 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 
1	 i 27, 38 (OH/ENS?), KBo 3.7 ii 26, KBo 6.3 ii 53, 56, KBo 19.163 ii 46, iii 17, KUB 1.17 iv 26, KUB 8.3 obv. 8, KUB 20.28 i 11, KUB 41.29 iii 6 (all OH/NS), KBo 5.2 iii 57, KBo 10.41:14, KUB 24.10 ii 14, KUB 27.67 iii 4, KUB 41.1 iv 4 (all MH/NS), KBo 2.8 i 38, KBo 23.1 ii 34, KUB 46.37 rev. 8 (all NH), KUB 30.34 iii 2, iv 20, 38, KUB 30.35 iv 4 (both Murš. II), KBo 6.28 rev. 19 (Hatt. III), KBo 4.10 rev. 25 (Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), KUB 26.1 i 60 (Tudh. IV), pé-da-a-i KBo 3.7 ii 27 (OH/NS), KBo 10.45 iv 44 (OH/LNS), KUB 6.2 obv. 5 (NH), pé-da-i KUB 33.62 iii 5, IBoT 1.36 i 53 (both MH/MS), KUB 25.32 i (27) (OH/NS), KBo 13.131 obv. 18, 19 (MH?/ NS), KBo 9.91 rev. 9, KUB 22.56 rev. 11 (both NH), KUB 
2	 obv. 48 (Hatt. III), KBo 27.130 rev. 2, pé-e-da-a-i KBo 

25.109 ii 19 (OS? or MS?), KBo 3.7 ii 24, KBo 6.5 iv 18 (both OH/NS), KBo 25.72 rt. col. 10 (pre-NH/MS?), KBo 5.2 ii 1, 31 (MH/NS), KBo 2.8 iv 8, KBo 5.1 i 13, 32 (both NH), pí-i-eda-i IBoT 4.139:5 (cf. Hoffner, IBoT 4 xviii), KUB 41.40 v 27. 
pl. 1 pé-du-me-ni KBo 17.3 i 25 (OS), pé-e-tu-me-ni KBo 
17.1 i 32, ii 29, 39, iii 16, KBo 17.6 ii 9 (both OS), pé-e-tu-mee-ni KBo 17.3 ii 10 (OS), pé-e-tu-mi-ni KBo 17.1 i 27 (OS), pé-e-du-mi-ni KUB 24.9 iii 15, KUB 24.11 iii 6 (both MH/NS), pé-e-[d]u-um-me-e-ni KUB 6.5:7 (NH), pé-e-du-um[-me]-ni KUB 8.52 + KUB 23.9:3 (NH, coll. Laroche, Myth. 130 n. 42), pé-e-tum-me-e-ni KBo 10.37 ii 11 (OH/NS), KUB 9.27 i 17 (MH?/NS), pé-e-≠dum!±-me-ni KBo 9.99 rt. col. 9 (NS). 
pl. 2 pé-ta-at-te-ni KBo 3.28:23 (OH/NS), pé-e-ta-at-te-ni KUB 58.76 obv.? 2 (NS), pé-e-da-at-te-ni KUB 13.4 iv 48 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 26.19 ii 6 (MH/NS), KUB 21.37 obv. 44 (Hatt. III). 
pl. 3 pé-e-ta-an-zi KBo 17.6 ii 18, KBo 20.11 ii 3, KBo 
34.12 obv. 5 (all OS), KUB 15.34 iv 44 (MH/MS), Bo 2689 ii 
345

30 (Ehelolf, ZA 43:173), pé-ta-an-zi KBo 20.10 i 13, ii 10 (OS), pé-da-an-zi KBo 25.51 i? 9 (OS), KBo 15.10 iii 43, KBo 
15.33 i 21 (MH/MS), KBo 27.165 rev. 16 (MS), KBo 8.55:25, KUB 46.37 obv. 9 (both NH), KUB 44.1 rev. 16, 17 (Tudh. IV), pé-e-da-an-zi KUB 43.26 i 3, iv 16, KUB 43.30 ii 7 (both OS), KUB 34.123 i 18, KBo 17.74 ii 38, 40 (both OH/MS), KBo 16.27 iv 3, KBo 17.105 iii 14, IBoT 1.36 i 14 (all MH/ MS), KUB 2.3 i 49 (OH/NS), KBo 4.2 ii 14 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 7.5 iii 4, KBo 21.34 ii 10 (both MH/NS), KBo 2.13 rev. 4, KUB 16.77 ii 42, 49 (all NH), pé-dan˛-zi KUB 44.21 iii 12 (NH), KUB 17.35 i 6 and passim, KUB 25.25:6, 16 (all Tudh. IV), pé-e-dan˛-zi KBo 2.7 rev. 19 (NH), KBo 13.237 obv. 13, rev. 3 (NS), KBo 26.191:5, 7, pé-e-da-zi KBo 2.13 obv. 10, KUB 46.37 obv. 27 (both NH), pé-e-da-an-«an-»zi KBo 27.42 iii 62 (OH/NS); [pí-i-e-d[a-an-zi] IBoT 1.36 i 31, (32) Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:176 should be read pí-i-e-e[z-zi]]. 
pret. sg. 1 pé-e-da-ah-hu-un KBo 10.2 ii 37, 40, 44, iii 28, KUB 23.41:5 (both OH/NS), KUB 19.8 iii (36) (Hatt. III), péda-ah-hu-un KUB 23.41:3 (OH/NS). 
sg. 2 pé-e-da-aš KUB 26.22 ii 4 (ENS). 
sg. 3 pé-e-ta-aš KUB 36.49 i 10 (OS), KUB 17.10 i 22 (OH/MS), pé-ta-aš KBo 18.151 obv.? 10, 15, rev.? 17 (OS), pé-ta-a-aš ibid. obv.? 4 (OS), pé-e-da-aš KBo 22.2 obv. 4 (OS), KUB 17.10 i 28 (OH/MS), KUB 33.59 ii 4 (OH/MS), KBo 23.4:10 (MS), KBo 3.7 iii 17, KUB 35.148 ii 3 (both OH/ NS), KUB 18.6 iv 1, 8, KUB 18.11 rev. 9, KUB 26.66 iii 11 (all NH), KUB 14.20:19 (Murš. II), KUB 1.1 ii 53 (Hatt. III), pé-da-aš KUB 40.20:8 (LNS). 
pl. 1 pé-e-tu-mi-en KBo 9.73 obv. 4 (OS), pé-e-du-me-en KBo 15.10 ii 1 (MH/MS), pé-e-tu›-um-me-en IBoT 3.148 iii 27 (LNS), [p]é-tu›-um-me-e[n] KBo 13.74:13 (NH). 
pl. 3 pé-e-te-er VBoT 76:3 (OS? or MS?), KUB 31.79:5 (MS?), KBo 3.16 ii 15 (OH/NS), KUB 22.70 obv. 26, KUB 
31.65 obv. 8, 9 (both NH), KBo 5.8 i 7, KUB 19.37 iii 20 (both Murš. II), pé-te-er KBo 16.16 iii 12 (Murš. II), KBo 18.160 iv? 6, KUB 26.66 iv 17, KUB 42.84 rev. 24, 27 (all NH), pí-i-te-er KUB 31.65 obv. 7 (NH), Bo 8169 obv. 3' + KUB 31.65 obv. 2' (Siegelová, Verw. 16), pé-e-ti-ir KUB 46.38 i 14 (LNS). 
imp. sg. 2 pé-e-da KUB 36.55 iii 21 (MH?/MS?), KUB 
29.1 ii 45, KUB 41.23 ii 12 (both OH/NS), KBo 15.25 obv. 19 (MH/NS), KUB 36.89 obv. 26 (NH), KBo 5.4 rev. 48 (Murš. II), KUB 21.1 iii 54 (Muw. II), KBo 34.62 obv. 4, pé-da KBo 
13.131 rev. 12 (MH?/NS). 
sg. 3 pé-e-da-ú KUB 29.1 iii 3 (OH/NS), KBo 6.34 i 39, ii 29, KUB 30.36 i 20 (both MH/NS), KUB 26.90 iv 6 (NH), pée-da-a-ú KBo 4.2 ii 12, KUB 13.4 iii 34 (both pre-NH/NS), KUB 27.67 ii 40 (MH/NS), KUB 7.54 iii 18 (NH), pé-da-a-ú KBo 10.45 iv 41 (OH/NS), pé-e-ta<-ú?> KBo 17.1 iii 13, KBo 
17.6 iii 5 (both OS), pé-e-da-ad-du KUB 39.71 iv 21 (NH). 
pl. 2 pé-ti-iš-te-en KUB 36.100 rev. 8, 9 (OS), pé-e-da-atte-en KBo 12.126 i 26 (MH/NS), pé-e-da-at-tén KBo 10.45 ii 9 (OH/NS), KUB 9.1 iii 28, KUB 13.17 iv 10 (both pre-NH/NS), pé-e-ta-at[-tén] KBo 26.61 iii! 21 (NS), pé-e-da-at-te-in KUB 
60.157 ii 12, pé-e-da-tén KUB 7.41 rev. 21 (MH/MS?), pé-daat-t[én] KUB 33.98 iii 11 (NS). 

peda- B 1 a 1' a' 

pl. 3 pé-e-ta-an-tu KBo 17.1 iv 4 (OS), pé-e-da-an-du KUB 13.17 iv 29 (NS), pé-e-da-du KUB 30.34 iv 34, KUB 
30.35 iv 1 (MH/NS), pé-da-an-du HKM 72:13 (MH/MS). verbal subst. nom. pé-e-tum-mar KUB 16.7 obv.? 17 (Murš. II), KBo 24.126 obv. 19 (NH). gen. pé-[e-]du-um-ma-aš KBo 2.1 i 43 (NH) see also peran 
pedumaš. inf. pé-e-tum-ma-an-zi KBo 18.86:24 (MH/MS?), KUB 
7.36 iv 4 (NS), KUB 41.37 i 6 (NS), pé-≠tum±-ma-an-zi KBo 
23.18 rev. 4 (NS), pé-e-du-ma-an-zi KUB 5.6 ii 72 (NH). part. sg. nom. com. pé-e-da-an-za KUB 50.104:17, KUB 
33.93 iv 25 (both NH). 
nom.-acc. neut. pé-e-da-an KUB 26.43 obv. 57 (Tudh. IV), KUB 22.70 rev. 51, 54, KUB 49.70 rev.? 12, 14, 21, KUB 50.52:2, KUB 50.123 rev. 9 (all NH), KBo 25.184 iii 67 (NS), pé-dan˛ KBo 2.7 obv. 17, KBo 18.48 obv. 16, KUB 38.26 obv. 20, 22, 30, KUB 38.34:7, KUB 46.21 obv. 4 (all NH). 
The reading pí-i-e-da-i is doubtless a scribal conflation of the stems peda-and pida-and does not attest a stem pieda-. Compare e-ni and i-ni with the scribal conflation i-e-ni KUB 
1.16 iii 40, HED A 3-4. 
(Akk.) u 7 DINGIR.MEŠ ana dUTU URUTÚL-na ú-še-li “I dedicated (cf. š„lû in CAD elû 9c) to the Sungoddess of Arinna seven (statues of) deities” KBo 10.1 obv. 18 = nu 7 DINGIR. MEŠ INA É dUTU URUTÚL-na [pé-]e-da-ah-hu-un “I carried off seven (statues of) deities to the temple of the Sungoddess of Arinna” KBo 10.2 i 37-38 (ann. of Hatt. I, OH/NS). Melchert, JNES 37:10 observed that “Elsewhere, KBo 10.2 has substituted pehhun ‘I gave,’ confusing ‘I carried it to the temple of X’ 
w. ‘I gave it to X.’” See pai-B bil. sect. On the rendering of the Akk. š„lû w. Hitt. peda-or pai-, see also Houwink ten Cate, Anatolica 10:97, 103. 
1. to take (somewhere) (contrasted w. uda-“to bring”), carry, transport — a. (a real, physical carrying) — 1' (obj. things incapable of self-propulsion) — a' without prev. or adv.: “[The man of] the Stormgod says: ‘Arise from the sweet sleep, Storm-god of Ziplanta’” kΩša–wa–tta tabarnaš LUGAL-u[š] ŠA AMA–KA ŠA dUTU URUArinna LÚSANGA INA HUR.SAGDΩha tuËl Ωššiyanti pé-e-da-i “Tabarna, the king, the priest of your mother, the Sungoddess of Arinna, is about to take you (i.e., your statue) to your beloved Mt. Daha” KUB 41.29 iii 3-6 (fest., NS), ed. Otten, ZA 61:235 (partially); DUMU É.GAL LUGAL-i M´ Q¸TI pé-e-da-i “The palace servant carries water for hand(-washing) to the king” KUB 
56.45 ii 16 (monthly fest.); [šaš]anuš pé-da-an-zi “They carry out the [la]mps” KUB 56.39 iv 29 (cult inv., NH); Ït–wa GUL-(a)h nu–wa pé-e-da “Go attack and carry off (plunder)” KUB 21.1 iii 54 (Alakš., Muw. II); (A dead body or corpse, not a living person:) (Šar

346

peda- B 1 a 1' a' 

ri-Kušuh died) [(n–an–kan)… pé]-e-te-er “[(and they) b]rought [(him) to his tomb?]” (and performed the funerary rites in the presence of the king) KUB 14.29 i 29 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KBo 4.4 i 7, ed. AM 108f.; “[If a child] dies in the birth-stool, the patili-priests [take-up?] the (dead body of the) child” n–an dammeli pËdi pé-e-da-an-zi “and they carry it to an uninhabited place” Bo 4951 rev.? 7 (birth rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 17.68:5, ed. StBoT 29:124f.; cf. also kÏ–ya kuit ØUPPU ANA LUGAL KUR MizrÏ hatrΩnun n–at tuËl LÚPITHALLUM pé-e-da-ú “May your mounted courier bring this tablet which I wrote to the king of Egypt” KUB 26.90 iv 4-6 (letter, NH), ed. Cornil/Lebrun, OLP 6/7:88; for KBo 3.22:39-42, see 1 a 1' b' 5''. Any movable items such as tools, weapons, foodstuffs, ritual paraphernalia, etc., can be the obj. of peda-. 
b' w. prev. or adverbs — 1'' anda: anda–kan halËnaš teššummiuš tarlipit š„wamuš 2-TAM pé-etu-mi-ni “Twice we bring in the cups (made) of clay(?) filled with tarlipa-beverage” KBo 17.1 i 26-27 (rit., OS), ed. StBoT 8:20f., translit. StBoT 25:6 (Neu’s coll. shows 2-TAM, not 2-ki); “They cook the breads” nam~ ma–an–kan É.ŠÀ-ni anda pé-e-≠da-an±-zi “Then they carry it into the inner chamber” KUB 17.24 ii 8 (witaššiyaš-fest.); n–an–kan anda pé-e-da-an-zi “They carry it (the bread) in” KBo 17.88 + KBo 24.116 ii 19 (fest. of the month, OH/MS); “They take the statue down from the chariot-with-a-seat” n–an–šan GIŠZA.LAM.GAR.HI.A-aš anda pé-e-da-an-zi “and take it into the tent” KUB 39.14 iv 5-6 (royal funerary rit), ed. HTR 82f.; “They bring the goddess down from the roof …” n–an–kan É.DINGIR-LIM anda pé-e-daan-zi “They carry her into the temple” KUB 29.4 iii 7 (Night Deity rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 22f.; LÚHAL–ma– kan 8 dUTU.HI.A URUArinna Éhalent„waš anda pée-da-i “The exorcist carries the eight Sungoddesses of Arinna into the palace” KUB 25.14 i 10-11 (nuntar~ riyašha-fest., OH?/NS); “When the god arrives at the temple of the new priest …” DINGIR-LUM INA É.DINGIR-LIM ŠA LÚSANGA GIBIL anda pétan˛-zi “They carry the deity into the house of the new priest, (and place (him) on the altar)” KUB 
17.35 i 31 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 125, 138; “If a man takes a wife and leads (pËhute-) her to his house” ≠iwaru–ššet–a–z anda± [(pé-e-da-a)]-i “he 

peda- B 1 a 1' b' 5'' 
carries her dowry into his (house)” KBo 6.3 i 75-ii 1 (Law §27, OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 ii 5-6 (NS), KUB 26.56 ii 7 (NS), ed. HG 24f., HL 36f., tr. Hoffner in LawColl 220f.; “The scepter-bearers go before the gate … the singers lift up the lyres. § …” n–ašta LÚ.MEŠNAR GIŠ. dINANNA.HI.A anda pé-e-da-an-zi “and the musicians carry the lyres in” KBo 4.9 v 38-39 (ANDAHŠUMfest., OH?/NS); n–ašta UN¨T´MEŠ MUNUS-TI anda pé-e-da-an[-zi] “They carry in the woman’s implements” KBo 25.184 ii 1 (funerary rit.); (The god’s valuables belong exclusively to the god and should not be used by a temple official) ANA NŠ.TE–ŠU–za– at–kan anda lË–pat pé-e-da-a-i (var. pé-e-da-i) “Let him not carry them on his own person. (Let him not make it ornament his own wife or his child)” KUB 13.4 ii 30-31 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.6 ii 21-22, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 42f., tr. ANET 208; for other usages of anda peda-, see 1 a 2' a' 2'' b'', 3'', 3' c', 1 b 2' b', d', f', 2, below. 
2'' Ωppa anda: “They will resettle it” nu–kan DINGIR.MEŠ ƒTanuhe[pa] EGIR-pa anda pé-eda-an-zi “They will bring the gods of Tanuhepa back in” KUB 16.32 ii 4-5 (oracle question, NH). 
3'' Ωppan anda: see below usage 1 a 2' a' 2'' b''. 
4'' andan: n–ašta ŠUKUR KÙ.GI dŠarruma kuedani Ékippi andan pé-e-da-an-zi dHepat–ya– kan apËdani andan pé-e-da-an-zi “They also carry Hepat into whatever kippa-room they have carried the golden spear of Šarruma” KBo 21.34 iii 3-5; cf. KUB 51.79 rev.? 9 (cult of LAMMA of the River). 
5'' Ωppa: kar„ µ¨hnaš LUGAL URUZΩlpuwa dŠiušumm[in] [UR]UNËšaz URUZΩlpuwa pé-e-d[a-aš app]ezziyan–a µAnittaš LUGAL.GAL dŠiušu[m~ min URUZ]Ωlpuwaz Ωppa URUNËša pé-e-[da-ah-huun] “Previously, Uhna, King of ZΩlpuwa had carried (pËda[š]) Šiušu[mmi] from Neša to Zalpuwa. But later, [I], Anitta, the Great King, carried Šiušummi back from ZΩlpuwa to NËša” KBo 3.22 obv. 3942 (hist., OS), ed. StBoT 18:12f.; “When they bring her (IŠTAR of Šamuha) before My Majesty” … § namma–an Ωppa INA URUŠam„ha pé-e-da-an-zi “Then they carry her back to Šamuha” KUB 32.130:20-2 (Murš. II), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 168f.; [nu 2 BI]BRIHI.A DINGIR-LIM EGI[R-pa INA É] ≠DINGIR-LIM± pé-e-da-a[n-zi] “They carry two 
347

animal-form vessels of the god back to the temple (and place them back on the altar)” KBo 23.1 iv 4-5 (rit.), rest. from par. KUB 30.38 i 31; cf. n–an pé-e-da-a-i … namma–an EGIR-pa pé-e-da-a-i “He carried it, … then he carried it back” KUB 39.91: 6, 8 (rit.); for other usages of Ωppa peda-, see b 2' a', d'. 
6'' arha: DINGIR-LUM karpanzi DINGIRLUM INA É DINGIR-LIM MUNUS.MEŠha≠zi±qaraza arha pé-tén-zi “They lift up the deity(’s statue). The hazqara-women carry the the deity(‘statue) away. (They place the deity on the altar)” KUB 17.35 ii 27-28 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 128, 141 (“carry home”); ŠA ZABAR aramniš INA É.NA› pé-e-daan-zi GInatin–ma KUŠkuršann–a ≠arha± pé-e-da-anzi “They carry the aramni-of bronze into the ‘stone-house,’ but the reed and the hunting bag they carry away” KUB 39.14 iii 8-11 (royal funerary rit.), ed. HTR 80f.; (If someone finds implements or a farm animal …) “But if he cannot find its owner, he shall secure witnesses. Afterwards (when) its owner finds it” nu–šši–kan kuit harkan n–at šaku~ waššar arha pé-e-da-i “He shall carry off in full what was lost” KBo 6.4 iv 9 (Law § XXXV, NH), ed. HL 54; lukkatta–m(a)–uš–kan arha pé-e-da-an-zi “In the morning they carry them off” KBo 27.165 rev. 15 (rit.); ≠x±-run–kan arha pé-≠e-da-an±-zi ≠n±–an INA URUŠahh„waliya pé-e-da-an-zi “They will carry off x, and they will carry it to Šahh„waliya” KUB 52.45 obv. 9 (oracle question, NH); šalli–kan waštul arha p[ée-da-an] “The ‘great misdeed’ was carried off” KUB 49.70 rev.? 4 (KIN oracle, NH); [… I]ZI MÈ arha pé-≠e±-[da-an] “[…] ‘fire’ (and) ‘battle’ were carried off ” ibid. 7; cf. […]arha pé-e-da-≠an± ibid. 12; for other usages of arha peda-, see 1 a 2' a' 1'', b 1' b', below. 
7'' Ωppan arha: [GI]ŠŠÚ.A–ma–šmaš–kan GUNNI-an EGIR-an arha [p]é-e-da-an-zi “They carry their stools away behind the brazier” KUB 2.3 i 48-49 (KI.LAM-fest., OH/NS), translit. StBoT 28:63. 
8'' ištarna arha: “They pick up the god. They place fire on either side…” nu–kan DINGIR-LUM ištarna arha pé-e-da-i “They carry the goddess through the middle” KBo 21.42 i 7-8 (Autumn fest. for Išhara); cf. similarly KUB 5.6 iii 30-31 (oracle question, NH); KUB 22.70 rev. 52 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:94f.; namma–kan [(UD)]U.ŠIR.HI.A MUNUS-TUM–ya NINDA.GUR›.RA KAŠ–ya KARAŠ ištarna arha 

peda- B 1 a 1' b' 13'' 

pé-e-da-an-zi (dupl. A: pé-da-an-zi) n–aš LŠL-ri pennianzi “Then they carry the rams and the woman, the thick bread and beer through the army, and drive them to the countryside” HT 1 iii 37-40 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupl. A: KUB 9.32 obv. 25-26, B: KUB 9.31 iii 44-45, ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:15, 24. 
9'' kattan arha: see b 2' a', below. 
10'' peran arha: kar„wariwar–ma h„dak IMBA≠RI± udΩš nu–mu–kan KARAŠ.[HI].A–ya IMBARU dΩiš … nu–mu–kan IM≠BA±R[U] peran arha pé-e-da-aš “(The Stormgod) right away in the morning brought in a cloud and placed it for me and my army. (… The enemy could not see. But when I arrived in Malazziya,) he carried the cloud away from before me” KBo 19.76 i 28-29, 31-32 + KUB 
14.20 i 15-16, 18-19 (ann., Murš. II), tr. Otten, AfO 22:113; cf. KUB 29.7 rev. 59-60, below 1 b 2' d'. 
11'' takšan arha: “We saw an aramnanta-bird tarlian. It flew in on the good side in front. It seized a bird GUN-lian” n–an takšan arha pé-e-da-aš “and carried it away in the middle” KUB 16.46 iv 7-8 (bird oracle, NH). 
12'' katta: (Muwatalli collected/picked up the statues of Hatti’s deities and the images of the ancestors) n–aš INA URU.dU-ašša katta pé-e-da-aš “and he transported them down to Tarhuntašša” KUB 1.1 ii 53 (Apology of Hatt. III), ed. StBoT 24:14f.; nu GIŠBANŠUR.HI.A šarΩ karpanzi n–at–kan KÁ.GAL-TIM ŠA URUTauiniya (dupl. [… aš-ka]az) katta pé-e-da-an-zi “They lift up the tables and carry them under the Tawiniya gate” KUB 15.31 i 1314 (evocation rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 15.32 i 14-15 (ENS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:150f.; n–an–šan katta INA ŠD¸l≠(da)] pé-e-da-an-zi “They carry it (the hilištarni-) down to the ¸lda River” KBo 24.13 iv 1718 (hišuwa-fest.), w. dupl. KBo 20.117 + KBo 24.14 iv 15; nu šaštan šarΩ dΩi n–an–kan katta pé-e-da-i “He picks up the bed and carries it down” KBo 5.11 iv 1011 (instr. for gateman, MH/NS); nu–kan GIŠGIDRU katta pé-e-da-[an-z]i “They carry the staff down” KUB 
12.2 iv 6 (cult inv.), ed. Carter, Diss. 79, 86; for other usages of katta peda-, see 1 a 2' a' 2'' b'', and 1 b 2' e' below. 
13'' kattan: They prepare six rams, six billy-goats, twelve GÌR.GAN-vessels, twelve cups, twelve thick-breads, one huppar-vessel of beer, 

348

(and) three small copper knives. Then they drive to another place in the countryside” kÏ–ya h„man kattan pé-e-da-an-zi “And they carry all these things along” KUB 9.31 iii 59 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:16f., 24; for a non-literal usage of kattan peda-, see 1 b 2' d', below. 
14'' kattanda: nu KUR UGU šarΩ dΩš n–at–kan INA KUR Gašga kattanda pé-e-da-aš “(Pihuniya) seized the Upper Land and transported it ([the booty? of] the land) down to the Kaška Land” KBo 3.4 iii 70-71 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 88f. | grammatically the obj. is the neut. n. utne; […]x–kan dU NA›ZI.KIN GAMta [p]é-tan˛-zi KUB 41.34 rev. 8; for a non-literal usage of kattanda peda-, see 1 b 2' d', below. 
15'' menahhanda: GIM-an DINGIR-LUM URU-ri maninkuwahhi nu–šši–kan MUNUSSANGA dHatepinun menahhanda pé-e-da-i “When the deity draws near to the city, the priestess carries (the statue of) Hatepinu to meet him (i.e., the deity)” KUB 60.147 iii? 15-17 (fest.); for another usage of menah~ handa peda-, see 1 b 2' d', below. 

16'' parΩ: see parΩ 1 hh. 
17'' Ωppa parΩ: KBo 22.190:8 (in broken context). 
18'' parranda: see 1 b 2' d' below. 
19'' pariyan: see pariyan 1 a 5'. 

20'' peran: KBo 27.80:9, translit. Otten/Rüster, ZA 71:126; cf. peran pedumaš. 
21'' šarΩ: dNinattanniuš–ma–kan TUR.TURTIM GIŠ-rui šarΩ pé-e-da-an-zi “But the small breads (in the shape) of Ninatta (and Kulitta) they carry up to the woods/tree” KUB 10.63 vi 5-6 (winter fest. for Ištar of Nineveh, MH?/NS), ed. dninattanni-a; “He will attack Kahamišša and carry off its grains” n– aš–kan URUHatienzuwa šarΩ pé-e-da-i “and carry them up to Hatenzuwa” KUB 40.106 ii? 6-7 (oracle question?, NH); “She places them (a spindle whorl and the stem of a reed) on the thick-bread” n–at išpan~ taz šarΩ šuhha pé-e-da-i “and at night carries them up to the roof” KUB 7.1 ii 18-19 (Wattiti’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 7:149, 151, cf. panzakitti-. 
22'' Ωppa šarΩ: “We will go up” [(U G)IŠŠUKUR ZAB]AR Ωppa šarΩ pé-e-tu-me-ni “and we will car

peda- B 1 a 2' a' 3'' 
ry the bro[nze spear] back up” KUB 17.1 iii 16 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KUB 17.3 iii 16 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:30f. 
2' (obj. beings usually capable of self-propulsion) — a' (humans or animals seen as unable to walk themselves and therefore carried or swept along without their own assistance or cooperation) 
— 1'' (a baby, who is unable to be led, but must be carried): [n–an] arha pé-e-da-aš “(The fisherman) carried [it] (sc. the child) home” KUB 24.7 iv 40-41 (tale of the Fisherman, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:232f., tr. Hittite Myths 66; (Take this newborn [stone monster Ullikummi]) [(nu–war–an)] GEﬂ-i KI-pí pé-e-taat[-tén] (var. pé-da-at-t[én]) “and carry him to the dark earth” KUB 33.102 iii 21 (Ullik., NH), w. dupl. KUB 
33.98 iii 11, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:154f. 
2'' (obj. people) — a'' people carried or brought against their will(?): [n–ašt]a? MUNUS.LUGALaš DUMU.MUNUS É-TIM kuwatan pé-ta-at-te-ni “Where are you taking the queen’s ‘daughter-ofthe-house’?” KBo 3.28 ii 23 (anecdotes, OH/NS); [nu– kan?] DUMU.MUNUS d[a]mËdani kuedanikki pedi pé-e-da-an-zi “They will bring/move the girl to some other place” KBo 18.10:14-17 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:206; see ex. in HT 1 iii 37-40, above 1 a 1' b' 8''. 
b'' possibly not people: “The enemy will surround the city” n–aš katta pé-e-da-at-ti n–an hul~ laši “You will bring them (com. pl. obj. unclear) down and defeat him (com. sg., sc. the enemy)” KUB 37.223 rev. 3-5 (omen, OS), ed. StBoT 23:142; definitely not people: ÉRIN.MEŠ-n–an kuiš anda pé-eta-i … ÉRIN.MEŠ-n–an Ωppan anda pe-e-ta-i (var. [pé]-≠e±-da-i) “He who brings the troops in … brings the troops in at the back” KBo 17.1 i 32-34 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 26-27, ed. StBoT 8:20f. note wÏlnaš ÉRIN.MEŠ-an “troops of clay” in ibid. iii 8. 
3'' (animals which seem to be carried, not led; therefore not conveying themselves): [o o –m]a 2 GUD.MAH GEﬂ-TIM karpanzi 1 GUD.MAH 10 LÚ.MEŠ ŠUKUR ZABAR [(karpanz)]i ≠namma± 1 GUD.MAH 10 LÚ.MEŠ ŠUKUR ZABAR kar~ panzi […-z(i? t–uš anda Éh)]alentiu pé-e-da-an-zi nu ap„šš–a [h(ukanzi)] “They lift two black bulls. Ten ‘men of the bronze spear’ ‘lift’ one bull, (another) ten men of the bronze spear lift another bull. They … carry(?) them to the palace and 
349

slaughter them also” KBo 21.25 i 46-48 + KUB 34.123 i 16-18 (thunder fest., OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 43.26 i 4-6 (OS), ed. Archi, RSO 52:24f., Alp, Tempel 212f.; “I take a piglet” n–an É.ŠÀ-na anda pé-e-da-ah-hi n–an MUNUS.MEŠSUHUR.LAL adanzi haštae–ma ANA É. MUHALDIM pé-e-da-an-zi “and carry it into the inner chamber. The female attendants eat it and they carry the bones to the kitchen” KUB 17.28 i 2224 (incant., NS); n–ašta LÚpatiliš SILA› anda pé-eda-a-i “The patili-priest carries in a lamb” KBo 5.1 iv 9 (rit., NH), ed. Pap. 12*f., cf. ibid. iv 21; n–ašta 3 NINDA.KU‡ TUR 1 DUGHAB.HAB GEŠTIN 1 MÁŠ.GAL ŠIR (cf. MÁŠ.ŠIR, line 26) parΩ Ωškaz pé-e-da-i “She (i.e., the Old Woman) brings from outside three small sweet cakes, one pitcher of wine, and a male goat” KBo 17.105 iii 23 (incant., MH/ MS); cf. KUB 5.6 iii 30-31, KUB 30.34 iv 19-20; cf. ex. in HT 1 iii 37-40, above, 1 a 1 b' 8''. 
b' (animals which are led, an apparent exception to the pattern of pehute-/uwate-for leading persons or animals able and/or willing to propel themselves, versus peda-/uda-for “bringing/carrying” objects or persons/animals not willing or able to propel themselves): mahhan–ma–aš INA 5 KASKAL arha uwadanzi n–aš INA É LÚIŠ pé-eda-an-zi “When they lead them (sc. the horses) back home for the fifth time, they bring them to the stable” KBo 3.5 iv 38-40 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 100-103; cf. IBoT 2.136 iv 50, 69 | outside of iv 40, 50, 60 in Tablet II of Kikk., pehute-is used instead of peda-. Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. 102 n. 134, therefore considers a possibility of a three-time error on this one tablet for pé-e<hu->da-an-zi, possibly because Hittite was a poorly understood language for Kikkuli. 
3' (subj. waters) — a' karez “flood”: [mΩ]n–wa GIŠKIRIﬂ.GEŠTIN–ma garez parΩ pé-e-d[a-i B´]L–ŠU GIŠtieššar Ωppa tΩn ti[ttanuzi] “And [whe]n a flood carri[es] off a vineyard, its [own]er [will] p[lant] (lit. make to stand) the fruit plantation a second time” KUB 57.30:8-9 (OS); [… utn]Ë kariz pé-e-da-i “… the flood will carry off the land” KUB 8.27 l.e. 3a (apod. to lunar omen, NH); cf. KBo 
10.45 iv 41, below 1 b 2' d'. 
b' ŠD “river”: ŠD-š–a ANA A.AB.BA KUR URUZalpuwa pé-e-da-a[š] “The river carried (them, 

peda- B 1 b 2' a' 

sc. the sons, or the baskets containing the sons) to the sea, to the land of Zalpa” KBo 22.2 i 3-4 (lit., OS), ed. StBoT 17:6f. and StBoT 23:35, 111; nu B´L GUD ŠDaš pé-e-da-i (var. pé-e-da-a-i) “The river carries off the owner of the ox” KBo 6.3 ii 53 (Laws §43, OH/ NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iv 14, ed. HG 30f.; n–at ŠD-aš pé-eda-i (var. pé-e-da-a-i) KBo 11.10 ii 11 (rit., MH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 11.72 iii 13-14 (MH?/NS). 
c' PAﬁ “canal”: n–ašta GIŠMÁ ištappešnaš PAﬁaš ištappešnaza parΩ ŠD–kan anda pé-e-d[a]-≠i± “The reservoir canal carries the boat out of the reservoir to the river” KUB 29.7 rev. 42-43 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 124, 131 (= rev. 51-52) w. rest. pé-e-e[nna]-≠i± cf. HED 1/2:473. 
4' (subj. winds): k„š–wa GIM-an h„wanza pée-da[-i nu … ] Q¸TAMMA ≠pé-e-da±-ú “As the wind carries these away, so may it carry […] away” KUB 60.144:7-8; cf. similar expression w. verb pittenu-A b. 
b. Extended meaning; not a literal carrying/ transporting — 1' in general — a' subj. a deity: LÚ.MEŠ URUKuruštamma mahhan [(dU URUHa)]tti INA KUR URUMizri pé-≠e-da±-aš “How the Storm-god of Hatti carried the men of Kuruštamma into Egyptian territory” KUB 14.8 obv. 13-14 (prayer, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 14.10 ii 2-3, tr. mahhan 3 a; cf. KBo 19.76 i 28-29, 31-32 + KUB 14.20 i 15-16, 18-19, above 1 a 1' b' 10''. 
b' subj. “death,” “day of death”: (If a king confides in you, saying:) lË–war–an–z–(š)an kueda~ nikki [parΩ] mematti n–an–za–an kuitman apËl [UD-za(?)] arha pé-e-da-i “‘You must not [dis]close it to anyone, until [death] (lit. ‘his [day]’) carries him away’” KUB 26.1 i 58-60 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV), ed. Dienstanw. 11. 
2' obj. abstract nouns or nouns representing intangibles — a' a message (memiya(n)-, haluka-): nu–kan ANA LÚ.MEŠ URUTaggašta memian kattan arha pé-e-te-er (var. pé-te-e[r]) “They brought the message to the people of Taggašta” KBo 5.8 i 7 (ann., Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 19.36 i 2, ed. AM 146f.; cf. KBo 16.16 iii 11-12, w. dupl. KUB 19.37 iii 19-20, KUB 14.20:9; [… EG]IR-pa dKumarbiya memiyan pé-e-da[-aš] KBo 26.83:15, cf. KBo 26.88 iv 5; [INIM.?M]EŠ kuiËš dUTU-ŠI memΩi n–aš apiya pé-e-da-an-zi KBo 24.128 obv. 2 (oracle question, NH); š–e EGIR-pa ANA µNaramdSînna [E]N-a–šši halukan pé-e-te-er (var. Ωppa 

350

peda- B 1 b 2' a' 

memir) “They brought the message (var. they reported back) to their lord Naramsîn” KBo 3.16 ii 14-15 (hist., OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 3.18 iii 1, ed. Güterbock, ZA 44:52-55; nu EGIR-pa dUTU-i halukan pé-e-da-aš “He brought the message back to the Sungod” KUB 
17.10 i 27-28 (myth, OH/MS), translit. Myth. 31, tr. Hittite Myths 15; cf. KUB 33.24 i 24, w. dupl. KUB 33.26 obv. 4; [… halu]gan pé-e-da-aš KUB 35.148 ii 3 (Zuwi’s rit., OH/ NS). 
b' testimony, a solemn declaration (obj. “testimony” implied, expressed only by a pron.) (-za … anda peda-“to bring in”): “Thus speaks Arlawizzi”: P¸NI DINGIR-LIM–wa–za–kan kÏ anda pé-eda-ah-hi “I bring in the following (testimony) before the deity”: (a sworn statement follows) KUB 
13.35 + KBo 16.62 iv 20-21 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:12f.; cf. nu–za–kan linkiya anda kišan pé-e-da-aš KUB 13.35 i 10, ed. StBoT 4:4f. and lingai-mng. 1 a 1'; (If temple officials neglect to offer first-fruits to the gods first, and this becomes known, it is a capital offence) “But if it does not become known” n–at udatteni kuedani mËhuni nu–šmaš–kan P¸NI DINGIR-LIM kiššan anda pé-e-da-at-te-ni (var. pé-e-da-attén(eras.)) “you will bring in (a solemn declaration) before the deity at the time in which you do bring them (as follows): (‘If we at first devoted these first-fruits to ourselves … , and have offended the gods,’ implied: May the gods punish us)” KUB 13.4 iv 47-48 (instr., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.17 iv 9-10, ed. Süel, Direktif Metni 82f., Chrest. 164f., tr. ANET 210 (both of the latter: “you bring them before the god with these words,” although “them” is not in the text; the obj. of peda-is “(words)” not “(first fruits)”); for KUB 13.4 ii 30-31, see above 1 a 1' b' 1''. 
c' (everything) good, good (items): “Telipinu became angry” nu–wa–z! h„man Ωššu pé-e-ta-aš (dupl. pé-e-da-aš) “and carried off everything good” KUB 17.10 i 22 (OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.2 i 7 (OH/ MS), translit. Myth. 31, tr. Hittite Myths 15; cf. KUB 33.4:8 + IBoT 3.141 obv. 3, translit. and rest. Myth. 39; halkin dIm~ marnin šalhianten mannitten išpiyatarr–a pé-e-daaš KUB 17.10 i 10-11 (OH/MS), see mannitti-mng. a, tr. Hittite Myths 15; ≠Ω±šš„–ya–z pé-e-da “And carry away good” KBo 34.62 obv. 4. 
d' various evils: IM.HI.A-uš walliwalliuš dLAMMA-aš idalauwa uddΩr ANA dÉ.A KASKAL

peda- B 1 b 2' d' 
ši IGI-anda pé-e-te-er HT 25 + KUB 33.111 ii or iii 3-5 (myth., NS), tr. menahhanda mng. 5 f; nu–wa–kan idΩlu k[allar? uttar] pé-e-da-a-ú KBo 4.2 ii 11-12 (rit., pre-NH/NS), see lamniya-mng. 4 a; n–at–za kΩš wappuwaš IM-aš tarhhan harzi n–at–za EGIR-pa wappui pée-da-ú “This riverbank mud has vanquished it (sc. the unfavorable thing). Let it carry it back to its own riverbank” KBo 4.2 i 52-53 (Huwarlu’s rit., pre-NH/ NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:91, 96; (Whoever breaks the oath, may he be shattered by a disease) nu idΩlu hinkan pé-e-da-ú “May he carry (i.e., experience) a horrible death” KBo 6.34 i 39, cf. ibid. ii 2829 (soldier’s oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:8f. differently and 
w. comment on p. 29; “In the future, the royal power in Tarhuntašša belongs to Ulmi-Teššub’s descendants” kuiš–ma–šši uwΩi pé-e-da-a-i “Whoever brings him woe/harm (and takes his country away … may the gods extinguish his line)” KBo 4.10 rev. 25 (treaty, Hatt. III or Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT 38:48f.; cf. KBo 
6.29 iii 38, ed. NBr. 50f. (“Schwierigkeiten macht”); [… ANA] dUTU-ŠI HUL-lu kuiški pé-da-i “[If] someone brings harm [to] My Majesty” KUB 21.37 obv. 48 (hist., Hatt. III); HUL-lu pe.-an arha UL pé-da-a-i KUB 6.2 obv. 5 (liver oracle, NH); idalu utta[r …] pé-eda KUB 41.23 ii 11-12 (incant., OH/NS); ezzan GIM-an IM-anza pít-te-nu-uz-zi (var. pít-te-nu-zi) n–at– kan aruni parranta pé-e-da-i kËll–a parnaš Ëšhar papratar Q¸TAMMA pít-te-nu-ud-du n–at–kan aruni parranda pé-e-da-a-ú (var. pé-da-a-ú) “Just as the wind whisks away the chaff and carries it across the sea, let it likewise whisk away the murder and impurity of this house and carry it across the sea” KUB 41.8 ii 15-18 (rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 
10.45 ii 52-54 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124-127; n–at–kan kariz aruni anda pé-da-a-ú (vars. pé-e-da-ú) “Let the cloudburst carry it (sc. slander, lit. the evil tongue) into the sea” KBo 10.45 iv 41, w. dupls. KUB 
7.41 iv 8, KUB 41.8 iv 39 (rit. pre-NH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:138f.; “Whatever evil matter, oath, curse (or) [unclea]nness has been committed before the deity” n–at kË nakkuššiËš ANA DINGIR-LIM peran arha pé-e-da-an-du “Let these scapegoats remove them from the presence of the deity (and let the deity and client be pure from that matter)” KUB 29.7 rev. 59-60 (rit. of Šamuha, MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 125, 132, tr. Gurney, Schweich 50; “Take these sacrifices for yourselves. Make the bloodshed, uncleanliness, mis
351

deed, oath, and kurkurai-of the house run before you” n–aš–kan katt[(an)] pé-e-da-tén “And carry them with (you)” KUB 7.41 iv 20-21 (rit. for the underworld, MH/MS?), w. dupl. KBo 10.45 iv 54 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:140f; “Whatever evil bloodshed is therein, take it and give it to the god of blood” n–at GAM-anta GEﬂ taknÏ pé-da-a-ú “Carry it down into the dark earth” KBo 10.45 iii 19-20 (rit. for the underworld, MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:128f. iii 11; cf. KBo 26.79:5 (Hedammu), ed. StBoT 14:68f.; KUB 30.36 ii 16 (purif. rit.). 
e' odor: “They unhitch them. They do not take their halter/bridle off” n–aš katta ašnuanzi waršu~ la–ya–šmaš katta pe-e-da-i “They rub them down (lit. treat them), and it carries their odors down” KBo 3.2 rev. 11 (Kikk., MH/NS), ed. Hipp.heth. 136f. | for waršula-, see Güterbock, JKF 10:212. 
f' the sea (aruna-), logical obj. expressed as pass. subject: nu–šši–kan arunaš [… (išhuzziyaš ped)]i TÚG-aš mΩn anda pé-e-da-an-za (var. […]x-zi) “The sea having reached (lit. “was brought”) up to his waist (lit. ‘the place of the belt’) like a garment” KUB 33.93 iv 24-25 (Ullik., NH), 
	w. dupl. KUB 33.92 + KUB 36.10 iii 15, ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:158f.; if we take the main text’s reading pedanza as the correct one, this could be a pass. part. of a trans. v., and we wouldn’t have to posit an intrans. use. If the [pedan]zi var. is correct, the intrans. option would become necessary. 
	c. (special usage: obj. furrow): “If someone violates the boundary of a field” 1 akkΩlan pé-e-da-i (NS dupls. 1 aggalan pennΩi) “(in that) he carries (NS var. “drives”) one furrow(?) (into the neighbor’s field)” KUB 29.30 iii 9 (Laws §168, OS), w. dupls. KBo 6.26 i 46-47 (NS), KBo 6.13 i 1-2 (NS), ed. HG 76f., see padda- v. for disc. of this passage. 

2. to spend (time): (My grandfather Šuppiluliuma restored order in the lost territories and rebuilt them) nu–kan MU.20.KAM anda pé-e-da-aš “He spent twenty years (until he repossessed them completely)” KUB 19.8 i 8-9 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Riemschneider, JCS 16:119, tr. Kitchen, Suppiluliuma and the Amarna Pharoahs, p. 3; cf. ibid. i 22, and iii 34-36, w. dupl. KUB 19.9 iii 6; [nu] UD.7.KAM–pat pé-≠e±-da-aš “He spent seven days” KUB 15.36 obv. 19 (aphasia of Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 12.31 obv. 17, ed. MSpr. 6f. (“Sieben Tage vergingen”) and 17, cf. Güterbock, ZA 42:227 (pointed out that 

piddai- A 

the subj. is the person, not the time), cf. also Pedersen ArOr 
7:86 (“es trug volle 7 Tage fort,” i.e., impers. usage); nu–kan mašiËš imma UD.HI.A UGU pé-e-da-i “(Regardless of) how many days he will spend up there” KUB 5.1 i 88, tr. maši-mng. 2 c. 
The criteria for using uwate-/pehute-versus uda-/peda-are not completely clear. But it seems that the former indicates a “leading” or “conducting.” The latter is either a “carrying,” where the object cannot walk, or the action is performed on an passive human or animal, or the subject is a deity and the action is not a literal carrying. 
Sommer, Heth. 2 (1922) 45; Friedrich, ZA 36 (1925) 52f.; Sturtevant, Lg. 7 (1931) 1-9; Götze, ArOr 5 (1933) 22 n. 3; Sturtevant, JAOS 54 (1934) 406; Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 226f. (mng. 1 “ferre”; mng. 1 b “(Worte) vorbringen,” “aussagen”; mng. 2 “(Zeit) hinbringen,” (“… ist die Person Subjekt, nicht die Zeitangabe”); Pedersen, ArOr 7 (1935) 85f.; Güterbock, JCS 5 (1951) 159 (mng. 1 b 2' f '); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 530f. (“bringen … je nach Objekt auch ‘transportieren’ u. ä. (Götterbilder, Menschen, Tiere, Leichen, Sachen)”); Starke, StBoT 23 (1977) 142. 
[pè-da-] “to dig,” Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214-216, and idem, FsNeumann (1982) 317 see padda-A. 
pitta-A n. see pÏËtta-. 
pidda-B v. see padda-A. 
LÚpíd-da[(-)…] see LÚpád-da[(-)…]. 
piddai-A, pittiya/e-, pitte-v.; 1. to run, race, 
2. to flee, 3. (trans.) to run (a review?), 4. to fly, 5. (associated prev., postpostions, or adverbs); from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pít-ti-ia-mi KUB 18.58 iii 32 (NH). 
sg. 3 píd-da-a-i KBo 17.43 i 16, KBo 20.12 i 1 (both OS), ABoT 9 i 1 (OH/MS), IBoT 1.36 iii 10 (MH/MS), KBo 14.3 iv 37 (Murš. II), pí-≠it±-t[a-i] KUB 56.46 vi 3 (OH/ENS?), pídda-i KUB 56.52:9, píd-da-a-iz-zi KBo 10.7 iv 11 (OH/ENS), KUB 30.36 iii 5 (MH/NS), KBo 5.6 ii 41 (Murš. II), pít-ta-aiz-zi KBo 4.14 iii 48, 49 (Šupp. II); possibly pí-it-ta-iz-zi KBo 
3.34 ii 35 (OH/NS), cf. mng. 3 and piddai-B 1 a 2'. pl. 1 píd-da-a-u-e-ni KBo 17.48 obv. 7 (ENS?). pl. 3 pít-ti-ia-an-zi IBoT 1.36 iii 66 (MH/MS), VBoT 24 ii 
14 (MH/NS), KBo 10.20 i 21 (NS), VBoT 56 obv. 6 (NS), KUB 10.22 i 4, pít-ti-an-zi KUB 10.1 i 12 (OH/NS), KUB 
30.39 obv. 15 (NS), pít-t[e]-an-zi IBoT 1.36 ii 17 (MH/MS), 

352

píd-da-a-an-zi KBo 5.4 obv. 28, KUB 6.41 iv 17 (Murš. II), píd-da-an-zi KBo 19.73a iii 17 (Muw. II). 
pret. sg. 2 píd-da-it-ta KBo 23.1 i 20 (NH) (w. Oettinger, Stammbildung 472 n. 30; Lebrun, Hethitica 3:156, interprets it as Luw. pret. sg. 3; cf. also differently Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:11). 
sg. 3 [p]≠íd-da±-iš KUB 14.1 obv. 3 (MH/MS), píd-da-a-iš KBo 8.34 + KBo 16.12:3 (Murš. II), KBo 2.5 + KBo 16.17 ii 25 (Murš. II), KBo 16.36 iii (13) (Hatt. III), KUB 19.61 ii 
(41) (Hatt. III), KUB 33.120 i 14, 22 (NS), píd-da-a-it KBo 
26.65 ii 8 (MH?/MS?), KUB 17.1 ii 12 (NH), KBo 3.6 ii 24 (Hatt. III), pí[d-d]a-it KUB 31.118:6 (NS). pl. 3 pít-ta-a-er KBo 19.80 rt. col. 10, (11) (NH), píd-daa-er KUB 34.125 left col. 8 (NS). 
imp. sg. 2 píd-da-i KBo 22.201 iii 9 (pre-NH/NS), píd-daa-i ibid. iv 9, KBo 20.67 (same text as KBo 17.88) iv 15 (OH/ MS?), KBo 17.88 (same text as KBo 20.67) iii 16 (OH/MS?), KBo 11.55:3, 7 (NS). 
pl. 2 píd-da-at-tén KUB 1.15 ii 8 (OH/NS), píd-da-a-at-tén VAT 7481 obv. iv 24. 

part. (LÚ)pitteyant- q.v. 

verbal subst. nom. pít-te-ia-u-wa-ar KUB 36.75 iii 15 (OH/MS), pít!(text: nu)≠-ti-i±[a-u-wa-ar] KUB 31.130 rev. 2 (MS); here or belonging to piddai- B are píd-da-a-u-wa-ar KBo 26.10 iv 7, KBo 26.11 rev. 5, see also bil. sec. 
gen. [pí]d-du-ma-aš KBo 13.119 ii 7 (NS), pít-ti-ia-u-wa-aš KBo 10.20 ii 13, iii 8 (NS). inf. píd-du-ma-an-zi KBo 13.119 ii 9, 19. 
uncert. pít-ti-ia-u-wa-x[…] KUB 51.77 obv. 6, either -a[š] v. subst. gen., or -a[n-zi] inf. 
iter. pres. sg. 2 pít-te-eš-ki-ši KUB 33.92 iv 12 (NS). pl. 3 píd-da-a-eš-kán-zi KBo 5.13 iv 9 (Murš. II), píd-da-a-iš-kán-zi KBo 4.3 iii 20 (Murš. II), píd-da-iš-kán-zi KUB 14.3 iv 13 (LNH), KUB 36.12 i 19 (NS). pret. pl. 3 píd-da-eš-ker KUB 14.3 iii 51 (LNH), KUB 19.23 rev. 11 (LNH). sup. pít-ta-iš-ki-u-wa-an KBo 6.29 i 14 (Hatt. III). 

The morphology in HW differs since Friedrich assigned here some forms belonging to piddai- B. The imp. sg. 2 pidda (Güterbock, IF 60:202 iv 10), is probably to be emended to <a>padda, see after the morphology of pÏËtta-/pitt(a)-, n. neut. 
Oettinger, Stammbildung 472f. postulates an older stem pitt¥e-hhi distinct from piddae-“entrichten” (our piddai-B), which only began to mutually coalesce in NH. 
EGIR-pa parΩ píd-da-a-u-wa-ar w. Sum. and Akk. cols. broken KBo 26.10 iv 7 (Diri Bogh., NH), w. dupl. KBo 26.11 rev. 5; [… ku]iš píd-da-iz-zi KBo 1.39 i 11 (proto-Lu, NH), ed. MSL 12:218 | both exx. could belong also to piddai- B. 
1. to run, race — a. (said of people, gods, horses) — 1' to run: ikniyanza píd-da-i lË “Does the lame man run? Certainly not” KUB 12.62 rev. 9 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. lË e; dudduwaranza–kan LÚ-aš mΩhhan pít-te-ia-u-wa-ar (dupl. pít!-≠ti-i±[a-u-wa

piddai- A 1 a 1' 
ar]) peššiyanun “Like a crippled(?) man I have given up running” KUB 36.75 iii 14-15 (prayer, OH/MS), 
w. dupl. KUB 31.130 rev. 2 (OH/MS), ed. mahhan 1 a 1' a' | Lebrun, Hymnes 130 tr. “j’ai rejeté l’ang[oisse],” apparently considering p. as related to pittuliya-; cf. also píd-du-maan[-zi o o]x pešši[(yanun)] KBo 13.119 ii 19 (purif. rit., NS), w. dupl. KBo 13.133:8; “He takes the body part and drops it back into the pot” t–aš ≠píd±-da-a-i (dupl. pí-it-t[a-i]) “and he runs off” KBo 17.43 i 16 (OS), w. dupl. KUB 56.46 vi 3 (OH/ENS?), translit. StBoT 25:102 (= l. 10); “One guard motions with the spear toward the guards and the palace attendants and calls out in Hittite: ‘To the side!’” nu LÚ.MEŠMEŠED¨TI DUMU.MEŠ É.GAL–ya EGIR-an arha pít-ti-iaan-zi “and the guards and palace attendants run past the rear” IBoT 1.36 iii 66 (instr., MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:196f., AS 24:30f.; “He who walks at the end of the line, breaks the gate down and throws it away. He shouts” n–at–kan arha pít-ti-ia-an-zi mahhan– ma–at parΩ aranzi “and they run away. But when they arrive outside (the gate) …” VBoT 24 ii 14-15 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Chrest. 110f., cf. parΩ-1 b; “The performer speaks: ‘Come, Mt. Hulla and Mt. Piškurunuwa! Rise!’” EGIR-pa–ma LÚ.MEŠaraš–teš(sic) píd-da-at-tén (dupl. píd-da-a-at-tén, par. píd-da-ai) “Run back to your friends (i.e., the other mountains)” KUB 1.15 ii 7-8 (monthly fest., OH/NS), w. dupl. VAT 7481 obv. iv 23-24 and par. KBo 17.88 + KBo 24.116 iii 16 (OH/MS?); cf. ibid. iii 19-21, ed. (LÚ)mayant- 2 b 1'; “He saw a seventh dream: Kešši went (to hunt) lions” n–aš–kan parΩ Ωški píd-da-a-it “He ran out to the gate (and found serpents and sphinxes in front of the gate)” KUB 17.1 ii 12 (Kešši, NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 49:238f., cf. parΩ-1 ii; kuwapi[(–war–at)] andan pídda-iš-kán-z[i] 2 LÚ.MEŠATHUTIM “Where are they running to, the two brothers?” KUB 33.113 i 6-7 + KUB 
36.12 i 19 (Ullik., LNS), w. dupl. KUB 33.92 iv 9, ed. Güterbock, JCS 6:10f.; cf. KUB 33.92 iv 12; “The chief spearmen bow” namma–at pít-≠te-an-zi± “Then they run (and they walk in front)” IBoT 1.36 ii 17 (instr., MH/MS), ed. AS 24:16f., Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:182f. (differently); (The king travels. When he comes away from the city Hišarluwa) “the HAZANNU stands on the right, on top of the paššu. But when [the kin]g(?) is lined up with him” n–aš (par. t–aš) UŠKÊN [n–a]š–kan paššun EGIR-an [katta] pídda-a-i (par. pa-iz-zi) “he bows and runs (par. goes) 
353

down the back of the paššu” KBo 34.160:4-6 (nuntar~ riyašhaš fest.), w. par. KUB 58.22 i 17-18, KUB 2.7 i 19-20, parallels ed. Popko, AoF 13:220, Košak, Linguistica 16:62, 57, cf. paššu-a. 
2' to race — a' (said of people): “The king and the queen come down to the ašuša-gate, the chief of the bodyguards gives a signal with his spear” nu LÚ.MEŠKAŠ›.E pít-ti-an-zi “and the runners race” KUB 10.1 i 12 (KI.LAM, OH/NS), cf. StBoT 27:104; nu LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI pít-ti-an-zi “The bodyguards race. (He who wins takes the bridle)” KUB 10.18 i 14 (fest., OH/NS), ed. Archi, RSO 52:20, and Watkins, FsPalmer 431f.; cf. KUB 10.18 vi 15; cf. […]x pít-ta-a-i nu tarhzi kuiš nu–šši […] “[…] runs, and he who wins, to him […]” 96/f:7, ed. Archi, RSO 52:22; [L]Ú.MEŠGAD.TAR pít-ti-ia-an[-zi] KUB 10.22 i 4 (fest. frag., NS); nu INA HUR.SAGTipp„wa LÚ.MEŠMEŠEDI DUMU.MEŠ É. GAL pít-≠ti-ia±-an-zi (dupl. pít-ti-an-zi) “At Mt. Tippuwa the bodyguards and the palace attendants race” KBo 10.20 i 20-21 (ANDAHŠUM fest.), w. dupl. KUB 
30.39 obv. 14-15 (NS), ed. Güterbock, JNES 19:80, 85. 
b' (said of horses): “The king goes to the boxwood grove” nu–kan pít-ti-ia-u-wa-aš ANŠE. KUR.RA.MEŠ KASKAL-ši dΩi “and sets the race horses on their track” KBo 10.20 iii 8-9 (ANDAHŠUM fest., NS), ed. Güterbock, JNES 19:83, 86; cf. ibid. ii 13; [o] ANŠE.KUR.RA.MEŠ píd-da-i KUB 56.52:9, ed. Alp, Tempel 56 (“er geht zu den Pferden”) is uncertain. If the horses are the subj., then piddai is intrans. and belongs here. | for “horses” as a collective sg., see e.g., [A]NŠE.KUR.RA.HI.A-un KBo 8.36 i 4 (HW 1. Erg. 25). 
b. (said of rumors, “to circulate,” i.e., “run (around)”?): “Further, since humanity is treacherous” nu–kan AWATEMEŠ kattan píd-da-a-eš-kán-zi “(if) rumors circulate …” KBo 5.13 iv 8-9 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:134f., tr. DiplTexts 74, differently CoS 1:215; see maršahh- 2 for other exx. in treaties; cf. Kestemont, Diplomatique 618; cf. AWATEMEŠ katta píd-da-a-an-zi KBo 5.4 obv. 28 (Targ.). 
2. to flee: (Attariššiya would have killed you) nu–š[ša]n zik µMadduwattaš anda ANA AB[I dUTU-ŠI pí]d-≠da-iš± “but you, Madduwatta, fled to My Majesty’s father” KUB 14.1 obv. 3 (hist., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 2f., tr. DiplTexts 145; ammuk–ma–kan DINGIRLUM GAM-an pít-ta-iš-ki-u-wa-an tehhun “I began 

piddai- A 4 

to flee (for protection) to the goddess” KBo 6.29 i 14 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. Hatt. 46f., Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 213 (differently); “When my father heard: ‘Ahead of time he (sc. the enemy) will go” [nu–wa] IŠTU URU-LIM kattan arha píd-da-a-iz-zi “[and] flee secretly from the town’” KBo 5.6 ii 41 (DŠ), ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:93; “I went to meet him” nu–mu µP[ittaparaš U]L tuhušiyai[t] n–aš–mu–kan píd-da-a-iš “Pittapara did not wait for me but he fled from me” KBo 8.34 + KBo 16.12:2-3 (ann., Murš. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, JNES 25:168, 177; “I sent to Mašhuiluwa: ‘Come here to me.’ …” n–aš–mu peran arha píd-da-a-iš “But he (i.e., Mašhuiluwa) fled before me (and crossed over into Maša)” KUB 6.41 i 41 (Kup., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:112f., ed. DiplTexts 70; (When I killed their leader) LÚ.KÚR–ma–za [(píd-da-)]≠a±-iš (dupl. píd-da≠a±-it) “the enemy fled” KUB 1.1 + KUB 19.61 ii 41 (Apology of Hatt. III), w. dupl. KBo 3.6 ii 24, ed. StBoT 24:12f. (tr. the reflexive -za “da verlief sich der Feind”); (Anu defeated Alalu) n–aš–ši peran arha píd-da-a-iš “and he (Alalu) fled from him (and went to the dark earth)” KUB 33.120 i 14 (myth, NH), ed. Kum. *2, 6, tr. Hittite Myths 40, LMI 117; n–aš píd-da-a-iš dAnuš n–aš nepiši iyanneš “Anu fled, and set out for the sky” ibid. i 22, ed. Kum. *2, 7, tr. Hittite Myths 40; DINGIR
LUM kuedani kuedani papranni peran arha píd-dait-ta “O deity, from whichever uncleanness you fled” (come back now) KBo 23.1 i 19-20 (rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 3:141, 149, cf. peran 12 c 1' j'; Lebrun, Hethitica 3:156, interprets this as Luw. act. pret. sg. 3; since the deity is addressed directly (ehu ibid. i 23-25) the form is pret. sg. 2, see Oettinger, Stammbildung 472 n. 30; “If in the same way it becomes difficult for the king” LÚKARTAPPU– man–kan GIŠGIGIR-za GAM pít-ta-a-iz-z[i LÚSAG?]–ma<n>–kan É.ŠÀ-za parΩ pít-ta-a-iz-zi “i.e., the charioteer might flee down from (his) chariot, or the [eunuch] might flee out of the bed chamber” KBo 4.14 iii 47-49 (hist., Tudh.IV/Šupp. II), ed. Stefanini, AANL 20:46f. 
3. (w. acc.) to run (a review?): nikumanza uwΩtar pí-it-ta-iz-zi “Naked he runs a review(?)” KBo 3.34 ii 35 (anecdotes, OH/NS), so THeth 20:536, w. disc. 555f., for an equally possible alternative tr. “he carries water” (piddai-B), see under nekumant- 1. 
4. to fly: dIŠTAR-i[š]–ma–[(ka)]n MUŠEN-iš iwar huript[(aš)] parran[t]a pí[d-d]a-it “Ištar flew 

354

like a bird across the desert places(?)” KUB 31.118:56 + KUB 36.37 ii 10 (myth, NH), w. dupl. KUB 12.61 ii! 1213, ed. parranda 1 c, tr. Hittite Myths 70; note that in bird oracles, only pai- and uwa-are used in the mng. “to fly,” see Ünal, RHA XXXI:34 | for iwar, see Hoffner, IM 43:39-51. 
5. (associated prev., postpositions, or adverbs) 
	— a. anda: KUB 14.1 obv. 3 (mng. 2, above); […] mahhan anda píd-da-a-er “As they ran in […]” KUB 34.125 left col. 8 (hišuwa-fest.); […ki]nun–ma–aš– kan ariyašešni kuit anda UL píd-da-a[≥-i] “But now, because he does not run to the oracle” KUB 49.39 ii 10 (oracle question, NH). 
	b. andan: KUB 33.113 i 6-7 + KUB 36.12 i 19 (Ullik., LNS) (1 a 1', above). 
	c. Ωppa: (addressing a deity) karpiya zik EGIR– ma píd-da-a-i “You, lift (yourself) and run back!” KBo 22.201 iv 9 (fest. of the month); “The MEŠEDIguard who brings in the litigants” n–aš EGIR-pa– pat píd-da-a-i “runs back again” IBoT 1.36 iii 10 (instr. for MEŠEDI, MH/MS), ed. AS 24:24f.; KUB 1.15 ii 7-8 (1 a 1', above). 
	d. Ωppan: […] EGIR-an pít-ta-a-[er] “They ran behind […]” KBo 19.80 rt. col. 11 (frag.). 
	
e. Ωppan arha: IBoT 1.36 iii 66 (1 a 1', above). 

	f. Ωppan parΩ: KBo 26.10 iv 7, KBo 26.11 rev. 5 (for both, see lex. sec.). 

g. Ωppanda: mΩn–man (so w. Forrer, Forsch., AU and photograph) URUMillawanda<n>–ma arha d[aliyazi n]u–kan ÌR.MEŠ–YA apËdani ¬kargar[anti EGIR-pa]n≠da píd-da-iš-kán-zi± “But if [he] were to le[ave] the city Millawanda, my servants would ever run after him kargaranti” KUB 14.3 iv 11-13, ed. AU 16f., Forrer, Forsch. 1:116f.; cf. nu kargaranti apËdani EGIR-panda x píd-da-eš-ker ibid. iii 51, ed. AU 14f. 
	h. arha: VBoT 24 ii 14 and IBoT 1.36 iii 66 (instr., MH/ MS) (both 1 a 1', above); […] INA HUR.SAG arha pídda-a-it “He ran off to the mountain” KUB 8.50 ii 4 (Gilg., NH), translit. Myth. 133. 
	i. awan arha: nu–mu INA KUR LÚ.KÚR awan arha lË kuiški píd-da-a-i “Let no one run away from me into the enemy country” KUB 21.47 rev.! 12; cf. KUB 23.82 rev. 18 + KUB 21.47 rev.! 14 (MH/MS). 

piddai- B 
j. katta: KBo 5.4 obv. 28 (1 b, above). 
k. kattan: KBo 5.13 iv 9 (1 b, above); KBo 6.29 i 14 (1 a 1', above); […]x KUR Hatt[i] GAM-an pít-ti-ia-mi “I will run down [to/from] the land of Hatti” KUB 
1	 iii 32 (oracle question, NH); annalaza–pat–kan GAM-an píd-da-eš-k[er] “From earlier times they repeatedly fled down” KUB 19.23 rev. 11 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:28f. (differently); GAM (= kattan?) KBo 
2	 rt. col. 10 (frag.). 

l. kattan arha: KBo 5.6 ii 41 (mng. 2, above). 
	m. parΩ: KBo 4.14 iii 48-49 (1 a 1', above); KUB 30.36 iii 5; KUB 17.1 ii 12 (for both, see parΩ 1 ii). 
	n. peran arha: “Go away from before me […] They will not abandon you [≥…]” [G]Eﬂ-az–pat pe~ ran arha píd-da-a[-it(?)] “At night he ran away from before (… he went down into a valley)” KBo 

12.75:6 (myth, NS); KBo 23.1 i 19-20 (1 a 1', above); KUB 
6.41 i 41 (mng. 2, above); KUB 33.120:14 (mng. 2, above). 
Götze, Hatt. (1923) 85; Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 81 (mng. 1 b), 156; Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 228-232; Risch, Cor.Ling. (1955) 192; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 472f. w. n. 30; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 212. 
Cf. (LÚ)pitteyant-, (LÚ)pitteyantili, pittiyali-, pittinu-A. 
piddai-B v.; 1. to bring, carry, 2. to render, pay; from OH/MS. 
pres. sg. 3 pí-it-ta-iz-zi KBo 3.34 i 12 (OH/NS), píd-da-aiz-zi KBo 6.3 ii (23), 26 (OH/NS), KUB 32.82:12 (NS), pídda-iz-zi KBo 6.3 ii 11, 27 (OH/NS), IBoT 2.92:9, RS 25.421:46 (Ugar. 5:445) (NH). 
pl. 1 [pí]d-da-u-e-ni KBo 24.107 obv. 11 (ENS?); pl. 2 pí-it-ta-at-te-ni KUB 23.53:6 (OH/NS); pl. 3 píd-da-a-an-zi KUB 
9.32 obv. 16 (MH/NS), KUB 34.97:4 (NS), KUB 43.68 obv.? 15 (pre-NH/NS), píd-da-an-zi KUB 14.1 rev. (85) (MH/MS), HT 1 iii 23 (MH/NS), KUB 41.18 iii 5 (MH/NS), Bo 6002 rev. 10 (Lebrun, Samuha 188). 
pret. sg. 1 píd-da-a-nu-un HKM 113:3 (MH/MS); sg. 3 píd-da-a-er KUB 17.21 ii 13, 17 (MH/MS), KUB 19.11 iv 33 (Murš. II), KBo 5.9 i 31, 34 (NH), KBo 12.132:7 (NS), KUB 
60.66 rev. 5. imp. sg. 2 píd-da-a-i KBo 5.9 i 32 (NH). pl. 2 píd-da-a-at-te-en KUB 13.27 rev.! 25 (MH/MS), [p]í
it-ta-at-te-en KUB 23.53:7 (OH/NS), píd-da-at-te-n–a KUB 
58.85 iii 6 (pre-NH?/NS); pl. 3 píd-da-a-an-du KUB 57.63 ii 11 (NS), píd-da-an-du KUB 57.60 obv. 6. 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. píd-da-a-an KBo 6.5 iii 7 (OH/ NS). 
355

iter. pret. sg. 3 píd-da-iš-ki-it KUB 23.91:16 (NH); pl. 3 píd-da-a-iš-ker KUB 22.40 ii (6), (10), 15, 30, 32 (NH), pídda-iš-ker ibid. ii 34 (NH), píd-da-a-iš-ke-er KUB 22.40 ii 19, 27 (NH). 
imp. pl. 2 píd-da-iš-ki-it-tén KUB 31.113:6 (NS). sup. [píd-d]a-a-iš-ki-u-an KUB 22.40 ii 7 (NH), píd-da-iš-ki-u-an ibid. ii (14), 18, píd-da-a-iš-ki-u-wa-an KUB 60.98 obv. 25. 
dur. pret. sg. 3 píd-da-an-ni-iš KBo 3.13 rev. 12 (OH/NS). 
sup. píd-da-a-an-ni-wa-an KUB 14.1 obv. 74 (MH/MS). 
Mng. 1 “to carry” is obviously very close, if not identical, to pé(-e)-da-. For this reason we must justify our reading pídda-as opposed to pè-da-. The following reasons caused us to favor the more common sign value píd: (1) No form of píd-da“to carry” is unambiguously of the hi-conjugation; all forms of this v. in which the two conjugations differ are of the mi-conjugation (píd-da-a-ši KUB 31.127 ii 3, pí-it-ta-iz-zi KBo 3.34 i 12, píd-da-a-iz-zi KBo 6.3 ii 23, píd-da-a-nu-un HKM 113:3). 
	(2) There are forms (such as pí-it-ta-iz-zi KBo 3.34 i 12) mng. “carry” which have the writing pí-id/t-. (3) Forms mng. “carry” which are ambiguous as to conjugation frequently show a plene writing of the da syll. (notably in pres. pl. 3 and participles) which is not yet attested for pé-(e-)da-. (4) Forms wr. either w. pí-id/t-or w. a mi-conjugation ending are found in contexts where the v. is explicitly contrasted w. uda-, as is normally the case w. peda-and so cannot be piddai-A. (5) The iter. of this 
	v. is píd-da(-a)-iš-k…, while that of peda-— while so far unattested — would be expected to be like uda-, which is uteški-/ utiški-. What this indicates to us is that there was a mi-conjugation verb w. a vocalization slightly different from hi-conjugation peda-, wr. w. an initial BAD sign, whose mng. was extremely close to, if not identical w., peda-. The vowel of its first syll. was either e or i. 

(Sum.) [p]aﬁ mú-sar-ra a-hi-li t[ú]m-a = (Akk.) rΩtu ša ana mušarÏ mê kuzba ubbalu “A canal which brings luxuriant waters to the irrigation ditches” RS 25.421:44 (Ugar. 5:445) (NH), ed. Nougayrol, Ugar. 5:314f., cf. Civil, JNES 23:2f. = (Hitt.) PAﬁ-aš–ma–aš GIM-an (eras.) n–aš–kan t/d?aluppiyaš dammetarwant[i]t A.MEŠ-ar anda píd-da-iz-zi “She is like a canal, she brings waters to the furrows with abundance” RS 25.421:44-46 (signalement lyrique, NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:774f. Laroche takes A.MEŠ-ar as subj. “les eaux y courent”; in this case the v. would be piddai- A. This, however, leaves n– aš–kan unexplained and deviates from the Sum. and Akk. versions. In either case, the text as it stands causes difficulties, because according to Watkins’ rule there should be no -aš subject 
w. a trans. v. and direct obj. 
1. to bring, carry — a. in general — 1' (contrasted w. uda-): […] GIŠBUT˘UTTU HUR.SAG-i pídda-an-zi [ha]zziwi ianzi § GIŠBUT˘UTTU URU-ya andan udanzi hazziwi ianzi “They carry off the pistachio to the mountain (and) perform the rites. § They bring the pistachio into the city (and) perform the rites” Bo 6002 rev. 10-13 (cult inv., NH), ed. Lebrun, 

piddai- B 1 a 2' 

Samuha 188; (From the lands that used to supply the gods with worship and tribute, all the cult personnel fled) DINGIR.MEŠ-š–a–kan argamanuš h[a]zziuya kuËz arha píd-da-a-er “From one place they carried off the tributes and ritual paraphernalia of the gods” (from another place they carried off the treasures of the Sungoddess of Arinna) KUB 
17.21 ii 12-13 (prayer, Arn. I), ed. Kaškäer 154f., Lebrun, Hymnes 136, 144, tr. ANET 399, cf. Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. 213; contrast the opp. uda-ibid. iii 17-18 + 1916/u; KÙ.BABBAR–y[a KÙ.G]I natta udai kuit wemizzi apašš–a [(par)]na–šša pí-it-ta-iz-zi “He does not bring the gold and silver. (Instead), he carries away to his house that which he finds” KBo 3.34 i 11-12 (anecdotes, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 36.104 obv. 9-10 (OS), ed. Kümmel, StBoT 3:162, differently Jasink, Mes. 13-14:215 n. 15 (“egli corre a casa sua”); [… p]„riyašmaš píd-da-aan-z[i] KUB 43.68 obv.? 15 (prayer, pre-NH/NS), w. par. KUB 43.71 rev. 4, ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 393, 395f. (“courent sur vos lèvres”), cf. [p„]riyašmaš uda[-…] KUB 36.91 rev.? 4. 
2' (not explicitly contrasted w. uda-): nu–kan pΩnzi DINGIR.MEŠ parΩ píd-da-iš-≠ki±-u-an tianzi “They proceed to carry the deities out” KUB 22.40 ii 14 (oracle question, NH), cf. ibid. ii 15, 19, 27 and passim; nu kuedani (var. A kËdani) [(ANA UDU.)]ŠIR kattan 1 DUGKUKUBI <(1>) NINDA.GUR›.RA 1 GAL. GI[R›] [(píd-da-a)]n-zi (var. A: píd-da-a-an-zi) KUB 9.31 iii 30-32 (B) (Ašhella’š rit., NH), w. dupls. KUB 
9.32 obv. 15-16 (A), HT 1 iii 22-23 (C), KUB 41.18 iii 3-5, ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:13f., 23; […] kuit arha–ya wahešnaš wΩtar / [IŠTU? DUG]KUKUB arha šΩrapi DUMU É.GAL píd-da-a-an-zi / […]x-ta wahešnaš wΩtar Q¸TAMMA–pat píd-da-a-an-zi / [… B]´LTI É-TIM šΩrapeškizzi KUB 34.97:14-17 (rit. frag., NS); [… IŠTU?] KUKUB wΩtar INA UD.3.KAM píd-da-anzi … […] wΩtar Q¸TAMMA–pat iššanzi KBo 34.240 rev. 10, 13; [… w]Ωtar ŠA DINGIR-LIM NINDA. GUR›.RA UD-MI GIŠTIR gauri[-… GIŠ]TIR dun~ nariyaza píd-da-iš-ki-it-tén “Regularly carry the water and the daily thick loaves of the deity [to(?)] the gauri[…]-forest from the dunnariya-forest” KUB 31.113:5-6 (instr., LNS), ed. KN 130f.; for another possible ex. w. obj. water, see KBo 3.34 ii 35 s.v. nekumant-1, but alternatively see piddai-A 3'; Ωššuwaz–ma–at I[(ŠTU K)]Ù.BABBAR KÙ.[GI] UN¨T ZABAR–ya h„mandazzi–y[a ÉRIN.MEŠ] URUGašg[aš(?)] pídda-a-er “The Kaškean troops carried them away to

356

gether with (their) goods, silver, gold, bronze utensils and everything” KUB 19.11 iv 31-33 (DŠ), w. dupl. KUB 19.10 i 22, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:66; Ωššu–ma KÙ.BABBAR KÙ.GI anda URUHattuši URUArinna (var. URUArinni) šiunan URU-aš píd-da-a-an-du (var. píd-da-an-du) “Let them carry the goods, the silver (and) gold in to Hattuša (and) to Arinna, to the cities (loc. pl.) of the gods” KUB 57.63 ii 8-11, w. dupl. KUB 57.60 ii 4-6, ed. Ehelolf, ZA 43:175f., Archi, FsMeriggi™ 49, idem, FsOtten™ 18f.; IŠTU HUR.SAGAm~ mana[–ma] kuit LÚgurtawanniš udan ha[rzi] pídd[a-a]n-zi–ma–at LÚ.MEŠ URUUdanna [n–a]t INA HUR.SAG karpannan≠zi± “What the gurtawanniman has brought from the Amanus Mountains, the men of the city Udanna carry it off and carry it in the mountain” KUB 45.58 iii 8-11 (hišuwaš fest.); píd-daat-te-≠n–a± […] / DINGIR.MEŠ dat!ten–a [… DINGIR.MEŠ?] “Bring […], O gods! Take […, O gods]!” KUB 58.85 iii 6-7 (rit. for the army?, pre-NH?/NS); […] LÚwalhiyalaš 1 DUG GEŠTIN píd-da-a-it “The walhiyala-man carried one jug of wine” KBo 

24.107 obv. 9 (fest. frag., ENS?). 

b. (said of messages, news): “Furthermore, when the enemy [invades] Hatti in great numbers and comes through your fields, (if) you cannot [overcome] him with might(?) or turn [him bac]k(?)” ≠nu–š±ši–kan tapušza ne-ia-an-te-eš Ëšten nu–šši–kan šar[Ω … A]NA KUR URUHatt[i] x parΩ halukuš píd-da-a-at-te-en [k]uitman–šan LÚ.KÚR x[… nu AN]A KUR URUHatti peran parΩ haluku[š píd-da-a-at-t]e-en “ “then turn away from (i.e., avoid) him, […] up to him, and bring the news to Hatti. While the enemy […-s, bri]ng the news beforehand to the land of Hatti” KUB 13.27 rev.! 23-25 + KUB 26.40:94-97 (treaty, MH/MS), tr. Kaškäer 123, nai-2 b 1' d'; “While they slaughter the sheep” LÚMEŠEDI LÚ.MEŠKAŠ›.E halukan píd-da-a-iz-zi mΩn–kan 1-EN wahnuËššar Ωšzi LÚMEŠEDI LUGAL-i halukan uda[i] “the guard carries news (of) the runners. When one lap(?) remains (for the runners), the guard brings news to the king” KUB 32.82:11-14 (fest. frag., NS); cf. [… h]alukan píd-da-i KBo 22.146 rev.? 6; “He kept sending Kuwaggulli the treasurer” memiyan–ma ≠kuin± píd-da-iš-ki-it “but the matter which he kept bringing (I do not know)” KUB 23.91:16 (letter, NH), cf. Justus, apud Kammenhuber, 

piddai- B 
Materialien 10 nr. 7 p. 31, 117 (wrongly analyzes as kuin–pat daiškit); cf. memiyanuš píd-da-a-an-zi KBo 19.60:18. 
c. (said of a disease-symptom): perhaps here: UZUmeiliyaš pahhur šΩtar píd(or: mu!?-)-da-a-iz-zi “It will carry away the inflammation (cf. pahhur 6) of the mili-body part (and) the wrath” KUB 9.4 iii 43-44 (Luw. rit., MH/NS), ed. Beckman, Or NS 59:39 (line numbers 47-48, reading mu!?-da-a-iz-zi), 47 (“it shall remove the burning of skin? and anger”); but against the emendation note that this scribe writes mu-ú-da-id-du in 33 and 36 and mu-ú-ta-iz-zi in 29 and 31. 
2. to render, pay: “If a girl is engaged to a man” nu–šši k„šata píd-da-iz-zi (dupl. píd-da-a-an) “and he pays the bride-price for her (dupl. ‘the bride-price for her is paid’)” KBo 6.3 ii 11 (Laws §29, OH/NS), 
w. dupl. KBo 6.5 iii 7 (OH/NS), ed. HG 24f.; cf. KBo 6.3 ii 1415, (23), (26); (Madduwatta took an oath of allegiance from the people of Dalawa) na[mma–š]ši a[rkamm]an píd-da-a-an-ni-wa-an dΩer “and then they began to pay tribute to him” KUB 14.1 obv. 74 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 18f., tr. DiplTexts 148; cf. ibid. rev. 85; “The tribute which was (text: shall be) imposed on your grandfather and your father” nu 300 GŠN KÙ.GI BAŠLA MAHRÂ SIGﬁ IŠTU NA›. HI.A INA KUR URUHatti píd-da-a-er zigg–an Q¸TAMMA píd-da-a-i “they paid by the weights in Hatti three hundred shekels of refined first-class pure gold — you shall pay it likewise” KBo 5.9 i 30-32 (Dupp., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:12f., tr. DiplTexts 56, ANET 204; cf. KUB 23.53:6-7 (hist. frag., OH/NS), and (Akk.) KUB 3.14 obv 10 = (Hitt.) KUB 21.49:8, ed. pai- B bil. sec. for a sim. expression; nu kuedaniya [ANA …]GAR píd-da-a-nuun 40 DUG!?≠ŠEN(!)±.Ú/KÙŠ?.ÀM “and to each […] I allotted 40 … kettles” HKM 113:2-3 (MH/MS). 
3. Associated postpositions, prev., and adverbs 
	— a. arha KUB 17.21 ii 13, 17 (1 a 1', above). 
	b. kattan KUB 41.18 iii 3-5 w. dupl. HT 1 iii 22-23 (1 a 2', above). 
	c. parΩ KUB 22.40 ii 14, 19 (1 a 2', above), and passim in this text, KBo 25.184 ii 10-11, 14 (1 a 2', above). 

Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 228f.; Pedersen, ArOr 7 (1935) 86f.; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 366, 472f.; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 213f. 
Cf. peran pedumaš. 
357

piddai-C v.; to make a pitta-/pÏËtta-allotment; OH/NS.† 
pres. sg. 2 píd-da-a-ši KUB 31.127 ii 3 (OH/NS). 
≠nu šarΩzz±i nepišaš DINGIR.MEŠ-aš p[íd-daa-ši] / kattanda dankui taknÏ kar[uiliyaš] / DINGIR.MEŠ-aš píd-da-a-ši “Above, you make an allotment to the celestial gods, below, in the netherworld, you make an allotment to the primeval gods” (i.e., “you allot the upper spheres to the celestial gods, you allot the lower spheres in the netherworld to the primeval gods”) KUB 31.127 ii 1-3 (prayer, OH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 96, 103. 
Cf. pÏËtta-/pitta-. 
pittalai-v.; to abandon, discard, disregard, neglect, scorn (always w. arha); NH.† 
pres. sg. 2 píd-da-la-ši KUB 24.7 ii 10; pl. 3 píd-da-la-anz[i] HT 1 iii 41 (NS), pí-it-ta-la-an-zi KUB 9.32 i 27 (NH), pítta-la-an-zi KUB 9.31 iii 46 (NH). 
pret. sg. 3 píd-da-la-it KUB 24.7 ii 49; pl. 3 pí-it-ta-la-a-er KUB 21.27 i 17 (Pud.). 
iter. pret. sg. 3 pí-it-ta-le-eš-ki-it KUB 19.12 ii 4a (Murš. II); [pl. 3 [pít-ta-li-i]š-ker(?) KUB 21.27 i 20 (Lebrun, Hymnes 330), now read tar-ah-hi-iš-ker 676/n, see Sürenhagen, AoF 8:110]. 
	a. obj. sheep: (They drive the sheep from the army camp into the steppe) n–aš–kan pΩnzi ANA ZAG LÚ.KÚR anda arha pí-it-ta-la-an-zi (dupls. pít-ta-la-an-zi, píd-da-la-an-z[i]) “They go and abandon them in the enemy territory” KUB 9.32 obv. 26-27 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupls. KUB 9.31 iii 46 and HT 1 iii 40-41, ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:15, 24. 
	b. obj. a city: hantezziuš–ma–at LUGAL.MEŠ mahhan arha pí-it-ta-la-a-er n–at dUTU URUTÚLna GAŠAN–YA šakti “How the earlier kings had abandoned it (sc. Nerik), that you know, O Sun-goddess of Arinna, My Lady” KUB 21.27 i 16-18 (prayer, Pud.), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 330, 337 and Sürenhagen, AoF 8:108-111, tr. ANET 393 | the antecedent is neut. because of the pedan. 
	c. obj. lovers treated as garments in IŠTAR’s wardrobe: TÚG.NŠG.LÁ[M.MEŠ]–aš–za GIM-an parkuwaya waššeškiši nu kuin [p]aprahti kuin–ma– za parkuin(!)–pat arha píd-da-la-ši “You put them (i.e., your lovers) on like fine garments; you soil one and another you discard, even though it is 

pittalwa(n)- b 

clean(!)” KUB 24.7 ii 9-10 (hymn), ed. (differently) Archi, OA 16:307, 309, Lebrun, Hymnes 404, 406, Güterbock, JAOS 103:158, 162 w. n. 19 | all eds. interpret parkun as a mistake for parkuin; for a lit. tr. see Friedrich, JCS 1:286 and Wegner, AOAT 36:49. 
Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 230 (“Vernachlässigung”); Friedrich, JCS 1 (1947) 285f. (“unbeachtet (unangerührt) lassen”); Laroche, Hommages à Georges Dumézil, Collection Latomus 45 (1960) 126; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214 (“set free, leave alone, neglect”); Hoffner, FsLacheman (1981) 191 (“allow to remain”). 
piddalli-see pittiyali-. 
pittalwa(n)-adj.; plain, simple, unadulterated, virgin (olive oil); from OH?/NS. 
sg. nom. com. pít-tal-wa-aš KBo 5.2 i 28 (MH/NS). 
acc. com. pít-tal-wa-an KBo 5.2 ii 15 (MH/NS), KUB 
17.12 ii 22 (NS). 
nom.-acc. neut. (ambiguous, could be either from pittalwa(n)- or pittalwant-) pít-tal-wa-an KUB 25.36 ii 10 (OH?/MS), KBo 5.2 i 12, 28, ii 8, 16 (MH/NS), KUB 42.38:16 (NH), KBo 23.18 obv. 10 (NS), KUB 41.35 ii 11 (NS), pít-talú-an ABoT 32 ii (8), (9) (MH). 
pl. com. acc. pít-tal-ú-≠iš?±[…] KBo 13.212 iii? 7. inst. pít-tal-wa-ni-it KBo 39.8 iii 30 (MH/MS). uncert. pít-tal-wa-aš KBo 7.60 obv.? (16), rev.? (5). A reading pát-is also possible. 
In the following semantic treatment forms of synonymous pittalwa-and pittalwant-are merged. 
	a. (said of bread): 8 NINDAmulΩtiš tarnaš pít-talwa-aš MUN UL išhuwΩn 1 UPNU memal pít-talwa-an MUN UL išhuwΩn “eight mulati-breads of (weighing one) tarna-, plain, no salt added (lit. poured/scattered); one handful of groats, plain, no salt added” KBo 5.2 i 27-29 (Ammihatna’s rit., MH/NS), ed. Goetze, JCS 16:33, cf. KBo 5.2 ii 15-16; n–ašta 1 NINDA.GUR›.RA pít-tal-wa-an ŠÀ DUGDŠLIM. GAL paršΩizzi n–an NINDA.Ì.E.DÉ.A DÙ-zi “He/ She crumbles one plain thick bread into a bowl and makes it into a sweet oily cake” KUB 17.12 ii 22-23 (rit., NS), cf. ibid. ii 20. 
	b. (said of oil): Ì (GIŠ)SERDUM pít-tal-wa-an “plain (i.e., virgin) olive oil” KBo 5.2 i 12, ii 8 (rit., MH/NS), KBo 23.18 obv. 10 (rit. frag.), KUB 32.115 i 6 (MH/ MS), KUB 39.88 i 20 (rit.); Ì pít-tal-wa-an “plain oil” KBo 10.34 i 27 (rit. frag.); “Afterwards, she takes a hu~ puwai-vessel” n–at–kan GEŠTIN-it Ì SERDUM 

358

pít-tal-wa-ni-it (dupl. pít-tal-wa-an) LÀL šunnai “and fills it with wine, plain olive oil and honey” KBo 39.8 iii 29-30 (MH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 9.106 ii 45, ed. Rost, MIO 1:360f. | pít-tal-wa-an in the dupl. is used as anacoluthon “and fills it with wine, olive oil — (it being) plain — and honey”; for a sim. construction, see below, mng. g 2'. Virgin olive oil is the first, cold extraction, which is lighter, of higher quality, and requires no addition of salt or other elements. For this reason it is called “plain.” 
	c. (said of stew): (They cut up a male goat, roast the liver, and cook/stew UZUkudur in a pot) kuitman–ma MÁŠ.GAL TU‡ pít-tal-wa-an Ì UZUšuppa zeandaz ari “Until the goat, the plain stew, the oil and the cooked meat(s) heat up, (the king goes outside)” KUB 56.45 ii 13-14 (monthly fest.); TU‡ pít-tal-wa-an KBo 23.67 iii 6, KBo 29.199 rt. col. 16, KUB 32.123 iii 55, KUB 41.35 ii 11; TU‡.UZU pít-tal-waan KUB 25.36 ii 10. 
	d. (said of meat): UZU pít-tal-ú-[an] ABoT 32 ii 8, 9 (rit., MH). 
	e. (said of hay, uzuhrin È.A): 1 UPNU uzuhrin È.A pít-tal-wa-an adanzi “They (sc. the horses) eat one handful of plain hay” KBo 3.5 i 63 (Kikkuli tablet I, MH/NS) and passim in Kikk. | opp. of plain hay is hay w. various combinations of additives, e.g., 1 UPNA uzuhrin È<.A> 1 UPNA kanza–ya … 3 UPNA ŠE–ya anda immiyandan KBo 3.5 iv 6-7, and passim in Kikk. 
	f. (said of various materials and artefacts): 1 ≠SAG±.DU TI°MUŠEN [KÙ].GI pít-tal-wa-an-za “one gold eagle’s head, plain (i.e., without additional gems, i.e., “plain gold”?)” KBo 18.172 rev. 4 (cult inv., NH); 3 TAPAL HUB.BI.HI.A KÙ.GI pít-tal-wa-an “three pairs of gold earrings, plain” KUB 42.38 obv. 16 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:147f. | other gold earrings in the same text are described as ŠA LUGAL-UTTI iwar “in royal fashion” (obv. 21), URUKÙ.BABBAR-aš iwar “in the fashion of Hattuša, in Hittite fashion” (obv. 20), or MUNUS.LUGAL “(in the fashion of a) queen” (obv. 15); 3 TÚGkaluppaš ZA!.GÌN nu 2 KÙ.G[I MAŠLU?] 1-EN pít-tal-waan-za “Three blue kaluppa-garments: two [trimmed? with] gold, one plain” KUB 12.1 iii 39-40 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:101, 104; GIŠh„luganni pít-tal-wa-ti “in a plain (i.e., undecorated) cart” IBoT 3.1:9 (fest., NS), tr. Laroche, RHA XIII/ 

pittalwant
57:112 (“peut-être ‘léger’?’) | for opp. cf. h„luganniš unu~ wanza “an adorned cart” KUB 10.91 ii 2, or h„lugannišš–a KÙ.GI GAR.RA “cart plated/inlaid with gold” KBo 11.43 i 21. 
g. (said of butchered and cooked animals) — 1' 
(w. mark-“to butcher”): SILA›–ma–kan arkanzi namma–kan SILA› h„mandan pít-tal-wa-an-daa[n] markanzi KBo 11.17 ii 15-18 (rit., NH), cf. KUB 17.23 ii 20, 25, KBo 24.69 rev. 9-13, KUB 47.91 ii 3; ŠAH–ma Ëššanzi [n]–an–kan pít-tal-wa-an markanzi KUB 
43.56 iii 14-15 (rit., MH?/NS); MÁŠ.GAL[–ya]–kan h„mantan pít-tal-wa-an markanzi HT 1 i 48 (rit.); | for the mng. “plain,” i.e., “(torso) without skin and guts,” see mark- (remarks at the end of the article) and tr. of relevant passages mark- mng. 3 a 2', 5', 7'. 
2' (w. zanu- “to cook”): (Referring to six rams and six billy-goats) n–aš pít-tal-wa-an-te-eš (dupl. pít-tal-ú-≠iš?±[…]) zanuanzi “and they cook them ‘plain’” KUB 41.17 iii 10-11 (Ašhela’s rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 13.212 iii? 7, ed. Dinçol, Belleten XLIX/193:17, 24 obv. 37 | the construction is anacoluthon, i.e., “they cook them — (they being butchered) plain,” cf. above mng. b. (last ex.). 
Laroche, RHA XIII/57 (1955) 112 (“peut-être ‘léger’?”); Friedrich, HW 1. Erg. (1957) 16 (“leicht(??)”; “locker(??)”; “dünnflüssig(??)”); Goetze, JCS 16 (1962) 33 (“plain”); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 26 (“‘einfach, schlicht’ (ohne Zutat),” citing Goetze but expressing doubt “(?)”); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 210f. (“base mng. is probably ‘light, thin’”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 215, 455 n. 574, 575 (accepting Goetze’s and rejecting Puhvel’s interpretation). 
Cf. pittalwant-. 
pittalwant-adj.; plain, simple, unadulterated, virgin (olive oil); from MH/NS. 
sg. nom. com. pít-tal-wa-an-za KBo 18.172 rev. 4 (NH), KUB 12.1 iii 40 (NH), KUB 17.12 ii 20 (NS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pít-tal-wa-an, see s.v. pittalwa(n)-. 
acc. com. pít-tal-wa-an-da-a[n] KBo 11.17 ii 17 (NH). 
d.-l. pít-tal-wa-ti IBoT 3.1:9 (NS). 
pl. nom. com. pít-tal-wa-an-te-eš KUB 56.55 i 4 (ENS), KUB 41.17 iii 10 (NH), KUB 9.32 obv. (37) (NH). 
uncert. pít-tal-wa-an-da-aš(-ša) KUB 15.42 i 29 (MH/ NS). 
A reading pát- is also possible. For exx., see pittalwa(n)-, semantic sec. 
Cf. pittalwa(n)-. 
359

pËdant-pedaššahh

pËdant-n. com.; place.† 
sg. voc. pé-e-ta-an-ti KUB 32.137 ii 2 (MH/NS). 
d.-l. pé-e-da-an-ti KUB 40.8 i 6, KUB 34.23 i 13 (both Murš. II). 
a. In the following ritual ped/tant-seems to be a personified place (hence, the -ant-extension), to which one can pray and offer food offerings: (Someone makes sacrifice three times and pours fine oil) anda–ma–kan kiššan memai pé-e-ta-an-ti Ëd–za nu–za duškiški … šipanzakanzi–ma apΩt– pat parnaš pËtan “Meanwhile, (s)he says the following: ‘O place! Eat, make merry, (and don’t let another deity or a bad omen in …’ Then they eat and drink, and singers sing) “but they keep making sacrifices (for) that same place of the house” KUB 
32.137 ii 2-8 (foundation rit., MH/NS); later in the same text this “place” seems to be referred to as apΩt AŠAR SISKUR “that (neut.!) place of sacrifice/ritual” ibid. ii 11. 
b. Less certain: in the following passage from the Deeds of Šuppiluliuma I, ped/tanti seems to mean “in place”: ([…] brought prisoners and cattle) nu–za kuišša apel AŠAR–ŠU E[GIR-pa Ë(pta)] LÚ.MEŠ URUIšuwa–ma–kan (var. omits -kán) kuiËš annalliš ≠e±[(šir)] nu–šmaš pé-e-da-an-ti ha[rk]er UL kuin[ki …-]er “and each betook himself to his own place. But they held the men of Išuwa, who were (there) before, in their place; they did not […] anyone” KUB 40.8 i 4-6 (DŠ), w. dupl. KUB 
34.23 i 11-13, ed. Güterbock, JCS 10:83 without KUB 40.8 (pedanti “to (the things that had been) carried (away)”). 
¬pi/attanummi-Luw. pass. part.(?); (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
“When (Gilgameš) arrived in the midst of the mountains” [n]u–kan 2 UR.MAH.MEŠ ¬pít-ta-nuum-m[i-in-zi(?)/-za(?) …] “[…] two p.-ed lions (nom. or acc. pl.)” KUB 8.50 ii 13 (Gilg., NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:24f., translit. Myth. 133 | Friedrich, restores ¬pít-ta-nuum-m[i-en] “scheucht[en(?) wir],” i.e., pret. pl. 1 of pittenu-. Because of the glossenkeil, the different vocalization and because there is no other direct speech in the pl. 1 in the frag., it is preferable to separate it from pittenu-. Our translit. follows that of Laroche. The vocalization ¬pát-… is also not excluded. 
Laroche, DLL (1959) 82; idem, Myth. (1968) 133; Melchert, CLL (1993) 178 (“?”). 
(UZU)pittar see pattar A. 
[pitarhaita] KUB 38.12 i 18, ii 7, 22 (text has pí-tar-hata), iii 24, Rost, MIO 8:172, Darga, RHA XXVII/84-85:7f., 20, read kaš-tar-ha-i-ta and cf. ¬ga-aš-tar-ha-i-ia-da KBo 9.96 i 5, cited by Melchert, CLL 103. 
pittarpalhi-see pattarpalhi-. 
pedaššahh-v.; to place, install, deposit; from MH/MS.† 
pres. pl. 3 pé-e-da-aš-ša-ah-ha-an-zi KBo 8.82 rev. 8 (MS? or ENS?), KUB 39.12:6 (MH?/NS). 
pret. pl. 3 pé-e-da-aš-ša-ah-he-er KUB 14.1 obv. 65, (57) (MH/MS). 
	a. without preceding adv.: “They eat up the meat” UN¨[T …]/ [… ištan]anaš pé-e-da-aš-šaah-ha-an-zi “and they place the im[plements(?)…] on [the alta]rs” KBo 8.82 rev. 7-8 (fest. frag., MS? or ENS?); cf. EGIR-ezziaz kuedani URU-ri […] / […-z]i mΩn–ši É.NA›–ŠU–ma apË<da>ni–pat URU-ri [(n–at apiya–pat)] / [(URU-ri)] pé-e-da-aš-ša-ahha-an[-zi] “Afterwards, in what city […-]s, if he has a Stone House in that same city, they deposit them (i.e., the bones) in that same city” KUB 39.12 rev. 4-6 (rit.), w. dupl. KUB 12.48 obv. 7, ed. HTR 72f. (“überführen? sie”), p. 149 (“überführen?”). 
	b. w. namma tΩn (cf. namma 2 a 3' a' and 2 d): (The Hittites sent troops under Pišeni and Puškurunu who defeated the Arzawan enemies of Madduwatta) ≠nu± µMadduwattan namma tΩn pé-e-da-aš[-šaah-he-er] “and they reinstated Madduwatta again” KUB 14.1 obv. 57 (hist., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 14f., tr. Dipl-Texts 147 (“[installed] … in his place once more”); (Attariššiya of AhhiyΩ attacked Madduwatta. Again, the Hittite king sent his troops to Madduwatta’s aid and they defeated Attariššiya) nu µMadduwattan namma tΩn pé-e-da-aš-ša-ah-he-er “and again (namma) they reinstated Madduwatta” ibid. obv. 65, ed. Madd. 16f. | Götze, Madd. 125, derived the v. from tΩn pedaš “of second rank” and tr. namma tΩn p. “wieder zweiten Ranges machten,” interpreting this as being “to install as a subordinate vassal.” KBo 8.82 shows that the v. can occur without tΩn (cf. Otten, StBoT 11:20); for tΩn namma/namma tΩn, see namma 2 a 3' a' and 2 d. 

Götze, Madd. (1928) 125 (tΩn p. “in die Stellung eines Lehnsmanns einsetzen”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 210 (tΩn p. “zweiten 

360

Ranges machen, zum Lehensmann machen”); Otten, HTR (1958) 71 (p. “überführen?”); Kammenhuber, KZ 77 (1961) 196f. (p. “überführen?”; tΩn p. “zweiten Ranges machen”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 430 (p. “an Ort und Stelle bringen, deponieren”; tΩn p. “zweiten Ranges machen”); Otten, StBoT 11 (1969) 20 (“Entgegen der seinerzeitigen Annahme handelt es sich nicht um eine Ableitung von tan pedan ‘zweitrangig,’ sondern um das einfache Verbum ‘an Ort und Stelle bringen, einsetzen’”); Neumann, IF 76 (1971) 271 (p. “plazieren”; tΩn used as predicate “den M. plazierten sie wieder als zweiten, sie ordneten ihn (in der Rangliste) als zweiten ein”; from adj. *pedašša- “an einer Stelle befindlich”); Puhvel, KZ 92 (1978) 102 n. 11 (thinks that namma tΩn must not be separated, mng. jointly “a second time,” w. the whole thus signifying simply “they reinstated M.’”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 455 n. 130 (tΩn p. “jemand zu einem zweiten Ranges machen”); Tischler, HdW (1982) 63 (p. “an Ort und Stelle bringen, plazieren”), 84 (tΩn p. “zweiten Ranges machen, zum Lehensmann machen”). 

Cf. peda- n. 
piddada see paddada. 

pittauri-or pittauriya-n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
gen. pí-it-ta-ú-ri-ia-aš KUB 8.75 i (50), ii 66, iii (1), 8, 20, iv 17, 30, 63, KUB 42.7 + KUB 8.75 iii 48, pí-it-ta-ú-ri!(text -te)-ia-aš KUB 8.75 i 57. 
[1 A.]ŠÀ GŠD.DA 8 PA. NUMUN–ŠU ŠA µTuttu pí-≠it±-[t]a-ú-ri-ia-aš “One long field, its seed is eight PARˆSU-measures, of Tuttu the p.” KUB 8.75 iv 63 (field lists, NH), ed. Souc√ek, ArOr 27:24f. (writes ŠA µTuttu(-)pittauriyaš); p. is an epithet of µTut~ tu. Cf. ŠA µUppakkili hatantiyaš KUB 42.1 iii? 3-4, 7, 10-11 (list of fields), ed. Souc√ek, ArOr 27:38f. and ŠA µZuwatti hata[ntiaš] KUB 42.4B 4, 10. The people in the lists of fields are characterized either by their profession, e.g., ŠA LÚNU.GIŠKIRIﬂ “of the gardener” (KUB 8.75 i 59, 61, iii 16), ŠA LÚBAHARﬁ “of the potter” (KUB 
8.75 ii 61), or by some other characteristics, e.g., ŠA µDINGIR.GEﬂ-LÚ pittΩš “(field) of Armaziti pittΩš” KUB 8.75 iii 6, ed. above s.v. pÏËtta-. 
Although p. lacks the det. LÚ, p. may still be a title. Since this Tuttu owns far more fields in this listing than any other person (ten entries for fields plus one entry for two karšattar), he must have been wealthy. If one tries to make an inner-Hittite etymology, the combination of pitta “land allotment” + ura/i-“great” could lead to a designation of one w. large land holdings. On the other hand 

pittiyali- b 
see Kaškäer 94, where it is listed w. epithets on Kaškaean PNs. 
Meriggi, WZKM 58 (1962) 105 (“ein Titel”); von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94; Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 26 (“(Beruf oder Titel)”); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214 (“‘(grand) intendant’ or ‘inspector (general)’”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 436 (keeps separate from LÚpidduri); Tischler, HdW (1982) 65 (“(ein Beruf oder Titel), vgl. pidduri-”). 
[pittazzikizzi] NINDA-LAM pí-it-ta-az-zi-ki-iz-zi KUB 28.6 ii 9b without word space in the copy may be pí-it-ta az-zi-ki-iz-zi or pí-it-ta-az zi-ki-iz-zi, cf. pÏËtta b. 
[pithiške-] see [pát(coll.)-hi-iš-kán-zi]. 
pittiya/e-, pitte-see piddai-A. 
pittiyali-, piddalli-adj.; swift; from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom. com. pít-ti-ia-li-iš KBo 39.8 iii 11 (MH/MS), IBoT 2.109 ii 25 (MH/NS), KBo 9.109 i (11) (NS), KBo 12.86 
(7) (NS), píd-da-al-li-iš KBo 9.106 ii 24 (MH/NS). acc. pít-ti-ia-li-in KBo 13.86 obv. 16, pít-t[e-ia-li-in] KBo 
9.110:11 (OH?/NS), KUB 33.80:7 (OH/MS). 
pl. nom. pít-ti-ia-li-e-eš KUB 33.62 ii 3 (OH or MH/MS?), [pít-t]i-ia-a-li-eš KUB 33.34 obv.? 6 (OH/NS). 
	a. (said of eagles): Ïtten–wa–mu TI°MUŠEN-a[(n pít-t)e-ia-li-in halzišten(?) …] / [p]Ωer ≠TI°MUŠEN±an pít-te[-ia-li-in halziËr(?)] “‘Go and [summon] for me the sw[ift] eagle’ … They went and [summoned] the swi[ft] eagle” KUB 33.80:6-7 (myth. frag., OH/MS), w. dupl. KBo 9.110 (NS) 11, translit. Myth. 98, tr. Hittite Myths 36; cf. TI°MUŠEN-aš pít-ti[-…] KBo 9.109 i 11 (OH/NS); MUŠENharanΩn pít-ti-ia-li-in […] nu– wa–kan pargamuš HUR.SAG.HI.A-uš [šanhta] “[He/they summoned/sent] the swift eagle, and [it searched] the high mountains” KBo 13.86 obv. 16-17; hΩranišMUŠEN pí-ti-ia-le-e-eš KUB 33.62 ii 3; [… hΩr]anMUŠEN pít-te-i[a-li-in …] KBo 34.32:6 (missing god myth frag.). 
	b. (said of the harziyallaš animal, who is called “swift (of) foot”): kar(a)p pít-ti-ia-li-iš GÌR-aš id[Ωlun] EME-an “Lift up the evil tongue, O swift foot!” IBoT 2.109 ii 25-26 (1Mast., MH/NS), ed. Rost, MIO 1:358f., Collins, Diss. 267, cf. lala- mng. 5; cf. píd-da-al-liiš [GÌR-aš] KBo 9.106 ii 24 and [píd-da]-al-li-iš GÌRaš KBo 39.8 iii 11 (both 2Mast.) | according to Watkins (GsKerns 345-48), followed by Puhvel (HED 3:209), the har~ 

361

ziyalli-is a snail, in which case the epithet “swift” is ironic. Puhvel correctly renders pittiyališ as “fleet,” but implausibly transliterates the dupl. as pè-da-al-li-iš GÌR-aš w. the mng. “scoopfoot,” derived from a supposed peda-“dig.” Cf. Collins, Diss. 265-268, for arguments against Watkins’ interpretation and favoring Siegelová’s (StBoT 14:41, 59) original suggestion of “Molche,” English “salamander.” 
An epithet of eagles (sec. a) should emphasize either their swiftness or sharp eyes. That it also describes a “foot” (usage b) points rather to the former. That the adj. is based upon the v. piddai-A “to run” also speaks for the mng. “swift.” 
Two other adjectives are translatable as “swift”: liliwant-and nuntarriya-. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 172 (w. lit.); idem, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 21; van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 113, 150; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 212. 
Cf. piddai-A. 
(LÚ)pitteyant-n.; fugitive; wr. syll. and w. Akk. MUNNABTUM; from MH/MS. 
sg. nom. pít-te-ia-an-za KUB 23.77:52, 54 (MH/MS), LÚpít-te-ia[-an-z]a KBo 19.39 + KUB 8.81 iii 9, KBo 19.39 iii 14 (both MH/MS), LÚpít-te-an-za KUB 8.81 ii 11 (MH/MS), KBo 16.27 iv 28 (= KUB 36.117:10) (MH/MS), LÚpít-ti-an-za KBo 18.14 l.e. 2 (MH/MS), LÚpít-ti-ia-an-za KUB 23.68 obv. 
(14) (MH/NS), KBo 18.58 obv. 4. 
acc. pít-te-an-da-an KUB 23.77:56 (MH/MS), LÚpít-te-anta-an KUB 8.81 ii 13 (MH/MS), KUB 13.26:(4), LÚpít-te-iaan-ta-an KUB 8.81 iii 3 (MH/MS), [LÚpít-te-ia-a]n-da-an KUB 14.1 rev. 62 (MH/MS), [LÚ]pít-ti-ia-an-da-an KUB 40.57 iv 6 (MH/NS). 
gen. [LÚ]p[ít-t]e-ia-an-ta-a[š] KUB 14.1 rev. 63 (MH/MS). 
pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠpít-te-ia-an-te-eš KUB 14.1 rev. 34 (MH/ MS), pít-te-an-te-e[š] KBo 16.43:2 (NS). 
d.-l. LÚ.MEŠpít-ti-ia-an-da-aš KUB 23.68 obv. 17 (MH/NS). 
case uncert. LÚpít-te-ia-an-ta-aš KUB 8.81 iii 18 (MH/ 
MS). 
a. wr. syll.: LÚhuyanzašš–a–šm[aš LÚpít-te-i]aan-za-aš-ša kuiš anda [iyatt?]ari “Any runaway or fugitive who enters your land (whether it be a freeman or a servant male or female, seize each one and send him before My Majesty. To the enemy or to any other country you shall not sell him)” KUB 
23.72 rev. 56-57 (Mita of Pahhuwa, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:38, 44; [LÚ]p[ít-t]e-ia-an-ta-a[š-w]a-at-ta uttar ŠAPAL [NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM kiššan kitta]t kuiš–wa– 

(LÚ)pitteyant- b 

ta–kkan ŠA KUR URU[Hatti … u]iškittari “The matter of the fugitives was [plac]ed for you under [oath as follows]: what(ever) [fugitive(?)] of the land [of Hatti come]s to you (send back to His Majesty)” KUB 14.1 rev. 63 (Madd., MH/MS), ed. Madd. 34f., tr. DiplTexts 150; Götze restored LÚhuyanza on the strength of obv. 34, which is not very sim.; one could just as easily restore LÚp. LÚhuyant- and LÚp. occur together in the same context and appear to be near synonyms; cf. [… LÚpít]-te-ia-an-taan-ma LÚhuyant[an …] KUB 13.26:4 (treaty frag., MH?/ NS); mΩn–ašta LÚpít-te-an-za URUHattušaz URUK[iz~ zua]t[ni] paizzi µŠunaššuraš–an Ëptu n–an ANA dUTU-ŠI Ωppa pΩu mΩn LÚpít-te-an-[t]a!-an-ma kuiški munnaizzi “If a fugitive goes from Hattuša to Kizzuwatna, Šunaššura must capture him and hand him back to His Majesty. If someone hides a fugitive (and they find him in his house …)” KUB 8.81 ii 11-14 (treaty, MH/MS), ed. Götze, ZA 36:11f., Petschow, ZA 55:242f., and del Monte, OA 20:217, tr. DiplTexts 21; [mΩn IŠTU KUR URUHat]ti pít-te-ia-an-za INA KUR URUKašga takšulaš URU-ya uizzi “If a fugitive comes from Hatti to the Kaška land into an allied city (if he is a slave and carries the property of his master, or, if he is a LÚ GIŠTUKUL, and carries the property of his associate, return the property but the fugitive belongs to you)” KUB 23.77:52 (treaty, MH/ MS), tr. Kaškäer 120; cf. ibid. 59-61 which prohibits the extradition to an enemy country of one who has sought refuge in Hatti, and ibid. 62-64; KUR URUHatti[–y]a–kan LÚ.MEŠpít-ti-ia-an-da-aš peran l[Ë p]uqqanuškatteni 
“You must not make the land of Hatti to appear hateful in the eyes of (lit. before) fugitives” KUB 
23.68 obv. 17 (treaty, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:194f.; UMMA dUTU-ŠI–MA ANA µKašš„ QIBI– MA § 13 LÚ.MEŠ pít-te-an-du-uš–kan kuit parΩ naitta n–aš uwater “Thus (says) His Majesty: Say to Kaššu: Regarding the fact that you dispatched 13 fugitives (to me): they have led them here” HKM 9:1-5 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 132f.; cf. also UMMA dUTU[-ŠI–M]A ANA µPišeni QIBI–MA § 2 LÚ. MEŠ pí[t-t]i-ia-an-du-uš–kan kuiuš parΩ [n]aitta n–aš uwater HKM 24:1-3 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 158f. 
b. wr. w. Akkadogram LÚMUN(N)ABTU: mun~ nabtu(m) is the Akk. word used for “fugitive” in the MH Hitt. treaty w. Šunaššura of Kizzuwatna (CTH 41), wr. in the Akk. language. The following are 

362

exx. from NH texts: mΩn KUR-TUM kuitki našma LÚMU-UN-NA-AB-TUM šarΩ tÏËzzi n–at INA KUR URUHatti iyattari n–at–kan tuel KUR–KA ištarna arha uizzi “If some land or a fugitive arises and travels to Hittite territory, and passes through your land” KBo 5.9 iii 12-15 (treaty w. Duppi-Teššub of Amurru), ed. SV 1:20f., tr. DiplTexts 58; namma–kan mΩn LÚMU-UN-N[A-AB-TUM …] uizzi n–an Ëp “If, then, a fugi[tive] comes […], seize him” ibid. iii 30-31, ed. SV 1:22f., tr. DiplTexts 58; [ŠA] LÚMU-NAB-TI–ma ŠAPAL NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM Q¸TAMMA kittaru mΩn–kan LÚMU-NAB-TUM IŠTU KU[R URUHatti LÚpít-t]i-iaan-ti-li uizzi “Let the (regulations) concerning fugitives likewise be placed under oath; if someone (lit. a fugitive) comes out of the land [of Hatti] as a refugee, (seize him and extradite him)” KBo 5.4 obv. 3536 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:58f., tr. DiplTexts 66; ŠA LÚMU-U[N-NAB-TI–ma ŠAP]AL NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM kiš(š)an iyanun mΩn–kan [LÚMU-UN-NAB-TUM IŠTU] KUR–KA <INA> KUR URU[KÙ.]BABBARTI [LÚpít-ti-ia-an-ti-li] uizzi [n–an–ta EGIR-pa UL piya]nzi IŠTU KUR URU[Hatti] LÚMU-UN[-NABTUM EGIR-pa piyan]na UL a-a-ra “I made (the regulation) regarding fugitive(s) (to be taken) under oath as follows: If [a fugitive] comes [from] your land to the land of Hatti, they will [not give him back to you], (for) it is forbidden to [gi]ve a fugitive [back] from the land of Hatti” KUB 21.1 iii 6164 (Alakš. treaty, Muw. II); for other refs., see KUB 19.9 ii 25 (Hatt. III), KUB 14.3 iii 42, 46 (Taw. letter, Hatt. III), KUB 
19.55 rev. 3-5 (Millawanda letter, Tudh. IV?); “I sent [… to] His Majesty — ” INA KUR URUHatti–wa 2 INIM. MEŠ nakkÏ [mΩn–w]a–kan LÚ.MEŠMU-NAB-TUM kuedanikki anda paizzi [nu–war–a]n UL parΩ pΩi “In the land of Hatti two matters are important: [If] a(!) fugitive goes to someone (in Hatti), and he does not hand him (the fugitive) over” KUB 54.1 iv 12-14 (dep., NH); […] ANA dU GIŠTIR LÚ.MEŠMU-NABTU›-TIM [… pe]iËr DINGIR-LIM–m[a]–wa–šmaš NU.GÁL “They [s]ent the fugitives to the Stormgod of the Forest, but they have no god” KBo 20.57 rev. 5-6 (frag. of text of unkn. nature). 
Alp’s preference (HBM 306) for a reading pat~ teant-for the n. and paddai for the v., in order to establish an etymological connection w. pada“foot,” conflicts w. the consistent writing of the 

(LÚ)pitteyantili 
word for “foot” w. single d/t (reflecting a voiced phoneme) and double d/t (reflecting a voiceless one) for the former two words. We follow the majority of scholars who employ the i vocalization. 
It seems that LÚhuyant- is a near synonym, except for KUB 26.17 ii 2-18 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:394-97 and 408, where he is to be interrogated by the military governor and is therefore perhaps closer to a mng. “(military) deserter.” 
Götze, ZA 36 (1925) 12 (“(politischer) Flüchtling”); idem, Madd. (1927) 114 (tries to define the difference between LÚp. and LÚhuyant-); Otten, StBoT 11 (1969) 17; Kestemont, Diplomatique (1974) 605 (also tries to define the difference between LÚp. and LÚhuyant-); Alp, HBM (1991) 306. 
Cf. piddai- A. 
(LÚ)pitteyantili, (LÚ)pittiyantili adv.; in the manner of/as a fugitive; from OS.† 
pít-te-an-ti-li KUB 37.223 obv. B 2 (OS), KUB 23.77 obv. 62, 72, 73, 74 (MH/MS), LÚpít-te-an-ti-li KBo 16.27 iv 29 (MH/MS), LÚpít-te-a[n]-≠ti-l±[i] KUB 40.5 ii 10 (OH/NS), LÚpít-te-ia-an-ti-l[i?] KUB 57.8 rev. 8 (Šupp. II), pít-ti-ia-an-tili KBo 4.3 iv 29, KBo 10.12 iv 7 (both Murš. II), KUB 40.51 ii? 2 (NS), LÚpít-ti-ia-an-ti-li KUB 40.4 ii? (5) (OH/NS), KBo 4.4 iv 57, KBo 5.4 obv. 36, 37, rev. (4), KBo 5.9 iii (33) (all Murš. II), KBo 19.70:15, LÚpít-ti-an-ti-li KBo 19.70:16 (Murš. II). 
LÚ-aš ANA KUR LÚ.KÚR pít-te-an-ti-li paizzi “The man will go to the enemy country as a fugitive” KUB 37.223 obv. B 2 (liver model, OS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 226f., Güterbock, FsReiner 152 w. drawing, see photograph MDOG 73:31; mΩn–kan IŠTU KUR URUKašga ≠LÚ± URUHatti pít-te-an-ti-li uizzi “If a Hittite comes from the Kaška land as a fugitive (and arrives back in an allied city, you have to set him on his way to Hattuša. You must not seize him and send him back to the Kaška land, or sell him to the Hittite territory)” KUB 23.77:62 (treaty, MH/ MS), tr. Kaškäer 121; cf. ibid. ll. 71-74; “As for the fugitives, let the following be put under oath”: mΩn– kan LÚMUNABTUM IŠTU KU[R URUHatti LÚpít-t]iia-an-ti-li uizzi “If someone (lit. a fugitive) comes to you from the land of Hatti as a fugitive (you must seize him and hand him back to me)” KBo 5.4 obv. 35-36 (Targ., Murš. II), ed. SV 1:58f., tr. DiplTexts 66 (“in flight”); [… na]mma–mu kuit TAŠPUR …[…] / […]x anzΩš ŠA LÚMU-NAB-TI […] / […] lË daškizzi nu–za § [IŠTU KUR URU…]x–kan x-az 
363

LÚpít-te-ia-an-ti-l[i uit] / [n–an …]x INA KUR Lul~ luwa LUGAL-un DÙ-at “… concerning what you wrote to me […] to us […] of the fugitive(s) […] let him not keep taking […]; § [He came from the land of …] … as a fugitive, and he made [him] king in the land of Lulluwa […]” KUB 57.8 rev. 5-9 (letter, Šupp. II); cf. also KUB 57.4 rev. 10. 
HroznŸ, SH (1917) 180; Götze, Hatt. (1925) 85; Götze, ZA 36 (1925) 16; Friedrich, SV 1 (1926) 47, 84; idem, HW (1952) 172 (w. lit.); Kestemont, Diplomatique (1974) 618. 
Cf. piddai- A. 
pittinu-, pittenu-A v.; to run off with, elope with (a woman), carry off quickly, whisk (something) away; from OS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pít-ti-nu-uz-zi KBo 6.2 ii 10 (OS), pít-ti-nu-zi KUB 13.6 ii 13 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 13.5 ii 29 (pre-NH/NS), pít-te-nu-uz-zi KBo 6.3 ii 29 (OH/NS), KBo 6.5 iii (4) (OH/ NS), KUB 41.8 ii 16 (pre-NH/NS), pít-te-nu-zi KBo 6.3 ii 25, KBo 6.5 ii 11 (both OH/NS), KBo 10.45 ii 52 (pre-NH/NS). 
pl. 3 pít-ti-nu-an-zi KBo 17.36 iv 2 (OS), KBo 20.6:(2), KBo 25.56 iv 11 (OS). 
pret. sg. 3 pít-te-nu-ut KBo 32.14 iii 9 (MH/MS). 
pret. pl. 3 pít-te-nu-er KUB 36.69:11 (NS). 
imp. sg. 3 pít-te-nu-ud-du KBo 10.45 ii 54 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 41.8 ii 18 (pre-NH/NS). 
iter. pít-te-nu-u[š-…] KBo 34.269:6, pít-te-nu-uš-k[i-…] KUB 60.4:3. 
uncert. pít-ti-nu-u[t] or -u[d-du] KBo 27.18:11 (OH/NS), pít-te-n[u-…] KUB 16.6: 9 (NH). 
While a few post-OS copies (KUB 13.6 ii 13, KBo 27.18:11) have the spelling pít-ti-(as opposed to pít-te-), it appears to have been the regular spelling in OS. 
a. obj. a woman: takku DUMU.MUNUS LÚ-ni taranza tamaiš–a–an pít-te-nu-≠uz-zi± (var. pít-tenu-zi) “If a daughter/girl is promised to a man, but another runs off with her” KBo 6.3 ii 5 (Laws §28a, OH/ NS), ed. HG 24f.; takku MUNUS-nan kuiški pít-ti-nuuz-zi (dupl. pít-te-nu-uz-zi) “If someone runs off with a woman (and a group of helpers goes after them, if three or two men are killed, there is no compensation. [They say]: ‘You (sg.) have become a wolf’)” KBo 6.2 ii 10 (Laws §37, OS), w. dupl. KBo 6.3 ii 29 (OH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 6.5 ii 10-11, ed. HG 26f. and HL 44, tr. Hoffner, Diss. 32, idem in LawColl 222; takku MUNUS-an ELLUM LÚAGRIG našma LÚSIPA pí[t-t]e-[nu-z]i k„šata–šši UL piddΩizzi “If either an AGRIG or a herdsman runs off with a free woman, and does not 

pittinu- A 

pay the bride-price for her, (she becomes a slave for three years)” KBo 6.3 ii 25-26 (Laws §35, OH/NS), ed. Friedrich, HG 26f.; on the herdsman and the LÚAGRIG, see Beckman in FsOtten™ 33-44. 
b. other obj.: — 1' without prev./adv.: ezzan GIM-an IM-anza pít-te-nu-uz-zi (var. pít-te-nu-zi) n–at–kan aruni parranta pËdai kËlla parnaš Ëšhar papratar Q¸TAMMA pít-te-nu-ud-du “Just as the wind whisks away the chaff and carries it across the sea, let it likewise whisk away the murder and impurity of this house (and let it carry it across the sea)” KUB 41.8 ii 15-18 (rit., pre-NH/NS), w. dupl. KBo 
10.45 ii 52-54 (NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:124-127; ŠAH.TUR– kan […].MEŠ pít-te-nu-er “The […-s] ran off with a piglet” KUB 36.69:10-11; cf. also KUB 60.4:3. 
2' w. anda: [LÚ.MEŠaš(ušΩla)…] KÁ-aš an[da (pít-ti-nu-an)-zi] KUB 2.3 iii 49 (OH), w. dupl. KBo 20.6:1-2 (OS). 
3' arha: NINDAkugullan UR.GI‡-aš UDUN-niya peran arha pít-te-nu-ut “A dog ran off with a ku~ gulla-loaf in front of an oven” KBo 32.14 iii 9 (MH/ MS), ed. StBoT 32:85, 167f. (= Hurr. tal–ahh–u–m “took away, stole”). 
4' w. parΩ: nu–za UN-ann–a au ZI-aš–ta–kkan kui[(š ¬z„wan)] IGI.HI.A-waz parΩ pít-ti-nu-zi “Just look at the man who whisks away your food from (before your) eyes” KUB 13.6 ii 12-13 (instr. for temple officials, pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 13.4 ii 20-21 (NS), KUB 13.5 ii 28-29 (NS), ed. Chrest. 152f., Süel, Direktif Metni 40f.; KUB 13.6 ii 13 (pre-NH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 13.4 ii 28, KUB 13.5 ii 29 (cf. above mng. 2). 
5' w. šarΩ: […] / [LÚ.M]EŠKISAL.LUH šarΩ pítte-n[u-…] KUB 16.6:8-9 (oracle question, NH). 
pitti/enu-is the caus. stem of piddai-A, pittiya“to run.” For the surmised stem piddanu-, see s.v. ¬pi/attanummi-. 
Walther, HC (1931) §28; Korošec, Studi in onore di S. Riccobono, I (1932) 563; David, Vorm en wezen van de huwelijkssluiting (1934) 39f.; Güterbock, ZA 42 (1934) 230; Friedrich, HW (1954) 171 (w. lit.); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 473 n. 32; Neu, StBoT 32 (1996) 166, 168, 427. 
Cf. piddai- A, (LÚ)pitteyant-, (LÚ)pitteyantili, pittiyali-. 

364

pitinu-B v.; (mng. uncert.); OS.† 

part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pí-ti-≠nu±?-an KUB 36.100 (OS) i 11. 
[…] µZukrašiš BA.Ú[Š] / […] U LÚ URUHašši 5[…] / […]x pí-ti-≠nu?±-an hark[anzi …] “[…] Zukraši died, and the five […-s] have …-ed the ‘man’ of Haššu” KUB 36.100 i 9-11 (Zukraši-text, OS). 
Because of the fragmentary context and the spelling which differs from the other attested forms of pittinu-we have listed this occurrence separately. It may turn out, however, that this is the same as pittinu-A. 

pitteššar see patteššar. 

[pé-e-te-eš-wa] read § nu–kan dUTU kaurÏ ka– ma GIŠBANŠUR BAL-ahhi <n–at> / pé-e-te-eš-ši! INA É DINGIR-LIM uppahhi “Or, I shall sacrifice here on a table to the Sungod(dess) kaurÏ and I shall send <it (= the zankilatar) ii 5> to his/her place in the temple?” KUB 5.24 ii 8-9 (oracle question, NH), cf. n–aš pedi–šši … INA É DINGIR-LIM pÏyauwanzi [(SI≈SA)]-at KUB 43.50 obv. 13-15 + KUB 15.36 obv. 5-7, w. dupl. KBo 4.2 iii 52-53, ed. MSpr 4f. 

[pittuanzi] see pattuanzi. 
(SŠG)pittula-n.; loop; from OH/MS. 

sg. nom. pít-tu-li-ia-aš KBo 16.97 l.e. 4a (MH/MS), pít-tu-la-aš KBo 21.82 iv 18 (OH/MS), KUB 32.133 i 12, SŠGpít-tu-u-la-aš KBo 15.10 ii 70, 71 (MH/MS), KUB 45.25 i 4, SŠGpít-tu-la-aš KUB 33.55 i 8 (OH/NS), KUB 42.14 i 8 (NH), KUB 
42.102:10 (NH), IBoT 2.134 iii 12, 13, píd-du-la-aš KUB 
32.129 i 10 (NH), pít-tu-u-la-aš KUB 29.4 i 74 (NH), KBo 

22.109 i 6, SŠGpíd-du-u-la-a[š] KBo 22.135 i 8. 

acc. pít-tu-la-an KBo 23.27 i 18 (MS? or ENS?), SŠGpít-tu-la-an KBo 27.136 ii 3, KUB 42.102:11, [SŠ]Gpíd-du-la-a[n] KUB 55.28 iii 9, (11). 
gen. pít-tu-la-aš IBoT 1.31 obv. 6 (NH). inst. SŠGpít-tu-u-li-it KUB 17.12 iii 19 (NS), KBo 29.183:(5), SŠGpíd-du-li-it KUB 17.12 iii 17 (NS). pl. acc. SŠGpít-tu-u-lu-uš 96/t:4, 183/t rt. col. 5, [S]ŠGpít-tu-lu-uš KUB 58.109 obv. 6, pít-tu-lu-uš IBoT 2.94 vi? 14. 
“The king and the queen take white wool and red wool from the karza(n)- (a weaver’s tool?)” ta taruppanzi t–uš pít-tu-lu-uš Ë[š]šanzi “They join them and make them into loops” IBoT 2.94 vi? 13-15 

(SŠG)pittula
(fest.), ed. Götze, KlF 1:189 (for Götze’s claimed opp. pittu~ liušš–a … hešikËmi Bo 2416 = KBo 17.3 iv 10, read pittuliušš– a … daškËmi w. copy and StBoT 8:36, and see pittuliya- B); nu SŠGpít-tu-la-an ZA.GÌN SŠGpít-tu-la-an S[Aﬁ …] anda uišuriyaizzi “(The practitioner) tightens a blue loop and a red loop […]” KBo 27.136 ii 3-4 (Kizz. rit.); nu GIG-zi kuin antuhšan n–an P¸NI ZAG. GAR.RA SŠGpíd-du-li-it ŠU.HI.A-uš išhiyanzi nam~ ma–an SŠGpít-tu-u-li-it-pát P¸NI DINGIR-LIM zΩhanzi “In front of the altar, they tie with a loop the hands of the person who is ill. Then, they whip him with that same loop before the deity” (till he cries for mercy) KUB 17.12 iii 16-20 (rit., NS), ed. Götze, KlF 1:189f.; (The carpenter climbs the rope twice up to the roof beam) INA 3 ≠KASKAL-NI±–[ma SŠ]Gpíd-du-la-a[n] tuhšΩ[r]i! mahhan–ma–kan LÚNAGAR [SŠ]G[pí]d-du-la-an tuhšΩri “But on the third time he unties(?) (lit. separates) the loop. When the carpenter unties(?) the loop, (the crier cries out, … The carpenter comes back down the rope)” KUB 55.28 iii 9-11 (building rit., NS), ed. Ünal, JCS 40:100f.; [x GIŠPISAN] SAﬁ SŠGpít-tu-la-aš ŠU-aš ŠA KASKAL “[x] red chest(s): (containing) carrier loops (lit. loops for the hand). For travel (lit. of the road)” KUB 42.14 i 8 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:19f., Siegelová, Verw. 404f. nn. 14, 16 (“‘(mit) Einschnürung für die Hand’ (wohl Handgriff bildend)”). Although it is possible that p. ŠU-aš describes the chest being equipped w. carrying straps “for the road” (i.e., for transporting it), it seems more likely that the chest contained a shipment of them, since other paragraphs in the same text also describe contents of the chests. That (SŠG)pittulaš can come in large quantities can be seen e.g., 10 MA.NA SŠGpít-tu-laaš QADU ≠x± KUB 42.102:10 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 94f. (“in Zwirn(spulen)”); […] 3 ME 40 SŠGpít-t[ula-aš] KUB 42.66 rev. 10 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 92f.; 1 KUŠA.GÁ.LÁ TAHAPŠI pít-tu-la-aš “one leather bag with carrying handles (lit. straps of loops)” IBoT 1.31 obv. 6 (inv., NH), ed. Goetze, JCS 10:32f., THeth 10:4, 6 (both tr. “with tightly fastened straps”), Siegelová, Verw. 80f. (“(mit) Schnur”). Goetze’s JCS 10:32f. tr. “tightly fastened,” is based on an underlying mng. “constriction”; since all contexts show a more concrete mng. of p., a tr. “straps (in shape of) loops, i.e., carrying handles” seems more appropriate. 
365

Götze, KlF (1930) 189f. (“Schlinge”); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 211 (“noose”), Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 613 (“Schnur, Einschnürung, Zwirnspule(?)”). 
Cf. pittuliya-A, pittuliya-B, pittuliyant-, pidduliyawant-. 
pit(t)uliya-A n. com.; 1. anguish, worry, constriction, tightness, tension, 2. (obj. in a lot oracle), 
3. (a feature of the exta); from OS.† 
sg. nom. pít-tu-li-ia-aš KUB 33.5 iii 14 (OH/MS), KUB 
30.10 rev. 16 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 16.97 l.e. 4a (MH/MS), KUB 36.79a iii 20 + KUB 31.127 iii 3 (OH/NS), KUB 8.35 obv. 7 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 3.103 obv. (4) (NH), KUB 43.22 iv 16 (NS), [píd-]du-li-ia-aš KBo 13.1 i 63 (NH). 
acc. pít-tu-li-ia-an KBo 18.151 rev.? 10, 11 (OH/OS? or MS?), KUB 31.127 iii 33 (OH/NS), KUB 56.17 obv. 2, (5), 15 (MH/NS), KUB 14.10 i 18, KUB 14.14 rev. 39, KUB 19.2 obv. 40 (all Murš. II), píd-du-li-an KUB 5.22:22 (NH). 
gen. pít-tu-li-ia-aš KUB 30.10 rev. 14 (OH or MH/MS).
d.-l. píd-du-li-ia-i ibid. rev. 14.
abl. píd-du-li-ia-az KUB 24.7 i 27, pít-tu-li-ia[-az] KBo

21.41 rev. (10) (MH/MS). pl. acc. pít-tu-li-uš KBo 17.3 iv 10, 27, KBo 17.1 iv (14), 
(31) (both OS). unclear: píd-du-li-ia-x[…] KUB 49.21 iii 18 (NH). 
(Sum.) […]≠x± = (Akk.) œa-ra-p[u] = (Hitt.) [píd-]du-li-iaaš “worry” KBo 13.1 i 63 (Erimhuš Bogh.), w. dupl. KBo 26.21:4, ed. MSL 17:105, StBoT 7:11, 18 (in StBoT 7:11 Akk. is read œa-ra-h[u]); (Sum.) [A.ŠI] = (Akk.) [ni]-is-sà!-tù “grief, worry, depression” = (Hitt.) pít-tu-l[i-ia-aš] KUB 3.103 obv. 4 (Diri), ed. Laroche, RHA XXIV/79:161f., cf. CAD N/2 
s.v. nissatu A. 
1. anguish, worry, constriction, tightness, tension: [m(Ωn) a(Ïn wΩÏ)]n pít-tu-li-uš-ša LUGAL-i MUNUS.LUGAL-i–(y)a daškËmi “When I take woe, pain, and worries from the king and the queen…” KBo 17.3 iv 10 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.1 iv 14 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:36f.; nu–mu É–YA inani peran píttu-li-ia-aš É-er kišat nu–mu pít-tu-li-ia-i peran ištanzaš–miš tamatta pËdi zappiškizzi … kinuna– mu–ššan inan pít-tu-li-ia-aš-ša makkËšta “Because of sickness, my house has now become a house of anguish, and because of anguish, my soul is flowing to another place … Now my sickness and anguish have become too much for me” KUB 30.10 rev. 14-17 (prayer, OH or MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 114, 117, and Güterbock, JNES 33:326, tr. ANET 401; pittuliyandan– ma LÚ-an [(ninganuwa)]nzi nu–š«ši»še–šta pít-tuli-ia-aš [arha mer]zi KUB 33.5 iii 13-15 (Tel. myth, OH/ MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.7 iii 10-11 (MS), ed. ninganu- mng. 2; 

pit(t)uliya- A 

“If a child is born in the ninth month, that child will die. If it doesn’t die” nu apËl ABU–ŠU AMA–ŠU pít-tu-li-ia-aš wemiyazi “his father and his mother will experience anguish (lit. anguish will find his father and mother)” KUB 8.35 obv. 7 (birth month omen, pre-NH/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 166, 169, and StBoT 29:14f.; (Whatever household is hated by Ištar, she sends to it her attendants) nu É-er tuhh[imazz]a píd-du-li-ia-az-za Ëššanzi “and they do the housework (lit. perform) with gr[oanin]g and anguish” KUB 24.7 i 26-27 (hymn to Ištar, NH), ed. Archi, OA 16:305, 308, and Güterbock, JAOS 103:156, cf. Melchert, Diss. 399; DINGIR-LUM–ma–kan EN.SŠSKUR–ya apËz píttu-li-ia[-za arha huittiyanun] “[I have drawn away] the deity and client from that anguish” KBo 21.41 rev. 10 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Samuha 122, 129; (O gods, chase the agony [lahlahhima-] from my heart) [N]Š.TE-az–ma–≠mu–kan± pít-tu-li-ia-an dΩtten “Take the constriction from my body” KUB 14.14 rev. 39 (PP1, Murš. II), ed. Götze, KlF 176f., tr. CoS 1:157b (“anguish”); ammuk–ma–az ŠÀ-az lahlahhiman UL tarhmi NŠ.TE-az–ma–za pít-tu-li-ia-an namma UL tarhmi KUB 14.10 i 16-18 (PP 2, Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 14.11 i 10-12, see lahlahhima- mng. a | for the use of abl. inst. in loc. sense, see StBoT 23:96 n. 61; ŠA dUTU-ŠI– pat ŠA NŠ.TE–ŠU kuinki píd-du-li-an išiya[hta] “(An oracle bird) portended/presaged some constriction of His Majesty’s body” KUB 5.22:22 (oracle question, NH), ed. HED 2:410 s.v. išiyahh-, tr. Götze, KlF 1:188, cf. Kammenhuber, ZA 56:205. 
1	(obj. in a KIN oracle): “He took …” LUGAL-aš x-x-an pí-tu-li-ia-an taÏš MUNUS. LUGAL-š[a?] x pí-tu-li-ia-an taÏš “He placed the king’s ‘anguish’ … He placed the queen’s ‘anguish’” KBo 18.151 rev.? 10-11 (KIN oracle, OS or OH/MS), ed. Ünal/Kammenhuber, KZ 88:164f.; cf. KUB 49.21 iii 18 (oracle, NH), in frag. context. 
2	(a feature of the exta): “(Is it the matter) of Tulpi-Teššub’s medication? (There is) a šintahi (a notch on the lobe of the liver)” ŠA dGÌR-aš–šan [AN]A GIŠŠÚ.A pít-tu-li-ia-aš kittari “A ‘constriction(?)’ lies on the ‘Throne of Sumuqan’” KBo 16.97 

l.e. 3a-4a (liver oracle, MH/MS), ed. Laroche, RA 64:132 (“un noeud”). 
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 190 (“Einschnürung, Beengung > Angst”); Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 211. 

366

Cf. (SŠG)pittula-. 

pittuliya-B v.; to be anxious, worry; from OH or MH/MS.† 

pres. pl. 3 [pít ?-]tu-li-ia-an-zi KBo 27.29:4. 
pret. pl. 3 pít!-tu-li-e-er VBoT 120 ii 14 (MH/NS). 

verbal subst. nom. pít-tu-li-ia-u-wa-ar KBo 3.21 iii 6 (OH/NS). 

part. see separate lemma pittuliyant-. 

iter. pres. sg. 1 [pít-t]u-li-iš-ki-mi KUB 30.11 rev. 10 (OH or MH/MS); pl. 3 pít-tu-li-iš-ká[n-zi] KUB 43.22 iv 18 (NS). 
verbal subst. nom. [píd-d]u-li-iš-ki-u-wa-ar KBo 13.1 i 64 (NH). 
(Sum.) […] ≠x±.DI = (Akk.) šu-úœ-r[u-pu] “to groan loudly(?)” = (Hitt.) [píd-d]u-li-iš-ki-u-wa-ar “to be always anxious” KBo 13.1 i 64 (Erimhuš Bogh.), ed. MSL 17:105, cf. StBoT 7:11 (rest. šu-úœ-r[u-hu]). 
“But I, what have I done to my god?” [… pítt]u-li-iš-ki-mi “I am anxious (and my soul is flowing to another place)” KUB 30.11 rev. 10 (prayer, OH or MH/MS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 124, 129, cf. Güterbock, JNES 
33:326 w. n. 17; (The Sungod speaks to Šauška) erer– at LUGAL.MEŠ nu šargauËš pít!-tu-li-e-er “The kings arrived(?), and the heroes worried” VBoT 120 ii 14 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:140f., see comment, ibid. 161; [karuil]iËš DINGIR.MEŠ pít-tu-li-iau-wa-ar […-]x-yandu “Let the primeval gods […] anguish” KBo 3.21 iii 6-7 (hymn to Adad, OH/NS), ed. Archi, Or NS 52:23f., 26. 
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 188f.; Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 29; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 211 (“constrict, cramp, make anxious”). 

Cf. (SŠG)pittula-. 

pittuliyant-adj.; worried, fearful, intimidated; from OH/MS.† 
sg. nom. com. p[ít]-tu(coll. Singer)-li-ia-an-za KUB 6.46 iv 35 (Muw. II). 
acc. com. pít-tu-li-ia-an-da-an KUB 33.5 iii 13 (OH/MS), pít-tu-li-an-ta-an KBo 3.21 ii 18 (OH?/NS). 
pít-tu-li-ia-an-da-an-ma LÚ-an [ning(anu~ wa)]nzi nu–š«ši»še–šta pittuliyaš [arha mer]zi “They get a worried man drunk, and his worry [disap]pears” KUB 33.5 iii 13-15 (myth, OH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 33.7 iii 10-11 (OH/MS); “Even he who is unafraid (UL nahšariyanza) will not escape from the circle of your net” UL pít-tu-li-an-ta-an-ma anda war~ piškiši “Even him who is unintimidated you en

piddunza 
close therein” KBo 3.21 ii 18-19 (hymn to Adad, OH?/NS), ed. Hoffner, Finkelstein Mem. 105, Archi, Or NS 52:23, 25, and Weitenberg, Hethitica 2:47f.; for KUB 6.46 iv 35, see 
pidduliyauwant-. 
Götze, KlF 1 (1930) 188f.; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 211. 
Cf. (SŠG)pittula-. 
pidduliyauwant-adj.; restrained, reluctant, grudging(?); NH.† 
píd-du-li-ia-u-wa-an-za KUB 30.14 iii 67 (Muw. II). 
“The sacrificial loaves and the libations which I am accustomed to present to the Stormgod pihaššaššiš, my lord” n–an–ši (dupl. n–an–ta) dušgarauwanza piškellu píd-du-li-ia-u-wa-an-zama-ta (dupl. p[ít]-tu(coll. Singer)-li-ia-an-za-mata) lË peškimi “may I give them to you gladly, may I not give them to you with restraint (i.e., reluctantly)” KUB 30.14 iii 66-67 (prayer, Muw. II), w. dupl. KUB 
6.46 iv 34-35, ed. Singer, MuwPr 24, 42, 68, tr. ANET 398 (“I would not give them to thee grudgingly”). 
Cf. (SŠG)pittula-. 
pËdunaš (only in peran pedunaš) n. see peran pedumaš. 
piddunaš (only in peran piddunaš) n. see peran pidumaš. 
pit„nt„i-adj. or n.; (onomastic epithet); MH.† 
µPaziziš pi-tu-u-un-tu-u-i[š] 1691/u rev. 10 (prayer, Arn. I), cf. Kaškäer 91. For a list of sim. onomastic epithets, see piggapilu[(-)]. 
von Schuler, Kaškäer (1965) 94, 164; Tischler, HdW (1982) 
65. 
piddunza Luw. n.; lump(?); NH.† 
[(BA.B)]A.ZA mahhan karšanza [(nu–šš)]i– kan pí-id-du-un-za (par. pa-ak-šu-wa-an) [(anda)] NU.GÁL “Just as the porridge is cut (smooth, so that) there is no lump(?) in it” KBo 23.1 iii 17-19 (rit., NH), w. dupl. KBo 24.50 i 12-13 and par. KUB 30.38a:4-5, ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 3:146, 153, and pakkuššuwant-mng. 2; since the Luw. form corresponds to the par. Hitt. sg. nom.-acc. neut., it is likely to be the case in -ša for which see van den Hout, KZ 97:60-80. The stem 
367

can be either in -u- (+ sg. nom. neut. -n + -ša > -za), cf. NINDAalalunza and van den Hout, KZ 97:65 
w. n. 27, 28, or, stem in -n. 
Lebrun, Hethitica 3 (1979) 153 (“grumeaux”). 
GIŠpiddur see GIŠpaddur. 
pitturi-see patturi-. 
LÚpidduri-n.; (a high dignitary of Cyprus); late NH.† 
sg. d.-l. (ANA) LÚpi-≠id-du±-ri KBo 12.38 i 10 (Šupp. II). 
case unkn. LÚpí-id-du[-…] KBo 12.39 rev.! 5 (coll. photo) (Šupp. II). 
“The country of Alašiya … I made tributary and this tribute I imposed on it on the spot”: [o]x ANA LUGAL KURAlašiya U ANA LÚpí-id-du-ri I[TT]I? dUTU URUTÚL-na U Tabarna LUGAL.GAL [Š]A? dUTU URUTÚL-na LÚSANGA kΩš arkammaš Ëšdu “[…] for the king of Alašiya and for the LÚp. this shall be the tribute (owed) to the Sungoddess of Arinna and to Tabarna, the great king, priest of the Sungoddess of Arinna” KBo 12.38 i 10-12 (hist., Šupp. II), ed. Güterbock, JNES 26:75, 77; LÚpí-id-du-[ri-iš?] / [URU…-t]u-um-ma URU-ri SIGﬁ-e-eš-du “Let the p. be well in the city […]” KBo 12.39 rev.! 5-6 (treaty, Šupp. II). 
LÚp. may be identical w. the (LÚ)MAŠKIM (GAL), a prominent office in Alašiya (EA 40:3 and RS 20.18:1f. (= Akk. rΩbiœu “königlicher Kommissär” AHw s.v., mng. 1.c.). 
Because of the different spelling (pí-id-vs. pát-) the lack of the det. LÚ, and different contexts, LÚp. should be kept separate from PÁT-tu-ri-q.v., but might be the same as pittauri(ya)-, q.v. 
Steiner, Kadmos 1 (1962) 136 n. 40 (nisbe of pdr?); Otten, MDOG 94 (1963) 15 w. n. 54 and 55 (Hurrian pidduri perhaps = Urartian patari(e) “city”; cf. alphabetic Ugaritic pdr “city”); Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 26f., 45, 51 (“Stadtkommandant(?),” “Statthalter,” connects w. pittauriya-); von Schuler apud Friedrich, HW 3. Erg. (1966) 51 (“Erbprinz(?)”); Carruba, SCO 17 (1968) 29 n. 65 (“il grande del luogo,” from peda(n)-uri, doesn’t say if he connects w. pittauriya); Imparati, RHA XXXII (1974) 72-75; Puhvel, Heth.u.Idg. (1979) 214; Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 436f. (keeps separate from pittauriya); Tischler, HdW (1982) 65 (“hoher Würdenträger, ‘Erbprinz’?”). 

puwai

piunušiya-v.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pí-u-nu-≠ši±-ia-z[i] KBo 22.135 rev. 2 (Kizz. rit., NS), in a frag. context. 
NA›pÏuri-n.; (a stone or mineral or an object made of stone); NS.† 
sg. acc. NA›pi-i-ú-ri-in KBo 23.70 ii (5), (10), 15, (19), 23. 
[nu–kan 1 NA›pi-i]≠-ú±-ri-in anda tar[nai?] KBo 
23.70 ii 19 (rit. for Hebat, NS), cf. ibid. ii 10, 15, 23. 
pezza-v.; (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
inf. pé-e-ez-za-u-wa-an-zi KBo 21.12:22, pé-ez-za-u-wa-an-zi ibid. 21. 
UMMA EN.SŠSKUR KUŠ UR.MAH–wa pap~ paraški«iz»mi KUŠ AM–wa U x[…] papparaškimi pΩiš–an–mu DUMU.LÚ.U⁄·.LU KUŠ-an pappar~ š„wanz[i] UZﬂ-š–a–mu pankur pé-ez-za-u-wa-an-zi paiš kinuna EN.SŠSKU[R …] papparš„wanzi pankur–ma–aš pé-e-ez-za-u-wa-an-zi dat[ta?] “Thus speaks the client: ‘I will sprinkle the hide of a lion; the hide of an aurochs(?), and … I will sprinkle. He gave it, the hide, to me, the mortal, for sprinkling. The pankur of a she-goat he gave to me for p.’ And now the clie[nt has taken(?) the hide] for sprinkling; but the pankur for p. he has ta[ken] from them” KBo 21.12:21-22; cf. papparš-a 6' | since -aš in the last sentence, according to Watkins’ rule [apud Garrett, JCS 42:227-242] cannot be a subject of a trans. v., it must be acc. or perhaps -aš for -šmaš. 
pu-ú-x[…] KUB 12.24 iv 10 see (SŠG)p„ttar. 
puwai-v.; to pound, grind; pre-NH/NS.† pres. sg. 3 pu-u-wa-iz-zi KBo 21.76 rt. col. 5 (NS), KUB 
44.64 i 12 (NH), pu-u-wa-a-iz-zi KUB 8.38 ii 14, KUB 44.64 ii 13 (both NH); Luw. pu-u-wa-ti KBo 4.2 i 40 (pre-NH/NS). 
(Akk.) ta-haš-šal “you pound” KUB 37.1 i 15 = (Luw.) pu-wa-a-ti “he pounds” ibid. i 16 (med. text, NH), ed. Köcher, AfO 16:48-50, cf. Haas, SMEA 29:108 n. 51. 
(Describing the preparation of a medication; the practitioner collects a prescribed quantity of herbs) namma–at kÏnaizzi pu-u-wa-a-iz-zi SIGﬁ-ahzi “(S)he then mixes(?), pounds/grinds, and refines them” KUB 44.64 ii 12-13 (med. rit., NH), ed. lazziyahhmng. 4 | for lazziyahh-, see Starke, GM 53:58 n. 15; cf. also ibid. i 11-12; (They bring up marruwašha-mineral 

368

from Cyprus to treat his eye) namma–aš–ši pup~ puššatari … n–an kinaiz!zi namma–an–kan pu-uwa-a-iz-zi nu–k[a]n ANA GAL ZABAR GEŠTIN≠an± lΩhuwΩi uni–ya marruwašhan menahhanda peššiazzi n–an anda harnamniyazzi n–an–ši–kan naššu UD-az našma–ši–kan GEﬂ-az anda tarneš~ kizzi “Then it (the marruwašha-) is pounded/ ground for it/him, … and (s)he mixes it, and then (or, again) (s)he pounds/grinds it, and pours wine into a bronze cup and throws that marruwašha-in, mixes it up, and applies it to the patient’s eye either in the day or at night” KUB 44.63 iii 5-10 + KUB 8.38 iii! 13-18 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 19:30f.; nu haššan GIŠkar(a)ššaniyaš dΩi n–an–kan pu-u-wa-ti n–an– kan ištalgaizzi “(The practitioner) takes the ash of a soda plant, pounds it, kneads it, (and they make it into one ball)” KBo 4.2 i 39-40 (rit., pre-NH/NS), ed. Kronasser, Die Sprache 8:91, 96 | for hašš(a)-, see Popko, Kultobjekte 73f. n. 36 w. lit. and Puhvel, HED 1-2:451 and 3:210-212, differently Starke, StBoT 31:123f., 379 (“Er nimmt den Stein der k.-Frucht, zerstöšt ihn und glättet ihn”), taking haš(š)-as “(Frucht-)Kern,” “(Frucht-)stein” from cuneiform Luw. haš-“Knochen.” 
Starke (StBoT 31:379) points out that in the Luw. passage KUB 32.8 + KUB 32.5 iv 21-23 the v. p„wandu occurs in parallelism w. tarmaindu “let them nail (down)/fix.” 
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 92; idem, JCS 1 (1947) 316f.; Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 123f. (“he grinds, pounds”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 174 (“anhauchen(?), erwärmen(?)”); HW 1. Erg. (1957) 17 (“zerstampfen”); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 474 (“zermahlmen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 162, 385; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 123, 378f. w. n. 1368 (“zerstošen, zerstampfen”). 

Cf. pupulli-, puppušša, (¬)puššai-, (TÚG)puššaimi-. 

TÚGpuwaliya-n. neut.; (a garment for the leg or foot?); NH.† 
Luw. neut. sg. nom.-acc. (case in -ša) TÚGpu-wa-li-an-za KUB 42.56 (rev.?) 9; Hitt. neut. nom.-acc. sg. or pl. TÚGpuwa-li-ia KBo 2.20 obv. 6; broken TÚGpu-wa-l[i?-…] KUB 

42.40 iv 3. 

(In a list of garments:) 3 TÚGpu-wa-li-ia QADU TÚGGAD.DAM “three p.-garments together with leggings” KBo 2.20 obv. 6 (rit. frag., NS), cited by Goetze in Cor.Ling. 59, 60, Siegelová, Verw. 524 n. 6 (“dürfte lediglich 

puwatti
in den Bereich von Schuhwerk hinweisen”); 19 TÚGpu-wali-an-za ŠÀ 10 HAŠMAN 3 ZA.GÌN 6 BABBAR “Nineteen p.-garments, among (them) ten purple, three blue, six white” KUB 42.56 (rev.?) 9 (inv., NH), translit. THeth 10:131, Siegelová, Verw. 522-24; TÚGpu-wal[i?-…] KUB 42.40 iv 3 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 506f. 
TÚGp. appears to be a small garment or its part, and forms a set together w. leggings. From the odd numbers in a single color (3 blue) it appears that the p. is not used in pairs, as would the associated leggings. Three out of the four numbered groups (3, 3, and 6) are divisible by three, but the fourth (10 purple) is not. 
Since Hitt. nouns w. numbers higher than one can be either sg. or pl., the analysis given in the morphological sec. above is based upon several factors. We assume that TÚGpu-wa-li-ia is a neut., which means that TÚGpu-wa-li-an-za KUB 42.56 (rev.?) 9 is unlikely to be a Luw. com. gender pl. Since there is no need for an erg. form in the latter passage, the only other possibility is the Luw. case in -ša, which is a sg. 
Goetze, Cor.Ling. (1955) 59 (= TAHAPŠU “leather strap, belt”), Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 131 and in gloss. 234 (“strap, belt,” apparently following Goetze; Košak [personal communication] has now abandoned this translation); Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 524 n. 6, 614 (lists the stem as TÚGpu∑aliant-and translates only as “ein Kleidungsstück”). 
[puwaššiya-v.] HW 174, Oettinger, Stammbildung 387 
n. 260 and index, Tischler, HdW 66; instead of [p]u-waaš-ši-ia-ad-du KUB 24.10 iii 9, read [L]Ú-aš wa-aš-šiia-ad-du, and see dupl. 987/v + KUB 24.11 iii 7 (Otten/ Rüster, ZA 63:89). 
puwatti-n. com.; madder(?); NH.† 
(Sum.) še-be-da = (Akk.) ši-in-du = (Hitt.) pu-wa-at-ti-≠iš± KBo 1.42 iv 46 (Izi Bogh.), ed. MSL 13.142 (without tr.). 
Akk. šimtu, šindu “Kennzeichen, Farbe, Marke,” see AHw 1238b. Nowhere else does Akk. šimtu translate Sum. še-be-da. Without a real Hitt. context, and in view of the uncertainty of even the mng. of the Akk. entry, it is risky to assume that either “Akk.” šindu or “Hitt.” puwattiš means “mark” or “color”; cf. Hoffner, JAOS 87:303. Nor do we know 
369

if puwattiš is Hitt. or Luw. The suggested translation is based on the assumption that Ugaritic pwt (a material used in dying and/or tanning) and Arabic fuwwatu “dyers’ madder” are related to this word. 
Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 94 (“mark, color”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 174 (“Farbe, farbige Marke (als Eigentumszeichen(?)”); Hoffner, RHA XXV/80 (1967) 56f. n. 103 (“a colored paste employed … in dyeing,” “dyer’s madder”); idem, JAOS 87 (1967) 303 (“powder, salve, paste”); Haas, SMEA 29 (1992) 107-109 (“Krappwurzel, Färberröte” [on basis of Sanmartin, AfO 34:54-56], does not cite Hoffner, JAOS 87, but repeats much of the same evidence). 
Cf. puwai-. 
p„h-(Luw.) v.; to campaign(?), fight(?), hunt(?); NH.† 
“If only I could make some name for myself!” [(nu mekki kuitki ape)dani ?…]x INA HUR.SAGNI–pat kuit nawi pu-u-uh-ti “[…] something great(?) in that […], because he (the Assyrian king) has not yet campaigned(?) in that same mountain” KUB 23.92 rev. 14 (letter to Assyria, Tudh. IV), 
w. dupl. KUB 23.103 rev. 14-15, ed. Otten, AfO 19:42f. Probably not Hitt. pres. sg. 2, but Luw. pres. sg. 3 of puh-, since the Assyrian king is referred to in the 3rd sg. in lines 15 and 16. Otten, AfO 19:43, also so interprets the form (“weil er noch nicht …-t”). 
There is a v. form pu-u[h?-t]a? KUB 33.120 ii 48 (Song of Kumarbi, NS) without context, which might be a pret. of the same verb. 
puhammi[…] (mng. unkn.); NS.† 
10 GA.KIN.AG ka[p]p[i]š[a o] x[…] / AN~ DAHŠUMSAR–ya pu-ha-am-mi-u[š …] / nu 7-an 7an anda išhiškanz[i] / nu išhiyatar ANDAHŠUMSAR iyan[zi] namma–at anda šÏettari / n–at išhiyatar n– an–za–an NINDA.GUR›.RA ANDAHŠUMSAR halziššanzi “ten kappiša-cheeses, […], AN~ DAHŠUM-plants, p.-s […]; they tie (together) seven and seven, and they make ANDAHŠUM-ties, then it is pressed together, and it (is the) tie. And they call it ANDAHŠUM-bread” KBo 25.163 v 2-3 (hišuwaš fest., NS); the last sign may be restored -u[š…] or -i[š]. p. might be a Luw. pass. part. or adj. modifying a type of bread. Since the end product of the entire process is “ANDAHŠUM-bread,” one expects some kind of bread among the ingredients. Probably not from the v. puh-q.v. 

p„hugari- a 

¬puharšan[(-)] adj. or n.(?); (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
[…]x-tarša ŠA KÙ.GI ¬pu-har-ša-an[(-)…] KBo 18.23 obv. 11 (letter, NH); p. may modify the […]xtarša made of gold. A reading ¬pu-hur-ša-an[(-) is also possible. Hagenbuchner’s restoration [(…) ša-kán]-tatar-ša ŠA KÙ.GI :pu-har-ša-an[-ni-it I-NA URUHat-tu]-ši? “Auch [šakan]tatar aus Gold [mit] :puharša[n nach Hattuš]a […]” (THeth 16:322f., 324) is without supporting evidence, and the sentence which results is grammatically questionable. 
puhla-n.; (mng. unkn.; describes gates and perhaps deities).† 
gen. pu-uh-la-aš ABoT 6:10, IBoT 1.27:5, IBoT 4.288:(6), 54/s i 11 (Berman, Diss. 50). 
“The king takes his seat in the huluganni-cart and goes up to Hattuša” mΩn–kan LUGAL-uš [p]uuh-la-aš KÁ.GAL[-aš a]nda ari “When he arrives at the gate of the puhla-, (the performer calls out: ‘aha’)” IBoT 1.27:4-5 + KUB 20.47 i 13-14 (spring fest.); cf. pu-uh-la-aš KÁ.GAL-aš ABoT 6:10; [… K]Á.GAL pu-uh-la-aš 54/s i 11 (Berman, Diss. 50); […] / DINGIR.MEŠ pu-uh-l[a-aš …] IBoT 4.288:5-6. 
puhlaš KÁ.GAL is probably the name of one of Hattuša’s gates. 
Otten, FsFriedrich (1959) 357; Berman, Diss. (1972) 50; Kammenhuber, HW™ 1 (1982) 411b (without tr., s.v. aška-). 
p„hugari-n.; replacement, substitute; from MH?/NS. 
sg. nom. pu-u-hu-ga-ri-iš KBo 4.2 iii 50, KUB 43.50 obv. 11 + KUB 15.36 obv. 3, IBoT 2.112 obv. (11) (all Murš. II). 
acc. pu-u-hu-ga-ri-in KBo 4.2 iii 51, 53, 56!, KUB 43.50 obv. 18, KUB 12.31 obv. (13), (15), KUB 15.36 obv. 16 (all Murš. II), Bo 4951 rev.? 14 (StBoT 29:126, MH??/NS), pu-hu-ga-re-en AT 454 iv 11, pu-u-hu!-ga-ri-in KUB 15.36 obv. 14 (Murš. II), pu-hu-ga-ri-in KUB 12.31 rev. 18 (Murš. II). 
gen. pu-hu-u-ga-a-ri-aš KUB 16.9 iii 5 (NH). 
uncert. (Hitt. d.-l. or Akkadographic?) (GUD) pu-u-hu-gari (EGIR-anda) KUB 15.36 obv. 15 (Murš. II). 
Akkadographic (ANA GUD) pu-u-hu-ga-ri KBo 4.2 iv 21, KUB 43.51 rev. 6; (ŠA GUD) pu-u-hu-ga-ri KBo 4.2 iv 42, (ITTI GUD) pu-u-hu-ga-ri KBo 4.2 iv 11, KUB 12.31 rev. 26 (all Murš. II); pu-u-hu-ga-a-ri KUB 16.9 iii 6 (NH). 
a. (said of swords): “Since it has been established that the god is angry about damaged appurtenances, we asked the temple officials, and they said: ‘The god Umbu was wearing a copper 

370

sword’” nu–war–at […] / pu-hu-ga-re-en-ma-wa kuiš pΩi “and it [is missing(?).] But he who was to give (lit. ‘gives’) a replacement ([gave(?)] a copper sword of poo[r] men)” AT 454 iv 10-11 (oracle question, NH), ed. Gurney in Wiseman, AT pp. 116f. 
b. (said of cattle): (An inquiry into Muršili’s inability to speak established the Stormgod of Manuzziya as its cause) “I inquired by oracle about the Stormgod of Manuzziya” nu–šši GUD pu-u-huga-ri-iš piyauanzi IZI-it wahnumanzi [(MUŠEN. HI.)]A wahnummanzi SI≈SÁ-at “and it was established that a substitute ox had to be sent (not “given,” see pai-B inf. in morphology) to him and ‘turned’ with fire, and that birds must be ‘turned.’” (The ox is then adorned, the king lays his hand on it, and it is dispatched according to ritual regulations) KBo 4.2 iii 50-51 (aphasia of Murš. II), w. dupls. KUB 43.50 obv. 11-12 + KUB 15.36 obv. 3-4, IBoT 2.112 obv. 11, KUB 
12.31 obv. 2, ed. MSpr. 4f., and Lebrun, Hethitica 6:104, 110. 
	c. (said of lambs): SILA› pu-hu-ga-ri-in Bo 4951 rev.? 14 (birth rit., MH??/NS), ed. StBoT 29:126f.; SILA› pu-hu-u-ga-ri-aš KUB 16.9 iii 5; SILA› pu-u-hu-ga-ari ibid. iii 6. 
	p. is a Hurr. n. derived by means of the suffix -ugar-. from the Akk. n. p„hu “substitute.” On the Hurr. -ugar-suffix see Goetze, Lg. 16:132f., and Speiser, Intr. 136f. Fincke in SCCNH 7:17-19 reviews p„hugari and points to the first attestation of the inf. puhugarumma epËšu “to exchange” at Nuzi. 

Götze, MSpr (1934) 27 (“Sühne(??)-Rind”), 64; von Brandenstein, Bildbeschr. (1943) 49 w. n. 1 (“Tausch, Ersatz”); Kümmel, StBoT 3 (1967) 81 (“Ersatz”); Laroche, GLH (1979) 204 (“substitut vivant; remplacement, échange”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 131 w. n. 342 (“substitute”). 
puhunuhiman (an ominous feature on the sheep’s liver, as described in extispicies); MH/ MS.† 
“There are three nipašuri-s. The right side (or: the right one) has ‘turned’ on top. There is a ‘path’ (KASKAL urnirniš), ‘beaten’ at the back” GÙBlaz–ma pu-hu-nu-hi-ma-an “but on the left, there is 
p. (Result favorable)” KBo 16.97 rev. 50 (liver oracle, MH/MS); “(Is it the matter) of Tulpi-Teššub’s medication? (There is) a šintahi (a notch on the lobe of the liver)” ŠA dGÌR-aš–šan [AN]A? GIŠŠÚ.A pít-tu

pu-ga[-…] 
li-ia-aš kittari urnirniš pu-hu-nu-u-hi-ma-an 
“There is a ‘constriction(?)’ on the ‘throne of Sumuqan’; (there is) a ‘path’ (and?) p.” ibid. l.e. 3a4a. 
Since both kalulupaš and urnirniš are com. gender, puhunuhiman cannot be a neut. part. predicate for either, and must therefore be a n., perhaps a Luw. n. w. the stem -(m)man (cf. StBoT 31:243-299 and esp. Starke’s criteria on p. 248 for distinguishing these from particples). 
Laroche, RA 64 (1970) 137 (“prédicat de l’urnirnis”); idem, GLH (1979) 204 (“signe omineux”). 
puhuršan[(-)] see puharšan[(-)]. 
pukk-, pugga-v. mid.; to be hateful, repulsive, unpleasant; NH.† 
imp. sg. 3 pu-ug-ga-ru KUB 9.32 obv. 22, pu-ug-ga-ta-ru HT 1 iii 33, pu-uk-ta-r[u] KUB 9.31 iii 40, pu[-…] KUB 41.18 iii 13 (-aru or -taru, pukk-or pugga-?). 
pu-ug-ga-t[i] IBoT 3.109:6, was tentatively analyzed as pret. sg. 3 by Neu, StBoT 5:143 w. n. 1, but should be read Akk. PU-UQ-QÁ-T[I] “buttocks”; cf. dupl. PU-UQ-QA-TI 125/r ii 11, ed. Otten, MDOG 93:76 w. n. 2. 
“Afterwards, the camp commanders lay their hands on the rams and speak as follows: ‘The deity who caused this plague — now the rams are standing here, and their liver, heart and limbs are fat/succulent’” nu–šši–kan ŠA AMILUTTI UZU pu-ug-gata-ru (vars. pu-ug-ga-ru, pu-uk-ta-r[u], pu[-…]) namma nu–wa–ššan kattan kËdaš UDU.ŠIR.HI.A waršiyahhut “‘May human flesh (lit. the flesh of mankind) be hateful to him once again. And may you, (O deity,) be satisfied with these rams’” HT 1 iii 32-35 (Ašhella’s rit., NH), w. dupls. KUB 9.31 iii 39-41, KUB 9.32 obv. 22-23 and KUB 41.18 iii 13-15, ed. Dinçol, Belleten 49/193:15, 24, Neu, StBoT 5:143, tr. Friedrich, AO 25/2:11, cf. idem, ZA 37:186, cf. Melchert, Diss. 400f. 
Friedrich, AO 25/2 (1925) 11 (“verhašt sein”); idem, ZA 37 (1927) 186; Kronasser, AfO 16 (1952-53) 317-319; idem, EHS 1 (1966) 386; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 143. 
Cf. pukkant-, puqqanu-. 
pu-ga[-…] (Hurr.) n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
2 MUŠEN tišimzihiya pu-ga[-…] (or put[a?…]) “(They sacrifice) two birds for tišimzihiya 
371

and p.” KBo 11.7 obv. 12 (list of offerings), translit. Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:94. 
pugga-see pukk-. 
pukkant-part.; hated, hateful, repulsive, unpleasant; NH.† 
sg. nom. com. pu-uk-kán-za KBo 1.42 iv 3, KBo 1.30 obv. 18, KUB 24.7 i (48), 50 (all NH). 
nom.-acc. neut. pu-uk-kán KUB 24.7 i 25 (NH). 
frag. pu-u[k-…] KBo 26.77:1 (NH), KBo 1.38 rev. 10. 
(Sum.) [lú níg-hul] = (Sum. pron.) lu-ni-hu-ul “evil man” = (Akk.) zé-e-ru = (Hitt.) pu-uk-kán-za “hated” KBo 1.30 obv. 18 (Old Babylonian Lu), ed. MSL 12:214f. (the Hitt. scribe may have considered the Akk. a form of zêru “to hate”); (Sum.) níg-x = (Akk.) [o-o]-tum = (Hitt.) pu-uk-kán-za “hated” KBo 1.42 iv 3 (Izi Bogh. A), ed. MSL 13:140 l. 230; (Sum.) […] = (Akk.) [ o ]x = (Hitt.) pu-u[k?-…] KBo 1.38 rev. 10 (Kagal). 
[mΩn] MUNUS-TUM–ma ANA LÚMUTI–ŠU pu-u[k-kán-za n–an zik?] / [dGAŠAN-iš?] puq~ qanuwan hart[i] mΩn [LÚ-iš–ma ANA DAM–ŠU ?] / [imma?] pu-uk-kán-za “But [if] a woman is hat[ed] by her husband, [then] you, [IŠTAR(?),] have caused her to be hated. [But] if [a man] is [even(?)] hated [by his wife], (then you, IŠTAR, have heaped up [… troubles(?)] for them)” KUB 
24.7 i 48-50 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:157; nu–kan dGAŠAN-li [k]uit É-er pu-uk-kán “Whatever household is hated by IŠTAR, (she sends those (sc. deities) into that house in order to infect it)” KUB 24.7 i 24-25, ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:156; cf. pu-u[k-…] KBo 26.77:1 (Hedammu, NH), ed. StBoT 14:66f. 
Friedrich, ZA 37 (1927) 186; Kronasser, AfO 16 (1952-53) 317-319. 
Cf. pukk-, puqqanu-. 
pukantami-, pukantimi-n.; (a container for liquids); from MS? or ENS?† 
sg. acc. pu-kán-t[a?-am-mi-in] KUB 46.48 rev. 21 (NH). 
loc. pu-kán-ti-mi KBo 17.103 rev. 26 (NH), pu-kán-t[i-mi?] KBo 2.6 ii 28 (NH). 
inst. pu-kán-ta-am-mi-i[t] KBo 23.13:11. 
broken pu-kán-ta[-…] KBo 25.190 obv. 33 (MS? or ENS?). 
a. (a container for liquids): “Water of the city Lahuwazantiya is placed” n–at–kan anda ANA 1 

puqqanu- a 2' 

pu-kán-ti-mi l[Ω]huwanzi “and they pour it into one p.-container” KBo 17.103 rev. 26 (+) KUB 46.48 rev. 10-11 (rit., NH); n–at mahhan P¸N[(I dTiyap)enti)] aranzi nu P¸NI x[…] pu-kán-ta-am-mi-i[t … (watar kit~ tari)] “And when they arrive before Tiyapenti, water is placed before […] with a p.-container” KBo 23.13:9-11, rest. from par. KBo 17.103 rev. 8-9; [… EGI]R-ŠU–ma ANA LÚtapri pu-kán-t[a?-am-mi-in w]ete~ naš pΩi “But afterwards he (the diviner) gives to the tapri-man a p.-container of water” KUB 46.48 rev. 21 (rit., NH); n–ašta pu-kán-ta[(-)o o](-) x[…] / […t]i anda lah[u]i KBo 25.190 obv. 33-34 (frag. of Hurr. rit., MS? or ENS?). 
b. (used as a descr. of a feature on the oracle liver): EGIR SU.MEŠ pu-kán-t[i-mi(?) z]ulkiš GIŠTUKUL–ya GÙB-laš NU.SIGﬁ “Second (inspection of) exta: [On(?)] the p. (there is) a zulkiš and a weapon. (It is) lefthand. Unfavorable” KBo 2.6 ii 28-29 (oracle, NH). 
puqqanu-, pugganu-, pukkunu-v.; to cause (someone) to be hated, create or cause dissension; from MH/MS.† 
pres. sg. 3. pu-uq-qa-nu-zi KUB 26.12 iii 27 (NH). 
pl. 2 [p]u-ug-ga-nu-ut-te-ni KUB 13.3 iv 34 (MH?/NS). 
verbal subst. nom.-acc. pu-uk-ku-nu-mar KUB 43.72 iii 4 (NS); gen. pu-uq-qa-nu-ma-aš KUB 30.56 iii 13 (NH). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pu-uq-qa-nu-wa-an KUB 24.7 i 49 (NH). 
iter. pres. pl. 2 [pu-]uq-qa-nu-uš-kat-te-ni KUB 23.68 obv.17 (MH/NS), [pu-uq-qa-nu-uš-k]a-at-te-ni KUB 23.72 rev. 61 (MH/MS). 
a. (in instr. and treaties) — 1' w. ANA: “If someone is dear to His Majesty …” [n–an tamaiš] ANA LUGAL pu-uq-qa-nu-zi “[and another] causes [him] to be hateful to the king” KUB 26.12 iii 27 (SAG instr., NH), ed. Dienstanw. 27. 
2' w. peran/P¸NI “before, in the eyes of”; cf. peran 1 c 1' c' 8'' and pitteyant-a: KUR URUHatti[–y]a– kan LÚ.MEŠpittiyandaš ≠peran± l[Ë pu-u]q-qa-nu-uškat-te-ni “Do not cause the land of Hatti to be hated/unattractive in the eyes of fugitives” KUB 23.68 obv. 17 (treaty of Arn. I, MH/NS), ed. Kempinski/Košak, WO 5:194f.; “And if any city of the enemy sues for peace” šumeš–a–šši KUR URUHatti pera[n lË puuq-qa-nu-uš-k]a-at-te-ni “you must [not caus]e the land of Hatti [to be hated/unattractive] to it” KUB 

372

23.72 rev. 61 (treaty of Arn. I w. Mita of Pahhuwa, MH/MS), tr. Gurney, AAA 28:39 (“you shall [not …] to him before the land of Hatti”); [p]u-ug-ga-nu-ut-te-ni in KUB 13.3 iv 34 (instr. for palace servants, MH?/NS), which deals w. duties of palace personnel, should probably be restored as […GEﬂ-an l]u?-ug-ga-nu-ut-te-ni on which, see lukkanu-. 
	b. (in hymns): [mΩ]n MUNUS-TUM–ma ANA LÚMUTI–ŠU pu-u[k-kán-za n–an zik?] / [dGAŠANiš?] pu-uq-qa-nu-wa-an hart[i] “But [if] a woman is hat[ed] by her husband, you, [IŠTAR,] have caused [her] to be hated.” KUB 24.7 i 48-49 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), tr. pukkant-; ANA LÚMUTI–ŠU is implied in the second clause, cf. a 1' above. 
	c. (in rituals): “When/if a man and a woman have bad dreams” nu ANA DINGIR-LIM GIM-an pu-uq-qa-nu-ma-aš huwappaš UH‡-aš SIS[KUR iyazi/iyanzi] “how [he performs/they perform] for the deity the rit[ual] of (i.e., to counteract) creating dissension (and) evil sorcery” KUB 30.56 iii 13 (shelf list, NH), ed. Laroche, CTH pp. 181f. (“… le rituel de la zizanie des méchants”); (In a list of sins and calamities) mΩn–at DINGIR.MEŠ-aš pu-uk-ku-nu-mar “Whether it (is) being made to be hated by the gods, (or abandonment by the gods, or the curse of the gods, or the plague of the land …)” KUB 43.72 iii 4 (rit. frag., NS), ed. Forrer, RHA I/3:151 (“ein Entzweien der Götter”); this tr. is based entirely on the assumption that puk~ kunu- is a var. writing of puqqanu-. Kronasser, EHS 1:304, lists pukkunumar as a verbal subst. of puqqanu- (pukkunumar, puq~ qanumaš pronounced as /puknumar/, /puknumaš/); cf. also Kammenhuber, MIO 2:54. 

Kronasser, AfO 16 (1952-53) 317 (“macht verhasst, macht widerwärtig”). 

Cf. pukk-, pukkant-. 

[pukkanza[tar]] KBo 1.42 iv 3, Sommer, HAB 64f., w. 
n. 7, cf. HW 172, HDW 65, Kronasser, EHS 1:265; read pukkanza (MSL 13:140, l. 230). See pukkant-. 

pukkunumar see puqqanu-. 

pukuri-, pukurui-Hurr. n.; (a phenomenon which can appear before and behind parts of the oracle liver); NH.† 
IGI-zi TE.MEŠ GIŠŠÚ.A-hi ZAG-an nu–šši pu-uku-ri-iš peran EGIR-pa NU.SIGﬁ “The first inspec

pul- a 
tion of exta: The Throne is a righthand (one); pu~ kuriš (are?) in front of and behind it. (Result:) Unfavorable” KUB 5.6 i 10-11 (liver oracle); nu SU.MEŠ NU.SIGﬁ-du ni. pu-ku-ru-iš per[an EGIR-pa] ≠SIGﬁ± “Let the exta be unfavorable. (There is) a nipašuriš; pukuruiš (are?) in fro[nt of and behind] (it). (Result:) Favorable)” KUB 22.36 rev. 13 (liver oracle). In view of the contexts, pukur(u)iš could be nom. pl. here. 
The two entries of S. de Martino ChS I/7:120 are dubious. 
Laroche, RA 64 (1970) 137 (“signe du nipašuriš, du ‘siège’”); idem, GLH (1977) 204 (“signe omineux”). 
pul-n.; lot; from OH/NS.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pu-u-ul KBo 3.7 iv 10, 15, KUB 12.66 iv 13, 18, KUB 17.6 iv 7, 12 (all OH/NS), KUB 17.35 i 18 (NH), pu-ú-ul KBo 26.20 iii (23), 24 (NH). 
gen. pu-u-la-aš KUB 20.45 iv 29, 30, 32 (OH/NS), KUB 
13.4 i 44 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 2.1 i (44), KUB 38.27 l.e. 3! (both NH), KUB 60.162:5, pu-la-aš KBo 2.1 i 14, KUB 17.35 i (17), 37, ii 4, KUB 38.26 obv. 20, 30 (all NH), VBoT 83 rev. 5, pu-la-a-aš KBo 26.223:2 (NH). 
sg. abl. pu-la-a[z] KUB 21.27 i 11 (Hatt. III).
inst. pu-u-li-it KUB 60.152 i? 17 (OH/NS).

(Sum.) GIŠ.ŠUB.BA = (Akk.) is-si-qú (cf. CAD isqu A “lot, share”) = (Hitt.) [pu-]≠ú±-ul “lot” KBo 26.20 iii 23; (Sum.) ÉRIN.SIGﬁ = (Akk.) is-si-iq ni-ši = (Hitt.) [LÚ.U⁄·.L]U-aš pu-ú-ul “lot of [a hum]an being” ibid. iii 24 (Erimhuš Bogh), ed. MSL 17:111. 
a. (in general): “All the gods will arrive” nu–za pu-u-ul tianzi “and deposit the lot for themselves. (Of all the gods of the town of Kaštama, ZašhapunΩ will be the greatest)” KBo 3.7 iv 15 (Illuy., OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:17, 20, tr. Hittite Myths 14; cf. nu–za LÚGUDU⁄¤ mΩn pu-u-ul tianzi KBo 3.7 iv 10 (Illuy., OH/ NS); nu ŠA LÚ.MEŠ URUZuppara […-]yanzi n–ašta kuËl pu-u-li-it / […]x iyanzi nu–za LÚ.MEŠSANGA parna halzΩi “They … [the …] of the men of Zuppara. And he with whose lot they make [the …] calls the priests to the house, (and they go […])” KUB 60.152 i? 16-18 (fest. of the lots, OH/NS); cf. LÚSANGA GIBIL “the new priest” in i 9; nu–kan apΩšš–a pu-laa[z?…] ANA dU URUNerik DUMU–KA aššiyanti [h]aptat “He (sc. Hattušili) was associated with (i.e., chosen to be the priest of) the Stormgod of Nerik, your beloved son, by destiny (lit. by lot)” 
373

KUB 21.27 i 11-12 (prayer, Pud.), ed. Sürenhagen, AoF 
8:108f., cf. 132 w. n. 47. 
b. EZEN› pulaš “festival of the lot(s)”: (Describing the election of a new priest) [mΩn ANA dU EZEN› pu-l]a-aš DÙ-anzi … [LÚ.MEŠSANGA–m]a TUŠ-aš pulanzi nu–kán pu-u-ul kuedani watkuzi “When they celebrate the festival of the lot(s) for the Stormgod, (they wash. The priest washes himself. They wash the god.) [The priests] cast lots while sitting. And for whom the lot jumps (sc. from a vessel) (he carries … into the temple and places it on the altar and becomes the new priest)” KUB 17.35 i 17-18 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 124, 137, tr. Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6:38. Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6:39f., suggests that the lots were in the shape of cubes or dice, and that the casting consisted in shaking a vessel w. a narrow neck until one lot jumped out; [ŠU. NIGIN] 1 UDU 1 PA. 2 BÁN ZŠD.DA 5 DUG KAŠ ANA EZEN› [p]u-la-aš LÚSANGA GIBIL pΩi “[Total]: one sheep, one PARˆSU-measure and two S¨TU-measures of flour, five pitchers of beer the new priest gives for the festival of the lot(s)” KUB 
17.35 i 37; in a list of named festivals: 1 EZEN› pula-aš 1 EZEN› ŠU.KIN.DÙ KUB 17.35 ii 4 (cult inv., NH); (13 festivals: 4 in the autumn, 4 in the spring) 1 EZEN› lilaš 1 EZEN› HUR.SAG-i p≠Ë±dummaš 
	[1] EZEN› GIŠmuttahilaš 1 EZEN› ŠU.KIN 1 EZEN› p[u-u-]la-aš KBo 2.1 i 43-44; cf. ibid. i 14; (In a long list of named festivals:) EZEN›.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠupatiyaš EZEN›.MEŠ pu-u-la-aš EZEN›.MEŠ ha-ah-ra-an-na-aš KUB 13.4 i 44 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS); perhaps here 1 EZEN› pu!?-la-aš copy EZEN› še-la-aš KUB 55.14 obv. 10 (cult inv., NS). 
	c. DINGIR.MEŠ pulaš “lot deities”: (When the prince [deposits] the ANDAHŠUM plant in the temples, …) nu ANA DINGIR.MEŠ pu-u-la-aš h„~ ma[ndaš ANDAHŠUMSAR(?)] pu-u-la-aš h„mandaš tianzi […] h„manduš irhΩn[zi] § mahhan–ma–ššan ANA DINGIR.MEŠ pu-u-la-aš […] EGIR-pa uwanzi nu IŠTU É[…] 1 DUGhuppar KAŠ udanzi “[they deposit] for all the lot deities [the AN~ DAHŠUM-plant(?)] at all the lots; they make the rounds of all the [gods(?)]. § And when the […-s] return to the lot deities, they bring a huppar vessel of beer from the […] house” KUB 20.45 iv 29-34 (fest., OH/NS), ed. Jasink-Ticchioni, SCO 27:154f. (partially); 

DUGpulla- C 

“They offer beer” [DINGIR.ME]Š pu-la-a[š] pétan˛ har[kan]zi “ and they have carried away the lot [deit]ies” KUB 38.26 obv. 20 (cult inv., NH), cf. KUB 38.27 
l.e. 3, KUB 56.40 iii 12, KBo 26.223:2, VBoT 83 rev. 5. 
Cf. Hurr. pulahli “lot caster” at Alalah (Dietrich/ Loretz, WO 3:193, AHw 878). 
Friedrich, AfO 17 (1954-56) 92 (“Los(?)”); Haas, KN (1970) 87f. n. 2 (“‘Fest des Loses(?)’ EZEN pu-la-aš ”); Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6 (1981) 39f., 42f. n. 9; Sürenhagen, AoF 8 (1981) 132 w. n. 47 (on KUB 21.27 i 11-12). 
Cf. pulai- v., (LÚ)pulala-, pullË-. 
Épull[a(-)…] A n.; (a building(?)); OS.† 
[…]x U Épu-ul-l[a(-)…] (or, É pu-ul-l[a(-)…]) KBo 17.29:2 (rit., OS), translit. StBoT 25:151. 
Hardly w. Hoffmann, FsAlp 292f., who reads this É pu-ul-l[a-aš] and equates it arbitrarily w. É DUMU(.MEŠ) in KBo 17.1+, hoping to see in pulla-the Hitt. reading for both DUMU.NITA and DUMU.SAL. 
Neu, StBoT 26 (1982) 152 (“ein Gebäude(?)”). 
NINDApul[a…] B n.; (a bread or pastry).† 
NINDApu-l[a-…] Bo 69/739 (Hoffner, AlHeth 177). 
This might be a writing of NINDAp/wulašne. According to Laroche, RHA XIII/57:76f. and apud Kammenhuber, OLZ 50:364 n. 1, wulašne is the Hattic word for “bread.” Cf. also NINDAzippulašni “thick bread” AlHeth 192. 
DUGpulla-C n.; (a vessel used to hold sourdough); MH/NS.† 
“They kill one sheep and cook it” namma 1 GA!.KIN.AG 1 EMŒU 1 DUGpu-ul-la-an NINDA EMŒU 1 DUGh„ppar GEŠTIN 1 DUGhuppar KAŠ GIŠINBIHI.A udanzi “Then they bring one cheese, one rennet, one p.-vessel (with) sourdough bread, one huppar-vessel of wine, one huppar-vessel of beer, and fruit. (With these they make provision for the god’s journey)” HT 1 ii 44-46 (Uhhamuwa’s rit., MH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 9.31 iii 11-12, tr. ANET 347; Goetze, ANET 347, translates “… 1 curd, 1 pulla (vessel), leavened bread, …” taking the p.-vessel as just another item in the list of provisions. In the context of 

374

listed foodstuffs, a container holding bread seems more likely than just an empty container. NINDA EMŒU may also be read 4 EMŒU, but it is unlikely that rennet would be listed twice in this short list. 

Sommer, Pap. (1924) 56. 
pulai-v.; to cast lots; NH.† 

(The priest washes himself and the statue of the god in preparation for the lot festival) [LÚ.MEŠSANGA–m]a TUŠ-aš pu-la-an-zi nu–kan p„l kuedani watkuzi “But [the priests], seated, cast lots. And for whom the lot jumps …” KUB 17.35 i 18 (cult inv., Tudh. IV), ed. Carter, Diss. 124, 137 (restoring LÚ.MEŠpulaleš), rest. follows Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6:43 n. 11. 
Friedrich, AfO 17 (1954-56) 92 (“losen(?)”); idem, HW 1. Erg. (1957) 16 (stem pulΩ(i?)-); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 34 (stem pulae-); Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6 (1981) 42 n. 9 (stem pulai-). 

Cf. pul-, (LÚ)pulala-, pulle-. 
(LÚ)pulala-n.; lot caster(?); from OH?/NS.† 

pl. gen. LÚ.MEŠpu-la-la-an KUB 11.28 iv 11 (OH?/NS) = dupl. p[u-la-…] KBo 8.124 obv.? 7. 

frag. LÚpu-la-l[a-…] KBo 22.35:8. 

[LÚ.MEŠpu-la-li-eš-m]a KUB 17.35 i 18, restored by Carter, Diss. 124, is more likely to be restored [LÚ.MEŠSANGA–m]a, see Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5-6:43 n. 11. 
É LÚ.MEŠpu-la-la-an (dupl. p[u-la-…] omits det.) “the house of the lot-casters(?)” KUB 11.28 iv 11 (contributions of villages to the cult, OH?/NS), w. dupl. KBo 8.124 obv.? 7, other personnel whose houses are mentioned in this enumeration are cooks, table men, bakers, LÚ.MEŠMURIDI, and LÚ.MEŠhaliyami; LÚpu-la-l[a-…] (together w. ÉRIN.MEŠ šarikuwa, LÚhaliyari-, LÚzilipuriyatalla-, LÚMURIDI in a list of professions) KBo 22.35:8. 
The interpretation “lot caster(?)” is obtained entirely by a putative derivation from pul “lot” and is correspondingly uncertain. Cf. LÚpulahli “Loswerfer(?)” at Alalah (Dietrich/Loretz, WO 3:193, AHw 878). 
Friedrich, AfO 17 (1954-56) 92 (“Loswerfer(?)”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 88 (“préposé au pul (substance rituelle)”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 255 (no tr., merely quotes earlier lit.). 

Cf. pul-, pulai-, pullË-. 
¬pulpuli[(-)…] 
pullË-n. neut.; (mng. unclear).† 
“Let them question [him] and […] him” nu IQBI pu-ul-le-e-wa pešš[i-…] nu–kan ŠA NA›NUNUZ DUG-i parΩ […] pu-ul-le-e–kan kuwapi anda [kit~ tat] n–at–kan parΩ u≠t±er n–at 1-aš wahnuškit [nu– kan pu-ul-le-e(?) …] watkut nu memer kuw[api …]x mΩn wa[tkuzi …] anda x-x[…] “And he said: ‘[…] thre[w(?)] the p.; and [he/they …-ed] forth in(to) the beaded vessel […]; where the p. [was placed(?)] in, they brought it forth; and one kept turning it; [the p. …] jumped, and they said: Wh[ere(?) …?] If …” KUB 60.24 obv.? 4-11 (NH). 
Perhaps pullË is synonymous w. pul “lot.” One problem w. this interpretation is that the v. peššiyaused w. the pullË, while seemingly appropriate for a lot, is not yet attested w. pul “lot,” and several of its characteristic verbs (tiya-, pulai-) do not appear here. The v. watku-, however, occurs w. both. Another problem is the spelling of pullË w. a double l. Contrast pulai-and pulala-w. undoubled l. 
Cf. the PN Pulli in Laroche, NH (1966) 149, and in Alp, HBM (1991) 89f. 
NINDApulliššΩ(i?)-n. (neut.?); (a bread or pastry); NH?.† 
nu–kan 3 NINDAiyattiuš IŠTU INBI GA.KIN.AG teyanteš 1 NINDApu-ul-li-iš-ša-a-ia ME-i “He/she takes three iyatti-loaves studded(?) with fruit and cheese, and one p.-loaf (and places them down on the god’s table”) KUB 10.91 iii 15-16 (fest. frag., NH?), ed. AlHeth 177; after segmenting off the final -ia “and,” the stem seems to be puliššΩ-; for exx. of sim. word formation, see Kronasser, EHS 1:188f. Although –ia occasionally occurs as –aia (see HW™ 1:43), it is never spelled plene. Therefore a stem pullišš- is unlikely. Another possibility is the case in -ša from a stem pulli–, for which, see van den Hout, KZ 97:60-80 
(w. lit.). Also possible, if we do not consider the form to have the conj. -ya-, is a neut. pl. nom.-acc. of a stem in -ai-(cf. Weitenberg, Heth.u.Idg. 295). 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 177. 
¬pulpuli[(-)…] n. com.; (mng. unkn.; poss. a beam or log); NH.† 
(Huwawa says to Gilgamesh:) “Be my lord; I will be your slave. And the cedars that I have raised 
375

for you (on my mountains) [I will …]” [d]aš~ ša<m>uš ¬pu-ul-pu-li-i[-uš??…] [k]aršmi “I will cut […] strong beams(?) (and [build?] pal[aces(?) for you])” KUB 8.53:25 (Gilg., NH), ed. Friedrich, ZA 39:12f., translit Myth. 129, cf. Weitenberg, U-Stämme 143; Friedrich, ZA 39:47, assumes that daššauš ¬p. is the obj. of karš-, therefore possibly trees used for the building(?) of houses. The Akk. vers. of Gilg. Tablet V is badly damaged. The corresponding passage, von Weiher, BagM 11:95f. (ii 24-25), mentions trees (Akk. iœ-œi) and myrtle wood (GIŠ ŠIM.GŠR). The absence of a GIŠ det. might indicate that this is not a tree or plant name, but an ordinary noun mng. “beam(?).” The gram. gender of pulpuli[…] is determined by its attributive adj. dašša<m>uš. 
Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 47 (“vielleicht Name eines Baumes”); Götze apud Friedrich, ZA 39 (1930) 77 (“‘Stamme’ oder ‘Balken’”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 173 (“(ein Baum?)”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 120 (“nom d’une espèce d’arbre”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 178 (“3,” perhaps related to pulpulumi-). 
pulpulumi-n.; (mng. unkn., a metal object); NH.† 
sg. or pl. nom. com. pu-ul-pu-lu-me-eš KUB 42.39:6. sg. nom.-acc. neut., or stem form? [pu-]ul-pu-lu-mi KBo 
18.161 rev. 16. frag. pu-ul-pu-l[u-…] KUB 42.42 iii 10. 
In a list following an enumeration of metal pins and cutting instruments: […] pu-ul-pu-lu-me-eš ZABAR ŠÀ 4 HURRI “[…] p. of bronze, among them four Hurrian ones (or, in Hurrian style)” KUB 
	42.39:6 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:152; 1-EN pu-ul-pu-l[u…] KUB 42.42 iii 10 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:58f.; Siegelová, Verw. 474f.; [… pu-]ul-pu-lu-mi µEhi URUZarar[a] KBo 18.161 rev. 16 (inv., NH); perhaps also: “If …,” [ANA DINGIR-L]IM GAŠAN–YA 1 pu-ul-p[u-lu-mi-in ZABAR(?) DÙ-mi(?)] “[I will make for the godd]ess, my lady, one pulpulumi [of bronze(?)]” KUB 15.11 iii 3 (vow, NH). 
	p. is a metal artifact, which can be counted, and was manufactured from bronze (and other materials?) in a Hurrian style. 

Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 60; Siegelová, Verw. (1986) 613. 
(DUG)pulluri(ya?)-n. neut.; (a container); NH†. 
7 ANŠE.KUR.RA GIR› 7 GUD GIR› 7 MUŠEN GIR› 7 DUGpu-ul-lu-ri-ia (i.e., DUGpulluriya or 

NINDApun(n)iki-

DUGpulluri–ya) n–at IŠTU LÀL š„wan šer–ma–at– kan IŠTU GIŠPÉŠ ištappan “Seven terracotta horses, seven terracotta oxen, seven terracotta birds, seven (or: and seven) p.-containers — these are filled with honey and covered with figs on top” KBo 5.1 ii 38-39 (rit., NH), ed. Pap. 8*f.; [n]amma–kan pu-ul-lu-ri-ia KUKUB ZAB[A]R TUR TÚG(?) ZABAR [o]uš(?)gi–kan TÚG(?) anda dΩi KUB 58.79 iv 11-12 (taknaz dΩ- rit., NS); cf. ibid. ii 2, and ibid. i 1, w. dupl. KUB 

55.67 i 1. 

Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 56; Friedrich, HW (1952) 173 (stem DUGpulluri(¥a?)-); Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 226 (stem pulluri-). 
pulušhi[(-)…] (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
pu-lu-uš-hi[(-)…] KBo 18.138:24 (letter about oracles, NH), in frag. context. 
NINDApun(n)iki-n.; (a bread or pastry); from pre-NH/NS. 
sg. nom. NINDApu-un-ni-ki-iš KBo 4.13 iii 12 (pre-NH/ NS), KUB 46.10 i (6) (NS), KUB 51.78 obv.? 5, NINDApu-unni-ke-eš KUB 2.8 ii 7, 10, 16, 20 (pre-NH/NS), NINDApu-un-nikiš KUB 11.18 ii 21, (31) (pre-NH/NS), NINDApu-ni-ki-iš KBo 
4.13 iii 15 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 53.10 obv. 2, 5 (NS), IBoT 2.4 obv. 10, NINDApu-ni-kiš KBo 4.13 iii 4 (pre-NH/NS), Bo 4930 rt. col. 2 (AlHeth 178). 
sg. acc. NINDApu-un-ni-ki-in KUB 25.18 iv 36 (pre-NH/ NS), KBo 22.169 left col. 11, IBoT 3.30 ii? 3, Bo 68/241 obv.? 11 (AlHeth 178). 
inst. NINDApu-un-ni-ki-it KBo 4.13 iii 18, KUB 2.8 ii 23 (both pre-NH/NS), NINDApu-ni-ki-it IBoT 2.3:5. 
1 DUGPURSˆTUM TU‡huruttel 1 NINDA KU‡ \ UPNI 1 NINDApu-un-ni-ke-eš \ UPNI 3 AN~ DAHŠUMSAR ANA ŠDZuliya dLAMMA ŠD “One PURSˆTUM-vessel of huruttel stew, one loaf of sweet bread half a handful, one p.-loaf half a handful, three ANDAHŠUM-plants: for the river Zuliya (and) the patron deity of the river” KUB 2.8 ii 6-8 (ANDAHŠUM fest., pre-NH/NS), cf. ibid. ii 10, 16, 20, 23; 1 NINDApu-un-ni-ki-iš BA.BA.ZA \ UPNI KBo 4.13 iii 12; cf. ibid. iii (4), (9); [1] NINDApu-un-ni-ki-iš UPNI BA.BA.Z[A] KUB 51.78 obv.? 5, cf. KBo 4.13 iii 15; 1 NINDApu-ni-ki-iš ŠA UPNI \ UPN[I BA.BA.ZA] IBoT 2.4 obv. 10. 
NINDAp. is always associated w. the hurutel-stew, sweet bread and ANDAHŠUM-plants. Only single 

376

loaves are mentioned, consisting of one half, one, and one and a half handfuls. With the exception of KUB 2.8 ii 7, and passim in this text, where no ingredients are mentioned, NINDAp. is made of porridge (BA.BA.ZA) | cf. Akk. pannigu/punnigu AHw 818 and Hebrew pannag, both of which are probably related (see AlHeth 178). 
Hoffner, AlHeth (1974) 177f.; Durand, NABU 1989:35 no. 54. 

¬pundannu[š] (mng. unkn.).† 

nu HUR.SAG m[urišta …] / ¬pu-un-da-an-nuu[š …] KUB 54.60 obv. 3-4 (frag. of unkn. nature). 
puntarriya-v.; to be obstinate, stubborn; NH.† 

pres. sg. 3 pu-un-tar-ri-i-e-ez-zi KBo 19.145 iii 12. 

verbal subst. nom.-acc. pu-un-tar-ia-u-wa-ar KUB 3.99 ii 11, pu-un-ta-ri-ia-[u-wa-ar] ibid. ii 12. 
(Sum.) GÚ.[o o]x A? […] = (Akk.) […]-ma? = (Hitt.) puun-tar-ia-u-wa-ar / (Sum.) GÚ.E.LA.A.E = (Akk.) […] šá ANŠE = (Hitt.) ANŠE-aš pu-un-ta-ri-ia-[u-wa-ar] KUB 3.99 ii 11-12 (+) KBo 1.50 obv. 1-2, ed. MSL 17.121. 
The fragmentary condition of this vocab. and also of the ritual occurrence KBo 19.145 iii 12 make any suggested mng. very uncertain. But both pun~ tarriya- and the related adj. puntarriyalli- are employed in connection w. the ass. 

Cf. puntarriyalli-. 
puntarriyalli-adj.; stubborn, obstinate; NS.† 

ANŠE-aš–ma–za GIM-an pu-un-tar-ri-ia-li-iš zi[k] MUNUS.LUGAL dIŠTAR-iš “You are stubborn as an ass, Queen IŠTAR” KUB 24.7 ii 18 (rit.hymn), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:158. 
Archi, OA 16 (1977) 309 w. n. 36 (“ostinato”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 352 (“störrisch?”), Güterbock, JAOS 103 (1983) 163. 

Cf. puntarriya-. 
p„ntaz (mng. unkn.).† 

§ nu kar„ pu-u[-un-ta-…] IŠTU HUR.SAG¸šk[a~ šipa …] kinuna 1 MÁŠ.GAL pí-x[…] anzel IŠTU x[…] pu-u-un-ta-az URUHar[-…] KBo 25.164 rt.col. 2
6. If pu-u[-…] in line 2 is the same as the word in line 6, p. is probably a n. in abl., cf. the ablatives in lines 3, 5. 

punušš
p„nnuhi-v.?; (mng. and identification unclear); NH.† 
[… G]ÙB-laza anšan! pu-u-≠un±-nu-hi-it-ta-ia […] “… On the left it is ‘wiped.’ And (-ya) (it) has p.-ed(?) […]” KBo 8.55:19 (liver oracle, NH). 
Since p. introduces a new sentence, –ia may be segmented off as the enclitic conj. In line 24, which also concludes a paragraph, a neut. predicate part. išhian “is tied” is immediately followed by a finite 
v. anda–ya uškizzi “and (it) looks in.” If we have the same pattern here, puhunuhitta could be a Luw. pret. sg. 3. 
punuhulziya, punuhunšiya, punuhu(š)šiya 
(Hurr. offering term); from MH/NS.† 
pu-nu-hu-ul-zi-ia KBo 24.40 rev.? 8 (MH/NS), pu-nu-huun-ši-ia KBo 4.2 iv 6, KUB 12.31 i 26 (both Murš. II), KBo 
8.86 obv. (10), KBo 8.88 obv. (17), pu-nu-hu-ši-ia KBo 23.47 ii 5, pu-nu-hu-uš-x[…] KUB 45.78 iii? 9, pu-nu-hu-uš-š[i-ia] KUB 45.78 iii? 9. 
(In a list of burnt offerings) 1 MUŠEN kipiššiya pu-nu-hu-un-ši-ia KBo 4.2 iv 6 (aphasia of Murš. II), w. dupl. KUB 12.31 i 26, ed. MSpr. 8f.; [(3 NINDA)]. GUR›.RA ŠA 1 UPNI dΩhašiya durušiya pu-nuh[u-un??-ši-ia] (dupl. pu-n[u-…]) KBo 8.86 obv. 10 (rit.), w. dupl. KBo 8.88 obv. 17, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:262f.; [… MUŠEN.GA]L ANA dU pu-[n]u-≠hu±-šiia / […] KBo 23.47 ii 5-6 (Hurr. rit.); p. may be an epithet of the Stormgod in this ex., cf. ibid. ii 2-4; [ANA] dU pu-nuhu-un!-š[i-ia …] KBo 27.201:2. 
Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 95; Laroche, GLH (1979) 205. 
punušš-v. trans.; 1. to ask, question, consult (w. person asked or questioned in acc.), 2. to investigate, ask about; wr. syll., and ÈN.TAR; from OS. 
pres. sg. 1 pu-nu-uš-mi KUB 32.121 ii 23 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 13.20 i 28 (MH/NS), KBo 3.3 iv 10 (Murš. II), KUB 
26.1 iv 13, 22 (Tudh. IV), KBo 8.63 i 8, KBo 18.93:4. sg. 2 pu-nu-uš-ši KBo 22.1 obv. 30 (OS). sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-zi KBo 23.23 obv. 27 (MH/MS), KBo 3.17 
ii 17 (OH/NS), KUB 13.20 i 37 (MH/NS), ABoT 17 iii 5 (NS), KBo 12.118 rev.? 13, [È]N.TAR-zi KUB 44.18 obv. 12. pl. 1 pu-nu-uš-šu-u-e-ni KUB 12.50:(3), 5 (NS), KUB 
22.70 obv. 31, 39 (NH), pu-nu-uš-šu-u-e«-u-e»-ni ibid. obv. 84, KUB 12.50:5, KUB 33.106 ii 20. 
pl. 2 pu-nu-uš-te-ni KBo 22.1 obv. 26 (OS), KUB 54.1 i 18 (NH). 
377

pl. 3 pu-ú-nu-uš-ša-an-zi KBo 20.5 iii! 7 (OS), pu-nu-uš-ša-an-zi KBo 17.105 ii 17, IBoT 1.36 i 58 (both MH/MS), KBo 
6.4 iv 32, KUB 36.51 rev. 2 (both OH/NS), KBo 2.2 iii 32, KUB 22.70 rev. 14, KUB 13.33 iv 10, KUB 52.79 iii 20 (all NH). 
pret. sg. 1 pu-nu-uš-šu-un HBM 58:9 (MH/MS), KUB 
31.127 iii 12 (OH/NS), KUB 14.4 iv 34 (Murš. II), KUB 26.33 
ii 8 (Šupp. II), KBo 4.8 ii 3 (NH), KBo 26.88 iv 6. 
sg. 2 pu-nu-uš-ta KUB 23.101 ii 5 (NH). 
sg. 3 pu-u-nu-uš-ta KUB 36.35 i 8 (MH?/MS?), pu-nu-uš
ta KUB 36.55 ii 30 (MH?/MS?), KBo 3.63 i 4 (pre-NH/NS), KUB 21.27 i 13 (NH), KBo 13.54:(7), KBo 24.129 rev. 2, KBo 
26.88 iv 2. 
pl. 1 pu-nu-uš-šu-u-en KUB 5.7 obv. 9, 18, KUB 18.21 ii 4, AT 454 i 7, KBo 13.64 obv. 10, 17, KBo 14.21 i 7, 28, KBo 24.122:20, KUB 16.16 obv. 13, 17, 23, KUB 22.70 obv. 37, RŠ 
17.109:7 (all NH), pu-u-nu-uš-šu-u-en AT 454 ii 17, 21, iv 14 (NH), pu-nu-uš-šu-u-e-en KUB 5.7 obv. 20, 24, and passim, KUB 18.39 obv.? 4, KUB 50.97:7 (all NH), pu-nu-uš-šu-en KBo 14.21 i 66, 79, KBo 23.106 rev. 13, KUB 50.64:9, KUB 
50.95:10 (all NH), ÈN.TAR-u-e[n] KUB 60.93:2, (8) (NH), ÈN.TAR-en KUB 31.76 obv. 17, KUB 50.28:6, KUB 50.44 ii 10 (all NH). 
pl. 3 pu-nu-uš-šer KUB 36.101 ii? 3 (OH/NS), KUB 26.1 iv 16, 18 (Tudh. IV), KUB 13.33 ii 6, KUB 18.3 left col. 16, KUB 50.91 iv 12 (all NH), pu-nu-uš-še-er KUB 13.33 iv 5, KUB 18.27 obv.? 11 (both NH). 
imp. sg. 2 pu-nu-uš HKM 52:38 (MH/MS), KUB 14.3 i 27 (NH), KBo 34.43 rev.? 10, KUB 23.103 obv. 21 (Pud.), KUB 
21.38 i 12, 24 (Pud.). 
sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-du KUB 26.17 ii 10 (MH/MS), KBo 10.45 ii 24 (OH/LNS), KUB 19.26 iv 8 (Šupp. I), KBo 4.10 obv. 9 (NH), Bronze Tablet ii 100 (Tudh. IV), KBo 18.15:19, KUB 
54.1 i 36. 
pl. 2 [pu-]≠ú±-nu-uš-tén KUB 59.10 vi 2 (OH/NS), pu-nuuš-tén HKM 60:16 (MH/MS), KUB 43.49 rev.? 4 (NS), KBo 
4.8 ii 17, KBo 12.128 rt. col. 13, KBo 20.108 rev.? 6, KUB 54.1 i (7). pl. 3 pu-nu-uš-ša-an-du KBo 12.46 rev. 3, KUB 13.33 iv 4 
(both NH), KUB 60.24 obv. 3. 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-ta-ri HKM 29:10 (MH/MS). 
verbal subst. nom. pu-nu-uš-šu-u-wa-ar KBo 1.44 i 11 (NH). 
inf. pu-nu-uš-šu-wa-an-zi KUB 56.19 ii 18 (NS), KBo 19.88:3, pu-nu-uš-šu-u-an-zi KUB 49.17 iii 4 (NH), pu-nu-šu-an-zi KUB 55.4:7, pu-nu-uš-šu-u-wa-an-≠zi± KUB 57.70 obv. 8 (NS). 
uncert. [p]u-nu-uš-šu-u-e[-en? or -ni?] KBo 20.108 rev.? 10, pu-nu-uš-te-e[-en? or -ni?] KUB 39.99 obv. 5 (MH/MS? or NS?). 
iter. pres. sg. 1 pu-nu-uš-ki-mi KBo 3.40 i 4, 15, KUB 31.4 obv. 16 (both OH/NS), KBo 11.1 obv. 23 (Muw. II), KUB 
48.118 i 10. 
sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi KBo 8.42 obv. 6 (OS), KUB 12.63 obv. 10, rev. 32 (OH/MS), KUB 1.16 iii 67 (OH/NS), KUB 

punušš- 1 a 

17.8 iv 15 (pre-NH/NS), KBo 13.1 iv 27 (NH), KBo 22.118:3, KUB 48.118 i 8, pu-nu-uš-ki-zi KBo 24.45 obv. 19 (ENS? or MS?). 
pl. 3 pu-nu-uš-kán-zi KUB 55.56 rev.? 13 (NS), KBo 16.99 
i 31. pret. sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-ki-it KUB 23.21 rev. 22 (MH/NS). imp. sg. 2 pu-nu-uš-ki KUB 1.16 iii 61, 70 (OH/NS), KUB 
13.2 iv 14 (MH/NS), KUB 54.1 ii 50 (NH), KUB 57.70 obv. 7 
(NS). sg. 3 pu-nu-uš-ki-id-du KBo 3.3 iii 29 (Murš. II), KUB 
21.29 ii 15 (Hatt. III), KUB 26.16 ii 6. verbal subst. pu-nu-uš-ki-u-wa-ar KBo 1.44 i 12 (NH). sup. pu-nu-uš-ki-u-wa-an KUB 24.8 i 32 (OH?/NS), KBo 
12.133 rev. (13), pu-nu-uš-ki-wa-an KUB 24.8 i 27, 44 (OH?/ NH). 
part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. ÈN.TAR-kán IBoT 2.129 obv. 30 (NH). 
(Sum.) èn-tar = (Akk.) ša-ºa-a-lu = (Hitt.) pu-nu-uš-šu-uwa-ar “to ask” / (Sum.) èn-tar-tar = (Akk.) ši-ta-ºa-a-lu = (Hitt.) pu-nu-uš-ki-u-wa-ar “to ask repeatedly” KBo 1.44 i 1112 (Erimhuš Bogh., NH), ed. MSL 17:101; (Sum.) UD.KUŠÚ = (Akk.) ša-a-u (mistake for šâqu; on this problem, see Civil, AS 20:135f.) = (Hitt.) uttar–za kuiš pu-≠nu-uš±-ki≠-iz±-zi “he who always investigates/examines a thing” (probably attempting to tr. either šeºû “seek” or šaºΩlu “ask”) KBo 13.1 iv 27 (Erimhuš Bogh, NH), ed. MSL 17:115. 
annû MUNUS.MEŠ.ŠU.GI [t]≠a±-aš-ta-na-al u LUGAL kÏam iqabbi adi inann[a] MUNUS.MEŠ.ŠU.GI iš-ta-na-al ul Ïde la tepperikki[anni] la tepperikkianni ši-ta-i-li-in-ni ši-ta-ili-in-n[i] KUB 1.16 iv 66-69 = (Hitt.) [kΩ]ša–wa–z MUNUS. MEŠ.ŠU.GI-uš pu-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi LUGAL-š–a–š[še? kišš]an tezzi kin„n–wa–z n„wa MUNUS.MEŠ.ŠU.GI[-uš pu-nu-uš-kiiz]-≠zi± UL šaggahhi namma–mu–šša[n lË] paškuÏtta [l]Ë EGIR-pa–mu–za pu-nu-uš-ki-[pát] “This one is forever consulting the ‘Old Women.’ May the king (not) say [about her] as follows: ‘Is she still forever consulting the “Old Women”? I do not know. Do not neglect me any more’ Absolutely not! Always consult me!” ibid. iii 67-70 (Hatt. I edict, NS), ed. HAB 16f. 
A direct question following punušš-does not have -wa(r)in OH texts, cf. Pecora, IF 89:119. 
1. to ask, question, consult (w. person asked or questioned in acc.) — a. (w. no mention of the subj. matter of the inquiry): LÚ.MEŠN¸ŠI ŒIDˆTI–ŠU natta pu-nu-uš-te-ni “You do not question his provision carriers” KBo 22.1 obv. 26 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f.; “If someone buys the entire field of a GIŠTUKUL man” LUGAL-un pu-nu-uš-ša-an-zi “they ask/consult the king” (and the buyer performs the corvée which the king orders) KBo 6.4 iv 31-32 (Laws §39, NH), ed. HG 58f.; natta LÚMUŠEN.DÙ kuin[(ki)] pu-nu-uš-ta “He did not consult any au

378

gur” KBo 3.63 i 4 (fest., OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 3.64 i 6 and KBo 3.66:2, cf. Archi, SMEA 16:130; (The gatekeeper has to prevent the spears from leaving the premises) “If any man goes up, he will be reported to the palace, as soon as you see him” nu LÚÌ.DU° pu-nu-uš-šaan-zi nu ŠUKUR.HI.A apaš nahšaraz uškizzi “They will question the gatekeeper. Such (lit. that) caution regards the spears” IBoT 1.36 i 58-59 (instr. for the bodyguards, MH/MS), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 11:180f., AS 24:10f.; luk[k]atta–ma INA UD.3.KAM LÚpat[iliš] paizzi nu MUNUS pu-nu-uš-zi “On the morning of the third day, the p.-priest goes and questions the woman” ABoT 17 iii 4-5 (birth rit., NS), ed. StBoT 29:94 w. 
	n. c; k[Ωš]a–za DINGIR.MEŠ B´L¨MEŠ–YA [E]GIRpa pu-nu-uš-šu-un “I again questioned the gods, my lords” (and it was determined by oracle that I could execute Tawananna) KBo 4.8 ii 2-3 + “Izmir 1277” ii 5-6 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188; kuittaya šal~ lin LÚ.ŠU.GI pu-nu-uš-ki-mi “Whenever I consult a venerable old man” KBo 11.1 obv. 23 (prayer, Muw. II), ed. Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXV/ 81:107, 116; “If some son or grandson of yours sins” n–an LUGAL KUR URUHatti pu-nu-uš-du “the Hittite king must question him” (and do with him what he wants, if he is found to have sinned) KBo 4.10 obv. 9 (treaty w. Ulmi-Teššub), ed. StBoT 38:4f. 
	b. (w. subj. matter of inquiry also in acc.): B´LI–YA–ya–an ŠA KUR-TI AWATEMEŠ pu-nuuš-du “May my lord question him about the affairs of the land” KBo 18.15:17-19 (letter, NH), ed. Ehelolf, MDOG 75:65f., THeth 16:368; for another ex., see Luraghi, KZ 99:26f. 
	c. (w. subj. matter of inquiry in d.-l.): (As soon as they come before My Majesty) n–aš dUTU-ŠI ANA DI.HI.A pu-nu-uš-mi “I, My Majesty, will question them about the (above mentioned) court cases” KBo 3.3 iv 9-10 (hist., Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:38f., 45; nu µPallariyan kËdani memini pu-nu-uššu-u-en “We questioned Pallariya about this matter, (and he said: ‘…’”) RŠ 17.109:6-7 (dep., NH), ed. Laroche, Ugar. 5:769f.; cf. KUB 26.1 iv 16, 22 (SAG 1 instr., Tudh. IV); (Tašmišu says to Teššub) “Come, let us go to Abzuwa, before Ea” [n–an a]nnallaš INIM.MEŠ-naš tuppiyaš EGIR-pa pu-nu-uš-šu-ue-ni “We shall again ask him about the tablets of the former words” KUB 33.106 ii 20 (Ullik. IIIA), ed. 

punušš- 1 e 
Güterbock, JCS 6:22f.; nu–tta uwanzi apËdani uddanÏ IŠTU ≠É±.[GA]L-LIM UL pu-nu-u[š-š]a-a[n]-zi “Will they not come from the palace and ask you about that matter?” HKM 54:21-24 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 220f. 
d. (w. subj. matter of inquiry phrased as a direct question): nu–nnaš pu-nu-uš-ki-iz-zi išpΩn–wa kuwap[i(?) …] “He asks us: ‘Where […] …(?)” KBo 8.42 obv. 6 (anecdotes, OS), ed. Oettinger, Stammbildung 467f.; uk–uš pu-nu-uš-ki-m[i kÏ k]uit walkuwan “I ask them: ‘What kind of a multitude is [this]?”’ KBo 
3.40 rev. 15 (= 2 BoTU 14) (Soldier’s Song, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 17:16 | for walkuwan, see Hoffner, Or NS 49:290; nu–tta mΩn DINGIR.MEŠ kiššan pu-nu-uš-ša-an-zi kÏ–wa kuit iËššer “If the gods ask you as follows: ‘Why were they doing this?’” KBo 17.105 ii 17-18 (incant., MH/MS); [dElkuni]ršaš dU-an aušta n–an puu-nu-uš-ta [kuit–wa] uwaš “Elkunirša saw the Stormgod and asked him: ‘[Why] have you come?”’ KUB 36.35 i 8-9 (myth, MH?/MS?), ed. Otten, MIO 1:126f., tr. CoS 1:149; cf. also KBo 23.23 obv. 27 (conjuration, MS); KBo 12.118 rev.? 13 (rit. frag.); n–an pu-nu-uš-kiwa-an da[iš k]uit–wa waštul–tit “(The Sungod) began to ask him (i.e., Appu): ‘What is your trouble?’” KUB 24.8 i 44-45 (Appu, NH), ed. StBoT 14:6f., tr. CoS 1:154, cf. ibid. i 32-34. 
e. (w. subject matter of inquiry phrased as an indirect question): nu tuel LÚTEMU kuwat UL pu-nuuš-ta memahhun–ši GIM-an “Why did you not ask your messenger how I spoke to him?” (followed by the quoted message) KUB 23.101 ii 5-6 (letter, NH), ed. THeth 16:278f.; kuedani–wa uddanÏ uwanun nu–mu TÚL-anza pu-nu-uš-du witenanza “‘Let the spring, the water, ask me for what matter I came’” KBo 
10.45 ii 23-24 (rit., OH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:122f.; “Since Urhi-Tešub is there” n–an pu-nu-uš mΩn kišan mΩn UL kišan “ask him whether it is so or whether it is not so” KUB 21.38 i 12 (letter of Pud. to Ramses II), ed. Stefanini, AttiAccTosc 29:6, Helck, JCS 17:88, and Mascheroni, SMEA 22:58; cf. ibid. i 24; KUB 14.3 i 27 (Taw., Hatt. III); KUB 23.103 obv. 21 (letter to Assyria); nu B´LU LÚ.MEŠ KUR-TI–pat pu-nu-uš [m]Ωn ammuk šahhan luzzi iššahhun “O my lord, ask the aforementioned men of the district whether I used to perform šahhan and luzzi” HKM 52:38-39 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 216f. 
379

f. (followed by reply, which in turn is introduced by memai- or UMMA): µGašga-DINGIRLIM-in LÚKISAL.LUH LÚ URUPaliya ŠA É.GAL URUŠulupašši pu-nu-uš-šu-u-en nu memešta “We asked Gašgaili, the forecourt sweeper from Paliya, (the one) of the palace in Šulupašši, and he said: (‘I have stolen …’)” KUB 13.33 ii 16-18 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:34f.; cf. ibid. iv 1, 5; n–aš namma pu-u-≠nu±-uššu-u-en UMMA ŠUNU≠–MMA± “We asked them again, and they said as follows: (‘…’)” AT 454 ii 17 (oracle question, NH), ed. Gurney, in AT pp. 116f.; “Since it was determined by the oracle that it was an omission” nu LÚSANGA pu-nu-uš-šu-u-en UMMA ŠU– MA “we asked the priest. He said as follows: (‘…’)” KBo 14.21 i 7 (oracle question, NH), cf. ibid. i 28, 66, 79, ii 3-4; LÚ.MEŠTAPPIHI.A µPallΩma pu-nu-uš-šuu-en nu memir KUB 22.70 obv. 37-38, ed. THeth 6:64f.; [… p]u-nu-uš-šer nu IQBI KUB 18.3 left. col. 16, and passim in oracle questions. 
2. to investigate, ask about — a. (w. the obj. of inquiry in acc.) — 1' (inanimate objects) — a' in general: DˆN–ŠU natta pu-nu-uš-ši “You do not investigate his (sc. the poor man’s) legal case” KBo 
22.1 obv. 30 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 46f., cf. Melchert, Diss. 173; DI-ešni–ma–aš–kan GAM iyat~ taru nu DI-ašša[r] arahza pu-nu-uš-ki-id-du “Let (the EN KUR-TI) go down (from the city) for judgment, and investigate case(s) outside (the city)” KUB 21.29 ii 15; ug–at–za Ωppa MUNUSENSI-t–a natta kuššanka pu-nu-uš-šu-un “I never investigated it by means of a dream interpretess” KUB 30.10 rev. 21 (prayer, OH/MS), ed. mΩn 4 a 1', Lebrun, Hymnes 115, 117; nu uwami dUTU-ŠI uttar ukila pu-nu-uš-mi “I, My Majesty, will come (and) personally investigate the matter” KUB 13.20 i 28 (instr., MH/NS), ed. Alp, Belleten XI/43:392f., 407; cf. HKM 68:13-14 (letter, MH/MS), ed. HBM 250f.; [m]aniyahhiya–ta–kkan kue É.GAL«-LIM». HI.A-TIM É.HI.A B´L¨TI–ya [(and)]a n–ašta EGIR-an arha pu-nu-uš-ki “Investigate meticulously (Ωppan arha) the palaces and the houses of lordship which are in your district (whether anything is …, or …)” KUB 13.2 iv 13-14 (B´L MADGALTI instr., MH/ NS), w. dupl. KUB 13.1 iv 4, ed. Dienstanw. 51, tr. CoS 1:225; kuit–ma DI-šar šumel UL tar(a)hh„waš …. n–at LUGAL-uš apΩšila pu-nu-uš-zi “The king himself will investigate whatever case you cannot manage” 

punušš- 2 a 1' c' 

KUB 13.20 i 36-37; nu–za DINGIR.MEŠ kÏ DˆNAM peran katta dΩišten n–at pu-nu-uš-tén “O gods, set this case down before yourselves and investigate it” KBo 4.8 ii 16-17 (prayer, Murš. II), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 103:188; “Mumulanti said: ‘One person died’” n–at pu-nu-uš-mi n[(–at–kan anda šarnikmi)] “I will investigate it (sc. this matter) and pay compensation for it” KUB 31.51 rev. 6 (D) (vow of Pud.), w. dupls. KUB 
31.58 rev. 10 (J), KUB 56.1 i 17 (S), ed. StBoT 1:30f.; cf. [… pu]-nu-uš-mi n–ašta Q¸TAMMA Ëššanzi KUB 15.21:11; (Praying to the Sungod of Heaven) ammel– ma–wa DI-šar dUTU AN-E ˚zËlan pu-nu-uš-du “May the Sungod of heaven investigate my case” KUB 54.1 i 35-36 (dep.?, NH), ed. Archi/Klengel, AoF 12:54, 58; nu ap„n memian pu-nu-uš-šu-u-e«-u-e»-ni “We will investigate this matter” KUB 22.70 obv. 84 (oracle question, NH), ed. THeth 6:80f. 
b' (w. a person involved in d.-l.): “If there is any litigation, may the Priest step into (these) litigations on your behalf” nu–šmaš DI!.HI.A pu-nuuš-ki-id-du “and may he investigate your (pl.) cases for you’” KBo 3.3 iii 28-29 (hist., Murš. II); “They have cast a spell upon me” nu–mu dLIŠ! (text dUTU) URUŠamuhi GAŠAN–YA [ANA S]AG.DU– YA kattan artat [nu–mu D]I-eššar pu-nu-uš-ta “Šaušga of Šamuha, my lady, stood by me, [and] she investigated [the] case [for me]” KUB 21.17 i 1113 (hist., Hatt. III), ed. THeth 4:18-21, and Lebrun, Samuha, 144, 147; “If it happens that a son or grandson of Ura-Tarhunta sins against My Majesty …” nu–šši waštul pu-nu-uš-ša-an-du “they must investigate his crime” KUB 26.58 obv. 15 (hist., Hatt. III); cf. KUB 54.1 i 17-18 (dep.?, NH), ed. Archi/Klengel, AoF 12:53, 58; (Send nobles to My Majesty) nu–šmaš kuit DˆNU nu– šmaš–at dUTU-ŠI / [pu-nu-u]š-mi “and I, My Majesty, will [inves]tigate for you the case which you have” KBo 5.4 rev. 19-20 (Targ.). 
c' (w. the persons from whom something is learned in abl.): “Be quiet and listen. See out of your own wisdom, the words which are laid down for mankind …” n–at tuliyaza pu-nu-[u]š-tén “Investigate them by an assembly (or: Learn of them from an assembly). (Read them from the tablet)” KBo 12.128 rt. col. 13 (frag. of prayer or wisdom text?, NS), ed. Lebrun, Hymnes 399f., Melchert, Diss. 406. 

380

2' (obj. people): “He had no descendants” arm[ahhantan] MUNUS-an pu-nu-uš-šu-un “I asked about a pr[egnant] woman. (And there was no pregnant woman)” KUB 26.33 ii 7-8 (oath, Šupp. II), ed. Carruba, SMEA 18:151, tr. Meriggi, WZKM 58:94, and Otten, MDOG 94:3f. 
3' (obj. animals): §[…] nu dÉ.A-aš šuppal EGIR-pa kiššan pu-nu-uš-ta “[…] and Ea asked again about the animals” KUB 36.55 ii 30 (myth). 
	b. (absolute use: no acc., d.-l. or recorded question): (In testimony of Hešni the treasurer) “‘He was given a …”’ pu-nu-uš-šer [namma–w]a 1-EN paratiš Ëšta “They investigated: [furthermore(?)] there was (only) one p. (and it was not complete)” KUB 13.33 ii 6-7 (dep., NH), ed. StBoT 4:34f. 
	c. (part. based upon an impers. construction): kÏ kuit NU.SIGﬁ-ta nu LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-≠ap-ši šer± ÈN. TAR-kán “Since this was unfavorable, (it has been) asked about the purapši-priests” IBoT 2.129 obv. 30 (oracle question, NH), w. dupl. KBo 22.139:3, ed. Berman, JCS 34:96; although this form could be understood as either punuškan or wekan, the oracular inquiry context and the log. ÈN.TAR favor the former. The reason for the iter. construction is not immediately clear. 
	d. (frag.; no obj.): […] wemiyazzi nu–šše–ššan pu-u-nu-uš-šu[-…] KUB 26.17 ii 9, cf. Alp, Belleten XI/ 43:394, 408 (restores p„nuššu[war Ëštu] and tr. “[let] a question[ing be] (made) of him”). 

HroznŸ, SH (1917) 79; Götze, ZA 34 (1922) 184; Friedrich, HW (1952) 173; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 405; Berman, JCS 34 (1982) 123 (on the spelling ÈN.TAR); cf. Mascheroni’s three articles about interrog. sentences (SMEA 22 (1980) 5362 [punušš- mentioned in passing only]; OA 20 (1981) 99-105; StMed 4 (1983) 123-140). 
LÚpupu-n.; seducer(?), lover(?); from OH and MS.† 
sg. nom. LÚpu-pu-uš KUB 43.35:12 (pre-NH/MS); acc. LÚpu-pu-un-n(a) KBo 6.26 iv 12 (OH/NS). 
“If he brings them (sc. his wife and her lover) to the gate of the palace and declares: ‘My wife shall not be executed’ and (thereby) spares his wife’s life” LÚpu-pu-un-na huišn[u]zi “He shall also spare the life of the lover(?)” KBo 6.26 iv 12-13 (Laws §198, OH/NS), ed. HG 86f.; (In a fragmentary context deal

pupuwalatar 1 
ing with a river ordeal) […] LÚpu-pu-uš Ωššuš KUB 
43.35:12 (protocol frag., pre-NH/MS). 
The mng. “lover(?), seducer(?)” is determined from the context and from derivations from this stem. An Akk. word bubu “lover” (HW 173, Lebrun, Samuha 46, and Kronasser, EHS 1:119) does not exist, see Goetze, JCS 
22:24. 
Hroznyπ, CH (1922) 149 (“l’HOMMEadultère”); Friedrich, OLZ 29 (1926) 47 (“den Buhlen(?)”); idem, HW (1952) 173 (“Buhle, Geliebter”); Otten, ZA 52 (1957) 222; Güterbock, JAOS 103 (1983) 161 (“adulterer”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 44 (“Buhle?,” w. lit.). 
Cf. LÚpupuwatar, pupuwalai-, pupuwalatar. 
pupuwalai-v.; to seduce(?); NS.† 
MUNUS!-n[an kuiš(?)] pu-pu-wa-la-iz-zi nu– za–kan pupuwalatar ZAG-a–š[šan] arnuzzi “He who seduces(?) a woman and carries the seduction(?) to fulfillment …” KUB 24.7 i 40-42 (hymn to IŠTAR, NS), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:157, Archi, OA 16:306, 308, see pupuwalatar, below. 
Archi, OA 16 (1977) 308 (“adorare”); Lebrun, Hymnes (1980) 408 (“adorer”); Wegner, AOAT 36 (1981) 142; Güterbock, JAOS 103 (1983) 161 (“to seduce”). 
Cf. LÚpupu-. 
pupuwalatar n.; 1. seduction(?), 2. adultery(?); NH.† 
nom. pu-pu-wa-≠la-tar± KUB 24.7 i 41, (52). 
gen. pu-pu-wa-la-an-na-aš KUB 49. 94 ii 3, 11, VBoT 25 i 4, pu-pu-wa-la-an-na-aš!(text -ni) KUB 52.72 obv. 13, pu-puwa-≠la-n±[a-aš] KUB 6.15 ii 13. 
[pu-pu-]wa-la-tar KUB 21.27 ii 32 rest. by Wegner, AOAT 36:142, is against the traces, see Güterbock, JAOS 103:161 n. 
13. 
1. seduction(?): “A man and his wife love each other, and they carry their love to fulfillment …” MUNUS!-n[an kuiš(?)] pupuwalaizzi nu–za–kan pu-pu≠-wa-la±-tar ZAG-a–š[šan] arnuzzi “He who seduces(?) a woman and carries the seduction(?) to fulfillment” KUB 24.7 i 40-42 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:157, Archi, OA 16:306, 308 (“… e l’adorazione nella direzione giusta conduce”), Wegner, AOAT 
36:142 w. n. 436 | Güterbock, JAOS 103:161 (citing Carruba, Part. 20) suggested that ZAG-aššan should consist of the all. kunna-plus the local particle -šan, which would be an addition
381

al ex. to the three passages cited by Neu, Linguistica 33:140 of multiple local particles in one sentence. 
2. adultery(?): [kÏ] kuit ŠÀ É.DINGIR-LIM DI! (text: KI) dUTU-ŠI [pu-p]u-wa-la-an-na-aš INIMni šer SI≈SÁ-at “Concerning the fact that in the midst of the temple a case involving His Majesty was determined regarding a matter of adultery(?)” KUB 49.94 ii 2-3 (oracle question, NH), cf. […] ANA DINGIR-LIM SISKUR pu-≠pu±-wa-la-an-≠na±-aš […] “… to the deity a sacrifice (to atone for) adultery(?) [they shall give(?)]” ibid. ii 11; ANA dIŠTAR URUŠamuha–wa–za [SISKUR] pu-pu-wa-la-an-naaš BAL-ahhi “I will offer the [sacrifice] (to atone for) for adultery(?) to IŠTAR of Šamuha” VBoT 25 obv. 3-4; cf. KUB 6.5 ii 13, KUB 52.72 obv. 13; […]x(-)naš marlatar pu-pu-wa[-la-tar iyazi(?)] “[…], folly, adu[ltery(?) …]” KUB 24.7 i 52 (hymn to IŠTAR, NH), ed. Güterbock, JAOS 103:157 (differently). 
Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 297; Archi, OA 16 (1977) 309, w. n. 32 (“adorazione”); Wegner, AOAT 36 (1981) 141f.; Güterbock, JAOS 103 (1983) 161; Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 44. 
Cf. LÚpupu-. 
LÚpupuwatar n.; adultery(?); OS.† 
[…]x ANA ÉRIN.MEŠ SA.GAZ idΩlu natta kui[ški] / [iyazi … w]aštai nu LÚpu-p[u-w]a-a-tar iezzi “… no one [will do] evil against the Hapir„people in that he ‘sins’ [against them(?) …] and commits ‘adultery(?)’” KBo 9.73 obv. 6 (treaty, OS), ed. Otten, ZA 52:220f., Güterbock, JAOS 103:161. 
Otten, ZA 52 (1957) 222; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 297 (“sexueller Frevel?”); Riemschneider, StBoT 9 (1970) 38 n. 28 (“sicher eine schlechte Eigenschaft … vielleicht ‘Verrat’(?)”); Neumann, IF 76 (1971) 266 (connects w. pupulli-); Güterbock, JAOS 103 (1983) 161 (“here perhaps ‘fornication’ in general rather than ‘adultery’”); Weitenberg, U-Stämme (1984) 44. 
Cf. LÚpupu-. 
pupulli-n.; ruin(?), heap of rubble(?); from OH/ NS.† 
(Sum.) gú-bal = (Akk.) te-lu “tell” = (Hitt.) URU-aš p[upu-ul-li] “the r[uins] of a city” KBo 1.42 iii 6 (Izi Bogh, NH), ed. Hoffner, JAOS 87:303 w. n. 23, MSL 13:137, cf. AHw 1359b, s.v. tÏlu “(Schutt-)Hügel.” 

puram(m)im(m)a

“If anyone rejects the judgment of the king” É– SU pu-p[u-u]l-li kÏša “his house shall be made a ruin(?)” KBo 6.26 ii 12 (Laws §173, OH/NS), ed. HG 76f. and HL 138, cf. Güterbock, JAOS Suppl. 17:17. 
HroznŸ, CH (1922) 133 (“amas de m[or]ts”); Walther, HC (1931) 269 (“ruin(?)”); Friedrich, HG (1959) 111 (“ein Substantiv, etwa ‘Ruine(??),’ oder ein Adjektiv, vielleicht ‘wüst, zerstört(??)’ oder auch ‘friedlos(??)”’); van Brock, RHA XX/ 71 (1962) 120; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 120; Hoffner, JAOS 87 (1967) 303 w. n. 23; Neumann, IF 76 (1971) 266. 
Cf. puwai-. 
puppušša-v. mid.; to be pounded/ground(?); NH.† 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pu-up-pu-uš-ša-ta-ri KUB 8.38 ii 13. 
(They bring up marruwašha-mineral from Cyprus to treat his eye) namma–aš–š[i …] pu-up-puuš-ša-ta-ri … n–an kinaiz!zi namma–an–kan pu-uwa-a-iz-zi nu–k[a]n ANA GAL ZABAR GEŠTIN lΩhuwΩi uni–ya marruwašhan menahhanda peššiazzi n–an anda harnamniyazzi n–an–ši–kan naššu UD-az našma–ši–kan GEﬂ-az anda tarneš~ kizzi “Then it (the marruwašha-) is pounded/ ground(?) up for it/him, … and (s)he mixes it, and then (or again) (s)he pounds/grinds it, and pours wine into a bronze cup and throws that marru~ wašha-in, mixes it up, and applies it to the patient’s eye either in the day or at night” KUB 44.63 iii 4-10 + KUB 8.38 iii! 12-18 (med. rit., NH), ed. StBoT 19:30f. and puwai-, cf. StBoT 5:143. 
The tr. is based on the related puwai-, pu(wa)ššai-, of which p. is a reduplication. 
Laroche, RHA XVI/63 (1958) 107 (“est pressée”); van Brock, RHA XXII/75 (1964) 121 w. n. 9; Kronasser, EHS 1 (1966) 120, 570; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 143. 
Cf. puššai- puwai-. 
GIŠpura-x[(-)] n.; (a kind of wood or a wooden object).† 
GIŠpu-ra-x[(-)…] KUB 54.93 obv. 2 (rit. frag.). 
puram(m)im(m)a-adj. or (Luw. pass.) part.; (describing SU.MEŠ); NH.† 
pl. nom.-acc. neut. pu-u-ra-mi-im-ma KUB 5.6 i 10, ii 31, pu-ra-am-me-ma ibid. iv 12, pu-ra-mi-ma ibid. i 13a, KBo 9.150:7, 15. 

382

puram(m)im(m)a
abl. pu-ra-am-mi-ma-za KUB 5.10 obv. 15. 

(The first oracle inquiries are made by means of HURRI-birds) nu IGI-anda IŠTU SU.MEŠ pu-raam-mi-ma-za ER.-wen “In addition, we inquired by means of p.-exta” KUB 5.10 obv. 15 (oracle question, NH), ed. Laroche, RHA XII/54:25 | on the reading ER., see Beal, JAOS 112:129; “Have you (O god) required the regulation about the country of Aštata?” nu apadda šer SU.MEŠ pu-u-ra-mi-im-ma ER.-ker “About that they investigated the p.-exta” KUB 5.6 i 10 (oracle question, NH), ed. Laroche, RHA XII/54:25; zilaš–ma SU.MEŠ pu-u-ra-mi-im-ma SIGﬁ “Oracle reply: the p.-exta are favorable” (they were checked three times: by the diviner, the augur and the Old Woman) ibid. ii 31; nu SU.MEŠ pu-ra-mi-ma SIGﬁ-ru KBo 9.150:7, 15; SU.MEŠ pu-ra-am-me-ma NU.SIGﬁ-ta KUB 5.6 iv 12. 
Sommer, AU (1932) 421; Laroche, RHA XII/54 (1952) 25; Friedrich, HW (1952) 173; Laroche, GLH (1979) 205. 

p„rana-n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 

6 KUŠE.SIR.HI.A ŠÀ.BA ≠2 TAP±[AL o] ≠x x KÙ.GI± hulpanzinaimeš KUŠMARŠUM anda 3 TAPA[L o o o o l-N]≠U?±-TUM KÙ.GI hulpazinan~ teš 3 TAPAL pu-u-ra-na KÙ.GI [ca. 7 signs GAR. R]A? “Six (pairs of) sandals, among them two pairs […] studded with gold, thongs included; three pairs […, one s]et? studded with gold; three pairs p. [… pla]ted” KUB 12.1 iv 34-36 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:102, 106, Siegelová, Verw. 450f. 
The six pairs of sandals are exhausted by the 2, 3, and 1 pairs which follow. This means that the three pair of p„rana are something else. 

puran[i(-)] (mng. unkn.), NH.† 

[… d]UTU-waš pu-ra-n[i(-)…] “p. of the sun(god)” KBo 29.32 ii 12, in a text w. many Luw. terms. 
LÚpurapši-n. of Hurr. origin, com.; (a priest); from MH and MS. 
sg. nom. LÚpu-ra-ap-ši-iš KBo 15.52 v 11 (MH?/NS), KBo 
17.103 obv. 22 (NH), KBo 19.129 obv. 2 (NS), KBo 13.189:2, (7), KUB 25.49 ii 2, KUB 45.52 obv. 19, KUB 55.11 left edge (2), KUB 59.53 i (1). 
d.-l. (ANA) LÚpu-ra-ap-ši KBo 33.188 ii 6, KBo 8.63 i (13). 

LÚpurapši
pl. nom. LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-e-eš KBo 25.190 rev. (32) (MS), KBo 9.115 obv. (13) (MH), KUB 25.49 ii 24, KUB 
40.102 i 17, KUB 45.58 iii 14, LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-i-e-eš KBo 
23.1 ii 24 (NH), HSM 3644:(4) (JCS 19:33), LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap
ši-uš (or, -iš!) KUB 56.19 ii 11, KUB 30.42 iv 20 (NH). 
acc.(?) LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-uš KUB 22.65 iii 36. 
d.-l. LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-še-ia-aš KBo 24.61 obv.? 4. 
stem form: LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-≠ap-ši± IBoT 2.129 obv. 30 (NH), 
KBo 34.180 obv.? (3). sg. or pl. gen. [… p]u-ra-ap-ši-ia-aš KUB 42.106 obv.? 13 (NH). uncert. [… pu-ra-]ap-še-iš KUB 46.48 obv. 5. 
1 IM.GŠD.DA QATI INIM µAmmihatna µTulpÏ U [µM]ΩtÏ LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-i-e-eš ŠA KUR URUKummanni “One IM.GŠD.DA tablet (w. text) complete: The words of Ammihatna, Tulpi, and Mati, the p.-priests of Kummanni. (If they find desecration [maršaštarri-] of whatever sort, in the temple, in a holy place, this is the ritual for it)” KBo 23.1 ii 17-19 (rit., NH), ed. Lebrun, Hethititica 3:144, 151f.; cf. KUB 30.42 iv 19-24; UMMA µA[m]mihatna µTulpÏ U µMΩtÏ LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-i-e-eš ŠA KUR U[RUK]ummanni mΩn–kan INA É.DINGIR-LIM šupp[a]i pedi ithiuš kuiški anda dΩi “Thus (say) Ammihatna, Tulpi, and Mati, the p.-priests of Kummanni: If someone deposits ithiuš in a holy place in the temple” KBo 23.1 ii 23-26; cf. HSM 3644:3-6 (Güterbock, JCS 19:33); nu–ššan LÚpu-ra-ap-ši-iš unu~ wanza šuhhi artari nu GIŠTUKUL kuin harzi n– an–kan peran katta tarnai “The adorned p.-priest stands on the roof. He lowers in front the weapon which he holds” KUB 30.40 i 20-22 (hišuwaš fest.); 1 LÚpu-ra-ap-ši-iš–ma–kan kuiš šuhhi šer artari nu LUGAL-i m[(e)]nahhanda kuwarayalla kiššan memiškizzi “One p.-priest who stands upon the roof and speaks encouraging things to the king, as follows: (‘O king, fear not! The Stormgod will put the enemies and the enemy lands under your feet, and you will crush them like empty vessels’)” KBo 
15.52 + KUB 34.116 v 11-13 (hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 20.60:1-4, s.v. menahhanda 2 b 2'; (Wine is distributed among five chapels or temples, bread is distributed among several locations) nu kuwapiya ANA P[(¸NI DINGIR-LIM LÚ.MEŠp)]u-ra-ap-ši-e-eš adanna ue[(kanzi nu kuwap)]iya ANA P¸NI DINGIR-LIM 3-Š[(U akuwanzi)] “and everywhere the p.-priests ask for something to eat before the (respective) deity, and everywhere they drink 
383

three times before the deity” KUB 20.49 i 11-13 (hišu~ waš fest., NS), w. dupl. KBo 20.114 vi 25-26 + KBo 7.45 rev. left col. 1-3. ed. Dinçol, RHA XXVII/84-85:32, 40 (w. different tr.); n–ašta LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-e-eš 2 SI GUD KÙ.GI GAR.RA hantiyarahhašš–a KÙ.GI KÁ-aš anda harkanzi n–ašta GUD.HI.A kuiËš šipan~ duanzi ANA P¸NI DINGIR-LIM anda nanniyanzi nu–šmaš–at–kan <ANA> SI.MEŠ–ŠUNU SAG. KI.HI.A–ŠUNU–ya anda appeškanzi “In the doorway, the p.-priests hold two (pairs of?) bovine horns, plated with gold, and (two?) gold blaze-ornaments(?). They apply them (to?) the horns and the foreheads of the oxen which they drive to the deity to be sacrificed” KUB 40.102 i 17-23 (hišuwaš fest.) | since the Hitt. reading of SAG.KI is hant-rather than hantiyarrahha-, we assume that these two logograms (SI.MEŠ–ŠUNU SAG.KI.HI.A–ŠUNU–ya) designate the body parts of the oxen to which the gold plating was applied, even though the d.-l. case is not expressed; EGIR-ŠU–ma LÚpu-ra-ap-ši-iš wΩtar TI°MUŠ[EN-aš] partaunaz arha 3-ŠU pap[paršzi] “Afterwards, the p.-priest sprinkles water three times by means of an eagle’s feather” KBo 8.155 ii 8-9 (hišuwaš fest.); namma–kan LÚSANGA TI°MUŠEN-aš partΩuwa[r …] arha dΩi n–at–kan anda ANA DUGG[AL …] n–at ANA LÚpura-ap-ši pΩi “Then a šankunni-priest takes an eagle’s feather(?) away [from …] and [dips(?)] it into a cup, and gives it to a p.-priest” KBo 33.188 ii 46 (fest. frag.), translit. StBoT 15:42; apËdani–m[a–at] UD.KAM-t[i] LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-e-eš ANA GIŠ ≠menahhanda± immeyanzi “On that day the p.priests mix it (something brought from the mountains and dried out) with wood” KUB 45.58 iii 13-15; na[m]ma MUNUStaprit[a]ššin(!) LÚpu-ra-ap-ši-iš Q¸TAM Ëpzi n–an–kan 7 KASKAL.M[EŠ] arah~ zanda wahnuanzi “Next the p.-priest takes the tap~ ritašši-woman by the hand, and they encircle it (some object named in the preceding broken context) seven times” KUB 25.49 ii 1-3 (hišuwaš fest.); (At birth) LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-ap-ši-iš! dapianteš anda aranzi “all the p.-priests will enter. (We will determine [her fate?]. Thereafter they will set her in order)” KUB 56.19 ii 11 (vow), ed. StBoT 29:256f.; kÏ kuit [N]U.SIGﬁ-ta nu LÚ.MEŠpu-ra-≠ap-ši šer± ÈN.TARkan “Since this was unfavorable, (it was) repeatedly asked about the p.-priests. (They said: ‘They used to give a pomegranate (nuratin) to the god, 

(˚/¬)puri- A 1 a 

but now we haven’t yet given it’)” IBoT 2.129 obv. 30 (oracle question, NH), ed. Berman, JCS 34:96. 
The p.-priests are attested only in southeastern Asia Minor where Hurrian influences were felt, i.e., Kummanni/Kizzuwatna, Lawazantiya (KBo 19.129:2, 4), and Tarhuntašša (KUB 50.122 rev. 1-2). 
Gurney, Schweich (1977) 45f., w. n. 6 (LÚp. possible reading of LÚHAL/LÚAZU); Laroche, GLH (1977/1979) 206 (“prêtre,” derived from Hurr. puramši “‘serviteur’ (d’un dieu)”); Pecchioli Daddi, Mestieri (1982) 255-257 (“sacerdote (in Kizzuwatna)”). 
(˚/¬)puri-A n.; 1. lip, 2. rim, edge, border, 3. (in the expression aššauweš purieš); from OH/MS. 
sg. nom. pu-u-ri-iš KUB 29.10 ii 4, (11) (OH/NS), KUB 
53.34 obv. 5, pu-ri-iš ibid. obv. 4. 
acc. pu-u-ri-in KBo 17.74 ii (30) (OH/MS), HT 1 i 41 (MH/NS), KBo 15.58 v 22 (MH?/NS), KBo 16.45 rev. (7), KUB 20.16 i 6, KUB 27.69 ii 13, KUB 39.61 i 3, pu-ri-in KBo 

19.112:7. 

d.-l. ¬pu-u-ri(-š[i]) KBo 26.82 obv. 8 (so StBoT 14:70, 106; -š[i] not visible in the hand copy), pu-u<-ri>-i-ia-aš-mi KBo 17.105 ii 33. 
pl. nom. pu-u-ri-e-eš KBo 34.19:3 (MS), KBo 10.24 iii 7 (NS). 
acc. pu-u-ri-uš KUB 10.1 ii 21 (OH/NS), KBo 19.128 i 34 (OH?/NS), KBo 19.129 obv. 30, KBo 21.98 ii 8 (both NS), IBoT 3.97:4, 7, IBoT 4.76 iii 10, pu-u-ri-ú-uš KBo 19.163 i 23, iv 4 (OH/NS), pu-ri-uš KUB 17.16 i 8 (NS), KBo 21.54:27. 
d.-l. pu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 9.28 i 14 (MH/NS), KBo 25.184 ii 
(3) (NS), pu-u-ri-aš KUB 43.71 rev. 4. 
abl. pu-u-ri-ia-az KBo 16.56:14, KBo 23.43 ii? 4 (MH?/ MS), IBoT 2.46:8 (NS), pu-ri-ia-a[z?] KUB 40.93:8, ˚pu-u-[rii]a-az KUB 45.26 ii 7 (NS). 
inst. ≠pu±-u-ri-t([a-at]) KUB 58.111 rev. 9.
uncert. pu-ri-ia-aš KUB 33.68 iii 17 (OS or MS).

1. lip — a. in general: […] … UZUZAG.LU–šuš / […] iniri–ššit IGI.HI.A-≠it±/ [… E]ME–ŠU UZUZU·–šuš p[u-r]i-uš–šuš / […]. UZUNŠG.GIG UZUhahri–šši< t > / […-]iš UZUÚR UZU≠ke±nu–ššit / […]namuš–šuš “his shoulders, […] his eyebrows, with the eyes […], his tongue, his teeth, his lips, […], liver, his diaphragm, … member(s), his knee, his […-]s” KUB 57.105 ii 3-8; “[…] honey […] is placed […]” […M]EŠ(?) azzikiten /[… pu]-u-riuš–(š)muš / […] lala<n>–šman–a–z–apa / […-]ki~ ten “Keep eating […-]s, [keep …-ing] your lips, keep […]-ing your tongue(s) […]” KBo 39.18:7-10; pu-ri-uš–za kuiËš Ëššanzi KUB 17.16 i 8 (NH); 

384

(˚/¬)puri- A 1 a 

[mahhan–ma LÚšank]unnieš A[WATEMEŠ URUPabi~ lili mem]iyauwanzi z[innai……] É.GAL ŠU.MEŠaš wΩtar […LÚšankunie]š URUPΩbilili ki[ššan me~ mai x-x] ŠU.MEŠ–KI B´LTI MUNUS.LUGAL. GAL Š[U.SI.HI.A–KI…… Š]APTI–KI ŠUKKE[L] KUB 39.71 ii 1-6 (rit. for IŠTAR-Pirinkir, NH); [GAL DUMU.M]EŠ É.GAL LUGAL-i GAD-an pΩi [LUGAL-uš] pu-u-ri-uš Ωnši “The [chief of the] palace [atten]dants gives a linen cloth to the king, [the king] wipes (his) lips” IBoT 4.76 iii 9-10 (AN~ DAHŠUM fest.); LÚ GIŠTUKUL LUGAL-i GAL-in pΩi [LUGAL-uš pu]-u-ri-in dΩi LÚ GIŠTUKUL DUGteššum[m]in Ωppa Ëpzi KBo 17.74 ii 29-30 (fest. of the Storm, OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:21f.; LÚšerhalaš art[a … še]rhan harzi n–apa pu-u-ri-ú-uš Ωnaškizz[i] “The šerhala-man stands and holds the šerha-. He wipes (i.e., applies the šerha-substance to) the lips (of several participants)” KBo 19.163 i 22-23 (fest. for Tetešhabi, OH/NS); cf. ibid. iv 3-4; KBo 21.98 ii 7-8 (NS); “The chief cook offers to the king the tuhhueššarsubstance” LUGAL-uš–kan tuhuhša pu-u-ri-uš Ωnši “The king cuts(? tuhša) (it) and wipes/salves (his) lips” (he then wipes his hands with a linen cloth) KBo 19.128 i 34 (fest., OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 13:4f.; cf. KUB 
20.59 i 17-18 (OH or MH/MS), KBo 21.54 + KBo 30.174:20, 27; [… š]araz<zi>yaz pu-u-ri-ia-az “with the upper lip” KBo 16.56:14 (rit., NS), ed. Kühne, FsOtten 162f.; nu– ššan [… p]u-u-ri-ia-aš šer p„riyal KÙ.GI ANA IGI.HI.A-aš [šer …-l]i KÙ.GI tianzi “They place a gold lip-cover over the lips, and gold [eyecov]ers(?) [over] the eyes (of the deceased?)” KBo 
25.184 ii 2-3 (funeral rit., NS); idΩlun kardimiyattan šΩuwar arha namma peššiyaten nu–šmaš–kan puu<-ri>-i-ia-aš-mi NINDA.Ì.E.DÉ.A namma kittaru nu!–šmaš–kan KA≈U-az parΩ Ì-an arašdu “Cast out again the evil anger (and) fury. Let sweet, oily cake be put again on your lip(s). Let fat flow from your mouth” KBo 17.105 ii 32-34 (incant. for dLAMMA and dVII.VII.BI, MH/MS); the unemended reading P¨-iya–šmi “in your (pl.) mouth” followed by Otten, KBo 17, VI, n. 17, is strange, since the expected Hitt. pronunciation would be *išši– šmi, not *iššiya–šmi; for this reason we prefer to emend the text to a grammatically more acceptible pu-u<-ri>-i-ia-aš-mi “in your (pl.) lip(s)”; [lΩl]it–at–kan liptu ≠pu±-u-ri-t[aat(-) …-du] “Let him lick it with (his) tongue. [Let him … it] with (his) lip[s]” KUB 58.111 rev. 9 (rit.). 

(˚/¬)puri- A 2 a 
b. in the idiom p„rin/p„riuš dai-“to set lip(s) (to something)”: ANA GIA.DA.GUR-ya–ššan pu-uri-in dΩi nu pΩši “He sets his lip to the (reed) drinking tube and sucks” HT 1 i 41-42 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Friedrich, JCS 1:287, idem, ArOr 6:373f., cf. HTR 120; “They set up a chair for him to sit, but he did not sit down. They laid a table for him to eat, but he did not reach out” GAL-in–ši piËr nu–ššan pu-u-ri-in ≠UL± dΩiš “They gave him a cup, but he did not put (his) lip to (it)” KUB 36.7a iv 53 + KUB 33.96 iv 17 (Ullik.), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:160f.; nu–ššan apËdani ANA GAL KAŠ [(MUNUSalhuitraš)] pu-u-ri-in UL dΩi “The alhuitra-woman does not set (her) lip to that cup of beer. (She passes it on to the tarpaš~ gana-woman. She bows, takes it and drinks it, then she returns the cup to the cup-bearer)” KUB 20.16 i 56 (cult of Huwaššana), w. dupl. KBo 29.86 obv. 5-6; cf. KUB 
40.97 iii 21-23; KBo 15.52 i 7 (MH/NS); KBo 15.58 v (22); KBo 19.112:7, w. dupl. KBo 19.112a:(6); LÚ GIŠTUKUL LUGAL-i GAL-in pΩi [LUGAL-uš pu-]u-ri-in dΩi “The GIŠTUKUL-man hands a cup to the king, the king sets (his) lip (to the cup). (The GIŠTUKULman takes the cup back)” KBo 17.74 ii 29-30 (thunder fest., OH/MS), ed. StBoT 12:20f.; cf. KUB 39.61 i 3-4; KBo 
21.69 i 17; KBo 21.99:8; IBoT 3.72:7; “The palace attendant then holds up to the cook the bowl (of oil)” nu–šš[an t]api[š]anaz GEŠTIN ANA DU[G]DŠLIM. GAL Ì pu-u-ri-in dΩi “and from the vessel of wine (the cook) sets his lip to the bowl of oil” KUB 27.69 ii 11-13 (fest.), ed. Melchert, Diss. 229 (instr. abl.; compares nu–ššan LÚEN É-TIM ŠA UDU.ŠIR ŠA GUD.MAH–ya auliya GŠR ZABAR-it Q¸TAM dΩi KBo 15.33 iii 11-12 [MH/MS] which has a similarly used instr.); [nu–š]šan MUNUS. LUGAL [AN]A NINDAharzaz„ti p[u-]≠u±-ri-in dΩi “The queen puts her lip to the harzazuta-bread/ cake” KUB 27.69 iii 5-7 (fest. of the month), ed. Friedrich, JCS 1:288 | for harzazuta, a ‘soupy’ dish, see Hoffner, AlHeth 157f. 
2. rim, edge, border — a. (said of vessels): (A large storage vessel (palhi-) is turned on its side and an opening made in the bottom, so that the whole serves like a culvert, through which a person can crawl) [n]–aš–ma (var. n–ašta) EN.SŠSKUR DUGpa[(lhi)] arraz anda [(paiz)]zi para–ma–aš– kan ≠p±u-u-ri-ia-az uizzi “The patient goes into the storage vessel through (its) bottom (lit. ‘arse’), and 
385

he comes out through (its) ‘lip(s)’” KBo 24.63 obv.? 11-12 + KBo 23.43 obv.? 3-4 (rit., MS?), w. dupl. KUB 45.26 ii 6-7, ed. Puhvel, HED 1:122 (interpreting arraz and p. as the patient’s arse and lip), but cf. correctly HW™ 1:258b s.v. arraz 2; DUGpalhiaš pu-u-ri-ia-aš peran kue [GIŠ]hata[lk]iš~ naš KÁ.GAL artari MUŠEN.HI.A–ya–ššan anda hamankanteš “Birds are tied to the gate of hawthorn which stands in front of the ‘lips’ (i.e., of the ‘front’ open end) of the storage vessel” KBo 24.63 rev.? 1-3 + KBo 23.43. rev.? 8-10; cf. par. [ŠA DUGpa]l?hi pu-u-riia-aš <peran?> kue KÁ.GAL.HI.A [hatalk]išnaš artari MUŠEN.HI.A–ya–ššan [anda h]amanganteš KBo 27.159 ii 11-13 (rit.); […]x-x DUGišn„ran pu-u-riuš anda hulaliyazi “He wraps up the ‘lips’ of the dough jar/bowl [with …] (and stops up […] with warm bread)” KBo 19.129 obv. 30 (Kizz. rit.); nu DINGIR-LIM-aš Ëšri iyazi […GI]ŠGANNU šerr–a– ššan DUGHAB.HAB-aš wedanda š„š anda KÙ. BABBAR TUR 7 NA›.HI.A TUR išh„wanteš pu-uri-ia-aš-ša-aš wËlkuwan šΩhan “(S)he makes an image of the deity: [on the …] is a potstand. On top there is a pitcher full of water, small (pieces of) silver and seven small stones are dropped in, and grass is stuffed in its ‘lips’” KUB 9.28 i 11-14 (rit. for the Heptad), ed. Eichner, Die Sprache 21:157-61, cf. Berman, JAOS 
	92:467 (referring p. to the image of the deity, i.e., ‘lips’); “Three lion rhyta …” 1-EN KÙ.G[I] pu-u-ri-iš tit~ talitaimeš “(The third) one (is of) gold; its ‘lip’ is tittalitai-d” Bo 87/5a ii 19-20, ed. Otten, FsTÖzgüç 366f. (“die ‘Lippe’ ist …t”), cf. ii 25, 30-31; (In an enumeration of six animal figures (BIBRU) of gold, among them) 4 GUD IGI-zi GUB-anteš ŠÀ 3 KÙ.GI NA› l-EN KÙ.GI pu-u-ri-in [ti]ttalitaimeš “four (representing) oxen (with respect to their) front (quarters) standing, among them three of gold and gems, one is (of) gold, tittalitai-d with respect to its ‘lip’” KUB 12.1 iv 21-22 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:102, 105, Siegelová, Verw. 448f., cf. Goetze, JCS 5:72. The front legs of the animal portrayed on the BIBRU are shown in a standing position. p. here may refer to the rim of the BIBRU | for BIBRU’s and their descr., see Güterbock, FsBittel 212-214 and Otten, FsTÖzgüç 368. 
	b. (said of garments): 2 TÚG–ma!(text: ku) SAG.DUL ZA.GÌN pu-u-ri-in tittalitaimenzi “Two garments, head cover(s), blue, tittalitai-ed (i.e., decorated in a certain way) with respect to the bor

(GIŠ/GI)p„ri- B 

der/hem (lit. lip)” KUB 12.1 iv 43 (inv., NH), ed. Košak, Linguistica 18:103, 106; cf. in a context mentioning garments: [… pu-u-]ri-in ti[tt]alitaimeš KUB 42.69 obv. 22. 
3. aššauweš purieš: in broken context: [… Ωšša]ueš pu-u-ri-e-eš šume[š…… ta]knΩš dUTU-i peran Ω[ššu?…] tar(a)škitten “You (pl.) ‘[go]od lips’ — keep speaking go[od …] before the Sungoddess of [the E]arth” KBo 34.19:3-5 (prayer, MS); the lips are called “good” because they speak pleasing and beneficial things to the deity; obscure: GIŠippiyaš kapnuËš≠ni± ΩššauËš pu-u-ri-e-eš “in/on the k. of the ippiya-tree/ bush (are) ‘good lips’” KBo 10.24 iii 6-7 (KI.LAM fest., OH/NS), ed. HED 2:378, translit. StBoT 28:18, tr. StBoT 27:61f. n. 29 (“On a thread(?) of ippiya-plant (there are) good lips”), Ardzinba, VDI 141:118. 
Friedrich, ArOr 6 (1934) 373f.; idem, JCS 1 (1947) 286-289 (comprehensive investigation, mng. 1); Goetze, JCS 5 (1951) 72 w. n. 57 (mng. 2); Košak, Linguistica 18 (1978) 110 (mng. 2); Poetto, Sprache 29 (1983) 37-40. 
Cf. p„riyal, (¬)puriyalli-. 

(GIŠ/GI)p„ri- B, (GIŠ/GI)p„riya-n. com.; (a wooden or wicker object, existing in sets, for supporting pitchers, etc.; probably a tray); from OS. 
sg. nom. GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 35.133 i 9 (NS), pu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 54.91 obv.? 9, ≠GIŠ±pu-ri-ia-aš KUB 32.123 ii 21, GIŠpu-u-ri-iš KUB 59.53 i 6. 
sg. acc. [G]Ipu-u-ri-in or, [… KÙ.G]I pu-u-ri-in KBo 
16.101:8 (perhaps puri- “lip”?). 
pl. nom. GIŠpu-u-ri-eš KBo 20.4 iv 6 (OS), KUB 58.103 right col. 11 (NS), pu-u-ri-eš KUB 42.107 iv? 14, GIŠpu-u-ri-eeš KUB 53.15 v 12, pu-u-ri-e-eš KBo 7.46 iv 3, GIŠpu-ri-eš KBo 20.86:7 (OH/NS), GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-aš(–šmiš) VBoT 58 iv 20 (OH/NS) on which, see below. 
acc. pu-u-ri-uš IBoT 3.97:4, 7, ≠GI±pu-u-ri-[u]š? KUB 41.13 ii 17, pu-ri-uš KUB 17.16 i 8 (or puri- “lip”?). 
d.-l. GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-aš KBo 20.8 rev.? 5 (OS), KBo 20.61 ii 37 (OH), KUB 41.8 ii 31 (MH/NS), pu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 39.71 i 30 (NS). 
sg.?/pl.? abl. GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-az KBo 17.75 i 31 (OH/NS), KUB 24.13 i 20 (NS), KUB 55.63 ii (27), pu-u-ri-ia-az KUB 32.111:7, KUB 35.9 i (1), GIŠpu-ri-ia-az KBo 13.217 iii 4 (NS), KUB 9.31 i 31 (MH/NS), GIŠpu-u-ri-az KUB 7.1 iii 34 (NH), KUB 7.13 rev. 7. 
uncert.: sg. or pl. nom. pu-ri-aš KBo 18.175a:3, KUB 
42.11 v 8 (both NH); sg. nom. (so StBoT 26:152) or pl. d.-l. GIŠpu-u-ri-aš KBo 20.8 rev.? 11 (OS), [pu-u]-ri-ia-aš or [GIŠpu-?]-ri-ia-aš KBo 17.58 i 6 (OH/MS), GIŠpu-ri-ia-aš KUB 
39.22 iii 7. 

386

a. (in general): “He brings water into the house” nu UN¨TU dapian kuwapi kitta apadd–a apÏ pËdai n–at–šan GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-aš dΩi “He brings that also there where all the paraphernalia are placed, and puts it on the p.’s (pl.)” KUB 41.8 ii 29-31 (rit., MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:126f. (= ll. 66-68) (“auf das Abstellbrett?”); (The sacrificer places the deity on the table) nu–šši peran katta [o] ≠DUGKU±KUB KAŠ GIŠpu-u-ri-az dΩi “and sets down before it [x] pitchers of beer (which were taken) from the p. (or perhaps: with/ by means of the p.)” KUB 7.1 iii 33-34 (rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Sprache 7:163; (The sacrificer lifts up a vessel with water) n–at–šan GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-≠az± ZAG. G[AR.RA-n]i ≠dΩi± “and by means of a p. places it on the altar” KUB 24.13 i 20 (rit., NS), ed. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:102f.; peran katta–ma ANA GIŠBANŠUR (dupl. B. GIŠBANŠUR AD.KID) 1 DUGh„ppar GEŠTIN GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-az (dupl. C: ≠pu-u-ri-ia-az±) dΩi U 1 DUG KA.DÙ NAG GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-az (dupl. 
	B: GIŠpu-ri-ia-az) dΩi “Down in front from (or “with”) the p. he places one h„ppar-vessel of wine on the table, and from (or “with”) the p. he places one pitcher of KA.DÙ beer for drinking (and inserts a drinking tube)” HT 1 i 23-25 (rit. MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 9.31 i 30-31 (B), KUB 35.9 i 1 (C), ed. Schwartz, JAOS 58:336f.; 3 DUGKUKUB [I]ŠTU 3 TÚL.HI.A wΩtar … U 3 GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-aš-mi-iš (i.e., puriyaš– šmeš) “Three pitchers (of) water from three springs … and their three p.-s” VBoT 58 iv 19-20 (myth., OH/ NS), translit. Myth. 26; […] NINDA ÉRIN.MEŠ pu-uri-ia-az kitta “[…] soldier bread from (or: with) the 
	p. is placed (down)” KUB 32.111:7 (funerary rit.), ed. HTR 84f. (“Schanktisch?”). 
	b. (characteristics) — 1' (counted in sets or pairs): l-NUTUM pu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 54.91 obv.? 9; 1NUTIM GIŠpu-u-ri-iš AD.KID KUB 59.53 i 6, translit. Haas/Thiel, AOAT 31:120 (as Bo 3133); 1-NUTIM pu-uri-e-eš UD.x[…] KBo 7.46 iv 3; 2 TAPAL ≠GIŠ±pu-riia-aš AD.KID KUB 32.123 ii 21; 3 TAPAL GIŠpu-u-riia-aš AD.K[ID] KUB 35.133 i 9. 

2' (made of) — a' wickerwork: for KUB 32.123 ii 21, KUB 35.133 i 9, KUB 59.53 i 6, see b above; GIpu-u-ri[u]š? AD.KID KUB 41.13 ii 17. 
b' metal: 81 NŠG.GŠD.DA AN.BAR.GEﬂ 3 puri-aš ŠÀ.BA 1 AN.[BAR …] KUB 42.11 v 8, ed. Siegelová, Verw. 404f., translit. THeth 10:33. 

puri(ya)- C 
3' (color): [… x+]l GIŠpu-u-ri-eš BABBAR KBo 
20.4 iv 6, cf. KBo 20.8 rev.? 5, 11; [x pu-u-ri-eš(??) GA]L BABBAR 20 pu-u-ri-eš TUR BABBAR KUB 
42.107 iv? 14; GIŠpu-u-ri-ia-az SAﬁ KBo 17.75 i 31. 
4' (size): For KUB 42.107 iv? 14, see b 3' above; 20 GIŠpu-ri-eš TUR KBo 20.86:7. 
It is certain that this is not a syll. reading of GIŠGANNUM because the two are juxtaposed in KUB 32.123 ii 21-22. 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 48, 88 (“Lokalität(?)”); Schwartz, JAOS 58 (1938) 337 (“tray”); Friedrich, JCS 1 (1947) 286f. (“Untersetzer(??), Abstellbrett(??)”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 173 (“(eine Art Schanktisch??)”); Otten, HTR (1958) 84f. (“Schanktisch?”); idem, ZA 54 (1961) 126f. (“Abstellbrett?”). 
Cf. (¬)puriyalli-. 
puri(ya)-C, wuri(ya)-n.; (Hurr. offering term); from MH/MS. 
gen. pu-u-ri-ia-aš KBo 21.34 ii 65 (MH/NS), IBoT 3.148 iii (61) (LNS). 
dat.-loc. pu-u-ri-ia KBo 21.34 ii 37, 57 (MH/NS), KUB 
15.31 iv 26 (LNS), KBo 5.1 ii 12 (NH), KBo 9.119 i (12), KBo 11.7 obv. 3, wuu-ri-ia KUB 15.34 iv 46 (MH/MS), KBo 
17.69:10 (NS), KUB 47.89 iii 10, pu-ú-ri-ia KBo 27.191 iii 3. 
nu ANA DINGIR-LIM menahhanda pu-u-ri-ia šipanti “(The patili-priest) sacrifices before the deity for p.” KBo 5.1 ii 11-12 (rit., NH), ed. Pap. 6*f.; nu 1 MUŠEN wuu-ri-ia warnuanzi “They burn one bird for p.” KUB 15.34 iv 46 (rit., MH/MS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:206f.; EGIR-anda–ma LÚpatiliš 1 MUŠEN GAL 1 NINDAnahhitin UPNI 5 NINDA SIG Ì.GIŠ GEŠTIN tepu ANA dLUGAL-ma Éšinapšiyaš IGIanda wuu-ri-ia keltiya šipanti “But afterwards the patili-priest offers one ‘large bird,’ one nahhitibread (made) of one UPNU (of flour), five thin breads, vegetable oil, and a little wine to Šarruma across from the šinapši-building for wuri(ya) and wellbeing” KBo 17.69:7-10 (rit., NS), translit. Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:102; cf. KBo 9.119 i 12, KBo 11.7 obv. 3; cf. EGIR-ŠU–ma–šši 1 MUŠEN 5 NINDA SIG. MEŠ 1 NINDAmulΩtinn–a ZŠD.DA UPNI pu-u-ri-ia šipanti … nu–kan GIŠirhuiti kuedani kattan išhuwΩn pu-u-ri-ia-aš-ša (i.e., puriyašš–a) MUŠEN.HI.A h„prušhinn–a šarΩ danzi “Afterwards he sacrifices to him one bird, five thin breads, and one mulati
387

bread (made from) one UPNU of flour for p. … They also take up the birds of puri(ya) and the h„prušhi-vessel out of the basket into which (the foodstuffs) have been poured” KBo 21.34 ii 56-58, 6466 (fest., MH/NS); […] ≠SŠSKUR pu-u-ri±-ia-aš kišan ≠BAL-ti± “He offers the sacrifice of puri(ya) as follows:” (one sheep to this deity, one sheep to that deity, etc.) IBoT 3.148 iii 61 (rit., LNS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:226f.; namma 1 MUŠEN 5 NINDA SIG.MEŠ 1 NINDAidurin ZŠD.DA UPNI Ì.GIŠ tepu GEŠTIN tepu ANA dU pu-u-ri-ia šipanti “Next he offers one bird, five thin breads, one iduri-bread (made of) one UPNU of flour, a little vegetable oil and a little wine to the Stormgod for p.” KBo 21.34 ii 36-37 (fest., MH/NS), ed. Lebrun, Hethitica 2:120, 129. 
Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 48 (“Man rät auf eine Stelle, an der oder in die libiert wird”); Laroche, RA 54 (1960) 195 (wuri-“vue”); Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 101f. (s.v. w/puri, doubt the connection w. the Hurr. wuri “sight”); Laroche, GLH (1977/1979) 298 (on the v. wur-1 “to see” and its derivatives). 
puriyaimi-adj.; (describing a reed basket); NH.† 
[1 GIPI]SAN SAﬁ pu-ri-ia-i-mi-iš […] “One red reed basket, p.” KUB 42.16 iv? 1 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 
10:233 (“belonging to the side table”), Siegelová, Verw. 416f. 
(“mit Holzgestell(?) versehen”). 
p„riyal n. neut.; lip-cover.† 
sg. nom.-acc. pu-u-ri-ia-al KBo 25.184 ii 3 (NS). 
nu–ššan [akkantaš(?) p]u-u-ri-ia-aš šer pu-u-riia-al KÙ.GI ANA IGI.HI.A-aš [šer šakuwall]i KÙ.GI tianzi “They place a lip-cover of gold over the lips, and [eye-cov]ers(?) of gold [over] the eyes (of the deceased?)” KBo 25.184 ii 2-4 (funeral rit., NS), ed. van den Hout, StMed 9:202, 206 (differently: “a gold mouth(?) (and) … a gold eye ornament”); for gold foil strips to cover eyes and mouth in burials found at Kültepe-Kaniš, see T. Özgüç, Kültepe-Kaniī II, p. 25. 
Van den Hout, StMed 9 (1995) 200f. 
Cf. (˚/¬)puri-A. 
(¬)puriyalli-, puriyalla-n. neut.; 1. halter(?), 
2. (a drinking vessel w. a lip?), 3. (uncert.); from MH/MS.† 

(¬)puriyalli

sg. nom.-acc. pu-ri-ia-al-li KUB 29.52 iv 1, KUB 29.53 i (8), KUB 29.40 ii (24) (all MH/MS), pu-u-ri[-ia-al-l]i KUB 
1.13 i 23, (44) (MH/NS), pu-ri-al-li KBo 11.25 v? 10 (NS), ¬pu-ri-al-li KBo 18.153 obv. 13 (NH), pu-ri-ia-al-la-an KBo 
18.176 i 7 (NH). 
1. halter(?) — a. put on the horse after it eats: mahhan–ma ŠÀ.GA[L–ŠUNU z]innanzi nu–šmaš pu-u-ri[-ia-al-l]i dΩi “But when (the horses) finish their feed, he puts the halter(?) on them” KUB 1.13 i 22-23, ed. Hipp.heth. 54f. 
	b. put on the horse to keep its head elevated and prevent eating: [nu–šm]aš pu-[ri-ia-al-li] / [dΩ]i n– aš ANA GIŠKAK šarΩ huittiyazi “He puts the halter(?) on them and draws them (i.e., the horses’ heads) up to a peg; (so that not until noon can they eat hay)” KUB 1.13 i 44-45, ed. Hipp.heth 56f. 
	c. put on the horse to keep it from lying down at night: (They feed the horses) [nu]–šmaš–kan pu-riia-al-li tianzi n–at [ar]antari “They place a halter(?) on them, and they are kept standing (through the early part of the night. When the middle watch of the night arrives, they take them out and … they eat)” KUB 29.52 iv 1-2 (Hitt. horse training manual, MH/MS), ed. Hipp.heth. 196f., cf. KUB 29.53 i 8 and passim in hipp. texts. 

1	a drinking vessel w. a lip(?): [LÚS]A[G]I.A pu-≠ri±-al-li KÙ.GI KAŠ [LUGAL-i? p]Ωi [LUGAL-uš G]UB-aš dPirwan [ekuz]i “The cupbearer [g]ives a gold p. of beer [to the king], and [the king, while st]anding, [dri]nks Pirwa” KBo 11.25 v? 10-13 (fest. frag., NS). 
2	(made of gold; possibly = mng. 2): ≠12± GŠN KÙ.GI Ωškaz da[nzi? o]x ¬pu-ri-al-li and[a o o o o] “They take twelve shekels of gold from outside […] p. (is) in[cluded?]” KBo 18.153 obv. 13 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:72, 74 (“Snaffle”), Siegelová, Verw. 102f. (“Maulkorb”); (In a list of various gold, silver and ivory items in a container) [… G]ŠR? KÙ.GI 1 puri-ia-al-la-an KÙ.GI KBo 18.176 i 7 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 46f. (“Maulkorb”), translit. THeth 10:61. 

HroznŸ, ArOr 3 (1931) 441 w. n. 19 (“la muselière(?)”); Friedrich, JCS 1 (1947) 289f,; Kammenhuber, Hipp.heth. (1961) 313 (“Maulkorb”); van Brock, RHA XX/71 (1962) 110 (“‘muselière’ ou ‘bridon’”); Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 471 w. n. 1718 (“Beiškorb”); idem, StBoT 41 (1995) 116 w. n. 225. 
Cf. (˚/¬)puri-A n. 

388

p„riyanza (mng. unkn.); MH/NS.† 

[…] kattan URU-aš pu-u-ri-ia-a[(n-za)] / [(h„)-…] KUB 15.32 iv 54-55 (rit., MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 

15.31 iv 24, ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:168f. 
puripu-x[-…] n.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 

(In a context of garments or textiles) 1 pu-ri-pux[…] KUB 42.59 rev.? 7 (inv., NH), ed. Siegelová, Verw. 340f., translit. THeth 10:133; trace could be beginning of š[i. 
purka- n. com.; (a paired body part?); from OH?/ NS.† 

sg. nom. pur-ga-aš KBo 2.35 v? 6 (OH?/NS). 
pl. nom. pur-ki-iš KUB 29.4 i 14 (NH). 

1 AŠ.ME KÙ.GI ŠA 1 GŠN ŠUM–ŠU dPirinkir 1 LI.DUR KÙ.GI 1-NUTIM pur-ki-iš KÙ.GI n–at IŠTU NA›KÁ.DINGIR.RA tiyanteš “One sun-disk of gold, of one shekel (in weight) — its name is Pirinkir — one navel (ornament?) of gold, one set of gold p.’s: they are set with Babylon stones” KUB 
29.4 i 13-14 (rit., NH), ed. Schw.Gotth. 6f.; takku MUNUS-za [hΩši …] / pur-ga-aš […] “If a woman [gives birth], [and the child’s] p. [is …]” KBo 2.35 v? 5-6 (omens from malformed births, OH?/NS), ed. StBoT 9:50. 
[…]x [D]UGpur-qa UN¨T AD.K[ID …] KBo 17.78 ii 21 (rit. frag., NS) should be read: [… UN¨]T BÁHAR (DUG.BUR.SÌLA, w. metathesis of the last two signs) UN¨T AD.K[ID …]. This eliminates the only alleged evidence that p. is a vessel. 
The first ex. shows the p.’s immediately following a gold navel (ornament?) and suggests that these gold objects are representations of or at least named for another body part. The omen passage confirms this, since the second half of the protases of such omens always describes some part of the newborn’s anatomy which is either missing (NU.GÁL) or malformed. 
Kronasser, Schw.Gotth. (1963) 42 (alternative reading “BURkiš??”); Laroche, NH (1966) 340 (compares Capp. PN Purka, Purkia). 

purni (Hurrian offering term).† 

pur-ni IBoT 3.148 ii (24), 28, 3l, pur-ni-ia ibid. ii 23, 26, iv 10, 14. 

purpura- a 
EGIR-ŠU–[m]a … 1 MUŠEN h„zi h„danni hamri pur[-ni] t„ni … DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ BAL-ti “Afterwards … he offers one bird (each) to the male deities for h„zi h„danni hamri pur[ni] (and) t„ni” IBoT 3.148 ii 22-25 (rit. of marking the paths), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:218f.; cf. also ibid. ii 28, 31; pur-ni-[i]a in ibid. ii 23, 26, iv 10, 14. 
purpura-, purpuri-n. com.; ball, lump; (w. NINDA det.) ball-shaped breads or cakes; from OH/MS?. 
sg. nom. pur-pu-u-ra-aš KBo 22.229 right col. 6, NINDApur-pu-ra-aš KUB 7.54 i 7. 
sg. acc. pu-u-úr-pu-ra-an KBo 4.2 i 48, 56 (NH), pu-u-ur-pu-ra-an ibid. 41, 55, pur-pu-ra-an KUB 58.34 iv 6, 9, 16, NINDApur-pu-ra-an(-na) KBo 13.164 i 18. 
pl. nom. pu-u-ur-pu-u-ri-i-e-eš KUB 27.67 ii 11, iii 16 (MH/NS), pu-u-úr-pu-ri-e-eš KBo 4.2 i 63 (NH), pur-pu-re-eš KUB 60.73 rev. 14, NINDApu-ur-pu-u-re-e[(š)] KBo 30.6 left col. 3, NINDApur-pu-ru-uš KBo 10.24 iv 24, v (3). 
pl. acc. pur-pu-ru-uš KBo 19.128 i 14, KUB 33.70 ii 13, Bo 5001 left col. 3 (Alp, Tempel 302f.), KBo 17.46 rev. (26), (27), pu-u-ur-pu-u-re-e-eš KUB 27.67 ii 9 (MH/NS), [pu(-u-)ú]r-pu-ru-uš KUB 33.71 iv 5 (OH/NS), Bo 68/215 v 17, [p]ur-pu-re-e-eš IBoT 4.343:6, NINDApu-úr-pu-ru-uš KBo 4.2 i 19, NINDApuru-ur-pu-ru-uš KUB 9.17 obv. 23, NINDApur-pu-ru-uš KUB 44.13 iv! 1, 4, KBo 23.91 iv 6, 11, 15, KBo 16.82 rev. 2, 5, 9, Bo 181 iv 3 (Otten, ZA 53:176), VAT 7448 iii 4 (StBoT 13:25, StBoT 15:31), NINDApu-u-ur-pu-re-eš KUB 29.4 iii 6, KUB 32.68 obv. (3), NINDApur-pu-u-ru-uš Bo 5005 rev. 6 (StBoT 28:31), NINDApu-ur-pu-u[-ru-u(š)] KBo 30.6:5, [NINDA]pu-ur-pu-ru-uš KUB 55.43 iii 7, 11 (NS). 
pl. gen. pu-u-úr-pu-u-ri-ia-aš KBo 4.2 ii 30 (NH) (or pl. acc.?, cf. HW™ 1:384). 
unclear [pu]-u-ur-pu-u-ri-ia-aš KUB 27.67 iii 14, NINDApur-pu-ri-ia-aš KUB 54.91 obv.? 6 (pl. acc.?), NINDApu-u-ur-pu-u-ru-uš KUB 25.36 vi 26. 
frag. pu-u-ur-p[u-…] KUB 53.15 ii! 22. 
a. ball(s) made of dough: nu išnaš pu-u-úr-pura-an iyanzi n–an ANA LUGAL MUNUS.LUGAL … anda tamaškizzi “They make a ball of dough, and she presses it against the king and queen” KBo 
4.2 i 56-57 (Huwarlu’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Sprache 8:91, 96; pu-u-úr-pu-re-e-eš išnaš “lumps of dough” ibid. i 63, ed. Kronasser, Sprache 8:92, 97; cf. ibid. ii 29-31, ed. e, below; less clear: nu išnΩš pu-u-ur-pu-u-ri-e-eš h„rtallenzi 1 GIŠBAN Ëzzaš nu–ššan SŠGištaggaš huittiyanza 3 GI.HI.A Ëzzaš perann–a–ššan išnaš pu-u-ur-pu-u-ri-i-e-eš GIŠhattalu GIŠ?tarzuwΩn peran–ma–ššan KUŠšΩlaš haminkanza nu–ššan kÏ 
389

h„man GIpaddanÏ dΩi “They mix balls of dough. A bow made of ezza-(cf. HW™ 2:141 s.v. ezza-(2)), (its) woolen bowstring being drawn (tight), three arrows (again) made of ezza (also lie there). In front of them (they put) balls of dough, a door-bolt (of dough) (and) a GIŠtarzuwΩn (with) a leather strap fastened in front (as a hinge). All these (things) she places in a basket” KUB 27.67 ii 9-14 (rit., MH/NS), tr. ANET 348, cf. ibid. i 8-13 and similarly ibid. iii 14-18, cf. AlHeth 75f. | Puhvel, HED 1:382, apparently taking hurtal~ lenzi as Luw. pl. acc., translates line 9 “lumps [and] blobs of dough” | Weitenberg, U-Stämme 50 derives tarzuwΩn from (GIŠ)tarzu-(“Teil des Schlosses?”) and translates it “mit einem tarzu-versehen”; but tarzu + -want-should appear as tarzuman 
	(w. m [HE 1 §29a] and a short a), not tarzuwΩn. 
	b. made of clay, dirt: nu wapp„waš IM dΩi n–an pu-u-úr-pu-ra-an iyanzi “She takes clay from the riverbank, and they make it into a ball/lump” KBo 

4.2 i 48-49 (Huwarlu’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Sprache 8:91, 
96. 
	c. made of iron and silver: LÚ.MEŠ AN.BAR 20 [pur-]pu-ru-uš AN.BAR šuhhanz[i] LÚ.MEŠ KÙ.BABBAR 20 [pur-]pu-ru-uš KÙ.BABBAR šuhhan[zi] “The iron-workers(?) scatter 20 [b]alls of iron, the silver-workers(?) scatter 20 [b]alls of silver” KBo 17.46:26-27 + KBo 34.2:50-51 (KI.LAM fest., OH/MS?), translit. StBoT 28:91 (= lines 50-51, without join), cf. StBoT 27:77. 
	d. made of soapweed: “She takes the alkaline pieces (haš-) of soapweed and reduces them to powder. She kneads it (the powder)” n–an pu-u-urpu-ra-an 1-EN DÙ-anzi “and she make it into one ball” (and she presses it on the bodies of king and queen) KBo 4.2 i 41 (Huwarlu’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Sprache 8:91, 96, Bossert, FuF 29:213. 
	e. material unkn. or not mentioned: “The king goes into the ‘Great House.’ The princes stand behind the stage(?) (taršanzipa-)” pur-pu-ru-uš GA.KIN.AG GIŠINBIHI.A NINDA–ya ŠAPAL LUGAL išhuwai “(And) (s)he pours out balls (of?) cheese, fruits and bread under (the feet of) the king” KBo 19.128 i 14-16 (ANDAHŠUM fest, OH/NS), ed. StBoT 13:2f.; nu–kan NUMUN.HI.A kue šΩnh„wanta NINDA.GUR›.RA.HI.A NUMUN. HI.A pu-u-úr-pu-u-ri-ia-aš ašaran n–at arha šuni~ 

DUGpurpuriš 

y[anzi] GIpaddani–ma arha peššiyanzi “All the roasted seeds, the (small?) thick breads, the (unroasted) seeds — a string of balls — [they] scatter(?) and they throw (them) into a reed basket” KBo 4.2 ii 29-31 (Huwarlu’s rit., NH), ed. Kronasser, Sprache 8:93, 97, cf. ibid. i 62-65 above, a | it is possible that ašaran 
(w. purpuriyaš as gen. of material) denotes here a band or string on which purpura’s are strung like beads; [nu–za purpu]-ra-aš (var. pur-pu-ru-uš) šuhhΩi kΩša dUTU-uš [(ANA LUGAL MUNUS.LUG)]AL ANA DUMU. MEŠ LUGAL anda neyan<za> dUTU-i (var. dUTU-ui) [(nu–tta kΩ)]ša GÌR.MEŠ–KA kattan pur-pu-ru-uš (var. pu-ú]r-pu-ru-uš GAM-an) [šuhha(hh)]un “He scatters/strews balls (and speaks as follows): ‘The Sungod is just now turned toward the king, queen (and) royal princes. O Sun-god I have just scattered/strewn (these) balls under your feet for you’” KUB 33.70 ii 11-14 (missing god rit., OH/MS?), w. dupls. KUB 46.52:10-12 (NS), KUB 33.71 iv 3-6 (NS), translit. Myth. 102. 
Friedrich, HW (1952) 173f.; Hoffner, AlHeth (1973) 178f. 
Cf. purpuriya-, DUGpurpuriš. 
purpuriya-v.; (mng. unkn.; perhaps “to ball up, gather, assemble”); NH.† 
part. neut. nom. pur-pu-ri-ia-an KUB 23.51 iv? 3 (NH). 
Subject of the pass. part. is antuhšatar “people, population”: [… pan?]kuš UN.MEŠ-tar pur-pu-riia-an Ëšta […] DˆNU katterran Ëšta “[The en]tire(?) […] (and) the population was assembled(?); the […] suit was unsuccessful” KUB 23.51 iv? 3-4 (hist. frag., NH). 
The mng. proposed above can only be valid if the word is etymologically related to (NINDA)pur~ pura-; cf. Turkish top “ball” / topla(n)mak “assemble” and German zusammenballen. 
Cf. purpura-, DUGpurpuriš. 
[GIŠpurpuriya] 499/w obv. 19, Berman, Diss. 103, should be read ≠du±-pur-pu-ri-ia, and see Haas/ Wilhelm, AOATS 3:99. 
DUGpurpuriš n. neut. (?); (a ball-shaped vessel used in ritual for refined oil and plant-oil); NH.† 
pl. nom. DUGpur-pu-ri-iš KBo 5.1 ii 41, 42, 43 (NH). 

390

14 DUGpur-pu-ri-iš ŠÀ.BA 7 DUGpur-pu-ri-iš IŠTU Ì.DÙG.GA š„wan 7 DUGpur-pu-ri-iš-ma IŠTU Ì.GIŠ š„wan “Fourteen p. vessels, among them seven p. vessels are filled with refined oil, seven p. vessels are filled with vegetable oil” KBo 5.1 ii 41-43 (Papanikri’s rit., NH), ed. Pap. 8*f. Because of the com. gender of related (NINDA)purpura-and also the ending -iš/-eš we expect com. gender, but part. sg. neut. šuwan does not support this, cf. Kronasser, Sprache 8:103f. 

Sommer/Ehelolf, Pap. (1924) 57. 
Cf. purpura-, purpuriya-. 
purštan rot(?), rotted(?); MS?.† 

sg. nom.-acc. pur-aš-ta-an KUB 30.32 i 12, KBo 18.190:7. 
ÉheštΩ šarazzi kattËr kuwapi w[(etešnaš)] GIŠru<i?> naššu l„ri kuitki našma pur-aš-ta-an [(kuitk)i] n–at LÚHAZANNU EGIR-pa takliezzi “Where (there is) either some deficiency(?) or some rot(?) (or: something rotted?) <in?> the construction timber in the upper (or) lower heštabuilding, the HAZANNU-official will reinforce(?) it” KUB 30.32 i 11-13 (inv., MS?), w. dupl. KBo 18.190:7-8 (NS), ed. luri-mng. 4 (partially), THeth 12:19f., tr. Haas/Wäfler, UF 9:104, Daddi Pecchioli, OA 14:128 | we understand the first three words in the cited passage to be loc., kattËr being a so-called “endingless” loc. (Neu, Lok. 37, contra Kammenhuber, Heth.u.Idg. 126). Cf. also Otten, BagM 3:91-95 (on the HAZANNU and his duties). 
According to its form, p. can be an a-stem or n-stem n., a neut. part. of stem purštant-, or a neut. sg. a-stem adj. If we knew the precise force of EGIR-pa takliezzi here, it would help to ascertain the mng. of p. The tr. “reinforce(?)” used above is a guess. We have assumed that the situation is a threat to public safety, and therefore a matter of concern to such a high-ranking person as the HAZANNU, because the wetešnaš GIŠ is not just in storage awaiting use, but is already a part of the heštΩ building. Its dangerously poor condition could result in a collapse of part of the structure. Therefore EGIR-pa takliezzi may have involved reinforcing the weak timbers w. braces or buttresses. 

purulli- A 
purti[(-)…] (mng. unkn.; NS.† 
§ nu–ššan pu-ur-ti[(-)…] KUB 58.93 rt. col. 5. There is too little context to parse or determine a meaning. 
purulli-A, wurulli-, purulliya-n. com.; (mng. unkn.; designation of an important festival); from OH/NS. 
sg. nom. pu-ru-liš KUB 6.26 rev. 7.
acc. pu-ru-ul-li-ia-an KUB 48.119 obv.? 5 (NS).
gen. pu-u-ru-li-ia-aš KBo 2.5 iii 14, 20 (Murš. II), KUB 25.31 obv.! 4 (NS), KUB 30.42 i 5 (NS), KBo 23.103 iv 17, KUB 8.69 iii 5, KUB 30.68 rev. (2), pu-ru-ul-li-ia-aš KBo 3.7 i 3, 7 (OH/NS), KUB 42.100 iv (16), (17) (Tudh. IV), KUB 48.119 rev.? 7, (19) (NS), Bo 3127 vi 3 (Haas, KN 253), pu-ru-li-ia-aš KBo 2.5 iii 17 (Murš. II), KBo 24.131 rev. 21 (NS), KBo 14.81:2, KUB 49.95 i 1, Bo 3251 iii (4) (Haas, KN 254), KBo 30.82 vi (2), wuu-ru-ul-li-ia-aš KUB 22.25 rev. (17), 27 (NH), wuu-ru-li-ia-aš KUB 22.25 obv. 21, 33, rev. (8) (NH), IBoT 2.17 i 3.
abs. pu-ru-ul-li KUB 49.1 i 5, 22 (NS), pu-ru-li KUB 
22.31 obv. 2, (5), 7, 12, 15 (NH), wuu-ru-ul-li Bo 4962 obv. 2, 4 (Haas, KN 252). 
(The cult legend of the p.-festival. When they speak thus:) utni–wa mΩu šešdu nu–wa utnË pahšanuwan Ëšdu nu mΩn mΩi šešzi nu EZEN› puru-ul-li-ia-aš iyanzi “‘Let the land thrive (and) prosper, and let the land be protected/cared for (by the gods),’ and when it thrives (and) prospers, they celebrate the festival of p.” KBo 3.7 i 5-8 (Illuyanka myth, OH/NS), ed. Beckman, JANES 14:12, 18, translit. Myth 6, tr. ANET 125, Hittite Myths 11, LMI 49f.; mahhan–ma hamešhanza kišat nu EZEN› pu-u-ru-li-ia-aš kuit GAL-in [EZEN›-an] ANA dU URUHatti U ANA dU URUZippa[landa] iyanun INA Éhešti–ma ANA dLelwa[ni] EZEN› pu-ru-li-ia-aš GAL-in EZEN›an UL iyanun nu–kan URUHattuši šarΩ uwanun nu ANA dLelwani INA ÉheštÏ EZEN› pu-u-ru-li-ia-aš GAL-in EZEN›-an iyanun “But when it became spring — because I had celebrated the festival of p., the great [festival], for the Stormgod of Hatti and for the Stormgod of Zippa[landa], but I had not celebrated the festival of p., the great festival, in the hešta-house for Lelwani — I came back up to Hattuša, and in the hešta-house I celebrated the festival of p., the great festival, for Lelwani” KBo 2.5 iii 13-20 (ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 188-91 (= iii 38-45); DUB.1.KAM ANA EZEN› pu-u-ru-li-ia-aš–za mahhan LÚ.MEŠha~ 
391

pËš unuwašhuš danzi halkueššarr–a mahhan han~ da[nz]i MUNUS.MEŠzint„hËšš–a mahhan SÌR GAL SÌR-RU “Tablet one — how the hapËš-men take for themselves ornaments for the festival of p., how they prepar[e] the materials for the festival, and how the zintuhi-women sing the ‘great song’” KUB 
8.69 iii 5-9 (cat., NH), ed. CTH p. 186; parΩ–ma–za–kan URUNeriqqaz arha ariyami mΩn kururiHI.A h„dak RA-mi mΩn–za EZEN› wuu-ru-li-ia-aš h„dak DÙmi “Further(more), (departing?) from Nerik, I will inquire by oracle whether I should immediately attack the enemies, or whether I should immediately celebrate the festival of p.” KUB 22.25 obv. 19-21 (oracle question, NH), ed. Kaškäer 176f.; cf. also obv. 32-33, 45
47, rev. 7-9, 16-17, 26-27, and 34-35. 
The festival of p. was a “great” festival (KBo 2.5 iii 13-20, KUB 30.68 rev. 2), of some length, as demonstrated by a catalogue entry which mentions thirty-two tablets of this rite (KUB 30.42 i 5-6). It was carried out in the spring (KBo 2.5 iii 13), in the heštihouse (ibid. iii 13-20, IBoT 2.17:3-4), under the leadership of the monarch (KBo 2.5 iii 13-20, KUB 22.25 obv. 19-21, KUB 49.95 i 1). The Myth of Illuyanka (CTH 321) served as a text for the festival of p. (KBo 3.7 i 3). Numerous sites are attested for the performance of this ceremony: Arinna (KUB 18.2 ii 2), Hakmiš (KUB 48.119 obv. 5), Hattuša (KBo 2.5 iii 13), Nerik (KUB 22.31 obv. 5, etc., KUB 30.42 i 5), Utr„na (KUB 
42.100 iv 16), and Ziplanta (KBo 23.103 iv 15), and several gods are named as its recipients: Lelwani (KBo 
2.5 iii 13), the Stormgods of Hatti, of Zippalanda (both ibid.), and of Nerik (KUB 48.119 obv.? 6), as well as Telipinu (KUB 42.100 iv 18). The festival of p. was performed for the sake of the life of the king (KUB 
22.31 obv. 7, 12) and for that of the lands (obv. 15). We learn little from the surviving sources concerning the character of the rites encompassed by this complex, beyond a procedure involving the casting of lots (pul) — see KBo 3.7 iv 8-17. That the words pul and purulli sound similar may not have escaped the notice of the Hittites themselves, leading at least to a folk etymology of the latter word. But because there was no lot-throwing in the other version of the story, caution is in order. 
It is unlikely that the festival of p. was identical to that of the ANDAHŠUMSAR, as suggested by 

purulli- B 

Gurney, Schweich 38f., since a snake oracle KUB 49.1 lists separate serpents representing each ceremony: MUŠ pu-ru-ul-li-kán … / MUŠ ANDAHŠUM (i 56). No proof exists for the common assumption (e.g., Goetze, Kl™ 139) that the festival of p. constituted a New Year’s Festival, beyond its spring date and the interpretation of the character of the ritual activities accompanying the Myth of Illuyanka (CTH 321). In recent studies by Pecchioli Daddi (Hethitica 8:361380) and Haas (ZA 78:284-298), p. is identified w. certain festival texts of dTetešhabi. 
Kronasser, EHS 1:213 (§118.4), thought that purul~ li-designated some sort of cultic implement, but since the noun appears only in contexts dealing w. the festival named after it, we remain uncertain of the basic meaning. Some connection to Hattic wur, “earth” (see Sommer, HuH 92f.) is possible, esp. in view of the rare spellings of the initial phoneme utilizing the wuu sign. Although Hurrian also has a noun purni-, purulli-, the Hattic background of the purulli festival — see Kammenhuber, HbOr 434 — as well as the Old Hitt. origin of its text, the Myth of Illuyanka (CTH 321), has led us to propose separate lemmas. 
Originally an i-stem, this word developed a secondary iya-stem, as evidenced by the acc. purul~ liyan. 
Goetze, AM (1933) 264f.; idem, Kl™ (1957) 139, 165; Kammenhuber, MSS 14 (1959) 67f.; Haas, KN (1970) 43-50; Gurney, Schweich (1977) 38f.; Kellerman, Slavica Hierosolymitana 5/6 (1981) 35-46; Pecchioli Daddi, Hethitica 8 (1987) 361-80; Haas, ZA 78 (1988) 284-98; Pecchioli Daddi/ Polvani, LMI (1990) 39-55, 48 n. 1. 
Cf. purulli- B, purulliyašši-. 
purulli-B Hurr. n.; “house, temple”; gen. used as divine epithet in Hitt. religious contexts; from MH/ NS.† 
Hurr. gen. (in Hitt. context:) pu-ru-ul-le-e-wee KBo 24.59 iv 13 (MS?), pu-ru-ul-le-pé KBo 21.34 i 18 (MH/NS), (in Hurr. context:) pu-ru-le-pé KBo 11.20 rt. col. 3. 
EGIR-ŠU–ma dHebat pu-ru-ul-le-pé ekuzi “After this he drinks Hebat ‘of the house’” KBo 21.34 i 18 (fest., MH/NS); [1 NINDA.SI]G ANA dHebat pu-ruul-le-e-wee KBo 24.59 iv 13 (fest. w. Hurrian gods). 

392

This word, as well as its var. form purni, is also frequently attested in Hurrian-language contexts from Bo©azköy, see Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:119, GLH 206f. 
Parrot/Nougayrol, RA 42 (1948) 12; Laroche, RA 47 (1953) 192f., Kammenhuber, Die Arier im Vorderen Orient (1968) 138f.; Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3 (1974) 119; Laroche, GLH (1976) 206f. 

Cf. purulli- A. 

purulliyašši-Luw. adj.; pertaining to the purul~ li-; NH.† 
Luw. nom. sg. neut. SISKUR pu-ru-ul!-li!-ia-aš-≠ši-ia±-anza IBoT 2.129 obv. 3, ≠SISKUR± pu-ru-ul-[li-ia-aš-ši-ia-]an-za KUB 16.35:3. 
Modifying SISKUR: (Since it has been determined by oracle that the mighty Stormgod is angry in his temple, we questioned the temple personnel, and they said:) ANA DINGIR-LIM–wa SISKUR pu-ru-ul!-li!-ia-aš-ši-ia-an-za ŠA MU.7.KAM kar~ šan “The purulli ritual/offering for the deity of year seven has been omitted” IBoT 2.129 obv. 2-4 (oracle question, NH); since the predicate is a neut. sg. part. (karšan), it is clear that pu-ru-ul!-li!-ia-aš-ši-ia-an-za is neut., either sg. or pl. One would expect a vocalization *pu-ru-ul-li-ia-aš-ši-inza/i for the com. pl. Thus, our form shows the neut. nom.-sg. ending -an + the case in -ša. 
Laroche, DLL 82 (“sg. nom. — Dérivé en -ašši-ant-, louv. ou hitt., de hatti purulli-”). 

Cf. purulli- A. 
purullišši (Hurrian offering term); MH/MS.† 

EGIR-ŠU–ma pu-ru-ul-li-iš-ši-ia (dupl. pu-r[u…]) šipantanzi KUB 15.34 iv 55 (evocation of the cedar-gods rit., MH/MS?), w. dupl. KUB 15.33b iv 15 (NS), ed. Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:208f. 

Haas/Wilhelm, AOATS 3:122. 

purungi-or purunga-n.; (an ornament made of silver or gold); from OH/MS.† 
(Listed among unuwašheš “ornaments, jewelry”) […] 14 pu-ru-un-ge-eš KÙ.BABBAR KBo 
16.68 iv! 4 (KI.LAM fest., OH/MS), translit. StBoT 28:113; cf. [… 10 p]u-ru-un-ge-eš KÙ.BABBAR ibid. iv! 10; 3 pu-ru-un-ge-eš KÙ.G[I …] KBo 30.20 iii 17 (KI.LAM 

purušiyala
fest., OH/MS), translit. StBoT 28:116; 12 pu-ru-un-ge-eš KÙ.GI 3 ŠA NA›Z[A].GÌN “Twelve p. of gold, three of lapis lazuli” ibid. iii 8; […]≠E±.ŠB KÙ.BABBAR 10 pu-r[u-un-…] KBo 34.179 obv.? 4. 
The stem could be purunga-or purungi-, the form either sg. or pl. nom. 
Singer, StBoT 27 (1983) 165; idem, StBoT 28 (1984) 164 (“purunga-c. a (metal) ornament”). 
purundukarrit(a) (a part of or mark on the exta); NH.† 
The first (examination of) exta: ni. ši. ke.HI.A-uš pu-ru-un-du-kar-ri-ta GIŠTUKUL ŠA dU ZAG-aš GÙB-za RA-IŒ 12 ŠÀTIR. SIGﬁ “The nipašuri-, šin~ tahi-, keldi-s, p.; a righthand Weapon of the Storm-god ‘struck’ to the left; the 12 turns of the intestines: favorable” KBo 2.6 i 17-18 (oracle). Perhaps pu~ rundukarrit–a “and a p.” Probably a Hurrian word: cf. p„rušdugariša GLH 207 and wuurugariš GLH 298. 
URUPurušhandumna-adj.; Purušhandan, belonging to the city of Purušhanda; OH/NS.† 
sg. acc. URUPu-ru-uš-ha-an-du-um-na-an KBo 3.28 ii 5, (6). 
e–šta DUMU URUPu-ru-uš-ha-an-du-um-na-an dΩer ke[šri–mi(?)…] / kËda–mmu apΩš iezzi šu– mu DINGIR.DIDLI DUMU URUPu-r[u-uš-ha-andu-um-na-an] / kišri–mi daÏr “They placed the Purušhandan prince(?) (lit. son) [into my] h[and(s) …]. That one dealt (lit. deals) with me in this way(?) (kËda). The gods placed the Pur[ušhandan] prince(?) into my hand(s)” KBo 3.28 ii 5-7 (hist., OH/ NS), cf. Laroche, FsOtten, 186f. (“le fils, le Purushandien”) | the trace in line 5 does not permit a reading ki-i[š-(ša-)-ri-mi] “in my hand”; on ibid. ii 5 cf. also Houwink ten Cate, RHA XXIV/79:127 (“and he dealt with me in such a way”) | the form eš-ta is not wr. correctly for the verb Ëšta nor is it likely that a verb is intended. Rather this is the introductory word of the clause, containing the sentence particle -(a)šta, cf. HW™ 1:433b (-ašta), 41a (a-1). 
Laroche, BSL 55 (1960) 170; Neu, StBoT 18 (1974) 36. 
purušiyala-, p„rišiyala-n.; (item made of wool or cord, perhaps a wreath or headband).† 
sg. acc. pu-ru-ši-ia-la-an KBo 33.186:16, KBo 23.28 i (32) 
+ KUB 32.65 i (10), pu-u-r[u-ši-ia-la-an] KBo 33.193 right 2. 
393

sg. d.-l. [p]u-ru-ši-ia-li KUB 32.65 i 15. 
pl. acc.(?) pu-u-ri-ši-ia-la KBo 24.10 i? 11 (or sg. acc. pu-u-ri-ši-ia-la<-an>). 
broken pu-u-ru-ši-≠ia±-[…] KUB 55.63 ii? 9, perhaps here SŠGpu[-…] KUB 58.106 iii 8. 
	a. around a pitcher (KUKUBU): “They place one mulati-bread on the stone table of Liluri” šerr– a–ššan SŠGkišrin SŠG SAﬁ SŠG ZA.GÌN pu-ru-ši-iala-an iyanzi … [(n)]–at–za ŠA dLiluri [GAL–SU halz]iššanzi “And on top of it, they make a skein(?), (one of) red wool and (one of) blue wool, into a p.” (They place one pitcher of wine on top and an eagle’s feather/wing [is stuck] in.) They call it (-at, neut., not referring to purušiyala-, but the [neut.] pitcher) ‘Liluri’s [cup]’” KBo 33.186:1516, w. dupl. VBoT 72 iv 4-5, followed by VBoT 72 iv 8-9 (hišuwaš fest.), w. dupl. KBo 33.193 rt. col. 1-4, translit. ChS I/4:124 (without using dupls. and w. mistaken translit. GIŠkišrin); cf. par. “They put a wicker table before the gods of his fathers in the grandfather’s house. They put mulati-bread (made of/and) \ UPNU of porridge” [namma] 1 SŠGkišrin BABBAR [1 tar~ palan SŠG S]Aﬁ 1 tarpalan SŠG ZA.GÌN [pu-r]uš[i-ia-la-a]n iyanzi [n]–an–šan ≠ANA?± NINDAmu~ lati [ANA G]IŠBANŠUR ŠA [DING]IR(sic) šer tianzi § [na]mma–kan ANA DUGKUK¨B GEŠTIN [Š]A TI°MUŠEN partauwar paškan [n]–at–kan [ANA p]u-ru-ši-ia-li anda dΩi [n]–an–z–a[n Š]A dLiluri GAL–SU [ha]lziš[š]anzi “[Then] they make one skein(?) of white wool, [one tarpala-of r]ed [wool], (and) one tarpala-of blue wool into a p. They place it (-an, i.e., the purušiyala-) on the goddess’ (or: if we read d<IŠTAR>, “IŠTAR’s”) table on top the bread. § Then an eagle’s wing/feather is stuck into a pitcher of wine. They place it (-at, i.e., the pitcher) in the p. They call it (i.e., the pitcher) ‘Liluri’s cup’” KBo 23.28 i 25-39 + KUB 32.65 i 3-17 (hišuwaš fest., MH?/NS), ed. Haas, AoF 17:183f., trans-lit. ChS 1/4, p. 60f. (as Bo 5351) | in the last sentence “it” refers to the pitcher despite the -an; the par. in KUB 33.186:12-16 shows that -at is meant). 
	b. upon a nahhiti bread: […] NINDAnahhitin / […] ANA GIŠBANŠUR AD.KID–šan / […]GIŠHUR~ PULU GIŠHAŒŒINU–ya–ššan / [… G]ÙB-laz ANA GIŠBANŠUR.GIŠ–šan / [… n]u 1 SŠGkišrin anda wišuriyazi / [purušiyalan] ienzi n–an–šan ANA NINDAnahhiti šer dΩi § [… 1 tarpala]n SŠG.SAﬁ 1 

purušiyala

tarpalan SŠG.ZA.GÌN–ya dΩi / [… i]miezi n–ašta 1 NINDAhalwanin šunnai / [… GIŠhaš]šikkit imiyan ištΩpi / [… NINDAna]hhiti ŠA SŠG pu-u-ri-ši-ia-la šer dΩi / […-]aš(?) NINDA.GUR›.RA halziššanzi “[…] a nahhiti-bread […] on a wicker table […] a HURPULU-weapon; an ax on […] on the left. […] on a wooden table. And (s)he squeezes(?)/ twists(?) one skein(?) of wool. They make [a pu~ rušiyala-(?)]. And (s)he places it on the nahhitibread. § (S)he takes […, one tarpala] of red wool, one tarpala of blue wool. And (s)he mixes […], and fills one halwani-bread (with it). (Then) (s)he stops it up with the […] that is mixed with GIŠhaššigga. And (s)he places p.-s(?) of wool on a nahhiti bread. And they call [it ‘…]’s thick bread’” KBo 24.10 i? 2-12 (rit. frag.), for the restoration […GIŠhaš]šikkit, see GIŠhaššikki[t] / [i]mmianzi KUB 12.5 i 2021; cf. ŠA SŠG pu-u-ru-ši-≠ia±-[…] KUB 55.63 ii? 9. In both examples the copy shows no word space between SŠG and p. 
c. on the head of a statue of a goddess: (Describing a statuette of IŠTAR:) “In her hand she holds an empty vessel” INA SAG.DU–ŠU–ma šummanzΩš pu-ru-ši-ia-[la-aš ki-i]t?-ta-at “On her head was placed a string (as?) a p. (or: a p. of string)” KBo 10.45 ii 29 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/ LNS), ed. Haas, AoF 17:185 (w. rest.), Otten, ZA 54:122f. (without rest.). In Otten’s KBo copy the space is hardly sufficient to restore [-la-aš ki-i]t?-. If the copy is correct, perhaps restore: pu-ru-ši-ia[-la-a]t-ta-at, and posit a denominative v. (“the string served as a purušiyala”). 
The p. is made of wool or cord (šummanza) and can be placed upon breads or in a pitcher. It also is placed on the head of the statue of IŠTAR. Haas translates it “wreath” (German Kranz). In the passages discussed under sections a and b the presence of the p. seems to be the influencing factor for calling the pitcher “Liluri’s cup” and the nahhiti-bread “[…-’s] thick breads.” Since the p. is also worn on the head of the statue of IŠTAR, it is possible that Liluri and the deity mentioned in the break are IŠTAR-like deities and that the p. was a symbol of this kind of goddess. 
Haas, AoF 17 (1990) 182-185 (“‘Gebinde, Kranz’ etwa in der Art eines Zopfes”); Neumann, KZ 103 (1990) 218f. (the suggested etymologies — which presuppose initial *breu or *bhreu 

394

— would require a Hitt. “Sprossvokal,” but the spelling pu-ur[u-, of which Neumann appears to be unaware, indicates the first vowel to be “sprachwirklich”; also problematic for Neumann’s proposed etymologies is the writing pu-u-ri-ši-iala, unkn. to him and Haas, which shows an i vocalization in the second syll.). 
purut-n. neut.; earth, soil, mud; mud plaster; mudbrick; totality of mudbrick buildings; from OH.† 
sg. acc. pu-ru-ut KBo 10.45 i (14), 29 (MH/NS), KUB 
30.36 ii 17 (MH/NS), KUB 31.86 ii 16 (MH/NS), KUB 41.8 i 13 (MH/NS), ABoT 53:3 (NS), KBo 3.3 i 16, 24 (Murš. II), KUB 2.2 i 42 (NH), KUB 12.50:(12), KUB 17.27 ii 4, 8, 11, KUB 43.59 i 3 (NH), KUB 9.39 i 2 (NH), KUB 7.13 obv. 9, KBo 6.11 i (18), (20), KBo 10.16 i 9, iv 4, KUB 58.74 obv. (11), pu-u-ru-ut KBo 14.100:12 (MH/MS or NS), KUB 7.41 i 23 (MH/NS), KUB 24.9 ii 19 (MH/NS), KUB 30.34 iii 2 (MH/ NS), KUB 41.8 ii 34, 35 (MH/NS), KBo 4.1 i 34 (NH), KUB 
12.58 i 12 (NH), KUB 53.3 v 4, KUB 58.74 obv. 13 (NS), 

IBoT 2.128 obv. 4, pu-u-<ru->ut KBo 6.16:3. 
dat. pu-ru-ut-ti-ia-aš-ša-an KUB 31.86 ii 24 (MH/NS). 

d.-l. pu-ru-ut KUB 12.58 i 10 (NH), Bo 2610 (Forrer, For
sch. 1:203; THeth 12:11 n. 18). abl. pu-ru-ut-ta-az Bronze Tablet i 87 (Tudh. IV), pu-ru-ud-da-za KUB 46.39 iii 9. inst. pu-ru-ut-ti-it KBo 10.45 iii 8 (MH/LNS), KUB 41.8 ii 42 (MH/NS). frag. pu-ru-ut KBo 16.35:9, KUB 35.116:7, KUB 39.103 obv. 3 (MH/NS), KBo 35.96:5. 
a. dry earth, soil in its natural form, adequate to produce mud: [… p]u-ru-ut paddΩnzi “They dig up the earth” KBo 10.16 i 9 (restoration of a cult?), cf. ABoT 
53:3 (instr., NS); namma ŠA GIŠGEŠTIN pu-ru-ut dΩi “Then she takes soil of vines (i.e., naturally calciferous soil in which vines grow well)” KUB 17.27 ii 11 (rit. against sorcery), tr. ANET 347, cf. Tunn. 68; [n]u–za šalwinaš pu-ru-ut lalawišnaš pu-ru-ut wappuwaš IM-an NUMUN.HI.A h„manda MUNU° BAPPIR “<They take> soil/mud of šalwina-, soil of the anthill, clay of the riverbank, all (kind of) seeds, malt, ‘beer-bread’ (and they grind them all together; they mix it in mud and make figurines out of it)” KUB 

43.59 + KUB 9.39 i 2-4 (Šehuzzi’s rit., NH). 

b. mud, silt, sludge in its natural form as brought up by a spring: namma wappuwaš IM-an dΩi namma–aš šakuniya paizzi 1 NINDA.SIG paršiya n–at šakuniyaš pu-ru-ut dΩi NIN[DA.Ì. E.D]É.A memal šuhhai GEŠTIN šipanti nu memai (§) zik–kan mahhan šaku<ni>š GEﬂ-az KI-az pu-u

purut- c 1' 
ru-ut EGIR šarΩ šakuneškiši “Then she takes clay of the riverbank. Then she goes to a spring, she breaks one thin loaf and places it upon the mud of the spring. She scatters ta[llow ca]ke (and) groats. She libates wine and says: ‘As you, O spring, keep gushing up silt/sludge from the dark earth’” KUB 
12.58 i 9-13 (Tunnawi’s rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 6f. (= ll. 33-37); cf. KUB 17.27 ii 4-8 (rit. for dMAH), tr. ANET 347. 
c. finished mud ready to use for walls, roofs, etc. — 1' in general: ≠takku± h„ššelliyaz (var. o‹ huššuliaz) pu[(-ru-)]ut (var. g pu-u<-ru>-ut) kuiški dΩiyazi (var. a⁄ tayezzi) [mašiyan d]Ωiyazzi (var. g dΩyËz[zi]) anda–še–ya apËnišš„wan pΩi “[If] someone steals mud from a mud pit, he shall give to him (i.e., the owner) in addition [as much] as he steals” KBo 6.11 i 18-19 (Laws §110, OH/NS), w. dupls. KBo 6.16:3-5 (g), KBo 6.10 i 21-22 (a⁄), KUB 29.23:13-14 (NH) (o‹), ed. HG 62f., CHD mašiyan; the foundation ritual KBo 4.1 i 31-34, w. dupl. KUB 2.2 i 38-42 gives the sequence of activities in constructing a house: 
1. foundation, 2. walls, 3. roofing w. timbers, and 
4. plaster: DINGIR.MEŠ LÚ.MEŠ–war–at LÚNAGAR-az weter šamanuš–ma–wa kattan dTe~ lipinuš daiš šer[(–ma–šša)]n kudduš dÉ.A-aš h[(a)ttannaš] LUGAL-uš wetet GIŠ-ru–ma N[(A›–ya h„)]manteš HUR.SAG.MEŠ (var. B M]EŠ-uš) [(weter)] (var. C uter) pu-u-ru-ut-ma (var. B pu-ru-ut-ma) [(DINGIR.MEŠ MUNUS. MEŠ)] w[eter] “‘The gods as carpenters have built it (i.e., the temple). Telipinu has laid the foundations. Ea, the king of w[isdom], has built the walls above [th]em. [A]ll the mountains [have brought] (the necessary) timber and st[one]. But the mud (for plastering), [the goddesses have] su[pplied] (lit. brought)’” KBo 4.1 i 31-34 (foundation rit., NH), w. dupls. KUB 2.2 i 38-42 (B), KUB 9.33 obv. 7-10 (C) (both NH), ed. Kellerman, Diss. 128, 135, THeth 12:8, tr. ANET 356; mud used as concrete in depositing paraphernalia under the earth: maninkuwahhi «GIŠ» (dupl. omits GIŠ) tËkan paddΩi nu–kan aniuraš KIN.HI.A anda dΩi pu-u-ru-ut šer išhuwai nu ištalkzi nu–za GIŠKAK.HI.A walhzi “Nearby she (sc. the Old Woman) digs up the earth and places the ritual materials in it. She heaps mud upon (it) and smooths/ levels (it). She drives wooden pegs in (and speaks as follows)” KUB 24.9 ii 18-20 (rit. of Alli, MH/NS), ed. THeth 2:32-35, CHD maninkuwahhi (partially). 
395

2' clay like, waterproof mud used in roofing: DUMU.LUGAL 4 LÚ.MEŠSANGA URUKa[(šha)] MUNUSammama LÚB´L URUHa[(nhana)] TÚGšiknu– ššet (var. [TÚG]šiknui–šmi, šiknu–ššit) aški [(IŠTU GIŠMAR)] GIŠAL KÙ.BABBAR GAR.RA pu-u-ruu[(t)] (var. pu-ru-ut) išhuiš«huiš»kanzi [(n–aš– šan)] INA É.DINGIR-LIM šuhhi š[(arΩ 9-ŠU!)] (var. UGU 7-ŠU) pedanzi ŠA dT[(elipinuaš)] šuhhan pu-u-ru-u[(d-da-an-zi)] (dupl. B pu-ru-udda-an-zi, C […-t]a-an-zi) “At the gate, the prince, four priests of the town of Kašha, the ammamawoman, (and) the Lord of Hanhana keep heaping up the mud into their! (w. var., text “his”) šeknugarment(s) with a silver-inlaid spade (and) pickax. They carry it (i.e., the mud) nine (var. seven) times to the temple, up on the roof, (and) they plaster the roof of Telipinu’s (temple) with (that) mud” KUB 
53.3 v 1-8 (fest. for Tel., NS), w. dupls. KUB 53.4 iv 25-28 
(B) (NS), KUB 53.7 iii 1-3 + 917/u iii 15-21 (C) (NS), ed. Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:56, 58f., 75, 78, 82 (line count and restoration of text follow them), cf. Otten/Rüster, ZA 68:275; cf. URU-LUM TUR–ma hašduirraza pu-ru-ud-daza IŠTU […] “[They cover?] the small town(?) (i.e., a model?) with brushwood, mud [and] with […]” KUB 46.39 iii 9 (Kizz. rit.); the same phrase occurs in Bo 6730 rt. col. 9 w. URU-an h„man “the whole city,” translit. Otten, ZA 66:103. 
3' mud plaster of walls: (From the inner room of the impure house) n–aš–kan parΩ ÉhÏli paizzi nu ÉhÏli p[(u-u-ru-ut dΩi)] nu Q¸TAMMA memai hi~ lamni (var. B Éhila[mni]) pu-u-ru-ut (var. C pu-ruut) dΩi nu Q[(¸TAMMA memai)] “he (i.e., the conjuration priest) goes forth to the courtyard and takes plaster from (lit. in) the courtyard and speaks in the same way (as above i 9-21). From (lit. in) the portico he takes plaster and speaks in the same way” KUB 7.41 i 22-23 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/NS), 
w. dupls. KBo 10.45 i 13-15 (B), KUB 41.8 i 1-2 (C) (both MH/NS), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f. (“Lehm”); “Now he throws the hanišša-vessel down from the roof and breaks it into pieces” pu-ru-ut-ma (dupl. E omits -ma) kuit daškit nu kuwapi KIN-az (var. a-ni-e-az) h„man (var. [da]pian) kittat ap„nn–a apiya pËda[(i)] “But the plaster which he has taken (from the courtyard and gateway), this he carries to (the place) where the whole ritual paraphernalia has 

purut- e 

been placed” KBo 10.45 i 28-31 (rit. for infernal deities, MH/NS), w. dupls. KUB 41.8 i 14 (C) (MH/NS), IBoT 2.128 obv. 4-6 (E), ed. Otten, ZA 54:118f. (= ll. 36-38); notice the lack of gender concord purut kuit … ap„nn–a; cf. later in this text: (The dust/ore or earth containing ore of) silver, gold, iron, tin, stone, oil, honey, utensils made of terracotta, (the small pieces of) the woven utensils) parnaš pu-u-ru-ut Éhilamnaš pu-u-ru-ut harnamniyazi “(and) plaster of a house (i.e., the same plaster which he has taken from the courtyard i 22) (and) the plaster of a portico he mingles” (and molds out of it a figurine of the blood-god) KUB 
41.8 ii 34-35, ed. Otten, ZA 54:126f. (= ll. 70-72); andurzi– ya–kan … ANA É.MEŠ.ŠÀ–ya–kan da[piyaš(?) GIŠ]ÙR.MEŠ […] GIŠAB.HI.A–ya arha hašhaššanzi a[ndurzi–ya–kan(?) k]uwapitta parΩ pu-ru-ut ar~ rirranzi x[…] n–at–kan parΩ Ωški pËdanzi “In the inside … in a[ll] of the inner chambers they chip/ plane/scour the beams, […] and (the frames of) the windows. [In the inside(?)] they scrape off everywhere plaster (from the walls) and they carry them (i.e., the shavings, splinters and plaster) outside” KUB 7.13 obv. 5-10 (purif. rit.), cf. Tunn. 66f., HW™ 1:243b, 299a, THeth 12:9 | for hašhaš-, see Carter, JNES 44:139-141 (“‘to scour,’ ‘to finish (by some scraping or grinding or abrasive action)’”). 
	d. wet mudbricks, molded and put out to be dried, which, being still wet and soft, can easily be trampled upon and destroyed by hoofed animals: “Next let nobody dig in the enclosure of the fortification, let nobody burn fire in the inside” pu-ru-utti-ia-aš-ša-an (var. pu-ru-ut-ti-eš-n[i]) GUD UDU(coll.) ANŠE.KUR.RA ANŠE.GÌR.NUN.NA ANŠE anda lË tarniškanzi “and let them not drive the livestock, horses, mules (and) donkeys to the (area of) wet mudbricks” KUB 31.86 + 1203/u (StBoT 15:45) ii 24-25 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.89:12-13, ed. von Schuler, Dienstanw. 43 (differently). 
	e. mass of buildings made of mudbricks: (Abiradda came once to Muršili II and asked him): URUIyaruwaddaš–wa URU-aš kuit annaz ammel ŠA ABI ABI–YA Ëšta nu–wa–mu URUIyaruwattan URU-an dannattan pu-ru-ut DINGIR.MEŠ ak~ kandušš–a EGIR-pa pΩi “‘Since the settlement of Iyaruwadda belonged earlier to my grandfather, now give back to me (this) empty settlement of 

396

Iyaruwadda, the mud(-brick buildings in it), the gods and the manes’” (In the following Muršili is ready to concede the village to Abiradda, after he would conquer it and capture its residents, plunder its goods and transport them to Hattuša) URUIyaru~ waddan–ma URU-an tannatan pu-ru-ut DINGIR. MEŠ akkandušš–a tuk ANA µAbiratta pehhi “But I will give to you, Abiradda (only) the empty settlement of Iyaruwatta, the mud(-brick buildings), the gods and the the manes” KBo 3.3 i 14-17, 23-25 (Syrian affairs of Murš. II), ed. Klengel, Or NS 32:33f., 39f. (‘Lehm’), Otten, HTR 144 (“die nackten Wände”); nu–šši k„š URU. DIDLI.HI.A ABU–YA pu-ru-ut-ta-az pešta antuh~ šaz–ma–šši–aš UL pešta “These cities (i.e., the sites) my father gave to him together with the mud(-brick buildings), but he did not give them to him with the population” Bronze Tablet i 87-88 (treaty, Tudh. IV), ed. StBoT Beih. 1:14f. (“mit dem nackten Mauerwerk”); cf. “He did not take anything from the country Mera. […] he gave [back to him(?)]” apel–ši pu-ru-ut [peš]ta “(But only) its mud(-brick buildings) he [gav]e back to him” KBo 16.35:8-10 (hist. frag., NH?), translit. Carruba, SMEA 14:80. 
	f. uncert.: (A symbolic kurtali- container is molded from dough) n–at pu-ru-ut-ti-it šunnΩi “and he (i.e., the incantation priest) fills it with mud” KBo 10.45 iii 8 (rit. for underworld deities, MH/NS), 
	w. dupl. KUB 41.8 ii 42, ed. Otten, ZA 54:128 (= ll. 79); [takku šË(ni(?) pu-r)]u-ut kuiški epΩri alwanzatar DˆN LUGAL “[If] someone forms(?, epari) mud for [an im]age/[fig]urine, it is sorcery (and it is the concern of) the royal court” KBo 6.11 i 20 (Laws §111, OH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 29.23:15, ed. HG 62f. (von Schuler, apud Friedrich, HG 62f. n. 43 restored [takku ANA DINA-]NI(?) …. “[Wenn] jemand Lehm [zu einem Ersatzbil]d(?) modelliert(?)), cf. Güterbock, JCS 15:70 (restores [še-e]-ni conforming to the shorter available space in the break); šal~ winaš pu-ru-ut (KUB 43.59 +) KUB 9.39 i 2 (Šehuzzi’s rit., NH), see above a 1'; cf. [šakun]iyaš pu-ru-ut URUriaz KUB 35.116:7 (rit. frag.) cf. above b; namma han[t]i GIŠZAG.GAR.RA pu-ru-ut tianzi KUB 56.48 iii 29 (monthly fest.). 

Friedrich, ZA 36 (1927) 281f. (“ein Bauteil ist, und zwar wird es beim Haus zuletzt gebaut. … ‘Hofmauer,’ bzw. ‘Stadtmauer’”); Götze/Pederson, MSpr. (1934) 65 (“Mörtel”); Goetze, Tunn. (1938) 64-68 (“mud, plaster”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 174 (“Lehm, Kalk, Mörtel; Putz ‘der Hauswand’”); 

*purutteššar 
Güterbock, JCS 15 (1961) 70; Klengel, Or NS 32 (1964) 39 n. 5 (“‘Lehm,’ … Die (aus Lehm errichteten) Gebäude ohne lebendes oder totes Inventar bzw. Bewohner”); Hoffner, Laws (1964) 153; Moyer, Diss. (1969) 88; Naumann, Architecktur Kleinasiens (1971) 43-46, 54, 117-121; Darga, Mimarlı©ı (1985) 107 (“kil, toprak, kerpiç”); Boysan-Dietrich, THeth 12 (1987) 6-17 (“Lehm, Lehmerde, Lehmmörtel” versus wilan “Ton”). 
Cf. halina-, haneššuwar, huššilli-, puruttai-, puruteššar, ša~ kuni-, šalwina-, wilan- (IM), GIR›, SAHAR. 
puruttai-v.; act.: to cover with mud; from MH.† 
act. pres. pl. 3 pu-u-ru-u[d-da-an-zi] KUB 53.3 v 8 (NH?/ NS?), pu-ru-ud-da-an-zi KUB 53.4 rev. 28 (NH?/NS?), [(pu-u-ru-u)t-t]a-an-zi 917/u iii 21 (NH?/NS?) [rest. from KUB 53.4 rev. 28; Haas/Jakob-Rost, AoF 11:82]. 
inf. pu-ru-ut-ti-ia-u-wa-an-zi KUB 31.86 ii 16 (MH/NS). 
	a. to cover a roof with mud: KUB 53.3 v 8, ed. purut a 2'. 
	b. to cover a wall with mud or to plaster a wall with mud: n–ašta arha lË kuitki hark[(zi BÀD– ma)] pu-ru-ut-ti-ia-u-wa-an-zi ≠wan±alla[(n Ëšdu namma–a)]t ištalgan Ëšdu n–ašta ≠šu±[(hha) (warh)]ui zappiyattari lË “Let nothing be lost. Let the fortification wall be scraped(?) for covering with mud-plaster. Next let it (i.e., the roof?) be smoothed (ištalkan), (because) a roof (which) is rough (i.e., full of cracks?) will leak. (It) should not be!” KUB 31.86 ii 15-18 (B´L MADGALTI, MH/NS), w. dupl. KUB 31.89 ii 5-7, ed. Dienstanw. 43 (differently), cf. Hoffner, JCS 29:152 w. n. 3, idem, BiOr 35:245 (comparing it 
	w. KUB 31.100 rev. 13). 

Cf. purut-, puruteššar. 
[purut(ti)-“Gemauer,” cited in Dienstanw. 43, 45f.; HW 1. Erg. 16; Tischler, HdW 66, 131 does not exist, s. above, purut- e.] 
*purutteššar n. neut.; mudbrick; from MH.† 
sg. nom./acc. [p]u-ru-ut-te-e[š-šar(?)] KBo 22.130a:2; sg. dat. pu-ru-ut-ti-eš-n[i] KUB 31.89 12 (MH/NS). 
In B´L MADGALTI it appears as a var. of pu~ rut-cf. above s. v. purut- e. 
Kammenhuber, MIO 2 (1954) 436; Friedrich, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 21. 
Cf. purut-. 
397

pur-za-x[…] (mng. unkn.).† 
In frag. vocab. text: (Akk.) […-]ZU = (Hitt.) pur-za-x[…] KUB 3.111:14 (NH). 
puš-v.; to be eclipsed(?); from OH/NS.† 
pres. sg. 3 pu-u-uš-zi KUB 8.14 rev. (2), 5, obv. (11), KUB 8.22 ii 2, KUB 8.29 i (1), 4, KUB 8.30 rev. 6, 16, pu-uš-zi KBo 13.20:9, KUB 8.13:(9), KUB 34.8:(6), (8), KUB 34.9:2, (5), KUB 34.11 rev. 13, KUB 57.73 rev. 7, KBo 34.121:(2), 5, Bo 3485 obv. 6 (Oettinger, Stammbildung 215), pu-uš-za KBo 8.128 left col. 3, KUB 34.10:(6), 9, KBo 13.36 rev. (4), 7, 10, (13) | for the pres. sg. 3 in -za, see Melchert, Diss. 473 n. 6, and Oettinger, Stammbildung 191 n. 18, pu[-…] KUB 8.27 l. e. 3b; [Oettinger, Stammbildung 215, cites pu!-eš!zi KBo 13.20:7, for which read še≠-eš±-zi]. 
(Akk.) [BE] 30 ina SI ZAG–šu 1 MUL GUB AN.TA.LÙ GAR-an Emar VI.4 255:31 = (Hitt.) takku dSÎN SI ZAG–ŠU MUL arta dSÎN! (text: DINGIR.MEŠ) pu-uš[-zi] “If a star stands (near?) the right horn of the moon, the moon(! text: gods) will be eclipsed(?)” KUB 8.13:9, cf. Riemschneider, Omentexte 450-452 (p„šzi = AN.TA.LÙ iššakkan), Wilhelm, KBo 36, p. VI no. 48. 
	a. (said of the moon): see also KUB 8.13:9 above in bil. sec.; [m]Ωn INA ITU.4.KAM dSÎN-aš pu-uš-[za n]aššu gašza kiša naššu x [L]Ú-aš kuiški aki § mΩn INA ITU.5.KAM dSÎN-aš pu-uš-za girËzza uizzi “If the moon is eclipsed(?) in the fourth month, there will be either famine, or some man will die. If the moon is eclipsed(?) in the fifth month, a flood will come (and water will carry away the crops)” KUB 34.10:6-10 (lunar omens, OH/NS), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 191f.; takku dSÎN EGIR-ezzi hΩli pu[-uš-zi] “If the moon is ecli[psed(?)] during the last watch, (… there will be plague)” KUB 8.27 l.e. 3b (oracles relating to Arma-dU and Šaušgatti, NH), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 149f.; [… dE]N.ZU pu-uš[-zi] KUB 34.8:6. 
	b. (said of the sun): [(takku ha)nt]ezzi [ITU-mi] / [(dUTU-uš) pu-u]š-zi kΩšz[a kiša(ri ŠEŠ-aš–za ŠEŠ-a)n] / [(kar)Ωp]i! KUR-e tepauËšz[i] “If the sun is eclipsed(?) in the first [month], [there will be] famine, [brother] will dev[ou]r [brother], the land will become small” KBo 34.121:1-3 (solar omen, OH/NS), w. restorations from parallels KUB 8.20 ii 11-13 and KUB 8.18:2-3, cf. KBo 34.121:5 (over eras.), ed. Riemschneider, Omentexte 266f.; [… nek]uz mehur–ma dUTU-uš pu-u-uš-z[i] “But the sun is eclipsed(?) in the [eve]ning” KUB 8.14 obv. 11 (lunar omens, OH/NS). 

(¬)puššai

c. (subject broken away or uncert.): […]x-aš pu-u-uš-zi lukatta–ma dUTU-u[š …] “[…] is eclipsed(?), but on the morrow the sun […]” KUB 
8.14 rev. 5 (lunar omens, OH/NS); the trace could be [… IT]U. 
p. describes an ominous astron. phenomenon of the sun and the moon; on the basis of an IE etymology Oettinger (Stammbildung 215) translates p. as “klein werden(?), sich verfinstern(?).” When a part of the moon or sun is occluded, it does appear to become smaller. More commonly an eclipse is expressed by the v. ak-“to die.” 
Riemschneider, Omentexte 450-452 (“sich verfinstern”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 215 (stem pušš-; “klein werden(?), sich verfinstern(?)”); Wilhelm, KBo 36 (1991) VI, no. 

48. 

˚pu-uš[-…] (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
n–at–kan išt[ar]na arha x[…] / uppahhun ≠kË±dani–ma […] / anda Ërwe[n…] ≠nu–šš±[an? …] / man–za ˚pu-uš[-…] / kuit≠m±an[…] KUB 23.101 ii 22-26 (letter to Assyrian king?). 
(¬)puššai-v.; to chop up, crush; from MH/MS.† 
pres. sg. 1 pu-uš-š≠a-a-m±[i] KUB 33.120 ii 45 (NS); sg. 3 pu-uš-š[a]-iz-zi KBo 21.41 rev. 24 + KUB 29.7 rev. 15 (MH/ MS), ¬pu-uš-ša-iz-zi KUB 36.25 iv 10. 
pret. sg. 3 pu-uš-ša-a-it KUB 29.7 rev. 21, (25) (MH/MS). 
imp. sg. 3 pu-uš-ša-id-du KUB 29.7 rev. 22 (MH/MS), KUB 33.93 iii 32 (NS). 
part. nom.-acc. neut. (?) pu-uš-ša-a-a[n] KBo 21.15:4. 
frag. pu-uš-ši-≠e±[-…] KBo 8.67:4. 
pu(or: pu-u)[over eras.]-ši-id-du KUB 24.9 iii 16, and [p]uwa-aš-ši-ia-ad-du KUB 24.10 iii 9 (THeth 2:44 (= iii 21') w. n. 20 and p. 112 puššai-“zerkleinern”), are scribal corruptions of waššiyaddu according to the dupl. 987/v + KUB 24.11 iii 7 (Otten/Rüster, ZA 63:89). 
nu–wa–kan URUKummiyan … GAM tamašdu dU-an–ma–wa GUL-ahdu nu–war–[an e]zzan GIM-an arha pu-uš-ša-id-du lalakuešan–ma–war– an–[kan? GIM-an?] GÌR-it anda pašihaiddu “Let (Ullikummi) press down the city of Kummiya, let him strike Teššup, let him chop him up like chaff, let him crush him with his foot [like] an ant” KUB 
33.93 iii left 20-22 + right 31-33 (Ullik., NH), ed. Güterbock, JCS 5:152f., tr. Hittite Myths 53 (“chop … up fine like chaff”), cf. HW™ 2:141 s.v. ezza-(“ihn soll er wie Häcksel zerstošen”); cf. [n–an hahharin G]I?-in mahhan pu-uš-š≠a-a

398

m±[i] “I will crush [him] like a [brittle re]ed(?)” KUB 33.120 ii 45 (Kum., NH), tr. and rest. Hoffner, Hittite Myths 41 (“smash”), earlier rest. [ha-ah-ha-r]i-in in Myth. 157, questioned by HW™ 3:9; nu–šši hašuwΩ[i]SAR pianzi n–at anda pu-uš-š[a]-iz-zi “They give him soapwort and he chops it up/crushes it” KUB 29.7 rev. 15 + KBo 21.41 rev. 24; ≠n±–at DINGIR-LUM LÚŠE.KIN. KUD-aš mΩhhan miyΩn iyatnuwan hΩšuwΩiSAR […]x waršta namma–at anda pu-uš-ša-a-it idΩlu– ya uttar NˆŠ DINGIR-LIM hu[rtain] paprΩtar hašuwΩiSAR mΩhhan anda pu-uš-ša-id-du n–at haššan [iya]ddu “And the deity, like a reaper, has reaped it, the luxuriant, iyatnuwant-soapwort […]. Furthermore, he has chopped it up/crushed it. Let him chop up/crush the evil word, the oath, curse (and) impurity like soapwort, and let him make them into soap” KUB 29.7 rev. 20-23 (rit., MH/MS), ed. mahhan l a l' a', HED 3:211 (“pound”), Lebrun, Samuha 123, 130 (= 29-32) (“(un plante alcali[ne] …) broyer”), Goetze, JCS 1:316-318, tr. ANET 346; cf. KUB 29.7 rev. 24-25 | on hašuwai, see HED H 211; in the analogy to soapmaking, there is no mention of burning the hašuwai nor to mixing its ashes w. fat, which lends credence to a translation of hašuwai as “soapwort” (genus Saponaria), whose broken stems and leaves produce saponin, a carbohydrate which has the physical properties of a soap solution, producing a natural lather (OED 9:103, 353, Encyclopaedia Britannica (1974) Micro 2:604); puššai-thus refers to this breaking/crushing of stem and leaves to release the saponin; nu–mu–kan kuiš wΩki x[…] / ¬pu-uš-šaiz-zi ¬h„wahuwanalaš […] / ¬malušteyaš–ma–mu wΩkit KUB 36.25 iv 9-11 (myth of Kumarbi), ed. Otten, MGK 32f., cf. ¬malušteya-; despite the Glossenkeil the v. ending -zi shows the form is Hitt. 
puššai-is related to puwai-, to which its mng. is similar, and which also describes the preparation of soap. 
Güterbock, Kum. (1946) 64; Goetze, JCS 1 (1947) 316-318 (“reduce, pulp”); Friedrich, HW (1952) 174 (“zerkauen(?), zerkleinern(?)”); Güterbock, Or NS 25 (1956) 123f.; Friedrich, HW 1. Erg. (1957) 17 (“zerstampfen”); Oettinger, Stammbildung (1979) 387 w. n. 260 (“zermalmen”); HW™ 2 (1988) 141 

s.v. ezza-(“zerstošen”). 
Cf. puwai-, puppušša-, (TÚG)puššaimi-. 

(TÚG)puššaimi-n.; (a kind of garment or cloth); NH.† 

˚puškantatar 
sg. or pl. nom. TÚGpu-uš-ša-i-me-iš KUB 42.16 ii 4, [TÚGpu-uš-š]a-i-mi-iš KUB 42.16 ii 13, pu-u[š-ša-i-…] KBo 
18.184 rev. 2. 
(In lists of clothing) […]x TÚGmaššiaš HAŠ~ MANNI / […]x-meiš 6 TÚGpu-uš-ša-i-me-iš KUB 42.16 ii 3-4 (inv., NH), ed. THeth 10:39, 41, Siegelová, Verw. 408f.; cf. KUB 42.16 ii (13); […] ZA.GÌN 1 HA-ŒAR˛(HI)-TI 1 BABBAR 1 pu-uš[-ša-i-…] KBo 18.184 rev. 2. 
p. has the appearance of a Luw. part. from the v. puššai-“to chop up, crush.” “Chopped up, crushed” cloth might be “felt.” 
Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 42 (connects w. puššali-); Siegelová, Verw. (1982) 409f. n. 22 (mistakes Košak as equating this word to GAD.DAM), 614 (“Gamaschen(?)”). 
Cf. puwai-, (¬)puššai-. 
puššali-n.; (a leg or foot garment); from OS.† 
pl. nom. pu-uš-ša-li-eš KBo 22.1 obv. 10 (OS); acc. pu-ušša-li-uš KBo 21.82 iv 16 (OH/MS). 
broken pu-uš-ša-≠a±-[li?-eš/uš] KBo 34.64:3. 
(Garments among foodstuffs in a list of provisions) 1 TÚG 1 TÚGhištani 3 KABALLUM 3 pu-ušša-li-eš 3 TAPAL KUŠE.SIR “one garment, one hištani-garment, three (pairs of?) leggings(?)/puttees(?), three (pairs of?) p.-garments, three pairs of shoes” KBo 22.1 obv. 9-10 (instr., OS), ed. Archi, FsLaroche 45f.; 2 TAPAL pu-uš-ša-li-uš IŠTU É ŠÀ.TAM pianzi “They issue two pairs of p.-garments from the treasury/warehouse” KBo 21.82 iv 16 (rit., OH/MS); 4 TAPAL TÚGitta-x[…] / tannaran 2 TÚGx[…] / 4 TAPAL pu-uš-ša-≠a±[-li-eš/uš] / tannara[n(-)…] KBo 34.64:1-4 (rit. frag.). 
KBo 22.1 gives us the pairing of KABALLU and p. If p. is to be equated w. GAD.DAM, as Košak proposed, then both KABALLU and p. would be leg coverings of some type. 
Archi, FsLaroche (1979) 48; Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 42 (proposes equivalence w. Sumerogram GAD.DAM “leggings” and suggests that TÚGpuššaimi-may be related). 
Cf. (TÚG)puššaimi-. 
˚puškantatar n.; aloofness(?), unfriendliness(?), the state of being puškanti-(adj.); NH.† 
(After denying that the gifts he sent to the Assyrian king were inferior, the Hittite king says:) 
399

ammel ˚pu-uš-kán-ta-tar tuk m[ena]hhanda puš~ kantiš–man–za kuw[api] ešun a[p]Ωt–man–ta ku~ wat hatrΩnu[n] / ištarni–šum[i–m]an–wa–nnaš– kan SIGﬁ-anteš “Is (it) my ˚p. toward you? If I had ev[er] been (a) puškanti-, why would I have written that (i.e., the following) to you? ‘If only we could be on good terms with each other!’” KUB 
23.101 ii 15-18 (Assyro-Hitt. royal correspondence, NH), ed. THeth 16:278f., cf. Otten, AfO Beih. 12:64; ammel is wr. over an eras., followed by a Winkelhaken without space, while there is word space between the Winkelhaken and pu-uš-kán-ta-tar. Because of ˚pu-uš[-…] ibid. ii 25 in broken context, the Winkelhaken in ii 15 is most likely intended to pertain to the following puškantatar regardless of the word space. Note several erasures in the text: ii 3, 5, 9, 21, 24, and a badly wr. sign over eras. in ii 5. 
Hagenbuchner, THeth 16:280, regards puškanti-as a n., not an adj. This is not certain. If puškanti- is a substantive denoting a kind of person, one would expect the LÚ det. If it is an adj., the context might indicate something like “aloof,” “unfriendly,” “disrespectful,” or “miserly” for puškanti-and “aloofness,” “unfriendliness,” “disrespectfulness” or “miserliness” for puškantatar. 
Meriggi, WZKM 58 (1962) 107 (from root puš-); Hagenbuchner, THeth 16 (1989) 280. 
Cf. puškanti-. 
puškanti-adj.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
sg. nom. pu-uš-kán-ti-iš KUB 23.101 ii 16. 
See ex. and disc. s.v. ˚puškantatar. 
pušpuša/i-n. com.; (mng. unkn.); NH.† 
sg. nom. or pl. acc.? [pu-uš-]≠pu±-ši-iš KBo 26.73:5. 
sg. acc. pu-uš-pu-ši-in KUB 12.65 iii 22 (NH), [… pu]-ušpu-ša-an-na KBo 34.70 left col. 15. 
pl. nom. [… p]u-uš-pu-ši-i-e-eš KBo 34.70 left col. 6; acc. pu-uš-pu-ši-iš KBo 34.62 rev. 13. 
pu-uš-pu-ši-in [(mΩn)] (var. [pu-uš-]≠pu±-ši-iš mΩn) “Like a p.” KUB 12.65 iii 22 (Hedammu, NH), w. dupl. KBo 26.73:5, ed. StBoT 14:52f. (= iii 27), in a frag. context w. waršulaš GIM-an in preceding line; nu–šši–kan dueggaz […] / pu-uš-pu-ši-iš waršta “He wiped p.-s from his/her (i.e., the worshipper’s) body […]” KBo 34.62 rev. 12-13 (incant. rit.); [… p]u-uš-pu-ši-i-e-eš […-ant]aru “Let the p.-s […] KBo 34.70 left col. 6-7; 

pudahΩ- b 

[… pu]-uš-pu-ša-an-na / […]-iškanzi “And they […] a p. KBo 34.70 left col. 15-16. 
In all passages p. is associated w. waršulaš šanizziš “a sweet odor.” 
pudahΩ-, putehΩ-n.; (an object, mng. unkn.); NS.† 
gen. pu-te-ha-a-aš-ša KBo 35.247 rev. 25 (NS), pu-ú-da-ha-aš KBo 14.142 ii 7 (NH), pu-u-da-ha-aš KUB 13.4 i 41, KBo 14.142 ii (30), (32) (NH), pu-da-ha-aš KBo 26.155 ii 10, pu-da-ha-aš-ša KUB 20.22 i 2, here? pu-u-ta-ha-[…] KBo 
20.108 i? 5. 
	a. (an object, mng. unkn.): [… -n]i LÚSAGI.A 1 pu-u-ta-ha[-…] KBo 20.108 i? 5. 
	b. (in gen. case in the name of a festival): mΩn ANA dU URUHa[lap dHebat URUHalap URUKÙ. BABBAR-TI(?)] / EZEN› pu-da-ha-aš iya[nzi] “When they perform the p.-festival for Teššub of Al[eppo and Hebat of Aleppo in Hattuša(?)]” KBo 

26.155 ii 9-10, ed. Souc√ek/Siegelová, ArOr 42:47; [anda– m]a EZEN› ITU.KAM EZEN› MU-TI EZEN› AYALI ≠EZEN›± zen[and]aš EZEN› hamešhandaš EZEN› tethešnaš [(EZE)]N› hiya≠r±aš EZEN› puu-da-ha-aš EZEN› išuwaš EZEN› [ša]tlaššaš EZEN› BIBRI … našma–aš kuiš imma kuiš EZEN›-aš URUHattuši–kan šer “Furthermore, whatever festivals exist up in Hattuša — the monthly festival, the yearly festival, the stag festival, the autumn-festival, the spring-festival, the thunder-festival, the hiyaraš-festival, the p.-festival, the (h)išuwa-festival, the šatlašša-festival, the festival of the animal-shaped vessels, …” KUB 13.4 i 39-42, 45 (instr. for temple personnel, pre-NH/NS), ed. Chrest. 150f., Süel, Direktif Metni 26-29; 1 IM.GŠD.DA UL Q[ATI] EZEN› pu-te-ha-a-aš-ša […] “One long tablet: (composition) not finished: p.-festival […]” KBo 
35.247 rev. 24-25 (colophon); [Š]A EZEN› mΩn EZE[N› hiyaraš mΩn] / EZEN› pu-da-ha-aš-ša […] / 10 NINDA ZŠD.DA 10 NINDA BA.BA.ZA […] / 1 MÁŠ.TUR.ŠE 1 TU.TURMUŠEN […] / INA UD.3.KAM […] § “[The provisions] of the festival, whether the [hiyaraš] festiv[al or] the p.-festival are […] 10 breads (made of) flour, 10 breads (made of) pap, […] one grain-fed kid-goat, one small dove, […] for the third day” KUB 20.22 i 1-5 (cult of Teššub and Hepat of Aleppo); mΩn ANA MU-TI 

400

ITU.8.KAM tiyazi ANA ITU.≠8±.[KAM UD.x. KAM tiyazi] / nu ANA dU URUHalap dHebat URUHalap URUKÙ.BABBAR […] / EZEN› pu-ú-daha-aš iyanzi “When in the year the 8th month arrives, and when in the 8th month [the xth day arrives] for Teššub of Aleppo, Hepat of Aleppo[…] they perform the p.-festival in Hattuša” (various offerings) KBo 14.142 ii 5-7 (cult of Teššub and Hebat of Aleppo, NH); (Various offering to various Hurrian deities) ŠU.NŠGIN 2 G[UD] ŠÀ.BA 1-EN GUD. ŠE 12 UDU 9 PA. 4 BÁN 1 UPNU–ya ZŠD.DA 5 DUG KA.DÙ.A LÚ.MEŠ É.GAL URUHalap ANA EZEN› pu-u-d[a]-≠ha±-aš peškanzi § 3 UDU 20 NINDA 3 DUG KAŠ LÚ.MEŠUMMIY¸N¨TIM ANA EZEN› pu-≠u±-[d]a-ha-aš peškanzi “Total: 2 oxen, one of which is grain fed, 12 sheep, 9 PARˆSU, 4 S¨TU and 1 UPNU of flour, 5 vessels of cheap beer the men of the palace of Aleppo give for the p.-festival. § 3 sheep, 20 breads and 3 vessels of beer the master craftsmen give for the p.-festival” KBo 14.142 ii 28-32; cf. GIM-an–ma–kan EZEN› pu[…] KUB 52.14 ii 27, cf. Otten, ZA 66:93 (as Bo 5446). 

Souc√ek/Siegelová, ArOr 42 (1974) 51 w. n. 30. 

(¬)putal(l)iya/e-v.; 1. to tie on, tie together, secure (garments, esp. sashes), 2. to gird (troops); from OS.† 

Luw. pres. sg. 3 ¬pu-tal-li-it-ti KUB 40.106 iii? 3 (NS). 
pret. sg. 1 pu-tal-li-ia-nu-un KBo 5.8 iii 13 (Murš. II). 
Luw. sg. 3 pu-tal-li-it-ta KUB 44.4 rev. 3 (NH). 

part. sg. nom.-acc. neut. pu-tal-li-ia-an KUB 38.36 obv. 5 (NH), pu-tal-li-an KUB 45.23 + IBoT 4.38 obv. 6 (NS), putal-li-ia<-an> KUB 45.22 iii 5 (NS). 
pl. nom. com. pu-ta-li-ia-an-te-eš(-ša) KBo 17.1 i (25), KBo 17.3 i 20 (both OS). 
nom.-acc. neut. pu-tal-li-ia-an-da KBo 4.4 iii 69 (Murš. II). 

frag. pu-tal-li-i[-e-ez-zi?] KBo 24.41 i 20. 

1. to tie on, tie together, secure (garments, esp. sashes) — a. obj. a sash — 1' TÚGŠB.LÁ (Akk. nËbehu): (Describing two figurines made of wax) 1 LÚ nu TÚG.GÚ.È.A waššan harzi TÚGŠB.LÁ putal-li-ia<-an> (dupl. pu-tal-li-an) harzi nu–ššan TAHAPŠI išhuzziyan harzi “One man: he has put on a tunic (TÚG.GÚ.È.A), tied on a sash (TÚGŠB.LÁ), put on a belt, (and put on shoes and leggings)” KUB 45.22 iii 4-6 (Hurr. rit., NS), w. dupl. KUB 

(¬)putal(l)iya/e- 2 
45.23 + IBoT 4.38 obv. 5-7, ed. Goetze, Cor.Ling. 48 n. 10 (as Bo 2721), Boley, hark-60 | for Akk. nËbehu AHw gives “Gürtel, Binde,” and CAD “a belt or sash.” The exx. in Akk. texts show it could be made of wool, was worn by women, as well as men, and could occur in pairs (T¸PALU). 
2' TÚGŠÀ.GA.DÙ (Akk. nËbehu, cf. CAD šakat~ tû): nu TÚGŠÀ.GA.DÙ pu-tal-li-i[-e-ez-zi?] KBo 
24.41 i 20 (rit. frag.), for the rest., see [… ú-i-š]u-u-ri-i-e-ez-zi ibid. i 19 and [… -u]z-zi-ia-i-e-zi ibid. i 21 | both AHw and CAD give the general definition “a garment” for TÚGŠÀ.GA.DÙ, but Goetze, Cor.Ling. 54f. corroborated Weidner’s tr. “‘Tuch-Gürtel’ (‘waist-band’)’; the new Emar evidence cited in CAD *šakattû proves the underlying Akk. reading was nËbehu “sash.” 
	b. obj. skins or hides (KUŠ.HI.A): “The Moon-god dressed himself in blood-red” [nu?] ÚŠ-aš KUŠ.HI.A pu-tal-li-it-ta “[and] he tied together ‘skins of blood’ (i.e., blood-red or bloodied ones), (he took an ‘arrow of blood,’ he took a ‘bow of blood’)” KUB 44.4 rev. 3 (birth rit., NH), ed. StBoT 29:176f. 
	c. obj. broken away, but certainly a kind of blue garment: […] ZA.GÌN pu-tal-li-ia-an harz[i] KUB 

38.36 obv. 5 (cult inv., NH), ed. Jakob-Rost, MIO 9:197f. 
2. to gird, gird up (troops): (Describing representations of hantašepa-demons) wËšš[(a)]nda–ma išharwantuš TÚG.HI.A-uš pu-ta-li-ia-[(a)]n-te-ešša “They wear bloodied/blood-red clothes, and they (sc. the demons) are girded” KBo 17.1 i 24-25 (rit., OS), w. dupl. KBo 17.3 i 19-20 (OS), ed. StBoT 8:20f., trans-lit. StBoT 25:6, 13 (dupl.); (When I, the king, heard that the enemies from Azzi intended to lay ambush at night) nu–za dUTU–ŠI KAR[A]Š.HI.A išhi„l~ lahhu≠n± [KARAŠ.HI.A] mahhan UD.KAM-ti putal-li-ia-an-da iyatta[ri] “I, My Majesty, instructed the army (as follows): Just as [the army] marches by day battle-ready (lit. girded), (in the same manner it will remain alert to ambushes by night)” KBo 
4.4 iii 68-69 (extensive ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 132f. | the Hitt. n. which underlies KARAŠ.HI.A is elsewhere also neut. pl. apË … KARAŠ.HI.A KUB 14.16 i 22; (I made the city of Altana into a depot and left the baggage there) dUT[U-ŠI–ma KARA]Š.HI.A pu-tal-li-ia-nu-un “and I, My Maj[esty], made [the troo]ps battle-ready (lit. girded [the troo]ps)” KBo 5.8 iii 13 (exten
401

sive ann., Murš. II), ed. AM 156f.; cf. also in broken context ¬pu-tal-li-it-ti “(The army) girds itself” KUB 
40.106 iii? 3. 
Sommer, AU (1932) 63f. (“ich erleichterte, machte eilmarschfähig”); Götze, AM (1933) 250 (“ohne Gepäck bzw. in einer Ausrüstung, die sofortigen Kampf zuläšt, ausrücken lassen”); Goetze, Cor.Ling. (1955) 56 (“put on light clothes”); Holt, BiOr 15 (1958) 148 (“nouer”); Otten/Souc√
ek, StBoT 8 (1969) 121 (“hochschürzen(?); leicht bekleiden(?)”); Košak, THeth 10 (1982) 43 (“to fasten (a belt)”); Beckman, StBoT 29 (1983) 183 w. n. 477, 293; Starke, StBoT 31 (1990) 342 w. n. 1210 (“die Eile betreffend”); Melchert, CLL (1993) 181 (“to hitch up (clothing)”). 
(SŠG)p„ttar n. neut.; (a hairy part of an animal’s body); NH.† 
nom.-acc. neut. SŠGpu-u-ut-tar; gen.(?) pu-ú-u[t?-ta?-na?aš?] KUB 12.24 iv 10. 
≠x±-uš–ta–kkan kattan ≠arha± paizzi nu–š<ši>– kan SŠGpu-u-ut-tar huit<ti>yaši GUD–k[an] kattan arha paizzi nu–šši–kan šukšukan huittiyaš[i] “(As) the …-animal passes under you, and you pull its p., (and as) a head of cattle passes under [you,] and you pull its šukšuka-, (in the same way pull from this patient (his) evil, impurity, sorcery, sin, divine anger, perjury, common gossip, (and) a short life)” KUB 7.53 iii 1-4 (rit., NH), ed. Tunn. 18f. (= ll. 35-42; w. incorrect join!), Collins, JCS 42:219 w. n. 42, cf. Otten, AfO 16:70; cf. KUB 17.10 iv 1-3; “If the patient does not recover by this (treatment)” […] / [d]Ωi ŠA UR.MAH pu-ú-u[t?-ta?-na?-aš tetanan(?) dΩi] / n–an–kan ANA ≠SŠG GEﬂ± [anda(?) h„laliyazi] / n–at–ši–kan U[ZU(?)…]. “[the practitioner] takes […], (and) [takes hair of] the p. of a lion, [wraps] it (com. gender, = the hair?) in black wool and [applies(?)] it (neut., = the black wool and the enclosed hair) to him [on his …]” KUB 12.24 iv 9-12 (rit.), restoration in line 11 based on lines 6-7. The same phraseology seems to be used for each of the items employed in col. iv. Only the gender of the object of hulaliya-changes. This indicates that (1) the object of hulaliya-in each sec. is the item taken, and (2) that each item is able to be h„laliya-ed. In the only place where this object is preserved, it is ŠA UR.MAH UZUZÉ “the gall bladder of a lion” (line 6). Similar med. texts in Akk. employ the skin, fat or hair of a lion (cf. CAD N nËšu 1 g and personal communication from R. Biggs); perhaps here SŠGpu[-…] in broken context KUB 58.106 iii 8, alternatively to purušiyala-. 
Cf. pankur. 

putkiya- a 

(MUN)puti-n.; lump (of salt); from MH/MS.† 
sg. nom. pu-u-ti-iš KBo 21.47 ii? 5, 6 (MH/MS), KUB 
54.40 rev.? (10) (MH/MS), KBo 21.1 i 31 (MS?), KUB 32.123 ii 40, KUB 35.142 iv? 14 (both NS), KUB 12.53:14 (NS), pu-ú-ti-iš KUB 32.123 ii 18 (NS), pu-ti-iš KUB 28.5 obv. 6b (NS), KUB 7.29 obv. 14. 
a. (w. quantity given) — 1' p. preceding MUN: ≠11± pu-≠ti±-[iš MUN …] 2000/c + 2256/c + 2348/c + 1700/c rev. 13 (Hattic bil.); 3 pu-u-ti-iš MUN KUB 35.142 iv? 14 (rit., NS); 1 pu-ú-ti-iš MUN KUB 32.123 ii 18 (rit., NS), cf. KUB 28.5 obv. 6b, KUB 7.29 obv. 14. 
2' w. MUN as det.: “On both sides a fire is burning” kËz 5 MUNpu-u-ti-iš kia[nta kË(zzi–ya 4 MU)]Npu-u-ti-iš kianta ŠU.NŠGIN 9 MUNpu-u-ti-iš “On one side, five p. of salt are placed; on the other side, four p. of salt are placed: total nine p. of salt are placed” KBo 21.47 ii! 5-6 (rit., MH/MS), w. dupl. KUB 
54.40 rev.? 10-11. 
b. (no quantity given) — 1' p. preceding MUN: pu-u-ti-iš MUN! (text: KAK.HI.A) KUB 32.123 ii 40 (fest., NS), cf. KBo 21.1 i 31 (MS?). 
2' w. MUN as det.: MUN!(text: TIM)pu-u-ti-iš KUB 
12.53:14 (rit., NS). 
Salt can also be measured by the UPNU: \ UPNI MUN KBo 21.34 iii 54. The use of MUN as a det. (above a 2') which is certain from the lack of word space between MUN and pu-u-ti-iš, points in the direction of a mng. “lump.” 
Laroche apud Meriggi, RHA XVIII/67 (1960) 96 (“sûrement une mesure pour le sel”); Friedrich, HW 2. Erg. (1961) 21 (“(Maš für Salz?)”); van den Hout, RlA 7 (1990) 525 (§11). 
putehΩ-see pudahΩ-. 
putkiya-v.; to swell (said of fermented dough and of a tumor or boil on the head); from MH/NS.† 
mid. pres. sg. 3 pu-ut-ki-i-e-et-ta KBo 6.34 i 33 (MH/NS). 
iter. mid. pres. sg. 3 pu-ut-ki-iš-ki-it-ta-r[i] KUB 8.36 ii 14 (NH). 
a. of fermented dough: “He puts yeast in their (i.e., the soldiers’) hand(s) and they lick it. (He speaks) as follows: ‘What is this? (Is it) not yeast? As one can take a little (of) this yeast, mix it (in the dough) in the kneading trough and let the trough sit for one day’” n–aš pu-ut-ki-i-e-et-ta 

402

“‘and it (i.e., the dough) rises/swells’” KBo 6.34 i 33 (the Soldier’s Oath, MH/NS), ed. StBoT 22:8f. (= l. 39), cf. also Hoffner, AlHeth 136 w. n. 59, 145 w. n. 114. 
b. of an ailment on the head: tumor, boil, lump, swelling: “[I]f a disease befa[lls] a man’s head; whether it (viz. the head) falls sick in this (aforementioned) way” [na]šma–šši pu-ut-ki-iš-ki-it-tar[i] “[o]r it keeps swelling up for him” KUB 8.36 ii 14 (med. text mentioned in a shelf list(?), NH), ed. CTH pp. 188f. (“avoir une enflure(?)”), StBoT 19:38f. (“[od]er ihm an

putkiya
schwillt”), Goetze, Tunn. 89 (differently: PU-TÚ ki-iš-ki-it-tari). 
In KBo 15.33 ii 34 the v. šarΩ uwa- “to come up, to swell” is used of the “leftover (dough)” (ŠB.TAG›) in a vessel in a manner sim. to putkiya-(AlHeth 145f.). 
Friedrich, ZA 35 (1924) 163 n. 8, 176 w. n. 2 (“in Gärung übergehen”); Götze, Madd. (1928) 73 n. 4 (“Vorgang im Gefäš bzw. in der Flüssigkeit”); idem, Tunn. (1938) 89 (cf. above); Friedrich, HW (1952) 174; Neu, StBoT 5 (1968) 143 (“schwellen(?); aufgehen(?) (vom Teig)”). 
403

THE HITTITE DICTIONARY OF THE ORIENTAL INSTITUTE
OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO (CHD)

VOLUMES IN PRINT 
Available from The Oriental Institute, Publications Sales
1155 East 58th Street
Chicago, Illinois 60637-1569

Telephone (773) 702-9508, Facsimile (773) 702-9853
Electronic mail oi-publications@uchicago.edu

Volume L–N, fascicle 1	la-to -ma. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1980. Pp. xxxii + 96 
Volume L–N, fascicle 2	-ma to miyahuwant-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1983. Pp. 128 
Volume L–N, fascicle 3	miyahuwant-to nai-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1986. Pp. 128 
Volume L–N, fascicle 4	nai-to nutarnu-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1989. Pp. xxx + 126 
Volume L–N, fascicles 1– 4	la-to nutarnu-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1980–1989. Pp. xxxii + 477 (Hardcover) 
Volume P, fascicle 1	pa-to parΩ. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1994. Pp. xi + 112 
Volume P, fascicle 2	parΩ to (UZU)pattar A. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1995. Pp. 128 
Volume P, fascicle 3	(UZU)pattar A to putkiya-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry 
A. Hoffner. 1997. Pp. xxxii + 163 
Volume P, fascicles 1– 3	pa-to putkiya-. Edited by Hans G. Güterbock and Harry A. Hoffner. 1994 –1997. Pp. xxxii + 403 (Hardcover)